23B-046 (240) B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal 0"W,
insulation.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
B. Review data in the operation and maintenance manual. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Project Closeout."
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Manufac-
turer and Installer to ensure that installed electric heating cables, including leads, are not
damaged or crushed prior to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 16856
in '
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric Heating Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16856-6 04/01/05
A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive heating cables for compliance with require-
ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the heat-
ing cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
I. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs
and sharp protrusions.
2. Ensure pipe testing is complete.
3. Ensure surfaces and substrates are plumb and level.
B. Test cables for electrical continuity before installing.
C. Test cables for insulation resistance before installing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install heating cables and accessories as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions,rough-in drawings,the original design, and referenced standards.
B. Cut cable to length required.
C. Do not install heater-to-cold lead connections in concrete or plaster.
D. Avoid crossing expansion, construction, or control joints with heating cables. Where in-
dicated or required, provide sufficient slack conductor in an appropriately arranged ex-
pansion loop.
E. Do not install heating cable mats across expansion, construction, or control joints.
F. Connect heating cables and other components to wiring systems and to ground as indi-
cated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including
screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not
indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in
UL 486A.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test installed electric heating cables after installation. Perform tests prior to application
of coverings, such as insulation,plaster, or concrete.
1. Test cables for electrical continuity before energizing.
2. Test cables for insulation resistance before energizing. Remove cables if measured
resistance is less than 10 megohms to ground.
3. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and
current simultaneously.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric Heating Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16856-5 04/01/05
B. Temperature Control: Provide controller listed in Article 2.4.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Cable installation accessories include tapes, cable ties, warning labels, end seals and
splices, and installation clips for the application indicated and for a complete system.
1. Tapes: Fiberglass tape shall be used to secure freeze-protection heating cables to
steel piping, and aluminum tape shall be used to secure freeze-protection heating
cables to plastic piping.
2. Attachment Clips: Adhesive type to avoid penetrating roof and flashing with nails
or screws. Allow sufficient time for adhesive to cure before installing the heating
cable within clips.
3. Cable Ties: UV-resistant cable ties to secure the heating cable being serpentined on
the roof to the heating cable being routed in the gutter.
B. Heat Trace Controllers: Provide and install multiprocessor based, full featured multi
point controllers for monitoring and control of heat trace and ice melting circuits. (Tyco
Thermal Controls Digitrace 920 or equal) Features are as follows:
1. Capable of freeze protection and temperature maintenance.
2. Monitor and alarm for high and low temperature for each control point.
3. Monitor and alarm for ground fault on each control point.
4. Monitor and alarm for high and low current on each control point.
5. Monitor and alarm for voltage on each control point.
6. Output shall be provide by an electromechanical relay.
7. Provide dry contact relay for output to building management system for each
alarm.
8. Provide temperature sensing RTD's as required for each control point monitored.
RTD's shall be three wire 100 ohm platinum RTD's.
9. Controller's enclosure shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel.
10. Operator's console with LED's, function keys, and full text front panel for easy
field programming.
11. Alarm settings must be stored in non volatile memory to prevent loss of settings
during power failure.
12. RS-485 communications interface.
13. Controller must be capable of acting as a 30mA equipment ground fault circuit in-
terrupter thus eliminating the need for a GFPD at the power distribution panel.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric Heating Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16856-4 04/01/05
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing heating cables and accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are
not limited to,the following:
1. Chromalox.
2. Pyrotenax USA Inc.; As manufactured by Tyco Thermal Controls.
3. Raychem Corporation;As manufactured by Tyco Thermal Controls.
4. Thermon Manufacturing Co.
2.2 ROOF AND GUTTER DE-ICING HEATING CABLES
A. Self-regulating, electric heating cables suitable for use on roof and in gutters for snow
and ice melting as indicated.
1. 277 Volt, 12 Watts/foot in snow and ice conditions and 5 Watts/foot in air, per
IEEE 515.1-1995, Section 4.2.6.
2. Pair of parallel 16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires are embedded in cross-linked
conductive polymer core, which varies power output in response to temperature
along its length.
3. Cables terminated with factory-assembled nonheating leads with connectors.
4. Cable cover fabricated of cross-linked, modified, polyolefin dielectric jacket and
tinned-copper braid, and polyolefin outer jacket.
S. Cable suitable for crossing over itself without overheating.
6. Cable shall be suitable for use with wood, plastic, adhered rubber membrane, and
asphalt building material and shall be capable of being cut to length in the field.
B. Temperature Control: Provide controller listed in Article 2.4.
2.3 PIPE-FREEZE-PROTECTION HEATING CABLES
A. Self-regulating, electric heating cables suitable for freeze protection of metal or plastic
piping as indicated.
1. 277 Volts, 8 Watts/foot.
2. Heater output reduction at least 90 percent from 40 to 150 deg F (4 to 65 deg C)
pipe temperature.
3. Pair of parallel 16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires are embedded in cross-linked
conductive polymer core, which varies power output in response to temperature
along its length.
4. Cable suitable for crossing over itself without overheating.
S. Cable cover fabricated of cross-linked, modified, polyolefin dielectric jacket and
tinned-copper braid, and polyolefin outer jacket.
6. Cable shall be capable of being cut to length in the field.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric Heating Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16856-3 04/01/05
D. Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating
and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements, of
electric heating cables.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to install heating cables.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing heating cables similar
to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service perform-
ance.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and la-
beled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
E. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain heating cables and accessories from one source and
by a single manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances and
locate obstructions.
B. Coordinate heat tracing requirements with Division 15. Review Division 15 Contract
Documents for heat tracing requirements and controllers.
C. Coordinate layout and installation of heating cables.
1. Coordinate with roofing and sheet-metal installers.
2. Coordinate with piping installer and insulation installer.
3. Revise locations to suit field conditions and as approved by the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric Heating Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16856-2 04/01/05
SECTION 16856— ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes heating cables for the following applications:
1. Heat tracing.
2. Ice stopping.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media" for control wiring.
2. Division 15 Specifications and Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of heating cable and for each accessory specified. Include
manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for electric heating
cables.
B. Shop Drawings: For each electric heating cable and related equipment.
1. Wiring Diagrams for electric heating cables showing layout and connections. In-
clude requirements for proper spacing between cables and show connections to
electrical power feeders.
2. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn accurately to
scale. Show heating cable layout and relationships between components and adja-
cent structural and mechanical elements. Indicate and certify field measurements.
C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric Heating Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E'— 2323 16856-1 04/01/05
7. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each power amplifier at
normal gain settings of 50, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. Maximum variation in power
output at these frequencies must not exceed plus or minus 1 dB.
8. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic address
equipment signal ground. Comply with testing requirements specified in Divi-
sion 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Retesting: Correct deficiencies, revising tap settings of speaker-line matching transform-
ers where necessary to optimize volume and uniformity of sound levels, and retest. Pre-
pare a written record of tests.
D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line
matching transformers.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and in-
stallation requirements.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site
assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting controls to
meet occupancy conditions.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied condi-
tions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose,
without additional cost.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain public address and music equipment.
END OF SECTION 16726
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment '°
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16726-12 04/01/05
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bond-
ing.it
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the follow-
ing field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.
2. After installing public address and music equipment and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page mes-
sages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Verify
proper routing and volume levels and that system is free of noise and distortion.
4. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at
normal gain settings as follows:
a. Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and replace it in the
circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Replace all other mi-
crophones at corresponding connectors with dummy loads, each equal in
impedance to microphone it replaces. Measure signal-to-noise ratio.
b. Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.
C. Minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.
5. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed
signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz into each
preamplifier channel. For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging and
all-call amplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 3
percent total harmonics.
6. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at
500 and 4000 Hz. Use sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure level
at five locations in each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maximum permis-
sible variation in level is plus or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels between loca-
tions in the same zone and between locations in adjacent zones must not vary more
than plus or minus 3 dB.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16726-11 04101105
B. Install raceways and cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural
members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or
similar fittings so designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at in-
tervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from
cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
D. Control-Circuit Wiring: Install number and size of conductors as recommended by sys-
tem manufacturer for control functions indicated.
E. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power
wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, sepa-
rate conductors at least 12 inches (300 mm) for speaker microphones and adjacent paral-
lel power and telephone wiring. Separate other intercommunication equipment conduc-
tors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,
and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
G. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide
matching networks where required.
H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and ca- ,
ble marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination
with system wiring diagrams.
I. Wall-Mounting Outlets: Flush mounted.
J. Floor-Mounting Outlets: Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles through outlet cov-
ers. Secure outlet covers in place. Trim with carpet in carpeted areas.
K. Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks
to loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No. 18 AWG and conductors from microphone
receptacles to amplifiers not smaller than No. 22 AWG.
L. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or
where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
M. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap
settings indicated on Drawings.
N. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 GROUNDING
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 16726-10 04/01/05
OW 2. Attenuation per Step: 3 dB,with positive off position.
3. Insertion Loss: 0.4 dB maximum.
4. Attenuation Bypass Relay: Single pole, double throw. Connected to operate and
bypass attenuation when all-call, paging, program signal, or prerecorded message
features are used. Relay returns to normal position at end of priority transmission.
5. Label: "PA Volume."
M. Microphone Outlet: Three-pole, polarized, locking-type, microphone receptacles in sin-
gle-gang boxes. Equip wall outlets with brushed stainless-steel device plates. Equip floor
outlets with gray tapered rubber or plastic cable nozzles and fixed outlet covers.
N. Headphone Outlet (for the Hearing Impaired): Microphone receptacles in single-gang
boxes. Equip wall outlets with brushed stainless-steel device plates. Equip floor outlets
with gray tapered rubber or plastic cable nozzles and fixed outlet covers.
O. Battery Backup Power Unit: Rack-mounted unit consisting of time-delay relay, sealed
lead-calcium battery, battery charger, on/off switch and "normal" and "emergency" in-
dicating lights, and adequate capacity to supply maximum equipment power require-
ments for one hour of continuous full operation.
1. Arrange unit to supply public address equipment with 12- to 15-V do power auto-
matically during an outage of normal 120-V ac power.
2. Arrange for battery to be on float charge when not supplying system and to trans-
fer automatically to supply system after three to five seconds of continuous outage
row of normal power, as sensed by time-delay relay.
3. Automatic retransfer of system to normal supply when normal power has been re-
established for three to five seconds continuously.
P. Conductors and Cables: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid
copper.
1. Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)
thick.
2. Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not less than 2/64 inch (0.8 mm) thick,
over shield with filled interstices. Shield No. 34 AWG tinned, soft-copper strands
formed into a braid or approved equivalent foil. Shielding coverage on conductors
is not less than 60 percent.
3. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, desks, and counters.
Conceal cables and raceways except in unfinished spaces.
"' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16726-9 04/01/05
H. Monitor Panel: Mounted above amplifiers. ^'^*e
1. Equip with VU or dB meter, speaker with volume control, and multiple-position
rotary selector switch.
2. Connect selector switch and volume control to permit selective monitoring of out-
put of each separate power amplifier via VU or dB meter and speaker.
I. Cone-Type Loudspeakers: Comply with TIA/EIA SE-103.
1. Minimum Axial Sensitivity: TIA/EIA pressure rating of 45 dB.
2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 50 to 15,000 Hz.
3. Size: 8 inches (200 mm) with 1-inch (25-mm) voice coil and minimum 5-oz. (140-
g) ceramic magnet.
4. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees.
5. Rated Output Level: 10 W.
6. Matching Transformer: Comply with TIA/EIA-160. Full-power rated with four
TIA/EIA standard taps. Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.
7. Surface-Mounting Units: Ceiling, wall, or pendant mounting, as indicated, in steel
back boxes, acoustically dampened. Front face of at least 0.0478-inch (1.2-mrn)
steel and whole assembly rust proofed and shop primed for field painting.
8. Flush-Ceiling-Mounting Units: In steel back boxes, acoustically dampened. Metal
ceiling grille with white baked enamel.
J. Horn-Type Loudspeakers: Comply with TIA/EIA SE-103.
1. Type: Single-horn units, double-reentrant design, with minimum full-range power
rating of 15 W.
2. Matching Transformer: Comply with TIA/EIA-160. Full-power rated with four
TIA/EIA standard taps. Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.
3. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 250 to 12,000 Hz.
4. Dispersion Angle: 130 by 110 degrees.
5. Mounting: Integral bracket.
6. Units in Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled for environment in
which they are located.
K. Noise-Operated Gain Controller: Units continuously sense space noise level and auto-
matically adjust signal level to local speakers.
1. Frequency Response: 20 to 20,000 Hz, plus or minus 1 dB.
2. Level Adjustment Range: 20 dB minimum.
3. Maximum Distortion: 1 percent.
4. Control: Permits adjustment of sensing level of device.
L. Volume Attenuator Station: Wall-plate-mounted autotransformer type with paging pri-
ority feature.
1. Wattage Rating: 10 W, unless otherwise indicated.
Public Address and Music Equipment
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E'—2323 16726-8 04/01/05
I. Signals Produced: Minimum of seven distinct, audible signal types including wail,
warble, high/low, alarm, repeating chimes, single-stroke chime, and tone.
2. Pitch Control: Chimes and tone.
3. Volume Control: All outputs.
4. Activation-Switch Network: Establishes priority and hierarchy of output signals
produced by different activation setups.
F. Equipment Cabinet: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D. House amplifiers and auxiliary
equipment at each location.
1. Cabinet Housing: Construct of 0.0478-inch (1.2-mm) steel, minimum, with front-
and rear-locking doors and standard TIA/EIA 19-inch (483-mm) racks. Arrange
for floor or wall mounting as indicated. Size to house all equipment indicated plus
spare capacity. Include 20 percent minimum spare capacity for future equipment
over and above space required for future cassette deck and CD player.
2. Power Provisions: Install a single switch in cabinet to supply cabinet power distri-
bution system and electrical outlets, uniformly spaced, to accommodate ac-power
cords for each item of equipment.
3. Ventilation: A low-noise fan for forced-air cabinet ventilation. Equip fan with a
filtered input vent and connect to operate from 105- to 130-V ac, 60 Hz; sepa-
rately fused and switchable; arranged to be powered when main cabinet power
switch is on.
G. Equipment Rack: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D. House amplifiers and auxiliary equip-
ment in standard TIA/EIA 19-inch (483-mm) racks.
1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by side, and ar-
range controls symmetrically.
2. Power-Supply Connections: Approved plugs and receptacles.
3. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible
at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack
without disturbing other items or connections.
4. Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front of rack is oc-
cupied by panels.
5. Enclosure Panels: Ventilated rear and sides and solid top. Use louvers in panels to
ensure adequate ventilation.
6. Finish: Uniform, baked-enamel factory finish over rust-inhibiting primer.
7. Power-Control Panel: On front of equipment housing, with master power on/off
switch and pilot light; and with socket for 5-A cartridge fuse for rack equipment
power.
8. Service Light: At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch.
9. Vertical Plug Strip: Grounded receptacles, 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. the full height
of rack, to supply rack-mounted equipment.
10. Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied independent of
vertical plug strip and located in front and bottom rear of rack.
11. Spare Capacity: 20 percent spare space capacity in rack for future equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16726-7 04/01/05
4. Output Level: Minus 58 dB minimum.
5. Finish: Satin chrome.
6. Cable: C25J.
7. Mounting: Desk stand with integral-locking, press-to-talk switch.
B. Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor. install
in central equipment cabinet. Arrange to provide a constant input to power amplifiers.
1. Frequency Response: 45 to 15,000 Hz, plus or minus 1 dB minimum.
2. Signal Reduction Ratio: At least a 10:1 and 5:1 selectable capability.
3. Distortion: 1. percent, maximum.
4. Rated Output: Minimum of plus 14 dB.
5. Inputs: Minimum of two inputs with variable front-panel gain controls and VU or
dB meter for input adjustment.
C. Control Console: Modular, desktop cabinet; complying with TIA/EIA-310-D.
I. Housing: Steel, 0.0478 inch (1.2 mm) minimum, with removable front and rear
panels. Side panels are removable for interconnecting side-by-side mounting.
2. Panel for Equipment and Controls: Each module is nominal 19 inches (483 inm)
wide by 8-3/4 inches (222 mm) high.
3. Controls: Include the following:
a. Switching devices to select signal sources for distribution channels.
b. Program selector switch to select source for each program channel.
C. Switching devices to select zones for paging.
d. All-call selector switch.
4. Indicators: A visual annunciation for each distribution channel to indicate source
being used.
5. Self-Contained Power and Control Unit: A single assembly of basic control, elec-
tronics, and power supply necessary to accomplish specified functions.
6. Spare Positions: 20 percent spare zone control and annunciation positions on con-
sole.
7. Microphone jack.
D. Telephone Paging Adapter: Arranged to accept voice signals from telephone extension
dialing access and to automatically provide amplifier input and program override for
preselected zones.
1. Minimum Frequency Response: Flat, 200 to 2500 Hz.
2. Impedance Matching: Adapter matches telephone line to public address equipment
input.
E. Tone Generator: For clock and program interface.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 16726-6 04/01/05
D. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz.
E. Input Jacks: Minimum of two. One matched for low-impedance microphone; the other
matchable to cassette deck, CD player, or radio tuner signals without external adapters.
F. Minimum Noise Level: Minus 55 dB below rated output.
G. Controls: On/off, input levels, and master gain.
2.5 POWER AMPLIFIERS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101-A.
B. Mounting: Rack mounted.
C. Output Power: 70-W balanced line.
D. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 50 to 12,000 Hz.
E. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 60 dB, at rated output.
F. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 50 to
12,000 Hz.
G. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.
H. Controls: On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter.
I. Input Sensitivity: Matched to preamplifier and providing full-rated output with sound-
pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. crn impinging on speaker microphone or handset
transmitter.
2.6 TRANSFER TO STANDBY AMPLIFIER
A. Monitoring Circuit and Sensing Relay: Arranged to detect reduction in output of power
amplifier of 40 percent or greater and, in such event, transfer load and signal automati-
cally to standby amplifier.
2.7 COMPONENTS
A. Microphone: Comply with TIA/EIA SE-105.
1. Type: Dynamic, with cardioid polar or omnidirectional characteristic.
2. Impedance: 150 ohms.
3. Frequency Response: Uniform, 50 to 14,000 Hz.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16726-5 04/01/05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Dukane Corporation; Communications Systems Div.
2.2 FUNCTIONAL,DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. System Functions: Include the following:
1. Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal channels.
2. Selectively amplifying sound among various microphone outlets and other inputs.
3. Communicating simultaneously to all zones regardless of zone or channel switch
settings.
4. Paging, by dialing an extension from any local telephone instrument and speaking
into the telephone.
5. Producing a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all speakers,
overriding signals currently being distributed.
6. Reproducing high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loud-
speakers at all times during equipment operation including standby mode with in-
puts off; and output free of nonuniform coverage of amplified sound.
2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Coordinate features to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnec-
tions for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty,
unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usu-
ally supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
C. Waterproof Equipment: Listed and labeled for duty outdoors or in damp locations.
2.4 PREAMPLIFIERS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA 5E-101-A; either separately mounted or as an integral part of
power amplifier.
B. Output Power: Plus 4 dB above 1 mW at matched power-amplifier load.
C. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 1 percent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16726-4 04/01/05
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For public address and music equipment to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 2 hours' normal travel time from In-
staller's place of business to Project site.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capabil-
ity to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Elec-
trical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as de-
fined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain public address and music equipment through a single source
authorized by manufacturer to distribute each product.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with UL 50.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fix-
tures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Microphone: One
2. Desk Stands: One
!►* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16726-3 04/01/05
14. Battery backup power unit.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints for
central control cabinets.
2. Equipment Details: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location of each
field connection.
3. Console layouts.
4. Control panels.
5. Rack arrangements.
6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:
a. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
b. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.
C. Cabling diagram showing cable routing.
C. Calculations: For sizing backup battery.
D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that public ad-
dress and music equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the fol-
lowing:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
Public Address and Music Equipment
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' — 2323 16726-2 04/01/05
SECTION 16726 - PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes equipment for amplifying, distributing, and reproducing sound sig-
nals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker
zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for
speaker alternative program signals.
B. Zone: Separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be ar-
ranged for selective switching between different channels.
C. VU: Volume unit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Preamplifiers.
2. Power amplifiers.
3. Transfer to standby amplifier.
4. Microphone.
5. Volume limiter/compressor.
6. Control console.
7. Telephone paging adapter.
8. Tone generator.
9. Equipment cabinet and rack.
10. Monitor panel.
11. Loudspeakers.
12. Noise-operated gain controller.
13. Microphone and headphone outlets.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Public Address and Music Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16726-1 04/01/05
END OF SECTION 16725
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-12 05/13/05
APIK a. Disconnect a speaker microphone and replace it in the circuit with a signal
generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Measure the ratio of signal to noise and
repeat the test for four speaker microphones.
b. The minimum acceptable ratio is 35 dB.
6. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed
signals at frequencies of 150, 200, 400, 1000, and 2500 Hz into each nurse call
equipment amplifier, and measure the distortion in the amplifier output. The
maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 5 percent total harmonics.
C. Retesting: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system
meets these Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Report results in
writing.
D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel and caregiver staff.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Provide a minimum of eight hours' training.
3. Train Owner's caregiver personnel on proper use of the equipment. Coordinate
periods of training with Architect to ensure nursing shifts receive the required
training. Conduct training outside normal working hours as required to coordi-
nate with shift schedules. Include instructions utilizing audio and visual graphics
and hands-on operation of the equipment in typical zones selected by Architect.
Provide handout material describing equipment features and functions to those at-
tending. Provide a minimum of three, three-hour sessions for each group of train-
ees.
4. Training Aids: Use approved maintenance manual material as instructional aids.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Provide copies of this material
for use in the instruction.
5. Provide connection and software for diagnostics and programming.
3.6 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Com-
pletion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and controls to suit actual
occupancy conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project site for this purpose.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16725-11 05113105
G. Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances and sig-
nal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks if required.
H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Retain color-coding of conductors and apply
wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in
coordination with system wiring diagrams. Label stations, controls, and indications us-
ing approved consistent nomenclature.
3.2 EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Examine existing code blue system for proper operation, compatibility with new equip-
ment, and deficiencies. If discrepancies or impairments to successful connection and op-
eration of interconnected equipment are found, report them and do not proceed with in-
stallation until directed. Schedule existing code blue system examination so there is rea-
sonable time to resolve problems without delaying construction.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup,cross talk, and other signal impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding except at connection to main building ground bus.
C. Grounding Provisions: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and testing and adjusting of system.
B. Test Procedure: Comply with the following:
1. Schedule tests a minimum of seven days in advance of performance of tests.
2. Report: Submit a written record of test results.
3. Operational Test: Perform an operational system test to verify compliance of sys-
tem with these Specifications. Perform tests that include originating station-to-
station and all-call messages and pages at each nurse call station. Verify proper
routing, volume levels, and freedom from noise and distortion. Test each available
message path from each station on the system.
4. Frequency Response Test: Determine frequency response of two transmission
paths by transmitting and recording audio tones. Minimum acceptable perform-
ance within 3 dB from 150 to 2500 Hz.
5. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of the complete
system at normal gain settings, using the following procedure:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-10 05/13/05
1. Conductors: Jacketed single and multitwisted pair, untinned solid copper. Sizes as
recommended by equipment manufacturer, but not smaller than No. 22 AWG.
2. Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) thick.
3. Shielding: For speaker-microphone leads and elsewhere if recommended by the
manufacturer; No. 34 AWG tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or ap-
proved equivalent foil. Shielding coverage not less than 60 percent.
4. Cable for Use in Plenums: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
5. Cable shall be from one manufacturer and color coded to follow the nurse call sys-
tem manufacturer's color-coding requirements.
J. Grounding Components: As specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters.
Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters;
and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions, where cable wir-
ing method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces includ-
ing plenum ceilings. Conceal cable and raceway wiring except in unfinished spaces.
C. Install exposed raceways and cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed
structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps,
staples, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage cables. Secure cable
at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm)
from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and
train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars in cabi-
nets.
E. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power-
wiring runs. Run in separate raceways or, if exposed or in same enclosure, provide 12-
inch (300-mm) minimum separation between conductors to speaker microphones and
adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide separation as recommended by
equipment manufacturer for other conductors.
F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered
terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment en-
closures. Install terminal cabinets where there are splices, taps, or terminations for eight
or more conductors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-9 05/13/05
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS Aaft%.
A. Emergency-Call Station: Locking-type push button, labeled "Push to Call Help"; reset
trigger to release push button and cancel call; and call-placed lamp; mounted in a single
faceplate.
B. Pull-Cord Call Station: Water-resistant construction. Includes the following, mounted
under a single faceplate:
1. Pull-down Switch: Lever-locking type, labeled "Pull Down to Call Help."
2. Reset trigger.
3. Call-placed lamp.
C. Patient Control Unit: Equipped with plug and 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long white cord.
1. Ethylene oxide, sterilizable.
2. Light-Control Switch: Arranged for independent on-off control of patient's up and
down light.
3. Integral Speaker: 2 inches (50 mm),with 0.35-oz. (9.9-g) magnet, rated 0.2 W.
4. Controls: Speaker volume, TV control, and nurse call.
5. Housing: High-impact white plastic.
6. Attachment: Stainless-steel bed clamp with permanently attached Mylar strap.
7. Quantity: 12 units for every 10 patient beds.
D. Dummy Plugs: Designed to plug into BIU cord-set receptacle when patient control unit ,,N**
cord is not used. Furnish 3 plugs for every 10 patient beds.
E. Indicator Lamps: Light-emitting-diode type with 20-year rated life, unless otherwise in-
dicated.
F. Equipment Mounting Provisions: Suit mounting arrangement indicated.
G. Station Faceplates: High-impact plastic, white or beige in color. Molded or machine-
engraved labeling identifies indicator lamps and controls. All faceplates for entire system
shall be of the same color.
H. Corridor Dome Lights and Zone Lights: Three-lamp signal lights.
1. Lamps: Front replaceable without tools, low voltage with rated life of 7500 hours.
Barriers are such that only one color is displayed at a time.
2. Lenses: Heat-resistant, shatterproof, translucent polymer that will not deform, dis-
color, or craze when exposed to hospital cleaning agents.
3. Filters: Two per unit, amber and red.
I. Cable: Features include the following, unless otherwise indicated:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-8 05/13/05
2. Station Selection Controls: Switches select stations for two-way voice communica-
tions.
3. Signal Tones: Announce incoming calls.
a. Pulse rate and frequency of tone identify the highest priority call awaiting re-
sponse at one time.
4. Volume Control: Regulates incoming-call volume.
5. Speaker-Microphone Sensitivity: At least 40 dB (EIA pressure rating).
6. Privacy Handset with Hook Switch: Attached to each station, unless otherwise in-
dicated.
7. Staff Reminder Control: Initiates flashing of corresponding corridor dome lights
for patients requiring service. Permits scanning equipment to indicate which pa-
tients are currently in reminder status.
8. Call Priority Selection: Controls associated with patient station selection switches
determine the priority indication displayed when a call is initiated at a patient sta-
tion.
B. Single-Patient Station: Speaker microphone with 2-inch (50-mm) dynamic cone, a polar-
ized receptacle to match the cord-set plug, monitor lamp, reset switch, and call-placed
lamp; assembled under a single faceplate.
C. Staff Station: Audible call-tone signal device, speaker microphone with 2-inch (50-mm)
dynamic cone, call button, cancel button, call placed lamp, and monitor lamp; assembled
under a single faceplate.
D. Duty Station: Audible call-tone signal device, speaker microphone with 2-inch (50-mm)
dynamic cone, call button, cancel button, call placed lamp, monitor lamp, normal-call
lamp, bath-call lamp, emergency-call lamp, and code-call lamp; assembled under a single
faceplate.
E. Ambulatory-Patient Station: Speaker microphone with 2-inch (50-mm) dynamic cone,
monitor lamp, reset switch, call-placed lamp, and call push button; assembled under a
single faceplate.
F. Selective Paging Amplifiers: Plug-in card mounted in central equipment cabinet; rated 15
W.
G. Selective Paging Speakers: 8-inch (200-mm) cone type with 1-inch (25-mm) voice coil
and minimum 5-oz. (140-g) ceramic magnet, multitap matching transformer, flush-
mounting steel back-box, and white enamel-finished metal ceiling grille.
H. Call Priority Switch Station: Three-position, tamper-resistant priority selection switch.
Positions designated by labeling "Normal," "Emergency," and "Priority."
I. Staff Reminder Cancel Switch Station: Momentary contact.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16725-7 05/13/05
troller shall be supplied to match the voltages of the ballasts. Indirect and reading 1OW
lamps may be controlled independently by momentary closure of separate switches
or sequentially from a single momentary contact switch. The momentary contact
switches are located on the side rails of the equipped beds.
2. Patient Entertainment Control: Controls entertainment volume, and channel selec-
tion.
3. Patient Monitoring Alarms: Provide capabilities to connect patient alarms to nurse
call system. System shall be able to identify type and location of patient alarm.
4. Bed Exit: Call initiation produces signals and indications at a higher level than
normal, lights a unique dome lamp, and resets when the alarm is reset on the bed.
Q. Selective Paging: Master station is capable of initiating a message to selected groups of
stations or speakers simultaneously by using station group switches.
R. Staff Reminder: Master station can initiate a staff reminder that a patient requires direct
staff response by operating a reminder control while in contact with the patient station.
This will light a distinctive-color lamp in the corridor dome light at the patient's room
and in the appropriate zone lights. Reminder calls are canceled by operating a staff re-
minder cancel switch in the patient's room.
S. Call Priority Indication: Call priority switch near each patient station, or integral with
the master station, controls the priority status of the call transmitted by individual sta-
tions. The switch selects one of the following status levels:
1. Normal: No change to the normal call initiation and canceling sequence.
2. Emergency: Call initiation produces signals and indications identical to those of
emergency-call stations. Indicator lamps are extinguished and the system is reset
only at the originating station.
3. Priority: System response is the same for emergency status, except voice communi-
cation between the master station and the calling station is locked in from the time
of call initiation until the system is reset at the originating station.
T. Emergin Nurse Call Gateway (NCG) Communications Server: Provide capability to
connect to the Hospital's network to transmit messages from the nurse call system to the
Hospital's Emergin communications server.
2.4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTIONS
A. Master Station: Speaker-microphone unit with operating controls.
1. Indicator lamps with legends or by liquid-crystal displays designate identification
and priority of calling stations and called stations.
a. Pulse rate of lights identify the highest priority call awaiting response at one
time.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-6 05/13/05
G. Patient Station Call (via Patient Control Unit): Lights the call-placed lamp at patient sta-
tion, zone, and corridor dome lights. It sounds a tone and lights the call lights at staff
and duty stations and actuates annunciation at the master station. When the calling sta-
tion is selected at the master station, the patient can converse with the master station
without moving and without raising or directing the voice. During voice communica-
tions, entertainment audio at the calling station is automatically muted.
H. Pull-Cord Call Station and Emergency-Call Station Call: Lights call-placed lamp and
corridor dome light, and flashes zone light. Master station tone pulses and annunciator
light for that room flashes. When master station acknowledges the call by operating a
switch, the tone stops but lights continue to flash until the call is canceled at the point of
origin.
1. Staff Station Call: Lights the call-placed lamp at the station and actuates annunciation at
the master station. When the called station is selected at the master station, the caller
and the master station operator can converse.
J. Duty Station Call: Lights the call-placed lamp at the station and actuates annunciation
at the master station. When the called station is selected at the master station, the caller
and the master station operator can converse.
K. Handset Operation: Lifting handset on master station disconnects speaker microphone
and transfers conversation to the handset.
L. Station Privacy: No patient, staff, or duty station can be remotely monitored without the
lighting of a warning lamp at the monitored station.
M. Bed Interface Unit (BIU): The bed interface unit located at the patient headwall shall
have two connection ports to connect to either type of patient control unit (i.e. SideCom
enabled bed or pillow speaker unit). All patient control unit connections shall be made
at the BIU; no external connections will be allowed at the patient station.
N. Patient Control Unit Cord Set: When a patient control unit cord-set plug is removed
from the jack in the (BIU) faceplate, a patient station call is initiated as described above.
When the master station call button for the station is pressed, the tone stops but lights
continue to flash until the call is canceled at the point of origin or the plug is reinserted
or replaced with a dummy plug.
O. Noise: System is free from pops, clicks, hisses, hums, and other noise at all speakers and
handsets during operation, including standby.
P. SideCom Enabled Bed Interface: Provides capability for SideCom enabled beds to inter-
face with the nurse communication module allowing audiovisual signaling of the bed
status (brakes, bed exit, side rails,prevention, and elevation).
1. Patient Lighting Control: Bed interface shall be operated via the low voltage con-
troller installed in the headwall light or remotely elsewhere. The low voltage con-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-5 05/13/05
C. Existing Code Blue System Compatibility: Functionally and electrically compatible with lowN
existing code blue system. All functional performance of the existing system applies to
the final system. Colors, tones, types, and durations of signal manifestation are common
between new and existing systems.
D. Resistance to Electrostatic Discharge: System, components, and cabling, and the selec-
tion, arrangement, and connection of materials and circuits, shall be protected against
damage or diminished performance when subjected to electrostatic discharges of up to
25,000 V in an environment with a relative humidity of 20 percent or less.
E. Equipment: Solid state, modular.
F. Wall-Mounted Component Connection Method: Components connect to system wiring
in back boxes with factory-wired plug connectors.
2.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE
A. Station Selection: Master station is capable of selectively communicating with other sta-
tions or groups of stations on its system by operating selector switches.
B. Master Station Privacy: Capable of conversing with individual stations in complete pri-
vacy.
C. Hands Free: Called station is capable of conversing hands free. ,,,,k
D. Annunciation: At the master station, a tone announces an incoming call and an annun-
ciator light or liquid-crystal display identifies the calling station and indicates the priority
of the call. Memory lamps or lighted displays identify stations selected for outgoing
calls.
E. System Reset at Master Station: A normal incoming call is canceled, associated lights
and audible tones are extinguished, and the system is reset when the station switch is re-
turned to the normal position after responding to a call.
F. Patient Control Unit: Integral to siderails of SideCom enabled beds or pillow speaker
unit. Depending on features available at various bed locations, the following control fea-
tures may be provided:
1. Patient station call via nurse button.
2. Headwall light fixture on/off functions
3. Entertainment volume and channel selection.
a. Speaker is used for both nurse communication and entertainment sound.
b. Entertainment sound is automatically muted when station is communicating
with master station.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-4 05/13/05
2. Patient consoles.
3. Patient beds with built-in nurse call features.
C. Coordinate interface requirements to connect the new nurse call system with other sys-
tems.
1. Emergin Nurse Call Gateway (NCG).
2. Existing facility code blue system.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Corridor Dome Lights and Zone Lights: Furnish quantity equal to 20
percent of amount installed.
2. Nurse Call Stations: Furnish two of each type of station installed.
3. Master Stations: Furnish one of each type of station installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dukane Corp.; Communications Systems Div.
2. Hill-Rom Company, Inc.; a Hillenbrand Industry
3. Rauland-Borg Corp.
4. West-Com Nurse Call Systems, Inc.
S. Executone Information Systems Inc.
2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment to form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. Expansion Capability: Equipment ratings, housing volume, spare keys, switches, relays,
annunciator modules, terminals, and cable conductor quantities shall be adequate to in-
crease the number of stations in the future to accommodate the fifth and sixth floor ex-
pansions plus an additional 25 percent without adding internal or external components
or main trunk cable conductors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-3 05/13/05
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with re-
quirements.
G. Field Tests Reports and Observations: Include record of final adjustments certified by
Installer.
H. Maintenance Data: Include the following in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1:
1. Operating instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Wiring terminal identification.
4. Equipment parts list.
5. Installation instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the product manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing equipment similar to
that indicated for this Project and that maintains technical support services capable of
providing user with training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repair with a 24-
hour-maximum response time.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain nurse call equipment components through one source from a
single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled according to
UL 1069 as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authori-
ties having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate patient control units with items controlled that are not part of nurse call
equipment.
1. TV: Channel selection and volume.
2. Lights: Up light and down light at patient location.
3. Patient Monitoring Alarms: Bed ext, patient blood pressure, etc.
B. Coordinate wiring paths and maintenance access at locations listed below. Coordinate
trim features and finishes at these locations to present a unified design appearance.
1. Patient head-wall units.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16725 - NURSE CALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes audiovisual equipment using voice communications and microproc-
essor control. All stations in an area are connected to a master station. Master stations
are capable of communicating selectively with each other and with connected patient and
other stations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
000,, B. Shop Drawings: Detail the system including the following:
1. Cabling Diagrams: Single-line block diagrams showing cabling interconnection of
all components for this specific equipment.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control systems and differentiate be-
tween manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals.
3. Station Installation Details: For built-in equipment; dimensioned and to scale.
4. Equipment Cabinet Drawings: Dimensioned and to scale.
C. Coordination Drawings: Detail system components that fit, match, and line up with
provisions made in equipment specified in other Sections or in separate contracts:
1. Patient head-wall units.
2. Patient consoles.
3. Patient beds with built-in nurse call features.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of nurse call equipment certifying that
products comply with requirements.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements. On request, submit evidence of experience and of relationship with equip-
ment manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Nurse Call
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16725-1 05/13/05
1. Include a record of final speaker-line matching transformer-tap settings, and signal
AOWI ground-resistance measurement certified by Installer.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and initial
system programming.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and in-
stallation requirements.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site
assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting controls to
meet occupancy conditions.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied condi-
tions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose,
took without additional cost.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain intercommunication equipment.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on programming equipment for starting up
and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Provide connection and software for diagnostics and programming.
END OF SECTION 16722
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16722-11 05/13/05
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the follow- ..�
ing field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.
2. After installing intercommunication equipment and after electrical circuitry has
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3. Operational Test: Test originating station-to-station, all-call, and page messages at
each intercommunication station. Verify proper routing and volume levels and
that system is free of noise and distortion. Test each available message path from
each station on system.
4. Frequency Response Test: Determine frequency response of two transmission
paths, including all-call and paging, by transmitting and recording audio tones.
Minimum acceptable performance is within 3 dB from 150 to 2500 Hz.
5. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at
normal gain settings, as follows:
a. Disconnect speaker microphone and replace it in the circuit with a signal
generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Measure signal-to-noise ratio at paging
speakers.
b. Repeat test for four speaker microphones and for each separately controlled
zone of paging loudspeakers.
C. Minimum acceptable ratio is 35 dB.
6. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed
signals at frequencies of 150, 200, 400, 1000, and 2500 Hz into each paging and
all-call amplifier, and a minimum of 2 selected intercommunication amplifiers. For
each frequency, measure distortion in the paging and all-call amplifier outputs.
Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 5 percent total harmonics.
7. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at
500 and 4000 Hz. Use sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure level
at three locations in each paging zone. Maximum permissible variation in level is
plus or minus 3 dB; in levels between adjacent zones, plus or minus 5 dB.
8. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each paging amplifier at
normal gain settings of 150, 1000, and 2500 Hz. Maximum variation in power
output at these frequencies is plus or minus 3 dB.
9. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at system signal
ground. Comply with testing requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding."
C. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Prepare a written record of tests.
D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line
matching transformers.
E. Prepare written test reports.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16722-10 05/13/05
E. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power
wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, sepa-
rate conductors at least 12 inches (300 mm) for speaker microphones and adjacent paral-
lel power and telephone wiring. Separate other intercommunication equipment conduc-
tors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,
and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
G. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide
matching networks where required.
H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and ca-
ble marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination
with system wiring diagrams.
L Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or
where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bond-
ing.if
3.3 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A. Programming: Fully brief Owner on available programming options. Record Owner's
decisions and set up initial system program. Prepare a written record of decisions, im-
plementation methodology, and final results.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16722-9 05/13/05
A. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101-A. All-metal, weatherproof construction; complete with
universal mounting brackets.
B. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 275 to 14,000 Hz.
C. Minimum Power Rating of Driver: 15 W, continuous.
D. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 110 degrees.
E. Line Transformer: Comply with TIA/EIA-160, maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB, power
rating equal to speaker's, and at least 4 level taps.
2.12 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conductors: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper. Sizes
as recommended by system manufacturer, but not smaller than No. 22 AWG.
B. Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) thick.
C. Shielding: For speaker-microphone leads and elsewhere where recommended by manu-
facturer; No. 34 AWG tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or equivalent foil.
1. Minimum Shielding Coverage on Conductors: 60 percent.
D. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation. AI"`
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, desks, and counters.
Conceal cables and raceways except in unfinished spaces.
B. Install exposed raceways and cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed
structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps,
staples, or similar fittings designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure ca-
bles at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm)
from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
D. Control-Circuit Wiring: Install number and size of conductors as recommended by sys-
tem manufacturer for control functions indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16722-8 05/13/05
D. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 60 dB, at rated output.
E. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 70 to
12,000 Hz.
F. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.
G. Controls: On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter.
H. Input Sensitivity: Matched to input circuit and providing full-rated output with sound-
pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on speaker microphone or handset
transmitter.
I. Amplifier Protection: Prevents damage from shorted or open output.
J. Output Circuit: 70-W line.
2.10 CONE-TYPE LOUDSPEAKERS/SPEAKER MICROPHONES
A. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-103.
B. Minimum Axial Sensitivity: TIA/EIA SE-103 pressure rating of 45 dB.
C. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 70 to 15,000 Hz.
D. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees.
E. Line Transformer: Comply with TIA/EIA-160, maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB, power
rating equal to speaker's, and at least 4 level taps.
F. Enclosures: Steel housings or back boxes, acoustically dampened, with front face of at
least 0.0478-inch (1.2-mm) steel and whole assembly rust proofed and factory primed;
complete with mounting assembly and suitable for surface ceiling, flush ceiling, pendant
or wall mounting; and with relief of back pressure.
G. Baffle: For flush speakers, minimum thickness of 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum.
H. Vandal-Proof, High-Strength Baffle: For flush speakers, self-aging cast aluminum with
tensile strength of 44,000 psi (303 MN/sq. m), 0.025-inch (0.65-mm) minimum thick-
ness,countersunk heat-treated alloy mounting screws, and textured white epoxy finish.
I. Size: 8 inches (200 mm) with 1-inch (25-mm) voice coil and minimum 5-oz. (140-g) ce-
ramic magnet.
2.11 HORN-TYPE LOUDSPEAKERS/SPEAKER MICROPHONES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16722-7 05/13/05
B. Output Power: At least 0.5-W RMS for each station and speaker connected in all-call
mode of operation, plus an allowance for future stations.
C. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 5 percent at rated output power with load equiva-
lent to quantity of stations connected in all-call mode of operation.
D. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB, at rated output.
E. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 70 to 12,000 Hz.
F. Output Regulation: Maintains output level within 2 dB from full to no load.
G. Input Sensitivity: Compatible with master stations and central equipment so amplifier
delivers full-rated output with sound-pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm imping-
ing on master station, speaker microphone, or handset transmitter.
H. Amplifier Protection: Prevents damage from shorted or open output.
2.8 INTERCOMMUNICATION AMPLIFIER
A. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101-A.
B. Minimum Output Power: 2-W RMS and adequate for all functions.
C. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 5 percent at rated output power with load equiva-
lent to 1 station connected to output terminals.
D. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB, at rated output.
E. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 70 to 10,000 Hz.
F. Output Regulation: Maintains output level within 2 dB from full to no load.
G. Input Sensitivity: Matched to input circuit and providing full-rated output with sound-
pressure level of not more than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on master stations, speaker
microphones, or handset transmitters.
H. Amplifier Protection: Prevents damage from shorted or open output.
2.9 PAGING AMPLIFIER
A. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101-A.
B. Input Voltage: 120-V ac, 60 Hz.
C. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 60 to 10,000 Hz.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16722-6 05/13/05
H. Central-Control Cabinet: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D. Lockable, ventilated metal
cabinet houses terminal strips, power supplies, amplifiers, system volume control, and
other switching and control devices required for conversation channels and control func-
tions.
2.5 SPEAKER-MICROPHONE STATIONS
A. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated, and suitable for mounting conditions indi-
cated.
B. Faceplate: Stainless steel or anodized aluminum with tamperproof mounting screws.
C. Back Box: Two-gang galvanized steel with 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum depth.
D. Speaker: Comply with TIA/EIA 5E-103. 3-inch (76-mm), 2.3-oz. (65-g) minimum, per-
manent magnet.
E. Recurring momentary tone announces incoming calls.
F. Call Switch: Mount on faceplate. Permits a call to master station.
G. Privacy Switch: Mount on faceplate. When in on position, switch prevents transmission
of sound from remote station to system; when in off position, without further switch
manipulation, response can be made to incoming calls.
H. Handset with Hook Switch: Telephone type with 18-inch- (450-mm-) long, permanently
coiled cord. Arrange to disconnect speaker when handset is lifted.
2.6 CALL-SWITCH UNIT
A. Enclosure: Single-gang box with stainless-steel faceplate.
B. Call Switch: Momentary contact signals system that a call has been placed.
C. Privacy Switch: Prevents transmission of sound signals from station to system.
D. Volume Control: Operated by screwdriver blade through a hole in faceplate to adjust
output level of associated speaker.
E. Handset with Hook Switch: Telephone type with 18-inch- (450-mm-) long, permanently
coiled cord. Arrange to disconnect speaker when handset is lifted.
2.7 ALL-CALL AMPLIFIER
A. Comply with TIA/EIA 5E-101-A.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16722-5 05/13/05
1. Having privacy from remote monitoring without a warning tone signal at moni-
tored station. Designated speaker-microphone stations have a privacy switch to
prevent another station from listening and to permit incoming calls.
2. Communicating hands free.
3. Calling master station by actuating call switch.
4. Returning a busy signal to indicate that station is already in use.
5. Being free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.
C. Speakers: Free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.
2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Coordinate features to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnec-
tions for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. Expansion Capability: Increase number of stations in the future by 25 percent above
those indicated without adding any internal or external components or main trunk cable
conductors.
C. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty,
unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usu-
ally supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
D. Waterproof Equipment: Listed and labeled for duty outdoors or in damp locations. ,
2.4 MASTER STATION FOR MICROPROCESSOR-SWITCHED SYSTEMS
A. 12-Digit Keypad Selector: Transmits calls to other stations and initiates commands for
programming and operation.
B. Volume Control: Regulates incoming-call volume.
C. Light Annunciation: Identifies calling stations and stations in use. Light remains on un-
til call is answered.
D. Tone Annunciation: Momentary audible tone signal announces incoming calls.
E. Speaker Microphone: Transmits and receives calls.
1. Minimum Speaker Sensitivity: TIA/EIA SE-103 pressure rating of 40 dB.
F. Handset with Hook Switch: Telephone type with 18-inch- (450-mm-) long, permanently
coiled cord. Arrange to disconnect speaker when handset is lifted.
G. Reset Control: Cancels call and resets system for next call.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16722-4 05/13/05
!�"' 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 50.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted speaker microphones with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by theirs, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dukane Corporation; Communications Systems Div.
2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF MICROPROCESSOR-SWITCHED SYSTEMS
A. Station Selection: Capable of the following:
1. Communicating selectively with other master and speaker-microphone stations by
dialing station's number on a 12-digit keypad.
2. Communicating simultaneously with all other stations by dialing a designated
number on a 12-digit keypad.
3. Communicating with individual stations in privacy.
4. Including other master-station connections in a multiple-station conference call.
5. Accessing separate paging speakers or groups of paging speakers by dialing desig-
nated numbers on a 12-digit keypad.
6. Overriding any conversation by a designated master station.
7. Displaying selected station.
B. Speaker-Microphone Station: Capable of the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16722-3 05/13/05
C. Cabling diagram showing cable routing. ""'k
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that central con-
trol cabinets, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Divi-
sion 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For intercommunication equipment to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 2 hours' normal travel time from In-
staller's place of business to Project site.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capabil-
ity to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Elec-
trical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as de-
fined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16722-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16722 - INTERCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes direct-connected, manually switched, voice intercommunication
equipment independent of telephone equipment.
B. This Section includes user-programmable, multichannel, microprocessor-switched, cen-
trally controlled voice intercommunication equipment, capable of expansion of up to 100
stations; independent of telephone equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Master stations.
2. Speaker-microphone stations.
3. Call-switch units.
4. All-call amplifier.
5. Intercommunication amplifier.
6. Paging amplifier.
7. Loudspeakers/speaker microphones.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints for
central control cabinets.
2. Equipment Details: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location of each
field connection.
3. Master-Station Details: Scaled drawings for built-in equipment.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:
a. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
b. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Intercommunication Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16722-1 05/13/05
A. Scope of Work: "
1. Perform demonstration of the Isolated Power Panels and Systems, and instruct staff
as follows:
a. Demonstrate the test functions of the L.I.M.
b. Instruct facility maintenance and medical staff on correct operation and rou-
tine testing of the Isolated Power Panels and Systems.
C. Instruct the facility maintenance staff on the proper use of the test equip-
ment.
d. Demonstrated the proper method of recording data gathered from the testing
of the system in the log book.
e. Furnish a log book with the factory technician's readings gathered during the
initial testing of the system.
f. Furnish three (3) sets of Operation and Maintenance manuals to the facility
maintenance staff. These manuals shall include written instruction on the
care and maintenance of the system, replacement part list, and certified "as
built" drawings of the material furnished for this facility.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Isolated Power Systems and Accessories
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16630-6 05/13/05
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install backboxes and frame supports and/or mountings of size and type rec-
ommended by manufacturer's representative to suit assembly and location shown on
Drawings.
B. Provide interconnecting wire and cable between components or modules as specified and
recommended by the manufacturer's representative.
1. Install power conductors, in conduit, from the laser isolated power panel serving
the area to the laser receptacle/hazard indicator modules installed in the rooms.
Power conductor insulation shall be cross-link polyethylene, with a dielectric con-
stant of 3.5 or Iess.
2. Install hazard indicator wiring, in conduit, from the hazard alarm indicator in the
module to the terminal strip provided in the x-ray isolated power panel.
C. Make conduit runs direct to limit conductor length. Horizontal runs in walls and point-
to-point runs in ceilings are permitted.
D. Pull wire without the use of lubricants.
E. Ground isolation transformer electrostatic shield to room equipotential ground bus.
F. Install ground conductor, in conduit, from the ground lug on each laser receptacle to the
reference ground bus in the x-ray isolated power panel. Run each ground conductor di-
rectly back to the reference ground bus.
3.2 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
A. Scope of Work:
1. Provide manufacturer's engineer or technician for final testing of Isolated Power
Panels and the related system as follows:
a. Simulate various combinations and types of faults at each receptacle to ascer-
tain correct function of L.I.M.
b. Check calibration of L.I.M. meter and record readings.
C. Record and date all data in permanent log book.
d. Certify that the system is properly installed and in correct working order.
e. The factory representative shall turn over to the facility maintenance de-
partment a set of test equipment consisting of a ground integrity tester, cur-
rent leakage tester, and plug-in L.I.M. tester.
3.3 STAFF INSTRUCTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Isolated Power Systems and Accessories
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16630-5 05/13/05
f. Provide an audible alarm which shall sound in the event of a hazardous con-
dition.
g. Provide a set of indicating lights to visually indicate the status of the system.
Green shall indicate "safe," red shall indicate "hazard," and amber to indi-
cate that the audible alarm feature is in the "mute" anode. All test switches
shall be flush with the face of the L.I.M.
h. Provide a test switch on the face of the L.I.M. so that the functions of the
unit can be tested by hospital personnel. It shall not be possible to leave the
test switch in the "test" position. The test switch shall be flush with the face
of the L.I.M.
i. Provide terminals within the Isolated Power Panel for connection of a modu-
lar remote indicator of the L.I.M. functions.
3. Primary Circuit Breaker:
a. Sized in accordance with NFPA 70-1990(NEC), NFPA 99-1990, and UL-
1047 standards, based on the primary voltage as shown on the contract
documents.
b. Full size, thermal magnetic type, with AIC as shown on the contract draw-
ings.
4. Secondary Branch Breakers:
a. 20 amp, 2 pole in accordance with NFPA 70-1990(NEC), NFPA 99-1990,
and UL-1047 standards.
b. Full size, thermal magnetic type, 10,000 AIC.
C. Provide each panel with quantity as required per the contract documents.
5. Reference Grounding Bus:
a. Grounding bus shall contain a minimum of one (1) #1/0 and eighteen (18)
#14 to#6 grounding lugs.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering prod-
ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:
1. Cutler Hammer
2. Hospital Systems, Inc.
3. Isotrol Systems
4. Square D
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Isolated Power Systems and Accessories
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16630-4 05/13/05
door shall contain a flush lock, all panels shall be keyed alike. Faceplate
shall contain a cut-out for the L.I.M., which shall remain visible at all times.
Faceplate shall also contain a cut out for the receptacle and ground jack sec-
tion. The faceplate for recessed units shall overlap the enclosure by a mini-
mum of 1" on all sides. Faceplate for surface units shall exactly match the
dimensions of the backbox. The faceplate shall be attached to the backbox
by means of 8 #10-32 x 1" stainless steel screws.
B. Components
1. Isolation Transformer:
a. Single phase, 60 Hz with primary and secondary voltages as indicated on the
contract drawings.
b. Use class H rated insulation in manufacture of transformer.
C. Wind with electrostatic shield between primary and secondary windings, and
ground to enclosure.
d. Design electrostatic shield so that it will prevent direct shorting of primary
winding to secondary winding, and reduce coupling of harmonic distortions
between primary circuit and secondary circuits.
e. Core: stacked design, securely clamped and bolted.
f. Core and coil shall be vacuum impregnated, with final wrap of insulating
material.
g. Internally isolate core and coils from enclosure by means of suitable vibra-
tion dampening system.
h. Total leakage current to ground from transformer secondary winding shall
be in compliance with UL-1047, tables 30.1 and 30.2
i. Maximum sound level of transformer: 25 dB.
j. Limit temperature rise to 55 degree C above ambient under full load condi-
tions.
k. Transformer shall be U.L. listed, or recognized as a component, at the volt-
ages, amperages, and KVA ratings required.
2. Line Isolation Monitor:
a. The L.I.M. shall be a solid state modular assembly which utilizes the dy-
namic principal of constantly monitoring both sides of the line to ground.
b. Monitoring shall be accomplished electronically, without mechanical devices,
and shall provide visual and audible indication from a first fault condition.
C. The L.I.M. shall be capable of detecting all combinations of capacitive and
resistive faults, including balanced, unbalanced, and hybrid.
d. The total hazard index shall be set at the factory to either 2 mA or 5 mA,
and shall be field adjustable to either milliamp level by toggling a dip switch
located within the modular L.I.M. assembly.
e. Provide a continuous reading meter (digital or analog). The meter shall be
flush with the face of the L.I.M.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Isolated Power Systems and Accessories
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16630-3 05/13/05
C. Submit isolated power systems test reports.
D. Submit evidence of UL labeling on Shop Drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 1047 - Isolated Power System Distribution
Equipment
2. Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 1022 - Line Isolation Monitor
3. Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 50
4. NEC - Article 517
5. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities
B. Construction Standards:
I. Isolation Panel shall be UL listed and labeled as an assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ISOLATED POWER PANELS
A. Enclosure
1. Backbox:
a. Shall be recessed mounted as indicated on the contract documents. Recessed
units shall be fabricated from 14 GA galvanized sheet steel. Maximum di-
mension of the backbox shall be 24" wide, 41" high and 12" deep.
2. Backplate:
a. Shall be fabricated from 12 GA galvanized sheet steel. The backplate shall
provide a mounting surface for the isolated power center components. The
backplate shall be mounted to the backbox by means of four 1/4" - 20 x
1.5" welded studs.
3. Faceplate:
a. Shall be fabricated from 14 GA #304 Stainless Steel, #4 brushed finish.
Faceplate shall contain a flush door covering the circuit breaker section. The
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Isolated Power Systems and Accessories
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16630-2 05/13/05
09"k
SECTION 16630 - ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes isolated power systems and associated auxiliary equipment which
include the following:
1. Surgical facility isolated power panels.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section 16010 "Basic Electrical Requirements"
m" 2. Division 16 Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"
3. Division 16 Section 16452 "Grounding"
4. Division 16 Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables"
5. Division 16 Section 16140 "Wiring Devices"
6. Division 16 Section 16195 "Electrical Identification"
7. Division 16 Section 16470 "Panelboards"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit pertinent descriptive catalog literature, specifications, and wiring diagrams. In-
clude dimensional data and complete raceway and wiring diagrams for each assembly
device.
B. Shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Overcurrent protection device schedule.
2. Dimensional data.
3. Transformer data.
4. L.I.M. details and data.
5. Manufacturer's current product specifications.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Isolated Power Systems and Accessories
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16630-1 05/13/05
A. Install lamps in each fixture.
B. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing lumi-
naires and energizing circuits with normal power source. Measure light intensities at
night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the
following IESNA testing guide(s):
1. IESNA LM-5.
2. IESNA LM-50.
3. IESNA LM-52.
4. IESNA LM-64.
5. IESNA LM-72.
C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating
and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demon-
strate compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 16521
" Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16521-9 05/13/05
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Clean-
ing," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint
bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill
scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/MACE
No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Interior Surfaces: Apply one coat of bituminous paint on interior of pole, or oth-
erwise treat to prevent corrosion.
3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats
of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
D. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal
Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for apply-
ing and designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32);
buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat
wax.
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class 1,
clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium
satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or
thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
S. Gold Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A43 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemi-
cal Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
impregnated color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of a qualified, independent testing and inspecting agency to factory test
luminaires with ballasts and lamps; certify results for isofootcandle curves, zonal lumen,
average and minimum ratios, and electrical and energy-efficiency data for ballasts.
B. Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for isofootcandle curves,
zonal lumen, average and minimum ratios, and electrical and energy-efficiency data for
ballasts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Alaftk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 16521-8 05/13/05
b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.
2. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 40 deg C.
3. Open-circuit operation will not reduce average life.
2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 35 K, average rated
life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum).
3. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum).
4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 780 initial lumens (minimum
5. T4, Double Twin Tube: Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
6. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
7. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 32 W, 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
S. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 42 W, 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
9. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 50 W, 4000 initial lumens (minimum).
10. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 57 W, 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
11. T5, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 55 W, 4800 initial lumens (minimum).
2.8 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS
A. High-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage and burning position as sched-
uled, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900[, and average rated life of 24,000
hours.
B. Low-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.41.
C. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled,
CRI 65 (minimum), and color temperature 4000.
2.9 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Field Painting Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested lumi-
naire before shipping. Where indicated, match process and color of pole or support
materials specified in Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards."
C. Factory-Painted Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16521-7 05/13/05
3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations.
B. Ballasts for compact lamps shall be suitable for cold-weather starting and shall include
the following:
1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
2. Ballast-Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum.
3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations.
4. Type: Programmed Start.
5. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
6. Ballast factor: Greater than .93 for 13 watt through 42 watt T4 and T5 diameter
lamps.
7. Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
S. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
9. Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 65 kHz or higher.
10. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
11. Ballast have a minimum starting temperature of—18C (OF) for primary lamps.
12. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T4 and T5 diameter lamps.
2.6 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Type: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-
lamp ballasts.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
4. Open-circuit operation will not reduce average life.
5. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and cur-
rent ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp on when fix-
ture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Automatically
turns quartz lamp off when high-intensity-discharge lamp reaches approximately 60 per-
cent light output.
C. High-Pressure-Sodium Ballasts: Solid-state igniter/starter with an average life in pulsing
mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Instant Restrike Device: Solid-state potted module, mounted inside high-pressure-
sodium fixture and compatible with high-pressure-sodium lamps, ballasts, and
sockets up to 150 W.
a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16521-6 05/13/05
4) U.L. wet location listed.
5) Final finish of fixture to be approved in writing by architect and light-
ing designer.
6) Provide 20 ft. pole, as specified.
7) Fixture shall be furnished with Pulse Start lamps and ballast.
B. Bollards
1. Fixture Type: B1A: compact fluorescent, square, bronze bollard walkway lumi-
naire.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Hubbell — BMS-100H-81-SQUARE-BRONZE
2) McGraw Edison— BSC-42-100-MH-MT-BZ
3) Lithonia — KS8 100M R5 TB
b. Mounting: Pole
C. Voltage: Multi-Tap
d. Lamps: 1-10OMH
e. Other Requirements:
1) Refer to civil and landscape site plans for final pole/fixture locations.
2) U.L. wet location listed.
2.4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. UL 773 or UL 773A listed, factory mounted to the luminaire.
B. Contact Relays: Single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn
light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx) with 15-
second minimum time delay. Contacts shall have directional lens in front of photocell to
prevent fixed light sources to cause turnoff.
1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10.
2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.
2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Ballasts shall be suitable for low-temperature environments.
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic or electromag-
netic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting temperature.
2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic
type designed for use with high-output lamps.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16521-5 05/13/05
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or -10%
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage snider
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed
to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling acciden-
tally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be renwv-
able for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to
heat, and UV radiation.
1. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indi-
cated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
J. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
J. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
2.3 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Pole Mount
1. Fixture Type: H1A: metal halide pole mount single head, bronze die-cast alumi-
num housing with type 3 distribution mounted on 20 ft square straight aluminum
pole.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Hubbell—MSQ-A-400H-HP-8-1-. Pole: SAP-4206-A-2
2) McGraw Edison— CLM-AM-400-MP-MT-3F-FG-BZ
3) Lithonia —KSF2 400M R3 TB SP04
b. Mounting: Pole
C. Voltage: Multi-Tap
d. Lamps: 1-400MH BT28
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by landscape architects detail.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Refer to civil and landscape site plans for final pole/fixture locations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16521-4 05/13/05
b. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months
from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail
within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of
each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
J. Ballasts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 5 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL
A. Complying with UL 1598 and listed for installation in wet locations.
B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated
for luminaires.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16521-3 05/13/05
C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Coordination Drawings: Mounting and connection details, drawn to scale, for exterior
luminaires with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Stan-
dards."
E. Source quality-control test reports.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. FMG Compliance: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indi-
cated class and division of hazard by FMG.
C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate exterior luminaires with mounting and wind load requirements in Division 2
Section "Lighting Poles and Standards."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace luminaires or components of luminaires and lamps that fail in materials or
workmanship; corrode; or fade, stain, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radia-
tion within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail
damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty
coverage.
1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
a. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16521-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts, but not mounted on exterior surfaces
of buildings.
2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric switches.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and other support
structures and for requirements of resistance to wind loads.
2. Division 16 Section "Interior and Specialty Lighting" for exterior luminaires nor-
mally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.
3. Section 01300 "Submittals and Substitutions".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, arranged in the order of lighting unit designation. In-
clude data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated
parameters.
2. Luminaire dimensions, effective projected area, details of attaching luminaires, ac-
cessories, and installation and construction details.
3. Luminaire materials.
4. Photoelectric relays.
S. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
6. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge lamps.
7. Electrical and energy-efficiency data for ballasts.
B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufac-
turer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Exterior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16521-1 05/13/05
3. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fix-
ture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
4. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least
two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
5. Install at least two independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on
lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture
at a safety factor of 3.
C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to ]unit
swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing of rod
for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.
D. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
4.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
4.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating
and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demon-
strate compliance with standards.
D. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of cor-
rosion.
END OF SECTION 16512
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16512-15 05/13/05
3:6 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 1.6 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel-
and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/z-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to
mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Wires For Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed
stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel
rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped
with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
H. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended
by fixture manufacturer.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects.
2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fix-
ture.
B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings:
1. Units may not be supported from suspended ceiling support system.
2. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-14 05/13/05
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test,
and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches
(1220 MM) 2950 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature of
41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 25 W maximum, nominal length of 36 inches
(915 MM) 2225 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of
41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
D. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 1.7 W maximum, nominal length of 24
inches610 mm, 1400 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature
of 41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
E. TS rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches
1220 mm, 2600 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature of
41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
F. T5 rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 21 W maximum, nominal length of 36 inches
915 mm, 1890 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature of 41
K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
G. T5 high output, rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of
48 inches 1220 mm, 4400 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color tem-
perature of 41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
H. T5 high output, rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 39 W maximum, nominal length of
36 inches 915 mm, 3080 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color tem-
perature of 41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 41 K, average rated
life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum).
3. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum).
4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 780 initial lumens (minimum
5. T4, Double Twin Tube: Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
6. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
7. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 32 W, 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
8. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 42 W, 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
9. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 50 W, 4000 initial lumens (minimum).
10. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 57 W, 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
11. T5, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 55 W,4800 initial lumens (minimum).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-13 05/13/05
10. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations.
11. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations
on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
F. Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum.
3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations.
4. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations
on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
C. Ballasts for dimmer-controlled fixtures shall comply with general and fixture-related re-
quirements above for electronic ballasts and the following features:
1. Dimming Range: 100 to 3 percent of rated lamp lumens for T8 and Compact
Fluorescent lamps. 100 to 1 percent of rated lamp lumens for T5 high output
lamps
2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
3. Ballast shall have a power factor > 98% at full light output, and > 90% through-
out the dimming range.
4. Ballast shall ignite the lamps at any light output setting selected without first hav-
ing to go to full light output.
5. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of 10C (50F) for primary lamp.
6. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming system in-
dicated. Wall dimmer switch shall be compatible with ballast.
7. Ballast input current shall have total harmonic distortion of less than 10% when
operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp.
H. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 deg F (Minus 17 deg C) and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic
type rated for 0 deg Fminus 17 deg C starting temperature.
2. Temperatures Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type
designed for use with high-output lamps.
3. Temperatures Minus 25 Deg F (Minus 30 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type de-
signed for use with compact fluorescent lamps.
I. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR,
Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency in-
terference for consumer equipment.
3.5 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-12 05/13/05
C. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include, the following features, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Comply with ANSI C82.11.
2. Ballast Type: As indicated in schedule.
3. Programmed Start: Ballasts shall operate as a series or series parallel circuit with
two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started lamps.
4. Instant Start: Multiple lamp parallel circuit ballasts shall maintain full light output
on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail
5. Sound Rating: A
6. Ballast Factor: Greater than .87
7. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to
ANSI C82.11.
8. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A.
9. Operating Frequency: 40 kHz or higher.
10. Ballast shall operate lamps with no visible flicker (< 3%, flicker index)
11. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of —18C (OF) for standard
T5/HO and T8 lamps.
12. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without reset-
ting power.
13. Ballasts shall not have any PCB"s (Polychlorinated Biphenyl)
14. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
1S. Provide lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
16. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations
on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
D. Electromagnetic ballasts for linear lamps shall have the following features, unless other-
wise indicated:
1. Comply with NEMA C82.1.
2. Type: Energy-saving, high power factor, Class P, automatic-reset thermal protec-
tion.
3. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
4. Provide lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for TS diameter lamps.
E. Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Type: Programmed Start.
2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
3. Ballast factor: Greater than .93 for 13 watt through 42 watt T4 and T5 diameter
lamps.
4. Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
S. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
6. Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 65 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
8. Ballast have a minimum starting temperature of—18C (OF) for primary lamps.
9. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T4 and T5 diameter lamps.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16512-11 05/13/05
I) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling elan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
5) Fixture finish to be approved and selected by architect.
6) Fixture shall be egiupped with built in shut-off switch that will kill
power to the receptacle feeding the patient bed , in the event that an
I.V. pole or other obstacles comes in contact with the fixture.
3. SWD: Decorative compact fluorescent wall sconce.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Scott—53260-2C13E-BA-277
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-CFQ13WG24D/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed in the specifications. Contractor is respon-
sible for final fixture coordination.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
3.4 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Advance
2. Lutron
3. Universal
4. Sylvania
B. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-10 05/13/05
1) Louis Poulsen —AJC 18.1" 3/26W/CF G24Q-3 120/277 CHR
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 3-CFQ26W/G24Q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
B. Wall Mounted
I. SWB: Recessed hole in the wall (16 1/a" x 8") light niche for drywall installation.
Fixture is constructed of fiberglass reinforced composite plaster housing.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Engineered Lighting Products — 140-BX-HITW-277-ML-LEX
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-FT40W/2G11/RS/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with wall type in-
dicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
2. SWC: 4' fluorescent patient bed light fixture with direct reading and indirect am-
bient light. Fixture shall also be equipped charting light and low voltage relay for
interface with patient pillow controller.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco—HZ4T8 22 CC/277/NL-INC LESS SWITCH/LVC
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-up-F32T8/841 and 2-down-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16512-9 05/13/05
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Louis Poulsen — AJC-6.3 1/13W/CFGX24Q-1 "120-277 CHR SEMI
RECESSED
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFQ13W/GX24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is respornsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
3. Fixture SRC: 2' round fluorescent recessed concave white acrylic dome fixture
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prudential—P8920 (2) 40BX CWA-TMW SC 277 X3B 10THD
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-FT40W/2G11/RS/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) All fluorescent light fixtures to be equipped with electronic ballasts,
unless otherwise noted. refer to specifications.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body.
6) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
7) Fixture shall compliment fixture type "SRA" in appearance and manu-
facturer.
4. SRD: 18" round semi recessed downlight with white opal glass decorative dif-
fuser
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' — 2323 16512-8 05/13/05
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different
thickness is scheduled.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. Downlights
1. Fixture SRA: 5' round fluorescent recessed concave white acrylic dome fixture
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prudential —P-8950 (8) T8 CWA-TMW DC 120/277 X3B 10THD
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 8-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) All fluorescent light fixtures to be equipped with electronic ballasts,
unless otherwise noted. refer to specifications.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
6) Fixture shall be furnished with (4) ballasts. Lamp and ballast shall be
arranged to control every other lamp. (4) lamps shall be non-switched
and connected to life safety branch circuit. The other (4) lamps shall
be switched and connected to normal branch circuit.
2. SRB: 6" semi recessed fluorescent downlight with white opal glass diffuser and
chrome trim.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-7 05/13/05
J. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: A component of fixture assembly. Suppress con-
ducted electromagnetic-interference as required by MIL-STD-461D. Fabricate lighting
fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified. Substitutions will not be accepted.
3.2 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fix-
tures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A. Aftk
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to pre-
vent warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed
to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling acciden-
tally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indi-
cated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-6 05/13/05
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fix-
tures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to pre-
vent warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed
to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling acciden-
tally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indi-
cated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different
thickness is scheduled.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16512-5 05/13/05
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equip-
ment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which bal-
last manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Coiu-
pletion.
2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substan-
tial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's
standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace
lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 2 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 2 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Fur-
nish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Deco Globes, Glass Pendants and Sconce Diffusers: 1 for every 15 of each type
and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
5. Diffuser softening lens for MR16 lamps: 1 for every 5 of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-4 05/13/05
H. Field quality-control test reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Divi-
sion 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" include the following:
1. Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in
that fixture.
J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency; with the experience and capa-
bility to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capa-
bility to conduct the testing indicted, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory
(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Mockups: Provide lighting fixtures for room or module mockups. Install fixtures for
mockups with power and control connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undis-
turbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 COORDINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16512-3 05/13/05
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated
parameters.
2. Lamps.
3. Fluorescent ballasts.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input
from installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which lighting-fixture suspension systems will be attached.
3. Other items in finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Air outlets and inlets.
b. Speakers.
C. Sprinklers.
d. Access panels.
e. Track Lighting.
f. Smoke detectors.
g. Nurse Call dome lights.
E. Samples for Verification: For interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission
in the Specialty Lighting Fixture Schedule.
1. Fixture Type: "SWB"
2. Fixture Type: "SWC"
3. Fixture Type: "SWD"
4. Fixture Type: "SRA"
5. Fixture Type: "SRB"
6. Fixture Type: "SRC"
7. Fixture Type: "SRD"
F. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by
product manufacturer.
G. Source quality-control test reports.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16512-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16512 — SPECIALTY INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps arid'ballasts.
2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
3. Accessories, including low voltage power supply transformers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for fluores-
cent lamps.
2. Section 01300 "Submittals and Substitutions".
3. Section 01430 "Mock-Ups".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast factor. Ratio of light output of a given lamp(s) operated by the subject bal-
last to the light output of the same lamp(s) when operated on an ANSI reference circuit.
B. CRI: Color rendering index.
C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D. LER: Luminaire efficiency rating, which is calculated according to NEMA LE 5. This
value can be estimated from photometric data using the following formula:
1. LER is equal to the product of total rated lamp lumens times BF times luminaire ef-
ficiency, divided by input watts.
E. RCR: Room cavity ratio.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Specialty Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16512-1 05/13/05
5. Install at least two independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab Ou
lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture
at a safety factor of 3.
C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit
swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod
for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
d. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.
D. Air-Handling Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal.
D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating
and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demon-
strate compliance with standards.
E. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of cor-
rosion.
END OF SECTION 16511
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-52 05/13/05
2. Occupancy detection indicator.
3. Ultrasonic Sensors: Crystal controlled with circuitry that causes no detection inter-
ference between adjacent sensors.
4. Infrared Sensors: With daylight filter and lens to afford coverage applicable to
space to be controlled.
5. Combination Sensors: Ultrasonic and infrared sensors combined.
2.13 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE RETROFIT MATERIALS
A. Comply with UL [1570] [1598] listing requirements.
I. Reflector Kit: UL [1570] [1598], Type L Suitable for two- to fOtr-lamp, surface-
mounted or recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.
No electrical parts are to be changed.
2. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL [1570] [1598], Type 1I. Suitable for changing
existing ballast, lamps, and sockets as scheduled.
2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of a qualified, independent testing and inspecting agency to factory test
fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric
data.
B. Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and pho-
tometric data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fix-
ture.
B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings:
1. Units may not be supported from suspended ceiling support system.
2. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners.
3. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fix-
ture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
4. Fixtures of Sizes Less-Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least
two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-51 05/13/05
C. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled,
CRI 65 (minimum), and color temperature 4000.
2.10 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel-
and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to
mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, [12 gage (2.68 mm)]
<Insert wire size>.
E. Wires For Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed
stainless steel, [12 gage (2.68 mm)] <Insert wire size>.
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel
rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped Amok'
with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
H. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended
by fixture manufacturer.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects.
2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
2.12 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Occupancy Sensors: Adjustable sensitivity and off delay time range of 5 to 15 minutes.
1. Device Color:
a. Wall Mounted: Ivory.
b. Ceiling Mounted: White.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-50 05/13/05
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 25 W maximum, nominal length of 36 inches
AVW (915 MM) 2225 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of
41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
D. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24
inches610 mm, 1400 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature
of 41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
E. T5 rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches
1220 mm, 2600 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature of
41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
F. T5 rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 21 W maximum, nominal length of 36 inches
915 mm, 1890 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature of 41
K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
G. T5 high output, rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of
48 inches 1220 mm, 4400 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color tem-
perature of 41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
H. T5 high output, rapid-start low pressure lamps, rated 39 W maximum, nominal length of
36 inches 915 mm, 3080 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color tem-
perature of 41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 41 K, average rated
life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum).
3. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum).
4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 780 initial lumens (minimum
5. T4, Double Twin Tube: Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
6. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
7. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 32 W, 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
8. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 42 W, 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
9. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 50 W, 4000 initial lumens (minimum).
10. T4, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 57 W, 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
11. T5, Triple Tube (Amalgam): Rated 55 W, 4800 initial lumens (minimum).
2.9 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS
A. High-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage and burning position as sched-
uled, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 19 K. and average rated life of 24,000
hours.
B. Low-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.41.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-49 05/13/05
2. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated
lamp life.
3. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum of rated
lamp life.
4. Additional Lamps for DC Operation: Two minimum, bayonet-base type, for con-
nection to external de source.
C. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained
power pack.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with special warranty.
2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is re-
stored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically re-
charged and floated on charger.
2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. General: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 10-year nominal
life and special warranty.
2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects
from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage
is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically re-
charged and floated on charger.
4. Wire Guard: Where indicated, heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp
heads or fixtures.
5. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval when power is re-
stored after an outage; time delay permits high-intensity-discharge lamps to restrike
and develop adequate output.
2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test,
and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches
(1220 MM) 2950 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 82 (minimum), color temperature of
41 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-48 05/13/05
�ow 3. Temperatures Minus 25 Deg F (Minus 30 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type de-
signed for use with compact fluorescent lamps.
I. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR,
Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency in-
terference for consumer equipment.
2.5 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Type: Constant-wattage autotrans former or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg FMinus 30 deg C for single-lamp
ballasts.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F40 deg C.
4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp on when fix-
ture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Automatically
turns quartz lamp off when high-intensity-discharge lamp reaches approximately 60 per-
cent light output.
C. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to
minimize audible fixture noise.
D. High-Pressure-Sodium Ballasts: Solid-state igniter/starter with an average life in pulsing
mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Instant Restrike Device: Solid-state potted module, mounted inside high-pressure-
sodium fixture and compatible with high-pressure-sodium lamps, ballasts, and
sockets up to 150 W.
a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac.
b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.
2.6 EXIT SIGNS
A. General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Incandescent, 2 for each fixture, 50,000 hours of rated
lamp life.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-47 05/13/05
I. Type: Programmed Start.
2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
3. Ballast factor: Greater than .93 for 13 watt through 42 watt T4 and T5 diameter
lamps.
4. Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
6. Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 65 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
8. Ballast have a minimum starting temperature of—18C (OF) for primary lamps.
9. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T4 and T5 diameter lamps.
10. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations.
11. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations
on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
F. Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features,
unless otherwise indicated:
I. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum.
3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations.
4. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations
on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
G. Ballasts for dimmer-controlled fixtures shall comply with general and fixture-related re-
quirements above for electronic ballasts and the following features: *'
1. Dimming Range: 100 to 3 percent of rated lamp lumens for T8 and Compact
Fluorescent lamps. 100 to 1 percent of rated lamp lumens for T5 high output
lamps
2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
3. Ballast shall have a power factor > 98% at full light output, and > 90% through-
out the dimming range.
4. Ballast shall ignite the lamps at any light output setting selected without first hav-
ing to go to full light output.
S. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of 10C (50F) for primary lamp.
6. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming system in-
dicated. Wall dimmer switch shall be compatible with ballast.
7. Ballast input current shall have total harmonic distortion of less than 10% when
operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp.
H. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
I. Temperatures 0 deg F (Minus 17 deg C) and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic
type rated for 0 deg Fminus 17 deg C starting temperature.
2. Temperatures Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type
designed for use with high-output lamps.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-46 05/13/05
1. Advance
2. Lutron
3. Universal
4. Sylvania
5. AC Electronics
B. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
C. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Comply with ANSI C82.11.
2. Ballast Type: As indicated in schedule.
3. Programmed Start: Ballasts shall operate as a series or series parallel circuit with
two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started lamps.
4. Instant Start: Multiple lamp parallel circuit ballasts shall maintain full light output
on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail
5. Sound Rating: A
6. Ballast Factor: Greater than .87
7. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to
ANSI C82.11.
8. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A.
9. Operating Frequency: 40 kHz or higher.
10. Ballast shall operate lamps with no visible flicker (< 3% flicker index)
11. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of —18C (OF) for standard
T5/HO and T8 lamps.
12. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without reset-
ting power.
13. Ballasts shall not have any PCB"s (Polychlorinated Biphenyl)
14. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
15. Provide lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
16. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations
on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
D. Electromagnetic ballasts for linear lamps shall have the following features, unless other-
wise indicated:
1. Comply with NEMA C82.1.
2. Type: Energy-saving, high power factor; Class P, automatic-reset thermal protec-
tion.
3. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
4. Provide lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
E. Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless
otherwise indicated:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 1651145 05/13/05
with high efficiency acrylic optical lens. Each fixture is furnished with a 120 volt
remote power driver.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) IO Lighting— I0-2.0-01-5G-100-1-22'-1-1
2) Ardee — CLM-22-C-SA (Approved Equal)
3) Color Kinetics — I-COLOR ACCENT, 101-000008-01 (Approved
Equal)
b. Mounting: Surface
C. Voltage: 120
d. Lamps: 32K White L.E.D..
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan and or
architectural exterior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Ingress protection: IP66.
Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.31.
6. Fixture Type: H5F: 1'-6" x 2" low voltage adjustable linear floodlight with
white L.E.D. light source. Fixture housing is constructed from heavy-duty alumi-
num with high efficiency acrylic optical lens. Each fixture is furnished with a 120
volt remote power driver.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) IO Lighting—I0-2.0-01-5G-100-1-01-1-I
2) Ardee — CLM-1'-6"-C-SA (Approved Equal)
3) Color Kinetics — I-COLOR ACCENT, 101-000008-01 (Approved
Equal)
b. Mounting: Surface
C. Voltage: 120
d. Lamps: 32K White L.E.D..
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan and or
architectural exterior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Ingress protection: IP66.
4) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
2.4 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-44 05/13/05
Fixture Type: HSC: 9' x 2" low voltage adjustable linear floodlight with white
L.E.D. light source. Fixture housing is constructed from heavy-duty aluminum
with high efficiency acrylic optical lens. Each fixture is furnished with a 120 volt
remote power driver.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) IO Lighting—10-2.0-01-90-100-1-10'-4"'-1-1
2) Ardee— CLM-10'-4"-C-SA (Approved Equal)
3) Color Kinetics — I-COLOR ACCENT, 101-000008-01 (Approved
Equal)
b. Mounting: Surface
C. Voltage: 120
d. Lamps: 32K White L.E.D..
C. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan and or
architectural exterior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Ingress protection: IP66.
4) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.31.
4. Fixture Type: HSD: 4'-6" x 2" low voltage adjustable linear floodlight with
white L.E.D. light source. Fixture housing is constructed from heavy-duty alumi-
num with high efficiency acrylic optical lens. Each fixture is furnished with a 120
volt remote power driver.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) IO Lighting—IO-2.0-01-SG-100-1-4'-6"'-1-I
2) Ardee— CLM-4'-6"-C-SA (Approved Equal)
3) Color Kinetics — I-COLOR ACCENT, 101-000008-01 (Approved
Equal)
b. Mounting: Surface
C. Voltage: 120
d. Lamps: 32K White L.E.D..
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan and or
architectural exterior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Ingress protection: IP66.
4) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
S. Fixture Type: HSE: 22' x 2" low voltage adjustable linear floodlight with white
L.E.D. light source. Fixture housing is constructed from heavy-duty aluminum
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-43 05/13/05
1. Fixture Type: HSA: 63' x 2" low voltage adjustable linear floodlight with white
L.E.D. light source. Fixture housing is constructed from heavy-duty aluminum
with high efficiency acrylic optical lens. Each fixture is furnished with a 120 volt
remote power driver.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) IO Lighting—I0-2.0-01-5G-100-1-63'-1-I
2) Ardee— CLM-63-C-SA (Approved Equal)
3) Color Kinetics — I-COLOR ACCENT, 101-000008-01 (Approved
Equal)
b. Mounting: Surface
C. Voltage: 120
Cl. Lamps: 32K White L.E.D..
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan and or
architectural exterior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) U.L. wet location listed.
4) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
2. Fixture Type: HSB: 22'-6" x 2" low voltage adjustable linear floodlight with
white L.E.D. light source. Fixture housing is constructed from heavy-duty alumi-
num with high efficiency acrylic optical lens. Each fixture is furnished with a 120
volt remote power driver.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) IO Lighting—I0-2.0-01-90-100-1-22'-6"'-1-I
2) Ardee— CLM-22'-6"-C-SA (Approved Equal)
3) Color Kinetics — I-COLOR ACCENT, 101-000008-01 (Approved
Equal)
b. Mounting: Surface
C. Voltage: 120
d. Lamps: 32K White L.E.D..
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan and or
architectural exterior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Ingress protection: IP66.
4) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-42 05/13/05
d. Lamps: None
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 131.
3. E3A: Remote DC Lighting Heads-Recessed round Gimball Fixture with adjust-
able rotating lamp
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
I) Dual —EXT-122-EM-K
2) Sure-Lites— GFR-29-45
3) Lithonia — ELA RG PAR36 SB
b. Voltage: 12
C. Mounting: Ceiling
d. Lamps: 12W-Halogen BI-PIN
e. Other Requirements:
1) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
2) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
W. Exterior Wall Mount
1. Fixture Type: W2K: Exterior metal halide wall luminaries (12" x 12") with ano-
dized aluminum reflector and tempered glass behind die cast aluminum louvers.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Bega —2457P 120/277
2) Allscape— BL89-42CFT-277-OP-BK
3) Approved Equal
b. Mounting: Wall
C. Voltage: 120/277
d. Lamps: 1-CFTR42W/GX24Q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan and or
architectural interior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) U.L. wet location listed.
4) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
X. Exterior Surface
* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-41 05/13/05
4. Ell): Edge lit exit sign-dual face
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Dual — LECDR''"A
2) Sure-Lites— ELX-6-2-00-WH-RW277-C
3) Lithonia —EDG 2 R 120/277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Ceiling
d. Lamps: L.E.D
e. Other Requirements:
I Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Number of faces, directional arrows, and mounting as indicated on
floor plans.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation, with correct number
of chevrons where required.
V. Emergency Battery Fixtures
1. E2B: 12 volt lead calcium battery with dual lighting heads.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Dual —LM40-12V
2) Sure-Lites—XR12206-29-19-SD
3) Lithonia —ELM4 SSB SD
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-18W PAR36
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
2. E2D: 12 volt DC maintenance free lead calcium emergency battery unit.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Dual —AS180-12V
2) Sure-Lites—HR-12400-V-A
3) Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Wall
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-40 05/13/05
2) Sure-Lites — CCX-6I-RWH-7
3) Lithonia —LQM S W 1 R 120/277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Ceiling
d. Lamps: L.E.D
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Number of faces, directional arrows, and mounting as indicated on
floor plans.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
2. El B: Exit sign-dual face, polycarbonate housing
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Dual — LXURW
2) Sure-Lites— CCX-62-RWH-7
3) Lithonia — LQM S W 3 R 120/277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Ceiling
d. Lamps: L.E.D
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Number of faces, directional arrows, and mounting as indicated on
floor plans.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3. E1C: Edge lit exit sign-single face
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Dual —LECSR**A
2) Sure-Lites —ELX-6-1-00- R-C
3) Lithonia —EDG 1 R 120/277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Ceiling
d. Lamps: L.E.D
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Number of faces, directional arrows, and mounting as indicated on
floor plans.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation, with correct number
of chevrons where required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-39 05/13/05
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Hubbell —NVQB184GG
2) ADRA— AWP-NM-26PL-G-277V
3) Caplet— GFW F26 H1 G GSC
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 1-CFTR26W/GX24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Moulting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
2. W1J: Decorative compact fluorescent wall sconce.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Scott—SC3486-1CF39-FINISH-BTL
2) Advent—AJW1132-2F13-120/277-BAL-SBA
3) Visa —CB3552 2LF13 BA MOD19"H MOD ROLL BARS A"Nk
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-CFQ13W/G24D/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
U. Exit Signs
1. E1A: Exit sign-single face, polycarbonate housing
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Dual—LXSRW
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-38 05/13/05
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Scott - S7020-BA
2) Advent— AIC1060-2F26-BAL-120/277
3) Visa —CP6132-2-2QF26-BA-XX
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 2-CFQ26W/GX24Q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed start electronic ballasts, un-
less otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluorescent lamp
ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
3. RNC: 18" Diameter ceiling mounted downlight with opal acrylic diffuser and
brushed aluminum trim.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Scott - S7020-BA
2) Advent—AIC1060-3F18-BAL-120/277
3) Visa —CP6132-2QF18-BA-XX
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 3-CFQ18W/GX24Q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed start electronic ballasts, un-
less otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluorescent lamp
ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
S) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
T. Fluorescent Wall / Sconces
1. W1A: Enclosed and gasketed wall mounted compact fluorescent with glass globe
and guard.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-37 05/13/05
2) Portfolio — PD6 H126E 6HC
3) Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFTR26W/GX24q/841
C. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
S. Semi Recessed Downlights
1. RNA: Shower light with Fresnel lens
lowk
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prescolite—LFFQ-H8-26EB-8FFR-TRG-TLG
2) Halo—H803120/277-803P
3) Gotham— LGF 2/26DTT 7RW FFL 277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-CFQ26W/G24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5) U.L. wet location listed.
2. RNB: 18" Diameter ceiling mounted downlight with opal acrylic diffuser and
brushed aluminum trim.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 16511-36 05/13/05
1) Prescolite— LFHL-V9-70MH-70MHFE-8SRFR-B24
2) Kirlin — RR50820-43-58-FR
3) Gotham - LGH 70M 7RW FFL 277
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-70W/E17/E26MED/3K/Pulse Start
e. Other. Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Provide pulse start high reactance auto-transformer ballast. Refer to
specification section (High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts)
2. RKF: 8" diameter metal halide downlight with fresnel lens and quartz re-strike
standby lamp
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prescolite— LFHL-V9-70MH-QR-70MHFE-8SRFR-B24
2) Kirlin — RR50820-43-58-65-FR
3) Gotham - LGH 70M 7RW FFL 277 QRS
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-70W/E17/E26MED/3K/Pulse Start
e. Lamps: 1-100T4/GY6.35
f. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3) Provide pulse start high reactance auto-transformer ballast. Refer to
specification section (High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts).
4) Factory installed relay, lamp and socket for immediate illumination for
momentary loss of power. Quartz lamp remains on until metal halide
lamp restrikes.
R. Small Aperture Downlights
1. RMF: 5" open fluorescent downlight with horizontal lamp
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Edison Price—TRPH 12615 120/277 COL
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-35 05/13/05
2) Portfolio— C6226-E-6251-LI-HB26 10041k,
3) Gotham—AF-2/26 DTT-6AR-LD-GEB10RS-BH24
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-CFQ26W/GX24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed start electronic ballasts, un-
less otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluorescent lamp
ballast's).
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cults.
P. Incandescent Downlights
1. RJF: 10" Incandescent lensed downlight with regressed prismatic lens with dou-
ble gasketing.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Atlantic—A10500IN-A10521CL
2) Kirlin—RR20917-45-46
3) Gotham—LG 12 200PS23 RW FFL
b. Voltage: 120
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-200W/PS23IF/MED
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
Q. HID Downlights
1. RKE: 8" diameter metal halide downlight with fresnel lens
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-34 05/13/05
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prescolite— CFT832HEB-STF802HMF-B24
2) Portfolio— C7132-E-7151-LI-HB26
3) Gotham — AF 1/32TRT 8AR LD MVOLT GEBIORS BH24
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFTR32W/GX24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed start electronic ballasts, un-
less otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluorescent lamp
ballast's).
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
4. RGG: 6" diameter compact fluorescent open wall washer
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
., 1) Prescolite— CFT632HEB-STF602HWW-B24
2) Portfolio— C6132-E-6111-LI-HB26
3) Gotham—AFW 1/32TRT 6AR LD MVOLT GEB10 BH24
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFTR32W/GX24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5. RHJ: 6" diameter compact fluorescent open downlight with 2-horizontal lamps
and wide beam distribution
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prescolite — CFR626EB-ST372A-B24
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-33 05/13/05
O. Fluorescent Downlights
J. RAA: 8" diameter compact fluorescent prismatic lensed downlight
a. Nlanufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prescolite— CFT832HEB-STF802HMF-SL-B24
2) Portfolio— C7142-E-7181-LI-1-HB26
3) Gotham —AF 1/42TRT 8AR LD Al2 MVOLT GEB10RS BH24
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFTR42W/GX24q/841
C. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed start electronic ballasts, un-
less otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluorescent lamp
ballast's).
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
2. RBA: 8" diameter compact fluorescent prismatic lensed downlight
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Prescolite— CFT832HEB-STF802HMFC-L-B24
2) Portfolio— C7132-E-7181-LI-1-HB26
3) Gotham—AF 1/32TRT 8AR LD Al2 MVOLT GEB10RS BH24
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFTR32W/GX24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed start electronic ballasts, un-
less otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluorescent lamp
ballast's).
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
3. RBE: 8" diameter compact fluorescent open downlight
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-32 05/13/05
N. Night Light
1. NLA: Single face night light with louvered front
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco — 104/277
2) Vista - F26-1L5-277-EB-MW
3) Kenall—MSLS 0 MW PIA 13 277 XX
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFQ13W/G24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5) Coordinate fixture depth with wall thickness.
6) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
2. NLB: Dual face thru-wall night light with louvered front
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco 104-DF/277
2) Vista - F26-2L5-D4-277-MW
3) Kenall—MSLS 0 MW PIA 13 277 XX DUAL
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-CFQ13W/G24q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with electronic ballast, unless otherwise noted.
Refer to specification section (Fluorescent lamp ballast's).
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5) Coordinate fixture depth with wall thickness.
6) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-31 05113105
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan +,,
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4. FWN: 4' Direct/Indirect wrap around lens fluorescent fixture
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia —WPM4-232-EB8LHUNV
2) Legion - WH1265-232-ACW-EBO-(10% THD)-120/277
3) Lithonia —WP 2 32 ACF125 MVOLT GEM ORS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation. ""�"""'
5. FWO: 9" x 13" adjustable wall mounted indirect fluorescent luminaire with
painted solid aluminum facia.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Insight—VCM/597/WCB/2/W/SP
2) Approved Equal
3) Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-FT55W/2G11/RS/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for 'final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body.
5) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-30 05/13/05
d. Lamps: 2-F25T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For perimeter lighting systems, contractor is responsible for ordering
lengths, corners, extensions, end caps, etc to maximize extent of
lighted cove for a complete system.
5) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body
2. FWJ: 4' direct/indirect perforated metal linear wall fixture
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark— EC-W-2-FO32WT8-EB-UNV-4'-IND-RFI
2) Neoray - 201IW-SP-2T8-1C-UNV-SU-WA-04-RFI
3) Litecontrol —W-AI-55-24T8-CWM-1 CWQ-120/277 RFI
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for 'final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body.
5) For perimeter lighting systems, contractor is responsible for ordering
lengths, corners, extensions, end caps, etc to maximize extent of
lighted cove for a complete system.
3. FWM: 3' Direct/Indirect wrap around lens fluorescent fixture
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—WPM4-225-EB8LHUNV
2) Legion - WH1265-225-ACW-EBO-(10% THD)-120/277
3) Lithonia —WP 2 25 ACF125 MVOLT GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Wall
d. Lamps: 2-F25T8/841
C. Other Requirements:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-29 05/13/05
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/841 -O
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
L. Fluorescent Surface
1. FSC: 4' fluorescent narrow strip fixture, 1 lamp
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia — CH4-132-EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux— SN-132-UNV-ER81
3) Lithonia —UN-132-MVOLT-GEBlORS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 1-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Fixture width shall not exceed 3" where installed in vertical light
pocket outside of patient rooms. Refer to architectural detail to verify
space requirements.
M. Fluorescent Wall
1. FWG: 3' direct/indirect perforated metal linear wall fixture
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark—EC-W-2-FO25WT8-EB-UNV-3'-IND-RFI
2) Neoray - 2011W-SP-2T8-1C-UNV-SU-WA-03-RFI
3) Litecontrol —W-AI-55-23T8-CWM-ICWQ-120/277-RFI
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Wall
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-28 05/13/05
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
4. Fixture FD8: 1'x4' fluorescent direct/indirect with semi specular floating baffle
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark —NUV 14 1-F28WTS UNV SSP
2) Approved Equal
3) Zumtobel Staff—SCLI-14-2328-PW-W-120/277-XX
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-F28T5/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
., 2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
K. Fluorescent Pendant
1. FPA: 4' fluorescent industrial strip with 20% uplight.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—KL4-232-EB8LHUNV-SS18
2) Metalux—DIVM-232-UNV-ER81
3) Lithonia —AF 2 32 MVOLT GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Pendant
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-27 05/13/05
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal- 0"k,
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cuits.
5) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body.
6) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2. Fixture FB3: 2'x4' fluorescent direct/indirect round perforated center basket
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia — STR24-332G-MPO-3EB8LHUNV
2) Neo-Ray—244-3-F32T8-W-G-UNV-ER81
3) Focal Point—FLU 24 B 3T8 S 120/277 G PS DC WH
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-F32T8/835
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations. "
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Provide acrylic overlay above perforated body.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
3. Fixture FB4: 2'x4' fluorescent direct/indirect round perforated center basket
with dimming ballast
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—STR24-332G-MPO-3EB8DLH277
2) Neo-Ray—244-3-F32T8-W-G-277-ER81-DB
3) Focal Point—FLU 24 B 3T8 D 277 G PS DC WH
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-F32T8/835
e. Other Requirements:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-26 05/13/05
4) Coordinate with division 15 to confirm size of T-bar which will sup-
port HVAC diffusers and surgical troffers.
5) Provide radio frequency interference (rfi) filter.
6) Provide radio frequency interference (rfi) shielding.
4. Fixture F91): 4' linear fluorescent exam light with asymmetric distribution and
clear lens
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Architectural Lighting Systems—ALSX1004
2) Kenall — MEC 48 G 154TSHO 120/277
3) Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-F54T5HO/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
* indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
5) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.31.
J. Recessed Fluorescent Direct/Indirect
1. Fixture FA1: 2'x2' fluorescent direct/indirect round perforated center basket
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—STR22-240TTG-MPO-EBTTLH277
2) Neo-Ray—242-2-40BX-W-G-277-ER51
3) Focal Point—FLU 22 B 2BX40 S 277 G PS DC WH
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-FT40W/2G11/RS/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-25 05/13/05
4) Provide radio frequency interference (rfi) filter.
5) Provide radio frequency interference (rfi) shielding.
6) Furnish with (2) magnetic ballasts.
7) Coordinate with division 15 to confirm size of T-bar which will sup-
port HVAC diffusers and surgical
2. Fixture F9B: 2'x4' fluorescent Surgical Troffer with symmetric/asymmetric
acrylic lens.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco — ST8240-3/G/277/WHS
2) Vista — 6925-G-6-F32-T8MAG-277-A
3) Kenall — MSE G 124-6-32 MB 2 277 PAF 2H SA HD TC
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 6-F32T8/850
e. Other Requirements:
1) Furnish with (3) magnetic ballasts
2) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
3) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Provide radio frequency interference (rfi) filter.
6) Provide radio frequency interference (rfi) shielding.
7) Coordinate with division 15 to confirm size of T-bar which will sup-
port HVAC diffusers and surgical troffers.
3. Fixture F9C: VA' fluorescent Surgical Troffer with symmetric/asymmetric
acrylic lens
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco—ST8140-2/G/277/WHS
2) Vista— 6914-G-3-F32-T8MAG-277-A
3) Kenall—MSE G I14-3-32 MB 2 277 PAF 2H SA HD TC
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-32T8/850
e. Other Requirements:
1) Furnish with (2) magnetic ballasts
2) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
Aowk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-24 05/13/05
10. Fixture FSR: 4' fluorescent open wall slot wall washer
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia Alera —EN82-240TTG-K-EB8LH-277
2) Engineered Lighting Products —240 BXWW-AKTB-277
3) Peerless —Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2- FT40W/2G11/RS/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For perimeter lighting systems, contractor is responsible for ordering
lengths, corners, extensions, end caps, to maximize extent of lighted
cove for a complete system.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 131.
I. Medical Lighting Systems
1. Fixture F9A: 2'x2' fluorescent Surgical Troffer with symmetric/asymmetric
acrylic lens
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco —ST8220-2/G/277/WHS
2) Vista— 6922-G-4-F17-T8MAG-277-A
3) Kenall—MSE G 122 4F17 MB 277 PAF 2H SA HD TC
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 4-F17T8/850
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-23 05/13/05
2) Tivoli — CV5FE134Q2E2 ^ *
3) Birchwood— SYD 13Q 2 1L HRW XX
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Cove
d. Lamps: 1-CFQ13W/G24Q/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be provided with fault limiter cir-
cults.
5) For continuously mounted lighting systems, contractor is responsible
for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths to maxi-
mize the extent of the lighted cove.
6) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
9. Fixture FBQ: 4' fluorescent open wall slot wall wash with 4" aperture, gypboard
ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark— B13518-SPEC-1T5HO-WW
2) Engineered Lighting Products - 154T-5WW-MP-120/277-SP
3) Peerless—LWAR9 G 1 F54T5HO HOL U4 120/277 GEB10 LP840
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-FS4T5HO/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For perimeter lighting systems, contractor is responsible for ordering
lengths, corners, extensions, end caps, to maximize extent of lighted
cove for a complete system.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
6) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 16511-22 05/13/05
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For continuously mounted lighting systems, contractor is responsible
for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths, corners,
extensions and end caps to maximize the extent of the wall being
washed.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
7. Fixture FBL: 4' fluorescent open wall slot wall wash
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark —MPSR-I-FOT8-EB-UNV-4
2) Neoray— 79PF/1T8/04/UNV-ER8I-SI
3) Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For continuously mounted lighting systems, contractor is responsible
for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths, corners,
extensions and end caps to maximize the extent of the wall being
washed.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
8. Fixture FBP: 8" fluorescent field curvable modular system
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Belfer—2801-FX2S-13-2-E-a
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-21 05/13/05
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For continuously mounted lighting systems, contractor is responsible
for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths to maxi-
mize the extent of the lighted cove.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
5. Fixture F8J: 2' fluorescent open wall slot wall wash
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark — MPSR-I-FOTS-EB-UNV-2
2) Neoray— 79PF/1T8/02/UNV-ERSI-SI
3) Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-F17T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's. '
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For continuously mounted lighting systems, contractor is responsible
for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths, corners,
extensions and end caps to maximize the extent of the wall being
washed.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
6. Fixture F8K: 3' fluorescent open wall slot wall wash
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark—MPSR-I-FOT8-EB-UNV-3
2) Neoray—79PF/1T8/03/UNV-ER8I-SI
3) Approved Equal
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-F25T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-20 05/13/05
6) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
7) Fixture shall be installed in patient room "Mock-up."
J. Fixture F8C: 4' fluorescent wall slot with acrylic lens
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alera —AL-2TSFC-RWCB-NA12.125-EB8LHUNV-S-4
2) Neoray— S71/2T8/02/UNV-ER8I-SI-S58
3) Litecontrol — 85N24T8-S/A.125-CWM-G-ELB10 MVOLT
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/835
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For continuously mounted perimeter lighting systems, contractor is re-
sponsible for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths
"* to maximize the extent of the lighted cove.
5) Provide .125 inch prismatic acrylic lens.
6) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
4. Fixture F8E: 4' cove light mounted inside architectural cove with asymmetric dis-
tribution.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark— CG 4 2-FO32T8 EB UNV
2) Neoray— 74IC-2-T8-4-UNV-ER8I-SI
3) Litecontrol— CCAI 30 2 4T8 CWM ELB10 MVOLT
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Cove
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-19 05/13/05
1. Fixture F8A: 2' fluorescent wall slot with acrylic lens
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alera —AL-2TSF C-RWCB-NA12.125-EB8LHUNV-S-2
2) Neoray—S71/2T8/02/UNV-ER8I-SI-S58
3) Litecontrol — 85N22T8-S/A.125-CWM-G-ELB10 MVOLT
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F17T8/835
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved in anti facturcr's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For continuously mounted lighting systems, contractor is responsible
for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths to maxi-
mize the extent of the wall being washed.
5) Provide .125 inch prismatic acrylic lens.
6) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2. Fixture F8B: 3' fluorescent wall slot with acrylic lens
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alera—AL-2T8FC-RWCB-NA12.125-EB8LHUNV-S-3
2) Neoray—S71/2T8/031UNV-ER8I-SI-S58
3) Litecontrol — 85N23T8-S/A.125-CWM-G-ELB10 MVOLT
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F25T8/835
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations.
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) For continuously mounted lighting systems, contractor is responsible
for field verification prior to ordering the necessary lengths to maxi-
mize the extent of the wall being washed.
5) Provide .125 inch prismatic acrylic lens.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-18 05/13/05
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark— SL4-DF-48-2T5-EB-FA-IND
2) Linear Lighting— RC68-D-2ET5HO-120/277-MBL-G-BW-4
3) Litecontrol - LG-D-66N24T5I O-BWP-CWIv4-ELB10-120/277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F54T5HO/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacrurer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
5) Provide required number of ballasts to accommodate lighting fixtures
with multi level switching as indicated on drawings.
4. Fixture F7F: 6"x4' fluorescent with acrylic lens, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark—SL4-DF-48-2T5-EB-ACRYLIC LENS
2) Linear Lighting— RC68-D-1T8-1201277-AL-G-BW-4
3) Litecontrol — LG-D-66N14T8-PAT.I2-CWM-INT-ELB10-120/277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
5) Provide .125 inch prismatic acrylic lens.
H. Linear Fluorescent Wall Slot/Cove Fixtures
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-17 05/13/05
1. Fixture F7C: 2"x4' narrow slot fluorescent with regressed specular aluminum
parabolic baffle, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark— SL2R DF 4 T528W EB 120/277 PB IND
2) Linear Lighting— RC23-D-1-X-ET5-PVL-120/277-G-BW-4
3) Gammalux— GB33RC-128T5-120/277-ERS-4'-REC-PBB-WH-XX
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 1-F28T5/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2. Fixture F71): 6"x4' fluorescent with perforated parabolic baffle, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Mark— SL4-DF-48-2T5-EB-FA-IND-TANDEM
2) Linear Lighting— RC68-D-2ET5HO-120/277-MBL-G-BW-4
3) Litecontrol — LG-D-66N24T5HO-BWP-CWM-ELB10/2LAMP-
120/277
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F54T5HO/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
5) Fixture shall be tandem wired to provide multi-level switching as indi-
cated on lighting plans.
3. Fixture F7E: 6"x4' fluorescent with perforated parabolic baffle, grid ceiling
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-16 05/13/05
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia — P4D24-332G-LD36-S-EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux-2EP3GX-332S361-UNV-ER82-2BC
3) Lithonia —2PM3N G B 332 1 8L MVOLT GEBI ORS 2R
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Provide 2 ballasts for dual switching as indicated on floor plans.
2) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
2. Fixture F6D: 2' x 4' fluorescent 3" deep parabolic louver, 32 cell, 4 lamp, grid
ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia —P4D24-432G-LD48-S-EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux—2EP3GX-432S481-UNV-ER82
3) Lithonia —2PM3N G B 432 32LD MVOLT GEBIORS 2R
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 4-F32T8/835
e. Other Requirements:
1) Provide 2 ballasts for dual switching as indicated on floor plans.
2) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
G. Fluorescent Lensed Fixtures
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-15 05/13/05
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions.
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
E. 2' x 2' Fluorescent Parabolic
1. Fixture F5A: 2'x2' fluorescent, 3" deep parabolic louver, 9 cell 6" radius, grid
ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia— P4D22-232U6G-LD33-S-EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux—2EP3GX-2U6T8S33I-UNV-ER81
3) Lithonia —2PM3N G B 2 U316 9LD MVOLT GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/841
C. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Coordinate lighting installation and trim kit with ceiling type indicated
on architect drawings. Provide any necessary mounting hardware to
accommodate field conditions.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
F. 2' x 4' Fluorescent Parabolic Fixtures
1. Fixture F6C: 2' x 4' fluorescent 3" deep parabolic louver, 18 cell 3 lamp, grid
ceiling
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-14 05/13/05
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Provide triple gasketing.
5. Fixture F3P: 2'x4' fluorescent prismatic gasketed .125 lens 3 lamp, grid ceiling,
triple gasketing
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia — 4PS24-332G-FA12.125-3EB8LHUNV-G3
2) Metalux— 2GCFA-332A125-UNV-ER81-G3
3) Lithonia —2SP8 G 3 32 A12125 MVOLT 1/3 GEBI ORS ABC
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Provide triple gasketing.
D. 1' x 4' Fluorescent Prismatic Lensed Fixtures
1. Fixture F4K: 1'x4' fluorescent with prismatic acrylic lens, 3 lamp, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—ST814-332G-FA12.125-3EB8LHUNV
2) Legion— 71-332/EBO-FA125-120/277
3) Lithonia —SP G 332 A12125 MVOLT GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-F32T8/841
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-13 05/13/05
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
3. Fixture F31): 2'x4' fluorescent prismatic lens 4 lamp, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia —4PS24-432G-FSA12.12.5-EB81,HtJNV
2) Metalux —2GC-432A125-UNV-ER82
3) Lithonia —2SP8 G 4 32 A12125 MVOLT GEB1 ORS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 4-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Provide 2 ballasts
2) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
3) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions Almk
4) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
5) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4. Fixture F3H: 2'x4' fluorescent prismatic gasketed .125 lens 3 lamp, gypboard
ceiling, triple gasketing
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—4PS24-332F-FA12.125-3EB8LHUNV-G3
2) Metalux—2FCFA-332A125-UNV-ER81-G3
3) Lithonia —2SP8 F 3 32 A12125 MVOLT 1/3 GEB10RS ABC
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-12 05/13/05
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
5) Fixture shall be equipped with (2) ballasts for multi-level switching
where indicated on lighting plans.
C. 2' x 4' Fluorescent Prismatic Lensed Fixtures
1. Fixture F3A: 2'x4' fluorescent prismatic lens, 2 Iamp, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia —4PS24-232G-FSA12.125-EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux—2GC-232A125-UNV-ER81
3) Lithonia —2SP8 G 2 32 A12125 MVOLT GEMORS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
2. Fixture F3B: 2'x4' fluorescent prismatic lens 3 lamp, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—4PS24-332G-FSA12.125-3EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux—2GC-332A125-UNV-ER81
3) Lithonia —2SP8 G 3 32 A12125 MVOLT 1/3GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-F32T8/841
C. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-11 05/13/05
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer. to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
2. Fixture F2F: 2'x2' fluorescent prismatic gasketed lens, 2 lamp, grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia — 4PS22-232U6G-FAA12.125-EBSLHUNV-G3
2) Metalux—2GCXF-2U6T8-A125-UNV-ER81-G3
3) Lithonia —2SP8 G 2 U316 A12125 MVOLT GEBIORS ABC
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/U6/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
3) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4) Provide triple gasketing.
3. Fixture F2J: 2'x2' fluorescent Holophane lens 6" radius, 3-lamp,grid ceiling
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—4PS22-340TT-8246-EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux—2GCFA-3BX40-H8246-UNV-ER51
3) Lithonia—2SP8 G 3 CF40 84Y MVOLT GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 3-FT40W/2G11/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate lighting fixture installation and trim kit with ceiling type
indicated on architectural drawings. Provide any necessary mounting
hardware to accommodate field conditions
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-10 05/13/05
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
look 5. Fixture Type: F1F: 3' Fluorescent low profile task light strip with remote bal-
last.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco —ILF121/LR OR RR/120/277
2) Approved Equal
3) Birchwood—WP-T5-120/277-3-HRW
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 1421T5/835
C. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate task light fixtures to with casework as detailed on architec-
tural interior elevations to insure location of feeder to fixture is cor-
rect.
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation. Fixture may require
either a left or right feeder connection. Fixture dimensions shall not
exceed 1 1/z" W x 1" D.
5) Remote ballast mounted in case work below counter. Refer to ballast
manufacturer's recommendations for distance from fixture, and install
accordingly.
6) Approved equal must meet the requirements of section 1.3.F.
B. 2' x 2' Fluorescent Prismatic Lensed Fixtures
1. Fixture F2A: 2'x2' fluorescent prismatic lens 6" radius, 2 u-lamp
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Columbia—4PS22-232U6G-FSA12.125-EB8LHUNV
2) Metalux—2GC-2U6T8A125-UNV-ER81
3) Lithonia —2SP8 G 2 U316 A12125 MVOLT GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Recessed
d. Lamps: 2-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-9 05/13/05
3. Fixture Type: F1C: 4' Fluorescent under cabinet fixture with solid front
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco — SFLINCSI50-O48/277ECB
2) Fail Safe — MTS-32-277-11(12-ER81
3) Lithonia —N2S 32 277 GEBIORS
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 1-F32T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate task light fixture location as detailed on architectural irate-
rior elevations.
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
4. Fixture Type: ME: 2' Fluorescent low profile task light strip with remote bal-
last.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco —ILF114/LR OR RR/120/277
2) Approved Equal
3) Birchwood—WP-T5-120/277-2-HRW
b. Voltage: 120/277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 1-F14T5/835
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate task light fixtures to with casework as detailed on architec-
tural interior elevations to insure location of feeder to fixture is cor-
rect.
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation. Fixture may require
either a left or right feeder connection. Fixture dimensions shall not
exceed 1 1/2" W x 1" D.
5) Remote ballast mounted in case work below counter. Refer to ballast
manufacturer's recommendations for distance from fixture, and install
accordingly.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-8 05/13/05
5. Static Fixtures: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches
active units.
2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. Under Cabinet Light Fixtures
1. Fixture Type: F1A: 2' Fluorescent under cabinet fixture with solid front.
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco —SFLINCS150-024/277ECB
2) Fail Safe —MTS-17-277-1K12-ER81
3) Lithonia —N2S 17 277 GEB10RS
b. Mounting: Surface
C. Voltage: 277
d. Lamps: 1-F17T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting/ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate task light fixture location as detailed on architectural inte-
rior elevations.
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
2. Fixture Type: F1B: 3' Fluorescent under cabinet fixture with solid front
a. Manufacturer/Catalog Number
1) Alkco —SFLINCS150-036/277ECB
2) Fail Safe—MTS-17-277-1K12-ER81
3) Lithonia —N2S 17 277 GEB10RS
b. Voltage: 277
C. Mounting: Surface
d. Lamps: 1-F25T8/841
e. Other Requirements:
1) Mounting /ceiling height as directed by architects reflected ceiling plan
and or architectural interior elevations
2) Coordinate task light fixture location as detailed on architectural inte-
rior elevations.
3) Fixture to be equipped with programmed rapid start electronic bal-
lasts, unless otherwise noted. Refer to specification section (Fluores-
cent lamp ballast's) for requirements and approved manufacturer's.
4) Catalog numbers are listed for reference only. Contractor is responsi-
ble for final fixture coordination and installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-7 05/13/05
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to Aft,
NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to pre-
vent warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed
to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling acciden-
tally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indi-
cated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. ,.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different
thickness is scheduled.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: A component of fixture assembly. Suppress con-
ducted electromagnetic-interference as required by MIL-STD-461D. Fabricate lighting
fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.
K. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat
extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Division 15 Sec-
tion "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
1. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot assem-
blies.
2. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity.
3. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp
cavity at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units.
4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-6 05/13/05
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard
form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps
that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site,
within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I. Lamps: 10 for every 1.00 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Plastic Diffusers and Lens:1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Fur-
nish at least one of each type.
3. Battery and Charger Data: 1 for each emergency lighting unit.
4. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
5. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fix-
tures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE SA.
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16511-5 05/13/05
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in lowk
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. FMG Compliance: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indi-
cated class and division of hazard by FMG.
F. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit
signs.
G. Nlockups: Provide lighting fixtures for room or module mockups. Install fixtures for
mockups with power and control connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undis-
turbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equip-
ment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form
in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or re-
place components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 7 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall
apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.
B. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which bal-
last manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: 5 years from date of Substantial Comple-
tion.
2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: 3 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-4 05/13/05
a. Air outlets and inlets.
b. Speakers.
C. Sprinklers.
d. Access panels.
4. Perimeter moldings.
E. Samples for Verification: For interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission
in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule.
1. Lamps: Specified units installed.
2. Ballast: 120-V models of specified ballast types.
3. Accessories: Cords and plugs.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by
product manufacturer.
G. Source quality-control test reports.
H. Field quality-control test reports.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Divi-
sion 1 Section "Closeout Procedures", include the following:
1. Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in
that fixture.
J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capa-
bility to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capa-
bility to conduct the testing indicted, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory
(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-3 05/13/05
1. LER is equal to the product of total rated lamp lumens times BF times luminaire ef-
ficiency, divided by input watts.
E. RCR: Room cavity ratio.
F. Approved Equal Criteria: A fixture will be considered an " Approved Equal" if the r'01-
]owing criteria are met.
1. Fixture shall be manufactured with the same materials, quality of construction,
physical size, shape and appearance as the specified fixture.
2. Fixture shall mount in the same manner as the specified fixture and shall meet the
criteria of any special mounting details.
3. Fixture shall have the same photometric performance as the specified fixture.
4. A point to point lighting calculation shall be submitted for the area where the
specified fixture is to be installed, to demonstrate that the footcandle levels are
consistent to those achieved with the specified fixture.
5. An operable fixture sample shall be submitted to the engineer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated
parameters.
2. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
3. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
4. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Furnish data re-
quired in "Submittals" Article in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and
Grilles."
5. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level
and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards speci-
fied in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers and Grilles."
6. Lamps.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input
from installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which lighting-fixture suspension systems will be attached.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16511-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts.
2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
3. Emergency lighting units.
4. Exit signs.
5. Accessories, including [fluorescent fixture dimmers].
B. Related Sections include the following:
"* 1. Division 13 Section "Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control sys-
tems employing low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandes-
cent lamps.
3. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,
including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole
lighting relays and contactors.
4. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems.
S. Section 01300 "Submittals and Substitutions".
6. Section 01430 "Mock-Ups".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast factor. Ratio of light output of a given lamp(s) operated by the subject bal-
last to the light output of the same lamp(s) when operated on an ANSI reference circuit.
B. CRI: Color rendering index.
C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D. LER: Luminaire efficiency rating, which is calculated according to NEMA LE S. This
value can be estimated from photometric data using the following formula:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Interior Lighting
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16511-1 05/13/05
END OF SECTION 16491
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fuses
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16491-4 05/13/05
2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 0.05-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick steel unit with full-length, re-
cessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.
1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum.
2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) high letters on exterior
of door.
4. Fuse Pullers: For each size fuse.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of
sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be
applied to fuse ratings.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
B. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
B. Install spare fuse cabinet[s].
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused
switch.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fuses
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16491-3 05/13/05
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1. A&V%k
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient tempera-
ture adjustment factors to fuse ratings.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with HVAC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations
of maximum fuse size.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged in original cartons or containers and identified with labels describing con-
tents.
1. Fuses: Quantity equal to 5 percent of each fuse type and size, but not fewer than
5 of each type and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div.
2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
3. Ferraz Corp.
4. Gould Shawmut.
5. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating in-
dicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Fuses
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16491-2 05/13/05
Ow SECTION 16491 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less, for use in switches, panel-
boards, switchboards, controllers, and motor-control centers; and spare fuse cabinets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:
1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electri-
cal characteristics, and ratings.
, * 2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.
4. Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
B. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information. If ratings of fuses have been adjusted
to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses adjusted.
1. For each adjusted fuse, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient
temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
2. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
C. Maintenance Data: For tripping devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fuses
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16491-1 05/13/05
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by
transformer manufacturer.
1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 16 Section "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Work."
B. Install floor-mounting transformers level on concrete bases. Construct concrete bases of
dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 min) larger in both directions
than supported unit and 4 inches (100 mm) high.
. Anchor transformers to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written in-
structions, seismic codes at Project, and requirements in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical oc-
cupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at
secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10
percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 5 percent. Submit recording
and tap settings as test results.
B. Adjust buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being
served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap set-
tings.
END OF SECTION 16461
low Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dry-Type Transformers (600 V and Less)
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16461-5 05/13/05
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 100*.
3. Shield Effectiveness:
a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33
picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 120 dBA minimum at 0.5 to
1.5 kHz; minus 65 dBA minimum at 1.5 to 100 kHz.
C. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 52 dBA minimum at 1.5 to 10
kHz.
L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
M. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard
sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.
2.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty, complying
with NEMA ST 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 506.
B. Ratings: Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide at least 50 percent spare
capacity above connected peak load.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature require-
ments for each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required
by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls and floors for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be
installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dry-Type Transformers (600 V and Less)
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16461-4 05/13/05
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices, except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Provide transformers that are internally braced to withstand seismic forces specified in
Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
C. Cores: One leg per phase.
D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture
and air.
E. Indoor Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250 for "Indoor Corrosion
Protection."
1. Finish Color: Gray.
F. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a
maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
G. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.
H. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap
below normal full capacity.
1. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5
percent taps below normal full capacity.
J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with
UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree
defined by designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion
corresponding to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width cop-
per electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between
input and output terminals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dry-Type Transformers (600 V and Less)
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16461-3 05/13/05
E. Output Settings Reports: Record of tap adjustments specified in Part 3. -OWNS,
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with IEEE C 57.12.91.
C. Energy-Efficient Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Certified as meeting
NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels when tested according to NEMA TP 2.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written in-
structions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during
which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is con-
tinuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Cutler-Hammer.
2. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dry-Type Transformers (600 V and Less)
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16461-2 05/13/05
" SECTION 16461 - DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (600 V AND LESS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less,
with capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
2. Control and signal transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Wiring and connection diagrams.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer
assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on ac-
tual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dry-Type Transformers (600 V and Less)
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16461-1 05/13/05
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
? tions.
3.1.1 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-control centers.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and sched-
ules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Pro-
cedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 16443
low Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16443-13 05/13/05
1. Test insulation resistance for each motor-control center element, bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated in
NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16.
2. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including pretesting and
adjusting solid-state controllers.
D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean controllers internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning.
3.10 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that motor-control centers and components are installed and connected according
to the Contract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and in-
stallation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-12 05/13/05
E. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Divi-
sion 16 Section "Fuses."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify motor-control center, motor-control center components, and control wiring ac-
cording to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor-control centers,
including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished
metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor-control
centers.
3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor-control devices according to Division 16 Section "Conduc-
tors and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts,
high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 16 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-11 05/13/05
I. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output
contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal,
current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with adjustable re-
sponse delay.
2.8 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested control-
lers before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive motor-control centers for compliance with re-
quirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and
configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. See Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general installation
instructions.
B. Anchor each motor-control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized ac-
cording to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills
flush with motor-control center mounting surface.
C. Install motor-control centers on concrete bases complying with Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-10 05/13/05
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty
type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a
factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed
position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.
F. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and
plus or minus 2 percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide transfer device with an off
position. Meters shall indicate the following:
1. Ammeter: Output current, with current sensors rated to suit application.
2. Voltmeter: Output voltage.
3. Frequency Meter: Output frequency.
G. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor
based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential termi-
nals rated to 600 V.
2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
C. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes:
Plus or minus 2 percent.
i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;
stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
H. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output
contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-9 05/13/05
2.6 FEEDER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip set-
ting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
1. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
2. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: PRMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug.
Provide electronic trip unit circuit breakers on circuit breaker frames 400 A and
larger with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
C. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and 1't response.
3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through rat-
ings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
4. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral
limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening
or on opening of fuse compartment door.
S. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with [5] [30]-mA trip
sensitivity.
6. Molded-Case Switch: Molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.
B. Molded-Case, Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip rat-
ings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluores-
cent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating
equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module
with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system.
S. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 per-
cent of rated voltage.
C. Fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses with lock-
able handle.
2.7 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTER ACCESSORIES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16443-8 05/13/05
2. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch.
3. Circuit-Breaker Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with
field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
D. Adjustable Overload Relay: Dip switch selectable for motor running overload protection
with NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristic, and selected to protect motor
against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. Provide relay with Class II
ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting.
E. Multispeed Controller: Match controller to motor type, application, and number of
speeds; include the following accessories:
1. Compelling relay to ensure motor will start only at low speed.
2. Accelerating relay to ensure properly timed acceleration through speeds lower than
that selected.
3. Decelerating relay to ensure automatically timed deceleration through each speed.
F. Star-Delta Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition with adjustable time delay.
G. Part-Winding Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition with separate overload relays
for starting and running sequences.
H. Autotransformer Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition.
I. Solid-State, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, suitable for use with
NEMA MG 1,Design B,polyphase, medium induction motors.
1. Adjustable acceleration rate control utilizing voltage or current ramp, and adjust-
able starting torque control with up to 500 percent current limitation for 20 sec-
onds.
2. Surge suppressor in solid-state power circuits providing 3-phase protection against
damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.
3. LED indicators showing motor and control status, including the following condi-
tions:
a. Control power available.
b. Controller on.
C. Overload trip.
d. Loss of phase.
e. Shorted silicon-controlled rectifier.
4. Automatic voltage-reduction controls to reduce voltage when motor is running at
light load.
S. Motor running contactor operating automatically when full voltage is applied to
motor.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16443-7 05/13/05
2.4 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES -+
A. Description: Modular arrangement of controllers, control devices, overcurrent protective
devices, transformers, panelboards, instruments, indicating panels, blank panels, and
other items mounted in compartments of motor-control center.
B. Controller Units: Combination controller units of types and with features, ratings, and
circuit assignments indicated.
1. Install units with full-voltage, across-the-line, magnetic controllers up to and in-
cluding Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up
and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, ener-
gized positions.
2. Provide units with short-circuit current ratings equal to or greater than short-
circuit current rating of motor-control center section.
3. Equip units in Type B and Type C motor-control centers with pull-apart terminal
strips or drawout terminal boards for external control connections.
C. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Individual feeder-tap units through 225-A rating shall
have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with
vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.
D. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: Connect to motor-control center bus.
E. Spaces and Blank Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or
equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units.
F. Spare Units: Type, sizes, and ratings indicated; installed in compartments indicated
"spare."
2.5 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer with a con-
trol power transformer of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and
control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity.
C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect
switch.
1. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejec-
tion-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protec-
tion according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by a nationally recognized testing labo-
ratory.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers '
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-6 05/13/05
1. Motor-Control Centers with Manual and Magnetic Controllers:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b. Square D Co.
2.2 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
A. Wiring: NEMA ICS 3, Class I, Type B.
B. Enclosures: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1, un-
less otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Compartments: Modular; individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-
captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on combination controller units requiring dis-
connecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by
operating a permissive release device.
3. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units with-
out opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing
operation of other units in motor-control center. Interchangeability of units re-
quiring the same size compartment and constructed to permit ready rearrangement
of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces,
without cutting or welding.
4. Wiring Spaces: Wiring channel in each vertical section for vertical and horizontal
wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place.
C. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Section: Equal to or greater than indicated avail-
able fault current in symmetrical amperes at motor-control center location.
2.3 BUSES
A. Material: Plated copper.
B. Ampacity Ratings: As indicated for horizontal and vertical main buses.
C. Neutral Buses: Full size.
D. Equipment Ground Bus: Noninsulated, horizontal copper bus 2 by 1/4 inch (50 by 6
mm),minimum.
E. Horizontal Bus Arrangement: Main phase, neutral and ground buses extended with
same capacity the entire length of motor-control center, with provision for future exten-
sion at both ends by bolt holes and captive bus splice sections or equivalent.
F. Short-Circuit Withstand Rating: Same as short-circuit current rating of section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-5 05/13/05
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of motor-control centers with other construction in-
cluding conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
D. Coordinate features of motor-control centers, installed units, and accessory devices with
pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect.
E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor-control center, each con-
troller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor,
required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but not less than one set of
three of each type and rating.
2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-4 05/13/05
J. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor run-
ning overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project site, a ser-
vice center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain controllers of a single type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for mo-
tor-control centers, including clearances between motor-control centers, and for adjacent
surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver motor-control centers in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past ob-
structions in delivery path as indicated.
B. Handle motor-control centers according to NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Han-
dling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers." Use fac-
tory-installed lifting provisions.
C. Store motor-control centers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to pre-
vent condensation. Protect motor-control centers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water,
corrosive substances, and physical damage.
D. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover motor-control centers to protect from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient
wattage to prevent condensation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16443-3 05/13/05
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for class and type of motor- low%
control center. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of controller.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout., required working
clearances, and required area above and around motor-control centers where pipe and
ducts are prohibited. Show motor-control center layout and relationships between elec-
trical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support loca-
tions, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that motor-
control centers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Di-
vision "16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and ,
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Field Test Reports: Written reports specified in Part 3.
G. Manufacturer's field service report.
H. Maintenance Data: For motor-control centers, all installed devices, and components to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for motor-control centers and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protec-
tive devices.
I. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed
and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-
load currents.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-2 05/13/05
Aolk SECTION 16443 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes motor-control centers for use on ac circuits rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for monitoring
and control of motor circuits.
2. Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for low-voltage power, con-
trol, and communication surge suppressors.
3. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fuses in fusible switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of motor-control center. In-
clude dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each motor-control center.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Nameplate legends.
C. Short-circuit current ratings of buses and installed units.
d. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities.
e. UL listing for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in combination
controllers.
f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each motor-control
center unit.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motor-Control Centers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16443-1 05/13/05
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load
readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panel-
board, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this mini-
mum requirement.
E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panel-
boards checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove
paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16442
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16442-11 05/13/05
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-
plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to
main electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting sup-
ply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit. "
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified
testing.
C. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test in-
dicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case
circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows:
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working
schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour
services such as fax machines and on-line data-processing, computing, transmit-
ting, and receiving equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16442-10 05/13/05
1. Auxiliary Contacts: Integral with disconnect switches to de-energize external
control-power source.
D. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held general-purpose
controller.
1. Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.
2.9 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective de-
vice test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: To test functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from
panelboard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
C. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless oth-
erwise indicated.
D. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards
with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
E. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing
panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to
create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty
conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling
space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space
or below slab not on grade.
H. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap
with wire ties after completing load balancing.
** Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16442-9 05/13/05
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip rat- .•
ings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluo-
rescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerat-
ing equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module
with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control sys-
tem.
5. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 per-
cent of rated voltage.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable
handle.
2.8 CONTROLLERS
A. Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination controller equipped for panel-
board mounting and including the following accessories:
1. Individual control-power transformers.
2. Fuses for control-power transformers.
3. Bimetallic-element overload relay.
4. Indicating lights.
S. Seal-in contact.
6. Push buttons.
7. Selector switches.
B. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination controller equipped for panelboard
mounting and including the following accessories:
1. Individual control-power transformers.
2. Fuses for control-power transformers.
3. Indicating lights.
4. Seal-in contact.
S. Push buttons.
6. Selector switches.
C. Controller Disconnect Switches: Adjustable instantaneous-trip circuit breaker inte-
grally mounted and interlocked with controller.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16442-8 05/13/05
Breakers with equivalent time-current curves may be used if approved. Breakers
must be shown to protect transformers without nuisance tripping and coordinate
with upstream breakers. Coordinate breaker AIC ratings with panelboard ratings
and short circuit study.
3. Breakers upstream of 480-120/208V transformers: Breakers immediately up-
stream of transformer primary protection breaker will include the Panelboard
Main Breaker, where used, and the Distribution Panel feeder breaker.
kVA Minimum Upstream Breaker
Breaker
Size
15 125A ® SQD KH (35kAIC) or KC (65kAIC)
e CH JD (35kAIC) or HJD (65kAIC)
GE THFK (25kAIC) or TH K (65kAIC)
30 200A d SQD KH (35kAIC) or KC (65kAIC)
e CH JD (35kAIC) or HJD (65kAIC) or KD (35kAIC) or
HKD (65kAIC) or FD (25kAIC) or HFD (65kAIC)
• GE THFK (25kAIC) or TH K (65kAIC) or SFL (65kAIC)
45 225A • SQD KH (35kAIC) or KC (65kAIC)
• CH JD (35kAIC) or HJD (65kAIC) or KD (35kAIC) or
HKD (65kAIC) or FD (25kAIC) or HFD (65kAIC)
• GE THJK (35kAIC) [or SFL (65kAIC) only with SEL
transformer primary breaker]
75 400A • SQD LH (35kAIC) or LC (65kAIC)
• CH KD (35kAIC) or HKD (65kAIC)
• GE TH K (35kAIC) or SGL (65kAIC)
Breakers with equivalent time-current curves may be used if approved and shown
to coordinate with upstream and downstream breakers. Coordinate breaker AIC
ratings with panelboard ratings and short circuit study.
4. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with
front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
5. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug;
with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
C. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and IZt response.
6. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through
ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
7. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral
limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse open-
ing or on opening of fuse compartment door.
8. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with [5] [30]-mA
trip sensitivity.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16442-7 05/13/05
4. UL 1449 clamping levels shall not exceed 400 V, line to neutral and line to
ground on 120/208 V systems 800 V, line to neutral and line to ground on
277/480 V systems.
S. Withstand Capabilities: 3000 Category C surges with less than 5 percent change
in clamping voltage.
6. Accessories shall include the following:
a. Form-C contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote
monitoring of system operation. Contacts to reverse position on failure of
any surge diversion module.
b. Audible alarm activated on failure of any surge diversion module.
C. Six-digit transient-counter set to total transient surges that deviate from the
sine-wave envelope by more than 125 V.
2.7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet avail-
able fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Transformer Primary and Secondary Circuit Breakers:
kVA Primary Breaker Secondary Breaker
15 . SQD EG (35kAIC) or FC * SQD FA (25kAIC) or FG (65kAIC) or
(65kAIC) EG (65kAIC) or EH (65kAIC)
• CH FD (25kAIC) or HFD • CH BAB (10kAIC) or EHD (18kAIC) or
(65kAIC) FD (65kAIC)
• GE THED (25kAIC) or • GE THHQB (22kAIC) or THED
SEL (65kAIC) (65kAIC)
30 . SQD EG (35kAIC) or FC • SQD Q2H (22kAIC) or EG (65kAIC) or
(65kAIC) KC (100kAIC)
• CH FD (25kAIC) or HFD • CH FD (65kAIC)
(65kAIC) e GE TFK (25kAIC) or THED (42kAIC)
• GE SEL (65kAIC)
45 . SQD FC (65kAIC) • SQD Q2H (22kAIC) or KC (100kAIC)
• CH FD (25kAIC) or HFD • CH ED (65kAIC) or FD (65kAIC)
(65kAIC) • GE THQD (22kAIC) or TFK (25kAIC)
• GE THFK (25kAIC) or
SEL (65kAIC)
75 • SQD KC (65kAIC) • SQD Q2H (22kAIC) or KC (100kAIC)
• CH FD (25kAIC) or HFD • CH ED (65kAIC) or FD (65kAIC)
(65kAIC) • GE THQD (22kAIC) or TFK (25kAIC)
• GE THFK (25kAIC) or
SFL (65kAIC)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16442-6 05/13/05
B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler
lock; keyed alike.
2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: Front mounted, except omit in fused-switch panelboards; secured with vault-
type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.
C. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following:
1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers;
plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires me-
chanical release for removal.
2.6 TVSS PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: Front mounted; secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer
coat.
B. Main Overcurrent Devices: Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
D. Bus: Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus.
E. TVSS Device: IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, plug-in-style, solid-state, parallel-
connected, sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules.
1. Minimum single-impulse current rating shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 100,000 A.
b. Line to Ground: 100,000 A.
C. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
2. Protection modes shall be as follows:
a. Line to neutral.
b. Line to ground.
C. Neutral to ground.
3. EMI/RFI Noise Attenuation Using 50-ohm Insertion Loss Test: 55 dB at 100
kHz.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16442-5 05/13/05
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. ,
b. Square D Co.
2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet envi-
ronmental conditions at installed location.
B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
C. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or
primer coat.
E. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside
panelboard door.
F. Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
G. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
H. Equipment Ground "Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors; bonded to box.
I. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances re-
quired for future installation of devices.
J. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground con-
ductors; insulated from box.
K. Feed-through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16442-4 05/13/05
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protec-
tive devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent pro-
tective device.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the Inter-
National Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineer-
ing Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other con-
struction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other
types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance re-
quirements.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Keys: Six spares of each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Acces-
sories:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16442-3 05/13/05
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of in-
stalled devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
C. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective de-
vices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcur-
rent protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that panel-
boards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
Include the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
internal and external parts during a seismic event and the unit will be fully opera-
tional after the event." ,.
3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that com-
ply with requirements.
F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
G. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manu-
als specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout," include the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16442-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes load centers and panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and
associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types:
1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
2. Distribution panelboards.
3. Transient voltage surge suppressor panelboards.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
D. RMS: Root mean square.
E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
F. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, TVSS de-
vice, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'
technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
** Cooley Dickinson Hospital Panelboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16442-1 05/13/05
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indi-
cated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.1, 7.5, 7.6, 7.9, 7.10, 7.11, and 7.14 as appropri-
ate. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switch-
boards checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficien-
cies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.8 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove
paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16441
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-12 05/13/05
B. Support switchboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for
switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency proce-
dures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear
acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section Electrical Identification."
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with engraved metal or
laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switchboards with ground continuity to
main electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting sup-
ply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified test-
ing.
C. Testing: After installing switchboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion,.Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-11 05/13/05
A. Control Circuits: 120 V, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from con- ...
trol-power transformer.
B. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload
protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.
C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Pro-
vide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and
for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented steel
box or cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.
2.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with equipment factory-
finished background to represent bus and components, complete with lettered designa-
tions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manu-
facturer's written instructions.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-10 05/13/05
A� 1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy
tolerances as indicated:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus I percent.
C. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus I percent.
d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programma-
ble from S to 60 minutes.
i. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent. Accumu-
lated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
C. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Power-Factor Meters: ANSI C39.1.
1. Meters: 4-inch (100-min) diameter or 6 inches (150 mm) square, flush or semif-
lush, with antiparallax 250-degree scales and external zero adjustment.
2. Voltmeters: Cover an expanded-scale range of nominal voltage plus 10 percent.
D. Instrument Switches: Rotary type with off position.
1. Voltmeter Switches: Permit reading of all phase-to-phase voltages and, where a
neutral is indicated, phase-to-neutral voltages.
2. Ammeter Switches: Permit reading of current in each phase and maintain current-
transformer secondaries in a closed-circuit condition at all times.
E. Feeder Ammeters: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale. Me-
ter and transfer device with an off position, located on overcurrent device door for indi-
cated feeder circuits only.
F. Watt-Hour Meters: Flush or semiflush type, rated 5 A, 120 V, 3 phase, 3 wire, with 3
elements, 15-minute-indicating-demand register, and provision for testing and adding
pulse initiation.
G. Recording Demand Meter: Usable as totalizing relay or as indicating and recording
maximum-demand meter with 15-minute interval. Meter shall count and control a suc-
cession of pulses entering two channels. House in drawout, back-connected case ar-
ranged for semiflush mounting.
2.7 CONTROL POWER
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-9 05/13/05
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
C. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and Izt response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-throagh rat-
ings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral
limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening
or on opening of fuse compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with [5] [30]-mA trip
sensitivity.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip rat-
ings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluores-
cent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating
equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module
with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable
handle.
2.6 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrument Transformers: NEMA EI 21.1, IEEE C57.13, and the following:
1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy
class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Ratios shall be as indicated with accuracy class and burden
suitable for connected relays,meters, and instruments.
3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for
units larger than 3 W.
4. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect
secondaries to ground overcurrent relays to provide selective tripping of main and
tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker ground-fault protection.
B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three-
or four-wire systems and with the following features:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-8 05/13/05
A. IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, plug-in style, solid-state, parallel-connected, sine-wave
low tracking suppression and filtering modules.
B. Minimum single-impulse current rating shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 100,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 100,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
C. Protection modes shall be as follows:
1. Line to neutral.
2. Line to ground.
3. Neutral to ground.
D. EMI/RFI Noise Attenuation Using 50-ohm Insertion Loss Test: 55 dB at 100 kHz.
E. UL 1449 clamping levels shall not exceed 800 V, line to neutral and line to ground on
277/480 V systems.
F. Withstand Capabilities: 3000 Category C surges with less than 5 percent change in
clamping voltage.
G. Accessories shall include the following:
* 1. Form-C contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitor-
ing of system operation. Contacts to reverse position on failure of any surge diver-
sion module.
2. Audible alarm activated on failure of any surge diversion module.
3. Six-digit transient-counter set to totalize transient surges that deviate from the sine-
wave envelope by more than 125 V.
2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available
fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: PRMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug.
Provide electronic trip unit circuit breakers on circuit breaker frames 600 A and
larger with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
•, Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-7 05/13/05
C. Insulation and isolation for main and vertical buses of feeder sections.
D. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of
feeder sections.
E. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switch-
board.
F. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit-breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
G. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: Include the following features:
1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as
switchboard.
2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism.
3. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be eas-
ily removable for drilling and cutting.
4. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable
drops into switchboard.
5. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support ca-
bles indicated, including those for future installation.
H. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire, unless otherwise indicated. Include the
following features:
1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity
with feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
2. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) minimum size, drawn-temper copper of
98 percent conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-
circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment
grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in
vertical run.
3. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.
4. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Buses, and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capac-
ity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for
future extensions from both ends.
5. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.
6. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses, unless otherwise
indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.
Bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus is braced.
I. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connec-
tions, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
2.4 TVSS DEVICES
lo
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards ',
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-6 05/13/05
A. Spares: For the following:
1. Potential transformer fuses.
2. Control-poser fuses.
3. Fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers.
4. Fuses for fused switches.
5. fuses for fused power-circuit devices.
B. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. Square D Co.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboard: Fixed, individually mounted main de-
vice,panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned.
B. Front- and Side-Accessible Switchboard: Fixed, individually mounted main device,
panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned.
C. Front- and Rear-Accessible Switchboard: Front and rear aligned, with features as fol-
lows:
1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.
2. Branch Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.
D. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.
E. Main-Bus Continuous: 1600A.
2.3 FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard
gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
B. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-5 05/13/05
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchboards to provide protection from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside switchboards; install electric heating (250-W per
section) to prevent condensation.
D. Handle switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and
structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interrup-
tions. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
3. Proceed with utility interruptions only after receiving Architect's written authoriza-
tions.
C. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the follow-
ing, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
D. Service Conditions: NEMA PB2, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
2. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construc-
tion, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-4 05/13/05
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
G. Manufacturer's field service report.
H. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchboard load connec-
tions have been made, for record.
I. Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in maintenance manu-
als specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout," include the following:
I. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protec-
tive devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent pro-
tective device.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the Inter-
National Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having juris-
diction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 2.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchboards, including clearances between switchboards, and adjacent surfaces and
other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Pro-
tect from exposure to dirt, fumes,water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16441-3 05/13/05
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
C. Short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective de-
vices.
d. Descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insula-
tion and isolation.
e. Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility
company.
f. Mimic-bus diagram.
g. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
h. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcur-
rent protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate be-
tween manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switch-
boards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seis-
mic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." In-
clude the following:
Alftk
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
internal and external parts during a seismic event."
3. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
internal and external parts during a seismic event and the unit will be fully opera-
tional after the event."
4. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
5. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish, for color selection.
E. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Fuses."
2. Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
3. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
D. RMS: Root mean square.
E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
F. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, TVSS device,
ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchboards
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16441-1 05/13/05
END OF SECTION 16430
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-15 05/13/05
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove
paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
).8 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 STARTUP SERVICES
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that switchgear is installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal
by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies AMR*,
with requirements in Division 16 Sections.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for energizing
and de-energizing, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and
schedules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' ad-
vance notice.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear ''
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-14 05/13/05
1. Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified
testing.
C. Testing: After installing switchgear and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated in
NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
a. Switchgear: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.1.
b. Circuit Breakers: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.6.
C. Protective Relays: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.9.
d. Instrument Transformers: Perform tests and inspections stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.10.
e. Metering and Instrumentation: Perform tests and inspections stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.11.
f. Ground-Fault Systems: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.14.
g. Battery Systems: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.18.
h. Surge Arresters: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.19.
i. Capacitors: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.20.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear pan-
els so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies de-
tected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-13 05/13/05
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch (100-mm), channel-iron floor and attach by bolt-
ing.
1. Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into floor or concrete base.
2. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Ex-
tend base no more than 2 inches (50 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum
dimensions of switchgear, unless otherwise indicated. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into bases. Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Bus Diagram and Instructions: Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the
front of switchgear.
C. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control and
key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding conductors for switchgear with ground continuity to main
electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,
use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.S FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear '
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16430-12 05/13/05
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and
switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and discon-
nected positions.
2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices
without removal from switchgear.
3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear
class relays.
B. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating
carriage arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.
C. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified and compartmented steel box, or cabinet with lockable
door.
D. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using sym-
bols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.
1. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which
applied, to produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear compo-
nents and connections.
2. Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect.
3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
B. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution compo-
nents, and major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and
connections as follows:
1. Frame size of each circuit breaker.
2. Trip rating for each circuit breaker.
3. Conduit and wire size for each feeder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-11 05/13/05
E. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, , ;
with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-
breaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two Type "a" and two
Type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal
block in stationary housing.
F. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking
mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and discon-
nected positions. Include the following features:
1. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position
when it is closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected,
test, or disconnected position.
2. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from
connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment
door closed, unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open
circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the
structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different posi-
tions includes the following:
a. Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary dis-
connect devices and ground contact engaged.
b. Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact
disengaged.
G. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in discon-
nected position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit
breaker from switchgear.
H. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to
secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.
I. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.
J. Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.
K. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or
equivalent design and electrical interlocks.
L. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Instantaneous,with adjustable pickup voltage.
M. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.
N. Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.
O. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie
circuit breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-10 05/13/05
1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges
and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for the duty required.
2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13.
B. Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for
each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.
C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating
mechanism with the following features:
1. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
2. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.
3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with optional manual charging.
4. Operation counter.
D. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two cur-
rent transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:
1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,
independent of each other in both action and adjustment.
2. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from mi-
nus 5 to plus 40 deg C.
3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.
4. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on
circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods.
5. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked
"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum."
6. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions.
Equip short-time-trip function for switchable IZt operation.
7. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.
8. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three
trip-time-delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection
for the following:
a. Four-wire, double-ended substation.
9. Ground-fault alarm. Arrange to provide protection for the following:
a. Four-wire circuit or system.
10. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip
device to indicate type of fault.
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16430-9 05/13/05
4) Relay malfunction.
n. A clear key shall be available to clear the cause of trip indicators.
o. A phase current indicator shall be provided on the front panel.
p. The relay shall be able to communicate. The information available shall
include:
1) Settings.
2) Phase and ground current as a percentage of CT.
3) Status.
4) Simulation of trips.
q. The relay shall comply with Surge withstand capability standards such as
ANSI C37.90 and IEC 255.4.
2. Automatic Throwover Controller: The switchgear shall be provided with all re-
quired components, wiring, etc. to enable an automatic transfer scheme be im-
plemented. Utilize PLC type controller or combination of relays for control of
automatic transfer scheme due to loss of one, or more, sources. Final throwover
sequencing shall be coordinated with the Hospital and Mass Electric Company
prior to implementing.
3. Communications: Relays shall be capable of remote communications via one
Ethernet port for each piece of switchgear. A front panel RS232 communications
port shall be provided for local PC access. All necessary software shall be pro-
vided with the relays.
D. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, sup-
ports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.
E. Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits
through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:
1. Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, in-
cluding primary and secondary fuses.
2. Two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary inter-
locking relays; each transformer connected to line side of associated main circuit
breaker.
a. Secondary windings connected through a relay or relays to control bus to
effect an automatic transfer scheme.
3. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses with current-limiting and
overload protection.
F. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and
complying with the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-8 05/13/05
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
C. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Min-
utes: Plus or minus 2 percent.
i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;
stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
4. Communications: Meters shall be capable of remote communications via one
Ethernet port for each piece of switchgear. A front panel RS232 communications
port shall be provided for local PC access. All necessary software shall be pro-
vided with the meters and relays.
C. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types as shown and settings as determined in short
circuit and coordination studies specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protec-
tive Device Coordination." Provide digital multifunction relays equipped with commu-
nications capabilities.
1. Main, Tie, Feeder, and Transformer Protection Relays (Digitrip OPTIM 1050 or
equal): Protection shall be provided using a single static relay. Relay and protec-
tion features shall include:
a. Three phase (51) and ground (51G) time overcurrent
b. Three phase (50) and ground (50G) instantaneous overcurrent
C. Independent phase and ground curves; ANSI, IAC, and IEC/BS142 curve
shapes: Definite time, moderately inverse, normal inverse, very inverse, ex-
tremely inverse.
d. 40 "time dials" for phase and ground time overcurrent curves.
e. Separate pickup level and output relay for each protection element.
f. Three outputs: Trip, auxiliary trip, and service.
g. Trip record: Display of last five trips.
h. 86 lockout available.
i. Peak demand (kW)
j. Energy (kWh)
k. Power factor
1. Total harmonic distortion (THD)
M. The relay shall have front panel LED indicators for:
1) Cause of trip.
2) Pickup.
3) Relay in service
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16430-7 05/13/05
2. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus AM*,
with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. In-
clude braces for neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders.
3. Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for
spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.
4. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum
conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
5. Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus.
6. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.
7. Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions
equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
8. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with
pressure connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum
size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm).
9. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit
currents.
10. Neutral bus equipped with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit
neutral conductors. Neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders are braced.
11. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) cop-
per bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.
12. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground
bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.
13. Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-
retardant tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.
a. Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm), minimum.
b. Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be re-
moved and reinstalled.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy
class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable
for connected relays, meters, and instruments.
B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-
based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential termi-
nals rated to 600 V.
2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-6 05/13/05
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
2. Square D Co./troupe Schneider NA.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.
B. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.
C. Finish: IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting
primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.
D. Section barriers between main and tie circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended
to rear of section.
E. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main
and tie circuit breaker.
F. Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers
and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.
G. Fabricate enclosure with removable, hinged, rear cover panels, secured by captive
thumbscrews,to allow access to rear interior of switchgear.
H. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include
the following:
1. Bus transition sections.
2. Incoming-line pull sections.
3. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
4. Pull box on top of switchgear for extra room for pulling cable, with removable
top, front, and side covers and ventilation provisions adequate to maintain air
temperature in pull box within same limits as switchgear.
a. Set pull box back from front to clear circuit-breaker lifting mechanism.
b. Bottom: Insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes for cable
drops into switchgear.
C. Cable Supports: Arranged to ease cabling and adequate to support cables
indicated, including those for future installation.
I. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connec-
tions are not permitted.
1. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16430-5 05/13/05
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or oth-
ers unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interrup-
tions. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other
items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the fol-
lowing conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construc-
tion that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equip-
ment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equip-
ment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing con-
tents.
1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformer
fuses, control power fuses, and fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit break-
ers.
2. Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
3. Touchup Paint: Three containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 0.5
pint (250 mL).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-4 05/13/05
1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchgear and all installed components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protec-
tive devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent pro-
tective device.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the Inter-
National Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the lnterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' prod-
ucts complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path.
B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent con-
densation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive sub-
stances, and physical damage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to pro-
vide pathway for moving switchgear into place.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16430-3 05/13/05
2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate ..,
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working
clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are
prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adja-
cent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchgear,
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic
forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include
the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's
color charts showing colors available for mimic bus.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that com-
ply with requirements.
H. Manufacturer's field service report.
I. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connec-
tions have been made, for record.
J. Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures," include the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16430-2 05/13/05
w SECTION 16430 - SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage, power circuit-breaker switchgear
rated 1000 V and less for use in ac systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work" for mounting and an-
choring switchgear.
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing
communication and metering requirements.
3. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fuses and spare-fuse cabinets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, perform-
ance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Nameplate legends.
C. Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, in-
cluding phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.
d. Current rating of buses.
e. Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly.
f. Mimic-bus diagram.
g. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcur-
rent protective devices and auxiliary components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16430-1 05/13/05
A. Clean enclosed controllers internally, on completion of installation, according to manu-
facturer's written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to as-
sist in cleaning.
3.10 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that enclosed controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and in-
stallation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
3.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and sched-
ules. `
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Pro-
cedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 16420
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers Amok
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16420-10 05/13/05
A,,,,, 3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 16 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated in
NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16.
2. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including pretesting and
adjusting solid-state controllers.
D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.9 CLEANING
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16420-9 05/13/05
A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics
of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and
load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. See Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general installation
requirements.
B. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-
steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks
complying with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases complying with Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
E. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with require-
ments in Division 16 Section "Fuses."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controller components and control wiring according to Division 16 Sec-
tion "Electrical Identification."
3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 16 Section "Conduc-
tors and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applica-
ble.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and auto-
matic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cut-
outs, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16420-8 05/13/05
1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential termi-
nals rated to 600 V.
2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
C. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes:
Plus or minus 2 percent.
i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;
stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
H. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output
contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.
1. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output
contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal,
current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage;with adjustable re-
sponse delay.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosed
controllers before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with require-
ments, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16420-7 05/13/05
b. Controller on.
C. Overload trip.
d. Loss of phase.
e. Shorted silicon-controlled rectifier.
4. Automatic voltage-reduction controls to reduce voltage when motor is running ar
light load.
5. Motor running contactor operating automatically when full voltage is applied to
motor.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Description: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1, un-
less otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
I. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
4. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty
type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a
factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed
position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.
F. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and
plus or minus 2 percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide transfer device with an off
position. Meters shall indicate the following:
1. Ammeter: Output current, with current sensors rated to suit application.
2. Voltmeter: Output voltage.
3. Frequency Meter: Output frequency.
G. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-
based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16420-6 05/13/05
B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer with a con-
trol power transformer of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and
control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity.
C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect
switch.
1. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejec-
tion-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protec-
tion according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by a nationally recognized testing labo-
ratory.
2. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch.
3. Circuit-Breaker Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with
field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
D. Adjustable Overload Relay: Dip switch selectable for motor running overload protection
with NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristic, and selected to protect motor
against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. Provide relay with Class II
ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting.
E. Multispeed Enclosed Controller: Match controller to motor type, application, and num-
ber of speeds; include the following accessories:
1. Compelling relay to ensure motor will start only at low speed.
2. Accelerating relay to ensure properly timed acceleration through speeds lower than
that selected.
3. Decelerating relay to ensure automatically timed deceleration through each speed.
F. Star-Delta Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition with adjustable time delay.
G. Part-Winding Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition with separate overload relays
for starting and running sequences.
H. Autotransformer Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition.
I. Solid-State, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, suitable for use with
NEMA MG 1,Design B,polyphase, medium induction motors.
1. Adjustable acceleration rate control utilizing voltage or current ramp, and adjust-
able starting torque control with up to 500 percent current limitation for 20 sec-
onds.
2. Surge suppressor in solid-state power circuits providing 3-phase protection against
damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.
3. LED indicators showing motor and control status, including the following condi-
tions:
a. Control power available.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16420-5 05/13/05
D. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and
control circuits to which they connect.
E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings
and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of
inotor and load.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but not less than one set of
three of each type and rating.
2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Manual and Magnetic Enclosed Controllers:
a. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.
b. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
C. Rockwell Automation Allen-Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group.
d. Siemens/Furnas Controls.
e. Square D Co.
2.2 MANUAL ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with toggle action and overload
element.
2.3 MAGNETIC ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless
otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16420-4 05/13/05
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for en-
closed controllers, including clearances between enclosed controllers, and for adjacent
surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to pre-
vent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, cor-
rosive substances, and physical damage.
B. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient
wattage to prevent condensation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
POW A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction in-
cluding conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16420-3 05/13/05
cal components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support loca-
tions, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed con-
trollers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16
Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Field Test Reports: Written reports specified in Part 3.
G. Manufacturer's field service report.
H. Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Sec-
tion "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed com-
ponents.
I. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor run-
ning overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project site, a ser-
vice center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source from
a single manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16420-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16420 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ac general-purpose controllers rated 600 V and less that are sup-
plied as enclosed units.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for low-voltage power, con-
trol, and communication surge suppressors.
2. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fuses in fusible switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and manufac-
turer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and fin-
ishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Nameplate legends.
C. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcur-
rent protective devices in combination controllers.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manu-
facturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working
clearances, and required area above and around enclosed controllers where pipe and
ducts are prohibited. Show enclosed controller layout and relationships between electri-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Controllers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16420-1 05/13/05
1. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION 16415
AWK Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16415-11 05/13/05
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integ- 1+
rity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
C. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational func-
tion for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches
and of emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
C. Initiate transfer switch testing from remote monitoring software.
d. Verify time-delay settings.
e. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of con-
trol settings.
f. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-
switch operations.
g. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values ex-
ceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50
percent from other poles.
h. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,
transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power,
and engine cool-down and shutdown.
5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices
for power delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
b. Observe reaction of circuit-interrupting devices when simulated fault cur-
rent is applied at sensors.
D. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and paralleling switchgear and run them con-
currently.
E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as
specified below. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16415-10 05/13/05
dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.3 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS
A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication re-
quirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway
sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, includ-
ing connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the fol-
lowing field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insula-
tion-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use
test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manu-
facturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16415-9 05/13/05
B. Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or communication link AIANN.,
shall not affect functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure of com-
munication link, automatic transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-
contained operation. Automatic transfer-switch sensing, controlling, or operating func-
tion shall not depend on remote panel for proper operation.
C. Remote Annunciation and Control Panel: Solid-state components. Include the follow-
ing features:
1. Controls and indicating lights grouped together for each transfer switch.
2. Label each indicating light control group. Indicate the transfer switch it controls,
location of switch, and load it serves.
3. Digital Communication Capability: Matched to that of transfer switches super-
vised.
4. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and
primer.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment.
Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay
settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test
complying with NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Four-Pole Switches: Where four-pole switches are indicated, install neutral switching.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
B. Floor-Mounted Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Ex-
tend base no more than 2 inches (50 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16415-8 05/13/05
1. Means to lock the bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates the transfer
switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer
switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch opera-
tion, except for testing or maintenance.
2. No Load Break: The bypass/isolation switches• shall be no load break to allow
the transfer switch to be isolated and deenergized for maintenance, without inter-
rupting power to the load.
3. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provides physical separation from
live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.
4. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand
Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch,
and with same phase arrangement and number of poles.
5. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches do not exceed those of auto-
matic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.
6. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be per-
formed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.
7. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs
give detailed operating instructions.
8. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components
from front without removing other parts or main power conductors.
9. The automatic transfer switch shall be completely isolated form the by-
pass/isolation switch by means of insulating barriers and separate access doors to
positively prevent hazard to operating personnel while servicing the automatic
transfer switch.
C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Fac-
tory-installed copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated
available short-circuit current.
2.6 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Functional Description: Include the following functions for indicated transfer switches:
1. Indication of sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings
of transfer-switch controls.
2. Indication of switch position.
3. Indication of switch in test mode.
4. Indication of failure of digital communication link.
5. Key-switch or user-code access to control functions of panel.
6. Control of switch-test initiation.
7. Control of switch operation in either direction.
8. Control of time-delay bypass for transfer to normal source.
9. Coordinate and Refer to Division 16 "Modifications to Existing Paralleling
Switchgear" for transfer switch features and settings needed for proper function
of existing Paralleling Switchgear and remote monitoring software.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16415-7 05/13/05
G. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and -"411
emergency-source sensing circuits.
1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal
Source Available."
2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency
Source Available."
H. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw con-
tacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
1. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer
switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of
normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.
J. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and
normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V do minimum.
K. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and fac-
tory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator
controls after retransfer of load to normal source.
L. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine gen-
erator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers
and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at pre- ,ok
set intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to
30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period,
and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:
1. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and with-
out load transfer.
2. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
3. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not
available.
4. Engine-Generator Exerciser function shall be capable of being initiated from the
existing ISO Generator Synchronization Switchgear.
2.5 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES
A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power di-
rectly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. In-
clude the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and by-
pass/isolation switch:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16415-6 05/13/05
F. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only
when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship
and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer
when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be com-
pleted within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within
2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.
G. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect
motors before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval af-
ter transfer. Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to auto-
matic transfer switch. Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable
between 1 and 60 seconds, and settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling mo-
tor-control circuit inrush and seal currents are rated for actual currents to be encoun-
tered.
H. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral posi-
tion arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an
intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from
0.5 to 30 seconds minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated.
Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources
are live.
2.4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER-SWITCH FEATURES
A. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Senses low phase-to-ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal,
and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set
for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
B. Time delay for override of normal-source voltage sensing delays transfer and engine
start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.
C. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevents premature transfer to generator. Pickup
voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90
percent. Pickup frequency is adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set
for pickup at 95 percent.
D. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and
factory set for 10 minutes. Provides automatic defeat of delay on loss of voltage or sus-
tained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
E. Test Switch: Simulates normal-source failure.
F. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16415-5 05/13/05
G. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and
UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop
Drawings, either by color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers
at terminations.
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type suitable for types and sizes of field wiring
indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or
bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
1. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or
electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both
directions.
J. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated
current between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-
case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conven-
tional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have sepa-
rate arcing contacts.
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate posi-
tion stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both
sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit
automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.
D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts
operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30
seconds.
E. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or an-
nunciator and control panel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16415-4 05/13/05
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with NFPA 99.
H. Comply with NFPA 110.
I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Contactor Transfer Switches:
a. Russelectric, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and
total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent
of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by
protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indi-
cated, based on testing according to UL 1008.
C. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer
switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or an-
nunciator and control panels have communication capability matched with remote de-
vice. Transfer switches shall be capable of being monitored and controlled from exist-
ing ISO Generator Synchronization Switchgear.
D. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings is plus or minus 2 percent or
better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
E. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed volt-
age-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41.
Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
F. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16415-3 05/13/05
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Sec-
tion " Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instruc-
tions, including software, where applicable.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training,
parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight
hours from time of notification.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capa-
bility to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL)
as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having ju-
risdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches, bypass/isolation switches,
nonautomatic transfer switches, remote annunciators, and remote annunciator and con-
trol panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, for emergency service under UL 1008, by a testing agency ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16415-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
2. Bypass/isolation switches.
3. Remote annunciation and control system.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps" for automatic trans-
fer switches for fire pumps.
2. Division 16 Section "Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear" for re-
mote communications and features related to the existing Paralleling Switchgear.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clear-
ances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and ma-
terial lists for each switch specified.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Single-line diagram. Show connections between transfer
switch, bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking
provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer
switches, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Divi-
sion 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on ac-
tual test of assembled components or on calculation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transfer Switches
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16415-1 05/13/05
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified test-
ing.
C. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical cir-
cuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with require-
ments.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indi-
cated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case cir-
cuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Open
or remove doors or panels so connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches and
circuit breakers checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16410
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16410-7 05/13/05
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. ,,
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclo-
sures before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
''*k
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section Electrical Identification."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control
and indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16410-6 05/13/05
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug;
with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
C. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and IZt response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through rat-
ings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral
limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening
or on opening of fuse compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5 and 30-mA trip
sensitivity.
7. Molded-Case Switch: Molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip rat-
ings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of con-
ductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluores-
cent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating
equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module
with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system.
5. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 per-
cent of rated voltage.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R.
2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250,Type 4X, stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
4. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16410-5 05/13/05
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Fusible Switches:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b. Square D Co.
2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b. Square D Co.
3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground-Fault Trip:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b. Square D Co.
2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to ac-
commodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available
fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16410-4 05/13/05
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit
breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the Inter-
National Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having juris-
diction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for en-
closed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adja-
cent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the follow-
ing conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not
exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Main-
tain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16410-3 05/13/05
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Current and voltage ratings.
C. Short-circuit current rating.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcur-
rent protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manu-
facturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the fol-
lowing:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
F. Manufacturer's field service report.
G. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16410-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL.
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used
for the following:
1. Feeder and branch-circuit protection.
2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle
switches used for disconnecting means.
2. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for individually enclosed, fusible switches
used as feeder protection.
3. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fusible devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
B. RMS: Root mean square.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indi-
cated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics,ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16410-1 05/13/05
A. Protective-Relay Settings: Verify that settings shown on Drawings are appropriate for
final system configuration and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, recommend
final relay settings for approval before making final adjustments.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed switchgear. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's
written recommendations, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not
controlled for temperature and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service con-
ditions.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel in the following:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Opera-
tion and Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 16341
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16341-13 05/13/05
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components, installation, and connection of switchgear; and to
pretest and adjust switchgear components. Report results in writing.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field qual-
ity-control testing.
C. Testing: After installing switchgear and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform inspections and tests specified below. Report values that do
not meet manufacturer's written recommendations. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
2. Switchgear: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.
3. Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.
4. Protective Relays: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.9.
5. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.10.
6. Metering and Instrumentation: Perform inspections and tests stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.11.
7. Ground-Fault Systems: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.14.
8. Battery Systems: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.18.
9. Surge Arresters: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, Sec-
tion 7.19.
10. Capacitors: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.20.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of switchgear assembly. Make bus joints
and connections accessible to a portable scanner and perform scanning during a period
of normal working load as advised by Owner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform one additional follow-up infrared scan at
same locations as before, 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
scanning device used for electrical distribution equipment.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all connec-
tions checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16341-12 05/13/05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and compo-
nents may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved, pro-
vided the required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the identification
of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building maintenance
procedures.
B. Anchor each switchgear assembly to at least two 4-inch (100-mm), channel-iron floor
sills arranged according to the manufacturer's written recommendations; attach by tack
welding or bolting.
1. Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into floor or concrete or
mounting base.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Diagram and Instructions: Frame under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.
1. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including con-
trol and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
2. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for
a copy of the maintenance manual.
3. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution com-
ponents, and major loads.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect switchgear ground bus to common building ground indicated on Drawings.
B. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16341-11 05/13/05
C. Rack: Provide a two-step rack that fits available space indicated. Batteries are pro-
vided with necessary electrical connections between cells and between rows of cells and
include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads.
D. Accessories: Include the following:
1. Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales.
2. Hydrometer syringes.
3. Set of socket wrenches and other tools required for battery maintenance.
4. Wall-mounted, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items.
5. Set of cell numerals.
E. Charger: Static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic regulation and provision
for manual and automatic adjustment of the charging rate. Unit automatically main-
tains output voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated charger output current,
with ac input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent and input-frequency varia-
tion of plus or minus 3 Hz. Other features of charger include the following:
1. DC ammeter.
2. DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; operates with
toggle switch to select between battery and charger voltages.
3. Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights to indicate circuit ground,
connected in series between negative and positive terminals, with midpoint junc-
tion connected to ground by normally open push-button contact.
4. Capacity: Sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and ..
2.25 V per cell, and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell.
5. Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch provides for transferring to
higher charging rate. Charger operates automatically after switch operation until
manually reset.
6. AC power supply is 120 V, 60 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation
in voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power
supply for any interval, charger automatically resumes charging battery. Charger
regulates rate of charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses
or circuit breakers from opening.
7. Protective Feature: Current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current
to rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac
supply; to protect charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit
on output terminals.
8. Electrical Filtering: Reduces charger's audible noise to less than 26 dB.
2.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials: Refer to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." Identify units, de-
vices, controls, and wiring.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16341-10 05/13/05
m. The relay shall comply with Surge withstand capability standards such as
ANSI C37.90 and IEC 255.4.
3. Automatic Throwover Controller: The switchgear shall be provided with all re-
quired components, wiring, etc. to enable an automatic transfer scheme be im-
plemented. Utilize PLC type controller or combination of relays for control of
automatic transfer scheme due to loss of one, or more, sources. Final throwover
sequencing shall be coordinated with the Hospital and Mass Electric Company
prior to implementing.
4. Communications: Relays shall be capable of remote communications via one
Ethernet port for each piece of switchgear. A front panel RS232 communications
port shall be provided for local PC access. All necessary software shall be pro-
vided with the relays.
G. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with
NEMA LA 1.
1. Install in cable termination compartments and connect in each phase of circuit.
2. Coordinate rating with circuit voltage.
H. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, sup-
ports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.
I. Control Power Supply: DC battery system.
J. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and
complying with the following:
1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges,
and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for the duty required.
2.7 CONTROL BATTERY SYSTEM
A. System Requirements: Battery has number of cells and ampere-hour capacity and rat-
ing as indicated, based on an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25 deg C with electro-
lyte at normal level and minimum ambient temperature of 13 deg C. Cycle battery be-
fore shipment to guarantee rated capacity on installation. Arrange battery to operate
ungrounded.
B. Battery: Lead-calcium type in sealed, clear plastic or glass containers, complete with
electrolyte, fully charged, and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells. Each con-
tainer weighs not more than 70 lb (32 kg) and contains not more than three cells. Bat-
teries are suitable for service at an ambient temperature ranging from minus 18 to 25
deg C. Current output does not vary more than 0.8 percent for each degree below 25
deg C down to minus 8 deg C.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16341-9 05/13/05
7) Five programmable relay outputs.
8) One solid state trip output.
9) Eight analog transducer outputs.
k. The relay shall provide complete monitoring and metering functions inchid-
ing:
1) Fault locator with record of last 10 faults
2) An event recorder with record of last 128 events.
3) Waveform capture with storage of 128 cycles of data.
1. User interfaces include:
1) A 40 character display and keypad.
2) Indicator LED's on front panel for quick visual indication of status.
2. Feeder and Transformer Protection Relays (Digitrip 3000 or equal): Feeder and
Transformer protection shall be provided using a single static relay. Relay and
protection features shall include the following functions, as determined by the
coordination study:
a. Three phase (51) and ground (51G) time overcurrent
b. Three phase (50) and ground (50G) instantaneous overcurrent
C. Independent phase and ground curves; ANSI, IAC, and IEC/BS142 curve
shapes: Definite time, moderately inverse, normal inverse, very inverse, ex-
tremely inverse.
d. 40 "time dials" for phase and ground time overcurrent curves.
e. Separate pickup level and output relay for each protection element.
f. Three outputs: Trip, auxiliary trip, and service.
g. Trip record: Display of last five trips.
h. 86 lockout available.
i. The relay shall have front panel LED indicators for:
1) Cause of trip.
2) Pickup.
3) Relay in service
4) Relay malfunction.
j. A clear key shall be available to clear the cause of trip indicators.
k. A phase current indicator shall be provided on the front panel.
1. The relay shall be able to communicate. The information available shall
include:
1) Settings.
2) Phase and ground current as a percentage of CT.
3) Status.
4) Simulation of trips.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16341-8 05/13/05
#Owl f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Min-
utes: Plus or minus 2 percent.
i. Percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for all currents and voltages.
j. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;
stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
4. Provide an addressable communication card capable of transmitting all data, re-
motely controlling and programming the system over a compatible two-wire local
area network (LAN) to a central personal computer for storage, analysis, display
and printout. The network shall also be capable of transmitting data in RS-232c
format via a translator module. There shall also be an option to connect the sys-
tem to an Ethernet network via either a 10Base-T copper cable or fiber optic ca-
ble.
F. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types as shown and settings as determined in short
circuit and coordination studies specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protec-
tive Device Coordination." Provide digital multifunction relays equipped with commu-
nications capabilities.
1. Main and Tie Device Relays: Incoming line and Tie protection shall be provided
using a single feeder management relay (Digitrip 3000 or equal). Relay and pro-
tection features shall include the following functions, as determined by the coor-
dination study:
a. Complete time overcurrent.
b. Complete instantaneous overcurrent.
C. Independent phase and ground curves, ANSI curve shapes: definite time,
moderately inverse, normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse.
d. Directional overcurrent.
e. Undervoltage and overvoltage.
f. Negative sequence voltage.
g. Undervoltage automatic restoration.
h. Bus underfrequency
i. Underfrequency automatic restoration.
j. Control shall include the following:
1) Manual close control.
2) Cold load pickup control.
3) Four settings groups.
4) 20 programmable logic inputs.
5) Two breaker control relay outputs.
6) One internal failure relay output.
: Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16341-7 05/13/05
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on phos-
phatizing-treated metal surfaces.
C. Bus Transition Unit: Arranged to suit bus and adjacent units.
D. Incoming-Line Unit: Arranged to suit incoming line.
E. Outgoing Feeder Units: As indicated.
F. Auxiliary Compartments: Arranged to house meters, relays, controls, and auxiliary
equipment; isolated from medium-voltage components.
G. Key Interlocks: Arranged to effect interlocking schemes indicated.
H. Provisions for Future Key Interlocks: Mountings and hardware required for future in-
stallation of locks, where indicated.
2.6 COMPONENTS
A. Main Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points.
B. Ground Bus: Copper, silver, or tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm);
full length of switchgear.
C. Bus Insulation: Covered with flame-retardant insulation.
D. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy
class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated (or as required by coordination
study); burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and in-
struments.
E. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-
based unit (IQ Analyzer or equal) suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the
following features:
1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential termi-
nals rated to 600 V.
2. Switch selectable digital display of the following:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
C. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16341-6 05/13/05
of 17 or less, the transient voltage during interruption does not exceed twice the
rated line-to-ground voltage of the system.
2. Contact-Wear Indicator: Readily accessible to field maintenance personnel.
3. Spare Auxiliary Contacts: Six minimum.
E. Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switch-
gear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include extension rails, lifting de-
vice, and transport or dockable dolly or mobile lift, and all other items necessary to re-
move circuit breaker from housing and transport to remote location. Include a racking
handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and disconnected positions
and a secondary test coupler to permit testing of circuit breaker without removal from
switchgear. Include relay and meter test plugs.
F. Low-de-Voltage Alarm: Monitors dc, control power voltage and indicates an alarn-1 at
a location shown on Drawings when voltage falls to an adjustable value indicative of
impending battery failure. Factory set at 80 percent of full-charge voltage.
G. Grounding and Test Device System: Suitable for phasing out, testing, and grounding
switchgear bus or feeder if device is installed in place of circuit breaker; includes the fol-
lowing:
1. Portable Grounding and Test Device: Interchangeable with drawout, medium-
voltage circuit breakers to provide interlocked electrical access to either bus or
feeder; electrically operated.
#low* 2. System control cabinet permanently mounted near switchgear.
3. Portable Remote-Control Station: For grounding and test device.
4. Control-Cabinet Coupler Cable: Adequate length to connect device inserted in
any switchgear cubicle and control cabinet.
S. Remote-Control Coupler Cable: 50-foot (15-m) cable length to connect control
cabinet and portable remote-control station.
6. Permanent Control Power Wiring: From control cabinet to power source.
7. Protective Cover: Fabricated of heavy-duty plastic and fitted to device.
8. Approval of Grounding and Test Device System: Obtain approval of final system
design from power company and agency designated by Owner to handle future
maintenance of medium-voltage switchgear.
H. Circuit-Breaker Test Cabinet: Separately mounted and containing push buttons for cir-
cuit-breaker closing and tripping, control relay, fuses, and secondary coupler with cable
approximately 9 feet (3 m) long. Include a set of secondary devices for operating cir-
cuit breaker if removed from switchgear and moved near test cabinet. Include provi-
sion for storage of test and maintenance accessories in cabinet.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Indoor Enclosure: Steel.
00W Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16341-5 05/13/05
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear:
a. Square D Co.
b. Cutler Hammer
2. Metal-Clad Circuit-Breaker Switchgear:
a. Square D Co.
b. Cutler Hammer
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Comply with maximum dimensions indicated
on Drawings.
2.3 RATINGS Amok
A. System Configuration: Switchgear suitable for application in three-phase, 60-Hz,
grounded-neutral system.
1. System Voltage: 13.8 kV nominal; 15 kV maximum.
2.4 METAL-CLAD CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR
A. Comply with IEEE C37.20.2.
B. Nominal Interrupting-Capacity Class: 500 MVA.
C. Ratings: Based on IEEE C37.04 and ANSI C37.06.
1. Main-Bus Continuous: Amperage as shown on drawings.
D. Vacuum Circuit Breakers: Drawout mounted units using three individual, vacuum-
sealed contact modules and including the following features:
1. Circuit-Breaker Design: Operates at rated voltage to interrupt fault current
within its rating within three cycles of trip initiation. For systems with X/R ratio
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16341-4 05/13/05
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path as indicated.
B. Store so condensation will not form on or in switchgear.
C. Apply temporary heat where required to obtain suitable service conditions.
D. Handle switchgear using factory-installed lifting provisions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or oth-
ers unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interrup-
tions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear with other construction.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Con-
crete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Six, of each type and rating of fuse used. Include spares for power
fuses, potential transformer fuses, control power fuses, and fuses and fusible de-
vices for fused circuit breakers.
2. Spare Indicating Lights: Six, of each type installed.
3. Touchup Paint: Three containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 0.5
pint (250 mL).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16341-3 05/13/05
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working
clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are
prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adja-
cent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of switchgear certifying that the prod-
ucts furnished comply with requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
G. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of switchgear with requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: For switchgear to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing switchgear
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service per-
formance. ,,wk
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Quality Control," an independent testing agency shall meet OSHA criteria for
accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or shall be a full-member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
switchgear and are based on specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with IEEE C2.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16341-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16341 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes medium-voltage switchgear and associated auxiliary equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for cable terminations at switch-
gear.
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing
communication and metering requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each component, including the following:
1. Features, characteristics, and ratings of individual circuit breakers.
2. Features, characteristics, and ratings of individual interrupter switches.
3. Time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices, including
circuit-breaker trip devices and fusible devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, load-
ings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection. Include the following:
1. Nameplate legends.
2. Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, including
phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.
3. Current ratings of buses.
4. Short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchgear assembly.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and dif-
ferentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16341-1 05/13/05
1. After installing surge protective devices, but before electrical circuitry has been en-
ergized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
ATS, Section 7.19. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest after repairs or replacements are made.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and elec-
trical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's installation
requirements.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain surge protective devices.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for maintain-
ing suppressors.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 16289
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transient Voltage Suppression
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16289-7 05/13/05
9. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A, 250-V, ac, for remote monitoring of protec- .•
tion status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.
10. Surge-event operations counter.
C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per phase.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with voltages
of 480Y/277 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service en-
trance ground.
B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors between suppressor
and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufac-
turer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1. Provide multipole, 15-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for the suppres-
sor, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transient Voltage Suppression
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16289-6 05/13/05
1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3. Integral disconnect switch.
4. Redundant suppression circuits.
5. Redundant replaceable modules.
6. Arrangement with copper busbars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neu-
tral bus, and ground bus.
7. Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
9. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of pro-
tection status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.
10. Surge-event operations counter.
C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per phase.
D. Connection Means: Permanently wired.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with voltages
of 480Y/277 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.
2.3 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type with the following features and
accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
B. Surge Protective Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules and
the following features and accessories:
1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3. Integral disconnect switch.
4. Redundant suppression circuits.
5. Redundant replaceable modules.
6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
7. Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transient Voltage Suppression
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16289-5 05/13/05
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Manufacturers of a Broad Line of Suppressors:
a. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc.
b. Atlantic Scientific Corp.
c. Current Technology, Inc.
d. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
e. Entrelec, Inc.
f. Innovative Technology, Inc.
g. Intermatic, Inc.
h. LEA International.
i. Leviton Manufacturing Co. Inc.
I. Liebert Corp.
k. Northern Technologies.
1. Siemens Energy & Automation.
m. Square D Co.
n. Sutton Designs, Inc.
o. Transtector Systems, Inc.
p. Tycor International, Inc.
q. United Power, Inc.
r. Zero Surge Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Category A and Telephone/Data Line Suppressors:
a. MCG Electronics, Inc.
b. NTE Electronics, Inc.
C. Telebyte Technology, Inc.
3. Manufacturers of Gas-Tube Suppressors:
a. Sankosha U.S.A., Inc.
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type with the following features and
accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
B. Surge Protective Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules and
the following features and accessories:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transient Voltage Suppression `
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16289-4 05/13/05
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interrup-
tions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
C. Service Conditions: Rate surge protective devices for continuous operation under the fol-
lowing conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal
system operating voltage.
2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg Q.
3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.
4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6000 m) above sea level.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for
maintenance.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or re-
place components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Warranty for Plug-in Cord-Connected Surge Suppressors: Written warranty,
executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace electronic equipment connected
to circuits protected by surge suppressors.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transient Voltage Suppression
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16289-3 05/13/05
D. Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression,devices to include in maintenance s,
manuals specified in Division 1.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7
and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the Inter.National
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from
a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical per-
formance of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufac-
turers' products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Substitutions."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. IEEE Compliance: Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low
Voltage AC Power Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide
for Surge Suppressor Testing."
F. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protective De-
vices."
G. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and
UL 1449, "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Placing into Service: Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panel-
boards, control terminals, data terminals to their sources until the surge protective de-
vices are installed and connected.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transient Voltage Suppression
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16289-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16289 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control,
and communication equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices with integral transient voltage
surge suppressors.
2. Division 16 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed transient voltage surge
suppressors.
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for factory-installed transient voltage surge
suppressors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities; shipping, in-
stalled, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transient voltage suppression devices,
certifying that products furnished comply with the following testing and labeling re-
quirements:
1. UL 1283 certification.
2. UL 1449 listing and classification.
C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include
the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Transient Voltage Suppression
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16289-1 05/13/05
Technology standards and with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch (25 mm) per
hour. Voltage unbalance greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of
any phase voltage from nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent dur-
ing test period, is unacceptable.
2. Corrective Actions: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following correc-
tive actions, as appropriate:
a. Adjust transformer taps.
b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.
3. Retests: After corrective actions have been performed, repeat monitoring until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Report: Prepare written report covering monitoring and corrective actions per-
formed.
B. Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage
Switchgear."
END OF SECTION 16271
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16271-9 05/13/05
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and C;ables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, includ-
ing connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the fol-
lowing field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that ground-
ing system at substation is tested at specified value or less.
2. After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
3. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.2. Certify compliance with test parameters.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
D. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
3.6 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE
A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: If requested by Owner, perform the following volt-
age monitoring after Substantial Completion but not more than six months after Final
Acceptance:
1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven
days of three-phase voltage recording at secondary terminals of each transformer.
Use voltmeters with calibration traceable to National Institute of Science and
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers `
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16271-8 05/13/05
B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:
1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.
2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no
feeders will have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions
where transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 16 Sec-
tion "Grounding and Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5
ohms at location of transformer.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformers on concrete bases.
1. Anchor transformers to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written in-
structions, seismic codes at Project, and requirements in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
2. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit and 4 inches (100 min)
high.
3. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforce-
ment as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter
of base.
S. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts, for supported equipment, that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
7. Tack-weld or bolt transformers to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete bases.
Install sills level and grout flush with floor or base.
B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufac-
turer's written instructions and NFPA 70.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16271-7 05/13/05
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each tra ilsformer, ..00%ol
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified
in Division 16 Section " Electrical Identification."
2.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Design and fabricate transformers, and anchorage devices for them, to withstand static
and seismic forces in any direction.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for
components. Conduct transformer tests according to ANSI C57.12.51 and
IEEE C57.12.91.
B. Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each transformer:
1. Resistance measurements of all windings on rated-voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
2. Ratios on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.
3. Polarity and phase relation on rated-voltage connection.
4. No-load loss at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.
S. Excitation current at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.
6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on rated-voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
7. Applied potential.
8. Induced potential.
9. Temperature Test: If transformer is supplied with auxiliary cooling equipment to
provide more than one rating, test at lowest kilovolt-ampere Class OA or
Class AA rating and highest kilovolt-ampere Class OA/FA or Class AA/FA rating.
a. Temperature test is not required if record of temperature test on an essen-
tially duplicate unit is available.
10. Owner will witness all required factory tests. Notify Architect at least 14 days
before date of tests and indicate their approximate duration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage
transformers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16271-6 05/13/05
G. Primary Fuses: 150-kV fuse assembly with fuses complying with IEEE C37.47. Rating
of current-limiting fuses shall be 50-kA RMS at specified system voltage.
1. Current-limiting type in dry-fuse holder wells, mechanically interlocked with liq-
uid-immersed switch in transformer tank to prevent disconnect under load.
2. Internal liquid-immersed cartridge fuses.
3. Bay-O-Net liquid-immersed fuses that are externally replaceable without opening
transformer tank.
4. Bay-O-Net liquid-immersed fuses in series with liquid-immersed current-limiting
fuses. Bay-O-Net fuses shall be externally replaceable without opening trans-
former tank.
S. Bay-O-Net liquid-immersed current-limiting fuses that are externally replaceable
without opening transformer tank.
H. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, one for each primary phase; complying with
IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1; support from tank wall within high-voltage compart-
ment. Transformers shall have three arresters for radial-feed circuits.
I. High-Voltage Terminations and Equipment: Dead front with universal-type bushing
wells for dead-front bushing-well inserts, complying with IEEE 386 and including the
following:
1. Bushing-Well Inserts: One for each high-voltage bushing well.
2. Surge Arresters: Dead-front, elbow-type, metal-oxide-varistor units.
3. Parking Stands: One for each high-voltage bushing well.
4. Portable Insulated Bushings: Arranged for parking insulated, high-voltage, load-
break cable terminators; one for each primary feeder conductor terminating at
transformer.
J. Accessories:
1. Drain Valve: 1 inch (25 mm),with sampling device.
2. Dial-type thermometer.
3. Liquid-level gage.
4. Pressure-vacuum gage.
5. Pressure Relief Device: Self-sealing with an indicator.
6. Mounting provisions for low-voltage current transformers.
7. Mounting provisions for low-voltage potential transformers.
8. Busway terminal connection at low-voltage compartment.
2.4 Alarm contacts for gages and thermometer listed above.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E'—2323 16271-5 05/13/05
D. Insulation Materials: IEEE C57.12.01, rated at 220 deg C.
E. Insulation Temperature Rise: 115 deg C, maximum rise above 40 deg C.
F. Basic Impulse Level: 95 W.
G. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated
primary voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with
position indicator and padlock hasp.
H. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps below rated primary volt-
age, with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indica-
tor and padlock hasp.
L Cooling System: Class AA, self-cooled, complying with IEEE 057.12.01.
J. Sound level may not exceed sound levels listed in NEMA TR 1, without fans operating.
K. High-Temperature Alarm: Sensor at transformer with local audible and visual alarm
and contacts for remote alarm.
2.3 OUTDOOR PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: ANSI C57.12.13, IEEE C57.12.00, IEEE C57.12.22, IEEE C57.12.26,
pad-mounted, 2-winding transformers. Stainless-steel tank base and cabinet, cabinet,
and sills.
B. Insulating Liquid: Mineral oil, complying with ASTM D 3487, Type II, and tested ac-
cording to ASTM D 117.
C. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg C when operated at rated kVA output in a
40 deg C ambient temperature. Transformer shall be rated to operate at rated kilovolt
ampere in an average ambient temperature of 30 deg C over 24 hours with a maximum
ambient temperature of 40 deg C without loss of service life expectancy.
D. Basic Impulse Level: 110 kV.
E. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high
voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position in-
dicator and padlock hasp.
F. High-Voltage Switch: 200 A, make-and-latch rating of 10-kA RMS, symmetrical, ar-
ranged for radial feed with 3-phase, 2-position, gang-operated, load-break switch that
is oil immersed in transformer tank with hook-stick operating handle in primary com-
partment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16271-4 05/13/05
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
OW A. Store transformers protected from weather and so condensation will not form on or in
units. Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service condition.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of louvers, doors, spill retention areas, and sumps. Coordinate
installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for medium-voltage
transformers except those directly associated with transformers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
"' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Cutler-Hammer.
2. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA.
2.2 INDOOR DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: NEMA ST 20, IEEE C57.12.01, ANSI C57.12.52, UL 1562 listed and la-
beled, dry-type, 2-winding transformers.
1. Indoor, ventilated, cast coil/encapsulated coil, with primary and secondary wind-
ings individually cast in epoxy; with insulation system rated at 185 deg C with an
115 deg C average winding temperature rise above a maximum ambient tempera-
ture of 40 deg C.
B. Primary Connection: Transition terminal compartment with connection pattern to
match switchgear.
C. Secondary Connection: Transition terminal compartment with connection pattern to
match switchgear.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16271-3 05/13/05
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Source quality-control test reports.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Follow-up service reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emer-
gency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNa-
tional Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory '
(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
transformers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Sec-
tion "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with IEEE C2.
E. Comply with ANSI C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.10, IEEE C57.12.70, and
IEEE C57.12.80.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16271-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16271 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage prima-
ries:
1. Dry-type distribution and power transformers.
2. Pad-mounted, liquid-filled transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
" clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and per-
formance for each type and size of transformer indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Wiring and connection diagrams including power, signal, and control
wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinating floor penetra-
tions and floor-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Underground primary and secondary conduit stub-up locations where shown on
drawings.
2. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of transformer, and required clearances.
3. Ground rod and grounding cable locations.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer
assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on ac-
tual test of assembled components or on calculation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Transformers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16271-1 05/13/05
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Scope of work shall not be limited to installation and test, if additional training is re-
quired by the hospital during the testing/installation, this shall be provided at no addi-
tional charge. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's main-
tenance personnel in the following:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1.
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 16232
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16232-9 5113105
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components, installation, and connection of components; and to
pretest and adjust components. Report results in writing.
B. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-
control testing.
D. Testing: After installing new components in the existing switchgear and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with re-
quirements. Switchgear manufacturer shall provide a field service technician, fully quali-
fied to implement and test the above changes and added equipment. As a minimum, two
trips, at two days per trip shall be included. Independent testing agency and manufac-
turer technician shall work together to accomplish the following tests for each transfer
switch:
1. Verify load priority sequences for each transfer switch. Ensure only priority one
transfer switches are transferred to the paralleling switchgear bus when first gen-
erator achieves 90 percent rated voltage and frequency and is connected to the
emergency bus. Verify priority two transfer switches are transferred to the bus
upon synchronism of remaining generators. After all transfer switches have been
transferred to the paralleling switchgear bus, ensure generator engine failure, over-
load, and over frequency/under frequency will initiate load shedding control. Load
shedding shall shed appropriate priority two loads in reverse order of load addition
until total load is at capacity of the remaining generator.
2. Verify failure of normal power at each transfer switch will initiate generator start
sequence.
3. Verify transfer switch test initiation of each transfer switch can be accomplished
remotely from the switchgear touchscreen and remote computer stations.
4. Verify position (normal/emergency) of each transfer switch is correctly monitored
at the switchgear touchscreen and associated remote computer stations.
E. Coordinate tests with tests for generators and transfer switches and run them concur-
rently.
F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16232-8 5/13/05
Priority 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I
New Surgery/Beds Expansion Project
Equipment Transfer Switches
Features Needed at ATS-EQA ATS-EQB ATS-ELEV
Paralleling Switch-
ear (new) (new) (new)
Status Monitoring -
Position in Nor- X X X
mal/Emergency
Control -
No load test/test X X X
under load
Priority 1 2 1 1 1 2
C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and
complying with the following:
1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and
for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for the duty required.
.,,
2.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials: Refer to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." Iden-
tify units, devices, controls, and wiring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and compo-
nents may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved, provided
the required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the identification of the
units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building maintenance proce-
dures.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16232-7 5113105
onds for the Overload setpoint, 0 to 99.9 seconds for the increase and the O
decrease time delays.
5. Selector Switch Coordination
a. Coordinate the functions and circuitry of the various selector switches, to in-
sure that the various settings available do not cause malfunction in the in-
tended system operation.
Boiler Plant Transfer Switches
Features Needed at DPEQHI- PNLBDI ATS-
Paralleling Switch- ATS EQ-ATS BPLS-ATS WOODCHIP
gear (existing) (existing) (existing) (new)
Status Monitoring -
Position in Nor- X X X X
mal/Emergency
Control -
No load test/test X X X X
under load
Priority 1 1 1 2
Project 2000 Building Transfer Switches
Features Needed at ESS. EQ-
CC-ATS LS-ATS (ex-
Paralleling Switch- ATS
ear existin (existing) fisting)
Status Monitoring -
Position in Nor- X X X
mal/Emergency
Control -
No load test/test X X X
under load
Priority 2 1 1
New Surgery/Beds Expansion Project Critical and Life
Safety Branch Transfer Switches
Features Needed at ATS-FP ATS-LS ATS-CRA ATS-CRB
Paralleling Switch-
ear (new) (new) (new) (new)
Status Monitoring -
Position in Nor- X X X X
mal/Emergency
Control -
No load test/test X X X X
under load
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16232-6 5/13/05
synchronized to the bus. A PLC Register Access Panel shall allow the opera-
tor to select the sequence of engine starting and to make changes to the se-
quence without having to shut down the system. A digital status readout
system shall indicate the programmed starting sequence.
d. When normal power returns, and all automatic transfer switches have trans-
ferred back to normal, the diesel engine generator circuit breakers shall open
and the diesels shall operate unloaded for their cool down cycle.
3. Load Control Circuits.
a. A PLC shall allow only predetermined loads to be closed to the system bus,
until additional engine generators are connected in parallel to the main
switchgear bus.
b. If the PLC fails, the system shall allow all engines to close to the bus and
take on load, automatically, if normal power fails.
4. Load Demand/Engine Start/Stop Sequence
a. In a normal power failure operation, load demand sensing will, after a 0-60
minute adjustable time delay, be placed into operation. The PLC shall moni-
tor the load on the bus and will initiate signals to subtract and add genera-
tors as required. An indicating lamp on the master control cubicle will be
flashing during the time delay and will be on constantly when the system is
operating in load demand mode.
b. The engine starting and stopping sequence can be changed through the Reg-
ister Access Panel.
C. If the sequence is changed during automatic operation, any engine on line
will remain on line. If the engine selected as the base engine is not on line, it
will be immediately started up and placed on line. The engine generator that
is selected as sequence No. 2 will be added to the bus and subtracted in re-
verse sequence. If an engine is locked out of the system, it will be skipped
over and the next engine in sequence will be started as required.
d. Backlit engraved indicating windows shall be provided on the master control
cubicle to light when the loading of the generating system reaches preset
"Decreasing Load," "Increasing Load," and "Overload" setpoints. These
lights are flashing when timing and are on constant when timed out.
e. The setpoints shall be field adjustable through the Register Access Panel.
The overload setpoint is adjustable form 90 to 125 percent of the engine's
rated load. The Increase is adjustable from 60 to 100 percent or Overload
minus 10 percent, whichever is smallest, of the on line capability of the sys-
tem. The Decrease is adjustable from 40 to 80 percent or Increase minus 10
percent, whichever is smallest, of the online capability of the system after the
decrease.
f. The overload and increase time delays shall have inverse time characteristics,
the higher the loading, the shorter the time delay. The settings shall be pro-
grammable through the Register Access Panel. The ranges are 0 to 10 sec-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16232-5 5113105
touch screen. This includes all existing controls and monitoring, and additional
ATS monitoring and control added under this section.
5. One remote notification software and hardware package for paralleling switchgear
with capabilities to send switchgear error and alarm codes to Catepillar ISO service
personnel at a remote location. Remote notification software shall be Win-911 or
equivalent.
B. Operational Overview
1. The system is configured such that upon failure of a particular generator, lower
priority loads will be shed and the priority loads will be fed from an operable gen-
erator set. Revised load priorities (including new transfer switches to be installed
under this project.) are identified in the tables provided later in this specification.
The system shall be reprogrammed to include the new transfer switches, display
their status, and initiate testing under load via new graphical test switches for each
automatic transfer switch. The system shall communicate with all facility auto-
matic transfer switches (new and existing) for generator start signals, load shed-
ding and to initiate load testing.
2. Provide interconnecting control circuits to produce the following normal operating
function when a normal system power failure occurs, at any automatic transfer
switch.
a. Upon normal power failure, which shall be sensed by the automatic transfer
switches, a signal shall be sent to the emergency generator control switchgear •+
and shall cause a simultaneous automatic starting of all the emergency en-
gine generators.
b. The first generator to achieve 90 percent of rated voltage and frequency shall
be connected to the emergency bus. Priority One automatic transfer switches
(ATS) shall transfer to the bus. The priority one loads shall not exceed the
full load capacity of any one generator. The remaining generators shall
automatically be paralleled when in synchronism. As the remaining genera-
tors are added to the bus, pilot contacts shall initiate load control circuits to
transfer remaining ATS's to the bus. Failure of any engine generator while
operating in the automatic mode shall initiate load shedding control, if nec-
essary, to reduce the total load to the capacity of the remaining generators by
shedding equipment branch ATS's and shunt trip circuit breakers in Distri-
bution Panel No. 1 in reverse order of load addition.
C. After a predetermined adjustable time delay, 0-30 minutes, a programmable
kilowatt load sensing and engine sequence system will be placed into opera-
tion to control the addition or subtraction of engines and load as required.
The kilowatt load sensing system shall be provided with separate increase
and decrease load adjustments to accommodate the number of engines oper-
ating regardless of sequence, and size of generators. The kilowatt monitor-
ing system shall be programmed to monitor decrease load, increase load and
overload. Upon reaching the overload condition, nonessential load relays
will be energized and the next engine in line will be started immediately and
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16232-4 5/13/05
low G. The generator control and paralleling switchgear covered by this specification shall be
designed, tested and assembled in strict accordance with all applicable standards of
ANSI, UL, IEEE, and NEMA.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work
and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electri-
cal installations that follow.
B. Notify owner and architect no few than 10 days in advance of any proposed interrup-
tion. Do not proceed with interruption without Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products compatible
with the following:
1. Caterpillar ISO
P
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Additional PLC Hardware
1. One (1) remote PLC-1/0 cabinet in NEMA 1 enclosure, equipped with CPU's and
1/0 blocks in quantities suitable to monitor and control seven transfer switches.
The cabinet shall be equipped a 120VAC UPS for control power. A 120VAC, 15
Amp circuit shall be supplied by the hospital to power the UPS. A fiber optic re-
peater shall also be furnished to allow the cabinet to communicated with the exist-
ing switchgear located at a distance of six hundred feet away. (The EC shall be re-
sponsible for the supply and installation of the fiber optic cable as specified by the
switchgear manufacturer)
2. One (1) lot of additional PLC-I/O hardware to monitor and control four transfer
switches, three located in the switchgear room and one in the woodchip burning
plant.
3. One remote software/desktop PC (purchased through Cooley Dickinson Hospital)
with full control and monitoring capabilities as available from the switchgear
touch screen. This includes all existing controls and monitoring, and additional
ATS monitoring and controls under this section.
4. One remote software/laptop PC (purchased through Cooley Dickinson Hospital)
with full control and monitoring capabilities as available from the switchgear
40W Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16232-3 5113105
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of switchgear certifying that the products
furnished comply with requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of switchgear with requirements. Submit
written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirement.
J. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
G. Manufacturer's field service report.
1. Maintenance Data: For switchgear to include in the maintenance manuals speci-
fied in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Sec-
tion "Quality Control," an independent testing agency shall meet OSHA criteria for ac-
creditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or shall be a full-member com-
pany of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with NFPA 99.
E. Comply with NFPA 110 for generator alarm annunciation.
F. Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of UL standard 1558 " Metal-
Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16232-2 5/13/05
SECTION 16232 —MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The scope of this project includes the modifications to the existing ISO metal-enclosed,
low-voltage, paralleling switchgear. The modifications to the existing switchgear, PLC /
Touchscreen and associated equipment shall make the paralleling switchgear fully capa-
ble of monitoring the status of all campus automatic transfer switches. The paralleling
switchgear shall have the following features and functionality:
1. Position monitoring (normal/emergency) of eleven (11) automatic transfer
switches, located in the new building, the existing switchgear room, and the new
woodchip boiler plant.
2. Remote ATS test initiation via new graphical test switches for each automatic
transfer in the system. This is to include the existing ATS's currently monitored by
the gear, as well as the additional eleven ATS's.
3. Load shed priority assignment for the eleven new ATS's and shunt trip circuit
breaker within Distribution Panelboard 1.
4. Remote error notification via modem and remote notification software.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for requirements of new and existing Automatic
Transfer Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate loadings, method of field as-
sembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include the follow-
ing:
1. Conduit entrance locations and dimensions.
2. System description.
3. System operation.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differ-
entiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Modifications to Existing Paralleling Switchgear
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16232-1 5/13/05
3. Responder Qualifications: Engineer or technician thoroughly familiar with
power monitoring and control equipment.
END OF SECTION 16215
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16215-12 05/13/05
F. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified re-
quirements are met.
G. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to
tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representa-
tive.
H. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
1. Train Owner's management and maintenance personnel in interpreting and using
monitoring displays and in configuring and using software and reports. Train
them in troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment. Pro-
vide a minimum of 12 hours' training.
2. Training Aid: Use the approved final versions of software and maintenance
manuals as training aids.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' ad-
vance notice.
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide
up to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate com-
ponents and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting
sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.
3.8 TELEPHONE TECHNICAL SUPPORT
A. Hardware and Software: Within two years of date of Substantial Completion, provide
unlimited response to user questions regarding software use and hardware and commu-
nication link troubleshooting, reconfiguring, and adjusting.
1. Telephone Calls: Toll free.
2. Availability: Eight hours per day, weekdays.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16215-11 05/13/05
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's pub-
lished torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indi-
cated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification."
B. Label each power monitoring and control module with a unique designation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect, test, adjust, and program power monitoring and control equipment.
B. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests.with at least seven days'
advance notice.
C. Inspect power monitoring and control components for defects and physical damage, la-
beling of testing laboratory, and nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.
D. Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous
six months. Use manufacturer's recommended torque values.
E. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.
2. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls at PC workstations and at monitored
and controlled devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities. Use a me-
thodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions as recom-
mended by the manufacturer. Note response to each test command and opera-
tion. Note time intervals between initiation of alarm conditions and registration
of alarms at central-processing workstation.
a. Coordinate testing required by this Section with that required by Sections
specifying equipment being monitored and controlled.
b. Metering Test: Load feeders, measure loads on feeder conductor with an
RMS reading clamp-on ammeter, and simultaneously read indicated cur-
rent on the same phase at the central-processing workstation. Record and
compare values measured at the two locations. Resolve discrepancies
greater than 10 percent and record resolution method and results.
C. Record metered values, control settings, operations, cues, time intervals,
and functional observations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16215-10 05/13/05
A. Data Line Cable: Shielded, twisted-pair cable or other media recommended by manu-
facturer and as specified in Division 16 Section "Communication and Data-Processing
Equipment."
B. Low-Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conductor, color-coded, No. 20 AWG copper,
minimum.
1. Sheath: PVC; except in plenum-type spaces, use sheath listed for plenums.
2. Ordinary Switching Circuits: Three conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Switching Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator Feature: Five conductors, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Interfaces with Distribution Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Accessories, adapt-
ers, electronic interface units, and connections required for functional performance in-
dicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb. Anchor to building structural elements and support
according to requirements in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Meth-
ods."
B. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of
unit for wall-mounting items.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between control devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors
and Cables" for low-voltage analog connections and in Division 16 Section "Commu-
nication and Data-Processing Equipment" for network and data line circuits.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Race-
ways and Boxes," unless run in accessible ceiling space or gypsum board partitions.
C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D. Ground equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16215-9 05/13/05
3. Two-Way Communication: Send and receive values, data, and control com- ,
mands indicated. Initiate alarm on malfunction of monitored device of monitor-
ing equipment or network.
B. Circuit Breakers, 600 V and Less: Include communication capability as a feature of the
trip unit.
C. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: Include communication capability as a feature of
the overcurrent relay trip unit.
D. Multifunction Digital Meter and Power Quality Monitor: Microprocessor-based de-
vice, flush or semiflush mounted in the door of switchboard or switchgear. Unit shall
display and communicate indicated monitoring parameters and data for circuit and in-
puts to which connected. Unit shall have the ability to communicate as specified in
"Communication Function" Paragraph above plus the following:
1. Waveform data from high-speed sampling of voltage and current values metered.
2. Status of up to three external contact-monitored alarm conditions monitored by
internal meter relay functions.
3. Monitoring of a minimum of three programmable threshold values of metered
parameters.
4. Ability to Communicate: As specified in "Communication Function" Paragraph
above.
S. Power Supply Rating: 120-V ac or 48- to 125-V dc. * ,
6. Enclosure: NEMA 250,Type 12, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 ADDITIONAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL COMPONENTS
A. Current Transformers: For multifunction digital meter and power quality monitors and
other current-monitoring equipment furnished under this Section, without integral cur-
rent transformers, provide factory-mounted current-transformer units.
1. Primary Rating: Equal to or more than that of associated circuit-breaker trip rat-
ing. Equip with shorting switches.
B. Potential Transformers: If those required for indicated monitoring functions are not in-
tegral to basic switchgear, circuit breakers, or circuit-breaker trip units, provide fac-
tory-mounted units.
1. Rating: Same as distribution system phase-to-neutral voltage.
2. Protection: Current-limiting fuses.
2.6 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control '
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16215-8 05/13/05
9. Reports Trends: Instantaneously, in a real-time or historical tabular format, bar
chart, or user-defined time, trend plots of monitored parameters; unlimited as to
interval, duration, or quantity of trends.
10. Manages Alarm Function: Annunciates and logs alarm messages from discrete
input and controls outputs, according to programmable security access protocol
using the communication network.
a. Functions Requiring User Acknowledgment: Run in background during
computer use for other applications and override other presentations when
they occur.
11. Views and analyzes captured waveforms. Displays harmonic content through the
twenty-first harmonic, minimum, and reports total harmonic distortion.
12. Defines and initiates load-shedding schemes responding to programmable time
schedules, or set points of metered demands, or combinations of both.
C. Communication Software: As recommended by manufacturer for high-speed commu-
nication via modem.
2.3 COMMUNICATION COMPONENTS AND NETWORKS
A. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Electromagnetic-Interference Immunity: In-
clude in solid-state equipment. Comply with IEEE C37.90.
B. Network Configuration: High speed, multiaccess, open nonproprietary, industry stan-
dard communication protocol; LANs complying with EIA 485, IEEE 802.3, Ethernet,
or other approved industry standard.
C. Network Interface Modules: Provide polling time supporting 30-second maximum in-
terval between alarm initiation from monitored devices and registration and printout of
alarm messages.
D. Temporary Storage: Provide temporary storage of information so that network infor-
mation is not lost when network is down.
2.4 COMMUNICATION FEATURES OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DEVICES
A. Communication Function: Microprocessor based and integral to devices indicated as
having power monitoring or control functions.
1. Communication Address: Unique to each individual device, and changeable at
device.
2. Communication Protocol: Match that of network to which connected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16215-7 05/13/05
2. Hard-Disk Drive: 20 GB.
3. CPU: 300 MHz.
4. CD-ROM Drive: 24 X.
5. Floppy Disk Drive: One.
6. Internal Zip Drive: 100 MB.
7. Monitor: 17 inch (532 mm). Multisync with 0.25-mm mask pitch and 1024 by
768 resolutions at 100 Hz.
8. Operating System: Windows NT or Windows 2000.
9. Keyboard: Windows 95.
10. One serial and one parallel port in addition to those required for power monitor-
ing and control.
11. Network Interface Card: Computer operated, with two-way communication
transmitter-receiver chip.
12. Modem: External, 56 K, minimum.
13. Automatic Reboot Capability: When power is restored after an outage.
14. Printer: Laser jet. Six pages per minute minimum nominal printing rate in draft
mode.
15. Backup Battery-Inverter Power Supply: Automatic, rated 650-VA output for 10
minutes. Arranged to supply computer, accessories, and peripherals, not includ-
ing a printer. Include transient voltage surge suppressor and electromagnetic-
interference filters.
B. Metering and Monitoring Software: Features and functions include the following:
1. Password Protection: Three configurable security levels, minimum. **
2. Operates in multitasking, multiuser environment. Windows NT compliant.
3. On-Line Help: Context sensitive.
4. Coordinates the communications of the network.
5. Provides interactive color-graphics platform with mouse-accessed menu and
mouse-driven generation of distribution system graphics, including the following:
a. Site plan.
b. Floor plans.
C. Equipment elevations.
d. Single-line diagram.
6. Provides mouse-driven interface with devices depicted in single-line diagram and
equipment elevation screens.
7. Logs user-defined power monitoring and control and power distribution system
events including log on/off; attempted log on/off; alarms; equipment operations;
and out-of-limit, pickup, trip, and no-response events; with date and time stamps
accurate to 0.1 second.
8. Exports and imports data to and from commonly used Windows 95 spreadsheet,
database, tenant billing, and other applications; uses dynamic data exchange
technology.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16215-6 05/13/05
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace power monitoring and control components that fail in materials or workman-
ship within specified warranty period.
C. Special Warranty Period for Power Monitoring and Control Components: Two years
from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing con-
tents.
1. Addressable Relays: One for every 10 installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Line Drivers: One of each type installed.
3. Communication Power Supplies: One of each type installed.
4. Network Interface Cards: One of each type installed.
S. Repeater Units: One of each type installed.
6. Data Line Surge Suppressors: One for every 10 of each type installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-
lowing:
1. Cutler-Hammer Products; Eaton Corporation.
2. Square D Co.; Power Management Organization.
2.2 WORKSTATIONS AND SOFTWARE
A. Central-Processing Workstation: Desktop PC installation capable of communicating
with a minimum of 200 devices, and including the following minimum peripherals, ac-
cessories, and features:
1. RAM: 256 MB.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16215-5 05/13/05
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the power monitoring and control equipment manufacturer for both installation and
maintenance of units required for this Project.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing power monitoring
and control equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain power monitoring and control software, firmware, moni-
toring panels, and network components from the same manufacturer who is the source
of distribution equipment circuit breakers and other protective devices. This manufac-
turer's responsibilities include the following:
1. Ensuring compatibility of power monitoring and control features of electrical dis-
tribution components, including those provided in other Sections of these Specifi-
cations.
2. Integrating interconnected equipment and its communication functions and pro-
viding software and hardware interface components required for indicated func-
tional operation.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for indicated use and installation conditions.
F. Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately
processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth
and twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations.
G. Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
H. Comply with UL 916.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of distribution equipment and power monitoring and control com-
ponents to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.
1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified
functions.
B. Coordinate Work of this Section with that in Sections specifying distribution compo-
nents that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.
1.7 WARRANTY
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16215-4 05/13/05
1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components,
and clearance and access requirements.
2. Hardware and Software Description: Provide detail for all communications
hardware and software, including sensor devices and gathering data to be trans-
mitted over the network and master display unit. This description will include a
list of all the communicating devices to be connected to the network.
3. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this
Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indi-
cate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways,
concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network
and other data communication lines including type of wiring required.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail specific wiring to suit Project. Coordinate nomencla-
ture and presentation with a block diagram, and differentiate between manufac-
turer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals, including a system description and
maintenance section.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
D. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future power
system revisions or power monitoring and control revisions.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
G. Maintenance Data: For power monitoring and control equipment components to in-
clude in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
I. Startup Report: Detailed report including a list of trained customer personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel who are directly
employed by a manufacturer of distribution system protective devices.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16215-3 05/13/05
H. All Power Meters and Circuit Monitors shall be UL 508 Listed, CSA approved, and
have CE marking. They shall also have certified revenue accuracy as per ANSI C12.16.
L The system shall comply with the applicable portions of NEMA. standards. In addition,
the control unit shall comply with FCC Emission Standards specified in Part 15, Sub-
part J for Class A application.
1. Distribution system components include the following:
a. Medium-voltage switchgear.
b. Low-voltage switchgear.
2. Power monitoring and control units include the following:
a. Local display panels.
b. Central-processing workstation personal computers.
C. Remote workstation personal computers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. HVACIC: Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning instrumentation and controls.
C. LAN: Local area network, sometimes plural as "LANs."
D. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status
data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and
alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.
E. PC: Personal computer, sometimes plural as "PCs."
F. PMCS: Power Monitoring and Control System.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: List of components for power monitoring and control, including dimen-
sions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteris-
tics, ratings, and finishes. Attach copies of Submittals for affected products (such as
switchgear) that describe power monitoring and control features to coordinate Product
Data related to power monitoring and control.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for spe-
cific application on this Project.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16215-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16215 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
PART 1 -:GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes monitoring and control of electrical power circuits through elec-
tronic communication links between devices in distribution system components and
power monitoring and control units.
B. Furnish and install a complete Power Monitoring and Control System (PMCS) as de-
tailed on the drawings and as described in this specification. The system is defined to
include, but not be limited to, remote devices for monitoring, control and protection,
device communication interface hardware, inter-communication wiring, personal com-
puter workstations, software, printer, ancillary equipment, startup and training ser-
vices, and ongoing technical support.
C. The manufacturer shall demonstrate the system is not a prototype and that similar sys-
tems have been field installed and successfully operated for at least five years. The
PMCS vendor shall have full responsibility for insuring that the PMCS system performs
as specified.
D. The PMCS shall utilize Ethernet as the high-speed backbone network that supports di-
rect connection of an unlimited number of personal computer workstations anywhere
on the network.
E. Each Personal Computer Workstation (PCW) connected to the network shall have
equal access to information provided by the power monitoring devices for centralizing
data display, data logging, alarming, event recording, and other power monitoring op-
erations. Each PCW shall be independent of the other PCWs with its own software to
allow the user to retrieve and configure the information based on the user's needs.
F. The high-speed network shall allow direct access to data provided by the power moni-
toring devices for implementing automatic control.
G. Application software for personal computer workstations shall be provided as de-
scribed in this specification.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16215-1 05/13/05
D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions,
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification."
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been en-
ergized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays.
B. Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to deter-
mine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied condi-
tions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 16145
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Lighting Control Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16145-7 05/13/05
B. Multipole Contactors and Relays: Electrically operated and mechanically held, and
complying with UL 508 and NEMA ICS 2.
1. Current Rating for Switching: UL listing or rating consistent with type of load
served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts
with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2.7 Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
2.8 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than
No. 12 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors
not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and
Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not
smaller than No. 14 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Ca-
bles."
D. Install unshielded, twisted-pair cable for control and signal transmission conductors,
complying with Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." '''
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas indi-
cated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Minimum
conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Sepa-
rate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufac-
turer's written instructions.
C. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Cate-
gory A locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Lighting Control Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16145-6 05/13/05
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of
1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27 m) when
mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.
D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of
reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving at least 12
inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate
speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular
area of 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceil-
ing.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circu-
lar area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on an 8-foot- (2.4-m-) high ceil-
ing.
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular
area of 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceil-
ing.
5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27 m)
when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14
feet (4.3 m).
E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of
PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or com-
bination of technologies that controls on and off functions shall be selectable in the field
by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch (150-mm) minimum movement
of any portion of a human body that presents a target of at least 36 sq. in. (232 sq.
cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving at least 12 inches (305
mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12
inches/s (305 mm/s).
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circu-
lar area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high
ceiling.
2.6 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
A. Summary: Provide lighting control panel for line voltage control of interior and exterior
lighting as indicated. System shall be complete with photocells, relays, contactors, etc.
for a complete lighting control system. The system shall be structured as a multipanel
system utilizing the same photocell inputs. Lighting Control Panels shall have a manual
override to allow lighting contactors to be turned on or off independent of photocell.
00"' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Lighting Control Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16145-5 05113105
2.5 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS 44"k,
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell Lighting Inc.
2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
3. Lithonia Lighting.
4. MYTECH Corporation.
5. Novitas, Inc.
6. RAB Electric Manufacturing, Inc.
7. Sensor Switch, Inc.
S. TORK.
9. Unenco Electronics; a Hubbell Company.
10. Watt Stopper (The).
B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay
unit.
1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occu-
pied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable
over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with
UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-
A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be
24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
4. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted though a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a stan-
dard electrical enclosure.
C. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind
hinged door.
S. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (215 to 2150 lx);
keeps lighting off when selected lighting level is present.
C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and
movement in area of coverage.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch (150-mm) minimum movement
of any portion of a human body that presents a target of at least 36 sq. in. (232 sq.
cm).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Lighting Control Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16145-4 05/13/05
C. Time Delay: prevents false operation.
D. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and
equipped with sun-glare shield and ice preventer.
E. Manufacturers:
1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.
2. Fisher Pierce.
3. Grasslin Controls Corporation.
4. Intermatic, Inc.
S. Lithonia Lighting.
6. Novitas, Inc.
7. Paragon Electric Co.
8. Square D.
9. TORK.
10. Touchplate Technologies, Inc.
11. Watt Stopper (The).
2.4 SWITCH-BOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell Company.
2. Hubbell Lighting Inc.
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
4. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company.
5. Lithonia Lighting.
6. MYTECH Corporation.
7. Novitas, Inc.
8. RAB Electric Manufacturing, Inc.
9. Sensor Switch, Inc.
10. TORK.
11. Unenco Electronics; a Hubbell Company.
12. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Description: PIR type with integral power-switching contacts rated for 800 W at 120-V
ac, suitable for incandescent light fixtures, flourescent light fixtures with magnetic or
electronic ballasts, or 1/6-hp motors; and rated for 1000 W at 277-V ac, suitable for in-
candescent light fixtures, flourescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or
1/3-hp motors,minimum.
1. Include ground wire.
2. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (215 to 2150 Ix);
keeps lighting off when selected lighting level is present.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Lighting Control Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16145-3 05/13/05
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equip-
ment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lim-
ited to, manufacturers specified.
2.2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: An integral part of the devices for 120- and 277-V solid-
state equipment. For devices without integral line-voltage surge protection, field-
mounting surge protection shall comply with IEEE C62.41 and with UL 1449.
2.3 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. Description: Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with
UL 773A.
B. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc (0 to 37,673 lx), with an adjustment for
turn-on/turn-off levels, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light
sources from causing turn-off.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Lighting Control Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16145-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1. Outdoor photoelectric switches.
2. Switch-box occupancy sensors.
3. Indoor occupancy sensors.
4. Multipole contactors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Lighting Controls" for low-voltage, manual and programma-
ble lighting control systems.
2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light
switches.
3. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming system equip-
ment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. PIR: Passive infrared.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.
1. Lighting plan showing location, orientation, and coverage area of each sensor.
2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Lighting Control Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16145-1 05/13/05
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16140
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16140-8 05/13/05
!�"" 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise in-
dicated or required by NFPA 70.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
3. TVSS Devices: Blue.
4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.
5. Cover plates: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manu-
facturers' written instructions.
D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches
under single, multigang wall plates.
100W E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of parti-
tions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use en-
graved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of white plates and
white filled lettering on face of red plates, and durable wire markers or tags inside
outlet boxes.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16140-7 05/13/05
C. Service Plate: Round with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise in-
dicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening.
2.8 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with
multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable snatching floor ser-
vice outlet assembly.
1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for
four RJ-45 jacks.
2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch (75-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to
floor thickness.
3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch (75-mm) cored openings and rees-
tablish fire rating of floor.
S. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG con-
ductors; and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5 voice and data communication
cables.
2.9 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
B. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: Multioutlet assemblies should be constructed
with approved barrier(s) to separate normal power, emergency power, and telecommuni-
cations wiring.
D. Receptacles and Data Devices: Receptacles shall be spaced every 18 or 30 inches as indi-
cated on floor plans. Alternate between normal and critical power receptacles. Data de-
vices shall be located as indicated on floor plans.
E. Wire: No. 12 AWG.
2.10 FINISHES
A. Color:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16140-6 05/13/05
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to require-
OOW ments of equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket;
with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a
minimum of 30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle
type for connection.
2.5 SWITCHES
A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.
B. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.
C. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off
switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching
to suit connections.
2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjust-
able rotary knob, toggle switch, or slider; single pole with soft tap or other quiet
switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch (130-mm) wire con-
necting leads.
3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts;
trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capa-
ble of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full bright-
ness.
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic] [0.035-inch- (1-
mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
4. Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and
listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."
2.7 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16140-5 05/13/05
3. Receptacle Type: Hospital grade.
4. Identification: Distinctive marking on face of device to denote TVSS-type unit.
F. Industrial Heavy-Duty Pin and Sleeve Devices: Comply with IEC 309-1.
G. Hazardous (Classified) Location Receptacles: Comply with NEMA FB 11.
H. Plugtail receptacle devices: Comply with NFPA 70, cULus Listed, File Number
E140596, UL498, WC596. Plugtail receptacles shall be Hospital Grade and shall tamper
resistant where indicated.
1. Receptacles shall be rated 20A, 125V
2. Receptacle must feature a solid brass strap, integral ground and break-off ears.
3. Receptacle must feature a brass auto-ground clip crimped to strap.
4. Receptacle shall be assembled with a wrap around face locking strap and locking
drive screws.
5. Body must be of a wide body design at least 1.6 inches wide, but not more than
1.65 inches wide.
6. Tamper Resistant Receptacles shall be resistant to tampering from any foreign me-
tallic object and will require the presence of an object in both right and left hand
contact to energize the device.
7. All receptacles must be finger safe with built-in large (.036) brass terminals to ac-
cept a P1ugTail Connector with #12 AWG solid or stranded wire, including ground
wire. Connector to have a large brass contacts with audible snapping latch to as-
sure connection and allow release.
8. Receptacle must be finger safe with no exposed terminals after installation.
9. Receptacles shall have a circuit label ID on face to assist in circuit identifications.
10. Exposed molded parts must be constructed from impact-resistant nylon or poly-
carbonate.
11. Receptacles must be marked appropriately as required by UL with a green dot on
face.
12. Single source, matching wall plates must be available by the same manufacturer.
2.3 PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, NEMA WD 6,
Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, Heavy-Duty grade.
1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching ex-
ternal cable grip.
2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-
steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision de-
signed for corresponding connector.
2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16140-4 05/13/05
2. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
a. Crouse-Hinds/Cooper Industries, Inc.; Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
b. EGS/Appleton Electric Company.
C. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co./Hubbell Incorporated.
3. Multioutlet Assemblies:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Wiremold Company (The).
4. Poke-Through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
C. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA.
d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
e. Wiremold Company (The).
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-
C-596G, and UL 498.
B. Straight-Blade Receptacles: Hospital grade.
C. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Hospital grade, with integral
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and
UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without
an adapter.
D. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Straight blade, Hospital grade, duplex receptacle, with
equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of
the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap.
1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles.
2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on re-
movable parts.
E. TVSS Receptacles: Straight blade, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, with integral
TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp level
rating of 500 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 140 J
line to neutral, and 70 J line to ground and neutral to ground.
2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual only with light visible in face of device to indicate
device is "active" or "no longer in service."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16140-3 05/13/05
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Service Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10 , but no fewer than one.
2. TVSS Receptacles: One for every 10 of each type installed, but no fewer than two
of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary.
b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C. Hubbell Incorporated;Wiring Device-Kellems.
d. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand;Wiring Devices Div.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16140-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16140 -WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL.
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, integral surge sup-
pression units, and isolated-ground receptacles.
2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches.
3. Device wall plates.
4. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles.
5. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet as-
semblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-
marking wall plates.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Wiring Devices
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16140-1 05/13/05
2. Provide two levels of support on opposite side of corridor utilizing 4" support
hooks at each location.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufac-
turer and Installer, that ensures cable management system is without damage or deterio-
ration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable
management system manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recorn-
mended by cable management system manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16139
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cable Management System
Surgery/Beds Expansions, Phase 1 16139-3
Package 'E' —2323 05/13/05
B. Cable management systems components must be configured and located for ready access ** ,
by low voltage cabling contractors. Components installed where access is restricted by
ductwork, piping, lighting, etc., will not be accepted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Cable Support Hooks (2" and 4" Diameter, Wide Base, as specified below)
B. Bridle Ring type supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Coordinate installation of cable management system to ensure ease of installation of low
voltage cabling. Support system shall be arranged to minimize potential strain on cabling
during installation.
1. Utilize cable support hooks at 6 foot intervals in corridors to provide cable support
for low voltage cabling.
2. Where system cabling is less extensive, over rooms and in non corridor areas, util-
ize bridle rings to maintain low voltage cabling system management.
B. Sleeves at fire and smoke barriers: Install (4) four 4" sleeves for cabling through fire and
smoke rated partitions.
C. Workspace: Install cable support system with sufficient space to permit access for install-
ing cables.
D. Where cable management system is indicated on drawings, utilize cable support hooks
connected together to provide separate zones for installation as follows:
1. Provide four levels of support on one side of corridor utilizing 2" support hooks at
each location.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cable Management System
Surgery/Beds Expansions, Phase 1 16139-2
Package 'E' —2323 05/13/05
SECTION 16139 - CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes a cable management system consisting of J hooks, bridle rings and
associated support devices to provide system of organized support for owner furnished
low voltage cabling systems not installed in conduit.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 for firestopping materials and installation at penetrations through walls,
ceilings, and other fire-rated elements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of support
system provided.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain support components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable management system with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equip-
ment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cable Management System
Surgery/Beds Expansions, Phase 1 16139-1
Package `E' —2323 05/13/05
Q. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to free-
standing equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs
set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit;
FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated,
threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.
R. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for re-
cessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
S. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction
box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
T. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
U. Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
V. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabi-
nets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manu-
facturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recom-
mended by manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 16130
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16130-10 05/13/05
e0lok I. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural mem-
bers and follow surface contours as much as possible.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where el-
bows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints
tight.
1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
L. Terminations:
1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to en-
ter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts,
one inside and one outside box.
2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings
tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nip-
ples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so
no threads are exposed.
M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200-1b (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of
slack at each end of pull wire.
N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In ad-
dition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m)
and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull
or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
O. Telephone, Physiological Monitoring, and Signal Systems:
1. Each outlet shall consist of a 4" square box with single gang cover and 3/a" conduit
run to within 6 inches of the cable management system. A pull string shall be in-
stalled in all conduit runs.
P. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill
them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a
flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates
or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refriger-
ated spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16130-9 05/13/05
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use
with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing con-
duits.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where alumi-
num raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonine-
tallic sleeve.
F. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or
hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so
curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and
keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical dis-
tance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and
leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover.
1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to
main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to
slab support.
4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel
conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16130-8 05113/05
boards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and
include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.8 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard
prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard
paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before
shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC.
2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC.
3. Underground, Single Run: RNC.
4. Underground, Grouped: RNC.
S. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use
LFMC in damp or wet locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
S. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21).
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless other-
wise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16130-7 05/13/05
C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings
that snatch and mate with raceways.
2.7 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturer[s]:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
4. Hoffman.
S. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
E. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush
latch.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant
paint.
J. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged
door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panel-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16130-6 05/13/05
2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturer[s]:
1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated,
with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fas-
tened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with
stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with
snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as re-
quired for complete system.
E. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
2.6 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufac-
turer's standard prime coating.
1. Available Manufacturer[s]:
a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting;Wiremold Company (The).
b. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
C. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
d. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC
compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color.
1. Manufacturer[s]:
a. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division.
b. Enduro Composite Systems.
C. Hubbell, Inc.;Wiring Device Division.
d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e. Panduit Corp.
f. Walker Systems, Inc.;Wiremold Company (The).
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16130-5 05/13/05
2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturer's]:
1. American International.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corp.
4. Cantex Inc.
5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
6. Condux International.
7. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
D. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. LFNC: UL 1660.
2.4 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturer[s]:
1. Hoffman.
2. Square D.
B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1 or 3R.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as re-
quired for complete system.
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes -o"O,
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16130-4 05/13/05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following re-
quirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lim-
ited to, the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturer[s]:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
4. Electri-Flex Co.
5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.
6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
` 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Co.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
E. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
F. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
G. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Set-screw type.
H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
I. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16130-3 05/13/05
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover .
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways,
fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating pene-
trations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures,
cabinets, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Divi-
sion 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspen-
sion system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, in-
cluding light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assem-
blies.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16130-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical Avir-
ing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping mate-
rials and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated
elements.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, an-
chors, and identification products.
3. Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work" for seismic restraints
and bracing of raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
4. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-
box service fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Raceways and Boxes
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16130-1 05/13/05
M. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated con- look..
nectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-
connector fittings, and hardware.
N. Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-
control testing:
1. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been en-
ergized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16124
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16124-6 05/13/05
2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips
that will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling at-
tachment to cable.
C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural
members and follow surface contours where possible.
D. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Meth-
ods."
E. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped bed of 3-inch- (75-mm-) thick, clean
sand. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping by a minimum of 4 inches (100
mm) of tamped earth. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in di-
rection, and buried splices.
F. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches (305 mm) above cables.
G. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables
around walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals
adequate to prevent sag.
H. Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits.
I. Install terminations at ends of conductors and seal multiconductor cable ends with
standard kits.
J. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:
1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which
no feeder is indicated to be connected.
2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Three.
3. Standoff Insulator: Three.
K. Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations
not protected by conduit, cable tray, direct burial, or termination materials. In addition
to arc-proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows:
1. Clean cable sheath.
2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil (250-micrometer) pipe-wrapping
tape.
3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty.
4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable.
S. Band arc-proofing tape with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide bands of half-lapped, adhe-
sive, glass-cloth tape 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
L. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16124-5 05/13/05
__ s
B. Non shielded-Cable Terminations: Kit with compression-type connector. Include sill- 40%;
cone-rubber tape, cold-shrink-rubber sleeve, or heat-shrink plastic-sleeve moisture seal
for end of insulation whether or not supplied with kits.
2.5 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS
A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-
pole, cable terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals de-
signed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture.
B. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A load make/break and
continuous-current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and
material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is ca-
pacitance coupled.
C. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool,
and carrying case.
2.6 ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS
A. Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: 10-mil- (250-micrometer-) thick, corrosion-
protective,moisture-resistant, PVC pipe-wrapping tape.
B. Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch (8
mm) thick, compatible with cable jacket.
C. Glass-Cloth Tape: Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect cables according to NEMA WC 8 before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cables according to IEEE 576.
B. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling ten-
sions and sidewall pressure values.
1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that
will not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16124-4 05/13/05
C. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.
D. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber complying with AEIC CS 6 and
NEMA WC 8.
1. Voltage Rating: 15 W.
2. Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level.
E. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.
1. Circuit Identification: Color-coded tape (black, red, blue) under the metallic
shielding.
F. Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC.
2.3 SPLICE KITS
A. Connectors and Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or
splicing kit manufacturer for the application.
B. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for spe-
cific sizes, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components re-
quired for complete splice, with detailed instructions.
oow 1. Combination tape and cold-shrink-rubber sleeve kit with rejacketing by cast-
epoxy-resin encasement or other waterproof, abrasion-resistant material.
2. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with
outer heat-shrink jacket.
3. Premolded, cold-shrink-rubber, in-line splicing kit.
4. Premolded EPDM splicing body kit with cable joint sealed by interference fit of
mating parts and cable.
2.4 SOLID TERMINATIONS
A. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insula-
tion class is equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable
terminations.
1. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief tube;
multiple, molded-silicone rubber, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and
compression-type connector.
2. Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and
outer nontracking tubes; multiple, molded, nontracking skirt modules; and com-
pression-type connector.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16124-3 05/13/05
C. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single -40%,
manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or oth-
ers unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Cables:
a. Kerite Co. (The); Hubbell Incorporated.
b. Okonite Company (The).
C. Pirelli Cables & Systems NA.
d. Southwire Company.
2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:
a. Raychem Corp.; Telephone Energy and Industrial Division.
b. Thomas & Betts/Elastimold.
C. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
2.2 CABLES
A. Cable Type: MV-105.
B. Conductor: Copper.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16124-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16124 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for me-
dium-voltage electrical distribution systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cable indicated. Include splices and terminations for
cables and cable accessories.
B. Samples: 16-inch (400-mm) lengths of each type of cable indicated.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Material Certificates: For each cable and accessory type, signed by manufacturers, cer-
tifying that cables comply with requirements specified in Part 2 Article "Source Quality
Control."
E. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer,
to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7
or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise testing specified in Part 3.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medium Voltage Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 16124-1 05/13/05
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL +.
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been ener-
gized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 16120
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Conductors and Cables '
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16120-6 05/13/05
H. Fire Alarm Circuits: Shielded twisted pair suitable for use in the Notifier fire alarm sys-
tem. Notification circuits shall be shielded twisted pair circuit integrity cable with a UL
listed 2 hour fire rating. Refer to specification 13851 for additional information.
I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
K. Isolated Power Systems Branch Circuits: Type XHHW in raceway in accordance with
isolated power systems manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound
used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's rec-
ommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,
that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural mem-
ell bers, and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Meth-
ods."
F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electri-
cal Identification."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conduc-
tors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of
slack.
"" Cooley Dickinson Hospital Conductors and Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16120-5 05/13/05
D. Emergency Power Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, sin- +,
gle conductors in raceway.
E. Normal Power Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or
hospital grade armored cable, Type AC (Hospital Grade).
1. Hospital Grade Armored Cable may be used only for lighting and convenience out-
let wiring and only for those branches, applications, and areas which are not iden-
tified herein as exceptions. The exception branches and areas where AC cable is
not acceptable are as follows:
a. Emergency branch circuits
b. Life safety branch circuits
C. Critical branch circuits
d. Emergency equipment branch circuits
e. Exposed locations.
f. Mechanical, electrical, and boiler rooms.
g. Wet and damp locations
2. If AC cable is utilized, branch circuit wiring for receptacles and lighting in areas
with accessible suspended ceilings shall be installed in electric metallic tubing from
panelboards to a junction box within the room served, above the suspended ceil-
ing. Where structural conditions and code rules permit and only when approved
by the authority having jurisdiction, hospital grade No. 12 gauge armor-clad (AC)
cable with a No. 12 insulated green ground wire and with an internal bond wire •
may be used for all wiring within each room beyond the junction box mounted
above the suspended ceiling. If AC cable is used, T&B insulated Tite-Bite connec-
tors or equal shall be used, and wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
3. AC cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 4-1/2 feet and within 12 inches
of every outlet box or fitting. AC cable shall be secured via supports installed ex-
clusively for electrical systems. Support via other mechanical system support struc-
tures is not permitted. At all terminations, a fitting shall be provided to protect the
conductors from abrasion. Approved insulating bushings shall be provided be-
tween the conductors and the armor. The connector or clamp by which the cable
is fastened to boxes or cabinets shall be metal, of double lock-nut construction, UL
approved for use with AC cable, and of such design that the insulating bushing will
be visible for inspection. Internal box cable clamps are not acceptable.
4. Hospital grade AC cable may be utilized for emergency system lighting branch cir-
cuits upon approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-
THWN, single conductors in raceway.
G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Conductors and Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16120-4 05/13/05
2. Conductors shall be of solid, high electrical conductivity copper with a cross-
section area corresponding to standard AWG sizes.
3. The insulation shall be of highly compressed magnesium oxide that will provide
proper spacing for conductors. Thickness of insulation shall be at least 55 mils for
all 600 volt power and control cables from 16 AWG to 500 kcmil and 23 mils for
300 volt twisted pair cables.
4. Cables shall comply with Article 330 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
all other relevant provisions and articles.
5. All wiring shall be in accordance with the latest editions of the National Electrical
Code (NEC), and all manufacturers' recommendations. The complete installation
shall also be acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction.
B. UL-listed, factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation re-
quirements and as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers:
low 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International.
3. Hubbell/Anderson.
4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material,
type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single con-
ductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type
THWN, single conductors in raceway.
400' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Conductors and Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16120-3 05/13/05
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following re-
quirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.
2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
3. General Cable Corporation.
4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
5. Southwire Company.
B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, ca-
ble construction, and ratings.
C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7; solid conductor for
No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5,
Type XHHW (cross-linked polyethylene) complying with NEMA WC 7, type EPR (eth-
ylene propylene rubber) complying with NEMA WC 8, and type MI (magnesium oxide
refractory mineral) complying with NFPA 70.
E. Multiconductor Cable: Armored cable, Type AC (Hospital Grade) with ground wire.
2.3 MINERAL INSULATED (TYPE MI) CABLES
A. GENERAL
1. Mineral insulated (Type MI), metal-sheathed cable shall be a factory assembly of
one or more conductors insulated with highly compacted magnesium oxide insula-
tion and enclosed in a seamless, liquid-and-gas-tight continuous copper sheath as
manufactured by Pyrotenax.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Conductors and Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16120-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multicon-
ductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems
with 2001 to 35,000 V.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency en-
gaged by Contractor.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7
or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Conductors and Cables
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16120-1 05/13/05
END OF SECTION 16119 "*►
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16119-10 05/13/05
G. Grounding: Install ground rod through floor in each structure with top protruding 4
' inches (100 mm) above floor . Comply with applicable requirements of Division 16 Sec-
tion "Grounding." Seal floor opening against water penetration with waterproof non-
shrink grout. Ground exposed metal components and hardware with bare-copper
ground conductors. Train conductors neatly around corners. Install on walls and roof
using cable clamps secured with expansion anchors.
H. Precast Concrete, Underground Structure Installation: Install as indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM C 891.
1. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
2. Support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from the 1-inch
(25-mm) sieve to the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to the same density as
adjacent undisturbed earth.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Provide 24 hour notice to owner, architect, and electric utility company prior
to concrete encasement of ductbanks.
B. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of in-
stallation of underground ducts and utility structures.
ate'"° C. Grounding: Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and
grounding connections. Measure ground resistance at each ground rod and report re-
sults. Use an instrument specifically designed for ground-resistance measurements.
D. Duct Integrity: Rod ducts with a mandrel 1/4 inch (6 mm) smaller in diameter than ID
of ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts, remove obstructions and retest.
E. Watertightness: Make internal inspection of manholes 3 months after completing con-
struction for indications of water ingress. Where leakage is noted, remove water and seal
leak sources. Reinspect after 2 months and reseal remaining leak sources. Repeat proc-
ess at 2-month intervals until leaks are corrected.
F. Correct installations where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and
replace defective products and retest.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Pull brush through full length of ducts. Use round-bristle brush with a diameter 1/2 inch
(12 mm) larger than the ID of duct.
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
look Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16119-9 05/13/05
clearance from the electrical conduit. For gas there shall be a minimum of 3 feet in
any direction.
7. Depth: Install.top of duct bank at least 30 inches below finished grade in all ar-
eas.
H. Stub-ups: Use galvanized rigid steel conduit for stub-ups to equipment and riser poles.
For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit a minimum of 5
feet (1.5 m) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations.
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for the purpose and then encase
coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
I. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal
spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-
psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.
J. Pulling Cord: Install 2500-1b test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.
3.5 UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURE INSTALLATION
A. Elevation: Install manholes with rooftop at least 15 inches (375 mm) below finished
grade.
B. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Coordinate with drainage
provisions indicated.
C. Access: Install cast-iron frame and cover. For manholes, use 30-inch (750-mm) cover,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install precast collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover
with roof opening. Provide moisture-tight joints and waterproof grouting for cast-
iron frame to chimney.
2. Set frames in paved areas and traffic ways flush with finished grade. Set other
frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable
arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors
and as indicated.
E. Hardware: Furnish removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable
arms, and insulators, for installation under another contract. For each manhole and
handhole, furnish 1 stanchion for each 30 linear inches (750 mm) of interior floor pe-
rimeter. Also furnish 1 arm for each stanchion, 3 insulators for each arm, and a total of
3 pulling eyes. Furnish materials complete with associated fasteners, packaged with pro-
tective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents.
F. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches (98 mm) for an-
chor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of 2 anchors for each cable stanchion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16119-8 05/13/05
Change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without
reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. Grout end bells into
manhole walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
F. Building Entrances: Make a transition from underground duct: to conduit at least 10 feet
(3 m) outside the building wall. Use fittings manufactured for that purpose. Follow ap-
propriate installation instructions below:
1. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Install reinforcement in duct banks passing through dis-
turbed earth near buildings and other excavations. Coordinate duct bank with
structural design to support duct bank at wall without reducing structural or wa-
tertight integrity of building wall.
2. Direct-Buried, Nonencased Duct at Nonwaterproofed Wall Penetrations: Install a
Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe sleeve for each duct. Calls space between con-
duit and sleeve with duct-sealing compound on both sides for moisture-tight seal.
3. Waterproofed Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install a watertight entrance-sealing
device with the sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry
construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing
to the device to make permanently watertight.
G. Concrete-Encased Nonmetallic Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with
duct size and required duct spacing, and install according to the following:
1. Separator Installation: Space separators at a maximum of 8 feet and at each cou-
pling to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, and secure separators to the earth
and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do not use tie wires or rein-
forcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct
groups.
2. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and be-
tween conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power-driven agi-
tating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. Pour each
run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous opera-
tion. When more than 1 pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane
and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm)
into the concrete on both sides of joint near the corners of the envelope.
3. Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturb earth and where
indicated
4. Ductbank Identification: Upon pouring of concrete, red pigment shall be shaken
onto the top surface of the ductbank.
5. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where
the soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclu-
sions; otherwise, use forms.
6. Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior enve-
lope wall, 1-1/2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) be-
tween power and signal ducts. Ducts shall not be directly above or below any
other utilities or ducts except when crossing at approximate right angles. When
crossing water or sewer conduits there shall have a minimum 12 inches vertical
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16119-7 05/13/05
3.2 EXAMINATION A,
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to receive ducts and utility structures for com-
pliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting per-
formance of underground ducts and utility structures. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 2 but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-
operated, compaction equipment
B. During backfill operations, install ductbank warning tape approximately 8" below sur-
face for entire length of ductbank installation.
C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades,
unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is com-
pleted.
D. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.
Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding,
sprigging, and mulching. Perform according to Division 2.
E. Restore disturbed pavement. Refer to Division 1.
3.4 CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Install nonmetallic conduit and duct as indicated, according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum of 4 inches/100 feet (1:300) to drain toward manholes
and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point
in runs between 2 manholes to drain in both directions.
C. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows with a minimum radius of 36 inches for
stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances. At other locations, construct long
sweep bends with 5°couplings with a minimum 42 inch duct segment in between cou-
plings. Use longer segments when practical. Maintain a minimum radius of 40 feet,
both horizontally and vertically.
D. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane.
E. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Handholes: Space end bells approximately 10 inches
(250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16119-6 05/13/05
,,, D. Cable Stanchions: Hot-rolled, hot-dip galvanized, T-section steel, 2-1/4-inch (56-mm)
size,punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) centers for cable-arm attachment.
E. Cable Arms: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) thick, hot-rolled, hot-dip galvanized, steel sheet pressed
to channel shape; 12 inches (300 mm) wide by 14 inches (350 mm) long and arranged
for secure mounting in horizontal position at any position on cable stanchions.
F. Cable-Support Insulators: High-glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on
cable arms.
G. Ground Rods: Solid-copper-clad steel, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter by 10-foot (3-m)
length as indicated in Division 16 Section "Grounding".
H. Ground Wire: Stranded bare copper, No. 4/0 AWG minimum as indicated in Divi-
sion 16 Section "Grounding".
I. Ladder: UL-listed, heavy-duty wood, specifically designed for electrical manhole use.
Minimum length equal to the distance from the deepest manhole floor to grade plus 3
feet (1 m).
J. Duct Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to
cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (1 deg C). Capable of
withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (149 deg C) without slump and of adhering to
clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry,
lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
A. Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft.
(60 L), where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M may be used.
B. Concrete: Comply with Division 3 for concrete and reinforcement.
1. Strength: 3000-psig- (20.7-MPa-) minimum, 28-day compressive strength.
2. Aggregate for Duct Encasement: 3/8-inch (10-mm) maximum size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Underground Ducts For Electrical Utility Service: Plastic or rigid galvanized steel conduit
encased in concrete as shown on plans.
B. Manholes: Underground precast concrete utility structures.
OOW Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16119-5 05/13/05
3. Conduit Spacers and Accessories: .*
a. American Pipe and Plastic
b. Cantex
C. Carlon
d. Certainteed
e. GS Industries
f. Chance
g. Cooper
h. Electrical Materials
i. IPEX
j. Thomas & Betts
2.2 CONDUIT AND DUCT
A. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, rated for use with 90 deg C con-
ductors under all installation conditions.
B. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3.
C. Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: High-density polyethylene, Schedule 40.
D. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1, galvanized.
2.3 PULL BOXES AND HANDHOLES
A. Cast-Metal Boxes: Cast aluminum, sized as indicated, with outside flanges and recessed,
gasketed cover for flush mounting. Nonskid finish on cover.
B. Cover Legend: "Electric."
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum 1-1/2 inches duct spac-
ings and concrete cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.
Spacers shall not exceed 8 foot intervals and shall be placed at each coupling.
B. Frames and Covers: Cast iron with cast-in legend "ELECTRIC". Machine cover-to-
frame bearing surfaces
C. Expansion Anchors for Installation After Concrete is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-stell-
wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip 1/2-inch (12-mm— bolt size, 5300-lbf (24kN)
rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf(30-kN) rated shear strength.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16119-4 05/13/05
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts and manholes with final arrangement of
other utilities as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes with final profiles
of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and underground obstruc-
tions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field con-
ditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and hndholes, and as approved by
Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Conduit-Straight:
a. Carlon
1) 48715
b. Ipex
1) 08841UL
C. American Pipe and Plastics
1) TC74207
2. Conduit-Bends:
a. Carlon
1) UA9FNB
b. Cantex
1) 5233842
C. Certainteed
1) 59734
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16119-3 05/13/05
C. Shop Drawings: Show details and design calculations for precast manholes, including re-
inforcing steel. Include Shop Drawings prepared by registered professional structural en-
gineer, as indicated by seal on Shop Drawings.
D. Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and
underground structures. Include plans and sections drawn to scale.
E. Certificate for concrete and steel used in underground, precast concrete utility structures,
according to ASTM C 858.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
G. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of utility structures with ASTM C 857 and
ASTM C 858, based on factory inspection.
H. Record Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts and manholes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section
that is listed and labeled. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
B. Comply with ANSI C2 and NPFA 70. '
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to
prevent bending, warping, and deforming.
B. Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.
C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Architect not less than 10 working days in advance of proposed utility in-
terruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16119-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16119 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, duct banks and precast concrete
manholes.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 for excavation, backfill, and related items for ducts and manholes.
2. Division 3 for concrete requirements.
3. Division 16 Section "Grounding" for ground rods at manholes.
. 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct: Electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used under-
ground, embedded in earth or concrete.
B. Duct Bank: 2 or more conduits or other raceway installed underground in the same
trench or concrete envelope.
C. Handhole: An underground junction box in a duct or duct bank.
D. Manhole: An underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, connect-
ing with ducts to afford facilities for installing and maintaining cables.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: For metal accessories for manholes, conduits and ducts, duct-bank mate-
rials, and miscellaneous components.
*: Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16119-1 05/13/05
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. If a group of tests are specified to be performed by an independent testing agency, pre-
pare systems, equipment, and components for tests and inspections, and perform pre-
liminary tests to ensure that systems, equipment, and components are ready for inde-
pendent agency testing. Include the following minimum preparations as appropriate:
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests.
2. Perform continuity tests.
3. Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested).
4. Provide a stable source of single-phase, 208/120-V electrical power for test instru-
mentation at each test location.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, report the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions.
2. Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices in-
volved in tests. Am%
3. Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements.
4. Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation results.
END OF SECTION 16080
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Testing IOWA
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16080-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16080 - ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general requirements for electrical field testing and inspecting. De-
tailed requirements are specified in each Section containing components that require test-
ing. General requirements include the following:
1. Qualifications of testing agencies and their personnel.
2. Suitability of test equipment.
3. Calibration of test instruments.
4. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting.
S. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting.
ow B. Allowances: Electrical tests and inspections specified in various Division 13 and 16 Sec-
tions are covered by a testing and inspecting allowance specified in Division 1 Section
"Allowances." See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for what is included in allowance
amount, the amount of the allowance, payment procedures for allowances, changes to al-
lowance amounts, and disposition of unused portions of allowance.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: As specified in each Section containing electrical testing
requirements and in subparagraph and associated subparagraph below.
1. Independent Testing Agencies: Independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and in-
stallers of components to be tested or inspected.
a. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor for Power Component Testing: Person
currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the
National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise
on-site testing specified in Division 16 power component Sections.
B. Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.2.
C. Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.3.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Testing
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16080-1 05/13/05
F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall
completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in con-
tact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and
floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-11))
maximum intervals in congested areas.
G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors
listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, branch-circuit, service, feeder, and branch-
circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities
having jurisdiction permit, field applied.
2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
C. Phase C: Blue.
3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
C. Phase C: Yellow.
4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where
splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of con-
ductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous un-
derground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below
finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common
trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting
Sections.
END OF SECTION 16075
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16075-10 05/13/05
k. Push-button stations.
low 1. Power transfer equipment.
m. Contactors.
n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
o. Battery inverter units.
p. Battery racks.
q. Power-generating units.
r. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.
S. Master clock and program equipment.
t. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations.
U. Television/audio components, racks, and controls.
V. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators.
W. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal
cabinets, and racks.
X. Monitoring and control equipment.
y. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.
Z. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and
for signal and control functions.
M. Flash Protection: In accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E, Electrical equipment
shall be labeled with arc flash ratings, warnings, and Personal Projective Equipment
(PPE) needed in order to work each piece of equipment.
1. Equipment to be labeled:
' a. Switchboards
b. Switchgear
C. Panelboards
d. Motor Control Centers
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials
and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appro-
priate to the location and substrate.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16075-9 05/13/05
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless oth-
erwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panel-
boards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
K. Instruction Signs:
1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruc-
tion signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or
equipment operation.
2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a
red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergenc}, in-
structions at equipment used for power transfer and load shedding.
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation
label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or mas-
ter units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system.
Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm
systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)
high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are re-
quired, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropri-
ate for viewing from the floor.
d. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served.
Use engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of white
plates and white filled lettering on face of red plates, and durable wire mark-
ers or tags inside outlet boxes.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
C. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e. Electrical substations.
f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
g. Motor-control centers.
h. Disconnect switches.
i. Enclosed circuit breakers.
j. Motor starters.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16075-8 05/13/05
D. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems
with color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands in accordance with Cooley
Dickinson Hospital Standards:
I. Fire Alarm System
2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System
3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System
4. Security SystemMechanical and Electrical Supervisory System
5. Telecommunication System
6. Control Wiring
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0
AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-
coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors.
For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.
F. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than
three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape.
Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.
G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list
source and circuit number.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, con-
trol, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals,
and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system
used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for
power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install un-
derground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system
voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or
other access.
1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16075-7 05/13/05
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. * .
1) Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
8. Interior Ferrous Metal:
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
9. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel ma-
chine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- (100-
mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that ex-
tends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend
"DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high
black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the follow-
ing finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300
mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, ex-
posed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with
"DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches (50 mm) high, with self-
adhesive vinyl labels. Repeat legend at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and
Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16075-6 05/13/05
4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
1. Exterior Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
2. Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a block filler.
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
3. Exterior Ferrous Metal:
a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.
4. Exterior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):
a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Exterior zinc-coated metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.
S. Interior Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
6. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a block filler.
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
7. Interior Gypsum Board:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16075-5 05/13/05
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA
IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36
INCHES (915 MM)."
3. Location of Emergency Generators: Place signs at every door containing transfer
switches and major emergency electric distribution equipment indicating location
of emergency generators in accordance with Cooley Dickinson Hospital Standards.
2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1116 inch (1.6 mm) thick for
signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent proc-
ess. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by ther- AM*
mal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with
white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10
mm).
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mount-
ing. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height
shall be 1 inch (25 mm).
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 616 nylon cable
ties.
1. Minimum Width: 3116 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg),minimum.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16075-4 05/13/05
C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick alumi-
num sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching
slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conduc-
tors.
D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with
stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.
E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant
grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.
1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.
2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive
labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasten-
ers, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets
in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellu-
lose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with
colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners
for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
- EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16075-3 05/13/05
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with require-
ments in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards,
and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length
of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Color for Printed Legend:
1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicates system or service and voltage, if applicable.
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves,
with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place
by gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic
sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable
it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50
mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE
IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils
(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identifi-
cation legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16075-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.
2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
3. Underground-line warning tape.
4. Warning labels and signs.
5. Instruction signs.
6. Equipment identification labels.
7. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mount-
ing provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.5 COORDINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electrical Identification
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16075-1 05/13/05
4. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to the structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
5. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected
by Architect.
6. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
7. If a device fails the test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satis-
factory results are achieved.
8. Record test results.
END OF SECTION 16071
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16071-7 05/13/05
1. Size concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters �**
from the edge of the concrete base.
2. Concrete Bases for Floor-Mounted Equipment: Use female expansion anchors and
install studs and nuts after equipment is positioned.
3. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient me-
dia between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete.
4. Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment: Install to allow
for resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached
to wall.
5. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment manufac-
turer.
3.5 SEISMIC BRACING INSTALLATION
A. Install bracing according to spacings and strengths indicated by approved analysis.
B. Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of braced compo-
nents.
C. Cable Braces: Install with maximum cable slack recommended by manufacturer.
D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to the
structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
3.6 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Make flexible connections in raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where
they cross expansion and seismic control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are
supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate at electrical equip-
ment anchored to a different mobile structural element from the one supporting them.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-
control testing:
B. Testing: Test pull-out resistance of seismic anchorage devices.
1. Provide necessary test equipment required for reliable testing.
2. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency accept-
able to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device
to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and
with at least seven days' advance notice.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16071-6 05/13/05
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Generator Sets: Comply with Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved
by authorities having jurisdiction, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
3.3 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS
A. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings
to spread structural loads and reduce stresses.
B. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel-type concrete inserts or use expansion
anchors.
C. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.
D. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid re-
inforcing bars.
to E. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion anchors.
F. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with expan-
sion anchors.
G. Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through members.
H. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar
joists.
3.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE
A. Anchor rigidly to a single mobile structural element or to a concrete base that is structur-
ally tied to a single mobile structural element.
B. Anchor panelboards, motor-control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear,
transformers, unit substations, fused power-circuit devices, transfer switches, busways,
battery racks, static uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units,
communication system components, and electronic signal processing, control, and distri-
bution units as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16071-5 05/13/05
D. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
E. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
F. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not accept-
able.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismi-
cally rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of anchor bolts
and studs used.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and
matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.
2.4 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch (41-by-41-mm) cross section, formed from
0.1046-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch (14-by-22-min) slots at a
maximum of 2 inches (SO mm) o.c. in webs, and flange edges turned toward web.
1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 570, GR 33.
2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, or
ASTM A 36.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and de-
signed for use with that product.
4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and
phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel
brackets and bolts.
C. Cable-Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc-coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable at-
tached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service.
1. Arrange units for attachment to the braced component at one end and to the struc-
ture at the other end.
2. Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM 603. Use 49- or 133-strand cable with a
minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be resisted.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to
hanger rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16071-4 05/13/05
00W A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural system and
architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building
features in the vicinity.
B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. Erico, Inc.
4. GS Metals Corp.
S. Loos & Company, Inc.
6. Mason Industries, Inc,
7. Powerstrut.
8. Thomas & Betts Corp.
9. Unistrut Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Use the following materials for restraints:
1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
2.3 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall
be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
B. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type.
C. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16071-3 05/13/05
B. Shop Drawings: For anchorage and bracing not defined by details and charts on Draw-
ings. Indicate materials, and show designs and calculations signed and sealed by a pro-
fessional engineer.
1. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic: restraints. In-
clude calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
2. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachment of restraints to
both structural and restrained items. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacings, identifying components and listing their strengths. Indicate direction and
value of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.
3. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency approved by authori-
ties having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraints and the basis for
approval (tests or calculations).
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating seismic
bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment, including other
seismic restraints, in the vicinity.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of seismic restraints certifying that prod-
ucts furnished comply with requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results of seismic control devices for compliance with requirements indicated. -amok
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in UBC, unless requirements in this Section
are more stringent.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
seismic engineering services, including the design of seismic restraints, that are similar to
those indicated for this Project.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction,with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.8 COORDINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16071-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16071 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes seismic restraints and other earthquake-damage-reduction measures
for electrical components. It complements optional seismic construction requirements in
the various electrical component Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BOCA: BOCA National Building Code.
B. SBC: Standard Building Code.
C. UBC: Uniform Building Code.
D. Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening
assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizon-
tal movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake.
E. Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor struc-
ture, roof structure, or wall that may move independent of other mobile structural ele-
ments during an earthquake.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate types, styles, materials, strength, fastening provi-
sions, and finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used.
1. Anchor Bolts and Studs: Tabulate types and sizes, complete with report numbers
and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency approved by au-
thorities having jurisdiction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16071-1 05/13/05
4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, no-
tify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
3.10 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace
it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trench-
ing, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include
application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Divi-
sion 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as
indicated.
END OF SECTION 16060
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16060-12 05/13/05
fore manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from
ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground
rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or
heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below
concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
C. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts,
cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to
ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum,
stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around cor-
ners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recom-
mended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and counterpoise cir-
cling pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associ-
ated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding elec-
trodes. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for
taps to equipment ground pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches (450 mm) be-
low grade and 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-
resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and
at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after
the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means
other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other
artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-
potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other
grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the
record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their
depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
C. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
d. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
e. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16060-11 05/13/05
at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make
bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.
F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values
are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct cir-
cumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make
a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding con-
ductor.
H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration
of insulation and cable.
3.7 OVERHEAD-LINE GROUNDING
A. Comply with IEEE C2 requirements. Use 2 or more parallel ground rods if a single
ground rod electrode resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms.
B. Drive ground rods to a depth of 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade in undisturbed
earth.
C. Ground Rod Connections: Use clamp-type connectors listed for the purpose for under-
ground connections and connections to rods.
D. Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other grounding conductors.
E. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to grounding
conductor.
F. Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood poles with molding extended
from grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
3.8 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Duct Banks: Install a grounding conductor with at least 50 percent ampacity of the larg-
est phase conductor in the duct bank.
B. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so
4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod be-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16060-10 05/13/05
F. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment g,ounding conduc-
tors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-
type bonding straps.
G. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff
valve.
H. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service
entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.
I. Embedded Electrode (concrete encased): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, Para-
graph 250-52(A)(3), using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of one or morebare or zinc galva-
nized or other electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods or consisting of
at least 20 feet copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. If concrete foundation is
less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within the base of the foundation.
Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor
bolts.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals
in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to
make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers
and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent
future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pres-
sure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be ter-
minated with winged pressure-type connectors.
D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal hous-
ings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit
with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conduc-
tor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16060-9 05/13/05
M. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in
addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-
circuit conductors.
3.4 GROUND RING
A. Ground the steel framework of the building with a driven ground rod at the base of
every corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60
feet (18 m) apart. Provide a grounding conductor (ground ring), electrically connected to
each ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of the build-
ing. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for
tap to building steel. Bury ground ring not less than 18 inches (450 mm) below grade
and 24 inches (600 mm) from building foundation.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other
and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.
1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final
grade, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic
welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without
exposing steel or damaging copper coating.
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless oth-
erwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be sub-
jected to strain, impact, or damage.
C. Bonding Straps and jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration
isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use
exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection
is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking
care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for
maintenance.
D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes
by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, con-
nect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor con-
duit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water me-
ters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16060-8 05/13/05
D. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
E. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-
circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units.
F. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits
supplying x-ray equipment.
G. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding con-
ductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor
from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment
grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless other-
wise indicated.
H. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch
circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic
raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and
install a separate equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conduc-
tor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment
grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless other-
wise indicated.
I. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic race-
ways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
J. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-
mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heat-
ers. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
K. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment
grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating ca-
ble. Bond conductor to heater units,piping, connected equipment, and components.
L. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor
in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet,
wiring closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate ground-
ing conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6.4-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding termi-
nal.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16060-7 05/13/05
G. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned- copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG
minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade or bury 12 inches (300 mm)
above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.
3.2 GROUND RESISTANCE TEST MONITOR
A. Control/Display Unit
1. Sensor shall be located no further than six (6) to twelve (12) fee in cable length
from the Control/Display Unit
2. Connect 110 VAC, neutral, and ground with #12 AWG THWN. Provide a 20
amp single pole circuit breaker.
B. Sensor
1. Sized accordingly to Ground Conductor Size
2. Mounting
a. Screw Mounted- MUST ensure that screws are non-magnetic (Stainless steel
or nylon screws) as provided with unit.
b. Double-sided tape or adhesive
3. Mount the Sensor in such a way to minimize bending the cable as it exits the Sen-
sor. The ground conductor should not double back and/or return within 4" of the
sensor.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment ground-
ing conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by
NFPA 70 are indicated.
B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.
C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the follow-
ing items, in addition to those required by NEC:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
IOWA.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16060-6 05/13/05
w, 3. The unit shall be capable of alarm, remote reading and control via a RS232 inter-
face.
4. Operating Temperature: -20° to 55° C
5. Resistance measurement: Range - >.5 ohms— 1000 ohms, Resolution— 0.1 ohms <
100; 1.0 ohms >100
6. Current Measurement: Range — 0 —4 amps, Accuracy - ±(5%+1 digit)
a. Contact Rating: 30 VDC— 1 amp, 120VAC — 0.2 amp.
b. Normally Open output closes, Normally Closed output opens
7. Self Test: Test CDU at 2.5 ohms and 25.0 ohms.
8. Resistance Measurement (Excitation) Frequency: 1.953 kHz.
9. Sample Rate (Selectable): Continuous, 1 Test/hr, 1 Test/8 hrs
10. Current Measurement Frequency: 47—500 Hz.
11. Input Power: 120 VAC @ 50 mA
12. UL Listing
13. Operating Voltage: 150 VAC
C. Sensor Units:
1. The sensor shall be split core and installed around the ground conductor.
2. Operating Temperature: -40° to 65° C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct
contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for under-
ground connections, except those at test wells.
D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.
F. Grounding Bus: Install in all electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms hous-
ing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch (25.4 mm) from wall and support from wall 6
inches (150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the
doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16060-5 05/13/05
1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor.
2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-
treated fir, or cypress or cedar.
J. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.
2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combina-
tions of conductors and connected items.
B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufac-
turer's written instructions.
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
1. Size: 3/4 by 120 inches (19 by 3000 mm) in diameter.
B. Test Wells: Provide handholes as specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts look
and Utility Structures."
2.5 GROUND RESISTANCE TEST MONITOR
A. General System Description:
1. Permanently mounted resistance testing unit that can provide local and remote
control of the ground system resistance and alarm reading when the pre-set values
exceed over or under alarm set points.
2. Resistance monitor shall be capable of monitoring resistance through bare, insu-
lated and conduit encased conductors.
3. Unit shall be U.L. listed
B. Control/Display Unit (CDU)
1. The Control/Display Unit shall be surface mounted and have a 16 by 2 backlit
LCD display and five key switches. The CDU shall continuously display the
ground resistance and ground current. The CDU shall have an audible alarm, a
dry contact relay alarm output (open or closed) with high and low sensors, and a
RS232 output.
2. The unit shall sample at a minimum of three user selectable rates: continuous, once
per hour, or once per eight hours.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16060-4 05/13/05
AVW q. Lyncole XIT Grounding.
r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
S. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
t. Robbins Lightning, Inc.
U. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co.
V. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc.
W. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2. Ground Resistance Test Monitors
a. Lyncole Industries
2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
B. Material: copper.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe.
On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow
tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) in diameter.
2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1116 inch (1.5 mm) thick.
4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, termi-
nated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
thick.
I. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16060-3 05/13/05
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7
or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
1. Comply with UL 467.
C. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2.
D. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection sys-
tem.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.
b. Boggs, Inc.
C. Chance/Hubbell.
d. Copperweld Corp.
e. Dossert Corp.
f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical.
h. Galvan Industries, Inc.
i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.
j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc.
k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
1. Ideal Industries, Inc.
m. ILSCO.
n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.
p. Lightning Master Corp.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16060-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding re-
quirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of sys-
tems described in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for ground test
wells.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Ground rods.
2. Ground resistance monitors.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16060-1 05/13/05
3. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
3.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative, of elec-
trical distribution equipment being set and adjusted, to assist in setting of overcurrent
protective devices within equipment.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following device setting and to
prepare test reports:
1. After installing overcurrent protective devices and during energizing process of
electrical distribution system, perform the following:
a. Verify that overcurrent protective devices meet parameters used in studies.
b. Adjust devices to values listed in study results.
2. Adjust devices according to recommendations in Chapter 7, "Inspection and Test
Procedures," and Tables 10.7 and 10.8 in NETA ATS.
END OF SECTION 16055
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16055-6 05/13/05
D. Comply with IEEE 141 and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time in-
tervals.
E. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, which-
ever is specified for that transformer.
b. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.
F. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
G. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to
ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Verify ade-
quacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents, equipment
grounding conductors, and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault
currents.
H. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
coordination study:
1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a. Device tag.
b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-
pickup values.
C. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
d. Fuse-current rating and type.
e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective de-
vices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time
separation exists between series devices, including power utility company's up-
stream devices. Show the following specific information:
a. Device tag.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
C. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16055-5 05/13/05
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 16 Sec-
tions and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use
equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system
diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and
recommended device settings.
2. Impedance of utility service entrance.
3. Electrical distribution system diagram showing the following:
a. Load current that is the basis for sizing continuous ratings of circuits for ca-
bles and equipment.
b. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
C. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
d. Transformer kilovolt amperes, inrush amperes, primary and secondary volt-
ages, connection type, impedance, and X/R ratios.
e. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
f. Cables. Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor insulation,
and length.
g. Busway ampacity and impedance.
h. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced
with tag numbers on diagram:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent
starting and stopping. Include compounding inrush considerations if more
than one motor, transformer, etc is fed from same device.
b. Magnetic inrush current overload capabilities of transformers.
C. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time,
type of start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective de-
vices.
e. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
f. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
g. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,
ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time ad-
justment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment
range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer
ratio for overcurrent relays.
i. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting
rating in amperes rms symmetrical.
B. Perform coordination study and prepare a written report using the results of fault-current
study and approved computer software program. Comply with IEEE 399.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for overcurrent protection of circuit elements and devices.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination '
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 160SS-4 05/13/05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting perform-
ance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings and include coordination one
level into existing system when impacted by new construction.
B. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been as-
sembled. Overcurrent protective devices not submitted for approval with coordination
study may not be used in study.
3.2 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A. Source Impedance: As an infinite bus on primary side of utility transformer and utility
company's actual fault-current contribution. .
B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project and use approved computer software program to
calculate values. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate opera-
tions that could result in maximum fault conditions.
""'" C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault
current.
D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply
with the following:
1. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.50.
2. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
3. Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.13.
E. Study Report: Enter calculated X/R ratios and interrupting (5-cycle) fault currents on
electrical distribution system diagram of the report. List other output values from com-
puter analysis, including momentary (1/2-cycle), interrupting (5-cycle), and 30-cycle
fault-current values for 3-phase, 2-phase, and phase-to-ground faults.
F. Equipment Evaluation Report: Prepare a report on the adequacy of overcurrent protec-
tive devices and conductors by comparing fault-current ratings of these devices with cal-
culated fault-current momentary and interrupting duties.
3.3 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16055-3 05/13/05
B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An organization experienced in the appli-
cation of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of
similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of the InterNational Electrical Testilig
Association.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association to supervise testing specified in Part 3.
D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
E. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide com-
puter software programs developed by one of the following:
1. CYME International, Inc.
2. EDSA Micro Corporation.
3. Electrical Systems Analysis, Inc. "
4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with IEEE 399.
B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include
"mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399, Table 7-
4.
C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-
characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report de-
vice settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices.
1. Optional Features:
a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.
C. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16055-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16055 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device
coordination studies, and the setting of these devices.
B. The study shall be performed and submitted with the shop drawing submittal for the
electrical distribution equipment. Upon completion of the installation, the study shall be
revised and resubmitted with actual field conditions.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software
programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data
sheets.
2. Coordination-study report.
3. Equipment evaluation report.
4. Setting report.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in
this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16055-1 05/13/05
1. Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by the
metered feeder.
2. Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the "off" con-
dition.
3. Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a
measurable meter indication. Use a test load placement and setting that ensure
continuous, safe operation.
4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual
electricity used based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample measure-
ments of supply voltage at the test load connection. Record test results.
5. Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup; then re-
test. Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of entire system is
verified.
3.12 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified
in Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish
coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for
timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manu-
facturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recom-
mended by manufacturer.
3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, fin-
ishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Comple-
tion.
END OF SECTION 16050
tow Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16050-9 05/13/05
3.9 DEMOLITION
A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products
of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. Notify owner and architect of any shut-
down necessary to complete project within at least 2 weeks of scheduled shut down.
B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be aban-
doned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap race-
ways and patch surface to match existing finish.
D. Remove demolished material from Project site.
E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated
for relocation.
3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces re-
quired to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades
involved. Avok
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undis-
turbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed.
Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Raceways.
2. Building wire and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electrical components.
4. Electrical identification.
5. Electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete bases.
7. Electrical demolition.
8. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
9. Touchup painting.
B. Test Owner's electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy, and usabil-
ity of output data.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ''
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16050-8 05/13/05
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, con-
Rok trol enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless compo-
nents are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-
drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and
fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install
sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless other-
wise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening
methods are indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid ma-
sonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided
with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
AOW 7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits,
pipe straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of
its proof-test load.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assem-
blies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installa-
tion requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.8 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufac-
turer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie loca-
tions, unless otherwise indicated. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength
concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 16050-7 05/13/05
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of
at least four; minimum of 200-1b (90-kg) design load.
3.6 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical compo-
nents.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assem-
blies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hang-
ers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 per-
cent minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or '
clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may
be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways
serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening
raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar
hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the
raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Bads Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16050-6 05/13/05
A00h" 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3. Install conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN27) parallel to or at right angles to
main reinforcement. Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement, place con-
duit close to slab support.
4. Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make
bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel;
otherwise, provide field bends for exposed parallel raceways.
G. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofila-
ment plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12
inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire.
H. Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN53) and smaller, in
maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or
equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with
these requirements, in addition to requirements above.
I. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement
with a maximum of 72-inch (1830-min) flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp
locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
J. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.
K. Penetrate structural slabs and foundation walls only where approved by Architect. Sub-
mit proposed penetration points, sized openings, and penetration methods to Architect
for approval.
3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conduc-
tors.
B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each out-
let.
C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten
electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A.
3.5 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel
system components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16050-5 05/13/05
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of coin- Amok
ponents. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other in-
stallations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations:
1. Exposed: Rigid Galvanized Steel or IMC.
2. Concealed: Rigid Galvanized Steel or IMC.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use
LFMC.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid Galvanized Steel or IMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings,
and floors.
B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues
and steam or hot-water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping.
C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering.
D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same
plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use
and location.
F. Install raceways embedded in slabs in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and
leave at least 1-inch (25-mm) concrete cover.
1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16050-4 05/13/05
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps,
threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel
clamps. Spring steel clamps are not permitted for conduit sizes larger than 3/4 inch.
E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits.
Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual ris-
ers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs are not permitted.
2.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
B. Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.3 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment
finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible head-
room.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16050-3 05/13/05
ow
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 and any local or state addenda to NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work
and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electri-
cal installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other struc-
tural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for effi-
cient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning be-
fore closing in the building.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access
Doors."
D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate
installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
E. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceil-
ings and similar finishes,coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
F. Notify architect and owner no fewer than 2 weeks in advance of any proposed power in-
terruption.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-
mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16050-2 05/13/05
F SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Concrete equipment bases.
3. Electrical demolition.
4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
5. Access panels.
6. Firestopping.
7. Touchup painting.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16050-1 05/13/05
10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or re-
placement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
Access panels and doors are specified in Division 16 Section "BASIC
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS."
12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
END OF SECTION 16010
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16010-9 05/13/05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) *•�,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements
of the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.
3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems,
materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building components.
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during pro-
gress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. look
4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are con-
structed.
S. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materi-
als, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and over-
head utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connec-
tion for each service.
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal
data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of
the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination require-
ments conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpen-
dicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in fin-
ished spaces.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements laft�`
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16010-8 05/13/05
S. Tap setting schedule for each:
a. Transformer.
6. Overload element schedule for each motor starter.
7. Bolt tightening torques and inspection intervals on each:
a. Bolted bus connection.
b. Cable connection.
C. Miscellaneous bolted electrical connections.
8. Manufacturers' recommended cleaning intervals and special procedures for each:
a. Cooling fins.
b. Dry-type transformer coil assembly.
C. Electrical equipment interior.
d. Electrical equipment ventilation opening.
e. Lighting fixture lenses and reflectors.
9. Main and arcing contact adjustment and replacement for each:
a. Automatic transfer switch.
b. Contactor.
C. Circuit breaker.
d. Fused switch.
e. Motor starter.
10. Calibration and exercise procedures and intervals for each:
a. Automatic transfer switch.
b. Lighting control system.
C. Molded case breaker.
11. "As designed" and "as left" adjustable circuit breaker settings.
12. Testing interval and target values for ground fault protection circuit relays.
13. Testing and trouble shooting procedures unique to special systems.
14. Approved special construction details that differ from the details shown on
Drawings.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16010-7 05/13/05
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT
CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the fol-
lowing information for equipment items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, per-
formance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and
commercial numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut-
down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instruc-
tions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshoot-
ing; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
B. The minimum information that shall be furnished in the maintenance manual shall in-
clude the following:
1. Individual characteristics for trouble shooting sequences for each item of each:
a. Branch circuit panel.
b. Communication system.
C. Distribution panel.
d. Dry-type transformer.
e. Fire alarm system.
f. Individual motor starter.
g. Lighting control system.
h. Nurse call system.
i. Public Address system.
j. Switchboard.
2. Catalog cut sheets for every item for which a shop drawing is required.
3. Schedule of loads served from each:
a. Automatic transfer switch.
b. Branch circuit panel.
C. Distribution panel.
d. Lighting control system.
e. Switchboard.
4. On-hand spare parts list and complete parts list for each:
a. Communication system
b. Control system
C. Distribution panel.
d. Individual motor starter.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements `
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 16010-6 05/13/05
dination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate
drawing preparation with effort specified in other Specification Sections. Include the
.following:
1. Provisions for scheduling, sequencing, moving, and positioning large equipment
in the building during construction. Submit phasing plans to architect and owner
for review.
2. Floor plans, elevations, and details, including the following:
a. Clearances to meet safety requirements and for servicing and maintaining
equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic
maintenance.
b. Equipment support details.
C. Exterior wall, roof, and foundation penetrations of cable and raceway; and
their relation to other penetrations and installations.
d. Fire-rated interior wall and floor penetrations by electrical installations.
e. Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases.
3. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installing air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, alarm and communication systems components, sprinklers, and
other ceiling-mounted items.
1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addi-
tion to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for:
1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; loca-
tions of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and
circuit breaker size and arrangements.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent
building lines.
3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and mate-
rials installed.
4. Provide (3) sets of updated campus electrical one line diagrams in accordance
with Cooley Dickinson Hospital standards.
B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state
in which the project is located as specified in Division 1 to record the locations and in-
vert elevations of underground installations.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16010-5 05/13/05
15. Fuses
16. Grounding materials
17. Intercom systems
18. Interior and exterior lighting fixtures
19. Isolated power systems
20. Lamps
21. Lighting control equipment
22. Load interrupter switches
23. Low voltage wire and cable
24. Manholes and handholes
25. Medium voltage cable, terminations and splices
26. MI cable and associated connectors and tools
27. Motor Control Centers
28. Motor starters
29. Nameplates and device markings
30. Nurse call systems
31. Panelboards and cabinets for Communication/Special Systems
32. Public address/staff paging systems
33. Raceway connectors and fittings
34. Raceways
35. Switchgear
36. Switchboard
37. Transformers
38. Unit substations
39. Wireway and plug-in strip
40. Wiring devices
D. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of electrical related shop drawings,
product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus two copies
of each submittal required, which will be retained by the Electrical Consulting Engi-
neer.
1. Shop Drawings - Initial Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints.
2. Shop Drawings - Final Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints.
3. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item.
4. Samples: 1 additional set.
E. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare Coordination Drawings according to the requirements outlined in Division 1 to
a 1/4-inch-equals-1-foot (1:50) scale or larger. Detail major elements, components, and
systems of electrical equipment and materials in relation to each other and to other sys-
tems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations and space require-
ments for installation, access, and working clearance. Show where sequence and coor-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements `
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' -2323 16010-4 05/13/05
5. EIA/TIA - Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Asso-
ciation
a. EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building Wiring Standard.
b. EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Path-
ways and Spaces.
6. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
7. FM - Factory Mutual Association
8. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories
9. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
10. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers Association
11. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
C. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regula-
tions of governmental agencies and authorities having jurisdiction including local and
state building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire, and health department codes and
standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted in groups by systems. For example, all lighting fix-
tures, lamps, ballasts and accessories shall be submitted simultaneously in one package.
C. Refer to the applicable Division 16 section for specific submittal requirements. Where
there are no specific submittal requirements in the specification section, provide manu-
facturer's standard literature showing the submittal items. Required shop drawings
shall include but not be limited to:
1. AC cable and associated connectors (Hospital Grade)
2. Automatic transfer switches
3. Ballasts and accessories
4. Batteries and battery chargers
5. Boxes
6. Bridal ring cableways
7. Circuit breakers
8. Clocks and elapsed timers
9. Dimmers
10. Disconnect switches
11. Ductbanks and associated raceways
12. Electrical heat trace and snow melting cables and tapes
13. Equipotential grounding systems
14. Fire alarm systems
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16010-3 05/13/05
15. Section 16140 WIRING DEVICES
16. Section 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
17. Section 16215 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL,
18. Section 16232 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING PARALLELING
SWITCHGEAR
19. Section 16271 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
20. Section 16289 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
21. Section 16341 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
22. Section 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
23. Section 16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES
24. Section 16420 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
25. Section 16430 SWITCHGEAR
26. Section 16441 SWITCHBOARDS
27. Section 16442 PANELBOARDS
28. Section 16443 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
29. Section 16461 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS)
30. Section 16491 FUSES
31. Section 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
32. Section 16512 SPECIALTY INTERIOR LIGHTING
33. Section 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
34. Section 16630 ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
35. Section 16722 INTERCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
36. Section 16725 NURSE CALL
37. Section 16726 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT
38. Section 16856 ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Electrical work shall comply with the current editions of the following codes:
1. BOCA - National Building Code
2. NFPA 70 - National.Electrical Code
3. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
4. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
6. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code
7. Massachusetts State Building Code
8. Massachusetts Electric Code
B. Electrical work shall comply with the current standards of the following organizations:
1. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services - Guidelines for Construction
and Equipment of Hospital and Medical Facilities
2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
3. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
4. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Basic Electrical Requirements
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 16010-2 05/13/05
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes basic general requirements for electrical installations. The follow-
ing administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand
the requirements specified in Division 1:
1. Codes and Standards.
2. Submittals.
3. Coordination drawings.
4. Record documents.
5. Maintenance manuals.
6. Rough-ins.
7. Electrical installations.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of
Division 16.
B. Related Sections: The following sections of Division 16 contain requirements that re-
late to this section:
1. Section 13810 CLOCK CONTROL
2. Section 13851 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
3. Section 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
4. Section 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
5. Section 16055 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
6. Section 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
7. Section 16071 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
8. Section 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
9. Section 16080 ELECTRICAL TESTING
10. Section 16119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
11. Section 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
12. Section 16124 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
13. Section 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
14. Section 16139 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 16010-1 05/13/05
AO""`
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-31 05/13/05
f. Fuel type and input in Btuh (kW).
g. Number of passes.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Operating pressure in psig (kPa).
b. Operating temperature in deg F (deg Q.
C. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS (DN).
f. Safety valve settings in psig (kPa).
g. High-limit setting in psig (kPa).
h. Operating-control setting.
i. High-fire set point.
J. Low-fire set point.
k. Voltage at each connection.
1. Amperage for each phase.
M. Draft fan voltage at each connection.
n. Draft fan amperage for each phase.
o. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).
T. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
I. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
C. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.27 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional test-
ing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout
and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not per-
formed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections,
testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 15990
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-30 05/13/05
d. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
e. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
R. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by
plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Service.
d. Make and size.
C. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm).
k. Motor make and frame size.
1. Motor horsepower and rpm.
in. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
C. Actual impeller size in inches (mm).
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or prig (kPa).
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
S. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-29 05/13/05
a. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
C. Water temperature differential in deg F (deg Q.
d. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
C. Leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
g. Water flow rate in gpm (Us).
h. Bleed water flow rate in gpm (Us).
4. Air Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Duct airflow rate in cf n (Us).
b. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
C. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
d. Average entering-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg F (deg Q.
e. Average leaving-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg F (deg Q.
f. Ambient wet-bulb temperature in deg F (deg Q.
Q. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For steam and hot-water heat exchangers, in-
clude the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Ratings.
2. Steam Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Inlet pressure in psig (kPa).
b. Condensate flow rate in lb/h (M).
3. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
C. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
d. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
e. Water flow rate in gpm (Us).
4. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
C. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-28 05/13/05
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
o. Suction pressure in psig (kPa).
P. Suction temperature in deg F (deg Q.
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa).
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg Q.
S. Oil pressure in psig (kPa).
t. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C).
U. Voltage at each connection.
V. Amperage for each phase.
W. The kW input.
X. Crankcase heater kW.
y. Number of fans.
Z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm (Us).
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
P. Cooling Tower or Condenser Test Reports: For cooling towers or condensers, include
the following:
I. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Make and type.
C. Model and serial numbers.
d. Nominal cooling capacity in tons (M).
e. Refrigerant type and weight in lb (kg).
f. Water-treatment chemical feeder and chemical.
g. Number and type of fans.
h. Fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
i. Fan motor voltage at each connection.
j. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
k. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
1. Number of belts, make, and size.
2. Pump Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Make and model number.
b. Manufacturer's serial number.
C. Motor make and frame size.
d. Motor horsepower and rpm.
e. Voltage at each connection.
f. Amperage for each phase.
g. Water flow rate in gpm (Us).
3. Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-27 05/13/05
k. The kW input.
I. Crankcase heater kW.
M. Chilled water control set point in deg F (deg Q.
n. Condenser water control set point in deg F (deg Q.
o. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig (kPa).
p. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig (kPa).
5. Refrigerant Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Oil level.
b. Refrigerant level.
C. Relief valve setting in psig (kPa).
cf. Unloader set points in psig (kPa).
e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded.
f. Bearing temperatures in deg F (deg Q.
g. Vane position.
h. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F (deg C).
O. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone
refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units,
include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in lb (kg).
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F (deg C).
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
C. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg Q.
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
g. Condenser water temperature differential in deg F (deg C).
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Condenser water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
k. Control settings.
I. Unloader set points.
M. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-26 05/13/05
a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
C. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or prig (kPa).
C. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg Q.
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg Q.
N. Packaged Chiller Reports: For each chiller, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Make and model number.
C. Manufacturer's serial number.
d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal. (L).
e. Starter type and size.
f. Starter thermal protection size.
2. Condenser Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa).
b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg Q.
C. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
3. Evaporator Test Reports: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa).
b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C).
C. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
4. Compressor Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Make and model number.
b. Manufacturer's serial number.
C. Suction pressure in psig (kPa).
d. Suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Discharge pressure in psig (kPa).
f. Discharge temperature in deg F (deg C).
g. Oil pressure in psig (kPa).
h. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C).
i. Voltage at each connection.
j. Amperage for each phase.
took Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-25 05/13/05
a. System and air-handling unit number. .. ,
b. Location and zone.
C. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg Q.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. ( (sq. m)).
g. Design airflow rate in cfm (Us).
h. Design velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (Us).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:
Unit Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
C. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. ( (sq. m)).
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Airflow rate in cfm (Us).
b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).
C. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (Us).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).
e. Final airflow rate in cfm (Us).
f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).
g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).
M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the fol-
lowing:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
C. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
C. Flowmeter type.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-24 05/13/05
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Heat output in Btuh (kW).
b. Airflow rate in cfm (US).
C. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg Q.
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg Q.
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
C. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (US).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
C. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a
grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
Testing, and Balancing
Cooley Dickinson Hospital g� Adjusting, g
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-23 05/13/05
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btuh (kW).
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
I. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg Q.
C. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg Q.
d. Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C).
e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW).
i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). ,.
j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg Q.
I. Operating set point in Btuh (kW).
M. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh (kW).
I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
C. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btuh (M).
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-22 05/13/05
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
k. Outside-air damper position.
1. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
C. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm o.c.).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
C. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg Q.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg Q.
f. Entering-air,wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg Q.
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
h. Water flow rate in gpm (Us).
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg Q.
1. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
M. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg Q.
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).
H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's fac-
tory startup equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-21 05/13/05
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. -look
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
C. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
C. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-20 05/13/05
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibra-
tion.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the follow-
ing:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include ap-
proved Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following
data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
S. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design
values.
14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
C. Cooling coil,wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch di-
ameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-19 05/13/05
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve op- ,,
erators,
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
1. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.24 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. '
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.25 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing de-
vices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for perform-
ance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each
system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.26 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond pa-
per, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-18 05/13/05
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regu-
lation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 suc-
cessive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final tem-
perature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.22 FUME HOODS
A. Determine total airflow into the room where the fume hood is located and balance sys-
tems to ensure adequate air supply to all hoods.
1. Set fume-hood door opening at position of normal use.
2. Energize the exhaust fan and adjust airflow to provide the indicated average fume-
hood face velocity at hood opening.
3. Measure exhaust airflow volume by measuring airflow by Pitot-tube duct traverse.
4. Measure air velocity using Pitot-tube traverse method.
5. Record each face velocity measurement taken at 4- to 6-inch (100- to 150-mm) in-
crements over the entire hood door opening.
6. Calculate the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements.
7. Calculate the airflow volume of exhaust-hood face velocity by multiplying the cal-
culated average face velocity by the opening area. Compare this quantity with ex-
haust volume at exhaust fan and report duct leakage.
8. Measure airflow volume supplied by makeup fan. Verify that the makeup system
supplies the proper amount of air to keep the space at the indicated pressure with
the exhaust systems in all operating conditions.
9. Retest for average face velocity. Adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other parts of
the system to provide the indicated average face velocity and the indicated auxil-
iary air-supply percentages.
10. Retest and adjust the systems until fume-hood performance complies with Contract
Documents.
3.23 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely af-
fect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measure-
ments.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-17 05/13/05
A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and then make sure the makeup and
blow-down systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment.
Perform the following tests and record the results:
1. Measure condenser water flow to each cell of the cooling tower.
2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air.
4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air.
5. Measure condenser water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower.
6. Measure cooling tower pump discharge pressure.
7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup-water system.
3.18 CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Re-
cord compressor data.
3.19 BOILERS
A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
3.20 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for
less than 7500 cfm (3540 L/s).
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental
stage.
S. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
3.21 TEMPERATURE TESTING
Aowk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-16 05/13/05
E. Record safety valve settings.
F. Verify operation of steam traps.
3.15 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4 Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and
serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.16 CHILLERS
A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances
of design flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple
chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended
by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller op-
erating at design conditions:
1. Evaporator water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water
flow.
2. Condenser water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water
flow.
3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instru-
ments furnished by the chiller manufacturer.
4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW.
5. The kW input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW.
6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
7. Air-Cooled Chillers: Verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan data, including
number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.17 COOLING TOWERS
low Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-15 05/13/05
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. ,
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-
drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow
that is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over de-
sign flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm,
pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air tempera-
ture.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of bal-
ancing.
3.12 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at maxi-
mum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
3.13 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL
PROCEDURES
A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.
3.14 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of automatic tempera-
ture-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-14 05/13/05
B. Adjust each induction unit.
3.10 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump
to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow
rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addi-
tion to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design
flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not
set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several
terminal valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing de-
vice so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually oper-
ated.
3.11 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-
displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify
with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure dif-
ferential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in
gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and
confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump dis-
charge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower
for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare cal-
culated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report condi-
tions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-13 05/13/05
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one
is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
>. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and
inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems
have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum design airflow by setting the required number of terminal
units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum design airflow with the variable-airflow controller
set at maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units being tested at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing .• ,
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit
to design airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets down-
stream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and
inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.8 MULTIZONE SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.
B. Adjust each zone damper to design airflow.
3.9 INDUCTION-UNIT SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance primary-air risers by measuring static pressure at the nozzles of the top and bot-
tom units of each riser to determine which risers must be throttled. Adjust risers to de-
sign airflow within specified tolerances.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-12 05/13/05
3.7 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than
the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum
set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design
airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed
evenly among the branch ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a po-
sition that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static
pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering
static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal
unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static
pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge duct losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written in-
structions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air
outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air sys-
tems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return air-
flow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air
ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-
pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static
pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan sys-
tems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow and verify operation
of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air out-
lets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
took
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-11 05/13/05
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets
and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue
to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified toler-
ances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of de-
sign quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by
the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Set mixing boxes at full-cold airflow position for setting the fan volume, after verifying
that the cooling coil is capable of full-system airflow.
B. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to
determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to
overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase the airflow at the fan.
C. Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows:
1. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and observing the
air temperature and volume changes.
2. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments.
3. Adjust mixing box to design airflows within specified tolerances. Measure the air-
flow by Pitot-tube traverse readings, totaling the airflow of the outlets; or by
measuring static pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by the box manufacturer.
D. Remeasure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to
determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to
overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
E. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-volume dual-
duct systems, and adjust each mixing-box maximum- and minimum-airflow settings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-10 05/13/05
3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-
duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These addi-
tional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by
the fan manufacturer.
I. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible con-
nection.
C. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the
fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from
duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the ple-
num that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps,
heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design
static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors
with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recom-
mend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
S. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage
in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum re-
quired brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and ad-
just volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-9 05/13/05
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC national standards and this Section.
B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of En-
vironmental Systems" and this Section.
C. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this
Section.
Ill. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifica-
tions for this Project.
E. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and simi-
lar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow meas-
urements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-8 05/13/05
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and con-
trols.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mix-
ing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,
drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions
to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the fol-
lowing:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
S. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can
be met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-7 05/13/05
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment con-
trols.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate perform-
ance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create
undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a sys-
tem. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equip-
ment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment
was performance tested at the factory. 'To calculate system effects for air systems, use
tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with
the design data and installed conditions.
1'. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sec-
tions have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balanc-
ing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their lo-
cations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify
that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify
that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction pip-
ing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-6 05/13/05
A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article
shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions
of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National
Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the
Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with
the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the
following provisions:
1. The certified Agent has tested and-balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and in-
stallation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to dis-
cover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and bal-
ancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of
these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and
for efficient system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents."
D. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-5 05/13/05
F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
G. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Proce-
dural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
H. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
I. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's
standard forms approved by the Architect.
J. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national stan-
dards.
IC Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section 1I,
"Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
L. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more fre-
quently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the
entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during test-
ing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's opera-
tions.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building be-
fore Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and
balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to-operate HVAC systems
and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and wa-
ter distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-4 05/13/05
AOW D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports pre-
pared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting,
and balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
forms.
F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article be-
1 ow.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by
AABC.
B. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by
NEBB.
C. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Archi-
tect's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participa-
tion of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' au-
thorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel.
Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. Contract Documents examination report.
C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
E. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified test-
ing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced
in this Specification.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-3 05/13/05
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement.
In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
C. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the sec-
tion side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
1. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance rat-
ings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan
was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and re-
porting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Pro-
ject's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in
the "Quality Assurance" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice
to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in
Part 3 of this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step proce-
dures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report
forms intended for use on this Project.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
w 7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,
branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors
of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat
is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield re-
peatable results.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15990-1 05/13/05
and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and
controls to suit actual conditions.
END OF SECTION 15900
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-22 05/13/05
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment, and retest.
4. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psig (207 kPa) or 1.5 times the operating
pressure for 24 hours, with maximum 5-psig (35-kPa) loss.
5. Pressure test high-pressure control air piping at 150 psig (1034 ]cPa) and low-
pressure control air piping at 30 psig (207 kPa) for 2 hours, with maximum 1-psig
(7-kPa) loss.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.
2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, acid
control sequences.
J. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of op-
eration specified.
D. Verify DDC as follows:
1. Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset
controls, and occupied/unoccupied cycles.
2. Verify operation of operator workstation.
3. Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.
to"*
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and sched-
ules.
2. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting
data, executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default val-
ues, and requesting logs. Include a minimum of 40 hours' dedicated instructor
time on-site.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up
to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-21 05/13/05
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect
against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of con-
trol system, except local individual room control cables.
D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.
Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when
switch is in hand position.
F. Control contractor shall be responsible for the installation and maintenance of the
Ethernet network on which all control units shall reside. This system shall be running
completely independently from the hospitals Ethernet network throughout the construc-
tion of the building. The control contractor shall be responsible for providing all neces-
sary hardware such as Ethernet servers, switches and cabling to meet this requirement.
Once the system has been completely tested and commissioned then the control contrac-
tor shall turnover the control system's Ethernet network to the building owner. The
owner shall reserve the right to integrate the control system's Ethernet network into the
owner's network.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings A"k
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
B. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and elec-
trical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to con-
firm proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,
and retest.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-20 05/13/05
I. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15
Section "Mechanical Identification."
J. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Hydronic Piping."
K. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air
ducts.
L. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal
Transmission Media."
M. Provide room sensors with programmable setpoint adjustment via portable workstation
and adjustable temperature range (via slider mounted on sensor) with override button in
the following locations:
1. Medical/Surgical Patient Rooms.
2. Nurses Stations.
3. All Diagnostic Rooms.
4. Isolation Rooms.
5. Lounges/Locker Rooms.
6. Offices.
O"` N. Provide room sensors in the following locations:
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Atrium.
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Ca-
bles."
C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal
Transmission Media."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and pip-
ing are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in electrical metallic tubing.
3. Install concealed cable in electrical metallic tubing.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables
where several cables follow a common path.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-19 05/13/05
A. Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 16 Section
"Control/Signal Transmission Media."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator work-
station.
B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic pip-
ing are installed before proceeding with installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb.
B. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation speci-
fied.
D. Mount compressor and tank unit on vibration isolators according to Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." Isolate air supply with wire-
braid-reinforced rubber hose. Secure and anchor according to manufacturer's written in-
structions and seismic control requirements.
1. Pipe manual and automatic drains to nearest floor drain.
2. Supply instrument air from compressor units through filter, pressure-reducing
valve, and pressure relief valve, with pressure gages and shutoff and bypass valves.
E. Verify location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before installation. Locate all 60 inches (1524 mm) above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
F. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to out-
door temperatures.
H. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-18 05/13/05
3. The probes shall be capable of producing steady, non-pulsating signals of standard
and total static pressure without need for flow corrections or factors, with an accu-
racy of 3 percent of actual flow over a fan operating range of 6 to 1 turndown
C. Provide with the air flow traverse probes a NEMA 1 cabinet with air flow indication
gauge and electronic differential pressure transmitter for the supply fan and the minimum
outside air flow station. The cabinet shall be mounted in the piping vestibule of the air
handling unit.
1. The air flow meter shall be mounted flush on the cabinet front door. The meter
shall consist of a dual-scale, diaphragm-actuated differential pressure gauge.
Gauge to read in cubic feet per minute (CFM) and in feet per minute (FPM). Me-
ter to be complete with internal tubing, barb fitting for 1/4" O.D. tubing and fur-
nished with a plastic data plate listing the system, air flow station number, fan
number and design air volume.
2. The electronic differential pressure transmitter shall be capable of receiving signals
of duct and reference static pressure and of amplifying and scaling the sensed dif-
ferential pressure of inches W.C. into a 4-20mA DC or 0-5 VDC outlet signal lin-
ear to differential pressure. The differential pressure transmitter shall be capable
of the following performance and application criteria:
3. Performance Characteristics Common to All Transmitters
a. Reference Accuracy (Includes Non-Linearity, Hysteresis, and Non-
Repeatability):
1) +0.5 Percent of Span
b. Output Signal:
1) 4-20mA DC or 0-5 VCD Standard
C. Power Supply:
1) 12 to 40 DC unregulated: 2 wire, 4 to 20mA DC: 3 wire, 0 to 5 VDC.
d. Integral Zeroing Means:
1) 3-way zeroing valve with manual switch.
e. Temperature Effect:
1) +2.0 percent of full span from 40°F to 120°F
4. The transmitter shall not be damaged by over-pressurization up to 20 times
greater than span and shall be furnished with a factory calibrated span and integral
zeroing means. The transmitter shall be housed in a molded polyethylene (NEMA
12 steel) enclosure with external signal tubing, power and output signal connec-
tions.
D. Pneumatic tubing from the fan inlet probes to the gauge cabinet shall be factory installed
by the air handling unit manufacturer. Pneumatic tubing shall be copper with maximum
unsupported length of 36". Tubing shall be soldered or brazed, except at equipment and
at shipping breaks where compression fittings shall be used. Tubing shall be pressure
tested and purged with dry, oil-free compressed air before connections are made.
2.12 CONTROL CABLE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-17 05/13/05
12. Wiring: Room pressure monitor wiring shall be to a terminal strip that plugs into .A+s
the back of the monitor.
D. Damper Actuator.
1. Electric Actuator: The room pressure controller shall interface with an electric ac-
tuator with a control voltage of 0-10 volts. The control input current shall be less
than 0.001 amps DC.
2. Enclosure: The damper actuator shall be enclosed in a metal case with a 7/8 inch
knockout for electrical wiring. Electrical connections shall be made to screw ter-
minals.
3. Actuator Speed: The response time for 0 to 85 degrees of damper travel shall be 5
seconds or less.
a. Actuator shall be capable of direct or reverse action.
4. Torque: 400 in-oz.
5. Overcurrent Protection: Provide overcurrent protection of 0.28 amps.
2.11 AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Airflow Station Probes:
a. Air Monitor Corporation - Volu-Probe/FI. (For fan inlet applications)
b. Air Monitor Corporation - Volu-Probe/VS. (For inline duct mounted appli-
cations)
2. Airflow Station Flow Meter:
a. Air Monitor Corporation—Type "M".
3. Electronic Differential Pressure Transmitter:
a. Air Monitor Corporation—VELTRON Series 1000C.
B. Provide on the supply fan, air flow traverse probes factory mounted by the air handling
unit manufacturer in the fan inlet capable of continuously measuring the fan capacity.
1. The fan inlet air flow traverse probes (two per inlet) shall contain multiple total
and static pressure sensors placed at concentric area centers along the exterior sur-
face of the cylindrical probe and internally connected to their respective averaging
manifolds.
2. The fan inlet probe shall have dual end support swivel brackets suitable for mount-
ing in the fan inlet bell and shall be of aluminum construction with hard anodized
finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-16 05/13/05
S. Cable: Provide a 6 conductor, 22 AWG cable with connector for wiring between
the sensor and the pressure monitor.
C. Room Pressure Controller.
I. General: The room pressure controller shall measure, display and control room
pressure. Controller, display, and configuration module shall be one integral unit.
2. Keypad: The keypad shall provide access to menu driven configuration options via
and shall be a smooth spill-proof membrane switch.
3. Controller Housing: The controller housing shall be a molded plastic case. Case
shall mount to a double gang electrical box.
a. The controller shall have a sliding outer cover that protects the display and
membrane switch. The cover shall have the capability of concealing the dis-
play with the alarm lights still visible.
4. Indicator Lights: Two indicator lights located on the front of the monitor shall in-
dicate the following conditions:
a. Red— ALARM conditions.
b. Green —NORMAL or safe pressure conditions.
5. Display: Two line alphanumeric digital display indicating the measured room
pressure in inches of water column. The display shall have a range of—0.20000 to
+0.20000 with a resolution of 5 percent of reading and shall be updated every one-
half second.
a. The alphanumeric digital display shall indicate the actual room pressure
(positive, negative, or no isolation), alarm status, menu options, diagnostics,
and error messages. In normal operation, the display shall continuously
scroll information about room status, pressure, and other configurable vari-
ables as applicable.
6. Alarm Set-points: The controller shall have high and low alarms for negative pres-
sure and low and high alarms for positive pressure. Each alarm shall be capable of
having a unique set-point.
7. Audible Alarm: The controller shall have an audible alarm that sounds when the
room is in an alarm condition.
8. Test Button: A single test button on the face of the unit shall provide validation of
set-points, alarm points, and unit self diagnostics.
9. Output: Linear pressure output shall be user selectable as either a 0-10 VDC or 4-
20 mA, via the keypad.
10. Flow Station: An analog flow station shall be available for calculation of air
changes per hour and to indicate when minimum volumes are not being main-
tained.
11. Communications: RS-485 communications with field selectable Modbus or Cl-
metrics communications protocol.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-15 05/13/05
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design as indicated on the Drawings; ►
0.1084-inch (2.8-mm) minimum, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting;
damper blades shall not be less than 0.0635-inch (1.6-mm) galvanized steel with maxi-
mum blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).
1. Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using
zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-
plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and
thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to
plus 93 deg Q.
3. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
4. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable
seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm
per sq. ft. (51 L/s per sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches w-
(995 Pa) when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when
tested according to AMCA 500D.
5. Dampers installed in the emergency generator room intake and exhaust shall be
TAMCO Series 9000-Thermally Insulated Damper.
2.10 ROOM PRESSURE CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide room pressure con-
trollers by the following:
1. TSI Inc. —PRESSURA Model 8630.
B. Pressure Sensor.
1. General: The pressure sensor shall consist of two velocity sensing elements
mounted in-line with each other and a temperature compensating element. The ve-
locity sensing elements shall be ceramic coated platinum RTD. Constant tempera-
ture anemometry shall be used to make the air velocity measurement.
a. The pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated over a range of 55T
through 95°F.
2. Sensor Housing: The pressure sensor assembly shall consist of a molded plastic
sensor, PVC tubing, intumescent rings, and a matching sensor housing.
3. Fire Rating: The pressure sensor assembly shall be ANSI/UL 1479 listed for "Fire
Tests of Through Penetration Firestops". The unit shall be listed for a two hour
fire rating.
4. Accuracy: The pressure sensor shall accurately measure room pressure from —
0.20000 to +0.20000 inches water column. The sensor shall be capable of measur-
ing down to 0.00015 inches water column. The sensor shall be bi-directional to
determine the proper direction of negative pressure.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-14 05/13/05
A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, re-
newable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under
pressure.
C. Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-
type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.
D. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig (862 kPa) and 250 deg F (121 deg C) op-
erating conditions.
2. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel or brass.
a. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guid-
ing surfaces for plugs on top and bottom of guided plugs.
3. Sizing: 3-psig (21-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
4. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics.
Operators shall close valves against pump shutoff head.
E. Steam system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
'tow 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig (862 kPa) and 250 deg F (121 deg C) op-
erating conditions.
2. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel.
a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for
plug on top and bottom of guided plugs.
3. Sizing: 10-psig (69-kPa) inlet pressure and 5-psig (35-kPa) pressure drop.
4. Sizing: Pressure drop across steam valve at a maximum flow of 80 percent of inlet
pressure for low-pressure systems.
5. Flow Characteristics: Modified linear characteristics.
F. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig (1380-kPa), 150-psig (1035-kPa) maximum pressure differen-
tial, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended
neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
1. Body Style: Lug.
2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.
3. Sizing: 1-psig (7-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
2.9 DAMPERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-13 05/13/05
3. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for
running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).
B. Electronic Damper Actuators and Actuators for Valves Located Outside: Direct-coupled
type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.
1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-
cm/sq. m) of damper.
b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. (62 leg-cnn/sq.
m) of damper.
C. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-pounds/sq. ft (49.6 kg-
cm/sq. in) of damper.
d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-pounds/sq. ft. (37.2 kg-
cm/sq. m) of damper.
e. Dampers with 2 to 3 Inches wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Ve-
locities of 1000 to 2500 FPM (5 to 13 m/s): Multiply the minimum full-
stroke cycles above by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3 to 4 Inches wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face
Velocities of 2500 to 3000 FPM (13 to 15 m/s): Multiply the minimum full-
stroke cycles above by 2.0.
3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external,
manual gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V
dc.
8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V do or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V do position
feedback signal.
9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F (minus 30 to plus 50 deg C).
10. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F (minus 30 to
plus 121 deg C).
11. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
C. Pneumatic Valve Operators: Rolling-diaphragm, spring-loaded, piston type with spring
range as required and start-point adjustment and positioning relay. Operator shall main-
tain full shutoff at maximum pump differential pressure.
1. Control valves located in an interior location and over 1 inch shall be provided
with pneumatic valve operators.
2.8 CONTROL VALVES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-12 05/13/05
D. Pneumatic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Potentiometer mounted in enclosure with
adjustable crank-arm assembly connected to damper to transmit 0 to 100 percent
valve/damper travel.
E. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel
and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
F. Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or snap-
acting type, with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless-steel
or bronze paddle. For chilled-water applications, provide vaporproof type.
G. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity
control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mount-
ing.
H. Dewpoint Monitor: Provide dewpoint monitor as manufactured by Emseco — Newport
Model.
2.6 THERMOSTATS
A. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-, three-,
or four-position, push-button or lever-operated fan switch.
1. Label switches "FAN ON-OFF," "FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF," "FAN HIGH-MED-
LOW-OFF." Provide unit for mounting on two-gang switch box.
B. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,
enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, integral
manual on-off-auto selector switch.
1. Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position
on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.
2. Dead Band: Maximum 2 deg F (1 deg Q.
2.7 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modu-
lating action or two-position action.
1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil im-
mersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mecha-
nism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit
switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
2. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size
for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in.
x lbf (33.9 N x m).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-11 05/13/05
1. Thermistor temperature sensors as follows:
a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 036 deg F (0.2 deg C) at calibration point.
b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
C. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches (46 cm) long; use where
not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9
sq. ft. (1 sq. m).
d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches (183 cm) long, flexible; use where
prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (1
sq. m); length as required.
e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length
of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
f. Room Sensors: Refer to Part 3 of this section for required accessories and
locations required.
g. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
2. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
a. Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output.
b. Room Sensors: With locking cover matching room thermostats, span of 25
to 90 percent relative humidity.
C. Duct and Outside-Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate,
range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.
3. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for ex- ,
pected input, and temperature compensated.
a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.
C. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25 inch wg (0 to 62 Pa).
d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).
4. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suit-
able for system; proportional output 4 to 20 mA.
B. Equipment operation sensors as follows:
1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5
inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).
2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump with ad-
justable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 prig (55 to 414 kPa).
3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,
adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
C. Digital-to-Pneumatic Transducers: Convert plus or minus 12-V do pulse-width-
modulation outputs, or continuous proportional current or voltage to 0 to 20 psig (0 to
138 kPa).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-10 05/13/05
2. Panel-Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers, relays, and
automatic switches; except safety devices. Mount devices with adjustments acces-
sible through front of panel.
3. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, in-
cluding damper-positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and
gages.
4. Graphics: Color-coded graphic, laminated-plastic displays on doors, schematically
showing system being controlled, with protective, clear plastic sheet bonded to en-
tire door.
C. Graphic Interface Controller: The graphic interface controller shall be fully user pro-
grammable and contains an LCD display with a size of 24 lines by 40 characters. The
screen contains up to 64 cells that are activated by the touch of a finger. The screen shall
be capable of displaying various graphic images, database values, and predefined control
animations such as buttons, keypads, and gauges to enable operators to easily view and
modify system information. Refer to the Drawings for graphic interface requirements.
1. Graphic interface controller shall have a minimum of 64I< bytes of user RAM
memory and 128K bytes of EEPROM.
2. The display shall be capable of generating two color images of floor plans, equip-
ment, schematics, control animations and database values. The screen shall have a
minimum resolution of 320 x 200 characters, and will issue an audible sound upon
touching the screen.
3. The graphic interface shall contain a real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per
day. The real time clock shall provide the following information: time of day,
day, month, year, and day of the week. Each controller shall be capable of receiv-
ing a signal over the network to synchronize all of the clocks at the same time.
4. The graphic interface shall have a built in power supply of 24VAC, 60 Hz.
S. The graphic interface shall be designed for flush mounting on a wall.
2.4 TIME CLOCKS
A. Solid-state, programmable time control with 4 separate programs; 24-hour battery car-
ryover; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 pro-
grammable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; and system fault
alarm.
2.5 SENSORS
A. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct
mounting as required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-9 05/13/05
3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator
station.
4. BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN using MS/TP, Class 2, minimum,
with at least one communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in
P1CS for the following areas:
a. Network.
b. Functional groups.
C. Standard application services supported.
d. Standard objects supported.
H. LANs: Capacity for a minimum of 10 workstations connected to multiuser, multitasking
environment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units.
1. Media: Ethernet, peer-to-peer TCP/IP based, communicating at '10 Mbps or 100
Mbps (auto switching) over 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX Ethernet cable. All control
units shall use dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP). Fixed IP addresses
will not be allowed.
I. Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. Include and im-
plement the following capabilities from the control units:
1. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
2. Load Control Programs: Demand limiting, automatic time scheduling, start/stop
time optimization, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.
3. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy
switchover.
4. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser water reset, chilled-
water reset, and equipment sequencing.
5. Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm messages, weekly
scheduling, and interlocking.
2.3 CONTROL PANELS
A. Central (Master) Control Panels: Fully enclosed, steel-rack-type cabinet with locking
doors or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multicolor
graphic displays, schematically showing system being controlled.
B. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mount-
ing, located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying
for all panels.
1. Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-
aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with
manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-8 05/13/05
F. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,
random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface
equipment; and backup power source. Controls units shall contain a minimum of (40)
forty megabytes of random access memory. All inputs/outputs shall wire directly to these
units. If this cannot be achieved due to product architecture all sub-control units con-
taining input/output terminations shall reside in the same enclosure as the master unit.
These control units are to be used to control all core mechanical systems (Boilers, Chill-
ers, Pump systems, Air handling units, etc.)
1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; execute
commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download
from or upload to operator station.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. FLInC-
tions include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
C. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware
and controlled environment.
e. Data trend collection and storage
3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator
station.
4. BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN in Ethernet IEEE 802.3, Class 3,
minimum, with routers between LAN and other panels, with at least one commu-
nication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following ar-
eas:
a. Network.
b. Functional groups.
C. Standard application services supported.
d. Standard objects supported.
G. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically pro-
grammable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. These local con-
trol units are to be used to control peripheral/terminal units only (VAV boxes, duct re-
heat coils, radiant ceiling panels, etc.).
1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and
download from or upload to operator station.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Func-
tions include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
C. Monitoring,controlling, or addressing data points.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-7 05/13/05
4. Graphics: Super video graphic adapter (SVGA), minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels,
32.0-MB NVIDIA video memory.
5. Monitor: 17 inches (432 mm), noninterlaced, color, with maximum 0.28-nun dot
pitch.
6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Floppy-Disk Drives: 1.44 MB.
S. Hard-Disk Drive: 60.0 GB.
9. CD-ROM Drive: 32x.
10. Mouse: Three button.
11. Modem: Autodial, internal, minimum 56 kBaud.
12. Tape Backup: Internal Zip-drive, 100 MB.
13. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP.
14. BACnet Conformance: Workstation shall support BACnet device and have mini-
mum capabilities defined in PICS for the following areas:
a. Network.
b. Functional groups.
C. Standard application services supported.
d. Standard objects supported.
C. Printer: Color, ink-jet type as follows:
1. Print Head: 1440 x 1440 dpi photoquality color resolution.
2. Internal Memory Buffer: 32 kB. n*
3. Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets.
4. Print Speed: Minimum of 8 ppm in black and 4 ppm in color.
D. Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS): Provide an uninterrupted power supply for each
workstation. UPS shall include the following features:
1. Duration: Capable of 13.6 hours of run time at 115 watts.
2. Voltage Output: 120 Volts.
3. Voltage Input: 120 Volts.
4. Input Connection: (1) NEMA 5-15P.
5. Output Connections: (6) NEMA 5-15R.
E. Application Software: Include the following:
1. Input/output capability from operator station.
2. Operator system access levels via software password.
3. Database creation and support.
4. Dynamic color graphic displays.
5. Alarm processing.
6. Event processing.
7. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
8. Data collection.
9. Graphic development on workstation.
10. Maintenance management. ,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' - 2323 15900-6
000* B. Coordinate equipment with Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility
with equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator work-
station.
D. Coordinate vibration isolation of ATC compressor with Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Vibration and Seismic Controls".
E. Coordinate seismic restraint of control panels with Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vi-
bration and Seismic Controls".
F. Coordinate equipn-ient with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility
with starter coils and annunciation devices.
G. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve
compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.
H. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. DDC Systems:
a. Siemens Building Technology-Apogee Product Line.
b. Automated Logic Corp.
C. Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control.
d. Andover Controls.
2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Operator Station: Microcomputer station with printer.
B. Workstation: IBM-compatible microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:
1. Processor: Intel Pentium 4, 1.7 GHz.
2. Random-Access Memory: 256 MB RDRAM.
3. Cache Memory: 256 kB.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-5 05/13/05
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic tempera-
ture-control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of suc-
cessful in-service performance.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
E. ASHRAE BACnet Statement: PICS for each DDC system component (panel, zone con-
troller, field devices, and operator workstation) proposed.
F. Samples: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover.
G. Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately
processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and
twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations.
H. Control System Review Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's represen-
tatives on approval of the controls systems proposal and procedures plan to develop a
mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and
balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives,
and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time
and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. Contract Documents examination report.
C. Technical Proposal.
d. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
e. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
f. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
g. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
h. Commissioning plan and Project Engineer interface.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indi-
cated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to
unit manufacturer.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and
room details before installation. '
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' - 2323 15900-4
8. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input de-
vice.
9. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated)
point addresses, and operator notations.
10. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, dia-
grams, modems, and interconnections.
C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
I. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control sys-
tems.
D. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future power sys-
tem revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device
and compressed-air station.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components
and devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator func-
tion.
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibra-
tion tolerances.
S. Calibration records and list of set points.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including
control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installa-
tion and operating sequences.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative or
a certified installer of the automatic control system manufacturer for both installation
and maintenance of units required for this Project.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-3 05/13/05
1. Building intrusion detection system specified in Division 13 Section "Intrusion De-
tection."
2. Building lighting control system specified in Division 13 Section "Lighting Con-
trols."
3. Fire alarm system specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
4. Project shall include dial up modem for remote dial up and system shall be capable
of communicating remotely, and through local DDC panels of the existing net-
work.
5. Provide a secure remote means of connection to access all building controls sys-
tems on the campus via the internet or a dial up modem for the Project Engineer.
The modem shall be provided by the HVAC instrtunentation and controls contrac-
tor. Access shall be provided for two TRO engineering staff members as soon as
the head end workstations are in place and operational on the site. -hhe access
shall be password protected to allow the project engineers to only perform moni-
toring and trend logging capabilities for all control functions and trendable data
points. Access to the system for the project engineer shall remain in place through-
out the entire construction process and shall last for a period of one year beyond
date of substantial completion .
1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Refer to the Drawings for the Sequence of Operation. Awk
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indi-
cate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes
for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, boilers, and
control devices.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manu-
facturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
4. Written description of sequence of operation.
5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
6. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics.
7. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk
data conductors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' - 2323 15900-2
SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including
control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-
wired controls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for fire and smoke detectors mounted in HVAC
systems and equipment.
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B. LAN: Local area network.
C. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing.
D. PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
B. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed control-
lers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and
programmed to control mechanical systems.
C. Control system includes the following:
0
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15900-1 05/13/05
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,
fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to Achieve de-
sign requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure
drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed
in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features
or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final lo-
cation.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow ser-
vice and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as di-
rected, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 15855
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion
Package `E' - 2323 15855-6 05/13/05
a. Titus.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
C. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Size: As scheduled on drawings.
S. Construction: Frames shall be assembled with corner inserts to ensure hairline
seams. Cores shall be assembled with cross braces which interlock. Cores shall be
equipped with spring loaded latches for core removal.
6. Blow Direction: 1, 2, 3, or 4 way as indicated on drawings.
7. Frame: As scheduled on drawings.
8. Accessories: Induction vanes and 3-inch deep square to round transition as indi-
cated on Drawings.
2.5 LAMINAR FLOW DIFFUSERS:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Precision Air Products Lami-Vent Modules Model PAT
2. Materials: Extruded aluminum.
3. Construction: Perforated face with insulated plenum, diffusing plate,air valve
mechanism, and panel frame.
4. Finish: Off-white painted.
5. Blow Direction: Laminar flow downwards.
6. Frame: To lay-in structural grid provided as an option with these diffusers.
7. Accessories: Provide structural ceiling grid. Grid shall accommodate the laminar
flow diffusers and both the general and the operating room lighting. See architec-
tural reflected ceiling plan for details.
8. The perforated face plate assembly shall be removable for cleaning of the entire dif-
fuser. The face plate shall be retained to the framing through the use of safety
chains.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to
ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion
Package `E' - 2323 15855-5 05/13/05
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. loom%'
4. Face Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide.
6. Mounting: Countersunk screw
2.3 LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS
A. Linear Bar Grille or Diffuser:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Titus.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
C. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: White in Atrium applications, Anodized aluminum in all others.
4. Wide Core Spacing Arrangement: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick blades spaced 1/2 inch
(13 mm) apart, zero-degree deflection.
5. One-Way Deflection Vanes: Extruded construction fixed louvers with removable
core.
6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
7. Mounting: Countersunk screw. Awk
B. Linear Slot Diffuser:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Titus.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
C. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material - Shell: Aluminum, noninsulated.
3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.
4. Finish - Face and Shell: Anodized aluminum.
5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.
6. Finish -Tees: Anodized aluminum.
7. Slot Width: 1 inch (25 mm).
8. Number of Slots: Two.
9. Length: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS
A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:
1. Manufacturers:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion 05/13/05
Package `E' - 2323 15855-4
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal spaced 3/ 4 inch (19 mm) apart.
S. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide.
7. Mounting Frame: as noted on drawings
S. Damper Type: No damper required unless other wise noted
9. Accessories: Front blade gang operator is required on drawings.
B. Steel Fixed Face Grille/Register:
I. Manufacturers:
a. Titus.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
C. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel.
J. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Arrangement: Fixed blade, 4S-degree deflection, 20-gage steel blades spaced
at 3/a-inches apart.
S. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 min) wide.
6. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
C. Aluminum Fixed Face Grille/Register:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Titus.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
C. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Arrangement: Fixed blade, 4S-degree deflection, 0.04-inch thick aluminum
blades spaced at 3/4-inches apart.
S. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide.
6. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
D. Aluminum Double Deflection Grille/Register:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Titus.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
C. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Aluminum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion
Package `E' - 2323 1S8SS-3 05/13/05
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room loca- .
tion, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
3. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
I. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
5. Duct access panels.
C. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard
sizes to verify color selected.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Double Deflection Supply Register:
I. Manufacturers:
a. Titus.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
C. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel.
,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion
Package `E' - 2323 15855-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall
vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-
control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers,
registers, and grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, rectangular, or linear air distribution outlet, generally located
in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various di-
rections and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room
air.
B. Laminar Flow Diffuser : A perforated face , low velocity laminar flow air diffusion unit
C. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
D. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise rat-
ings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion
Package `E' - 2323 15855-1 05/13/05
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construc-
tion debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
1. Air handling units shall be cleaned after use for temporary heat and/or ventilation.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum
clean and wash down fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
3.S COMMISSIONING
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
perform the following:
1. Inspect field assembly of components and installation of indoor custoin air-
handling units including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
U. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following before startup:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connec-
tions for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify that proper thermal
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. ,
4. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
5. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
6. Install clean filters.
7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air-handling system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage the services of a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's main-
tenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, trouble-
shooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
1. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Sec-
tion "Contract Closeout."
2. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance no-
tice.
END OF SECTION 15854
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' - 2323 15854-32
A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 6
tow inches larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Draw-
ings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
2. Connect condensate drain pans. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Con-
struct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in di-
rection.
3. Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings as indicated on
Contract Documents.
4. Steam and Condensate Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15
Section "Steam and Condensate Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tap-
pings as indicated on Contract Documents.
5. All piping connections to the air handling units shall be made with flexible connec-
tions, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and
Loops".
B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
1. Provide flexible duct connectors at all duct connections to air handling units, in ac-
cordance with Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories".
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections.
I. Connect disconnect switches to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical
connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Division 15 Section
"Control Systems Equipment."
3. All electrical and control wiring shall be connected to the air handling units with a
3'-0" long Sealtight flex connect.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
3.7 CLEANING
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-31 05/13/05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for cornpliance with installation tol-
erances and other conditions affecting performance of air-handling units.
B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, condensate drainage piping, and electrical to
verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 USE OF AIR HANDLING UNITS DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The installer of air handling units AHU-1, 2, 3 shall assume responsibility for operation,
maintenance, and protection of each air handling unit during its use as a construction fa-
cility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
B. Air handling units AHU-1, 2, and 3may be used for temporary heat or ventilation pro-
viding the following conditions are met:
1. Start-up of the air handling unit has been performed by a factory trained represen-
tative or employee of the air handling unit manufacturer and start-up report has
been submitted to the Architect.
2. All filter banks are properly installed in the unit. Any air handling unit that is op-
erated without the final filters in place,will require the entire supply duct system to
be cleaned in accordance with NADCA (National Air Duct Cleaners Association)
Standard — "Cleaning of Non-Porous Air Conveyance System Components" at no
additional expense to the Owner.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install air-handling units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
1. Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete housekeeping bases using anchor bolts
installed in concrete housekeeping base.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service
and maintenance.
3.4 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' - 2323 15854-30
at shipping breaks where compression fittings shall be used. Tubing shall be pressure
tested and purged with dry, oil-free compressed air before connections are made.
2.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS/WIRING
A. The air handling unit shall be provided with pre-wired, non-corroding vapor tight, dou-
ble-lamp, fluorescent lights in each unit compartment as shown on the Contract Docu-
ments. Lighting size and layout shall provide a minimum of 10 foot-candles in all com-
partments.
13. Lights shall have 120V cold weather ballast and shall be UL labeled. Light switches shall
be mounted in bell boxes on the exterior of each unit conipartnlent. Unit lighting shall
be wired to turn on all of the lighting from a single switch.
C. Provide a minimum of two (2) duplex electrical outlets (20 amp) for operation of power
tools by the facility maintenance personnel.
D. Lighting, light switches, and outlets shall be wired in GRC type conduit by the Unit
manufacturer at the factory and terminated at two single-points for field connection to a
120 V single phase circuit.
E. Provide junction box and "seal tight" connections to allow power to be connected from
one section to the next when joining units in the field.
F. Disconnect: Provide factory-assembled, heavy-duty type, non-fused disconnect switch,
600V, padlockable, mounted outside the fan section. Connections shall be provided us-
ing conduit (GRC) and "seal-tight" between disconnect and motor.
G. Provide factory installed 120V power wiring to the following factory installed controls:
1. Combination minimum outside air/airflow station damper control power trans-
former furnished with airflow station controller.
2. Airflow station cabinet control power transformer furnished with airflow station
controller.
H. Wiring and Conduit:
1. The unit wiring shall be stranded copper wire sheathed in a THHN covering,
which will be distributed through the unit in GRC type conduit; the use of alumi-
num wire or flexible BX cable is prohibited.
2. Provide a terminal strip in the electric control center. This terminal strip shall have
enough terminals to allow for the connection of components in remote locations,
such as start/stop panels, alarm tie-ins, and external temperature controls.
3. The entire electrical system shall be tested at the factory prior to shipping. All wir-
ing shall comply with NEC requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-29 05/13/05
3. The probes shall be capable of producing steady, non-pulsating signals of standard
and total static pressure without need for flow corrections or factors, with an accu-
racy of 3 percent of actual flow over a fan operating range of 6 to 1 turndown
C. Provide with the air flow traverse probes a NEMA l cabinet with air flow indication
gauge and electronic differential pressure transmitter for the supply fan return fan and
the minimum outside air flow station. The Cabinet shall be provided with a
120Vac/24Vdc transformer, 120V. fuse and all 120V. and 24V. factory wiring for a sin-
gle point 120 V. power connection. The cabinet shall be factory mounted by the air
handling unit manufacturer on the exterior of the air handling unit supply fan section as
shown on the Drawing.
1. The air flow meter shall be mounted flush on the cabinet front door. The meter
shall consist of a dual-scale, diaphragm-actuated differential pressure gauge.
Gauge to read in cubic feet per minute (CFM) and in feet per minute (FPM). Me-
ter to be complete with internal tubing, barb fitting for 1/4" O.D. tubing and fur-
nished with a plastic data plate listing the system, air flow station number, fan
number and design air volume.
2. The electronic differential pressure transmitter shall be capable of receiving signals
of duct and reference static pressure and of amplifying and scaling the sensed dif-
ferential pressure of inches W.C. into a 4-20mA DC or 0-5 VDC outlet signal lin-
ear to differential pressure. The differential pressure transmitter shall be capable
of the following performance and application criteria:
3. Performance Characteristics Common to All Transmitters
a. Reference Accuracy (Includes Non-Linearity, Hysteresis, and Non-
Repeatability):
1) ±0.5 Percent of Span
b. Output Signal:
1) 4-20mA DC or 0-5 VCD Standard
C. Power Supply:
1) 12 to 40 DC unregulated: 2 wire, 4 to 20mA DC: 3 wire, 0 to 5 VDC.
d. Integral Zeroing Means:
1) 3-way zeroing valve with manual switch.
e. Temperature Effect:
1) ±2.0 percent of full span from 40°F to 120°F
4. The transmitter shall not be damaged by over-pressurization up to 20 times
greater than span and shall be furnished with a factory calibrated span and integral
zeroing means. The transmitter shall be housed in a molded polyethylene (NEMA
12 steel) enclosure with external signal tubing, power and output signal connec-
tions.
D. Pneumatic tubing from the fan inlet probes to the gauge cabinet shall be factory installed
by the air handling unit manufacturer. Pneumatic tubing shall be copper with maximum
unsupported length of 36". Tubing shall be soldered or brazed, except at equipment and
ANWIN
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-28 05/13/05
connections. The dispersion tubes shall extend the interior height of the air handling
unit and shall be fitted with two rows of high temperature inserts arranged in a V-
pattern. Each insert shall extend through and into the center of the dispersion tube and
incorporate a properly sized calibrated orifice.
D. Provide humidifier bank support for two humidifiers mounted side by side as indicated
on the Drawings. Humidifiers shall be installed with proper vertical clearance below the
condensate header to allow proper steam trap installation.
2.13 Air Blender
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
L Blender Products, Inc.
2.14 AIRFLOW STATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Airflow Station Probes: (for vane-axial supply fans)
a. Air Monitor Corporation - Volu-Probe/FI.
2. Airflow Station Flow Meter:
a. Air Monitor Corporation—Type "M".
3. Electronic Differential Pressure Transmitter:
a. Air Monitor Corporation—VELTRON Series DPT 2500.
B. Provide on the supply fan, return fan,and air flow traverse probes factory mounted by
the air handling unit manufacturer in the fan inlet capable of continuously measuring the
fan capacity.
1. The fan inlet air flow traverse probes (two per inlet) shall contain multiple total
and static pressure sensors placed at concentric area centers along the exterior sur-
face of the cylindrical probe and internally connected to their respective averaging
manifolds.
2. The fan inlet probe shall have dual end support swivel brackets suitable for mount-
ing in the fan inlet bell and shall be of aluminum construction with hard anodized
finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-27 05/13/05
F. Provide the following sets of filters:
1. AHU-1, 2 and 3d:
a. Pre-filters (25-30 Percent): 2 sets.
b. Final filters (90-95 Percent): 2 sets.
C. The first set of filters shall be installed in the unit prior to unit start-up and
shall be remain in place for the duration of the construction project. The
second set of filters shall be installed after construction is complete and prior
to any testing and balancing. Refer to Article 3.2 - "Use of Air Handling
Units during Construction" in Part 3 of these specifications for restrictions
on use of the air handling unit for temporary heat and ventilation during the
building construction and renovation.
2.11 FILTER GAUGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dwyer Magnahelic Type 2000 ASF.
B. Each filter bank shall be provided with factory mounted and piped Magnahelic pressure ►
gauges.
1. Provide filter gauges with the following scales:
a. Pre-Filter (25-30%): 0-1" water gauge.
b. Final Filter (90-95%): 0-2" water gauge.
2.12 STEAM HUMIDIFIER
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dri-Steem Humidifier Co. —Ultra-Sorb Model LV
2. Armstrong International, Inc.-Humidipak Center Feed Tube-in-Tube type
B. Humidifier banks shall be factory installed in the air handling unit in accordance with
humidifier manufacturer's recommendations. Factory installation shall include provi-
sions for unit wall penetrations as outlined under unit construction.
C. Tube bank shall consist of a horizontal header and necessary quantity of vertical disper-
sion tubes necessary to achieve the required steam absorption distance. Header shall be
constructed of stainless steel and be fitted with 1-1/2" tee outlets for dispersion tube
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-26 05/13/05
0001, 5. Frames shall be suitable for upstream filter servicing, as indicated on the Contract
Documents.
6. Provide a continuous 3116" thick by 5" wide galvanized steel vertical support
member to prevent excessive deflection or distortion of HEPA filter bank.
a. One continuos vertical support member shall be provided for every column
of HEPA filter frames.
7. Provide 16 gauge galvanized steel blank-off plates to prevent air bypass around the
perimeter of each filter bank.
S. HEPA filter frames shall be installed and sealed by air handling unit manufacturer
D. Pre-Filters (25-30 Percent):
1. Comply with NFPA 90A.
2. Prefilters shall be 4-inch deep, medium efficiency, Class I1 pleated disposable type.
Filters shall consist of a non-woven cotton and synthetic media, media support
grid, and enclosing frame. The media shall have an average efficiency of 25 to 30
percent on ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76. The effective media area shall not be
less than 7 square feet of media per 1.0 square foot of filter face area.
3. Media Support Grid shall be a welded wire grid with an effective open area of not
less than 96 percent. The welded wire grid shall be bonded to the filter media to
eliminate the possibility of media oscillation and media pull away. The media
support grid shall be formed in such a manner that it effects a radial pleat design,
allowing total use of filter media.
4. Enclosing Frames shall be constructed of a rigid, heavy-duty, high wet-strength
beverage board, with diagonal support members bonded to the air entering and air
exit side of each pleat to ensure pleat stability. The inside periphery of the enclos-
ing frame shall be bonded to the filter pack, thus eliminating the possibility of air
bypass.
E. Final Filters (90-95 Percent):
1. Comply with NFPA 90A.
2. Final filters shall be 12-inch deep, of rigid structure, and incorporating a mini-pleat
cellular design with string separators. The filter unit shall be of V-bank configura-
tion for low pressure drop and extended service life. The filter medium shall be
non-shedding, wet-process, glass fiber paper. A polyurethane sealant shall be used
to encapsulate the media to the filter casing preventing any bypass. The filter shall
be tested per ASHRAE Standard 52-76 and have an average dust spot efficiency of
90-95 percent. The filter when operating at a flow rate of 2000 CFM shall have
an initial clean pressure resistance of no more than 0.38 inches of water gauge.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-25 05/13/05
B. Pre-Filter and Final Filter Frame:
1. Filter bank framing shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel filter holding frame system.
2. Frames shall be cut to size and pre-punched for easy assembly into modules of size
and capacity as indicated on Contract Docoments.
3. Framing shall be permanently gasketed with polyurethane foam to prevent bypass
of unfiltered air.
4. Framing system shall incorporate filter fasteners to provide positive sealing for
each filter to facilitate installation and removal of cartridges without use of tools,
nuts, or bolts.
5. Frames shall be suitable for upstream filter servicing, as indicated on the Contract
Documents.
6. Provide a continuous 3/16" thick by 5" wide galvanized steel vertical support
member to prevent excessive deflection or distortion of pre-filter and final filter
banks.
a. One continuous vertical support member shall be provided for every two
columns of pre-filter frames.
b. One continuous vertical support member shall be provided for every column
of final filter frames.
7. Provide 16 gauge galvanized steel blank-off plates to prevent air bypass around the
perimeter of each filter bank.
8. Pre-filter and final filter frames shall be installed and sealed by air handling unit
manufacturer.
C. HEPA Filter Frame:
1. Filter bank framing shall be heavy gauge, welded, galvanized steel filter holding
frame system constructed to accommodate 12" deep HEPA filters. All welds shall
be ground and smoothly finished to provide a uniform flat-edged sealing surface.
2. Provide annular based dimples and mounting holes to prevent mounting bolt inter-
ference when constructing built-up filter bank.
3. Framing system shall incorporate two 5116" swing bolts per holding frame for
each nominal 12" of height. Bolts shall be zinc electroplated steel and shall be
provided with equi-bearing clamps and hex nuts capable of sealing each element
with 30 lb./ft. of torque, providing for 50 percent gasket compression.
4. Provide receptacle guides mounted on all four vertical sides of the holding frame to
properly align the filter and to provide a fulcrum for the swing bolt assemblies.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-24 05/13/05
2. The monitor/controller shall contain an integral multi-line liquid crystal display for
took use during the configuration and calibration processes, and to display two meas-
ured processes (volume, velocity, temperature) during normal operation. All con-
figuration, output scaling, calibration, and controller tuning will be performed
digitally in the on-board microprocessor via input pushbuttons.
3. The monitor/controller shall measure inlet airflow with an accuracy of :±-5% of
reading over a range of 150-600 FPM, and not have its reading affected by the
presence of directional or gusting wind. Measured airflow shall be density cor-
rected for ambient temperature variances, and atmospheric pressure due to site alti-
tude.
4. The monitor/controller shall interface with existing building automation systems
(BAS), accepting inputs for fan system start, economizer mode operation, and an
external controller setpoint, and provide flow deviation alarm outputs.
5. The sensors shall be constructed of materials that resist corrosion due to the pres-
ence of salt or chemicals in the air; all non-painted surfaces shall be constructed of
stainless steel. The electronics enclosure shall be NEMA 1.
6. The monitor/controller shall be the VOLU-flo/OAM as manufactured by Air
Monitor Corporation, Santa Rosa, California.
2.10 FILTER SECTION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Pre-filters (25-30 Percent):
a. Farr - 30/30
b. Airguard —Type DP Max KA-294
2. Pre-filter Frame:
a. Farr—Type 8.
3. Final Filters (90-95 Percent) and Final Filter Frame:
a. Farr— RIGA PLEAT 95.
b. Filtra—DURAFIL Series 1511.
C. Airguard —VARI+Plus KA-440.
4. Final Filter Frame:
a. Farr—Type 8.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-23 05/13/05
d. Provide flexible metal compression type jambs seals along the control
damper sides. Provide ruskiprene seal along control damper blade edges.
e. Bearings shall be molded synthetic.
f. Linkage shall be stainless steel and concealed within the frame.
g. Axles shall be minimum 1/2" diameter plated steel, hex shaped, mechanically
attached to the blade.
h. Provide an air straightener section consisting of 3000 series aluminum alloy
honeycomb. Straightener shall be contained in a 5" long, 16 gauge galva-
nized steel sleeve that shall be attached to the monitoring blade frame.
i. Frame shall be suitable for mounting inside the air handling unit as indicated
on the Contract Documents.
3. Damper Controller:
a. Each air monitor/damper shall include 24VAC electric modulating motor
and an application specific controller designed for this application furnished
by the damper manufacturer. Each integral air monitor/damper shall be
calibrated in an AMCA registered laboratory and a certification chart shall
accompany the air monitor/damper.
D. VOLU-flo OAM Station
1. Provide where indicated, airflow stations capable of continuously measuring the
fan or duct capacities (air volumes) they serve. The station shall be capable of di-
rect measurement of airflow. The station shall measure inlet airflow with an accu-
racy of ±5% of its range.
2. Each airflow station shall contain an expanded metal screen manufactured of 16
gauge hot dipped galvanized sheetmetal with 63% open area and 1/2" diamonds.
The station shall be provided with a upstream and downstream reference pressure
sensors. The pressure sensors shall be constructed of type 316 stainless steel with
1/a" stainless steel tubing and compression elbows.
3. The airflow measuring station(s) shall have a 14 ga. galvanized steel, 6" deep weld-
ing casing with 90°connecting flanges.
4. The airflow station shall be the VOLU-flo/OAM Station as manufactured by Air
Monitor Corporation, Santa Rosa, California.
E. VOLU-flo OAM Outside Air Monitor/Controller
1. The monitor/controller shall be capable of direct measurement of airflow through
an outside air inlet and produce dual outputs; one representing the measured air-
flow, and the other to control the inlet damper.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-22 05/13/05
B. Outside Air Economizer Damper:
1. Extruded aluminum damper frame shall not be less than .080" thickness. Damper
frame to be 4" deep and shall be insulated with polystyrene on four sides or have a
thermally broken frame.
2. Blades to be extruded aluminum, internally insulated with non-CFC, expanded
polyurethane foam and shall be thermally broken or provide a 4" insulating air
gap between two sets of parallel blade dampers. Complete blade assembly shall
have an insulating factor of R-2.29 and a temperature index of 55.
3. Bearings to be comprised of an inner bearing fixed to a minimum 7/16" aluminum
hexagon blade pin rotating within an outer bearing inserted in frame or molded
synthetic.
4. Linkage hardware shall be installed in frame side and be constructed of aluminum
and corrosion resistant, zinc & nickel plated steel.
5. Dampers to be designed for operation in temperature ranging between -40°F and
212°F.
6. Dampers shall be parallel blade action.
7. Air leakage through a 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed 4.12 cfm/sq.ft. at 4" wa-
ter gauge differential static pressure at standard air conditions. Leakage data to be
certified under the AMCA certified ratings program.
8. Pressure drop of a fully open 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed .03" water gauge
at 1000 fpm.
C. Return Air Damper:
1. Return air dampers shall be low leakage parallel blade dampers. Dampers shall be
constructed of extruded aluminum including blades and frame (minimum 12
gauge). Blades shall be airfoil shape, heavy gauge aluminum. Blade seals shall be
replaceable extruded vinyl or silicone. Damper blades shall be parallel blade orien-
tation.
2. Damper/StraightenerConstruction:
a. Damper frame shall be fabricated from 4"x1"x0.081" thick, 6063-T5 ex-
truded aluminum channel with mounting flanges on both sides of frame.
b. Control damper blades shall be airfoil shaped, heavy gauge, 6063-T5 ex-
truded aluminum.
C. Airflow monitoring blades shall be airfoil shaped, heavy gauge, 6063-T5 ex-
truded aluminum with a total pressure measuring chamber and a static pres-
sure measuring chamber. Blades shall be fixed in the 16 gauge galvanized
steel frame.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-21 05/13/05
G. Supply and Return Headers: Seamless copper tube, 0.60-inch tube thickness with brazed
joints.
1. Provide baffle plates in the supply header opposite the supply steam connection to
ensure uniform diffusion of entering steam within the supply header.
2. Provide intruded tube holes in both the supply and return header to allow for
added brazing surface and flexibility during coil expansion and contraction.
3. Provide copper drain and vent connections.
H. Frames: Galvanized steel, 16 gauge (0.0625 inch) (1.6 mm).
1. Provide an intermediate support for coils over 72 inches in length. Provide two in-
termediate supports for coils over 96 inches in length. Intermediate support shall
be 16 gauge, galvanized-steel.
I. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.
1. Coils shall meet scheduled performance indicated on the Contract Documents.
2. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 1000 feet per minute and velocity shall not be
lower than 700 feet per minute.
3. Working Pressure Ratings: 100 psig (690 kPa) steam, 400 deg F (204.4 deg C).
J. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig (2070 kPa), air pressure under warm water. Aftk
K. Coils shall be degreased to remove any residual oil remaining from the manufacturing
process.
2.9 DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Outside Air Economizer Damper:
a. TAMCO —Series 9000
b. Ruskin IL35
2. Return Air Damper:
a. TAMPCO —Series 1000
b. Ruskin— CD50
C. CESCO —CDAF-PB
3. Combination Minimum Outside Air/Airflow Station Damper:
a. Air Monitor Corporation - VOLU-flo OAM Station
4. Discharge smoke damper: a. Ruskin-SD50
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-20 OS/13/OS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steam coils by one of
the following:
I. Steam Coils:
a. Heatcraft Inc.; Heat Transfer Division.
b. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
C. Trane Co. (The).
d. Temtrol, Inc.
e. Ventrol, Inc
B. Description: Steam distributing, tube-in-tube steam distributing coil fabricated to
ARI 410.
C. Piping Connections: Same end. Provide threaded connections for coil connections 2
inches and smaller and flanged connections for coil connections 2-1/2 inch and larger.
1. Provide each coil connection with caps for thread protection and plugs for flanged
connections.
D. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M).
1. Provide the number of rows of tubes as scheduled on the Contract Documents.
2. Provide staggered tube design for two row coils.
3. Outer Tube Diameter: 1.0 inch (25.4 mm).
4. Minimum Outer Tube Thickness: 0.035 inch (0.875 mm).
5. Inner Tube Diameter: 0.625 inch (518")(15.9 mm).
6. Minimum Inner Tube Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm).
7. Inner tube shall be orficed to provide uniform steam distribution within the outer
tube.
8. Inner tube shall be centered and supported within the outer tube with stainless
steel holding clips.
9. Tubes shall be pitched in the coil casing, toward the connection side of the coil a
minimum of 1/a" per foot.
E. Fins: Aluminum, extended surface type, 0.0095 inch thick. (nominal 0.010")
1. Provide number of fins per inch as scheduled on the Contract Documents.
2. Provide plate fins with integral collars to provide continuous surface cover over the
tube and provide uniform fin spacing.
F. Fin and Tube joint: Mechanical bond.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-19 05/13/05
f. Ventrol, Inc
B. Description: Provide number of coils having capacities as scheduled on the drawings.
Coils shall be self-draining coil fabricated to ARI 410.
C. Piping Connections: Copper or brass, Male Pipe Threaded (MPT), on sale end with
brazed connections to coil headers.
1. Provide each coil connection with caps for thread protection.
D. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M).
1. Tube Diameter: 0.625 inch (5/8")(15.9 mm)
2. Minimum Tube Thickness: 0.035 inch (0.875 nun).
3. Return bend fitting wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the tube wall
thickness.
E. Fins: Aluminum, extended surface type, 0.095 inch thick. (nominal 0.010")
1. Provide plate fins with integral collars to provide continuous surface cover over the
tube and provide uniform fin spacing.
F. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
G. Headers: Seamless copper tube, 0.60 inch tube thickness with brazed joints. Provide fac- Amok
tory installed extended copper drain and vent connections for each coil.
H. Frames: Stainless steel, type 304, 16 gauge (0.0625 inch) (1.6 mm).
1. Provide an intermediate support for coils over 72 inches in length. Provide two in-
termediate supports for coils over 96 inches in length. Intermediate support shall
be 16 gauge, type 304, stainless steel.
I. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.
1. Coils shall meet scheduled performance indicated on the Drawings. All chilled wa-
ter coils shall be selected with a 25 percent solution of ethylene glycol and water.
2. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 500 feet per minute.
J. Working Pressure Ratings: 200 psig (1380 kPa) water, 300 deg F (148 deg C).
K. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig (2070 kPa), air pressure under warm water.
1. Coils shall be degreased to remove any residual oil remaining from the manufac-
turing process.
2.8 STEAM DISTIBUTING HEATING COILS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' - 2323 15854-18
A. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.
B. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
C. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range.
D. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for con-
tinuous duty at full load (Class F Insulation).
E. Service Factor: 1.15.
F. Motor Construction: NEMA MG-1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
G. Bearings: The following features are required:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals rated for minimum 100,000
hours.
2. Grease lubricated.
H. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
1. Totally enclosed air over (TEAO), pad mounted.
I. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
J. Noise Rating: Quiet.
K. Efficiency: Motors shall be premium efficient design and shall have the following mini-
mum nominal efficiency:
1. 100 hp: 98.5 percent.
L. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, con-
struction, and special features.
2.7 CHILLED WATER COILS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide chilled water coils by
one of the following:
1. 'Chilled Water Coils:
a. Heatcraft Inc.; Heat Transfer Division.
b. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
C. Carrier Corporation.
d. Trane Co. (The).
e. Temtrol, Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-17 05/13/05
quest, laboratory evidence that the impeller has been adequately stressed for running at
the highest speeds required. The fan shall be dynamically balanced to ISO 2372.
C. The fan casing shall be manufactured of mild steel with integral rolled flanges. The mo-
tor shall be supported from mild steel plates continuously welded to the motor duct. The
structure shall be hot-dipped galvanized. The impeller hub shall be cast in aluminum al-
loy, and precision-machined and balanced. The impeller blades shall be of airfoil section
cast in aluminum alloy, and mounted on thrust bearings fully submerged in grease. Im-
peller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a Ivey and keyway. Axial location shall be
provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft and a retaining washer and screw fit-
ted into a tapped hole in the end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in position.
D. The fan casing enclosing the impeller shall be removable to allow access to the impeller
with the fan in place.
E. The fan blade pitch angle shall be continuously variable "on the fly" for capacity con-
trol. The fan shall be a non-overloading selection over the entire range of blade pitch.
The fan shall be equipped with a pneumatic pilot positioner to provide positive control
of blade pitch angle. Pneumatic signal shall vary from minimum blade angle at a signal
of 3 psi to a maximum blade angle at a signal of 15 psi. External actuator-type control
shall employ a double acting piston type actuator with positive positioner.
F. Options and Accessories:
1. Acoustical diffuser cones shall be provided for each fan and shall be the same ,
length and interior diameters as standard diffuser cones. The center core shall be
perforated and filled with acoustical insulation, while the outer jacket shall have
varying thickness from inlet end to discharge end, with a perforated liner and solid
outer shell. Acoustical diffuser cones shall have no additional pressure drop above
that of standard diffuser cones and shall be a standard cataloged product of the fan
manufacturer, with published certified dynamic insertion loss ratings for all diame-
ters and in all (8) octave bands.
a. Refer to Drawing H700 for scheduled insertion loss of acoustical diffuser
cone.
2. Provide each fan with a bellmouth inlet
3. Provide wire guards on the inlet of each fan.
4. Mounting feet
5. Thrust restraint brackets
6. NEMA 1 junction box prewired and mounted to exterior of fan casing
2.6 MOTORS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-16 05/13/05
0owl 1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for
30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isola-
tion efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
I Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.
G. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the iso-
lation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission,
component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
I. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and
bars conforming to ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). Include support brackets to an-
chor base to isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxil-
iary motor slide bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with
not less than 1-inch clearance above the unit floor.
t
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for an-
chor bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.4 CONTROLLABLE PITCH VANE-AXIAL SUPPLY FANS
A. Fan Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide controllable pitch
vane-axial fans by one of the following:
1. Woods, U.S.A Division; Fairfield, Ohio
a. Model: Varofoil.
2. Joy Technologies, Inc.-Joy/Green Fan Division; New Philadelphia, Ohio.
a. Model: AXIVANE Concept HV.
B. Supply fan shall deliver the volume and pressure scheduled when tested to AMCA - 210.
Sound power levels should be detailed in octave bands from tests carried out in accor-
dance with AMCA standard 300. The fan manufacturer shall be able to provide, on re-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-15 05/13/05
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
b. Model: Type TRK.
C. Fabricated Steel Bases (Concrete Inertia Base): Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide fabricated steel bases by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type K.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
b. Model: Type CPF.
D. Vibration Isolation Requirements — General:
1. Provide restrained spring mounted vibration isolators selected for minimum static
deflection as indicated. Submit calculations showing the unit weight and the
weight carried by each vibration isolator for each fan and for each inertia base.
Submit calculations showing fan thrust and thrust restraint spring selection.
a. Indicate the size of each type of vibration isolator with coordinated isolator
spring.
E. Spring Isolators:
1. Provide restrainted type spring mounts designed to resist seismic forces in all direc-
tions.
2. Material finishes as follows::
a. Springs cadmium plated or electro-galvanized.
b. Hardware cadmium platedor zinc electroplated.
C. All other metal parts hot-dip or hot spray galvanized.
3. Deflection: Minimum 3 inch static deflection.
4. Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on under side.
5. Designed and installed so that the ends of the springs remain parallel.
6. Built-in vertical limit stops with minimum 1/4: clearance under normal operation.
7. Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment.
8. Adjustable and removable spring pack with separate neoprene isolation pad.
F. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-14 05/13/05
2. The exterior panels shall be finished with an air dried industrial alkyd enamel that
meets the following standards:
a. ASTM B-117: Salt spray resistance, 5%, salt fog at 95°F for 500 hours.
b. ASTM D-2247: Humidity Resistance 100%, salt fog at 95°F for 500 hours.
3. All ungalvanized steel, fan support, and inner floor liner shall be coated with one
(1) coat of primer and two (2) coats of enamel finish paint. Aluminum tread plate
shall not require painting.
4. All welds shall be ground smooth and painted.
M. Identification:
1. Provide equipment nameplate with data engraved or stamped for permanent at-
tachment on air handling unit. Nameplate shall provide the following informa-
tion:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
C. Labels of tested compliancies.
2. Provide each access door with permanent identification of the following:
a. Section identification, airflow direction, and OSHA required safety warn-
ings.
3. Coil and humidifier piping connections shall be clearly and permanently identified
with "SUPPLY" and "RETURN" identifiers.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION/SIESMIC RESTRAINTS —INERTIA BASE
A. Spring Isolators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide spring mounted vi-
bration isolators by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type SLR.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
b. Model: Type CTER.
B. Thrust Restraints: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thrust restraints by
one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type WBD.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-13 05/13/05
4. The doorframe shall be extruded aluminum with a built in thermal break barrier
and full perimeter gasket. The door shall be hinged using a minimum of two
heavy-duty 10 gauge stainless steel butt hinges.Two cast aluminum Vent-Lok #260
handles operable from either side shall be provided. Provide self-locking nuts for
handles and stainless steel hardware to assure long-term, proper door operation.
5. Each door shall contain a thermal double pane glass window, a minimum of 10
inches by 10 inches or 10" in diameter, installed at eye level and properly sealed to
operate safely against suction or pressure.
6. Access door sizes and orientation shall be as indicated on Contract Documents.
Doors shall open against pressure; positive-open in, negative-open out.
7. Removable access panels shall be provided in unit sections where large components
will have to be accessed for service and maintenance. Panels shall be of the same
construction as doors. Panels shall be sized to allow for the removal of the unit
component without disassembly of the internal component.
a. Provide removable panels at fan section, cooling coil, and humidifier.
J. Cooling Coil Support:
1. The cooling coils shall be mounted on a 16-gauge stainless steel rack with stainless
steel blank-off plates to prevent air bypass. All piping and fittings exposed to the
air stream shall be copper.
2. Wherever coils are stacked, each upper coil shall be independently supported on
structural steel tubing to allow the lower or upper coil section to be removed with-
out disturbing any other coil section. Coil support steel for cooling coils shall be
stainless steel.
K. Piping and Electrical Penetrations:
1. All piping and electrical conduits that penetrate the unit walls shall be provided
with a double wall, insulated, escutcheon plate sealed with a gasket both interior
and exterior. Escutcheon plate shall be designed to prevent any condensation in-
side the unit walls.
2. Provide schedule 40 pipe sleeves through unit walls for chilled water, steam, and
steam condensate piping that is to be field installed. Provide number and size of
sleeves as indicated on the Contract Documents.
L. Finishes:
1. The base and unit frame shall be painted with an industrial direct to metal finish
with corrosion inhibitors built-in.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-12 05/13/05
H. Drain Pans:
I. Full length drain pans shall be provided for each cooling coil bank. The pans shall
be fully welded 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel or 0.09" thick, fully welded,
aluminum. Where cooling coils are stacked, intermediate drain pans shall be pro-
vided and shall be constructed the same as the base drain n
pan. Intermediate pas
shall be double sloping and shall be provided with one 1" downcomer of Type
304 stainless steel pipe or aluminum pipe. Each downcomer shall drain to the
lowest drain pan.
2. Each pan shall be pitched in two planes toward the condensate outlet. The outlet
shall be a 2" minimum 304 stainless steel NPT nipple. All pans shall be installed
to be completely self draining. Pipe type 304 stainless steel pipe, or aluminum pipe
to side of the unit base. Ready for field connection of a P-trap.
J. The primary pan shall be extended from the upstream face of the coil assembly to
18" minimum downstream of the discharge face of the cooling coil. Intermediate
pans shall extend from the upstream face of the coil to 9" downstream of the coil
assembly.
4. The primary drain pan shall be a minimum of 3" deep. Intermediate drain pans
shall be a minimum of 1" deep.
S. Pans shall extend 1" beyond headers and U-bends on each side of coil.
6. Insulate the bottom drain pan with insulation to avoid condensation on the base of
the drain pans. Insulation shall be the same as the floor insulation.
1. Diffuser Plate:
1. Provide 16 gauge galvanized steel mixing baffle plate as shown on the Contract
Documents. Mixing baffle plate shall be supported with channels on each side to
prevent distortion. Mixing baffle plate shall be engineered and manufactured to
provide even airflow over downstream components within 36 inches. Mixing baf-
fle plate shall extend full width of unit, shall be solid sheetmetal (perforated not
acceptable) and shall be designed to create turbulent mixing of return and outside
air streams prior to entering air blender. Access Doors and Removable Access
Panels:
2. Provide service/access doors of the same construction as the air handling unit cas-
ing for all unit sections containing equipment requiring service, where dampers or
damper operators are installed or areas for cleaning of unit components such as
coils, etc., is required. Access doors shall be equipped with continuous gaskets and
shall fit in the door frame in a manner to guarantee no leakage.
3. Each access door shall have a built-in static pressure probe port for ease of pres-
sure readings across various internal components and to limit unnecessary or unau-
thorized access inside the unit. Pressure probe port shall be Ventlok #699.
ell
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-11 05/13/05
3. Supply fan interior septum walls shall be fabricated from minimum 16-gauge gal- ,
vanized steel, maximum 18" wide, 4-inch thick, three break type panels, and have
a maximum deflection of 1/200`h of the longest panel span at 150 percent of design
operating pressure. The inner liner facing the fan shall be 0.04" thick perforated
aluminum liner. Wall shall be insulated with 4" thick 3.0 pound per cubic foot fi-
berglass insulation with a fire hazard classification of 25150 per ASTM —84 and UL
723 and erosion requirements that meet or exceed UL-181.
E. Roof Construction
1. Roof panels shall be identical to wall panels. Channels, aprons, and corner joints
shall be used to secure the roof panels to the wall panels. Provide cap strip or turn
down .roof panels around the entire roof perimeter weld or caulk at corners.
F. Acoustic Performance of Panels
1. The manufacturer shall have published literature available stating the sound ab-
sorption coefficient of panel systems obtained using ASTM method Test for Sound
Absorption of Acoustical Materials in Reverberation Rooms (ASTM Designation
C423-90A), and the sound transmission loss obtained using procedures conform-
ing to ASTM designations E90, E413, and other pertinent standards. Perforated
panel system sound data shall meet the following criteria for sound transmission
losses and absorption coefficients:
Frequency 125Hz 250Hz SOOHz 1000Hz 2000Hz 4000Hz
Transmission
Losses (dB) 18 25 37 46 48 54
Absorption
Coefficient 0.74 1.25 1.11 1 1.01 1.99 1 0.94
G. Economizer, Return, Outside Air, and Supply Air Duct Connections
1. Supply air discharge air openings shall be provided with long radius bellmouths,
mounted flush with the interior liner of the unit casing and sealed to the interior
casing liner. The exterior bellmouth openings shall match the round or flat oval
duct size indicated on drawings and shall extend a minimum of 1" beyond the ex-
terior casing wall to allow for duct connection.
a. Supply air duct connections that discharge through the floor of the unit shall
be provided with a painted safety grating capable of supporting a 300 pound
point load at the center of the opening. Duct openings that discharge
through the unit floor shall be provided with a 11/2" internal raised lip that is
guaranteed watertight and capable of holding up to 11/2" of standing water
in the base of the discharge section without leaking.
2. Return, economizer, and outside air duct connection shall have 2"x 2" angles se-
cured to the exterior of unit to allow for field connection of ductwork. Size of
openings shall match duct sizes indicated on drawings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-10 05/13/05
ing water in each unit section without leaking. Floor shall be secured to the struc-
tural steel base with welds. The entire base shall be insulated with 4" thick, 3.0
pound per cubic foot fiberglass insulation with an effective thermal conductivity of
0.24 (BTU in./hr. sq. ft. 'F) and a fire hazard classification of 25/50 per ASTM —84
and UL 723. A 22-gauge galvanized steel base under-liner shall be provided to
protect and retain the insulation. Base under-liner shall be secured to the perimeter
base with a liner seal angle. All base under-liner seams shall be sealed to provide a
vaportight seal. All welds shall be ground and painted.
3. Minimum 1'/z" diameter floor drains shall be provided in each unit section. Drain
piping shall be stainless steel and shall terminate at the side of the unit with a
screwed nipple and cap. Drains shall be continuously welded to the unit floor and
the perimeter base.
C. Unit Section Splits
1. The unit section splits shall be bolted and gasketed along the entire perimeter.
Floor shall be bolted at 12" intervals using 3/8" zinc plated bolts and nuts or con-
tinuously welded. Section joints at walls and roof shall be screwed or bolted at 8"
in intervals along the entire perimeter. Exterior joints shall be caulked with sili-
cone or provided with a galvanized seal cap, screwed to the exterior panel.
D. Wall Construction
1. Unit casing shall be fabricated from minimum 16-gauge, maximum 18" wide, gal-
vanized steel, 4-inch thick, three break type panels, with inner liner. The inner
liner shall be a wash down type and shall be continuous across panel splits. The
inner liner shall also overlap the turned up lip of the floor or perimeter Z-bar by
1" and neoprene tape shall be installed between the wash down liner and the panel
return lip to prevent thermal conductance to the exterior of the unit. Inner liner
shall be secured to the return lip of the wall panels and the upturned lip of the
floor or Z-bar with 1/a" zinc plated, self-tapping screws at a minimum of 8" on
center. Cooling coil and humidifier section liner shall be 0.05" thick non-
perforated sheet aluminum, supply fan sections shall be 0.04" thick perforated
aluminum liner, and all other sections shall be 20-gauge solid non-perforated gal-
vanized steel or 0.05" thick non-perforated sheet aluminum. Insulation shall be
minimum 4" thick, non-combustible, odor and vermin proof, and shall be resistant
to mildew. Insulation density shall be 3.0 pound per cubic foot fiberglass insula-
tion with an effective thermal conductivity of 0.24 (BTU in./hr. sq. ft. °F) and a fire
hazard classification of 25/50 per ASTM —84 and UL 723. Insulation behind all
perforated inner liner shall meet or exceed the erosion requirements of UL-181.
2. Panels shall be sealed with two 3/a" wide strips of butyl between each panel and
shall be joined together using 1/a" hex head, self-tapping screws a maximum of 8"
on center. Exterior panel joints shall be sealed with silicone after the unit is
painted.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-9 05/13/05
4. Governair Corporation
2.2 CASING/UNIT CONSTRUCTION
A. General
1. The overall casing shall be designed and constructed to meet the following re-
quirements:
a. The maximum panel deflection shall be 1/200"' of the longest panel span at
150 percent of design operating pressure.
b. Maximum leakage rate of 1.0 percent at 150 percent of design pressure.
C. Capable of withstanding a static pressure of 15 inches water gage.
d. Non-condensing at an ambient dewpoint temperature of 65°F.
B. Unit Base/Floor Construction
1. The air handling units shall be constructed on a structural steel base. The base
shall be braced to support internal components without sagging or pulsating and
shall be provided with lifting lugs at each corner of each section to allow for rig-
ging of the unit. The unit perimeter base shall be constructed of 14 gauge welded
2"x6" rectangular structural steel tubing fully welded at all seams or 6" structural
C-channel fully welded at all seams. Angle iron or C-channel intermediate sup-
ports placed at a maximum of 18" on center shall be provided to support all inter-
nal components and to prevent deformation of the unit during lifting. Rectangular
structural steel tubing or structural C-channel support that is the full depth of the
perimeter base shall be provided over the entire width of the unit at each unit sec-
tion split. Intermediate structural members shall be installed at coils and fan sup-
ports and at any other point loads within the unit and shall be designed to carry
the component's weight to the perimeter structural base.
a. Intermediate supports supporting the fan shall be designed to provide a
maximum of 1/1000`h inch deflection over the entire width of the unit.
2. The floor wearing surface shall be 3116" thick aluminum tread plate or 1/8" thick
solid diamond-plate steel. The floor-wearing surface shall have a 1'/z" deep,
turned up lip around the entire perimeter including the unit section joints and floor
shall be welded at the corners. As an option to the turned up lip at the perimeter,
a continuously welded Z-bar strip at the perimeter with a turned up lip at the unit
section joints with the floor welded at the corners may be provided. Floors shall
have all seams continuously welded. All steel welds shall be coated with cold gal-
vanizing compound conforming to MIL-P46105 weld through primer. Floors shall
be completely coated with 1.5 mils of corrosion resistant phenolic primer after fab-
rication and welding. This coating shall exhibit a pencil hardness of B. Aluminum
floor seams do not require a coating. Floor seams at section splits shall be field
welded, primed and painted by the installing Contractor as noted above.Each unit
section shall be guaranteed watertight and capable of holding up to 11/ of stand-
.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-8 05/13/05
B. Instruction Seminar: Perform systems instruction seminar and walk-through with the
Owner's Representatives after preparation and review of the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals in accordance with Part 3 of this Section.
C. Schedule Manufacturer's factory representatives to perform equipment start-ups and in-
strucrion seminars as directed by Owner and specified in Part 3 of this Section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air handling units as factory-assembled modules suitably packaged and protected
for overland trucking and for storing the equipment outside, exposed to the weather.
Duct connection openings shall be covered and sealed with plywood or sheet metal caps.
B. Coordinate manufacturing and delivery sequence.
C. Coordinate necessary shipping splits required for trucking limitations and indicate ship-
ping splits on shop drawing submittals.
D. Items shipped loose with the air handling units, such as filters, humidifiers, and caulking
shall be suitably secured within the unit or on a separate pallet.
E. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members, concrete housekeeping
pads, and vibration isolators.
B. Refer to Article 3.2 - "Use of Air Handling Units during Construction" in Part 3 of these
specifications for restrictions on use of the air handling unit for temporary heat and ven-
tilation during the building construction and renovation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ventrol—Montreal, Quebec. (Air-Handling Systems Inc.)
2. Haakon Industries.
3. Industrial Sheet Metal
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-7 05/13/05
blade pitch angle of supply fan(s), fan RPM, motor ambient temperature,
and barometric pressure, all at design conditions.
3. Units shall be designed and tested to meet maximum sound power levels at the in-
lets and outlets of the units as defined in the table below. In lieu of factory acous-
tic performance testing, unit manufacturer may submit sound power calculations
stamped by a registered mechanical engineer. Stamped calculations shall only be
acceptable if the internal components installed in the air handling units are the ap-
proved design equipment as scheduled and specified in the Contract Documents.
Air handling units and any internal components that are "substitutions", as de-
fined in forthcoming Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 Specification Sections
and forthcoming Section 15050 — "Basic Mechanical Requirements" shall require
the factory acoustic testing performed as follows:
a. Inlet and outlet sound power shall be determined by the reverberation room
method as outlined in AMCA Standard 300. Sound pressure values shall be
included in testing report including ambient, reference sound source, and
measured values.
b. Sound power levels shall be determined at unit design airflow and static
pressure.
C. Maximum sound power levels are shown in the table below.
Octave Band Sound Power Level dB Re:10-12 Watts
Frequency 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1000Hz 2000Hz 4000Hz 8000Hz
Supply Outlets
91 85 79 64 51 40 50 62
Casing Radiated
AHU-1,2,3 -- 89 89 78 67 62 51 --
1.6 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare manuals in compliance with forthcoming
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, forthcoming Section 15050 — Basic Mechanical Re-
quirements, and the additional requirements of this Section. In addition to the require-
ments of other Sections, each manual shall include:
1. Product data cut sheets and approved shop drawings for equipment and materials
as specified in Article 1.3 of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-6 05/13/05
1. Notify Architect and Owner's representative 2 weeks prior to any scheduled test-
ing.
2. Provide all transportation, lodging, and meals for a designated representative of
the Architect and a designated representative of the Owner to witness the factory
test of the units. If the two units that require testing are tested more than 24 hours
apart; provide the accommodations listed above for two separate trips.
3. Correct any deficiencies in the unit performance at the factory prior to shipping.
Costs of additional witnessed testing and deficiency corrections required due to
lack of unit performance during testing shall be borne by the unit manufacturer.
4. Prepare a formal written report at conclusion of testing interpreting test results.
Submit to Architect in accordance with Article 1.3 of this Section.
P. The following factory tests are required on each manufactured air handling unit that is
selected for testing.
1. Unit casing shall be designed and tested to meet a maximum leakage of 1 percent
of system capacity when tested in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Manual. Leakage test shall be conducted at 150 percent of the unit oper-
ating static pressure on all components. Factory leakage testing shall be performed
as follows:
a. Seal the supply fan discharge opening and all supply air discharge openings.
Leakage test the fully assembled unit downstream of the supply fan pressure
wall under 150 percent of positive design static pressure and record leakage
too*' in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual.
b. Seal the return air, economizer air, and minimum outside air openings.
Leakage test the fully assembled unit upstream of the supply fan pressure
wall under 150 percent of negative design static pressure and record leakage.
Design negative static pressure shall be defined as 50 percent of the total de-
sign static pressure.
C. Measure and record panel deflection at the roof and walls under both the
positive pressure test and the negative pressure test. Deflection shall be less
than 1/200`h of the longest span for all unit sections.
2. Unit shall be designed and tested to meet a minimum of 100 percent of scheduled
system air volume (CFM) at design static pressure. Factory air volume and dis-
charge static pressure testing shall be performed as follows:
a. Install a supply duct from discharge of unit and install calibrated airflow
measuring stations, calibrated static pressure sensors and discharge air
dampers in supply duct. Install airflow measuring stations in accordance
with manufacturer's installation instructions. Seal return air opening. Con-
duct air volume test by modulating supply discharge damper to attain design
discharge static pressure and record air volume. Test results shall be reported
and shall include motor amperage (all three legs), CFM, static pressure,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-5 05/13/05
B. Housing shall be designed to minimize through wall metal construction in order to elimi- •
hate external water vapor condensation. The air handling unit manufacturer shall guar-
antee the unit casing will be airtight and non-condensing at an ambient dewpoint tem-
perature of 65°F. The structural integrity of the unit shall prevent distortion of the unit
superstructure during trucking, rigging, and installation.
C. The air handling unit components shall be fabricated in major sections in the unit manu-
facturer's factory and shall carry the manufacturer's nameplate. These major sections,
after having all framework completely installed on their base structures, shall be joined
into a one-piece complete unit assembly to ensure that all these sections will fit together
properly in the field and shall be tested in accordance with Article 1.5 — Factory Inspec-
tion and Testing.
D. The HVAC contractor shall provide all field labor necessary to join the unit sections, in-
cluding all electric splits after they are delivered to the site and set in place. All required
field assembly shall be provided under the direct supervision of a qualified engineer em-
ployed by the unit manufacturer.
E. NFPA Compliance: Air-handling units and components shall be designed, fabricated,
and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ven-
tilating Systems."
F. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors required as part of air handling units that
are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
G. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
H. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
I. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of air handling units with piping and
ductwork and with other installations.
J. Each unit shall bear an ETL or UL label under UL Standard 1995 indicating the com-
plete unit is listed as an assembly. ETL or UL listing of individual components, or control
panels only, is not acceptable.
1.5 FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Factory testing shall be performed on all three air handling units. The air handling unit
manufactured (AHU-1,2 and 3) shall be the unit that is tested. Witnessed testing re-
quirements shall be as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-4 05/13/05
b. Calculations showing fan weight and weight carried by each vibration Isola-
tor for each of the inertia bases.
C. Calculations showing fan thrust and thrust restraint spring selection.
12. Airflow stations.
13. Dampers.
a. Economizer damper.
b. Return air damper.
C. Minimum outside air damper with integral airflow station.
d. Smoke damper
14. Air Blender
15. Unit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differen-
tiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
16. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics.
17. Material gauges and finishes, including paint.
18. Construction drawing with elevation and plan views (minimum scale 3/8"=1'-0")
including all dimensions, components, inlet and discharge openings, access doors,
concrete pad size requirements, and equipment schedules. Show all shipping splits
and mounting of accessories including air flow station cabinet, disconnect switch,
etc.
19. Detail drawings including cross-sections of floor construction, structural frame
layout, structural steel supports and bulkheads for coil and fan mounting, and unit
section connection.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturer of air handling unit certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements including, but not limited to, air flow ca-
pacity, cooling capacity, sound data, non-condensing construction, structural integrity,
and air leakage rate.
D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with speci-
fied requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit copies of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual in compliance with forthcoming Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, forthcom-
ing Section 15050 — Basic Mechanical Requirements, and the additional requirements of
Article 1.6 of this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The air handling unit manufacturer shall guarantee the air handling unit performance.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-3 05/13/05
19. Operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Related Sections: The following forthcoming Sections contain requirements that relate to
this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" for general requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit testing procedures with diagrams and narrative indicating testing procedures
prior to factory testing. Refer to Article 1.5 of this Section for further submittal re-
quirements.
P). Submit data front manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimen-
sions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection. Submit product data submittals for custom air
handling unit materials and equipment specified in this Section including, but not limited
to:
1. Air handling unit complete with all components, controls, accessories, and installa-
tion details.
2. Freeze resistant Steam heating coil, including performance ratings and installation
details.
3. Steam humidifier, including performance ratings and installation details.
4. Chilled water coil, including certified coil performance rating and system operating
conditions indicated.
5. Air filters with performance characteristics.
6. Magnehelic filter gauges for pre-filters and final filters.
7. Insulation thickness, type, and properties. Indicate where each type of insulation is
installed within the air handling unit.
8. Supply fan, complete with acoustical diffuser cone, motor, certified performance
curves, certified sound power rating, and accessories. Indicate system operating
conditions.
9. Mixing baffle plate, including method of support and total air pressure drop.
10. Disconnect switches, lighting fixtures, and power receptacles.
11. Vibration isolators including:
a. Catalog cuts of the restrained type spring isolators.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15854 — CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide three indoor type, factory fabricated, custom air handling units having overall
dimensions as shown on the forthcoming Contract Documents. Air handling units shall
be variable volume, single duct, draw-through, medium pressure (10" WG), double wall
units. Operating capacity and internal components shall be of the size and quantity as
listed on the Contract Documents.
1. This Specification Section applies to Indoor Custom Air Handling Units AHU-1, 2,
and 3 as scheduled on the Contract Documents.
2. Close coordination shall be exercised between the unit manufacturer, the installing
HVAC contractor, the electrical contractor, and the automatic temperature con-
trols contractor to ensure proper operation of all components.
B. This Section includes variable-volume, custom air-handling units with the following
components: (Refer to Contract Documents for components required for specific air
handling units)
1. Economizer dampers.
2. Minimum outside air damper with integral airflow stations.
3. Mixing sections.
4. Air Blender
S. Prefilters.
6. Freeze Resistant Steam Heating Coils
7. Steam humidifiers.
8. Chilled water cooling coils.
9. Supply fan, supports, and vibration isolation.
10. Acoustical discharge cones.
11. Smoke dampers
12. Mixing Baffle plate
13. Final filters.
14. Discharge air sections.
15. Lighting, electrical power wiring, disconnect-switches, and junction boxes.
16. All components as shown on forthcoming Air Handling Unit Details, Air Handler
Schedules, and as specified in this Section.
17. Equipment start-up.
18. Factory performance testing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Custom Air-Handling Units
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15854-1 05/13/05
001111 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Division 1
Section - "Submittals and Substitutions", in Division 1 Section - "Contract Close-
out", and Division 15 - "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance no-
tice.
END OF SECTION 15845
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Air Terminals
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15845-7 05/13/05
"'
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to air terminals to allow service and maintenance.
B. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division ]5 Section "I-Iydronic Pip-
ing," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, union or flange and
pipe reducer to match coil connection; and to return with pipe reducer to match coil
connection size, union or flange, manual air vent, control valve with reducers and unions
to match control valve size, balancing valve, and shutoff valve.
C. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
I Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,
use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Aftk
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect ex-
posed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract Documents.
B. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal manufacturer to
achieve proper performance.
C. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
D. Verify that control connections are complete.
E. Check that nameplate and identification tags are visible.
F. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Air Terminals
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15845-6 05/13/05
OW troller shall be capable of performing all heating and cooling sequences indicated in the
"Sequence of Operation" shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 15975 -
"Automatic Temperature Controls
B. Air terminal controller, velocity pressure transducer, and control transformer shall be
furnished under Section 15975 - "Automatic Temperature Controls" Refer to Part 3 of
this Section for installation requirements of air terminal controller, velocity pressure
transducer, and control transformer.
C. Damper Position: All air terminal controllers shall have the following damper position
requirements:
I. Supply air terminal with hot water coil - Normally Open.
2. Supply air terminal without hot water coil - Normally Open.
3. Exhaust air terminal —Normally Open.
4. Return air terminal — Normally Closed.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: Test and rate air terminals according to ARI880, "Industry
Standard for Air Terminals."
B. Identification: Label each air terminal with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum
and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminals level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
rough-in drawings, original design, and referenced standards; and maintain sufficient
clearance for normal service and maintenance.
1. Maintain a minimum of 18" clear in front of terminal box controller for mainte-
nance.
B. Connect ductwork to air terminals according to Division 15 ductwork Sections.
C. Factory mount terminal box controller furnished by Section 15975 - "Automatic Tem-
perature Controls". Controller shall be installed in accordance with controller manufac-
turer's recommendations.
1. Install pneumatic tubing from the terminal box airflow sensor to the terminal box
controller transducer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Air Terminals
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15845-5 05/13/05
A. Volume Damper: Damper blade shall be constructed of galvanized steel with peripheral
gasket and self-lubricating bearings or shall be a cylindrical flow design with a beveled,
self centering damper.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg (750-Pa)
inlet static pressure.
2. Blade type dampers shall have a damper position indicator permanently marked on
the shaft and shall have a mechanical stop to prevent over-stoking.
2.6 AIRFLOW SENSOR
A. Air terminals shall be equipped with a multi-point, center-averaging or multiple point
flow sensing ring type air flow sensor. The airflow sensor shall be designed to provide a
differential pressure signal which is amplified 2.5 times the normal velocity pressure over
the range or a minimum of 0.03"wg at 500 FPM.
2.7 HOT WATER HEATING COIL
A. Provide air terminal hot water heating coils where indicated on the Drawings. Hot water
heating coils shall have capacities as scheduled on the Drawings and shall be constructed
as follows:
1. 1/2-inch (13-mm) copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins;
leak tested underwater to 200 psig (1380 kPa); and factory installed.
2. Provide 1-row or 2-row coils as scheduled on the Drawings.
3. Coil performance data shall be based on tests run in accordance with ARI Stan-
dard 410.
2.8 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide removable panels upstream of heating coil to permit access to dampers and other
parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance and for cleaning heating coil. Pro-
vide access door with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
1. Access doors shall have a minimum size of 6" by 6".
2.9 CONTROLS
A. General: Damper operator, damper actuator, thermostat, and other devices shall be
compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 15975 - "Automatic Tempera-
ture Controls". Air terminal controller shall be capable to perform as (CV)-Constant
Volume or (W)-Variable Volume as scheduled on the Drawings. Air terminal box con-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Air Terminals
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15845-4 05/13/05
2.3 CASING CONSTRUCTION
A. Casing Construction: Galvanized or zinc coated steel sheet metal of the following mini-
mum thicknesses:
I. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.0299-inch (22 Gage).
2. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.0299-inch (22 Gage).
B. Casing shall be mechanically assembled and sealed to form an air-tight casing.
C. Plenum Air Inlet: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct at-
tachment.
D. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.
2.4 CASING LINING/INSULATION/ATTENUATOR
A. Casing Lining: Minimum of 1-inch thick, fibrous-glass insulation; 1.5-lb/cu. ft. density,
or 3/4-inch- (13-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass insulation; 4.0-lb/cu. ft. density, complying
with NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Secure lining to pre-
vent de-lamination, sagging, or settling.
1. Provide a non-porous scrim-stitched reinforced foil liner laminated to insulation or
a 26 gage metal inner liner with insulation totally encapsulated. Provide metal an-
gle protective strips on all exposed insulation edges.
B. Provide a sound attenuator section on each air terminal, unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings. Attenuator section shall be constructed as follows:
1. Attenuator casing shall be the same construction as that of the air terminal casing.
2. Attenuator section shall be a minimum of 36" long, shall be single piece construc-
tion, and shall be the full outlet size of the air terminal.
3. Provide an access door in the sound attenuator in accordance with "Access Door"
paragraph of this Section.
4. Line attenuator with 3/4-inch thick, fibrous-glass insulation; 4.0-lb/cu. ft. density,
complying with NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Se-
cure lining to prevent de-lamination, sagging, or settling.
a. Provide a non-porous scrim-stitched reinforced foil liner laminated to insula-
tion or a 26 gage metal inner liner with insulation totally encapsulated. Pro-
vide metal angle protective strips on all exposed insulation edges.
2.5 DAMPER
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Air Terminals
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15845-3 05/13/05
C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
D. Coordination.Drawings: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section - "Spe-
cial Provisions", Division 15 Section - Basic Mechanical Requirements", and Division
15 Section - "Metal Ducts" for Coordination Drawing and Sheet Metal Fabrication
Drawing requirements related to air terminals.
E. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of air terminal and troubleshooting main-
tenance guide to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Divi-
sion 15 — `Basic Mechanical Requirements".
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated air terminals specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminals according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the In-
stallation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals by one
of the following:
1. Environmental Technologies—Model SDR.
2. Titus—Model ESV 3000.
3. Trane Co. (The) —Model VCWE.
4. Tuttle & Bailey, Hart & Cooley, Inc. —Model SDV.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control components
inside protective metal shroud.
B. Air terminal boxes shall be pressure independent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Air Terminals
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15845-2 05/13/05
00**" SECTION 15845 - AIR TERMINALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Single-duct air terminals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for external insulation of air terminals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. "Terminal Box": The term "terminal box" as referenced on the Drawings shall be de-
fined as "air terminal" as referenced in this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section - "Submittals and Sub-
stitutions" and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
B. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; fur-
nished specialties and accessories including sound attenuator casing construction, length,
lining type, method of attaching lining to casing, and access door construction. Submit
sound power data with no corrections or noise reduction factors applied. Submit a
schedule showing the following information for each air terminal provided:
1. Drawing designation (Item No.).
2. Room location.
3. Model number and air terminal size.
4. CFM minimum and maximum.
5. Heating coil capacity (MBH), number of rows, air pressure drop, water pressure
drop, and GPM.
6. Accessories included for each air terminal.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Air Terminals
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15845-1 05/13/05
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. [Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] [Train] Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 15837
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-23 05/13/05
seismic-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls."
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in
concrete base.
C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to
equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and [elastomeric
hangers] [spring hangers] [spring hangers with vertical-limit stops] <Insert device> having
a static deflection of [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert deflection>. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install line-sized piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5
times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper AWAk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-22 05/13/05
14. Discharge Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
15. Inlet Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: -,Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
16. Vibration Isolators: [Spring isolators] [Restrained spring isolators] <Insert type>
having a static deflection of [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert deflection>.
17. Spark Arrestance Class: [A] [B] [C].
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
B. Support floor-mounting units using [spring isolators] [restrained spring isolators] <Insert
device> having a static deflection of [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert deflection>. Vibration- and
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-21 05/13/05
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <Insert number> look
hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at
the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
5. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include
provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with
guard in place.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
K. Accessories:
1. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
2. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
3. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
L. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
M. Capacities And Characteristics:
1. Wheel Size (Diameter): <Insert inches (mm).>
2. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [One-piece fiberglass-reinforced plastic]
[Stainless steel].
3. Special Wheel Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin]
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
galvanized] [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
4. Airflow: <Insert cfm (L/s).>
5. Static Pressure: <Insert inches wg (Pa).>
6. Class: [I] [II] [III].
7. Brake Horsepower: <Insert value.>
8. Drive Type: [Belt Drive] [Direct].
9. Fan Rpm: <Insert value.>
10. Outlet Velocity: <Insert fpm (m/s).>
11. Motor Size: <Insert value> hp.
12. Motor Rpm: <Insert value.>
13. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: <Insert value.>
b. Phase: <Insert value.>
C. Hertz: <Insert value.>
d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.>
e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-20 05/13/05
D. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor [and disconnect switch],
drive assembly, and support structure.
L. Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet construction with smooth-curved inlet flange;
heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip
flange and backplate;[ and] cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened
to shaft with set screws[; and special coating].
F. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
G. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, LIO at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
H. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller
bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
I. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings
with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
J. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: [1.5] [1.4] [1.3] [1.2].
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-19 05/13/05
a. 1 st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
16. Vibration Isolators: [Spring isolators] [Restrained spring isolators] <Insert type>
having a static deflection of [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert deflection>.
17. Spark Arrestance Class: [A] [B] [C].
2.5 PLUG FANS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product
indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. ABB Fan Group North America.
2. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
3. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
4. Airmaster Fan Co.
5. Ammerman; General Resource Corp.
6. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
7. Carrier Corporation.
8. Central Blower Company.
9. Chicago Blower Corporation.
10. Cincinnati Fan.
11. CML Northern Blower Inc.
12. Howden Fan Co.
13. Industrial Air; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
14. Loren Cook Company.
15. Madison Manufacturing.
16. New Philadelphia Fan Co.
17. New York Blower Company (The).
18. Trane.
19. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
,look_
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-18 05/13/05
1. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
2. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
3. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
L. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
M. Capacities And Characteristics:
1. Wheel Size (Diameter): <Insert inches (mm).>
2. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [One-piece fiberglass-reinforced plastic]
[Stainless steel].
3. Special Wheel Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin]
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
galvanized] [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
4. Airflow: <Insert cfm (L/s).>
5. Static Pressure: <Insert inches wg (Pa).>
6. Class: [I] [II] [III].
7. Brake Horsepower: <Insert value.>
8. Drive Type: [Belt] [Direct].
9. Fan Rpm: <Insert value.>
10. Outlet Velocity: <Insert fpm (m/s).>
11. Motor Size: <Insert value> hp.
12. Motor Rpm: <Insert value.>
13. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: <Insert value.>
b. Phase: <Insert value.>
C. Hertz: <Insert value.>
d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.>
e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>
14. Discharge Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
15. Inlet Sound Power:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package' - 2323 15837-17 05/13/05
I. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
G. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
I. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, LIO at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
H. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller
bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
I. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings
with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
J. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: [1.5] [1.4] [1.3] [1.2].
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <Insert number>
hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at
the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
S. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include
provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with
guard in place.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
K. Accessories:
look
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-16 05/13/05
19. Spark Arrestance Class: [A] [B] [C].
2.4 PLENUM FANS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product
indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. ABB Fan Group North America.
2. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
3. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
4. Airmaster Fan Co.
S. Ammerman; General Resource Corp.
6. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
7. Carrier Corporation.
8. Central Blower Company.
9. Chicago Blower Corporation.
10. Cincinnati Fan.
11. CML Northern Blower Inc.
12. Howden Fan Co.
13. Industrial Air; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
14. Loren Cook Company.
15. Madison Manufacturing.
16. New Philadelphia Fan Co.
17. New York Blower Company (The).
18. Trane.
19. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
D. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor [and disconnect switch],
drive assembly, and support structure.
E. Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet construction with smooth-curved inlet flange;
heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip
flange and backplate;[ and] cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened
to shaft with set screws[; and special coating].
F. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-15 05/13/05
3. Wheel Size (Diameter): <Insert inches (mm).>
4. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Galvanized steel].
5. Special Wheel Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin]
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
galvanized] [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
6. Airflow: <Insert cfm (L/s).>
7. Static Pressure: <Insert inches wg (Pa).>
8. Class: [I] [II] [III].
9. Brake Horsepower: <Insert value.>
10. Drive Type: [Belt] [Direct].
11. Fan Rpm: <Insert value.>
12. Outlet Velocity: <Insert fpm (m/s).>
13. Motor Size: <Insert value> hp.
14. Motor Rpm: <Insert value.>
15. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: <Insert value.>
b. Phase: <Insert value.>
C. Hertz: <Insert value.>
d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.>
e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>
16. Discharge Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
17. Inlet Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
18. Vibration Isolators: [Spring isolators] [Restrained spring isolators] <Insert type>
having a static deflection of [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert deflection>.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-14 05/13/05
00W 3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <Insert number>
hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at
the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
S. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include
provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with
guard in place.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
L. Accessories:
1. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and
gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: [Bolted] [Quick-opening, latch-type] gasketed door allowing
access to fan scroll, of same material as housing.
J. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 (DN 25) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as
housing.
5. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently
lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating
in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with [parallel] [opposed] blades constructed of two
plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with
blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
7. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing.
8. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
9. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
10. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
11. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
M. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
N. Capacities And Characteristics:
1. Housing Material: [Reinforced steel] [Shaped fiberglass-reinforced plastic]
[Aluminum] [Stainless steel].
2. Special Housing Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin]
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
galvanized] [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-13 05/13/05
3. Spun inlet cone with flange. '"
4. Outlet flange.
F. Forward-Curved Wheels: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet
flange, backplate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of
airflow, mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate
and fastened to shaft with set screws.
G. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
H. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, LIO at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
I. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller ,
bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, LIO at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
J. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings
with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, LIO at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, 1,10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
K. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: [1.5] [1.4] [1.3] [1.2].
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-12 05/13/05
18. Vibration Isolators: [Spring isolators] [Restrained spring isolators] <Insert type>
having a static deflection of [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert deflection>.
19. Spark Arrestance Class: [A] [B] [C].
23 FORWARD-CURVED CENTRIFUGAL, FANS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product
indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. ABB Fan Group North America.
2. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
3. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
4. Airmaster Fan Co.
S. Ammerman; General Resource Corp.
6. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
4001'' 7. Carrier Corporation.
8. Central Blower Corporation.
9. Chicago Blower Corporation.
10. Cincinnati Fan.
11. CML Northern Blower Inc.
12. Howden Fan Co.
13. Industrial Air; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
14. Loren Cook Company.
15. Madison Manufacturing.
16. New Philadelphia Fan Co.
17. New York Blower Company (The).
18. Trane.
19. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
D. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor [and disconnect
switch], drive assembly, and support structure.
E. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with doors
or panels to allow access to internal parts and components.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-11 05/13/05
galvanized] [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
3. Wheel Size (Diameter): <Insert inches (mm).>
4. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [One-piece fiberglass-reinforced plastic]
[Stainless steel].
5. Special Wheel Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin]
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
galvanized] [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
6. Airflow: <Insert cfm (L/s).>
7. Static Pressure: <Insert inches wg (Pa).>
8. Class: [I] [II] [III].
9. Brake Horsepower: <Insert value.>
10. Drive Type: [Belt] [Direct].
11. Fan Rpm: <Insert value.>
12. Outlet Velocity: <Insert fpm (m/s).>
13. Motor Size: <Insert value> hp.
14. Motor Rpm: <Insert value.>
15. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: <Insert value.>
b. Phase: <Insert value.>
C. Hertz: <Insert value.>
d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.>
e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>
16. Discharge Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
17. Inlet Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-10 05/13/05
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <Insert number>
hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at
the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
S. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include
provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with
guard in place.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
L. Accessories:
1. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and
gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: [Bolted] [Quick-opening, latch-type] gasketed door allowing
access to fan scroll, of same material as housing.
3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 (DN 25) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as
housing.
5. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently
lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating
in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with [parallel] [opposed] blades constructed of two
plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with
blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
7. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing.
8. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
9. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
10. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
11. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
M. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
N. Capacities And Characteristics:
1. Housing Material: [Reinforced steel] [Shaped fiberglass-reinforced plastic]
[Aluminum] [Stainless steel].
2. Special Housing Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin]
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-9 05/13/05
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
3. Spun inlet cone with flange.
4. Outlet flange.
F. Backward-Inclined Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet
construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades[ welded or
riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate] and
fastened to shaft with set screws.
G. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adj ustinent made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
H. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
I. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller
bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
J. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings
with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
K. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: [1.5] [1.4] [1.3] [1.2].
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-8 05/13/05
00** g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
18. Vibration Isolators: [Spring isolators] [Restrained spring isolators] <Insert type>
having a static deflection of [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert deflection>.
19. Spark Arrestance Class: [A] [B] [C].
2.2 BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
13. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product
indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. ABB Fan Group North America.
2. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
3. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
4. Airmaster Fan Co.
5. Ammerman; General Resource Corp.
6. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
7. Carrier Corporation.
8. Central Blower Company.
9. Chicago Blower Corporation.
10. Cincinnati Fan.
11. CML Northern Blower Inc.
12. Howden Fan Co.
13. Industrial Air; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
14. Loren Cook Company.
15. Madison Manufacturing.
16. New Philadelphia Fan Co.
17. New York Blower Company (The).
18. Trane.
19. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
D. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor [and disconnect
switch], drive assembly, and support structure.
E. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with doors
or panels to allow access to internal parts and components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-7 05/13/05
2. Special Housing Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin] ,
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
galvanized] [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
3. Wheel Size (Diameter): <Insert inches (inm).>
4. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [One-piece fiberglass-reinforced plastic]
[Stainless steel].
5. Special Wheel Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl] [Epoxy] [Zinc] [Synthetic resin]
[Phenolic] [Color-match enamel] [Polytetrafluoroethylene] [Vinyl ester] [Hot-dip
galvanized], [Powder-baked enamel]; <Insert manufacturer's name and trade
name>.
6. Airflow: <Insert cfm (L/s).>
7. Static Pressure: <Insert inches wg (Pa).>
S. Class: [I] [II] [III].
9. Brake Horsepower: <Insert value.>
10. Drive Type: [Belt] [Direct].
11. Fan Rpm: <Insert value.>
12. Outlet Velocity: <Insert fpm (ni/s).>
13. Motor Size: <Insert value> hp.
14. Motor Rpm: <Insert value.>
15. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: <Insert value.>
b. Phase: <Insert value.>
C. Hertz: <Insert value.>
d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.>
e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>
16. Discharge Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
g. 7th Octave: <Insert dB.>
h. 8th Octave: <Insert dB.>
17. Inlet Sound Power:
a. 1st Octave: <Insert dB.>
b. 2nd Octave: <Insert dB.>
C. 3rd Octave: <Insert dB.>
d. 4th Octave: <Insert dB.>
e. 5th Octave: <Insert dB.>
f. 6th Octave: <Insert dB.>
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-6 05/13/05
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: [1.5] [1.4] [1.3] [1.2].
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <Insert number>
hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at
the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
5. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include
provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with
guard in place.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
L. Accessories:
1. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and
gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: [Bolted] [Quick-opening, latch-type] gasketed door allowing
access to fan scroll, of same material as housing.
3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 (DN 25) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as
housing.
5. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently
lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating
in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with [parallel] [opposed] blades constructed of two
plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with
blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
7. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing.
8. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
9. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
10. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
11. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
M. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
N. Capacities And Characteristics:
1. Housing Material: [Reinforced steel] [Shaped fiberglass-reinforced plastic]
[Aluminum] [Stainless steel].
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-5 05/13/05
E. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff, with doors
or panels to allow access to internal parts and components.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
3. Spun inlet cone with flange.
4. Outlet flange.
F. Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction
with curved inlet flange; heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades
continuously welded at tip flange and backplate;[ and] cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted
to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws[; and special coating].
G. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.
H. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
I. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller
bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, LIO at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
J. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings
with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours] <Insert
hours>.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at [50,000 hours] [120,000 hours]
<Insert hours>.
K. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-4 05/13/05
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Belts: [One] <Insert number> set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIRFOIL CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product
indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a
comparable product by one of the following:
' 1. ABB Fan Group North America.
2. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
3. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
4. Airmaster Fan Co.
S. Ammerman; General Resource Corp.
6. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
7. Carrier Corporation.
8. Central Blower Company.
9. Chicago Blower Corporation.
10. Cincinnati Fan.
11. CML Northern Blower Inc.
12. Howden Fan Co.
13. Industrial Air; a division of Lau Industries, Inc.
14. Loren Cook Company.
15. Madison Manufacturing.
16. New Philadelphia Fan Co.
17. New York Blower Company (The).
18. Trane.
19. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
D. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor [and disconnect
switch], drive assembly, and support structure.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-3 05/13/05
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between componentS
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Airfoil centrifugal fans.
2. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans.
J. Forward-curved centrifugal fans.
4. Plug fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on [actual Project site elevations above]
sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
S. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15837-1 05/13/05
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with
new units, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting,
and balancing procedures.
G. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or re-
placements are made.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and
cabinet.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fans.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and sched-
ules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15836
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Axial Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15836-7 05/13/05
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install axial fans level and plumb.
B. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.
Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. In seismic zones, restrain support units.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Iden-
tificarion."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories."
B. Ground equipment.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Equipment Startup Checks:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connec-
tions to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and
smooth bearing operation.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
B. Starting Procedures:
1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Ao%*
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Axial Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15836-6 05/13/05
S. Fan blade tip clearance shall be designed to expand and operate properly without
APW interference at 482 degrees Farenheit.
E. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 100,000 hours.
F. Motor Mounting: Motor encased in housing, factory wired to dust proof terminal box
located on outside of fan housing.
1. The motor shall be supported from mild steel plates continuously welded to the
motor duct. The structure shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
G. Accessories:
I. Suspension Clips: Suspension clips welded to fan housing to facilitate suspension
of fan from structure above.
H. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, , Design B, continuous duty, pre-
mium efficiency with efficiency as listed in Division 15 Section "Motors".
1. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-
installed motors.
2. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, air over.
3. Temperature Rated: Class H insulation rated for continuous operation at 482 de-
gress Farenheit.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of ro-
tation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Axial Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15836-5 05/13/05
2. Extended Lubrication Lines: Extend lubrication lines from motor bearing to out- ,
side of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
3. Suspension Clips: Suspension clips welded to fan housing to facilitate. suspension
of fan from structure above.
H. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, , Design B, continuous duty, pre-
mium efficiency with efficiency as listed in Division 15 Section "Motors".
I Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-
installed motors.
2. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, air over.
2.2 ADJUSTABLE PITCH VANEAXIAL FANS-SMOKE EXHAUST
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Woods, U.S.A Division; Fairfield, Ohio
a. Model: JM Aerofoil-Temperature Rated.
B. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted, direct drive motor. The fan
blade pitch angle shall be manually adjustable. The fan shall be a non-overloading selec-
tion for the operating points listed on the drawings.
C. Housings: The fan housing shall be manufactured of hot dipped galvanized mild steel
with integral rolled flanges. Provide EVASE casing as indicated on the drawings.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges de-
signed to accept flexible duct connectors provided under Division 15 Section "Duct
Accessories".
2. Guide Vanes: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan blades and impeller de-
signed to straighten airflow.
D. Fan Hub/Impeller and Blade-Bearing Assemblies: Cast aluminum alloy, precision ma-
chined, and fitted with bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies.
1. Blades: Replaceable, cast aluminum alloy; airfoil design, factory mounted and bal-
anced to hub assembly.
2. Blades shall be mounted on thrust bearings fully submerged in grease. Grease shall
be designed to operate continuously at 482 degrees Farenheit without breaking
down.
3. The fan casing enclosing the impeller shall be removable to allow access to the im-
peller with the fan in place.
4. Impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and keyway. Axial location
shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft and a retaining washer
and screw fitted into a tapped hole in the end of the shaft. The screw shall be
locked in position.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Axial Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15836-4 05/13/05
a. Model: Series 1000/2000 AXIVANE.
3. Chicago Blower Corp.
a. Model: Design 47 Vaneaxial Adjustable Pitch.
B. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted, direct drive motor. The fan
blade pitch angle shall be manually adjustable. The fan shall be a non-overloading selec-
tion for the operating points listed on the drawings.
C. Housings: The fan housing shall be manufactured of hot dipped galvanized mild steel
with integral rolled flanges. Provide EVASE casing as indicated on the drawings.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges de-
signed to accept flexible duct connectors provided under Division ]5 Section "Duct
Accessories".
2. Guide Vanes: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan blades and impeller de-
signed to straighten airflow.
D. Fan Hub/Impeller and Blade-Bearing Assemblies: Cast al uilinun-1 alloy, precision ma-
chined, and fitted with bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies.
1. Blades: Replaceable, cast aluminum alloy; airfoil design, factory mounted and bal-
anced to hub assembly.
2. Blades shall be mounted on thrust bearings fully submerged in grease.
3. The fan casing enclosing the impeller shall be removable to allow access to the im-
peller with the fan in place.
4. Impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and keyway. Axial location
shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft and a retaining washer
and screw fitted into a tapped hole in the end of the shaft. The screw shall be
locked in position.
E. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 100,000 hours.
F. Motor Mounting: Motor encased in housing, factory wired to dust proof terminal box
located on outside of fan housing.
1. The motor shall be supported from mild steel plates continuously welded to the
motor duct. The structure shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
G. Accessories:
1. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of fan to
detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control devices
are specified in Division 15 Sections "Control System Equipment".
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Axial Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15836-3 05/13/05
C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of sup-
port, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Maintenance Data: For axial fans to include in maintenance inanuals specified in Divi-
sion 1.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA stan-
dards.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final locations, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ADJUSTABLE PITCH VANEAXIAL FANS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Woods, U.S.A Division; Fairfield, Ohio
a. Model: JM Aerofoil.
2. Joy Technologies, Inc.-Joy/Green Fan Division; New Philadelphia, Ohio.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Axial Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15836-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15836 - AXIAL FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Adjustable pitch vaneaxial return fans serving air handling units.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Certified temperature rated test reports for fans utilized for smoke control applica-
tions.
4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
5. Material gages and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manu-
facturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolators.
3. Vibration Isolator Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attach-
ments to structure and to supported equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Axial Fans
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15836-1 05/13/05
Access Doors for Rectangular Supply, Return, and Exhaust Duct Systems
(Pressure Class 3" and Above)
Access Minimum
Pressure Insulated Duct Geometry Max. Duct Width Door Access Door
Class (Y/N) or Diameter Type Size
3" & Up N Rect. 6" thru 12" E 10" x 6"
3" & Up N Rect. 13" thru 20" E 12" x 8"
3" & Up N Rect. 21" and Up E 18" x 14"
3" & Up Y Rect. 6" thru 12" F 10" x 6"
3" & Up Y Rect. 13" thru 20" F 12" x 8"
3" & Up Y Rect. 21" and Up F 18" x 14"
Positive Pressure Relief Type Access Doors
for Rectangular, Round, and Flat Oval Supply, Return, and Exhaust Duct Systems
(Single Wall - Pressure Class 3" and Above)
Access Minimum
Pressure Insulated Duct Geometry Max. Duct Width Door Access Door
Class (Y/N) or Diameter Type Size
3" & Up Y Rect./Round/Oval All Sizes L Note 1
NOTE 1: Install positive pressure relief type access doors in ductwork of pressure class
3" above downstream of all air handling unit supply ductwork mains and shall be the size
indicated on the Drawings.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
fowl
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-23 05/13/05
ers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, humidifiers, airflow
measuring stations, and similar equipment.
1. Install duct access doors to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspect-
ing, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Access doors provided for inspection and cleaning shall be provided at intervals of
approximately 40 feet to allow for a maximum reach of 20 feet in straight horizon-
tal runs, upstream and downstream of each elbow and tee in supply and return
duct systems.
3. Install access doors on side or bottom of duct where adequate clearance is avail-
able.
13. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section ":Mechanical Identification".
J.4 ACCESS DOOR SCHEDULES
Access Doors for Rectangular Supply, Return, and Exhaust Duct Systems
(Pressure Class 2" and Below)
Access Minimum
Pressure Insulated Duct Geometry Max. Duct Width Door Access Door
Class (Y/N) or Diameter Type Size
2" & Less N Rect. 6" thru 12" A 6" x 6"
2" & Less N Rect. 13" thru 20" A 12" x 12" ,
2" & Less I N Rect. 21" and Up A 18" x 18"
2" & Less Y Rect. 6" thru 12" B 6" x 6"
2" & Less Y Rect. 13" thru 20" B 12" x 12"
2" & Less Y Rect. 21" and Up B 18" x 18"
Access Doors for Round Supply, Return, and Exhaust Duct Systems
(Pressure Class 2" and Below)
Access Minimum
Pressure Insulated Duct Geometry Max.Duct Width Door Access Door
Class (Y/N) or Diameter Type Size
2" & Less N Round 6" thru 8" C 8" x 5"
2" & Less N Round 9" thru 12" C 11" x 8"
2" & Less N Round 13" thru 18" C 16" x 12"
2" & Less N Round 18" and Up C 18" x 14"
2" & Less Y Round 6" thru 8" D 8" x 5"
2" & Less Y Round 9" thru 12" D 11" x 8"
2" & Less Y Round 13" thru 18" D 16" x 12"
2" & Less Y Round 18" and Up D 18" x 14"
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-22 05113105
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SNIACNA's "HVAC Duct Con-
struction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH1I 6, "Fi-
brous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel acces-
sories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-
steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
D. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-
approved written instructions.
F. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.
G. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with
fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
'* H. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible
connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly.
J. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 48-inch lengths of
flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. Flexible duct shall be limited to the vertical
drop from branch duct to diffuser or register.
K. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of
two duct widths from branch takeoff.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS
A. Install duct access doors for access to both sides of inline fans and duct coils, including
terminal box coils. Install duct access doors downstream from automatic control damp-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-21 05/13/05
2. Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch (50 N/mm) in the warp and 185 lbf/inch (32 N/mm)
in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg Q.
G. I-Iigh-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-
resistant coating.
1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. (474 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch (79 N/mm) in the warp and 340 lbf/inch (60 Nhnm)
in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg Q.
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible ducts by one
of the following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically
wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg Q.
C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically
wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit
duct size.
2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-20 05/13/05
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connectors by
one of the following:
I Ventfabrics, Inc.
a. Ventglas model for all conventional, non-corrosive applications, used in an
interior location, with temperatures below 200°F.
b. Ventlon model for all exterior, non-corrosive applications.
C. Ventsil model for all high temperature applications (above 200°F).
d. Ventel model for all corrosive applications.
2. Duro Dyne National Corp.,Inc.
a. Neoprene model for all conventional, non-corrosive applications, used ill an
interior location, with temperatures below 200°F.
b. Durolon model for all exterior applications.
C. Thermafab model for all high temperature applications (above 2000.
d. Durolon or Neoprene model for all corrosive applications.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
low C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches (89 mm)
wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick,
galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Select metal
compatible with ducts..
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm)
in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weather-
proof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm)
in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg Q.
F. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rub-
ber.
1. Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd. (542 g/sq. m).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-19 05/13/05
a. Ductmate Industries Inc. - Model "The Sandwich" (Insulated).
b. United McGill Corp. - Model AOBXFSDF (Insulated).
3. Access doors shall be sandwich type construction, suitable for use in rectangular
ductwork, and shall be removable, by hand without the need for tools. The access
door shall be designed such that the inner plate is tightened against the outer door
providing a positive airtight seal.
4. Doors for Type E and Type F access doors shall be constructed as follows:
a. Access doors installed in galvanized ductwork shall be minimum 22-gauge
(0.034-inch thick) galvanized steel outer door and inner plate. The outer
door shall be connected to the inner plate by means of spring loaded carriage
bolts with hand operated knobs.
b. Access doors installed in aluminum ductwork shall be minimum 0.05-inch
thick aluminum outer door and inner plate. The outer door shall be corn-
nected to the inner plate by means of spring loaded carriage bolts with hand
operated knobs.
C. Access doors installed in stainless steel ductwork shall be minimum 22-gauge
(0.034-inch thick), Type 316 stainless steel outer door and inner plate. The
outer door shall be connected to the inner plate by means of spring loaded
carriage bolts with hand operated knobs.
5. Type F access doors shall be provided with insulation with a minimum R-value of
7.0. Insulation shall be closed cell, bonded to the inside of the outer door or shall
be high-density fiberglass encapsulated between two layers of sheetmetal. The de-
sign shall be such that the inside surface of the access door shall be the only surface 'l"k
in contact with the air-stream.
6. Access doors shall seal tight against the duct wall with a closed cell gasket with a
service temperature range of -70cF to 220°F. The gasket shall be permanently
bonded to the inner door.
7. Access door shall be leak tested at 10" water gauge with no leakage.
F. Type L:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type L duct
mounted access doors by one of the following:
a. Kees Inc. - Model BO.
2. Access door shall be designed for the express intent of opening outward to prevent
bursting of ductwork under excessive positive pressure.
3. Door and frame shall be constructed of 12-gauge (0.105 inch thick) galvanized
steel. Door shall be provided with a continuous piano hinge and shall have a 1/a"
thick gasket around the entire perimeter of door.
4. Access door pressure relief mechanism shall consist of a latch body with a spring
loaded laminated cam and adjustment screw. The latch shall engage a frame
mounted strike with a roller pin. Access door pressure relief setting shall be ad-
justable from 3" to 8" water gauge.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-18 05/13/05
P401*. a. Kees Inc. - Model ADH-R.
b. Ruskin Manufacturing - Model ADH-22 (with turret for connection to
round duct).
C. Nailor Industries Inc. - Model 08SH (with turret for connection to round
duct).
2. Door construction for Type D access doors shall be as follows:
a. Door shall be double-wall, insulated, 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), galva-
nized, sheet metal construction for access doors installed in galvanized duct-
work. Insulation shall be 1-inck thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam
board.
h. Door shall be double-wall, insulated, 0.05-inch thick, aluminum construc-
tion for access doors installed in aluminum ductwork. Insulation shall be 1-
inck thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
C. Door shall be double-wall, insulated, 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), Type 316
stainless steel construction for access doors installed in stainless steel duct-
work. Insulation shall be 1-inck thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam
board.
3. Provide a continuous piano hinge and number of cam latches as follows:
a. Access doors smaller than 12" x 12" shall have one latch.
b. Access doors 12" x 12" and larger shall have a minimum of two latches.
C. Provide 4 cam latches in lieu of piano hinge where door swing is obstructed.
4. Access doors shall utilize a turret type design constructed with a saddle to conform
to the radius of the duct and shall be constructed as follows:
a. Access doors installed in galvanized ductwork shall have a turret constructed
of minimum 20-gauge (0.040-inch thick) galvanized steel.
b. Access doors installed in aluminum ductwork shall have a turret constructed
of minimum 0.063-inch thick aluminum.
C. Access doors installed in stainless steel ductwork shall have a turret con-
structed of minimum 20-gauge (0.040-inch thick), Type 316 stainless steel.
5. Seal around turret attachment to duct and door to turret with neoprene or foam
rubber.
6. Provide a single pane plexi-glass window in all "Type D" access doors installed for
the purpose of accessing fire dampers, smoke dampers, and automatic control
dampers.
E. Type E and Type F:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type E duct
mounted access doors by one of the following:
a. Ductmate Industries Inc. - Model "The Sandwich" (Uninsulated).
b. United McGill Corp. -Model AOBXFSDF (Uninsulated).
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type F duct
mounted access doors by one of the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V - 2323 15820-17 05/13/05
a. Door shall be double-wall, insulated, 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), galva-
nized, sheet metal construction for access doors installed in galvanized duct-
work. Insulation shall be 1-inck thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam
board.
b. Door shall be double-wall, insulated, 0.05-inch thick, aluminum construc-
tion for access doors installed in aluminum ductwork. Insulation shall be 1-
inck thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
C. Door shall be double-wall, insulated, 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), Type 316
stainless steel construction for access doors installed in stainless steel duct-
work. Insulation shall be 1-inck thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam
board.
6. Provide a continuous piano hinge and number of cam latches as follows:
a. Access doors smaller than 12" x 12" shall have one latch.
b. Access doors 12" x 12" and larger shall have a minimum of two latches.
C. Provide 4 cam latches in lieu of piano hinge where door swing is obstructed.
7. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam
rubber.
S. Provide a single pane plexiglass window in all Type A and Type B access doors in-
stalled for the purpose of accessing fire dampers, smoke dampers, and automatic
control dampers.
C. Type C:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type C duct
mounted access doors by one of the following:
a. Ruskin Manufacturing - Model ADR.
b. Nailor Industries Inc. - Model 0890.
C. Semco Inc. - Model S40.
2. Door construction for Type C access doors shall be as follows:
a. Door shall be single wall, 16-gage (0.064-inch thick) galvanized steel for ac-
cess doors installed in galvanized ductwork.
b. Door shall be single-wall, 0.09-inch thick, aluminum construction for access
doors installed in aluminum ductwork.
C. Door shall be single wall, 16-gage (0.064-inch thick), Type 316 stainless steel
for access doors installed in galvanized ductwork.
3. Provide a continuous piano hinge with a minimum of two plated steel strikes and
catches.
4. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam
rubber.
D. Type D:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type D duct
mounted access doors by one of the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-16 05/13/05
B. Type A and Type B:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type A duct
mounted access doors by one of the following:
a. Ruskin Manufacturing - Model ADH-12.
b. Nailor Industries Inc. - Model 08SH (Uninsulated).
C. Kees Inc. - Model ADH-S (Uninsulated).
d. Greenheck - Model HAD-10 (Uninsulated).
e. Air Balance Inc. - Model FSA-500.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type B duct
mounted access doors by one of the following:
a. Ruskin Manufacturing - Model ADH-22.
b. Nailor Industries Inc. - Model 08SH.
C. Kees Inc. - Model ADH-D.
d. Greenheck - Model HAD-10.
e. Air Balance Inc. - Model FSA-100.
3. Access door frames for Type A and Type B access doors shall be constructed as fol-
lows:
a. Frame shall be galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets
,,k for access doors installed in galvanized ductwork. Access door frames 12" x
12" and smaller shall be minimum 24-gauge (0.028-inch thick) and access
door frames 13" x 13" and larger shall be minimum 22-gauge (0.034-inch
thick).
b. Provide access door frames of aluminum construction with bend-over tabs
and foam gaskets for access doors installed in aluminum ductwork. Access
door frames 12" x 12" and smaller shall be minimum 0.04" thick aluminum
and access door frames 13" x 13" and larger shall be minimum 0.05" thick
aluminum.
C. Frame shall be Type 316 stainless steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gas-
kets for access doors installed in stainless steel ductwork. Access door
frames 12" x 12" and smaller shall be minimum 24-gauge (0.028-inch
thick), Type 316 stainless steel and access door frames 13" x 13" and larger
shall be minimum 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Door construction for Type A access doors shall be as follows:
a. Door shall be single-wall, 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), galvanized, sheet
metal construction for access doors installed in galvanized ductwork.
b. Door shall be single-wall, 0.05-inch thick, aluminum construction for access
doors installed in aluminum ductwork.
C. Door shall be single-wall, 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), Type 316 stainless
steel construction for access doors installed in stainless steel ductwork.
5. Door construction for Type B access doors shall be as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-15 05/13/05
sound attenuators shall not be required on sound attenuators installed in systems
classified as 2-inch wg (positive or negative) pressure class or lower.
2.7 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acoustic turning vanes
by one of the following:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Duro Dyne Corp.
C. METALAIRE, Inc.
d. Ward Industries, Inc.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-incli- (38-mm-) wide, double-vane,
curved blades of set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set
2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Construction of turning vanes shall match the mating duct material. Refer to Divi-
sion 15 Section "Metal Ducts" and the Drawings for required duct system mate-
rial
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
D. Contractors Option: In lieu of providing factory manufactured turning vanes, contractor
may fabricate turning vanes to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall auto-
matically align vanes.
2.8 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. All access doors provided on the project shall be constructed in accordance with the fol-
lowing:
1. Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Unhinged access doors shall be chained to the access door frame to prevent loss of
the door. Chain length shall be a minimum of 6" in length.
3. Insulation provided in access doors shall have a maximum combustion ratings of
25 for flame-spread classification and 50 for smoke developed rating when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Access door and frame material shall be the same as the attached duct material.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" and the Drawings for duct system con-
struction material required.
5. Access door sizes and access door type for each duct system are listed in the access
door schedules in Part 3 of this specification.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-14 05/13/05
low data. Glass fiber shall be packed with a minimum of 15 percent compression during at-
tenuator assembly. Media shall be bacteria and fungus resistant, resilient such that it will
not crumble or break, and shall conform to irregular surfaces. Media shall not cause or
accelerate corrosion of aluminum or steel.
1. The acoustic media shall be completely wrapped with Tedlar film to prevent shed-
ding, erosion, and impregnation of the glass fiber. The wrapped acoustic media
shall be separated from perforated metal by a factory installed 1/z" thick acousti-
cally transparent spacer. The spacer shall be flame retardant and erosion resistant.
2. Sound attenuator materials, including glass fiber, sealers, Tedlar film, and acoustic
spacer shall have maximum combustion ratings of 25 for flamespread classification
and 50 for smoke developed rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,
F. All non-media type sound attenuators shall not contain absorptive media of any hind.
Attenuation shall be achieved with controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned
resonators.
G. Options and Accessories:
1. Provide access doors in all sound attenuators where indicated on the Drawings or
as required to permit fire, smoke, or automatic control damper access. Access
doors shall be provided as an integral part of the sound attenuator and shall be
factory installed. Where high transmission loss walls are provided as an option,
the access door shall not reduce the effectiveness of the sound attenuator walls.
ew 2. Provide high transmission loss casings where indicated on the Drawings. The high
transmission loss casings shall be externally applied to the sound attenuator and
shall be factory sealed to the exterior casing. The high transmission loss walls shall
consist of media, airspace, mass, and outer protective metal skin. The thickness of
the outer skin shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as required to obtain the
specified room noise criteria.
3. Provide flanges or transverse connections to mate with duct system on all sound at-
tenuators installed in ductwork. Coordinate with Division °15 Section "Metal
Ducts".
4. Provide mounting brackets on sound attenuators to allow for suspension of the
unit from the structure above.
H. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:
1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both direc-
tions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power lev-
els, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air
and noise in opposite directions) in accordance with the Projects' air distribution
system requirements. Perform tests with a minimum airflow velocity of at least
2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity or the velocity scheduled on the Drawings, which-
ever is higher.
3. Leak Test: Test sound attenuators for air-tightness at 200 percent of associated
fan static pressure or 6-inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater. Testing of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-13 05/13/05
3. Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire rat-
ings not exceeding 25 for flame-spread index and 50 for smoke-developed index
when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Exceptions: SA-124 and SA-125 which are in the Atrium smoke control sys-
tem. Attenuators SA-124 and SA-125 shall be all stainless steel construction
and able to withstand a 400°F airstream temperature with no degradation.
4. Where casings are indicated to be galvanized sheet metal, they shall conform to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275).
5. Sheet metal perforations shall be 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and
baffle sheet metal.
6. All sound attenuator casings shall be lockformed and sealed to provide a leakage
rate in accordance with the system in which the sound attenuator is installed.
7. All perforated metal shall be adequately stiffened to in sure flatness and form. All
spot welds shall be painted.
S. All sound attenuator inlet and outlet connection dimensions must be equal to the
duct sizes indicated on the Drawings. Duct transitions to inlet or outlet of the
sound attenuators are not acceptable unless specifically indicated on the Drawings.
9. Fabricate sound attenuators to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle,
or otherwise react to system pressure variations. Provide cross or trapeze angles
for rigid suspension as required to meet system requirements. Do not use nuts,
bolts, or sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
10. Sound attenuator pressure drops shall not exceed those indicated on the Drawings.
Sound attenuator pressure drop measurements shall be made in accordance with
the ASTM E-477 test standard. Tests shall be conducted and reported on the iden-
tical units for which acoustical data is presented.
D. Rectangular sound attenuators with and without acoustic media shall be constructed as
follows:
1. Provide rectangular sound attenuator of galvanized steel construction for sound at-
tenuators installed in galvanized ductwork. Fabricate casings with a minimum of
22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), solid sheet metal for outer casing and 26-gauge
(0.022-inch thick), perforated sheet metal for inner casing.
2. Provide rectangular sound attenuator of aluminum construction for sound attenu-
ators installed in aluminum ductwork. Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal
Ducts" and the Drawings for duct systems required to be aluminum. Fabricate
casings with a minimum of 0.043-inch thick solid sheet aluminum for the outer
casing and 0.027-inch thick perforated sheet aluminum for the inner casing.
3. Provide rectangular sound attenuator of stainless steel construction for sound at-
tenuators installed in stainless steel ductwork. Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal
Ducts" and the Drawings for duct systems required to be stainless steel. Fabricate
casings with a minimum of 22-gauge (0.034-inch thick), solid stainless steel (Type
316L) for outer casing and 26-gauge (0.022-inch thick), perforated stainless steel
(Type 316L) for inner casing.
E. Dissapative type sound attenuators shall have acoustic quality media, shot-free glass fiber
insulation with long, resilient fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Glass fiber den-
sity and compression shall be as required to insure conformance with laboratory test
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-12 05/13/05
a. Smoke dampers installed in galvanized steel ductwork shall be 16-gauge
(0.064 inch thick) galvanized steel.
b. Smoke dampers installed in stainless steel or aluminum ductwork
shall be 16-gauge (0.064 inch thick) stainless steel.
D. Type SD2: Smoke Damper.
I. Damper shall be classified by U.L. as a Leakage Rated Damper-Class II (10.0
CFM/sq. ft. at 1.0" w.g.)
2. Damper shall be capable of operating (open and close) with the air delivery system
operating at total pressures up to 4" w.g. in the closed position and 2,000 feet per
minute in the open position.
3. Damper and actuator shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature
of 350T
E. Damper Actuator: Pneumatic actuator factory installed. Damper blades shall be held
open by actuator and close when air is interrupted. Air shall be interrupted when an
area smoke detector triggers the damper's e-p relay to cut and bleed the air supply from
the damper.
2.6 SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide sound attenuators by
one of the following:
1. Vibro-Acoustics.
2. IAC-Industrial Acoustics Company.
3. United McGill Corporation.
B. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, sound attenuator with geometry, size, capacity,
and acoustic performance characteristics as indicated on the Drawings. All sound at-
tenuators provided on the Project shall be of the same manufacturer.
C. All sound attenuators provided on the project shall be constructed in accordance with the
following:
1. Sound attenuators shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE and
SMACNA standard for the pressure and velocity classification indicated in Divi-
sion 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for the air distribution system in which the sound
attenuator is installed. Material gages indicated in this Section shall be increased
as required to meet the system velocity and pressure classifications and shall, as a
minimum, not fail structurally when subjected to a differential pressure of 8-inch
wg static pressure.
2. Construction of sound attenuators shall match the mating duct material. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" and the Drawings for required duct system ma-
terial.
tow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-11 05/13/05
d. Air Balance Inc. - Model S2Y-350.
B. General: All smoke dampers provided on the Project shall be constructed in accordance
with the following:
1. Provide factory-fabricated smoke dampers with geometry, size, capacity, pressure
drop, and performance characteristics as indicated on the Drawings. All smoke
dampers provided on the project shall be of the same manufacturer.
2. Refer to Part 3 of this Section for the application of smoke dampers required for
each air delivery system.
1 Each smoke damper shall be classified by UL as a Leakage Rated Damper for use
in smoke control systems in accordance with UL 5555 and bear a UL label attest-
ing to same.
4. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall be classified by UL as a Leakage
Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems in accordance with UL 555S and
bear a UL label attesting to same. In addition, combination fire and smoke damp-
ers shall be labeled for one-and-one-half-hour rating to UL 555 and bear a UL la-
bel attesting to same.
5. Smoke dampers shall have vertical or horizontal mounting orientation as indicated
on the Drawings.
6. Smoke damper blade and frame material shall match the mating duct material.
7. Smoke damper and combination fire/smoke damper actuators shall be outside the
air-stream.
8. Smoke damper and actuator shall be factory supplied as a single entity with all
UL555 and UL555S qualifications for matched damper and actuator assembly.
9. The smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be completely
compatible with the building fire alarm system and shall interface for alarm.
C. Type SD1 Smoke Damper.
1. Damper shall be classified by U.L. as a Leakage Rated Damper-Class I (4.0
CFM/sq. ft. at 1.0" w.g.)
2. Damper shall be capable of operating (open and close) with the air delivery system
operating at total pressures up to 4" w.g. in the closed position and 4,000 feet per
minute in the open position.
3. Damper and actuator shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature
of 350°F.
4. Damper frame shall be constructed as follows:
a. Smoke dampers installed in galvanized steel ductwork shall have frames con-
structed of 16-gauge (0.064 inch thick) galvanized steel.
b. Smoke dampers installed in stainless steel or aluminum ductwork
shall have frames constructed of 16-gauge (0.064 inch thick)
stainless steel.
5. Damper blades shall be constructed as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-10 05/13/05
1. Minimum Thickness: Fire damper mounting sleeve thickness shall be in accor-
dance with SMACNA - "Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for
HVAC Systems" - Table 2-2 - "Recommended Minimum Sleeve Thickness for Fire
Dampers".
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Type FD1 and Type FD2 Fire Damper Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as
indicated on the Drawings.
G. Type FD1 and Type FD2 Fire Damper Blades:
1. Provide roll-formed, interlocking, curtain type, 22 gauge (0.034-1inch) thick, galva-
nized, sheet steel blades, for fire dampers that are installed in galvanized ductwork.
2. Provide roll-formed, interlocking, curtain type, 22 gauge (0.034-1inch) thick, type
316 stainless steel blades, for fire dampers that are installed in aluminum or
stainless steel ductwork.
H. Type FD1 and Type FD2 Fire Damper Blade Lock and Negator Spring: Provide a blade
lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring on horizontal and vertical mounted fire
dampers.
I. Type FD1 and Type FD2 Fire Damper Fusible Links: Replaceable, 212 deg F (100
deg C) rated.
J. Type FD1 and Type FD2 Fire Damper Mullions: Provide mullions to subdivide openings
required to have fire dampers that are larger than the maximum multiple damper allow-
able. Mullions shall be 16 gauge (0.064-inch) thick galvanized steel.
2.5 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide smoke dampers by
one of the following:
1. Smoke Dampers (Type SD1):
a. PREFCO Products Inc. -Model 5150/5151-Class I.
b. Ruskin Manufacturing-Model SD60 or SD50.
C. Nailor Industries Inc. -Model 1260-Class 1.
d. Air Balance Inc. - Model S1Y-350.
2. Smoke Dampers (Type SD2)
a. PREFCO Products Inc. - Model 5150/5151-Class II.
b. Ruskin Manufacturing-Model SD60-II or SD50-11.
C. Nailor Industries Inc. -Model 1260-Class II.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-9 05/13/05
C. Greenheck - Model DFD-150/Style C.
d. CESCO Products- Model D75-C/Style C.
B. General: All fire dampers provided on the Project shall be constructed in accordance
with the following:
1. Refer to Part 3 of this Section for the application of fire dampers required for each
air delivery system.
2. Fire dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with UL-555
Standard for Fire Dampers. Fire dampers shall be rated and designed for use in
dynamic systems.
3. Fire dampers shall have a label affixed to indicate airflow direction, maximum
rated velocity through the open damper, and the maximum differential pressure
across the closed damper.
4. Provide multiple section fire dampers as required to meet the opening size and the
velocity and pressure requirements of the system.
5. Fire damper blade and frame material shall match the mating duct material. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" and the Drawings for duct systems requiring
stainless steel or aluminum construction.
6. Fire Rating: One and one-half hours.
C. Type FD1: Fire Damper Frame.
1. Fire dampers installed in low pressure duct systems (positive or negative 2" water
gage and less, as indicated in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts") shall be
SMACNA Type B with blades out of air-stream. look
a. Provide fire dampers fabricated with roll-formed, 22-gauge (0.034-inch)
thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners for fire dampers
that are installed in galvanized ductwork.
b. Provide fire dampers fabricated with roll-formed, 22-gauge (0.034-inch)
thick, type 316, stainless steel; with mitered and interlocking corners for fire
dampers that are installed in aluminum or stainless steel ductwork.
D. Type FD2: Fire Damper Frame.
1. Fire dampers installed in high pressure duct systems (positive or negative greater
than 2" water gage, as indicated in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts") shall be
SMACNA Type C with blades and frame out of air-stream.
a. Provide fire dampers fabricated with roll-formed, 20-gauge (0.040-inch)
thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners for fire dampers
that are installed in galvanized ductwork.
b. Provide fire dampers fabricated with roll-formed, 20-gauge (0.040-inch)
thick, type 316, stainless steel; with mitered and interlocking corners for fire
dampers that are installed in aluminum or stainless steel ductwork.
E. Type FD1 and Type FD2 Fire Damper Mounting Sleeves: Factory- or field-installed, gal-
vanized sheet steel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-8 05/13/05
a. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper in multiple-damper assembly.
2.3 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ruskin Manufacturing.
2. Vent Products Co., Inc.
3. American Warming and Ventilating.
4. Air Balance, Inc.
5. Greenheck.
B. General Description: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; as indicated on the
Drawings. Minimum of 0.1084-inch- (2.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel frames with
holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch- (1.61-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel
damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel
and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bear-
ings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to
plus 93 deg C).
3. Provide parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade g�in ed g or re-
placeable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. (51 Us per
sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg (995 Pa) when damper
is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when tested according to
AMCA 500D.
2.4 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire dampers by one of
the following:
1. Fire Dampers (Type FD1):
a. Air Balance Inc., a Division of Mestek, Inc. -Model D19B/Style B.
b. Ruskin Manufacturing- Model DIBD2/Style B.
C. Greenheck- Model DFD-150/Style B.
d. CESCO Products- Model D75-B/Style B.
2. Fire Dampers (Type FD2):
a. Air Balance Inc., a Division of Mestek, Inc. -Model D19C/Style C.
b. Ruskin Manufacturing- Model DIBD2/Style C.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-7 05/13/05
b. 3/8" diameter square or hex Type 316 stainless steel axles for manual vol-
ume dampers installed in aluminum ductwork.
4. Bearings: Nylon, molded synthetic, or self-lubricating porous bronze.
5. Finish: Mill.
6. Performance: Designed for maximum pressure differential of 1" s.p., maximum
temperature of 150 deg F, and maximum system velocity of 1,500 feet per minute.
7. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-
inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking
nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated plat-
form for insulated duct mounting. Refer to Division Section "Duct Insulation" for
ductwork requiring insulation.
E. Manual Volume Dampers (Type VD3): Factory fabricated, multiple blade, opposed
blade, manual volume damper, designed for installation in rectangular, low velocity
ductwork, designed for installation in either the horizontal or vertical orientation.
1. Frame:
a. 16 gage galvanized steel hat channel with mitered and welded corners.
b. Provide 0.10 inch thick aluminum hat channel frame for manual volume
dampers installed in aluminum ductwork.
2. Blades:
a. Roll-formed, 18 gage galvanized steel, 8-inch maximum blade width.
b. Provide roll-formed, 0.10 inch thick aluminum blade for manual volume
dampers installed in aluminum ductwork, 8-inch maximum blade width.
3. Blade Axles:
a. 1/2" diameter square or hex plated steel.
b. 1/z" diameter square or hex Type 316 stainless steel axles for manual volume
dampers installed in aluminum ductwork.
4. Control Rod:
a. 1/2" diameter plated steel or 3/8" square plated steel. Control rod located out
of the airstream.
b. 1/2" diameter or 3/8" square Type 316 stainless steel control rod for manual
volume dampers installed in aluminum ductwork. Control rod located out
of the airstream.
5. Bearings: Nylon, molded synthetic, or self-lubricating porous bronze.
6. Finish: Mill.
7. Performance: Designed for maximum pressure differential of 2" s.p. for 48",
maximum temperature of 150 deg F, and maximum system velocity of 2,000 feet
per minute.
8. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-
inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking
nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated plat-
form for insulated duct mounting. Refer to Division Section "Duct Insulation" for
ductwork requiring insulation.
9. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-
bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multi-
ple-damper assemblies.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-6 05/13/05
ew 2. Manual volume damper blade and frame material shall match the mating duct ma-
terial. Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" and the Drawings for duct sys-
tems requiring stainless steel or aluminum construction.
3. Manual volume damper shall be designed for damper components and duct con-
nections to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Refer to Division 1.5 Section
"Metal Ducts" for sealing requirements of duct systems.
C. Manual Volume Dampers (Type VD1): Factory fabricated, single blade, manual volume
damper, designed for installation in rectangular, low velocity ductwork, designed for in-
stallation in either the horizontal or vertical orientation.
J. Frame:
a. 16 gage galvanized steel hat channel.
b. Provide 0.1.0 inch thick aluminum hat channel frame for manual volume
dampers installed in aluminum ductwork.
2. Blades:
a. Roll-formed, 18 gage galvanized steel.
b. Provide roll-formed, 0.10 inch thick aluminum blade for manual volume
dampers installed in aluminum ductwork.
J. Blade Axles:
a. 1/z" diameter square or hex plated steel.
b. 1/z" diameter square or hex Type 316 stainless steel axles for manual volume
dampers installed in aluminum ductwork.
4. Bearings: Nylon, molded synthetic, or self-lubricating porous bronze.
5. Finish: Mill.
6. Performance: Designed for maximum pressure differential of 1" s.p., maximum
temperature of 150 deg F, and maximum system velocity of 1,500 feet per minute.
7. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-
inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking
nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated plat-
form for insulated duct mounting. Refer to Division Section "Duct Insulation" for
ductwork requiring insulation.
D. Manual Volume Dampers (Type VD2): Factory fabricated, single blade, manual volume
damper, designed for installation in round, low velocity ductwork, designed for installa-
tion in either the horizontal or vertical orientation.
1. Frame:
a. 16 gage galvanized steel. Provide reinforcing beads on dampers over 18" in
diameter.
b. Provide 0.10 inch thick aluminum frame for manual volume dampers in-
stalled in aluminum ductwork.
2. Blades:
a. Roll-formed, 20 gage galvanized steel.
b. Provide roll-formed, 0.630 inch thick aluminum blade for manual volume
dampers installed in aluminum ductwork.
3. Blade Axles:
a. 3/8" diameter square or hex plated steel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15820-5 05/13/05
D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill
finish for concealed ducts and standard, I-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on ga]-
vanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
2.2 Iv1ANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manual volume
dampers by one of the following:
1. Manual Volume Dampers (Type VD1):
a. Ruskin Manufacturing - Model MD-35 (Single Blade).
b. Vent Products Co., Inc. - Model 5101.
C. American Warming and Ventilating - Model VC-8.
d. Air Balance, Inc. —Model AC-111.
e. Greenheck—Model MBD-10.
2. Manual Volume Dampers (Type VD2):
a. Ruskin Manufacturing - Model MDRS-25.
b. Vent Products Co., Inc. - Model 5321.
C. American Warming and Ventilating - Model VC-9.
d. Air Balance, Inc. —Model AC-112.
e. Greenheck—Model MBDR-50.
3. Manual Volume Dampers (Type VD3):
a. Ruskin Manufacturing—Model MD-35/OB.
b. Vent Products Co., Inc. —Model 5103.
C. American Warming and Ventilating—Model VC-21.
d. Air Balance, Inc. —Model AC-2.
e. Greenheck—Model MBD-15.
B. General: All manual volume dampers provided on the Project shall be constructed in ac-
cordance with the following:
1. Refer to Part 3 of this Section for the application of manual volume dampers re-
quired for each air delivery system.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' - 2323 15820-4 05/13/05
owl* b. Include a schedule indicating the type of flexible connector to be used on
each system.
10. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Motorized-control damper installations.
4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-cdaulper installa-
tions, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
>. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating pene-
trations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access
doors required for access to duct accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"
and NFPA 9013, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 6531A 653M
and having G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for
surfaces exposed to view.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-3 05/13/05
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers.
4. Fire Dampers:
a. Provide product data indicating the damper construction and applicable list-
ing and labeling requirements.
b. Include a schedule indicating the damper size, model number, and location
of all fire dampers provided on the project. The schedule shall include the
following data based on AMCA Publication 500 testing:
1) Pressure drop.
2) Leakage rate.
3) Maximum pressure rating.
4) Maximum velocity rating.
5. Smoke dampers.
6. Sound Attenuators:
a. Provide product data indicating the sound attenuator construction.
b. Include a schedule indicating the sound attenuator size (dimensions),
weights, location, airflow, connection sizes, air system served, and model
number of all sound attenuators provided on the project. The schedule shall
include certified test data based on ASTM E477 tests performed in a NVLAP ,
accredited laboratory for each scheduled sound attenuator. The certified
data shall include the following for each sound attenuator:
1) Dynamic insertion loss (forward or reverse flow to match air system
requirements).
2) Generated noise (forward or reverse flow to match air system require-
ments).
3) Pressure drop (forward or reverse flow to match air system require-
ments).
7. Turning vanes.
8. Access Doors:
a. Include a schedule indicating access door type, duct system application, ac-
cess door size, number of latches, and accessories. Schedule shall indicate
the type of access door coordinated with the schedules listed in Part 3 of
these specifications.
b. Provide product data indicating the access door construction for each type of
access door, clearly indicate access door construction and access door type.
9. Flexible Connectors:
a. Provide product data indicating the flexible connector construction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-2 05/13/05
' SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL,
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Volume dampers.
2. Motorized control dampers.
3. Fire dampers.
4. Smoke dampers.
5. Sound attenuators.
6. Turning vanes.
7. Duct-mounting access doors.
8. Flexible connectors.
9. Flexible ducts.
10. Duct accessory hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneu-
matic damper actuators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Pressure Relief/Intake Dampers:
a. Provide product data indicating the damper construction.
b. Include a schedule indicating the damper size, model number, and location
of all pressure relief/intake dampers provided on the project. The schedule
shall include the following data based on AMCA Publication 500 testing:
1) Pressure drop.
2) Leakage rate.
3) Maximum pressure rating.
4) Maximum velocity.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Accessories
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15820-1 05/13/05
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan op-
erational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning ma-
terials; comb and straighten fins.
6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures.
7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present. Apply
biocidal agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of
surface deposits and debris.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment,
including biocidal agents and protective coatings.
2. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
3. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.
G. Gravimetric Analysis: At discretion and expense of Owner, sections of metal duct sys-
tem, chosen randomly by Owner, may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA
vacuum test gravimetric analysis.
1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable lev-
els, system shall have passed cleanliness verification.
2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness
verification will have failed and metal duct system shall be re-cleaned and re-
verified.
H. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning must restore coil pressure drop to within 10 per-
cent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is
not known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical
residue, based on thorough visual inspection.
END OF SECTION 15815
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-16 05/13/05
3.8 CLEANING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1. Use existing service openings where possible.
2. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
3. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
4. Reseal rigid fiberglass duct systems according to NAIMA recommended practices.
5. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
B. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and re-
store to their marked position on completion.
C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with
99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or larger) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system to the outside, use filtration to contain debris re-
moved from HVAC system, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air in-
takes and other points of entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and
drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil sec-
tion, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and
dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
S. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contami-
nants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned
are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces with-
out damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit
duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deterio-
rated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-15 05/13/05
3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and
perform cleaning before air balancing.
li. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from
HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other
points of entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and
drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil sec-
tion, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and
dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contami-
nants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned
are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces with-
out damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit
duct liner to get wet.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan op-
erational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning ma-
terials; comb and straighten fins.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-14 05/13/05
For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg (500 Pa), seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches
(1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth
of failure (proof-test) load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes
or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Sec-
tion "Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage
testing and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or
section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum de-
sign operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with leakage class requirements indicated
in "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule" in Part 3 of his Section.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum al-
lowable.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-13 05/13/05
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting lay-
outs, and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and af-
terward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
L. Install all duct mounted smoke detectors, and other devices furnished by the Division 16
for mounting in the ductwork or air handling equipment.
M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings
and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts.
Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 14/2 inches (38 mm).
O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exte-
rior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire
and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestop-
ping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
P. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equip-
ment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic
Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems".
Q. All pre-fabricated duct sections shall be cleaned prior to storage on the site and be pro-
vided with protective covering on all openings to maintain the interior of the ductwork
clean and free of dust and other materials prior to installation. Field-assembled duct sec-
tions shall be cleaned during assembly and similarly protected until installation.
1. Any ductwork that is installed without complying with the protective coating re-
quirement, will require the entire duct system to be cleaned in accordance with
NADCA (National Air Duct Cleaners Association) Standard — "Cleaning of Non-
Porous Air Conveyance System Components" at no additional expense to the
Owner.
R. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches (600 mm) up-
stream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a
compatible galvanized-steel primer.
3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-
dards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-12 05/13/05
,, Pressure Press.
System Duct Material Class Sealing Leakage Test
Geometry (in W.g.) Class Class Re 'd
(System Type 7)
Exhaust from Shower Rooms RECT ASW -3 A 6 Y
(Duct Shall be aluminum until
Shower Room exhaust is mixed
by 50% with general exhaust.)
(System Type 8)
Supply Ductwork Downstream of RECT ASW +2" A 6 N
Duct Mounted Humidifiers
(System Type 9)
Isolation Room Exhaust RECT GSW -3 A 3 Y
(System Type 10)
Outside Air, Relief, and Exhaust RECT GSW +2/-2 C 24 N
Plenums
(System Type 11)
Central Sterile Exhaust RECT ASW -3 A 6 Y
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-
Bards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m) unless inter-
rupted by fittings.
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Se-
cure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300
min), with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and per-
pendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid parti-
tions unless specifically indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-11 05/13/05
F. Duct Construction System Type 10:
1. Plenums: Plenums shall be constructed in accordance with Section VI Equipment
and Casings. Plenums shall be constructed of G90 coated galvanized steel and
shall be completely sealed water-tight. All joints shall be welded or silicone
caulked.
a. Refer to Division 15 Section "Metal Casings" for plenum construction of
main intake and relief plenums serving air handling twits AHU-1 through
AHU-4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHEET METAL DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the following schedule. Pressure,
sealing, and leakage classes are as defined in SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
SHEET METAL DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Pressure Press.
System Duct Material Class Sealing Leakage Test
Geometry (in w.g.) Class Class Re
(System Type 1)
Air Handling Unit Discharge to RECT GSW +10" A 3 Y
Terminal Box
(AHU-1 thru AHU-3)
(System Type 2)
Return Ductwork RECT GSW -3" A 6 Y
( RF-1 thru RF-3)
(System Type 3)
Supply Ductwork for A/C Units RECT GSW +2" C 24 N
(System Type 4)
Return Ductwork for A/C Units RECT GSW -2" C 24 N
(System Type 5)
Supply Ductwork Downstream of RECT GSW +2" B 12 N
Terminal Boxes to Diffusers
(System Type 6)
General Exhaust (Includes Gen- RECT GSW -3 A 6 Y
eral Storage Areas, Toilet
Rooms without Showers, and
Soiled Utility Rooms)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-10 05/13/05
7. Fittings: Fittings shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC
0001' Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Section II.
a. Elbows shall be in accordance with Figure 2-2, Type RE 1 or Type RE 2.
b. Branch connections shall be 45" entry Figure 2-6.
C. Divided flow branches shall be in accordance with Figure 2-5, Type 3.
d. Offsets and transitions shall be in accordance with Figure 2-7.
S. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches
(480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10
sq. ft. (0.93 sq. in) of unbraced panel area.
E. Duct Construction System Type 9:
1. Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel, lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts ex-
posed to view.
2. Pressure Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
J. Sealing Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
4. Duct Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"/Table 1-5 and shall be
reinforced for a maximum allowable deflection for transverse joints and intermedi-
ate reinforcements not to exceed the following:
a. 0.25 inch deflection for duct widths up to 100 inches
5. Longitudinal Seams: Seams shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Figure 1-5, Pitts-
burgh Lock Seam (L-1).
6. Transverse joints: joints shall be prefabricated slide on transverse joints with gas-
ket. Slide on transverse joints shall be as manufactured by Ducmate Industries, or
an approved equal.
a. Provide a flange gasket for each joint. Flange gasket shall be a butyl rubber
gasket that complies with UL Standard 181 and UL Standard 723 testing.
7. Fittings: Fittings shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Section 11.
a. Elbows shall be in accordance with Figure 2-2, Type RE 1 or Type RE 2.
b. Branch connections shall be 45° entry Figure 2-6.
C. Divided flow branches shall be in accordance with Figure 2-5, Type 3.
d. Offsets and transitions shall be in accordance with Figure 2-7.
8. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches
(480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10
sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of unbraced panel area.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-9 05/13/05
5. Duct Reinforcement (19 inch and larger - greatest dimension): Reinforcement shall
be in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"/Table 1-5 and shall be reinforced for a maximum allowable deflec-
tion for transverse joints and intermediate reinforcements not to exceed the follow-
ing:
a. 0.25 inch deflection for duct widths up to 100 inches
b. 0.3 percent deflection of the span for duct widths over 100 inches
6. Longitudinal Seams: Seams shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Figure 1-5, Pitts-
burgh Lock Seam (L-1).
7. Transverse Joints (Up to 18 inch - greatest dimension): Joints shall be in accor-
dance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexi-
ble" - Figure 1-4.
8. Transverse Joints (19 inch and larger - greatest dimension): Joints shall be prefab-
ricated slide on transverse joints with gasket. Slide on transverse joints shall be as
manufactured by Ducmate Industries, or an approved equal.
a. Provide a flange gasket for each joint. Flange gasket shall be a butyl rubber
gasket that complies with UL Standard 181 and UL Standard 723 testing.
9. Fittings: Fittings shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Section Il.
a. Elbows shall be in accordance with Figure 2-2, Type RE 1 or Type RE 2.
b. Branch connections shall be 45° entry Figure 2-6.
C. Divided flow branches shall be in accordance with Figure 2-5, Type 3.
d. Offsets and transitions shall be in accordance with Figure 2-7.
10. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches
(480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10
sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of unbraced panel area.
D. Duct Construction System Type 8:
1. Materials: Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Tem-
per H14, sheet form with mill finish. Aluminum gage thickness, reinforcement and
dimension adjustments shall be in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Tables 1-21, 1-22, and 1-23.
2. Pressure Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
3. Sealing Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
4. Duct Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Table 1-5.
5. Longitudinal Seams: Seams shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Figure 1-5.
6. Transverse joints: joints shall be in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Figure 1-4.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-8 05/13/05
9. Fittings: Fittings shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Section II.
a. Elbows shall be in accordance with Figure 2-2, Type RE l or Type RE 2.
b. Branch connections shall be 45° entry Figure 2-6.
C. Divided flow branches shall be in accordance with Figure 2-5, Type 3.
d. Offsets and transitions shall be in accordance with Figure 2-7.
10. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches
(480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10
sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of unbraced panel area.
B. Duct Construction System Type 3, Type 4, and Type 5:
1. Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel, lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 6531/1,
G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts ex-
posed to view.
2. Pressure Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
3. Sealing Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
4. Duct Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Table 1-5.
5. Longitudinal Seams: Seams shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Figure 1-5.
6. Transverse joints: Joints shall be in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Figure 1-4.
7. Fittings: Fittings shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Section 11.
a. Elbows shall be in accordance with Figure 2-2, Type RE 1 or Type RE 2.
b. Branch connections shall be 45° entry Figure 2-6.
C. Divided flow branches shall be in accordance with Figure 2-5, Type 3.
d. Offsets and transitions shall be in accordance with Figure 2-7.
8. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches
(480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10
sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of unbraced panel area.
C. Duct Construction System Type 7 and Type 11:
1. Materials: Aluminum Sheets: ASTM. B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Tem-
per H14, sheet form with mill finish. Aluminum gage thickness, reinforcement and
dimension adjustments shall be in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Tables 1-21, 1-22, and 1-23.
2. Pressure Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
3. Sealing Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
4. Duct Reinforcement (Up to 18 inch - greatest dimension): Reinforcement shall be
in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible"/Table 1-5.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-7 05/13/05
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces
painted with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; com-
patible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
J. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Duct Construction System Type 1, Type 2, and Type 6:
1. Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel, lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts ex-
posed to view.
2. Pressure Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
3. Sealing Class: Refer to "Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule".
4. Duct Reinforcement (Up to 18 inch - greatest dimension): Reinforcement shall be
in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible"/Table 1-5.
5. Duct Reinforcement (19 inch and larger - greatest dimension): Reinforcement shall
be in accordance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"/Table 1-5 and shall be reinforced for a maximum allowable deflec-
tion for transverse joints and intermediate reinforcements not to exceed the follow-
ing:
a. 0.25 inch deflection for duct widths up to 100 inches
b. 0.3 percent deflection of the span for duct widths over 100 inches
6. Longitudinal Seams: Seams shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA -
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" - Figure 1-5, Pitts-
burgh Lock Seam (L-1).
7. Transverse Joints (Up to 18 inch - greatest dimension): Joints shall be in accor-
dance with SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexi-
ble" - Figure 1-4.
8. Transverse Joints (19 inch and larger - greatest dimension): joints shall be prefab-
ricated slide on transverse joints with gasket. Slide on transverse joints shall be as
manufactured by Ducmate Industries, or an approved equal.
a. Provide a flange gasket for each joint. Flange gasket shall be a butyl rubber
gasket that complies with UL Standard 181 and UL Standard 723 testing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-6 05/13/05
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, and having a No. 2D finish for con-
cealed ducts.
E. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill
finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on gal-
vanized sheet metal ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of ad-
hesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips
and mastics.
B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light
when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
C. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polym-
erized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
D. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant comply-
ing with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or
for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-
aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-
dards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod di-
ameters.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-5 05/13/05
tion period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component
materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper mairn-
tained through fabrication and installation.
D. All pre-fabricated duct sections shall be cleaned prior to storage on the site and be pro-
vided with protective metal or polyethylene end caps on all openings to maintain the in-
terior of the ductwork clean and free of dust and other materials prior to installation.
field-assembled duct sections shall be cleaned during assembly and similarly protected
until installation.
1. Any ductwork that is not properly protected and cleaned in accordance with sub-
paragraph "D", will require the entire supply, return, and/or exhaust duct system
to be cleaned in accordance with NADCA (National Air Duct Cleaners Associa-
tion) Standard — "Cleaning of Non-Porous Air Conveyance System Components"
at no additional expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 6531A 653M
and having G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for
surfaces exposed to view.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with
oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-4 05/13/05
1. Prepare and submit a schedule for duct system testing indicating specific dates and
procedures. The Owner and Architect shall be notified a minimum of two (2)
weeks before testing is performed. Coordinate schedule with Section 15990 -
"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing".
2. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with per-
formance requirements.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and in-
stalled accessories and devices.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DIA, "Structural Weld-
ing Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--
Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
C. Mockups:
1. Before installing duct systems, build mockups of each duct system representing
pressure classes higher than 2-inch wg (500 Pa). Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, and
include each of the following features and fittings:
a. Five transverse joints.
b. One access door(s).
C. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.
e. Perform tests specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify
mockup construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve
specified minimum acceptable results.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bun-
dles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expira-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15815-3 05/13/05
1. Duct fabrication standards indicating metal gauges, reinforcing, joint construction,
gaskets, and methods of fabrication for each pressure classification and type of sys-
tem.
2. Duct sealing materials, including material safety data sheets for each product.
B. Shop Drawings: CAD-generated and drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:50) scale. Show
fabrication and installation details for metal ducts. Submit sheet metal fabrication draw-
ings after all coordination with specialty trades is completed. Drawings shall indicate the
following:
1. Definition: Sheet Metal fabrication drawings are the installation shop drawings
normally prepared by the installing sheet metal sub-contractor.
2. Prepare sheet metal fabrication drawings in accordance with the requirements for
coordination drawings as specified in Division 1 Section "Special Provisions" and
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
3. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, com-
ponents, and attachments to other work.
4. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
5. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
6. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
7. Duct fittings, transitions, and takeoffs.
8. Reinforcement and spacing.
9. Seam and joint construction.
10. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
11. Equipment including terminal boxes, humidifiers, coils, diffusers, grilles, fans, air
handling units, air flow stations, and sound attenuators.
12. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
13. Volume, fire, smoke, and automatic control dampers.
14. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibra-
tion isolation, and seismic restraints.
15. Duct smoke detectors.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to
dampers and other operating devices.
4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Submit the following duct system schedule for testing on all systems listed in Part 3 of
this Section:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-2 05/13/05
AW
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2500
Pa). Metal ducts include the following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall, round,and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for
mechanical equipment.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and
-distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configu-
ration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany
requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will
provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Ducts
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15815-1 05/13/05
J.5 CLEANING
took A. After installing panels, inspect radiant heating panels for damage to finish. Remove
burrs, paint splatters and other spots, and dirt. Replace radiant panels that have dam-
aged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain radiant heating panels.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
J. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15769
low
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Radiant Heating Panels
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15769-5 05/13/05
A. Install radiant heating panels as indicated, to comply with manufacturer's written in-
structions.
B. Installation of radiant panels shall not begin until exterior glazing is completed, all exte-
rior openings have been made weather-tight, roof has been made weather-tight, and all
concrete and plastering work has thoroughly cured.
C. Install radiant heating panels level and plumb.
D. Hang or support radiant heating panels according to Division '15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
1. Hangers shall be installed not over 4 feet on center.
2. Panels shall be suspended from the structure as indicated on the Drawings.
E. Panels shall be trimmed to run wall to wall to minimize joints. Ensure adequate expan-
sion allowance while maintaining panel end coverage by architectural moldings. In all
cases the fluting on the abutting panel shall be aligned. Manufacturer shall furnish all
special tools required for installation or modification of the panel. Inactive filler panels
will be permitted only where indicated on the Drawings.
F. Install insulation above all active radiant heating panels.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve, union, and pipe reducer/increaser at
each radiant panel supply connection. Install shutoff valve, union, balancing valve, and
pipe reducer/increaser at each radiant panel return connection.
C. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.
D. Install all interconnecting tubing between all panels.
E. Clean and flush all radiant panel piping and interconnecting tubing in accordance with
Division 15 Sections - "Hydronic Piping" and "HVAC Water Treatment".
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. Testing: All interconnecting piping shall be pressure tested. Pressure test accord-
ing to Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping".
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Radiant Heating Panels
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15769-4 05/13/05
1. Copper Coil NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
2. Nominal Size: Width, length as indicated on Drawings.
3. Minimum Heating Output: Capacities as indicated on Drawings.
4. Circuiting: As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Fabrication: Radiant panels shall be manufactured of extruded aluminum. Panel face
configuration shall be fluted. The panel shall consist of interlocking extruded sections
with steel channel cross braces attached by steel assembly clips. Each section shall have
at least one integral heat saddle with a 0.50 inch copper tube mechanically reformed into
the heat saddle such that the tube is in intimate engagement. A non-hardening heat con-
ductive paste shall be applied between the copper tube and the aluminum extrusion or a
top cap strip mechanically fastened into the tube saddle. The ends of the tubes shall be
sized to accept type L or M soft copper tubing without the need for fittings.
C. Finish: 2 coats, polyester finish with 70 to 80 percent light-reflection value.
1. Color: Standard White.
D. Insulation Above Panels: 1-inch thick, 3/4-pcf density, fiberglass pads.
E. Panel Weight: No more than 1.5 lb/sq. ft. (7.34 kg/sq. m) when filled with water.
F. Interconnecting Tubing: Provide 360 degree pigtail interconnects and U-bends 0.500 inch
inside diameter as required to interconnect panels.
G. Hold Down Clips: Provide hold down clips installed at wall channels and T-bars to se-
cure the panel and provide a flat even appearance.
H. Recessed Mounting Frame: Furnish a recessed mounting frame suitable for installation
in a plaster or gypsum wallboard ceiling where radiant ceiling panels are indicated to be
installed in a plaster or gypsum wallboard ceiling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive radiant heating panels for compliance with requirements for in-
stallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for hot-water piping connections to verify actual locations before
radiant heating panel installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Radiant Heating Panels
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15769-3 05/13/05
F. Maintenance Data: For radiant heating panels to include in maintenance manuals speci- -00%hl
fied in Division 1 and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
Include data for the following:
1. Detailed manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing radiant heat-
ing panels similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful
in-service performance.
1.5 C:OO.RDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of radiant heating panels and suspension system com-
ponents with the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans, Room Finish Schedule, Structural
Drawings, Mechanical Drawings, Electrical Drawings, Plumbing Drawings, and Fire Pro-
tection Drawings. Coordinate construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components,
and partition assemblies.
1. Inform Architect of all conflicts between the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans,
Room Finish Schedule, and the Mechanical Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide radiant heating panels
by one of the following:
1. Hydronic Radiant Heating Panels:
a. Airtex, ENGINEERED AIR; Desoto, Kansas.
b. Sun-El Corp.; Latrobe, Pennsylvania.
C. Shelley Radiant Ceiling Co.; Northfield, Illinois.
2.2 HYDRONIC PANELS
A. Description: Linear extruded-aluminum radiant heating panel with copper water coil,
mechanically attached to backside, suitable for lay-in installation flush with T-bar ceiling
grid. Panels shall be designed to allow field modifications such as shortening overall
length, and mitering. Panels shall have the following characteristics:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Radiant Heating Panels
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V - 2323 15769-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15769 - RADIANT HEATING PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hydronic radiant heating panels for space-heating applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, specialties, and accessories for each radiant panel
type indicated on Drawings. Submit data indicating the capacity of radiant heating pan-
els per square foot and the pressure drop per linear foot.
B. Shop Drawings: Include 1/8 inch scale plans, elevations, sections, details, and attach-
ments to other Work. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection. Detail connections and indicate all circuiting and interconnec-
tion between panels.
C. Coordination Drawings: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section - "Spe-
cial Provisions", Division 1S Section - "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods", and
Division 1S Section - "Hydronic Piping" for general Coordination Drawing requirements
related to radiant heating panels. Coordination Drawings shall show the following:
1. Location, size, and interconnecting piping for all radiant panels required on the
Project.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
4. Size and location of access doors and access panels for acoustical tile and gypsum
walls and ceilings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed radiant heating panel type and for each
color and finish required.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Radiant Heating Panels
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15769-1 05/13/05
2. Install a union and low-pressure float and thermostatic steam trap assembly in con-
densate return piping from unit heaters.
D. Install piping adjacent to unit heaters to allow service and maintenance.
E. Ground equipment.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor ro-
tation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or re-
placements are made.
3.S CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 15767
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Propeller Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15767-5 05/13/05
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL low"
A. Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for in-
stallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations be-
fore propeller unit heater installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.
B. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators
(rubber hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights
to match lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Unless otherwise indicated for hot water unit heaters:
1. Install shutoff ball valve, strainer, union, and drain in hot water supply piping to
unit heaters.
2. Install shutoff ball valve, manual air vent, balancing valve, and union in hot water
return piping from unit heaters.
C. Unless otherwise indicated for steam unit heaters:
1. Install shutoff gate valve, strainer, and union, in steam supply piping to unit heat-
ers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Propeller Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15767-4 05/13/05
2.4 COILS
owlk A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, 0.031-inch (0.78-mm) wall thickness, with mechanically
bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum
working pressure of 200 psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering water temperature of
325 deg F (163 deg C), with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 375 psig (2690 kPa) un-
derwater.
B. Steam Coil: Copper tube, 0.031-inch (0.78-mm) wall thickness, with mechanically
bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum
working pressure of 75 psig (520 kPa).
2.5 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS
A. Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in
magnesium-oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high-mass steel or corrosion-
resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch (4 mm). Element ends shall
be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed S50 deg F (288
deg C) at any point during normal operation.
1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and
limit controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
2.6 FAN
A. Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor, with fan guard.
2.7 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 hp and Smaller: Shaded-pole or permanent-split capacitor, motor with inte-
gral thermal-overload protection.
B. Motors, 3/4 hp and Larger: Totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Horizontal Configuration: Adjustable louver fin diffuser.
2.9 CONTROLS
A. Control Devices for Hot Water and Steam Unit Heaters:
1. Unit-mounted fan-speed switch and wall-mounting thermostat.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Propeller Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15767-3 05/13/05
I. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, and integral controls. Awk
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of propeller unit heaters and suspension system com-
ponents with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, includ-
ing light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
1. Coordination Drawings: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section
"Special Provisions" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for Coordination Drawing requirements related to propeller unit heat-
ers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide propeller type hot wa-
ter unit heaters by one of the following:
1. Airtherm Manufacturing Company.
2. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
3. Sterling Radiator Division/Mestek, Inc.
4. McQuay International.
2.2 UNIT HEATERS
A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge
configuration with horizontal, adjustable louvers in blow-through configuration.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Casing: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.
B. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and manu-
facturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater
before shipping. Awk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Propeller Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15767-2 05/13/05
"* SECTION 15767 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS
PART ] - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Submit a schedule showing the following information for each propeller unit heater
provided:
a. Drawing designation (Item No.).
b. Room location.
C. Model number and discharge configuration.
d. shipping, installed, and operating weights.
e. Fan CFM, motor horsepower, motor speed, motor voltage, and phase.
f. Air entering and leaving conditions.
g. Hot Water Coils: Coil capacity (MBH), number of rows, air pressure drop,
water pressure drop, GPM, water entering and leaving temperatures.
h. Steam Coils: Coil capacity (MBH), number of rows, air pressure drop, and
steam inlet pressure.
i. Electric Resistance Heating Elements: Coil capacity (MBH and kW), num-
ber stages, air pressure drop, voltage, and phase.
j. Accessories and specialties included for each propeller unit heater.
C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
D. Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals speci-
fied in Division 1. Include the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Propeller Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15767-1 05/13/05
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor ro-
tation and unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or re-
placements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean cabinet unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Install new filters in each cabinet unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Comple-
tion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15766
AdWk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cabinet Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15766-6 05/13/05
A. Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance with requirements for in-
stallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations be-
fore cabinet unit heater installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinet unit heaters level and plumb.
B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators
(rubber,hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Unless otherwise indicated for hot water cabinet unit heaters:
1. Install shutoff ball valve, strainer, union, and drain in hot water supply piping to
cabinet unit heaters.
2. Install shutoff ball valve, balancing valve, union, control valve, union and manual
air vent in hot water return piping from cabinet unit heaters.
C. Unless otherwise indicated for steam unit heaters:
1. Install shutoff gate valve, strainer, reducer, union, control valve, union, increaser,
and vacuum breaker in steam supply piping to unit heaters.
2. Install a union and low-pressure float and thermostatic steam trap assembly in
condensate return piping from cabinet unit heaters.
D. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
E. Ground equipment.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cabinet Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15766-5 05/13/05
2.5 FAN .0"k
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galva-
nized steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to motor.
2.6 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors: Shaded-pole or permanent-split capacitor, multi-speed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.
1. Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Disconnect switch for all cabinet unit heaters.
B. Steel sub-base for all floor mounted units, height as indicated.
C. Extended end pockets on vertical discharge units where required to install piping and
piping accessories.
D. Duct collar on the inlet and/or outlet for all ducted cabinet unit heaters.
E. Steel recessing flanges for all recessed and semi-recessed cabinet unit heaters. Recessing
flanges shall be suitable for recessing into ceiling or wall.
F. Filters: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, glass-fiber media in fiberboard frame.
2.8 CONTROLS
A. Control Devices:
1. Unit-mounted fan-speed switch.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test cabinet unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cabinet Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15766-4 05/13/05
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hot water cabinet unit
heaters by one of the following:
1. Airtherm Manufacturing Company.
2. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
3. Airtherm Manufacturing Company.
4. Sterling Radiator Division/Mestek, Inc.
5. McQuay International.
2.2 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Description: An assembly including filter, chassis, coil, fan, and motor in blow-through
configuration with heating coil.
B. Configuration: Cabinet unit heaters shall be surface-mounted, semi-recessed, or recessed
cabinet with mounting arrangement as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Air inlet and outlet configuration shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.
B. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch (25-mm) duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 and
attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a maximum flame-
spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
C. Cabinet: Removable 16-gage galvanized steel front panel, 18 gage galvanized steel top,
end and back panels. Panels shall be fastened with tamperproof fasteners and key-
operated access door.
D. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect, applied to factory-
assembled and -tested cabinet unit heater before shipping.
2.4 COILS
A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no
closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a mini-
mum working pressure of 300 psig (2068 kPa) and a maximum entering water tempera-
ture of 275 deg F (135 deg C), with manual air vent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cabinet Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15766-3 05/13/05
4. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed ,emu,
units.
5. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of col-
ors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
F. Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls,
and filters.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION ,
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cabinet unit heaters and suspension system compo-
nents with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by theirs, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition as-
semblies.
1. Coordination Drawings: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section
"Special Provisions" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for Coordination Drawing requirements related to cabinet unit heaters.
2. Coordinate recessed, semi-recessed, and surface mounted cabinet unit heaters with
wall and ceiling types.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one (1) spare filter for each filter installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cabinet Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15766-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15766 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cabinet unit heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
+, 2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Submit a schedule showing the following information for each cabinet unit heater
provided:
a. Drawing designation (Item No.).
b. Room location.
C. Model number and discharge configuration.
d. Shipping, installed, and operating weights.
e. Fan CFM, motor horsepower, motor speed, motor voltage, and phase.
f. Air entering and leaving conditions.
g. Hot Water Coils: Coil capacity (MBH), number of rows, air pressure drop,
water pressure drop, GPM, water entering and leaving temperatures.
h. Accessories, specialties, and controls included for each cabinet unit heater.
C. Coordination Drawings: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Spe-
cial Provisions" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
Coordination Drawing requirements related to cabinet unit heaters. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
ROW
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cabinet Unit Heaters
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15766-1 05/13/05
2. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove malfunc-
tioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
J. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain humidifiers.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equuipmcnt and sched-
ules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15752
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Humidifiers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15752-4 05/13/05
A. Examine ducts and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation toler-
ances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before humidifier installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 HUMIDIFIER INSTALLATION
A. Install with required clearance for service and maintenance.
B. Install humidifiers with a minimum of 5 feet of straight ductwork downstream of disper-
sion tube before any branch duct take-off, diffuser, elbow, volume damper, or other ob-
ject.
C. Seal humidifier dispersion-tube duct penetrations with flange.
D. Install drip leg upstream from steam trap, a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) for proper
operation of trap.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
** A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer in humidifier supply line.
B. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory
mounted.
C. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Humidifiers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15752-3 05/13/05
I. Jacketed, Duct Mounted, Steam-Injection Humidifiers:
a. Armstrong International, Inc. — 1000 Series.
b. Dri-Steem Humidifier Co. —CS Series.
2.2 STEAM-INJECTION HUMIDIFIERS
A. Description: Steam valve, separator, and dispersion tube extending across entire width
of duct and equipped with mounting brackets for both ends of tube.
B. Dispersion Tube: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel, jacketed; insulated with 1/2-
inch (13-mm) fiberglass and stainless-steel jacket.
C. Control Valve: Stainless steel body and internal trim, valve shall have modified linear
flow charateristics, normally closed valve seat and stem matched to deliver required
steam flow. Valve shall provide full and accurate modulation of steam flow over the en-
tire stroke of the valve.
1. Actuator: Electric actuator, self-contained, modulating, linear motor, actuator
with 60-second full travel, with transformer and single-throw, double-pole con-
tacts.
D. Steam Separator: Separating chamber shall be designed to remove water droplets and
particulate matter larger than three microns when humidifier is operating at maximum
capacity.
1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel.
E. Steam Trap: Inverted-bucket type, sized for maximum condensate flow.
1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel body and all internal parts shall be stainless
steel.
F. Steam Strainer: Inlet Y-type steam strainer located before steam control valve.
1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel body and internal parts.
G. Optional Accessories: Include the following:
1. Temperature switch to prevent cold operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Humidifiers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15752-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15752 - HUMIDIFIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following type[s] of humidifiers:
1. Steam-injection humidifiers for application on ducted HVAC systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating weights, furnished specialties, and ac-
cessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of humidifiers. Include piping de-
tails, plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and dispersion tubes.
C. Coordination Drawings: Detail humidifiers and adjacent equipment. Show support lo-
cations, type of support, weight on each support, and required clearances.
D. Maintenance Data: For humidifiers to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location and installation of humidifiers in ducts. Revise locations and eleva-
tions to suit field conditions and to ensure proper humidifier operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Humidifiers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15752-1 05/13/05
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-conditioning units. Refer to Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15734
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-8 05/13/05
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
2. After installing air-conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that air-conditioning units are installed and connected according to
manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. After startup service and performance test, change filters.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this
purpose, without additional cost.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-7 05/13/05
temperature control modules, time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-temperature w
thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounting control panel with start-stop switch, and
adjustable temperature set point.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air-conditioning units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended
clearances.
B. Install remote glycol cooler on rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
C. Install glycol pump package on rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hanger, with
vertical-limit stop, having 1-inch (25-mm) deflection. Vibration-control devices and
installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Condenser-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Provide shutoff valves in water inlet and outlet piping on water-
cooled units.
D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
"Refrigerant Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.
E. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16
Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.
F. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-6 05/13/05
B. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of
cabinet, fan, filters, and controls; for vertical floor mounting in upflow configuration.
C. Cabinet: Welded tubular-steel frame with removable steel panels with baked-enamel
finish, insulated with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick duct liner.
D. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, with adjustable V-belt drive.
1. Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
a. Noise Rating: Quiet.
E. Compressor: Hermetic, with oil strainer, internal motor overload protection, resilient
suspension system, and crankcase heater.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure switch,
thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, sight glass with moisture
indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of refrigerant.
2. Refrigerant: R-22.
F. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into
aluminum fins, with two circuits, each with solenoid valve. Mount coil assembly over
stainless-steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-
motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
' G. Water-Cooled Condenser: Brazed-plate type with liquid-line stop valve and head-
pressure-actuated, water-regulating valve.
H. Glycol Cooling Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with three-
way control valve.
I. Filter: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, disposable, glass-fiber media with 20 percent dust-spot
efficiency.
J. Remote Glycol Cooler: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-tube aluminum-fin coil,
direct-drive propeller fan with fan guards, and single-phase motors with internal
overload protection.
K. Glycol Pump Package: Weatherproof and vented enclosure of enameled, galvanized steel
on structural base frame containing centrifugal pump with mechanical seal.
1. Piping: Interconnecting piping, from suction to discharge, with shutoff valves,
flow switches, unions, and pressurized expansion tank with air purge vent and
system-charging connection.
L. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor,
compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-5 05/13/05
I. Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
a. Noise Rating: Quiet.
E. Compressor: Hermetic, with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, and internal motor
overload protection.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure switch,
thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, sight glass with moisture
indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of refrigerant.
2. Refrigerant: R-22type.
F. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into
aluminum fins. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan having a condensate
pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
G. Water-Cooled Condenser: Coaxial, counterflow, tube-in-tube type with liquid-line stop
valve and head-pressure-actuated, water-regulating valve.
H. Filter: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, disposable, glass-fiber media.
I. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor,
compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state
temperature control modules.
J. Remote Glycol Cooler: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-tube aluminum-fin coil,
multiple direct-drive propeller fans with fan guards, and single-phase motors with
internal overload protection, integral electric control panel, and disconnect switch.
Control capacity by cycling fans.
K. Glycol Pump Package: A structural base frame containing two centrifugal pumps with
mechanical seals; electrical-control cabinet with starters, disconnect switch, lead-lag
switch, automatic switchover, and alarm light.
1. Piping: Interconnecting piping, from suction to discharge, with shutoff valves,
flow switches, check valves in pump discharge, unions, and pressurized expansion
tank with air purge vent and system-charging connection.
2.2 FLOOR-MOUNTING UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Liebert Corporation.
2. Stulz Investment Corp. of America.
3. Data Aire Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote Awk
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-4 05/13/05
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years
from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty Period for Humidifiers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three)-ears
from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three
years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.
2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING-MOUNTING UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Liebert Corporation.
2. Stulz Investment Corp. of America.
3. Data Aire Inc.
B. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of
cabinet, fan, filters, and controls; for horizontal ceiling mounting.
C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked-enamel finish, insulated with 1/2-inch- (15-mm-)
thick duct liner.
D. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved,centrifugal, and directly driven by two-speed motor.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-3 05/13/05
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-conditioning units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
G. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EA 4: Manufacturers' product data for refrigerants, including printed
statement that refrigerants are free of HCFCs.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings."
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shell to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
F. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-conditioning units and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by theirs, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of air-conditioning units with computer-room access flooring
Installer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15736 —SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS WITH REMOTE FLUID
COOLER
PART 7 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of air-conditioning units:
1. Ceiling-mounting units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that air-
conditioning units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units With Remote
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1 Fluid Cooler
Package `E' - 2323 15736-1 05/13/05
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that heat exchangers are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
B. Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining heat exchangers.
2. Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Division 1
Section "Submittals and Substitutions", in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout",
and Division 15 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15710
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Heat Exchangers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15710-4 05/13/05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for struc-
tural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat ex-
changers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 HEAT EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install shell-and-tube heat exchangers on floor mounted angle-iron support frame in ac-
cordance with Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" and Division IS Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls". Secure heat exchanger saddle supports to
angle-iron frame.
C. Install heat exchanger on saddle supports with a U-bracket bolted to saddle supports.
Install with provisions to drain shell.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. Install
piping connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.
C. Install piping with threaded or flanged connections at heat exchangers.
1. Install unions in piping at all threaded connections.
D. Install shutoff valves at heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
E. Install relief valves on heat exchanger heated-fluid connection.
F. Install vacuum breaker at heat exchanger steam inlet connection.
G. Install thermometer wells, thermometers, and automatic temperature control wells at
heat exchanger inlet and outlet (heated fluid) connections.
H. Install steam control valve assemblies and steam condensate trap assemblies as indicated
on the Drawings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Heat Exchangers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15710-3 05/13/05
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide shell and tube heat 0%,
exchangers by one of the following:
1. Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchangers:
a. ITT Fluid Handling; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
b. Taco, Inc.
C. Amtrol, Inc.
d. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
e. Patterson-Kelley Co.; Div. of Harsco Corp.
2.2 CONFIGURATION AND RATINGS
A. Maximum Temperature: 375 deg F (190 deg Q.
B. Maximum Shell Pressure: 150 psig (1551 kPa).
C. Maximum Tube Pressure: 150 prig (2068 kPa).
D. Heat Exchanger Type: Heating and heated medium shall be as indicated on the Draw-
ings.
E. Configuration: Number of passes shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Heat Exchanger Capacity Computation: Heat exchanger surfaces shall be computed
based upon appropriate fouling factors for fluid, temperature, and tube velocity as rec-
ommended by the Standards of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association, except
when specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Shell and Head Materials: Steel shell and cast-iron head.
B. Tube and Tube Sheet Materials: Seamless, 3/4-inch (20-mm) OD copper tubes with steel
tube sheets.
C. Piping Connections: Flanged shell and head port connections for all piping 3" and larger
and threaded shell and head ports for all piping 2 1/z" and smaller.
1. Provide threaded drain connection and threaded vent connection.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Cradle: Provide steel or cast-iron mounting cradle.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Heat Exchangers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15710-2 05/13/05
AW
SECTION 15710 - HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes shell-and-tube heat exchangers for HVAC applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Submittals and Sub-
stitutions" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
B. Product Data: Include rated capacities and pressure drop; shipping, installed, and oper-
ating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each heat exchanger. Indicate
Aomll dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
C. Coordination Drawings: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Spe-
cial Provisions" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
Coordination Drawing requirements related to heat exchangers.
D. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of heat exchanger and troubleshooting
maintenance guide to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Di-
vision 15 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Heat Exchangers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15710-1 05/13/05
5. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.
B. Obtain wet-bulb, tower-size, and performance selection tables from manufacturer.
C. Lubricate bearings on fans and shaft as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Ensure fan wheels rotate in correct direction without vibration or binding.
E. Start cooling-tower and condenser-water pumps. Follow manufacturers written starting
procedures.
F. Check water level in tower basin.
G. Check operation of tower basin, makeup line, and controlling device.
H. Check operation of basin immersion heater and control thermostat.
I. Ensure system chemical treatment is working, and measure chemical treatment levels.
Check operation of tower basin automatic blow-down and controlling device.
J. Verify that tower discharge is not recirculating into air intakes.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting up
and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining cooling towers.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15640
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Cooling Towers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15640-7 05/13/05
1. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.
2. Pitch piping down to drain into sump.
3. Connect overflow drain and bleed lines to sanitary sewage system.
4. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 15
Section "Water Distribution Piping." Connect to water-level control with shutoff
valve and union or flange at each connection.
5. Condenser-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 15
Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return cooling-tower
connections as shown on cooling tower piping schematics.
B. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set and balance condenser-water flow to each tower inlet.
B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes
including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions and do the following:
1. Clean entire unit and wash basins.
2. Ensure accessories are properly installed.
3. Check makeup water float.
4. Check clearances for airflow and for tower servicing. Aftk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Cooling Towers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15640-6 05/13/05
D. Plenum walkways: Provide a galvanized steel internal plenum walkway to prevent
maintenance workers from having to stand in cooling tower collection basin to perform
routine maintenace.
E. Fan Access Platforms: Provide an internal galvanized steel fan access platform and ladder
to perform routine maintenance on cooling tower fan.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling towers according to CTI 201.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine proposed route of moving cooling towers into place and verify that it is free of
interferences.
B. Examine elements and surfaces to support cooling tower.
C. Verify piping and wiring roughing-in locations.
D. Verify suitability of branch-circuit wiring.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cooling towers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install cooling towers level and plumb, and fasten to supporting structure with proper
seismic restraints.
C. Maintain recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Install cooling towers and their support structures to withstand the effects of wind loads
and seismic events according to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by cooling tower manufacturer that
are not factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Cooling Towers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15640-5 05/13/05
I. Extended Lube Line; A neoprene and galvanized steel oil line shall extend from the
gear reducers to a point on the fan deck of each cell. The oil level in the gear
reducer shall be readable at that point by means of a dip stick.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "HVAC Motors" for general requirements for factory-
installed motors.
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled, energy efficient.
C. Motor Speed: Single speed, suitable for variable-speed drive.
2.4 BASIN HEATERS
A. Basin-Heater Capacity: Maintain basin water temperature at 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) when
ambient temperature is 9.0 deg F and wind velocity is 10 mph (16 km/h).
B. Heater Type: Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low-water cutout switch,
enclosed in weatherproof housing suitable for field wiring.
2.5 ACCESS
A. Handrails: The top of the tower shall be equipped with a sturdy handrail, complete with
kneerail and toeboard, designed according to OSHA guidelines. Handrails and kneerails
shall consist of 1.66" (42mm) O.D. x 15 gauge galvanized structural tubing, the handrail
of which shall be capable of withstanding a 200 pound (890N) concentrated live load in
any direction. Posts are 2" x 2" (51mm x 51mm) square structrual tubing and shall be
spaced on centers of 8'-0" (2438mm) or less
B. Ladders and Safety Cages: One 1'-6" (457mm) wide aluminum ladder with 3"(76mm) I-
beam side rails and 1.25" (32mm) diameter rungs shall be permanently attached to the
outer endwall casings of the two-cell tower, rising from the base of the tower to the top
of the handrail. A heavy gauge galvanized steel safety cage shall surround each ladder,
extending from a point approximately T-0" (2.134m) above the foot of the ladder to the
top of the handrail surrounding the fan deck. Provide a ladder extension for connection
to the foot of each ladder attached to the tower casing. This extension shall be long
enough to rise from the access level to the base of the tower. The installing contractor
shall be responsible for cutting the ladder to length; attaching it to the foot of the tower
ladder; and anchoring it at its base. The ladder shall be mounted on cooling tower CT-1.
C. Access doors: A 48" (1219 mm) high x 30" (762 mm) wide galvanized steel access door
shall be located on both endwalls for entry into the cold water basin and fan plenum
area. Access doors shall be operable from inside as well as outside the tower.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Cooling Towers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15640-4 05/13/05
4. The complete mechanical equipment assembly for each cell shall be supported by a
rigid, welded, hot dip galvanized steel structural support that resists misalignment
between the motor and the gear reducer.
C. Hot-Water Distribution System: Evenly distributes water over fill material.
I Hot-Water Basin: Galvanized steel basin material complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G210 (Z600) coating designation; gravity-feed nozzles,
and basin covers.
D. Hot-Water-Basin Control Valves: Manufacturers standard regulating valves arranged to
balance flow to each distribution basin and shut flow off during servicing.
E. Casing: Galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G210 (2600) coating
designation.
1. Fasteners: Corrosion resistance equal to or better than the materials being
fastened.
2. Joints: Sealed watertight.
3. Welded Connections: Continuous and watertight.
4. Rigging Supports: For handling cooling towers at construction site.
F. Collecting Basin: Stainless steel.
1. Removable strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices.
2. Overflow connection.
3. Makeup,water connection.
4. Drain Connection: Stainless steel side outlet sump with anti-vortex plate.
S. Provide Equalizer Flume Weir Gates for each tower with removable, gasketed,
isolation plates shipped loose to be stored by owner.
G. Fill Material: 15 mil thick PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with
maximum flame-spread rating of five according to ASTM E 84; and fabricated, formed,
and installed by manufacturer to ensure that water breaks up into droplets.
H. Drift-Eliminator: PVC, triple-pass, and shall limit drift losses to no more than 0.005% of
the design GPM flow rate. Eliminator shall have a maximum flame-spread rating of five
according to ASTM E 84
I. Louver Material: PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum
flame-spread rating of five according to ASTM E 84. Louvers shall be integral part of
each fill sheet.
J. Water-Level Control: Electric float switch; 5 point electric level control with high and
low level alarm points and solenoid-operated, makeup water valve .
K. Accessories: Furnish each cooling tower with the following accessories.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Cooling Towers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15640-3 05/13/05
deficiency, the owner chooses to conduct an on-site thermal performance test under the
supervision of a qualified, disinterested third party in accordance with CTI or ASME
standards during the first year of operation; and if the tower fails to perform within the
limits of test tolerance; then the cooling tower manufacturer will pay for the cost of the
test and will make such corrections as are appropriate and agreeable to the owner to
compensate for the performance deficiency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of structural steel equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver cooling tower as a factory-assembled unit with protective crating and covering.
B. Rig units for unloading and moving as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Induced-Draft, Cross-Flow Cooling Towers:
a. Marley Cooling Tower Co.
b. Baltimore Aircoil Co.
2.2 INDUCED-DRAFT, CROSS-FLOW COOLING TOWERS
A. Description: Induced-draft, cross-flow cooling tower that is factory fabricated and
assembled.
B. Fan: Cast aluminum, propeller.
1. Drive: Gear, with speed reducer. Speed reducers employing pulleys and belts will
not be accepted.
2. Bearings: Self-aligning ball bearings or bronze sleeve bearings.
3. Vibration Cutout Switch: De-energize fan motors if excessive vibration occurs.
Awk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Cooling Towers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15640-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15640 - PACKAGED COOLING TOWERS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes induced-draft, crossflow-type, factory-assembled, film-filled,
industrial-duty, galvanized steel cooling towers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan performance, rating curves
with selected points indicated, startup instructions, furnished specialties, and accessories
for each model indicated.
too,*, B. Shop Drawings: Certified by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment
assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show structural supports, piping roughing-in requirements,
wiring roughing-in requirements (determine spaces reserved for electrical equipment),
and access requirements for service and maintenance.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cooling towers to include certified
performance curves plotting leaving-water temperature against wet-bulb temperature.
E. Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1. Include part lists for tower fill, water distribution system, fans, bearings,
fan drives, vibration isolators, controls, basin heaters, and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Certification: Certify cooling tower's thermal performance according to
CTI 201. CTI Certification notwithstanding, the cooling tower manufacturer shall
guarantee that the tower supplied will meet the specified performance conditions when
the tower is installed according to plan. If, because of a suspected thermal performance
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Cooling Towers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15640-1 05/13/05
B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" SCBA video that details exact operating procedures of
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15635
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15635-7 05/13/05
B. Verify gas compatibility with monitor.
C. Examine room ventilation system to verify its operation with monitor(s).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install monitoring equipment level and plumb.
B. Install labels and nameplates to identify monitoring devices and SCBA components ac-
cording to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
C. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 "Conductors and Cables."
D. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal
Transmission Media."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to per-
form the following:
1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connec-
tions for compliance with requirements.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
C. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action
taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or re-
placements are made.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust alarm set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain refrigerant monitoring devices. Refer to Division 1
Section "Demonstration and Training."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15635-6 05/13/05
6. Response Time: 90 percent of a step change in 4 minutes.
7. Relatively Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating tempera-
ture range.
C. Operating Requirements:
I. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac; 60 Hz, 2Amps.
2. Alarm Outputs: 3 DPDT relays.
3. Alarm Set Points: Displayed on front of meter.
4. Audible Output: Sonic alert at 110 dB at 36 inches (1525 mm).
5. Relay Output: 5A,30Vdc or 250 Vac(resistive load).
6. Serial Output Type: RS 232.
D. Sensor Configuration: Diffusion fuel cell (oxygen).
E. Display: Indicating lights for each alarm set point; normal operation indicator, Alarm
level], Failure and aspirated zone, mounted on front panel; status and service fault
LEDs.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, type as required for ambient condition.
F. Alarm Output: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds.
1. Unit-mounting device with single-light beacon.
2. Field-adjustable alarm set points.
G. Calibration: Factory calibrated.
2.6 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and fiber-optic cable for control wiring shall be as specified in Division 16
Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. SCBA: Tested and certified by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
and the Mine Safety and Health Administration according to 42 CFR 84, Subpart H.
B. Refrigerant Monitor: Factory tested and certified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment layout for proper location of monitoring device.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15635-5 05/13/05
I. Unit-mounting device with single-light beacon.
2. Remote unit for mounting outside machinery room and having light beacon with
single light.
3. Field-adjustable alarm set points.
G. Calibration: Factory calibrated.
2.4 SCBA
A. Description: Open-circuit, pressure-demand, compressed-air SCBA includes completely
assembled, portable, self-contained devices designed for hazardous breathing environ-
ment application.
B. Face Piece: EPDM construction material, one-size-fits-all with double-sealing edge,
stainless-steel speaking diaphragm and lens retainer, five adjustable straps to hold face
piece to head (two straps on each side and one on top), exhalation valve in mask, close-
fitting nose piece to ensure no CO, build-up, and perspiration drain to avoid skin irrita-
tion and to prevent eyepiece, spectacle, and lens fogging.
C. Backplate: Orthopedically designed of high-strength chemical and impact-resistant glass-
fiber composite.
D. Harness and Carrier Assembly: Large triangular back pad, backplate, and adjustable
waist and shoulders straps. Modular in design, detachable components, and easy to Aww,
clean and maintain. Shoulder straps are padded with flame-resistant material and rein-
forced with stainless-steel cable and attached with T-nuts, washers, and screws; rivets are
not permitted.
E. Air Cylinder: 60-minute, low-pressure, air-supply-loaded fiberglass cylinders fitted with
quick-fill assembly for refilling and air transfer.
F. Wall-Mounted Case: Leakproof, corrosion-resistant, tough, plastic case.
2.5 MRI ROOM SAMPLE DRAW SYSTEM FOR OXYGEN DEPLETION
A. Description: A low maintenance diaphragm pump shall draw ambient air to the sensor
and display the specific gas concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming,
and automatically activating ventilation system.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Gas to Be Monitored: 02.
2. Concentration: 19.5 or 23%.
3. Accuracy: 3%.
4. Sensitivity: 0.1 %.
5. Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F (5 to 40 deg Q.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15635-4 05/13/05
I. Activate machinery room ventilation.
2. Activate audio and visual alarm inside and outside machinery room.
3. Shut down combustion process where combustion equipment is employed.
4. Notify Building Automation System of alarm condition.
2.3 REFRIGERANT MONITOR
A. Description: CMOS or IR sensor shall continuously measure and display the specific gas
concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming, and shutting down equip-
inent, and automatically activating ventilation system.
B. Performance Requirements:
I. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: HCFC-123.
2. Refrigerant Concentration: 0 to 1000 ppm.
3. Accuracy: 0 to 100 ppm; 1 ppm.
4. Linearity: 0 to 100 ppm; linear.
5. Sensitivity: 1 ppm.
6. Resolution: 1 ppm.
7. Operating Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F (S to 40 deg C).
8. Response Time: 90 percent of a step change in 4 minutes.
9. Relatively Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating tem-
perature range.
C. Operating Requirements:
1. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac; 60 Hz, 30 W.
2. Alarm Relays: 3 relays at 5- to 8-A resistive load.
3. Alarm Set Points: Displayed on front of meter.
4. Audible Output: Sonic alert at 7S to 80 dB at 60 inches (1525 min).
5. Analog Output: 0- to 10-V do or 4- to 20-mA current sourcing.
6. Serial Output Type: RS 232.
D. Sensor Configuration: Photoacoustic IR sensor.
1. Single-sensing channel.
2. Expandable to four channels.
E. Display: 10-character, alphanumeric, vacuum-fluorescent indicating lights for each
alarm set point; standard alarm; acknowledge switch and test switch mounted on front
panel; and alarm status LEDs and service fault LEDs.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, type as required for ambient condition.
F. Alarm Output: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15635-3 05/13/05
D. Product Certificates: For monitoring devices and SCBA, signed by product manufac-
turer.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant and oxygen monitoring equipment
and SCBA to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASHRAE: Monitoring system shall comply with ASHRAE 15.
L. CFR: SCBA shall comply with requirements in 42 CFR 84.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Refrigerant Monitoring Equipment:
a. Trane Co.
b. Vulcain Inc.
C. Davis Instruments Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Foxboro Company.
2. SCBA:
a. AFC International, Inc.
b. Clarey's Safety Equipment, Inc.
C. Genesis International Inc.
d. MSA, Instrument Division.
e. Thermal Gas Systems, Inc.; Haloguard Monitors.
3. Sample Draw Gas Monitoring System:
a. Vulcain Inc.
b. Davis Instruments Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C. Foxboro Company.
2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF REFRIGERANT MONITORING SYSTEM
A. On leak detection by refrigerant sensor(s), the system shall perform the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15635-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15635 - REFRIGERANT AND OXYGEN MONITORING, AND SAFETY
EQUIPMENT
PART -I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant and oxygen monitors, alarms, and breathing apparatus.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMOS: Ceramic metal-oxide semiconductor.
B. HFC: Hydrofluorocarbon.
C. HCFC: Hydrochlorofluorocarbon.
D. IR: Infrared.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.
F. ppm: Parts per million.
G. SCBA: Self-contained breathing apparatus.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For SCBA; include mounting details and service requirements and com-
pliance with authorized Federal agency.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of refrigerant and oxygen monitor; include refrigerant
and oxygen ppm range, temperature range, alarm outputs, readout range, furnished spe-
cialities, installation requirements, and power consumption.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Include machinery room and MRI layout showing location of
monitoring devices in relation to equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15635-1 05/13/05
8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water
AOW chiller startup and shutdown.
9. Verify and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low-
temperature interlocks.
10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.
E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied condi-
tions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers.
1. Start chiller and verify performance as outlined in the "Operation and Mainte-
nance" manuals provided by the chiller manufacturer. Demonstrate operation to
Owner.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for startup,
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Training shall
consist of up to 8 hours of "on-site" classroom training.
3. Review data in operating and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section -
"Submittals and Substitutions" and Division 15 - "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for requirements.
4. Schedule training with the Owner through the Architect with at least 7 days' no-
tice.
END OF SECTION 15625
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-19 05/13/05
A. Provide refrigerant vent piping from purge unit discharge to the refrigerant vent piping
downstream of the safety relief valve(s) or rupture disc(s). The purge unit discharge pip-
ing shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with Divi-
sion 15 Section - "Refrigerant Piping" of these specifications.
B. Auxiliary Water Piping Connections: Provide all necessary auxiliary water piping for
purge unit condensers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Divi-
sion 15 Section - "Hydronic Piping" of these specifications.
3.6 STORAGE RECEIVER AND PUMP-OUT COMPRESSOR INSTALLATION
A. Storage Receiver and Pump-out Compressor: Install storage receiver and pump-out
compressor unit in a permanent location where indicated on drawings. Provide inter-
connecting refrigerant piping and refrigerant vent piping in accordance with manufac-
turer's recommendation and Division 15 Section - "Refrigerant Piping" of these specifi-
cations. Provide cooling water connection to compressor.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean units using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer.
B. Clean finishes to remove dust and dirt.
C. Touch up scratches on unfinished surfaces to restore corrosion resistance.
D. Touch up scratches on finished surfaces to restore finish.
3.8 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical
connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions and perform the following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
4. Operate water chiller for run-in period according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
S. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief is vented outside.
7. Verify proper motor rotation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-18 05/13/05
1. Connect balancing valve at condenser outlet.
2. Connect modulating automatic flow control valve at condenser outlet.
3. Connect venturi type flow measuring device at condenser outlet.
F. Field-insulate any surfaces where condensation might occur that were not otherwise fac-
tory insulated.
G. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: Install refrigerant vent piping from each
chiller's safety relief valve(s) or rupture disc(s) to an approved location at the exterior of
the building without valves or restrictions. The refrigerant vent piping shall be installed
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with Division 15 Section - "Re-
frigerant Piping" of these specifications.
H. Auxiliary Water Piping Connections: Provide all necessary auxiliary water piping for oil
cooling units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Division 15 Sec-
tion - "Hydronic Piping" of these specifications.
3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Ground water chillers according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Install electrical devices furnished loose by manufacturer, including remote flow switches
and remote chiller control panel. Furnish a copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram sub-
mittal to electrical Installer.
E. Rig and mount free-standing motor controller furnished loose by manufacturer into place
for final electrical connection by electrical Installer. Furnish a copy of manufacturer's
wiring diagram submittal to electrical Installer.
F. Rig and mount variable frequency drive furnished loose by manufacturer into place for
final electrical connection by electrical Installer. Furnish a copy of manufacturer's wiring
diagram submittal to electrical Installer.
G. Electrical Coordination: Provide the proper size incoming power lugs on unit mounted
or free-standing manufacturer furnished starters. The lug size shall be coordinated with
the incoming wire size indicated on the Electrical Drawings and in accordance with Divi-
sion 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" of these specifications. Furnish a copy of
manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to electrical Installer.
3.5 PURGE UNIT INSTALLATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-17 05/13/05
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Amk*,
3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION
A. Install chillers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer.
C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Install water chillers with vibration isolators on concrete base. Concrete base is specified
in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materi-
als and installation requirements are specified in Division 3.
1. Vibration Isolation: Mount water chiller on vibration isolation equipment base as
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
2. Anchor vibration isolators to concrete base in accordance with Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls".
E. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Chilled- and condenser-water piping installation requirements are specified in Divi-
sion 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water chillers to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect flexible pipe connections on inlet and outlet of the evaporator and condenser
for chillers mounted on vibration isolators. Install flexible pipe connectors according to
manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with Division 15 Section - "Me-
chanical Vibration and Seismic Controls".
D. Evaporator Connections: Connect inlet to evaporator with controller-bulb well, shutoff
valve, thermometer, plugged tee, pressure gage, temperature sensor well, and flange.
Connect outlet to evaporator with shutoff valve, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee,
temperature sensor well, pressure gage, drain valves with cap and chain, and flange.
1. Connect balancing valve at evaporator outlet.
2. Connect modulating automatic flow control valve at evaporator outlet.
3. Connect venturi type flow measuring device at evaporator outlet.
E. Condenser Connections: Connect inlet to condenser with controller-bulb well, shutoff
valve, thermometer, plugged tee, pressure gage, temperature sensor well, and flange.
Connect outlet to condenser with shutoff valve, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee,
temperature sensor well, pressure gage, drain valves with cap and chain, and flange. ANN%
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-16 05/13/05
1) Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
2) Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
3) Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
4) Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
5) Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
6) Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
7) Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
8) Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60
Minutes: Plus or minus 2 percent.
9) Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 per-
cent; stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
b. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semirecessed in instrument
compartment door.
6. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with adjustable
undervoltage setting and isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection.
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and rate water chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 5501590, "Water
Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle." Stamp with ARI label.
B. Factory test heat exchangers hydrostatically at 1.50 times the design pressure.
C. Factory test and inspect evaporator and water cooled-condenser according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.
D. Factory test and inspect water boxes at 150 percent of working pressure.
E. Rate sound power level according to ARI 575 procedure.
F. Allow Owner access to places where water chillers are being source quality-control
tested. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, an-
chor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical to verify actual locations, sizes, and
other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Final water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine
exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
low
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-15 05/13/05
H. Motor controller shall include an advanced motor protection system incorporating elec-
tronic three phase overloads and current transformers. This electronic motor protection
system shall monitor and protect against the following conditions:
a. Three phase overload protection.
b. Overload protection during start-up.
C. Phase imbalance.
d. Phase loss.
e. Phase reversal.
f. Low voltage.
g. Distribution fault protection with auto restart consisting of three-please, cur-
rent sensing devices that monitor the status of the current. Distribution faults
of 1-1/2 electrical cycle duration shall be detected and the compressor motor
shall be disconnected within six electrical cycles.
I. The motor controller shall be designed to operate in temperatures up to 120 degrees F.
J. All field supplied wires, bus bars and fittings shall be copper only.
K. The following motor controller options shall be provided:
a. Ammeter - A digital display shall be provided with a 1% accuracy.
b. Voltmeters - A digital display shall be provided with a 1% accuracy.
C. Power Factor Correction Capacitors shall be provided to correct to 93.5-
95.5 percent at full load conditions. Aftk
L. Accessories: Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-
duty type.
2. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station
with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button
in depressed position with control circuit open.
3. Control Relays: Time-delay relays.
4. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum diameter with 90- or 120-
degree scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide
transfer device with an off position. Meters shall indicate the following:
a. Ammeter: Output current, with current sensors rated to suit application.
b. Voltmeter: Output voltage.
C. Real-time clock with current time and date.
d. Total run time.
5. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for
three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
a. Selectable, digital display of the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-14 05/13/05
2.12 MOTOR CONTROLLER (4160 VOLT)
A. Motor controller shall be an Auto-Transformer type.
R. Enclosure: Floor mounting, NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, with hinged access door with loci:
and key or padlock and key.
1. Completely front accessible and allowing free- standing against a wall or back-to-
back mounting.
2. Where multiple motor controller/structure installations are required, horizontal
power bus should be used to connect between structures.
3. Vertical bus to connect tiered motor controller units shall be insulated and integral
to the enclosure.
C. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer with enough
capacity to operate connected pilot and indicating and control devices.
1. The low voltage control circuit shall be isolated from the high voltage area with a
barrier.
2. Provided a separate low voltage access door.
J. The low voltage panel shall be accessible by sliding the unit out.
D. Isolating switch and contactor assemblies, including current limiting fuses shall be of the
component-to-component design without any interconnecting cables or flexible shunts.
They shall be easily removed from the front of the enclosure. Line and load cable termi-
nations shall be completely accessible from the front.
E. The isolating switch shall be an externally operated manual three pole draw-out, such
that in the open position it completely grounds and isolates the motor controller from the
line connectors with a mechanically driven isolating shutter leaving no exposed high
voltage. Integral mechanical interlocks shall prevent entry into the high voltage areas
while the motor controller is energized and shall block accidental opening or closing of
the isolating switch when the door is open or contactor is closed. The isolating switch
handle shall have provision for padlocks.
F. Current limiting power fuses shall be of the self-protecting type with visible fuse condi-
tion indicators, and with special time/current characteristics for motor service allowing
proper coordination with the contactor and overload protection for maximum motor
protection. The power fuses shall be vertically mounted permitting easy inspection and
replacement without starter disassembly.
G. The vacuum contactor shall be slide out, with single break high pressure type main con-
tacts with weld-resistant alloy contact faces. For vacuum contactors the contact wear
shall be easily checked with the use of a feeler gauge and the bottle gap shall be adjust-
able. A built-in test circuit shall be included to permit checking of the starter control and
pilot circuit with the high voltage de-energized and isolated, with the contactor in its
normal position. In the test mode, the control circuit shall be capable of being energized
through a polarized plug connector from an external 11S volt supply.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-13 05/13/05
i. Chilled water flow interlock (loss of chilled water flow).
j. Condenser water flow interlock (loss of condenser water flow).
k. Lockout restart timer with interval (automatic without manual reset).
1. Extended compressor surge.
M. Bearing high oil temperature.
n. Processor communication loss.
o. Restart after power failure (automatic without manual reset).
p. Electrical overload.
q. Starter fault.
r. Sensor- or detection-circuit fault.
S. Excessive air-leakage detection.
6. Motor Protection (may be included in unit mounted or rnanufacturcr furnished
free-standing starter):
a. Overvoltage protection.
b. Undervoltage protection.
C. Phase loss.
d. Phase imbalance.
e. Phase reversal.
f. Motor overload.
g. Starter fault.
h. High motor winding temperatures.
i. Starter transition failure.
7. BacNET compatible Building Management System Interface: Factory-installed
hardware and software to enable building management system to monitor and
control the following:
8. Building Management System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software
to enable building management system to monitor and control the following:
a. Remote chiller start/stop.
b. Reset leaving chilled water temperature. (4-20mA signal)
C. Reset demand or current limit. (4-20mA signal)
d. Common alarm relay for any safety requiring a manual reset of chiller.
e. Analog output signal indicating compressor motor percent RLA.
f. Compressor running relay.
g. Chiller operating at maximum capacity relay.
h. Initialization of free cooling cycle relay.
i. Analog output signal indicating evaporator pressure.
j. Analog output signal indicating condenser pressure.
k. Analog output signal indicating oil pressure.
1. Analog output signal indicating oil temperature.
M. Analog output signal indicating refrigerant level.
n. Analog output signal indicating accumulated operating hours.
o. Analog output signal indicating accumulated system starts.
p. Digital output signal indicating vent valve status.
q. Operating, safety shutdown, and cycling codes shall be available to the BMS
system.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 1S62S-12 05/13/05
I. Provide a means to maintain all set-points in memory for up to a two week
period due to a power failure.
m. A means of calibration.
J. Capacity Control:
a. User programmable ramp loading at start-up to assure gradual pull down of
the chilled water loop temperature.
b. Remote entering chilled water reset capability in the form of a 4-20mA sig-
nal from a remote source.
C. Stand-alone entering chilled water reset capability.
d. Remote power-demand limiting capability in the form of a 4-20mA signal
from a remote source.
e. Stand-alone power-demand limiting capability.
4. Diagnostics:
a. Date and time.
b. Operating or alarm status.
C. Operating hours (Elapsed time meter).
d. Entering chilled water temperature and operating setpoint.
e. Leaving chilled water temperature and operating setpoint.
f. Entering condenser water temperature and operating setpoint.
g. Leaving condenser water temperature and operating setpoint.
h. Oil supply pressure.
i. Oil sump temperature.
j. Saturation temperature in condenser.
k. Saturation temperature in evaporator.
1. Refrigerant pressure in evaporator.
M. Refrigerant pressure in condenser.
n. Compressor discharge temperature.
o. Number of compressor starts.
p. Percent of maximum motor amperage.
q. Current-limit set point.
r. Purge suction temperature if purge system is provided.
S. Purge elapsed time if purge system is provided.
S. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water
chiller and require manual reset:
a. Evaporator refrigerant low pressure.
b. Low chilled-water temperature.
C. Low oil differential pressure.
d. High oil pressure.
e. Low oil pressure.
f. High oil temperature.
g. High condenser pressure.
h. High compressor-discharge temperature.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-11 05/13/05
A. Provide a storage receiver designed, tested, and stamped according to the ASME "Boiler ** *+
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1". A storage receiver and pump-out
compressor is required for chillers operating at a positive pressure at 80 T. Provide a
single storage receiver and pump-out compressor, capable of storing the entire refrigerant
charge of the largest chiller in the system. The storage receiver and pump-out compres-
sor shall have the following features:
1. Manually controlled compressor to deliver refrigerant to storage receiver.
2. Minimum receiver capacity shall be the full operating charge of refrigerant.
3. Provide isolation valves that separate the storage receiver and compressor from the
chiller.
4. Receiver's pressure-relief safety valve vented to the exterior of the building.
2.11 CONTROLS
A. Provide a unit mounted control panel, factory wired with a single-point power connec-
tion and a separate circuit for controls for each chiller.
B. Enclosure: Unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, hinged or lockable; factory
wired with a single-point power connection and a separate control circuit.
C. Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor-based chiller controls including the fol-
lowing features, safeties, and diagnostics:
1. Display:
a. Multiple-character liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes and keypad.
b. Provide a minimum of 20 display characters.
C. The display shall provide all messages in plain English without the use of
codes or look-up tables.
d. Provide numerical data on display in (Inch-pound) units and (S.I.) metric.
2. Features and options:
a. Security access through the use of passwords.
b. Editable set-points.
C. Alarm history (minimum of last 4 safety shutdowns)
d. Control power transformer. (either located within control panel or within
unit mounted or free-standing starter)
e. 7-day occupancy schedule with holidays. (minimum)
f. RS-232 connection.
g. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.
h. Manual STOP/AUTO switch located on face of control panel.
i. Capable of START/STOP of associated chilled water and condenser pumps.
j. Capable of enabling cooling tower controls and or associated cooling tower
fans.
k. Control of leaving chilled water temperature within one degree of setpoint.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-10 05/13/05
9. Provide three-way valves and redundant relief valves for all relief connections on
condensers utilizing positive pressure refrigerants (HCFC-22 and HFC-134a). Re-
dundant valves shall allow relief valve replacement under unit operation. All relief
valves shall be re-seating type.
10. Purge valve.
11. Sub-cooler circuit.
2.9 PURGE UNIT
A. The manufacturer's of negative pressure (below atmospheric pressure at 75°F) shall pro-
vide a separate compressor type purge system.
1. The purge shall operate independently of the chiller and can be operated while the
chilled water system pump(s) are shutdown. No external water cooling source
shall be required.
2. Provide refrigerant service valves to isolate the purge unit from the chilling unit.
3. Any excess purge requirement will enable an alarm indication light at the chiller
unit control panel, a contact closure at the purge shall be provided for remote
alarm annunciation, and a diagnostic (with date and time of occurrence) shall be
stored in the chiller unit control panel's diagnostic summary.
4. The purge unit indication shall include:
a. Purge operating mode (ON, OFF, AUTO, AUTO ADAPTIVE)
b. Purge operating status (ON, OFF, AUTO, AUTO ADAPTIVE)
C. Elapsed time meter for total pump-out time and total run time.
S. Provide an indication of purge operating mode and purge operating status as an in-
tegral part of the chiller unit mounted control panel. Provide the following addi-
tional diagnostic information, displayed on the unit mounted control panel:
a. Purge suction temperature.
b. Purge liquid temperature.
C. Purge pump-out rate. (minutes/24 hours)
d. Time to next purge (minutes)
e. 30 day purge pump-out average (minutes/day)
f. Last 5 purge cycles pump-out average run time, interval from shutdown to 3
hours after shutdown (minutes/day)
6. At standard room operating conditions and with a condensing refrigerant tempera-
ture > 80 degrees F, the purge shall be rated for no more than .1 lb. of refrigerant
per 1 lb. non-condensables. If the purge uses refrigerant absorption media, the
media's design capacity must not exceed three years for typical chiller operation.
The purge efficiency must not deteriorate over time.
2.10 STORAGE RECEIVER AND PUMP-OUT COMPRESSOR
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-9 05/13/05
9. Provide three-way valves and redundant relief valves for all relief connections on
coolers utilizing positive pressure refrigerants (HFC-134a). Redundant valves shall
allow relief valve replacement under unit operation. All relief valves shall be re-
seating type.
9. Provide a non-fragmenting type rupture disk in series with a re-seating
type pressure relief valve on all chillers utilizing low pressure refriger-
ants (HCFC-123). Provide a port for a pressure sensor or pressure gage
between the rupture disk and the relief valve.
10. Evaporator shall be designed to prevent carryover of liquid refrigerant
into the compressor section. If required, provide metal screen-mesh
eliminators to prevent refrigerant carryover into the compressor.
2.7 INSULATION
A. Cold Surfaces: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with
ASTM C 534, Type I1, for sheet materials.
I. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Factory apply insulation over entire surfaces of water chiller components including
evaporator shell, suction lines, and other surfaces where condensation might occur.
a. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.
b. Seal seams and joints.
C. After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of protective coating to insu-
lation.
2.8 CONDENSER
A. Condenser: Shell and tube design, ASME labeled (for chillers utilizing R-134a (HFC-
134a)), with the following features:
1. Water enclosed in the tubes; refrigerant enclosed by the shell.
2. Shell Material: Carbon-steel.
3. Tube Construction: Seamless, externally finned, individually replaceable copper
tubes; expanded into tube sheets. Condenser tube wall thickness shall be 0.028".
a. Internal Finish: Ribbed.
4. Water Boxes: Marine type, removable, carbon steel or cast iron, piping connec-
tions to match chilled water piping system (flanged or mechanical grooved) with a
thermistor-type temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle. Provide vent
and drain connections on water box.
5. Water velocity through the condenser tubes of not less than 3 feet per second and
not more than 12 feet per second with a fouling factor of 0.0005 hr./sq. ft./F/btu.
6. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 300 psig (for chillers utilizing R-134a (HFC-134a))
7. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 30 psig (for chillers utilizing R-123 (HCFC-123)
8. Water-Side Working Pressure: 150 psig. 40%
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-8 05/13/05
00** 6. Provide automatically controlled hot-gas bypass (if required) to maintain stable
operation without overshoot or hunting, free of surge, cavitation, or vibration
throughout the throttling range of full load to 10 percent of full load.
7. Compressors shall be provided (if required) with temperature-or pressure-actuated
variable inlet guide vanes to provide stable operation that is free of surge, cavita-
tion, or vibration throughout throttling range from 100 to 10 percent of full load.
8. When required by the manufacturer, an economizer shall be provided. The flash
gas shall be piped from the economizer to the inlet of the intermediate-stage impel-
ler wheel. Necessary flow control to automatically regulate the flow of the liquid
refrigerant through the economizer shall be provided. Unit shall meet the require-
ments of ASHRAE 15.
2.5 COMPRESSOR MOTOR
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements.
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
C. The compressor(s) shall be driven by an electric motor that has a maximum speed of
1,800 rpm. Motor shall be of the constant-speed, squirrel-cage induction, hermetically
sealed, normal- or high-torque type as required by the compressor manufacturer to ade-
quately bring the compressor up to full operating speed without damaging the equip-
ment. Hermetically sealed motors shall be refrigerant-gas cooled.
2.6 EVAPORATOR
A. Evaporator: Shell and tube design, ASME labeled, with the following features:
1. Refrigerant totally enclosed by the shell; water in the tubes.
2. Shell Material: Carbon-steel.
3. Tube Construction: Seamless, externally finned, individually replaceable copper
tubes; expanded into tube sheets. Evaporator tube wall thickness shall be 0.028".
a. Internal Finish: Ribbed.
b. Internal Finish: Ribbed.
4. Water Boxes: Marine type, removable, carbon steel or cast iron, piping connec-
tions to match chilled water piping system (flanged or mechanical grooved) with a
thermistor-type temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle. Provide vent
and drain connections on water box.
5. Performance shall be based on a water velocity of not less than 3 feet per second
and not more than 12 feet per second with a fouling factor of 0.00025 hr./sq.
ft./°F/btu.
6. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 300 psig (for chillers utilizing R-134a (HFC-134a))
7. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 30 psig (for chillers utilizing R-123 (HCFC-123))
8. Water-Side Working Pressure: 150 psig.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-7 05/13/05
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested water chiller complete with compressor,
evaporator, condenser, controls, interconnecting unit piping and wiring, indicated acces-
sories, and mounting frame.
B. Fabricate water chiller mounting frame and attachment to the pressure vessel with rein-
forcement strong enough to resist water chiller movement during a seismic event when
the water chiller mounting frame is anchored to the building structure.
2.3 REFRIGERANT
A. Refrigerant: R-123 (HCFC-123); full operating charge of refrigerant and oil.
h. Refrigerant: R-1 34a (HFC-134a); full operating charge of refrigerant and oil.
C. Refrigerant Compatibility: Seals, O-rings, motor windings, and internal water chiller
parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure
components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.
D. Vent Pipe: Provide black steel vent pipe from safety relief valve(s) to exterior of building.
2.4 COMPRESSORS
A. Centrifugal compressors shall be variable displacement, single or multistage, having stati-
cally and dynamically balanced impellers, either direct or gear driven by the compressor
driver. Impeller shall be high-strength, cast-aluminum-alloy. Impellers shall be over-
speed tested at 1.20 times the impeller-shaft speed. Impeller shaft shall be heat-treated
alloy steel with sufficient rigidity for proper operation at any required operating speed.
B. Centrifugal compressors shall include:
1. Shaft main bearings that are the rolling element type in accordance with ABEMA 9
or ABEMA 11, journal type with bronze or babbitt liners, or of the aluminum-
alloy one-piece insert type. Bearings shall be rated for an L(10) life of not less than
200,000 hours.
2. Compressor casing shall be precision ground,cast iron with split sections gasketed
and bolted together.
3. Lubrication system shall be of the positive displacement, forced-feed type that pro-
vides oil at the proper pressure to all parts requiring lubrication. Provide oil filter
and sight glass.
4. Provisions to ensure proper lubrication of bearings and shaft seals prior to starting
and upon stopping with or without electric power supply. On units providing
forced-feed lubrication prior to starting, a differential oil pressure cutout inter-
locked with the compressor starting equipment shall allow the compressor to oper-
ate only when the required oil pressure is provided to the bearings.
5. Provide crankcase oil heaters, controlled as recommended by the manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-6 05/13/05
C. Store chillers to prevent damage and protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, and con-
struction debris in clean dry space.
D. Handle chillers according to manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions
for unloading, transporting, and setting in final location.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
1.S WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Electric Motor: Written warranty, signed by manu-
facturer agreeing to repair or replace compressor motor, including replacement of refrig-
erant.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years after date
of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Compressor Bearings: Written warranty, signed by
manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace compressor bearings and related damage, in-
cluding annual tear down and bearing inspection, and including replacement of refriger-
ant.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years after date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Trane Company (The).
2. Carrier; a United Technologies Company.
2.2 PACKAGED WATER CHILLERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-5 05/13/05
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing water-cooled cen-
trifugal chillers similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of suc-
cessful in-service performance.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with the latest edition of the following list of publications:
1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABEMA): ABEMA 9 - "Load Rat-
ings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings".
2. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABEMA): ABEMA 11 - "Load Rat-
ings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings".
3. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): ARI 550 - "Centrifugal or Ro-
tary Water Chilling Packages" for chiller ratings.
4. ARI Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with require-
ments in ARI 550 1590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression
Cycle."
5. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE): ASHRAE 15 - "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration" for chiller
design, construction, leak testing, and installation. Comply with
ASHRAE Guideline 3 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage re-
quirements.
6. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE): ASHRAE 90A - "Energy Conservation in New Building Design".
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE): ASHRAE STANDARD 34 - "Number Designation and Safety classifi-
cation of Refrigerants".
8. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for construction and testing of evaporator
and condenser pressure vessels. Stamp evaporator and condenser vessels with
ASME label.
9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA MG 1 - "Motors
and Generators".
10. National Electric Code (NEC): Comply with applicable NFPA 70 requirements for
electrical power and control wiring.
11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 984 - "Safety Standard for Hermetic Motor
Compressors".
12. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Comply with UL 465.
13. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Comply with UL 1995.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant or nitrogen.
B. Deliver centrifugal water chillers with protective crating and covering.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-4 05/13/05
#O"'' 1. Assembled unit dimensions.
2. Operating weight and load distribution.
3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.
4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections.
S. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate clearly between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinated with the following:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
J. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equip-
ment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and
electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
F. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water chill-
ers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Sec-
tion "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
H. Source quality-control test reports.
I. Startup service reports.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in the operating and main-
tenance manual specified in Division 1 Section Submittals and Substitutions and Divi-
sion 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-3 05/13/05
Water System. The life cycle cost analysis shall include the initial cost of the chiller, pro-
jected energy usage (accounting for demand load), as well as projected maintenance
costs over a 20 year period. (4) copies of the cost analysis report shall be submitted with
the bid and shall be reviewed by the Owner, Architect, and Construction Administrator
prior to award of the bid. After the review of the cost analysis reports is complete the
Construction Administrator will facilitate a meeting with the Owner, Architect, and
submitting chiller Manufacturer representatives present for final chiller purchasing nego-
tiations.
C. Product data for each chiller including the following:
1. Chiller refrigerant, oils, fluids. (include quantities of each)
2. Chiller capacity. Submit performance data indicating energy input versus cooling
load output from 15 to 100 percent of full load with constant condenser water
temperature.
3. Cooler and condenser and construction.
4. Condenser fluid pressure drop.
5. Cooler fluid pressure drop.
6. Compressor data including: compressor type, impeller and shaft construction, lu-
brication system, capacity control, refrigerant flow control system, and compressor
casing construction.
7. Motor data including: Motor type, voltage, phase, RPM, efficiency, and motor
cooling means.
8. Chiller sound data.
9. Chiller packaged controls including all alarms, diagnostics, display type, features, '"'k
operator settings, control system features, and required interfaces with building
control system.
10. Weights (shipping, installed, and operating).
11. Furnished accessories including:
a. Thermal insulation, include all components insulated and thermal character-
istics of insulation.
b. Refrigerant containment system including: Refrigerant vessel and pump-out
compressor.
C. Starter including disconnecting means, starter type, accessories and cabinet
enclosure type.
d. Purge units.
e. Field installed flow switches.
f. Marine water boxes.
g. Free cooling system.
h. Heat recovery system.
i. Variable frequency drive system.
j. Acoustical attenuation package.
k. Auxiliary condenser for heat recovery.
12. Installation and startup instructions.
D. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's certified prints of water chiller assem-
blies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15625 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven, centrifugal water
chillers with the following features:
1. Microprocessor-based controls.
2. Motor Controller.
J. Refrigerant Containment System. (Refrigerant vessel and pump-out compressor)
4. Marine Water Boxes.
5. Free cooling system.
6. Heat recovery system.
7. Acoustical Attenuation Package.
8. Auxiliary Condenser for Heat Recovery.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment" for refriger-
ant monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equip-
ment interlocks.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
chiller vibration isolation requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio.
B. IPLV: Integrated part-load value.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Submittals and Substitutions"
and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
B. Each manufacturer shall submit with their bid a life cycle cost analysis of all chillers as
applied to the design of the Maine Medical Center Central Utility Plant Chilled Water
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Centrifugal Water Chillers
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15625-1 05/13/05
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Field-Fabricated Metal Breechings and Chimneys: Dual-fuel boilers, oven vents, water heaters,
exhaust for engines, fireplaces, and other solid-fuel-burning appliances.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNLISTED,FIELD-FABRICATED BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Suspend breechings and chimneys independent of their appliance connections.
B. Install, support, and restrain according to seismic requirements.
C. Align breechings at connections, with smooth internal surface and a maxinuun 1/8-inch (3-111111)
misalignment tolerance.
D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest
point piped to nearest drain.
E. Lap joints in direction of flow.
F. Support breechings and chimneys from building structure with bolts, concrete inserts, steel
expansion anchors, welded studs, C-clamps, or beam clamps according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean
external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup
finish to match factory or shop finish.
C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed
or connected to equipment.
END OF SECTION 15550
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15550-4 05/13/05
1. Warranty Period: [10] [15] [25] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FIELD-FABRICATED METAL BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Fabricate freestanding chimneys according to SMACNA's "Guide for Steel Stack Design and
Construction." Design for minimum <Insert feet(meters)> high and <Insert inches (mm)> in
diameter.
13. Fabricate breechings and chimneys from ASTM A 1011/A 1011M hot-rolled steel with
continuously welded joints, complying with NFPA 211 for minimum metal thickness.
I. Equal to or Less Than 1.069 Sq. Ft. (0.099 Sq. m.) or 14 Inches (356 mm) in Diameter:
0.053 inch (1.35 mm).
2. Up to 1.396 Sq. Ft. (0.129 Sq. m) or 16 Inches (406 mm) in Diameter: 0.067 inch (1.7
mm).
3. Up to 1.764 Sq. Ft. (0.164 Sq. m.) or 18 Inches (457 mm) in Diameter: 0.093 inch (2.36
mm).
4. Larger Than Above: 0.123 inch(3.12 mm).
C. Fabricate chimneys and vent connectors from galvanized steel, complying with NFPA 211 for
minimum metal thickness.
1. Equal to or Less Than 6 Inches (152 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch(0.48 mm).
2. Up to 10 Inches (254 mm) in Diameter: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm).
3. Up to 16 Inches (406 mm) in Diameter: 0.029 inch(0.74 mm).
4. Larger Than Above: 0.056 inch(1.42 mm).
D. Fabricate cleanout doors from compatible material, same thickness as breeching, bolted and
gasketed.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15550-3 05/13/05
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that factory-fabricated ,
breeching, chimneys, and stacks; accessories; and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Breeching, Chimneys, and Stacks: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their
installation requirements.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DI.1/DLIM, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.IM, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents,breechings, and stacks.
C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section 'Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of venting system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures caused by expansion
and contraction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15550-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15550 -BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Field-fabricated metal breechings and chimneys.
13. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Draft Control Devices" for induced-draft and mechanical fans and
for motorized and barometric dampers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Chimney liners.
2. Type B and BW vents.
3. Type L vents.
4. Special gas vents.
5. Building-heating-appliance chimneys.
6. Grease ducts.
7. Refractory-lined metal breechings and chimneys.
8. Guy wires and connectors.
B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, methods of field assembly, components, hangers and seismic restraints, and
location and size of each field connection.
2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include calculations
required for selecting seismic restraints and structural analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Welding certificates.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15550-1 05/13/05
C. Tests and Inspections: ,
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections,for compliance with requirements.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Verify bearing lubrication.
4. Verify proper motor rotation.
5. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
C. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning equipment and retest as specified above.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do
the following:
1. Set deaerator makeup water-level controls. w*l
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Verify proper motor rotation.
4. Start pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust initial temperature and pressure set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
C. Clean strainers.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain deaerators. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION 15525
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase I-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-8 05/13/05
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install deaerators level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolator pads with a minimum static deflection of [0.25 inch
(6.35 mm)]. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
C. Install deaerators to permit access for service and maintenance.
D. Support piping independent of pumps.
E. Install base-mounted pumps on concrete base with grouted base frame.
F. Install all parts and materials not factory installed.
G. Extend overflow drains to floor drains.
H. Extend vent piping to outside and terminate with manufacturer-approved cap furnished with
deaerator.
I. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Steam and condensate piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15
Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect steam and condensate piping to tank tappings with shutoff valves and unions or flanges
at each connection.
C. Connect condensate drains, pump-discharge piping, vents, overflow drains, makeup water,
steam supply, and cooling water piping.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
0011K
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-7 05/13/05
I. Electric level controller operates electric control valve to maintain tank water-level set ,
point.
2. Pneumatic level controller operates pneumatic control valve to maintain tank water-level
set point.
3. Mechanical float operates valve to maintain water-level set point.
4. Visual alarm indication of low and high tank water level.
K. Building Management System Interface: Factory install hardware to enable building
management system to monitor and display points.
1. Hardwired Monitoring Points: On/off status for each pump, failure alarm for each
PUMP, low-water level alarm, high-water level alarm, feedwater temperature.
23 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard paint in standard colors, applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit
before shipping.
B. Do not paint aluminum, galvanized-steel, and stainless-steel surfaces.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fabricate and label deaerator tanks according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
B. Factory install and test piping that connects pumps to tanks according to [ASME B31.1, "Power
Piping] [ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping]."
C. Factory test performance and certify test results on packaged deaerator units, according to
ASME PTC 12.3, before shipping to Project.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before deaerator installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt
sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and
other conditions affecting performance, maintenance, and operations.
I. Final deaerator locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact
locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-6 05/13/05
17. Oxygen test kit.
F. Support Frame: Structural-steel frame for supporting tank and pumps. Weld or bolt to tank.
1. Fabricate support frame with bracing adequate for seismic forces according to authorities
having jurisdiction and to allow installation by anchoring deaerators to floor only.
G. Feedwater Pump: Cast-iron, base-mounted volute; with bronze, multistage centrifugal
impeller, renewable bronze case ring, and stainless-steel shaft.
1. Seals: Mechanical, suitable for 250 deg F(121 deg Q
2. Pump Motor: Continuous operation Horizontal, open dripproof enclosure, close coupled
to pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
H. Feedwater Pump Control Panel: Factory mounted and wired and including the following:
1. NEMA 250,Type 1 enclosure.
2. Single-point, field power connection to fused disconnect switch.
a. Branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch.
3. NEMA-rated motor controller, hand-off-auto switch, and overcurrent protection for each
motor.
a. Alternating control as indicated by control sequence for each pump.
w 4. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram.
5. Metal raceway for factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures. Make connections to
motor with liquidtight conduit.
6. Removable control mounting plate.
7. Visual indication of status and alarm with momentary test push button.
8. Audible alarm and silence switch.
9. Visual indication of elapsed run time, graduated in hours.
10. Fusible,control-circuit transformer.
I. Feedwater Pump Continuous Control Sequence:
I. Pump runs continuously while boiler operates. Electric interlock with boiler control
starts lead pump when boiler starts.
2. Boiler water-level controller modulates feedwater control valve to maintain boiler water-
level set point. Valve closes when boiler is off.
3. Lead and lag pumps alternate to equalize run time.
4. Feedwater pressure controller starts and stops lag pump to maintain feedwater pressure
set point.
5. Visual indication of pump on status.
6. Visual indication of pump lead/lag status.
7. Visual alarm indication of pump failure.
J. Makeup Water Control Sequence:
tow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-5 05/13/05
C. Forged-Steel Fittings: ASME B 16.11, Class 3000.
d. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150.
e. Forged-Steel Unions: MSS SP-83, Class 3000.
6. Factory-Installed Pipe, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Largei° ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type h,
(electric-resistance welded), Grade B; or ASTM A 106, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 40;
with welded joints and carbon-steel fittings and flanges.
a. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
b. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5,
Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets.
E. Accessories:
1. Lifting eyes.
2. Companion flanges.
3. Pump suction piping with vortex breaker, isolation valve, strainer, and flexible connector.
4. Purnp discharge piping with check valve, isolation valve, and liquid-filled pressure gage
graduated in pounds force per square inch.
5. Pump-discharge bypass relief valve with orifice plate.
6. Makeup Water Assembly:
a. Factory-mounted modulating valve with mechanical level control, external float
cage, and stainless-steel float.
b. Factory-mounted, electric, pilot-operated, solenoid valve with factory-mounted,
probe-type water-level controller.
C. Factory -mounted, pneumatic modulating valve with factory-mounted water-level
controller.
d. Factory-mounted, three-valve bypass and inlet strainer.
7. Steam Pressure-Reducing Valve(s): Steam operated with three-valve bypass, and sized to
reduce boiler outlet pressure to the deaerator design pressure.
8. Tank Overflow Drain: Sized to relieve full capacity at operating pressure.
9. Safety Valve(s): ASME labeled and sized to relieve full capacity of pressure-reducing
valve.
10. Vents: Manual and automatic vent valves.
11. Vacuum breaker.
12. Meters and Gages:
a. Full-height, water-level gage glass,reflex flat type, and stop valve set.
b. Liquid-filled industrial thermometer graduated in Fahrenheit mounted to measure
temperature in storage and steam section of tank.
C. Pressure gage graduated in pounds force per square inch mounted to measure
pressure in steam section of tank.
13. Provision for chemical injection quill.
14. Chemical injection quill.
15. Sampling connection with valve.
16. Tank drain connection with valve.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-4 05/13/05
I. Gaskets: Furnish one replacement gasket(s)for each gasketed opening.
Gage Glass: Furnish one replacement glass(es)for each gage glass.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
13. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. of Aqua-Chem Inc.
2. Bryan Steam LLC.
3. Deaerating Designs; a division of Precision Boilers,Inc.
4. PVI Industries, LLC.
5. Skidmore.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Horizontal , spray, single-compartment deaerator and feedwater pumps and controls to supply
feedwater to deaerator].
B. Material for Wetted Components: Components in contact with water that has not been
deaerated shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel.
C. Vent Condenser: Stainless steel, with automatic and manual vent valves.
D. Deaerator:
1. Material: Welded carbon steel.
2. Additional Corrosion Protection:
a. 0.19-inch (4.8-mm) thickness allowance.
b. Electrolytic corrosion-inhibitor anode.
3. Access: Manhole in deaerator and storage tank for access to internal components for
inspection and service.
4. Factory-Applied Insulation and Jacket: Minimum thickness of 2 inches (50 mm) for
mineral-fiber pipe and tank insulation. Cover insulation with painted steel jacket.
5. Factory-Installed Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S
(seamless), Grade B; or ASTM A 106, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 40; with threaded
joints and fittings.
a. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4, Class 125.
b. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3, Class 150.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-3 05/13/05
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of Ank
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For deaerators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. ASME Compliance: [ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for systems more than 15 psig (104 kPa)]
[ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for systems equal to or less than 15 psig (104 kPa)].
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect flanges, pipe openings, nozzles, bearings, and couplings from damage during shipping
and storage.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
C. Deliver deaerators as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15525 - DEAERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged,factory-assembled deaerators.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Feedwater Pump: Pump that moves feedwater from the deaerator to the boiler.
B. Transfer Pump: Pump that moves feedwater from the surge tank to the deaerator.
C. NPSH: Net-positive suction head.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated makeup water, feedwater, and
steam flow rates; working pressure; tank capacities; storage capacity in minutes; temperature
and NPSH required; pump performance curves with selection points clearly indicated; furnished
specialties; and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For deaerators, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer; include
plans, elevations, sections, details, dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, and
attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing deaerator bases.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that deaerators,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces as indicated in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Deaerators
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15525-1 05/13/05
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical
connections for compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Check bearing lubrication.
4. Verify proper motor rotation.
5. Start up service.
6. Report results in writing.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust boiler water-level controls to properly stage unit.
B. Set field-adjustable, makeup water and cooling-water controls.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment internally; remove coatings applied for protection during shipping and storage,
foreign material, and oily residue according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Clean strainers.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain feedwater units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION 15520
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Feedwater Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package' - 2323 15520-5 05/13/05
11. Microprocessor-based controller.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before feedwater unit installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-
bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes,
and other conditions affecting feedwater unit performance, maintenance, and operations.
I. Final feedwater unit locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact
locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
?. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install feedwater unit level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolator pads with a minimum static deflection of [025 inch
(6.35 mm)]. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." '"
C. Install unit to permit access for maintenance.
D. Support piping independent of pumps.
E. Install base-mounted pumps on concrete bases with grouted base frames.
F. Install parts and accessories shipped loose.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect makeup water piping and cooling-water piping with reduced-pressure backflow
preventers.
D. Install overflow drain piping to nearest floor drain.
E. Install vents and extend to outdoors; terminate with elbow turned down and an insect screen.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Feedwater Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 lSS20-4 05/13/05
Lattner Boiler Manufacturing.
4. PVI Industries,LLC.
5. Skidmore.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested unit consisting of duplex Feedwater pumps,
controls, and the following features and accessories:
1. Bimetal dial-type thermometer graduated in Fahrenheit.
2. Level gage glass[, reflex flat type, with stops at top and bottom.
3. Lifting eyes.
4. Companion flanges.
5. Pump, suction and discharge isolation valve, inlet strainer, discharge check valve, and
liquid-filled pressure gage.
6. Makeup Water Assembly: Electric level controller and valve; with inlet strainer and
three-valve bypass.
7. Feedwater Heater: Sparge tube, thermostat, and control valve.
C. Horizontal Feedwater Pump: Base-mounted, single-stage, radially split-case-design centrifugal
pump; rated for [175-psig (1205-kPa)] minimum working pressure and a continuous water
temperature of at least [225 deg F(107 deg C)]; with the following features:
I. Impeller: Stainless steel.
2. Coupling: Close.
3. Seals: Mechanical.
4. Motor: Open dripproof enclosure. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section
"Motors."
D. Control panel shall be unit mounted and factory wired and include the following:
1. NEMA 250,Type 1 enclosure.
2. Single-point field power interface to fused disconnect switch.
a. Branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or
circuit breaker.
3. NEMA-rated motor controller for each motor, and include a hand-off-auto switch and
overcurrent protection.
a. Alternating controls for duplex units with intermittent operation as indicated by
control sequence.
4. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram.
5. Wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway. Make connections to motor with
liquidtight conduit.
6. Removable control mounting plate.
7. Visual indication of status and alarm with momentary test push button.
S. Audible alarm and silence switch.
9. Visual indication of elapsed ruts time, graduated in hours.
10. Fused control-circuit transformer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Feedwater Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15520-3 05/13/05
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For feedwater equipment to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test unit according to ASME PTC 12.1, "Closed
Feedwater Heaters."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. ASME Compliance: [ASME B31.1, 'Power Piping," for systems more than 15 psig (104 kPa)]
[ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for systems equal to or less than 15 psig (104 kPa)].
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed-metal surfaces and treat with
anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles
with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store units in dry location.
C. Retain protective flange covers and machined-surface protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FEEDWATER UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. of Aqua-Chem, Inc.
2. Flotronics, Inc. ,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Feedwater Equipment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15520-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15520—FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Feedwater pumps and receivers.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. NPSH: Net-positive suction head.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacity, temperature and
NPSH required, pump performance curves with selection points clearly indicated, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power,-signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that feedwater
equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15
Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
I. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
internal and external parts during a seismic event and the unit will be fully
operational after the event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and
their installation requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Feedwater Equipment
Phase l-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15520-1 05/13/05
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. Install
piping connections to allow service and maintenance of unfired steam generators.
C. Install piping with flanged connections at unfired steam generators.
D. Install shutoff valves at unfired steam generator inlet and outlet connections.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that unfired steam generators are installed and connected according to the
Contract Documents.
B. Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain unfired steam generators as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining unfired steam
generators.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15516
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Unfired Steam Generator
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15516-6 05/13/05
A. Provide a Y-Pattern strainer ahead of the steam control valve. Strainer shall be full line
size of the steam piping entering the unfired steam generator.
B. Strainer shall be 250-psig (1725-kPa) working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B
cast-iron body; stainless-steel screen, No. 20 mesh for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and
manufacturer's recommended perforations for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger; tapped
blowoff plug. Threaded connections for strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and
flanged connections for strainers NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Pressure Gauges: Provide factory installed steam pressure gauges with shut-off cocl<s.
Steam gauges shall be provided for both the primary steam (tube-side) and the generated
steam (shell-side).
B. Manual Blowdown Valves: Provide a 1-1/2" stainless steel ball valve and a 1-1/2" iron
body, slow opening, blowdown valve piped in series
1. Provide factory installed stainless steel blowdown piping from bottom of shell to
the blowdown valves.
C. Vacuum Breaker: Provide factory installed vacuum breaker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for
structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of
unfired steam generators.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNFIRED STEAM GENERATOR INSTALLATION
A. Install unfired steam generators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install shell-and-tube unfired steam generators on housekeeping pads with provisions to
drain shell.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Unfired Steam Generator
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15516-5 05/13/05
B. Provide safety relief valves of size and capacity in accordance with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code Section I. Safety relief valve(s) shall be capable of relieving the total
BTU output of the unfired steam generator.
C. Unfired steam generators with total capacity below 7,499 pounds per hour of generated
steam shall be provided with safety valve(s) as follows:
1. Safety relief valves shall be bronze, Class 250, with threaded inlet and outlet;
forged copper-alloy disc; fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range
and positive shutoff; factory set and sealed.
D. Unfired steam generators with total capacity equal to or greater than 7,500 pounds per
hour of generated steam shall be provided with safety valve(s) as follows:
1. Safety relief valves shall be cast iron, Class 250; forged copper-alloy disc with
bronze nozzle; fully enclosed, cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure
range and positive shutoff; raised-face flanged inlet and threaded outlet
connections; factory set and sealed.
2.8 STEAM TRAPS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory installed steam
traps by one of the following:
1. Armstrong International, Inc.
2. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
3. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
4. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
B. Provide a float and thermostatic steam trap at the outlet of the source steam coil. Steam
trap shall be sized for the full capacity of the required source steam scheduled on the
Contract Documents.
C. Provide a float and thermostatic steam trap before the source steam control valve to
prevent condensate from damaging source steam control valve. Steam trap shall be sized
for a minimum of 100 pounds per hour of condensate.
D. Float and thermostatic traps shall be ASTM A 126, cast-iron body and bolted cap;
renewable, stainless-steel float mechanism with renewable, hardened stainless-steel head
and seat; maximum operating pressure of 125 prig (860 kPa); balanced-pressure,
stainless-steel or monel thermostatic bellow element.
1. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F (25 deg C) of superheat
and resisting water hammer without sustaining damage.
2.9 STEAM STRAINER
lowwk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Unfired Steam Generator
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15516-4 05/13/05
A. Provide an electronic level controller consisting of a stainless steel water column wired to
a factory installed feedwater solenoid valve. Provide a check valve factory installed
between the feedwater valve and unfired steam generator.
1. Stainless steel water column shall be provided with gauge glass and trycocks.
2. Provide factory installed stainless steel blowdown piping from water column.
Provide stainless steel ball type blowdown valve.
3. Electronic level controller shall be wired to an alarm bell and spare relay to signal
the DDC Building Automation System in the event of low water condition.
B. Provide a high water cutoff including an electronic probe which shall close an air
operated power to open, spring to close ball valve.
1. High water cut off shall close the factory installed ball valve in the event of a high
water alarm.
C. Packaged unfired steam generator shall be provided with an independent steam pressure
safety system that will automatically shut off the steam control valve if the steam
pressure in the shell is 5 psig over the operating steam system pressure.
1. Refer to Contract Documents for operating steam system pressure.
2. Setting shall be adjustable.
D. Provide a pneumatically operated, fully modulating steam control valve to modulate the
primary steam to maintain the desired output steam pressure within 2 PSIG of design
setpoint.
1. Provide pneumatic operator suitable for use with 20 psig main control air.
Pneumatic operator shall come complete with main air and controlled air signal
pressure gauges.
E. Provide an automatic timed unfired steam generator blowdown system consisting of a
24-hour, 7-day time clock and a 2 to 180 second interval timer and solenoid valve for
automatically blowing down the unfired steam generator.
1. Provide the automatic blowdown system factory wired to a NEMA 1 control
cabinet. Provide control cabinet with a single point 120 volt power connection.
2.7 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory installed safety
relief valves by one of the following:
1. Armstrong International, Inc.
2. Kunkle Inds. Inc.; Kunkle Valve Division.
3. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Unfired Steam Generator
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15516-3 05/13/05
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide packaged unfired
steam generators by one of the following:
1. Cemline Corporation, Cheswick, PA.
2. Patterson-Kelley Co.; Div. of Harsco Corp., East Stroudsburg, PA
2.2 GENERAL
A. Packaged unfired steam generator shall be of the U-tube design.
1. Generated steam in the shell and primary steam in the coils.
B. Packaged unfired steam generator shall be completely factory assembled and ready for
connection of primary steam, primary condensate, process (generated) steam, vessel
blowdown, drain, and feedwater.
C. All components that are exposed to the process (generated) steam shall be stainless steel.
2.3 SHELL-AND-TUBE CONSTRUCTION
A. Shell and Head Materials: Stainless-steel shell and cast iron or cast bronze heads.
B. Tube and Tube Sheet Materials: Tubes shall be 18 gauge, BWG 304 stainless steel, 3/a"
O.D.
1. Tube sheets shall be type 304 stainless steel.
2. Heat exchanger surfaces shall be computed based upon appropriate fouling factors
for fluid, temperature, and tube velocity as recommended by the Standards of
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association, except when specifically indicated
otherwise on the Contract Documents.
2.4 JACKET AND INSULATION
A. Packaged unfired steam generator shell shall be insulated with 3" fiberglass insulation
covered by a 20 gauge steel jacket with painted finish.
2.5 BASE
A. Packaged unfired steam generator shall be mounted on a welded steel base. Base shall
allow for the primary condensate steam trap outlet to discharge a minimum of 18" above
the unit base.
2.6 CONTROLS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Unfired Steam Generator
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15516-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15516 — PACKAGED UNFIRED STEAM GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged unfired steam generators for HVAC applications.
B. This Section includes replacement of source steam control valve, safety relief valve
replacement, steam trap replacement, and control system modifications required to
convert the existing relocated unfired steam generator from 25 psig source steam to
100psig source steam.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
B. Maintenance Data: For packaged unfired steam generators to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional
requirements of packaged unfired steam generators and are based on the specific
equipment indicated.
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label packaged unfired steam generators to comply
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Packaged Unfired Steam Generator
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15516-1 05/13/05
G. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage.a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
7. Energize electric circuits.
8. Adjust operating controls.
9. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F
(60 deg C) unless piping system application requires higher temperature. AN
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15487
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Heat Exchangers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15487-6 05/13/05
C. Install seismic restraints for heat exchangers. Anchor to substrate.
D. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tank shells of heat
exchangers with storage. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into shells.
Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge
onto closest floor drain.
E. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for heat exchangers without storage. Extend
relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto
closest floor drain.
F. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
G. Install-vacuum relief valves in heat-exchanger, storage tank shells that have copper lining.
H. Install heat-exchanger drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over
floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 1S Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
drain valves.
I. Install thermometers on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 15 Sec-
tion "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
J. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters
and Gages" for pressure gages.
K. Fill heat exchanger with water.
L. Charge compression tank with air.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-
circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
D. Connect steam and condensate piping with shutoff valves and unions.
E. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
F. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Divi-
sion 16 Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit servicing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Heat Exchangers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15487-5 05/13/05
C. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include
ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
D. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materi-
als for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and out-
lets.
E. Tank Exterior Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
2.4 HEAT-EXCHANGER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat in-
put and include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating. Select
relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank.
1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of
combination relief valve.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.
Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in pip-
ing.
1. Exception: Omit if heat exchanger has integral vacuum-relieving device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.2 HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers on concrete bases, level and plumb, according to layout drawings,
original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clear-
ances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
B. Anchor heat exchangers to substrate.
Cooley ickinson Hospital
Y p Domestic Water Heat Exchangers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15487-4 05/13/05
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Taco, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett, Inc.
2.2 INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Packaged, commercial, indirect-fired water heater with negligible storage
capacity; and heat exchanger for heating water with steam. Model No. 665DW-PP-
PTW50R, each heat exchanger shall provide 63-GPM based on 40°F-140°F temperature
rise and 15-PSIG steam pressure. Assembly shall include Rada mixing valve assembly
with by-pass feature.
B. Construction: ASME code, with 150-psig- (1035-kPa-) minimum working-pressure rat-
ing. Include nozzle or other arrangement for heat exchanger.
C. Heat Exchanger: Carbon steel shell for steam and straight, 1.6 BWG admirality brass
tubes and tube sheet.
1. Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than steam supply pressure.
2. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with water heater shell for
piping connections, relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, blowdown, vent, and
controls as required. Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling.
a. NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1,
pipe threads.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for
steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper
and copper-alloy flanges.
D. Temperature Control: Feed forward differential pressure diaphragm control valve is ca-
pable of maintaining outlet-water temperature within 5 deg F (2.8 deg C) of setting.
E. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
F. Miscellaneous Components: Strainer, steam trap, valves, piping, and thermostatic mix-
ing valve.
G. Stand: Factory fabricated for floor mounting not to exceed 34-inch width.
2.3 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-
installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating
pressure at tank.
B. Construction: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working-pressure rating.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Heat Exchangers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15487-3 05/13/05
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of heat
exchangers and are based on specific units indicated. Other manufacturers' products
complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitu-
tions."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat-exchanger, hot-water storage tanks to
comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"
Division 1.
E. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or re-
place components of heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within speci-
fied warranty period.
C. Warranty Period: 1-year material/wokmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Instantaneous Water Heaters:
a. Armstrong. "Flo-Rite-Temp".
2. Expansion Tanks:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
P Domestic Water Heat Exchangers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15487-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15487 - DOMESTIC WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:
1. Instantaneous water heaters.
2. Accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of heat exchanger. Include rated capacities; ship-
ping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail heat-exchanger assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manu-
facturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of heat exchangers certifying that prod-
ucts furnished comply with requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of heat exchangers through one source from a
single manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Heat Exchangers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15487-1 05/13/05
e"41 14 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Dissimilar Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both
piping materials.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping next to equipment and accessories to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect air piping to equipment and accessories with unions and shutoff valves. Install
with strainers where indicated.
1. Install thermorneters on compressor discharge piping, on receiver tanks, and where
indicated.
2. Install pressure gage on new discharge piping.
C. Install safety valves in receiver tanks, in quantity and size to relieve capacity not less than
that of connected compressor.
D. Install automatic drain valves on receivers, dryers, and other locations indicated.
Discharge condensate over nearest floor drain.
E. Install specialties as indicated.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and adjust piping safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls.
B. Piping System Tests: Test new piping. Cap and fill compressed-air piping with oil-free,
dry air, or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above system operating
pressure, but not less than 150 psig (1035 kPa). Isolate test source and let stand for 4
hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure and hold
pressure for 2 hours with no drop in pressure.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory
results are obtained.
END OF SECTION 15481
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Piping
Surgery/beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15481-5 05/13/05
1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Copper tube, copper-tube fittings, bronze-tube Awk
flanges, and soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
3. Compressed-Air Supply to Equipment: Locking-handle, safety-exhaust ball valves.
4. Do not use check valves in piping between reciprocating air con-ipressors and air
receivers.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Install air and drain piping with one percent slope downward in direction of airflow.
C. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of airflow, with
bottoms of both pipes and reducer flush. tow
D. Connect branch air piping to mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap
at end of each main, branch, and low point in piping.
E. Install supports and anchors according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Do not exceed the following spacing between pipe hangers:
1. Copper Tube: For the following sizes:
a. 1-1/4-Inch NPS (DN32) and Smaller: 72 inches (1800 mm) horizontal and
10 feet (3 m) vertical.
b. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40) and Larger: 10 feet (3 m) horizontal and 10 feet
(3 m) vertical.
F. Install valves according to Division 15 Section "Valves."
G. Install expansion joints and anchors according to Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion
Joints."
H. Install thermometers and pressure gages according to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages."
I. Install plumbing specialties according to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Piping
Surgery/beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15481-4 05/13/05
!'' 2.4 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Copper-Tube Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint, pressure type.
B. Bronze-Tube Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300.
C. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.
2.5 VALVES
A. General-Duty Valves: Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for compressed-air-service
valves not specified in this Section and for valves for other fluids.
B. Special-Duty, Compressed-Air Valves: Include PTFE seats and comply with the
following:
1. Ball Valves, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110; 2-piece bronze body
with blowout-proof stem; 100% full port; chrome-plated, solid-brass; threaded
ends; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum WOG pressure rating.
2. Check Valves, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Type 4 or
nonstandard T-pattern, swing check; Class 125, bronze body with composition-to-
metal seat and threaded ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. ASME Code Compliance: Provide compressed-air piping components complying with
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
B. ASME Code Compliance: Provide compressed-air piping components complying with
the following:
1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
C. Install flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below, except where
otherwise specified.
D. Use metal compressed-air piping between air compressors and air receivers. Using plastic
piping for this application is prohibited.
E. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air, Distribution Piping: Use the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Piping
Surgery/beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15481-3 05/13/05
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified AW%h,
standards.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Compressed-Air, General-Duty Valves:
a. Jomar International
2. Compressed-Air-Service, Locking-Handle, Safety-Exhaust Valves:
a. Jomar International.
2.2 PIPING, GENERAL
A. ASME Code Compliance: Provide compressed-air piping components complying with
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
B. ASME Code Compliance: Provide compressed-air piping components complying with
the following:
1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
2. Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: ASME B31.1, "Power Piping."
3. High-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: ASME B31.1, "Power Piping."
2.3 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), Seamless, water tube, hard-
drawn temper.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Piping
Surgery/beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15481-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15481 - COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and specialties for building compressed-air systems
operating at 200 psig (1380 kPa) and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping and
specialty labels.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for piping and specialty labels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for
piping operating at pressure of 125 psig (860 kPa) or less and at temperature of
200 deg F (93.3 deg C) or less.
B. Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for piping
operating at pressure between 125 and 200 psig (860 and 1380 kPa), or at temperature
of more than 200 deg F (93.3 deg C).
C. High-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for piping
operating at pressure greater than 200 psig (1380 kPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: For compressed-air equipment and piping, including
relationship to other services that serve same work areas.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Piping
Surgery/beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15481-1 05/13/05
C. Operate and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment discovered by service representative.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup
services and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1
Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15465
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-8 05/13/05
F. Ground equipment.
oplk 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,
use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
G. Arrange for electric-power connections to equipment that requires power. Electric
power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of
equipment, including piping and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Perform the following final checks before startup:
1. Verify that specified tests of piping systems are completed.
2. Check for piping connection leaks.
3. Check V belts for proper tension.
4. Check that compressor inlet filters and piping are clear.
S. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and
that equipment is properly attached to substrate.
6. Check safety valves for correct settings. Ensure settings are greater than air-
compressor discharge pressure, but not greater than rating of system components.
7. Check for proper seismic restraints.
8. Test operation of equipment safety controls and devices.
9. Drain receiver tanks.
10. Check for adequate room ventilation.
B. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no instructions are
prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Energize circuits.
2. Start and run equipment through complete sequence of operations.
3. Check for excessive vibration and noise. Correct problems.
4. Check air pressures.
5. Manually operate safety valves.
6. Adjust operating controls, including pressure settings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-7 05/13/05
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for air compressors and accessories. Refer
to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Equipment: Comply with ASME B19.1 or ASME B19.3 as appropriate.
B. Install air compressors, and dryers on concrete bases. Set and connect units according to
manufacturers' written instructions. Install units plumb, level, and firmly anchored in
locations indicated. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances. Orient so
equipment, controls, and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Anchor air compressors, receivers, and other equipment to substrate.
D. Install seismic restraints as indicated.
E. Support air compressors using the following vibration-control devices, unless otherwise
indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."
1. Install tank-mounted compressors, 5 hp or less, with spring isolators.
F. Install accessories and specialties as indicated. Set and connect units according to
manufacturers' written instructions. Install units plumb, level, and firmly anchored in ,,,k
locations indicated. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances. Orient so
controls needing service are accessible.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping next to equipment and accessories to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect air piping to equipment and accessories with unions and shutoff valves. Install
with strainers where indicated.
1. Install thermometers on compressor discharge piping, on receiver tanks, and where
indicated.
2. Install pressure gages on compressor discharge piping, on receiver tanks, and
where indicated.
C. Install safety valves in receiver tanks, in quantity and size to relieve capacity not less than
that of connected compressor.
D. Install automatic drain valves on receivers, dryers, and other locations indicated.
Discharge condensate over nearest floor drain.
E. Install accessories as indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-6 05/13/05
low free). A hot gas by-pass valve is provided to maintain a 32-deg. F evaporator
temperature. The dryer is self-regulating for large load swings, and includes a 3-micron
filter/separator with automatic condensate drain, On/off switch, power on light, and
dewpoint temperature indicator.
B. Filter Package: The medical filter system consists of a duplex series of filters and pressure
regulators. Air enters the system and is directed to either bank of filters controlled by a
ball valve. The first stage filter removes solids and liquid particles. The second stage of
filters removes submicronic particles and aerosols. The third and final filter is carbon
activated to remove unpleasant odors. Safety relief valves and a differential pressure
switch in the event of over-pressurization, or a reduction of air flow. Maximum
operating temperature is 125 F and maximum operating pressure is 150 PSIG.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Include accessories with working-pressure rating not less than system pressure
at location where used, and compatible with equipment and piping system used.
2.7 SPECIALTIES
A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels"
construction, National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of bronze
body with poppet safety valve for compressed-air service.
1. Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver
pressure rating.
B. Automatic Drain Valves: Corrosion-resistant metal body and internal parts, rated for
200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of
collected condensate.
C. Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct acting, spring loaded, manual pressure-setting
adjustment, and rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) inlet pressure, except where otherwise
indicated. Provide regulator for O.R. Suite and Lab equipment.
D. Filters: 0.5 micron line filter with auto drain.
E. Isolation Valve: Provide source shut-off valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-5 05/13/05
4. Instrumentation: Include air-receiver pressure gage, discharge-line pressure gage, _4"k
air-filter maintenance indicator, hour meter, compressor discharge air and coolant
temperature gage, and control transformer.
D. Receiver Tanks: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels"
construction and bear appropriate code symbols, with pressure gage, pressure-reducing
valve, and automatic drain.
E. Factory Prepiping: Entire unit, except where otherwise indicated.
2.3 SAFETY VALVES
A. Safety Valves: Poppet type complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, bear appropriate labeling, and factory sealed after testing.
2.4 SCROLL AIR COMPRESSORS
A. Description: STD-0508 pre-fabricated compressed air system. Tank-mounted, non-
lubricated, oil-less, scroll air compressors, with inlet silencer filter, safety valve, discharge
pressure gage, pressure regulator, and shutoff valve, and with sealed, oil-free bearings.
Provide minimum 100-psi to O.R. surgical articulating arm equipment and lab glass
washer. Provide 50-psi to lab ultracentrifuge.
B. Compressor: Provide two 5 HP, 3PH, 60 Cylce, 460 V, 1750 RPM, ODP NEMA
construction motors with belt guards. Each compressor shall be capable of delivering
14.5 SCFM at 120 PSIG.
C. Receiver Tank Orientation: 120 gallon pressure storage tank of ASME construction in
horizontal position.
D. Enclosure: Steel sheet, lined with acoustic material protected by perforated steel sheet,
inlet and outlet air silencers, and finned-cylinder head cover.
E. Controls: UL labeled control panel in a NEMA 12 enclosure, operable circuit breaker
w/door interlock, control circuit transformer w/fused primary/secondary coils, H-O-A
switch, magnetic starter w/3 leg overload protection, hour meter and motor running
light, multiple position selector switch (normal, automatic alternation, or manual
operation).
2.5 AIR DRYERS
A. Air Dryers, Refrigerated Type: Model MDR0158 rated for 15SCFM each dryer. Air
drying system provides air at a 35-38 degree F pressure dewpoint. System includes dual
dryers connected with individual by-pass capability. Dual Dryer Package shall be
mounted to the common frame, brazed and purged with nitrogen. The refrigerated
compressed air dryer is non-cycling, direct expansion, using R-134a refrigerant (CFC
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-4 05/13/05
ew PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Oilless, Scroll Air Compressors:
a. Powerex., Inc. STD-0508
2. Air Dryers:
a. Powerex., Inc. MDR-0158
2.2 AIR COMPRESSORS, GENERAL
A. General: Factory-assembled and -tested packaged units; duplex units; and with
capacities, features, and electrical characteristics indicated.
B. Construction of Equipment: ASME B19.1, "Safety Standard for Air Compressor
Systems"; or ASME B19.3, "Safety Standard for Compressors for Process Industries," as
appropriate.
C. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions.
Comply with NEMA ICS 2, "Industrial Controls and Systems: Controllers, Contactors
and Overload Relays, Rated Not More than 200 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC"; and
UL 508, "Industrial Control Equipment."
1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of
equipment package.
2. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, "Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures," Type 12
control panel, except where a higher degree of enclosure is specified.
3. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage
release feature and motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect and short-circuit
protective device.
a. Control Voltage: 120 V, ac or less, using integral control power
transformer.
b. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
C. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control
panel, plus pilot device for automatic control as indicated.
d. Automatic Alternating Starting: Switch lead compressor for duplex air
compressors.
e. Reduced-Voltage Starting: Instead of full-voltage starting, where indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-3 05/13/05
B. Wiring Diagrams: For each item of equipment with electric power supply. Include
ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final
installation. Differentiate between factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: For compressed-air equipment and piping, including
relationship to other services that serve same work areas.
D. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report: As required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
E. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
compressed-air equipment and accessories and are based on specific types and models
indicated. Other products with equal performance characteristics, made by specified
manufacturers, may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. Electrical Component Standard: NFPA 70.
C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified
standards. ,
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store equipment and large accessories on factory-installed shipping skids and
small accessories in factory-fabricated fiberboard containers.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
Deliver materials to Owner.
1. Air-Compressor, Inlet-Filter Elements: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15465 - COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes equipment and accessories for building compressed-air systems
operating at 200 psig (1380 kPa) and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for equipment and
accessory labels.
2. Division 1S Section "Motors" for electric motors that are an integral part of
packaged system components.
3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for equipment and accessory
ol', labels.
4. Division 15 Section "Compressed-Air Piping" for compressed-air piping and
specialties.
S. Division 15 Section "Medical Air Equipment" for air compressors, equipment, and
accessories for medical compressed-air systems.
6. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for equipment, piping, and
accessories for building temperature controls.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Systems: ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for
systems operating at pressure of 125 psig (860 kPa) or less and at temperature of
200 deg F (93.3 deg C) or less.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated. Include rated capacities of air compressors,
aftercoolers, air dryers, and accessories; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories. Indicate dimensions, required clearances, methods
of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Compressed-Air Equipment
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15465-1 05/13/05
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
END OF SECTION 15446
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SUMP PUMPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15446 - 6 05/13/05
H. Packaged Drainage Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to storm drainage
piping.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Storm drainage piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section
"Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and spe-
cialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and
connect to storm drainage piping.
2. Install swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sump pump discharge. In-
clude spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN65)
and larger.
3. Install swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each automatic, packaged pump
discharge.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in Divi-
sion 16 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as re-
quired for system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is
bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital SUMP PUMPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15446 - S 05/13/05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before pump installation.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for sump pumps. Refer to Division 3 Sec-
tion "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
B. Concrete for pits and sumps is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Auk
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of mo-
tors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sump Pumps: Suspend pumps from basin covers. Make di-
rect connections to storm drainage piping.
E. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump floor. Make direct connec-
tions to storm drainage piping.
F. Sump Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to storm drainage piping. Brace interior
of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or col-
lapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install
so top surface of cover is flush with finished floor.
G. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to storm drainage piping. Refer
to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete work. Set basin cover and
fasten to top edge of concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with finished
floor.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SUMP PUMPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15446 - 4 05/13/05
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through
full range of pump performance curves.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units be-
fore shipping.
F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS — GROUND WATER
A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sump pump complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for
submersible sump pumps.
I. Pump Arrangement: Simplex.
2. Casing: Cast iron with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit
flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange suitable for plain-end pipe
connection arranged for vertical discharge.
3. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, open
nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking
cap screw.
4. Construction: Stainless steel with stainless-steel or other corrosion-resistant impel-
ler, stainless-steel inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller,
and discharge companion flange suitable for plain-end pipe connection arranged
for vertical discharge.
S. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball
bearings.
6. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
7. Motor: 1/2-HP, Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload
protection; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with
grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
8. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof
cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
9. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
10. Basin Cover: Cast iron or steel with discharge outlet. Refer to "Sump Pump Ba-
sins" Article for other requirements.
2.4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and
check valves. Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. In-
clude features and devices indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SUMP PUMPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15446 - 3 05/13/05
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional re- A0%,
quirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated.
Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Submersible Sump Pumps:
a. Little Giant; 10E-CIA-SFS.
b. Zoeller Company.
2.2 SUMP PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sump
pump units complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construc-
tion for permanent installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps avail-
able only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion
flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SUMP PUMPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15446 - 2 05/13/05
SECTION 15446 - SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sump pumps for the building storm drainage systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for sump pump motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance curves, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type and size of pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differ-
entiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SUMP PUMPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 1S446 - 1 05/13/05
2. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids
OOW is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or
drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
J. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
E. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
2. Open circulating line valve if pump should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motor.
4. Open discharge valve slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
6. Close circulating line valve once there is sufficient flow through pump to prevent
overheating.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15441
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Distribution Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15441-5 05/13/05
brackets or supports as required. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports"
for materials.
D. Suspend vertical in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous-thread hanger
rods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for materials.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific con-
nection requirements:
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe
equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 15 Section "Water
Distribution Piping."
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and
throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected
piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves and Divi-
sion 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pres-
sure-gage _tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction
and discharge piping around pumps. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages" for pressure gages and gage connectors.
B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
C. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.
B. Clean strainers on suction piping.
C. Controls: Set for automatic starting and stopping operation.
D. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Distribution Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15441-4 05/13/05
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units be-
fore shipping.
F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.
2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A. Description: Taco 112B Horizontal in-line circulator, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa)
minimum working pressure and minimum continuous water temperature of 225 deg F
(107 deg Q.
1. Construction: Radially split, all-bronze casing.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 36/B 36M, rolled brass; overhung, single suction, and keyed to
shaft.
3. Seal: Mechanical.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft, with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze-journal or thrust type.
6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft mis-
alignment.
7. Motor: 1/3hp, Single speed, with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indi-
cated; and resiliently mounted to pump casing.
a. Motor Size: For motors larger than 1/2 hp, select motor size that will not
overload through full range of pump performance curve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connec-
tions before pump installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for peri-
odic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B. Support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
C. Suspend horizontal in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous-thread hanger
rods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Distribution Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 15441-3 05/13/05
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ""
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manu-
facturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional re-
quirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated.
Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DEI_,IVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. In-Line Circulators:
a. Taco, Inc.
2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal pump units; com-
plying with UL 778; suitable for potable-water service; with all-bronze or stainless-steel
construction and components in contact with water made of corrosion-resistant materi-
als.
B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors" with built-in ther-
mal-overload protection appropriate for motor size and duty.
C. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with
flanged ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
D. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Distribution Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15441-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15441 -WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pumps for the building potable-water systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Sections for power-supply wiring, field-installed disconnects, electrical
devices, and motor controllers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected mod-
els; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for
each type and size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchor-
ages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differ-
entiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Distribution Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15441-1 05/13/05
I Text: Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational require-
ments, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and im-
proper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
2. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, Mechani-
cal Identification" for nameplates and signs.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled [trap seal primer systems] and their installation, including piping
and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to con-
firm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, re-
place with new units, and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain trap seal primer systems and interceptors. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 15430
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15430-19 05/06/05
R. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing spe-
cialties.
S. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball,
gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible
locations. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, check, and gate
valves.
T. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball valve in inlet and drain piping from
outlet to floor drain.
U. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless
trap is indicated.
V. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16
Sections.
G. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories.
1. Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment name-
plate or sign on or near each backflow preventer, thermostatic water mixing valve, water
tempering valve, trap seal primer system.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-18 05/06/05
J. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with
finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
K. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through
floors with waterproof membrane.
L. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drain-
age. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mrn): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
C. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but
not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where pene-
trated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
N. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufac-
turer's written installation instructions.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
O. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush
with finished floor.
2. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral
cleanout on outlet.
P. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building sub-
strate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indi-
cated.
Q. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15430-17 05/06/05
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping join-
ing materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems
and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Com-
ply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with
air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at
least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap
device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not accept-
able for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid
valve.
E. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust ,
valve for proper flow.
F. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide
cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of
adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.
G. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors if indicated.
H. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the fol-
lowing, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS, 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for lar-
ger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (1S m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and
smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
I. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for pip-
ing below floors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-16 05/06/05
1. Pipe, Fittings, and Valve end Connectors: Shall be manufactured from a polypro-
pylene compund which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1401, Cell Class
PP340B53653.
2. Valve Seats: PFA type teflon, and O-ring seals shall be made of teflon-impregnated
viton to insure safe operation under dry conditions.
3. Pipe: Conform to the dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 for schedule 80.
4. Fittings: Pressure rated to be compatible with schedule 80 pressure pipe and shall
have dimensional capability to contain electrical fusion coils.
5. Joining Method: Pipe and fittings are joined by the use of electrical fusion coils
enenergized by a low voltage supply.
6. Uniform Installation: All pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be the product
of one manufacturer. Install and test pipe system in accordance with manufac-
turer's recommendations.
7. Plastic Pipe Supports: V-Bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 1.8 gauge continuous
support channel, B-Line B3106 and B3106V, to form a continuous support system
for plastic pipe or flexible tubing.
8. Supplementary Structural Supports: Design and fabricate supports using structural
quality steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by Cooper B-Line. Chan-
nels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 steel, 1-518 inch by
1-5/8 inch or greater as required by loading conditions. Use clamps and fittings de-
signed for use with the strut system.
2.17 OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Acorn Engineering Company.
B. General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with supply fittings complying with
ASME A112.18.1M. Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipment con-
nections, and wood-blocking reinforcement.
C. Hemo-Dialysis Equipment Outlet Boxes: Acorn #8195 With hose connection, drain,
and the following: Acorn
1. Box and Faceplate: Stainless steel.
2. Shutoff Fitting: PVC ball valve with viton seals.
3. Supply Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 (DN 15)
water tubing.
4. Drain: NPS 2 (DN 50) standpipe, P-trap, and direct waste connection to drainage
piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
'*. Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-15 05/06/05
1. Application: Penthouse Mechanical Room FAI Plenum.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 3001-15-NB-FBS-U-Y.
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
S. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 12-inch.
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-Hub outlet.
2.15 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof Drains, RD-1: Comply with ASME A112.21.2M.
1. Application: Main flat roof areas.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 1010-C-R-U-CID.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Cast iron.
4. Dimensions of Body: 16-inch.
5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Dome Material: Cast iron.
8. Expansion Joint: Required.
9. Extension Collars: Required .
10. Underdeck Clamp: Required .
11. Sump Receiver: Required.
2.16 RODI WATER TUBING (OFI)
A. GF PPRO: ASTM D 4101, polypropylene plastic, pure water system as manufactured by
George Fischer Sloane, Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15430-14 05/06/05
kow 3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 8.5-inches.
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
15. Trap Material: Cast iron.
16. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
17. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
G. Floor Drains, FD-E: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Sub-Sterile, Autoclave & Eqp. 1079.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 3101Y-04-21.
b. Mifab
w 3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
S. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
11. Top Shape: Round.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 8.5-inches with center hole for waste.
13. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-Cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
15. Trap Material: Cast-iron.
16. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
17. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
2.14 AREA DRAINS
A. Area Drains, 3"-AD: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15430-13 05/06/05
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 8.5-inches.
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
15. Trap Material: Cast iron.
16. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
17. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
E. Floor Drains, FD-D: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: CPD, Lab & Sterilizer Locations.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 3001Y-04.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: SS Type 304.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 12-inches.
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
15. Trap Material: Cast iron.
16. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
17. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
F. Floor Drains, 4"-FD-B: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Mechanical Room.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 2280-04-B-U.
b. Mifab
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' -2323 15430-12 05/06/05
13. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-Hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
14. Trap Material: Cast-iron.
15. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
16. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
B. Floor Drains, 2"-FD: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
L Application: Public Toilet Room Floor drain (Inside one-piece shower SH-1). Re-
fer to Section 15410/2.13.
C. Floor Drains, FD-A: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME Al 12.3.1.
1. Application: Public Toilet Rooms.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 2005Y-04-B-U.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Sediment Bucket: Not Required.
8. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
10. Top Shape: Round.
11. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 8-inches.
12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
13. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
14. Trap Material: Cast iron.
15. Trap Pattern: P-trap.
16. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
D. Floor Drains, 4"-FD: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Decon. Room.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 3020Y-04-B-U.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-11 05/06/05
1. Application: Floor cleanout,Wall cleanout, and installation in exposed piping.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.
3. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
4. Clamping Device: Required.
5. Outlet Connection: Threaded, Inside calk, Spigot.
6. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
8. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze.
9. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
10. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
L. Cleanouts: Comply with ASME Al 12.36.2M.
1. Application: Wall cleanout.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 4472-U-02-TP
3. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast bronze.
4. Outlet Connection: Taper Thread plug.
5. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel.
7. Cover Shape: Round.
2.13 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drains, FD-C: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Patient Toilet Room Floor Drain (Inside European Shower SH-2).
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; DX2010-02-A-B-U.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Sediment Bucket: Required.
8. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
10. Top Shape: Round.
11. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 5-inch.
12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' -2323 15430-10 05/06/05
G. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semio-
"'' pen top with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot
or threaded outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2
that will provide fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
1-1. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
1. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof as-
sembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-
inch (25-mm) enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar ex-
tension, with counterflashing.
J. Expansion Joints: ASME Al 12.21.21\4, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
K. Recessed Waste Receiver: (O.R. Steris Unit).
1. Acorn Series 819 waste box only, less supplies. Type 316 stainless steel with bead
blast interior. Removable wall flange of Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish,
hinged door with cylinder lock. 2-3/8" OD waste outlet with stainless steel P-trap.
Mount waste receiver 18-inches from finished floor to bottom of box.
2.11 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. ProSet Systems, Inc.
2. Linkseal.
B. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and
stack fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Cast-iron, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-
branch stack fitting with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-
release harness in branch.
a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for
plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.
2.12 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15430-9 05/06/05
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES Aowl%
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurized
metal-tube cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and
A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
C. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Hose Bibbs: Mifab Series MHY-90 or Woodford Series 26, Bronze body with replace-
able seat disc complying with ASME Al 12.18.1M for compression-type faucets. Include
NPS 1/2 solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig (860 kPa);
integral, nonremovable, drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose
threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Chrome plated.
2. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle.
3. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
4. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
5. Include integral wall flange with each chrome-plated hose bibb.
C. Air Vents: Float type for automatic air venting.
1. Bolted Construction: Bronze body with replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal float
and stainless-steel mechanism and seat; threaded NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet;
125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60 deg C); and
threaded vent outlet.
2. Welded Construction: Stainless-steel body with corrosion-resistant metal float,
stainless-steel mechanism and seat, threaded NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet, 150-
psig (1035-kPa) minimum pressure rating, and threaded vent outlet.
D. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where re-
quired, increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
E. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
piping and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.
F. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet,
and trap seal primer valve connection.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15430-8 05/06/05
rods to match wall thickness; concealed outlet; wall clamps; and factory-installed, non-
removable and manual drain-type, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with
ASSE 1011.
1. Box and Cover Finish: Polished chrome plate. Locate at roof level, Stair No. 2 for
window washing application.
2.8 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the fol-
lowing characteristics:
1. Manufacturers:
a. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
2. 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure.
3. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) solder joint.
5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
7. Distribution Unit: TP-2 requires 2-gravity lines; TP-3 requires 3-gravity lines; TP-4
requires 4-gravity lines.
8. 1/2-inch supply line shall be installed to drain to floor drain by gravity. Avoid bends
and traps in piping to ensure water supplies floor drain trap. Install trap primer in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.9 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, rated for 400-psig
(2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-
covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.
B. Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B_62 bronze body,
with NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose
threads on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.
C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig (1380-kPa)
minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with
NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side drain outlet and cap.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-7 05/06/05
1. Regulating Valve: Provide by HVAC Contractor.
2. Air Gap Fitting: J.R. Smith No. 3950. Run drain full size to mop receptor.
2.6 STRAINERS
A. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. In-
clude ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch (1.2-mm) round per-
forations, unless otherwise indicated. Install at recirculation pumps, water main entrance
before meter and at all sterilizer, washer and cart wash equipment.
1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum steam working pressure, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or
FDA-approved, epoxy coating and flanged ends.
4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.
a. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
2.7 KEY-OPERATION HYDRANTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Mifab
2. Woodford Manufacturing Co.
B. General: ASME A112.21.3M, key-operation hydrant with pressure rating of 125 psig
(860 kPa).
1. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25) threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads.
3. Operating Keys: One with each key-operation hydrant.
C. Nonfreeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: Mifab Series MHY-20, ASSE 1019, self-
drainable with flush-mounting box with cover, integral nonremovable hose-connection
vacuum breaker, casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, concealed outlet, and
wall clamp.
1. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for
automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
2. Box and Cover Finish: Polished chrome plate.
D. Hot and Cold, Nonfreeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: Woodford Series HCB67,
With deep flush-mounting box with cover; hot- and cold-water casings and operating
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-6 05/06/05
with standard or full-port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, threaded
or solder-joint ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bell 8: Gossett: Circuit Setter.
b. Taco Products: Accu-Flo.
2.4 WATER FILTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Water Systems.
2. Filtrine Manufacturing Company; Drinking Water Division.
3. U.S. Filter; Filterite Div.
B. General: Cartridge-type assemblies suitable for potable water. Include housing, fittings,
filter cartridges, and cartridge end caps.
C. Wall-Mounting Type: Housing head section with threaded inlet and outlet, mounting
bracket, and removable lower section for 20-inch- (250-mm-) long filter cartridge.
1. Housing Material: Plastic, 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum operating pressure.
2. Cartridge: Activated-charcoalfilter media, 20 inches (250 mm), 0.5-micron-
particulate removable rating.
3. Provide filter set at
2.5 THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Symmons Company, Inc.
2. Powers.
3. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
4. Leonard Valve Company.
B. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze
body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable
temperature setting, and thermometer.
1. Type: Liquid-filled motor, operation and pressure rating 100 psig (690 kPa)
minimum.
C. Master Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves (Penthouse): Unit provided with water heater
equipment. Refer to Section 15487 for additional information.
D. Waste Cooling Station: Unit with the following.
►, Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-5 05/06/05
A. Manufacturers: -'W
1. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body
with flanged ends.
a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for Back-
flow preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
5. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.
C. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers (Ice Machine & Coffee Makers): Watts Se-
ries 9D, ASSE 1024, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include union inlet
and two independent check valves.
D. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and
manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units at-
tached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
E. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers (HVAC Make-up, Sterilizer, Cart Wash,
Waste Cooling Station): Watts Series 909QTS, ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pres-
sure application. Include ball valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks;
and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between
two positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
F. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers (Domestic Water Main): Watts Series
909-NRS-S-FDA, ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include non-
rising OS&Y valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-
differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between two posi-
tive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
2.3 BALANCING VALVES
A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve,
rated for 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-4 05/06/05
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping
materials and installation.
E. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic
potable-water piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sec-
tions 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following re-
quirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-3 05/06/05
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig (860 kPa).
2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights.
Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.
2. Balancing valves, water filters, and strainers.
3. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
4. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems. ,
5. Drain valves, hose bibbs, hydrants, and hose stations.
6. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
7. Backwater valves, cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors, trench drains, and roof
drains.
8. Air-admittance valves, vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies.
9. Sleeve penetration systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field test reports.
D. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include
the following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.
2. Water filters.
3. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
4. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
5. Hose stations and hydrants.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15430-2 05/06/05
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Balancing valves.
3. Water filters.
4. Thermostatic water mixing valves.
5. Strainers.
6. Key-operation hydrants.
7. Wheel-handle wall hydrants.
8. Trap seal primer valves.
9. Drain valves.
10. Backwater valves.
11. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
12. Sleeve penetration systems.
13. Flashing materials.
14. Cleanouts.
15. Floor drains.
16. Roof drains.
17. Solids Interceptors.
18. Pure Water Piping System.
19. Dialysis Box.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and
pressure gages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15430-1 05/06/05
00K D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Water-Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance
with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or re-
placements are made.
C. Report test results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B. Adjust water-cooler temperature settings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
END OF SECTION 15415
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15415-5 05/06/05
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Use mounting frames for recessed water coolers, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view.
Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water cool-
ers to mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fixtures level and plumb.
D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected
to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations
where they can be easily reached for operation. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves"
for general-duty valves.
E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary
drainage system.
F. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-
pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Refer to Divi-
sion 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.
G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Sec-
tion "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15415-4 05/06/05
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles ["Available
Manufacturers,"] [and] ["Manufacturers"] introduce a list of manufacturers and their
products or manufacturers only, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified in other Part 2 articles.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
A. Water Coolers, EWC-1: ARI 1010, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style RE, recessed
fixture, bi-level.
1. Products:
a. Halsey Taylor; OVL-II-SER-Q.
2. Cabinet: All stainless steel.
3. Bubbler: Two, with automatic stream regulator, located on each deck.
4. Control: Push bar.
S. Supply: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) with ball valve and filter.
6. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum horizontal waste and trap comply-
ing with ASME A112.18.1M.
7. Cooling System: Electric, with precooler, hermetically sealed compressor, cooling
coil, air-cooled condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-
resistant-metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat.
a. Capacity: 8 gph (0.0084 L/s) of SO deg F (10 deg C) cooled water from 80
deg F (27 deg C) inlet water and 90 deg F (32 deg C) ambient air tempera-
ture.
b. Electrical Characteristics: 4.7 Amp; 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.
8. Ventilation Grille: Stainless steel, located below fountain.
9. Support: Mounting frame for attaching to substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of
piping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping
and types of supports match those indicated.
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15415-3 05/06/05
E. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC Al 17.1, "Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities"[; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and
Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act%] about fixtures for people with
disabilities.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
(UFAS), 1985-494-187" about fixtures for people with disabilities.
D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Ef-
fects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated
Drinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified
Drinking Water Coolers" for type and style classifications.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be in-
stalled to comply with original design and referenced standards.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and size
indicated, but not less than 6 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15415-2 05/06/05
SECTION 15415 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Water-station water coolers.
2. Fixture supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with dis-
abilities.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.
C. Fixture: Water cooler, unless one is specifically indicated.
D. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking
water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; fur-
nished specialties; and accessories for each type of fixture indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15415-1 05/06/05
C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or re-
? placements are made.
D. Report test results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.
B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.
END OF SECTION 15412
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15412-7 05/06/05
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures without in-
tegral, water-tempering system.
C. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to emergency plumbing fixtures with integral,
hot- and cold-water-tempering system.
D. Connect cold- and cooled-water.-supply piping to emergency plumbing fixtures with inte-
gral, cold- and cooled-water-tempering system.
E. Connect cold-water and steam supply and condensate return piping to emergency plumb-
ing fixtures with integral, steam and cold-water-tempering system.
F. 'Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water-tempering equipment.
Connect tempered-water piping to emergency plumbing fixtures.
G. Connect cold- and cooled-water-supply piping to cold- and cooled-water-tempering
equipment. Connect tempered-water piping to emergency plumbing fixtures.
H. Connect cold-water and steam supply and condensate return piping to steam and Cold-
water-tempering equipment. Connect tempered-water piping to emergency plumbing fix-
tures.
I. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sani-
tary drainage and vent piping.
J. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to
sanitary or storm drainage piping.
K. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for
compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and tem-
peratures.
B. Electrical-Component Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for com-
pliance with requirements.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15412-6 05/06/05
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water piping systems to verify actual locations of piping con-
nections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation. Proceed with installa-
tion only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other compo-
nents according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install fixtures level and plumb.
C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.
D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if
specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if
permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Re-
fer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty shutoff valves.
1. Exception: Omit shutoff valves on valved supplies to group of plumbing fixtures
that includes emergency plumbing fixture.
2. Exception: Omit shutoff valves on supplies to emergency equipment if prohibited
by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Install shutoff valve and strainer in steam piping and shutoff valve in condensate return
piping.
F. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to fixture if piping and fixture connections are
made of different metals. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for dielectric fittings.
G. Install trap and waste to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be
directly connected to drainage system.
H. Install indirect waste piping to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated
to be indirectly connected to drainage system. Refer to Division 15 Section "Drainage
and Vent Piping" for piping.
I. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutch-
eons.
J. Fill self-contained fixtures with flushing fluid.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15412-5 05/06/05
6. Spray Heads: Twin gentle spray outlets.
7. Mounting: Epoxy-coated angled bracket with spring clips and hardware.
8. Location: Microbiology and Central Accession.
B. Hand-Held Drench Hoses, EW-3: Plumbed counter-mounting type.
1. Products:
a. Guardian Equipment Co.; G-5036-FSH-VB-HG.
2. Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 3.0 gpm (11.4 L/min.) for at
least 15 minutes.
3. Supply Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) brass with flow regulator.
4. Hose: 8-feet, flexible stainless steel.
5. Control-Valve Actuator: Hand-held squeeze valve with locking clip.
6. Spray Heads: Twin gentle spray outlets.
7. Location: Histology.
2.4 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT
A. Hot- and Cold-Water-Tempering Equipment: Factory-fabricated equipment including
water thermostatic mixing valve designed to provide 85 deg F (29 deg C) potable water
at emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F
(3 deg C) throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure to con-
tinue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, corrosion-resistant metal piping,
and enclosure.
1. Products:
a. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc.; 911 (emer. shower) and 911-E/F (eyewash).
b. Leonard Valve Co.; TM-800 (emer. Shower) and TA-300 (eywash).
B. Emergency Shower: Provide chrome plated thermostatic mixing valve station within
stainless steel recessed cabinet.
C. Eyewash Station: Mount point-of-use thermostatic mixing valves under sink or cabinet of
eyewash location.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Certify performance of plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15412-4 05/06/05
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Available
Products" and "Products" introduce a list of manufacturers and their products, the fol-
lowing requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 COMBINATION EMERGENCY DRENCH SHOWER AND EYE WASH
A. Emergency Drench Shower, EW-1:
1. Products:
a. Guardian Equipment Co.; GBF2160-SSH.
2. Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 30 gpm (114 L/min.) for at
least 15 minutes.
3. Supply Fitting: NPS 1 brass with flow regulator.
4. Hose: Not required.
5. Control-Valve Actuator: Heavy duty stainless steel "panic bar" with black vinyl
foam grip.
6. Cabinet: Recessed stainless steel with removable access panel.
7. Shower Head: 8-inch minimum diameter, stainless steel.
S. Spray Heads: Four gentle spray outlets.
9. Pipe Material: 1-inch copper pipe and fittings provided by Plumbing Contractor
10. Eye/Face Wash: 2 FS plus spray heads, panic bar activation, stainless steel drain
pan, 1-1/2-inch drain tailpiece.
11. Shower Tester: Vinyl Chute, telescoping rod, and bucket with lid.
12. Location: Refer to drawing.
2.3 HAND-HELD DRENCH HOSES
A. Hand-Held Drench Hoses, EW-2: Plumbed wall-mounting type.
1. Products:
a. Guardian Equipment Co.; G-5046-FSH-VB.
2. Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 3.0 gpm (11.4 L/min.) for at
least 15 minutes.
3. Supply Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) brass with flow regulator.
4. Hose: 12-feet, recoiling, flexible stainless steel.
5. Control-Valve Actuator: Hand-held squeeze valve with locking clip.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15412-3 05106105
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance ,
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI 2358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equip-
ment."
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and
Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for
people with disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transpor-
tation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS),
1985-494-187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy
Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Ef-
fects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
G. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can
be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15412-2 05/06/05
SECTION 15412 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following emergency plumbing fixtures:
1. Hand-held drench hoses.
2. Water-tempering equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and
used by people with disabilities.
B. Cooled Water: Cooled potable water produced by water cooler.
C. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply.
D. Self-Contained Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with flushing-fluid-solution sup-
ply.
E. Tepid: Approximately 85 deg F (29 deg C) temperature (Verify with owner).
1. Allowable Variation: Plus or minus 5 deg F (3 deg C).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include flow rates and capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source
Quality Control" Article.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15412-1 05/06/05
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunc-
tioning units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves to produce
proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION 15410
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-22 05/06/05
U. Set shower receptors, and service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Refer to Divi-
sion 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for grout.
V. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Divi-
sion 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
D. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water sup-
plies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
Connect to plumbing piping.
E. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste pip-
ing specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to
plumbing piping.
F. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where in-
stalled.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified compo-
nents.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units oper-
ate properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15410-21 05106105
G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to
water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces
behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly con-
nected to sanitary drainage system.
L Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to
drainage system.
J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle moulited
on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people
with disabilities to reach.
K. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide
side of compartment.
L. Install toilet seats on water closets.
M. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if fau-
cets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
N. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at
stop valves.
O. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
P. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
Q. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
R. Install disposer in outlet of sinks indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indi-
cated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
S. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over
sink.
T. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal pro-
truding fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Meth-
ods" for escutcheons.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-20 05/06/05
1. Products:
a. Laboratory Enterprises, Inc.; 09-4113.009
2. Special Gas: Suffix 025. (Laboratory)
3. Compressed Air: Suffix 009. (CPD)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify
actual locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports
match those indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's rough-
ing-in data if roughing-in data are not indicated.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be in-
stalled.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
owl,, 3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' writ-
ten instructions.
B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fix-
tures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
E. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and
roughing-in drawings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15410-19 05/06/05
A. Service Basins, MSB-1: Flush-to-wall, floor-mounting molded stone basin with rim
guard.
1. Products:
a. Fiat Products; MSB-3624.
2. Shape: Rectangular.
3. Size: 36 by 24 inches (915 by 610 mm).
4. Height: 10 inches (255 mm).
5. Tiling Flange: On two sides.
6. Rim Guard: On front top surfaces.
7. Color: Not applicable.
S. Faucet: Refer to Section 2.4.
9. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 (DN 80) outlet.
2.16 CLINICAL SINKS
A. Clinical Sinks, CSS-1: Wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china, flushing-rim service
sink.
1. Available Products:
2. Products:
a. Kohler; K-12867 "Camerton".
3. Size: Approximately 25 by 20 inches (635 by 510 mm).
4. Color: White.
5. Rim Guard: Stainless steel on front and also on sides if flat rim.
2.17 SURGEON'S SCRUB-UP SINKS
A. Surgeon's Scrub-up Sinks, SS-1: Wall-mounting, stainless-steel fixture.
1. Products:
a. OFCI.
2. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
3. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) chrome-plated cast-brass trap, 0.045-inch- (1.1-
mm-) thick tubular-brass waste to wall, and wall flange.
2.18 TURRETS
A. Laboratory, : Wall-mounting fixture.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-18 05/06/05
4. Sink Faucet: 3-hole, centerset work faucet, SK-6: Mount emergency eye
low wash/drench hose in countertop. SK-7: DI faucet set 8-inches from work faucet
S. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
6. Drain Piping: NPS 2 PVDF trap with mechanical joints, tubular acid resistant
waste to wall, continuous waste, and wall escutcheon[s].
F. Sinks, SK-8: Counter-mounting, 18-gage stainless-steel fixture. (Blood Bank)
1. Products:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.; RLLVRI2.
b. Kindred Industries Limited.
C. Just Mfg. Co.
2. Overall Size: 14-3/8" Diameter.
3. Number of Compartments: One.
4. Sink Faucet: Mount in counter top.
5. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
6. Drain Piping: NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, 0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick
tubular brass waste to wall, continuous waste, and wall escutcheon[s].
G. Sinks, SK-9: Custom Built fixture. (AP Lab)
1. OFCI
tow 2. Overall Size: Contractor shall match existing AP Lab work sink.
3. Sink Faucet: Mount two faucets in backsplash.
4. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
5. Drain Piping: NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, 0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick
tubular brass waste to wall, continuous waste, and wall escutcheon[s].
6. Disposal: In-Sinkerator 777-SS.
H. Sinks, Frozen Section SK-11: Counter-mounting, 18-gage stainless-steel fixture.
1. Products:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.; DLR-332210.
2. Overall Size: 22 by 22 by 10 inches deep.
3. Number of Compartments: Two.
4. Sink Faucet: 3-hole, centerset work faucet.
S. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
6. Drain Piping: NPS 2 PVDF trap with mechanical joints, tubular acid resistant
waste to wall, continuous waste, and wall escutcheon[s].
7. Disposal: In-Sinkerator 777-SS
2.15 SERVICE BASINS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15410-17 05/06/05
8. Hot-Water Dispenser: SK-3 only. Requires filtered cold water supply.
B. Sinks, SK-2: Counter-mounting, 18-gage stainless-steel fixture.
1. Products:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.; LR-2222.
b. Kindred Industries Limited.
C. Just Mfg. Co.
2. Overall Size: 22 by 22 inches (559 by 559 mm).
3. Number of Compartments: One.
4. Sink Faucet: Refer to Section 2.4.
5. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
6. Drain Piping: NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, 0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick
tubular brass waste to wall, continuous waste, and wall escutcheon[s].
C. Sinks, SK-4A: Vitreous China fixture.
1. Products:
a. Kohler Co.; Kingston-2005.
2. Overall Size: 20 by 18 inches.
3. Number of Compartments: One.
4. Sink Faucet: Refer to Section 2.4.
5. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
6. Drain Piping: NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass, 0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick tubu-
lar brass waste to wall with escutcheon[s] with off-set grid drain and protective
wrap.
D. Sinks, SK-4, SK-5 & SK-10: Integral Corian fxture.
1. Products:
a. OFCI.
2. Sink Faucet: Refer to Section 2.4.
3. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
4. Drain Piping: NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass, 0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick tubu-
lar brass waste to wall with escutcheon[s]. SK-4 & SK-5 with off-set grid drain and
protective wrap.
E. Sinks, Laboratory SK-6, SIC-7 & SK-12: Counter-mounting, 18-gage stainless-steel fix-
ture.
1. Products:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.; DLR-222210.
2. Overall Size: 22 by 22 by 10 inches deep.
3. Number of Compartments: One.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-16 05/06/05
10. Light: Lightolier Model 1102DH2, HPF-277V frame-in kit w/1177SH/1102D Se-
ries reflector trim.
B. SH-2: Shower enclosure with slip-resistant bathing surface complying with ASTM F 462
and shower rod with curtain.
1. Products:
a. European Shower Unit (OFCI).
2. Faucet: Shower SH-2.
3. Drain: Grid, NPS 2 (DN 50) with Jay R. Smith DX2010-02-A-B-U. Integrate floor
waterproofing into drain flash pan per manufacturers reconuilendations.
C. Individual Showers, SH-3: Shower enclosure with slip-resistant bathing surface comply-
ing with ASTM F 462 and shower rod with curtain.
1. Products:
a. Aqua Bath Co., Inc.; C6530B-FUS-3/4.
2. Size: 60 by 30 inches T.D.
3. Material: Acrylic, one-piece surround.
4. Color: White.
5. Drain Location: Center.
6. Accessibility Options: Include grab bar and padded fold-up seat.
tow 7. Faucet: Shower SH-3.
8. Drain: Grid, NPS 2 (DN 50).
9. Light: Lightolier Model 1102DH2, HPF-277V frame-in kit w/1177SH/1102D Se-
ries reflector trim.
2.14 SINKS
A. Sinks, SK-1 & SK-3: Counter-mounting, 18-gage stainless-steel fixture.
1. Available Products:
2. Products:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.; LR-1720.
b. Kindred Industries Limited.
C. Just Mfg. Co.
3. Overall Size: 17 by 20 inches (432 by 508 mm).
4. Number of Compartments: One.
5. Sink Faucet: Refer to Section 2.4.
6. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
7. Drain Piping: NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, 0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick
tubular brass waste to wall,continuous waste, and wall escutcheon[s].
tow. Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15410-15 05/06/05
9. Protective Shielding Guard[s]: L-1. AMO-1,
B. Lavatories, L-2: Accessible, vitreous-china fixture.
1. Products:
a. Kohler; K-2053 "Soho"
2. Type: Flat rim with ledge.
3. Rectangular Lavatory Size: 20 by 18 inches (508 by 457 mm).
4. Faucet Hole Punching: Three, 8-inch centerset.
5. Faucet Hole Location: Top.
6. Color: White.
7. Faucet: Lavatory L-2.
8. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chronic-plated copper with stops.
9. Drain: Grid w/offset.
10. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, and brass waste
to wall with wall escutcheon.
11. Protective Shielding Guard[s]: L-2.
C. Lavatories, L-3: Integral Corian (OFCI).
1. Faucet Hole Punching: Three, 8-inch centerset.
2. Faucet Hole Location: Top.
3. Faucet: Lavatory.
4. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chrome-plated copper with stops.
5. Drain: Grid w/offset.
6. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, and brass waste
to wall with wall escutcheon.
7. Protective Shielding Guard[s]: Required.
2.13 INDIVIDUAL SHOWERS
A. Individual Showers, SH-1: Shower enclosure with slip-resistant bathing surface comply-
ing with ASTM F 462 and shower rod with curtain.
1. Products:
2.
a. Aqua Bath Co., Inc.; IS4136BF-3/4.
3. Size: 36 by 36 inches I.D.
4. Material: Acrylic, one-piece surround.
5. Color: White.
6. Drain Location: Center.
7. Accessibility Options: Include grab bar and padded fold-up seat.
8. Faucet: Shower SH-1.
9. Drain: Grid, NPS 2 (DN 50).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' -2323 15410-14 05/06/05
2.11 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets, WC-1 & WC-2: Wall-hanging, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture de-
signed for flushometer valve operation. Refer to Architectural sections for fixture mount-
ing heights.
1. Products:
a. Kohler: K-4330 "Kingston".
2. Style: Flushometer valve.
a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.
1) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6 L/flush).
b. Color: White.
B. Water Closets, WC-3 & WC-4: Wall-hanging, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture de-
signed for bedpan washing and flushometer valve operation. Refer to Architectural sec-
tions for fixture mounting heights.
1. Products:
a. Kohler: K-4330-L "Kingston".
2. Style: Flushometer valve.
a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design and bedpan lugs.
b. Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6 L/flush).
C. Color: White.
2.12 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories, L-1: Accessible, vitreous-china fixture.
1. Products:
a. Kohler, K-2196-8 "Pennington".
2. Type: Self-rimming.
3. Faucet Hole Punching: Three, 8-inch centerset.
4. Faucet Hole Location: Top.
S. Faucet: Lavatory L-1.
6. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chrome-plated copper with stops.
7. Drain: Grid w/offset.
8. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, and brass waste
to wall with wall escutcheon.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15410-13 05/06/05
A. Protective Shielding Guard, L-1, L-2, L-3, SK-4 & SK-5 Manufactured, plastic covering 0u.,
for hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA re-
quirements.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Truebro.
b. McGuire.
2.9 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Water-Closet Support, WC-1 through 4: Water-closet combination carrier designed for
accessible & standard mounting height. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal,
hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gas-
kets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension
coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith. Series 210.
b. Mifab.
B. Lavatory Support, L-2, SK-4A Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod.
Include steel uprights with feet. Sink shall be installed with back flush to wall to avoid 2- ..
inch gap.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith. 700-16-Z-M32.
b. Mifab.
2. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights. Concealed arms
shall be 16-inches long for mounting fixture flush to wall.
C. Clinical Sink Support, CSS-1: Carrier bolted to floor. Include steel uprights with feet.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith. 0914.
b. Mifab
2.10 HOT-WATER DISPENSERS
A. Hot-Water Dispenser, SK-3: (OFCI)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-12 05/06/05
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sloan Royal. BPW 1100-1.6.
2. Internal Design: Diaphragm operation.
3. Style: Exposed.
4. Inlet Size: NPS 1 (DN 25).
5. Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, lever-handle actuator.
6. Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6.0 L/flush).
7. Tailpiece Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and standard length to top of bowl.
S. Bedpan Washer: Factory fabricated, attached to tailpiece, and with spray head
C. Flushometer, CSS-1: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-
hold-open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, and copper or brass
tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Sloan Royal. BPW 9000-1.6 WN-500-AA Extension.
2. Internal Design: Diaphragm operation.
3. Style: Exposed.
4. Inlet Size: NPS 1 (DN 25).
S. Trip Mechanism: Push-button with stainless-steel access plate actuator.
6. Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6.0 L/flush).
7. Tailpiece Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) with extension tail piece.
8. Bedpan Washer: Factory fabricated, attached to tailpiece, and with spray head
2.7 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seat, : Solid plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Kohler, Church or Bemis.
2. Configuration: Open front without cover.
3. Size: Elongated.
4. Class: Heavy-duty commercial.
5. Hinge Type: SC, self-sustaining, check.
6. Color: White.
7. Water Closet WC-4: Provide 2-inch toilet seat for floor mount, rear outlet water
closets to meet ADA requirements.
2.8 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15410-11 05/06/05
a. Chicago Faucet. 814-NCP-90090-319
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Service sink faucet with stops in shanks, vacuum breaker, hose-thread outlet,
and pail hook.
6. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle.
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Required.
8. Centers: 8 inches (203 mm) Single hole.
9. Mounting: Back/wall, exposed.
10. Handle[s]: Wrist blade, 6 inches.
11. Inlet[s]: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male shank.
12. Spout: Rigid, cast With wall brace.
13. Spout Outlet: Hose thread.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Not required.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
2.5 RODI FAUCETS
A. Laboratory Sinks Faucet, SIC-7: (OFI)
2.6 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Flushometer, WC-1 & WC-2: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal compo-
nents,non-hold-open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, and copper
or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sloan Royal. 111-1.6
2. Internal Design: Diaphragm operation.
3. Style: Exposed.
4. Inlet Size: NPS 1 (DN 25).
5. Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, lever-handle actuator.
6. Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6.0 L/flush).
7. Tailpiece Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and standard length to top of bowl.
8. Bedpan Washer: Not required.
B. Flushometer, WC-3 & WC-4: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal compo-
nents, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, and copper
or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.
O
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15410-10 05/06/05
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
fowk 4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Faucet with three-hole fixture.
6. Mixing Valve: 317, Two-lever handle.
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Required between faucet and
sprayer. Provide Watts Model #91) with drain indirect to sink waste.
8. Centers: 8 inches (203 mm) centerset.
9. Mounting: Deck mounted with sprayer.
10. Handle[s]: Wrist blade, 4-inches (150 mm).
11. Inlets NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adapter.
12. Spout: Interchangable Rigid/Swing.
13. Spout Outlet: Plain end.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Not required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Grid.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
H. Sink Faucet, MSB-1: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets
with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Chicago Faucet. 445-897S-RC-XK-VB.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Service sink faucet with stops in shanks, vacuum breaker, hose-thread out-
let, and pail hook.
6. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handles with integral checks.
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Required.
8. Centers: 8 inches (203 mm) Single hole.
9. Mounting: Back/wall, exposed.
10. Handle[s]: Wrist blade, 4 inches (100 mm).
11. Inlet[s]: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male shank.
12. Spout: Rigid, cast
13. Spout Outlet: Hose thread.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Grid.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
I. Sink Faucet, CSS-1: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturer:
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15410-9 05/06/05
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Faucet with single-hole fixture.
6. Mixing Valve: Two-wristblade handle.
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Not required.
8. Centers: Single hole.
9. Mounting: Deck.
10. Handle[s]: Wrist blade, 4 inches (150 mm).
11. Inlet[s NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adapter.
12. Spout: Interchangable Rigid/Swing.
13. Spout Outlet: Plain end with serrated hose nozzle.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Acid Resistant Grid.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
F. Sink Faucet, SIC-11: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Chicago Faucet. 786-FC-XK combination faucet with GN2BVBFC.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Faucet with three-hole fixture.
6. Mixing Valve: 317, Two-lever handle.
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Not required.
8. Centers: 8 inches (203 mm) centerset.
9. Mounting: Deck.
10. Handle[s]: Wrist blade, 4 inches (100 mm).
11. Inlet[s] NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adapter.
12. Spout: Interchangable Rigid/Swing.
13. Spout Outlet: Plain end.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Grid.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
G. Sink Faucet, SK-12: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Chicago Faucet. 200-FC-XK combination faucet with GN2FC.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15410-8 05/06/05
5. Type: Sensor operated.
6. Centers: Single hole centerset.
7. Mounting: Deck.
8. Handle(s): N/A.
9. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adaptor.
10. Spout: Gooseneck.
11. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow.
12. Operation: Battery powered sensor.
13. Drain: Model ETF-460-A-1-1/4-inch grid strainer.
14. Tempering Device: Integral with faucet. Set temperature in accordance with
owner's requirements and turn adjustment key over to owner.
D. Laboratory Sink Faucet, SK-6 & SK-7: Include non-potable hot- and cold-water indica-
tors; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Chicago Faucet. 930-317CP-FC-XI< faucet with GN2BVB.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Faucet with single-hole fixture.
6. Mixing Valve: Two-wristblade handle.
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Not required.
8. Centers: Single hole. .
9. Mounting: Deck.
10. Handle[s]: Wrist blade, 4 inches (150 mm).
11. Inlet[s NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adapter.
12. Spout: Interchangable Rigid/Swing.
13. Spout Outlet: Plain end with serrated hose nozzle.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Acid Resistant Grid.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
E. Laboratory Sink Faucet, SK-9 (AP Lab): Include non-potable hot- and cold-water indica-
tors; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Chicago Faucet. 631-317CP-FC-XK faucet with GN2BVB. Provide 2-faucet
sets on custom built sink assembly.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15410-7 05/06/05
6. Mixing Valve: 317, Two-lever handle.
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Not required.
8. Centers: 8 inches (203 mm) centerset.
9. Mounting: Deck.
10. Handle[s]: Wrist blade, 4-inches (150 mm).
11. Inlets NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adapter.
12. Spout: Interchangable Rigid/Swing.
13. Spout Outlet: Plain end.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Not required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Grid.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
B. Sink Faucet, SK-3: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Chicago Faucet. 2300.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Faucet with three-hole fixture.
6. Mixing Valve: One-lever handle. "'
7. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Not required.
8. Centers: 8 inches (203 mm) Single hole.
9. Mounting: Deck.
10. Handle[s]: Single lever.
11. Inlet[s: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adapter.
12. Spout: Swing, cast
13. Spout Outlet: Aerator.
14. Vacuum Breaker: Not required.
15. Operation: Compression, manual.
16. Drain: Grid.
17. Tempering Device: Not required.
C. Sink Faucet, SK-4 & SIC-4A: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet
inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Sloan Valve Co: Optima No. EAF-150-1SM.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' -2323 15410-6 05/06/05
13. Drain: Model 337-1-1/4-inch Grid.
14. Tempering Device: Not required.
2.3 SHOWER FAUCETS
A. Shower Faucet, SH-1, SH-2 & SH-3: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; and shower
head, arm, and flange. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and outlet with diverter
valve.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Symmons, Co.: 1-117VT-FS-X-2 Safetymix Visu-Temp.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
S. Type: Single-handle pressure balance with integral or field-installed check stops on
hot- and cold-water supplies.
6. Mounting: Concealed.
7. Handle[s]: Lever.
8. Diverter Valve: Not integral with mixing valve.
9. Backflow Protection Device for Hand-Held Shower: In-line vacuum breaker.
10. Operation: Compression, manual.
11. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.
12. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15), Sweat.
13. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.
14. Head Type: Ball joint, 5-feet Hand held, 30-inch adjustable slide-bar mounted.
15. Spray Pattern: Fixed.
16. Integral Volume Control: Required.
17. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: 1.5 gpm (5.7 L/min.).
2.4 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink Faucet, SIC-1, SIC-2, SK-5, SK-8, SK-10 & SIC-11: Include hot- and cold-water indi-
cators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Chicago Faucet. 786-FC-XK combination faucet with GN2FC.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
S. Type: Faucet with three-hole fixture.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15410-5 05/06/05
4. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can
be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles Products
and Manufacturers introduce a list of manufacturers and their products or manufacturers
only, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.
A
2.2 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucet, L-1, L-2 & L-3: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate
faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Chicago Faucet, Co.: No. 786-5-XK-FC.
2. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (Public); 2.2 gpm (Private) , unless otherwise indi-
cated.
3. Body Material: Cast brass.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Type: Two-handle mixing.
6. Centers: 8 inches (203 mm) centerset.
7. Mounting: Deck.
8. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches (100 mm).
9. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adaptor.
10. Spout: Model GN2A Interchangable Rigid/Swing.
11. Spout Outlet: Plain end.
12. Operation: Noncompression, manual.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-4 05/06/05
5. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
6. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
lavatory and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:
ASME Al 12.18.3M.
2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
5. NSF Materials: NSF 61.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
8. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
shower faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME Al 12.183M.
2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
4. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
5. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
9. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
10. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.
3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
4. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
5. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.
L. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.
2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15410-3 05/06/05
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and
Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for
people with disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transpor-
tation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS),
1985-494-187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy
Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Ef-
fects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
plumbing fixtures:
1. Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
2. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
3. Stainless-Steel Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.3M.
4. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.2M.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital g
Plumbin Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-2 05/06/05
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty
fixtures not in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by peo-
ple with disabilities.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and
tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty
valves are included where indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appur-
tenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, con-
struction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Fixtures
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15410-1 05/06/05
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain medical air and vacuum equipment. Refer to Divi-
sion I Section "Contract Closeout."
END OF SECTION 15255
Awk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15255-8 05/13/05
A. Install identifying labels and devices for medical air and vacuum equipment according to
NFPA 99. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and
identification materials.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test, inspect, and adjust compo-
nents and equipment installation and to perform startup service.
B. Perform the following final checks:
1. Verify that specified tests of piping systems are complete.
7. Verify that potable-water supply connections to equipment have correct backflow
preventer.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for lubricating oil in lubricated-type equipment.
5. Check belt drives for proper tension.
6. Verify that air compressor inlet filters and piping are clear.
7. Verify that vacuum equipment filters and piping are clear.
8. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and
verify that equipment is properly attached to substrate.
9. Check safety valves for correct settings. Ensure that settings are greater than air
compressor discharge pressure but not greater than rating of system components.
10. Check vacuum relief valves for correct settings.
11. Check for proper seismic restraints.
12. Test operation of equipment safety controls and devices.
13. Drain receiver tanks.
14. Drain separators and add disinfectant.
C. Verify that medical air and vacuum equipment is installed and connected according to
the Contract Documents.
D. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and writ-
ten installation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
E. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
G. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
H. Prepare written report documenting testing procedures and results.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15255-7 05/13/05
D. Vibration Isolation: Mount equipment on a vibration isolation equipment base as speci-
fied in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
E. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Install the following devices on medical air equipment:
1. Thermometer, Pressure Gage, and Safety Valve: Install on each compressed-air re-
ceiver.
2. Pressure Regulators: Install downstream from air compressors, dryers, purification
units, and filter assemblies.
3. Automatic Drain Valves: Install on intercoolers, aftercoolers, receivers, and dryers.
Discharge condensate over nearest floor drain.
G. Install the following devices on medical vacuum equipment:
1. Vacuum Gage and Vacuum Relief Valve
2. Manual Drain Valve: Install on vacuum receiver tank. Discharge condensate over
nearest floor drain.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to compressors, vacuum pumps, and receivers, except safety relief valve
connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connec-
tors and their installation are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materi-
als and Methods."
D. Connect medical air and vacuum equipment to medical gas alarm system. Refer to Divi-
sion 15 Section "Medical Gas Piping" for alarm system.
E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15255-6 05/13/05
7. Miscellaneous Devices: Sight glass, manual drain, safety valves, inlet-line vacuum
gages, three-valve receiver bypass, and shutoff valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean equipment, accessories, and components that have not been cleaned for oxygen
service and sealed or that are furnished unsuitable for medical applications, according to
CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases for medical air and vacuum equipment. Concrete base is specified
in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materi-
als and installation requirements are specified in Division 3.
3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install medical air and vacuum equipment according to NFPA 99.
B. Install medical air and vacuum equipment on concrete bases. Set and connect units ac-
cording to manufacturers' written instructions. Install units level, plumb, and anchored
to substrate in locations indicated. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances.
Orient equipment so controls and devices are accessible for servicing.
1. Anchor packaged equipment to concrete base according to manufacturers' written
instructions and seismic criteria applicable to Project.
a. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless other-
wise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full
perimeter of base.
b. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment; extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
C. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, dia-
grams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
d. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to sup-
ported equipment.
e. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
C. Vibration Isolation: Install spring isolators with 2% deflection. Vibration isolation de-
vices and installation requirements are specified in Division 1S Section "Mechanical Vi-
bration and Seismic Controls."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15255-5 05/13/05
1. BeaconMedaes.
B. Description: Duplex, Oil-less Claw-type, medical vacuum pump unit for medical vac-
uum systems.
1. Vacuum Pump(s): Model LVS-I0D-H200.
a. Construction: Cast-iron body and rotor, cast-iron body with bronze rotor,
or bronze body and rotor.
b. Mounting: Freestanding.
C. Number of Vacuum Pumps: Two.
d. Motor Size (Each Vacuum Pump): 1.0 hp, 460 V, 1800 rpm, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
e. Standard-Air Capacity of Each Vacuum Pump: 89 sefm free air. System Ca-
pacity will be 89 scfm free air.
f. Vacuum Produced: 19 in. Hg.
g. Coupling: Nonlubricated, flexible type.
C. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions.
Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of
equipment package.
2. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 control panel, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage re-
lease feature and motor-circuit-protector-type disconnecting means and short-
circuit protective device.
a. Control Voltage: 120-V ac, using integral control power transformer.
b. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
C. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic lighted selector switches and runtime
hourmeters in cover of control panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.
1) PLC to sequence lead-lag compressors for multiplex air compressors.
4. Instrumentation: Include receiver pressure gage, hour meter, vacuum relief valve,
and control transformer.
5. Alarm Signal Device: For connection to alarm system to indicate when backup
vacuum pump is operating.
6. Receiver: ASME construction steel tank with stainless steel lining.
a. Orientation: Vertical arrangement.
b. Capacity: 200 gal.
C. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (690 kPa) minimum and suitable for vacuum pro-
duced by vacuum pump(s).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15255-4 05/13/05
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of medical vacuum equipment
manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
medical vacuum equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Di-
vision 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and ,labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receiver tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
F. Comply with NFPA 99, "Health Care Facilities," for materials and installation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Me-
chanical Materials and Methods" for concrete bases. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete" for formwork,reinforcement, and concrete requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 MEDICAL VACUUM PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15255-3 05/13/05
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and at- Aoft�.
tachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
and rails, and base weights.
3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Certificates of shop inspection and data report for receiver tanks as
required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that medical vac-
uum equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the follow-
ing:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Startup service reports. The contractor shall have a manufacturers representative present
for start-up and training of the hospital staff.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the vacuum equipment and accessories to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:
1. Vacuum pumps.
H. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15255-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15255 - MEDICAL VACUUM EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following medical vacuum equipment and related accessories
for healthcare facilities:
1. Oil-Less Claw medical vacuum pumps and receivers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Medical Gas Piping" for compressed-air and vacuum piping,
valves, alarms, and related specialties.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Medical vacuum equipment shall comply with the following NFPA 99 level categories:
1. Level 1: For entire facility with systems where failure of medical gas supply would
be immediate and direct life-safety threat to patients. Vacuum equipment arrange-
ment must be redundant (Duplex).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories for the following medical air and vacuum equipment:
1. Vacuum pumps, including receivers and outlet filters.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15255-1 05/13/05
A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use
procedures described below:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water.
3.12 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that neutralization system is installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and in-
stallation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions and do the following:
1. Install neutralizing solutions and limestone.
2. Energize circuits.
3. Start and run systems through complete sequence of operations.
4. Adjust operating controls. ..
3.13 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain neutralization systems. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15221
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package 'E' —2323 15221-12 05/13/05
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pressure-Piping Testing:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced piping until
it has been tested and approved. Expose piping that was covered or concealed be-
fore it was tested.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operat-
ing pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
B. Chemical-Waste Piping Inspection:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put drainage and vent piping into operation until it is in-
spected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before con-
cealing after system roughing-in and before setting fixtures and equipment.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdic-
tion to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with require-
ments.
3. Reinspections: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust neutralization system set points.
3.11 CLEANING
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package 'E' —2323 15221-11 05/13/05
H. Install supports for vertical PP piping every 72 inches (1830 mm).
I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 36 inches (910 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch
(13-mm) rod.
4. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 5/8-inch ("l6-
mm) rod.
5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
6. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-
mm) rod.
J. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1220 mm).
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are spe-
cific connection requirements:
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect chemical-waste piping to sinks, specialties, accessories, and equipment. Use
chemical-resistant coupling, adapter, or fitting as required for materials being joined.
D. Connect chemical-waste, force-main piping to pumps, specialties, accessories, and
equipment. Use chemical-resistant coupling, adapter, or fitting as required for materials
being joined.
E. Ground equipment.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
G. Arrange for electric-power connections to specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
Division 1S Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-10 05/13/05
B. Plastic-Piping, Heat-Fusion Joints: Make polyolefin pressure-piping joints according to
ASTM D 2657.
C. Plastic-Piping Electrofusion Joints: Make polyolefin drainage-piping joints according to
ASTM F 1290.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for seismic-
restraint devices.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hariger and support de-
vices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42, riser clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer:
MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
low 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and
coupling.
E. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
F. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
G. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP piping with the following maximum horizontal spac-
ing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 33 inches (840 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch
(13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-
mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 (DN 200): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-9 05/13/05
I. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion
joints.
D. Under Slabs-on-Grade, Chemical-Waste Piping: Use the following piping materials for
each size range:
1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion
joints.
E. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. If specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
F. Use plastic and plastic-lined valves with wetted surfaces made of same material as or
compatible with piping and compatible with system liquid.
3.3 SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. Install neutralization tanks on smooth and level foundation or floor surface. Include full
initial charge of limestone.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Install piping next to equipment, accessories, and specialties to allow service and mainte-
nance.
C. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ing may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install underground fiberglass piping according to ASTM D 3839.
F. Install drain valves at low points in chemical-waste force mains.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction. If specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufac-
turer's written instructions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping _104`
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-8 05/13/05
I. Visual and audible annunciators shall be provided. The alarm horn may be si-
lenced by depressing push button switch and alarm indicator shall remain until
alarm condition is removed.
2. The pH controller shall be a digital microprocessor offering menu driven functions
all accessible from font panel, system diagnostics with self-verification, and non-
volatile memory. Exterior shall be Nema 4X rated of corrosion-resistant plastic
with 1/4 DIN panel mounting. The controllers are configured for application in-
cluding analog inputs, relay, and 4-20 mA current proportional outputs. Noise
immunity to IEC 801-2, level 3 standards. Calibration and proportional range pro-
grams are programmed from membrane key pad on front panel.
3. The circular chart recorder shall be a dual pen type, 10" or 12" diameter. The
unit shall operate with a 4-20 mA input and shall be programmable to record for a
period 7days.
4. The system supplier shall provide a 6-month supply of chart paper.
N. The flume shall be manufactured from polypropylene to include clear PVC cover, 12"
circular access port, and one flow sensor quick twist. Flume shall measure approximately
20" x 42" x 22". Flume shall have an integral head gauge scaled in inches. Flume shall
be capable of measuring a flow rate of 0 to 20 GPM. Point of measurement shall be via
an ultrasonic transducer mounted on the cover quick twist connection. The flume shall
be sufficiently support and installed per manufactures instructions.
O. The effluent U-Trap shall be constructed of 4" polypropylene pipe material designed to
meet local regulatory requirements for effluent monitoring. The wet well must insure the
pH electrode remains wet at all times and must provide provisions for a sampling tap at
the monitoring point. The outlet of the assembly shall be provided with a flanged con-
nection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ing may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Above Floor Chemical-Waste Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size
range:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-7 05/13/05
polypropylene housing and 15 ft of six conductor shielded cable for elimination of inter-
ference. The junction shall be self-cleaning porous Teflon. The reaction tank pH probe
shall be mounted through the tank cover with a quick access flange connection and a
perforated probe guard designed to eliminate blinding of the electrode and prevent dam-
age. The effluent probe shall include quick access flange connection fitting for installa-
tion in the monitoring U-Trap on tank discharge.
I. All liquid level controls shall be float/magnetic reed switch style constructed of polypro-
pylene with a totally encapsulated CPVC stem and a Nema 4X enclosure. Sensors shall
employ low voltage secondary wiring with solid state controls. Primary power shall be
120 VAC.
J. Two 30 gallon nominal capacity reagent tanks constructed of polyethylene with a mini-
mum 3/"16" wall thickness shall be provided. Each tank shall include a one piece molded
cover designed for mounting of chemical metering pumps and a low level drum caddy.
The cover shall have a 2" capped opening for addition of chemicals by a drum transfer
pump (supplied by others). The reagent tanks shall be mounted on a spill containment
pallet.
K. Each reagent tank shall be fitted with a low level control switch mounted to the tank
cover. When the tank level reaches 6" from tank bottom a local indicator light is acti-
vated and a signal is provided to the main control panel for audible and visual indication
of low reagent level.
L. Two (2) chemical metering pumps shall be electronic, positive displacement diaphragm Awwk
type with adjustable stroke length adjustment and variable stroke rate. Pumps shall be
equipped with automatic external control by electronic proportional pacing,
auto/off/manual selector switch, and circuit breaker reset. Materials of construction of
head and fittings are PVC, diaphragm is Teflon faced hypalon, and seat and 0-ring are
Teflon with ceramic ball. The flow rate shall not exceed 0 to 120 GPD @ 0-100 psi. Elec-
trical service shall be 115 VAC. The manufacturer shall supply an adequate amount of
discharge tubing for the field contractor. Accessories include injection/anti-siphon/back
pressure valve with tubing, foot valve, and strainer.
M. The control panel shall be completely prewired and preassembled as well as pretested
prior to delivery to the site. The cabinet shall be NEMA 4X type enclosure ready for
wall mounting with dimensions of 30" high x 24" wide x 12" deep. The control panel
will be wired in accordance with local and NEC codes to the highest standards of work-
manship. The front panel shall include engraved nameplates for all devices. The panel
front shall be hinged and locked. The panel components shall include the following:
-System on/off switch and indicator light
-Mixer on/off switch and indicator light
-Metering Pump on/off switches and indicator lights
-Audible alarm horn
-High and low pH indicator lights
-pH controllers and recorder
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping AWN
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package 'E' —2323 15221-6 05/13/05
2.7 NEUTRALIZATION SYSTEMS
A. Description: Automatic system for neutralizing chemical waste.
1. Manufacturers:
a. PH Treatment System:
1) Burt Process Equipment. pH Neutralization System.
B. System Description: The Neutralization System shall be a completely integrated, engi-
neered, prepackaged unit including automatic controls and instrumentation. All equip-
ment shall be certified as tested prior to shipment. The system shall be a BPDN-2000 se-
ries as manufactured by Burt Process Equipment, 1050 Sherman Avenue, Hainden, Con-
necticut 06514.
C. Primary Neutralizing Module: The tank shall be rotational molded of heavy duty high
density polyethylene and measures 36" x 48" tall. The tank wall shall be designed to
withstand a continuous operating temperature of 1400 F under corrosive conditions with
a 1/2" thick reinforced cover. The tank shall have a flat bottom, 200 gallon capacity with
a minimum treatment capacity of 180 gallons.
D. The tank shall be fitted with an Anti-Vortex Baffling System (AVS) to prevent short cir-
cuiting and insure complete reaction of the wastewater and reagents. The tank shall be
fitted with 4" flange inlet outlet and vent connections triple welded and reinforced. The
cover shall include an opening sized for angled entry of the agitator shaft. The opening
shall include a vapor seal at shaft penetration. Additionally the cover shall be fitted with
all necessary flanged connections for instrumentation, reagent inlets, and a threaded 16"
inspection manhole. Inlet and outlet connections shall include down pipes extending to
within 12" of tank bottom. See tank details for dimensions and fitting locations.
E. Epoxy painted I-Beam rails shall be provided for mounting of the agitator with an angle
riser to provide proper mixer orientation. All hardware shall be T304 SS.
F. The tank mixer shall be direct drive 1725 rpm and mounted on tank rails. The single im-
peller shall be a high efficiency axial flow A310 design constructed of T316 SS sized for
thorough mixing with the AVS Baffle System. The mixer shaft shall be T316 SS with
minimum of 3/4" diameter and shall provide an impeller depth of 1 1/2 impeller diame-
ters off of tank bottom.
G. The mixer motor shall be high efficiency, low temperature rise, of not more than 1/3 HP,
120 VAC, 1750 RPM with a TEFC enclosure. The mixer shall incorporate oversized
bearings rated at a minimum of 100,000 L-10 hours.
H. Reaction tank and effluent pH sensors shall be combination type high density polyethyl-
ene double junction completely encapsulated with 3K Balco temperature compensation
device. The electrode shall have an industrial quality glass membrane and a measuring
range of 0-14 pH. pH probes shall have an epoxy encapsulated pre-amplifier with a
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-5 05/13/05
1. PP: ASTM D 4101, PP resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections to equipment
and plumbing fixtures.
2.6 SPECIAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Plastic Valves: Ball complying with MSS SP-122; butterfly, check, and other types made
of same material as piping. Include union ends, socket ends, socket ends with separate
unions, flanged ends, or wafer design for flanges.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Manufacturers:
a. Enfield Industrial Corp.
b. Orion Fittings, Inc.
B. Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) nipple or adapter,
with ASME 81.20.7, garden-hose-thread outlet and cap.
1. Metal Piping: Metal or plastic valve, nipple, or adapter, and cap of material com-
patible with piping and system liquid.
2. Plastic Piping: Plastic valve, nipple, or adapter, and cap of same material as or
compatible with piping, and compatible with system liquid.
C. General-Duty Valves: Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for metal angle, ball, but-
terfly, check, gate, globe, and plug valves.
D. Plastic Dilution Traps: Corrosion-resistant PP, with mechanical-joint pipe connections
and removable base.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Manufacturers:
a. Enfield Industrial Corp.
b. Orion Fittings, Inc.
3. Dilution Tanks: 1-gal. (3.8-L) capacity, with clear base unless colored base is indi-
cated. Include two NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) top inlets and one NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) side
outlet.
4. Dilution Jars: 1-pint (0.5-L) capacity, with clear base unless colored base is indi-
cated. Include NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) top inlet and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) side outlet.
5. Dilution Jars: 1-quart (1-L) capacity. Include NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) top inlet and
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) side outlet.
E. Corrosion-Resistant Traps: P-trap or drum trap; NPS 2 (DN 50), as required to match
connected piping.
1. PP: ASTM D 4101, PP resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-4 05/13/05
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following re-
quirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. PP Drainage Pipe and Fittings: Orion Blueline, ASTM F 1412, pipe extruded and drain-
age and vent-pattern fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PP resin with
fire-retardant additive complying with ASTM D 4101. Include fusion joint ends.
1. Exception: Pipe and fittings made from PP resin without fire-retardant additive
may be used for underground installation.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly
used joining materials. Connection at sink locations shall be mechanical, all other system
joints shall have electro-fusion fittings.
B. Couplings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, gaskets, sleeves, and threaded or
flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made by piping manufac-
turer for joining system piping.
C. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, couplings,
adapters, gaskets, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liq-
uid; and made for joining different piping materials.
D. Flanges: Assemblies of companion flanges gasket complying with ASME B16.21 and
compatible with system liquid, and bolts and nuts.
2.5 SPECIALTIES
A. Corrosion-Resistant Traps: P-trap; NPS 2 (DN 50), as required to match connected pip-
ing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-3 05/13/05
D. Maintenance Data: For neutralization systems and tanks to include in maintenance
manuals.
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain pipe, fittings, and joining materials for each piping system
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: Piping from different manufacturers may be used in same system if in-
dicated and suitable transition fittings matching both piping materials are used.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
chemical-waste specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Divi-
sion 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing laboratory.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping."
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store piping and specialties with sealing plugs in ends or with end protection.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Neutralization-System Chemicals: For each neutralization system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package 'E' —2323 15221-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15221 - CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and specialties for the following systems:
1. Chemical-waste and vent, gravity-flow, nonpressure piping system designated
"chemical waste."
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Process Material Sewerage" for exterior chemical-waste pip-
ing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot (3-m) head of water.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For chemical-waste piping materials, components, and specialties and for
neutralization systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties, including relation to other services
that serve same work areas.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1:
Package `E' —2323 15221-1 05/13/05
6) Final Tie-End Tests: Verify that above tests have been successfully per-
00611 formed.
7) Operational Pressure Tests: Use designated system gases and test for
pressure and flow.
8) Medical Gas Concentration Tests: Test each gas for required concen-
tration.
9) Labeling: Verify correct labeling.
4. Level 1 Vacuum System Testing: Use oil-free dry nitrogen, unless otherwise indi-
cated, and perform procedures and tests as indicated in NFPA 99 performance and
testing paragraphs for piped vacuum systems. Include the following:
a. Blow Down: Clear piping before connecting service connections or inlets._
b. Initial Pressure Tests: Subject each piping section to test pressure not less
than 150 psig (1035 kPa) before attaching system components, after install-
ing station outlets with test caps (if supplied) in place, and before concealing
piping system. Maintain test until joints are examined for leaks by means of
soapy water. Repair leaks with new materials and retest systems.
C. Initial Cross-Connection Tests: Determine that no cross connections of pip-
ing systems exist. Disconnect all systems except system to be checked. Pres-
surize system to 50 prig (345 kPa). Verify that gas flow from service connec-
tions and outlets is only from system being checked. Repeat for each system.
Verify correct labeling.
d. Standing-Pressure Tests: Install assembled system components after testing
individual systems as specified above. Subject systems to 24-hour standing-
pressure test at not less than 60 psig (415 kPa).
e. Final Cross-Connection Tests: Repeat cross-connection test above or per-
form alternate tests with each system at different pressure.
f. Vacuum Tests: Verify functional operation of components.
g. Valve Tests: Verify proper valve operation.
h. Alarm Tests: Operate systems and verify proper warning indication of each
medical gas piping system function.
i. Labeling: Verify correct labeling.
3.14 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain medical gas alarm system. Refer to Division 1 Sec-
tion "Closeout Procedures & Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 15213
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E'—2323 15213-17 05/13/05
specialties, service connections, alarm system, safety devices, and source equip-
ment.
a. Bulk Oxygen Storage Systems: Comply with NFPA 50.
b. Bulls Nitrous Oxide Storage Systems: Comply with CGA G-8.1.
2. Provide oil-free dry nitrogen, medical gases, materials, and equipment required for
testing.
3. Level 1 Pressure Medical Gas Testing: Use oil-free dry nitrogen, unless otherwise
indicated, and perform procedures and tests as indicated in NFPA 99 performance
and testing paragraphs for piped gas systems. Include the following:
a. Performance Testing:
1) Blow Down: Clear piping before connecting service connections or
outlets.
2) Initial Pressure Tests: Subject each piping section to test pressure of
1.5 times system working pressure, but not less than 150 psig
(1035 kPa), before attaching system components, after installing sta-
tion outlets with test caps (if supplied) in place, and before concealing
piping system. Maintain test until joints are examined for leaks by
means of soapy water. Repair leaks with new materials and retest sys-
tems.
3) Cross-Connection Tests: Determine that no cross connections of pip-
ing systems exist. Disconnect all systems except system to be checked.
Pressurize system to 50 psig (345 kPa). Verify that gas flow from ser-
vice connections and outlets is only from system being checked. Re-
peat for each system. Verify correct labeling.
4) Purge Tests: Perform heavy intermittent purging of piping and full-
flow purging of service connections.
5) Standing-Pressure Tests: Install assembled system components after
testing individual systems as specified above. Subject systems to 24-
hour standing-pressure test at 20 percent above normal line pressure.
Verify that pressure differences comply with required calibration. Re-
pair leaks with new materials and retest systems.
b. System Verification:
1) Cross-Connection Tests: Repeat cross-connection test above or per-
form alternate tests with each gas at different pressure.
2) Flow Tests: Perform flow test at each outlet.
3) Valve Tests: Verify proper valve operation.
4) Alarm Tests: Operate systems and verify proper warning indication of
each medical gas piping system function.
5) Piping Purity Tests: Test for dew point and hydrocarbons as com-
pared to source gas.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15213-16 05/13/05
B. Install piping adjacent to specialties and equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect medical gas piping to specialties, equipment, and accessories.
I. Connection NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: With shutoff valve and copper union.
2. Connection NPS 2-1/2 (DN 6S) and Larger: With shutoff valve and cast-copper-
alloy flange.
D. Ground specialties and equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding."
E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.12 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying labels and devices for medical gas piping systems according to
NFPA 99. Refer to Division 1S Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and
identification materials.
B. Captions and Color-Coding: Use the following or similar medical gas captions and
'* color-coding for medical gas piping products where required by NFPA 99:
1. Oxygen: White letters on green background or green letters on white background.
2. Medical Air: Black letters on yellow background.
3. Medical Vacuum: Black letters on white background.
4. Nitrous Oxide: White letters on blue background.
S. Nitrogen: White letters on black background.
6. WAGD: White letters on purple background.
7. Carbon Dioxide: Black or white letters on gray background.
C. Label medical gas systems operating at other-than-standard pressure with system operat-
ing pressure.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect, test, and certify completed medical gas systems according to requirements
in NFPA 99. Inspect, test, and certify each medical gas piping system, including
'* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15213-15 05/13/05
B. Brazed Joints: Use silver- or copper-phosphorus-composition filler metal and comply
with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," Section VII, "Brazed Joints"; or AWS D10.13,
"Recommended Practices for the Brazing of Copper Pipe and Tubing for Medical Gas
Systems."
C. Arrange for coupling manufacturer's authorized representative to join new copper tube
to existing copper tube with memory-metal couplings.
D. Join new copper tube to existing copper tube with memory-metal couplings. Follow
coupling manufacturer's product-specific procedure.
3.8 MEDICAL GAS MANIFOLD INSTALLATION
A. Install medical gas manifolds on concrete base anchored to substrate.
B. Install medical gas cylinders and connect to manifold piping.
C. Install medical gas manifolds with seismic restraints as indicated.
D. Install wall bracket secured to wall with chains around cylinders.
3.9 MEDICAL GAS SERVICE CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install medical gas service connections, of types indicated, in walls. Attach roughing-in
assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
B. Install medical gas service connections, of types indicated, in medical gas service units.
3.10 MEDICAL GAS ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install medical gas alarm system components in locations required by and according to
NFPA 99 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install medical gas alarm panels and computer interface cabinet where indicated.
C. Install medical gas anesthetizing-area, area, and master alarm panels.
D. Install medical gas local alarm panels at source equipment.
E. Install computer interface cabinet with connection to medical gas alarm system.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-14 05/13/05
E. Install exterior, buried medical gas piping in protective conduit fabricated with PVC pipe
and fittings. Do not extend conduit through foundation wall.
F. Purge medical gas piping, using oil-free dry nitrogen, after installing piping but before
connecting to service connections, alarms, and gages.
3.6 MEDICAL GAS VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division IS Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
and valve installation.
B. Install valves in locations required by and according to NFPA 99.
C. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from medical gas specialties and equip-
ment.
D. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of fluid flow to and from medical gas
specialties and equipment.
E. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used
for multiple valves that serve same area or function.
F. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure
of cover when valve is in closed position.
1. Pressure System Valves: Install pressure gage downstream from valve.
2. Suction System Valves: Install vacuum gage upstream from valve.
G. Install pressure safety and vacuum relief valves where recommended by specialty manu-
facturers.
H. Install emergency medical gas connections with pressure relief valve and full-size dis-
charge piping to outside, with check valve downstream from pressure relief valve and
with ball valve and check valve in supply main from bulk oxygen storage tank.
1. Install pressure regulators in piping to reduce pressure.
J. Install automatic drain valves for specialties and medical air and vacuum equipment that
require draining.
3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-13 05/13/05
D. Specialty and Equipment Flanged Connections: Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange
with gasket and brazed joint for connection to copper tube.
E. Interior and Underground Medical Gas Pressure Piping: Use hard copper tube, copper
pressure fittings, and brazed joints.
F. Interior Medical Gas Piping at Pressures Greater Than 200 psig (1380 kPa): Use
ASTM B 819, Type K, hard copper tube, copper pressure fittings, and brazed joints.
1. Interior Medical Vacuum Piping: Use hard copper tube, copper pressure fittings,
and brazed joints.
3.4 MEDICAL GAS VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate medical gas valve types to be used. If specific valve types are not indi-
cated, the following requirements apply:
1. Medical Gas Pressure Piping:
a. Shutoff Valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and Smaller: Copper-alloy ball valve.
b. Shutoff Valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Stainless-steel ball valve.
C. Check Valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and Smaller: Bronze.
2. Medical Vacuum/WAGD Piping:
a. Shutoff Valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and Smaller: Copper-alloy ball valve.
b. Shutoff Valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Stainless-steel ball valve.
C. Check Valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and Smaller: Bronze.
d. Check Valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Cast iron.
3. Zone Valves: With copper-tube extensions and gage.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Install supports and anchors according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports"
with spacing according to NFPA 99.
C. Install thermometers and pressure gages according to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages."
D. Install flexible pipe connector at each connection to medical air and vacuum equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-12 05/13/05
1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than [two] days in advance of proposed inter-
ruption of medical gas service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of medical gas service without Architect's and
Owner's written permission.
3. If existing oxygen and medical air systems can not be shut down for any reason,
connections shall be made using "Smart Tap" Technology, and shall conforn with
NFPA 99. SMART TECHNOLOGY, INC. can be contacted at 1-888-762-78SS.
B. Cleaning of Piping: If factory-cleaned and -capped medical gas piping is not available or
if precleaned piping must be recleaned because of exposure, perform the following pro-
cedures:
1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil,
grease, and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service ac-
cording to CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
2. Wash medical gas piping and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution
of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb (0.453 kg) of
chemical to 3 gal. (11.3 L) of water.
a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning.
b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases for medical vacuum pump. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for concrete
bases and to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement,
and concrete requirements.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods for medical gas piping systems ac-
cording to the following applications:
B. joining New to Existing Copper Tubes NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use memory-metal
couplings.
C. joining of Dissimilar Metal Piping: Use dielectric fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fitting types.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.
3. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-11 05/13/05
d. Nitrous Oxide: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60
psig (415 kPa) and changeover is made to alternate bank. Proposed N20
sensing points to tie into existing N20 upon removal of existing system..
e. Carbon Dioxide: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60
psig (415 kPa) and changeover is made to alternate bank.
f. Nitrogen: Pressure drops below 160 psig (1100 kPa) or rises above 200 psig
(1380 kPa) and changeover is made to alternate bank. Proposed N2 sensing
points to tie into existing N2 upon removal of existing system.
g. Contractor shall provide dedicated wiring and conduit from new medical
source equipment to new master gas alarm panel locations as noted above.
h. Contractor shall schedule shut-down of existing nitrogen and nitrous oxide
systems with owner. Do not interrupt existing services without owner's ap-
proval. Schedule interruptions in advance, according to owner's instructions.
Submit in writing, with request for interruption, methods proposed to mim-
mize length of interruption. Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of
day and work to minimize impact to owner's operations.
2.9 MEDICAL GAS CYLINDER STORAGE RACKS
A. Wall Storage Racks for Medical Gas Cylinders: Fabricate racks with chain restraints for
upright gas cylinders as indicated or provide equivalent manufactured wall racks.
B. Freestanding Storage Racks for Medical Gas Cylinders: Fabricate racks for gas cylinders
as indicated or provide equivalent manufactured storage racks.
2.10 TEST GAS
A. Description: Oil-free dry nitrogen complying with CGA P-9, for purging and testing of
piping.
2.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for identification of piping,
valves, gages, alarms, and specialties and for labels for bulk medical gas storage tanks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Medical Gas Service: Do not interrupt medical gas service to fa-
cilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary medical gas service according to require-
ments indicated:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-10 05/13/05
2. Enclosures: Fabricated from minimum 0.047-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick steel or mmi-
mum 0.05-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick aluminum, with knockouts for electrical and
piping connections.
3. Area Alarm Panels: TotalAlert 6819 Series — 6-, digital area alarm panels with in-
dicators for oxygen, medical air, nitrous and medical vacuum. Each area alarm
panel shall have a minimum of 6-sensing modules for area served and for future.
Alarms signal when the following conditions exist:
a. Oxygen: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60 psig
(415 kPa).
b. Medical Air: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60 psig
(415 kPa).
C. Nitrous Oxide: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60
psig (415 kPa).
d. Carbon Dioxide: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60
psig (415 kPa).
e. Medical Vacuum: Vacuum drops below 12 in. Hg (40 kPa vacuum).
f. Nitrogen: Pressure drops below 20 percent or rises above 20 percent of the
set pressure rating.
4. Local Alarm Panels: TotalAlert, Separate trouble alarm signals and pressure and
vacuum gages to indicate function of medical gas and vacuum equipment. Include
alarm signals at local alarm panels when the following conditions exist:
a. Medical Vacuum Equipment: Vacuum drops below 12 in. Hg (40 kPa vac-
uum) and backup vacuum pump is in operation.
S. Master Alarm Panels, (MGA-1, MGA-2 & MGA-3): Locate MGA-1 in existing
Telephone Switchboard and MGA-2 in existing Engineering Department, MGA-3
in existing Emergency Department, Series 6819 (60-points). Master alarm panel
shall connect to existing alarm signals from master alarm panels scheduled to be
removed. Proposed Engineering and Switchboard master alarm panels shall pro-
vide a separate/dedicated trouble alarm signal to the Emergency Department mas-
ter `slave' alarm panel. Unit shall be capable of interfacing with facilities network
communications system (Ethernet) in the future (OFI). Include alarm signals at
master alarm panels when the following conditions exist:
a. Medical Vacuum: Vacuum drops below 12 in. Hg (40 kPa vacuum) and
backup vacuum pump is in operation.
b. Oxygen: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60 psig
(415 kPa).
C. Medical Air: Pressure drops below 40 psig (275 kPa) or rises above 60 psig
(415 kPa).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-9 05/13/05
S. Before final assembly, provide temporary dust shield and U-tube for testing. IAW*+.
6. Nitrogen Control Panels: Label cover plate "Nitrogen Pressure Control." Include
CGA V-5, D.LS.S. No. 1120, nitrogen outlet.
2.8 MEDICAL GAS ALARM SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Beacon Medical Products (Medplus TotalAlert Series)
B. Medical Gas Alarm System, General: Compatible alarm panels, remote sensing devices,
and other related components as required by NFPA 99 for Level 1 medical gas alarm
systems. Refer to Division 15 Section "Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment" for air
compressors and vacuum pumps. Power wiring is specified in Division 16 Sections. All
sensor alarm conduit and wiring shall be provided under this Section. Refer to Division
16 for conduit information.
C. Components: Designed for continuous service and to operate on power supplied from
120-V ac power source to alarm panels and with connections for 24- or 12-V ac low-
voltage wiring and conduit to remote sensing devices by this Section. Include step-down
transformers if required.
D. Dew Point Monitors: Hill-Rom Medplus Dew Point/CO Monitor (SIOX) Continuous
line monitoring, having panel with gage or digital display, pipeline sensing element, elec- A
trical connections for alarm system, factory- or field-installed valved bypass, and visual
and cancelable audio signal for dryer site and master alarm panels. Alarm signals when
pressure dew point rises above 39 deg F (3.9 deg C) at 55 psig (380 kPa).
E. Pressure and Vacuum Switches: Continuous line monitoring with electrical connections
for alarm system.
1. Low-Pressure Switches: 0- to 100-psig (0- to 690-kPa) operating range.
2. High-Pressure Switches: Up to 250-psig (1725-kPa) operating range.
3. Vacuum Switches: 0- to 30-in. Hg (0- to 101-kPa vacuum) range.
F. Carbon Monoxide Monitors: Hill-Rom Medplus Dew Point/CO Monitor (SIOX)Panel
with gage or digital display, pipeline sensing element, electrical connections for alarm
system, and factory- or field-installed valved bypass. Alarm signals when carbon monox-
ide level rises above 10 ppm.
G. Medical Gas Alarm Panels: Factory wired with audible and color-coded visible signals to
indicate specified functions.
1. Mounting: Recessed installation.
Amok
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-8 05/13/05
4. Quick-Connect Service Connections: Diamond III Series 6-23XXXX-00 With
keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services, constructed to permit one-
handed connection and removal of equipment, and with positive-locking ring that
retains equipment stem in valve during use. Include the following:
a. 02 Connections: R-I 6-234510-00, Finish Assy 6-234610-00, with trim kit.
b. Med Air Connections: R-I 6-234512-00, Finish Assy 6-234612-00, with trim
kit.
C. Med Vac Connections: R-I 6-234513-00, Finish Assy 6-234613-00, with
trim kit.
d. N20 Connections: R-I-6-234511-00; Finish Assy: 6-234611-00; with trim
kit.
e. WAGD Connection: R-1-"-234519-00; Finish Assy: 6-234619-00; with trim
kit.
f. Med Vac Slide Brackets: R-I-6-234500-00; Finish Assy: 6-234600-00 with
trim kit.
g. N2 Connection (DISS): R-1-6-234514-00; Finish Assy: 6-234714; with trim
kit.
h. CO2 Connection (DISS): R-I-6-234520-00; Finish Assy: 6-234720-00 with
trim kit.
i. WAGD Connection (DISS): R-I-6-234519-00; Finish Assy: 6-234719-00;
with trim kit.
5. Wall Outlet Service Connection Cover Plates: One piece, stainless steel, with
NAAMM AMP 503, No. 4 finish and permanent, color-coded, medical gas identi-
fying label matching corresponding outlets.
6. Vacuum Bottle-Slide Brackets: Bottle-slide and mounting assembly matching pat-
tern of vacuum inlet. Include one slide bracket for each wall-mounting vacuum
inlet unless no slide bracket requirement is indicated.
2.7 MEDICAL GAS PRESSURE CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: Steel box and support brackets for recessed roughing-in with stainless-steel
or anodized-aluminum cover plate with printed operating instructions. Include manifold
assembly consisting of inlet supply valve, inlet supply pressure gage, line-pressure control
regulator, outlet supply pressure gage, D.I.S.S. service connection, and piping outlet for
remote service connection.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Beacon Medical Products: Series 6-120276-01
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 180 psig (1240 kPa).
3. Line-Pressure Control Regulator: Self-relieving, diaphragm type with precision
manual adjustment.
4. Pressure Gages: 0- to 300-psig (0- to 2070-kPa) range.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15213-7 05/13/05
connections complying with CGA V-1, individual inlet check valves, shutoff valve, .".
pressure regulator, check valve, and pressure gage.
3. Medical Gas Cylinders: Furnished by Owner (OFCI).
4. Operation: Automatic, pressure-switch-activated changeover from one cylinder
bank to the other when first bank becomes exhausted, without line-pressure fluc-
tuation or resetting of regulators and without supply interruption by shutoff of ei-
ther cylinder bank header.
5. Mounting: Wall with mounting brackets for manifold control cabinet and headers
or Floor with support legs for manifold control cabinet.
6. Label manifold control unit with permanent label identifying medical gas type and
system operating pressure.
7. Nitrous Oxide Manifolds: For 4/4 cylinders and 1333-cu. ft./h (10.5-L/s) capacity
at 55-psig (380-kPa) line pressure, with electric heater or orifice design that will
prevent freezing during high demand.
8. Nitrogen Manifolds: For 8/8 cylinders and 2000-cu. ft./h (15.7-L/s) capacity at
180-psig (1240-kPa) line pressure.
9. Carbon Dioxide Manifolds: For 2/2 cylinders and 500-cu. ft./h (3.94-L/s) capacity
at 55-psig (380-kPa) line pressure.
2.6 MEDICAL GAS SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Connection Devices: For specific medical gas pressure and vacuum services listed. In-
clude roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates. Individual cover
plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or assembly with cover +
plate. Furnish recessed-type units made for concealed piping, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. BeaconMedaes; Medaes Diamond III Series QC.
2. Roughing-in Assembly:
a. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping.
b. Brass-body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas
flow when primary valve is removed.
C. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage.
d. ASTM B 819, Type K, NPS 3/8 (DN 10) copper inlet or outlet tube brazed
to valve with gas-service marking and tube-end dust cap.
3. Finishing Assembly:
a. Brass housing with primary check valve.
b. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage.
C. Cover plate with gas-service label.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15213-6 05/13/05
stem, threaded or solder-joint ends, and handle designed for quarter turn between
opened and closed positions.
1. Include union-type body with bolted swing-away center section.
2. Include factory-installed ASTM B 819, Type K or L, copper-tube extensions with
pressure gage for pressure systems and vacuum gage for vacuum systems.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Beacon Medical: Series 6-150.
E. Zone Valve Boxes: Formed steel for recessed mounting, with holes for medical gas pip-
ing and anchors. Include boxes for single- or multiple-valve installation with pressure
gage and in sizes to permit manual operation of valves.
1. Interior Finish: Factory-applied white enamel.
2. Cover Plate: Stainless steel with NAAMM AMP 503, No. 4 finish with frangible
or removable windows.
3. Valve-Box Windows: Clear or tinted transparent plastic with labeling that in-
cludes rooms served, according to NFPA 99.
F. Safety Valves: Bronze body with settings to match system requirements.
1. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME construction, poppet type.
2. Vacuum Relief Valves: Specialty manufacturer's option.
G. Automatic Drain Valves: Corrosion-resistant metal body and internal parts, 200-psig
(1380-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, and capable of automatic discharge of
collected condensate.
2.5 MEDICAL GAS MANIFOLDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Beacon Medical Products: Series 6-107XXX-XX Li feLine
B. Description: Manifolds for medical gases that comply with NFPA 99, Ch. 4, Section
Cylinder Systems without Reserve Supply," for high-pressure medical gas cylinders. In-
clude the following features:
1. Central Control Panel Unit: Weatherproof cabinet, supply and delivery pressure
gages, electrical alarm system connections and transformer, indicator lights or de-
vices, manifold connection, pressure changeover switch, line-pressure regulator,
shutoff valves, and safety valve.
2. Manifold and Headers: Duplex, nonferrous-metal header for number of cylinders
indicated, divided into two equal banks. Units include design for minimum 800
psig (5520 kPa inlet pressure. Include cylinder bank headers with inlet (pigtail)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15213-5 05/13/05
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the Apo%,,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, hard drawn-temper, medical gas
tube that has been factory cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service. Include stan-
dard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in
green for Type K tube and blue for Type L tube.
1. Fittings: Factory cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to
ASTM B 819 or field cleaned, purged, and bagged as specified in "Preparation"
Article in Part 3.
a. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint pres-
sure type or MSS SP-73, wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints.
b. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 300.
C. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joining ma-
terials not in this Section. w
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP series alloys. Flux is prohibited unless used
with bronze fittings.
2.4 MEDICAL GAS VALVES
A. Valves, General: Factory cleaned for oxygen service and bagged.
B. Bronze/Brass Ball Valves: 3-piece-body, full-port ball valve rated for 600 psig minimum
working pressure; with chrome-plated brass ball, PTFE or TFE seats, blowout-proof
stem, brazed-joint ends, and locking-type handle designed for quarter turn between
opened and closed positions.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Beacon Medical Products Series 6-21126X-00 and 6-23002X-00
C. Bronze Check Valves: Straight-through-pattern, spring-loaded ball check valve; designed
for 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure.
D. Zone Valves: 3-piece-body, full-port bronze/brass ball valve rated for 600-psig minimum
working pressure; with chrome-plated brass ball, PTFE or TFE seats, blowout-proof
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15213-4 05/13/05
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the Medical Gas
Professional Healthcare Organization or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory
(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS 82.2, "Standard for
Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label bulk medical gas storage tanks to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels."
E. Comply with NFPA 50, "Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites."
F. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
G. Comply with NFPA 99, "Health Care Facilities," for materials and installation.
H. Comply with UL 498, "Attachment Plugs and Receptacles," for electrical service connec-
tions.
I. Comply with UL 544, "Medical Equipment," for medical gas specialties.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with concrete work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply for product selection:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-3 05/13/05
1. Level 1: For entire facility with systems where failure of medical gas supply would
be immediate and direct life-safety threat to patients. Air and vacuum equipment
arrangement must be duplex or redundant.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Medical gas tubes and fittings.
2. Medical gas manifolds.
3. Medical gas valves and valve boxes.
4. Medical gas service connections and pressure control panels.
S. Medical gas service units. Include integral service connections.
6. Alarm system components.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: For medical gas systems. Include relationship to other services
that serve same work area.
D. Brazing Certificates: As required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,
or AWS B2.2.
E. Piping Material Certification: Signed by Installer certifying that medical gas piping mate-
rials comply with NFPA 99 requirements.
F. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report for Bulk Medical Gas Storage Tanks:
As required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
G. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
H. Field quality-control test reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For medical gas piping and specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include data for the following:
1. Medical gas service connections and pressure control panels.
2. Medical gas service units.
3. Alarm system.
4. Medical gas manifolds.
J. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15213-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15213 - MEDICAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes medical gas piping and related specialties for the following medical
gas systems:
1. Medical gas pressure systems:
a. Oxygen piping, designated "oxygen."
b. Medical compressed-air piping, designated "medical air."
C. Nitrous oxide piping, designated "nitrous oxide."
d. Nitrogen piping, designated "nitrogen."
e. Carbon dioxide piping, designated "carbon dioxide."
2. Medical gas suction systems:
a. Medical-surgical vacuum piping, designated "medical vacuum."
b. Waste anesthetic gas disposal piping, designated "WAGD."
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers and pressure gages.
2. Division 15 Section "Medical Air and Vacuum Equipment" for compressed-air and
vacuum equipment and related accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. D.I.S.S.: Diameter-index safety system.
B. WAGD: Waste anesthetic gas disposal.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide medical gas and vacuum piping systems that comply with the following
NFPA 99 level categories:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Medical Gas Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15213-1 05/13/05
C. Startup Procedures: During boiler system startup, operate boiler water
treatment system (after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain re-
quired steady-state characteristics of feedwater.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and sched-
ules.
B. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.
C. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts inventory
and supply sources and on availability of parts and service. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data".
D. Schedule at least four hours of training with Owner, through Architect, with at least
seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15189
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-11 05/13/05
characteristic. Where applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the follow- 100%,
ing standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.
2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.
3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
4. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
6. Particulate and Dissolved Matter: ASTM D 1888.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, in-
spect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris; repair
damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Ensure that system is operational, filled, started, and vented prior to clean-
ing. Place terminal control valves in OPEN position during cleaning. Use
water meter to record capacity in each system.
C. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Hot-Water Heating System: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising
system to design temperature; maintain for a minimum of 12 hours.
Remove heat and allow to cool; drain and refill with clean water. Circu-
late for 6 hours at design temperature, then drain. Refill with clean wa-
ter and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
2. Chilled-Water System: Circulate for 48 hours, then drain. Refill with
clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water
and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
3. Steam System: Fill steam boilers only with cleaner and water. Apply
heat and maintain for a minimum of 12 hours. Cool and drain. Refill
with clean water, drain, refill, and check for sludge. Repeat until sys-
tem is free of sludge. Apply heat to produce steam for piping system
and maintain for a minimum of 8 hours. Bypass traps and waste con-
densate.
4. Open System: Flush with clean water for a minimum of one hour.
Drain completely and refill.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service repre-
sentative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's
maintenance personnel as specified below.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-10 05/13/05
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's pub-
lished torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indi-
cated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4868.
F. Steam Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of section 15182, Steam and Con-
densate Piping.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
I. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping
and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during
the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
B. Test chemical feed piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfac-
tory test results are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate re-
port for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water pip-
ing until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operat-
ing pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate
test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test
pressure constitute defects.
S. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until satisfactory re-
sults are obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform two
separate water analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are maintaining
water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Perform analy-
ses at least 60 days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis.
B.
Sample boiler water at 1-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of 5
weeks and prepare certified test report for each required water performance
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-9 05/13/05
4. Program timer designed to control the duration of the backwash cycle.
a. Timer shall be engaged by either the 24 hour timer, pressure differential
switch, or the manual override button. This program tinier shall control a
valve sequence multi-port valve. An internal delay of no less than 90 sec-
onds shall be built into the program timer to avoid false backwashing.
b. Multiport valve sequence shall operate the filter's diaphragm actuated valves.
It shall be equipped with a position indicator and two control switches. One
switch shall be used electrically to override the multiport valve, in the event
that it is not in sequence with the program timer and will automatically reset
the multiport valve to filtration position.
5. Backwash indicating light mounted on the outside of the panel cloor.
6. Non-resettable backwash counter mounted on the outside of the panel door to in-
dicate the number of times the filter has backwashed.
7. Motor starter and disconnect.
8. Step down transformer to convert 3 phase power to 115 volts AC to operate con-
trol components.
9. A set of dry contacts which can be connected to Building Automation System to
monitor backwash frequency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical
treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance Require-
ments" Article.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.
B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 16 Sections for connecting electri-
cal equipment.
D. Ground equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V - 2323 15189-8 05/13/05
"'` A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are com-
00 with piping system components and connected equipment.
B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to
remove grease and petroleum products.
C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.
D. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust
pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
E. Open-Loop, Condenser Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling,
acid to reduce alkalinity and pH, corrosion inhibitor, and biocide.
F. Steam System Chemical: Sequestering agent to reduce hardness and prevent feedline
congestion, base to provide alkalinity, oxygen scavenger, carbon dioxide neutralizer, and
filming amines.
2.4 CONDENSER WATER FILTRATION UNIT
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by the following:
1. Diamond Water Systems, Model TSA Series 0.5 Micron Sand Filter.
B. General: Filter shall be comprised of#304 Stainless Steel tank(s), circulating pump and a
Schedule 80 PVC manifold.
C. Media: Media shall be natural Quartz multimedia, that is certified as to quality by NSF
standards.
D. Manifold Valves: Manifold valves shall be bronze construction, automatic diaphragm
type, 125 psig working pressure manufactured by Aquamatic.
E. Pressure Gages: Filter shall be equipped with two pressure gauges. The gauges shall
have a stainless steel casing, with brass internals and be liquid filled. The minimum face
size shall be no less than 2-1/2". One gauge marked (IN) shall be connected to the filter
pump discharge and the second gauge marked (OUT) shall be connected to the outlet
side of the filter.
F. Filter Controls: Enclosure shall be non metallic NEMA 4X and shall contain the follow-
ing:
1. 24 hour timer to enable backwash once per day.
2. Pressure differential switch, which is factory set to initiate backwash at 18 psig dif-
ferential across the filter bed.
I Manual override switch, of a momentary contact design, mounted on the control
enclosure door.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-7 05/13/05
f. Bleed-off light to indicate valve operation.
g. Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band.
2. Control inhibitor feeding, based on makeup volume, and include the following:
a. Solid-state reset counter (accumulator), with selections from 1 to 15.
b. Solid-state timer, adjustable from 15 to 300 seconds.
C. Test switch.
d. Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump.
e. Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated.
f. Solid-state lockout timer, adjustable from 15 to 180 minutes, with indicator
light. Lockout timer to deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits.
g. Electromechanical-type, panel-mounted makeup totalizer to measure amount
of makeup water.
3. Control biocide with an adjustable time programmer and include the following:
a. 24-hour timer with 14-day skip feature to permit activation any hour of day.
b. Precision, solid-state, bleed-off lockout timer (zero to nine hours) and clock-
controlled biocide pump timer (zero to two and one-half hours). Prebleed
and bleed lockout.
C. Solid-state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations.
d. 24-hour digital display of time of day.
e. 14-day LED display of day of week.
f. Fast and slow internal clock set controls.
g. Battery backup so clock is not disturbed by power outages.
h. Quartz timekeeping accuracy.
i. Hand-off-auto switches for biocide pumps.
j. Biocide A and Biocide B illuminated legends to indicate pump is running.
2.2 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case, for
testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, sulphite concentrations, biocount,
chloride, low phosphate, conductivity bridge, range 0 to 10,000 microhms, creosol red
pH slide complet with reagent, high nitrite, and total alkalinity and for calcium hardness
field tests.
B. Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete with
piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream
from mild steel coupon in the test coupon assembly.
1. Four-station rack for open condenser water systems.
2.3 CHEMICALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-6 05/13/05
E. Agitator: Direct drive, 1750 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment.
1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 120-V, 60-Hz, single-phase motor.
2. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and propeller.
F. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, recepta-
cles for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.
G. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial
adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light,
output to control circuit, and recorder.
1-I. Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic drive;
impulse contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact switch.
1. Turbine type with bronze or cast-iron body rated for 125 psig (860 kPa).
2. Magnetic-drive or mechanical-impulse contactor matched to signal receiver.
3. At least six-digit totalizers.
4. 120-V ac.
I. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid enclo-
sure with 120-V, continuous-duty coil.
J. Electronic Timers: 150-second and S-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full
range, and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.
K. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing
with heat fusion.
L. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and polytetrafluoro-
ethylene seats and seals.
M. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer ele-
ment.
N. Condenser Water-Treatment Control Panel: Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits
and digital LED displays, in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable
door.
1. Control dissolved solids, based on conductivity, and include the following:
a. Digital readout display.
b. Temperature-compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream mani-
fold.
C. High, low, and normal conductance indicator lights.
d. High or low conductance alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with si-
lence switch.
e. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-5 05/13/05
2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 100 percent of amount initially installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by the following:
1. HVAC Water-Treatment Products:
a. Barclay Chemical Co., Inc.
B. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel
shutoff valve on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating
shutoff valves on sides.
1. Capacity: S gal.
2. Working Pressure: 175 psig.
C. Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for intended
chemical with 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.
1. Adjustable flow rate.
2. Thermoplastic construction.
3. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 120-V, 60-Hz, single-phase motor.
4. Built-in relief valve.
D. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density
opaque polyethylene with graduated markings.
1. Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid-level
switch.
2. Capacity: 50 gal.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-4 05/13/05
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; water-pressure drops; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; and furnished products listed below:
1. Pumps.
2. Chemical solution tanks.
3. Agitators.
4. Control equipment and devices.
5. Test equipment.
6. Chemicals.
7. Filters.
8. Chemical feeders.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, re-
quired clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available
at Project site.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to in-
clude in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of chemical
treatment equipment required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum con-
ditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the
cooling, chilled-water piping, condenser water piping and equipment. Services and
chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Comple-
tion, including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-3 05/13/05
*'
1. Sequestering agent and base pumped from solution tank into boiler,
with minimum of one pump per boiler, if treatment materials can be
mixed. Agitator as required.
2. Oxygen scavenger pumped from solution tank into deaerator storage
section. Pumps and agitator as required.
3. Carbon dioxide neutralizer or filming amine pumped from solution tank
into steam header with minimum of one pump per boiler. Agitator as
required.
4. Solution pumps activated when feedwater pumps are running.
5. Conductivity controller samples boiler water on timed cycle and oper-
ates solenoid blowdown valve in line to blowdown tank.
6. Liquid-level switch, in each solution tank, deactivates solution pump
and agitator, and signals alarm.
7. Performance: Water treatment sized and equipped to treat raw water
available at Project site to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Hardness: 0.00.
b. Iron: 0.00.
C. Total Alkalinity: 1026 ppm or less.
d. Silica: 120 ppm or less.
e. Total Algae: 0.00 growth.
f. pH: 10.5 or above.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build-up of scale
and biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a
hazard to operating personnel or the environment.
B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Pro-
ject site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance
characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of au-
thorities having jurisdiction.
1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling.
2. Condenser Water, Cooling Tower System: Maintain system essentially free of scale
and total suspended solids.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15189 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART "( - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:
1. Chilled-water piping (closed-loop system).
2. Heating, steam and condensate piping.
3. Condenser water piping (open system).
4. Steam Systems.
1.3 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Closed-Loop System: One bypass feeder on each system with isolating and drain valves
downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Introduce chemical treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by
test.
B. Open-Loop Systems for Cooling Towers: PVC tubing with hole to feed chemical.
1. Conductivity controller samples sump water when activated by pump and operates
solenoid bleed-off valve in line to drain.
C. Open-Loop, Condenser Water Piping: Pump sequestering agent and corrosion inhibitor
from solution tank into condenser water supply to tower. Use agitator as required.
1. Intermittently feed biocide to condenser water to achieve a toxic level of the chemi-
cal to kill the organism present.
2. Change biocides periodically to avoid chemical immunity.
3. Activate chemical solution pump from water meter in makeup water line to cooling
tower when condenser water pumps are running.
4. Automatically feed chemical with electronic solid-state controllers.
5. Deactivate solution pump and signal alarm by a liquid-level switch in each solution
tank on low chemicals.
D. Steam Systems: Bypass feeder on feedwater line to each boiler.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Water Treatment
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15189-1 05/13/05
#'Oftk END OF SECTION 15186
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam Condensate Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15186-7 05/13/05
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that steam condensate pumps are installed and connected according to the Con-
tract Documents.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instruc-
tions and the Contract Documents.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
D. Clean strainers.
E. Set steam condensate pump controls.
F. Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation.
G. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
1. Lubricate bearings. ,,Nook,
2. Set float switches to operate at proper levels.
3. Set throttling valves on pump discharge for specified flow.
4. Check motors for proper rotation.
5. Test pump controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
6. Replace damaged or malfunctioning pump controls and equipment.
7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
H. Start steam condensate pumps according to manufacturer's written startup instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain steam condensate pumps as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
2. Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Division 1
Section - "Submittals and Substitutions", in Division 1 Section - "Contract Close-
out", and Division 15 - "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam Condensate Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15186-6 05/13/05
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Install pumps on concrete bases. Anchor pumps to bases using inserts or anchor bolts in
accordance with Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Re-
straints".
E. Install thermometers and pressure gages.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
low-
C. Install shutoff and check valves on inlet of each condensate return connection prior to re-
turn header.
D. Install inlet strainer and valved bypass to drain at system return connection.
E. Install union or flange, check valve, throttling valve, and shutoff valve at pump discharge
connections for each pump unit.
F. Install pipe drain and overflow to nearest floor drain for overflow and drain piping con-
nections.
G. Install full-size vent piping, terminating in 180-degree elbow at point above highest steam
system connection or as indicated on Drawings.
H. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
1. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sec-
tions.
J. Ground equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam Condensate Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15186-5 05/13/05
I. Electrical alternator to sequence water pumps.
2. Manual lead-lag control to override the electric alternator when active pump is
manually selected and allows both pumps to operate on receiver high level.
3. The stand-by float switch shall be provided to activate both condensate pumps in
the event of failure of the electrical alternator and will sound an alarm in the fac-
tory mounted control cabinet.
4. Disconnect switch and cover interlock to insure complete electrical deactivation of
the entire condensate handling system.
5. Magnetic starters with fused line protection and overload relays for each pump.
6. Two (2) Hand-Off-Automatic selector switches, with auto spring return from
"Hand" position.
7. Control circuit transformer having fused and grounded secondary when motor
voltage exceeds 120 volts.
S. Two (2) pump run lights.
9. Numbered terminal strip.
10. Momentary contact "TEST" push button, for each pump, on cover
11. High water alarm light (red).
12. High water alarm horn and silence push button.
13. Contacts to allow high water alarm to be enunciated at building system control
panel.
2.6 CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. Control Sequence: Condensate return system controls shall be provided by the unit
manufacturer, as follows:
1. When the level in the unit receiver rises to a preset high level, the mechanical alter-
nator shall alternately activate the condensate pumps when the hand-off automatic
selector switch is placed in the automatic position.
2. When the pump has discharged the water and the condensate level in the receiver
recedes to a preset low level, the alternator shall deactivate and stop the pump.
3. If the condensate level in the receiver should continue to rise to a second high level
with the lead pump running; the alternator shall activate the second pump and will
continue to operate both pumps until the water level recedes to the preset low
level, at which point the pumps shall be deactivated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with require-
ments for installation.
B. Examine rough installation of steam condensate piping.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam Condensate Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15186-4 05/13/05
b. Shippensburg Pump Co., Inc. (SHIPCO)
C. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, packaged, electric-drive pump units with capacities in-
dicated on Drawings. Steam condensate pumps shall include receiver, pumps, controls,
and accessories suitable for operation with low-pressure steam condensate.
B. Configuration: Floor-mounting, duplex unit with receiver, 2 centrifugal water pumps,
and 2 externally adjustable float switches.
2.3 RECEIVER
A. Floor-mounting, close-grained cast iron; with the following features and accessories:
1. Cast iron inlet basket type strainer with self cleaning bronze screen, dirt pocket,
and clean-out plug. Inlet strainer shall be mounted on the receiver and screen shall
be removable for cleaning.
2. Thermometer well and thermometer.
3. Lifting eye bolts or lugs (minimum of 2).
4. Externally adjustable float switches (2).
tow S. Flanges for mounting pumps.
2.4 WATER PUMPS
A. Centrifugal, 2 stage, close coupled, vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted.
Include renewable bronze case ring, mechanical seal (rated for 250°F), drip-proof motor
with stainless steel shaft and independent pump control circuit for each pump. Pumps
shall be mounted on receiver flange. The pumps shall deliver the full specified capacity
at all points on the curve with a maximum 2 foot NPSH (net positive suction head)
available. Provide the following features and accessories on each pump:
1. Provide a pump suction isolation valve for each pump to allow the entire pump
and motor assembly to be removed for service, including the lower half of the
pump casing for wear ring replacement, without draining the receiver.
2.5 CONTROL PANEL
A. Control Panel and Wiring: Provide factory mounted and wired NEMA 250, Type 12
control cabinet with hinged door and grounding lug. Provide factory wiring between
pumps, float switches, and control panel for single external electrical connection. Wiring
to motors, floats, controls and starters shall be factory run in flexible, liquid tight con-
duit. The control cabinet shall contain the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam Condensate Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15186-3 05/13/05
A. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with .Onft,,.
Hydraulic Institute - HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Ap-
plication and Operation," and Hydraulic Institute - HI 1.6, "Centrifugal Pump Tests."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receivers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pres-
sure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain steam condensate return units from one source and
by a single manufacturer. Include responsibility and accountability to answer questions
and resolve problems regarding compatibility, installation, performance, and acceptance
of units.
L5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store steam condensate pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Floor-Mounted, Duplex, Centrifugal Pump, Steam Condensate Return Units:
a. ITT Fluid Handling; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam Condensate Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15186-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15186 - STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes condensate pumps for low-pressure steam systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements for steam conden-
sate pumps.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
isolation pads and anchoring requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section - "Submittals and Sub-
""'"` stitutions" and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
B. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected mod-
els; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for
each type of product. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. Include receiver capac-
ity and material.
C. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include Setting Drawings with
templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differ-
entiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section - "Spe-
cial Provisions" and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Requirements" for Coordi-
nation Drawing requirements related to steam condensate pumps.
E. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of steam condensate pump and trouble-
shooting maintenance guide to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1 and Division 15 — "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam Condensate Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15186-1 05/13/05
D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
operation.
2. Open cooling water-supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where ap-
plicable.
3. Open cooling water-supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid-supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally
kept at operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
7. Start motors.
S. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper
flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leak-
age through stuffing boxes; then tighten glands.
10. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
11. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.
E. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves
open, steps are the same, except open discharge valves before starting motors.
F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed require-
ments for testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15185
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-13 05/13/05
I. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.
J. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of base-mounted pumps.
K. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps be-
tween pump casing and valves.
L. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure-gage
tappings where provided.
M. Install temperature and pressure-gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping
around each pump.
N. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
O. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
P. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 1.6 Sec-
tions.
Q. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instruc-
tions and the Contract Documents.
C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction
marked on pump casing.
4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot liq-
uids are free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are
bound or drag, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
6. Clean strainers.
7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-12 05/13/05
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal
wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to
1-1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check
coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are
level and plumb.
F. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to
open drain.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations,
after grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping con-
nections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in
HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Opera-
tion."
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Com-
pletely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or
wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to
pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump noz-
zles.
E. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators.
F. Install nonslam check valve and globe valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.
G. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of vertical in-line pumps.
H. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-11 05/13/05
steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and
factory- or field-fabricated support.
B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating, cast-
iron body, pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing,
and check valve features.
2.11 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS
A. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and
automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch- (1800-
mm-) minimum, electrical power cord with plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with require-
rnents for installation.
1. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connec-
tions before pump installation.
2. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to
be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install pumps according to HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature,
Definitions, Application and Operation."
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hang-
ers. Install seismic bracing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before set-
ting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-10 05/13/05
2.9 VERTICAL-MOUNTING, FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, DOUBLE-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, double-suction, single-stage,
bronze-fitted, axially split case design; made for vertical mounting; and .rated for 175-
psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of
225 deg F (107 deg C), with mechanical seals.
1. Casing: Cast iron; with ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanged pipe connections. Include
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections and threaded drain plug at
low point of volute.
2. Casing: Cast iron; with ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanged pipe connections. Include
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections and threaded drain plug at
low point of volute.
3. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
double suction, mounted between bearings, and keyed to shaft.
4. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
5. Shaft: Stainless-steel shaft with axially split spacer coupling.
6. Pump Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated, ball-type, thrust bearings contained in
cast-iron housing.
7. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
8. Seals: Stuffing box, with at least four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn
with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
9. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalign-
ment.
10. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
11. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment for motor sizes of 100 hp and smaller; with flange and sleeve section
that can be disassembled and removed without removing pump or motor, for sizes
larger than 100 hp.
12. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
13. Baseplate: Steel or cast iron.
14. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing,
coupling guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting holes for field-installed
motors.
15. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
2.10 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating, cast-
iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-9 05/13/05
B. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, double-suction, single-stage,
bronze-fitted, axially split case design; rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working
pressure and a continuous water temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C), with stuffing-
box seals. Include impeller mounted between bearings and the following:
1. Casing: Cast iron; with ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanged pipe connections. Include
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections, vent valve at high point of
volute, and threaded drain plug at low point of volute.
2. Casing: Cast iron; with ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanged pipe connections. Include
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections, vent valve at high point of
volute, and threaded drain plug at low point of volute.
a. Casing shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnect-
ing piping.
3. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
double suction, and keyed to shaft.
4. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
5. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
6. Pump Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron hous-
ing.
7. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
8. Seals: Stuffing box, with at least four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn
with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
9. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalign-
ment.
10. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
11. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment for motor sizes of 100 hp and smaller; with flange and sleeve section
that can be disassembled and removed without removing pump or motor, for sizes
larger than 100 hp.
12. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
13. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.
14. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing,
coupling guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting holes for field-installed
motors.
a. Option: Cast-iron frames are acceptable.
15. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-8 05/13/05
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
J. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft extension with bronze sleeve and neoprene slinger.
5. Shaft: Stainless-steel shaft close coupled to motor shaft.
6. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
7. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with supporting legs as integral part
of motor enclosure.
2.7 SUPPORTED-VOLUTE, FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, end-suction, single-stage,
bronze-fitted, back-pull-out, radially split case design; rated for 1.75-psig (1200-kPa)
minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F
(107 deg Q.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point of vo-
lute, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections, and integral feet or
other means on volute to support weight of casing and attached piping. Casing
shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
S. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
7. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.
8. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing,
coupling guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting holes for field-installed
motors.
a. Option: Cast-iron frames are acceptable.
9. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
2.8 FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, DOUBLE-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, double-suction, single-stage,
bronze-fitted, axially split case design; rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working
pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C), with mechanical
seals and impeller mounted between bearings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-7 05/13/05
motor section from motor-stator windings by corrosion-resistant, nonmagnetic, alloy
liner. Include design rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a con-
tinuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Casing: Cast bronze or cast iron, with stainless-steel liner, static O-ring seal to
separate motor section from motor stator, and flanged piping connections.
2. Impeller: Overhung, single suction, closed or open, nonmetallic.
3. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with carbon-steel sleeve.
4. Motor: Single speed.
5. Motor: Multispeed.
2.5 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Description: Vertical, in-line, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, single-stage, radially split case
design. Include vertical-mounting, bronze-fitted design and mechanical seals rated for
125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of
225 deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections
smaller than NPS 3 (DN80), drain plug at low point of volute, and threaded gage
tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Ground and polished stainless-steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Shaft: Ground and polished stainless-steel shaft with axially split spacer coupling.
6. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
7. Seals: Stuffing box, with at least four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn
with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
8. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with lifting and supporting lugs in
top of motor enclosure.
2.6 CLOSE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Centrifugal, close-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, back-
pull-out, radially split case design; rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working
pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point of vo-
lute, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
a. Connection Option: Unions at connections for casings that are not available
with threaded companion flanges.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-6 05/13/05
A. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.
POW B. Motors: Include built-in, thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bear-
ings. Select each motor to be nonoverloading over full range of pump performance
curve.
C. Motors: Minimum efficiency as indicated in Division 15 Section— "Motors".
2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A. Description: Horizontal, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case
design; rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) rmnirnum working pressure and a continuous water
temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections, and
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
a. Connection Option: Unions at connections for casings that are not available
with threaded companion flanges.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Impeller: ASTM B 36/B 36M, rolled-temper-brass fabrication, statically and dy-
namically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
400W 4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
5. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type.
7. Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated, sleeve type.
8. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalign-
ment.
9. Motor: Resiliently mounted to pump casing.
2.4 COMPACT IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A. Description: Water cooled, horizontal, in-line, compact design, seal-less, centrifugal, and
single stage. Include pump and motor assembled on a common shaft in hermetically
sealed unit, without stuffing boxes or mechanical seals. Include lubrication of sleeve
bearing and cooling of motor by circulating pumped liquid through motor section, and
isolation of motor section from motor-stator windings by corrosion-resistant, nonmag-
netic, alloy liner. Include design rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pres-
sure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg Q.
B. Description: Cartridge type, horizontal, in-line, compact, seal-less, centrifugal, and single
stage. Include pump and motor assembled on a common shaft in cartridge-type, her-
metically sealed unit, without stuffing boxes or mechanical seals. Include isolation of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-5 05113105
o. Swaby Manufacturing Co. Am%" .
p. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.
q. Well Pump Company, Inc.
5. Supported-Volute, Flexible-Coupled, End-Suction Pumps:
a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
b. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.
C. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
6. Flexible-Coupled, Double-Suction Pumps:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
C. Buffalo Pumps, Inc.; all Ampco Pittsburgh Co.
d. Burks Pumps, Inc.; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.
e. Deming Div.; Crane Co.
f. General Signal Pump Group; a unit of General Signal.
g. Goulds Pumps, Inc.
h. Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Co.
i. PACO Pumps.
j. Patterson Pump Co.
k. Peerless Pump Co.
1. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.
M. Weil Pump Company, Inc.
7. Vertical-Mounting, Flexible-Coupled, Double-Suction Pumps:
a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
b. Burks Pumps, Inc.; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.
C. General Signal Pump Group; a unit of General Signal.
d. Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Co.
e. PACO Pumps.
f. Peerless Pump Co.
8. Vertical Tturbine Pumps, Water Lubricated:
a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
9. Automatic Condensate Pump Units:
a. Beckett Corp.
b. Hartell Div.; Milton Roy Co.
C. Little Giant Pump Co.
d. Marsh Manufacturing, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-4 05/13/05
1. In-Line Circulators:
a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
b. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.
C. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
2. Compact In-Line Circulators:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
d. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
e. Hartell Div.; Milton Roy Co.
f. PACO Pumps.
g. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.
3. Vertical In-Line Pumps:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
d. Burks Pumps, Inc.; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.
e. Deming Div.; Crane Co.
f. General Signal Pump Group; a unit of General Signal.
g. Goulds Pumps, Inc.
h. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
i. MEPCO (Marshall Engineering Products Co.).
j. PACO Pumps.
k. Patterson Pump Co.
1. Peerless Pump Co.
m. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.
4. Close-Coupled, End-Suction Pumps:
a. Alyan Pump Co.; Div. of Hannmann Machinery Systems, Inc.
b. Amtrol, Inc.
C. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
d. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
e. Buffalo Pumps, Inc.; an Ampco Pittsburgh Co.
f. Burks Pumps, Inc.; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.
g. Deming Div.; Crane Co.
h. General Signal Pump Group; a unit of General Signal.
i. Goulds Pumps, Inc.
j. Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Co.
k. MEPCO (Marshall Engineering Products Co.).
1. PACO Pumps.
M. Peerless Pump Co.
n. Scot Pump; Div. of Ardox Corp.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-3 05/13/05
A. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label pumps to comply with UL 778; "Motor-Operated
Water Pumps," for construction requirements.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with
HI 1."I-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Opera-
tion," and HI 1.6, "Centrifugal Pump Tests."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic systems:
l. In-line circulators.
2. Vertical in-line pumps.
J. End-suction pumps.
4. Double-suction pumps.
5. Automatic condensate pump units.
B. Related Sections include the following:
POW 1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
inertia pads, isolation pads, spring supports, and spring hangers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities; shipping, in-
stalled, and operating weights; furnished specialties; final impeller dimensions; and acces-
sories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include Setting Drawings with
templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differ-
entiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi-
sion 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Pumps
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15185-1 05/13/05
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
J. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Flush steam and condensate piping with clean water. Remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
END OF SECTION 15182
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-14 05/13/05
10"k D. Install vacuum breaker downstream from control valve and bypass and close to coil inlet
connection.
E. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
F. Install a drip leg at coil outlet.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during
test.
2. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pres-
sure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpres-
sure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage
"" due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped
air. Use drip legs installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified
minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,
"Building Services Piping."
4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repair-
ing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
5. Prepare written report of testing.
3.15 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after steam and condensate system
balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-13 05/13/05
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or
longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm).
2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm).
3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
4. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 13 feet (4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
5. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
6. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 15 feet (4.6 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
7. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
8. NPS 6 (DN 150): Maximum span, 21 feet (6.4 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
9. NPS 8 (DN 200): Maximum span, 24 feet (7.3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch
(16 mm).
10. NPS 10 (DN 250): Maximum span, 26 feet (8 m); minimum rod size, 3/4 inch
(19 mm).
11. NPS 12 (DN 300): Maximum span, 30 feet (9.1 m); minimum rod size, 7/8 inch
(22 mm).
D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors.
3.12 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint con-
struction requirements for threaded, welded, and flanged joints.
3.13 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connec-
tions.
B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-12 05/13/05
A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment,
but not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) from connected equipment.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, install ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from
trap; install union, check valve, and ball valve downstream from trap.
3.9 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure-reducing valves in readily accessible location for maintenance and inspec-
tion.
B. Install bypass piping around each pressure-reducing valve, with globe valve equal in size
to area of pressure-reducing valve seat ring, unless otheru<,ise indicated.
C. Install gate valves around each pressure-reducing valve.
D. Install unions around each pressure-reducing valve having threaded-end connections.
E. Install pressure gages on low-pressure side of each pressure-reducing valve and ahead of
shutoff valve. Install pressure gages downstream from globe valve on pressure-reducing
valve bypass.
1. On two-stage pressure-reducing stations, install drip trap and pressure gage up-
stream from second stage pressure-reducing valve.
F. Install strainers upstream for each pressure-reducing valve.
G. Install safety valves downstream from each pressure-reducing valve station.
3.10 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1. Pipe safety valve discharge without
valves to atmosphere outside building. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety
valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain.
3.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet
(6 m) long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping
20 feet (6 m) or longer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-11 05/13/05
E. Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction ARNPIN
of condensate flow.
P. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side clown.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to steam mains using 45-degree
fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Use of 90-
degree tee fittings is permissible if 45-degree fittings are impractical. If length of branch
takeoff is less than 10 feet (3 m), pitch branch line down toward mains at a 0.4 percent
grade.
H. Install unions in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller adjacent to each valve, at final con-
nections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install flanges in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger at final connections of each piece
of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid
valve, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) nipple and ball valve in
blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. Match size of strainer
blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50).
K. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
L. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms
of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe bends,
and expansion joints.
1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not
exceeding 150 feet where pipe is pitched down in direction of steam flow and a
maximum of 75 feet where pipe is pitched up in direction of steam flow.
2. Size drip legs at vertical risers same size as pipe and extend beyond rise. Size drip
legs at other locations same diameter as main. In steam mains NPS 6 (DN 150)
and larger, dirt leg size can be reduced, but to no less than NPS 4 (DN 100).
3. Install gate valve at drip legs, dirt pockets, and strainer blowdowns to allow re-
moval of dirt and scale.
4. Install steam traps close to drip legs.
M. Pitch condensate piping down toward flash tank. If more than one condensate pipe dis-
charges into flash tank, install a swing check valve in each line. Install thermostatic air
vent at top of tank. Install inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at low-pressure
condensate outlet, sized for three times the condensate load. Install safety valve at tank
top. Install pressure gage, gate valve, and swing check valve, and backpressure valve on
low-pressure (flash) steam outlet.
3.8 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-10 05/13/05
how B. Steam Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through DN 300): Schedule 40 steel
pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
C. Condensate Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded
J oints using Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
D. Condensate Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through DN 300): Schedule 80
steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and
Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for steam and
condensate valve applications.
B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at inlet connection
to each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.5 LP STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS (UP TO 15 PSIG)
A. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, heat exchangers, and
heating coils.
3.6 HP AND MP STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS (16 PSIG to 125 PSIG)
A. Inverted Bucket Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs.
B. Thermodynamic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs.
3.7 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4
(DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as
required for system drainage.
D. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of
steam flow.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-9 05/13/05
2.14 CONDENSATE COOLER
A. Condensate cooler shall be manufactured from Schedule 40 steel pipe with interior baffle
and connections for non-potable water inlet and aquastat bulb fitting to measure con-
densate outlet temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS (UP TO 15 PSIG)
A. Steam and Amospheric Vent Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe,
with threaded joints using Class 125 cast-iron fittings.
B. Steam and Atmospheric Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through
DN 300): Schedule 40 steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel
welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
C. Condensate and Pumped Discharge Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 80
steel pipe, with threaded joints using Class 125 malleable-iron fittings.
D. Condensate and Pumped Discharge Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through
DN 300): Schedule 80 steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel
welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges. AM*
3.2 LPSH PROCESS (CLEAN) STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS (UP TO 15 PSIG)
A. Steam Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints
using Class 125 cast-iron fittings.
B. Steam Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through DN 300): Schedule 40 steel
pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
C. Condensate and Unfired Steam Generator Blowdown and Drain Piping, All pipe sizes:
Schedule 80 stainless steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought
austenitic stainless steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought austenitic stainless
steel flanges.
3.3 HP AND MP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS (16 PSIG to 125 PSIG)
A. Steam Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints
using Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
A.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-8 05/13/05
2.9 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS
A. Quick Vents: Cast-iron or brass body, with balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel
thermostatic bellows and stainless-steel heads and seats.
B. Float Vents: Cast-iron or brass body, seamless brass float, balanced-pressure thermo-
static bellows, and replaceable stainless-steel seat, float, and head.
2.10 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Vacuum Breakers: 150-prig (1035-kPa) steam working pressure, 365 deg F (1,85 deg C)
maximum operating temperature, brass or stainless-steel body, and stainless-steel re-
tainer, spring, and ball; with plain or threaded outlet.
2.11 STRAINERS
A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 250-psig (1725-kPa) working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B
cast-iron body; stainless-steel screen, No. 20 mesh for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and
manufacturer's recommended perforations for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger; tapped
blowoff plug. Threaded connections for strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and
flanged connections for strainers NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
B. Basket Strainers: 250-psig (1725-kPa) working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B
cast-iron body; stainless-steel screen; bolted cover; threaded connections for strainers
NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and flanged connections for strainers NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
and larger.
2.12 FLASH TANKS
A. Shop or factory fabricated of welded steel according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, for 150-psig (1035-kPa) rating; and bearing ASME label. Fabricate with
tappings for vents, low-pressure steam and condensate outlets, high-pressure condensate
inlet, air vent, safety valve, and legs. Acceptable manufacturer, Spirax-Sarco or equal.
2.13 STEAM BLOWDOWN SEPARATORS
A. Shop or factory fabricated of welded steel according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, for 150-psig (1035-kPa) rating; and bearing ASME label. Fabricate with
tappings for vents, condensate outlet, low pressure steam inlet, air vent, and required
support. Acceptable manufacturers: Cleaver Brooks or equal.
1. Provide a condensate aftercooler manufactured from Schedule 40 steel pipe with
interior baffle and connections for non-potable water inlet and aquastat bulb fit-
ting to measure condensate outlet temperature.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-7 05/13/05
2.6 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Size, Capacity, and Pressure Rating: Factory set for inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
B. Valve Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range
and positive shutoff. Valves shall have cast-iron body with threaded connections for
valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and flanged connections for valves NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger; and hardened stainless-steel trim, replaceable head and seat, main
head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure-arresting device, cover over pilot dia-
phragm, and non-asbestos gaskets.
2.7 STEAM BACKPRESSURE VALVES
A. Size, Capacity, and Pressure Rating: Factory set for inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
B. Valve Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range
and positive shutoff. Valves shall have cast-iron body with threaded connections for
valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and flanged connections for valves NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger; and hardened stainless-steel trim, replaceable head and seat, main
head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure-arresting device, cover over pilot dia-
phragm, and non-asbestos gaskets.
2.8 STEAM TRAPS
A. Thermostatic Traps: Class 125, bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece
and screw-in cap; balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel bellow element; and renew-
able, hardened stainless-steel head and seat.
B. Thermodynamic Traps: Stainless-steel body and screw-in cap; maximum operating pres-
sure of 600 psig (4140 kPa); stainless-steel disc and seat; threaded ends.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A 126, cast-iron body and bolted cap; renewable,
stainless-steel float mechanism with renewable, hardened stainless-steel head and seat;
maximum operating pressure of 125 psig (860 kPa); balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or
monel thermostatic bellow element.
1. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F (25 deg C) of superheat
and resisting water hammer without sustaining damage.
D. Inverted Bucket Traps: Cast-iron body and cap, pressure rated for 250 psig (1725 kPa);
stainless-steel head and seat; stainless-steel valve retainer, lever, and guide pin assembly;
and brass or stainless-steel bucket.
1. Strainer: Integral stainless-steel inlet strainer within the trap body.
2. Air Vent: Stainless-steel thermostatic vent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-6 05/13/05
J. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and
gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
K. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-
reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure and
250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged
or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-
inch (20-mm) misalignment.
L. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analy-
sis of pipe being welded.
M. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and de-
sign temperatures and pressures.
2.4 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section
"Valves."
B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
2.5 SAFETY VALVES
A. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to the ASME Boiler and Pres-
sure Vessel Code.
B. Bronze Safety Valves: Class 250, with threaded inlet and outlet; forged copper-alloy
disc; fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; fac-
tory set and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads
complying with ASME B1.20.1.
C. Cast-Iron Safety Valves: Class 250; forged copper-alloy disc with bronze nozzle; fully
enclosed, cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shut-
off; raised-face flanged inlet and threaded outlet connections; factory set and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads
complying with ASME B1.20.1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-5 05/13/05
5. Air Vents and Vacuum Breakers:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. Barnes &Jones, Inc.
C. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
d. Johnson Corp. (The).
e. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 piping application articles for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through DN 300): ASTM A 53, Type E
(electric-resistance welded), Grade A, Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, NPS 14 through NPS 18 (DN 350 through DN 450): ASTM A 53, Type E
(electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain
ends.
D. Steel Pipe, NPS 20 (DN 500): ASTM.A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S
(seamless), Grade B, Schedule 20, black steel, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM. A 53, Schedules 40 and 80,
black steel; seamless for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and electric-resistance welded
for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2. Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM.A 733, made of ASTM A 312, Grade TP316,
Schedules 40 and 80, austenitic stainless steel; Type S (seamless) for NPS 2
(DN 50) and smaller and Type E (electric-resistance welded) for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.
F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3; Classes 150 and 300.
G. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
H. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250;
raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
I. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-4 05/13/05
4-00* E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sec-
tions.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Safety Valves:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. Kunkle Inds. Inc.; Kunkle Valve Division.
C. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.
2. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
C. Leslie Controls, Inc.
d. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
e. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
3. Backpressure Valves:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
C. Leslie Controls, Inc.
d. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
e. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
4. Steam Traps:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. Barnes &Jones, Inc.
C. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
d. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
e. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
f. Sterling, Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-3 05/13/05
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve and steam trap indicated, including
rated capacities and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail flash tank assemblies and fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops and
their attachment to the building structure. Include dimensions, weights, loadings, re-
quired clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include
the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
J. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For steam traps, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in mainte-
nance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materi-
als, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropri-
ate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of steam and condensate piping and suspension sys-
tem components with other construction, including light fixtures, hydronic piping, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetra-
tions. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
Awk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15182 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steam and condensate piping and specialties for systems up to 125
psig (860 kPa), inside the building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping
materials and installation requirements.
2. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descrip-
tions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in
this Section.
*. 3. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and
check valves.
4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and pres-
sure and vacuum gages.
5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying steam
and condensate piping.
6. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature-
control valves and sensors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. HP Systems: High-pressure systems operating at 60 psig (414 kPa) or more.
B. MP Systems: Medium-pressure systems operating at 16 psig (110 kPa) to 59 psig (407
kPa).
C. LP Systems: Low-pressure systems operating at less than 15 psig (104 kPa).
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Steam and condensate piping for this Project is a two-pipe, mechanical flow, upfeed sys-
tem.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steam and Condensate Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15182-1 05/13/05
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped
low air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is
full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified
minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,
"Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repair-
ing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing
has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
!� 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and op-
erating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
S. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to de-
sign requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer
screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, re-
move disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
END OF SECTION 15181
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-11 05/13/05
D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright posi-
tion with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor. Install feeder in
bypass line, off main, using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between
bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.
E. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure
tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
1. Support tank from floor with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping
connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload
building components and structural members.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connec-
tiOns.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during
test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due
to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints
from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pres-
sure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpres-
sure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage
due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
may be used.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-10 05/13/05
eftl, 1. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 in); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
3. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 in); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13
mm).
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13
mm).
5. NPS 8 (DN 200): Maximum span, 19 feet (5.8 in); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16
mm).
6. NPS 10 (DN 250): Maximum span, 20 feet (6.1 in); minimum rod size, 3/4 inch
(19 mm).
7. NPS 12 (DN 300): Maximum span, 23 feet (7 1n); minimum rod size, 7/8 inch (22
-1111).
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 n1); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
11-11).
2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
4. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint con-
struction requirements for soldered joints in copper tubing; and threaded, welded, and
flanged joints in steel piping.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as
required for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system
piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C. Install air separator in pump suction lines. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 per-
cent downwardward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with ball valve; extend
to nearest drain.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-9 05/13/05
F. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to '0"INA.
regulate system pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4
(DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as
required for system drainage.
D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main
pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install
the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid A0ft*
valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) nipple and ball
valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. Match size of
strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50).
H. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6
m) long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20
feet (6 m) or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or
longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes: ,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-8 05/13/05
A. Hot and Chilled Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L
(Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
B. Hot and Chilled Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN6S) and Larger: Schedule 40, steel pipe with
welded and flanged joints.
C. Condenser Water, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper
tubing with soldered joints.
D. Condenser Water, 2 —1/2-Inch NPS thru 12-Inch NPS: Schedule 40 steel pipe with
welded and flanged joints.
E. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground,
use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
F. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Schedule 40,
steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
G. Non-potable Make-up Water Piping, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground,
use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
H. Piping between Expansion Tank and Hydronic System, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller:
Aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
1. Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for valve appli-
cations for hydronic systems.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connec-
tion to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the
branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at
return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling ele-
ment and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow di-
rection.
E. Install safety valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to
floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
for installation requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-7 05/13/05
1. Manual air vents shall be as manufactured by:
a. Bell and Gossett - Model No. 17SR.
b. Taco - Model No. 417.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body
and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure; 240 deg F (116
deg C) operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) discharge connection and NPS 1/2
(DN 15) inlet connection.
1. Automatic air vents shall be as manufactured by:
a. Bell and Gossett - Model No. 107.
b. Taco - Model Hy-Vent.
C. Armstrong - Model No. AAE-750
C. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) work-
ing pressure, 240 deg F maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from sys-
tem water to maintain design expansion capacity, by a flexible, replaceable, elastomeric
diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure gage and air-charging fit-
ting, and drain fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal
tanks with steel saddles. Provide lift ring. Fabricate and test tank with taps and sup-
ports, and label according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Divi-
sion 1.
1. Initial Air Pre-Charge: 12 psig.
2. Expansion tanks shall be primed and painted with air dry enamel.
D. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for
125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating tem-
perature; perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into
expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for NPS 2
(DN 50) and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger; threaded
blowdown connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity.
1. Air separators shall be primed and painted with air dry enamel.
2. Provide base ring suitable for floor mounting.
E. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,
Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, threaded connections for
NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom
drain connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-6 05/13/05
I. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
J. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analy-
sis of pipe being welded.
K. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and de-
sign temperatures and pressures.
2.5 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section
"Valves."
B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-
psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating tempera-
ture, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connec-
tions for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a
memory stop to retain set position.
k D. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body,
ball type, 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operat-
ing temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have cali-
brated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with inte-
gral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet
pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorro-
sive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit sys-
tem. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field ad-
justment.
F. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wet-
ted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply
with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.
2.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa)
working pressure; 225 deg F (107 deg C) operating temperature; manually operated with
screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8 (DN 6) discharge connection and NPS 1/2
(DN 15) inlet connection.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-5 05/13/05
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fit-
ting materials.
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B).
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).
C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME 816.22.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (fur-
nace-butt welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through DN 300): ASTM A 53, Type E
(electric-resistance welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, NPS 14 through NPS 18 (DN 350 through DN 450): ASTM A 53, Type E
(electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain
ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel;
seamless for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.
E. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
F. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
G. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250;
raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
H. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
I. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including
bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-4 05/13/05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Flow Design, Inc.
C. Gerand Engineering Company.
d. Griswold Controls.
C. ITT' Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
f. Taco, Inc.
2. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.
3. Safety Valves:
a. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
b. Amtrol, Inc.
C. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Kunkle Valve Division.
f. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
4. Expansion Tanks:
a. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
b. Amtrol, Inc.
C. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
d. Taco, Inc.
S. Air Separators and Air Purgers:
a. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
b. Amtrol, Inc.
C. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
d. Taco, Inc.
l
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-3 05/13/05
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assem-
blies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building
structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include
the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in main-
tenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materi-
als, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropri-
ate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with -AMON
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system compo-
nents with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetra-
tions. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Con-
crete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water
heating, chilled-water cooling, snowmelt, and condenser water systems; makeup water
for these systems; blowdown drain lines; safety relief vent, and condensate drain piping.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and
methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping
materials and installation requirements.
4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descrip-
tions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in
this Section.
S. Division 1S Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and
check valves.
6. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and pres-
sure gages.
7. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying hy-
dronic piping.
8. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hy-
dronic piping.
9. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature-
control valves and sensors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure
drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, and calibrated balanc-
ing valves.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hydronic Piping
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15181-1 05/13/05
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspec-
tion must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having juris-
diction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or in-
spection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,
in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drain-
low age piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close
openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less
than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to
completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
S. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15160
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15160-7 05/13/05
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support de- ,
vices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-
mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-
mm) rod.
6. NPS 15 (DN 375): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1-inch (25-mm) rod.
7. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for
fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15160-6 05/13/05
100W 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
L. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade
if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts accord-
ing to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backlog.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backwater valves.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 1S Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
seismic-restraint devices.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15160-5 05/13/05
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION Amok
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage" for Project site storm sewer and drainage
piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical ivlaterials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building
storm sewers.
D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main
piping.
E. Underground, Ductile-Iron, Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried piping
inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to storm sewer pip-
ing outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-
block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
F. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links re-
quired to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
H. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Hand-
book," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
I. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-
sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of
standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
J. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab
in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
K. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indi-
cated:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15160-4 05/13/05
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground Storm Drainage Piping: Use [any of] the following piping materials for
each size range:
1. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the
following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
2. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one
of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
3. NPS 8 (DN 200): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
4. NPS 10 (DN 250): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
5. NPS 12 (DN 300): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou-
plings.
6. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou-
plings.
C. Underground Storm Drainage Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping;
gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping;
gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pip-
ing; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
4. NPS 12 (DN 300): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
5. NPS 15 (DN 375): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
j oints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15160-3 05/13/05
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include
corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type
coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to
and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING
A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class[es].
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Couplings: Clamp-All ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-
resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral center pipe stop.
a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide
shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide
shield with 6 bands.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15160-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes storm-drainage piping inside the building and to locations indi-
cated.
P. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for storm drainage piping system spe-
cialties.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the fol-
lowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa)].
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Shop Drawings: For controlled-flow storm drainage system, include calculations, plans,
and details.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15160-1 05/13/05
kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water
level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and
traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.
Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.
Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-
tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air
pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout pe-
riod of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15150 ,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15150-8 05/13/05
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fix-
tures."
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indi-
cated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties."
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indi-
cated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connec-
tions NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspec-
tion must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having juris-
diction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or in-
spection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having ju-
risdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage
and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was cov-
ered or concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except out-
side leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and
fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15150-7 05/13/05
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION :
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
seismic-restraint devices.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support de-
vices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-
mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-
mm) rod.
6. NPS 15 (DN 375): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1-inch (25-mm) rod.
7. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for
fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15150-6 05/13/05
tions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab
in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade
if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts accord-
ing to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backwater valves.
A*W, Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15150-5 05/13/05
7. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou- _64k
plings.
D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gas-
kets; and gasketed joints.
2. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping;
gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pip-
ing; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
4. NPS 12 (DN 300): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
5. NPS 15 (DN 375): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to build-
ing sanitary sewers.
D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links re-
quired to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
F. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration,through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Hand-
book," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105.
H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true
to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instruc-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15150-4 05/13/05
A01K 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indi-
cated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-
and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3."I EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 and DN 40): Copper DWV tube, copper drain-
age fittings, and soldered joints.
2. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the
following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
3. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one
of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
4. NPS 8 (DN 200): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
S. NPS 10 (DN 250): Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
6. NPS 12 (DN 300): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou-
plings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15150-3 05/13/05
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING
A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class[es]. (Underground)
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. (Above grade)
1. Couplings: Clamp-Alls, ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-
resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide
shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide
shield with 6 bands.
2.3 COPPER TUBING
A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought
copper, solder-joint fittings.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M (ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water
tube, drawn temper.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping '40%°
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15150-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the build-
ing and to locations indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems
specialties.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the fol-
lowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system, include plans, elevations, sections, and de-
tails.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15150-1 05/13/05
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
APW Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work pro-
gresses.
END OF SECTION 15140
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15140-11 05/13/05
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been M*
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic
water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operat-
ing pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate
test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure con-
stitute defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
1. Manually adjust circuit setter balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return pip-
ing to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
2. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
3.10 CLEANING Al"k.
A. Clean and disinfect potable and nonpotable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been al-
tered, extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdic-
tion or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651
or AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not ap-
pear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50
ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for
24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three
hours.
C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming
from system after the standing time.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15140-10 05/13/05
J.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to Existing L.L. Bean booster pump water service piping.
Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. Reconnect Richards water ser-
vice to existing via Charles Street Project.
D. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and con-
nect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Fixtures."
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and ap-
proved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdic-
tion to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with require-
ments.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15140-9 05/13/05
D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of
each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.
Use circuit setter for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Refer to Division 15 Sec-
tion "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing valves.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
seismic-restraint devices.
P. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support de-
vices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
S. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
G. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15140-8 05/13/05
L Perform the following steps before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing
of piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified
for application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.
J. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do
not operate water heaters before filling with water.
K. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig (550 kPa) maximum,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed-coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and
bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fix-
tures or equipment. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
B. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to
plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal
piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15140-7 05/13/05
D. Domestic Water Systems (Cold, Hot,and Hot Water Recirculation): Use valve types ac-
cording to the following schedule:
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 250°F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 175 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve 4"-8" GTV-A Isolation
Ball Valve 1/2"-3" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 3'/z"-6" -- Not Used
BLitterfly Valve 1 8"-12" 1 Not Used
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for site water distribution and service
piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
C. Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and
locations indicated.
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links re-
quired to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
E. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
F. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside building at each domestic water service. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages" for pressure gages, and to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain
valves and strainers.
G. Install aboveground domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward to-
ward drain and plumb.
H. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that
piping is full of water.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15140-6 05/13/05
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Use NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to
DN 100) hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fit-
tings; copper-tubing, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
5. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN ISO): Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved
ends; copper grooved-end fittings; copper-tubing, keyed couplings; and grooved
joints.
6. NPS 8 (DN 200): Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-
end fittings; copper-tubing, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
F. Nonpotable-Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 3-1/2 (DN 90) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fit-
tings; and soldered joints.
2. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved
ends; copper grooved-end fittings; copper-tubing, keyed couplings; and grooved
joints.
3. NPS 8 (DN 200): Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-
end fittings; copper-tubing, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use cast-iron
gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 3-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use cast-
iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: TACO or B&G Circuit setter balancing valves
with memory stop.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Cast-iron, grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Non-Potable Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
NON-POTABLE WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature- 150°F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 150 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve 4"-8" GTV-A Isolation
Ball Valve 1/2"-3" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Globe Valve 1/z"-2" -- Not Used
Swin Check Valve 1h"-2" -- Not Used
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15140-5 05/13/05
a. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IB645 laftk
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. - Figure 105
C. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure B-110
B. Gate Valves Type (GTV-A): MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) cold working
pressure (CWP); ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and union bonnet, solid-bronze wedge,
copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut,
threaded end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
2.5 WATER METER and STRAINER
A. Description: Sensus Technologies, Inc. 4-inch SRH AWWA C702, compound type,
bronze case and strainer. Registers flow in gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as
required by utility. Obtain meter and strainer from EJP Prescott in accordance with
Northampton specifications.
B. Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; direct-reading type complying with
AWWA C706; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wir-
ing, and remote register assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.
D. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used
on aboveground copper tubing.
E. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size
range:
1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L copper pressure fit-
tings; and soldered joints.
2. NPS 2 (DN 50): Hard copper tube, Type L copper pressure fittings; and soldered
joints.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Hard copper tube, Type L copper
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15140-4 05/13/05
&"%" 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish
Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-
and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L (ASTM B 88M, Types B), water tube, drawn
temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indi-
cated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish
Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-
and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or
ASTM B 584 bronze castings.
a. Copper-Tubing, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design simi-
lar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for
hot water, and bolts and nuts.
2.3 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide copper-alloy ball
valves by one of the following:
1. Ball Valves Type (BLV-A):
a. Jomar. —T-100-SS
B. Ball Valves Type (BLV-A): MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP,
ASTM B 584 brass body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball,
100% port for 3-inch valves and smaller; blowout proof; extruded brass stem; PTFE
seats and seals; threaded end connections:
1. Operator: Lever operators with vinyl grip, lockable.
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
2.4 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bronze gate valves by
one of the following:
1. Gate Valves Type (GTV-A):
' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15140-3 05/13/05
E. Water Meter: Submit compound meter from EJP Prescott Mfr. Northampton water me-
ter specification.
F. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.5 QUALI'T'Y ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurte-
nances," and NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for combined fire-protection and domestic water service piping to building.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufac-
tured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible
with, piping to be joined.
C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-
type coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
2.2 COPPER TUBING
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K (ASTM B 88M, Types A), water tube, annealed
temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping '
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15140-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and
equipment inside the building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fit-
tings.
2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for shut-off valve types and sizes.
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping special-
ties.
4. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation thickness.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems
with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Service Piping: 100 psig (690 kPa).
2. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 80 psig (550 kPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Domestic Hot Water System: Submit water balancing certification report.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15140-1 05/13/05
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust faces of gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 15122
look
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-8 05/13/05
7. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at chilled- and condenser-water inlets and
outlets of chillers.
C. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) into fluid and
in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
D. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at
most readable position.
E. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except
steam).
F. Install needle-valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
G. Install test plugs in tees in piping.
H. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Install gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for
meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
1. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-7 05/13/05
1. Construction: One piece type 316 stainless steel body, bonnet, stem, and type 304
stainless steel handle. Stem seal shall be type D-2000 Viton.
2. Pressure Rating: 6,000 psig.
D. Temperature Rating: 450 deg F.
E. Pressure Transducer: Industrial pressure transducer with pressure ranges up to 580 psig
and 4-20mA output.
1. Construction: Berylium copper diaphragm, nitrate seal, brass pressure connection,
with anodized aluminum cover.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent over the full range.
3. Pressure Rating: 580 prig.
4. Output: 4-20mA.
F. Rate Indicator: Flow indicator that measures the current of a 4-20mA signal and provide
a digital display of the flow rate directly in gallons per minute (GPM). Unit shall derive
power from the 4-20mA signal with no external power required.
1. Enclosure: ABS and poly-carbonate mixture.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent of span counts.
3. Display: 0.7" high 3 digit LCD with trailing zero (5 digits) and decimal points
switch selectable.
4. Input: 4-20mA.
S. Provide wall or pipe mounting brackets for each rate indicator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central sys-
tems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
5. At all other locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3. Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
4. Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
5. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
6. Steam and Condensate: 30 to 300 deg F, with 5-degree scale divisions.
-Am%,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-6 05/13/05
E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, one ther-
mometer(s), and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing
elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-111ch- (51- to 76-
mm-) diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa).
2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25-
to 51-mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25
to 125 deg F (minus 4 to plus 52 deg Q.
3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25-
to 51-mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0
to 220 deg F (minus 18 to plus 104 deg C).
4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.
2.7 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
1. Venturi-Type Flow Measuring System:
a. Venturi Flow Element
1) Preso Meters Corp. —Series LPL.
b. Valve Manifold
1) Preso Meters Corp. —Model 3-VAL-SS-2.
C. Pressure Transducer
1) Preso Meters Corp. —Series TEN- 4301.
d. Flow Indicator
1) Preso Meters Corp. —Model RI-210.
B. System includes calibrated flow element, 3-valve manifold, pressure transducer, and flow
computer.
C. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting made for in-
stallation in piping.
1. Construction: Bronze or brass for NPS 2 (DN50) and smaller elements, cast iron
Grade ASTM A 126 for NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and larger elements with brass fittings
and attached tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for NPS 2
(DN50) and smaller elements and flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and larger ele-
ments.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa).
3. Temperature Rating: 250 deg F (121 deg C).
D. Valve Manifold: Stainless steel general purpose valve manifold designed to isolate and
provide equalization between the pressure transducer and the primary flow element.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-5 05/13/05
B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with Auk
ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Liquid-filled type, metal or plastic, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-
outlet type is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale mark-
ings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass or plastic.
8. Ring: Metal or plastic.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa of
vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure).
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant,
porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
low*
2.6 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Trerice, H. O. Co.
2. Flow Design, Inc.
3. National Meter, Inc.
4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gas-
keted and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93
deg Q.
D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.
1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to plus
93 deg C) shall be CR.
2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F (minus 35 to
plus 136 deg C) shall be EPDM.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-4 05/13/05
D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, with locking device.
G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation.
H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermome-
ter stem.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maxi-
mum of 1.5 percent of range.
2.4 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Trerice, H. O. Co.
2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
3. Ernst Gage Co.
4. Marsh Bellofram.
S. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc.
6. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
7. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
C. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and
of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.5 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ernst Gage Co.
2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
3. Eugene Ernst Products Co.
4. Marsh Bellofram.
5. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
6. Trerice, H. O. Co.
7. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
8. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-3 05/13/05
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Trerice, H. O. Co.
2. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
3. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B. Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass 9 inches (229 mm) long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, with locking device.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length
to suit installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maxi-
mum of 1.5 percent of range.
2.3 DUCT-TYPE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Trerice, H. O. Co.
2. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
3. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
B. Case: Metal or plastic, 7 inches (178 mm) long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled, with magnifying lens.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
J. Test plugs.
4. Flow Measuring Systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection wa-
ter service meters inside the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's num-
ber, scale range, and location for each.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gage , signed by product manu-
facturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Meters and Gages
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15122-1 05/13/05
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and in-
clude embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion-joint manufacturer's written instructions if
expansion joints or compensators are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors in-
stalled on or in concrete.
END OF SECTION 15121
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15121-5 05/13/05
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. ,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Coinply with ASME B-11.9 and ASIN/lE Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install prefabricated expansion loops at all locations where piping crosses a seismic joint.
3.2 SWING CONNECTIONS
A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including
tee in main.
B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,
including tee in riser.
C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,
including tee in main.
3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion joints and bends and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and
to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15121-4 05/13/05
1. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 220 deg F
(104 deg Q.
2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
2. Metraflex, Inc.
3. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
B. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base
for alignment of piping, and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
2.4 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Botts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for ap-
plication.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened Port-
land cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be in-
stalled.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, un-
less otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15121-3 05/13/05
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe expansion joint and alignment guide indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping sys-
tems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions
and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building struc-
ture.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating,
end connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe expansion joint, signed by product manufac-
turer.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pipe expansion joints to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PREFABRICATED PIPING EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. The Metraflex Company
B. Description: Model ML; Two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows,
and a 180 degree return with connections suited to application. Aftk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15121-2 05/13/05
tO"" SECTION 15121 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMAP.Y
A. This Section includes the following pipe expansion joints and expansion compensation
devices for mechanical piping systems:
1. Expansion compensators.
2. Pipe bends and loops.
3. Alignment guides and anchors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BR: Butyl rubber.
B. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
C. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
D. CSM: Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber.
E. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
F. NR: Natural rubber.
G. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working
pressures, and temperatures.
B. Capability: Products shall absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between an-
chors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15121-1 05/13/05
L Pumped Condensate Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
PUMPED CONDENSATE SERVICE
Maximum Temperature -250T
Operating Pressure— 0-15 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1/z"-2" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 2-1/z"-6" BTFY-C Isolation
Globe Valve 1/z"-2" GLB-A ATC Modulation and Bypass
Globe Valve 2-1/z"-10" GLB-C ATC Modulation and Bypass----
Plug Valve 2-1/z"-10" PLG-A Balancing @ Cond Pump Disch.
Swing Check Valve 1/z"-2" SWG-A Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Swing Check Valve 2-1/z"-12" SWG-B Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Silent (Wafer) Check 1/z"-2" SLT-A Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
Silent (Wafer) Check 2-1/z"-12" SLT-B Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
END OF SECTION 15110
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-16 05/13/05
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve 1/2"-2" GTV-B Isolation
Gate Valve 21/2"-12" GTV-D Isolation
Ball Valve -- -- Not Used
Butterfly Valve -- -- Not Used
Globe Valve 1/2"-2" GLB-B Bypass (Manual Modulation)
Globe Valve 2-1/2"40" GLB-D Bypass (Manual Modulation)
Plug Valve -- -- Not Used
J. Low Pressure (Steam) Condensate Return Systems: Use valve types according to the fol-
lowing scledule:
LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE SERVICE
Maximum Temperature -250'F
Operating Pressure— 0-15 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1/2"-2" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 2-1/z"-6" BTFY-C Isolation
Globe Valve 1/2"-2" GLB-A Bypass
Globe Valve 2-1/2"-10" GLB-C Bypass
Plug Valve 2-1/2"40" PLG-A Balancing @ Pump Disch.
Swing Check Valve 1/2"-2" SWG-A Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Swing Check Valve 2-1/2"-12" SWG-B Prevent Flow Reversal in Pi in
Silent (Wafer) Check 1/2"-2" SLT-A Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
Silent (Wafer) Check 2-1/2"-12" SLT-B Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
K. Medium Pressure (Steam) Condensate Return Systems: Use valve types according to the
following schedule:
MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE SERVICE
Maximum Temperature- 366°F
Operating Pressure— 0-150 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes'
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1/2"-2" BLV-A Throttlin and Isolation
Globe Valve 1/2"-2" GLB-B Bypass
Swing Check Valve 1/2"-2" SWG-C Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-15 05/13/05
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1/2"-2" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 21/2"-6" BTFY-A Isolation
Butterfly Valve 8"-12" BTFY-B Isolation
Globe Valve 1/2"-2" GLB-A ATC Modulation and Bypass
Globe Valve 21/2"40" GLB-C ATC Modulation and Bypass
Plug Valve 21/2"40" PLG-A Balancing @ Pump Disch. (Note 1)
Swing Check Valve 1/2"-2" SWG-A Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Swing Check Valve 21/2"-12" SWG-B Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Silent (Wafer) Check 1/Z"-2" SLT-A Prevent Flow Reversal @ Fuj lip Disch.
Silent (Wafer) Check 2'/2"-12" SLT-B Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
NOTE 1: Balancing valves 1/2"-2" and balancing valves required at terminal
equipment shall be calibrated balancing valves as specified in Divi-
sion 15 Section-"Hydronic Piping".
H. Low Pressure Saturated Steam Systems: Use valve types according to the following
schedule:
LOW PRESSURE SATURATED STEAM SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 2509 .•
Operating Pressure— 0-15 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve 1/2"-2" GTV-A Isolation
Gate Valve 21/275-16" GTV-C Isolation
Ball Valve -- -- Not Used
Butterfly Valve -- -- Not Used
Globe Valve 1/2"-2" GLB-A Bypass (Manual Modulation)
Globe Valve 2-1/2"-10" GLB-C Bypass (Manual Modulation)
Plug Valve -- I -- Not Used
I. Medium Pressure Saturated Steam Systems: Use valve types according to the following
schedule:
MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE SATURATED STEAM SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 366T
Operating Pressure— 16-150 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-14 05/13/05
Maximum Temperature -250'F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 175 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1/2"-2" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 21/2"-6" BTFY-A Isolation
Butterfly Valve 8"-12" BTFY-B Isolation
Globe Valve 1/2"-2" GLB-A ATC Modulation and Bypass
Globe Valve 21/2"-10" GLB-C ATC Modulation and Bypass
Plug Valve 21/2"-10" PLG-A Balancing @ Pump Disch. (Note 1)
Swing Check Valve 1/2"-2" SWG-A Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Swing Check Valve 21/25'-12" SWG-B Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Silent (Wafer) Check 1/2"-2" SLT-A Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
Silent (Wafer) Check 21/2"-12" SLT-B Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
NOTE 1: Balancing valves 1/2"-2" and balancing valves required at terminal
equipment shall be calibrated balancing valves as specified in Divi-
sion 15 Section-"Hydronic Piping".
F. Condenser Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
CONDENSER WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature- 150°F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 150 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1/2"-2" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 21/2"-6" BTFY-A Isolation
Plug Valve 21/2"40" PLG-A Balancing @ Pump Disch.
Swing Check Valve 21/2."-12" SWG-B Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
Silent (Wafer) Check 21/2"-12" SLT-B Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.
G. Chilled Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
CHILLED WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 150'
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 150 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-13 05/13/05
3.4 ADJUSTING A"k
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent ]caking occurs.
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of
valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Mon-Potable Water Systems (Cold Water Make-up): Use valve types according to the
following schedule:
NON-POTABLE WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 150°F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 150 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1/2"-2" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Globe Valve 1 1/2"-2" 1 GLB-A Bypass
Swing Check Valve 1 1/2"-2" 1 SWG-A Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
D. Domestic Water Systems (Cold, Hot,and Hot Water Recirculation): Use valve types ac-
cording to the following schedule:
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 250°F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 175 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve 31/2"-12" GTV-A Isolation
Ball Valve 1/2"-3" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 1 31/2"-6" BTFY-A I Isolation
Butterfly Valve 8"-12" BTFY-B Isolation
E. Heating Hot Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
HEATING HOT WATER SERVICE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-12 05/13/05
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Re-
move special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install chainwheel operators on valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger and more than 96
inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished
floor elevation.
G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-11 05/13/05
cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron
handwheel.
2.9 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron plug valves
by one of the following:
I. Plug Valves Type (PLG-A):
a. Grinnell Corp.
b. DeZurik.
C. NIBCO Inc.
B. Plug Valves Type (PLG-A): MSS SP-78, 175-psi (1200-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Teflon packing, flanged end connections:
1. Operator: Gear operator with handwheel and position indicator.
2.10 CHAINWHEEL ACTUATORS
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers: AW-#N,
1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.
2. Roto Hammer Industries, Inc.
C. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.
1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for valve.
2. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.
3. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-10 05/13/05
bronze-alloy stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded end connec-
tions; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
C. Globe Valves Type (GLB-B): MSS SP-80; Class 300, 600-psi CWP; ASTM B 61 bronze
body and screwed bonnet, bronze disc and seat, silicon bronze-alloy stem, renewable seat
rings, threaded end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
2.8 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron globe valves
by one of the following:
1. Globe Valves Type (GLB-C):
a. Grinnell Corp. — Figure 6200A
b. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves — Figure 351
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IR116
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 1123
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. — Figure F2981
f. NIBCO Inc. —Figure F-718-B
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure G-512
h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves —Figure 613
i. Powell— Figure 241
j. Fairbanks —Figure 0131
2. Globe Valves Type (GLB-D):
a. Grinnell Corp. —Figure 6250A
b. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves —Figure 21E
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IR313
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 884
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. —Figure F2983
f. NIBCO Inc. —Figure F-768-B
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure G-532
h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 923
i. Powell — Figure 256
j. Fairbanks—Figure 0110
B. Globe Valves Type (GLB-C): MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable
bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated pack-
ing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with ASTM A 126 Class B
cast-iron handwheel.
C. Globe Valves Type (GLB-D): MSS SP-45, Class 250, 500-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 Class
B cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc,
brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-9 05/13/05
h. Powell — Figure 1797
i. Fairbanks —Figure 0312
B. Gate Valves Type (GTV-C): MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126, ;lass B cast-iron body and bonnet,, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy
stem, outside screw and yoke, bolted bonnet, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece
packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
C. Gate Valves Type (GTV-D): MSS SP-70, Class 250, 500-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron ASTM A 126 wedge, cast bronze ASTM B 584
seats, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece
packing gland assembly, bolted bonnet, flanged end connections; and with ASTM A 126
Class B cast-iron handwheel.
2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bronze globe valves by
one of the following:
1. Globe Valves Type (GLB-A):
a. Grinnell Corp. —Figure 3240
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division. —Figure 7-TF
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IB413T
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 123
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. —Figure S90
f. NIBCO Inc. —Figure T-235Y
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure B-22-T
h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 106-A-2
i. Powell —Figure 150
J. Fairbanks—Figure 4195-3
2. Globe Valves Type (GLB-B):
a. Grinnell Corp. —Figure 3255
b. Crane Co, Crane Valve Group, Crane Valves—Figure 362E
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IB412
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 409
e. NIBCO Inc. —Figure T-275-B
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure B-66
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 1103
h. Powell —Figure 120
i. Fairbanks—Figure 033
B. Globe Valves Type (GLB-A): MSS SP-80; Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP;
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-8 05/13/05
2. Gate Valves Type (GTV-B):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure#3090
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 435UB
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure I11631
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 3150
e. Milwaukee Valve—Figure 1151
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves — Figure 64U
g. Powell — Figure 2714
h. Fairbanks —Figure U-0228
B. Gate Valves Type (GTV-A): MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) cold working
pressure (CWP); ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and union bonnet, solid-bronze wedge,
copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut,
threaded end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
C. Gate Valves Type (GTV-B): MSS SP-80; Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP;
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and union bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon al-
loy rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded end con-
nections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
2.6 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron gate valves
' by one of the following:
1. Gate Valves Type (GTV-C):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure#6020A
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 4651/2
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IR1140
d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. - Figure F2885
e. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 1430
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure G-623
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 651A
h. Powell— Figure 1793
i. Fairbanks—Figure 0405
2. Gate Valves Type (GTV-D):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure#6100A
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 71/2E
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IR330
d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. - Figure F2894
e. Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 1436
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure F-667
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 204
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-7 05/13/05
i. Fairbanks — Figure 0606 ,
4. Wafer Check Valves Type (SLT-A):
a. Grinnell Corp. —Figure 3600
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. — Figure 14
C. Hammond Valve Corporation —Figure IB958
5. Wafer Check Valves Type (SLT-B):
a. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. —Figure 18
B. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-A): MSS SP-80; Class "125, 150-psi (1380-10a) WSP;
horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc
with teflon seat,,threaded end connections.
C. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-B): MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze renewable
disc, flanged end connections.
D. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-C): MSS SP-80; Class 300, 600-psi CWP; horizontal
swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 61 bronze body and cap, regrinding type, renewable bronze
disc with bronze seat, threaded end connections:
E. Silent (Wafer) Check Valves Type (SLT-A): Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, bronze disc, stainless-steel set screws and springs, Bronze
bushings, installed between flanges.
F. Silent (Wafer) Check Valves Type (SLT-B): Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 48 cast-iron globe style body, renewable bronze disc and seat, stainless-steel
pins and springs, bronze bushings, installed between flanges.
2.5 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bronze gate valves by
one of the following:
1. Gate Valves Type (GTV-A):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure #3000
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 438
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IB645
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 2129
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. - Figure 105
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure B-110
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves —Figure 370
h. Powell— Figure 507
i. Fairbanks —Figure 0250
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-6 05/13/05
C. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-B): MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035-
kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, extended neck, 416 or
410 stainless-steel stem with upper and lower TFE bushings, resilient EPDM seat, lug
style with bi-directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-psig:
1. Disc Type: Aluminum-Bronze.
2. Operator: Gear operator with handwheel and position indicator. Provide chain
wheel operators for valves installed over 96 inches above the floor.
D. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-C): MSS SP-68, ANSI Class 150, BS 1400 AB2 aluminum-
bronze body and disc, Inconel 625 metal seat, K-Morel shaft and disc pin, PTFE com-
posite shaft bearing on top and bottom, graphite body gasket and gland packing, lug
style with bi-directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-psig WSP:
1. Operator: Gear operator with handwheel and position indicator. Provide chain
wheel operators for valves installed over 96 inches above the floor.
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-A):
a. Jomar International—No. T-511
2. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-B):
a. Grinnell Corp. —Figure 6300A
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division—Figure 373
C. Hammond Valve Corporation—Figure IR1124
d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co. — Figure 1790
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. —Figure 2974
f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.—Figure G-931
g. Jenkins—Figure 624
h. Powell—Figure 559
i. Fairbanks —Figure 0702
3. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-C):
a. Grinnell Corp. —Figure 3370
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division—Figure 76E
C. Hammond Valve Corporation—Figure IB952
d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co. — Figure 624
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.—Figure 517
f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. —Figure B-375
g. Jenkins—Figure 962A
h. Powell —Figure 563-Y
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-5 05/13/05
2.2 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide copper-alloy ball
valves by one of the following:
1. Ball Valves Type (BLV-A):
a. Jomar. —T-100-SS
B. Ball Valves Type (BLV-A): MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP,
ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass or red
bronze ball, full port for 1-inch valves and smaller and standard port for 1-1/ inch valves
and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals; threaded end
connections:
1. Operator: Lever operators with vinyl grip, lockable.
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
2.3 HIGH PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-A):
a. Grinnell Corp. Figure LC-8281-3
b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. Figure 632LD-RS66-1
C. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Figure LG-752-BS-3E
2. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-B):
a. Grinnell Corp. Figure LC-8282-3
b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. Figure 632LD-RS66-1
C. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Figure LG-722-BS-3E
3. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-C):
a. Grinnell Corp. Figure M15L-32M5-4
B. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-A): MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035-
kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, extended neck, 416 or
410 stainless-steel stem with upper and lower bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seat, lug
style with bi-directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-psig:
1. Disc Type: Aluminum-Bronze.
2. Operator: Standard lever handle with 10 position (minimum) memory stop.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-4 05/13/05
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature.
If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclo-
sures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not Ilse
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in
the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller, except plug
valves.
5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
J. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-3 05/13/05
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section - "Submittals and Sub-
stitutions" and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
B. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include a valve schedule indicating the
following:
1. Piping system and valve size range applicable to valve each valve type.
2. Valve design and arrangement.
3. Body, seating, and trim materials.
4. End connections.
S. Pressure and temperature classification.
6. Dimensions and required clearances.
7. Shipping, installed, and operating weights.
8. Specialties and accessories.
C. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of valve and maintenance guide to include
in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Division 15 — "Basic Mechanical
Methods and Materials". Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, ser-
vicing, disassembling, and repairing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: All valves of similar type shall be of a single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance (up to 125 psig SWP): ASME B31.9 for building services piping
valves.
C. ASME Compliance (125 psig SWP to 300 psig SWP): ASME B31.1 for power piping
valves.
D. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension
and design criteria.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15110 —VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves for use in HVAC piping system
applications:
1. Copper-alloy ball valves.
2. High-pressure butterfly valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Gray-iron swing check valves.
S. Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves.
6. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
7. Bronze gate valves.
o*_ 8. Cast-iron gate valves.
9. Bronze globe valves.
10. Cast-iron globe valves.
11. Cast-iron plug valves.
12. Chainwheel actuators.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and
actuators.
3. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1. CWP: Cold working pressure.
2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
S. SWP: Steam working pressure.
6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15110-1 05/13/05
engine exhaust piping according to the Interior Diesel Engine Exhaust Piping Insulation
Application Schedule:
1. Diesel engine exhaust piping.
2. Diesel engine silencer.
Interior Boiler Exhaust Piping Insulation Application Schedule (50°F to 1,250°F)
PIPE VAPOR FIELD-
SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) REQ-D JACKET
12" to 36" Calcium silicate 5" No A-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with "1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations. Insulation system shall maintain a maximum 140°F outer surface
temperature at an ambient temperature of 80°F with a pipe temperature of 1,250°F.
END OF SECTION 15083
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-19 05/13/05
B. Exterior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Application Schedule (180T to 2SOT):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following exterior exposed and concealed steam
condensate piping according to the Exterior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Appli-
cation Schedule:
1. Pumped discharge piping.
2. High pressure condensate return piping.
Exterior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Application Schedule (306T to 4507)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RL 'D JACKET
�/2" to 11/a" Cellular glass 3" No A-Note 1
11/2" to 4" Cellular glass 31/z" No A-Note 1
S" to 10" Cellular glass 4" No I A-Note 1
12" to 36" Cellular glass 41/25) No I A-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
NOTE 2: Apply insulation over freeze protection heat tracing.
C. Exterior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (3067 to 4S0°F): Awk
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all exterior exposed and concealed high pressure
steam piping according to the Exterior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Applica-
tion Schedule:
Exterior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (3067 to 45011F)
VAPOR FIELD
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
1/2" to 11/4 Cellular glass 31/2" No A-Note 1
11/2" to 4" Cellular glass 4" No A-Note 1
S" to 10" Cellular glass S" No A-Note 1
12" to 36" Cellular glass S1/2" No A-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
D. Interior Diesel Engine Exhaust Piping Insulation Application Schedule (SOT to 1,250°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed diesel
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-18 05/13/05
'" VAPOR
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER FIELD- APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
3/" to 2" (Note 1) Glass fiber 11/a" No None
3/a" to 2" Glass fiber 21/2" No None
21/2" to 4" Glass fiber 3" No None
5" to 10" Glass fiber 31/2" No None
12" and u Glass fiber 4" No None
NOTE 1: Applies to runouts to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length.
1_. Interior Unfired Steam Generator Specialty Piping Insulation Application Schedule (180°F
to 250T): Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and con-
cealed unfired steam generator specialty piping according to the Interior Unfired Steam
Generator Specialty Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Unfired steam generator blowdown piping.
Interior Boiler Specialty Piping Insulation Application Schedule (180T to 250 ')
VAPOR
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER FIELD-APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
3/a" to 2" Glass fiber I 11/2 No None
2'/z" to 6" Glass fiber 2" No None
8" and up Glass fiber 3" No None
M. Interior Steam Safety Relief Vent Piping Insulation Application Schedule (2120: Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed steam safety relief vent
piping according to the Interior Steam Safety Relief Vent Piping Insulation Application
Schedule:
Interior Steam Safety Relief Vent Piping Insulation Application Schedule (212T)
VAPOR
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER FIELD APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JA CKET
All piping Glass fiber 1" No None
3.12 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-17 05/13/05
I. Interior Low Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (212T to 250°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed low
pressure steam piping according to the Interior Low Pressure Steam Piping Insulation
Application Schedule:
1. Low pressure steam piping.
2. Low pressure process steam piping.
Interior Low Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (212C' to 250CF)
VAPOR
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER FIELD- APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
-1/4" to 2" (Note 1) Glass fiber 1" No None
3/4" to 11/4 Glass fiber 11/2 No None
11/2" to 4" Glass fiber 2" No None
5" to 10" Glass fiber 3" No None
12" to 36" Glass fiber 31/2" No None
NOTE 1: Applies to runouts to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length.
J. Interior Medium Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (251`F to 3050:
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed medium pressure
steam piping according to the Interior Medium Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Applica-
tion Schedule:
Interior Medium Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (251T to 3050
VAPOR
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER FIELD- APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
3/4" to 2" (Note 1) Glass fiber 11h" No None
3/4" to 11/" Glass fiber 2" No None
21/z" to 4" Glass fiber 21/2" No None
5" and up Glass fiber 31/2" No None
NOTE 1: Applies to runouts to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length.
K. Interior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (306T to 450T):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed high pressure
steam piping according to the Interior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application
Schedule:
Interior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (306°F to 450`F)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-16 05/13/05
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
Up to 4" Glass fiber 11/2." Yes None
5" to 36" Glass fiber 1 2" Yes None
G. Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule (40T to 90T): Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed miscellaneous
piping according to the Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Cold water make-up piping.
2. Piping to and from expansion tanks.
3. Condensate drains from cooling coils.
Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule (40°F to 90T)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
All piping Glass fiber 1" Yes None
H. Interior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Application Schedule (180T to 250T):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed steam
condensate piping according to the Interior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Applica-
tion Schedule:
1. Pumped discharge piping.
2. Low pressure condensate return piping.
3. Low pressure process condensate return piping.
4. Medium pressure condensate return piping.
5. High pressure condensate return piping.
Interior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Application Schedule (180°F to 250°F)
VAPOR
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER FIELD-APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
3/a" to 2" (Note 1) Glass fiber 1" No None
3/a" to 2" Glass fiber 11/2" No None
21/2" to 6" Glass fiber 2" No None
8" and up Glass fiber 3" No None
NOTE 1: Applies to runouts to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-15 05/13/05
D. Interior Heating Hot Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (901F to 200°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed heating
hot water piping according to the Interior Heating Hot Water Piping Insulation Applica-
tion Schedule:
1. Constant temperature heating hot water systems.
2. Variable temperature heating hot water systems.
3. Radiant floor heating hot water systems.
4. Snowmelt hot water/glycol systems.
Interior Heating Hot Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (90°F to 200°F)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
'/z" to 2" (Note 1) Glass fiber 1/z" No None
1/2" to 4" Glass fiber 11/z" No None
5" to 10" 1 Glass fiber 2" No None
12" to 36" 1 Glass fiber 21/2" No None
NOTE 1: Applies to runouts to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length.
E. Interior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35T to 90°F): Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed chilled water piping ac- "
cording to the Interior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35`x' to 90T)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNES BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) S REQ'D JACKET
(in inches)
1/2" to 11/4 Glass fiber 1" Yes None
11/2" to 4" Glass fiber 11/215 Yes None
5" to 36" Glass fiber 2" Yes None
F. Interior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 100°F): Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed condenser water piping
according to the Interior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 100T)
VAPOR FIELD
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-14 05/13/05
3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Domestic Cold Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 90°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed domestic cold wa-
ter piping according to the Interior Domestic Cold Water Piping Insulation Application
Schedule:
Interior Domestic Cold Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 90°F)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNES BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) S REQ'D JACKET
(in inches)
/z" to 1'/4" Glass fiber 1" Yes None
1'/z" to 8" 1 Glass fiber 1'/z" Yes None
B. Interior Domestic Hot Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (90°F to 180°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed domes-
tic hot water piping according to the Interior Domestic Hot Water Piping Insulation Ap-
plication Schedule:
1. Domestic hot water piping.
2. Domestic hot water recirculation piping.
Interior Domestic Hot Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (90T to 180CF)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
1/2" to 2" Glass fiber 1" No None
21/2" to 4" Glass fiber 11/2 No None
C. Interior Storm Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35T to MOT): Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed storm water
piping according to the Interior Storm Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Storm water piping.
2. Roof drain bodies.
Interior Storm Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 100T)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
All Piping Glass fiber 1 11/2" Yes None
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-13 05/13/05
B. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to tine following
systems, materials, and equipment:
I. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insu-
lation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect.
2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncom-
pliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials ac-
cording to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according
to these Specifications.
3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retard-
ers, and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-12 05/13/05
steel wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-
steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed
insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer
of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of
lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth
finish.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
J. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same
material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insu-
lation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket with-
out disturbing insulation.
2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-
mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insula-
tion with vapor-retarder mastic.
took
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-11 05/13/05
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic.
J. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched sta-
ples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple lon-
gitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the in-
sulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insula-
tion of the same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, over-
lapping seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with aluminum jacket.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket insula-
tion to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation
for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-
mm) intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-10 05/13/05
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple lon-
g'tudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the in-
sulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
I
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, over-
lapping seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered
sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to
adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insula-
tion jackets at least 1 inch (25 mm) at each end. Secure fitting covers with manu-
facturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder
mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket in-
sulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to al-
low valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insu-
lation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fit-
ting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape
and vapor-retarder mastic.
S. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with
canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer.
3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-9 05/13/05
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor re-
tarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of
roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (SU
mm) below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate in-
sulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls
and floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through
penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic
where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of
15 to 20 feet (4.5 to 6 m) to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation seg-
ments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched sta-
ples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
Ammo ,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-8 05/13/05
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and special-
ties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a va-
por retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
1. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and va-
por-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for apply-
ing insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation
at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation
on anchor legs at least 12 inches (300 mm) from point of attachment to pipe and
taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the in-
40W sulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insula-
tion to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the
hanger, support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insula-
tion material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material
as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). Apply
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to re-
ceive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4
inches (100 mm) o.c.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-7 05/13/05
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
B. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-min), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed,
stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compati-
ble with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's
written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout
the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use ac-
cessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either
wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-6 05/13/05
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant lcraft paper and
aluminum foil.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock
ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained within
the piping system.
D. Heavy PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 30-mil-
(0.75-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, re-
ducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
E. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-
""' mil- (0.5-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, re-
ducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
F. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209
(ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
G. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Corrugated finish, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same mate-
rial, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-5 05/13/05
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
3. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
b. Pabco.
C. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with
the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-
applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unlaced glass-fiber in-
sulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging
cloth to unlaced glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for in-
door applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermeti-
cally sealed cells, incombustible.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 1.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hy-
drous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type II.
D. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimen-
sions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-4 05/13/05
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Archi-
tect.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appro-
priate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Di-
vision 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after in-
stalling and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of pip-
ing that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-3 05/13/05
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3. Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type
of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insula-
tion materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an appren-
ticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable test-
ing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and
finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build
mockups according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the com-
pleted Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN50) straight pipe.
b. One 90-degree elbow.
C. One tee fitting.
d. One NPS 2 (DN50) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One reducer.
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
PART ] - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUN 1\4ARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and applica-
tion for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and pro-
tection saddles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and
field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type
of insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing prod-
uct and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15083-1 05/13/05
"^ 1. High temperature heating hot water heat exchangers.
2. High temperature heating hot water air separators.
3. High temperature heating hot water expansion tanks.
4. High temperature heating hot water pumps.
Interior High Temperature Heating Equipment Insulation Application Schedule
(250`F to 350T)
THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM (in inches) BARRIER APPLIED
RE 'D JACKET
Mineral Fiber Board Block or board 4" No A-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block or board 4" No SS-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by "1/4
inch corrugations.
NOTE 1: Provide a stainless steel field applied jacket 0.10 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
F. Interior Boiler Flues and Breeching Insulation Application Schedule (250°F to 1,200°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior boiler flues and breeching according to
the Interior Boiler Flues and Breeching Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Boiler Flues and Breeching Insulation Application Schedule (2509F to 1,200T)
THICKNESS VAPOR BARRIER FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM (in inches) REQ'D APPLIED
JACKET
Calcium silicate Block 4" No A-Note 1
Calcium silicate Block 4" No SS-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with stucco-
embossed finish.
NOTE 1: Provide a stainless steel field applied jacket 0.10 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
END OF SECTION 15082
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-13 05/13/05
D. Interior Hot Surface Temperature Equipment (90T to 200°F): Unless otherwise indi-
cated, insulate the following interior hot surface temperature equipment according to the
Interior Hot Surface Temperature Equipment Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Hot water/steam heat exchangers.
2. Hot water air separators.
3. Hot water expansion tanks.
4. Domestic hot water heaters and tanks.
5. Steam flash tanks.
6. Steam condensate pump receivers.
7. Steam blowdown separators.
8. Boiler feedwater tanks.
9. Deaerators.
Interior Hot Surface Temperature Equipment Insulation Application Schedule
(90°F to 200°F)
VAPOR FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(in inches) RE 'D JACKET
Mineral Fiber Board Block or board 2" No F&P-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block or board 2" No PVC-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block or board 2" No GC-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block or board 2" No A-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block or board 2" No SS-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide a white foil and paper field applied jacket.
NOTE 1: Provide a white PVC field applied jacket.
NOTE 1: Provide a field applied glass cloth jacket with a painted white finish.
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
NOTE 1: Provide a stainless steel field applied jacket 0.10 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
E. Interior High Temperature Heating Equipment Insulation Application Schedule (250T to
3500: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior high temperature heat-
ing equipment according to the Interior High Temperature Heating Equipment Insulation
Application Schedule:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-12 05/13/05
ow THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM (in inches) BARRIER APPLIED
RE 'D JACKET
Mineral Fiber Board Block 2" Yes F&P-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block 2" Yes PVC-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block 2" Yes GC-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block 2" Yes A-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block 2" Yes SS-Note 1
Cellular glass Block 3" Yes F&P-Note 1
Cellular glass Block 3" Yes PVC-Note 1
Cellular glass Block 3" Yes GC-Note 1
Cellular glass Block 3" Yes A-Note 1
Cellular glass Block 3" Yes SS-Note I
NOTE 1: Provide a white foil and paper field applied jacket.
NOTE 1: Provide a white PVC field applied jacket.
NOTE 1: Provide a field applied glass cloth jacket with a painted white finish.
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
NOTE 1: Provide a stainless steel field applied jacket 0.10 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
C. Interior Condensate Drain Pans and Duct Mounted Chilled Water Coils Insulation Ap-
plication Schedule (35°F to 1000: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all condensate
drain pans and duct mounted chilled water coils according to the Interior Condensate
Drain Pans and Duct Mounted Chilled Water Coils Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Condensate Drain Pans and Duct Mounted Chilled Water Coils Insulation
Application Schedule (35°F to 100°F)
THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-APPLIED
MATERIAL FORM (in inches) BARRIER JACKET
RE 'D
Flexible Elastomeric Sheet 11h" I Note 1 None
NOTE 1:All joints, splits, and seams shall be sealed with contact adhesive to provide a
continuous vapor BARRIER.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-11 05/13/05
3.8 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
h. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULES
A. Interior Chilled Water Pumps Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 100°F): Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate all chilled water pumps according to the Interior Chilled
Water Pumps Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Chilled Water Pumps Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 100°F)
THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-APPLIED
MATERIAL FORM (in inches) BARRIER JACKET
RE 'D
Mineral Fiber Board Block (Note 1) 21/z" Yes A-Note 1
Mineral Fiber Board Block (Note 1) 21/z" Yes SS-Note 1
Cellular glass Block (Note 1) 3" Yes A-Note 1
Cellular glass Block (Note 1) 3" Yes SS-Note 1
NOTE 1:Fabricate 0.040 inch thick, aluminum boxes with integral vapor barrier. Line
interior of aluminum box with block insulation that fits the pump casing. Fit boxes
around pumps and coincide joints in box with the splits in the pump casings. Fabricate
joints with outward bolted flanges
NOTE 1:Fabricate 0.10 inch thick, stainless steel boxes with integral vapor barrier. Line
interior of stainless steel box with block insulation that fits the pump casing. Fit boxes
around pumps and coincide joints in box with the splits in the pump casings. Fabricate
joints with outward bolted flanges
B. Interior Cold Surface Temperature Equipment (35°F to 1000: Unless otherwise indi-
cated, insulate the following interior cold surface temperature equipment according to
the Interior Cold Surface Temperature Equipment Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Chilled water air separators.
2. Chilled water expansion tanks.
3. Chilled water chemical shot feeders.
Interior Cold Surface Temperature Equipment Insulation Application Schedule
(359F to 1000
THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM (in inches) BARRIER APPLIED
REQ'D JACKET
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-10 05/13/05
l"' C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and
vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with manufac-
turer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap
and the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
D. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
E. Stainless-Steel Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
3.6 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats
of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following
field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and fin-
ishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
B. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field quality-
control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to deter-
mine compliance with requirements:
C. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insu-
lation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect two pumps and two tanks randomly selected by Architect.
D. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncom-
pliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials ac-
cording to these Specifications.
E. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection according
to these Specifications.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-9 05/13/05
d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads of —,
tanks and vessels.
5. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
6. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape snatching insulation
facing
7. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
8. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
9. Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other ele-
ments that require frequent removal for service.
10. Bevel and sea] insulation ends around manholes, hndholes, ASMF stamps, and
nameplates.
11. Apply vapor-barrier mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation in-
dicated to receive vapor barrier.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply insu-
lation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written in-
structions.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recom-
mended adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams
and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket manu-
facturer's recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-
mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-barrier jackets and exposed insula-
tion with vapor-barrier mastic.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-8 05/13/05
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor barrier as recommended by insula-
tion material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
J. Vapor-Barrier Mastics: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing
insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-barrier mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor barriers. Overlap
insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and pressure-sensitive tape
having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or
mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
O. Removable Insulation: Install insulation on components that require periodic inspecting,
cleaning, and repairing for easy removal and replacement without damage to adjacent in-
sulation.
P. Insulate the equipment listed in the equipment insulation application schedules at the end
of this Section.
Q. Omit insulation from the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
00� 3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 INDOOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
square foot, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment,
including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint.
Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesive-attached or self-adhesive anchor pins and speed washers on sides
of tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b. On tank and vessel, 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints,
and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.
C. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
low
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-7 05/13/05
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
�.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
>.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's
written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids through-
out the length of equipment.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each equipment system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use ac-
cessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the
wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-barrier mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
barrier.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-barrier
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation
at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated,
seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor barrier.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-6 05/13/05
owl,, 2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
3. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for
tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270
g/sq. m).
1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 min).
B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 min) thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 min) thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed,
stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length suf-
ficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for sur-
face temperatures of tanks and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
100 lb (45 kg) for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.5 VAPOR BARRIERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compati-
ble with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 1.0 perm maximum.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-5 05/13/05
C. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermeti-
cally sealed cells, incombustible.
1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type 1.
2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber mate-
rials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
I?. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved--block sections of noncombusti-
ble, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Com-
ply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock '
ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code to match connected piping jackets based on mate-
rials contained within the piping system.
D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy comply-
ing with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), and having an integrally bonded moisture bar-
rier over entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation di-
mensions are scheduled at the end of this Section.
1. Finish: As indicated in the Insulation Application Tables and associated notes lo-
cated at the end of this Section of the specifications.
2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
E. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick; and roll stock ready for shop
or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.
1. Finish: As indicated in the Insulation Application Tables and associated notes lo-
cated at the end of this Section of the specifications. AWAk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-4 05/13/05
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.
B. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Rubatex Corp.
4. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
b. Pabco.
C. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufac-
tured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-3 05/13/05
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an appren-
ticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable test-
ing and inspecting agency.
I. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and
finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build
mockups according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the com-
pleted Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One chilled-water centrifugal pump.
b. One small tank or vessel.
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Archi-
tect,
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
S. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appro-
priate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
AO*k.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-2 05113105
SECTION 15082 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
ducts and plenums.
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
** 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and
field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Field application for each equipment type.
2. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
3. Application of field-applied jackets.
4. Special shapes for cellular-glass insulation.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, de-
scribing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sections of each
sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type
of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insula-
tion materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Equipment Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15082-1 05/13/05
toms according to the Exterior Exposed Rectangular Duct Insulation Application Sched-
ule:
1. Supply air rectangular duct systems (all pressures).
2. Return air rectangular duct systems (all pressures).
Exterior Exposed Rectangular Duct Insulation Application Schedule
FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS (in VAPOR BARRIER APPLIED
inches) REQ'D JACKET
Glass fiber I Board (Note 1) 2" 1 Yes I A-Note 2
NOTE 1: Mineral fiber board installed on exterior rectangular duct applications shall be
a minimum 6.0 pound per cubic foot density.
NOTE 2: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with stucco-
embossed finish.
B. Interior Boiler Flues and Breeching Insulation Application Schedule (2501F to 1,200 1F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior boiler flues and breeching according to
the Interior Boiler Flues and Breeching Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Boiler Flues and Breeching Insulation Application Schedule (250cF to 1,200°F)
THICKNESS VAPOR BARRIER FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM (in inches) REQ'D APPLIED
ACKET
Calcium silicate Block 4" No A-Note 1
Calcium silicate Block 4" No SS-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with stucco-
embossed finish.
NOTE 1: Provide a stainless steel field applied jacket 0.10 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
END OF SECTION 15081
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-12 05/13/05
FIELD-
MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS VAPOR BARRIER APPLIED
(in inches) REQ'D JACKET
Glass fiber Board-Rect. 11/2 Yes ltione
Glass fiber Pipe - Round 1 1'/a" Yes None
C. Interior Exposed Dishwasher and Sterilizer Hood Exhaust Duct Insulation Application
Schedule: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed dishwasher and steri-
lizer hood exhaust duct systems according to the Interior Exposed Dishwasher and Steri-
lizer Hood Exhaust Duct Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Exposed Dishwasher and Sterilizer Hood Exhaust Duct Insulation Application
Schedule
FIELD
MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS VAPOR BARRIER APPLIED
(in inches) RE 'D JACKET
Glass fiber Board 2" No Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide a stainless steel field applied jacket 0.10 inch thick with smooth finish.
D. Interior Concealed Dishwasher and Sterilizer Hood Exhaust Duct Insulation Application
Schedule: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior concealed dishwasher and
sterilizer hood exhaust duct systems according to the Interior Concealed Dishwasher and
Sterilizer Hood Exhaust Duct Insulation Application Schedule:
Interior Concealed Dishwasher and Sterilizer Hood Exhaust Duct Insulation Application
Schedule
FIELD
MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS VAPOR BARRIER APPLIED
(in inches) RE 'D JACKET
Glass fiber Board 2" No Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide a glass cloth field applied jacket.
3.10 EXTERIOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Exposed Rectangular Duct Insulation Application Schedule (50°F to 95°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following exterior exposed rectangular duct sys-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-11 05/13/05
2. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. ,
3. Flexible connectors.
4. Vibration-control devices.
5. Testing agency labels and stamps.
6. Nameplates and data plates.
7. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Concealed Duct and Plenum Insulation Application Schedule (-10°F to 100°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior concealed duct systems accord-
ing to the Interior Concealed Duct and Plenum Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Single wall rectangular and round supply air duct systems (all pressures).
2. Outside air plenums and ductwork carrying outside air to air handling units, sup-
ply fans, and ventilating units.
J. Exhaust and outside air plena and ductwork a minimum of 10 feet from roof
opening for roof mounted exhaust fans and outside air intakes.
4. Exhaust air, relief air, and outside air plena and ductwork up to automatic control
dampers.
5. Single wall rectangular and round return air duct systems (all pressures).
Interior Concealed Duct and Plenum Insulation Application Schedule (50°F to 95°F)
MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- APPLIED
(in inches) BARRIER JACKET
RE 'D
Glass Fiber Blanket 11/z" Yes None
B. Interior Exposed Duct and Plenum Insulation Application Schedule (-lff to 1000:
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed duct systems accord-
ing to the Interior Exposed Duct and Plenum Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Single wall rectangular and round supply air duct systems (all pressures).
2. Outside air plenums and ductwork carrying outside air to air handling units, sup-
ply fans, and ventilating units.
3. Exhaust and outside air plena and ductwork a minimum of 10 feet from roof
opening for roof mounted exhaust fans and outside air intakes.
4. Exhaust air, relief air, and outside air plena and ductwork up to automatic control
dampers.
5. Single wall rectangular and round return air duct systems (all pressures).
Interior Exposed Duct and Plenum Insulation Application Schedule (-10°F to 100°F)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-10 05/13/05
A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
-1 Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands
without deforming the insulation material.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless-
steel wire. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands.
3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat
of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When
dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or
tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive
over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams
and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket manu-
facturer's recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats
of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in the application schedules in Part 3 of
this Section.
B. Insulate each of the duct and plenum systems specified in the application schedules in
Part 3 of this Section.
C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-9 05/13/05
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of the same material used to insulate
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions. Adhesive to be omitted from top surface of horizontal rectangular
ducts.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along longi-
tudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insula-
tion end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm). Space 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insu-
lation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly
against surface at cross bracing.
C. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular
ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by remov-
ing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13-mm) staples, 1 inch (25 mm)
o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible
to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval
duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of the same material used to insulate
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
3.5 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-8 05/13/05
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper
sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor
support at top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insula-
tion ends with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive
and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions. Adhesive to be omitted from top surface of horizontal rectangular
ducts.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and
sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along longi-
tudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insula-
tion end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm). Space 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insu-
lation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly
against surface at cross bracing.
C. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular
ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by remov-
ing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13-mm) staples, 1 inch (25 mm)
o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams
and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18
inches (450 mm) o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows
with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
ell-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-7 05/13/05
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
L Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation
at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation 'Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insula-
tion material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. Awk
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing
insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with va-
por-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure
with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of
roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls
and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-6 05/13/05
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length suf-
ficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for sur-
face temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding ca-
pacity of 100 lb (45 kg) for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compati-
ble with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's
written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids through-
out the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use ac-
cessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either
wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a va-
por retarder.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-5 05/13/05
C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombusti- ,
ble, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Com-
ply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket: Sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with
ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions
are scheduled at the end of this Section.
1. Finish: As indicated in the Insulation Application Tables and associated notes lo-
cated at the end of this Section of the specifications.
2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
B. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Sheets of stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 or
316; 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming
to indicated sizes.
1. Finish: As indicated in the Insulation Application Tables and associated notes lo-
cated at the end of this Section of the specifications.
2. Moisture Barrier: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
3. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type I1 for
tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270
g/sq. m).
1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm).
B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM.A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
S. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed,
stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-4 05/13/05
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appro-
priate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may
begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
b. Pabco.
C. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufac-
tured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-3 05/13/05
tion materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests.
I-". Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply witli re-
quirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an appren-
ticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable test-
ing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and ,
finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build
mockups according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the com-
pleted Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of rectangular straight duct.
b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
C. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers.
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Archi-
tect.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insu-
lating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing com-
pounds.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and applica-
tion for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and
field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, de-
scribing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sections of each
sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type
of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insula-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Duct Insulation
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15081-1 05/13/05
MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM ID
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR
Medical Air 1-1/2" Round Yellow Black MA
Nitrous Oxide 1-1/2" Round Blue Black N20
Nitrogen 1-1/2" Round Green Black N2
Medical Vacuum 1-1/2" Round White Black MV
3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually
blocked by other work.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 15075
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-9 05/13/05
HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR 1D
Variable Temperature Hot Water 1-1/2" Square Yellow Black VHW
ivon-Potable Cold Wtr Make-up 2" Round Green Black NPCW
HVAC Steam and Condensate Systems Valve Tag Application Table
HVAC STEAM SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR ID
High Pressure Steam 2" Square Red White HPS
High Pressure Condensate 2" Square Red White HPR
Mcdium Pressure Steam 2" Square Red White MPS
Medium Pressure Condensate 2" Square Red White MPR
Low Pressure Process Steam 2" Square Red White LPSH
Low Press Process Condensate 2" Square Red White LPRH
Low Pressure Steam 2" Square Red White LPS
Low Pressure Condensate 2" Square Red White LPR
Pumped Condensate Discharge 2" Square Red White PD
Plumbing System Valve Tag Application Table
PLUMBING SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR ID
Domestic Cold Water 2" Round Green White CW
Domestic Hot Water 2" Square Yellow White HW
Domestic Hot Water Circulation 2" Square Yellow Black HWC
Gas 1-1/2" Square Black White LPG
Steam 2" Square Red White LPS
Fire Protection System Valve Tag Application Table
FIRE PROTECTION TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM ID
SYSTEMS SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR
Fire Line Piping 2" Round Red White FL
Sprinkler 2" Round Red White SP
Medical Gas System Valve Tag Application Table
MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM ID
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR
Oxygen 1-1/2" Round Green Black OX
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-8 05/13/05
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10
feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings where walls extend to the underside
of structure, install pipe markers in each room.
3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts.
2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing dis-
tances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
B. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum in-
tervals of 25 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by remov-
able ceiling system.
1. On ductwork above removable acoustical ceilings where walls extend to the under-
side of structure, install duct markers in each room.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; faucets; and
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme
and with captions similar to those indicated in the following tables:
HVAC Hydronic Systems Valve Tag Application Table
HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG' LETTER SYSTEM'
SIZE "SHAPE COLOR COLOR ID
Chilled Water 2" Round Green White CHW
Condenser Water 2" Round Blue White CW
Hot Water 1-1/2" 1 Square Yellow Black HW
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-7 05/13/05
a. Green: For cooling equipment and components.
b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components.
C. Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 min) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing dis-
tances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indi-
cate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations,
and identify units.
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.
b. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
C. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.
d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
e. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
f. Tanks and pressure vessels.
g. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equip-
ment.
D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with
flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, [at least 3/4 inch (19
mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at both
ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) wide, lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and cov-
ering full circumference of pipe.
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed and above removable acoustical ceiling locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-6 05/13/05
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more
than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is
Installer's option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located
where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include name-
plates for the following general categories of equipment:
1. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
2. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.
3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
4. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of me-
chanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers
may be omitted if both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing dis-
tances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indi-
cate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations,
and identify units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following
general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.
b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
C. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
d. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
e. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.
f. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
g. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
h. Tanks and pressure vessels.
i. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equip-
ment.
C. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color
codes:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-5 05/13/05
2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity
of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
2.4 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system ab-
breviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Archi-
tect. Provide 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm--) thick brass or 3/32-inch- (2.4-mrn-) thicl< lami-
nated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer.
2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
2.5 VALVE SCHEDULES
A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations
for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on ma-
sonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
2. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-
thickness glass.
2.6 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized
card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm).
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO
NOT OPERATE.
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-4 05/13/05
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves;
4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide
holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
3. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- (1.6-trim-) thick, engraved laminated plastic,
with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch
(3.2-mm) center hole for attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
service, and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for
each application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band
pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-
band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length re-
quired for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both direc-
tions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-
adhesive back.
C. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with pres-
sure-sensitive,permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches
(150 mm): 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) or
Larger: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-3 05/13/05
6.
1 A QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASIvIE Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attach-
ment on equipment.
1. Data:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
C. Labels of tested compliances.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
C. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving condi-
tions, and speed.
A
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installa-
tion:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Equipment signs.
4. Access panel and door markers.
5. Pipe markers.
6. Duct markers.
7. Valve tags.
" 8. Valve schedules.
9. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identifica-
tion material and device.
C. Valve numbering scheme coordinated with the Owners valve numbering scheme.
D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system.
1. Valve schedule shall indicate the valve number, piping system, system abbreviation
as shown on tag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification.
2. Tabulate valve schedules to indicate the location of all valves by room name and
number as identified on the architectural floor plans.
3. Indicate areas, floors, or specific rooms controlled by each.
4. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
5. In addition to mounted copies, furnish copies for maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1 and Division 15 Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Meth-
ods".
how
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 15075-1 05/13/05
TABLE E
VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT SCHEDULE
(ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT)
z "
H 0 4 Q � x WOE
EQUIPMENT HORSEPOWER RPM N v z w O" x U O"
and 0 zw � w Ow " w ¢ ~ GQ: z
OTHER p ,a W O pr-4 U
O
Centrifugal Fans
<22" Diameter !E3.0"S.P.wg All 10L 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
<22" Diameter �3.1"S.P.wg All 11 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter a4OHp <300 10 4 3.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter alOHp 300-500 10 4 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 112,5
>24" Diameter ?IOHp >500 10 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter >_50Hp <300 11 4 3.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 13255
>24" Diameter �5OHp 300-500 11 4 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter �5OHp >500 11 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
NOTES (Table E):
1. Equipment base or isolator bolted to concrete base. Install resilient bolt isolation
washers on equipment anchor bolts.
2. Provide seismic snubbers bolted to concrete base. Install resilient bolt isolation
washers on seismic snubber anchor bolts.
3. Equipment bolted to support structure. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on
equipment anchor bolts.
4. Coordinate vibration isolators with packaged equipment provided under other Sec-
tions.
5. Provide thrust restraints (Isolator Type 6) for all high pressure fans greater than or
equal to 4 inches water gauge.
END OF SECTION 15071
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2')233 15071-22 05/13/05
rL4 z N h U � o
F � O WUW z � x WPx
EQUIPMENT HORSEPOWER RPM H o U v w 0 v 0 w
and E~ - W � w � F" U UwU O
� � Q z OTHER w k OO
0 U U Q
Small Fan Coil Units X00 CFM All - 3 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Large Fan Coil Units 3501 CFM All - 5 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Small Inline Fans :!00 CFM All - 3 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Cabinet Unit Heaters All All - 3 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Propeller Unit Heaters All All -- 3 0.75" 1 2.0 1.5 1.0 1 1
Heating Hot Water Piping
(1" to 3") Suspended Note 4 Note 4 - 3 Note 4 2.0 1.5 1.0 4
(4" to 8") Suspended Note 4 Note 4 - 5 Note 4 2.0 1.5 1.0 4
(10"&Lar er) Suspended Note 4 Note 4 - 5V Note 4 2.0 1.5 1.0 4
Condenser Water Piping
(1" to 3") Suspended Note 5 Note 5 - 3 Note S . 2.0 1.5 1.0 5
(4" to 8") Suspended Note 5 Note 5 -- 5 Note 51 2.0 1.5 1.0 5
(10"&Lar er) Suspended Note 5 Note 5 -- 5V Note 5 2.0 1.5 1.0 5
Chilled Water Piping
(1" to 3") Suspended Note 6 Note 6 -- 3 Note 6 2.0 1.5 1.0 6
(4" to 8") Suspended Note 6 Note 6 - 5 Note 6 2.0 1.5 1.0 6
(10"8cLar er) Suspended Note 6 Note 6 -- 5V Note 6 2.0 j 1.5 1.0 6
NOTES (Table D):
1. Provide restraining cables anchored to equipment supports and structure.
2. Coordinate vibration isolators with packaged equipment provided under other Sec-
tions.
3. Provide thrust restraints (Isolator Type 6) for all high pressure fans greater than or
equal to 4 inches water gauge.
4. Provide vibration isolators listed in the table on each pipe hanger for heating hot
water piping for a distance of 50 pipe diameters in both directions from circulating
pumps or a minimum of three pipe hangers, whichever is greater. Deflection of
isolators shall be equal to or greater than the static deflection of the vibration iso-
lators provided for the connected pumps. Provide metal heat shield or thermal iso-
lators on all neoprene isolators.
5. Provide vibration isolators listed in the table on all interior condenser water piping.
Deflection of isolators shall be equal to or greater than the static deflection of the
vibration isolators provided for the connected pumps.
6. Provide vibration isolators listed in the table on each pipe hanger for chilled water
piping for a distance of 50 pipe diameters in both directions from circulating
pumps or a minimum of three pipe hangers, whichever is greater. Deflection of
isolators shall be equal to or greater than the static deflection of the vibration iso-
lators provided for the connected pumps.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15071-21 05/13/05
NOTES (Table C):
1. Equipment base or isolator bolted to concrete base. Install resilient bolt isolation
washers on equipment anchor bolts.
2. Provide seismic snubbers bolted to concrete base. Install resilient bolt isolation
washers on seismic snubber anchor bolts.
3. Equipment bolted to support structure. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on
equipment anchor bolts.
4. Coordinate vibration isolators with packaged equipment provided under other Sec-
tions.
5. Provide thrust restraints (Isolator Type 6) for all high pressure fans greater than or
equal to 4 inches water gauge.
6. On all heating hot water, steam (all pressures), and steam condensate pipe risers 3"
and larger that penetrate 3 floors or more, anchor piping at the midpoint with
Type 7 - Pipe Riser Resilient Supports and provide Type 8 - Resilient Pipe Guides
within 12-15 feet in both directions from pipe anchor. Provide Type 4 - Free-
standing Spring Vibration Isolators at each floor with a minimum deflection of
0.75" except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required
to limit load changes to 15% of the initial load. Provide submittals in accordance
with Part 1 of these specifications. Provide submittals showing riser diagram and
calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point,
initial and final loads on the building structure, springdeflection changes and seis-
mic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been
examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design.
TABLE D
VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT SCHEDULE
(EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE GRADE and SUSPENDED)
a F.
a O U w z W
EQUIPMENT HORSEPOWER RPM H p W O w H O U w F-4 O
and OTHER d d w (A Ow U w h a w Z
� Q O O W U d
a
Inline Cent &Axial Fans
<22" Diameter !�3.0"S.P.wg All -- 5 1.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
<22" Diameter >3.1"S.P.wg All -- 5 1.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,3
>24" Diameter <SOHp <300 -- 5 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,3
>24" Diameter <SOHp 300-500 -- 5 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,3
>24" Diameter <SOHp >SOO -- 5 1.00" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,3
>24" Diameter 3601lp <300 -- 5V 3.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,3
>24" Diameter 36014p 300-500 -- 5V 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,3
>24" Diameter 36OHp >500 -- 5V 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,3
Small Rotating Equip
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15071-20 05/13/05
W
W z H U zo
z z
EQUIPMENT HORSEPOWER RPM H O Z - U w 0 � v C
and H Za � ~ w �' � U UwU O
OTHER 0 C) xW U w Hew Z
O Q U U
Pumps
End Suction All All 11 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
Split Case All All 11 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
Condensate Pumps
Floor Mounted All All -- 1R 0.75" 1 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Boilers
Clean Steam Boiler All All 10 4R 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Air Compressors (ATC)
Tank Mounted gOHp All -- 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 112,4
Tank Mounted A5Hp All 11 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,4
Medical Air Compressors
Packaged All All -- 1R 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,4
Medical Vacuum Pumps
Packaged All All - 1R 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,4
Centrifugal Fans
<22" Diameter !�3.0"S.P.wg All 10L 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
<22" Diameter ?3.1"S.P.wg All 11 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter a4OHp <300 10 4 ISO" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter - OHp 300-SOO 10 4 2.SO" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,S
>24" Diameter a4OHp >SOO 10 4 0.7S" 1 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter �5OHp <300 11 4 3.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter �50Hp 300-500 11 4 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter �5OHp >500 11 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,S
Axial& Cabinet Fans
<22" Diameter :�3.0"S.P.wg All 10L 4 0.7S" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
<22" Diameter >2.1"S.P.wg All 11 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter :9-"S.P.wg <300 11 4 3.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
>24" Diameter g"S.P.wg 300-500 11 4 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
>24" Diameter Q"S.P.wg >500 10 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
>24" Diameter >2.1"S.P.wg <300 11 4 3.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter >2.1"S.P.wg 300-500 11 4 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,S
>24" Diameter >2.1"S.P.wg >500 11 4 1.7S" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
Vertical Pipe Risers
Pipe Riser Supports Note 6 Note 6 -- 7 -- 2.0 1.5 1.0 6
Pipe Riser Guides Note 6 Note 6 -- 8 -- 2.0 1.5 1.0 1 6
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2')23 15071-19 05/13/05
H : O wUw
EQUIPMENT HORSEPOWER RPM U
and zw OV4w Odd � �,aQ Z
OTHER O Q ww, U w E a
0 U U d
>24" Diameter �5014p 300-500 11 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter �5014p X00 11 4 1.00" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
Axial & Cabinet Fans
<22" Diameter :�3.0"S.P.wg All 10L 2 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
<22" Diameter >3.1"S.P.wg All 10 2 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter :9-"S.P.wg X00 10 4 2.50" 1 2.0 1.5 1 1.0 1,2
>24" Diameter !"S.P.wg X00 10 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
>24" Diameter 2.111S.P.wg X00 11 4 2.50" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter 2.1"S.P.wg 300-500 11 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter 2.1"S.P.wg X00 11 4 1.00" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1 1,2,5
Condensing Units
Pad Mounted (Interior) All All -- 1R 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,4
Pad Mounted (Exterior) All All -- 111 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,4
NOTES (Table B):
1. Equipment base or isolator bolted to concrete base. Install resilient bolt isolation
washers on equipment anchor bolts.
2. Provide seismic snubbers bolted to concrete base. Install resilient bolt isolation
washers on seismic snubber anchor bolts.
3. Equipment bolted to support structure. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on
equipment anchor bolts.
4. Coordinate vibration isolators with packaged equipment provided under other Sec-
tions.
5. Provide thrust restraints (Isolator Type 6) for all high pressure fans greater than or
equal to 4 inches water gauge.
TABLE C
VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT SCHEDULE
(EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE GRADE and FLOOR MOUNTED)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 232') 15071-18 05/13/05
1. Provide vibration isolation devices and seismic restraints on piping connected to
vibration producing devices in accordance with Table D.
2. Provide vibration isolation devices and seismic restraints on high-pressure duct-
work connected to vibration producing devices in accordance with Table D.
TABLE B
VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT SCHEDULE
(EQUIPMENT LOCATED ON GRADE and FLOOR MOUNTED)
w w z
w >_4 z z z z � � w ° �
EQUIPMENT HORSEPOWER RPM H O Z U U w 0 Q O a
and w zw D " w P; hU Uw_ U O
OTHER ¢ Q Zw � w Ow9 d -aw Z
O O x v
O0 Q U U a Q 1�
Pumps
End Suction aOHp All - 1R 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
End Suction 25Hp All 11 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
Split Case 4OHp All - 1R 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Split Case 25Hp All 11 1 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2
Condensate Pumps
Floor Mounted All All - 1R 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Boiler Feed Pumps
Floor Mounted All All -- 1R 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Chillers
Centrifugal All All -- 1R 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1
Cooling Towers
Induced and Forced Draft All All -- 1R 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 3
Air Compressors (ATC)
Tank Mounted gOHp All -- 4 0.75" 1 2.0 1.5 1.0 1 1,2,4
Tank Mounted A5Hp All 11 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,4
Fuel Oil Pump Set
Packaged All All -- 1R 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,4
Medical Air Compressors
Packaged All All -- 1R 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,4
Medical Vacuum Pumps
Packaged All All -- 1R 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,4
Centrifugal Fans
<22" Diameter :9.0"S.P.wg All IOL 2 1 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1 1.0 1,2
<22" Diameter >3.1"S.P.wg All 10 2 0.25" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter g}OHp 900 10 4 2.50" 2.0 1.S 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter alOHp 300-500 10 4 1.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter ?4OHp X00 10 4 0.75" 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
>24" Diameter �501fp X00 11 4 2.50" 1 2.0 1.5 1.0 1,2,5
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -232') 15071-17 05/13/05
W � z
z z z ¢ � w ° �
EQUIPMENT Z U w U NOTES
w rU VwU
W4 0
O O 04 E~ �
U U w Q
Custom Air Handling Units
Floor Mounted (Internally Isolated) 2.0 1.5 1.0
Heat Exchangers
Shell and Tube 2.0 1.5 1.0 _
Plate and Frame 2.0 1.5 1.0
Unfired Steam Generators 2.0 1.5 1.0
Fuel Burning Equip Breeching and Stacks
Boilers- Breeching & Stacks 2.0 1.5 1.0
Dom Hot Wtr Heater-Breeching & Stacks 2.0 1.5 1.0
Emergency Generator-Stack & Muffler 2.0 1.5 1.0
Tanks
Air Separators-Floor Mounted 2.0 1.5 1.0
Expansion Tanks-Floor Mounted 2.0 1.5 1.0
Flash Tanks-Floor Mounted 2.0 1.5 1.0
Blow-down Separators-Floor Mounted 2.0 1.5 1.0
Deaerators-Floor Mounted 2.0 1.5 1.0
Dom. Hot Water Tanks/Heaters-Fir. Mid. 2.0 1.5 1.0
Variable Frequency Drives
Wall and Floor Mounted 2.0 1.5 1.0
ATC Control Panels
Wall Mounted 2.0 1.5 1.0
Piping Systems
Natural Gas (All) 2.0 1.5 1.0
Fuel Oil Piping (All) 2.0 1.5 1.0
Steam Piping (All Pressures) 2.0 1.5 1.0
Steam Condensate (All Press and Temps) 2.0 1.5 1.0
Boiler Feed Piping (All Press and Temps) 2.0 1.5 1.0
Heating Hot Water Piping (All Temps) 2.0 1.5 1.0 Note 1
Chilled Water Piping 2.0 1.5 1.0 Note 1
Condenser Water Piping 2.0 1.5 1.0 Note 1
Fire Suppression Piping 2.0 1.5 1.0
Compressed Gas Piping (>40 si ) 2.0 1.5 1.0
Other Piping Systems 0.67 1.5 1.0
HVAC Ductwork
Ducts >6 sq ft Cross Sectional Area 0.67 1.5 1.0 Note 2
NOTES (Table A):
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' -2323 15071-16 05/13/05
the Architect, including the representative's report. Certifying correctness of the installa-
tion or detailing corrective work to be done.
B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. Isolator seismic-restraint clearance.
2. Isolator deflection.
3. Snubber minimum clearances.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating
weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of
contact during normal operation.
C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm)
movement during start and stop.
D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
G. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to
resist seismic forces.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT SCHEDULE
A. Supported or Suspended Equipment Tables:
TABLE A
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SCHEDULE FOR NON-ISOLATED EQUIPMENT LOCATED ON
GRADE AND ABOVE GRADE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15071-15 05/13/05
B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.
C. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to
vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.
D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp
edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron
clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor loca-
tions, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do
not weld angles to rods.
F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) concrete;
trowel to a smooth finish.
1. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Divi-
sion 3.
B. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment
manufacturer's written instructions for seismic codes at Project site.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise in-
dicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (4S0-mm) centers around the full perimeter
of the base.
2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Divi-
sion 3.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices, the local representative
shall inspect the completed project and certify in writing to the contractor that all sys-
tems are installed properly, or require correction. The contractor shall submit a report to
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15071-14 05/13/05
C. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, an-
e"11.1 chor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
I. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-
wedge or female-wedge type.
2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neo-
prene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or mi-
nus 5.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select an-
chor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to
ASTM E 488/E 488M.
2.16 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equip-
ment before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
exterior use.
3. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to
indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices
for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual loca-
tions before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15071-13 05/13/05
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas. �.
a. Model: Type CPF.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type WPF.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type SN.
B. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases ready for field-applied,
cast-in-place concrete.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for
pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate a minimum 4" over-
lap of the supported equipment.
3. Perimeter steel members shall have a minimum depth of 1/12 of the longest span,
but not less than 6" deep and not greater than 14" deep. Provide concrete rein-
forcement bars or angles welded on 6" centers in both directions. Reinforcement
layer shall be placed 1-1/2" from the bottom of the base. Provide a second layer of
reinforcement 1-1/2" from the top of the base for all bases larger than 120" in any
direction.
4. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
S. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and
anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from
supported equipment manufacturer.
2.15 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Seismic Restraint Devices: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide seismic re-
straint devices by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston,Texas.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
B. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene
complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or minus 5, with a
flat washer face.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Packagee' —2323 15071-12 05/13/05
B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equip-
ment.
3. Perimeter steel members shall have a minimum depth of 1/10 of the longest span,
but not less than 6" deep and not greater than 12" deep.
4. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
C. (TYPE 10L) — Lightweight Steel Equipment Bases: Subject to compliance with require-
ments, provide lightweight steel equipment bases by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type M.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type SFB.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type SCA.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type S Base.
D. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, steel bases.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equip-
ment.
3. Perimeter steel members shall be adequately sized to prevent distortion and mis-
alignment of the drive and shall limit the deflection of the beam on the drive side
to 0.05" due to starting torque.
2.14 INERTIA BASES
A. (TYPE 11) — Inertia Bases: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide inertia
bases by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type K.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15071-11 05/13/05
shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides .•
shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
2.12 STEEL RAILS
A. (TYPE 9) — Steel Rails: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel rails by
one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type ICS.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type WSR.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type WFR.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type HB Rails.
B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel rails.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
3. Steel rails shall have a minimum depth of 1/10 of the longest span, but not less
than 6" deep and not greater than 12" deep.
2.13 STEEL EQUIPMENT BASES
A. (TYPE 10) — Steel Equipment Bases: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
steel equipment bases by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge,New York.
a. Model: Type WF.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type WSB.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type WFB.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type OSK.
"*a
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 15071-10 05/13/05
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm)
movement at start and stop.
2.10 PIPE RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT
A. (TYPE 7) — Pipe Riser Resilient Supports: Subject to compliance with requirements, pro-
vide pipe riser resilient supports by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type ADA.
2. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type MDPA.
3. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type VERA.
B. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel
tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, 60-durometer neoprene. In-
clude steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both
directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig
(3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all directions.
2.11 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES
A. (TYPE 8) — Resilient Pipe Guides: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide re-
silient pipe guides by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type VSG.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type LPR.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type RPG.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type VERG.
B. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum
of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a
shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15071-9 05/13/05
a. Model: Type PBSRA.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New,Jersey.
a. Model: Type RSHPR30A.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type PCSR.
B. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert
hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
J. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, folly compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
2.9 THRUST RESTRAINTS
A. (TYPE 6) — Thrust Restraints: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thrust
restraints by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type WB.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type TRK.
B. Thrust Restraints: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert
in compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching
to equipment.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maxi-
mum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isola-
tion efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15071-8 05/13/05
I Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
2.7 SPRING ISOLATION HANGERS
A. (TYPE 5) - Spring Isolation Hangers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
spring isolation hangers by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type 30N.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type BSRA.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type RSH30A.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type SNRC.
B. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and
insert in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-
reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
2.8 SPRING ISOLATION HANGERS WITH VERTICAL STOP
A. (TYPE 5V) - Spring Isolation Hangers with Vertical Stop: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide spring isolation hangers with vertical stop by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type PC30N.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15071-7 05/13/05
a. Model: Series AC.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type OSK.
B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-
mm-) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall
limit floor load to 100 psig (690 kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
2.6 RESTRAINED SPRING MOUNTED VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. (TYPE 4R) - Restrained Spring Mounted Vibration Isolators: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide restrained spring mounted vibration isolators by one of the
following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type SLR.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type CTER.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type AWR.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type KW.
B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic re-
straint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch-
(6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and ad-
justable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during instal-
lation.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 15071-6 05/13/05
a. Model: Type RD.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type 368SD.
B. Elastomeric Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neo-
prene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equip-
ment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to in-
dicate capacity range.
1. Durometer Rating: As required to meet scheduled static deflection at operating
equipment weights.
2.4 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION HANGERS
A. (TYPE 3) — Elastomeric Isolation Hangers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide eastomeric isolation hangers by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type HD.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type BRD.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type RHD.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type CD.
B. Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neo-
prene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
2.5 FREESTANDING SPRING MOUNTED VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. (TYPE 4) - Freestanding Spring Mounted Vibration Isolators: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide freestanding spring mounted vibration isolators by one of the
following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type SLF.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type SW.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15071-5 05/13/05
2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A. (TYPE 1 and TYPE 1R) — Elastomeric Isolation Pads: Subject to compliance with re-
quirements, provide elastomeric isolation pads by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type SW.
2. . Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type NR.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
a. Model: Type Maxi-Flex.
4. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc.; Long Island City, New York.
a. Model: Type 200N.
B. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, ar-
ranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel
baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to
sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Size pads for a maximum loading of 50 pounds per square inch.
2. Durometer Rating: As required to meet scheduled static deflection at operating
equipment weights. ,.
3. Minimum Deflection: Refer to Tables in Part 3 of this Section.
4. Number of Layers: Provide multiple layers separated by 16-gage galvanized steel
plates bonded to pads, where required to meet specified performance.
S. Provide metal loading plates on top and bottom, where required for even weight
distribution.
6. Provide necessary bolt holes for anchoring to structure. Provide neoprene bush-
ings, and neoprene impregnated duck washers at each bolt hole to prevent short
circuiting. (All Type 1R Elastomeric Isolation Pads shall be bolted to the structure
to meet seismic compliance.)
2.3 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
A. (TYPE 2) — Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide elastomeric isolation mounts by one of the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.; Hauppauge, New York.
a. Model: Type ND.
2. Amber Booth Company, Inc.; Houston, Texas.
a. Model: Type RVD.
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls/Korfund; Bloomingdale, New Jersey.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 15071-4 05/13/05
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculations.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Weld-
ing Code--Steel."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Con-
crete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for all snubbers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, without
failure, one-half "G" external forces and one "G" for life safety equipment.
B. Vibration isolation devices shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not
short circuit isolation during normal operating conditions.
C. Vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices shall have provisions for bolting and/or
welding to the structure.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15071-3 05/13/05
C. Performance Criteria Factor: Refer to the equipment schedule in Part 3 of this Section . k
for the Performance Criteria Factor for each piece of equipment.
D. Attachment Amplification Factor: Refer to the equipment schedule in Part 3 of this Sec-
tion for the Attachment Amplification Factor for each piece of equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit the following product data:
1. Data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to be utilized.
2. An itemized list of isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedules show-
ing isolator and seismic restraint proposed for each piece of equipment, referencing
material Drawing number and specified location.
3. Show base construction for equipment; include dimensions, structural member
sizes and support point locations.
4. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection data.
5. Show all methods of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.
6. Detail methods of isolation for ducts and pipes piercing walls and slabs.
7. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and
locations for each piece of equipment.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the fol-
lowing:
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated ex-
pansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building
structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that
riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and at-
tachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component
misalignment, and cantilever loads.
4. Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints
and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth
of penetration of anchors.
5. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2-inch
(13-mm) deflection in x, y, and z planes.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified
equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Arti-
cle above. Include the following:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15071-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vibration isolation elements for equipment, piping, and ductwork.
a. Elastomeric isolation pads.
b. Elastomeric isolation mounts.
C. Elastomeric hangers.
d. Spring hangers.
e. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
f. Freestanding spring isolators.
g. Restrained spring isolators.
h. Thrust restraints.
i. Pipe riser resilient supports.
j. Resilient pipe guides.
2. Equipment isolation bases and curbs.
a. Steel and inertia vibration isolation equipment bases.
b. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
3. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
a. Seismic snubbers.
4. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment, piping, and ductwork.
a. Restraining cables.
5. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
6. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. A,: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. A,: The Effective Peak Velocity-Related Acceleration Coefficient (Aj shall be 0.12g.
B. Component Seismic Coefficient: Refer to the equipment schedule in Part 3 of this Sec-
tion for the Component Seismic Coefficient for each piece of equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15071-1 05/13/05
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that N
cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, ap-
pearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and cor-
rosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply gal-
vanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15060
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' — 2323 15060-10 05/13/05
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that inatches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048
inch (1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
C. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06
inch (1.52 mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075
inch (1.91 mm) thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN400 to DN600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105
inch (2.67 mm) thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insula-
tion.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to sup-
port equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and
equipment supports.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15060-9 05/13/05
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attach-
ments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping
and support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizon-
tal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size
or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being sup-
ported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space at-
tachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install addi-
tional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and
expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at
top of inserts. A•f,,
E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
and other accessories.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action
of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maxi-
mum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not ex-
ceeded.
J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15060-8 05/13/05
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-
quired.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to lin-
ear horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of
high-density, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-
treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoin-
ing insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pip-
ing system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not ex-
ceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit vari-
ability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping sys-
tem from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equip-
ment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment
capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
C. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze mem-
ber.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15060-7 05/13/05
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 •
to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping in-
stallations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C)
piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to sus-
pend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-
joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tan-
gent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (675 kg).
C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1350 kg).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 15060-6 05/13/05
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
ew NPS 24 (DN15 to DN600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN15 to
DN100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN20 to DN200).
7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated sta-
tionary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).
S. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated station-
ary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).
9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsu-
lated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN15 to DN50).
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11):
For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DNIO to
DN200).
11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension
of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN10 to DN80).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to
DN750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN100 to DN900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN100 to DN900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN65 to DN900), if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN25 to DN750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20 (DN65 to DN500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by ex-
pansion and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN50 to DN1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contrac-
tion might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24
(DN50 to DN600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and con-
traction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2
to NPS 30 (DN50 to DN750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation
might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' - 2323 15060-5 05/13/05
I. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier. 100%,
2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-
treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of
pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping op-
erating below ambient air temperature.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galva-
nized.
C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetal-
lic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both in-
terior and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not speci-
fied in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to
232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN100 to DN400), requiring up to 4 inches
(100 mm) of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN20 to DN600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to
4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15060-4 05/13/05
2. Channel Support Systems:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.
C. GS Metals Corp.
d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
e. National Pipe Hanger Corp.
f. Thomas & Betts Corp.
g. Unistrut Corp.
h. Wesanco, Inc.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
C. PHS Industries, Inc.
d. Pipe Shields, Inc.
e. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
f. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:
a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.
b. Hilti, Inc.
C. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components.
Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific
hanger and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attach-
ments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attach-
ments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength insu-
lation, encased in sheet metal shield.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' 2323 15060-3 05/13/05
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and 10041
thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple pip-
ing supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and char-
acteristics of components and fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations
for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional
engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally quali-
fied to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are de-
fined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar
to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc.
b. B-Line Systems, Inc.
C. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
d. Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
f. Grinnell Corp.
g. GS Metals Corp.
h. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
i. National Pipe Hanger Corp.
j. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
k. PHS Industries, Inc.
1. Piping Technology &Products, Inc.
A"*
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15060-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and
supports to building structure.
2. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.
3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.
low 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers
and Supports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of support-
ing combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of support-
ing combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint
hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
"'' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hangers and Supports
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15060-1 05/13/05
I. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting up
and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining variable frequency
drives.
a. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance as
specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Include training relat-
ing to equipment operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 150.56
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15056-12 05/13/05
1. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Sec-
tion "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
E. Install freestanding equipment on concrete housekeeping bases conforming to Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Sec-
tion "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field-connected con-
nectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splat-
ters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean variable frequency drives, on completion of installation, according to manufac-
turer's written instructions.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform acceptance tests as follows and include the report in the emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Me-
chanical Materials and Methods":
1. Run each motor with its variable frequency drive. Demonstrate correct rotation,
alignment, and speed at motor design load.
2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.
4. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connec-
tions for compliance with requirements.
5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency drives as specified below:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-11 05/13/05
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide tuned harmonic trap
filters by the following:
1. Trans Coil Inc., (TCI,) Milwaukee WI.
a. Harmonic Guard.
B. Provide tuned harmonic trap filters on all variable frequency drives serving motors 25
horsepower and larger, regardless of the harmonic voltage distortion and harmonic cur-
rent distortion analysis results required in Part 1 of this Section.
C. Trap filters shall be enclosed in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
PART 3 - LXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive variable frequency drives for compliance with requirements, in-
stallation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each variable frequency drive to coordinate with ratings and character-
istics of motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load.
B. Select horsepower rating of variable frequency drives to suit the motor controlled.
3.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE INSTALLATION
A. Install variable frequency drives according to manufacturers written instructions.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service represen-
tative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components, including the pre-
testing and adjustment of variable frequency drives.
C. Location: Locate controllers within sight of motors controlled, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
D. For variable frequency drives at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight struc-
tural-steel channels bolted to wall. For variable frequency drives not at walls, provide
freestanding racks conforming to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15056-10 05/13/05
functional with variable frequency drive in "Normal" and `Bypass" modes
of operation.
b. b. Provide a bimetallic thermal motor overload relay to protect the motor
in bypass mode of operation.
C. C. Provide a service switch to electrically isolate the variable frequency
drive while in bypass mode, without having to remove power from the mo-
tor. This will provide the user with the ability to service the drive when in
the bypass mode of operation.
d. Provide a solid-state, reduced-voltage controller on the manual bypass cir-
cuit. Controller shall be NEMA ICS 2, suitable for use with standard
NEMA MG 1, Design B, poly-phase, medium induction motors. Controller
shall have adjustable acceleration rate control uses voltage or current ramp,
and adjustable starting torque control has up to 500 percent current limita-
tion for 20 seconds. Provide a surge suppressor in solid-state power circuits
provides 3-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10
percent or more above nominal line voltage. Provide LED indicators show
motor and control status, including the following conditions:
1) Control power available.
2) Controller on.
3) Overload trip.
4) Loss of phase.
5) Shorted silicon-controlled rectifier.
2.10 LINE REACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide input line reactors by
the following:
1. Trans Coil Inc., (TCI,) Milwaukee WI.
a. Sine Guard, KLR Series.
B. Provide three phase AC input line reactors on each variable frequency drive. The AC line
reactors are to provide attenuation of the line side voltage transients, thus preventing
over-voltage trips or other unnecessary variable frequency drive shutdowns, as well as, a
reduction in harmonic current distortion. The AC line reactors shall have the following
features:
1. Minimum of 2 1/z% line impedance.
2. Saturation rating of no less than 2.5 times the continuous current rating.
3. UL listed.
2.11 TUNED HARMONIC TRAP FILTERS
' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-9 OS113105
2. Provide a terminal strip for connection of fire, smoke, freeze, and external start
command. Terminal strip shall allow for connection into the Building Automation
System. All external interlocks shall remain fully functional whether in the
"Hand", "Auto", or "Bypass" modes. External "Start/Stop" shall be functional
only in the "Auto" mode.
3. Provide a Manual Bypass Circuit for all variable frequency drives 40 horsepower
and smaller. Provide manual bypass with the following features:
a. The bypass circuit shall allow the user to manually bypass the variable fre-
quency drive and transfer control of the motor across-the-line, running the
motor at full speed. The manual bypass circuit shall provide across-the-line
starting capability. When in the "Normal" mode of operation, the bypass
contactor shall be closed. In the "Test" position both contactors shall be
open, and in the "Bypass" position, the variable frequency drive output con-
tactor shall be open, and the bypass contactor is closed. The variable fre-
quency drive output contactor shall also open when a stop command is
given, isolating the motor from the variable frequency drive. While in the
bypass mode of operation, the motor shall be protected by a fuse or circuit
breaker. A three position selector switch to control the bypass contactor and
the variable frequency drive output contactor shall be mounted on the enclo-
sure door. Start/Stop signals and safety interlocks shall remain fully func-
tional with variable frequency drive in "Normal" and "Bypass" modes of
operation.
b. Provide a bimetallic thermal motor overload relay to protect the motor in
bypass mode of operation.
C. Provide a service switch to electrically isolate the variable frequency drive
while in bypass mode, without having to remove power from the motor.
This will provide the user with the ability to service the drive when in the
bypass mode of operation.
4. Provide a Manual Bypass Circuit with soft start capability for all variable fre-
quency drives 50 horsepower and larger. Provide manual bypass with the follow-
ing features:
a. The bypass circuit shall allow the user to manually bypass the variable fre-
quency drive. The manual bypass circuit shall provide solid state, reduced
voltage starting capability. When in the "Normal" mode of operation, the
bypass contactor shall be closed. In the "Test" position both contactors
shall be open, and in the "Bypass" position, the variable frequency drive
output contactor shall be open, and the bypass contactor is closed. The
variable frequency drive output contactor shall also open when a stop com-
mand is given, isolating the motor from the variable frequency drive. While
in the bypass mode of operation, the motor shall be protected by a fuse or
circuit breaker. A three position selector switch to control the bypass con-
tactor and the variable frequency drive output contactor shall be mounted on
the enclosure door. Start/Stop signals and safety interlocks shall remain fully
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-8 05/13/05
9. The variable frequency drive shall have the capability of either ramping or coasting
to a stop, as selected by the user.
10. The variable frequency drive shall have an automatic extended power loss ride-
through circuit that will utilize the inertia load to keep the drive powered. Mini-
mum power loss ride-through shall be one cycle, based on full load and no inertia.
11. The variable frequency drive shall be capable of restarting into a rotating load
(forward) and accelerate or decelerate to set-point without safety tripping or com-
ponent damage.
12. The variable frequency drive shall have the ability to automatically restart after
momentary power loss, momentary over-voltage, or loss of input reference signal.
Upon loss of input reference signal, the drive shall operate at a preset minimum
speed.
2.8 PROTECTIVE FEATURES
A. Provide self-protection and reliability features with fault indicators which shall be dis-
played on the front panel, including the following:
1. Ground fault protection.
2. Over-current protection.
3. Over-voltage protection.
4. Under-voltage protection.
5. Over-temperature protection.
6. Electronic motor overload protection.
B. Provide current limiting circuit with the following features:
1. The current limiting circuit shall be adjustable from 0 to 100 percent of the vari-
able frequency drive's variable torque current rating. This adjustment shall be
made via the keypad and shall be displayed in amps or as percent of full load.
2. Provide current limited stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, and run
conditions.
3. Current "switch-off" limit shall be fixed at a minimum of 120 percent of the vari-
able frequency drive's variable torque rating for 60 seconds.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide the following accessories with each variable frequency drive. The accessories
shall be factory installed by the variable frequency drive manufacturer:
1. Door interlocked circuit breaker, padlockable in the "OFF" position.
a. The circuit breaker Ampere Interupting Capacity (A.I.C) shall be 65,000
AMPS.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-7 05/13/05
fiers, and an integral three-winding phase-shifting transformer to reduce harmonic
current distortion.
3. Carrier Frequency Switching: Optimized and factory preset to reduce motor noise.
4. Output Frequency: 0 Hz to 120 Hz.
2.6 DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE
A. The variable frequency drives shall have a digital keypad for performing all parameter
adjustments and programming. The digital keypad shall have as a minimum the follow-
ing features:
1. Up and down arrow keys for adjustment of motor speed and adjustment of pro-
gramming parameters
2. "Start/Stop" key for starting and stopping in manual mode.
B. The variable frequency drives shall have a LED or LCD display. The variable frequency
drive shall have the following operating information displays:
1. Output Frequency.
2. Motor Current.
3. Output Voltage.
4. Status.
2.7 OPERATING FUNCTIONS/FEATURES/ADJUSTMENTS
A. The variable frequency drives shall have the following operating features, functions, and
adjustments:
1. Provide two (2) independently adjustable acceleration/deceleration ramps adjust-
able from 1 to 1200 seconds.
2. Provide a minimum of two (2) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to
prevent the variable frequency drive from continuously operating at an unstable
speed.
3. Provide a PI Setpoint controller allowing a pressure or flow signal to be connected
to the variable frequency drive, using the microprocessor in the variable frequency
drive for closed loop control.
4. Provide a minimum of two (2) programmable digital inputs for interfacing with di-
rect digital control or energy management systems.
5. Provide one (1) analog output proportional to frequency and output current.
6. Provide a minimum of two (2) digital outputs.
7. Provide a minimum of two (2) programmable analog inputs which shall accept a
current or voltage signal for speed reference, or for reference and actual signals for
PI controller. The minimum and maximum values (gain and offset) shall be ad-
justable within the range of 0-20 mA and 0-10 Volts.
8. Provide a minimum of seven (7) programmable preset speeds.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-6 05/13/05
power-transmission connection. The variable frequency drive shall be provided with the
following:
1. The variable frequency drive shall be solid state, with a Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM) output waveform.
2. The variable frequency drive shall employ a full wave bridge rectifier to prevent
input line notching.
3. DC bus choke.
4. DC bus filter capacitors.
5. Utilize Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT's) as the switching device.
6. The variable frequency drive shall maintain a power factor of not less than 0.95
throughout it's speed range.
2.3 ENCLOSURE
A. Description: NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Mounting: Wall mounted or floor mounted.
2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The variable frequency drives shall be designed to operate within the following environ-
mental and service conditions:
1. Input Voltage: As indicated on the Drawings.
a. Variable frequency drive designed to operate +/- 10% of scheduled input
voltage.
2. Input Frequency: 60 Hz +/- 3%.
3. Ambient operating temperature: 0cF to 104°F.
4. Storage Temperature: 40°F to 104°F.
5. Relative Humidity: 90% Maximum, Non-Condensing.
6. Altitude: 3,000 feet above sea level - Maximum.
2.5 CONTROL
A. The variable frequency drives shall be designed to operate with the following design and
control features:
1. Control Method: The variable frequency drive output shall be a Pulse Width
Modulated (PWM) wave form. The variable frequency drive shall be configured
with a 6-pulse convertor.
2. Optional Control Method: The variable frequency drive output shall be a Pulse
Width Modulated (PWM) wave form. The variable frequency drive shall be con-
figured with a 12-pulse convertor section comprised of two full wave bridge recti-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-5 05/13/05
I. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each variable frequency drive with the
ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence,
and the duty cycle of the motor and load.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
Contract Documents.
II). Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to
a full parts and labor on-site warranty on all variable frequency drives for a period of
one year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary. - ACH 400 Series.
2. Toshiba International Corporation, - Q-Flowsaver II Series.
3. MagneTek Drives and Systems, - GPD-506 Series.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, variable-frequency drive, listed and labeled as a complete
unit and arranged to provide variable speed of a standard NEMA MG 1-1993 Revision
1, Design E, High efficiency, 3-phase, induction motor by adjusting output voltage and
frequency.
B. Design and Rating: Provide variable frequency drives of capacities and with voltage re-
quirements as indicated on Drawings. Match load type such as fans, blowers, and
pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-4 05/13/05
AOW E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working
clearances, and required area above and around variable frequency drives. Show vari-
able frequency drive layout and relationship between electrical components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
F. Test Reports: Written reports specified in Parts 2 and 3.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of variable frequency drive to include
in the emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Divi-
sion 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate variable frequency drive support with requirements for access for mainte-
nance and installation of accessories.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
+• A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project site, a ser-
vice center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain variable frequency drives from a single manufacturer.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully installed
variable frequency drives for use in similar applications.
D. Comply with the latest edition of the following list of publications:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers: Standard 519-1992, IEEE Guide
for Harmonic Content and Control.
2. National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 70: National Electric Code.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: NEMA 250: Enclosures for Elec-
trical Equipment.
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: NEMA ICS 7.0: AC Adjustable
Speed Drives.
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: NEMA MG 1-1993, Revision 1:
Motors and Generators.
6. Underwriters Laboratories: UL 508: Industrial Control Equipment
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide variable frequency drives specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15056-3 05/13/05
4. Provide submittal information on all variable frequency drive accessories and op-
tions.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Harmonic Requirements:
1. Calculations
a. Under both normal and emergency operating conditions, the line harmonics
introduced into the power system from the AC variable fi-equency drives
shall be within the distortion limits as defined be IEEE-519 (1992). THD
(voltage) shall not exceed 5% when measured at the point of common cou-
pling. Note that the emergency generator(s) may become a point of common
coupling during emergency operating conditions. The VFD manufacturer
shall coordinate with the local utility company and with the manufacturer of
the emergency generator(s) to obtain the impedance data required for the
analysis.
b. In addition to the distortion limitations specified, the drives shall not create
line notching in excess of the limits called for in IEEE-519 (1992) under the
same conditions specified above.
C. The VFD manufacturer shall provide input line reactors, as a minimum, for
each drive furnished for this project. If the harmonic distortion limits speci-
fied above cannot be met by the addition of line reactors, the VFD manufac-
turer shall provide harmonic trap filters as necessary to meet those limits.
1) Provide three phased tuned harmonic trap filters on all variable fre-
quency drives serving motors 25 horsepower and larger, regardless of
the harmonic voltage distortion and harmonic current distortion
analysis results.
d. The drive manufacturer shall include with his submittals a harmonic analysis
which shall indicate the calculated level of voltage and current distortion and
maximum line notching expected. The submittal shall include as a minimum
the following information:
1) All input data and assumptions.
2) Explanation of method used to perform the analysis.
3) All calculations and/or computer printouts used in the analysis.
4) A system impedance diagram based on the Electrical one-line dia-
gram(s).
5) A detailed description of the tests, procedures and supporting calcula-
tions required to substantiate the installed systems compliance with the
specified THD limits. The description shall include information on the
proposed test equipment and test conditions. Include the name and
qualifications of the firm which will conduct the field tests.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15056-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15056 —VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for motor driven equipment controlled with
variable frequency drives.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for mounting of
variable frequency drives.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Submittals and Substi-
tutions" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
B. Product data for each variable frequency drive including the following:
1. A schedule of all variable frequency drives provided under this Section of the speci-
fications including the following information:
a. Variable frequency drive identification tag. (corresponding to Drawings)
b. Manufacturer model number.
C. Input voltage, phase and frequency.
d. Horsepower rating, rated KVA, and output current amps.
e. Weight, dimensions, and NEMA enclosure type.
2. Provide a list of all variable frequency drive protective features and circuits, pro-
grammable adjustments, required environmental conditions, display type, and in-
formation available for display during drive operation.
3. Provide manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring (to) and
power output wiring (from) variable frequency drives. Submittal shall include lad-
der-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate be-
tween portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are field in-
stalled.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Variable Frequency Drives
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15056-1 05/13/05
AW 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform acceptance tests as follows and include the report in the emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Me-
chanical Materials and Methods":
1. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and
speed at motor design load.
2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.
4. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and elec-
trical connections for compliance with requirements.
5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
6. Verify bearing lubrication.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3 CLEANING
' A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splat-
ters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
END OF SECTION 15055
+® Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motors
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15055-7 05/13/05
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements
for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller
output.
2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally pro-
tected motors.
C. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to
NEMA MG 1:
1. Measure winding resistance.
2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. Perform high-potential test.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to
motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of
motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor tem-
perature returns to normal range.
D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces
on motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motors
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15055-6 05/13/05
Premium Efficiency Motor Minimum Efficiencies
TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED (TEFC)
Speed (RPM)
SIZE 1200 1800 3600
HP
NEMA Nominal Efficiency
3 89.5% 89.5% 88.5%
5 89.5% 89.5% 89.5%
7.5 91.7% 91.7% 91.0%
10 91.7% 91.7% 91.7%
15 92.4% 92.4% 91.7%
20 92.4% 93.0% 92.4%
25 93.0% 93.6% 93.0%
30 93.6% 93.6% 93.0%
40 94.1% 94.1% 93.6%
50 94.1% 94.5% 94.1%
60 94.5% 95.0% 94.1%
75 95.5% 95.4% 94.5%
100 95.4% 95.4% 95.0%
125 95.4% 95.4% 95.4%
150 95.8% 95.8% 95.4%
200 95.8% 96.2% 95.8%
250 95.4% 95.8% 95.4%
B. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
E. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G.
2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
H. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 HP and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than
7.5 HP.
1. Finish: Gray enamel.
►.. Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motors
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' -2323 15055-5 05/13/05
1. Design Characteristics for Open Drip-Proof Motors: NEMA MG 1, Design E, all
motors larger than 1/z horsepower; to meet or exceed the following efficiencies for
open drip proof motors:
Premium Efficiency Motor Minimum Efficiencies
OPEN DRIP- PROOF (ODP)
Speed (RPM)
SIZE 1200 1 1800 3600
HP
NEMA Nominal Efficiency
1 82.5% 85.5% 80.0%
1.5 86.5% 86.5% 85.5%
2 87.5% 86.5% 86.5%
3 89.5% 89.5% 86.5%
5 89.5% 89.5% 89.5%
7.5 91.7% 91.0% 89.5%
10 91.7% 91.7% 90.2%
15 92.4% 93.0% 91.0%
20 92.4% 93.0% 92.4%
25 93.0% 93.6% 93.0%
30 93.6% 94.1% 93.0%
40 94.1% 94.1% 93.6%
50 94.1% 94.5% 93.6%
60 95.0% 95.0% 94.5%
75 95.0% 95.4% 94.5%
100 95.0% 95.4% 94.5%
125 95.4% 95.4% 95.0%
150 95.8% 95.8% 95.4%
200 95.4% 95.8% 95.4%
250 1 95.4% 95.8% 95.0%
2. Design Characteristics for Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled Motors: NEMA MG 1,
Design E, all motors larger than 1/z horsepower; to meet or exceed the following ef-
ficiencies for totally enclosed fan-cooled motors:
Premium Efficiency Motor Minimum Efficiencies
TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED (TEFL)
Speed (RPM)
SIZE 1200 1800 3600
HP
NEMA Nominal Efficienc
1 82.5% 85.5% 78.5%
1.5 87.5% 86.5% 85.5%
2 88.5% 86.5% 86.5%
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motors AMIN
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 15055-4 05/13/05
�., 2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for
use throughout speed range without overheating.
3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control se-
quence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as fol-
lows:
1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in an-
other Section.
2. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or char-
acteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage
to which motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F (40 deg C) and at altitude
of 3300 feet (1005 m) above sea level.
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate con-
nected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated
operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service fac-
tor.
H. Enclosure: Open dripproof, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motors
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15055-3 05/13/05
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working
clearances, and required area above and around field-installed motors. Show motor lay-
out, mechanical power transfer link, driven load, and relationship between electrical
components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations,
type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that motors, ac-
cessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Motorized Equipment: Identify center of grav-
ity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Test Reports: Written reports specified in Parts 2 and 3.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in the emer-
gency, operation, and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Sec-
tion "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods".
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors
that are:
1. Compatible with the following:
a. Magnetic controllers.
b. Reduced-voltage controllers.
C. Auto-transformer type controllers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motors
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15055-2 05/13/05
SECTION 15055 —MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors
on related motor-driven equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for mounting
motors and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
2. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor re-
quirements for motor-driven equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a
component of equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide
nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting ar-
rangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground
lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes.
B. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and
details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the
following:
1. Each installed unit's type and details.
2. Nameplate legends.
3. Diagrams of power and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each
type of motor and for each control scheme.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Motors
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15055-1 05/13/05
7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement
as specified in Division 3.
3.12 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.13 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and an-
chor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fas-
teners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.14 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 15050
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-21 05/13/05
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.9 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9
Section "Painting".
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with mate-
rials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.10 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access Panels: Comply with Section 08305.
B. Furnish access panels for installation wider other sections to allow access to mechanical
equipment and devices installed under Division 15. Furnish access panels for mechanical
devices installed behind permanent construction such as gypsum wall board partitions
and ceilings or concrete masonry walls and partitions.
C. Mechanical devices that require access include, but are not necessarily limited to; valves,
cleanouts, air release valves; water hammer arrestors, terminal boxes; fire and smoke
dampers, smoke detectors, steam traps, filters, coils, volume and control dampers.
D. Access panels shall be large enough to provide access for maintenance and removal of
mechanical devices.
3.11 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufac-
turer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise in-
dicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter
of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's set-
ting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ""W`
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-20 05/13/05
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC
pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 31.38
Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth
or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join ac-
cording to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materi-
als of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect pip-
ing materials of dissimilar metals.
3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replace-
ment of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum inter-
ference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 15050-19 05/13/05
P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Divi-
sion 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division "15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to
tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Hand-
book," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fit-
tings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and sol-
vent cements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods A
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-18 05/13/05
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas
or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-
iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materi-
als:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gyp-
sum-board partitions.
C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane water-
proofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-
iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and loca-
tion of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and instal-
lation.
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and me-
chanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements re-
quired for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble me-
chanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make wa-
tertight seal.
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch
(25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements re-
quired for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble me-
chanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make wa-
tertight seal.
* Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-17 05/13/05
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the follow-
ing:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-
plated finish.
C. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-
casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
i. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-
plate type.
Aftk
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated fin-
ish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and
spring clips.
C. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting,
cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-
brass type with chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with
rough-brass finish.
f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.
g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-
plate type.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board par-
titions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-16 05/13/05
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
' or compatible piping material.
J. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and re-
move, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal ca-
pacity and quality.
3.5 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specify-
ing piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calcu-
late friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
*., Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-15 05/13/05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect site conditions before starting preparatory work and verify that actual conditions
are known and acceptable before starting work.
B. Inspect areas where piping and equipment will be installed and verify adequate space is
available for access, service and removal of equipment. Coordinate with the Work of
other Sections.
C. Notify the Architect immediately when the removal of existing ceilings, walls, or obstruc-
tions reveal conditions substantially different from the Contract Documents.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform coordination with the work of other Sections and prepare composite coordina-
tion drawings as specified in Section 01150 before starting installation work of this sec-
tion.
B. Verify points of connection to existing systems before proceeding with any related instal-
lation work.
3.3 SYSTEM SHUTDOWNS
A. Coordination shutdowns of existing systems with the Owner and submit a written re-
quest at least ten working days in advance. Minimize system shut downs as much as
possible. Submit a list of all effected areas, the proposed work to be performed, and the
expected length of the shut-down including time for re-testing.
B. Provide temporary services to maintain active system during extended shut-downs as re-
quired for demolition and construction phasing.
3.4 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for gen-
eral demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components in-
dicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-14 05/13/05
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
"* plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. In-
clude clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that com-
pletely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-
plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
AV*, D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-13 05/13/05
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermo-
plastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working
pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-12 05/13/05
a. NIBCO INC.
b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) mini-
mum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg Q.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Eclipse, Inc.
d. Epco Sales, Inc.
e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.;Wilkins Div.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges,
full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system
pressures.
mow. Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-11 05/13/05
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refriger-
ant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.42 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to
and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
I. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
C. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or
coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type
coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufac-
turer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one
solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11
equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint
end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. In-
clude brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1. Manufacturers:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods -Awk'
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-10 05/13/05
�"'%1 cations and shall clearly show the assigned valve tag number. Record drawings shall in-
clude.
1. Piping and equipment location changes from the Contract Documents.
2. Valve locations and valve tag numbers.
3. Equipment identification numbers coordinated with the Owner's Facility Man-
agement Program.
B. Record drawings include ductwork fabrication drawings or coordination drawings pre-
pared under the work of this Contract. Provide polyester mylar reproducible drawings
of both the Contract Drawings and additional fabrication/coordination drawings that
indicate mechanical systems.
C. Submission of the specified polyester mylars of the full mechanical coordination draw-
ings eliminates the requirement to modify the Contract Drawings to incorporate the
changes to piping and equipment locations made during construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed be-
low.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thick-
ness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux accord-
ing to ASTM B 813.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-9 05/13/05
1. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent en-
trance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
2. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacement
necessary to the approval of the Architect at no change in Contract Sum.
1.12 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division I Section — "Contract Closeout".
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Bind Manuals in hard-cover, three-ring binders,
and provide identified dividers with tabs. Indicate appropriate model numbers in manu-
facturers' brochures and cross out non-applicable information. Review the Manuals
with the Owner's maintenance personnel and add additional maintenance data sheets
and information as directed by the Owner's Representatives. Copies of faxed pages are
unacceptable.
C. Division of Manuals: Divide manuals with tabs to match the mechanical specification
sections.
D. Each Manual shall include:
1. Table of contents.
2. Subcontractor's warranties.
3. Name and telephone number of local representative or supplier.
4. Manufacturers' maintenance procedures.
5. Exploded drawings and parts lists.
6. Troubleshooting checklists with potential problems and possible causes.
7. Schematic wiring diagrams.
8. Record drawings.
9. Valve tag charts.
10. Equipment warranties and guaranties.
11. Additional requirements specified in the mechanical sections.
E. Instruction Seminar: Perform systems instruction seminar and walk-through with the
Owner's representatives after preparation and review of the Operation and Maintenance
manuals.
1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents for the work of Division 15 as specified in Division 1 Section
"Project Record Documents". The record drawings shall accurately indicate all valve lo-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-8 05/13/05
D. Document Review: Review the complete set of Contract Documents and be familiar
with the space requirements of other trades. Thoroughly review building sections, archi-
tectural details, and mechanical and electrical drawings for a complete understanding of
the scope and coordination requirements of the Mechanical Sections.
E. Scheduled Equipment: Standard manufacturers model numbers scheduled on the draw-
ings shall be modified as specified in the descriptive specification for the scheduled
equipment. The drawings generally define quantities, and the specifications further de-
fine equipment quality and system components, which may not be included in the stan-
dard model number.
F. Pipe sizing notations: Pipe sizing notations run along the pipe from the larger sizes to the
smaller size. Sections of pipe that are not specifically identified with a pipe size are the
continuation of the previous larger pipe size indication. Pipe sizes change only where in-
dicated by a notation change.
G. Existing Conditions: The existing conditions indicated on the contract drawings are
taken largely from existing record drawings. Preparation work of the mechanical sec-
tions includes the verification of existing conditions before the start of related installation
work.
1.9 DUST AND AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS CONTROL
A. Comply with the requirements of dust and airborne contaminant control as specified in
Division 1 Section — "Dust and Airborne Contaminants Control".
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Prepare coordination drawings as specified in Division 1 Section— "Special Provisions".
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress
of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring ac-
cess that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of the Mechanical Sections be-
fore, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all
trades and Sections.
w►, Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-7 05/13/05
of Substantial Completion. Date of Substantial Completion shall be as determined in lowk
accordance with the General Conditions.
B. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be
limited to:
1. Failures in operating component or components.
2. Leakage from piping system.
3. Code violations.
C. The use of systems or equipment provided under Division 15 Sections for temporary ser-
vices and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of work nor beneficial use by the
Owner, and shall not institute the Warranty period.
D. Obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturers published
data without exclusion or limitation, in Owner's name.
E. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
F. Guarantee shall include 24-hour service of complete system during guarantee period at
no cost to Owner. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Owner's approval.
G. Submit guarantee to Architect before final payment and include in the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
H. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer's equipment and material warranties
still in force to Owner.
I. This Article shall not be interpreted to limit Owner's rights under applicable codes and
laws and under this Contract.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with Article 2 of the Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701, including the
Appendix. Visit the site prior to submission of bids and examine existing conditions to
be familiar with the related implications to the Work of the Mechanical Sections.
B. Questions regarding the Bidding Documents: Submit questions and requests for clarifica-
tions in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders.
C. Contract Documents: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show every
fitting and component and shall be used in conjunction with the specified requirements
to provide complete and functional systems. The drawings and specifications are com-
plimentary, and the requirements indicated on both establish the requirements of the
Contract.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-6 05/13/05
2. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
ew and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
a. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
b. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding pro-
cesses involved and that certification is current.
1) If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing will be Contractor's
responsibility.
1.6 CODES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS
A. Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable Rules, Laws, Regulations,
Codes, and Ordinances of Local, State, and Federal Governments.
1. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent
regulations of authorities that have jurisdiction.
2. In case of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regula-
tions, the more stringent requirement shall govern when so directed by the Archi-
tect.
B. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the applicable regulations and retain at the Pro-
ject site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need.
C. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent re-
quirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as
if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
D. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract
Documents, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Copies of Standards: Obtain copies of the most recent editions of the following stan-
dards and retain at the Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a
reasonable need:
1. UL Through Penetration Fire Stop Systems.
2. SMACNA Fire Damper Installation Guide.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Archi-
tect two copies of a written Warranty agreeing to replace the work of each mechanical
section which fails due to defective materials or workmanship within one year after Date
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-5 05/13/05
tract is based. Acceptable manufacturers names are listed to provide competitive bids
with the specified or scheduled manufacturer.
1. The inclusion of a manufacturer's name within the list of acceptable manufacturers
does not necessarily mean that the manufacturers standard product is equal to the
specified or scheduled product without some required modification. The submit-
ted product shall be equal in all respects to the specified product.
C. Substitutions: Substitutions include manufacturers not listed as acceptable within the
specifications, or products, systems and methods that differ from the specified systems.
I. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 Section "Submittals and Substitutions".
Submit list of proposed substitutes for review and approval in compliance with Ar-
ticle 3 of the Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701.
2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify that the products of acceptable manu-
facturers and proposed substitutes meet or exceed the performance of the specified
or scheduled product including the following:
a. Horsepower: Equal or less.
b. Efficiency: Equal or greater.
C. Capacities: Equal or greater.
d. Space/Clearances: Equal or greater.
e. Storage and Recovery: Equal or greater.
f. Warranty: Equal or better.
g. Weight (Lbs): Equal or less.
h. Noise: Equal or quieter.
3. By the submission of a proposed substitution, the Contractor represents that he has
reviewed the proposed substitution and certifies that:
a. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
b. Changes to the building design, including A/E design and review time at a
rate of 2.7 x DPE, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested
substitution will be included in the bid price with no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the
construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements.
d. Maintenance and service parts are available locally.
e. All costs associated with the use of the proposed substitute will be covered
by the Contractor.
D. Qualifications for Welding and Brazing Work:
1. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-4 05/13/05
D. Schedule of Shut-downs: After the project construction schedule is developed, submit the
following information to the Owner for all required shut-downs of existing systems.
1. Date of proposed shut-down.
2. List of systems to be affected.
3. List of areas affected by the shut-down.
4. Description of work to be performed.
5. Estimated length of the shut-down.
E. Piping Systems Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule of mechanical piping systems to
indicate the piping material, joints, and fittings to be used with each system.
F. Insulation Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule to indicate insulation types and
thicknesses to be used on each mechanical piping system.
G. UL Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule to in-
dicate the UL-System number for through-penetration assemblies to be used with all me-
chanical systems. Coordinate with the work of Division 7 Section "Firestops and
Smokeseals".
H. Product Data: For the following:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Record Drawings: Prepare record drawings in accordance with the provisions of Divi-
sion 1 Section "Project Record Documents" and the additional requirements of this Sec-
tion.
K. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare and submit copies of the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Close-Out", Division
1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data", and in Article 1.10 of this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled, licensed workers who are thoroughly
trained and experienced and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Standard of Quality: The manufacturers names specified first or scheduled on the draw-
ings are used for the design and to establish the standard of quality upon which the Con-
took Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Packagee' —2323 15050-3 05/13/05
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambi-
ent temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical con-
tact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General Requirements: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Submit-
tals and Substitutions", the Sections of Division 15-Mechanical, and the additional re-
quirements of this Section.
1. Copies of faxed pages within submittal packages will be rejected.
B. Materials List: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to proceed, submit a list of the proposed materials to be provided under the work
of the Mechanical Sections of Division 15.
C. Organization of Submittals: Bind submittals into comprehensible packages with related
product data sheets organized and identified by Specification Section and Article num-
bers. Bind submittals into packages as specified in the Sections of Division 15. Identify
submittal pages to indicate the specific equipment or fixture type the data sheet applies
to. Submittals that are not properly bound and identified may be returned without re-
view.
1. Indicate appropriate model numbers in manufacturers' brochures and cross out
non-applicable information.
2. Copies of faxed pages are unacceptable.
3. Submit shop drawings for particular systems complete, simultaneously, and organ-
ized by system.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods '"
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 15050-2 05/13/05
POW SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Organization of Submittals.
2. Proposed substitutions.
3. Coordination drawings.
4. Infection control requirements.
5. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
6. Transition fittings.
7. Dielectric fittings.
8. Core drilling.
9. Penetrations.
10. Mechanical sleeve seals.
11. Sleeves.
12. Escutcheons.
13. Grout.
14. Mechanical demolition.
15. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
16. Painting and finishing.
17. Concrete bases.
18. Supports and anchorages.
19. Record documents.
20. Systems start-ups and Commissioning.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceil-
ings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished oc-
cupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
mow, Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 15050-1 05/13/05
END OF SECTION 13921
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-14 05/13/05
strate compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or that does
not perform as indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Verify that each fire
pump performs as indicated.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following preventive-maintenance opera-
tions and checks:
a. Lubricate oil-lubrication-type bearings.
b. Remove grease-htbrication-type bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene,
and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation. Rotation
shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
d. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or if it drags
even slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and cor-
rected.
3. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
a. Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare pump
look for operation.
b. Open sealing-liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
C. Start motor.
d. Open discharge valve slowly.
e. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing-liquid valve for
proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland immedi-
ately, but let packing run in before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes.
f. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
S. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or
other acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Fire hoses are for
field-acceptance tests only and are not property of Owner.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps, drivers, controllers, and pressure-
maintenance pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout Procedures] [Demonstration
and Training]."
400'` Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-13 05/13/05
B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill baseplate completely with
grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after grout
has hardened. Check alignment and make required corrections.
C. Align piping connections.
D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 1.4 and
to tolerances specified by manufacturer.
E. Align vertically mounted, split-case pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been
made plumb on concrete base, grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression
Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water supply and discharge piping to fire pumps and pressure-maintenance
pumps with flexible connectors. Refer to Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping"
for flexible connectors.
D. Connect relief-valve discharge to point of disposal. ,
E. Connect flowmeter-system sensors and meters according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
F. Connect controllers to pumps.
G. Connect fire-pump controllers to building fire-alarm system. Refer to Division 13 Sec-
tion "Fire Alarm."
H. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
I. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect[, test, and adjust] field-assembled components and equipment installation, includ-
ing connections[, and to assist in field testing]. Report results in writing.
B. Perform field tests for each fire pump when installation is complete. Comply with oper-
ating instructions and procedures in NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance with require-
ments. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demon-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-12 05/13/05
'* 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install and align fire pump, pressure-maintenance pump, and controller according to
NFPA 20.
B. Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic maintenance including re-
moval of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Set base-mounting-type pumps on concrete bases. Disconnect coupling halves before set-
ting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal
wedges having small taper, at points near anchor bolts, to provide 3/4- to 1-1/2-
inch (19- to 38-mm) gap between pump base and concrete base for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Verify
that coupling faces and pump suction and discharge flanges are level and plumb.
D. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than diameter of fire-pump noz-
zles.
E. Install valves that are same size as piping connecting fire pumps, bypasses, test headers,
and other piping systems.
F. Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge at pressure-gage tappings.
G. Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.
H. Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves, meters and gages, and
equipment supports.
I. Install flowmeters and sensors where indicated. Install flowmeter-system components
and make connections according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but
not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram
submittals to electrical Installer.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A. Align [split-case] [end-suction] fire-pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been
leveled on concrete base, grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.
' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 1392141 05/13/05
f. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 11.07, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-
shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect fire pumps with their controllers according to NFPA 20 for certified
shop tests.
B. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to requirements indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, concrete bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance Awk
with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.
B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping to verify actual locations of piping con-
nections before fire-pump installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance
pumps, and controllers. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise in-
dicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of
base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, in-
structions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-10 05/13/05
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and
-tested unit before shipping.
3. Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the following:
a. Motor-operating condition.
b. Loss-of-line power.
C. Phase reversal.
d. Low-water alarm.
2.7 FLOWMETER SYSTEMS
A. Description: Fire-pu np flowmeter system that indicates flow to not less than 175 per-
cent of fire-pump rated capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing, flowmeter,
and fittings.
1. FMG-Approved Manufacturers:
a. Dieterich Standard Inc.
b. Gerand Engineering Co.
C. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
d. Meriam Instruments Div.; Scott Fetzer Co.
e. Preso Meters Corporation.
tow f. Reddy-Buffaloes Pump Co.
2. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum.
3. Sensor: Venturi, annubar probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches (115
mm) in diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
5. Permanently Mounted Flowmeter: Suitable for wall mounting with copper tubing
to connect to flow sensor.
6. Portable Flowmeter: With two 12-foot (3.7-m) hoses, in carrying case.
2.8 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- (90- to 115-mm-) diameter dial with range of
0- to 300-psig (0- to 2070-kPa) minimum. Include caption "WATER" on dial face.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AGF Manufacturing Co.
b. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
C. Brecco Corporation.
d. Dresser Equipment Group; Instruments Div.
e. Marsh Bellofram.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-9 05/13/05
a. Firetrol, Inc. FTA500
b. Master Control Systems, Inc.
2. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2, wall-mounting type for field electri-
cal wiring.
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
3. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
a. Fusible disconnect switch.
b. Pressure switch.
C. Hand-off-auto selector switch.
d. Pilot light.
e. Running period timer.
D. Accessories and Specialties: Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and discharge
ratings as required for pump capacity rating. Include the following:
1. Circulation relief valve.
2. Suction and discharge pressure gages.
E. Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Characteristics and Specialty Data:
1. Rated Capacity: 92psig
2. Total Rated Head: 213TDH
3. Pump Speed: 1750rpm.
4. Electric-Motor Driver Size: 1 hp, 1750 rpm, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
a. Full-Load Amperes:.
b. Minimum Circuit Ampacity:.
C. Maximum Overcurrent Protection:.
2.6 ALARM PANELS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying with UL 508 and
requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and visible alarms matching controller type.
Locate in Engineering office of existing building. Provide protective conduit from addi-
tion to engineering office. Coordinate with Division16.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Firetrol, Inc. FTA200
b. Master Control Systems, Inc.
2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-8 05/13/05
ished chrome-plated finish escutcheon plate with lettering equivalent to "PUMP
TEST CONNECTION."
8. Hose Valves: UL 668, straightway pattern, and bronze with cap and chain. In-
clude NFPA 1963 hose thread that complies with local fire department standards
and finish same as for test-header-manifold escutcheon plate.
9. Ball Drip Valve: UL 1726.
10. Main Relief Valve: UL 1478, spring loaded.
11. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint unless brass or other
finish is specified.
12. Fittings: The pump manufacturer shall furnish piping accessory items for the pump
installation that will adapt the pump connections to the fire protection system and
test connection as follows. Fittings subjected to pump discharge pressure shall be
ANSI 250 pound rating. Fittings subjected to suction pressure shall be ANSI 125
pound rating.
2.5 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A. Pressure-Maintenance Pumps, General: Factory-assembled and -tested pumps with elec-
tric-motor driver, controller, and accessories and specialties. Include cast-iron or stain-
less-steel casing and bronze or stainless-steel impellers, mechanical seals, and suction and
discharge flanges machined to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions unless Class 250
flanges are indicated and except that connections may be threaded in sizes where flanges
are not available.
' 1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -
tested unit before shipping.
2. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
B. Multistage, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps: Multiple-impeller type complying with
HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 requirements for multistage centrifugal pumps. Include base.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sterling Peerless Pump; Sterling Fluid Systems Group.
b. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
2. Driver: NEMA MG 1, open-dripproof, squirrel-cage, induction motor complying
with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70. Include wiring compatible with controller used.
3. Driver: NEMA MG 1, open-dripproof, squirrel-cage, induction motor complying
with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70. Include wiring compatible with controller used.
C. Controllers: UL 508; factory-assembled, -wired, and -tested, across-the-line type for
combined automatic and manual operation.
1. Manufacturers:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-7 05/13/05
C. Fire-alarm system connections for indicating motor running condition, loss-
of-line power, and line-power phase reversal.
d. Automatic and manual operation, and minimum run-time relay to prevent
short cycling.
C. Water-pressure-actuated switch with independent high and low calibrated
adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression piping.
f. Automatic and manual shutdown.
g. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven with spring backup.
6. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and listings, and
other pertinent data.
7. Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to NFPA 20 with
nonferrous-metal sensing piping, NPS 1/2 (DN 15), with globe valves for testing
controller mechanism from system to pump controller as indicated. Include bronze
check valve with 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) orifice in clapper or ground-face union with
noncorrosive diaphragm having 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) orifice.
B. Full-Service Fire-Pump Controllers:
1. Type Starting: Wye delta, closed transition with Autotransformer, closed transi-
tion.
2. Mounting: Floor-stand type for field electrical connections.
3. Automatic Transfer Switches: UL 218 and UL 1008 and requirements for and at-
tached to fire-pump controllers. Include enclosure complying with UL 50, Type 2,
with automatic transfer switch with rating at least equal to fire-pump driver-motor
horsepower. Include ampere rating not less than 115 percent of motor full-load
current and suitable for switching motor-locked rotor current.
C. Limited-Service Fire-Pump Controllers:
1. Type Starting: Across the line.
2. Mounting: Wall type.
2.4 FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity rating.
Include the following:
1. Automatic air-release valve.
2. Circulation relief valve.
3. Suction and discharge pressure gages.
4. Eccentric-tapered reducer at suction inlet.
5. venturi test flow meter
6. Concentric-tapered reducer at discharge outlet.
7. Test-Header Manifold: Pedestal mount Brass body for hose valves. Include 3-
nozzle outlets arranged in 180° degree, concrete mounting attachment; and pol-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-6 05/13/05
4. Driver: UL-listed, NEMA MG 1, open-dripproof, squirrel-cage, induction motor
complying with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70. Include wiring compatible with control-
ler used.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Emerson; U.S. Electrical Motors.
2) Lincoln Electric Company (The).
3) Marathon Electric, Inc.
2.3 FIRE-PUMP CONTROLLERS
A. Fire-Pump Controllers, General: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for electric-drive, fire-
pump service and service entrance; combined automatic and manual operation; factory
assembled and wired; and factory tested for capacities and electrical characteristics.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Firetrol, Inc.: FTA1350 with FTA900
b. Master Control Systems, Inc.
2. Rate controllers for scheduled fire-pump horsepower and short-circuit withstand
rating at least equal to short-circuit current available at controller location. Take
into account cable size and distance from substation or supply transformers.
3. Electric Motor Controllers: The automatic electric motor controller shall be (ULI
listed)(FM approved) (ULC Listed) specifically for fire pump service. The control-
ler shall be model # FTA1350, as manufactured by Firetrol, and designed for wve-
delta closed transition type starting. The controller shall be rated for the horse-
power specified in this specification's electric motors section. The controller shall
be capable of interrupting a short circuit current at least equal to the available
short circuit current in the controller supply circuit. This fire pump controller in-
stallation requires a withstand rating of not less than 100,000 amps RMS symmet-
rical at an operating voltage of 460 volts. A Firetrol model # FTA900 Transfer
Switch shall also be supplied. The controller shall be floor or wall mounted and
electrical connection to the motor shall be by the equipment installer.
4. Enclosure: UL 50, Type 2, dripproof, indoor, unless special-purpose enclosure is
indicated. Include manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
5. Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as required
for drivers and controller types used, and specific items listed.
a. Isolating means and circuit breaker.
b. "Power on" pilot lamp.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-5 05/13/05
pound ANSI rated discharge flanges machined to American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) dimensions.
D. Electric Motors: The pump driver shall be horizontal foot mounted ball bearing induc-
tion motor rated 50 horsepower, 60 hertz, open drip-proof NEMA enclosure for opera-
tion on 460 volt, 3 phase service. The motor locked rotor current shall not exceed the
values stated in NFPA Pamphlet 20. The motor shall be mounted on a steel base, com-
mon to the pump, and shall be connected to the pump with a flexible coupling protected
by a suitable guard . The fire pump manufacturer shall accurately align the pump and
motor shafts prior to shipment. After field installation, but prior to grouting the base, a
millwright or similarly qualified person shall check and verify or correct the shaft align-
ment.
E. Peerless Pump, Sterling Fluid Sytems; 5AEF8 General: UL 448, factory-assembled and -
tested, electric-drive, centrifugal fire pumps capable of furnishing not less than 150 per-
cent of rated capacity at not less than 65 percent of total rated head and with shutoff
head limited to 140 percent of total rated head.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and -
tested unit before shipping.
2. Nameplate: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
F. Fabricate base and attachment to fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and control-
lers with reinforcement to resist movement of pumps and controllers during a seismic
event when their bases are anchored to building structure.
G. Single-Stage, Horizontally Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: Double-suction type with
pump and driver mounted on same base and connected with coupling.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sterling Peerless Pump; Sterling Fluid Systems Group.
b. Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group.
2. Pump: Axially split cast-iron casing with suction and discharge flanges machined
to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically and dy-
namically balanced, and keyed to shaft.
b. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
C. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
1) Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
2) Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-
impregnated braided yarn and bronze packing gland.
3. Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft mis-
alignment. Include metal coupling guard.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-4 05/13/05
E. Comply with NFPA 20, "Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection," for fire pumps, drivers,
controllers, accessories, and their installation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
A. Description, General: The pumps furnished for fire protection service shall be supplied
with the specified drivers, controls and pump accessory items by the pump manufacturer.
The pump, driver and control shall be ( ) Underwriters Laboratories (ULI) Listed ( ) Fac-
tory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) Approved for fire protection service. The
pumping equipment shall be installed as recommended in the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Pamphlet 20, Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire
Pumps.
B. The fire pump shall be designed to deliver 750 US gpm at a total differential pressure of
82 psi. The fire pump shall also be capable of delivering not less than 150% of rated
flow at not less than 65% of rated head. The pump(s) shall be a Peerless Pump model
5AEF8 as manufactured by Sterling Fluid Systems (USA), Inc. and shall be furnished with
driver, controllers and accessories as detailed in this specification. Pump manufacturer
shall have unit responsibility for the proper operation of the complete unit assembly as
indicated by field acceptance tests.
C. Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps: The fire pump shall be of horizontal centrifugal single
stage construction specifically labeled for fire service and shall be a Sterling Fluid Systems
(USA), Inc. model 5AEF8. The pump shall be connected to the fire standpipe system. The
suction supply for the fire pump shall be from a public service water main at a maximum
pressure of 95 pounds per square inch (psi) and a minimum pressure of 85 psi. The
pump casing shall be cast iron with 6 inch 125 pound ANSI rated suction and 5 inch 250
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-3 05/13/05
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fire pumps ,
and drivers and fire-pump controllers, pressure-maintenance pumps, accessories, and
specialties will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vi-
bration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separa-
tion of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces speci-
fied and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of fire pump and fire-pump controller, signed by
product manufacturer.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps and drivers, pressure-maintenance
pumps, controllers, accessories and specialties, alarm panels, and flowmeter systems to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and controllers
through one source from a single manufacturer for each type of equipment.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of fire
pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and controllers and are based on specific systems
indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials, hose
threads, and installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-2 05/13/05
SECTION 13921 - ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1. Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electric-drive, split-case centrifugal fire pumps and the following:
1. Full service fire-pump controllers and automatic transfer switches.
2. Fire-pump accessories and specialties.
3. Pressure-maintenance pumps, controllers, accessories, and specialties.
4. Alarm panels.
S. Flowmeter systems.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pump, Equipment, Accessor Y� Specialty, and Piping Pressure Rating: 175- si g (1200-kPa
)
minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, certified
pump performance curves with each selection point indicated, operating characteristics,
and furnished accessories and specialties for each fire pump and pressure-maintenance
pump.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps and drivers, fire-pump controllers, fire-pump accessories
and specialties, pressure-maintenance pumps, pressure-maintenance-pump controllers,
and pressure-maintenance-pump accessories and specialties. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 13921-1 05/13/05
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Start and run air compressors.
5. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Accep-
tance" Chapter.
6. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Accep-
tance" Chapter.
7. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.17 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
END OF SECTION 13915
Owk Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 19 05/13/05
3.12 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with
finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. In-
stall valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Division 10 Section
"Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor
drain or outside building.
D. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections,
and accessories.
E. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
F. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
G. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
I. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.14 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 1391S - 18 05/13/05
3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 1.4 and authorities having *
Ju-
risdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of
water supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification
signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventer instead
of check valve in fire-service supply source.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm con-
nections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line
attachment.
a. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff
valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass
valve for quick system filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain sys-
tem pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range;
and 175-psig maximum inlet pressure.
3.10 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use
the following sprinkler types:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Dry sprinklers or sidewall, dry sprinklers as indicated.
5. Sprinkler Finishes:
a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
3.11 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels and tiles.
B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use
dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
"* Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 17 05/13/05
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviat-
ing from approved working plans.
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and re-
ductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not re-
quired on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2
and larger connections.
F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
G. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to stand-
pipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
H. Install drain valves on standpipes.
I. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check
valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
L. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top
of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and
with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve.
Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
N. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
O. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance de-
vices.
P. Fill wet-standpipe system piping with water.
Q. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 16 05/13/05
2. Plain-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; locking-lug fittings;and
twist-locked joints.
3. Plain-end, black, standard-weight schedule 40 steel pipe; steel welding fittings; and
welded joints.
B. Standard-Pressure, Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:
1. Threaded-end, galvanized, standard-weight schedule 40 steel pipe; cast- or malle-
able-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Grooved-end, galvanized, standard-weight schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved-end fit-
tings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
3.6 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread
pipe smaller than NPS 8 with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with
ASME B1.20.1.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings
and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.
3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
#4P%1 Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 1391S - 15 05/13/05
3.2 EXAMINATION ,
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of pip-
ing connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and sta-
tions are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.
B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish
and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in
aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded or grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and
grooved joints.
3.4 STANDPIPE SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Type Standpipe System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:
1. Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight schedule 40 steel pipe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Plain-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
3. Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight schedule 40 steel pipe with
square-cut- or roll-grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings;
and grooved joints.
3.5 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:
1. Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight schedule 40 steel pipe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 14 05/13/05
D. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with
normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than
fully open position.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
E. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 10-inch- (250-mm-) diameter, vibrating-type,
metal alarm bell with red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company.
b. System Sensor.
2.12 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. AGF Manufacturing Co.
2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.
5. Marsh Bellofram.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch-diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to
300 prig.
1. Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.
2. Air System Piping: Include retard feature and caption "AIR" or "AIR/WATER"
on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and NFPA 291. Use re-
sults for system design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13915 - 13 05/13/05
2.10 HOSE STATIONS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.: Series 1 800.
2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
3. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
B. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include the following:
1. Valve: UL 668, brass, 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure rating, 90-degree-
angle-pattern hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
a. Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
b. Stair Tower Cabinet: Recessed Trimless style No. 1811
C. Floor Cabinets: Recessed style No. 1810.
2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 2000 and matching local fire department threads.
2.11 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow
detector with 250-psi pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation.
Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary
contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable
retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if re-
moved.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company.
b. Viking Corp.
C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard fea-
ture. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that oper-
ates on rising pressure and signals water flow.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Fire Protection.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
C. Viking Corp.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING `
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13915 - 12 05/13/05
ew 2. AFAC Inc.
3. Central Sprinkler Corp.
4. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
5. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
6. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
7. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
8. Mueller Company.
B. Description: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-prig minimum pressure rating, hose valve for
connecting fire hose. Include angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose out-
let; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include NPS 2-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch reducer with cap
and chain, and hose valve threads according to NFPA 2000 and matching local fire de-
partment threads.
1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type.
2. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
ell 3. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
4. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
S. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
B. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pres-
sure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon
plate, brass lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connec-
tions. Include inlets with Storz connection matching local fire department sizes, exten-
sion pipe nipples, check devices for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking similar to
"AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Type: Flush, with two inlets and rectangular escutcheon plate.
2. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
C. Exposed, Freestanding-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 300-psig (2070-
kPa) pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body, brass inlets with threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains;
brass lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-inch-
(460-mm-) high, brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass escutcheon plate with marking
"AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 11 05/13/05
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed and FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rat-
ing.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
3. Viking Corp.
C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications.
2. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
1. Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.
a. Orifice: 1/2 inch, with discharge coefficient I< between 5.3 and 5.8.
E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate (Office, Patient, Corridor &
Staff areas).
2. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate and dust tight concealer (O.R.).
3. Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Upright sprinklers (Areas with no ceiling).
F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted white.
G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mount-
ing applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are speci-
fied with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat. Provide dust covers on
concealed heads located in C-Section rooms.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Plastic,white finish, one piece, flat.
H. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
Install over sprinklers subject to damage, ie. Under penthouse ductwork.
2.8 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div. Series 4085D.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13915 - 10 05/13/05
1) Hammond Valve.
2) Milwaukee Valve Company.
3) Mueller Company.
4) NIBCO.
5) Red-White Valve Corp.
G. Indicating Valves: UL 1091 and FM, with integral indicating device and ends matching
connecting piping.
1. Ball valve or butterfly valve with ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or
grooved ends.
a. Available Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Grinnell Fire Protection.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
4) Milwaukee Valve Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Victaulic Co. of America.
2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed and FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron
' body with flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Control
valves shall have 300-psig pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure pip-
ing system.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
C. Victaulic Co. of America.
d. Viking Corp.
2. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with
bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include
trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain
piping.
b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
2.7 SPRINKLERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 9 05/13/05
C. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.
1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with
grooved ends.
3. NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
4. Available Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO.
b. Victaulic Co. of America.
D. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091, Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with
flanged or grooved ends.
1. Coordinate subparagraph and list below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Re-
tain "Available" for nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.
a. Available Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
3) Mueller Company.
4) NIBCO.
5) Victaulic Co. of America.
E. Check Valves: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved ends.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
C. Hammond Valve.
d. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
e. Mueller Company.
f. NIBCO.
g. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.
h. Stockham.
i. Victaulic Co. of America.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
F. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
1. Coordinate subparagraph and list below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Re-
tain "Available" for nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.
a. Available Manufacturers:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 1391S - 8 05/13/05
B. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or
locking-lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
C. Viking Corp.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
C. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet,
and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
C. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and
drain outlet and sight glass.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. AGF Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
C. G/J Innovations, Inc.
d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
2.5 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed and FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:
1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc, nonrising
stem, operating nut, and flanged ends.
2. Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with hand wheel,
extension rod, locking device, and cast-iron barrel.
3. Available Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Fire Protection.
b. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
C. NIBCO.
d. Stockham.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 7 05/13/05
a. Available Manufacturers: A001k
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Central Sprinkler Corp.
3) Victaulic Co. of America.
4) Ward Manufacturing.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with
OD matching steel-pipe OD.
C. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include
ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting
grooves, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel
bolts and nuts.
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
1. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers. ,tee,
1. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body
with flanged ends.
a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for back-
flow preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
2. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
3. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
D. Double-Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventer: Watts Model 770DCDA
ASSE 1048, FM approved and UL listed, and suitable for continuous pressure applica-
tion. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet. Include test cocks;
two positive-seating check valves; and bypass with displacement-type water meter,
valves, and double-check backflow preventer. Coordinate with City of Northampton
DPW Water Department for by-pass meter type and installation.
2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum
working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 1391S - 6 05/13/05
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS (Schedule 40)
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,
ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or
field-formed threaded ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME 816.3.
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized where indicated.
Include ends matching joining method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indi-
cated.
B. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135,
or ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
low 1. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require
one-quarter turn to secure pipe in fitting.
a. Available Manufacturers:
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Victaulic Co. of America.
3) Ward Manufacturing.
C. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135,
or ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
1. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, and ASME B16.9 or
ASME B16.11.
2. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
D. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,
ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or
field-formed, square-cut- or roll-grooved ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13915 - 5 05/13/05
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For standpipe and sprinkler specialties to include in Awk
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-
suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to as-
sume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow
test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and
field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installa-
tion, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number
of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet
with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 4 05/13/05
�ow e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise in-
dicated.
5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13, un-
less otherwise indicated:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes.
b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.
D. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE 7, "Minimum De-
sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Piping materials.
2. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints.
3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, and specialty valves and trim.
4. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mount-
ing, finish, and other pertinent data.
5. Hose Cabinets.
6. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish.
7. Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and arrangement of in-
lets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and fin-
ish.
8. Alarm devices, including electrical data.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Fire pump flow test report.
D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13,
that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calcula-
tions, if applicable.
E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
F. Welding certificates.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 3 05/13/05
perproof valve, flow switch and capped connection pending Massachusetts State •■w�,
Board780CMR904.1 "Moratorium". Sprinkler heads shall be quick-response, frangible
bulb, concealed style installed flush with ceiling. Provide sprinkler coverage under duct-
work over 48-inches wide in penthouse.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
B. Fire-suppression standpipe system design shall be approved by authorities having juris-
diction.
1. Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is the following:
a. NPS 2-1/2 Hose Connections: 65 psig.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, the following is maximum residual pressure at required
flow at each hose-connection outlet:
a. NPS 2-1/2 Hose Connections: 175 psig.
C. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10
g� y percent, including
losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
C. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
e. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
f. Patient areas: Light Hazard.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
C. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Patient Areas: 200 sq. ft.
b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.
C. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 2 05/13/05
SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class I standpipe systems.
2. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Combined Standpipe and Sprinkler System: System shall connect to Locust Street fire
main provided by Division 2.. Service shall enter fire pump room with isolation and
backflow devices before connection to fire pump. Fire main shall extend to through the
proposed surgery bed tower to each stair tower. Floor control stations shall be located at
each floor level for sprinkler system distribution.
B. Automatic Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 hose connections at
each floor landing level in required exit stairway[s]. Fire department connections (sia-
mese) and alarm bells shall be located at the East and West entrances from Locust Street.
Standpipe systems shall maintain a minimum pressure of 100psig at the most remote
hose outlet. Provide Class I hose cabinet in areas of travel exceeding 200-feet.
C. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers shall provide 100% coverage of all ar-
eas throughout the Surgery Bed Tower Project. Existing sprinkler systems shall be modi-
fied in the O.P./ED where the two buildings connect with each other. Sprinklers for ele-
vator shaft, pits and machine rooms shall be installed outside of each location with tam-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13915 - 1 05/13/05
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer
to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 13851
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V—2323 13851-20 05/13/05
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement us-
ing the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in
NFPA 72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted
under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm
Systems program at Level III.
a. Include the existing system in tests and inspections.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built
drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly lo-
cated, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in
NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demon-
stration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in
NFPA 70.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied condi-
tions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this pur-
pose.
B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.
C. Semiannual Test and Inspection: Six months after date of Substantial Completion, test
the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in
NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, and semiannual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
D. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual peri-
ods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
POO"' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13851-19 05/13/05
enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Marls each terminal
according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-
on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets,
or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire
alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of
one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or
zones.
H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch (25-mm) conduit between the
FACP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for
connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Sec-
tion "Electrical Identification."
B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnecting means red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire
from main service ground to the FACP.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the follow-
ing field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13851-18 05113105
E. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprin-
kler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal
viewing position.
F. Audible Alarm Indicating Devices: If ceilings heights allow, install wall-mounted appli-
ances such that their tops are not less than 90 inches (2300 mm) above the finished floor.
Install at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the finished ceiling.
G. Visible Alarm Indicating Devices: Install wall-mounted appliances such that the entire
lens is not less than 80 inches (2000 mm) and not greater than 96 inches (2400 mm)
above the finished floor. Install at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the finished ceiling.
H. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
I. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above
the finished floor.
J. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the
finished floor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring according to the following:
1. NECA 1.
2. TIA/EIA 568-A.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes."
1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm sys-
tem shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used
for any other wire or cable.
C. Wiring Method:
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring as-
sociated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70 Types MI
and CI, is permitted.
3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the
same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points
with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13851-17 05/13/05
D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central
station.
2.16 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
2.17 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm system is operational
before making changes or connections.
1. Connect new equipment to the existing control panel in the existing part of the
building.
2. Connect new equipment to the existing monitoring equipment at the Supervising low*
Station.
3. Expand, modify, and supplement the existing control/monitoring equipment as
necessary to extend the existing control/monitoring functions to the new points.
New components shall be capable of merging with the existing configuration with-
out degrading the performance of either system.
B. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:
1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m) or the rating of the detector.
2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and
for high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.
3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommen-
dations in NFPA 72.
C. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-
air opening.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes
so they extend the full width of the duct.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm "
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13851-16 05/13/05
2.12 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and
trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including
acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP.
Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing
functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.
2.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system ad-
dress for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open con-
tacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate
elevator recall, for damper controls, HVAC shutdown, door hold open release, door lock
release and as required for continuity of services. Provide tamper switches as required to
monitor cabinets.
2.14 ADA STROBE POWER SUPPLY
A. Provide 24 VAC power supplies as indicated and required for speakers and door con-
trols. Provide necessary number of power supplies to allow patient room and general
floor strobe devices to be tested separately.
2.15 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Listed and labeled according to UL 632.
B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the
FACP, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number
for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal
is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising 2 lines,
if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local
trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm
receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit auto-
matically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone
lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.
C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity
is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-15 05/13/05
5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the
speaker location. Provide 1/a, 1/z, 1, 2 Watt field selectable taps.
D. Operating Room Visible Alarm Devices: Flush mounted, steady-on incandescent lamp,
with clear lens, and red faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch
(25mm) high white letters on the faceplate.
1. Space Age V33 Guardian Light or equivalent.
2.10 FIREFIGHTERS' TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE
A. Dedicated, two-way, supervised, telephone voice communication links between the
FACP, the Fire Command Center, and remote firefighters' telephone stations. Supervised
telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in a control module. Pro-
vide the following:
1. Common-talk type for firefighter use only.
2. Controls to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use si-
multaneously.
3. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote
telephone is activated, it causes audible signal to sound and high-intensity lamp to
flash.
4. Selector panel controls simultaneous operation of telephones in selected zones and
permits up to six phones to be operated simultaneously. Indicate ground faults
and open or shorted telephone lines on the panel front by individual LEDs.
5. Provide liquid-crystal digital display to indicate location of caller.
6. Remote Telephone Cabinet: Flush-mounted cabinet, factory-standard red finish,
with handset.
a. Install one-piece handset to cabinet with vandal-resistant armored cord.
Silk-screened or engraved label on cabinet door, designating "Fire Emer-
gency Phone."
7. Handsets: Provide push-to-talk type sets with noise-canceling microphone.
2.11 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS
A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is
connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is
flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification
plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the sig-
nal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the
identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow
switch.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm `
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-14 05/13/05
2.8 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General: UL 521 listed.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F
(57 deg C) or rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute, un-
less otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C).
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections. Provide field selectable candela ratings and speaker tap values. This shall
be selectable without removing the device from the back box.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly.
B. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is en-
graved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 15, 30, 60, 75, 110, 177 candela, field selectable and syn-
chronized.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
3. All strobe lights located within patient rooms (private and semi-private) shall be
rated for 110 candela.
C. Voice/Tone Speakers:
1. UL 1480 listed.
2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.
3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.
4. Mounting: Flush mounted. Provide ceiling mounted devices as shown on the con-
tract documents.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-13 05/13/05
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation
to restore them to normal operation.
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status.
6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable
type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
a. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011 per-
cent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
C. Duct Smoke Detectors:
1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011
percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be
designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base
for connection to building wiring.
a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied
detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for
Type 4X.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation
to restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station where
indicated.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable
type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the
specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
Cooley ickinson Hospital '
Y P� Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-12 05/13/05
A. General: Components include sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid batteries,
charger, and automatic transfer switch.
1. Battery Normal Life Expectancy: 10 years, minimum.
B. Battery Capacity: Sized such that under maximum quiescent load (system functioning in
a non-alarm situation), the emergency supply shall have sufficient capacity to operate the
fire alarm system for 60 hours; and, at the end of that period, shall be capable of operat-
ing all alarm notification appliances for 5 minutes.
C. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide ca-
pacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full
charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within
four hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
2.5 Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without the loss of
signals or status indications when normal power fails.
2.6 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instruc-
tions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted
on recessed outlet box. Surface mount units will not be allowed as they exceed ADA
protrusion requirements when used with indoor protective shield.
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever
type. With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station
status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
3. Indoor Protective Shield: Each fire alarm pull station shall have a factory-
fabricated clear plastic (Stopper II) enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for
access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered
audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.
2.7 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Description:
1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in
the fixed base for connection of building wiring.
foow Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13851-11 05/13/05
L. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in
terminal unit.
1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes
and system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted
password algorithm.
M. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trou-
ble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed
indications. Also print system reset event, including the same information for device, lo-
cation, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, super-
visory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
N. Primary Power: 24-V do obtained from 120-V ac life safety service and a power-supply
module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, super-
visory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V do
source.
1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent
of the power-supply module rating.
2. Power supply shall have a dedicated mechanically protected, red colored circuit
breaker labeled "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL."
O. Secondary Power: 24-V do supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger
and an automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
P. Surge Protection:
1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for auxiliary
panel suppressors.
2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system
wiring external to the building housing the FACP.
Q. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plas-
tic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and de-
scribe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional op-
eration of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.4 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-10 05/13/05
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appli-
ances until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is oper-
ated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
H. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of
initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The
FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If test-
ing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically re-
turn to normal.
I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific address-
able smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings,
and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive,
time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record
sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory,
and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.
J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trou-
ble, and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communi-
cator transmitter and telephone lines.
K. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: A central emergency communication system with redun-
dant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in a separate
cabinet located in the main tel/data room.
1. Required number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of
different announcements to different zones, or for manual transmission of an-
nouncements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall be
UL 1711 listed.
a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones
and, at the same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in
any combination.
b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.
C. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."
d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of the type recom-
mended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of the noti-
fication-appliance circuits of the FACP.
2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
3. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and
the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.
4. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to
backup units, on primary equipment failure.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13851-9 05/13/05
1) Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760,
Classification Cl, for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed
as Type FPL, and complying with requirements in UL 1424 and in
UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
a) Pyrotenax Brand Pyro CiC or equivalent
e. Annunciator Circuits: Twisted shielded pair, No. 18 AWG for all anntincia-
tors and 16/2 fire cable for all annunciator power circuits.
1) 18 Gauge
a) West Penn 975
b) Belden 9574
f. Door Holders: 16/2 fire cable for door holder circuits.
3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, emergency voice communications, an-
nunciation, smoke control, elevator recall, and actuation of suppression systems
shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.
D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the
FACP.
2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the
detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
S. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
E. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a slow march time in the low
rise portion of the facility followed by a custom voice evacuation message. Slow whoop
in the high rise portion followed by a female custom voice evacuation message. System
shall be programmed to allow patient room, operating room, and floor notification de-
vices/speakers to be tested separately.
F. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for
supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated do power supply, and power for
the do component shall be from the ac supply.
G. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and
remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and ac-
tivates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is
retained.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-8 05/13/05
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the sys-
tem for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 6.
a. System Layout: New signaling line circuits shall not be loaded to more than
70 percent of their total device capacity.
b. Signaling Line Circuit Cable: All initiating addressable devices shall be
twisted, shielded pair, No. 18 AWG. All cables to transponders shall be No.
16 AWG.
1) 18 Gauge
a) West Penn 975
b) Belden 9574
2) 16 Gauge
a) West Penn 991
b) Belden 9575
2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style Z.
a. System Layout: New notification appliance circuits shall not be loaded to
more than 70 percent of their total device capacity.
b. Speaker Circuit Cable: All speaker circuits shall be twisted, shielded pair,
No. 16 AWG. All Cables to transponders shall be No. 14 AWG. Speaker
circuits SHALL NOT be run in the same raceway as signaling line circuits.
1) 16 Gauge
a) West Penn 991
b) Belden 9575
2) 14 Gauge
a) West Penn 995
b) Belden 9581
C. Strobe Circuit Cable: Strobe circuits shall be 2 conductor No. 14 AWG fire
cable. Runs of 300 feet or more shall be No. 12 AWG.
d. Notification appliance circuit risers shall be wired utilizing 2-hour rated cir-
cuit integrity cable or equivalent 2-hour construction to within notification
zone in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package B' —2323 13851-7 05/13/05
3. Audible and Visual Signals: AO%*
a. Gentex Corporation.
b. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
2.2 EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. As a project running concurrently but separate from the Surgery/Beds Expansion, the
Hospital plans to install a Notifier 3030 fire alarm master control panel to serve as the
new head-end for the entire existing campus. Modifications and/or programming shall
be made to the new head end fire alarm master control panel to accommodate communi-
cation with the new Surgery/Beds Expansion fire alarm control panel and new fire alarm
devices installed in existing areas.
B. The successful bidder shall be responsible for interfacing the existing and new systems
such that, there will be a single reset for the entire networked fire alarm system at the
head-end panel.
2.3 PATIENT BEDS/EXPANSION FACP
A. The new fire alarm system being installed within the Surgery/Beds Expansion shall be a
Notifier 3030 Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall serve as the fire alarm system for the
new building. The new fire alarm system shall be fully capable of networking with the
existing campus fire alarm system. The new fire alarm system shall be configured to ac-
commodate future high rise building requirements.
1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow
for adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.
b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitiv-
ity range of the device.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human op-
erator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and su-
pervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the pro-
gramming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, four line(s) of 80 characters, mini-
mum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-6 05/13/05
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain fully operational until new equipment has
been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE"
until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label
existing fire alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, remove existing dis-
connected fire alarm equipment.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of
amount installed, but not less than 1 unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not
less than 1 unit.
3. Smoke and Heat Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but
not less than 1 unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed compo-
nents.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. FACP and Equipment:
a. NOTIFIER; a GE-Honeywell Company.
2. Wire and Cable:
a. Belden
b. Pyrotenax
C. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
00"' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-5 05/13/05
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, opera-
tion, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations
for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the
FACP.
F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements
for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal
to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Con-
tract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make
clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities
having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
G. Documentation:
1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to
NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according
to NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of
the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.
a. Hard copies on paper to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE Atok
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for in-
stallation of units required for this Project. Work of this Section be performed by a UL-
listed company.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire alarm service to facili-
ties occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than five working days in advance of proposed interrup-
tion of fire alarm service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Owner's written
permission.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13851 4 05/13/05
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
G. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the
FACP and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of opera-
tions for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manu-
facturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types
and sizes.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equip-
ment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wir-
ing color code.
6. Batteries: Size calculations.
7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each
detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity,
temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
8. Ductwork Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations of ducts, drawn
to scale and coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to
them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling
tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detec-
tors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
9. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
10. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. Provide (3) copies of floor plan
with the above listed information as a laminated 11" x 17" placard in accordance
with Cooley Dickinson Hospital standards.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-3 05/13/05
A. Comply with NFPA 72. •■%
B. Premises protection includes 1B and I2.
C. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
L Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
D. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators.
3. Transmit a signal to all Type 1 and Type 2 automatic doors to initiate manual op-
eration sequence.
4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
7. Activate voice/alarm communication system.
8. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm
mode.
9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initi-
ated.
10. Record events in the system memory.
11. Record events by the system printer.
E. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.
F. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or ac-
tions:
1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and
notification-appliance circuits.
2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-
initiating devices.
3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
6. A break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-2 05/13/05
SECTION 13851 - FIRE ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems for the following:
1. A new fire alarm control panel and fire alarm system for the new Surgery/Beds Ex-
pansion. The new fire alarm control panel shall act as an extension of the existing
system.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door closers and holders with associated
smoke detectors, electric door locks, and release devices that interface with the fire
** alarm system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.
B. LED: Light-emitting diode.
C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded, analog-addressable system; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke de-
tectors; and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
1. Interface with existing Notifier fire alarm system..
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Fire Alarm
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13851-1 05/13/05
elk D. Program the system according to Owner's requirements. Set system so signal devices op-
erate on required schedules and are activated for durations selected by Owner. Program
relay output circuits to suit Owner's operating schedule for the equipment controlled.
E. Adjust sound output level of adjustable signal devices to suit Owner's requirements.
F. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Com-
pletion, provide on-site assistance for adjusting and reprogramming to suit actual occu-
pied conditions. Provide up to two visits to the Project for this purpose.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain clock control as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and sched-
ules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 13810
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Clock Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13810-7 05/13/05
A. Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and
outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures.
B. Ground clocks, programming equipment, and conductor and cable shields to eliminate
shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross
talk, and other impairments.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they are uniformly
identified and coordinated with wiring diagrams throughout the system.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. Adjust system and perform operational system tests to verify compliance with
Specifications. Include operation of all modes of clock correction and all pro-
gramming and manually programmed signal and relay operating functions.
2. Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and
terminals are identified.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or re-
placements are made.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including clock-control
equipment. Report results in writing.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that clock-control components are installed and connected according to the Con-
tract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and in-
stallation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Clock Control Awk
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13810-6 05/13/05
D. Coded Relay: Dual coded for up to 10 program circuits, with integral power-line carrier-
receiver pulse frequency as indicated. Program circuit selected by internal switch setting.
Operating duration adjustable from 2 to 12 seconds.
1. Relay: Four-pole mechanically held contactor with contacts rated 50 A.
2.6 BACK BOXES FOR CLOCK AND PROGRAM DEVICES
A. Suitable for indicated mounting method.
B. Equip with knockouts and hanger straps or mounting adapters. Back-box cover plate
suits mounting of designated device.
2.7 WIRE .
A. Description: Stranded conductors of size recommended by system manufacturer. Mate-
rials and installation requirements are specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and
Cables."
B. Cable for Low-Voltage Control and Signal Circuits: Twisted-pair cable, unshielded, un-
less manufacturer recommends shielded cable.
C. Color-Coding: Uniformly identified and coordinated with wiring diagrams throughout
the system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install 120-V wiring in raceway. Install low-voltage wiring in raceway.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess; use lacing bars and distribution spools.
B. Control-Circuit Wiring: Install control circuits according to NFPA 70 and as indicated.
Install number of conductors recommended by system manufacturer for control func-
tions indicated.
C. Refer to drawings for wiring and conduit sizes to existing Master Clock Head End Unit.
Coordinate interconnecting cabling requirements between new Master Clock System and
existing Master Clock System. Provide appropriate conduit size and additional cables or
necessary cables if different from what is shown on the drawings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Clock Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13810-5 05/13/05
J. Housing: Steel cabinet with locking front panel. When cabinet is locked, time indication
is visible on front panel face. Arrange cabinet for surface, semirecessed, or flush mount-
ing as indicated.
K. Housing: Rack-mounting enclosure with time indication visible on front panel face.
2.3 CARRIER SIGNAL GENERATORS
A. Description: Solid-state, carrier-current, signal generators transmit up to four control
and synchronization signals to clock, signaling units, and control relays. Each signal has
adjustable amplitude and is a distinct, field-tuned output frequency to match clock, sig-
nal, and control equipment.
1. Voltage: 120 V.
2.4 CLOCKS
A. Description: Clocks shall be Simplex 6310-9221 or equivalent; match master control
unit for power supply and time-correction signals.
1. Connection Provisions: Wire pigtail.
B. Analog Synchronous Clocks: Driven by self-starting, permanently lubricated, sealed syn-
chronous motors, and equipped with sweep second hands and correcting solenoid actua-
tors.
C. Interval Timer Function: Flush-mounted local control station, near clocks indicated to
have this feature, controls clock so unit can display either current real time or manually
controlled elapsed time with start-stop capability, with or without reset. Hour and min-
ute display shall be at least 2 inches (50 mm) high, with reduced height for display of
seconds.
2.5 CONTROL AND SIGNAL DEVICES
A. Mounting Arrangement: Mount on back-box cover plate, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Power-Line Carrier Receiver: Coded for up to 10 program circuits, with integral power-
line carrier-receiver pulse frequency as indicated. Program circuit selected by internal
switch setting. Operating duration adjustable from 2 to 12 seconds.
C. Receiver: Coded for up to 10 program circuits, for dedicated signal wiring system. Pro-
gram circuit selected by internal switch setting. Operating duration adjustable from 2 to
12 seconds.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Clock Control "*
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13810-4 05/13/05
The state of the six output circuits shall be programmed by the user through a keypad,
and can also be controlled by six manual override switches.
B. Time Reference Unit: Uses a temperature-compensated crystal oscillator to regulate sys-
tem timing functions to within plus or minus three seconds per month. Operates on in-
ternal, automatically recharging battery power for a minimum of seven days when nor-
mal power is disconnected. Automatically resets system and corrects clocks when power
resumes.
C. Microprocessor: An integral self-diagnostic program automatically checks functioning of
LEDs, switches, input keys, central processor, read-only memory, and random access
memory output circuits. A control panel display indicates failure by identifying the
faulty device or circuit.
D. Lockout Codes: A minimum of two levels of access shall restrict use of system operating
and programming controls to authorized personnel.
1. Level 1: Access to all user-programming and control functions.
2. Level 2: Access to review existing programs only.
E. Clock-Control Function: Unit supervises and corrects individual system clocks automati-
cally.
1. Daylight Savings Time Correction: Programmable for automatic correction.
2. Analog Synchronous Clocks: Correct for minute- and second-hand synchroniza-
tion at least once each hour and for hour-hand synchronization at least once daily.
3. Digital Clocks: Test clocks automatically for synchronization with master time
control at least once every hour and automatically correct those not synchronized
with the time reference unit.
F. Program-Control Function: Programmable to automatically activate indicated signal or
relay output circuits and signal devices selectively to produce programmed signals or to
initiate relay operation at any minute of any day of any 365-day cycle.
G. Schedules for Operating Program Signal Devices and Remote Switching: Operate the
number of independent schedules required to perform indicated functions, but no fewer
than four. Operate independent event schedules simultaneously and continuously with a
minimum of 125 events according to the schedule. Any schedule can be programmed to
control any output circuit.
H. Output Circuits: Type and quantity as required for functions indicated. Circuits are
manually switchable using controls on master control unit.
I. Output Signals: Momentary, unless otherwise indicated. Duration of momentary signal
is individually programmable for each output circuit from 1 to 99 seconds.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Clock Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 13810-3 05/13/05
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color photographs or color chips showing
the full range of colors available for clocks, signal equipment, and control panels.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For each clock- and program-control component to include in main-
tenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the master control unit manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units re-
quired for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm that maintains a service center capable of providing
maintenance and repairs at Project site within 24 hours.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain clock-control components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Dukane Corp.; Communications Systems Div.
2. Simplex Time Recorder Co.
2.2 MASTER CONTROL UNIT
A. Description: Unit supplies power for clocks and sends time-correction signals to them.
Unit controls programmable output circuits, both automatically and manually. The unit
shall have programmable time and day-of-week referenced control of six output circuits.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Clock Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 13810-2 05/13/05
SECTION 13810 - CLOCK CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes a master clock- and program-control unit, analog clocks, digital
clocks, audible and visual signal devices, and a public-address system interface.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for wires and cables.
2. Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media" for low-voltage control
cables.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. An integrated, microprocessor-based system for originating and distributing time and
time-correction signals and for programming and initiating audible and visual program
signals. Components display time at various locations, provide programmed audible and
visual signals, and operate remote switching. The system transmits time and program
signals from a new master control unit to indicating clocks, signal equipment, and re-
mote switching devices over system wiring. The system shall be capable of interfacing
with the master clock system in the existing hospital.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individ-
ual components and profiles, and finishes for each product specified. Describe features
and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
B. Shop Drawings: Wiring diagrams to detail power, signal, and control systems and to dif-
ferentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals
and wiring color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate
recommended types and sizes for field-installed system wiring and show how wiring is
protected from overcurrent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Clock Control
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package V —2323 13810-1 05/13/05
NEW
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES
16420 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
16,130 SWITCHGEAR
1.6441 SWITCHBOARDS
16442 PANELBOARDS
16443 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
16,161 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (600V AND LESS)
1649I FUSES
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
16512 SPECIALTY INTERIOR LIGHTING
16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16630 ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
16722 1NTERCOMMIJNICATION EQUIPMENT
16725 NURSE CALL
16726 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC" EQUIPMENT
16856 ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES
END OF SECTION 00005
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS -Volume Two
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 00005-3 05/13/05
15481 COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING ,
15487 DOMESTIC WATER HEAT.EXCHANGERS
15.516 PACKAGED UNFIRED STEAM GENERATOR
15520 FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT
15525 DEAERATORS
15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS,AND STACKS
15625 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS
15635 REFRIGERANT AND OXYGEN MONITORING, AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
15640 PACKAGED COOLING TOWERS
15710 HEAT EXCHANGERS
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS WITH REMOTE FLUID COOLER
15752 HUMIDIFIERS
15766 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS
15769 RADIANT HEATING PANELS
15515 METAL DUCTS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15836 AXIAL FANS
15837 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
15845 AIR TERMINALS
15854 CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15990 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16055 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16071 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16080 ELECTRICAL TESTING
1.6119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
1.6120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1.6124 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16139 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16,145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16215 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
16232 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING PARALLELING SWITC.HGEAR
16271 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
16289 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
16341 MEDIUM.VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS -Volume Two
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 00005-2 05113105
SECTION 00005 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PkOJECT iVIANUAL -VOLUME TWO
00001 COVER PAGE
00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13810 (LOCIti CONTROL
13851 FIRE ALARM
1 31)i'5 FIRE S1.1PPRESSION PIPING
13t)_'1 11.1 CTIZIC-DRIVE, CE NTRIFU{ Al,TIRE PtiMPS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055 MOTORS
15056 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15081 DUCT INSULATION
15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15122 METERS AND GAGES
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15181 HYDRONIC PIPING
15182 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS
15186 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
15213 MEDICAL GAS PIPING
15221 CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPPING
1.5255 MEDICAL AIR AND VACUUM EQUIPMENT
15410 PLUMB.ING FIXTURES
1.5412 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES
15415 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15441 WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS
1,.5416 SUMP PUMPS
15465 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT
low
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS -Volume Two
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 00005-1 05/13/05
T 1 t
elk
P R _J E C T M A N U A L
Vo_.L _v E Two
Date of Issue:May 13, 2005
PROJECT Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion - Package `E'
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Northampton, Massachusetts
Architect's Commission Number—2323
OWNER Cooley Dickinson Hospital
30 Locust Street
Northampton, Massachusetts 01061
ARCHITECT The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street
Newton, Massachusetts 02458
CONSULTANTS Structural Engineer
Struble Engineering, LLC
604 Main Street
Reading, Massachusetts 01867
HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection,
and Electrical Engineering
The Ritchie Organization, Inc.
80 Bridge Street
Newton, Massachusetts 02458
Civil Engineer
Vanasse Hangen Brustlin, Inc.
505 East Columbus Avenue
Springfield, Massachusetts 01105
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER Barr& Barr, Inc.
260 Cochituate Road, 2n' Floor
Framingham, Massachusetts 01701
ARCHITECTURE PLANNING ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGN..
TRO/The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street, Newton,MA 02458-1134 T 617.969.9400 F 617.527.6753
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlvjk. Toil A
Mw�
13106-ME ELEC CONC/SEALED PTD EXPD
G107-ME MECH CONC/SEALED EPXY EXPD
G108-ME ELEC CONC/SEALED PTD EXPD
G109-ME MECH CONCISEALED EPXY EXPD
G110-ME MECH CONC/SEALED EPXY EXPD
G111-ME MECH CONC(SEALED EPXY EXPD
13112-ME PASS CONC/SEALED PTD ACT-1
G113-PO STER COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2
G114-PO ST VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
13115-PO CORR
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept POOO-P&iqperafive Swvxw Bldg: Floor. OG-Ground Floor Page 23 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes M I k Toil.A
.:.,....v n..... ... 1. ,::.:•'•.:.Ti}}::4:.{{:{?.�.:.}:::.::???{•i::::.........
... ......,l�1; 4... .... . ..... . ..,.ate}.. .,.............r.•:.:•:::{.::::.::{.,.....r:.•:.�.:}•:.:..,:.:::::.:::.::::.�::•::::.:>:• ........
.. .... ..........:..........r... ....v.........r....r... ....:r.v,.F vw:.,i.r.C..wn. ..,.,.,....{. ..:.v.:. .v...{ ...}..v,,v,•v:'::.v,..,;..,v,.}:r^v•... :..f....... ..}......
�::T:vT:w:v:}}:•:::::::}::v:::::•::::.v:::?''v:•rT:,:.,v.•vr::?v:A,•rF.+••:4•:}:•..:r..M..... r.... ... .. .....T r r..nY. ....r.........
G084-PO HLDNG COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2
G085-PO PASS COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2 D
G086-PO COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2
G087-PO DECON COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2
G088-PO CART WASH COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2
G089-PO COMP-1 IB SPC EPXY
6090-PO PREP COMP-1 IB SPC EPXY F
G091-PO STER COMP-1 18 SPC ACT-2
G092-PO ST COMP-1 IB SPC EPXY
G093-PO ELEV RUB-2 ST ST ST ST
G094-PO ELEV MACH CONC/SEALED PTD PTD
G095-PO STER SPLY COMP-1 IB SPC EPXY
G096-PO OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 'W/ACCENT
G097-PO OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 'W/ACCENT
G098-PO BRKDN COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2 D
G099-PO EQP COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-1
G100-PO CORR VCT RUB PTD ACT-1 `W/ACCENT
13101-PO CORR VCT RUB PTD ACT-1 •W/ACCENT
G102-ME PUMP RM CONC/SEALED EPXY EXPD
G103-ME EMER ELEC CONC/SEALED PTD EXPD
G104-ME CORR VCT RUB PTD PTD/ACT-1
G105-ME MECH CONC/SEALED EPXY EXPD
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept ME00-Medical Education Bldg: - Floor. OG-Ground Floor Page 22 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlwk, Toil.A
..........
G059-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
6060-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
G061-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
G062-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *WIACCENT
G063-LA WK STA RUB-2 RUB PTD ACT-1
6064-LA T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 PRICE VCT AS ALT D 3
#3
G065-LA HSKPG COMP-1 is EPXY ACT-2 7
G066-LA PASS RUB-2 RUB PTD ACT-6
G067-PU SHELL CONC/SEALED PTD EXPID
G068-LA WK STA CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1
6069-LA WK RM RUB-2 RUB PTD ACT-6
G071-PU STIR CONC/SEALED PTD EXPID *W/ACCENT
G072-Po ELEV RUB-2 ST ST ST ST
G075-PO ST VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
6076-PO CORR VCT RUB PTD PTD/ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
G078-PO T/SH SHT V-3 RUB EPXY EPXY/ACT-2 *W/ACCENT 6
G079-Po LKIRS F VCT-3 RUB PTD ACT-1
G080-PO LKIRS M VCT RUB IM ACT-1
G081-PO T/SH SHT V-3 RUB EPXY EPXY/ACT-2 *W/ACCENT 6
(3082-Po LOUNGE CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-11 *ACCENT WALL
G083-PO HSKPG COMP-1 Is EPXY ACT-2
TROfThe Ritchie Organization Dept P000-Pen0perative Serv"s Bldg: - Floor- OG-Ground Floor Page 21 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Floor Room# Room Name .
}..�}.
•:$:. •:'fie•:<;
..:�:.�:::.x:;v:.,•..�:....x::•/..n:.:n:v...•n:•.:::{•Y.::{. XT::.i;w;•:.{•S.•R{,?..:�,{ :.:.. ..::.:::.Z'{•::G+, .e.x , •. .:nx:?r,:{.,+.:•:•v.;::.:::{{:..{v::.i}}^}.$.?x:::.x?}:?}•ryY{::.Y•.....................:::+}:•} ^
G039-LA WK RM RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
G040-LA PASS RUB-2 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-1
RW/ACCENT
G041-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 RW/ACCENT
G042-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 RW/ACCENT
R
G043-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 R W/ACCENT
G044-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
G045-LA WASH COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2
G046-LA T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 •PRICE VCT AS ALT 3
#3
G047-LA ELEC VCT RUB PTD EXPD
G048-LA ELEC VCT RUB PTD EXPD
G049-LA LOUNGE RU13-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 RW/ACCENT D
G050-LA LKRS VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
G051-LA T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 •PRICE VCT AS ALT 3
#3
G052-LA OFF SHRD RUB-2 RUB PTD ACT-1
G053-LA PASS RUB-2 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-1 R W/ACCENT
G054-LA PASS RUB-2 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-1 R W/ACCENT
G055-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 'ACCENT WALL
w
G056-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 "ACCENT WALL
G0574LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 'ACCENT WALL
G058-LA WK STA RUB-2 RUB PTD ACT-1
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Deaf LAOO-Labonsfory Bldg: - Floor: OG-Ground Floor Page 20 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Nctes Mlv,/k. Toil.A
............
I---- ----------
G018-LA REFIR RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
G019-LA RCPT RUB-2 RUB PTD ACT-111 C
G020-LA ST VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
G021-LA WTG CPT-1 WD vWC ACT-3 C
SHT V-2
6022-LA INT CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-3
G023-PU ELEV RUB-2 ST ST ST ST ACT-3
G025-LA CONIF CPT-3 WD FWC-2 ACT-3 *WD CHAIR RAIL
CPT-4 W/ACCENT
G026-LA LKRS F VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
G027-LA T/SH SHT V-3 RUB EPXY EPXY/ACT-1 PRICE VCT AS ALT D 5
#3
G028-LA T/SH SHT V-3 RUB EPXY EPXY/ACT-1 *PRICE VCT AS ALT D 5
#3
G029-LA LKRS M VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
G030-LA STIR RUB RUB PTD EXPD •STR SYSTEM
G031-LA LAB RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6 F
G032-LA SPCM RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6 F
G033-LA HISTO RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
G034-LA WK RM RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
G035-LA WK STA RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
G036-LA PASS RUB-2 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-1 'W/ACCENT
G037-LA PREP RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
G038-LA SCREEN RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept LAOO-Laboratory Bldg: Floor OG-Ground Floor Page 19 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes MIA. Toil.A.
..........
------------------ ........ -------------------- i.-: X x
..........*-,--1-,-.".,.----*.-----'., .. ...•:::•::::•}:+•i
........ .. .
...................... ...............................
. :•}}Y.{4}}}':::::::::........................................ .....
%...........
..Xx•
............................. .............................. .............
... .... .. .
................
................
..... ......
...... ............................................. ......
..... . .......... ................... ....... ..I ................
..... .................. ............. ...... .....................
...................... .................... .....................
.......... ...................
XX ............ .............. .... ..
G000-PU CORR SHT.... V-1.1.: WD .. .... PTO PTO *W/ACCENT
G001-PU ELEV LOBBY SHT V-1 WD PTO PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
• WD PANEL
G002-PU STR RUB RUB PTO PTO *STR SYSTEM
G003-PU STR RUB RUB PTO EXPD *STR SYSTEM
ACT-3 **W/ACCENT
G004A-PU ELEV LOBBY SHT V-1 WD PTO ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
G004-PU ELEV LOBBY SHT V-1 WD PTDNVD PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
FWC-11
G005-PU ELEV RUB-2 ST ST ST ST
G006-PU ELEV TERR ST ST LP
G007-PU ELEV TERR-2 SHT V LP
G008-pU CORR SHT V-1 WD PTO WDIFWC-1 PTD/ACT-3 *TEL COUNTER TO
RECEIVE SSM-1
**W/ACCENT
0009-LA T PUB SHT V-1 RUB CST/EPXY ACT•3 *W/ACCENT G 4
G010-LA BLD DNR SHT V-2 WD PTO ACT-3
G011-LA WK RM RUB-2 RUB PTO ACT-6 -SSM @ SINK ONLY D*
G012-LA OFF CPT-2 RUB PTO ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
G013-LA BLD BNK RUB-2 RUB PTO ACT-6 D
G014-LA CORR VCT RUBfWD PTO PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT
SHT V-1
G015-LA LAB RUB-2 RUB EPXY EPXY/ACT-6 *W/ACCENT
G016-LA LAB RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
G017-LA REFR RUB-2 RUB EPXY ACT-6
TROrrhe Ritchie Organization Dept LAOO-Laboratory Bldg: Floor.- OG-Ground Floor Page 18 of 23
I I I
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/1312005
�Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes W& Toil.A,
. ... . ... . ...... ..
... . ... . R,
N.. . .....EN
. . . . .. ... . .... ..
... . ....^.
,:iii:. ...... .. .. ...
.. .. .... ..4
. .. ... ... ..
.I .•..... .. ..... .I ....................
... .. ..... .......I. ...... ..... ...
.*,.........
"R,
. ..... ...........
5001-PU ELEV MACH
5053-PU CORR
5054-PU ST
5055-PU STIR
TRO[The Ritchie Organization Dept P000-Public services Bldg: Floor. 05-Fifth Floor Page 17 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Floor Room# Room Name Toil.
,��.1}...... j�y. \�y� iiti;:;
�y���� t•!.:•.•.v�v:.
x::{4:{•:^•.:..t.t t. ?�}..:......... }:•: •:::::::a•�.�:::::{{:;is:,::::::?:v�i4:: :?:i:•i::i:•i.. W.
:LV•:::::.:�::J.w::.:�::::.w:.�.v::.�:.L•::..:tti.:}: .L• ..}y8:•:9: •: '.}•J{:.� :{{�.}. :.....::
. ..x::.•::.•:r.A•3r.. .: •Y.Y?4:?�:?.:?:}::}}i::i:i::•i::ii{{{¢ ..:}:•}:::}?`:vi}:.}:•}::•:�::::v::•}:v.�::v:{;:•:'y4•,:w:+p}w.... ..:.....
.................................... 1' h..n.F........ J
..4................. ......... .•.J......,{n.J....t.....r.........................:::.•:..�.�:::::::.}'::::::::::::::nom::J::::::.}4t4:•.:::w.�..::;''i'''::':?}:4}:'}:•}:'}:•:':':':'}}:4}}:':'}::.:.}?}:ii:•:•:•:•i}:::'
................................}.................:.............:..:::{...:::x:::J:4v.:tL4•:?t.n......n...J...A...r..t.............t ntv Jn n..........
:::::::::::::}:::}::.�v:••.{4v::.�::::.�.::..A.I. .........J...:.......... }..... ............. .... ...............n.....w:::::::•:r.v}::.: .:...................... ........................ ............................................
4044-PO PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT
4045-PO T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY 'W/ACCENT G 1
4046-PO CLN SPLY SHT V-3 RUB PTO ACT-1
4050-PO CORR CPT-3 WD PTO ACT-1
4051-PO SHELL CONC/SEALED PTO ACT-1
4052-PO CORR SHT V-1 RUB PTO ACT-1
4053-PU SHELL CONC/SEALED PTO PTO EXPD
4054-PU ST VCT RUB PTO ACT-1
4055-PU STIR CONC/SEALED PTO EXPD •W/ACCENT
4056-PO MECH CONC/SEALED PTD, EXPD
4057-PO ELEC CONC/SEALED PTO EXPD
4058-PO ELEC CONC/SEALED PTO EXPD
4059-PO TEUDATA VCT RUB PTO ACT-1
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept POOO-F'ariopwative Services Bldg: - Floor: 04-Fourth Floor Page 16 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room N Floor Base . - Toil, '
ft.b:(��tt.t ....: .rr..... ... •.:"?:.y,Y..
:v:.........:....:::::•v:::::v:::::::::::;.,......w::v:r:•:f:::v .:v:•:.:.. ..r r ..:• ..: .. /.•... �,t`,tI
............. ..... v. t...:..x •...:[:.:.•:J:f.v. 'v.:::n:.}•.r: ::.}•:^:?•Y:'•::?4}}:+.}}}•::::ti'•:r}}:::?:'}i:•:i{%:
:. .v.:r....f ...r}. ... .. ..f.}...... tt... ....::vf:.•: vr:•' :•:..::tt•:.tv}:vv:.v.:, •.vff.t:f:,•:.••;., .......:w::
........... ............r..... $.. J.J..f
......v ......n.,}.r....... .:•f..t.....{.. .:....tt.t. ....: .............v:....::•:w.v•• :r•?• n:.......r..::::::::::•iY:}'?•:::::
.. ........... .Y .. ... of{,t fl... ... .. ..... ............
fi..t?.t:•t:•f.•:•fk2
•}nvn
:•,vhx• ?•N .
................................t....;:.:.:.;,v:?::vv:•:x. v•• :.r..: .. •. t•;v.:y .}•,. .. :. ��yy��,,��::+: ' t
� :?'..vv:tJ...}. r ::rx.Y??•Yw.:.: ...• ..........:.........:x•:fi v:.:v..v::::.......... '•:{::j r;:}}�.
....... r.. ......v...r .. .r~ .... :.t.:x..x..f.x. :..:..r....r..... .....r::::.::.}i}}w:;:y}:•: .}
....... ...................r......r..}..r..r...t:�....'f.... .. ...r:f.... ... .....v..:v. r....w....xt•.�}x.f vf...t.4t,v n.. : :•::••.................... ...
v}:::w::v:4:4:0:4:i:;::::::::wv::}::::::::;.v:}:r:•r:{..,;;r....t.v:•:?.:.. ??v::fix:}::trv.ly...;n....f•: .Y.+�. fS...Y. :.r.
4019-PO CORR CPT-3 WD PTO PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
CPT4 INSET '
4025-PO SEMI PRIV RM BHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT4 •PRICE RUB AS ALT A
4026-PO T H/C COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 2
4027-PO SEMI PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB AS ALT A
4028-PO T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
4029-PO CORR CPT-3 WD PTD PTD/ACT-3 •W/ACCENT
CPT-4 INSET
4030-PO WK STA CPT-3 WD PTD PTD *W/ACCENT C
*/TKBD-2
4031-PO MEDS SHT V-1 RUB PTD ACT-4 D
4032-PO NOUR SHT V-1 RUB PTD ACT-4 E
4033-PO EXERC RUB-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
4034-PO CORR CPT- WD PTD PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
CPT-4 INSET
4035-PO LN ST CPT-3 WD PTD PTD
4036-PO ALC CPT-3 WD PTD ACT-4
4037-PO SOLARIUM CPT-1 WD FWC-2 PTD/ACT-3
4038-PO ISOL SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT
4039-PO T H/C COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 2
4040-PO PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT
4041-PO T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W!ACCENT G 1
4042-PO PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 "PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT
4043-PO T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
TROrThe Ritchie Organization Dept P000-Permperetrve Sermes Bldg: Floor: 04-Fourth Floor Page 15 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Notes Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Toil. '
.............. ...... ..............v.. ....�-::••...wnv:. •:��.v .•.pT:ti+l x,•is4'J.Y•.{•}:•:4}:'}}:•:•:{{:i.:' ... W�+:...... ........:... -1
..................................:.......r.........v...r....:...... .....r. ,...r .�'... ..... .. ^�.�,���.�.n..,r. vr..,::r.r n.. •. r....:... ..r....:`.......:::.. x.,•:. :.,:•:n:v.v:.xv:nv:::::w.;...::.�i.
.......... .�..,.. .. {...... ... , .. ....,•::nv:;.v::::r:::::::..:.•:. .}::;:.vr•}}}:}}:4::!•Ti:4:4}:{�•iT}}•:::.:v:::v:{{{:?.}....
•:::::::.'.•.................... ..... ........... .... ....r.. .r•r v..y.. .r 4TT'4T}}}}:'•T:•}}}i}}
...i .....n.., .. ... ... rvr.b ...v J f r :..:::..,.n:v:;•:::;•.:v::;•::::::::;•:::::::::.::....................
..... .. { ......, .n. ,..r.......... ... ... ..v... ......,,::dv}ii}::::}:-:-.:::.:Y iii:is:4T}::'•T:v:{..d};:.
t� <'r:t>25::•T::::.v�:4i:�<v'ip iii$Y:4;:: v:i4:•iii:;i{:
........ ...... r .n.../., .. rf.:
....,..........,rxvr.,... r}r ... :: ,.}r. .r? .r...... r..h. '
�... ......... ...Y... .v..,nr.r. }'. .r..,:..:.{{:••r,.}i}:{:{:::;••ii'i:4:{{{{4i}}:!4}}:.?4:i•i::.::T:{4:d;4:4;•}:::v:.::.v::::;,v:n:v:.:::;...,..:�;.:...:4v..;;.....::}T:•T:4i}}}:
......n.:.. r.. .4, r.{
..... .rte....... .:...v:.,.... .r.. .:. {..::-rn:.
......... .:x.. :..rr..... {.,,..„, r:. .. ..•:.v:.:....,.•:}TT:•TT••y:•}}x:v:;::.::.. ::::::v:::::.;.... :.
. � .:.r.r...: ... ?4. ..... �...::.:.•r.�'•. ,•:r.•. ,:...r:r.};L«{.};{.}:LL-:•::::::....,;...:.::...r:....::.... .........
4000-PU CORR CPT-3 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4
4001-PU ELEV LOBBY TERR WD PTD PTD/ACT-3
4002-PU ELEV LOBBY TERR WD PTD/WD PTD/ACT-3
FWC-1
4003-PU STIR RUB RUB PTD EXPD 'STR TREAD/RISER
PTD SYSTEM
••W/ACCENT
4004-PU WTG TERR WD PTDNVD WD/PTD 'W/ACCENT
FWC-1/' ACT-3
4005-PU T PUB TERR IB CST/EPXY EPXY/ACT-3 I 4
SSM-5
4006-PU PASS SHT V-1 WD PTD ACT-3
4007-PU ALC SHT V-1 WD PTD PTD
4008-PO MULTIPURP CPT-3 WD FWC-2 PTD/ACT-3 'HDWD ACCENT RAIL
CPT4 BORDER •!" "W/ACCENT
4009-PO EXAM RUB-3 RUB PTD ACT-1
4010-PO EQP VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
4011-PO SHWR COMP-2 IB CT/EPXY EPXY 'W/ACCENT
4012-PO T SHT V-3 IB EPXY ACT-2 'W/ACCENT 3
4013-PO HSKPG COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2
4014-PO LOUNGE CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 'W/ACCENT D
4015-PO OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 'W/ACCENT
4016-PO CORR CPT-3 WD PTD PTD/ACT-3 W1 ACCENT
CPT-4 INSET
4017-PO SOIL UTL i SHT V-3 IB EPXY ACT-2 D
4018-PO T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 3
TRO/The Ritchie Organization
Dept P000-Perioperative services Bldg: - Floor. 04-Fourth Floor Page 14 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005_
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlvjk Toil A.
X: . ...........•.................. ... ...
3092-NU TEUDATA VCT RUB PTO EXPD-1
3093-NU LOUNGE SHT V-1 RUB PTD ACT-1 'W/ACCENT D
CPT-2
3094-NU ELEC VCT RUB PTD EXPD
3095-NU ELEC VCT RUB PTO EXPD
3096-NU MULTIPURP CPT-3 WD FWC-2 PTD/ACT-3 *HDWD ACCENT RAIL C
CPT-4 BORDER —W/ACCENT
3097A-NU ALC CPT-3 WD PTD PTD
30978-NU ALC CPT-3 WD PTD PTO
3097-NU CORR CPT-3 WD PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-3
CPT41NSET
3098-NU HSKPG COMM Is EPXY ACT-2 7
3099-NU NOUR SHT V-1 RUB PTD, ACT-1 E
3100-NU MEDS SHT V-3 RUB PTO ACT-1 D
3101-NU CLN SPLY SHT V-3 RUB PTD ACT-1
3102-NU PASS CPT-3 WD PTO PTD/ACT-3 C
3103-NU SOIL UTL SHT V-3 Is EPXY ACT-2 D
CPT-3 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT- C
3104-NU WK STA TK BD-2
3105A-NU ALC CPT-3 WD PTO PTD
SHT V-1
3105-NU CORR CPT-3 WD PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-3
CPT41NSET EXPD *W/ACCENT
3106-PU STIR CONCISEALED PTO
• ACT-5
3108-NU LKRS SHT V-1 RUB PTD ACT-1 D
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept NUOO-Inpatient Nursing Unit Bldg: - Floor.- 03-Third Floor Page 13 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 511312005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlvvk. Toil,A,
:..r::.......
.......... ..............:.:. ... ......... ... ..:.. \.... .....v.44.+.•7:•'i.4+•:44:4Gi7:::.• .'•7 .:+ .. .. :7 7:•>.'•:�i}:•iT:•:•:•.47:i•7i:�7}:{:47::4 v
k t
....t..: .. :. •.. ..f........... ... :• ... � �i?i:•77:•>:•7:•:<•7:.}:.sYY>:•7>7:{.Y:•7:.YS:.Y>Y::•::.7:.>:.7:.;.::•::::::.�::::.
....................:...::::`v::.v::::::::::.+v:v:r7::.v4^A..::...•:•::. :•:•.v:::47.•.•,:v.•r::::.vx :••.v::.v:::.•.:v. n•.........
...................... .. ........v............{.. :• : :.tv.v.•:•. .... ;tj.,}.,,r,Y}.,{..:,...vr v+;.:.v�..vrr•:::••:::::'•:nv;.;.........:........ ...........
.......................:....vt.......... .....r. :.......:.........Y...... .} ... ... •::: r. .....::.rw:;.........................::.......... :;i»:•5ijy;:::{:>iiy:.'•:7�:•$
3073-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3074-NU PRIV RM BHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 'PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3075-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3076-NU SOIL UTL BHT V-3 IB EPXY ACT-2 D
3077-NU PASS CPT-3 WD PTO PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT C
3078-NU WKSTA CPT-3 WD PTO PTD/ACT4 *W/ACCENT C
* TK BD-2
3079-NU CLN SPLY BHT V-3 RUB PTO ACT-1
3080-NU MEDS BHT V-3 RUB PTO ACT-1 D
3081-NU NOUR BHT V-1 RUB PTO ACT-1 E
3082-NU T STAFF BHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 3
3083-NU EQP VCT RUB PTO ACT-1
3084-NU OFF CPT-2 RUB PTO ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
3085-NU WK RM CPT-3 WD FWC-2 ACT4 H
3086A-NU ALC CPT-3 WD PTO PTO
3086-NU CORR CPT-3 WD PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-3
CPT4 INSET
3087-NU WKSTA CPT-3 WD PTO PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT C
TK BD-2
3088A-NU ALC CPT-3 WD PTO PTO H
3088-NU PASS CPT-3 WD PTO PTD/ACT-3 C
3089-NU T STAFF BHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 3
3090-NU OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
3091-NU MEDS BHT V-3 RUB PTO ACT-1 D
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept. N000-Inpatient Nursing Unit Bldg: - Floor. 03-Third Floor Page 12 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlvjk. Toil.A.
...... .................. .... ... ................ ...............:..:::::::::.:::......t::.r:::.:.......r::.::r.:::::.:::..,::::.:::::::::..:...", .:......
............ ...... .......... ............ v.. v.yr a
............ ........................x.. �t
.. ..✓. ;.. rY .... .. / �.✓................u. ..... ..,:. v.:v::.v.:v;::::::::::4:tia:•T;{{:{:!i,•�::.::'4•.v::.:•::✓✓::::.:v::::.v::::::.v:nv:: :. '
..::.:.:v:v::::::::::•:v:,...... ......tr..r....... .... ... T :$r... ${, ... xx.✓.. a..t, ..., �.K.{iL�W.. ....r ..:..... ..
n....N..........
.. ..�..• ... ... .,✓. •.w✓v•..::..:,:•r:•.v., ....:...v.r....v.:. .n .............t:.:v::.y::.:...........:N:•::::•:::::{:w;,:.;...................
::.:•:.;•::::.�:.�r::.:�:.}T•;::;:::,.•.;.::r.}:{a}<•T ris•::::•T:T�dtr:.;,•.{r��rV:,..,. :::•✓.•}.<..1.r.•:c;t5•:.;,�''.:•r:.};,...v:.�r•>T:T. •r:,t•TTTtrs.:.: ..,:�. :4 r. r: ✓T..✓.✓...........
...........
3054-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 'PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3055-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3056-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3057-NU T PAT COMP-2 1B CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3058-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3059-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3060-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3061-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3062-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3063-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3064-NU ISOL BHT V-2 WD PTD ACT/PTD *PRICE RUB AS ALT A
3065-NU T H/C COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 2
3066-NU SOLARIUM CPT-1 WD FWC-2 PTD/ACT-3 A
3067-NU CL CPT-3 WD PTD PTD
3068-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3069-NU T H/C COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 2
3070-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3071-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3072-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept NUOO-Inpatient Nursing Unit Bldg: - Floor. o3-Third Floor Page 11 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor
x .fr. } :•:::..::::::::.:.:.::.:•
t..x.. .. .. :... r. ... {. .,:. x.. .r.:..:.. y�
3036-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 'PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3037-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W1 ACCENT G 1
3038-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3039-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3040-NU ISOL SHT V-2 WD PTD ACT/PTD *PRICE RUB AS ALT A
3041-NU T H/C COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 2
3042-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3043-NU SOLARIUM CPT-1, WD FWC-2 PTD/ACT-3 *PRICE RUB BASE
AS ALT.
3044-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3045-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY .W/ACCENT G 1
3046-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3047-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3048-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3049-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3050-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3051-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY •W/ACCENT G 1
3052-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3053-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept N000-lnpaUenl Nwsing Unit Bldg: - Flow. 03-Third Flow Page 10 of 23
r
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mkvk, Toil A.
iRoom# Room Name Floor Base
.............. ... .... .. .. .... .. ....... .....:: :::.,.:. .,.: :.:.: .:::::::::.v::::.:..:..::::::.:,:Y::}:Y:•,:;»YY.;.;:.YYYYY:;.:.::{.:{{.Y:{;.::{.::{;{{:::{::.::.:<.:.:{.>:.Y:{.:.+rY
...... .... ............r........... n.v.. r..f.. .vf...... r'/.. ..rn.......:..Y.....r..... � .............
.v...:.::x.. } :v.r,• ••:.:....n:.........r............. ,...r.......::.vY:?A:•Y•Y.::....,............ ...:.r..:. .n...
..........n.........x....v..........• ..... ..Y.. .. r.. .. .r.•v •:••xx , •.•. •. ......... ..n....v......::::+ ... N
............................r.. .. ru.v? ..F...v ..rn. r.. v. O r...:{}y..;...::
...r ... :. .• : :. {• ••3:4......::LY}ii:w::::::;i•}:•Y:^i:.�r .:... ..:......:. :i::}:•}:ivii:}
(fix
............v..................:n.n....r x v:. ..:.n.Y ..:.. ., ........ ....... r•:::. rv....n:, v.:::: .. ...........
F..:..Y...... : .: vx.v.. v..v....r ....: .... n......... v.........:.............. .:�:••}}}:•{y•
.....x...... n..:.x...x.•lv:3.r+rr..r...n...... .... ................r....... r .r....... ..... .......r........ .... ....r....
3018-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3019-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3020-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3021-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3022-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3023-NU TPAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3024-NU PRIV.RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
. AS ALT.
3025-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3026-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3027-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *WJ ACCENT G 1
3028-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3029-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3030-NU CORR CPT-3 WD PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-3 A
CPT-41NSET
3031-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY *W/ACCENT G 1
3032-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3033-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY •W/ACCENT G 1
3034-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTO PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3035-NU TPAT COMP-2 IB ' CT EPXY rW/ACCENT G 1
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept N000-Inpatient Nursing Unit Bldg: - Floor. 03-Third Floor Page 9 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room
Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlvik Toil.A,
:..h...r.\v:1%4}:{::••..... :..:�?��.:::•,:: :.::�::;::;::::::.nv:i}}}}:•}}i:•}::Y:::%v{4Y:•i
........... .. ................ ....... .:.r... .,:...l... ..........v...4:., , ryy.. f}f. .. .....,"i..v..:, vnv.....r.. ......................
.L y
..•.4x:fr:•xv.. pp��,,�,,
...... ..v..:. k....... Y .....}. ... ...... ... , wr. .,:v,v , ,.....r.. ... :.....:
w::::::::::::::w.::k..:........:........ .r........................ ,
•.Hi 4
... ......... .....,. r ::.{,.r.,•:::.: :...,.n.vnv:.,
r.}
:•«:: }^}vY:-0}:^}w:.:v::::::{4:•iiY:w:•.v:.::}.}?•:}:::::
.....n. r.. .{.}.,.: Y, .. .Y' }:} ... ... ..... .:. r•.,:•. ...:........r.•.,:••,:..:::v:.:••:+v{•:•:;,;.:.::::::::v::w::::::::w:::::.:.w:::....
... .:..r.r. .. ..., .•+}. .. ..... ... ::•:.v:•.:••r.•:::::.::•::::::::::::.,•:.{.}}.'•}..;..;{.:>:•>:••:�:•}}••Y:}}::{;{.}}:•}}:.;::•:::::.v::•:::.:.v.:::.,.:.::.:..:::::::::::.:::•::::•::::::::•::::::..}:•:4:•}:•:Y::::�::�:::�;:,YrY;
.. 4.........f .n:....: .. .....} .. .. ..:...v vv:x:.v.:;,v:::.vv.v...,.....;.S{...n...............:v::::::::.•..:::::.v.:::;.......v:::.}.v::.v::::;:::•::::::::;w:::.... .......::.:
.... ..... i. ..4.., .. }. :..v:......n.. m:::.v. :..:::..v:::.v::.::m;::.:;v 4•:?•}::{:::::YY;«:;v:
.......... .... ..:........,.r:.....r..r... : .:.r. .......:.3y :5r.. .. : ........... z'.:r:...,£r: .:.C, ......... ......... .....:... .............
.. ....... .}r.. .. }....... ....x.:.......:.....:.:w::nv::...;..w:i::}:::}:::::.v::.::::::::::...:..:::::.::.::::{{?n}x;::•.},•.}:•}:•.i::t4:•}::C•:}}}>Y:?•
... r. ..... ...r..............r..:. ...,r.....,r.../:.,. ,..L»x.,.:.v.rvr w ..r ri.....:..}... }$ «. .$n....
..,v.:. .}r.... .r.....r :. ..:...,.:.v.:v...,,........•rr.4.v...........:......r::v:w.:v:::r.•:::::.....
... .f... ......... .......,........ .. r.v....... .4�}... .......... :.i..:::::v,•:•.:::w.w.:...r........:.xv.:..:...}..::::v::::::::::: ....... _...........
....qqLLI�}.... ..... .. ..... .....: ... v,}..r.n.,{....n.n r.r. v. ,. .....Y......,... .. ...........:::::::::.v:::.:...................:::::::.::.:.::...:v:::::::v.v:.v::.:.�:w:n;::::•::::::w::::::::.:::::::::::::::•:::::::.::y1:::iv:::.:!!?:5}:
.......................... ............................ r....:.v..w.,vv v.,,,n x. .... x...}.•,}J.:.:v:::.. }{.;.:..,.,.... ..::::::....:...::.:........::::..................
..........:...:.:,:.:.v:.,,,:,,•::.w.vr.•.:...:.........r...{r..:..::$.•:•Y::•:{Y:.'r?•}•. }.,.,:.,:.,....:..{:..::..,:..:r..kL•..,:\.:...HV......w:..:.,.n..:.,.,
3000-PU CONNECTOR CPT-3 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4
3001-PU ELEV LOBBY TERR WD PTD/WD PTD/ACT-3
3002-PU ELEV LOBBY TERR WD PTD/FWC-1 PTD/ACT-3
WD PANEL
3003-PU STR TERR WD PTD PTD
3004-PU STR RUB RUB PTD EXPD 'STR SYSTEM
lPTD/ACT-3 —W/ACCENT
3005-PU WTG TERR WD PTD/WD PTDMD B
FWC-1
3006-PU T TERR IB CST/EPXY EPXY/ACT-3 1 4
SSM-5
3007-NU PASS SHT V-1 WD PTD PTD/ACT-3 'W/ACCENT
3008-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 *PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3009-NU T H/C COMP-2 1B CT EPXY 'W/ACCENT G 2
3010-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 'PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3011-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY 'W/ACCENT G 1
3012-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 'PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3013-NU T PAT COMP-2 1B CT EPXY 'W/ACCENT G 1
3014-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 •PRICE RUB BASE A
AS ALT.
3015-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY 'W/ACCENT G 1
3016-NU PRIV RM SHT V-2 WD PTD PTD/ACT-4 `PRICE RUB BASE A
„ AS ALT.
3017-NU T PAT COMP-2 IB CT EPXY •W/ACCENT G 1
TROlThe Ritchie Organization
Dept N000-Inpatient Nursing Unit Bldg: - Floor 03-Third Floor Page 8 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlvvk Toil.A,
r.x x{.r.4:.}.v.n t.vY r }:•.f:r} ..4:. ..r..!•.::•r:rx...r..... .r::. ... t�(.`..+.............r.....,v::
..
;•.. ...... +::•:•:::::v,v+•x::;..•::•:•:{.�.};::.};::...:. •.
......:...t....,....t.....t r.:...t{t..............t. ... r» ..f•..4. ..}:.. }: .. r..R.r......... t.. ............... .:..r..........::........ •
... .....S.f...\..r.
..$. ........r �•�,y� t .....v..rt xi..n •Sv... v..... ..........:..........r........ ....................4}:4}}}}::v
.......... .v.......v.{
}. Y:>}:iiiiii:{:;?YF,.$i$:.•'i}j:::<�i:{4i:� {::i:`vi:•}:•}:•:•i:v}.•iii}}}}
.....7. .....: ... v. v r..r....r....t .t... v v............. vm::}}}}::?•y}:{.?}i}:y:;:;:{???• .v.
..................................... ........n: ..f.r. .x rw ..vr: L..f+Ri9F:. 4. :::::::.•.:.:::
.....:.r .xt xxr...t..{.... .v t .... ... .rY : �+T .. .........,
......... t ..4 .\. 4t $:r�v..•..r..n•.. :R...........n..::v.:. nw::.v;..:...•v::•: •v:::•;•.: :.::::•
................................. ........ .....4. ... ...... t t•, .�i�•.F••.•: r.:rn•:.+..{•n.: .r:F.t xr xt4 .. tv r. t4}ppnr... ...tt.. .0:.{}}.}L;x;.• .r..r..l.........frr::::.. t:•}}Yr
........................::::w:::.r�::•:::::?:;4k?w::::f:x�v:}•::!�}.}.. •.. ............... k...fih....... ...: /. .......
1153-PO OR RUB-3 IB SPC EPXY *W/ACCENT
1154-PO OR RUB-3 IB SPC EPXY 'W/ACCENT
1155-PO OR RUB-3 IB SPC EPXY *W/ACCENT
1156-PO SHELL CONC/SEALED PTD EXPD
1158-PO SCRUB RUB-3 RUB EPXY EPXY
1159-PO ALG RUB-3 RUB EPXY EPXY
1160-PO LOUNGE CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT D
1161-PO CONF CPT-3 WD FWC-2 PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
CPT-4 BORDER */" **HDWD ACCENT
RAIL
1162-PO HSKPG COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2 7
1163-PO T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 *W/ACCENT 3
1164-PO OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
1165-PO OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 W/ACCENT
1166-PO OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 *W/ACCENT
1167-PO PROC SHT V-3 RUB PTD ACT-4 J
1168-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT4 *W/ACCENT 3
1169-PO CNSLT CPT-1 WD VWC ACT-3
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept P000-PeripPerar^'e Se^m" Bldg: - Floor. 01-First Floor Page 7 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5113/2005
Room# Room - Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes MIM. Toil.
.............................................. .... .. r.... ......... .. ... x Wx.. to..
{.
.:.........................r.......4 ..4. : Y. .. ... .. :. .. :..t f....v. 44x.n. v.
...f......}... f. 44v4 ..... .... .+}r .. .r...:::•::;x%.Y:{{{:{:w::::::•. :::.:. r::.t:>�}:4:•}::v:::::....::::n.... ...::::•:::•::••{r{:
....... I.✓..t.� F....
....... :h:. .$.:. ..... ..: .......... .. .. ..... �w::f::::.v::.v..:•i:•:{{{4:J}}i:{•Y:C{:{,'ri{:i4Y:.y::.::::.::::..i:ii::C•Y}Y}:
.v.�.
.......n.......................{:.: x.........{... ...}. 4.v.. .{•n4..f....r�.v...{.:.t.n.....f.•.:rt::ff:.xt:w:::::.fr...}.... ::::'......................., B:Y:{........:.:.::..:....:::•.::::::...::•:::.:::::::::::::
v.... w:::..:.4t:wr:x:::.w.w:.4:4,{,,}y.Yx:{f:•'{{•}}}}'{'}} �Y•4...:?f:.•f:fr.;�.,.},.{.t}:::4:'Y:v...,.
iii'r{$i}:•}:4}}}}}y}:•}.............................. i:::Y::t'•::.. ......................... ...
1131-PO CNTRL CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 C
TKBD-2
1132-PO OFF CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 'W/ACCENT
1133-PO ANES RUB-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 D
1134-PO TEL/DATA VCT RUB PTD EXPD-1
1135-PO ST RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD F
1136-PO ALC RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD
1137-PO ALC RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD
1138-PO SCRUB RUB-3 RUB EPXY EPXY 'W/ACCENT
1139-PO SCRUB RUB-3 RUB EPXY EPXY 'W/ACCENT
1140-PO PASS RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD F
1141-PO SOIL UTL SHT V-3 IB EPXY ACT-2 D
1142-PO SUB STER RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD D
1143-PO CLN SPLY/ST RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD
1144-PO SUB STER RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD D
1145-PO PASS RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD
1146-PO ST RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD F
1147-Po ELEC VCT RUB PTD EXPD
1148-PO EMER ELEC VCT RUB PTD EXPD
1149-PO ALC RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD
1150-P0 OR RUB-3 IB SPC EPXY 'VV ACCENT
1151-PO OR RUB-3 IB SPC EPXY 'W/ACCENT
1152-PO OR RUB-3 IB SPC EPXY NV/ACCENT
F
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept P000-Peroperaeve services Bldg' .low: 01-Firsf Floor Page 6 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
;Room# Room - Floor Base Walls Ceiling -
XM...f.. !M1t..: ....... ....... ..r .. .1,:••.V:✓.,v;,w.v..............: ... ........,.:::w:nv::.+•:fN:::::.�
............ ....: .:n.r.rf...{...•. ..r...... r.r.
v....r:..v. ..::..N...f... .. ... .. f.. ....r.f:::r.:v:•:v::v::. :.:
... r... r r :ti4.•} '::v:.�:.::.:.iv.�::::.::w::::;;;, ...:nv:::::.;.•.�:.:.:.::::::::.:::::..v;:•}'+•}}:{{ry:ry:.:�::�;:?::..:iYv:^:4}:�:
..................:.�::r:?:•:}}.�.•:::•}:}:::•::tr...::••r ::.r..,:•ff?{:..,,.:. ,...:.: N.,,•:f:+.>.:ff•t...L„:,v.:,,•L: '..}nr/a:.;;;..}:�:....}.:�.•:::?f• }:•+r•}:::}...f:..........}r.....
:?:{•}}}}i:{•}}}i}:w::::::x:v:::X:'•::::•:h4::•}}:$}.O.{+.;.ytrh}./..........}}:•}}.. .rY.•r...r......r$.f+.rf..4..}......r.r. •}}:.+•'•:v.:. :f}.{., ............... .......................................
1101-PO PREP/RECOV
RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1102-PO PREP/RECOV RUB-3 RUB PTDlVWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1103-PO PREP/RECOV RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1104-PO, PREP/RECOV RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1105-PO PREP/RECOV RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1106-PO PREP/RECOV RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1108-PO FR SECT RUB-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 D
1109-PO HSKPG COMP-1 IB EPXY ACT-2 7
1110-PO EQP VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
1111-PO ALC RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD
1112-PO AISLE RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 •W/ACCENT
1120-PO T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 *W/ACCENT 3
1121-PO ELEV MACH
1122-PU STIR CONC/SEALED PTD EXPD *W/ACCENT
f
1123-PO CORR RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-6 *W/ACCENT
1124-PO CORR RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-6 *W/ACCENT
1125-PO CORR RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-6 *W/ACCENT
1126-PO CORR RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-6 *W/ACCENT
1127-PO CNTRL CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 H
TKBD-2
1128-PO PASS CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1
1129-PO WK STA CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT-1 H
TKBD-2
1130-PO DICT CPT-2 RUB FWC-2 ACT-1 H
TKBD-2
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dear t�-aerioaeratire services Bldg: - Floor: 01-First Floor Page 5 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name .. Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes
x......... . �. :::..::.,::...:... :.::::..::..
............ ..... :ice:,..:............... ..
1077-PO COMM CLO VCT RUB PTD EXPD-1
1078-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT4 'W/ACCENT 3
.1079-PO WK STA RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-4 'W/ACCENT C
TK BD-2
1080-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT4 'W/ACCENT 3 3
1081-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT4 •W/ACCENT 3 3
1082-PO DICT CPT-2 RUB FWC-2 ACT-1 H
TK BD-2
1083-PO WK STA RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD 'W/ACCENT C
1084-PO WK STA RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD `W/ACCENT C
1085-PO MEDS SHT V-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 D
1086-PO EQP VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
1087-PO AISLE RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 •W/ACCENT
1090-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1091-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1092-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1093-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1094-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1095-PO PASS RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD •W/ACCENT
1096-PO ISOL RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT 4 J
1097-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT4 W ACCENT 3
1098-PO ISOL RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1099-PO PREP/RECOV RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
1100-PO PREP/RECOV RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 J
Page 4 of 23
TROlThe Ritchie Organization Dept a000-PerioperativeServices Bldg: - Flow: 01-First Flow
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Finish Notes Mlwk. Toil.A,
X
1044-PO WK STA RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD WACCENT C
TIK BD-2
1045-PO WK STA RUB-3 RUB PTO PTD `W/ACCENT C
1046-PO MEDS SHT V-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 D
1047-PO DICT CPT-2 RUB FWC-2 ACT-1 H
TIK BD-2
1048-PO EMER ELEC VCT RUB PTD EXPD
1049-PO ELEC VCT RUB PTD EXPD
1055-PO AISLE RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 •W/ACCENT
1056-PO AISLE RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 "W/ACCENT
1057-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4
1058-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4
1059-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4
1060-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4
1061-PO RECOV BAY RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4
1062-PO SOIL UTL SHT V-3 IB EPXY ACT-2 D
1063-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT-4 *W/ACCENT 3
1064-PO NOUR SHT V-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 D
1065-PO CLN SPLY SHIT V-3 RUB PTD ACT-1 F
1066-PO T PAT SHT V-11 RUB EPXY ACT-4 "W/ACCENT 3
1067-PO T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 WACCENT 3
1068-Po ALC RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 C
1069-PO VVK STA RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-4 WACCENT C
1075-PO PASS RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 G
TRO/The Ritchie Organization Dept POOO-Aeripperative Services Bldg: - Floor. 01-First Floor Page 3 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor - Walls Ceiling Finish Notes
::.�:.�:.�::.::..:�::...:.::::n:n�:.:w::::nn...........::::.:.::..:.....::•::�;.�..:v..nt•::::Y.....:::}•::::•}:
:!�i�i'�{k''{•::•:<4i:i�:iii �: ;•'.:'.!':::'::!•i:i::::: :::{%:',::i;::ii:4�ivi:•i�:4: :•,v':::•v:':::
L� y
................:..:.:.....:.v:::v::::::::::.:•::•i::.�::::vi: i:'.•::ti .W::%.�:::�•:•/.::'L•:?4.•:ivi4iv:ti'.':.:iti i ..LL:::i4'•LY•::J'''S:•:•::•:•':::i•:'•ii:• :•:•;:.ti! i !\'i•:: :is ::::8::::•}:�!i::•:Lviv:T?i:}•:�:
............... ......... ..i ..............................���yr yv:�::::::::..v..:. �ryy���{�ry{":.�w:•.:}L:•:•:•:•::•::•::':''::•Y.:•:Y::':4:......................:........::v:::::::::::.:::::::::::::.::::::::::.:::::::....�::v::::::::::.::.::.:::::.::::::v:...::..::::..::.::•
w:•:::::::•:•:::......:v:••v::t:..................L.....r..........�... ...�.`�:.:.................:::::.v:::::::::..::::n .::::.�V•::.::.:t.::....vL n.........r..........................�n..n.....
':::i:::::::::v:.:v:':•:':•:':i:::•:•i:u: :0:6:•:•:�:•i:::•:V::0:6i;;{•::C•::x::::.......::v:w:.''w:::::::.�:::N::n...................... ......r:.4....... ....................... ....
1023A-PO T STAFF SHT V-3 RUB EPXY ACT-1 *W/ACCENT 3
1023-PO LOUNGE CPT-2 RUB PTD ACT
1024-PO AISLE RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
1025-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT4 J
1026-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1027-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1028-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1029-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1030-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 W/ACCENT J
,
1031-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1032-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1033-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1034-PO PACU RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1035-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT4 *W/ACCENT 3
1036-PO T PAT SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT4 *W/ACCENT 3
1037-PO ISOL 1 RUB-3 RUB PTD/VWC PTD/ACT-4 *W/ACCENT J
1038-PO ISOL RUB-3 RUB PTDNWC PTD/ACT-4 •W/ACCENT J
1039-PO PASS RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
1040-PO ALC i RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD
1041-PO PASS RUB-3 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
1042-PO ST VCT RUB PTD ACT-1
1043-PO T STAFF SHT V-1 RUB EPXY ACT-1 *W/ACCENT 3
«
TRO/The Ritchie Organization aPC P000-Perioperative Services Bldg: - Floor 01-First Floor Page 2 of 23
Cooley Dickinson Room Finish Schedule
2323.000 Surgery/Beds 5/13/2005
Room# Room Name Floor Base Wails Ceiling Finish Notes Mlwk. Toil.A. -
. ...... ........ . ..... .. ... .. ......
R
. ..... ..................................I
.. .........
.................. ...........
. .. ......
... .........
1000-PU CORR CPT-3 WD PTD PTD
1001-PU ELEV LOBBY TERR WD PTD WD/FWC-1 PTD/ACT-3
1002-PU STR RUB RUB PTD EXPD *STR SYSTEM
/PTD/ACT-3 **W/ACCENT
1003-PU RCPT TERR WD FWC/PTD PTD/WD B
AND
1004-PU LOBBY TERR WD PTD/WD PTDMD B
/FWC-1
1005-PU VEST WOM WD PTD ACT-3
1006-PU T M TERR IB CST/EPXY EPXYJACT-3 1 4
SSM-5
1007-PU T F TERR is CST/EPXY EPXY/ACT-3 1 4
SSM-5
1008-PO RCPT TERR WD PTD WD/FWC-1 PTD/ACT-3 B
1009-PO WTG CPT-1 WD PTD PTD/ACT-3 B
TERR WOOD PANEU FWC-1 /WD
1011-PO CNSLT CPT-1 WD vWC ACT-3
1012-PU VEST TERR WD PTD PTD/ACT-3 B
FWC-1
1013-PU W/C ST TERR WD PTDIFWC-1 PTD/ACT-3
1015-PO ELEV LOBBY SHT V-1 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3
1016-PO CORR SHT V-1 RUB PTD ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
1017-PO CORR SHT V-1 RUB PTD ACT•3 *W/ACCENT
1018-PO CORR SHT V-1 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
1019-PO PASS SHT V-1 RUB PTD PTD/ACT-3 *W/ACCENT
1020-Po ALC SHT V-1 RUB PTD ACT-11
1022-PO STR RUB RUB PTD ACT-1 STIR SYSTEM
TROfThe Ritchie Organization Dept P000-Penoperative Sermes Bldg: - Floor 01-First Floor Page 1 of 23
e. #4 nylon cord with fiberglass cord; No. 9-040.
3. Mounting Brackets: Heavy duty aluminum, for fastening track to ceiling surface of
pocket and designed to support weight of track assembly and drapery plus force applied
to operate track; Model 9-360.
a. Mounting Surface: Drapery pocket.
4. Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drapery, and fabricated from
metal compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two
fasteners to fasten each bracket to supporting construction.
B. Operation: Cord tension pulley.
1. Draw: One way, stack as indicated on Drawings.
2. Operating Hardware Location: On stack side.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 DRAPERY TRACK INSTALLATION
A. Install track systems according to manufacturer's written instructions, level and plumb, and at
height and location in relation to adjoining openings as indicated on Drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After draperies are hung, test and adjust each track to produce unencumbered, smooth
operation.
END OF SECTION 12497
Cooley Dickinson Hospital DRAPERY TRACK
Surgery/Bed Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12497-3 05/13/05
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,.
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain drapery track through one source from a single manufacturer.
t.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Track Carriers: For each size indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no
fewer than 10 of each size.
2. Track Controls: For each type indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no
fewer than 10 of each type.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Design is based on Graber Drapery Hardware Track Systems by Springs
Window Fashions, Inc., Montgomery, PA 17752, (800) 544 4749; and trade names of that
manufacturer are used herein.
2.2 DRAPERY TRACKS
A. Manually Operated Track: Graber"Series 9-650"Super Duty Cord Draw.
1. Track Construction: Extruded aluminum, dual channel track, 0.050-inch thick.
a. Lengths and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Support Capability: 60-1b. fabric weight rating for track length indicated.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, satin-finish anodized aluminum.
2. Components: Provide manufacturer's standard components for one-way draw including
but not limited to the following carriers and cord.
a. One way master carrier; Model 9-348.
b. End pulley; Model 9-350/351.
C. Cord tension pulley; Model 8-655.
d. Rolling carriers; Model 9-383.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital DRAPERY TRACK
Surgery/Bed Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12497-2 05113105
SECTION 12497 -DRAPERY TRACK
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Window drapery track for installation in all patient room exterior window openings..
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry: for wood blocking for support of drapery track brackets
or pocket assemblies.
2. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: for metal pockets recessed into ceiling
., system to receive drapery track.
3. Draperies will be furnished and installed by the Owner(OFI).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Include maximum weights of draperies that can be supported by track.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show layout, installation and
anchorage details,and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
D. Samples for Verification: Provide the following:
1. Tracks: 18 inches long, with carriers,controls, and accessories.
E. Maintenance Data: For drapery track to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital DRAPERY TRACK
Surgery/Bed Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12497-1 05/13/05
e0k 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean finished installation of all spots, smears, stains, etc., according to manufacturer's written
instructloils.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
LND OF SECTION 12494
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLER SHADES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12494-7 05113105
C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of
the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (w:h) ratios
and shall not exceed manufacturer's standards, or, in absence of such standards, shall be
responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the
shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered
steel, as required.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Aluminum Components: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness
PAIZT 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades in windows level, plumb, square and true in accordance with
manufacturer's product data and approved shop drawings.
B. Install units with the following tolerances:
1. Maximum variation of gap at window opening perimeter: 1/4-inch per 8 feet
(± 1/8) of shade light.
2. Minimum clearance to interior face of glass not closer than 2-inches. Allow clearances
for window operation hardware.
C. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shade drive/brake mechanisms to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and
free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
B. Adjust shade and shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion.
C. Replace any units or components which do not hang properly or operate smoothly.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLER SHADES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12494-6 05113105
C. Mounting System: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller,
and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.
1. Brackets: Minimum 1/8 " sheet steel to which drive assembly, idle-end assembly and
center support systems are attached.
a. Drive Bracket/Brake Assembly: Mecho/5 Standard Wide Bracket.
2. Furnish center- support brackets to meet span or weight requirement, constructed of
minimum 1/8" steel with Delrin bearing blocks.
D. Accessories:
1. Shade Pocket: Provide extruded aluminum shade pocket with exposed flush mounted
extruded aluminum removable closure panel to provide access to shades and an exposed
flush mounted the support; MechoShade#4123 Pocket.
E. Manual Operation:
1. General: Bi-directional clutch and bead -chain mechanism with adjustable brake:
a. Sprocket: one-piece, injection-molded, high-density Delrin capable of full
engagement with stainless steel bead -chain qualified to match the pitch of the
sprocket.
b. Chain: Qualified No. 10 stainless steel, 90-1b. test. Nickel-plated brass-bead or
steel-bead control-loop chain and plastic-bead chain are not acceptable.
F. Electric Motors: UL-approved, asynchronous, totally enclosed, insulated, capacitor-start
motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with thermal overload protection, brake, permanently
lubricated bearings, and limit switches; sized by shade manufacturer to start and operate size
and weight of shade.
1. Motor Mounting: Within manufacturer's standard roller enclosure.
G. IndividuaVGroup Control Stations: Momentary-contact, three-position, key operated, wall
switch control station with open, close, and center off functions for individual and group
control.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to completely fill openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb, unless
specifically indicated otherwise. Provide inside and outside mitered corners where necessary for
continuous coverage.
B. Fabricate shade cloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed
trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to
roll straight and true without shifting sideways more than 1/8" in either direction per 8 feet of
shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate with bottom hem weights.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLER SHADES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12494-5 05113105
1.9 WARRANTY ,..
A. Provide manufacturer standard five year written warranty against defects in manual shade
materials and workmanship beginning at date of Substantial Completion.
I. The control chain is considered a normal maintenance item and is not under warranty.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: Design is based on products by MechoShade Systems, Inc., Long Island, NY
11101, (718) 729-2020; and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
2.2 ROLLER SHADES
A. Shadecloth Material: "ThermoVeil - 3000 Series" shadecloth material consisting of non-
raveling .030 inch vinyl fabric woven from .018 inch diameter extruded vinyl yarn.
1. Color, Pattern and Openness Factor: Satin texture dense twill weave, 0-1% visually
translucent, in color(s) to be selected by the Architect.
2. Width: 96-inches.
3. Fire Retardance: Provide shade material tested in accordance with NFPA 701 - Vertical
Burn Test and rated "PASS".
4. Anti-Microbial: Provide shade material indicating "No Growth" when tested in
accordance with ASTM G21-and ASTM 85G22-80.
B. Shade -Roller Components:
1. General: All hardware shall be available with regular drive and offset drive and be
reversible for left or right hand operation.
2. Shade Roller: Extruded aluminum tube 6063-T5 alloy, of diameter and wall thickness
required to support shade fabric without deflection. The tube shall be extruded with 2
(two) fabric - mounting channels designed so that the shade cloth does not disengage
from the tube itself. Shade rollers shall be reversible for left or right hand position.
a. Provide lift-assist mechanism consisting of a spring assembly inside the shade tube
and idle-end brackets designed to wind the spring in the proper direction;
MechoShade "LAM".
3. Shade Mounting Spline: Extruded vinyl "Snaploc" spline with asymmetrical insertion -
locking channels and embossed - shadecloth guide, enabling shadecloth to be removed
without having to remove the tube from retainer brackets or without removing brackets
from the wall.
4. Tube Support: Delrin cover plate to provide protection from tube's dislocation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLER SHADES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12494-4 05/13/05
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
D. Mockups: Provide four full size mockups of each type of shade and mounting specified to
verify selections made and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution.
1. Provide mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect. Should mockup be disapproved, provide additional mockups until
approved by Architect.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if Undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades to project site in manufacturer's original factory packages, marked with
manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same room designations
indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete with interior ambient temperature
maintained between 60 degrees and 90 degrees F. and relative humidity conditions do not to
exceed 80%.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Rollers Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each size, color,
texture, and pattern indicated.
2. Chain: 5% of the total length of stainless steel chain required on the project, not to
exceed one 500 ft spool.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLER SHADES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12494-3 05/13/05
B. Product Data: For each type of roller shade indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, ..0"k
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and
operating instructions.
1. Motorized Shade Operators: Include operating instructions.
2. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings,characteristics, and mounting arrangements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections,
details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings,
attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.
1. Motorized Shade Operators: Show locations and details for installing operator
components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive
arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, system, and control wiring.
D. Samples: For each colored component of each type of roller shade indicated.
1. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. Mark
face of material.
E. Window Treatment Schedule: Include roller shades in schedule using same room designations
indicated on Drawings.
F. Product Certificates: Provide notarized affidavit from the manufacturer of each type of roller
shade product, stating that the material supplied for the project shall be washable, inherently
flame resistant, and shall remain flame resistant after repeated washing for the life of the fabric.
G. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,
finishes, and performance.
3. Operating hardware.
4. Motorized shade operator.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLER SHADES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12494-2 05/13/05
SECTION 12494 -ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes roller shades and motorized shade operators, including all accessories and
attachment hardware for a complete installation as follows:
1. Chain-driven, manually operated roller shades,for installation in all patient room exterior
window openings.
2. Motorized roller shades, for installation in all exterior window openings within waiting
areas 1009-NU, 3005-NU, and 4004-NU.
l.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Furnish the following items for installation under the work of Section 09250 — Gypsum Board
Assemblies:
1. Metal shade pockets.
ate', 1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: for wood blocking for support of roller shade brackets
or pocket assemblies.
2. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: for installation of metal shade pockets
recessed into ceiling system.
3. Division 16, Electrical: for electrical service and connections for motor operators,
controls, limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches
for motorized shade operation
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLER SHADES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 12494-1 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after-unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
anchoring all units firmly into position, square,plumb, straight, and true.
1. Prepare a recess in the concrete flooring (block out) where the foot grille will be located.
The recess should be at least 1-inch deeper than the total height of foot grille and frame.
Block out an area 6-inch wider than the outside dimensions of the frame in both
directions.
2. Place the frame in the recess. Use shims to raise frame to exact height of finished floor
and level the frame.
3. Pour non-shrinking grout around perimeter of frame. There must not be any free space
between the intermediary supports and the non-shrink grout.
4. Use a board slightly smaller than the frame opening and level the non-shrink grout in
each section to be flush with the top of the grille support. Be absolutely certain the non-
shrink grout is smooth and level with the lip of the frame so the grille lies perfectly flat
and will not rock.
5. Before the grout hardens recheck that the dimensions are correct, frame is square and
level, and the pan and/or intermediary supports are fully supported by wet grout.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or
fiberboard in recessed, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection
until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
B. Defer installation of floor mat until time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12484
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase I
Package `E' -2323 12484 -4 05113105
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloys 6061-T6, 6063-T5, 6063-T6, and 6105-T5 for extrusions as
standard with manufacturer.
B. Grout: Latex leveling materials for fill around and under recessed mats and frames as
recommended by manufacturer.
2.3 FLOOR MATS
A. Model and Description: Mats, Inc. "SafeTrack" recessed aluminum foot grille.
B. Recessed Aluminum Grid: Constructed from recycled Aluminum alloy type 6061-T6 fabricated
to sizes indicated and mechanically fastened rails (swedge or key lock fastening of rails is
unacceptable) with the following characteristics:
1. T-shaped blades, 3/8 by 1/8 by I inch size striated every 3/8 inch with 9/64 by 3/16 inch
notches; spacing between blades not to exceed 3/16 inch.
C. Perimeter Frames: Inverted "T" shape,recessed frame set integral with concrete substrate; Mats,
Inc. Model VV. Pre-assemble frames at factory incorporating welded construction for all joints.
1. Provide each grille section shall incorporate an invisible section divider integrated and
welded within the frame.
D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate foot grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. If not otherwise
indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles
are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
B. Fabricate frame members in single lengths with welded joints, or where frame dimensions
exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline
joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 12484 -3 05/13/05
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the worl< of this Section.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the project site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections
and assemblies as practical,in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled.
13. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual openings for recessed floor mats by accurate field
measurements of blocked-out openings in floors before fabrication, and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
B. Coordinate frame installation with concrete construction to ensure recess and frame anchorage
are accurate and that the base is level and flat. Defer frame installation until building enclosure
is complete and related interior finish work is in progress.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant to the Owner the recessed foot mat system will be free from any
defects in materials and workmanship and will meet the design criteria noted in its catalogs,
when properly applied and installed, for a period of two years following date of shipment by
manufacturer.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturer: Provide floor grille entrance system as manufactured by Mats, Inc.,
Stoughton,MA 02072; (800) 628-7462.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 12484-2 05113105
SECTION 12484 -FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes recessed foot grilles and frames.
1. Foot grilles are designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "WO:)M".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `.A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300,Cast-In-Place Concrete: Depression in concrete slab.
2. Section 03515, Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayment: for leveling recess at floor mats.
3. Section 09400,Terrazzo: Interior floor finish abutting floor grilles.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide foot grilles and frames capable of withstanding and supporting
a 500 lb rolling load and uniform load of 5001bf/sq. ft. without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Maintenance Data: For cleaning and maintaining floor grilles to include in maintenance
manuals.
,O,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 12484 - 1 05/13/05
B. Stainless Steel Sink: Shall be in seamless construction with all internal corners coved. Bottorn
of each sink shall be drilled and punched to receive strainer, tailpieces, or disposal unit for the
types as furnished under Division 15, Mechanical. Sinks shall be fitted and welded to the
countertop, affording a watertight and sanitary connection with no buckling or distortion. No
overlapping joint shall be permitted where bowl is welded to top.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install laboratory equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Connect equipment to utilities.
B. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required.
1. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent
finish.
C. Install joint sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint
backing, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. After completing installation of equipment,repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition.
C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.
END OF SECTION 11535
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11535 -3 05/13/05
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
i'ART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Elkay Manufacturing Co., Oak Brook, IL (630) 574-8484.
2. Advance Tabco,Edgewood, NY (800) 645-3166.
2.2 GROSS LAB SINK
A. Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, with No. 4 finish (directional satin finish) on exposed
surfaces.
B. Gross Lab Sink: Provide custom sink to match existing unit as designated by the Owner.
1. Description: Unit to be approximately 177-inches long by 36-inch high, double
compartment sinks, 8-inch high backsplash with 14-deep shelf, 2-inch high upturn, and
tubular legs.
2. Construction:
a. Material: Stainless steel,Type 304, 14-gage, reinforced and sound deadened.
b. Back Splash: 8-inch high.
C. Shelf: 14-inch deep with 2-inch high upturn.
d. Edge: Square edged.
e. Sinks: Stainless steel,Type 304, 14-gage, welded into table top.
f. Size: 24-inch by 20-inch by 8-deep,each compartment.
g. Legs: Stainless-steel tubing.
h. Feet: Stainless-steel,flanged, adjustable bullets.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Stainless Steel Top and Splash Back: Shall be formed down and back on exposed edges, and
bonded to a stainless steel underbody, which shall be reinforced with No. 14 gauge full-length
stainless steel members. Top shall have integral back splash and end splashes where located
against walls, and shall be to height indicated and 14 inch deep unless otherwise indicated.
Joints between counter and back splash shall be coved to a 1/2 inch radius. Underside of top
shall have a heavy mastic agent coating providing sound deadening.
-look.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11535 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 11535 -LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes equipment for laboratory facilities as follows:
1. Custom stainless steel gross lab counter with integral sinks.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications.
2 Section 06402, Interior Architectural Woodwork: for custom casework and countertops.
3. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
4. Section 11530,Laboratory Refrigeration.
5. Division 15, Mechanical: for service roughing-ins; drain traps; pipes,and fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings for custom equipment in sufficient detail to show
fabrication details, layout, utility service requirements, anchorage, and interface of the work of
this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 11535 - 1 05/13/05
OW components, piping, leak testing and startup of the refrigeration system, testing of complete
walk-in refrigerator and the piping of the condensate drains.
C. Seal or otherwise insure that fastenings to walk-in refrigerator do not compromise vapor
barriers or insulation. Seal all service penetrations for piping and sleeves. Seal all electrical
conduit to prevent condensation from accumulating in light fixtures/junction boxes.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Operating Temperature: After walk-in refrigerator has reached operating temperature door shall
be fully opened to 75 degrees Fahrenheit ambient for a period of one full minute, room shall
recover to operating temperature within 5 minutes after closing door.
B. Control Setpoint: The walk-in refrigerator shall be designed to operate at temperature and
humidity as specified by the Hospital. Control sensitivity is defined as the temperature
measured at the point where the walk-in refrigerator temperature control sensing element is
placed, at a given point in time. The control sensitivity is to be + 0.5 degrees Centigrade within
specified setpoint.
C. Temperature Uniformity: The walk-in refrigerator is to be designed to provide a temperature
uniformity as specified by the Hospital. This is to be defined as an area on a horizontal plane 48
inches above the floor and within 24 inches of the walls. The uniformity is the variation
between points across this plane as measured by a multipoint strip chart recorder at a given
point in time.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain refrigeration equipment. Refer to Section 01730, Operation and
Maintenance Data.
END OF SECTION 11530
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY REFRIGERATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11530-5 05113105
D. Trim Strips and Closures Panels: Shall be of the same finish as the walk-in refrigerator exterior 1001%�.
to be provided and installed to fill the area between the building wall and the perimeter of the
walk-in refrigerator.
C. Lighting: Provide 48-inch surface mounted, cool white, fluorescent lighting fixture. Lamps and
low temperature ballasts are to be mounted in vaporproof gasketed UL listed fixtures, designed
for use in damp and wet locations.Locate light switch with pilot light adjacent to door.
F. Refrigeration System: Preassembled condensing unit and evaporator assemblies. Refrigeration
system shall be specifically designed, engineered and manufactured to achieve and maintain the
scheduled room temperature requirements and performance.
1. Condensing Unit: Water cooled, welded hermetic type compressor, factory assembled
and UL listed; 3/4 hp, 208-230v/3p/60hz.
a. 54 -ph, 7030 Btu @ 109.8 degrees F entering water temperature.
2. The Evaporator Coil: Is to be of copper tube aluminum fin design. Evaporators shall be
UL listed and be forced air type designed for ceiling installation. Fan motors, guards,
multi-fin and tube-type coil shall be housed in heavy gauge aluminum housing. Unit shall
have drain pan with suitable drain pipe connection;
G. Temperature Monitoring System: Remote reading temperature recorder with programmable
speed and temperature ranges. Wall mounted case with 1/2-inch LED display and 6-inch
diameter charts capable of recording 31 days by means of ink type recording pen. Recorder
shall have selectable temperature scale from —40 deg. C to 50 deg. C., with a temperature
accuracy of+/-2 deg. C. -,Mk,
1. Power Requirement: 115v/60hz.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, properly located electrical and mechanical utilities, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install walk-in refrigerator level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Installation shall include receiving, unloading, inspection, and unpacking of the walk-in
refrigerator components, panel erection, light fixture mounting, interwiring of the electrical
—ON,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY REFRIGERATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11530-4 05/13/05
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the pre-engineered, sectional walk-in refrigerators are
based products as manufactured by Kolpak., Manitowoc Foodservice Group., Parsons, TN
(800) 826-7036.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable
product by one of the following manufacturers:
1. Bally Refrigerated Boxes, Inc., Morehead City, NC (800) 242-2559.
C. System Components:
1. Walk-in Refrigerators: Kolpak's modular walk-in cooler complete with floor and door.
a. Size: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Condensing Unit: Kolpak Model "CS"top mounted, self-contained unit.
3. Evaporator: Forced air type, with discharge parallel to the walk-in ceiling.
2.2 WALK-IN REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
A. Wall and Ceiling Panels: UL listed, factory-formed insulating panels fabricated from two metal
facing sheets and insulation core foamed-in-place during fabrication, nominal 4-inch thick.
Panel system shall incorporate cam lock type fasteners as joining devices for interlocking the
adjacent tongue and groove panels.
1. Exposed Exterior Finish: Stucco embossed, 26 gage galvanized steel skins with white
polyester painted finish.
2. Interior Finish: Stucco embossed, 26 gage galvanized steel skins with white polyester
painted finish.
B. Floors: Foamed core insulated floor panels of similar construction to wall panels, nominal 4-
inch thick, with 16 gage galvanized steel interior skin.
C. Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard flush mounted 36-inch wide door with two self-closing
spring load hinges, and positive type latch with cylinder lock. Include safety-release handle that
opens door from inside when door is locked. Door construction shall be similar to wall panels
and be fitted with a magnetic core, thermoplastic gasket at top and sides of the door, and a
flexible,dual-blade wiper gasket at the bottom of the door forming a tight seal.
I. Provide anti-condensate heater wire concealed behind the metal edge of the door jambs
and threshold.
2. Door section to be field wired to surface mounted junction box on the interior door panel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY REFRIGERATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11530-3 05113105
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For laboratory equipment, include parts list with sources
indicated, and list of factory-authorized service agencies including their addresses and telephone
numbers. Include such data in Maintenance Manual specified in Division One.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of complete pre-
engineered, sectional walk-in refrigerators, with satisfactory installations of similar equipment,
in operation for at least 5 years.
13. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the work of this section with a minimum five
years experience.
C. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification
Mark certifying compliance with applicable NSF/ANSI standards
D. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are
evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety
standards and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following:
1. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
2. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
F. Fire Performance: Provide insulating panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119.
I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide panel system with the following surface-
burning characteristics per ASTM E 84.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Walk-In Refrigerator Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace any part of the structure it supplies (except refrigeration system) that fail in
materials or workmanship for a period of ten(10)years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five (5)
years from date of Substantial Completion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY REFRIGERATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package' —2323 11530-2 05/13/05
SECTION 11530—LABORATORY REFRIGERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following laboratory equipment as indicated on the Drawings
1. Pre-engineered, walk-in refrigerator.
12 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 11535,Laboratory Equipment: custom stainless steel sink units.
2. Division 15, Mechanical: for final hookup to service lines, evaporator drain line and
traps.
3. Division 16 Section, Electrical: for wiring, disconnect switches, and other electrical
materials required to complete laboratory equipment installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements. Include the following:
1. Manufacturer's model number.
2. Options, accessories, and components that will be included for Project.
3. Clearance requirements for access and maintenance.
4. Utility service connections for water, drainage, power, and fuel; include roughing-in
dimensions.
C. Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in
dimensions, assembly and installation details, utility service requirements, and attachments to
other work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LABORATORY REFRIGERATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11530-1 05113105
3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND FINAL INSPECTION
A. Certify in writing to the Architect that all work performed under this Section of the
Specifications has been completed correctly and that all installed products function properly.
Adjust items where necessary to ensure satisfactory operation.
B. Complete the inspection log book to certify system for use.
END OF SECTION 11242
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11242-5 05/13/05
D. Base Plate and all other Sections: Galvanized mild steel as able with yield strength of 44 ksi.
Thickness and securement to suit application.
E. Miscellaneous Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Type 304 stainless steel with yield strength of 35 ksi.
F. Adhesive Anchors: HIT-TZ Anchor Rods, as manufactured by Hilti Inc., Tulsa, OK (800) 879-
6000.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine job conditions before commencement of work. Commencement of work will denote
acceptance of existing conditions unless notice has been given in writing of unacceptable
conditions prior to commencement.
B. Faults occurring in the work completed under this Section of the Specifications due to the
acceptance of incorrect conditions of existing work shall be rectified at no cost to the Owner.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of
those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Coordinate with the work of Section 07531 - EPDM Membrane Roofing to ensure proper
flashing of anchor system.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all items to be installed. Provide handling, installation instructions, anchorage
information, roughing-in dimension, templates and service requirements for completion of the
work of this Section. Assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices when
handled by others. Provide advise and assistance with respect to construction of other work
related to products specified in this section.
B. Install all work true, level,tightly fitted and flush to adjacent surfaces.
C. Provide anchorage and mounting devices required for the installation of each product. Isolate
dissimilar materials to prevent corrosion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11242-4 05113105
D. Manufacturer shall have specific liability insurance (products and completed operations)
insurance in the amount of$2,000,000.00 to protect against product/system failure.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Boston Anchor,LLC, Stoughton, MA, (781) 344-2255.
2. Pro-Bel Enterprises,Ltd.,Ajax, ON, (800)461-0575.
3. Acme Maintenance Equipment, Inc., South Houston,TX 77587, (800) 862-0239.
4. Spider Engineered Systems Group, Tukwila,WA 98188, (877) 774-3370.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Basis of Design: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, drawings and
specifications are based on the following safety fall arrest roof anchors as manufactured by
Boston Anchor,LLC:
1. Open Roof Area: Model BA-1H, 12-inch high, filled with urethane foam. For installation
into structural concrete deck with four 5/8-inch adhesive bolts, double nuts and washers.
2. Open Roof Area: Model BA-3, 12-inch high, filled with urethane foam. For weld-on
application to structural steel.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Safety U-Bars: Type 304 stainless steel with yield strength of 35 ksi. U-bar to be not less than
3/4-inch diameter material with 1-1/2—inch eye opening.
B. Securement Bolts: Mild steel, Type 300W with yield strength of 44 ksi, hot-dip galvanized to
ASTM A123/A 123M-2000.
C. Hollow Steel Section Piers: Galvanized steel as above with yield strength of 50 ksi. Wall
thickness to suit application. Fill with manufacturer's standard urethane foam insulation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11242-3 05/13/05
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades. Clearly indicate design and fabrication details, hardware and installation details. Include
all necessary Restrictive and Non Restrictive Working Usage Notes and General Safety Notes.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Shop drawings shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer
registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
D. Provide a safety inspection log book for yearly inspections.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's Equipment Manual & Inspection Log Book, with
"Initial Inspection—Certification for Use" and "Inspection Sign-Off' forms completed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Manufacturer shall specialize in the design, fabrication and
installation of permanent window washing anchor system and have a minimum of 5 years
documented experience.
B. Welding to be executed by certified welders in accordance with AWS requirements.
C. References:
1. ANSI/IWCA 1-14.1 — 2001 Window Cleaning Safety Standard (International Window
Cleaning Association.)
2. OSHA Regulations:
a. 1910, Subpart D(Walking and Working Surfaces).
b. Appendix C to 1910 Subpart F(Personal Fall Arrest Systems).
C. "OSHA Ruling on Window Cleaning by Bosun's Chair" memorandum to Regional
Administrators from P.K. Clark,Director Directorate of Compliance Programs.
3. AISC S342L-1993, with Supplement No. 1 "Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
4. AISI SG-971-1996, with 2000 supplement "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members."
5. AA ADM-1-Aluminum Design Manual; Aluminum Association' 2000 and AWS D1.2-
2000 Structural Welding Code—Aluminum.
6. AWS D1.1-2000-Structural Welding Code—Steel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11242-2 05/13/05
SECTION 11242—WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
PAI1 T I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes window washing anchor system, as shown on the Drawings, specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07531,EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered.
OOW 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design window cleaning/suspended maintenance system to suit building and in accordance with
plans, specifications, and referenced standards and codes.
B. Locate safety and tie-back anchors to suit suspension equipment which will be used on the
building with respect to items such as rigging, spacing, roof edge conditions and similar items.
C. Design all anchor components to provide adequate attachment to the building and suited to
current window cleaning/suspended maintenance practices. Ensure compatibility with industry
standard equipment.
D. Ensure all anchor components conform to proper engineering principles and have been designed
by a Professional Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, qualified in the
design of window cleaning/suspended maintenance equipment, its application and safety
requirements.
E. Design system fall arrest safety anchors to comply with the following structural requirements:
1. Fall arrest safety anchors are designed to atypical maximum fall arresting force of 1800
lbs when wearing a body harness with a factor of safety of 2 without any permanent
deformation and to 50001bs against fracture or detachment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11242- 1 05113105
END OF SECTION 11132
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PROJECTION SCREENS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11132-4 05/13/05
b. "Envoy"by Draper, Inc.
2. Provide metal or metal-lined wiring compartment on units with motor in roller.
3. Screen Case: Aluminum framing with side, end, and top panels of fire-retardant
hardboard. Provide screen case constructed to be installed with ceiling finish applied to
underside.
C. Screen Material: Provide seamless screens of mildew and flame resistant vinyl-coated glass-
fiber fabric with black masking borders and the following type of viewing surface:
1. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of 0.9 to 1.0, and gain of not less than 0.8 at an
angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.
2. Size of Viewing Surface: 70" high by 70" wide.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining
construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a
smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is
lowered.
1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closure, and
other operating components are in optimum functioning condition.
3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. After installation, protect projection screens from damage during construction. If damage
occurs despite such protection, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as
required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PROJECTION SCREENS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11132-3 05/13/05
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed and other construction within spaces
where screens will be installed is substantially complete and ready for screen installation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with adjacent construction, including
ceiling framing, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions.
PART 2 - 1_112ODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Da-Lite Screen Co.,Inc.,Warsaw,IN 46580, (800) 662-3737.
2. Draper, Inc., Spiceland, IN 47385, (800)238-7999.
2.2 PROJECTION SCREENS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting
accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. Provide units that are
listed and labeled as an assembly by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Control: Remote, key-operated, 3-position control switch installed in recessed metal
device box with flush cover plate matching other electrical device cover plates in room
where switch is installed.
2. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by screen
manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal-overload
protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in up and down positions,
and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. Mount motor inside roller with vibration
isolators to reduce noise transmission.
B. Recessed, Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Provide units
designed and fabricated for recessed installation in ceiling; with bottom of case composed of
two panels fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring, one panel hinged and designed to open
and close automatically when screen is lowered and fully raised, the other removable or
openable for access to interior of case.
1. Products:
a. "Boardroom Electrol"by Da-Lite Screen Co.,Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PROJECTION SCREENS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11132 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 11.132 -PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrically operated front projection screens.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: for wood blocking for recessed screen installation.
2. Division 16, Electrical: for electrical service and connections including device boxes for
switches and conduit, where required,for low-voltage control wiring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Maintenance Data: For projection screens to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain projection screens through one source from a single manufacturer.
Obtain each screen as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PROJECTION SCREENS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 11132 - 1 05/13/05
°"'*+
Set No. 2 Typical HP Patient Toilet Room
1 -Toilet Tissue Holder(TTD-1)
1 -Grab Bar,42"
2 -Grab Bar, 24"
1 -Grab Bar, 12"
1 -Robe Hook
1 -Toiletry Shelf
Set No. 3 Typical Staff Toilet/Public Toilet
1 -Mirror
1 -Toilet Tissue Holder(TTD-1)
2 -Grab Bar,42"
Set No. 4 Public HP Toilet
1 -Toilet Tissue Holder(TTD-1)
2-Grab Bar,42"
Set No. 5 Staff Toilet/Shower Room
1 -Toilet Tissue Holder(TTD-1)
1 -Toilet Tissue Holder(TTD-2)
2 -Grab Bar, 42"
1 -Robe Hook
Set No. 6 Staff Toilet/Shower Room
1 -Mirror
1 -Toilet Tissue Holder(TTD-1)
2-Grab Bar,42"
1 -Robe Hook
Set No. 7 Typical Janitor Closet
1 -Utility Shelf
END OF SECTION 10800
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10800-6 05/13/05
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the wort: of
those trades for interface with work of this Section.
B. Install each item in its proper location, firmly anchored into position, level and plumb, and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 ATTACHMENT
A. Except for grab bars, all items that are fastened to steel stud partitions or metal furrecl walls
shall be fastened to concealed wood blocking furnished and installed under the work of Section
06100, Rough Carpentry. Attach all items with properly sized stainless steel screws to assure a
rigid and adequately secure anchorage.
B. Furnish grab bars with anchor backplates. Submit samples and shop drawings showing
construction details with specific instructions for attaching. Deliver backplates to the project
prior to the delivery of the grab bars at such time as required by the Contractor.
C. Anchor plates shall be 2 inch wide by 1/8 inch thick by required length, cold rolled steel with
1/4 inch diameter threaded rod by 2-1/2 inch long welded to plate to suit location of flanges or
secure plate to studs with three self tapping screws at each stud. Anchoring methods other than
as specified herein shall be approved by the Architect.
D. Provide formed stainless steel spacers or fillers at back of wall flanges to prevent gap from
finished wall and flange of unit where accessories are mounted partially on or project above top
of ceramic tile wainscot. Fabricate from 22 gage, 18-8 Type 304 stainless steel with exposed
surfaces No. 4 finished to match accessory.
3.4 TOILET ACCESSORIES SETS
A. Install toilet accessories sets in the locations shown in the Room Finish Schedule under the
column heading "Toil. A".
Set No. 1 Typical Patient Toilet.Room
1 -Toilet Tissue Holder(TTD-1)
1 -Grab Bar, 30"
2-Grab Bar, 24"
1 -Robe Hook
1 -Toiletry Shelf
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10800-5 05113105
la
2.5 ROBE HOOKS
A. Surface Mounted Robe Hooks: Double stainless steel robe hook with bright polished finish.
1. A.S.I. - 7345
2. Bobrick -B-7672
3. Gamco No. 5154
2.6 TOILETRY S14ELF
A. Surface Mounted Shelf: Stainless steel with bright polished finish, 24-inch long with roll-
formed edges.
1. A.S.I. 7380
2. Bobrick B-683
3. Gamco No. 5173
2.7 UTILITY SHELF
A. Surface Mounted Utility Shelf: 30-inch long stainless steel shelf with 3 mop/broom holders and
2 rag hooks, satin finish. ,0,1
1. A.S.I. 1315
2. Bobrick B-224
3. Gamco No. US-1
2.8 LOCKS
A. All locks shall be tumbler type, keyed alike with the exception of the sanitary napkin/tampon
vendor which shall be keyed different. Provide twelve keys.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Finish: All toilet accessories shall be stainless steel, satin finish except as indicated otherwise.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10800-4 05113105
. 2.3 TOILET TISSUE HOLDER
A. Provide theft resistant spindles at all toilet tissue holders.
B. Where recessed toilet tissue holders are located in masonry partitions, provide units and
mounting accessories suitable for installation in masonry partitions.
C. Recessed toilet tissue holders (TTD-1): Double roll, stainless steel with open one piece shell
and flange, satin finish.
1. A.S.I. No. 74022
2. Bobrick No. B-697
3. Gamco No. 212-Dbl
D. Partition mounted toilet tissue holders (TTD-2): Multi-roll, stainless steel designed to serve two
compartments, satin finish, equipped with tumbler lock.
1. A.S.I. No. 0264-1
2. Bobrick No. B-2740
3. Gamco No. 814
2.4 GRAB BARS
A. Grab Bars:
l
1. Stainless steel tubing, 1-1/4" o.d., minimum 18 gauge, Type 304L.
2. Each flange shall be of sufficient strength and design to sustain a concentrated load of
250 pounds.
3. Standard wall clearance shall be 1-1/2",unless indicated otherwise.
4. Provide Snap Flange construction except where indicated otherwise. Heliarc weld
mounting flanges to tubing to form single structural unit. Secure flanges to concealed
mounting plate drilled and tapped to accommodate appropriate type stainless steel
screws.
5. Provide snap-on cover unless other type mounting is indicated. Snap flange cover
escutcheon shall be minimum 22 gage type 304 stainless steel.
B. Straight Grab Bars (GB-1): length as indicated.
1. A.S.I. 3700 P Series
2. Bobrick B-5806.99 Series
3. Gamco No. 125 S Series
C. Finish: Bars shall be peened with satin finished flange and bar ends.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10800-3 05113105
1 MOPE
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of tills Section.
B. All work in this section shall be done in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and local
codes including but not limited to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
C. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products
of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing
to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion..
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on specific products indicated.
Provide the named product as manufactured by the following:
1. American Specialties,Inc. (ASI),Yonkers,NY 10701, (914)476-9000.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc., Clifton Park,NY 12065, (518) 877-7444.
3. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO),Durant, OK, (800)451-5766.
2.2 MIRROR
A. Minor (MIR): with 3/4-inch by 3/4-inch stainless steel angle frame, vertical grain satin finish;
18-inch by 30-inch, unless otherwise indicated.
I. A.S.I. 0600
2. Bobrick B-290
3. Gamco No. A series
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10800-2 05/13/05
SECTION 10800 -TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide toilet and bath accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as
needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. DOCU7nents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Packa-c `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry; Wood blocking in partitions
2. Section 08800, Glazing: Frameless mirrors
3. Section 10155,Toilet Compartments.
a. Coat hooks in toilet compartments.
b. Coordination of cutouts for through-partition accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, product data sheets, installation instructions, and any other
information needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify products using designations indicated in Specifications.
D. Through-Partition Toilet Accessories: Provide accessory templates or cuts to Section 1.0155 —
Toilet Compartments.
E. Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10800 - 1 05/13/05
C. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding.
END OF SECTION 10522
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10522-4 05/13/05
OOW a. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch.
4. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard white baked enamel.
5. Trim and Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel, ready for field finish
painting.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets
will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and
trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if
not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure,square and plumb.
1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection
specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10522-3 05113105
law
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requiren-ients and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired,
drawings and specifications are based on products by Larsen's Manufacturing Company,
Minneapolis, MN 55342, (800) 527-7367, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
13. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product. or a comparable
product by one of the following manufacturers:
1. Potter-Roemer Tri-Star, Santa Ana, CA 92704, (800) 366-3473.
2. JL Industries, Inc.,Bloomington,MN 55435, (800) 554-6077.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's heavy gage enameled steel box (tub), with
trim, frame,door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated for fully
recessed installation.
1. Acceptable Product: Larsen Model "2712R", or a comparable product by one of the listed
manufacturers.
2. Trim: Exposed one piece combination flat trim and perimeter door frame, with corners
mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
3. Cabinet Door: Vertical Duo with clear tempered safety glass panel style with continuous
hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
AWN
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10522-2 05/13/05
SECTION 10522 -FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire protection specialties where shown on the Drawings, as
specified herein, as needed for a complete and proper:
I. Fire-protection cabinets.
2. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. Owner-Furnished Material:
1. Fire extinguishers will be furnished and installed by the Owner.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
L Section 09900,Painting: for field painting fire-protection cabinets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show rough-in dimensions,
mounting method, relationship of box and trim to surrounding construction, cabinet type, trim
style, and panel style
D. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10522- 1 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install flagpoles where shown, according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION 10350
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLAGPOLES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 10350-4 05113105
Provide additional bracing as required. Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597,
Temper T6.
D. Vertical Wall Mount: Custom bronze alloy mounting brackets complete with, mounting plate
and through-wall anchorage; Pole-Tec Model PTV-40.
1. Provide units with same finish as flagpole.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Flagpole shall be furnished less halyard, cleat, and finial ball. Design intent is for flagpole to
serve as a decorative architectural spire.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Metal Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40RIx (Chemical
Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic
Coating: The finish coating for extruded aluminum shall be a factory applied, oven baked
finish based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 (70% min. polyvinylidene fluoride - PVF2).
Application of the finish based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shall be performed under
specifications issued by the coating manufacturer and by an applicator specifically
approved by manufacturer. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturer's written
instructions.
a. Application: The finish for all exposed to view aluminum shall be a two coat, two
bake system. The primer coat shall be an inhibitive primer with dry film thickness
averaging 0.2 mils to 0.3 mils. The color coat shall have a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.0 mils. The total minimum dry film thickness of the fluoropolymer
system shall be 1.2 mils.
b. Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc., No other manufacturer will be acceptable.
1) Color and Gloss: Match metal faced composite wall panel `MP-2' furnished
under Section 07412-Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLAGPOLES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 10350-3 05113105
100%%
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled worl<men who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Provide structural calculations used to determine
compliance with design loads, prepared by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the State of Maine.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other
protective container.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired,
drawings and specifications are based on products by Pole-Tee Company, Inc., East Setauket
New York 11733, (800) 633-6733, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable
product by one of the following manufacturers:
1. American Flagpole; Abingdon,VA 24210 (800)368-7171.
2. Baartol Company Inc. (The), Kenton,OH 43326 (800) 537-4143.
3. Lingo Inc.; Acme Flagpole Division,Camden,NJ 08105 (800)260-1897.
2.2 FLAGPOLES
A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one
piece is necessary, comply with the following:
1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking.
2. For tapered flagpoles, provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting,
internal sleeves.
B. Exposed Height: As indicated.
C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing
complying with ASTM B 241, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLAGPOLES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 10350-2 05113105
SECTION 10350 -FLAGPOLES
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wall-mounted flagpoles (architectural spire) made from aluminum.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports,
capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads, determined according to NAAMM FP 1001,
"Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles.
1. Base flagpole design on nylon or cotton flags of maximum standard size suitable for use
with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent.
2. Basic Wind Speed: 70 mph.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements for each type of flagpole required.
C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations and details showing general arrangement,jointing, fittings
and accessories,grounding, and anchoring and supporting systems.
D. Structural Calculations: For flagpoles indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
E. Finish Samples for Verification: For each finished material used for flagpoles and accessories.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLAGPOLES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 10350- 1 05113105
C. Where splices occur in horizontal runs over 20 feet, splice aluminum retainer and vinyl cover at
different locations along the run.
3.3 CLEANING
A. At the completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's clean-up
and maintenance instructions.
END OF SECTION 10263
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 10263 -4 05113105
2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.
3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.
4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5.
2.3 VINYL BUMPER RAILS
A. Acceptable Products: Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by
Construction Specialties, Inc., and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
1. Bumper Rail (VBR-1): "Model SCR-80M" by Construction Specialties.
B. Bumper Rail Construction: Surface mounted assemblies, consisting of continuous 0.100- inch
thick, snap-on vinyl cover installed over continuous retainer; with continuous vinyl bumper
cushion(s) centered in the retainer; designed to withstand impacts. Provide interrupted interior
and exterior corners.
1. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;
field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
2. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.
C. Color and Texture: Manufacturer's standard matte pebblette grain surface, in color as indicated
on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as
approved by the Architect, using only the approved mounting materials, and locating all
components firmly into position,level and plumb.
B. Secure to internal wall reinforcing. Bumper guard to be hand"pressure-locked" over retainers.
low
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10263 -3 05/13/05
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this
Section from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store vinyl wall guard units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-
ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of the work, furnish and deliver the following materials to the
Owner's representative for future maintenance:
1. Wall Bumper Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of
each type, color,and texture of units installed,but no fewer than two, 8-foot long units.
2. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same
production run as installed units.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturer: Provide vinyl wall guards as manufactured by Construction
Specialties, Inc. (C/S), Cranford,NJ 07016; (201)272-5200.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-
impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness
as indicated.
1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to
ASTM D 256,Test Method A.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10263 -2 05113105
SECTION 10263—WALL GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wall guards of the following type:
1. Vinyl wall bumpers.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Coordinate to insure that continuous wood blocking is
installed horizontally in partitions, for locations of vinyl wall bumper rails.
2. Section 10262, Corner Guards: for metal and vinyl corner guards.
Rook
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: 12-inch long samples of wall bumper assembly, showing the
full range of color and texture variation expected. Prepare samples from the same material to be
used for the Work.
E. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and methods for
vinyl/acrylic covers to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10263 - 1 05113105
and locating all components firmly into position, level, and plumb. Do not use materials with
chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
B. Installation to conform to manufacturer's recommendations and approved details. Corner guard
covers shall be hand "pressure-locked" over retainers.
3.3 CLEANING
A. At the completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's clean-up
and maintenance instructions.
I3. Remove paper covering from stainless steel corner guards and thoroughly clean after the
surrounding walls have been completed.
END OF SECTION 10262
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CORNER GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10262-5 05/13/05
floor to 2-inches above finish ceiling except at soffit locations, terminate retainer at soffit.
Provide structural aluminum support base installed at bottom of retainer for installation of
coved base. Install vinyl cover from top of base to 2-inches above finish ceiling. In soffit
locations, terminate at soffit and intall end cap.
1. Install flexible fire barrier and retainer in compliance with requirements indicated as part
of UL's fire-resistance rating.
E. Color and Texture: Manufacturer's standard matte pebblette grain surface, in color as indicated
on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS
A. Acceptable Products: Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by Wilkinson
Hi-Rise, LLC., and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
B. Metal Corner Guards: Guards shall be fabricated from one piece, 16 gauge stainless steel with a
brushed satin finish (#4 finish typical), with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition and
formed edges.
1. Surface Mounted Guards (CG): Model WCG stainless steel corner guards with 3-1/2 -
inch legs. Provide with 1/8-inch radius, unless otherwise detailed. For end wall
conditions furnish WCG-U series.
a. Mount with PL Premium Adhesive as furnished by the corner guard manufacturer.
C. All corner guards shall extend full height, from top of room base to finish ceiling.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine walls to which corner guards will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid
backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support
fasteners.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Architect, using only the approved mounting materials,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CORNER GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10262-4 05113105
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-
impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness
as indicated.
1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to
ASTM D 256,Test Method A.
2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.
3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.
4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A176,Type 430.
2.3 VINYL CORNER GUARDS
A. Acceptable Products: Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by
Construction Specialties, Inc., and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
B. Non-Rated,Flush Mounted Corner Guards:
1. VCG-1 Corner Guards (90 deg.):
a. C/S No.: SFS-20
2. VCG-2,Partition End Guards:
a. C/S No. FSC-25
3. VCG-6, Corner Guards (135 deg.):
a. C/S No. FSC-25
C. Fire Rated, Flush Mounted Corner Guards: Provide UL listed assemblies with fire-rating equal
to fire-rating of partition where installed.
1. VCG-3, One Hour Rated Corner Guard Assemblies:
a. C/S No.: FS-20R— 1HR
2. VCG-4,Two Hour Rated Corner Guard Assemblies:
a. C/S No.: FS-20R—2HR
3. VCG-5,Two-Hour Rated Partition End Assemblies:
a. C/S No.: FSC-25R—2HR
D. Provide full height units, consisting of a snap-on vinyl cover installed over a continuous
aluminum retainer, unless indicated otherwise on the interior elevation. Install retainer from
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CORNER GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10262-3 05/13/05
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this
Section from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store vinyl wall guard units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-
ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of the work, furnish and deliver the'following materials to the
Owner's representative for future maintenance:
1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of
each type, color,and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 8-foot long units.
2. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same
production run as installed units.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide products as manufactured by the following:
1. Vinyl Corner Guards:
a. Construction Specialties, Inc. (C/S),Cranford, NJ 07016; (201)272-5200.
2. Stainless Steel Corner Guards:
a. Wilkinson Hi-Rise,LLC, Stow, OH 44224; (800)686-6726.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CORNER GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10262-2 05/13/05
SECTION 10262—CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL,
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes corner guards of the following type:
1. Vinyl corner guards.
2. Stainless steel corner guards.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of fire barriers and aluminum
retainers for flush mounted corner guards.
2. Section 10263,Wall Guards: for vinyl wall guards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: 12-inch long samples of wall bumper assembly, showing the
full range of color and texture variation expected. Prepare samples from the same material to be
used for the Work.
E. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and methods for
vinyl/acrylic covers to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CORNER GUARDS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10262- 1 05113105
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Immediately clean exposed surfaces of the louvers to remove fingerprints and dirt accumulation
during the installation process. Do not let soiling remain until the final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to the to the material finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Restore louvers and accessory components damaged during installation and construction so no
evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
the Architect, remove damaged materials and replace with new materials.
1. Touch up abrasions in finishes with a compatible air-dried coating that matches the color
and gloss of the factory applied coating.
END OF SECTION 10200
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-9 05113105
MINN
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work.
B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the
work will be accurately designed,fabricated and fitted to the structure.
C. Anchor louvers to the building substructure as indicated on shop drawings.
D. Erection Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on the approved shop drawings: 1/8
inch per 12 feet of length,but not exceeding 1/2 inch in any total building length or portion
thereof(non-cumulative).
2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end to end, edge-to-
edge in line or separated by less than 3 inches: 1/16 inch (shop or field joints). This
limiting condition shall prevail under both load and no load conditions.
E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or
fabricator, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove
and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the
assembly.
F. Do not erect warped,bowed,deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and
replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed.
G. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily
removed without leaving residue or permanent stains.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-8 05113105
1k
2.6 BLANK OFFS
A. Provide blank-off panels on all areas of louver not covered by ductwork and elsewhere as
indicated on Contract Drawings.
B. Blank-off panels shall be 2 inches thick and faced on both sides with 0.032 inch thick aluminum
sheet. Fabricate panels with an expanded polystyrene (EPS) core having an R-value of 8
(°F*ft2*hfBtu). Panel perimeter frame to be 0.050 inches thick-formed aluminum channels.
Miter panel frame at the corners. Finish panels to match louvers.
2.7 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) 'Designation System for Aluminum
Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations.
B. High Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C40R1x, AAMA 2605.
1. Apply fluoropolymer finish to all exposed to view aluminum. The finish coating for
extruded aluminum shall be a factory applied, oven baked finish based on Kynar 500 or
Hylar 5000 (70% min. polyvinylidene fluoride — PVF2). Application of the finish based
on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shall be performed under specifications issued by the
coating manufacturer and by an applicator specifically approved by manufacturer. Said
applicator shall provide written notification of approval by the manufacturer prior to
application of the finish. The coating system shall be applied to properly cleaned and
pretreated aluminum. The pretreatment shall meet ASTM D-1730-67, Type B, Method 5
or Method 7. Processing shall conform with ASTM B-339-67 (1972) Section 5.
Conversion coating weight shall be between 30-100 mgms. per square foot.
2. Application:
a. The finish for all exposed to view aluminum shall be a two coat, two bake system.
The primer coat shall be an inhibitive primer with dry film thickness averaging 0.2
mils to 0.3 mils. The color coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0
mils. The total minimum dry film thickness of the fluoropolymer system shall be
1.2 mils.
3. Unexposed areas such as inside corners and channels shall be visually covered to the
extent possible.
4. The finish shall meet the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association "2605 -
Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels".
5. Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc.,No other manufacturer will be acceptable.
a. Color and Gloss: Match metal faced composite wall panel `MP-2' furnished under
Section 07412-Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-7 05/13/05
b. Architectural Line Drainable Sightproof Storm Resistant Fixed-Blade designed to
collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of multiple gutters in blades and
channels in jambs and mullions
C. Supply louvers with 4 inch high by full depth sill fleshings formed from minimum
0.050 inches thick aluminum. Sill flashings shall have welded side panel end dams.
d. Install louvers and sill flashings in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures to ensure complete water integrity performance of the
louver system.
2. AMCA Performance: A 4' x 4' unit shall conform to the following:
Free Area 8.09 sq.ft. (0.75 sq. m.)
Intake pressure drop at 900 fpm free area ve- 0.259 in. H-,O (6.58 mm)
locity (274 m/min)
Exhaust pressure drop at 900 fpm free area 0.259 in. H,,O (6.58 mm)
velocity (274 m/min)
3. Wind Driven Rain Performance:
a. AMCA certified and licensed to bear the AMCA seal.
b. The louver test was based on a 39.370 inch (1.00m) x 39.370 inch (1.00 m) core
area. Unit tested at a rainfall rate of 3.0 inches per hour (75 mm/hr) and with a
wind directed to the face of the louver at a velocity 29.1-mph (13 m/s). The test
data shall show the water penetration effectiveness rating at each corresponding
ventilation rate.
Core Ventilation Rate(m/s): 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 * .
Core Ventilation Rate(ft/min): 0 108 200 300 403 480 600 719
Free Area Ventilation Rate(ft/min): 0 202 372 559 751 894 1117 1339
Rating effectiveness: A A A A A B B D
Effectiveness Rating: A= 1 to B =0.989 to C =0.949 to D=0.80 to
0.99 0.95 0.80 0
4. Anchors:
a. Aluminum, stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized steel that is properly insulated
from aluminum.
2.5 BIRD SCREENS
A. Unless otherwise indicated,furnish louvers with mill finish bird screens.
B. Screens shall be 5/8 inch mesh,0.050 inches thick expanded and flattened aluminum bird screen
secured within 0.055 inch thick extruded aluminum frames. Miter frame corners and provide
corner locks.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-6 05113105
B. Products equal to the C/S materials may be offered providing that the manufacturer and
materials meet or exceed the requirements specified herein. Requests for substitution shall be in
strict accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals and Substitutions.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
D. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head
and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E. Mullions: Provide vertical mullions fully recessed behind louver blades at spacings indicated,
but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.
1. Provide applied decorative mullions to face of louver frame, as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.4 FIXED HORIZONTAL,STORM RESISTANT LOUVERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: 7-inch deep "Model RS-7315"by Construction Specialties.
1. Louver Construction:
a. Heads, sills, jambs and mullions to be one-piece structural aluminum members
with integral caulking slot and retaining beads.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-5 05113105
C. Performance Requirements: Provide AMCA and BSRIA test data as required to confirm that the
louvers have the specified air and water performance characteristics.
D. Acoustical Performance: Where applicable, submit test reports to confirm that the louvers meet
the specified STC and Noise Reduction requirements.
E. Professional Engineer Requirements: Drawings and structural calculations to be signed and
sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
F. Warranty: Provide written warranty to the owner that all products will be free of defective
materials or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: At the time of delivery all materials shall be visually inspected for damage. Any
damaged boxes, crates, louver sections, etc. shall be noted on the receiving ticket and
immediately reported to the shipping company and the material manufacturer.
B. Storage:
1. Material may be stored flat, on end or on its side.
2. Material may be stored either indoors or outdoors.
3. If stored outdoors the material must be raised sufficiently off the ground to prevent it
being flooded.
4. If stored out doors the material must be covered with a weather proof flame resistant
sheeting or tarpaulin.
C. Handling:
I. Material shall be handled in accordance with sound material handling practices and in
such a way as to minimize racking.
2. Louver sections may be hoisted by attaching straps to the jambs and lifting the section
while it is in a vertical position.
3. Louver sections should only be lifted and carried by the jambs. Heads, sills and blades
are not to be used for lifting or hoisting louver sections.
4. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during,
and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired,
drawings and specifications are based on products by Construction Specialties, Inc., Cranford,
NJ, 07016; (800) 631-7379, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-4 05/13/05
I. General Seismic Requirements: Architectural components and their attachments shall
comply with seismic design requirements of the referenced building code for a project in
Seismic Hazard Exposure Group I1I, with a Seismic Performance Category of D:
2. Provide louvers and attachments shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of
Section 1612.2.5 of 780 CMR, in its entirety, and for seismic forces (F,,) in accordance
with the formula FP=A,,C,PW, where the following values are used:
a. The coefficient representing effective peak velocity related acceleration (Av) _
0.12g.
b. The seismic cofficent for architectural components(CJ:
1) Component(CJ=0.9
2) Attachments (C) =3.0
C. Performance criteria factor from Table 1612.7.3 of 780 CMR (P)= 1.5
d. W,=Weight of architectural component.
E. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from a
temperature change (range) of 120 deg F in ambient and 180 deg F surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, air flow and water entrainment performance test results, material
types and thickness, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate compliance
with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, elevations,
sections, specific details for each louver, installation, anchorage details, connection for all
component parts, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Shop Drawings and structural calculations shall be signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples for Verification: Provide 3 inch x 5 inch samples of each type of metal finish specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers through one source from a single manufacturer where
indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B. Fabricator's Qualification: Subcontract the work to a single firm that has had not less than six
years experience in the design and manufacturing of work similar to that shown and required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-3 05/13/05
2. ASTM B211
3. ASTM B221
4. ASTM E90-90
E. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
1. AAMA 800 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants
2. AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
3. AAMA TIR Metal Curtain Wall Fasteners
4. AAMA 2605-98 Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the seismic
requirements for aluminum louvers as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building.
B. The BOCA@ National Building Code 11999, Fourteenth Edition, referred to herein as "BOCA
99":
I. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the performance
requirements for design wind loads and other designated or applicable loads for
aluminum louvers as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building
C. Structural Performance -Implied Loads: Design and construct architectural louver system to
withstand minimum loading requirements as specified herein.
1. Design and engineer architectural louver system in accordance with procedures for
determining design wind loads for components and cladding for building height less than
60 feet, pursuant to §1609.8.1 of BOCA '99, incorporating the following project-specific
values.
2. Incorporate the following values to design wind load procedure referenced above which
shall become the basis for design and engineering of architectural louver system.
a. Salient Corner Area: Within 14-feet of exterior corners
b. Basic Wind Speed: 70 mph
C. Velocity Pressure: 12.5
d. Wind Importance Factor: 1.16
e. Project Exposure Category: C.
D. Seismic Performance:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200-2 05113105
SECTION 10200 -LOUVERS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fixed, storm resistant extruded-aluminum louvers.
12 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 04210, Brick Masonry.
2. Section 07412, Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
3. Section 07715,Elevator Vents.
4. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
5. Section 08911, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall.
6. Division 15,Mechanical.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
1. AMCA Standard 500-L-99 Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating
2. AMCA Publication 501 Application Manual for Louvers
B. The Aluminum Association Incorporated
1. Aluminum Standards and Data
2. Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures
C. American Society of Civil Engineers
1. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
D. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM B209
Cooley Dickinson Hospital LOUVERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10200- 1 05/13/05
joining sleeves, wall flanges, brackets, ceiling clips, and other accessories from same material
and with same finish as track.
C. Carriers: Provide carrier assemblies with the track, averaging 2.5 for each linear foot of track.
1. General Cubicle: Model#1062N
2. Kirsch: Model#7918
D. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2.3 IV SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. I.V. Track: Extruded aluminum having overall dimensions of 1-3/8 - inch x 3/4-inch x .062-inch
wall thickness, slotted on the underside to receive a four wheeled nylon carrier.
1. Curved Track: Provide factory fabricated corner bends with a 12-inch radius, with a true
90° for"L" or "U" shape configurations.
2. Finish: Clear satin anodized finish.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Mount track directly to ceiling as detailed and in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, anchoring all units firmly into position, square,plumb, straight, and true.
B. Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining sleeves, and other
accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.
END OF SECTION 10190
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CUBICLES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10190-3 05113105
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all cubicle curtain and IV tracks, and associated components
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all mean necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary at no change in Contract Surn.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of the work, furnish and deliver the following materials to the
Owner's representative for future maintenance:
1. Cubicle Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of
amount installed,but not less than 10 units.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. General Cubicle Company Inc., Telford,PA 18969; (215)723-8931.
2. Kirsch, Sturgis,MI 49091; (800) 528-1407.
2.2 CURTAIN TRACKS
A. Curtain Track (Cubicle Curtains, Shower Curtains): Extruded aluminum having over-all
dimensions of 1-3/8 - inch x 3/4-inch x 0.062-inch minimum wall thickness. Design for surface
application with side projections to overcome ceiling irregularities and affording a method for
scribing a tight, neat line to the ceiling.
1. Curved Track: Provide factory fabricated corner bends with a 12-inch radius, fabricated
in one continuous "L" shaped where ever practical.
2. Finish: Clear satin anodized finish.
B. Track Accessories: Provide extruded slip-on connectors, splices, coupling and joining sleeves,
and nylon end stops and gates. Fabricate splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CUBICLES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10190-2 05113105
SECTION 10190 -CUBICLES
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Curtain tracks and curtain carriers for cubicle and shower curtains
2. IV tracks.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Concealed support systems will be furnished and installed as part of the work of Sections
05500 and 06100.
C. Cubicle curtains, shower curtains, and IV pendants/holders will be furnished and installed by
the Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CUBICLES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10190- 1 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerance and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of
those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop
Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the
manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect; anchoring
all components firmly into position for long life under hard use, plumb, level, and square.
C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten.
Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in
closed position.
D. Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units
level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
B. Remove temporary protective covering and strippable film. Touchup scratches and abrasions to
be permanently and completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet.
END OF SECTION 10155
AftRl
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10155 -4 05113105
B. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than
22 gage and 4 inches high, finished to match hardware.
C. Leveling Device: 3/8" x 7/8" steel bar welded to 11-gauge steel-reinforcing core. Leveling
device shall be chromate-treated and double zinc-plated.
D. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard fittings constructed of stainless steel, mounted
inside compartment. Wall-mounted urinal screen brackets shall be 11 gauge double thickness.
E. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip
galvanized or other rust-resistant,protective-coated steel.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies
complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for
"* connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support
pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at
tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.
B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet
compartments and 36-inch wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch wide clear
opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors
open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard sliding door latch unit designed for
emergency access. Latch handle shall have rubber bumper to act as doorstop. Provide
units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard coat hook constructed of stainless steel and shall
project no more than 1-1/8" from face of door. Coat hook shall be secured by theft-
resistant, one-way stainless steel screws.
4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides
of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10155 -3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE _Oft"
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction
contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: The design is based on products as manufactured by Bobrick
Washroom Equipment, Inc., and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE UNITS
A. Basis of Design Product: Series 1048 partitions as manufactured by Bobrick.
B. Door,Panel, and Pilaster Construction:
1. All surfaces shall be high-pressure laminated plastic NEMA LDS-1985 minimum
thickness 0.050" with matte finish. Bond high-pressure plastic laminate to core material
with adhesive specially formulated to prevent delamination. Bond edges prior to bonding
face sheets. No splices or joints in faces or edges shall be acceptable unless there are
laminate material limitations.
a. Color and pattern: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
2. Core Material:
a. Stiles: 45-1b density, industrial grade, resin-impregnated, particle board bonded to
each side of an 11-gauge steel reinforcing core.
b. Panels, doors, screens, and benches: 45-1b density, industrial grade, resin-
impregnated,particle board.
3. Finish Thickness: 1-inch for uniform flush front.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: All hardware to be 18-8,type-304 stainless steel with satin finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10155 -2 05/13/05
Rlwk SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet partitions and screens of the following types:
1. Types: Plastic laminate clad.
2. Toilet Enclosures: Ceiling hung.
3. Urinal Screens: Wall hung.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05500,Metal Fabrications: for overhead support of ceiling hung units.
low 2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: for concealed blocking to receive wall brackets and
support of wall anchored units.
3. Section 10800, Toilet Accessories: for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, and similar
accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch
square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 10155 - 1 05113105
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces.
3.8 PROTECTION OF COATING SYSTEMS
A. Protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION 09965
Cooley Dickinson Hospital REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09965 -6 05113105
mow D. Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits.
E. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings, and techniques in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
F. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DF1'.
G. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect
performance or appearance of coating systems.
H. Stripe paint with brush critical locations on steel such as welds, corners, and edges using
specified primer.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Materials and Surfaces Not Scheduled To Be Coated: Repair or replace damaged materials and
surfaces not scheduled to be coated.
B. Damaged Coatings: Touch-up or repair damaged coatings. Touch-up of minor damage shall be
acceptable where result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces. Recoat entire surface
where touch-up result is visibly different,either in sheen,texture, or color.
C. Coating Defects: Repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions coatings that exhibit
film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating
systems.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspector's Services:
1. Verify coatings and other materials are as specified.
2. Verify surface preparation and application are as specified.
3. Verify DFT of each coat and total DFT of each coating system are as specified using wet
film and dry film gauges.
4. Coating Defects: Check coatings for film characteristics or defects that would adversely
affect performance or appearance of coating systems.
5. Report:
a. Submit written reports describing inspections made and actions taken to correct
nonconforming work.
b. Report nonconforming work not corrected.
C. Submit copies of report to Architect and Contractor.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance
and guidance for surface preparation and application of coating systems.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09965 -5 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT SCHEDULED TO BE COATED
A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated frorn damage during surface
preparation and application of coatings.
B. Immediately remove coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be
coated.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. Prepare gypsum board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt,dust, and other contaminants.
C. Sand joint compound smooth and feather edge.
D. Avoid heavy sanding of adjacent gypsum board surfaces, which will raise nap of paper
covering.
E. Do not apply putty, patching pencils, caulking, or masking tape to gypsum board surfaces to be
painted.
F. Lightly scuff-sand tape joints after priming to remove raised paper nap. Do not sand through
primer.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix and thin coatings, including multi-component materials, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09965 -4 05/13/05
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: The design for high-performance coating system is based on products
as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec), Kansas City, MO 64141; (800) 863-
6321, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein..
22 REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
A. General: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Wall Coating System (SPC): Provide the following fiberglass mat reinforced epoxy system over
properly prepared impact resistant gypsum wall board.
1. System Type: Tnemec"Series 273 Stranlock"mat lay up.
2. Substrate: Gypsum board with"Durabond 90" sanded and finished smooth.
a. Prime Coat: Series 201 Epoxoprime applied at a rate of 200 sq. ft. per gallon (6.0
to 8.0 mils).
b. Bedding Coat: Series 280 Tneme-Glaze applied at a rate of 125sq. ft. per gallon
(10.0 mils).
C. Reinforcement: Series 273 Fiberglass Mat, imbedded and back rolled into Series
280 bedding coat.
d. Second Coat: Series 280 Tneme-Glaze applied at a rate of 150 sq. ft. per gallon.
(10.0 mils).
e. Following cure, sand the surfaces to remove any raised fiber and or excess
material.
f. Intermediate Finish Coat: Series 280 Tneme-Glaze applied at a rate of 150 sq. ft.
per gallon (10.0 mils).
g. Finish Coat: Series 297 Enviro-Glaze roller applied to achieve 2.5 - 3.0 mils dry
film thickness.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09965 -3 05113105
C. Mock-Ups: Prepare 10-foot by 10-foot mock-up for coating system specified using same
materials, tools, equipment, and procedures intended for actual surface preparation and
application.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of mock-ups. Retain mode-ups to establish intended
standards by which coating systems will be judges.
D. Preapplication Meeting: Convene a preapplication meeting two (2) weeks before start of
application of coating systems. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this
Section, including Contractor, Architect, applicator, and manufacturer's representative.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying coating or material name, manufacturer, color name and number,
batch or lot number, date of manufacturer, and mixing and thinning instructions.
B. Store materials in a clean dry area and within temperature range in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Keep containers sealed until ready for use.
C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather:
1. Air and Surface Temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coating within air
and surface temperature range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Surface Temperature: Minimum of 5 degrees above dew point.
3. Relative Humidity: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within relative humidity
range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide ventilation during coating evaporation stage in confined or enclosed areas
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance
1. Furnish two (2) of manufacturer's standard "Touch-Up Kits" for each system and color
applied.
2. Materials shall be furnished with manufacturer's printed label indicating product name,
color name and number.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09965 -2 05113105
SECTION 09965 —REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
13ART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of high-performance coating
systems to items and surfaces scheduled.
1. Specialty wall coating designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "SPC-#".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: for gypsum board substrates to receive
reinforced epoxy wall coating system.
tow 2. Section 09900,Painting: for water-borne epoxy coatings and general field painting,
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, technical data, surface preparation, application instructions, and
other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color samples showing full range of
standard colors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed high-
performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for
Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 09965 - 1 05113105
1) Pittsburgh-Pitt-Glaze 16 Line lombll
2) Water Base Acrylic Epoxy Coating
3) Tnemec - 111 Tneme Tufcoat
4) Pratt and Lambert -Tech-Gard Water Borne Epoxy
5) Benjamin Moore -M43-44 Acrylic Epoxy
6) California-Wilbur &Williams Tuf-Flex 1300 Series
7) Duron -Dura Clad Acrylic Semi-Gloss Epoxy White, 95-205
END OF SECTION 09900
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900-22 0513105
1. 0-25 Class A
B. Special coating shall be a water base acrylic epoxy with a semigloss sheen, as may be provided
by manufacturer and approved by the Architect, applied to the various building surfaces to a
Dry Finn Thickness, (D.F.T.)per coat, as indicated:
1. Masonry Surfaces:
a. First Coat: (D.F.T. 5.5 to 8.0)
1) Pittsburgh- 16-90 Masonry Block Filler
2) Tnemec -54-560 Latex Masonry Filler
3) Pratt and Lambert-Primafil
4) Benjamin Moore -M88 Latex Block filler
5) California -Mason Cote Block Filler 3751
6) Duron -Wall Kote hlterior Alkyd Enamel Undercoater,04-024
b. Second Coat: (D.F.T. 4.0 to 6.0)
1) Pittsburgh-Pitt-Glaze 16 Line
2) Water Base Acrylic Epoxy Coating
3) Tnemec - 11I Tneme Tufcoat
4) Pratt and Lambert -Tech-Gard Water Borne Epoxy
5) Benjamin Moore -M43-44 Acrylic Epoxy
6) California-Wilbur&Williams Tuf-Flex 1300 Series
7) Duron -Dura Clad Acrylic Semi-Gloss Epoxy White, 95-205
C. Third Coat: (D.F.T.4.0 to 6.0)
1) Pittsburgh-Pitt-Glaze 16 Line
2) Water Base Acrylic Epoxy Coating
3) Tnemec - 111 Tneme Tufcoat
4) Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Water Borne Epoxy
5) Benjamin Moore-M43-44 Acrylic Epoxy
6) California-Wilbur&Williams Tuf-Flex 1300 Series
7) Duron -Dura Clad Acrylic Semi-Gloss Epoxy White, 95-205
2. Gypsum Drywall Surfaces and Gypsum Plastered Surfaces
a. First Coat-Primer: (D.F.T. 2.0 to 3.0)
1) Pratt and Lambert-Prohide Latex PVA Primer Z8160
2) Tnemec -51-792 PVA Sealer
3) Pratt and Lambert-Vinyl Acrylic Wall Primer
4) Benjamin Moore-Waterborne Epoxy Primer(M08/MO9)
5) California-Premium 100%Acrylic Enamel Undercoat 54600
6) Pittsburgh-6-603 Speedhide Int/Ext Acrylic Latex Primer
7) Duron-Acrylic Enamel Undercoater,04-123
b. Second Coat: (D.F.T. 4.0 to 6.0)
1) Pittsburgh-Pitt-Glaze 16 Line
2) Water Base Acrylic Epoxy Coating
3) Tnemec - 111 Tneme Tufcoat
4) Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Water Borne Epoxy
5) Benjamin Moore -M43-44 Acrylic Epoxy
6) California-Wilbur&Williams Tuf-Flex 1300 Series
7) Duron -Dura Clad Acrylic Semi-Gloss Epoxy White, 95-205
C. Third Coat: (D.F.T.4.0 to 6.0)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900-21 0513105
C. Benjamin Moore-Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane(423)
d. Pittsburgh-77-Series Water Base Polyurethane
e. Duron -McCloskey Crystal Clear Polyurethane, Gloss
N. Interior Softwood or Poplar Trim (Opaque Finish)
1. First Coat-Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert- Suprime 1
b. California-100% Acrylic Enamel Undercoat or ASAP "30"
C. Benjamin Moore-Alkyd Enamel Underbody (217)
d. Pittsburgh -6-855
C. Duron -Acrylic Enamel Undercoater, 04-123
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California -Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss 563XX
C. Benjamin Moore -Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh - 89 Series,Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wail and Trim
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss 563XX
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh- 89 Series,Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim
e. Duron-Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
O. Existing Acoustical Ceilings (Where indicated to be painted)
1. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Prohide Latex Flat Z8100
b. California-Acrylic Latex Ceiling WHITE 54100
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Wall Satin Ceiling Paint(215)
d. Pittsburgh- 80 Line Wallhide Latex Flat Wall Paint
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Flat Acrylic Latex, 17 series
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Prohide Latex Flat Z8100
b. California-Acrylic Latex Ceiling WHITE 54100
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Wall Satin Ceiling Paint(215)
d. Pittsburgh- 80 Line Wallhide Latex Flat Wall Paint
e. Duron-Plastic Kote Interior Flat Acrylic Latex, 17 series
3.10 EPDXY COATING
A. Exposed interior surfaces marked "Epoxy Coating" in the Room Finish Schedule or as so noted
on the drawings shall receive coatings as hereinafter specified. The special coating shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and shall bear certification that it
meets the following criteria when tested under ASTM Designation E84-79a, "Standard Method
of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials:"
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 09900-20 0513105
d. Pittsburgh 6-7 White Masonry Block Filler
e. Duron- Block Kote Latex Block Filler,08-126
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Velvety Latex
b. Cali fornia--PremiUrn 100% Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel 531XX
C. Benjamin Moore-Aqua Velvet Acrylic Latex Eggshell (319)
d. Pittsburgh 89 Series,Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim
e. Duron- Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel, series 20
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert -Accolade Velvety Latex
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel 531XX
C. Benjamin Moore-Aqua Velvet Acrylic Latex Eggshell (319)
d. Pittsburgh 89 Series, Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim
C. Duron- Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel, series 20
L. Interior Concrete Floors (Where indicated to be painted)
1. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Withstand Latex Floor Enamel Z5100
b. California -Allflor Acrylic Epoxy Floor Paint 530XX
C. Benjamin Moore -Moore's Latex Floor&Patio Enamel (122)
d. Pittsburgh-3-5XX Series
e. Duron -Bradley Acrylic Latex Floor&Patio Coating LFP-4XX
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Withstand Latex Floor Enamel Z5100
b. California-Allflor Acrylic Epoxy Floor Paint 530XX
C. Benjamin Moore -Moore's Latex Floor&Patio Enamel (122)
d. Pittsburgh-3-5XX Series
e. Duron-Bradley Acrylic Latex Floor&Patio Coating LFP-4XX
M. Interior Hardwood Trim(transparent finish)
NOTE: For all open grain wood precede finish coat with one(1)coat of paste filler
1. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tonetic Wood Stain
b. California-Woodtone Interior Wood Stain
C. Benjamin Moore -Benwood Architectural Stain
d. Pittsburgh-Not available
e. Duron-McCloskey Tung Seal Oil Base Wood Stain, 1969 Natural
2. Second Coat: (Sheen: GLOSS)
a. Pratt and Lambert-Acrylic Latex Varnish
b. California -ClearAcrylic Polyurethane Satin Finish
C. Benjamin Moore - Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane (422)
d. Pittsburgh-77-Series Water Base Polyurethane
e. Duron - McCloskey Crystal Clear Polyurethane, Gloss
3. Third Coat:(Sheen: SATIN)
a. Pratt and Lambert-Acrylic Latex Varnish
b. California-ClearAcrylic Polyurethane Satin Finish
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 19 0513105
e. Duron -Interior Acrylic Latex Drywall Primer, 04-124 '""'
3. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Velvety Latex Enamel
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel 531XX
C. Benjamin Moore-Aqua Velvet Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel (319)
d. Pittsburgh 89 Series, Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel, series 20
4. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Velvety Latex Enamel
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel 53 1X
C. Benjamin Moore-Aqua Velvet Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel (319)
d. Pittsburgh 89 Series, Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim
C. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel, series 20
H. Interior Gypsum Drywall Walls and Interior Plaster Walls Scheduled to Receive Wall Covering
1. One Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert -Vapex Primer
b. California-Acrylic Enamel Undercoat
C. Benjamin Moore—Regal First Coat(216)
d. Pittsburgh 6-2 Q.D. Emulsion Sealer
e. Duron -Acrylic Enamel Undercoater, 04-123
I. Gypsum Drywall Ceilings and Plaster Ceilings
1. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Prohide Latex PVA Primer Z8160
b. California-Premium Acrylic Ceiling White 54100
C. Benjamin Moore-No. 216 Regal First Coat
d. Pittsburgh-6-700 Series Speedhide Ultra Interior Wall Flat, 100%Acrylic
e. Duron -Interior Acrylic Latex Drywall Primer, 04-124
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Prohide Latex Flat Z8100
b. California-Premium Acrylic Ceiling White 54100
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Wall Satin Flat Latex(215)
d. Pittsburgh-6-700 Series Speedhide Ultra Interior Wall Flat, 100% Acrylic
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Flat Acrylic Latex, 17 series
J. Pipe Covering
L Painted same as drywall and plaster wall.
K. Exposed Interior Concrete and Masonry
1. First Coat-Filler:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Primafil No. 100
b. California Mason Cote Block Filler 3751
C. Benjamin Moore-Moorcraft Block Filler(285)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 18 0513105
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California -Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore -Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California -Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
E. Exposed Interior Ductwork-Insulated and Wrapped
1. Apply one prime coat and two finish coats of a paint recommended by the approved paint
manufacturer for application on the exposed wrapping material.
F. Interior Exposed Piping
1. First Coat-Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert-SUPRIME 3
b. California-Wilbur and Williams No. 1050, 1051 Combatit Metal Primer
C. Benjamin Moore—Acrylic Metal Primer(M04)
d. Pittsburgh 90-712 Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad "Direct-to-Metal" (DTM)Acrylic Coatings, Semi-Gloss, series
95-06X
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100%Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad "Direct-to-Metal" (DTM) Acrylic Coatings, Semi-Gloss, series
95-06X
G. Interior Gypsum Drywall Walls and Interior Plaster Walls
1. First Coat (At abuse resistant gypsum wallboard and standard gypsum wallboard where
adjacent):
a. United States Gypsum—Sheetrock Brand"First Coat"
2. First Coat(At all other areas,excluding above):
a. Pratt and Lambert-Prohide Latex PVA Primer Z8160
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Enamel Undercoat 54600
C. Benjamin Moore-No. 216 Regal First Coat
d. Pittsburgh 6-603 Speedhide Int/Ext Acrylic Latex Primer
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900 - 17 0513105
B. Interior Metal -Factory Primed (including interior galvanized metal doors and frames)
1. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert -Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore -Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore -Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
C. Interior Galvanized Ductwork
1. First Coat -Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert- Suprime 3 Interior/Exterior Latex Metal Primer
b. California-Wilbur and Williams No. 6906 Grip Coat Vinyl Wash Primer
C. Benjamin Moore—Acrylic Metal Primer(M04)
d. Pittsburgh 90-712 Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel
C. Duron -Dura Clad Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer,White 33-100 ANW,
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 9047X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
D. Interior Aluminum Indicated to be Painted
1. First Coat-Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Z190 Tech Gard Latex Metal Primer
b. California-Wilbur and Williams No. 6906 Grip Coat Vinyl Wash Primer
C. Benjamin Moore—Acrylic Metal Prime(M04)
d. Pittsburgh 90-712 Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad Universal Acrylic Metal Primer,White 33-105
AMIN
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900 - 16 0513/05
e. Duron -Weathershield Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Satin, series 11
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Aqua Royal House and Trim Finish
b. California - 100% House &Trim Satin Gloss 471 XX
C. Benjamin Moore -MoorGlo Latex House and Trim Paint Soft Gloss (096)
d. Pittsburgh - San-Proof Latex Semi-Gloss House and Trim Paint 78 Line
e. Duron -Weathershield Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Satin, series 11
J. Exterior Wood (Transparent Finish)
I. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert- Stainshield Penetrating Rustic Stain
b. California Storm Stain -Semi-transparent
C. Benjamin Moore-Moorwood Semi-transparent Exterior Stain (C070)
d. Pittsburgh 77 Line Alkyd Oil Stain
e. Duron -Dura Stain Oil Semi-Transparent Stain, 28-108
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Stainshield Penetrating Rustic Stain
b. California Storm Stain -Semi-transparent
C. Benjamin Moore-Moorwood Semi-transparent Exterior Stain(C070)
d. Pittsburgh 77 Line Alkyd Oil Stain
e. Duron-Dura Stain Oil Semi-Transparent Stain,28-108
3.9 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Interior Metal -Not Factory Primed
1. First Coat-Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert-SUPRIME 3
b. California Larcoloid Rust Inhibiting Metal Primer
C. Benjamin Moore—Acrylic Metal Primer(M04)
d. Pittsburgh 90-712 Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel
e. Dura-Clad Universal Acrylic Metal Primer,White 33-105
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Accolade Interior Semi Gloss
b. California-Premium 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Benjamin Moore-Regal Aqua Glo 333
d. Pittsburgh 90-47X Int/Ext High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial
Enamel
e. Duron -Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, series 22
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 15 0513105
e. Duron Dura Clad Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer, White 33-100
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California Larcoloid Enamel 211 X
C. Benjamin Moore - -Impervo Alkyd Metal & Wood Enamel (C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron - Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California Larcoloid Enamel 211XX
C. Benjamin Moore - - Impervo Alkyd Metal & Wood Enamel (C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
H. Exterior Exposed Piping
1. First Coat -Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Hi-Performance R.I.P. S455 1/S4556
b. California-Wilbur and Williams No. 1050, 1051 Combatit Metal Primer
C. Benjamin Moore—Alkyd Metal Primer(M06)
d. Pittsburgh-7-85X Industrial Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd White Metal Primer#33-010
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California Larcoloid Enamel 211XX Aft,,
C. Benjamin Moore- -Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel (C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California Larcoloid Enamel 21 1X
C. Benjamin Moore- -Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel (C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
1. Exterior Wood(Opaque Finish)
1. First Coat-Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Prohide Alkyd Exterior Primer C299
b. California-House Paint Primer
C. Benjamin Moore All-Purpose 100%Acrylic Primer(023)
d. Pittsburgh-Speedhide Exterior Wood Primer 6-9
e. Duron -Superior Exterior Alkyd/Oil House Paint Primer, series 08
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Aqua Royal House and Trim Finish
b. California- 100%House &Trim Satin Gloss 471XX
C. Benjamin Moore-MoorGlo Latex House and Trim Paint Soft Gloss (096)
d. Pittsburgh-Sun-Proof Latex Semi-Gloss House and Trim Paint 78 Line
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 14 0513105
D. Exterior Metal -Primed
I. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel 54500
b. California -Larcoloid Enamel
C. Benjamin Moore --Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel (C 133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California-Larcoloid Enamel
C. Benjamin Moore - -Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel (C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
E. Exterior Metal -Galvanized
1. First Coat-Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert -Z190 Tech Gard Latex Metal Primer
b. California-Wilbur and Williams No. 6906 Grip Coat Vinyl Wash Primer
C. Benjamin Moore-M04 Acrylic Metal Primer
d. Pittsburgh 90-712 Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel
e. Duron Dura Clad Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer, White 33-100
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California-Larcoloid Enamel 211XX
C. Benjamin Moore - -Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel (C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
C. Duron-Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel 54500
b. California-Larcoloid Enamel 211XX
C. Benjamin Moore--Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel(C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
F. Exterior Ductwork, Insulated and Wrapped
1. Apply one prime coat and two finish coats of a paint recommended by the approved paint
manufacturer for application on the exposed wrapping material.
G. Exterior Aluminum(Noted on drawings to be painted)
1. First Coat-Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Z190 Tech Gard Latex Metal Primer
b. California-Wilbur and Williams No. 6906 Grip Coat Vinyl Wash Primer
C. Benjamin Moore M16 Zinc Rich Primer
d. Pittsburgh 90-712 Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 13 0513105
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Vapex House Paint
b. California - 100% Acrylic Latex House Paint 450XX
C. Benjamin Moore -Moorgard Latex House Paint(103)
d. Pittsburgh - Sun-Proof Latex House Paint, 72 Lime
e. Duron -Weathershield Exterior Acrylic Flat House Paint, series 34
B. Exterior Concrete Masonry Units
1. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert -Prohide Latex Block Filler Z98
b. California-Mason Cote Exterior Acrylic Block Filler
C. Beniamin Moore-Moorcraft Block Filler(285)
d. Pittsburgh -6-7 Masonry Block Filler
e. Duron -Block Kote Latex Block Filler,08-126
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Vapex House Paint
b. California- 100% Acrylic Latex House Paint 450XX
C. Benjamin Moore -Moorgard Latex House Paint(103)
d. Pittsburgh -72 Line Sun-Proof Latex House Paint
e. Duron -Weathershield Exterior Acrylic Flat House Paint, series 34
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Vapex House Paint
b. California- 100% Acrylic Latex House Paint 450XX
C. Benjamin Moore-Moorgard Latex House Paint(103) M%
d. Pittsburgh-72 Line Sun-Proof Latex House Paint
e. Duron-Weathershield Exterior Acrylic Flat House Paint, series 34
C. Exterior Metal -Not Factory Primed-3 Coats
1. First Coat Primer:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Hi-Performance R.I.P. S455 1/S4556
b. California-Wilbur and Williams No. 1050, 1051 Combatit Metal Primer
C. Benjamin Moore—Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel (M06)
d. Pittsburgh -7-85X Industrial Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer
e. Duron -Dura Clad Alkyd White Metal Primer#33-010
2. Second Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert -Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California Larcoloid Enamel
C. Benjamin Moore-Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel (C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron-Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
3. Third Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel S4500
b. California Larcoloid Enamel
C. Benjamin Moore-Impervo Alkyd Metal &Wood Enamel(C133)
d. Pittsburgh 7-814 Industrial Int/Ext Gloss Oil Enamel
e. Duron-Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel (Urethane Modified), series 12
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 12 0513105
3.6 CONCRETE SEALER APPLICATION
A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
13. Apply by brush, spray, short nap roller, or lambs wool applicator.
C. Do not allow puddling.
D. Apply in two coats.
E. Allow floor to dry thoroughly between applications.
3.7 PAINTED STENCILED IDENTIFICATION
A. Apply painted stenciled identification lettering to the following types of partitions:
1. 2 hour fire rated partitions:
a. Applied identification: 2 HOUR FIRE
2. 1 hour fire rated partitions:
a. Applied identification: 1 HOUR FIRE
3. Smoke barriers:
a. Applied identification: 1 HOUR SMOKE
4. Smoke partitions:
a. Applied identification: SMOKE PARTITION
B. Stencil Characters: 4-inch height.
C. Application:
1. Except for fire rated shaft walls, apply to both sides of partition at 10-foot intervals for
entire length of partition, or once on any partition less than l'-0"feet in length.
2. Locate identification within 12-inches above finished ceiling, or at a height that is easily
observed when accessing through finished ceilings.
3. Apply by spray or brush.
4. Color: Easily identifiable color as approved by Owner.
3.8 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffits
1. First Coat:
a. Pratt and Lambert-Vapex House Paint
b. California- 100%Acrylic Latex House Paint 450XX
C. Benjamin Moore-Moorgard Latex House Paint(103)
d. Pittsburgh-Sun-Proof Latex House Paint, 72 Line
e. Duron-Weathershield Exterior Acrylic Flat House Paint, series 34
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 11 0513105
2. In order to minimize skipping, slightly vary the tint of each coat. Do not apply additional
coats until the completed coat has been inspected and approved. Only the inspected and
approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of coats applied.
3. Sand and dust between enamel coats to remove all defects visible to the unaided eye from
a distance of five feet. On all removable panels and all hinged panels, paint the back sides
to match the exposed sides.
4. Paint and varnish coats shall be well applied, evenly worked out and allowed to dry
before subsequent coat is applied.
5. All Painter's finishes shall be applied with brushes, except:
a. Gypsum wallboard and plaster surfaces to be painted may be roller applied.
b. "Epoxy Coating": Prime coat and all finish coats shall be applied by roller. Roller
shall be high quality, professional type suitable for application of epoxy coating,
nap sizes as follows:
1) Gypsum wallboard and plaster surfaces: 1/4 inch smooth.
2) Masonry and concrete surfaces: 3/8 inch.
C. Concrete sealer applied as specified below.
6. Prime coated butts and prime coated hardware shall be painted in with the door frames.
7. Do not paint metal having plated finish or nonferrous metal, unless primed, shop coated
or otherwise specifically required.
8. Store materials where directed. Oily rags, waste and empty cans shall be removed from
site every night and under no circumstances left in unventilated rooms or allowed to
accumulate. Furnish and lay drop cloths where necessary, and protect floors and adjacent
work from damage.
9. Surfaces to be primed shall be dry, smooth and adequately protected from dampness. Seal
pitch pockets, streaks and knots prior to priming.
B. Drying:
I. Allow sufficient drying time between coats. Modify the period as recommended by the
material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions.
2. Oil-base and oleo-resinous solvent-type paints shall be considered dry for recoating when
the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb,
and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of
the undercoat.
C. Brush application: Brush out and work all brush coats onto surfaces in an even film.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
D. Spray application:
1. Confine spray application to specified areas.
2. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of
brush-applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment for the purpose of
building up film thickness of two coats in one pass.
E. Completed work shall match the approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint all work not in compliance with specified requirements.
Aaw
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900- 10 0513105
3. Do not proceed with painting of wood surfaces until the moisture content of the wood is
12 percent or less as measured by a moisture meter.
C. Preparation of Gypsum Drywall and Plaster Surfaces
1. All holes and cracks in surfaces shall be filled with spackling compound before painting.
Do not use sandpaper on surfaces to the extent that would cut through the plaster top
coating or gypsum wallboard facing. It should be used only as a smoother to blend the
patch or crack to the wall. Before painting plaster or gypsum wallboard, the surfaces
shall first be tested with a moisture testing device especially designed for this purpose.
No paint or sealer shall be applied on surfaces when the moisture content exceeds 8%-9%
as determined by the testing device. Test sufficient areas in each space as often as
necessary to determine the proper moisture content for painting. Plaster surfaces shall be
tested for the presence of alkali, and if present, the plaster shall be allowed to dry until no
alkalinity is indicated by the test.
D. Preparation of metal surfaces:
1. Sand and clean surfaces as required by paint manufacturer's specifications prior to
application of each coat of paint. Where rust or scale is present, it shall be wire brushed
or sandpapered clean before painting. Shop coats of paint that have become matted shall
be cleaned and touched up with primer specified. Before painting, zinc coated metal
surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with turpentine or mineral spirits to remove all
grease and oil, and then wiped thoroughly dry. Remove all crayon or other marks on
piping steel and iron before painting same. Rub down varnished surfaces before
applying other coats.
2. Equipment and items which have a factory applied baked enamel finish and which are
required or indicated to be painted shall have their surfaces roughened with sandpaper,
after which shall be applied a coat of liquid sander just prior to application of paint.
Liquid sander shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
3. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning and then treat the surface
thoroughly with phosphoric acid etch. Remove all etching solution before proceeding.
4. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint.
E. Preparation of concrete for application of sealer:
1. Surfaces must be clean, dry and free of all loose dirt, oil, wax, sealers, curing and parting
compounds and other foreign matter.
2. New concrete shall be thoroughly set and dry(28 days minimum).
3.5 PAINT APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Do not apply Painter's finish to any surface when the air or surface temperature is below
50 degrees Fahrenheit, above 90 degrees Fahrenheit or when the Relative Humidity is 85
percent or higher.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900-9 0513105
may properly commence. Verify that painting may be completed in strict accordance with the
original design and with the manufacturers'recommendations as approved by the Architect.
B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been
fully resolved.
3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations.
13. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
C. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free
from foreign materials and residue.
D. Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as required
during the application of materials. Do not stir into the material any film and, if necessary,
strain the material before using.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Spaces shall be clean, free from dust and rubbish, and well lighted before applying any
paint. No Painter's finish shall be applied in any place not closed in, protected from draft
and dust, or not well lighted.
2. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect.
3. Remove all removable items which are in place and are not scheduled to receive paint
finish, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting
operations.
4. Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the removed items by
using workmen skilled in the necessary trades.
5. Clean each surface to be painted prior to applying paint or surface treatment.
6. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents of low toxicity and a flash
point in excess of 100 degrees F,prior to start of mechanical cleaning.
7. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall onto wet newly painted surfaces.
B. Preparation of wood surfaces:
1. Clean all wood surfaces until they are free from dirt, oil, and all other foreign substance.
2. Smooth all finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sandpaper. Where
so required, use varying degrees of coarseness in sandpaper to produce a uniformly
smooth and unmarred wood surface.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900-8 0513105
B. Apply painter's finish to surfaces as indicated in the Room Finish Schedule and the Contract
Drawings.
C. In existing rooms and areas where alterations occur, all surfaces which have an existing
painter's finish, and all acoustical ceilings, shall be washed and given 2 coats of a painter's
finish.
1. Surfaces to receive painter's finish include, but are not limited to walls, ceilings, metal
frames, all wood surfaces, inside surfaces of exterior windows, metal and wood doors,
and all items included in the Paint Schedule.
2. The finish to be applied shall be as indicated in the Painting Schedules for the type of
surface to be finished. In the event a material is not listed, apply a new finish to match the
existing finish.
3. When painting existing disturbed surfaces, paint the entire surface, terminating as
follows:
a. Walls: at the nearest intersection by a wall not in the same plane.
b. Gypsum or Plaster Ceilings: entire ceiling within a space or room; in corridors or
passages,to the nearest wall intersection.
D. Surfaces to receive painter's finish:
1. Except for surfaces which are excluded from receiving a painter's finish, it is the intent
that all surfaces, existing and new, in rooms and spaces indicated in the Room Finish
Schedule, shall receive painter's finish as specified herein.
2. Apply painter's finish to disturbed surfaces as specified above.
E. The following items shall be field painted
1. HVAC. items:
a. All HVAC wall registers and grilles except those with a clear anodized aluminum
finish. Registers which are to be painted shall receive two sprayed coats of paint.
b. HVAC through wall incremental units.
C. Fin tube radiation covers
2. All electrical panels located in walls which are scheduled or indicated to be painted,
epoxy coating or receive wall covering.
3. Access panels.
4. Electrical Outlet Strips.
5. Plug molds
6. Emergency lights
7. Fire extinguisher and fire accessory cabinets; all exposed to view surfaces.
8. Electrical ductwork in areas which are painted.
3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection: Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work
of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900 -7 0513105
B. It shall be understood that the first quality products of one manufacturer shall be used for all
coats of paint for the entire project. No deviation from this understanding will be permitted
without specific authorization, in writing, by the Architect.
C. Oil: Other than finishing oil, shall be pure raw linseed oil, well seasoned.
D. Turpentine: Shall be Spirits of Turpentine meeting the requirements of Specifications ASTM
D13-51.
E. Spackling Compound: Shall be ready mixed spackling compound as manufactured by
Savogram, Synkaloid, Rutland or United Gilsonite Laboratories.
I;. Provide paints of durable and washable quality. Do not use paint materials which will not
withstand normal washing as required to remove pencil marks, ink, ordinary soil, and similar
material without showing discoloration, loss of gloss, staining, or other damage.
G. Colors and glosses: The Architect will select colors to be used in the various types of paint
specified and will be sole judge of acceptability of the various glosses obtained from the
materials proposed to be used in the Work. Tinting colors shall be Universal fluid tinting colors
manufactured by the paint manufacturer of the paint being applied.
H. Undercoats and thinners: Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the
finish coat. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and use only to the
recommended limits. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner as parts of a
unified system of paint finish.
2.3 CONCRETE SEALER
A. "Crete Seal" clear water-based urethane acrylic sealer as manufactured by Silpro Masonry
Systems Inc.,Ayer,MA(800)343-1501.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation
of the work of this Section, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and as selected
by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Apply all products by means as specified herein and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions. Apply paints and varnishes to a Dry Film Thickness for each coat as
indicated in the manufacturer's written instructions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package' —2323 09900-6 0513105
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Surface temperatures: Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to
be painted and the surrounding air temperature are below 45 degrees F, unless otherwise
permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions as approved by the Architect.
B. Weather conditions: Do not apply paint when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to
damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions as
approved by the Architect. Applications may be continued during inclement weather within
the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of the work, furnish and deliver the following materials to the
Owner's representative for future maintenance:
1. One gallon can of each color of finish coat of each type of paint used for exterior and
interior paint application.
2. One gallon can of paint and one quart of hardener for each color of finish coat of Water
Based Epoxy.
3. Paint containers shall be furnished with manufacturer's printed label indicating paint
series. Label each container with manufacturer's paint formula and paint name.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Products listed are those of Benjamin Moore & Co., Montvale, NJ
07645; (201) 573-9600. Only products manufactured or furnished by the manufacturer listed
herein shall be used on the project. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS
A. All materials used on the work shall be exactly as hereinafter specified in brand and quality. No
claim as to the unsuitability or unavailability of any material specified or unwillingness to use
same, or the inability to produce first class work with same, will be entertained by the Architect
unless such claims are made in writing to the Architect prior to receipt of bids. All paint,
varnish, enamels, stains, paste fillers, linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and similar materials shall
be delivered in the original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. All materials shall
be used only as specified by the manufacturer's directions label on the container.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900-5 0513105
I. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work IOWA,
of this Section, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements and the
materials and methods needed for their execution, and who shall direct all work
performed under this Section.
2. Provide adequate numbers of workmen skilled in the necessary crafts and properly
informed of the methods and materials to be used.
D. Paint coordination:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be
used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata.
3. Upon request, furnish information relative to the characteristics of the specific finish
materials to ensure that compatible prime coats are used.
4. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers, or remove the primer and reprime as
required.
5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating
systems over prime coating supplied under other Sections.
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery of materials: Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new, and unopened
containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label showing at least the following
information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Federal Specification number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's stock number.
4. Manufacturer's name.
5. Contents by volume for major constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application'instructions.
B. Storage of materials: Provide proper storage to prevent damage to, and deterioration of, paint
materials.
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' — 2323 09900 -4 0513105
3. For information only, submit two copies of manufacturers' specifications, including paint
analysis and application instructions for each material. Indicate by transmittal that a copy
of each manufacturer's instructions has been distributed to the applicator.
C. Colors, Samples and Schedules:
1. Colors: The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance of the
Painter and reserves the right to select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces
throughout the work and to vary the color schemes.
2. Twenty-five percent of all wall surfaces which are to be painted or which are to receive
"Epoxy Coating" shall have deep accent colors, of which one wall surface in any room,
area or space shall be finished with an accent color.
3. Samples: Provide samples of manufacturer's latest color chips for selection by the
Architect. Before beginning work, prepare for approval a sample of each color and finish
required. Such approved samples shall constitute standards for color and finish for
acceptance or rejection of completed work. Make samples 8 x 10 inches in size and upon
materials corresponding with those to be finished in the building. Furnish sufficient
samples until approval has been obtained. After-approval, two (2)record samples of each
kind and color, properly identified with formula, manufacturer's name, brand and address
shall be furnished to the Architect.
4. Schedule: A product schedule shall be submitted to the Architect for approval in
accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule shall list all materials proposed
for use on the project together with manufacturer's specifications and shall follow the
format used in the schedule of this section of the specifications, listing the manufacturer's
products together with the surfaces over which they are to be applied.
5. Before proceeding with the work, finish one entire room for approval of the Architect
using previously approved colors and materials. The room shall include at least one wall
with Epoxy Coating. Upon completion of the painting of the sample room, the Architect,
accompanied by a representative of the paint manufacturer, shall inspect the room for
conformance with the specification for applied materials. After approval, this room shall
serve as standard for all painted and stained work.
6. Should the sample room not be approved after inspection, provide additional coats of
paint or Epoxy Coatings as required until such time as the areas are approved by the
Architect.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. VOC Compliance
1. In the event a specified product is not in compliance with the VOC. requirements of the
regulatory agency having jurisdiction, provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, an
equal product, as approved by the Architect, and meeting all such requirements.
B. Products: Only those products specified herein shall be used in the work of this section.
C. Qualifications of workmen:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900-3 0513105
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A* of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01045, Cutting and Patching.
2. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications: Shop painting or prime coating of miscellaneous
metal items.
3. Section 05511, Metal Stairs: Shop painting or prime coating of steel stair and rails.
4. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Millwork to be field finished under this Section.
5. Section 06402, Interior Architectural Woodwork: Factory finishing of wood casework
trim.
6. Section 08113, Steel Fumes: Shop priming of metal frames.
7. Section 08211, Flush Wood Doors; Factory finish of new flush wood doors.
8. Section 08330, Overhead Coiling Doors; shop priming of service door.
9. Section 09965,Fiberglass Reinforced Epoxy Coating: specialized wall coating system.
10. Division 15, Mechanical: Coding of pipes, ducts and conduit.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. "Paint" as used herein, means coating systems materials including primers, emulsions, epoxy,
enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or
finish coats.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems
and Specifications.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300—Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Submit the following manufacturer's data:
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this
Section.
2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with
specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900-2 0513105
SECTION 09900 -PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Paint and finish the exterior and interior exposed surfaces listed on the Painting Schedule in Part
3 of this Section, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
13. Provide concrete flooring sealer in locations as indicated in the Room Finish Schedule.
C. Refinishing existing wood doors.
D. Applied painted stenciled lettering on designated partitions.
E. Work Not Included:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and
inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces,
and duct shafts.
2. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze,
and similar finished materials are not required to be painted under this Section except as
*. may be so specified.
3. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve
operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts; unless otherwise indicated.
4. Do not paint over required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name,
or nomenclature plates.
5. The following items do not require painting, except as indicated otherwise:
a. Catch basin and manhole covers, gratings and frames
b. All nonferrous or plated metal surfaces
C. Factory finished acoustical surfaces (except existing acoustical surfaces in areas as
hereinafter specified to be painted.)
d. All piping, ducts and conduit which are not exposed in the finished work
e. All exposed piping, ducts and conduit located in Mechanical and Utility Rooms
which are not scheduled to be painted.
f. All items and equipment with factory finish, except where primed only for finish
painting or where factory finish is required to be painted out to match adjacent wall
or ceiling finish
g. Gratings for exterior areaways.
h. Exterior galvanized steel pipe rails with factory applied vinyl coating.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PAINTING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09900 - 1 0513105
4. Secure starter plank with finishing nails through face at groove into the perimeter
row blocking. Secure side of plank with clip and framing screw into metal furring channel.
5. Install tongue of successive planks into previous installed board groove. Secure with clip.
6. Trim finisher plank to correct width, secure with finishing nails through face at groove
into perimeter blocking.
F. Ceiling Installation:
1. Coordinate work with drywall suspension grid system installed under Section 09250 -
Gypsum Board Assemblies.
2. Install acoustical insulation between suspension members.
3. Cut plank to lengths required. Ensure holes in each plank are identically spaced from
ends, so that the hole pattern will match on all planks.
4. Secure starter plank with finishing nails through face at groove into the perimeter
blocking. Secure side of plank with clip and framing screw into bottom flange of
suspension system.
5. Install tongue of successive planks into previous installed board groove. Secure with clip.
6. Trim finisher plank to correct width, secure with finishing nails through face at groove
into perimeter blocking.
G. Panel Penetrations: Provide holes for sprinkler heads, light fixtures, and other services that
penetrate the acoustical wood panels.
H. Installation Tolerances: As follows:
AOW 1. Variation from Level and Plumb: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10'-0".
2. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch wide.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean surfaces free from oil, fingerprints, marking as and other disfigurements.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, to ensure that acoustical wood panels are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged sections, touch up damaged finish, in a manner approved by Architect,before
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09845
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09845 -5 05113105
D. Mounting Clips: Manufacturer's standard mounting clip; "Solo-1" for attachment to steel wall
furring strips and ceiling suspension system.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including wall and ceiling framing system, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting installation of acoustical wood panel system.
P. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each area and establish layout to balance border widths at opposite edges of each area.
Avoid using less-than-half-width planks at starter and finishing planks.
B. Acoustical wood panel material shall be allowed to stabilize on site for a minimum of 72 hours
on site prior to installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical wood wall and ceiling panels in locations indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop drawings.
B. Install with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other
panels,faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.
C. Comply with acoustical wood panel manufacturer's written instructions for installation of panels
using type of concealed clip mounting. Anchor panels securely to supporting substrate.
D. Install trim boards to create pattern as shown on the interior elevations and reflected ceiling
plans.
E. Wall Installation:
1. Coordinate work with perimeter wood blocking installed under Section 06100 - Rough
Carpentry, and metal furring strips spaced 24-inches on center installed under Section
09250- Gypsum Board Assemblies.
2. Install acoustical insulation between furring channels.
3. Cut plank to lengths required. Ensure holes in each plank are identically spaced from
ends, so that the hole pattern will match on all planks.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09845 -4 05113105
B. Deliver materials and panels in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry
place-with adequate air circulation.
C. Handle components to prevent panel edge damage or any other damage to components.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install acoustical wood panels until building is
enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature
not to exceed 80 deg F and relative humidity between 35 and 55 percent during the remainder of
the construction period.
B. Coordination: Coordinate work with installers of related work including, but not necessarily
limited to, building insulation, gypsum drywall, mechanical systems and electrical systems.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the acoustical wood paneling is based on products as
manufactured by Decoustics, Getville, NY 800 560-5758, as represented by Shannon Corp.,
Sudbury, MA (978)443-4911, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Acoustical Wood Panels: Manufacturer's Class A fire rated acoustical wood plank product
consisting of a perforated medium density fiberboard (MDF) core with a ribbed natural wood
veneer laminated to the face and an acoustically transparent black mat laminated to the back
side.
1. Product: "Solo"r'm."by Decoustics.
2. Thickness: 21/32-inch thick with tongue and groove edges.
3. Size: 7-9/16 -inch wide by 120-inch lengths.
4. Profile: Solo 8" with ribs spaced 5/16-inches on center.
5. Veneer: Maple, quarter sliced, slip matched.
6. Finish: Custom stained to match Architects control sample.
B. Solid Trim: Provide perimeter trim as detailed from Class A fire rated MDF core material with
wood veneer and finish to match panel products.
C. Acoustical Insulation Material: 1-inch thick, glass-fiber board, 6-7 pcf density, dimensionally
stable, molded rigid board, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50,respectively.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09845 -3 05113105
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades. Include the following:
1. Elevations and reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
surface-mounted items.
2. Plans of each room or space; indicate suspension system layout and related dimensioning,
junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, and interrelation of mechanical and
electrical items related to the system
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Large scale installation details of
special conditions.
1). Samples for Verification: For the following products. Prepare Samples from same material to
be used for the Work.
1. Panel: 12-inch square sample showing edge profile, core, and finish.
E. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements,
including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm with
B. Source Limitations: To ensure proper interface and color match, all acoustical wood wall and '
ceiling panels, and associated grid components shall be produced or supplied by a single
manufacturer.
C. Acoustical Rating: Panel system tested in accordance with ASTM C423 (Type A mounting)
with a resultant Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC) of 0.95.
D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide fire treated panel assemblies with surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing full assemblies of identical materials and construction
representative of specified installation in accordance with ASTM E 84, with the following
results.
1. Classification: UL rated Class A.
2. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
3. Smoke Developed: 75 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with fabric and acoustical wall panel manufacturers' written instructions for minimum
and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09845 -2 05113105
SECTION 09845 -ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANELS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide custom wood veneer clad acoustical panels where shown on the Drawings, in Finish
Schedules, and as specified herein.
1. Acoustical wood wall panels.
2. Acoustical wood ceiling panels.
B. Provide all related accessories, fasteners, and other materials necessary for secure anchorage of
panels to wall substrate and overhead structure, and as needed for a complete and proper
installation.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry: for wood blocking.
2. Section 06200,Finish Carpentry: for non-acoustic wood veneer wall paneling.
3. Section 07210, Building Insulation: for building insulation,except as specified herein.
4. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: furring strips for direct wall mount systems,
drywall suspension system for direct mount ceiling system.
5. Section 09510, Acoustical Ceilings: for acoustical ceiling panels of mineral fiber and
fiberglass set in standard suspension systems.
6. Section 09841, Acoustical Wall Panels: for fabric clad acoustical wall panels.
7. Division 15 -Mechanical: for work to be coordinated with ceiling.
8. Division 16 - Electrical: for additional or larger size wires, as required to properly
support lighting fixtures, and fire alarm equipment mounted in ceiling.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, panel edge, core material, and installation instructions, and other
data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09845 - 1 05113105
D. Installation Tolerances: As follows:
1. Variation from Level and Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
2. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 Hich wide.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.
B. Clean panels with fabric facing, on completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign
materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, to ensure that acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
B. Replace acoustical wall panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by
Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09841
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09841 -5 05113105
4. Material: 60%polyolefin,40% polyester with Teflon finish and acrylic backing.
5. Flammability: ASTM E-84 (Steiner Tunnel Test) Class A rated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabric-Wrapped Panels: Panel construction consisting of facing material adhered to face,edges
and back border acoustically transparent adhesive.
13. Fabric Facing: Stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples,
wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other foreign matter. Applied with visible surfaces
fully covered. Corners shall be tailored and heat fused.
C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 iiich for the following:
1. Thickness.
2. Overall length and width.
D. Mounting Devices: Concealed metal Z-clips on back of panel, recommended to support weight
of panel, designed to allow for panel removal. Resin harden areas of core for attachment of
mounting devices.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard two-part panel clips, with one part of each clip
mechanically attached to back of panel and the other part to wall substrate.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fabric, substrates, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical
wall panels.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top
edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work
accurately at borders and at penetrations.
B. Comply with acoustical wall panel manufacturer's written instructions for installation of panels
using type of concealed Z-clip mounting. Anchor panels securely to supporting substrate.
C. Match and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent panels.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09841 -4 05113105
I. The Contractor and systems manufacturer shall certify in writing, individually and
collectively, that in the event of default of the Contractor, the systems manufacturer shall
assume full responsibility of all warranties referred, implied, and specified herein.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: Provide products by the following:
I. Wall Panels: Sound Concepts Canada, Inc.,Winnipeg, Manitoba; (204) 783-6297.
2. Fabric: Maharam, Hauppauge, NY11788; (800) 645-3943.
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Acoustical Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard wall panel system consisting of seamless
fabric facing over fiberglass panel core.
1. Product: "Reflect -High Impact Resistant Panels -H.I.R."by Sound Concepts.
B. Core Material: 1-inch thick, glass-fiber board, 6-7 pcf density, dimensionally stable, molded
rigid board, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively.
C. Face Layer: Tackable, impact-resistant, high-density face layer, 1/8-inch thick, 18-20 pcf
fiberglass sheet laminated to face of core.
D. Tackable, Impact-Resistant, High-Density Face Layer: 1/8-inch thick layer of compressed
molded glass-fiber board with a minimum nominal density of 16 to 1.8 lb/cu. ft. laminated to
face of core
E. Mounting Method: Two-piece metal Z-clip system.
F. Panel Properties:
1. Panel Thickness: 1-1/8-inch.
2. Panel Size: As indicated on the Drawings (48-inch x 120-inch maximum).
3. Panel Edge and Corner Detail: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard
options.
G. Panel Fabric (FWC):
1. Fabric: "Glint,No. 901380"as manufactured by Maharam.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by the Architect.
3. Width: 54-inch.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09841 -3 05113105
E. Maintenance Data: For acoustical wall panels to include in maintenance manuals. Include ANWN,,
fabric manufacturers'written cleaning and stain-removal recommendations.
1.4 QIJALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain acoustical wall panels through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Acoustical Rating: Panel system tested in accordance with ASTM C423 (Type A mounting)
with a resultant Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC) of 0.95.
C. Fire performance characteristics: Fabric panel assembly tested in accordance with ASTM E 84
(80a) with gypsum wall board substrate,UL rated Class A, with the following results.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 400 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with fabric and acoustical wall panel manufacturers' written instructions for minimum
and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Deliver materials and panels in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry
place with adequate air circulation.
C. Protect panel edges from crushing and impact.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Panel Fabric Material: Full-size units equal to three (3) percent of panel fabric material
for each type,pattern and color installed.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's 5 year warranty which shall contain provisions that installation shall
remain dimensionally stable, without sag for the warranty period.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09841 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 09841 -ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide tackable, fabric clad acoustical wall panels where shown on the Drawings, in Finish
Schedules, and as specified herein.
1. Acoustical wall panels, designed as "AWC".
B. Provide all related accessories, fasteners, and other materials necessary for secure anchorage of
panels to substrate, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06402, Architectural Woodwork: for tacksurfaces built-in to custorn casework.
2. Section 09720,Wall Covering: for adhesive applied fabric wall coverings.
3. Section 09900, Painting: for prime painting of substrates to receive acoustical wall
panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, panel edge, core material, and installation instructions, and other
data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products. Prepare Samples from same material to
be used for the Work.
1. Fabric: Full-width by 36-inch-long Sample from dye lot to be used for the Work.
2. Panel: 12-inch square sample showing edge profile,corner, and finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09841 - 1 05/13/05
0000, B. Make a plumb line for the first sheet at 48 inches from the inside corner, unless indicated
otherwise.
C. Make all cuts as required for protrusions and all wall mounted items. Scribe edges to any inside
corner and ceiling.
D. Wipe the fiber-backed side thoroughly with a clean dry cloth prior to the application of
adhesive.
E. Using textured roller, apply an even coat of the adhesive to the entire back of the sheet. After
the whole sheet has been covered, apply a second coat around the perimeter of the sheet. Do not
allow adhesive to dry.
F. Apply trim to sheet and immediately install sheet. Apply a continuous, thin bead of silicone
sealant behind wainscot and outside corner trims.
G. Provide 1/16-inch vertical space between adjacent sheets. Space between sheets shall be straight
and even throughout its length.
H. Once sheet is in position, smooth it out by using wallpaper hanging brush provided by the
factory. Brush from the center toward the edges making sure the entire sheet has made contact
with the wall.
I. Provide color match sealant at butt joints between sheets; between top cap and wall; between
bottom of sheet and floor base.
3.5 INSTALLATION,WALL PANELS
A. Install wall panels in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.
B. Provide adhesive mount option for mounting of wall panels to substrate using construction
grade adhesive supplied by panel manufacturer.
3.6 CLEANING
A. As the work progresses, clean the surplus adhesive from plastic wall covering surfaces and
adjacent surfaces with mild detergent in luke warm water, using a sponge. Wipe dry with a
clean cloth.
B. Visually inspect to verify that installed material is secure, smooth, clean, without wrinkles.
C. At the completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's clean-up
and maintenance instructions.
END OF SECTION 09725
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PLASTIC WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09725 -5 05113105
I. Provide trim at inside and outside corners.
C. Adhesives and Sealers: Adhesive and sealer types as recommended by the wall covering
manufacturers for the wall substrate over which the material is to be installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Where painted surfaces occur, test for adhesion by applying masking tape or Scotch tape to the
painted surface and remove by pulling off sharply. Do not install wall covering if paint peels off
wall.
C. Make moisture content tests of substrate by use of an electronic moisture meter approved by the
Architect, and verify that substrate moisture content does not exceed five percent.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris dust and loose'
particles.
B. Where painted surfaces occur,lightly sand walls.
C. Prime wall surfaces with 100 percent acrylic paint primer. Do not use primer containing PVCa.
1. Apply primers using standard short nap roller, supplied by the factory. Room temperature
shall be above 40 degrees F.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as
approved by the Architect, using only the approved mounting materials, and locating all
components firmly into position, level and plumb.
3.4 INSTALLATION, SHEET
A. Install sheet wall covering from 1/2-inch above floor slab to height indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PLASTIC WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09725 -4 05113105
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: Provide products as manufactured by the following:
1. Construction Specialties, Inc. (C/S), Cranford, NJ 07016; (201) 272-5200.
2.2 PLASTIC WALL COVERING
A. Sheet Wall Covering (PWC-1): Semi-rigid vinyl/acrylic "Acrovyn" impact-resistant plastic
sheets with pebblette texture finish manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. Material
shall be furnished by the manufacturer in 4 foot by 10 foot flat sheets. Roll material, or sheets
cut from rolls, will not be accepted.
1. Sheet thickness: .060--inches
B. Wall Panels (PWC-2): Semi-rigid, .040-inch thick, vinyl/acrylic "Acrovyn" impact-resistant
plastic sheets with texture finish factory bonded to face side of 3/8-inch thick particle board
core as manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. Backside of panels to be laminated with
a moisture resistant vapor barrier.
I. Texture: Pinstripe,
2. Edge Detail: Bevel edge.
C. Panel Characteristics:
1. Fire Hazard Classification: Product shall be as tested by Underwriters' Laboratories
Tunnel Test ASTM E-84 and shall meet all requirements for Class 1 construction.
2. Impact Strength: Minimum Izod notched impact strength of 8 pounds per inch of notch
when tested as .125 inch thickness in accordance with ASTM D-256.
3. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Provide product with chemical and stain resistance in
accordance with ASTM D1308.
D. Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet. Color integral through the full
depth of material.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation.
B. Moldings: Supplied in matching or contrasting colors as selected by the Architect.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PLASTIC WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09725 -3 05/13/05
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled work inen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wall protection material through one source from a
single manufacturer.
C. Mockups: At areas on the site where approved by the Architect provide mock-up panels of the
work of this Section.
1. Provide one mock-up panel for each type, color and pattern of plastic wall covering used
on the Work.
2. The mock-up panels, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points for
comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purpose of acceptance
or rejection.
3. The mock-ups may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated into the finished Work,
when so approved by the Architect.
4. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely
demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work
of this Section.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to
show manufacturer.
B. Store materials in original, undamaged packaging in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight and
exposure to the elements. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less 40°F than
and a maximum of 100°F.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install plastic wall covering components until the space is
enclosed and weatherproof and ambient temperature at time of installation is between 65 - 75°F
and maintained for not less than 48 hours after installation. Do not install plastic wall covering
if relative humidity exceeds 80 percent.
B. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65-75°F for at least 24 hours prior to
beginning the installation.
C. Do not expose wall panels to direct sunlight during or after installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PLASTIC WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09725 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 09725 -PLASTIC WALL COVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide plastic wall covering in sheet and panel form where shown on the Drawings, indicated
in Finish Schedules, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1. Plastic wall covering in sheet form designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "PWC-1".
2. Plastic wall covering in panel form designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "PWC-2".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 09720,Wall Covering: for vinyl wall covering in roll form.
2. Section 09900, Painting: Prime painting of wall covering substrate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, material descriptions, components and
accessories, finishes and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified
requirements.
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide 6-inch by 8-inch samples of wall covering, showing
the full range of color and texture variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material
to be used for the Work.
D. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and methods for
vinyl/acrylic covers to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PLASTIC WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09725 - 1 05113105
D. Verify that installed wall covering meets or exceeds the quality of installation achieved in the
approved mock-up panels.
END OF SECTION 09720
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09720-6 05/13/05
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sequence:
1. Use wall covering fabric in consecutive numerical sequence of their manufacture.
2. Place wall covering panels sequentially in the exact order they are cut from the roll,
including for filling all spaces above doors and above or below windows and similar
locations.
C. Handle the wall covering in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as
approved by the Architect.
D. Trim additional selvage where required to achieve a color and pattern match at seams.
E. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing adhesive.
F. When overlapping edges and double-cutting through both thicknesses, exercise care to prevent
cutting substrate.
G. Wrap wall covering six inches beyond and outside corners; not cutting at corners except when
color of wall covering selected is different on adjacent walls.
H. Do not permit horizontal seams.
I. Install the wall covering prior to installation of plumbing fixtures,casing,bases, and cabinets.
J. Use stiff bristled brush or flexible broad knife to eliminate air pockets and to secure wall
covering to substrate surfaces.
K. Using a damp sponge, remove excess adhesive from each seam as it is made, wiping clean and
dry with a cloth towel.
3.4 CLEANING
A. As the work progresses, clean the surplus adhesive from wall covering surfaces and adjacent
surfaces.
B. Visually inspect to verify that installed wall covering is secure, smooth, clean, without wrinkles,
and with no gaps or overlaps.
C. Inspect all seams, verifying that precise match has been achieved, and correcting mismatch of
color or pattern as necessary to obtain the Architect's approval.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09720-5 05/13/05
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide a heavy-bodied water-soluble adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the
approved wall covering material.
1. Test adhesive for compatibility with existing substrate.
2. If adhesive is not compatible with existing substrate:
a. Provide other adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the approved
wallcovering.
b. Test alternate adhesive(s) to ensure compatibility with existing substrate.
B. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1. Make moisture content tests of substrate by use of an electronic moisture meter approved
by the Architect, and verify that substrate moisture content does not exceed five percent.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,
oil, grease,incompatible primers, dirt, and dust.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
D. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas
not less than 24 hours before installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09720-4 05113105
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL WALL COVERING (VWC)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide products as listed on the Drawings by the following
manufacturers:
1. Maharam, Hauppauge, NY 11788, (800) 645-3943.
2. Wolf Gordon,Long Island City, NY 11101 (718) 361-6611.
3. MDC/Len-Tex Corporation,North Walpole, NH 03609 (603)445-2342.
4. D.L. Couch, New Castle, IN 47362 (800)433-0790.
B. Style, Color and Pattern: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
C. Fire Retardancy: ASTM E-84, Class A
2.2 FABRIC WALL COVERING(FWC-1)
A. Manufacturer: Carnegie,Rockville Centre, NY 11570(516) 678-6770.
B. Product: "Stria".
1. Color and Pattern: As indicated on the Materials &Finishes Index Sheet.
2. Width: 52-inches wide.
3. Material: 100% Xorel fabric, with applied paper backing material.
C. Fire Retardancy: ASTM E-84,Class A
2.3 FABRIC WALL COVERING(FWC-2)
A. Manufacturer: Wolf Gordon,Long Island City, NY 11101 (718) 361-6611.
B. Product: "Papillon".
1. Width: 54-inches wide.
2. Backing: Acrylic.
3. Color and Pattern: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
C. Fire Retardancy: ASTM E-84, Class A
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09720-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has a minimum of 3 years
experience installing wall covering similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
i.his Project, and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 25 or less.
D. Mock-Ups: At areas on the site where approved by the Architect provide one mock-up panel for
each color and pattern of each type of wall covering used on the Work.
1. Make panels full height by three fabric widths wide.
2. The mock-up panels, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points for
comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purpose of acceptance
or rejection.
3. The mock-ups may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated into the finished Work,
when so approved by the Architect.
4. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely
demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work
of this Section.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Wall Covering: Full-size units equal to five (5) percent, but not less than one (1) full roll
of each type installed
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09720-2 05113105
SECTION 09720 -WALL COVERING
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide the types of wall covering listed below, where shown on the Drawings, or indicated in
Finish Schedule.
I. Vinyl wall covering designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "VWC".
2. Fabric wall covering designated in the Room Finish Schedule as `FWC".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06402, Interior Architectural Woodwork: for fabric wall covering over tackable
surfaces.
2. Section 09725,Plastic Wall Covering: for wall surfacing of semi-rigid plastic sheet.
3. Section 09841, Acoustic Wall Panels: for acoustical wall panels with fabric covering.
4. Section 09900,Painting: Prime painting of wall covering substrate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, data on physical characteristics,
durability, fade resistance, flame-resistance characteristics and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch- long section of wall covering from lot to be
used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern required.
D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WALL COVERING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09720- 1 05/13/05
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installing carpet, remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface
blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. Remove all loose threads that
protrude from carpet surface and vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater
element.
B. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24 hours or
until adhesive is set.
C. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of hldoor
Installations."
END OF SECTION 09680
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CARPETING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09680-7 05113105
1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation."
B. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. Check matching cif carpet- before
cutlirlc and ensure there is no visible variation bet%veen dye lots.
C. Relaxing/Conditioning Carpet - Carpet shall be unrolled and allowed to relax in the installation
area for a minimum of 24 hours at a temperature between 65-95°F. Carpet shall be adequately
protected from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants. To facilitate relaxation, pre-cutting
carpet is recommended.
D. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match Ensure cuts are
straight and true and unfrayed.
E. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive with a 1/8-inch by 1/8-inch V-notch trowel in quantity
recommended by manufacturer after primer application to ensure proper adhesion over full area
of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet. After adequate
open or tack time, lay carpet into the adhesive.
F. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic.
G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous traffic.
H. Roll carpet areas with a 75-100 lb carpet roller to insure uniform bond to substrate and eliminate
any and all air pockets and buckles.
1. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical
surfaces. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled,
leaving no gaps.
J. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. Seams at
doorways must be parallel to door and drop directly under door. Perpendicular seams at
doorways will not be permitted.
K. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet
installation and decrease its life expectancy. Adjoin and seam edges of carpet with a 1/8-inch
bead of acrylic seam sealer. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of
gaps.
L. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at edges and
present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match
within any one area.
M. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces
only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and
flush.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CARPETING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09680-6 05113105
1. Profile: As selected by Architect.
2. Color: Shall be selected by Architect.
D. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential
defects.
B. Verify that alkalinity and moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and
relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials
being used.
1. Obtain copy of and review test results of alkalinity, adhesion and moisture testing of
floors specified in Section 01410-Testing Laboratory Services.
2. Proceed with installation only after substrates are acceptable to the adhesive and flooring
product manufacturers, and the Owner.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with Carpet and Rug Institute standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet
(CRI 104), and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates
indicated to receive carpet installation.
B. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to
proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to thoroughly dry.
C. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet noncumulative.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions,to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
D. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to
acidity and alkalinity.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions
for the following as applicable.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CARPETING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09680-5 05113105
2. Pattern and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
B. Carpet (CPT-2): "Agenda" as manufactured by Monterey Carpets, Santa Ana, CA 92704;
(800) 678-4640.
1. Construction: Multi-level loop pattern with 100% DuPont Antron a XTI D nylon, solution
dyed, 0.125/0.156-inch pile height, 28 oz/sy yarn weight, soil and stain repellant
protection, woven polypropylene primary backing and "Super-Lok It"" enriched latex
secondary backing system, 12 ft widths.
2. Pattern and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
C. Carpet (CPT-3): "Subscriber" as manufactured by Monterey Carpets, Santa Ana, CA 92704;
(800) 678-4640.
1. Construction: Tip sheared, multi-level loop pattern, with 100% DuPont Antron 12 Legacy
type 6,6 yarn dyed nylon fiber, 0.093/0.187-inch pile height, 32 oz/sy yarn weight, soil
and stain repellent protection, woven polypropylene primary backing and "Lifespan-MG"
polyurethane secondary backing system, 12 ft widths.
2. Pattern and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
D. Carpet (CPT-4): "Alpaca"as manufactured by Monterey Carpets, Santa Ana, CA 92704; (800)
678-4640.
1. Construction: Tip sheared, loop pile, with 100% DuPont Antron® Legacy type 6,6 yarn
dyed nylon fiber, 0.218-inch pile height, 39 oz/sy yarn weight, soil and stain repellent
protection, woven polypropylene primary backing and "Lifespan-MG" polyurethane
secondary backing system, 12 ft widths
2. Pattern and Color: Custom color as indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Floor Primer: As recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives:
1. Carpeting: Provide solvent-free, white latex carpet adhesive such as W. W. Henry
Company No. 351, Roberts Company No. 41-0504, or an equal approved by the
Architect,recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the selected carpet.
2. Seam Sealer: Provide seam adhesive such as W. W. Henry Company No. 248, Roberts
Company No. 41-0502, or an equal approved by the Architect and recommended for the
purpose by the manufacturer of the selected carpet.
3. Provide a water-resistant, neoprene latex contact adhesive, as supplied by the
manufacturer of the resilient accessories;Johnsonite#945.
C. Edge Strips: Johnsonite, Flooring Products Division, Johnson Rubber Company, (800) 637-
4995
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CARPETING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09680-4 05113105
C. Maintain fresh air ventilation during installation using exhaust fans, and by operating the
ventilation system at full capacity. Exhaust air to the outside and avoid re-circulation. After
installation, maintain fresh air ventilation for 48-72 hours at normal room temperatures.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Carpet manufacturer shall provide his standard warranty for work under this section. However,
such guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, all other liabilities which the
contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. Certification: A certification provided by the carpet manufacturer shall be furnished to the
Architect stating that the register numbers on the carpet furnished was manufactured according
to the specifications listed herein.
C. The carpet installer shall be required to re-lay any carpet that does not provide an attractive
wrinkle free appearance. The installer shall be required within one year after substantial
completion to return to restretch carpet or to correct any condition due to faulty installation
without charge to the Owner.
D. Replace all defective or improperly installed material within one year after substantial
completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to three (3) percent of the total amount used of each type
and color of carpet installed. Provide sufficient amount of adhesive for above.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPETING(CPT-#)
A. Carpet (CPT-1): "Perspective" as manufactured by Atlas Carpet Mills, Inc., Los Angeles, CA
90040; (800)372-6274.
1. Construction: Interloop with 100% DuPont Antron® Legacy type 6,6 yarn dyed nylon
fiber, 0.203-inch pile height, 36 oz/sy yarn weight, soil and stain repellent protection,
polypropylene primary backing and Action Bac® secondary backing system, 12.5 ft.
widths.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CARPETING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09680-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installer: Carpet installation shall be done only by an installer having
experience on similar installations and employing only experienced carpet layers skilled in this
work.
B. Carpet shall conform with or pass tests of the following Standards:
1. ASTM D-2859 (Methenamine Reagent Pill Test).
2. ASTM E-648 (Flooring Radiant Panel Test): Class I(Minimum Average CRF of 0.48).
3. NBS Smoke Chamber Test: Maximum average of 450.
4. AATCC-134 (Electrostatic Propensity): Maximum electrostatic generation below level of
human sensitivity.
C. Flooring system including floor covering material and adhesives shall have the ability to
withstand water vapor transmission levels up to 3 lbs/24 hours per 1,000/sf and pH levels up to
9.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All carpet shall be delivered to the job site in original mill wrappings with each roll having
register number tags attached or register number stenciled on bale and intact. Store under cover
in well ventilated spaces as soon as delivered, protect from damage, dirt, stains, and moisture.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
C. Assume all responsibility for carpet and its installation until final acceptance of building.
D. Carpet shall be stored in a clean, dry room or area, protected against damage, dirt and
construction activity until its installation.
E. Protect carpet after installation by means of drop cloths or heavy reinforced, non-staining Kraft
paper during work. At the completion of work, the covering shall be removed and the carpet
left in perfect condition.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceilings and overhead work,tested, approved and completed.
B. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CARPETING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09680-2 05113105
SECTION 09680 -CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL,
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes broadloom carpet.
I. Carpeting is designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "CPT-#".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410,Testing Laboratory Services: Moisture and pH testing concrete floors.
2. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. Section 03515, Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayment.
ro"'""' 4. Section 09651, Resilient Tile Flooring and Base: for resilient base at carpeting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance and other data
needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements for each type of product
indicated. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings clearly indicating the location of all seams, method of
joining seams, direction of carpet, type of adhesive to be used and method of integrating edge
strips.
D. Samples for Verification: For each product specified, and for each color and texture required.
Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and
designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Obtain the Architect's approval of these
Samples prior to installation.
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include methods for
maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and
manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CARPETING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09680- 1 05113105
D. Finish or Sealing Coats: After body coat has cured sufficiently, apply grout and finish coats of
type recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish matching approved sample and
in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.
1. Final finish coat shall be in color and skid retardant profile in conformance with the
Contract Documents and the approved sample.
2. Finished floor shall be 3/16-inch thick, uniform in color and free of trowel marks.
3.8 APPLICATION, COMP-2:
A. Broadcast Coats: Apply liberal application of clear epoxy resin mixture, allow to self-level,
broadcast(by hand or spray machine)ceramic coated quartz aggregate, allow to set to hardness,
sweep off excess unbonded aggregate and repeat process to achieve total nominal thickness of
1/16"-1/8".
B. Finish or Sealing Coats: After quartz filled broadcast coats have cured sufficiently, apply finish
coats of type recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish matching approved
submittal sample and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.
1. Finished floor shall be 1/16"-1/8" thick,uniform in color and free of trowel marks.
C. Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations shown to form cove base height
as indicated. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions and details including taping, mixing,
priming, troweling, sanding, and top-coating of cove base.
3.9 CURING,PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Cure epoxy resin composition flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions, taking
care to prevent contamination during application stages and before completing curing process.
Close application area for a minimum of 24 hours.
END OF SECTION 09671
tow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COMPOSITION FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09671-7 05113105
B. Apply initial troweled adhesion waterproofing coating to floor and vertical base surfaces of
walls and concrete pads.
C. Carry waterproofing membrane onto floor drain flange to provide watertight seal between
flange and flashing collar.
D. Embed reinforcing fabric into adhesion waterproofing coating.
E. Trowel or brush apply additional waterproofing coating to fill voids or pinholes.
3.6 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. System shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
B. General: Apply each component of epoxy resin composition flooring system according to
manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic flooring surface of thickness
indicated.
C. Feather edge where composition flooring abuts dissimilar material. Provide metal edge strips at
locations indicated or where flooring system meets other flooring that finishes flush with epoxy
resin composition flooring.
D. Provide metal edge strips at locations indicated or where composition flooring abuts dissimilar
material. Feather edge for flush finish where composition floor meets other flooring material.
•nk
E. Allow surfacing to set undisturbed for a minimum period of 48 hours. Maintain temperature at
50 degrees F minimum until floor surfacing has completely cured.
F. Finished surfaces shall be flush, true to plane, and shall be level within permissible degree of
tolerance 1/8-inch in 10'-0" in any direction.
3.7 APPLICATION, COMP-1:
A. Bond Coat: Apply bond coat over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate.
B. Body Coat: Over primer, trowel apply epoxy mortar mix at nominal 1/8-inch thickness; hand or
power trowel. When cured, sand or grind if necessary to remove trowel marks and roughness.
C. Cove Base:
1. Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces to form cove base to height indicated with a
featheredge, unless otherwise detailed.
2. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions and details including taping, mixing, priming,
troweling, sanding, and top-coating of cove base.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COMPOSITION FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 09671-6 05113105
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures according to flooring manufacturer's
instructions for particular substrate conditions involved, and as specified. Provide clean, dry,
and neutral substrate for flooring application.
B. Concrete Surfaces: Shot-blast, acid etch or power scarify as required to obtain optimum bond of
flooring to concrete. Remove sufficient material to provide a sound surface free of laitance,
glaze, efflorescence, and any bond-inhibiting curing compounds or form release agents.
Remove grease, oil, and other penetrating contaminates. Repair damaged and deteriorated
concrete to acceptable condition. Leave surface free of dust, dirt, laitance, and efflorescence.
C. Materials: Mix resin hardener and aggregate when required, and prepare materials according to
flooring system manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 MOISTURE VAPOR BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing performed by the Owner's Special Inspector for interior
concrete slab areas receiving epoxy flooring systems shall determine where moisture vapor
barrier systems is required.
.,, I. Moisture vapor reduction system shall be applied on concrete floors with moisture vapor
transmission level of greater than 3 lbs/24 hrs per 1,000 sf.
B. Apply negative side moisture vapor barrier system to dampened substrate in a single
application with a 3/32-inch notched squeegee. Roll the resinous material immediately with a
3/8-inch nap roller.
1. Coverage: 14 mils thick, approximately 100 sq/ft per gallon.
C. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 UNDERLAYMENT
A. Apply underlayment to substrate to create sloped areas to levels indicated, required, or to meet
adjacent areas.
B. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Apply waterproofing membrane, where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended thickness.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COMPOSITION FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package' —2323 09671-5 05113105
3. Color: Color shall be custom blend to match Architect's sample.
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL MATERIALS:
A. Moisture Vapor Barrier System: Flooring manufacturer's fluid-applied modified epoxy system
for use under composition flooring where water vapor transmission levels are greater than 3
Ibs/24 hours per 1,000/sf and pH levels exceed 9.
1. Product: Dex-O-Tex Vapor-Lok 100 (VL100) with Dex-O-Tex A-81 SQ overlay:
13. Waterproofing Membrane: Flooring manufacturer's composite system consisting of a neoprene
Ribber emulsion waterproofing membrane with a fabric reinforced cementitious protection
layer.
1. Product: Dex-O-Tex Neobond Fracture Resistant Waterproof Membrane, with: Dex-O-
Tex Glassmat#4. Waterproof Membrane Fabric
C. Anti-Microbial Additive: Incorporate antimicrobial chemical additive to prevent growth of
most bacteria, fungi, algae and actinomycetes.
D. Underlayment: Polymer modified,pre-packaged cementitious leveling compound.
1. Product: Dex-O-Tex A-81 Underlayment, except provide A-81-SQ (Squeegee-Grade)
for use over moisture vapor emission barrier.
E. Metal Edge Strips: L-shape, height to match flooring system thickness, white zinc alloy,
designed specifically for flooring applications.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. Verify that alkalinity and moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and
relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials
being used.
1. Obtain copy of and review test results of alkalinity, adhesion and moisture testing of
floors specified in Section 01410-Testing Laboratory Services.
2. Ifi moisture levels in concrete slabs are too high, temporary climate control systems shall
be used to remove excess moisture to levels acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
3. Do not proceed with the work until substrates are acceptable to the adhesive and flooring
product manufacturers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COMPOSITION FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package' —2323 09671-4 05/13/05
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired,
drawings and specifications are based on products by Crossfield Products Corp., Roselle Park,
NJ (908) 245-2800; and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
2.2 COMPOSTION FLOORING
A. Composition Flooring(COMP-1):
1. Product: Troweled epoxy resin composition flooring shall be Dex-O-Tex Cheminert "K"
with Dex-O-Tex Posi-Trod "O" slip-retardant top coat.
2. Physical Properties: Provide flooring system that meet or exceed the listed minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to the referenced standard test
method indicated in parentheses.
a. Compressive Strength(ASTM C-579): 11,000 psi
b. Tensile Strength(ASTM C-307): 1643 psi
C. Flexural Strength (ASTM C-580): 4,300 psi
d. Water Absorption (MIL.D-3134): 0.3 %.
e. Surface Hardness (ASTM D-2240): 85.5 Durometer "D"
f. Abrasion Resistance(ASTM D-1044): 0.0 gr.
OOW g. Impact Resistance (MIL-D-3134, Para 4.7.3): 0.024" max. No chipping, cracking,
loss of adhesion
h. Impact Resistance (Gardner Impact Tester): No chipping, cracking, or
delamination and not more than 0.014" indentation
i.. Bond Strength (A.C.I. #403): 400 psi; (100%failure in concrete)
j. Flammability(ASTM E-648): Self-extinguishing
3. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Composition Flooring (COMP-2):
1. Product: Troweled novolac-epoxy resin composition flooring shall be "Decor-Flor" with
color quartz aggregates.
2. Physical Properties: Provide flooring system that meet or exceed the listed minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to the referenced standard test
method indicated in parentheses.
a. Compressive Strength(ASTM C-109): 8,556 psi
b. Surface Hardness (ASTM D-2240): 80-85 Durometer "D"
C. Tensile Strength(ASTM C-638): 4,400 psi
d. Elongation(ASTM D-638): 19.6%
e. Adhesion (ACI Bull No. 59-43): 345 psi (100% failure of concrete)
f. Impact Resistance (MIL-D-3134,Para 4.7.3): 0.011"indent
g. Water Absorption(MIL.D-3134): Less than 1%
h. Temperature Resistance: No measurable softening, deflection or integrity loss
upon 8 hours immersion in boiling water and boiling cooking oil.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COMPOSITION FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09671-3 05113105
E. Samples for Verification:
1. Submit 2-1/2" x 4" samples of color chips from color chart selection designated by the
Architect.
2. Submit samples of showing range of textures to be expected for "fine profile" and "very
fine profile" skid-retardant surfacing.
F. Maintenance Provide manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and maintenance
practices to include in maintenance manuals.
L4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. lustaller Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer or applicator who has specialized in
installing resinous flooring types similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable
to manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain epoxy resin composition flooring materials, including
primers, resins, hardening agents, and finish or sealing coats, from a single manufacturer.
C. Mock-Up:
A. In an area designated by the Owner, apply a 3-foot by 3-foot mock up sample of each type of
composition flooring system, including top coats.
1. The Owner and Architect will review mock up for color, sheen and finish texture.
2. Adjust texture, if so required by Owner, until Owner's approval has been received.
3. Approved sample shall serve as standard for the application of the specified floor.
4. With Owner's approval, mock up may be used as part of the finished floor. In the event
Owner does not approve of use of the mock up, remove all material, leaving substrate
clean and free of contaminates.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels containing brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other
components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's directions to prevent deterioration from
moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with epoxy resin composition flooring manufacturer's
directions for maintenance of ambient and substrate temperature, moisture, humidity,
ventilation, and other conditions required to execute and protect Work.
Avwk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COMPOSITION FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09671-2 05/13/05
SECTION 09671 -COMPOSITION FLOORING
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes epoxy resin composition flooring systems and integral base.
1. Composition flooring is designated in the Room Finish Schedules as "COMP-#".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410, Testing Laboratory Services: Moisture and pH testing concrete floors.
2. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. Section 07265, Water Vapor Emission Control System: for moisture vapor barrier
systems, except as specified herein.
4. Division 15, Mechanical: for coordination of waterproofing tie-in to floor drains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's
color charts showing full range of colors and finishes available.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COMPOSITION FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09671-1 05113105
END OF SECTION 09652
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652-8 05/13/05
'", H. Install reducer strips wherever new resilient sheet flooring terminates at carpeting and elsewhere
as required to terminate flooring.
1. Seams: Provide chemically welded seams typically, except provide heat welded seams where
indicated in the Room Finish Schedule.
1. Heat Welded Seam: Rout seams and heat weld together with specified heat welding rod
in accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations.
a. Provide welding rods in color(s) as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's
full range of patterned and solid colors
3.5 INTEGRAL BASE INSTALLATION:
A. Where indicated, flash cove sheet vinyl flooring up the walls forming a flash coved base at wall
surfaces. Where casework is to be installed in areas with sheet vinyl flooring, the same flash
coved base shall be flashed up onto all casework. The base shall be installed at sides and at toe
space of cabinets. The height of the cove base at casework shall match that of the toe space. The
height of the base at walls shall be 4" unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
B. Install flash cove strip to ease transition at intersection between floor and wall. At external
corners, add extra material using the modified flat Vee plug without point, so that bottom of
plug is located at the mid-height of the cove. Heat fuse joints with teflon hot iron tool to create
an almost invisible joint line. At internal corners, miter-cut, fit, and heat fuse with hot teflon
iron tool.
C. Install continuous vinyl cap strip at top edge of resilient sheet flooring base at walls and
casework, with top edge of trim level and with all trim joints mitered. Cap strip will not be
required at underside of casework toe space.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved.
Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652-7 05113105
Aokk
33 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install materials only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and
after permanent heating system is operating.
B. Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and relative humidity
are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials being used.
C. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or plainly marked for future
cutting by repeating on the finish surface as marked in the subfloor. Use chalk or other non-
permanent marking device.
D. Installation shall mean acceptance of the subfloor by the installer, as ready to receive the
flooring materials.
3.4 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet vinyl flooring in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions with
a minimum of seams using conventional full-spread method with adhesive as recommended by
the manufacture and seams chemically or heat welded as specified.
B. Where integral base is scheduled for sheet vinyl flooring, install continuous coved fillet strip
behind sheet vinyl at the intersection of vertical surfaces and floor surfaces for walls and
casework.
C. Cut sheet material into required lengths and sizes. Layout and cut to achieve minimum number
of seams and for pattern match between abutting edges. Double-cut if required.
D. Felt backed sheet flooring shall remain rolled-up with the wear surface facing outwards until
flooring installation. Unbacked flooring material shall be laid flat and allowed to come to room
temperature prior to installation.
E. Installation in corridors:
1. Run sheet flooring in longest lengths possible with seams parallel to corridor length.
2. Unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings, where corridor width exceeds the
width of the sheet, center the sheet with the centerline of the corridor.
3. At the areas adjacent to the centered sheet, lay sheet flooring in longest lengths possible.
Ensure that end joints are staggered with end joints of centered sheet.
F. Install the sheets and roll the floor surface to work wrinkles and air pockets out past the outer
edges.
G. Fit the sheet vinyl neatly and tightly into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes and
penetrations, under saddles and thresholds, and around permanent cabinets and equipment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652-6 05113105
B. Verify that alkalinity and moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and
Fr relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials
being used.
I. Obtain copy of and review test results of alkalinity, adhesion and moisture testing of
floors specified in Section 01410-Testing Laboratory Services.
2. If moisture levels in concrete slabs are too high, temporary climate control systems shall
be used to remove excess moisture to levels acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
3. Do not proceed with installation until substrates are acceptable to the adhesive and
flooring product manufacturers.
C. Perform adhesive bond test in each major area, minimum 1 per 2,000 square feet, prior to
installation. Examine after 72 hours to determine whether bond is solid and no moisture is
present. Do not proceed with work until results of bond test are acceptable.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710 and flooring manufacturer's
recommendations. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners. Remove substances incompatible with resilient flooring adhesive by method
acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Verify that the adhesives cure within 72 hours to require extraordinary effort to remove
the test material.
B. Remove, by light sanding and grinding, all protruding edges, high spots. Ensure that substrate is
free from paint, varnish, wax, oil,existing adhesive residue, or other foreign matter.
C. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with trowelable
underlayment. Apply, trowel and float finish subfloor underlayment and leave a smooth, level,
hard surface. Acceptable level tolerance shall be 1/8 inch in 10 feet-0 inches when measured in
all directions.Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate, and ensure that substrate is dry, clean and smooth prior to application
of flooring.
E. Apply primers as recommended by adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Condition resilient sheet flooring and adhesives to room temperature for 24 hours prior to,
during and after installation. Room temperature shall be maintained between 65 degrees and 75
degrees and relative humidity of 50%.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652-5 05113105
2.2 SHEET RUBBER FLOORING
A. Sheet Rubber Flooring (RUB-3)
1. Manufacturer: Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc., Lawrence, MA; (800) 332-6672;
Local Representative: Al Baker, (978)689-0530
2. Product: Noraplan Mega , Article 1.081
3. Description: Synthetic rubber flooring, 4 foot widths having a nominal thickness of 3.0-
mm, with the following properties:
a. Characteristics:
1) Hardness: ASTM D 2240, Shore A, greater than 85.
2) Slip Resistance: Static Coefficient of Friction, D-2047-85; "James Test"
equal to or greater than 0.6, ADA guidelines compliance.
b. Seaming Method: As indicated in the Room Finish Schedule.
4. Adhesives:
a. Sheet flooring: Nora PU310 Polyurethane Adhesive.
b. Sanitary Base: Nora Contact Adhesive.
5. Pattern and Colors: As indicated on the Materials &Finishes Index Sheet.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Trowelable underlayment for leveling and patching: Armstrong S-180 or Masco Latex Cement
manufactured by Silpro Masonry Systems, Inc.
B. Cove Filler Strip: Rigid vinyl, 7/8-inch by 7/8-inch(1-1/4 -inch radius), manufactured by Kindt-
Collins Company, Kinkead Industries,Inc., or as approved equal.
C. Resilient Cove Cap: Johnsonite SCC-XX-B. Color as selected by Owner from manufacturer's
full range of colors.
D. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652-4 05113105
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOORING
A. Sheet Vinyl Flooring (SHT V-1)
I. Manufacturer: Mannington Mills,Inc., Salem, N.1 (800) 241-2262.
2. Product: Mannington Commercial "Assurance II", slip-retardant sheet vinyl.
3. Description: Solid, homogeneous sheet vinyl, conforming to ASTM F-1913, 6-ft widths
having a nominal thickness of 0.080-inch, with embossed surface.
a. Seaming Method: As indicated in the Room Finish Schedule.
4. Adhesives: Mannington V-85 Commercial Adhesive at "wet" areas, and V-82 elsewhere.
as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
5. Pattern, Style and Color: As indicated on the Materials &Finishes Index Sheet.
13. Sheet Vinyl Flooring (SHT V-2)
1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Lancaster, PA, (877)276-7876.
2. Product: Armstrong"Timberline".
3. Description: Seamless commercial sheet vinyl with backing, complying with ASTM F-
1303, Class B backing, Grade 1, Type 1; 6 ft. widths having a nominal thickness of
0.080-inch. Wear surface over photographic print film design with a nominal thickness
of 0.020-inch.
a. Seaming Method: As indicated in the Room Finish Schedule.
4. Adhesives: Armstrong S-575 Vinyl Back Flooring Adhesive as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
5. Pattern, Style and Color: As indicated on the Materials &Finishes Index Sheet.
C. Sheet Vinyl Flooring(SHT V-3):
1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, (800) 359-4508.
2. Product: "Medintech Tandem".
3. Description: Inlaid sheet vinyl flooring with fibrous backing, conforming to ASTM
F1303, Type II, Grade 1, Class A backing; 6 ft widths having a nominal thickness of
0,080-inch. Wear surface composed of polyvinyl chloride resin, plasticizers, stabilizers,
fillers, and pigments with a nominal thickness of 0.060-inch consisting of through-grain
vinyl chips with color and pattern detail dispersed uniformly through-out wear layer.
a. Seaming Method: Seaming Method: As indicated in the Room Finish Schedule.
4. Adhesives:
a. Field Application: Armstrong S-235 Premium Sheet Flooring Adhesive as
recommended by flooring manufacturer and acceptable to water vapor emission
control system manufacturer.
b. Flash cove base: 5-580 Flash Cove Adhesive.
5. Pattern and Color: As indicated on the Materials &Finishes Distribution Index Sheet.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652-3 05113105
I. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches AANN
long, of each color required
E. Maintenance Manual: Provide cleaning and maintenance data for the various types of resilient
sheet flooring. Include such data in Maintenance Manual specified in Division One.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Arrange for an authorized representative of the sheet vinyl flooring manufacturer to be present
at the start of the installation to observe the method of installation of the integral base and to
advise, as necessary, for the proper installation of the integral base.
1. Inform the Architect of the date on which the manufacturer's representative is scheduled
to be present at the project site.
C. Flooring system including floor covering material and adhesives shall have the ability to
withstand water vapor transmission levels up to 3 lbs/24 hours per 1,000/sf and pH levels up to
9.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide flooring material to meet the following fire test
performance criteria:
1. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class 1.
2. ASTM E 662(Smoke Generation)Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Resilient Flooring: Full-width rolls equal to one (1) percent of the total amount used of
each type, pattern and color of resilient sheet floor pattern installed.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652-2 05113105
ew SECTION 09652 -RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide the following types of resilient sheet flooring:
1. Sheet vinyl flooring designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "SHT V-#"
2. Sheet rubber flooring designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "RUB-#".
3. Provide integral "Sanitary Base"designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "IB".
B. In rooms and areas where resilient sheet flooring occurs and integral flash cove base is
indicated, provide integral flash cove base on casework furnished under Section 06240.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410,Testing Laboratory Services: Moisture testing concrete floors.
2. Section 03515, Self-leveling Concrete Underlayment.
3. Section 09651, Resilient Tile Flooring and Base: V.C.T. flooring, rubber floor tile; top set
resilient base.
4. Section 07265,Water Vapor Emission Control System.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show layout of all seams, method
of joining seams, type of adhesives to be used, locations and types of reducer strips, and detail
of integral sheet vinyl base with information for fabricating external and internal corners.
D. Samples for Verification: Samples of each item in manufacturer's standard size, but not less
than 6-by-9-inch sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09652- 1 05113105
3.6 RESILIENT STAIR TREAD INSTALLATION
A. Install resilient stair treads in accordance with manufactw-er's printed installation instructions.
13. Apply rolled adhesive material to stair tread and back of riser. Remove paper cover and fit
rubber- stair tread tight to the nosing, tapping into place, with rubber rr1.111et. Press tread into
place with hand pressure to prevent movement. Rentove paper cover from adhesive at the riser
and press rubber stair riser into place.
C. Hand roll each section of stair tread and riser with it seam roller as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.7 PATCHING OF EXISTING AREAS
A. Patch and match existing resilient floors and base in existing areas where scheduled, noted or
disturbed by new construction. Resilient flooring and base used for patching and matching shall
match the existing material for size, color and pattern. Submit samples to Architect for
comparison and approval.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. All flooring and bases shall be protected from damage after laying, and any such material
damaged by building operations shall be replaced before acceptance of the building.
B. At the completion of the work, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned, waxed and buffed using
materials recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09651
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09651 -7 05/13/05
�. Lay tiles in pattern of field, border and accent colors as indicated on the Floor Finish
Distribution Plan.
D. Lay units from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that
units at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut
widths less than 3" wide at room perimeters. Lay units square to axes of the room or space.
E. Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged.
F. Lay in square field pattern with striation of tile running in the same direction.
G. Install reducer strips wherever new resilient flooring terminates at exposed concrete slab, at
dissimilar abutting material, and elsewhere as required to terminate resilient tile flooring on
even plane.
H. Finished floors and bases shall be smooth and free from buckles, cracks, break waves and
projecting edges, and shall be neatly fitted at seams at all pipes and other projections.
1. Where vinyl wall covering occurs on walls, overlap between top of resilient base and bottom of
wall covering should not be greater than 1/2-inch. Report to the Contractor all areas where the
overlap exceeds 1/2-inch. Do not install base until wall covering work has been corrected.
J. Spread adhesives evenly in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Closely butt all
joints so that they are straight and inconspicuous.
3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Install base in longest possible lengths where shown in Finish Schedules. Field form external
corners in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, with joints occurring a minimum of 2
ft, from the corner in each direction.
B. Install top set and straight rubber base wherever indicated in the Room Finish Schedule and on
the drawings.
C. Install base at sides and at toe space of cabinets. The height of the cove base at casework shall
match that of the toe space. The height of the base at walls shall be 4 inches unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09651 -6 05113105
3. Do not proceed with installation until substrates are acceptable to the adhesive and
flooring product manufacturers.
C. Perform and report results of Bond Test, as detailed in Section II.C.5 of Publication #5061, and
LO test.at least every 400 sd.ft.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
�.? PREPARATION
A. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710 and flooring manufacturer's
recommendations. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
Hardeners. Remove substances incompatible with resilient flooring adhesive by method
acceptable to manufacturer.
B. Remove, by light sanding and grinding, all protruding edges, high spots. Ensure that substrate
is free from paint, varnish, wax, oil,existing adhesive residue, or other foreign matter.
C. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with trowelable
underlayment. Apply, trowel and float finish subfloor underlayment and leave a smooth, level,
hard surface. Acceptable level tolerance shall be 1/8 inch in 10 feet-0 inches when measured in
all directions. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate, and ensure that substrate is dry, clean and smooth prior to application
of flooring.
E. Apply primers as recommended by adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install materials only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed
and after permanent heating system is operating.
2. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or plainly marked for
future cutting by repeating on the finish surface as marked in the subfloor. Use chalk or
other non-permanent marking device.
3. Installation shall mean acceptance of the subfloor by the installer, as ready to receive the
flooring materials.
B. Place units with adhesive cement in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
as approved by the Architect. Butt joints tightly to vertical surfaces, nosings, edgings, and
thresholds. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints. Place tiles tightly
laid,even, and in straight parallel lines.Extend units into toe spaces, door reveals, and in closets
and similar spaces.
rte"'
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09651 -5 05113105
4. Colors: As indicated on the Material and Finishes Index Sheet.
F. Resilient Reducer Strips: Johnsonite,Flooring Products Division, Johnson Rubber company.
1. Resilient to carpet: C'I'A-XX-_11.
2. Resilient to unfinished: RRS:XX.-(".
3. Resilient transitional profiles: ('TA-XX-H.
4. Colors: Shall be as selected by Architect.
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Adhesive:
I. For VCT flooring: Armstrong "5-515".
2. For RUB flooring: Nora PU310 Polyurethane Adhesive
3. For resilient base: Johnsonite#960 Acrylic Cove Base Adhesive.
4. For rubber stair treads: Nora—Stepfix, dry contact adhesive system.
5. For reducer strips: Johnsonite#945 Contact Bond Adhesive.
B. Trowelable underlayment for leveling and patching of VCT: Armstrong 5-180 or Masco Latex
Cement manufactured by Silpro Masonry Systems, Inc.
C. Primer: Provide non-staining type as required and as recommended by the manufacturer of the
material being installed.
D. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. Verify that alkalinity and moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and
relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials
being used.
1. Obtain copy of and review test results of alkalinity, adhesion and moisture testing of
floors specified in Section 01456 -Testing Laboratory Services.
2. If moisture levels in concrete slabs are too high, temporary climate control systems shall
be used to remove excess moisture to levels acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
lowk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09651 -4 05113105
2.2 RESILIENT MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Composition Tile(VCT):
I. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.,Lancaster, PA 17604, (800)448-1405.
2. Series: "Excelon Imperial Texture".
3. Description: Vinyl composition tile complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1
(nonasbestos formulated), Class 2—through pattern; 12 in. by 12 in. by 1/8 in. thick.
4. Fire Test Data:
a. ASTM E 648, Critical Radiant Flux -0.45 watts/cm2 or more - Class 1.
b. ASTM E 662, Smoke -450 or less.
5. Static Load Lin-ft ASTM F 970, 75 psi.
6. Pattern, Style and Colors: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
B. Rubber Floor Tile (RUB-1): Intentionally Omitted.
C. Rubber Floor Tile(RUB-2):
1. Manufacturer: Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc., Lawrence, MA
(800) 332-6672.
2. Product Noraplan Logic,Article 2230
3. Description: Synthetic rubber tiles, 24-inch by 24-inch having a nominal thickness of 2.0-
mm, with the following properties:
a. Characteristics:
1) Hardness: ASTM D 2240, Shore A,greater than 85.
2) Slip Resistance: Static Coefficient of Friction, D-2047-85; "James Test"
equal to or greater than 0.6, ADA guidelines compliance.
4. Pattern, Style and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
D. Rubber Base(RUB)
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johnsonite, Flooring Products Division, Johnson Rubber
Company [800] 637-4995.
2. Base: Shall be Johnsonite Rubber Wall Base, 4-inch high unless otherwise indicated, top
set type, coved, ribbed back, 1/8-inch thick, rounded top. Provide straight base similar to
above in carpeted areas. Rubber base shall be furnished in continuous lengths,
approximately 100' long.
3. Colors: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
E. Stair Treads and Landing Tiles:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc., Lawrence, MA (800)
332-6672.
2. Products: Norament Stairtreads, 3.5-mm thick by width to suit; with Norament 825
Article 1910, 19.68-inch by 19.68-inch by 2.7-mm thick tiles for intermediate landings.
3. Description: Material to be solid, homogeneous resilient rubber conforming to ASTM F
1344, Class I,Type A. Stairs treads to be one piece nosing-tread-riser design.
a. Texture: Hammered surface.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09651 -3 05113105
D. Maintenance Data: Provide cleaning and maintenance data for the various types of resilient tile ;
flooring. Include such data in Maintenance Manual specified in Division One.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Flooring system including floor covering material and adhesives shall have the ability to
withstand water vapor transmission levels up to 3 lbs/24 hours per 1,000/sf, and pH levels up to
9.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F,
in spaces to receive floor tile for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours
after installation.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Resilient Flooring (VCT/RUB): One (1) percent, but not less than one (1) case of each
type,pattern and color of resilient tile floor installed.
2. Rubber Base (RUB): One(1) 100 ft roll of each color installed.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Provide colors and patterns selected by the Architect from standard patterns of the approved
manufacturer and scheduled on the Room Finish Schedule and Materials Distribution Sheet.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09651 -2 05113105
SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide resilient tile flooring and base where shown on the Drawings, in Finish Schedules, as
specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1. Vinyl composition tile flooring designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "VCT-#".
2. Rubber tile flooring designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "RUB-#".
3. Resilient base designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "RUB".
4. Stair treads with imegra.l risers, as indicated on the drawings and designated in the Room
Finish Schedule.
B. Except as indicated otherwise, furnish and install resilient base on casework furnished under
Section 06402.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410,Testing Laboratory Services: Moisture testing concrete floors.
2. Section 03515, Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayment.
3. Section 05510,Metal Stairs.
4. Section 07265,Water Vapor Emission Control System.
5. Section 09652,Resilient Sheet Flooring: for resilient sheet flooring and integral base.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.
1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less
than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09651 - 1 05/13/05
3.3 REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
A. Where required by the work of new construction, remove existing acoustical ceilings, including
suspension system, as required for the completion of the work.
B. Remove only that portion of the acoustical materials and suspension system as is necessary for
the required work. Coordinate with all trades to determine the extent of the area to be removed.
Store materials in a neat manner and protect from damage.
C. After all associated trade work has been completed,reinstall the existing ceiling materials.
3.4 PATCHING OF EXISTING AREAS
A. Patch and match existing acoustical ceilings in existing areas disturbed by new construction.
Where acoustical panels, acoustical tiles and suspension system have been removed because of
new construction and cannot be reinstalled, install new material to match the existing. Materials
to be used for patching and matching shall be approved by the Architect. The installer shall visit
the site, acquaint himself with the types of existing ceiling materials and the extent of
replacement.
3.5 CLEANING UP
A. In addition to other stipulated requirements for cleaning, completely remove fingerprints and
traces of soil from the surfaces of grid and acoustical materials, using only those cleaning
materials recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the material being cleaned.
B. Replace damaged or improperly installed acoustical work.
END OF SECTION 09510
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09510-7 05/13/05
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage
and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INS'T'ALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design
requirements indicated,per manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install the grid system in the pattern shown on the approved Shop Drawings.
C. Provide saw-cut miters at inside and outside corners.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Coordinate application of a continuous ribbon of concealed acoustical sealant on back of
vertical legs of wall moldings before they are installed with Section 07920, Joint
Sealants.
E. Make all grid level within tolerance of 1 in 1,000 and straight within a tolerance of
1 in 1,000.
F. Frame exposed grid openings for lay in type lighting fixtures. Support fixtures on main tees and
provide additional support at each corner of fixture. Wherever recessed lights do not fit within
the modular grid system, adjust grid layout to accept fixture installation, securing adjusted tee
with concealed fasteners.
G. Where reveal edged acoustical panels occur and full panels cannot be installed, cut panels and
rout edges which are exposed to view to match factory edge. Paint all cut edges which are
exposed to view. Paint color shall match panels.
H. Provide hold-down clips for ceiling boards only when so required by governmental agencies
having jurisdiction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 09510-6 05/13/05
00141 b. Cross Tee (unless otherwise indicated): 1-1/2 inch height for 4 foot spans;
minimum of 1 inch for 2-foot spans.
4. Steel: 0.015-inch minimum thickness,conforming to ASTM A-366.
5. Provide the following suspension systems, in accordance with corresponding acoustical
ceiling tile type annotated in the"Ceiling Type"column of the following schedule.
Ceiling
Suspension System Hemmed Wall Molding T )e
15/16 inch wide exposed tee grid: Types-1 & 6
Armstrong Prelude Plus Armstrong No HD7801
15/16 inch wide exposed tee grid, hot dip Type-2
galvanized with aluminum cap:
Armstrong No 7820
Armstrong Prelude
9/16 inch wide exposed tee grid: Types-3 &_4
Armstrong Suprafine Armstrong No. 7804
H. Finish:
1. Normal Installation: Chemically clean, electro-galvanize and bonderize all steel roll-
formed parts. Provide a high-bake, low-sheen, satin finish on finished surfaces.
Chemically clean, electro-galvanize and treat with chromatic conversion coating all steel
stamped parts.
2. Hot Dipped Galvanized Suspension System: Chemically clean and hot dipped galvanize
all steel roll-formed parts. Provide aluminum capping prefinished in baked polyester
paint.
3. Color of grid shall exactly match color of acoustical panels.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
B. Accessories shall be specifically designed as an integral part of the grid system and shall be
installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced
24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard unobtrusive markers for designating acoustical panels
where access is required to mechanical systems located above ceiling areas with hold-
down clips.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09510-5 05/13/05
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM Aoft%.
A. Mechanical suspension system shall be exposed Grid T System, as manufactured by Armstrong
World Industries,Lancaster,PA 17604; (800) 448-1405.
B. The acoustical grid system shall conform to requirements of the INTERMEDIATE D(JTY (12#
minimum) structural classification ASTM C-635, applicable seismic codes and shall be as
hereinafter specified.
C. The allowable uniform load in pounds per linear foot of beam shall not exceed the amount that
the section in a simply supported span is capable of supporting without mid-span deflection
exceeding 0.133" in 48".
D. Cross-tees that support transverse cross tees shall be carefully chosen with respect to allowable
load for the section inasmuch as their loading is similar to that of beams.
E. Radius Wall Molding:
1. Moldings to be installed at intersection of radiused vertical gypsum wallboard fascia and
horizontal acoustical ceilings shall be Fry Reglet Acoustical Wall Angle or approved
equal.
2. Factory bent to radius required to ensure flush installation against vertical gypsum
wallboard fascia.
3. Finish shall match sample color furnished by Architect.
F. Perimeter Trim Systems:
1. Trim Channel:
a. Product: Custom extruded aluminum trim system for attachment to ceiling
suspension grid system shall be "Axiom - Classic" by Armstrong with factory
welded and finished corners.
b. At drywall soffits, provide Axiom Drywall Bottom Trim with integrated taping
flange.
2. Furnish profile in 10-foot lengths of straight or curved profiles as indicated on the
drawings, complete with factory welded and finished inside and outside corners. System
components shall by factory-cut, mitered and curved to match approved shop drawings.
3. Accessories: Provide all trim, splice plates, hold down clips, alignment clips, T-Bar
connectors, hanging clips,and other fittings necessary for a complete installation.
4. Finish: All components shall receive a factory applied baked polyester paint to match
acoustical panels.
G. Suspension Grid Requirements:
1. Classified Intermediate Duty in accordance with ASTM C 635.
2. Double thickness web,bulb section design.
3. Web
a. Main Beam(unless otherwise indicated): 1-1/2 inch height with routs for cross tees
6 inches o.c.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09510-4 05113105
look
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Provide products as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries,
Inc.,Lancaster, PA 17604; (800)448-1405. No other manufacturer will be accepted.
2? ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
A. Acoustical ceiling materials shall be non-combustible; shall conform to requirements of Federal
Specification SS-S-1 18a, Type III, Class 25; and shall bear Underwriters Laboratories Label.
B. Basis-of-Design: The design for each acoustical panel is based on the product specified.
Type Product Description Size Grid Color
Type-1 Armstrong"Georgian",Beveled 24" x 24" x 5/8" 15/16 White
Tegular Edge,Humiguard Plus;
No. 1752
Type-2 Armstrong "Clean Room VL", Square 24" x 24" x 5/8" 15/16 White
Edge,Humiguard Plus;
No. 868, non-perforated.
Type-3 Armstrong"Optima Open Plan", 24"x 24"x 1" 9/16 White
Square Tegular Edge,Humiguard Plus;
No. 3251
Type-4 Armstrong"Georgian",Beveled 24" x 24" x 5/8" 9/16 White
Tegular Edge,Humiguard Plus;
No. 1753
Type-5 Not Used
Type-6 Armstrong"Clean Room VL", Square 24" x 24" x 5/8" 15/16 White
Edge,Humiguard Plus;
No. 869,Perforated.
C. Size, pattern, texture and color of acoustical panels for supplementing existing materials shall
match that of panels in existing building.
D. Provide acoustical panels manufactured from mineral fiber with face and back surfaces coated
with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide
added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when
tested according to ASTM D 3273.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09510-3 05113105
E. Maintenance Data: Provide cleaning and maintenance data for acoustical ceilings, to include in ,,00rk
maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Comply with requirements of ASTM E580 to meet State seismic requirements for bracing the
ceiling suspension system.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Acoustical Panels: One (1) percent, but not less than one (1) case of each type of
acoustical ceiling panel installed at the project.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09510-2 05113105
SECTION 09510 -ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Remove and reinstall existing acoustical ceiling systems as required for completion of the work.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07920, Joint Sealants: for sealing joint between acoustical ceiling wall molding
and wall.
2. Section 08800, Glazing: for suspended decorative translucent panels.
3. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard cheek walls, ceilings, and
soffits including framing supports,and drywall suspension system.
4. Division 15 - Mechanical: for coordination of suspension system with radiant heating
panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show layout, suspension, lateral
restraint, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of
adjacent trades.
D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type,color,pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09510- 1 05113105
1.7 PROTECTION
A. During the operation of terrazzo work, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage,
damage, or disfigurement by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace
any work so damaged and soiled.
B. After completion of the work of this Section, protect finished floors with heavy duty red-rosin
paper or kraft paper. Reapply torn or damaged protection paper.
END OF SECTION 09400
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TERRAZZO
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 09400-6 05/13/05
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate free of loose chips, laitenance and all foreign matter. Treat cracks in concrete
substrate as recommended by NTMA standards.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION EPDXY TERRAZZO
A. General: Comply with appropriate NTMA Specifications and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect.
B. Prime subfloor in accordance with resin manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Place divider strips in a true and accurate plane, continuously shimming and adhering as
required. Install strips slightly above the finish floor plane to allow for grinding entire finish
flush.
D. Place terrazzo mixture and trowel to a dense flat surface to top of divider strips. Cure as
required.
3.4 FINISHING EPDXY TERRAZZO
A. Finish terrazzo to NTMA instructions to produce terrazzo finish surface to match approved
mockup sample with 70 percent chip exposed. Grind terrazzo surface with power disc machine;
sequence with course to fine grit abrasive, using a wet method.
B. Apply grout mix to match matrix over ground surfaces to fill honeycomb exposed during
grinding. After grout has sufficiently cured,grind, using a fine grit abrasive.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from flat surface 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Maximum variation from level (except
surfaces sloping to drain) 1/8 inch.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with NTMA instructions; let dry.
Immediately when dry, apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Wax and
polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. After completion of the work of this Section, remove equipment, and clean all wall, partition,
and floor areas free from deposits of materials installed under this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TERRAZZO
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09400-5 05113105
4. Isolation Strips: 1/8-inch, L type angle strip with 1/2-inch depth and 1/8-inch wide
neoprene filler strip at vertical leg, for use at structural walls, and columns.
B. Cleaning: Neutralizing liquid type, biodegradable and phosphate free, with pH factor between 7
and 10.
C. Sealer: Colorless, penetrating liquid type specially prepared for use on terrazzo; with pH factor
between 7 and 10.
1. UL listed as "Slip Resistant".
2.3 MIXES
A. Cementitious Terrazzo: Comply with NTMA Guide Specification for terrazzo type indicated for
matrix and marble-chip proportions and mixing.
1. Mix Color and Pattern: Custom blend, to match Architect's control sample.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify concrete substrate is level within 1/4 inch per 10 feet and to have a steel trowel
finished surface. Verify no curing agents or other additives which can prevent bonding
have been used.
2. Do not begin terrazzo work until concrete substrate has cured 28 days, minimum.
B. Verify that alkalinity and moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and
relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials
being used.
1. Obtain copy of and review test results of alkalinity, adhesion and moisture testing of
floors specified in Section 01410-Testing Laboratory Services.
2. If moisture levels in concrete slabs are too high, temporary climate control systems shall
be used to remove excess moisture to levels acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
3. Do not proceed with installation until substrates are acceptable to the flooring product
manufacturer.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances,
have been corrected.
Awk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TERRAZZO
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 09400-4 05113105
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 EPDXY TERRAZZO
A. Epoxy Terrazzo(TERR): Resinous, thin-set, epoxy-matrix terrazzo over concrete slab-on-deck.
1. Thickness: 3/8-inch.
B. Materials:
1. Flexible Reinforcing Membrane: Manufacturer's resinous membrane for substrate crack
preparation and reflective crack reduction.
2. Primer: Product of manufacturer recommended for substrate and use indicated.
3. Epoxy Resin: Manufacturer's standard recommended for use indicated and in color
required for mix indicated.
a. Physical Properties without Aggregates:
I) Hardness: 60 to 85 per ASTM D 2240, Shore D.
2) Minimum Tensile Strength: 3000 psi per ASTM D 638 for a 2-inch
specimen made using a "C"die per ASTM D 412.
3) Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D 695, Specimen B
cylinder.
b. Physical Properties with Aggregates: For resin blended with Georgia White
ew marble, ground, grouted, and cured per requirements in NTMA's "Guide
Specification for Epoxy Terrazzo," comply with the following:
1) Flammability: Self-extinguishing, maximum extent of burning 0.25 inch per
ASTM D 635.
2) Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 0.0025 inch/inch per deg F for
temperature range of minus 12 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 696.
4. Marble Chips: Complying with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and
containing no deleterious or foreign matter.
a. Hardness: Ha-10 minimum per ASTM C 241.
b. 24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent.
C. Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight.
5. Finishing Grout: Resin based.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Strips: Provide divider, edge and angle strips of brass as manufactured by Manhattan American
Terrazzo Strip Company,or approved equal.
1. Standard Divider Strips: 1/8-inch and 18 B&S gauge as indicated, 1-1/4 inches deep, with
anchoring features for use above concrete saw-cut control joints.
2. Angle Strips: 1/8-inch and 18 B&S gauge as indicated, K or L type with 1/2-inch depth,
anchored by nailing or adhesive to subfloor for aesthetic joints.
3. Control Joint Strips: 1/8-inch, T-type with 1/2-inch depth and 1/8 inch wide neoprene
filler strip between vertical legs, for use at poured control joint.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TERRAZZO
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09400-3 05113105
E. Maintenance Data: Provide cleaning and maintenance data including procedures for stain
removal, stripping, sealing, and waxing, to include in Maintenance Manual specified in Division
One.
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously
successful work of the type specified herein and a contractor member of NTMA.
1. Applicator shall be approved by the manufacturer, with adequate numbers of skilled
workmen who are thoroughly trained by the approved manufacturer, experienced in the
approved materials, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. Throughout
progress of the work of this Section, maintain a competent superintendent at the site.
13. Comply with applicable requirements of NTMA (National Terrazzo and Mosiac Associations,
Inc.), latest edition of Guide Specification and written recommendations for terrazzo type
indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified.
C. Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
qualities of materials and execution.
1. Install mockups of at least 4 ft. by 4 ft. of typical flooring, border and base condition for
each color and pattern in locations directed by Architect.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with
source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any.
Comply with NTMA recommendations.
B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated
area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
C. Clearly label and package extra materials securely to prevent damage.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not install wet mixed terrazzo when temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit or above 90
degrees Fahrenheit. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after
installation of terrazzo.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TERRAZZO
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 09400-2 05/13/05
SECTION 09400 -TERRAZZO
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Thin-set epoxy terrazzo.
B. Terrazzo flooring designated in the Room Finish Schedules as "TERR-#"
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 0 14 10,Testing Laboratory Services: Moisture and pH testing concrete floors.
2. Section 09671, Composition Flooring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show layout and patterns, divider
strips, control joint strips, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory
required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each
terrazzo sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and marble-chip types, sizes, and
proportions. Prepare samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the
Work in size indicated below:
1. Terrazzo: 6-inch.square Samples.
2. Accessories: 6-inch long Samples of each exposed strip item required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TERRAZZO
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09400-1 05113105
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect tile work during the period of installation. After completion of this portion of the work
the Contractor shall assume responsibility of protecting the tile work.
B. Apply a protective coat of neutral cleaner solution to all clean, completed tile walls; one parr
cleaner to one part water.
C. Just prior to final acceptance of tile work, rinse protective coat of neutral cleaner from all tile
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09310
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TILING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09310-6 05/13/05
B. Lay out all tilework so as to minimize cuts less than one-half tile in size.
C. Locate tile cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous.
D. Align all floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines.
E. Joints:
1. For interior ceramic Floor and wall tiles that are to be grouted with epoxy grout allow a
minimum 1/8-inch to a maximum 3/16-inch wide even joint spacing.
3.5 WORKMANSHIP
A. Supply first-class workmanship in all tilework.
B. Use all products in strict accordance with recommendations and directions of manufacturer.
C. Proportion all mixes in accordance with referenced ANSI Standard Specifications unless
otherwise indicated by product manufacturer, in which case use most stringent requirements.
D. Smooth all exposed cut edges.
3.6 GROUTING
A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Force grout into joints, avoiding air traps or voids; strike or tool joints of cushion edge tile to
depth of cushion.
3.7 CONTROL JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Control joints shall be provided where tile work abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter
walls, curbs, columns, pipes, etc.; at intervals of approximately 25' each way in large areas of
tile surfaces; where tile abuts dissimilar materials.
B. Caulked joints shall be raked out, cleaned and completely filled with sealant materials in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed specifications.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean all tile surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Remove all
grout haze, observing grout manufacturer's recommendations as to use of acid and chemical
cleaners.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TILING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09310-5 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the Work as required by tile manufacturer.
13. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Gypsum Interior Dry Wall Surfaces:
1. Prime all drywall and plaster wall surfaces with Mapei Planicrete-AC° Multipurpose
Acrylic Additive&Primer or Laticrete 3701 latex.
2. Allow to dry completely before applying the tile-setting mortar or adhesive.
3. Gypsum levelers and gypsum patching compounds are not acceptable substrates for
direct bonding.
C. Treat joints of cementitious backer units to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's
written instructions for type of application indicated.
3.3 SETTING METHODS
A. The American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile, 2003/2004
edition, is hereby made a part of this specification and all work shall be installed in accordance
with the various specification contained therein and as specified below and in accordance with
the specifications of Mapei Corporation or Laticrete International,Inc.
B. ANSI A108.5, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar shall be used for installing:
1. Wall tile over gypsum board(TCA installation method W243).
2. Wall tile over tile backer board(TCA installation method W244).
3.4 LAYOUT
A. Determine locations of all movement joints before starting tilework.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TILING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09310-4 05113105
I. Patterns: Provide general overall pattern and border in each space as indicated on the
Floor Finish Distribution Plans.
2.2 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following. No other manufacturer will be accepted.
1. Mapei Corporation, Deerfield Beach,FL 33442; (954) 246-8888.
2. Laticrete International,Inc., Bethany, CT 06524; (800) 243-4788.
3. Products should be submitted from ONE manufacturer and should provide single source
responsibility for all installation products. No mixing of manufacturers.
B. Thin-Set Latex Portland Cement Mortar:
1. Latex Portland Cement Mortar: Two component Liquid-added Latex Modified Thin Set
mortar system meeting ANSI 118.4 and ANSI Al 18.11-.
a. Mapei Kerabond°mixed with Keralastic°
b. Laticrete International 317 Floor and Wall Thinset with 333 Superflexible Admix.
C. Chemical Resistant Water Cleanable Epoxy Grout to ANSI A118.3:
1. Mapei Kerapoxy°400 100% solids epoxy mortar and grout.
2. Laticrete Latapoxy SP-100.
"* 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
D. Sealants: Shall be as follows:
1. Two component polyurethane complying with Federal Specifications TT-S 0027e, Type I
self leveling for horizontal surfaces and Type II, non sag for vertical surfaces. Colors
shall be custom to match color samples furnished by the Architect.
2. Provide flexible compressible type closed cell foam polyethylene or butyl rubber back-up
rod,as required.
2.3 ACCESSORIES:
A. Tile Edge and Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum, to ASTM B221, 6463-T5 alloy edge
strips, 1/8-inch wide at top edge, with integral perforated anchoring leg.
1. Height: To suit tile.
2. Product: Satin Anodized Aluminum: Schluter°-SCHIENE-AE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TILING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09310-3 05113105
I. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver the following materials to the Owner's representative for future
maintenance:
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to one(1) percent of amount
installed,for each type, composition,color,pattern, and size indicated.
B. Deliver material to the Owner at the same time when products are delivered to the site for
installation. Materials shall be of the same manufacturer's run as those used on the project.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CERAMIC TILE
A. General: Provide ceramic tile, quarry the and accessories complying with Tile Council of
America Specification 137.1, in colors and patterns selected by the Architect from the specified
manufacturers.
B. Wall Tile(CT): Glazed ceramic tile.
1. Manufacturer: "Gypsum", as distributed by Stone Source, Inc., Somerville, MA 02143;
(617) 666-7900.
2. Product: "Gypsum",double-fired white body ceramic tile.
3. Size: 4-inch by 8-inch, and 2-inch by 4-inch ribbed; 3/8-inch thick.
4. Trim: Manufactured to wall tiles, with bullnosed top edge at surface applications; 2-inch
height,by 8-inch length.
5. Finish: Matte gloss.
C. Wall Tile(CST): Engineered stone composed of recycled quartz and granite grit.
1. Manufacturer: Trend Group, as distributed by Stone Source, Inc., Somerville, MA
02143; (617) 666-7900.
2. Product: "Rock Solid"
3. Size: 24-inch by 48-inch, and 24-inch by 24-inch; 1/4-inch thick.
D. Tile Pattern, Style and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TILING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09310-2 05113105
SECTION 09310 -TILING
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following tile:
1. Glazed ceramic tile is designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "CT".
2. Composite stone tile is designated in the Room Finish Schedule as "CST".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
2. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard and tile backer board for
tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes:
1. Provide samples for each type, class, and color of tile required.
2. Color selections of specified grout.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TILING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09310- 1 05113105
E. Finish new wallboard as herein before specified. Finish shall match surrounding surfaces foi-
texture.
3.16 INSTALLATION OF FLUSH MOUNTED VINYL CORNER GUARDS
A. Install aluminum retainers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Fasten aluminum retainer to corner stud with sheet metal screws 18 inches O.C. (with double
dry wall construction, retainer is placed over and fastened through the primary dry wall layer
into stud).
C. Insert exterior dry wall into drywall receiver at the outside of the aluminum retainer.
D. Cover exposed to view areas of aluminum retainer drywall receiver with tape and joint
compound.
3.17 CLEANING UP
A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum
wallboard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto
floor surfaces.
B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room space, promptly pick up and remove
from the working area all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section.
END OF SECTION 09250
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 15 05/13/05
L. Provide Level 2 finish joint treatment consisting of tape embedded in joint compound and AOW#„
wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coat of compound over tape in future fit-out spaces
where noted as "tape and float" on the Drawings.
M. Omit joint treatment for gypsum wallboard surfaces located above suspended ceilings at furred
walls. Where such joint treatment is discontinued, reinforce vertical joints at the ceiling line by
cross taping the joint.
3.13 OTHER METAL TRIM
A. The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal trim. General:
1. Carefully study the Drawings and the installation and provide all metal trim normally
recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use in this
Work.
2. Install edge trim and wall reveal channels in locations where necessary or indicated, in
strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.14 EXTERIOR WALL SYSTEM-WITH METAL STUD BACKUP AND PARAPET WALLS
A. Exterior Sheathing:,
1. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
2. Use appropriate length material to avoid end joints. Edge joints shall be parallel to and
occur over framing members. End joints,if required shall be staggered.
3. Screw attach to exterior of each stud spaced 3/8 inch from ends and edges, and
approximately 8 inches o.c. along each stud. At parapet walls, fasten panels a maximum
8-inch o.c. around the perimeter, and 8-inch o.c. on framing members in the field of the
panel.
4. Drive fasteners so as to bear tight against and flush with the surface of the sheathing. Do
not countersink.
3.15 PATCHING EXISTING GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Patch existing gypsum wallboard surfaces disturbed by new construction and where removed to
permit installation of new work within existing wall cavities. Install all material in compliance
with ASTM C840 and in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions.
B. Infill openings in existing gypsum wallboard partitions where openings remain after selective
demolition work and are not required for the completion of the Work.
C. Install metal framing necessary for the support of new wallboard.
D. All patching material shall match existing surfaces to be patched.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 14 05113105
3.12 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Joint compound and topping compound shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturers
written directions.
B. A uniform thin layer of joint compound shall be applied over the wallboard joints,
approximately 4 inches in width. The tape shall be centered over the joint and imbedded into the
compound leaving sufficient compound under the tape to provide proper bond. Wall angles and
inside corners shall be reinforced with tape folded to conform to the angle and imbedded in the
compound.
C. After compound is thoroughly dry, the tape shall be covered with a coat of joint compound
spread over the tape approximately 3 inches on each side of the tape and feathered out at the
edge. After thoroughly dry, a coat of topping compound shall be applied. This coat shall be
smooth and the edges feathered approximately 3 inches beyond the previous coat.
D. All angles and inside corners shall be coated with one coat of joint compound and one coat
topping compound, feathered out at edges.
E. All screw heads shall receive three coats (two coats joint compound and one coat of topping
compound), allowing proper drying time between each coat.
F. Flanges of wallboard corner beads, casing beads and all other trim shall be concealed by two
coats of joint compound and one coat of topping compound feathered out approximately 9
inches from exposed edge or nosing.
G. Allow each application of compound to joints and screws heads to thoroughly dry, then sand if
necessary. Avoid roughing of the paper wallboard surface.
H. All acoustical sealant work shall be done in accordance with the partition system manufacturer's
recommendations in order to obtain required sound ratings.
I. Sand all wallboard and treated surfaces and leave ready for final finishing.
J. Provide joint treatment for gypsum wallboard surfaces located above suspended ceilings at all
partitions.
K. In addition to the treatment indicated above, apply skim coat of joint compound over entire
gypsum board surfaces at areas specified below, as required to achieve a Level 5 finish.
1. Surfaces of gypsum board fascias and soffits adjacent to cove light fixtures.
2. Surfaces of gypsum board walls scheduled to receive reinforced epoxy wall coating
system.
3. All other surfaces where indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 13 05113105
C. All openings and/or penetrations through shaft wall system partitions and ceilings shall be
properly boxed and protected in order to maintain required fire rating required.
D. Position steel runners at floor and at structure above with the short leg toward finish side of
wall. Securely attach runners to structural supports with power driven fasteners at both ends and
24 inches o.c.
E. Cut liner board panels 1 inch less than opening height and erect vertically between J-runners.
Where shaft walls exceed 14' in height, position liner panel end joints within upper and lower
third points of wall. Stagger joints top and bottom in adjacent panels.
F. Install C-H studs 3/8 inch to not more than 1/2 inch less than opening height and install between
liner panels with liner inserted in the groove. Install full-length steel E-studs over shaft wall
liner at T-intersections, corners, columns and both sides of closure panels. Frame openings cut
within a liner panel with E-studs around perimeter. For openings, fame with vertical E-studs at
edges, horizontal J-strut at head and sill, and reinforcing as recommended by the shaft wall
manufacturer. Suitably frame all openings to maintain structural support for wall.
G. Erect 5/8 inch fire rated gypsum panel base layer horizontally on one side of studs with end
joints staggered. Fasten base layer to studs with 1 inch, Type S-12 screws. Caulk perimeter of
base layer panels.
H. Apply 1/2 inch fire rated gypsum panels face layer vertically over base layer with joints
staggered and attach with 1-5/8 inch Type S-12 screws staggered from those in base, spaced 12
inches o.c. and driven into studs.
I. Where indicated on the drawings, apply third layer of gypsum board over the second layer with
adhesive as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer.
J. Finish face layer panels in the same manner as specified for gypsum panels on metal studs.
K. Horizontal ceiling installation, two hours: Install gypsum panels to horizontally installed CH
and/or E studs. Install the base layer with edges parallel to the studs and attached with 1 inch
Type S screws 24 inches o.c. Install face layer perpendicular to the studs and attach with 1-5/8
inch type S screws 12 inches o.c. Place face layer end joints between studs and secure with 1-
1/2 inch Type G screws 12 inches o.c.
3.11 EXTERIOR GYPSUM CEILING BOARD SOFFITS
A. Installation of exterior gypsum ceiling board soffits shall be similar to that specified for interior
gypsum board ceilings. Install molding trim continuously at all edges and control joint molding
at control joints. Space control joints no greater than 30' apart, at intersection of"L", "U" or "T"
shaped areas, around columns and other penetrations, and elsewhere as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 12 05113105
000, 2. Space 8 gauge hanger wire 48 inches o.c. in all directions. Provide additional support at
lighting fixtures, access doors, stepped soffits, areas of increased loading and elsewhere
as required by manufacturer. Secure hangers to overhead structure and framing using
method recommended by suspension system manufacturer.
3. Suspend main beams from overhead construction with hanger wire spaced not more than
48 inches o.c. Install cross tees at 24 inches o.c, mechanically joining to main beam and
to each other. Attach perimeter angle where grid system meets vertical surfaces.
a. Install double main beams at expansion joints. Do not bridge expansion joints
with steel framing or furring members.
39 FURRED WALL SYSTEMS
A. Direct Furring Channel Attachment
1. Attach metal furring channels vertically or horizontally spaced 24 inches o.c. to masonry
or concrete surfaces with hammer set or power driven fasteners or concrete stub nails
staggered 24 inches o.c. on opposite flanges. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor
with two fasteners in each wing.
2. For channels positioned horizontally, attach a fuming channel not more than 4 inches
from both the floor line and the ceiling line. For channels positioned vertically, attach a
horizontal channel between each vertical channel at a height of 4 inches above floor line.
B. Z-Furring Channels with Rigid Insulation
1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring channels spaced 24 inches o.c.
Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, install insulation full height. Except at
exterior corners, attach narrow flanges of furring channels to wall with concrete stub nails
or power driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. At exterior corners, attach wide flanges
of furring channels to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; start from this
furring with a 3 inches strip of insulation followed by furring channel in the normal
manner. At interior corners space second channel no more than 12 inches from corner
and cut insulation to fit. Hold insulation in place until gypsum panels are installed with
10: long staple, field fabricated from 18-gauge tie wire and inserted through slot in
channel.
2. Attach mitered furring channels horizontally around masonry corners at window
locations. Miter channels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Unless otherwise noted or indicated on the drawing, extend furring full height from the
floor line to underside of structure.
3.10 SHAFT WALL SYSTEM
A. The shaft wall system shall be installed where indicated and as detailed on the drawings. System
shall be similar and equal to United States Gypsum Cavity Shaft Wall System and be installed
in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain the required fire rating.
B. All studs shall extend from the floor to the underside of the structure above in one single length.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 11 05113105
by manufacturer. Score backside of gypsum panel at 1 inch intervals in order to make them •l
flexible.
1. Coordinate installation of wood blocking in partitions and furred walls for the support of wall
mounted objects as follows:
1. Wherever such reinforcing plates are indicated on the drawings.
2. In locations where wall bumpers are to be installed for the protection of wall surfaces
from swinging doors. (See Section 08710-Finish Hardware).
3.6 INSTALLATION AT DEFLECTION TRACKS
A. General: Do not fasten gypsum wallboard panels to top runner of deflection track assembly.
13. Installation At Fire-Rated Deflection Track Assemblies:
1. Install fire-safing, gypsum wallboard cladding, and firestopping compound in accordance
with deflection track manufacturer's instructions and details and in accordance with
governing fire-resistance design requirements.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS
A. Access doors will be furnished under Section 08305 - Access Panels and installed under this
Section. By careful coordination with the trades involved, install the access doors where
required.
B. Anchor firmly into position, and align properly to achieve an installation flush with the finished
surface.
3.8 CEILING SYSTEMS
A. Steel Stud Ceiling Framing:
1. Attach runners at ceiling height, through previously installed gypsum panels, to each
partition stud with two screws. Insert steel studs in runners and attach each end with one
3/8 inch pan head screw. Install 1-5/8 inch std cross-bracing over stud framing, space 48
inches o.c., and attach to each framing stud section for box reinforcing or lap studs 12
inches and secure each end with two 3/8 inch pan head screws.
2. At light troffers or any openings that interrupt the ceiling, install additional cross
reinforcing to restore lateral stability of framing.
B. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board
1. Install grid suspension in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in
compliance with ASTM C636.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 10 05113105
B. Screws for attaching wallboard to studs shall be spaced 8 inches on center at edges and at 12
inches on center in field of wallboard.
C. Gypsum wallboard shall be held in firm contact with the framing member while fasteners are
being driven. Fastening shall proceed from center portion of the wallboard toward edges and
ends. Fasteners shall be set with the heads slightly below the surface of the wallboard in a
dimple formed by the screwdriver. Avoid breaking the face paper of the wallboard; remove
improperly driven and loose screws.
D. For two-ply and three-ply application the first layer shall be installed as previously specified,
except fasteners shall be driven flush with surface of board and the joints will not be treated.
E. The second layer shall be applied by screws fastening and/or adhesion to obtain fire rating
specified. Screws shall be set as previously specified for single layer application for finishing.
Third layer shall be applied with adhesive, in addition to'screws.
F. Direct application with adhesive:
1. Testing:
a. Prior to direct application installation, test wall surfaces over which gypsum
wallboard is to be applied by installing a 48 inch by 96 inch sample, or other size
as approved by Architect, on a wall surface to be covered.
b. Allow sample to set 24 hours. Test bonding by attempting to pull board from wall.
2. Preparation:
a. Clean surfaces to which gypsum board is to be applied. Remove dirt, grease and
other contaminants which would affect adhesion of wallboard. Use cleaning
products which will leave no residue.
3. In locations indicated, direct apply gypsum wallboard to existing gypsum surfaces.
4. Cut face boards to allow continuous clearance(1/8 inch to"A inch maximum) at floor.
5. Apply any of the following: Sheetrock Brand Setting-Type (Durabond) or Sheetrock
Brand Lightweigt Setting-Type (Easy Sand) Joint Compound, Sheetrock Brand Ready-
Mixed Joint Compound at center and near each board edge in strips consisting of 4 beads,
3/8 inches wide by'/z inch high and spaced 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches on centers.
6. Position boards vertically over wall surface, press into place and provide temporary
support until adhesive is hardened.
G. Installation on Z-Furring Channels: Apply gypsum panels parallel to channels with vertical joint
occurring over channels. Use no end joints. Attach gypsum panels with 1 inch, Type "S" screws
spaced 16 inches o.c. in field of panels and at edges, and with 1-1/4 inch, Type "S" screws
spaced 12 inches o.c. at exterior corners.
1. For double layer application, install first layer and face layer parallel to channels with
vertical joints offset at least one channel. Fasten base layer with screws 24-inches on
center and face layer with 1-5/8-inch screws spaced 16-inches on center.
H. Where curved surfaces occur place a stop at one end of curve, and gently and gradually push on
other end of panels, forcing center against framing until curve is complete. Moisten face and
back of gypsum panels, and store for at least one hour to obtain shorter radii than recommended
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250-9 05113105
b. A ceiling abuts a structural element,dissimilar wall or ceiling.
C. Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling.
d. Partition or furring run exceeds 30'.
e. Ceiling dimension exceeds 50' in either direction with perimeter relief, 30' without
relief.
f. Expansion or control joints occur in the base exterior wall.
2. Install vertical control joints in partitions and furred wall surfaces where straight run
exceeds 30' and wherever indicated on the drawings. Completely fill control joints with
insulation.
3. Install reveals in gypsum wallboard for module panels and in other areas where indicated
and as detailed on the drawings.
4. Frame all openings as required for items recessed into gypsum wallboard surfaces.
3.4 INSTALLATION ON CEILINGS
A. Install gypsum board panels with ends and edges at framing members. Use panels of maximum
practical length installed either perpendicular or parallel to framing members to minimize end
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid abutting end joints in the central area of the ceiling.
Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
1. For double layer ceiling construction, install base layer boards perpendicular to framing
members, and face layer parallel with joints offset.
B. Extend ceiling board to corners and make firm contact with the wall angle, channel or top plate.
Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Cut ends, edges, scribe or make cutouts
within the field of panels in a workmanlike manner. Cut gypsum board to size using a knife and
straight edge.
C. Attach gypsum panels to framing members with specified screws spaced 8-inches on center at
periphery of gypsum panels and located 3/8-inch in from panel edges and spaced 12-inches on
center in the field. Drive fasteners in field of panels first working toward ends and edges. Hold
panels in firm contact with framing while driving fasteners. Drive fastener heads slightly below
surface of gypsum panels in a uniform dimple without breaking face paper.
D. Install trim at all internal and external angles formed by the intersection of panel surfaces or
other dissimilar materials. Apply corner bead to all vertical or horizontal external corner, and
install control joints at locations indicated in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.5 INSTALLATION ON WALLS
A. Erection of Gypsum Wallboard and Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Wallboard: Apply wallboard
with the lengths parallel to the studs. Where double layer application occurs, install first layer
horizontally. Center abutting edges over the stud flanges. No two joints shall occur at the same
stud and no joints shall occur between studs. Back all joints with metal framing.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 8 05113105
2. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Shall be installed on walls and partitions indicated,
lopk schedule and as detailed.
3. Water-Resistant Fire Rated Gypsuni Wallboard: Shall be installed on all walls and
partitions indicated or scheduled to receive tile, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Tile Backer Board: Shall be installed where indicated on the drawings. Where tile,
backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
B. General:
1. Install all material in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions.
2. Apply gypsum board panels first to the ceiling and then to the walls.
3. Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Wallboard: Apply in one-ply on partitions where indicated.
Handle fiber -reinforced gypsum wallboard and make all cuts in strict accordance with
the wallboard manufacturer.
4. At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges of the boards by the overlapping
covered edges of the abutting boards.
5. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common point
except in vertical corners.
6. All gypsum wallboard and fiber-reinforced gypsum wallboard shall be screw applied to
steel stud or furring members.
7. Work shall be performed only when temperatures and atmospheric conditions are within
the range recommended by the drywall manufacturer.
8. Gypsum wallboard and fiber-reinforced gypsum wallboard shall not be applied until all
pipes, ducts and conduits have been inspected, and pressure treated.
9. Apply gypsum wallboard to all fascias and soffits and gypsum wallboard ceilings, and
provide whatever furring is necessary for this purpose. Do not install gypsum wallboard
over studs until partition interiors are clean.
10. Install all metal framing, insulation and gypsum board full height from floor to underside
of structure, except as indicated otherwise on the drawings.
11. Except where vinyl corner guards are required to be installed on vertical corners,
reinforce all exposed to view vertical and horizontal exterior corners with corner beads
fastened with 9/16 inch rosin coated staples 9 inches o.c. on both flanges along the entire
length of the bead.
12. Install casing beads where wallboard or fiber-reinforced gypsum wallboard abuts
dissimilar materials, at edges of all reveals and wherever indicated on the drawings.
13. Install acoustical sealant at perimeter of all partitions in which wallboard panels are
installed full height, at all cutouts such as, but not limited to, receptacles, duct and pipe
openings, and wherever acoustical sealant is indicated on the drawings in conjunction
with gypsum wallboard construction.
14. Install compressible insulation filler where stud partitions abut window mullions.
C. Control Joints and Reveals
1. Isolate gypsum wallboard surfaces with control joints where:
a. Partition or furring abuts a structural element (except floor) or dissimilar wall or
ceiling.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250-7 05113105
2. Control Joints for Exterior Gypsum Soffits: USG Control Joint No. 093.
H. Adhesives,joint tape,joint compound and concealment compound, topping compound shall be
of the types recommended by the wallboard manufacturer.
1. At surfaces scheduled to receive Level 5 finish, apply setting-type joint compound; U.S.
Gypsum Durabond 90.
I. C..uulking: acoustical sealant as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer.
J. Accessories for Fire-]fated Deflection Tracks:
1. Fire-Safing: Mineral wool, 3.5 pcf density minimum.
2. Firestopping Compound: Gypsum based free of asbestos and capable of maintaining an
effective barrier against flame, smoke and gas. Provide required Flame (F) and
Temperature (T) ratings, as tested by an independent testing agency in accordance with
ASTM E-814, and conform to applicable governing codes. Provide Sta-Smooth FS-90
Fire Shield as manufactured by National Gypsum Company, Fire Stop Compound, as
manufactured by United States Gypsum Company, or approved equal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including hollow-metal frames and
framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorage: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to
building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers, that hangers will develop their
full strength, and are spaced as required to support ceilings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locations:
1. Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard: applied in one-ply or two-plies on walls, partitions and
ceilings where indicated, scheduled and as detailed to obtain fire ratings indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250-6 05/13/05
a. Hat-shaped, 24-gage hot dipped galvanized steel, with 7/8-inch depth.
b. Z-shaped, 24 gauge hot dipped galvanized steel. Sizes for Z-furring channels shall
be as indicated on the drawings.
C. Resilient furring channels, 1/2-inch-deep hot-dipped galvanized asymmetric-
shaped steel channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg.
3. Shaft Wall Framing: Double"E" and "GH" Steel Studs, and "J"Runners for Shaft Walls:
2 1/2-inch, 4-inch and 6-inch x 20 gauge hot dipped galvanized studs and runners, lengths
as required.
D. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: Pre-engineered direct-hung grid system
complying with ASTM C645 and consisting of heavy duty, double-web steel construction with
galvanized finish. Provide fire rated components where ceiling is part of rated assembly.
1. "Drywall Suspension System" by USG Interiors, Chicago, IL 60606;
(800) 874-4968.
2. "Drywall Furring System" by Armstrong World Industries, Lancaster, PA 17604;
(800)448-1405.
3. "640 Furring System" by Chicago Metallic Corp., Chicago, IL 60638; (800) 323-7164.
E. Trim:
I. Casing Beads: U. S. Gypsum No. 200-A; Gold Bond No. 100.
2. Corner Beads: U.S. Gypsum"Dur-A-Bead"; Gold Bond 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch.
3. Perimeter Molding for Exterior Gypsum Soffits: Fry vented reveal molding WDM-50-V-
75 baked on white enamel.
F. Extruded Aluminum Trim and Shapes:
1. Manufacturer: Provide products as manufactured by Gordon, Inc., Bossier City, LA
71111; (800)747-8954, or as approved equal.
2. Perimeter Pockets: Final Forms Type `D", furnished complete with hanger clips and
brackets. The perimeter pocket shall be factory fabricated of alloy 6063-T5 extruded
aluminum in sizes and configurations as shown on drawings. Pocket shall be two piece
construction with necessary splices and hangers. Pocket shall be prepainted with color to
match ceiling grid.
3. Wall Reveal Channels: Final Forms Series 500, manufactured by Gordon, Inc., or as
approved equal.
4. Edge Trim: Final Forms Series 200,manufactured by Gordon, Inc.,or as approved equal.
5. Trim Reveals: Final Forms Series 300, manufactured by Gordon, Inc., or as approved
equal.
6. Unless otherwise detailed, all reveals shall be 1/4-inch width.
7. Trim shall consist of a fin, tapered, grooved and prepunched for screw attachment and to
accept bonding agent. Surface coated with a protective film compatible with paint.
G. Control Joints:
1. Control Joints between Interior Gypsum Surfaces: U. S. Gypsum No. 093; Gold Bond
"E-Z Strip".
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250-5 05113105
48-inch widths as manufactured by United States Gypsum. Panels shall be mold and water AO%
resistant throughout the core.
E. "1111, Backer Board Panels: For use with the installation of ceramic wall tile shall be "Dnrock",
as manufactured by United States Gypsum Company. Thickness shall be 1/2 inches.
F. 1-Wer Board for Shaft Walls: ASTM C442, fire-resistant panels with non-combustible, moisture
resistant core encased in a water-resistant, mold and mildew resistant face and back paper.
Provide 1-inch thick by 24-inch wide panels with lengths as required, beveled edged.
1. Product: "Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panels — Enhanced" as manufactured by
United States Gypsum."
G. Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board: Shall be fire rated 5/8 inch thick, supplied in 48 inch widths, as
manufactured by United States Gypsum or as approved equal.
H. hxterior Sheathing Panels: For curtain wall construction shall be 1/2" x 48" x 96", Dens-Glass
Gold Gypsum Sheathing manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corporation or 1/2" x 48" x 96"
Fiberock'''"' Sheathing manufactured by United States Gypsum.
1. Exterior Sheathing Panels: For parapet wall construction to receive adhered membrane roofing
system shall be 5/8-inch thick, square edge, 48-inch by 96-inch glass mat faced gypsum with
non-asphaltic, highly filled coating on one side.
1. Product: "DensDeck Prime Roof Guard"as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation."
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Wallboard Screws:
1. Type "S" shall not be less than 1 inch long for one-ply application and not less than 1-5/8
inch for second ply attachment in two-ply application.
2. Durock Steel Screws shall be used for the application of Tile Backer Board.
3. Screws for exterior sheathing shall be 1 inch long, Kwik-Pro S or SD as required by
manufacturer for gage of stud to be used, manufactured by Hilti Corp.,Tulsa, OK(1-800-
879-8000), or as approved equal,and shall be provided with electroplated zinc finish.
B. Wire:
1. Hanger wire shall be 8 gauge, galvanized wire.
2. Tie wire shall be 16 gauge,galvanized wire.
C. Metal Framing Accessories:
1. Cold Rolled Channels: 3/4 inch and 1-1/2 inches as specified. Channels located in
exterior soffits shall be hot dipped galvanized.
2. Metal Furring Channels:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250-4 05/13/05
AO** B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: All materials for the various systems specified shall be manufactured one of the
following.
1. United States Gypsum(USG), Chicago, IL 60606 (800) 874-4968.
2. Gold Bond (National Gypsum Company), Charlotte, NC 28211 (800) 628-4662.
3. G-P Gypsum Corp.,Atlanta,GA 30303 (800) 225-6119.
B. In order to provide total systems, all materials to be used on a system, such as partition system,
furred wall system or ceiling system shall be the products of one of the listed manufacturers,
unless specified otherwise.
2.2 MATERIALS—GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Gypsum Board: Gypsum wallboard shall be fire rated Firecode Type `X', except where
Firecode `C' is required by the designated fire test, 5/8-inch, 1/2-inch and thick, as indicated,
tapered edge supplied in 48 inch widths and in such lengths as will result in a minimum of
joints. Wallboard shall be delivered to the job with taped ends bearing Underwriters'
Laboratories labels with proper identification.
1. The interior gypsum wallboard panels installed on exterior walls constructed of metal
studs and exterior furred walls shall be Firecode Type `X',aluminum foil backed gypsum
wallboard with taped ends bearing Underwriters' Laboratories labels. Panel thickness
shall be 5/8 inch thick.
B. Impact Resistant Gypsum Board: Shall be "Fiberock Brand AR" interior panels, UL Classified
for fire resistance, 5/8-inch thick with tapered edges, supplied in 48-inch widths as
manufactured by United States Gypsum.
C. Water Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Shall be fire rated Firecode Type `X', 5/8 inch thick,
tapered edges supplied in 48 inch widths and in such lengths as will result in a minimum of
joints. Wallboard shall be delivered to the job with taped ends bearing Underwriters'
Laboratories labels for proper identification.
D. Water Resistant - Impact Resistant Gypsum Board: Shall be "Fiberock Brand Aqua-Tough"
interior panels, UL Classified for fire resistance, 5/8-inch thick with tapered edges, supplied in
l
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package' —2323 09250-3 05113105
B. Related Sections include the following: A
I. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and plywood secured to metal studs.
2. Section 07210,Building Insulation.
3. Section 07840,Firestops and Smokeseals
4. Section 09111, Interior Metal Stud System: Studs for interior walls, Deflection tracks.
5. Section 09310,Tiling: Taping joints for cementitious tile backer board.
6. Section 10262, Corner Guards.Furnishing of corner guards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Fire rated partitions and construction joints at deflection tracks are based on tests listed on the
Drawings. Construction of these partitions and construction joints shall conform to these tests
and in addition, shall be in accordance with the details on the Drawings.
C. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Section 07196—Air Barrier Systems.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250-2 05/13/05
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide gypsum drywall and accessories.
B. The work to be performed includes but is not limited to:
1. Partitions:
a. Interior metal framed drywall partitions.
b. Furring with drywall all surfaces where furred gypsum wallboard is indicated on
the drawings.
C. Gypsum board shaft wall system.
2. Ceilings and Soffits:
a. Interior metal framed drywall ceilings, soffits and fascias.
b. Exterior gypsum wallboard soffits.
3. Sheathing:
a. Gypsum sheathing for exterior wall system constructed of face brick with metal
stud backup.
b. Gypsum sheathing for parapet walls.
4. Provide gypsum wallboard cladding strips,fire-safing, and firestopping compound as part
of fire-resistant deflection track assembly at tops of the below listed interior partition
types. (Note: Deflection track and studs provided under Section 09111 — Interior Metal
Stud System).
a. Fire-rated partitions
b. Corridor partitions
C. Smoke partitions
5. Other work specified herein.
C. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section
1. Section 07210, Building Insulation: Rigid insulation for furred walls installed under this
Section 09250.
2. Section 10262, Corner Guards: Aluminum retainers for flush mounted vinyl acrylic
corner guards.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09250- 1 05113105
3.5 TOUCHUP
A. Upon completion of the other work of this Section, inspect all gypsum plaster surfaces and
correct conditions which do not meet specified requirements. Remove protective materials and
plaster materials from adjacent surfaces, and remove stains which would adversely affect
finishes.
END OF SECTION 09210
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM PLASTER
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 09210-4 05/13/05
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects
caused by plastering.
B. Verify that grounds have been set in a manner to achieve the required plaster thicknesses.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform all work in strict accordance with the approved plaster manufacturer's written
specifications.
3.4 PATCHING
A. Remove deteriorated plaster from existing plastered surfaces which are to remain. Cut out
deteriorated plaster to a point where sound plaster is encountered. Remove plaster base if base
is found to be deteriorated. Through wall cracks on plastered surfaces shall be cut back to the
base and 6" on each side of crack.
B. Install steel framing and metal lath as required to apply plaster for patching.
C. Apply 3 coat plaster system over metal lath. Plaster finish shall identically match existing
plastered surface. Patch existing plastered ceilings so as to maintain fire resistance integrity of
the entire ceiling.
D. Patch all plastered surfaces and prepare such surfaces for the application of paint or wall
covering by grinding all high spots and filling all depressions with Durabond Joint Compound,
or other material approved by the Architect. Patching of plaster shall match existing work in
texture and finish, and at joining with plaster previously applied, shall finish flush and smooth.
Heavy textured sandpaper of other abrasive shall not be used to clean or smooth off finished
plaster surfaces.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM PLASTER
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09210-3 05/13/05
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage fi-01T)
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other
causes.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM C 842 requirements or gypsum plaster manufacturer's written
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum plaster drying out too quickly.
1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces
normal drying conditions.
3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Products: All products shall be manufactured by U.S. Gypsum, National Gypsum (Goldbond),
or as approved equal.
B. Gypsum plaster: Shall match existing plaster for texture and finish.
C. Lath:
1. Gypsum Lath: Screw attached gypsum plaster base lath for interior use.
2. Metal Lath and Furring: Screw attached self-furring diamond-mesh steel lath and
furring; Rust-inhibitive paint finish.
D. Accessories: Galvanized steel corner beads,casing beads,and control joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM PLASTER
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 09210-2 05/13/05
SECTION 09210 -GYPSUM PLASTER
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Patch all lath,plaster and trim in existing areas disturbed by new construction.
2. Patch all cracks in existing plastered surfaces which are to remain and which are
indicated or required to be painted or receive a wall covering.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. DOCUments affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01045, Cutting and Patching.
2. Section 02070, Selective Demolition.
3. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: patching of existing drywall assemblies
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GYPSUM PLASTER
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 09210-1 05/13/05
not opposite, install steel stud cross braces 24" o.c. horizontally and securely anchor each Awk
end to a continuous horizontal 2-1/2"runner screw attached to chase wall studs within the
cavity.
1). Coordination:
1. Space the studs as specified to give proper support for the covering material.
2. Coordinate and provide required backing and other support for items to be mounted on
the finished covering.
3. Coordinate requirements for pipes and other items designed to be housed within the
partition and wall systems.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Vertical alignment (plumbness) of studs shall be within 1/960t" (1/8 inches in 10 feet) of the
span.
B. Horizontal alignment (levelness) of walls shall be within 1/960`' (1/8 inches in 10 feet) of their
respective lengths.
C. Spacing of studs shall not be more than plus or minus 1/8 inches from the designed spacing
providing that the cumulative error does not exceed the requirements of the finishing materials.
END OF SECTION 09111
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR METAL STUD SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09111 -6 05113105
2) Install fire-rated deflection track top runner in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions at top of fire-rated, corridor and smoke
partitions.
B. Steel Stud Partitions and Furred Walls
1. Except as indicated otherwise on the drawings, steel stud partitions shall be carried full
height from floor to the underside of slab or deck above. Partitions shall be carried
between structural joists, beams and other objects extending down from the underside of
deck or slab and which occur at an angle to the partition. Wherever a partition occurs
directly under and parallel with a steel joist, the joist shall be furred as required to be
covered with wallboard on both sides.
2. Pipe spaces where indicated shall be double partitions of size to accommodate the pipes.
3. Erection of Steel Studs: Floor and ceiling tracks shall be aligned accurately according to
partition layout, and secured to floor and slab or deck above with 1/2" concrete stub nails
or other approved fasteners, not more than 2' on centers. Use track at top of door frames
and over and under view windows. Studs shall be positioned in track at not over 16" on
center, except where walls are used to support wall cabinets or other wall mounted
equipment, reduce metal stud spacing to 12" on center and secure in place. Studs located
adjacent to door, view windows or other similar openings, partition intersections and
corners shall be secured by 3/8" drywall screws through both flanges of studs and bottom
tracks (note: do not fasten through top track_when deflection tracks are used).
4. Where horizontal studs are used for wall reinforcing or framing, cut pieces of stud and
install horizontally between vertical studs. Cope horizontal studs to fit between flanges of
vertical studs. Bend ends of horizontal studs or install clip angles in order to secure by
screwing to vertical studs. Where curved partitions occur, space framing closer together
than normal to prevent flat areas between framing members.
5. All door frames shall have metal stud reinforcing consisting of boxed double studs at
each jamb, with gypsum panels screw attached 8" o.c. to both studs. Box studs shall
consist of standard stud and 20 gauge stud, with 20 gauge stud next to jamb anchor clip.
For doors over 48" wide and double doors, install two 20 gauge studs.
6. At furred walls brace studs to walls wherever stud length exceeds manufacturer's
recommended limit height for required stud size.
C. Double Stud Partitions
1. Align parallel rows of floor and ceiling runners spaced apart as detailed. Attach to
concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power driven anchors 24" o.c.
2. Position steel studs vertically in runners, 16" o.c. with flanges in the same direction and
with studs on opposite sides of flanges in the same direction and with studs on opposite
sides of chase directly across from each other. Anchor all studs to floor and ceiling runner
flanges with USG Metal Lock Fastener tool.
3. Cut cross bracing to be placed between rows of studs from gypsum panels, 12" high by
chase wall width. Space braces 48" o.c. vertically and attach to stud webs with six 1",
Type "S" screws per brace. If larger braces are used, space screws 8" o.c. maximum on
each side.
4. Bracing of 2-1/2" steel studs may be used in place of gypsum panels. Anchor web at each
end of steel brace to stud web with two 3/8" pan head screws. When chase wall studs are
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR METAL STUD SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09111 -5 05113105
configuration, of thickness indicated for studs and width to accommodate depth of
studs indicated with flanges offset to accommodate gypsum board thickness.
1) Offset Configuration:
a) "Shadowline" by Fire Trak Corp., at balanced and unbalanced fire-
rated assembly partitions.
b) "Cavity Shadowline" by Fire Trak Corp., at shaftwall and chase wall
(double stud)partitions.
b. Coordination: Verify with partition schedule on the Drawings to ensure proper
depth of flange offsets at various partitions types.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.t EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach Z-clips to building structure
indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Fasten legs of clips to bottom of
beams with steel fasteners or welds,not more than 16-inches o.c.
2. Provide Z-clips of proper size, extending through the fireproofing material, so as not to
reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings
indicated during installation of top track or deflection track. Protect adjacent fire-
resistive materials from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Accurately layout partition and wall lines from the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
2. Install metal studs and accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations,anchoring all components firmly into position.
3. Deflection Track Installation:
a. Isolate interior metal stud framing from building structure to prevent transfer of
loading imposed by structural movement due to deflection.
1) Install deflection track top runner in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as required to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR METAL STUD SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09111 -4 05/13/05
ads'` 2. Deflection Track:
a. Fire Trak Corp.,Kimball MN 55353; (800) 398-7660.
2.2 METAL STUDS
A. Steel Stud System:
1. Meet or exceed minimum requirements of ASTM C 645, including requirements for
minimum thickness.
2. Steel studs:
a. Partitions, furred walls and ceiling suspension systems shall be 20-gauge standard
type, except provide heavier gage studs when recommended by manufacturer for
spans and loads imposed.
b. 2-1/2", 3-5/8" and 6" unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, shop fabricated,
complete with floor and ceiling track.
C. Studs shall be continuous one-piece from floor to underside of slab or metal deck
above.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General:
1. Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, tracks, clips, anchors,
** fastening devices, and other accessories required for a complete and proper installation;
all as recommended by the manufacturer of the steel studs used.
a. Steel Attachment Clips: Z-shaped clips formed from 1-inch wide strips of
minimum 20 gage galvanized steel with 2-inch long upper and lower legs. Clips to
be sized to extend through the thickness of the spray-applied fire-resistive material.
B. Deflection Track Assemblies:
1. Non Fire-Rated Assemblies
a. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard top runner with extended flanges
designed to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions
resulting from deflection of the structure above fabricated from steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568. Thickness as indicated for studs,
and width to accommodate depth of studs, and the following configuration.
1) Top runner with extended deep flanges that either have V-shaped offsets
that compress; slots 1 inch o.c. that allow fasteners attached to studs through
the slots; or 16 gage sliding clip assemblies attached to top track and clipped
to stud
2. Fire-Rated Assemblies:
a. Deflection and Firestop Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads to
expand and contract with movement of structure above while maintaining
continuity of the assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 645 except
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR METAL STUD SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09111 -3 05113105
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Schedule: Submit schedule verifying locations and configuration of fire-rated deflection track
assemblies for use in coordinating installation gypsum wallboard, fire-safing, and firestopping
compound under the work of Section 09250—Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-rated Deflection Track Assemblies:
1. Provide fire-rated deflection track systems conforming to Building Code Requirements in
fire resistant wall and floor assemblies.
2. Testing Requirements:
a. All firestop/smokeseal systems shall be tested by a recognized, independent testing
agency and shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) requirements of
ASTM E-814 and UBC 43-6. „wk
b. Conform to UL Fire Hazard Classification Requirements.
3. Fire-rated deflection track assemblies shall have fire resistance rating at least equal to the
partition construction into which it is installed.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
following:
1. Standard Steel Studs:
a. United States Gypsum(USG), Chicago, IL 60606; (800) 874-4968
b. Marino/Ware, South Plainfield,NJ 07080; (800)627-4661.
C. Superior Steel Studs,Inc.,Astoria, NY 11102; (718) (718) 545-7500.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR METAL STUD SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09111 -2 05113105
SECTION 091 t 1 - INTERIOR METAL STUD SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide interior metal studs and accessories.
B. Provide deflection track assemblies at tops of metal stud partitions.
1. Provide fire-rated assemblies at fire-rated, corridor, and smoke partitions.
2. Provide non fire-rated assemblies at all other partitions.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
., 1. Section 05400,Light Gage Metal Framing.
2. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry; wood blocking within partitions.
3. Section 07810, Sprayed-On Fireproofing: Coordination of the following items.
a. Installation of Z-clips to structural members prior to application of spray-on
fireproofing material.
4. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination of the following items.
a. Deflection track installation at shaft wall installations.
b. Installation of gypsum wallboard, fire-safing, and firestopping compound at top of
fire-rated deflection track assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Submit copies of Systems Designs as indicated in latest edition of Fire Resistance
Directory - Vol. II, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for each type of fire-rated deflection
track assembly in the Work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR METAL STUD SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 09111 - 1 05113105
END OF SECTION 08911
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 08911 - 14 05113105
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Field engineer from curtain wall manufacturer shall visually
inspect the system at the following stages to ensure compliance with manufacturer's
recommendation for installation.
1. Prior to erection of subframe, verify structural support system is within tolerances and
proper alignment.
2. During installation: Provide periodic inspection during installation at critical stages of
each curtain wall system.
3. Upon completion of installation: Inspect entire system for areas of non-conformance to
either manufacturer's recommendations or mock-up test report recommendation.
4. Issue written report within 48 hours of Site inspection to Contractor and Architect.
B. Field Tests: Architect shall select representative areas to be tested to determine compliance of
installed system with specified requirements. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water
penetration with manufacturer's representative present.
1. Testing Agency: Testing shall be performed per AAMA 503 by a qualified independent
testing agency. Refer to Section 01410,Testing Laboratory Services.
a. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
2. Air Infiltration Tests: Areas shall be tested for air leakage in accordance with ASTM
E783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the
performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ftz, which ever is greater at a minimum static air
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
3. Water Infiltration Tests: Areas shall be tested for water infiltration in accordance with
ASTM E1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test
pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 8 psf.
4. Repair or replace work as part of the contract amount where test results and inspections
indicate that it does not comply with specified performance requirements.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation
of glass and sealants, allowing for nominal curing of liquid sealants. Clean installed products in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protection: Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required to ensure that system
will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance.
Repair or replace damaged work.
C. At the time of Substantial Completion, clean curtain wall system thoroughly. Demonstrate
proper cleaning methods and materials to the Owner's maintenance personnel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 - 13 05/13/05
3. Limit offsets in end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignments of adjoining and consecutive
members, which form planes, continuous runs and profiles to the following:
a. Not more than 1/16-inch offset in flush alignment, including members which are
out-of-flush.
b. Not more than 1/8-inch offset where members are offset from each other by more
than a 2-inch separation or protrusion.
F. Glazing: Install glazing as specified Section 08800, Glazing. Glass shall be outside glazed and
held in place with extruded aluminum pressure plates anchored to the mullion using stainless
steel fasteners spaced no greater than 8-inches on center complying with manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Provide gasket washer beneath heads of exterior fasteners. Use neoprene spacers at
extrusions for glass separation. At no point shall glass come in contact with metal parts.
2. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
G. Sealants: Install sealants as indicated and required to achieve water and airtight assembly,
complying with requirements of curtain wall manufacturer and Section 07920, Joint Sealants.
1. Clean and prime joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Install sealant and
related backing material around perimeter of frames.
2. Apply sealant filling joint and tool smooth to insure full contact with adjacent surfaces.
Strike off excess material.
H. Curtain Wall Insulation: Install and secure insulation materials as specified in Section 07210,
Building Insulation.
1. Seal foil facing of insulation to surrounding curtain wall framing with foil tape to provide
positive vapor barrier.
2. Where multiple pieces of insulation are required, splice insulation together with foil tape
to ensure continuous visual appearance when viewed through spandrel glass.
1. Firestopping: Install perimeter fire-containment systems (safing insulation) where indicated or
required as specified in Section 07270,Firestops and Smokeseals.
1. Clean debris from behind curtain wall during erection and provide temporary closures to
prevent accumulation of debris.
J. Installation of Metal Panels:
1. Coordinate work with the metal panel manufacturer. Glaze metal panels into curtain wall
system in strict accordance with panel manufacturer's instructions.
2. Remove strippable film from panels as they are erected and prior to moving to next
portion or area.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 - 12 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Existing Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product
installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive
curtain wall system and sill plate is level in accordance with manufacturer's acceptable
tolerances.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install curtain wall system in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install components plumb, level, and true to line, anchored securely, without warp or rack of
frames. Install sills and related trim.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action contact points.
1. Protect aluminum in contact with masonry, concrete, steel, and other dissimilar materials
from galvanic and corrosive action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or
by applying neoprene gaskets or tape or installing nonconductive shims as recommended
by manufacturer.
E. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum framed curtain-wall systems to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1. Limit variations from plumb, level, or dimensional angle to the following:
a. Not more than 1/8-inch deviation in 1 story height, in 10 foot vertical, angular run,
or in 20 foot horizontal run.
b. Not more than 1/4-inch deviation in 40 foot run, in any direction.
C. At battered wall areas,plumb is defined to match indicated slope.
2. Limit variations from location (theoretical calculated position in plan or elevation based
on established floor lines and column lines), including variations from plumb and level,
to the following:
a. Not more than 3/8-inch total deviation for member at any location.
b. Not more than 1/8-inch change in deviation for member for 10 foot run.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 - 11 05113105
Awk
D. Fabrication:
1. Corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration
and fillet welds. Glazing stops shall be snap in type.
2. The door weathering on a single acting butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall be
Kawneer SEAL-AIR weathering. It shall be a dense, semi-rigid polymeric material,
which remains resilient and retains its weathering ability under temperature extremes.
3. Fabricate doors with 5 inch high midrail, unless sized otherwise on Contract Drawings.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) 'Designation System for Aluminum
Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations.
13. High Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C40R1x, AAMA 2605.
1. Apply fluoropolymer finish to all exposed to view aluminum. The finish coating for
extruded aluminum shall be a factory applied, oven baked finish based on Kynar 500 or
Hylar 5000 (70% min. polyvinylidene fluoride — PVF2). Application of the finish based
on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shall be performed under specifications issued by the
coating manufacturer and by an applicator specifically approved by manufacturer. Said
applicator shall provide written notification of approval by the manufacturer prior to
application of the finish. The coating system shall be applied to properly cleaned and
pretreated aluminum. The pretreatment shall meet ASTM D-1730-67, Type B, Method 5
or Method 7. Processing shall conform with ASTM B-339-67 (1972) Section 5.
Conversion coating weight shall be between 30-100 mgms. per square foot.
2. Application:
a. The finish for all exposed to view aluminum shall be a two coat, two bake system.
The primer coat shall be an inhibitive primer with dry film thickness averaging 0.2
mils to 0.3 mils. The color coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0
mils. The total minimum dry film thickness of the fluoropolymer system shall be
1.2 mils.
3. Unexposed areas such as inside corners and channels shall be visually covered to the
extent possible.
4. The finish shall meet the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association "2605 -
Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels".
5. Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc.,No other manufacturer will be acceptable.
a. Color and Gloss: Match metal faced composite wall panel `MP-2' furnished under
Section 07412-Manufactured Metal Wall Panels..
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 - 10 05/13/05
2. Provide extruded aluminum components with straight, sharp, well-defined corners and
low flush sightlines, free of defects or deformations. Accurately fit and secure joints and
corners with shear blocks and internal reinforcement. Make joints flush, hairline and
weatherproof.
3. Provide major framing members factory assembled in basic rectangular units sized for
ease of erection and transportation. Provide interlocking male/female type stack joints at
adjacent grid frame members to allow thermal expansion.
4. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
5. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
6. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subjected to temperature
differential from—30 degrees F to+180 degrees F without damage.
7. The curtain wall system and its anchorage shall be designed to accommodate differential
floor movements of 1/4-inch vertically without damage.
B. Drainage: Provide weep holes and drainage slots within glazing pockets to drain any and all
condensation or accumulating water within the system to exterior.
C. Thermal Break: Frame and pressure plates shall be thermally separated. Completely insulate
pressure plate retaining screws from exterior air and pressure plate contact. Do not short circuit
thermal barrier with improper placement of through fasteners. Do not impair independent frame
movement by improper placement of bolts, screws, welds, or other fasteners.
2.5 DOORS
A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard aluminum glazed doors.
1. Door Design: Series 350 as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc., or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Air Infiltration: Air infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283, at a
pressure differential of 1.567 psf(75 Pa). A single 3'-0" x T-0" entrance door and frame
shall not exceed .50 CFM per linear foot of perimeter crack. A pair of 6-0" x 74"
entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 CFM per linear foot of perimeter crack.
C. Hardware:
1. Install all reinforcing required and prepare all doors and frames for finished hardware
furnished under Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. The finish hardware supplier will
furnish physical hardware to the entrance manufacturer prior to fabrication.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 -9 05/13/05
C. Steel Shapes,Plates and Bars: ASTM A36; shapes to suit mullion sections.
D. Primer: FS TT-P-31; red; brown; for shop application and field touch-up.
E. Fasteners: 300 Series stainless steel, type and size recommended by curtain wall manufacturer
and compatible with materials being fastened.
F. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum or steel that is properly insulated from aluminum.
G. Glazing: Provide 1-inch insulating glass of type(s) as indicated on the drawings. Where noted,
provide an interior 1/4-inch glazed access panel (triple glazed units). Comply with
requirements as specified in Section 08800, Glazing.
1-1. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed corner, pressure-glazing system of extruded
silicone compatible EPDM rubber complying with ASTM C864 for glazing gaskets, setting
blocks, shims and spacers.
I. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
J. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint, containing no asbestos fibers, formulated
for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Basis of Design Series: The design for glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems is based on
Kawneer"1600 Wall System";
1. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads; 2-1/2—inch face x depth as
indicated,for 1-inch and 1/4-inch infill.
a. Reinforcing required to comply with specified lateral load design requirements
shall be provided within curtain wall framing; component sizes to remain as
indicated.
b. Provide pressure plate covers in profiles and depths as follows, unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings.
1) Typical Horizontal and Vertical Cover: 2-1/2 inch by 3/4-inch; Kawneer
#162-006.
2) Vertical Accent Cover: 2-1/2 inch by 2-1/4 -inch; Kawneer#813-897.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with minimum
clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and
dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 - 8 05113105
AO"`, 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements of openings and structural supports for
aluminum framed curtain wall systems by.field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty
doclnnent executed by authorized company official in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that do not comply with
requirements or fail within specified warranty period. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to,
and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Loosening,
weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system caused by
thermal movement, or thermal movement transmitted to other-systems.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
C. Deterioration of metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water leakage.
e. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
2. Warranty Period: Two(2)years from date of Substantial Completion.
w
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide listed product by
one of the following:
1. Kawneer Company, Inc.,Norcross,GA;"1600 Wall System".
2. Wausau Window and Wall Systems,Wausau,WI; "Superwall Series".
3. Hankins &Johann, Inc.,Richmond,VA; "2500CW Series".
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 or—T6 alloy and temper.
2. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209, 5005H34(anodic) or 3003H14.
B. Steel Sheet and Strip: ASTM A653; steel sheet zinc coated (galvanized)by the hot-dip process.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 -7 05113105
e. Glazing and similar details.
f. Profiles.
g. Intersections.
h. Flashing.
T. Certificates: Submit a letter certified by a Structural Engineer registered in the Commonwealth
of Massachusetts, stating that the curtain wall framing is designed to comply with the specified
design requirements. Submit letter with Shop Drawings and do not submit calculations.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineering and Design: Provide the services of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered
in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, to design, engineer, and certify that the work of this
section meets or exceeds the requirements specified in this section. The Engineer shall assume
professional responsibility for the design of all curtain wall framing components and their
connections. Design decisions which effect visual characteristics shall be subject to the approval
and modifications of the Architect.
1. All shop drawings shall bear the signature and stamp of a licensed structural engineer
registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, who designed the aluminum framed
curtain wall system and oversaw the production of the Shop Drawings.
2. Curtain wall submittals shall be prepared (engineered and detailed) by the curtain wall
manufacturer directly, and not by glazing subcontractor or a subsidiary of the curtain wall
manufacturer.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation of systems similar in complexity to
those required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.
1. Curtain wall manufacturer shall review and approve qualifications of installer, indicating
manufacturer's verification that installer meets specified minimum requirements.
2. Not less than 5 years experience with systems.
3. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system.
4. Installation by curtain wall manufacturer, by his authorized representative, or under his
direct supervision and responsibility.
C. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,
substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
D. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Section 07196—Air Barrier System
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver products in a manner that will prevent distortion or damage. Store frames upright and
off ground. Protect finishes from staining and scratching. Replace damaged material.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 -6 05113105
1. Section 07412,Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
2. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
3. Section 08800, Glazing.
C. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature containing information verifying that
Products comply with these specifications.
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Certified test reports clearly indicating compliance with performance requirements
specified herein.
4. Sealant manufacturer's data on surface preparation and application for each type of
sealants proposed.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioning, general construction, specific modifications, component
connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following
specific requirements.
1. All shop drawings shall bear the signature and stamp of a licensed structural engineer
registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, who designed the aluminum framed
curtain wall system and oversaw the production of the Shop Drawings.
2. Elevate entire openings of curtain wall system.
3. Indicate conditions at adjacent and dissimilar construction, comers, terminators, parapets,
soffits, sills,etc.
4. Indicate anchorage details, including dimensioning for sizing and setting embedded
items, expansion joints both vertically and horizontally.
5. Profiles, thickness, and construction of members, custom extrusion, integration of
component items specified under other Sections.
6. Detail rain screen and weepage system.
7. Indicate glazing details, including wet sealant locations, type, lengths, and dry gasket
system including corner construction, setting blocks, jamb cushions, and miscellaneous
accessories.
8. Indicate glass types, sizes, and edge clearances.
9. Indicate jamb, head, sill, and corner conditions and specific anchorage details for each
situation.
10. Indicate fabrication details for aluminum closures in conjunction with aluminum curtain
wall system.
E. Samples: Submit samples of exposed finishes.
I. Exposed Finish: Three (3) aluminum samples, 3-inches by 5-inches indicating color
selection approved by the Architect.
2. Fabrication Sample: The Architect reserve the right to require fabrication samples
showing the following:
a. Prime members.
b. Joinery.
C. Anchorage.
d. Expansion provisions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 -5 05113105
4) Basic Velocity Pressure: (P,.): 12.5
5) Wind Load Importance Factor(1): 1.16
6) Product of Internal Pressure Coefficient and Gust_ Response Factor (GCS,;):
Condition(+0.25 and —0.25).
b. Deflection Limit: Engineer aluminum curtain wall flaming with the following
deflection limits applied to positive load, per ASTM E72 Chamber Method.
Ultimate structural values shall be achieved without the use of backside
mechanical attachments to the structure.
1) Vertical spans over 13'-6": L/240+ 1/4-inch.
2) Vertical spans less than 13'-6": L/175.
2. Structural-Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems tested
according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
a. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding specified limits.
b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile wind for relevant
exposure category.
J. Seismic Requirements
1. General Seismic Requirements: Architectural components and their attachments shall
comply with seismic design requirements of the referenced building code for a project in
Seismic Hazard Exposure Group I11, with a Seismic Performance Category of D:
2. Architectural Components Design: The glazed aluminum curtain wall system and
attachments shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Section 1612.7.3 of Amok,
780 CMR, in its entirety, and for seismic forces (FP) in accordance with the formula Fp=
A,,C,PWc where the following values are used:
a. The coefficient representing effective peak velocity-related acceleration (Av) _
0.12g.
b. The seismic coefficient for architectural components (Cc):
1) Components(Cc)=0.9.
2) Attachments (Cc)= 3.0
C. Performance criteria factor from Table 1612.7.3 of 780 CMR(P)= 1.5.
d. Wc= weight of architectural component.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions and the
following:
1. Curtain wall submittals shall be prepared (engineered and detailed) by the curtain wall
manufacturer directly, and not by glazing subcontractor or a subsidiary of the curtain wall
manufacturer.
B. Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure that "design intent" of
the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 -4 05113105
B. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum curtain wall system with maximrun air leakage of no more
than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E283 at a minimum
static air pressure differential of 6.21 psf.
C. Water Penetration: Provide aluminum curtain wall system that do not evidence water leakage
when tested according to ASTM E331 at a minimum design positive and negative pressure
differential of 15 lbs/sq. ft. with a water rate of 5 gallons/hr./sq. ft.
D. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum curtain wall system with condensation resistance
factor(CRF) of not less than the following values when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1. Test Sample Criteria: 6'-0" x 6'-8" test unit with 1-inch insulating composed of two 1/4
inch liter with a low-e coating applied to the No. 3 surface, and 1/2-inch argon filled
interspace. Data from calculation, test reports on units of different size or non-
representative frame proportions will not be accepted.
2. CRF--Frame Profile: 73
3. C'RF—Glass: 68
E. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum curtain wall system with average U-factor of not
more than 0.48 when tested according to AAMA 1503.
F. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum curtain wall system with minimum STC 34 according
to ASTM E413 as determined by testing according to ASTM E90.
G. Thermal Performance: Provide aluminum curtain wall system that allows for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change in ambient and surface temperatures.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime—sky heat loss.
1. Base thermal movement on a minimum of temperature differential from—30 degrees F to
+120 degrees F.
H. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by curtain-wall
systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. Provide sealant that fails cohesively before
sealant releases from substrate when tested for adhesive compatibility with each substrate and
joint condition required.
I. Structural Performance:
1. Structural Performance — Implied Loads: Design and construct aluminum curtain wall
system to withstand minimum loading requirements as specified herein.
a. Design and engineer aluminum curtain wall system in accordance with procedures
for determining design wind loads for components and cladding for building height
>60 feet, pursuant to §1609.8.2 of BOCA '99, incorporating the following project-
specific values:
1) Salient Corners: Within 14-feet of exterior corners.
2) Basic Wind Speed: 70 mph
3) Exposure Category: C.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package' —2323 08911 -3 05113105
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the seismic
requirements for the curtain wall system as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building.
B. The BOCA @ National Building Code 11999, Fourteenth Edition, referred to herein as "BOCA
99":
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the performance
requirements for design wind loads, and other designated or applicable loads for the
curtain wall system as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building.
C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA CW-DG-1: Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Manual.
2. AAMA 501: Method of Tests for Exterior Walls.
3. AAMA 503: Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Wall
and Sloped Glazing Systems.
4. AAMA 1503: Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation
Resistance of Windows,Doors and Glazed Wall Sections ,
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 1401: Standard Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing.
2. ASTM E283: Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls, and Doors.
3. ASTM E 331: Standard Test Method for Water penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls.
4. ASTM E783: Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through
Installed Exterior Windows and Doors.
5. ASTM El 105: Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of
Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors,and Curtain Walls.
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General: Provide manufacturer's stock aluminum curtain wall systems, adapted to the
application indicated, that comply with performance requirements as specified. If system tests
are not available, mock-ups shall be constructed and tests performed under the direction of an
.independent third party laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction which show
compliance to the following minimum standards.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 -2 05113105
SECTION 08911 -ALUMINUM FRAMED CURTAIN WALL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following;
1. Glazed aluminum curtain wall system with silicone glazed corner units.
2. Exterior and interior aluminum entrance doors.
B. Products Installed But Furnished Under Other Sections
1. Section 07412, Manufactured Metal Wall Panels: for metal panel installed with
aluminum curtain wall system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05120, Structural Steel:
2. Section 05500,Metal Fabrications:
3. Section 07196, Air Barrier System:
4. Section 07210, Building Insulation: for insulation installed with aluminum curtain wall
system.
5. Section 07840, Firestops and Smoke Seals: for perimeter fire-containment system
installed between curtain wall system and building structure.
6. Section 07920, Joint Sealants: for requirements of sealants and backer materials.
7. Section 08110, Steel Doors: for insulated steel doors installed with aluminum curtain
wall system.
8. Section 08410, Aluminum Framed Storefront: for aluminum storefront systems.
9. Section 08461, Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors: for automatic entrance systems
installed with aluminum curtain wall system.
10. Section 08710,Finish Hardware: for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section.
11. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing: for glazing requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08911 - 1 05113105
replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned. Clean frequently, if necessary, to remove
build-up of potentially harmful construction contaminants. Re-clean all glass within one week
of final acceptance of the project.
B. Protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers or ribbons,
suitably attached to the framing and held free from glass. Do not apply warning markings,
streamers, ribbons, or other items directly to the glass except as specifically directed by the
Architect.
END OF SECTION 08800
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800 - 11 05113105
F. Mask, or otherwise protect, surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants. Remove immediately ,
after tooling sealants.
G. Miter-cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seals at corners and other locations where
joints are required.
3.3 FRAMELESS MIRRORS
A. Adhere mirrors to walls or plywood following mirror and adhesive manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations. Support bottom of mirrors with stainless steel clips spaced at quarter-
points or with continuous stainless steel J-channel. Do not provide mechanical fasteners at top
of mirror. Do not provide rosettes or fasteners through the mirror.
3.4 INTERIOR BUTT GLAZING
A. Glass lights indicated to be butt glazed shall have flat ground edges at butting edges.
B. Prior to installation of sealant, thoroughly clean edges and prepare as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer.
C. Hold glass edges in plane by the use of clips which shall remain in place until sealant has fully
cured.
D. Apply sealant in one operation, without air bubbles, to full depth of butt joints. Fully tool
sealant, taking care not to extend sealant onto glass surfaces.
E. After sealant has cured, remove clips and fill voids with sealant. Voids created by the
restraining clips shall be imperceptible in the finished installation.
Glass Joint Width
Thickness Min. Max.
3/8" 3/8" 7/16"
112" 3/8" 7/16"
5/8" 3/8" 1/2"
3/4" 3/8" 1/2"
7/8" 1 3/8" 1/2"
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess sealant and labels from glass surfaces. Clean exposed surfaces using materials
and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. Remove and
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800- 10 05113105
1. Comply with manufacturers'instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior to
application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes.
2. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations.
D. All sash shall be checked prior to glazing to make certain the opening is square, plumb and
secure in order that uniform face and edge clearance are maintained. If butt or miter joints of
frames are open, they shall be sealed with sealant prior to glazing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All glazing shall be performed in accordance with the standards of the 1997 Edition of
the Glazing Manual published by the Glass Association of North America, Topeka,
Kansas.
2. Glass clearance dimensions shall be based on the type and thickness of the glass as
determined by the G.A.N.A. Glazing Manual as hereinafter specified.
3. All tempered glass shall be marked in such a manner as will permanently identify the
manufacturer, thickness, type of material and conformance with test requirements of
ANSI Z97-1.
4. Install tempered glass with no visible tong marks.
B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched,
abraded, or damaged in any other manner.
2. Do not remove labels from glass until so directed by the Architect.
3. Install glass so distortion waves, if present,run in the horizontal direction.
4. Glass shall be set without springing; provide proper clearance at all edges.
C. Locate setting blocks at sills one quarter of the width of the glass in from each end of the glass,
unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
1. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations.
2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass from
stops; except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided.
a. Locate spacers no more than 24" apart,and no closer than 12" to a corner.
b. Place spacers opposite one another.
C. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4" or more.
D. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance.
E. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800-9 05113105
tubular aluminum spacer-bar frame with bent, soldered or welded sealed corners, and filled with
desiccant with breather ports into sealed space; with secondary edge sealant completely
encapsulating outer face of spacer bar and sealed to the opposing sheets of glass. Corner key
construction will not be accepted. Provide silicone or polyurethane sealant as secondary edge
seal. Stamp tubular spacer bar with date of manufacture of insulated unit.
C. Fill air spaces by fabricator's standard process, using either gas or dry air with a maximum dew
point of-20 degrees F. Exercise extreme care to exclude dirt and other foreign substances.
D. Label each unit to show compliance with required standards and regulations, and to list
generically each component including elements of edge seal. Indicate which face of unit is for
exposure to exterior of weather. Provide removable label except where regulations require a
permanent label.
1. Label interior-exposed edge of spacer bar with fabricator's name, date of completing
hermetic seal and classification.
2.6 GLAZED PASS-THROUGH WINDOWS
A. Horizontal sliding pass-through windows.
1. Manufacturer: Engineered Products Co. (EPCO),Flint,MI(810) 767-2050.
a. Glass: 1/4" clear tempered.
b. Track Assembly: Consisting of#730 track base,#726 single track, and#732 upper
guide.
C. Rollers: #753 steel ball bearing roller set in #743 shoe molding. Roller spacing:
one roller at each end with remainder spaced 3 inches on center to allow for
smooth operation of slider. Provide two#771 plastic clip guides per slider panel.
d. Pull: Continuous GP-23 pulls with clear anodized finish.
e. Lock: G-03
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
condition detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from
obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work.
C. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' —2323 08800-8
a. Pattern: RORG-257 as manufactured by Bendheim.
b. Provide fully heat tempered architectural glass for units installed in hazardous
locations.
9. Type GL-9 - Architectural Laminated Glass: Provide two panes of 1/8" thickness glass,
laminated to a 0.037-inch thick - polyurethane inner layer and free from foreign
substances and air pockets. Provide laminated glass as follows:
a. Pattern: "Chromafusion CF7765 Sandblast Density No. 5" as manufactured by
Cesar.
10. Type GL-10 - 1 inch insulated unit consisting of 1/4 inch heat strengthened, clear outer
light with VE1-2M Solarscreen (Low-E) coating on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space,
gray silicone with 1/2-inch sight line, and 1/4 inch ceramic coated heat strengthened glass
conforming to ASTM C-1048-85, Section 7-12. Ceramic color shall be V933, Warm
Grey. Apply ceramic frit to No. 4 surface.
11. Type GL-I1 -Clear Glass: 1/4-inch thick annealed glass.
12. Type GL-12 - Frameless Mirror: 1/4-inch thick mirror glazing quality float glass with all
edges ground and polished.
2.4 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glazing Materials - Shall be as recommended in the 1997 Edition of Glazing Manual,published
by the Glass Association of North America, Topeka, Kansas. Unless otherwise approved, only
polysulfide,polyurethane, or silicone sealants shall be used where sealants are required.
B. Mirror Adhesive: Mirro-Mastic by Palmer Products Corp. (800) 431-6151, or Mirror-Mastic by
Pecora [800] 523-6688.
C. Butt Glazing Sealant:
1. General Electric Silglaze II® (800) 255-8886.
2. Dow Corning 983 Structural Silicone(800)255-8886.
3. Tremco Proglaze®(800) 321-7906.
2.5 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Insulated glass units, except as specified otherwise, shall be manufactured only by Viracon,
Inc., Owatonna, MN (800) 533-2080, Interpane Coatings, Deerfield, WI 1-800-447-0185 or
Guardian Industries Corp., Carleton, MI (800) 521-9040. No other manufacturer will be
accepted.
1. Insulated glazed units shall be a "Single Source" product manufactured only at the
factories of the manufacturers specified above. Insulated glazed units manufactured by
fabricators other than the specified manufacturers will not be accepted.
B. Sealed Edge Construction: Fabricate units with a permanent, hermetically sealed, dry air or gas
filled space of the width indicated, between sheets of glass as indicated. Provide an edge seal
consisting of twin primary sealant beads of polyisobutylene; positioned and retained by a
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800-7 05113105
1. Size: Provide sizes shown. If not shown, provide continuous one piece mirrors from top
of back splash to the underside of ceiling and extending in one piece the full length of the
countertop. Extend mirrors wall to wall where countertop is in an alcove.
G. Architcctural 1,aminated Glass: Provide two panes of 1/8" thickness glass, laminated to aliphatic
polyurethane inner layer and free from foreign substances and air pockets. Provide laminated
glass having the following characteristics:
1. Pattern: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
2. Inner Layer Material: Patented aliphatic polyurethane inner layer .037 inches thick or as
required by Manufacturer.
11. Decorative Translucent Panels: Lumicor"Colorway" acrylic decorative panels as manufactured
by Schober, Inc.; Class C2 or CC2 based on ASTM D635 for light transmitting plastics.
L Pattern and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
2.3 GLAZING TYPES
A. The various types of glazing listed herein correspond to the types of glass and glazing units
indicated on the drawings.
1. Type GL-1 - 1 inch insulated unit consisting of 1/4 inch heat strengthened, tinted outer
light with VE3-2M Solarscreen (Low-E) coating on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space,
gray silicone with 1/2-inch sight line, and 1/4 inch clear heat strengthened glass for
interior light.
2. Type GL-2 - 1 inch insulated unit consisting of 1/4 inch heat strengthened, tinted outer
light with VE3-2M Solarscreen (Low-E) coating on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space,
gray silicone with 1/2-inch sight line, and 1/4 inch ceramic coated heat strengthened glass
conforming to ASTM C-1048-85, Section 7-12. Ceramic color shall be V933, Warm
Grey. Apply ceramic frit to No. 4 surface.
3. Type GL-3 - 1 inch insulated unit consisting of 1/4 inch heat strengthened, clear outer
light with VEl-2M Solarscreen (Low-E) coating on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space,
gray silicone with 1/2-inch sightline and 1/4 inch clear heat strengthened glass for interior
light.
4. Type GL-4 - 1 inch insulated unit consisting of 1/4 inch clear tempered outer light with
VEl-2M Solarscreen (Low-E) coating on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space, gray silicone
with 1/2-inch sightline,and 1/4 inch clear tempered glass for interior light.
5. Type GL-5 -Clear, tempered glass; thickness as required by application but not less than
1/4-inch.
6. Type GL-6 - Transparent, wireless, fire rated glass: 5/16 inch thick Firelite Plus ceramic
glazing material.
7. Type GL-7 -Clear wire glass; 1/4-inch thick.
S. Type GL-8 - Architectural Textured Glass: Provide 1/4-inch thick glass with
manufacturers standard etched finish in texture and pattern as indicated below. Cut edges
clean and grind smooth with slight kerfs. All etched glass to be coated with Thompson's
Etch Glass Sealer applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1 05113105
Package `E' —2323 08800-6
2.2 GLASS AND GLASS PRODUCTS
A. All glass shall conform to the specifications and standards listed above, and shall be factory
labeled on each piece indicating the strength, type, thickness and quality. Labels shall remain on
glass until final cleaning.
B. General: Provide the type and thickness shown on the Drawings or as specified.
C. Clear Float Glass: Type I-transparent, flat, Class 1 -clear, Quality q3, glazing select.
I. Provide clear, low-iron float glass designated as "Ultrawhite"in conjunction with exterior
insulating glass units were indicated.
D. Tempered or Heat Strengthened glass:
1. Provide tempered or heat-strengthened glass where indicated on the Drawings, and
elsewhere as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
a. Clear Heat Strengthened Glass: Provide ASTM C1048, Condition A, Type I, Class
1, Quality q3, kind HS.
b. Clear Tempered Glass: Provide ASTM C1048, Condition A, Type I, Class 1,
Quality q3, kind FT.
2. Sizes and cutting: Prior to tempering or heat treating, cut glass to required sizes as
determined by accurate measurements of the openings to be glazed, making allowances
for required edge clearances. Cut and process edges in accordance with the glass
manufacturers' recommendations. Provide bent "curved" glass at Retail area display
windows.
3. Fully tempered glass:
a. Comply with Fed Spec DD-G-1403 and ANSI Z97.1.
b. Install tempered glass with no visible tong marks.
C. Permit minimum warpage practicable.
E. Transparent,Wireless,Fire Rated Glass, laminated ceramic glazing material as manufactured by
Nippon Electric Glass Co.,Ltd. and distributed by Technical Glass Products (800)426-0279.
1. 5/16 inch thick FireLite®Plus,Premium(polished surfaces).
a. For fire rated door assemblies, conform with latest edition of ASTM E152, ASTM
E163,NFPA-80,NFPA 252,NFPA 257.
b. Permanently identify each individual glazing unit with a listing mark visible after
installation.
C. In accordance with manufacturer's specifications, shall be glazed into frames with
a similar rating, using silicone glazing compound which shall be supplied with the
Firelite material.
F. Mirrors: Provide 1/4", quality q2, clear float glass with triple silver coating copper and
electroplated copper backing. Provide uniformly ground and polished edges.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800-5 05113105
to failure to notify the selected glazing manufacturer in a timely manner, of the anticipated time
requirements for delivery of the glazing.
1,g WARRANTIES
A. Provide written warranties signed by manufacturer and Installer, agreeing to repair or replace
work which exhibits defects in materials or workmanship for the following periods. "Defects" is
defined to include, but is not limited to, leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration,
failure of hermetic seal in insulating units, edge separation or delamination of laminated glass,
peeling, cracking, crazing or other failure of metallic coatings in coated glass, spoiling of
mirrors, and failure to meet requirements of Contract Documents. Provide warranty periods
standard with manufacturer, but not less than the following:
l. Insulating Glass: 10 years from date of manufacture of insulated glass unit.
2. Coated Glass: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Laminated Glass: 4 years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Mirror Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
5. Architectural Glass: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Except where other manufacturers are specified, glass and all glazing units shall be
manufactured only by Viracon, Inc., Owatonna, MN (800) 533-2080, Interpane Coatings,
Deerfield, WI 1-800-447-0185 or Guardian Industries Corp., Carleton, MI (800) 521-9040. No
other manufacturer will be accepted.
B. Clear wire glass shall be manufactured by A.F.G. or as approved equal.
C". Fire-rated glass shall be manufactured only by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. and distributed
by Technical Glass Products 1.8001426-0279. No other manufacturer will be accepted.
D. Architectural glass shall be as manufactured by the following:
1. Bendheim, Passaic,NJ (800) 835-5304.
2. Cesar Color Inc.,Burlingame, CA (800) 275-7272.
E. Decorative translucent panels shall be as manufactured by Lumicor, Renton, WA
(425)255-4000.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' —2323 08800-4
3. C.P.S.0 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 16 CFR 1201.
4. Safety Glass Standards: Provide safety glass which complies with ANSI Z97.1 and
requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials and is permanently marked
with certification label of Safety Glass Certification Council.
5. Glass Association of North America:
a. Glazing Manual, 1997 edition
6. Insulated Units:
a. Manufacturer: Firm with not less than five (5) years of successful experience in
production of insulating glass units of types and performances required for project.
b. Fabricate and label units to match units which have been tested and certified by the
Insulating Glass Certification Council in accordance with below listed standards
and passed tests for the following classification: Insulating glass seal classification
CBA, for coated and uncoated substrates.
C. Standards
1) ASTM E-773 and ASTM E-774, Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass
Units.
2) Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC): Certified Products Program
or A.L.T. Certification.
3) Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA): Sigma 70-7-
1, Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
D. Heat Soaking of Tempered Glass: All heavy tempered glass (3/8 inch and thicker) shall be
subject to "heat checking" prior to delivery to job site. Provide documentation of "heat
checking" process.
E. Glass Thickness: Determine exact sizes and thicknesses of glass products and certify that the
work of this section meets or exceeds the performance requirements specified in this section.
Provide proper thicknesses, edge clearances and tolerances to comply with the
recommendations of the glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses required for application
indicated.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.7 ORDERING GLASS
A. It is understood that glazing for the project is considered a long lead item. To avoid project
delays, notify one of the specified glazing manufacturers immediately after receipt of contract
for the work of this section. Coordinate schedule with glazing manufacturer to ensure timely
delivery for installation at the project.
B. The Architect will not entertain requests for substitutions of the specified glazing
manufacturers, if such manufacturers are unable to deliver the glazing at the required time due
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800-3 05113105
I. Temperature Range: Glass and glazing shall function correctly and normally throughout
an ambient temperature range of 100°F above and below installation temperature.
2. Hermetic Seals: Insulated units shall be free from internal dirt, moisture, condensation,
fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating [if any], and visual evidence of
seal failure throughout the warranty period.
3. Coated Glass: Coated glass shall be free from peeling, cracking, hazing, visual non-
uniformity, and other defects throughout the warranty period.
4. Laminated Glass: Laminated glass shall be free from delamination, edge separation,
visual discoloration, and other damage throughout the warranty period.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Submit the following product data:
I. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturers' recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the Work.
C. Accompanying the above product data, submit following samples:
1. 12 inch by 12 inch sample of each type insulating glass unit specified for project.
2. Glazing compound and sealant- 1/4 pint can each type.
3. Glazing tapes-4 inches length,each type.
D. Submit the following written certifications:
1. Sealed glass unit manufacturer's certificate indicating conformance with above standards.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Install glass and glazing to meet requirement of Local Building Code, and Requirements of
Regulatory Agencies having authority.
C. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM C-1036 covering float, sheet and rolled glass.
2. ASTM C-1048 covering heat strengthened and fully tempered flat glass.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800-2 05/13/05
SECTION 08800-GLAZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide glazing and glazing accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and
as needed for a complete and proper installation of glass for the following areas:
l. Glazed curtain wall.
2. Aluminum entrance doors.
3. Interior and exterior metal doors, wood doors and view windows.
4. Butt glazing.
5. Frameless mirrors.
6. Glazed pass-through windows.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07920,Joint Sealants: General sealant requirements.
2. Section 08110, Steel Doors: doors and sidelights to be glazed.
3. Section 08211,Flush Wood Doors: for factory glazed wood doors.
4. Section 08410, Aluminum Framed Storefront: for glazed aluminum storefront framing
system.
5. Section 08450,All-Glass Entrances.
6. Section 08461, Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors: for glazed aluminum entrance door
units.
7. Section 08524,View Windows with Integral Blinds: for factory glazed window units.
8. Section 08911,Aluminum Framed Curtain Wall: for glazed aluminum entrance doors and
curtain wall framing system.
9. Section 10800,Toilet Accessories; for stainless steel framed mirrors.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Work of this section shall withstand normal loads due to wind, temperature and normal impact
without failure,breakage of glass or seals,fogging or other defects.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital GLAZING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08800- 1 05/13/05
D. Automatic Sliding Entrances,Double Slider
1. System: Wizard.
2. Components:
a. (2)Wizards; (1)each side of door unit
b. (2) Crystals mounted over fixed sidelights to protect sliding pathways.
C. (2) Safety Beams.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify the following:
a. Installation dimensions are acceptable to manufacturer.
b. Floor conditions are suitable for safety and system performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Commencement constitutes acceptance of conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions and approved shop drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and test completed installation pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions.
END OF SECTION 08717
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1 05/13/05
Package `E' —2323 08717 -6
low* and l5-24 VDC. This module will have jumpers that shall provide the installer with the
flexibility of either a wet or dry output.
G. MC-65 - l.:)oor Se( uencer. This microprocessed door sequencer shall be used in a small
vestibule to coordinate inbound and outbound traffic through automatic doors. This module
shall be capable of accepting four independent inputs from push plates and it can provide two
relay outputs in a timed sequence depending on the direction of travel.
2.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Simultaneous Swinging Doors, 2 way Traffic:
1. System: Parallax I1.
2. Components:
a. (2)Wall mounted push plates where manual activation is indicated; or
f). (2) agles-used for automatic activation.
1) (2)ECA-False ceiling adapter for the Eagle.
C. (1) BodyGuard -Presence sensor, mounted on the safety side of the door header.
d. (1)LO-21-Lockout relay or SS-21 (depending on door control).
e. (4) SuperScansII -mounted on the top rung of each door (Safety & Swing side 1
Master, 1 Slave in a housing).
B. Double Egress Swinging Doors, 2 way Traffic:
1. System: Parallax II.
2. Components:
a. (2)Wall mounted push plates where manual activation is indicated; or
b. (2)Eagles-used.for automatic activation.
1) (2)ECA-False ceiling adapter for the Eagle.
C. (2) BodyGuards - Presence sensors, mounted on the header on the safety side of
each door leaf.
d. (1)LO-21-Lockout relay or SS-21 (depending on door control).
e. (4) SuperScansII-mounted on the top rung of each door leaf(Safety & Swing side
1 Master, 1 Slave in a housing).
C. Single Swinging Doors,2 way Traffic:
1. System: Parallax.
2. Components:
a. (2)Wall mounted push plates where manual activation is indicated; or
b. (2)Eagles-used for automatic activation.
1) (2)ECA-False ceiling adapter for the Eagle.
C. (1)BodyGuard-Presence sensor,mounted on the safety side of the door header.
d. (1)LO-21-Lockout relay or SS-21 (depending on door control).
e. (2) SuperScansII -mounted on the top rung of each door (Safety & Swing side 1
Master, 1 Slave in a housing).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08717-5 05/13/05
2. Operational Temperature Range: Unit shall have an operating temperature range of —30 *"
degrees F to+131 degrees F.
3. Mounting Height: Unit shall be capable of operating from a mounting height of 7 feet
through 12 feet above finish floor.
4. Unit Housing: Black ABS plastic housing.
2.4 SAFETY DEVICES
A. The " Bodyguard": Active infrared presence device shall utilize a combination of focused and
diffused technology. The `Bodyguard" shall recognize 2 different patterns: 1.) when door is
closed and 2) when door is open. When door is in open position it will provide 1 foot of
threshold protection with an adjustable self-adaptation time of 30 seconds to 25 minutes. All
adjustments shall be made by a universal coded infrared remote control. Operating temperature
range of-30° F to+131°F. Mounting height 7 feet to 9 feet above finished floor
13. The "SuperScan " System shall be used in conjunction with the Bodyguard/LO-21 in order to
provide safety during the closing and opening cycles of the door. The SuperScan shall detect
the presence of anything entering from either side of the door. SuperScan shall be mounted on
each side at top of the door and will require as many master/slave modules as required by
application. Door mounted detectors shall use active infrared technology with distance
measurement. Detection shall be insensitive to color or background. 12V-24V AC or DC power
requirement.
1. Available in lengths from 13"to 96"W 2 1/8"H x 2 1/8"D
a. Width to suit door size
b. Four required for a pair of swing doors-"Parallax II"
C. LO-21 - Lock Out Relay: The "Lock out Relay" shall inhibit the Bodyguard output during the
closing cycle. The LO-21 shall also communicate the position of the door to the Bodyguard in
order for the Bodyguard to utilize 2 different programs. One program will be with the door
open and the other program will be with the door closed. Coordinate with detection system
package.
D. LE-21 - Lock Out Relay: The lock out module shall inhibit the approach SuperScan on a low-
energy door when the door is used manually. The LE-21 will allow the Super Scan to be active
only when the door is triggered by activating a push plate. The SuperScan will remain in the
activation circuit until the door fully closes following the automatic operation of the door. A
door position switch must be used to indicate to the LE-21 that the door has reached its fully
closed position and to ignore the input of the SuperScan util the push plate activates the door
again.
E. SuperStop" (SS-21) Stop-And-Hold Module. This module is only needed when door operator
control box does not have stall logic. Coordinate with detection system package.
F. MC-25 -Delay on Make/Delay on Break. This module shall be used with a magnetic lock or an
electric strike which is installed on an automatic door. The unit will operate on 12-24 VAC
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08717 -4 05/13/05
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Provide products specified herein produced by B.E.A., Inc. (B.E.A.), 300 s. Main Street,
Pittsburgh, PA (800) 523-2462.
B. No other manufacturer will be accepted.
2.2 ACTIVATING DEVICES
A. The "Eagle"Motion detector is a unidirectional/bidirectional sensor which operates only on the
FCC approved K-band frequency (24.125 GHz) It shall utilize a planar, (flat antenna) and for
aesthetic purposes the unit shall be no larger than 4-3/4" W x 3 1/8"H. x 2" D.
1. Relay hold time from 0.5 seconds to 9.0 seconds. Adjustable for unidirectional or bi-
directional sensing capabilities, wide or narrow patterns. All adjustments must be made
by a universal coded infrared remote control. Operating temperature range of- 30 deg. F
to+ 131 deg.F. Mounting height, 7 to 1 F above finished floor.
2. Finish: (Black, ready for non-metallic field finish painting).
B. Stainless Steel Push Plate:
I. Push plate shall have a #4 stainless steel finish. Standard normally open (NO) contact
SPST switch fits all automatic door applications. The unit shall comply with full
provisions/regulations of the ADA.
2. Provide plates as follows:
a. 4 3/a_inch square
b. Provide plates with handicap logo and inscribed "Push to Open".
C. Provide with mounting box and weather ring for exterior/outdoor applications.
2.3 COMBINATION ACTIVATING/SAFETY DEVICES
A. The "Wizard" Sliding Door Sensing System shall utilize planar K-band microwave technology
to detect motion and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing.
The focused active infrared presence detection shall overlap the motion pattern and be
comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of detection each (two
rows on each side of the door). The focused presence technology shall remain on throughout the
closing cycle of the door.
I. Monitoring Option: The Wizard unit shall have the option of being totally self-monitored
(motion and presence) and have the ability to make adjustments with a universal coded
remote control.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08717 - 3 05113105
1.4 SUBMITTALS '" '
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Diagrams and instructions: Furnish complete custom wiring details including point-to-
point and riser diagrams, mounting instructions and installation information required for
the proper and complete installation of all units.
D. Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance manual for systems specified herein for
inclusion in Maintenance Manual specified in Division One.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Acceptable to detection systems manufacturer, with certified evidence of suitable
factory training for installation of motion detection systems similar to those specified.
B. All work in this section shall be done in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and local `o"'
codes including but not limited to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSUBHMA
A156.10,ANSI/BHMA A156.19 and NFPA 101,
C. Coordination: Coordinate with the work of other sections in which electrical hardware is to be
used in conjunction with the operation of the work of this section. Provide whatever information
is required by other trades for the proper interfacing and operation of the automatic operators
and their components.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary, at no change in Contract Sum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08717 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 08717 -AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Provide sensing systems for the following automatic door systems:
1. Automatic swinging doors.
2. Sliding automatic enhance doors.
B. Systems shall include:
I. Systems to control automatic door opening.
2. Systems to allow closing cycles for safe operation.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 08110, Steel Doors
2. Section 08113, Steel Frames
3. Section 08211,Flush Wood Doors
4. Section 08461, Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors
5. Section 08710,Finish Hardware
6. Section 08716,Automatic Door Operators
7. Division 16,Electrical: Necessary electrical service to each operator.
8. Security System: Card readers working in conjunction with automatic door operators
shall be provided by Owner's separate contractor.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. 28 CFR Part 36 "Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability Accommodations and in
Commercial Facilities".
B. ANSI 156. 10"American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors".
C. FCC Part 15 -Subpart C.
D. International Standards Organization ISO 9002
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 08717 - 1 05/13/05
3. A "soft-start" motor driving circuit to smooth normal opening and recycle to minimize A+ ,
loosening of doors, pivots, and frames.
4. An "energy-saver" circuit that reduces power to the motor after seven seconds of
maintained opening speed.
5. A cam actuated emergency breakout switch to disconnect power to the motor when the
door is manually pushed in the emergency direction. The operator will then automatically
reset and power will be resumed.
6. The opening speed and the opening damp speed shall be fully adjustable. Control
circuitry shall include a 0-45 second adjustable time delay.
7. Provide a contact for delayed action wherever electrical latching hardware is used in
conjunction with automatic operators.
1. Linkage assembly shall provide control of door through entire swing; shall permit use on buts.
hung, center pivot, and offset pivot hung doors.
J. Header shall be 5-1/2 -inch wide by 6-inch high, 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy of.156-inch
minimum wall thickness. Access to the operator and electronic control box shall be provided by
a full length removable cover, edge rabbeted to the header to ensure flush fit and fastened with
1/4- turn spring loaded fasteners. The aluminum header, including structurally integrated end
caps, shall have an AA M12 C22 A41 clear finish.
2.3 ACTUATING AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Provide actuating and safety devices as specified in Section 08717 — Automatic Door Sensing
Systems.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop
Drawings, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the
Architect, anchoring all components firmly into positions for long life under hard use.
END OF SECTION 08716
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08716-4 05/13/05
1. "4100 Series"by Horton Automatics, Corpus Christi, TX 78405 (800) 531-3111.
2. "Magic Swing" by Stanley Access Technologies,Farmington, CT 06032 (800) 722-2377
2? AUTOMATIC OPERATORS
A. Each system shall consist of electro-mechanical door operator, aluminum header, actuating
controls, and keyed power on/off switches.
B. The operator shall be an electro-mechanical system, sealed against dust, dirt, and corrosion in a
cast aluminum case, and fully lubricated to minimize wear and friction of moving parts between
temperature extremes of -20 degrees F and 140 degrees F. The entire operator shall be
removable from the header as a unit.
C. The operator shall open the door with a 1/8 HP, DC motor reduction gears, ball screw actuator,
forged steel rack and pinion, and linkage assembly. Opening time to backcheck (approximately
75 degrees) shall be 1.25-1.6 seconds and from backcheck to fully opened position 70°-90° in
1.0-1.5 seconds. The drive train shall have positive, constant engagement. A force no greater
than 241bF at the lock stile of the door shall stop the door from opening. The operator shall stop
the door in the open position by electrically reducing the motor voltage and stalling against an
adjustable 90-degree stop. All bearings shall be ball or roller type -no bushings shall be used.
D. The operator shall close the door by spring energy. Closing speed shall be controlled by
employing the motor as a dynamic brake,and closing to latch check(approximately 10 degrees)
shall be in 2.5 to 4.0 seconds. Closing through the last 10 degrees shall be in 1.5 seconds
minimum. The closing spring shall be a Helical compression spring, pre-loaded for positive
closing action at a low material stress level for long spring life.
E. The operator shall have built-in emergency release with controlled spring return to the closed
position without manual resetting. While the door is in the emergency release mode, a
disconnect switch shall prevent powered operation. No housing nor jamb mounted stops or
cams shall be required for emergency function. Not more than 50 1bF at the lock stile shall be
required for emergency use,per ANSI A-156.10-1979.
F. The operator shall function as a manual door closer in the direction of swing with or without
electrical power.
G. The forces and speeds of power opening, manual opening in both directions of swing, and
spring closing in both directions of swing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A-156.10-
1979.
H. A solid state, completely enclosed electronic control with quick connect plugs shall incorporate
the following features:
1. A "safety plus" -- 1-1/2 second extension of both operate and safety signals after pressure
has been removed from the control mats.
2. A 2-1/2 ampere current limiting circuit which limits the opening force of the operator to a
maximum of 241bF at the lock stile.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08716 -3 05113105
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout, ,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Diagrams and instructions: Furnish complete custom wiring details including point-to-
point and riser diagrams, mounting instructions and installation information required for
the proper and complete installation of all units.
D. Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance manual for automatic door operators, to
include in Maintenance Manual specified in Division One.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. All work in this section shall be done in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and local
codes including but not limited to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and ANSUBHMA
A156.10-1985
C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Coordination: Coordinate with the work of other sections in which electrical hardware is to be
used in conjunction with the operation of the work of this section. Provide whatever information
is required by other trades for the proper interfacing and operation of the automatic operators
and their components.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary, at no change in Contract Sum.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one the following
electro-mechanical door operators:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08716 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 08716 -AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide automatic door operators, complete, with all necessary accessories and controls, where
shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper
installation.
B. The wort:of this Section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:
I. Electro-mechanical swinging door operators for:
a. Type 1: Automatic operator tied into fire alarm system for fire rated and non-fire
rated requiring positive latching.
b. Type 2: Automatic operator tied into fire alarm system, non-fire rated assembly, no
positive latching required.
C. Type 3: Automatic operator, non-fire rated assembly, no tie-in to fire alarm, no
positive latching.
1.2 RELATED WORK
fopw
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 08110, Steel Doors
2. Section 08113, Steel Frames
3. Section 08211,Flush Wood Doors
4. Section 08710,Finish Hardware
5. Section 08717,Automatic Door Sensing Systems
6. Division 16,Electrical: Necessary electrical service to each operator.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08716- 1 05/13/05
Set 121A 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Programmable Lock PRO5596 BP 06 LC
1-Key Cylinder 1000 Series
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set lockset to storeroom function.
END OF SECTION 08710
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-33 05/13/05
Set 118 6-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Lock ML2057 x M21
2-Closers DC6210 x M71
1-Set Auto Flush Bolts 1945
1-Dust Proof Strike 570
1-Coordinator 1600 Series
2-Mounting Brackets 1601AB/C
2-Protection Plates 12" x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Set 119 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Lock ML2057 x M21
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 1.5"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 120 3-Butts TA314 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6210 x A13
1-Protection Plate 12" x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width)
1-Set W/S 700SA(hd/jmbs)
1-Sweep D608A x WOD
1-Threshold 426 x WOD
Set 120A 3-Butts TA386 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6210 x A13
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width)
1-Set W/S 700SA(hd/jmbs)
1-Sweep D608A x WOD
1-Threshold 426 x WOD
Set 121 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Programmable Lock PR05596 BP 06 LC
1-Key Cylinder 1000 Series
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set lockset to storeroom function.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
SurgeryBeds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-32 05113105
Set 93D 4-Swing Clear Butts AB7502 x 5
2-Elec. Swing Clear Butts.AB7502 x 5 ETW-8
2-Exit Device-F?lec l.,atela Pt111back 1"D5470 x N959 x X1155 x M0}4
2-.K.ey Cylinders ::3000 Series
2-Protection Plates 3•1- x 1. i" 1.,A'C.}D
2-Stops 2109
1-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
1-Smoke Seal 9550(meeting stile)
1.-Controller 78.18
Auto door olvrators by Section 08716.
Card reader by securitV.
Set,exit deg ice i.ritn to strarerooaaa fua161011.
I)ooas tare. Tiormrally Closed amid l.at.chod. SMlaia.g csr-d o.asicie o pwssaaag
switch inside. releases 1.11clac.s ..and mao opcaas doors.
Set 95
Set 96
Set 97
Set 98
Set 99
Set 100
Set 101
Set 102
Set 103
Set 104
Set 105
Set 106
Set 107
Set 110
Set 111
Set 112
Set 113
Set 114
Set 115
Set 116
Set 117
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-31 05/13/05
Set 93B 5-Swing Clear Butts AB7502 x 5
1-Elec. Swing Clear Butts AB7502 x 5 ETW-8
' l-;xit. Deg I ce.-E lec l.,atCh 1'ullbacl< I...DS 1��70 x N455 ;, :494
1-Push Plate 70C,1 x 16
4-Protection i'lates 34 x 1.S' LM0:)1)
2-Stoles 4.0()
1-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
1-Smoke Seal 9550(meeting stile)
1-I.)elayed Egress Maglock iMXD
1-Power Supply BPS-24-1
1-Co.nt.roller 78.1N
Auto door open,atoi-s by Section 08716.
Card render by security.
Set internal switch on maglock for BOCA function (MA).
1)oors are normally closed and latched/secured by exit device at one door anti
rnaglock at the other door. Swiping card outside or pressing wall switch inside
releases maglock, retracts exit device top latch and auto opens door,. Door with
maglock and push plate can be opened in 1.5 seconds in an emergency. Signal
from fire alarm releases maglock for immediate egress. Free egress at all times
through door with exit device.
Set 93C 4-Swing Clear Butts AB7502 x 5
2-Elec. Swing Clear Butts AB7502 x 5 ETW-8
2-Exit Device-Elee Latch Pullback ED5470 x N959 x M55 x M9'1 �'
2-Key Cylinders 3000 Series
2-Protection Plates 34" x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
1-Controller 781N
Auto door operators by Section 08716.
Card reader by security.
Doors are normally closed and latched. Swiping card outside or pressing wall
switch inside releases latches and auto opens doors.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-30 05113105
Set 92B 6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5
2-Pulls BF107
2-Protection Plates 34" x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
2-Maelocks M02
1-Power Supply BPS-24-1
Automatic door operator by section 08716.
Card reader by security.
I:)oors are normally closed and secured by nraglocks. Swiping card releases
rna(,locks and auto opens doors. Inside press wall switch releases rnaglocks and
auto opens doors. Sio nal from fir, alarm releas,,�s nii wlocks.
Set 93 4-Swing Clear Butts AB7502 x 5
2-Elec. Swing Clear Butts AB7502 x 5 ETW-8
2-Exit Devices-Elec Latch Pullback ED5470 x x:910 x M55 x :x'194
2-Protection Plates 34" x 15"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
I-Controller 781N
Auto door operators by Section 087.16.
Doors are normally closed and unlatched. Pressing wall switch on either side of
the opening auto opens doors. Signal from fire alarrri releases latches.
Set 93A 4-Swing Clear Butts AB7501 x 5
2-Elec. Swing Clear Butts AB7501 x 5 ETW-8
2-Exit Devices-Elec Latch Pullback ED5470B x N910 x M55 x M94
2-Protection Plates 34" x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 440/442 (verify with Arch)
2-Silencers 608
2-Maglocks M62
1-Power Supply BPS-24-1.
l-Control ler 7 8 1 N
1-Emerg Exit Button EEB2
Auto door operators by Section 08716.
Card reader by security.
Doors are normally closed and unlatched, secured by rnaglocks. Swiping card
releases rnaglocks and auto opens doors. Inside press wall switch releases
rnaglocks and auto opens doors. Signal from fire alarm releases rnaglocks and
extends exit device latches. Emerg exit button located inside room interrupts
power to the ma clocks.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-29 05113105
6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5"
Set 88 2-push Plates 70C 4 x 16
2-Automatic Release Closers -Type B 4040 SE (push side mount)
4-Protection Plates 34"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
I-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
I-Smoke Seal 9550 (meeting stile)
Set 88A 6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5"
2-Push Plates 70C 4 x 16
2-Closers DC6210 x M71
4-Protection Plates 34"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
I-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
1-Smoke Seal 9550(meeting stile)
2-1)elayod 1,-tress Ma,:(ocks iii XI)
1--Power Supply 13PS-24-I
Card reader by security.
Set internal switch on maglocks for BOCA function (MA).
Doors are normally closed and secrzred by DE maglocks. Swiping card from
either side releases its respective rnaglock and allows door to he pushed open.
Doors can be opened in 1.5 seconds in an emergency. Signal from fire alarm
releases ma locks for immediate egress.
Set 89 Awk
Set 90
Set 91
Set 92 6-Swing Clear Butts TA5795 x 5
2-Pulls BF107
2-Protection Plates 34"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Automatic door operator by section 08716.
Set 92A 6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5
2-Pulls BF107
2-Protection Plates 34"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
1-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
1-Smoke Seal 9550(meeting stile)
Automatic door operator by section 08716.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-28 05/13/05
Set 79A 6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5"
2-Exit Devices ED5470B x M55
2-Automatic Release Closers - Type B 4040 SE(push side mount)
4-Protection Plates 34"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
1-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
1-Smoke Seal 9550 (meeting stile)
Set 79B 8-Pocket Pivots PH-4(2/4070 doors)
2-Recessed Exit Devices 9447EO-F x LBR
2-Pocket Closers 4004T
2-Protection Plates 12"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers
2-Electromagnetic Holders SEM 7850
Provide 3-7/16" pocket depth measured fi-0111 pull-side face of door at 90 degree
open position. Solid blocking required in wall for door closers.
Set 79C 8-Pocket Pivots PH-4(2/4070 doors)
2-Recessed Exit Devices 9447EO-F x LBR
2-Pocket Closers 4004T
2-Protection Plates 12"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
1-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
1-Smoke Seal 9550 (meeting stile)
2-Electromagnetic Holders SEM 7850
Provide 3-7/16"pocket depth measured from pull-side face of door at 90 degree
open position. Solid blocking required in wall for door closers.
Set 80
Set 81
Set 82
Set 83
Set 84
Set 85
Set 86
Set 87 6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5"
2-Push Plates 70C 4 x 16
2-Pulls BF107
2-Automatic Release Closers -Type B 4040 SE(pull side mount)
2-Protection Plates 34"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-27 05113105
Set 64 6-Swing Clear Butts TA5795 x 5" Avft
I-Exit Device ED5470 x M55
I-Push Plate 70C 4 x 16
2-Closers DC6210 x M71
4-Protection Plates 34" x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
1-Delayed Egress Maglock iMXD
1-Power Supply BPS-24-1
Card reader by security.
Set internal switch on maglock for BOCA function (MA).
Authorized access via card reader for door with maglock/push plate. Door can
also be opened in 15 seconds in an emergency. Signal from fire alarm releases
maglock for immediate egress. Free egress at all times through door with exit
device.
Set 65
Set 66
Set 67
Set 68
Set 69
Set 70
Set 71 6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5"
2-Exit Devices ED5470 x N955 x M55
2-Key Cylinders 3000 Series
2-Automatic Release Closers -Type B 4040 SE(pull side mount)
2-Protection Plates 34"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers
Set 72
Set 73
Set 74
Set 75
Set 76
Set 77
Set 78
Set 79 6-Swing Clear Butts TA795 x 5"
2-Exit Devices ED5470B x M55
2-Automatic Release Closers -Type B 4040 SE(push side mount)
4-Protection Plates 34" x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-26 05113105
Set 59C 2-Butts TA314 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Elec. Butt TA314 5 x 4-1/2 CC8
1-Exit Device—Latch Pull Back ED5200 x N957 x M94 x M92
1-Key Cylinder 3000 Series
1-Closer DC6210 x A13
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width)
1-Set W/S 700S (hd/jmbs)
1-Sweep D608 x WOD
1-Threshold 426 x WOD
1-Controller 781N
Card reader&door position switch by Security.
Swiping card retracts latchbolt for authorized entry. TOUChbar to be monitored
by security.
Set 60
Set 61 5-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Elec. Butt TA714 4-1/2 x 4 CC8
1-Exit Device ED5470B x N950 x M55 x LHR
I-Exit Device-Elec Latch Pullback ED5470B x N959 x M55 x iM94 x x-192 x
RIJR
1-.Key Cylinder 3000 Series
'_-Closers DC621.0 x M71
2-Protection Plates 34" x 15"LWOD
2-Stops 409
'_-Silencers 608
1-Controller 781.N
Card reader by security.
Doors are normally closed and latched. Swiping card outside releases exit device
latch at RHR door for authorized entry.
Set 62 6-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Exit Device ED5400A
1-Exit Device ED5400A x N959 x M21 knurled o/s lever
1-Key Cylinder 3000 Series
2 Closers DC6210 x M71
2-Protection Plates 12"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Set 63
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-25 05113105
Set 59 3-Butts TA314 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Exit Device ED5200 x M52
1-Key Cylinder 1000 Series
1-Closer DC6210 x A13
1-Protection Plate 12" x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width)
1-Set W/S 700S (hd/jmbs)
1-Sweep D608 x WOD
1-Threshold 426 x WOD
Door position switch by Security.
Set 59A 5-Butts TA386 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Elec. Butt TA386.5 x 4-1/2 CC8
1-Exit Device ED5400 x M51
1-Exit Device—Latch Pull Back ED5400 x N957 x M94 x M92
1-Key Cylinder 3000 Series
1-Closer DC6210(LH)
1-Closer DC6210 x A13 (RH)
2-Protection Plates 12" x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width -RH)
1-Set W/S 700S (hd/jmbs)
1-Set Meeting Stile W/S 140P
2-Sweeps D608 x WOD
1-Threshold 426 x WOD
Card reader&door position switch by Security.
Swiping card retracts latchbolts at RHR door for authorized entry. Touchbar to
be monitored by security.
Set 59B 3-Butts TA386 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Exit Device ED5200 x M52
1-Key Cylinder 1000 Series
1-Closer DC6210 x A13
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width)
1-Set W/S 700S (hd/jmbs)
1-Sweep D608 x WOD
1-Threshold 426 x WOD
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-24 05113105
.r
Set 47 3-Swing Clear Butts TA5795 x 5
1-Hospital Latch 28-115P
1-Protection Plate 10" x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stay 9-516
3-Silencers 608
1-Set Gasketing 5050B
Set 48
Set 49
Set 50
Set 51
Set 52
Set 53
Set 54
Set 55 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Exit Device ED5200A x N910
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 408/409
1-Set Gasketing 5050B
Set 56 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
, * 1-Exit Device ED5200A x N910
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 408/409
1-Set Gasketing 5050B
Set 56A 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Exit Device ED5200A x N959 x M21 Knurled lever
1-Key Cylinder 3000 Series
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
3-Silencers 608
Set 57
Set 58
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-23 05113105
Set 31
Set 32
Set 33
Set 33A
Set 34
Set 35
Set 36
Set 37
Set 38
Set 39
Set 39A 1-Pivot Set EP5-J
1-Privacy Set ML2060
1-Combo Strike/Stop CSS-9 x center hung x jamb depth
1-Protection Plate 12" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
1-Sight Baffle 369AP(pivot edge)
1-Si ht Baffle 18062DP(latch edge)
Set 40
Set 40A
Set 41
Set 42
Set 43
Set 44
Set 45 3-Swing Clear Butts TA5795 x 5
1-Hospital Latch 28-115P
1-Protection Plate 10"x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stay 9-516
3-Silencers 608
Set 46 3-Butts TA786 5x 4-1/2
1-Hospital Latch 28-115P
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 46A 3-Swing Clear Butts TA5795 x 5
1-Hospital Latch 28-115P
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-22 05113105
Set 20
Set 21 6-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
2-Pulls BF107
2-Push Plates 70C 4 x 16
2-Automatic Release Closers -Type B 4040 SE(push side mount)
4-Protection Plates 12" x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Set 21A 6-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
2-Push Plates 70C 4 x 16
2-Closers DC6210 x A13
4-Protection Plates 34" x 1.5"LWOD
2-OH Holders 9-526 (size properly for door width)
2-Silencers 608
Set 22 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Privacy Set ML2030
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 23
Set 23A
Set 24
Set 25
Set 26 3-Butts TA 714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Pull BF107
1-Push Plate 70C 4 x 16
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 26A 3-Butts TA 714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Pull BF107
1-Push Plate 70C 4 x 16
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 27
Set 28
Set 29
Set 30
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-21 05113105
Set 18A 2-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2 NRP '
1-Elec. Butt TA786 5 x 4-1/2 CC8
1-Elec. Lock ML20905
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Card reader by security. Power supply by others.
Set 18B 2-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Elec. Butt TA714 4-1/2 x 4 CC8
1-Elec. Lock ML20905
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12" x 2"LWOD
l-Stop 409
1-Set Gasketing 5050B
Card reader by security. Power supply by others.
Set 18C 2-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Elec. Butt TA714 4-1/2 x 4 CC8
1-Elec. Lock ML20905
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Card reader by security. Power supply by others.
Set 18D 2-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Elec. Butt TA714 4-1/2 x 4 CC8
1-Elec. Lock ML20905
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Card reader by security. Power supply by others.
Set 18E 2-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Elec. Butt TA714 4-1/2 x 4 CC8
1-Elec. Lock ML20905
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Card reader by security. Power supply by others.
Set 19
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-20 05113105
Set 13B 6-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
2-Pulls BF107
2-Magnetic Catches 327
2-Silencers 608
Set 14 6-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2057 x M21
2-Closers DC6200 x M71
1-Set Auto Flush Bolts 1845
1-Dust Proof Strike 570
1-Coordinator 1600 Series
2-Protection Plates 12"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Set 14A 6-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Lock ML2057
2-Closers DC6200 x M71
1-Set Auto Flush Bolts 1945
1-Dust Proof Strike 570
1-Coordinator 1600 Series
2-Protection Plates 12"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Verify size of inactive leaf. May need to use DC4600 series closer.
Set 15
Set 15A
Set 15B
Set 16
Set 17
Set 18 3-Butts TA 786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Pull BF107
1-Push Plate 70C 4 x 16
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-19 05113105
3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
Set l0E 1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width)
3-Silencers 608
Set lOF 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 10G 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409/440/442
3-Silencers 608
Set lOH 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2057 x M21
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 11
Set 12 6-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Lock ML2051
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Manual Flush Bolt 555 (top only)
2-Stops 408/409
2-Silencers 608
Set 13 6-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Lock ML2051
2-Closers DC6210 x M71
1-Set Auto Flush Bolts 1945
1-Dust Proof Strike 570
1-Coordinator 1600 Series
2-Mounting Brackets 1601AB/C
2-Protection Plates 12"x 1.5"LWOD
2-Stops 409
2-Silencers 608
Set 13A 6-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Lock ML2057
1-Self Latching Flush Bolt 1945 (less bottom bolt)
2-Silencers 608
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-18 05113105
Set 9C 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2051
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 9D 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Lock ML2051
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 10 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Lock ML2057 x M21
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set l0A 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Lock ML2057 x M21
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409/440/442
3-Silencers 608
Set IOB 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2 NRP
1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set IOC 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 10D 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2057
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-17 05113105
Set 8C 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Latch ML2010
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers
Set 8D 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Latch ML2010
I-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
1-Set Smoke Seal 9440B (head/jambs)
Set 8E 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Latch ML2010
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34" x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers
Set 8F 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Latch ML2010
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34" x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-436 (size properly for door width)
3-Silencers
Set 8G 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 m
1-Latch ML2010
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-OH Stop 9-336 (size properly for door width)
3-Silencers
Set 9 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2051
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 9A 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Lock ML2051
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 34"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 9B 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2051
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-16 05113105
Set 6A 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Privacy Set ML2030 x 2 thumbturns
1-OH Stop 9-336
3-Silencers 608
Set 6B 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Privacy Set ML2030 x 2 thumbturns
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 6C 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Privacy Set ML2030 x 2 thumbturns
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
1-Coat Hook 806
Set 6D 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Privacy Set ML2030
1-OH Stop 9-336
3-Silencers 608
Set 6E 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Privacy Set ML2030
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 7 6-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4 NRP
1-Lock ML2051
1-Manual Flush Bolt 555 (top only)
2-Silencers 608
Set 8 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Latch ML2010
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers
Set 8A 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Latch ML2010
1-Closer DC6200 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
1-Set Gasketing,5050B
Set 8B 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Latch ML2010
1-Closer DC6210 x M71
1-Protection Plate 12"x 2"LWOD
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-15 05113105
3.1 HARDWARE SETS A
A. The hardware sets shown on the drawings are furnished as information and as a guide only. The
complete quantity requirements for each and every opening shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Lock numbers shown are for operating features only and areixl:inll�.��s,tivi?�.
Hardware sets not shown on the drawings for new door shall be provided with hardware sets as
indicated for other similar purposed rooms.
B. Provide door operating hardware (levers, panic bars, pulls, push plates, knobs, etc.) where
indicated, to comply with handicap regulations. There devices shall be made identifiable to the
touch by a textured surface on this item obtained by knurling, roughening or by a material
applied to the surface. Textured surfaces for tactile warnings shall be standard throughout the
facility.
C. Hardware sets listed in the specification, but not shown on the drawings, shall be disregarded.
Disregard hardware specified but not included in selected hardware sets .
HARDWARE SET NUMBERS AND DESCRIPTIONS
Set 1 Cylinder(s) only MK'd and GMK'd
Set 2
Set 3 No hardware under this section
Set 4 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Lock ML2051
1-Stop 409/440/442
3-Silencers 608
Set 5 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Latch ML2010
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 5A 3-Butts TA786 5 x 4-1/2
1-Latch ML2010
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Set 5B 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Latch ML2010
1-OH Stop 9-336(size properly for door width)
3-Silencers 608
Set 6 3-Butts TA714 4-1/2 x 4
1-Privacy Set ML2030
1-Stop 409
3-Silencers 608
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-14 05113105
2.32 ELECTRIC LOCKING SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer:
1. Securitron
B. Electric Locking System Description:
1. M62 magnetic lock(s) x Alum x 24VDC
BPS Power Supply
EEB2 Exit Button
2. iMXD Delayed Egress Magnetic lock with BOCA function.
C. Operation:
1. Door assembly shall have free egress at all times by means of w dl moujited push plate
which activates automatic operator..
2 Loss of power shall unlock the doors until such time as emergency power is activated.
3. Fire protection system shall automatically unlock doors and the doors shall remain
unlocked until the fire protection system is manually reset.
4. Ingress shall be by means of Owricr.Furnistied card reader which shall unlock doors.
5. Pair of doors shall operate in conjunction with automatic door operator system wherein a
request to enter or egress from any of the above specified sources shall deactivate the
magnetic lock, and after a predetermined time activate the automatic door operators
OOW 2.33 PROGRAMMABLE LOCKS
A. Locknetics PRO 5500 series with function as indicated in hardware set and lever trim to match
other trim used throughout project.
2.34 KEY CABINET
A. Furnish one (1)"Dupli-Key" Two Tag" wall cabinet as manufactured by MMF Industries, or
equal wall cabinet by Lund or Telkee, Inc. Furnish hooks, file tags, duplicate tags, key collection
envelopes, key receipt holders/ slips and complete 3 way cross index binder to provide a
complete Dual Key Tag System.
B. Cabinet size shall be sufficient to accommodate all locks related to this Contract, based on two
keys per lock, with an allowance for expansion of not less than 50%.
C. Key systems which are construction keyed shall have all permanent keys affixed to hooks with
all index cards filled out for the complete cross references. The cabinet shall be delivered to the
Contractor only when requested and shall be completely set up.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package' —2323 08710-13 05113105
A. Provide door gaskets for steel fire rated doors; for wood or steel doors located in smoke barriers.
B. Manufacturer: National Guard.
1. Equal products by Pemko, Reese or Zero will be acceptable.
C. Classification:
1. Conform with requirements of UL 10-C
2. Category B.
3. "S"Label at doors in smoke barriers
D. For fire rated steel doors provide Category B products:
I. Head and Jambs: NG No. 9440B-Brown
2. Meeting Stiles at Door Pairs and Double Egress: NG No. 9550B-Brown
2.29 DOOR GASKETS-SOUND
A. Door bottom and gasketing products as manufactured by National Guard are listed below for
establishing the level of quality and performance required. Equal products by Reese and Pemko
will be acceptable.
B. Where gaskets are indicated on the Drawings (subscript designation "G"),provide the following:
1. Head and Jambs: NG103N
2. Door Bottoms: NG420N
3. Meeting Stiles at Door Pairs: NG140P
C. Finish:
1. Bronze anodized aluminum
2.30 SILENCERS
A. Silencers shall be Ives SR64, Rockwood 608, Corbin 33, Yale 890 or approved equal. Except for
"A" labeled doors, provide four (4) for each Dutch door, three (3) for each single door, two (2)
for each pair of doors. Silencers shall be omitted for exterior, lightproof and stair hall doors.
2.31 EMERGENCY DOOR STOP/DOUBLE LIPPED STRIKE
A. Mckinney CSS-9 Combination Strike/Stop
B. Stanley DLS-2 x 5-3/4 inch width x ES-1 Stop
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-12 05113105
1. LCN Series 4040-SE. Closers shall have cast iron cylinders and two separately adjustable
noncritical closing speed valves plus adjustable back-check and adjustable spring power as
standard equipment. Arm shall connect to track with low friction roller assembly.
2. Closers shall be mounted on push side of door unless indicated otherwise. Telescope
adjustment in lever arm shall locate hold open at points from 85 degrees to 110 degrees in
3 degree increments. Doors indicated on the drawings to hold open between 110 degrees to
120 degrees shall be provided with Model SEL closers.
3. Provide each unit with 24VDC. Devices shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and
meet requirements of NFPA-101 Life Safety Code.
4. Finish shall be LBRNZ [Light Bronze] to match US l0
5. Where 1-1/2 inch wide frames occur,prepare units with template No. 4040 SEDE x ST18.
2.25 WALL MAGNETS
A. LCN SEM 7800 Series, low profile recessed wall mount, SEM 7850 magnet, 24 volts, Light
Bronze finish.
226 SIGHT BAFFLES
A. Provide sight baffles for installation on both vertical stiles of wood doors where indicated in
hardware schedule. Products shall be manufactured by Pemko or as approved equal.
1. Hinge side: 369AP
2. Strike side: 18062DP
2.27 WEATHERSTRIPS AND THRESHOLDS
A. Weatherstrips, door bottoms, and threshold products as manufactured by National Guard. Equal
products by Reese International and Pemko will be acceptable.
B. All exterior doors shall have the following:
1. Head and Jambs: NG 700
2. Door Bottoms: NGD608Meeting Stiles at Pairs: NG140P
4. Thresholds: NG426
C. Head, jamb and meeting stile weatherstrips for aluminum doors will be furnished by door
manufacturer.
D. Finish: [EDIT select one]
1. Bronze anodized aluminum for head/jamb/meeting stile weatherstripping.
2. Mill Finish Aluminum for thresholds.
2.28 DOOR GASKETS-POSITIVE PRESSURE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-11 05/13/05
C. Push plates shall be 4" x 16" high; kick plates shall be 12" high, armor plates shall be 34" high. Aawlk'
1. Kick plates occuring at patient bedroom doors shall be 10-inch high.
D. Armor and kick plates shall be 1-1/2" less the width of the door for pairs of doors; 2" less the
width of the door for single doors and 2" less the width of the door for double acting doors.
E. Bevel all edges.
F. Protection plates greater than 16" above the bottom of the door, installed on fire doors, shall be
UL labeled at the factory.
G. _?dhcsive _rnourrt: as recommended by door protection manufacturer for installation on the
specified door surfaces and finishes. Coordinate with door manufacturers to determine
compatibility between adhesive and door finishes.
2.21 BUMPERS
A. Wall bumpers shall be installed wherever an opened door or any item of hardware thereon strikes
a wall, column, casework or other part of the building construction. Where wall bumpers cannot
be effectively used, a floor stop shall be installed.
Manufacturer Masonry Steel Stud Partition
Wall Bumpers: Rockwood 408 409
Ives WS406CCV WS407CCV
Floor Bumpers: Rockwood: 440,442
Ives: FS436,FS438
B. Roller Bumpers: Provide roller bumpers, Rockwood 455, Ives RB470 or approved equal, for
each door where two doors interfere with each other in swinging.
2.22 COAT HOOKS
A. Rockwood#806 or approved equal.
2.23 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Magnetic catches shall be Ives#327
2.24 AUTOMATIC RELEASE CLOSING DEVICE
A. TYPE "B"
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 08710-10 05113105
3. Elevator key switches, Sections 14210 and 14240.
2.15 HOSPITAL LATCH
A. Hospital latches shall be Sargent, Series 115P, Trimco 1380, or Glynn-Johnson HL-6E with brass
base. Paddle configuration shall be push paddle up with pull paddle down, unless otherwise
indicated in the finish hardware set listing. Backset shall be 5 inch unless noted otherwise.
Inscribe Push/Pull lettering.
2.16 PULLS
A. Interior pulls shall be as manufactured by Rockwood BF107, Baldwin 902, Ives 8102-8 or
approved equal, unless otherwise specified. Exterior pulls shall be Rockwood BF111, Burns
BF426C or approved equal, unless otherwise specified.
2.17 COMBINATION PUSH PULL PLATES
A. Combination push pulls shall be Rockwood 91, Baldwin 2590 or as approved equal, with corners
of projecting lip cut to 1/2" radius and edges rounded. Plate shall be engraved with letters not
less than 1/2" high, reading "PUSH" or "PULL" as required.
2.18 PUSH PLATES
A. Push plates shall be .050" thick,4" x 16", all edges beveled.
1. Rockwood No. 70 Series.
2. Burns: 50 Series.
3. Quality: 40 Series.
2.19 PUSH BAR/PULL SET
A. One inch diameter bars:
1. Rockwood: BF11147 x Template T1004
2. Burns: BF26C x 422
3. Quality: BF482
2.20 ARMOR PLATES, KICK PLATES,PUSH PLATES
A. Manufacturers: Rockwood ,Baldwin, or as approved equal.
B. Armor plates, kick plates and push plates shall be .050" thick,US 10 satin Bronze finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-9 05113105
2.11 AUTOMATIC COORDINATING DEVICE Affwk.
A. Provide automatic coordinating devices at all pairs of doors where latching would interfere with
proper operating of doors. Coordinators shall be Ives Series "COR" or Rockwood 1600 Series.
Furnish filler pieces to close opening between coordinator and jamb of frame. Provide mounting
brackets and carry bars.
2.12 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Flush bolts at top and bottom of doors shall be automatic type, except where manual or self
latching flush bolts are indicated, with dust-proof floor strikes, as manufactured by Ives or
Rockwood. Units shall be as follows:
I. Automatic Flush Bolts
a. Metal doors: Rockwood - 1842 Ives -FB31P
b. Wood doors: Rockwood - 1942 Ives -FB41P
2. Manual Flush Bolts
a. Metal doors: Rockwood -555 Ives—FB458
b. Wood doors: Rockwood—557/555 Ives—FB358/458
3. Self Latching Flush Bolts
a. Metal doors: Rockwood- 1845 Ives-FB51P
b. Wood doors: Rockwood- 1945 Ives-FB61P
2.13 LOCKS,LATCHES AND BATH SETS
A. Lock sets, latch sets, and bath sets shall be mortise type, with lever handles and curved lip
strikes.
B. Mortise lock set, latch sets, and bath sets shall be one of the following:
Manufacturer Series Design
Corbin/Russwin ML2000 NSM
C. All hardware for fire-rated(labeled) doors shall be Underwriters Laboratories approved.
2.14 CYLINDERS
A. Wherever cylinders are required to be furnished, provide collars or rings necessary for proper fit
of cylinder in lock. The hardware supplier shall be responsible for furnishing the proper cylinder
to fit the various hardware items which required cylinders.
B. In addition to providing cylinders for products of this Section; furnish cylinders for the
following:
1. Overhead Coiling Doors, Section 08331.
2. Automatic Sliding Entrance Door System, Section 08461.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-8 05/13/05
G. Closers shall have full covers.
H. Closers shall be as follows:
1. Exterior Doors
a. Corbin Russwin DC6210 or LCN 4041, except as otherwise indicated in hardware
sets, template for 110 degrees, except where doors indicated on drawings to swing
180 degrees use standard arm. Coordinate with auxiliary overhead stops where
indicated in the hardware sets and provide all necessary mounting brackets.
2. Interior Doors
a. Corbin Russwin DC6200 or LCN 4041, except as otherwise indicated in hardware
sets. Where parallel arm required,provide DC6210 or 4041.
b. LCN 4000T at pocket conditions.
3. Concealed overhead door closers shall be Rixson. Provide mounting hardware and wood
door end caps.
2.9 DOOR HOLDERS
A. Door holders shall be Rixson 9 series or Glynn Johnson 90 series, function as listed in hardware
sets.
2.10 EXIT DEVICES
ell, A. Exit devices shall be one of the following:
1. Corbin Russwin ED5000 Series or Von Duprin 98 Series as indicated.
a. Lever design: Newport(C/R); 06(VD)
2. Von Duprin 94 Series as indicated for pocket conditions.
B. Exit Device-Electric Latch Retraction:
1. Corbin Russwin M94 or Von Duprin EL used in conjunction with automatic door
operators.
2. Power supplies for electric latch retraction exit devices shall be one of the following:
(1) Corbin Russwin 781N
(2) Von Duprin PS873 x 2-FA or IF LATCHES ARE REQUIRED TO BE EXTENDED)
USE PS873 x2-AO-FA.
C. All exit devices with lockable lever trim shall have free-wheeling type trim.
D. Provide cylinder dogging at exterior doors. Floor strikes shall be flush with finish floor or tops of
thresholds. Furnish master keyed cylinders where keyed function is indicated. Vertical functions
shall be provided with retracting bottom latch bolt feature.
E. Functions indicated in hardware schedule are Corbin Russwin.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-7 05113105
2.6 POCKET PIVOTS -law,
A. McKinney PH4
B. Rixson F519
2.7 DOUBLE ACTING PIVOTS
A. McKinney EP54
B. Rixson 127-3/4
2.8 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers shall be manufactured by Corbin Russwin or LCN.
1. They shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron
cylinder. Hydraulic fluid shall be a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for
temperatures ranging from 120 degrees Fahrenheit (49 degrees Centigrade) to -30 degrees
Fahrenheit(-35 degrees Centigrade).
2. All closers shall be sized at factory for size and location of door. Spring power for each
closer shall be adjustable. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamperproof, non-critical screw
valves.
3. Closers shall have separate adjustments for latch speed, general speed and hydraulic back-
check.
4. Closers with delayed action shall have back-check set at factory. Back-check shall be
properly located for protection of door frame and hardware. All parallel arm closers shall
have solid forged steel arms.
5. All closers shall carry a manufacturer's ten year warranty.
B. Except for exterior doors and as noted otherwise, all surface closers shall be provided with zero
to two minute delayed action feature, manually adjusted after installation.
C. Provide drop brackets where required.
D. Do not locate closers on the side of doors facing corridors, passageways or similar type areas.
Where it is necessary, due to certain conditions, and with the approval of the Architect, to have
closers in corridors,provide such closers with parallel arms.
E. All door closers shall be adjusted by the installer in accordance with the manufacturer's templates
and written instructions. All closers shall have back-check features adjusted at the time of
installation.
F. Closers shall conform to all applicable code requirements relative to setting closing speed for
closers and maximum pressure for operating interior and exterior doors. Where requested by the
Architect, test doors for compliance with the above requirements using a Chatillion No. 719-20
gauge or a similar device capable of measuring such forces.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-6 05/13/05
G. Supply a bitting list for all change keys and master keys to the Owner.
2.3 BUTTS
A. Butts: Shall be McKinney as specified in the following schedule. Butts manufactured by Soss or
Hager will be accepted.
B. Hinge pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Steel hinges: steel pins.
2. Non-corrosive hinges: stainless steel pins.
3. Exterior doors and Interior oat-swing doors with locks: non-rernovable pins.
4. All other Interior doors: non-rising pins.
5. Tips: flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
C. Butt hinges required per door:
1. Doors 60 inches or less in height: 2 butts
2. Doors over 60 inches and not over 90 inches:3 butts
3. Door over 90 inches high: 4 butts
4. Dutch type doors: 4 butts
INTERIOR DOORS
Tvpe Frame Width Thickness Type and Size Butts
w, WD WDF 3'-4" and less 1-3/4 TA714-44/2x4
WD or HM PMF 3'-4" and less 1-3/4 TA714-44/2x4
WD WDF Y-6" and over 1-3/4 TA.786-5x4-1/2
WD or HM PMF Y-6" and over 1-3/4 TA786-5x4-1/2
EXTERIOR DOORS
I'ype Frame Width Thickness Type and Size Butts
WD WDF 3'-0" and less 1-3/4 TA314-5x4-1/2
WD or HM PMF 3'-0" and less 1-3/4 TA314-5x4-1/2
WD or HM PMF 3'-2" and over 1-3/4 TA386-5x4-1/2
2.4 SWING CLEAR HINGES
A. Wherever swing clear butts are indicated provide the following:
1. McKinney TA795 x 5";TA5795 x 5";Hager AB7501 x 5"; AB7502 x 5"
2.5 ELECTRIFIED SWING CLEAR HINGES
A. Where electrified swing clear hinges are indicated provide the following:
1. Hager AB7501/AB7502 x 5 x ETW-8
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-5 05/13/05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS "
2.1 MATERIALS AND FINISH
A. Materials and finishes shall be:
1. Interior butts: Steel, US 10
2. Exterior butts: Bronze,US 10
3. Door closers:
a. Finishes based on LCN-Powdered Coatings.
b. Where US 10 occurs -LCN No. 25
4. F,xit Devices: US 10
5. Magnetic locks: Alum
6. Exit buttons: Stainless Steel
7. Magnetic Catches: A92
8. All other hardware shall be bronze with US10 finish.
2.2 KEYED INSTRUCTIONS
A. Construction cores and keys shall be provided during the construction period. When directed by
the Owner, remove the cores and install the new cores keyed into the existing Grand Master Key
System.
B. Key System: All new cylinders shall be keyed into the existing Grand Master Key System. AOWA
C. Furnish all locks with removable core cylinders and nickel silver keys.
D. Keys:
1. Furnish Three (3) master keys per group, three (3) keys for each cylinder keyed
differently, six (6) keys for each set keyed alike, and in sets where only two (2) cylinders
are keyed alike, four(4)keys will be required.
2. Privacy sets: Furnish(2)emergency keys for each privacy set.
3. Provide twenty (20)construction master keys and six(6)control keys.
4. All keys and cores shall be stamped with the key symbol as directed by the owner.
5. All keys shall be stamped"Do Not Duplicate".
E. All keying shall be done at the factory to avoid duplication of the new cylinders. The keying
system shall be approved by the Architect.
F. Master Keys shall be sent to the Owner by registered mail,return receipt requested.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
30 Locust Street
Northampton, MA 01060
Attn: Marc Fleury
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-4 05113105
F. Fasteners:
1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not use self-tapping sheet metal screws.
2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws
except as otherwise specified. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to
match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such
other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive
painted finish.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed,
when the unit is available with concealed fasteners.
4. Do not use through-bolts for installation except:
a. Where required by fire ratings or required by hardware manufacturer's installation
instructions.
b. Where the work cannot be reinforced for normal screw mounting, and then only
with the Architect's approval. In such cases, provide sleeves for each through-bolt or
use sex screws.
G. Arrange for a representative of the manufacturers of door closers, automatic release closing
devices and exit devices to visit the project prior to the start of the installation of such items and
instruct the hardware installers on the proper method of installation.
H. Upon completion of installation of all hardware, arrange for the hardware manufacturer's
representatives to inspect and make final adjustments to all of the above items.
I. The successful hardware bidder:
1. Shall be a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, or shall have such members on his
staff to oversee the scheduling and furnishing of finish hardware.
2. Shall have office and distribution facilities located no more than 75 miles from project and
shall maintain qualified personnel readily available to service the supplied hardware.
J. Coordination of electrical hardware:
1. Coordinate with the work of other sections in which electrical hardware is to be installed
in conjunction with electrical components provided under other sections of the
specifications. Provide whatever information is required by other trades for the proper
interfacing and operation of electrical hardware.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Packing and marking: Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper
fastenings and appurtenances, clearly marked on the outside to indicate the contents and specific
locations in the Work.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary
to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-3 05113105
2. Make the schedule in a form suitable to the Architect for reviewing submittal. Include in
the schedule the Architect's hardware set number for each door opening as provided in the
Hardware Set Numbers and Descriptions of this Section.
3. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to demonstrate;
compliance with the specified requirements.
4. Approval of the hardware list by the Architect will not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility for furnishing all required finish hardware.
C. Samples: Deliver any physical samples requested by the Architect within 15 calendar days after
being so requested. Such samples, after approval, will be returned to the hardware supplier for
incorporation into the Work.
1). Templates:
1. In a timely manner to ensure orderly progress of the Work, deliver templates or physical
samples of the approved finish hardware items to pertinent manufacturers of interfacing
items, such as doors and frames.
E. Electrical Hardware:
1. Furnish complete custom wiring details including point-to-point and riser diagrams for
each hardware set containing electrical components, mounting instructions and installation
information for all electrically operated hardware.
F. Copies of testing documentation relative to hydraulic fluid for closers, stating compliance with
stated criteria.
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All hardware, as far as practical, shall be one manufacturer's make. The Contractor shall submit
to the Architect a list of all finish and operating hardware, listing all items by the manufacturer's
name, catalog number and description.
B. Provide hardware by specified manufacturers only, except where the words "or approved equal"
are indicated. The Architect will be the sole judge in determining the equality of products
proposed for substitution from specified manufacturers.
C. The hardware supplier shall meet with the Owner's representative to establish a keying schedule.
This schedule will be submitted to the Architect, who will forward it to the Owner for his review.
Upon review and approval by the Owner, the keying schedule will be returned to the Architect,
who will forward same to the Contractor.
D. All hardware, which is furnished under this section for aluminum entrance doors, shall be
shipped to the aluminum door manufacturer for installation by the door manufacturer. Furnish all
templates and shop drawings as required for hardware installation and fabrication of doors and
frames.
E. Forward hardware templates for wood doors to wood door manufacturer for premachining.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package' —2323 08710-2 05/13/05
SECTION 08710 -FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide finish hardware throughout the Work as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and as
needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Finish hardware installed under the work of Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry.
RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls, Installation of finish hardware.
2. Section 06402, Architectural Woodwork; Hardware for custom casework.
3. Section 08110, Steel Doors.
4. Section 08113, Steel Frames.
5. Section 08211,Flush Wood Doors: Premachining of wood doors.
6. Section 08716, Automatic Door Operators.
7. Division 16, Electrical; Installation of wiring and final connections for electrically
operated hardware.
8. Security System: Card readers working in conjunction with electrically operated hardware
shall be provided by Owner's separate contractor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Submit the following product data:
1. Complete materials schedule of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Identify
each hardware item by manufacturer's name, manufacturer's catalog number, and the
locations of the item in the Work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Finish Hardware
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08710-1 05113105
I. For channel glazing, use only a non-hardening, non-corrosive, gun-applied sealant,
specifically recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the type of glass specified.
2. In no case shall glazing be performed with any oleo-resinous or oil-base compounds, nor
shall any glazing sealant be diluted or thinned with any solvent.
3. Never fill the space between the bottom edge of the glass and the sill. This will interfere
with the weepage system.
4. All sealants must be applied to provide an absolute tight seal; on insulation glass units,
sealant must contact the glass a minimum of 1/8-inch above the metal edge protection.
5. Framing with neoprene or structural neoprene gaskets must have a supplementary wet
seal applied between the gasket and the glass, at the bottom edge (sill) of the glass and 6"
up on each jamb. Sill section of all structural neoprene gaskets must have weep holes to
the exterior. Glass should be set on two 70-90 duro peter neoprene setting blocks.
6. All surfaces to be sealed must be completely clean and dry. Check sealant
manufacturer's recommendations for proper cleaning procedures.
3.4 SPECIAL TECHNIQUES
A. Careful handling of all glazing is essential during installation.
B. Care should be taken to avoid striking the edges of the unit against framing materials.
C. Use vacuum cups or nylon web straps to center the glass in the opening---do not use a pry bar.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Labels: Leave all labels in place, intact and legible, until reviewed and approved by the
Architect.
1. Following Architect approval, remove all stickers and labels as soon as possible after
glazing.
B. Prior to completion of the Work, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces of glass.
1. Use only the cleaning materials and techniques recommended by the manufacturer of the
material being cleaned.
2. Do not scratch or otherwise damage the glass.
END OF SECTION 08524
Cooley Dickinson Hospital VIEW WINDOWS WITH INTEGRAL BLIND
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08524-5 05113105
B. The panels shall indicate the manufacturer and date of manufacturing. "
PART -3) -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Frame Requirements
1. Coordinate with other trades and work of other sections.
2. All framing members must be specifically designed to accept the glass specified and
must have adequate structural strength to support the weight of the glass without
deformation.
3. Framing must be level, plumb, square and in plane.
4. Framing must also be free to any glazing obstructions.
5. All joints must be sealed to be tight, and all sill members must have weep holes.
B. Clearance and Edge Bite
1. Adequate edge and face clearances must be provided, to allow the glass to float freely in
the opening, without undue restriction by the framing members. The recommended
clearance will be 3/8-inch minimum. Retention must be suitable.
2. Adequate bite is mandatory to maintain a tight seal, as well as retain the glass in the
opening under deformation of the framing members.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Units shall be installed and securely in place in a plumb and level condition, by experienced
workmen in exact accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
Erector shall make final adjustments for proper operation after glazing.
B. Setting Blocks And Spacers
1. Two 70-90 durometer neoprene setting blocks shall be used on the bottom edge of each
light. Place setting blocks at the end points.
C. Sealing:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital VIEW WINDOWS WITH INTEGRAL BLIND
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08524-4 05113105
e011" C. Overall thickness: 2.48-inches
B. Sealants:
1. Compressed polyisobutylene shall be used as a primary seal and high quality polysulfide
as a secondary seal. The contact of both sealants shall provide for perfect adhesion as
well as insurance against moisture, vapor penetration,resistance to the effects of solvents
and oils and infiltration of any substance covering the warranty period.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Louvers:
1. Each panel shall be fabricated according to a whole number of slats, with a choice of
predetermined heights according to manufacturer's standards resulting in a variation of 1-
5/16 -inch between each subsequent size. The maximum sizes for vertical application is
48-inch for width and 120-inch for height.
2. The 1-3/8 -inch louvers shall be made of extruded aluminum, hollow-chambered profile,
alloy 6063-T5. The louvers shall be secured at both ends of panel with molded pivots
and shall operate without cords and strings. The finish of the louvers shall be baked-
enamel Duracon, shall be gloss white.
B. Dessicant:
1. The air space between the two glass panes shall be hydrated with desiccant contained in
precise proportions in the spacers. The drying agent shall provide a minimum dew point
of-73°F and a moisture-free air space for the entire warranty period.
C. Spacers:
1. The corrosion-resistant aluminum spacer of 2-inch shall be cbemically-c leaned and shall
contain sufficient quantity of desiccant. The spacers shall be turned into frames by
mechanically-locked corner keys.
D. Operating Mechanism:
1. All pivots, pinions and racks shall be made with U.V. stabilized materials to insure
dimensional stability, durability and maintenance-free service never needing lubrication.
2. Manual operation: The rotation of the slats shall be controlled through a standard
fingertip manual crank handle. The slats shall rotate 180° in a continuous cycle then
handle shall be rotated to the left of to the right.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. All panel's elements shall be assembled under unit manufacturer's rigid quality control
standards at the manufacturer's factory.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital VIEW WINDOWS WITH INTEGRAL BLIND
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08524-3 05113105
1. ASTM E773 for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulated Glass.
2. ASTM E774 for Sealed Insulated Glass Units, level CBA.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect.
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. The manufacturer of insulating glass panels shall provide a warranty to the Owner which shall
state:
1. The insulating glass unit manufacturer warrants that all insulating glass units, installed at
the project, shall be not develop, under normal conditions, material obstruction of vision
as a result of dust or film formation on the internal glass surface caused by failure of the
hermetic seal other than through glass breakage.
2. Such warranty on the project shall extend of a period of five (5) years after the date of
Substantial Completion In the event of failure of a unit as described above, the
manufacturer shall furnish and install an identical product or a product approved by the
Owner. The warranty on replacement products shall extend for the balance of the
original five (5) year period. Submit copy of manufacturer's warranty with shop
drawings.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panels shall be factory-glazed Vision Control panels with extruded
aluminum louvers, double sealed within the glass as manufactured by Unicel Inc. distributed by
Atlantic Architectural Products, Inc.,Medfield,MA 02052, (508) 359-7524.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass:
1. The panels shall be both fabricated with a 2-inch air space. Both lights shall be tempered
glass.
2. The panels will be made of:
a. Side one light: 0.24-inch thick, clear, tempered.
b. Side two light: 0.24-inch thick, clear, tempered.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital VIEW WINDOWS WITH INTEGRAL BLIND
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08524-2 05113105
SECTION 08524 -VIEW WINDOWS WITH INTEGRAL BLIND
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide factory-glazed, double-glazed vision control panels, hermetically sealed, with
integrated pivoting louvers, and all operating components and accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: blocking and shims.
2. Section 07920,Joint Sealants: perimeter seals.
3. Section 08113, Steel Frames: metal frames to accept vision units.
4. Section 08800, Glazing: window glass and performance requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Include elevations of panels, full-sized details of all sections of panels, collateral
materials, details of anchorage and metal data shall include instructions for storage,
handling and erection of panels.
D. Samples for Verification: Color samples for specified finish of aluminum.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Vision control panels shall meet or exceed the following tests:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital VIEW WINDOWS WITH INTEGRAL BLIND
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08524-1 05113105
OW 2. Remove construction debris from construction site and legally dispose of debris.
3. Repair or replace damaged installed products.
4. Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for optimum condition and
safety.
B. Adjustment: Adjust operator and controls for optimum condition and safety.
END OF SECTION 08461
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08461 -7 05/13/05
b. The finish for all other exposed to view aluminum shall be a two coat, two bake
system. The primer coat shall be an inhibitive primer with dry film thickness
averaging 0.2 mils to 0.3 mils. The color coat shall have a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.0 mils. The total minimum dry film thickness of the fluoropolymer
system shall be 1.2 mils.
2. Unexposed areas such as inside corners and channels shall be visually covered to the
extent possible.
3. The finish shall meet the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association "2605 -
Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels".
4. Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc., No other manufacturer will be acceptable.
a. Color and Gloss: Match metal faced composite wall panel `MP-2' furnished under
Section 07412-Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, area and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash
with manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. Provide support and anchor in place.
B. Dissimilar Materials: Comply with AAMA 101, Appendix Dissimilar Materials by separating
aluminum materials and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action contact points.
C. Weather-Tight Construction: Install header and framing members in a bed of sealant or with
joint filler or gaskets. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of
construction.
D. Electrical: Work under Division 16 -Electrical will provide all wiring to operator on a separate
circuit breaker routed into header.
3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: After installation, installer to take following steps:
1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08461 -6 05/13/05
G. Actuating and Safety Devices: Provide actuating and safety devices as specified in Section
08717—Automatic Door Sensing Systems.
H. Glass: 1-inch thick insulating units for exterior units, 1/4-inch thick for interior units. Refer to
Section 08800—Glazing, for glass type and performance requirements.
I. Hardware: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door
finish,unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper, anodized:
1. Structural Header Sections: Minimum 3/16 inches thickness.
2. Structural Frame Sections: Minimum 1/8 inches thickness.
3. Structural Panel Sections: Commercial grade.
B. Panel Construction: Mortise and tenon type joints, neatly and mechanically secured. Sash
consists of snap-in glass stops, snap-in glazing beads and vinyl gaskets.
C. Frame Construction: Butt joints, neatly and mechanically secured by means of screws and
formed aluminum corner brackets.
D. Operator Construction: Electromechanical, modular type construction.
2.4 FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic-Coating Finish: Apply fluoropolymer finish to all exposed to view
aluminum. The finish coating for extruded aluminum shall be a factory applied, oven baked
finish based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 (70% min. polyvinylidene fluoride - PVF2).
Application of the finish based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shall be performed under
specifications issued by the coating manufacturer and by an applicator specifically approved by
manufacturer. Said applicator shall provide written notification of approval by the manufacturer
prior to application of the finish. The coating system shall be applied to properly cleaned and
pretreated aluminum. The pretreatment shall meet ASTM D-1730-67, Type B, Method 5 or
Method 7. Processing shall conform with ASTM B-339-67 (1972) Section 5. Conversion
coating weight shall be between 30-100 mgms. per square foot.
1. Application:
a. The finish for all doors shall be a three coat, three bake system. The primer coat
shall be an inhibitive primer with dry film thickness averaging .2 mils to .3 mils.
The color coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mils. A
fluoropolymer clear coat shall be applied at .4 to .8 mils DFT. The total minimum
dry film thickness of the fluoropolymer system shall be 1.6 mils.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08461 -5 05113105
working with drive belt, attached door hangers, and idler pulley. Drive belt to be Neoprene
reinforced nylon, 3/4-inch wide. Idler pulley to be reinforced, non-metallic material.
1. The Microprocessor Master Control shall have Horton Version 2 software and have
programmable speed values for: Open Speed, Close Speed, Open Checl<, Close Check,
and Open Cushion; however, Close Speed not to exceed 12-inch per second.
2. The control shall also have programmable time values for: Full-Open Time Delay and
Partial-Open Time Delay. Partial-Opening to be adjustable in increments of 1-inch.
Modes of operation shall be: Auto-seal mode with self-close approximately every 11
seconds, Self-cycle test mode (operates door during tune-in process), Night mode power
fail operation, Day mode autolock prevention, Day 1-way and 2-way, Night 1-way and 2-
way. Diagnostics shall be accomplished via a digital display.
3. Control to have dedicated interface connection.
4. A Revolution Encoder shall instruct the control on sliding panel's speed and position. An
Adjustable Reversing Circuit will reopen door unit if closing path is obstructed.
Maximum force required to prevent sliding panel from closing: 28 lbf.
5. Finger Safety: When unit slides open, strike rail of sliding panel will stop 3-1/2 -inches
short of adjacent sidelite; resulting opening is net slide.
6. Power On/Off Switch: Shall be located inside header and when switched OFF, unit
reverts to free manual operation(likewise during electrical power failure).
C. Header: Shall be aluminum with removable faceplate and capable of self-support up to length of
16 feet on standard door size and glazing. Optional transom of size and type indicated mounted
on header. Header size to be 6-inches deep by 6-inches high.
D. Track: Shall be aluminum, 5/8-inches wide and replaceable. Door-Hanger Rollers will be non-
metallic, sealed ball bearing wheels 1-3/4 -inch diameter. Anti-derailing shall be accomplished
by means of a separate adjustable roller.
E. Sliding Panels and Sidelites: Shall be aluminum, 1-3/4 -inches deep with "medium stile"
horizontal and vertical rails. Weather-stripping to be along perimeter of sliding panel(s) and
swingout sidelite(s). Concealed guides to stabilize bottom of sliding panel. Standard glazing
prep to be for 1/4-inch glass,except provide prep for 1-inch glass at exterior.
1. Emergency Egress: Slide-swing panels can swing out 90° from any position of slide
movement and require no more than 50 lbf. of force applied at the lock stile to open.
Swing-slide panels and swing-out sidelites have torsion spring designed to re-close panel
if pushed open in the direction of egress; also, include intermediate horizontal rail. Units
with emergency egress feature are UL listed as an exit way and are compliant with NFPA
101.
F. Threshold: Shall be aluminum, 1/2-inches tall by 4-inches wide or optional threshold 7-inches
wide.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08461 -4 05113105
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions/openings by field measurements before
fabrication and record on shop drawings. Coordinate with fabrication and construction schedule
to avoid construction delays.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Ordering and Delivery: Comply with factory's ordering instructions and lead time requirements.
Delivery shall be in factory's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification
labels intact.
B. Storage and Protection: Provide protection from exposure to harmful weather conditions and
vandalism.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired,
drawings and specifications are based on products by Horton Automatics; Div. of Overhead
Door Corporation, Corpus Christie, TX 78405, (800) 531-5591, and trade names of that
manufacturer are used herein
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or the listed product
by the following manufacturer(s):
1. "Dura-Glide Series 3000"as manufactured by Stanley Access Technologies, Farmington,
CT, (800)722-2377
2.2 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors,
sidelites, framing, headers,carrier assemblies,roller tracks,door operators, activation and safety
devices, and accessories required for a complete installation.
1. Sliding Automatic Entrance Door: Horton Type 310
a. Configuration: single-sliding doors, with one sliding leaf and sidelite. Emergency
breakaway capability provided for both sliding leaf and sidelite.
B. Operator: The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be Series 2003 Belt Drive. The operator
shall be mounted and concealed within the header. Operating force shall be accomplished
through a 1/8 HP DC permanent magnet motor with worm gear transmission and 1800 RPM
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08461 -3 05113105
I. NFPA 101: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings & Structures. Aak
F. The Aluminum Association:
1. AA Aluminum Finishes Manual.
G. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.:
1. UL 325: Electrical Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.
H. Underwriters Laboratory Of Canada (ULC).
l.d SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Quality Assurance: AAADM inspection compliance form completed and signed by certified
AAADM inspector prior to doors being placed in operation as proof of compliance with ANSI
A156.10.
E. Maintenance Data: For automatic entrance door systems to include in operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress.
B. Installers Qualifications: Installer experienced to perform work of this section who has
specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is
acceptable to product manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer to have minimum (5) five years successful
experience in the fabrication of automatic doors of the type required for this project.
Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during installation, approving
acceptable installer and approving application method.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08461 -2 05113105
SECTION 08461 —SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior and interior single-sliding, automatic entrance door assemblies.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Section 08710,Finish Hardware: for lock cylinders.
2. Section 08717, Automatic Door Sensing Equipment:
3. Section 08800, Glazing: Glass and glazing for automatic entrances.
4. Section 08911, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
5. Division 16, Electrical: Electrical services to operators and wiring from remote switching
to operators.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
1. AAMA 101: Appendix Dissimilar Materials.
B. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM).
C. American National Standards Institute:
I. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -Methods of Test.
2. ANSI A156.10: For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Sliding Doors section.
D. American Society For Testing And Materials:
1. ASTM B221: Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods, Shapes and Tubes.
E. National Fire Protection Association:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08461 - 1 05/13/05
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
32 INSTALLATION
A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Set units level and plumb.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points and AMW
weather stripping.
B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces.
END OF SECTION 08450
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08450-4 05/13/05
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Rails:
L Material: Bronze-clad aluminum.
2. Height:
a. Bottom Rail: 10-inch.
b. Top Rail: 4-inch.
3. Style: Flat top, square profile.
I3. Sidelight Channels: Match fitting-metal finish, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Accessory Fittings: Match rail metal and finish for the following:
1. Overhead doorstop.
D. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Heavy-duty hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by
manufacturer for all-glass entrances indicated. For exposed parts, match fitting metal and
finish.
B. Overhead Concealed Closers and Bottom Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1;
including cases, bottom arms, top walking beam pivots, plates, and accessories required for
complete installation.
C. Push-Pull Set: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails, and accessories before
tempering glass. Do not cut,drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process and fabricate so, when
installed,roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
2. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08450-3 05113105
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
all-glass systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for all-glass systems is based on "CRL - Style P"
entrances as manufactured by C.R. Laurence Company, Los Angeles, CA, (800) 421-6144.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product
by one of the following:
1. Blumeraft of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA, (412) 681-2400.
2. Virginia Glass Products Corp., Martinsville, VA, (800) 368-3011.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
(transparent), Class 1 (Clear), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and
for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Butt Edges: Flat ground.
3. Pattern: Clear and decorative pattern as indicated on the Drawings. Patterned glass to
match Cesar Color, Inc. Chromafusion "Sandblast Density No. 5" (Glass Type GL-9,
Section 08800, Glazing).
a. Acid-Etched Finish: Acid etch glass with hydrofluoric and hydrochloric acids,
evenly applied and maintaining detail of sandblasted pattern, according to
manufacturer's standard process.
4. Antifingerprint Coating: Protective coating recommended and provided by glass
fabricator.
B. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than
alloy 6063-T5.
1. Bronze Cladding: ASTM B 36/13 36M, alloy as standard with manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08450-2 05113105
SECTION 08450 -ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior all-glass entrance and sidelight systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Section 08710,Finish Hardware
2. Section 08800, Glazing:
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Three 6" x 6" samples of specified metal finish.
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of hardware, decorative glass and applied coating to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08450-1 05113105
NXIMMIMMINNAMW
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop
Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction and the
manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring
all components firmly into position.
B. General:
1. Do not install damaged components.
2. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
4. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
5. All shims shall be aluminum. Wood shims will not be acceptable.
6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp ,
or rack.
E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08800, Glazing.
F. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce
weathertight installation.
G. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 1.2 feet.
1/4 inch over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.
H. Remove protective coating completely from exposed surfaces as soon as progress of the Work
will permit with safety.
END OF SECTION 08410
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08410-6 05113105
2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum
Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations.
B. High Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C40R1x, AAMA 2605.
1. Apply fluoropolymer finish to all exposed to view aluminum. The finish coating for
extruded aluminum shall be a factory applied, oven baked finish based on Kynar 500 or
Hylar 5000 (70% min. polyvinylidene fluoride — PVF,). Application of the finish based
on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shall be performed under specifications issued by the
coating manufacturer and by an applicator specifically approved by manufacturer. Said
applicator shall provide written notification of approval by the manufacturer prior to
application of the finish. The coating system shall be applied to properly cleaned and
pretreated aluminum. The pretreatment shall meet ASTM D-1730-67, Type B, Method 5
or Method 7. Processing shall conform with ASTM B-339-67 (1972) Section 5.
Conversion coating weight shall be between 30-100 mgms. per square foot.
2. Application:
a. The finish for all exposed to view aluminum shall be a two coat, two bake system.
The primer coat shall be an inhibitive primer with dry film thickness averaging 0.2
mils to 0.3 mils. The color coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0
mils. The total minimum dry film thickness of the fluoropolymer system shall be
1.2 mils.
3. Unexposed areas such as inside corners and channels shall be visually covered to the
extent possible.
4. The finish shall meet the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association "2605 -
Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels".
5. Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc.,No other manufacturer will be acceptable.
a. Color and Gloss: Match metal faced composite wall panel `MP-2' furnished under
Section 07412-Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of
those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Make measurements as required in the field to assure proper fit.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08410-5 05113105
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Basis of Design Product: The design for aluminum framed storefront systems is based on
"Encore" series as manufactured by Kawneer Company, Inc., Norcross, GA.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extrusions shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B221 alloy G.S. ]0A-T5). Fasteners,
where exposed, shall be aluminum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM
A164. Sheet aluminum of alloy and temper as required for fabrication and finish. Provide
mullion extrutions in sizes and profiles as detailed on the Drawings.
B. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel; isolate steel from aluminum with asphaltic
coating.
C. Glazing gaskets shall be elastomeric extrusions.
D. Sheet aluminum shall be of alloy and temper as required for fabrication and finish. Flashing
shall be 0.062" aluminum.
E. Materials: Extrusions shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B221 alloy G.S. l0A-T5).
Fasteners, where exposed, shall be aluminum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance ,
with ASTM A164. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly
isolated from the aluminum. Glazing gaskets shall be elastomeric extrusions.
F. Closure Covers: Form from .090 inch sheet aluminum to profiles indicated. Sections and
lengths shall be stiff and free from oil canning, and where joined together, the joints shall be
tight and aligned. Connections shall have concealed fasteners wherever possible. Provide
extruded aluminum framing members for securing aluminum closures.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturers' specifications and Shop Drawings as
approved by the Architect,prefabricating in the shop to the maximum extent practicable.
B. Provide hairline fit at joints, with smooth continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and
angles. Securely fasten.
1. The framing system shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with no projecting stops.
Vertical and horizontal framing members shall have a nominal face dimension of 1-3/4
inches. Overall depth shall be 3-9/1.6 -inch or 6-inch as scheduled, with a 5/8 inch
exterior metal reveal. Glass pocket depth shall be not less than 3/4 inch.
2. An applied cover on the exterior shall provide flush joints and a seamless appearance to
the installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08410-4 05113105
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Corner sample of fixed window consisting of vertical jamb and 2 horizontal mullions
with 1 inch insulated glass unit.
2. Three 6 inch square samples on aluminum of specified finish, in colors selected.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver products in a manner that will prevent distortion or damage. Store frames upright and
off ground. Protect finishes from staining and scratching. Replace damaged material.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements of openings and structural supports for
aluminum framed curtain wall systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect two
copies of a written Warranty agreeing to replace work of this Section which fails due to
defective materials or workmanship within three years after Date of Substantial Completion as
that date is determined in accordance with the General Conditions.
B. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be limited to:
1. Failures in operation of operating component or components.
2. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of the specified standard.
3. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye.
4. Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or potential
untimely failure of the work of this Section or the Work as a whole.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08410-3 05/13/05
C. Structural Performance:
1. Structural Performance — Implied Loads: Design and construct aluminum framed
storefront system to withstand minimum loading requirements as specified herein.
a. Design and engineer aluminum curtain wall system in accordance with procedures
for determining design wind loads for components and cladding for building height
>60 feet, pursuant to §1609.8.2 of BOCA '99, incorporating the following project-
specific values:
1) Salient Corners: Within 14-feet of exterior corners.
2) Basic Wind Speed: 70 mph
3) Exposure Category: C.
4) Basic Velocity Pressure: (Pv): 12.5
5) Wind Load Irnportance Factor (1): 1.16
6) Product of Internal Pressure Coefficient and Gust Response Factor (GCIJ:
Condition (+0.25 and—0.25).
b. Deflection Limit: Engineer aluminum curtain wall framing with maximum
deflection of 1/175 of the span.
2. Structural-Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems tested
according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
a. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding specified limits.
b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile wind for relevant
exposure category.
D. Seismic Requirements
1. General Seismic Requirements: Architectural components and their attachments shall
comply with seismic design requirements of the referenced building code for a project in
Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III, with a Seismic Performance Category of D:
2. Architectural Components Design: The aluminum framed storefront system and
attachments shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Section 1612.7.3 of
780 CMR, in its entirety, and for seismic forces (FP) in accordance with the formula Fp =
A,,CcPW,where the following values are used:
a. The coefficient representing effective peak velocity-related acceleration (A,,) =
0.12g.
b. The seismic coefficient for architectural components (Cc):
1) Components (Cc) =0.9.
2) Attachments (Cc)= 3.0
C. Performance criteria factor from Table 1612.7.3 of 780 CMR (P) = 1.5.
d. Wc=weight of architectural component.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08410-2 05/13/05
SECTION 08410 -ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes aluminum framed storefront systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07920,Joint Sealants
2. Section 08800, Glazing.
3. Section 08911, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the seismic
requirements for the curtain wall system as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building.
B. The BOCAO National Building Code 11999, Fourteenth Edition, referred to herein as `BOCA
99":
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the performance
requirements for design wind loads, and other designated or applicable loads for the
curtain wall system as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Air infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283. Infiltration shall not exceed 0.06
CFM per square foot of fixed area.
B. Water infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E331. No water penetration at a test
pressure of 6.24 psf(300 Pa).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08410-1 05/13/05
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
END OF SECTION 08331
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08331-5 05/13/05
b. The firefly shall also include a remote enunciator which shall include a warning
light and audible alarm. Upon activation of the Firefly, the enunciator shall warn
occupants that the Firefly has been activated and the fire door will mechanically
close in 10 seconds. The enunciator shall be connected to the Firefly and shall not
require an auxiliary power source to operate.
C. If the door is dropped by mechanical means, resetting of the door shall be
required.
I. Finishes: Stainless steel curtain, bottom bar, guides, and hood shall have No. 4, bright
directional polished finish. All other parts given a shop coat of rust inhibiting prime paint.
PART 3 - EXECLJTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts,hangers, and equipment supports.
1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Test: Test doors for normal operation and automatic closing. Coordinate with authorities
having jurisdiction to witness test and sign Drop Test Form.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08331-4 05113105
C. Guides: Construct from 16-gauge stainless steel formed shapes.
1. Provide structural steel support tubes for between the jamb mounting condition. Size as
required for span, and forces and loads imposed during operation, with welded angle
mounting tabs.
D. Sill:
1. Stair Tower: Provide manufacturer's fire rated sill as integral part of frame assembly
fabricated of 14-gauge stainless steel.
2. Pass-Through: Provide manufacturer's high-pressure decorative laminate-covered
countertop, UL or ITS tested and labeled for 1-1/2-hour fire rating for approved use with
fire-door assembly.
a. Color, Pattern and Finish: As selected by the Architect.
E. Counterbalance Assembly: Oil tempered heat treated steel helical torsion spring assembly,
capable of counterbalancing weight of curtain.
F. Hood: 24-gauge stainless steel, with intermediate supports as required to prevent excessive sag.
G. Operation: Motor operated; Model 11 Midget Operator with manual push up emergency
operation, 120 volt, 1 phase. The motor operator shall be activated by a 3 position keyed
selector switch in a NEMA 1 enclosure. All motor operators shall be U.L. listed.
H. Fire Protection Products:
1. Motor shall be controlled by TEST-A-FIRE Test Control Panel. This panel shall allow
the testing of the fire door without resetting the release mechanism. The control panel
shall be UL approved for use with fire doors and motor operators. The control panel shall
be hooked up to alarm system and shall accept the voltage as required by the building's
fire alarm system.
2. Featheredge safety edge system:
a. The Featheredge shall be installed on the bottom bar of the door and shall
automatically reverse the door if the device detects an obstruction in the
downward travel of the door.
b. The Featheredge shall consist of a rubber boot attached below the bottom bar with
an electrical switch secured to the back of the bottom bar. The Featheredge shall
operate with air wave technology and shall not rely on pneumatic pressure or
electrical strip contacts to operate properly. The Featheredge shall create an air
wave that shall be detected and reverse the direction of the rolling door.
C. The operation of the Featheredge shall not be subject to interference by
temperature,barometric pressure, water infiltration, or cut it the rubber boot.
3. Firefly Time Delay Device:
a. If power to the motor operator is interrupted, while the alarm is in an activated
state, the Firefly Time Delay Device shall be activated. If power is resumed before
the timer cycle has elapsed, the motor operator shall automatically close the door
and the Firefly device shall automatically reset itself. If power is not resumed, the
door shall be released and closed by mechanical means.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08331-3 05/13/05
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide rolling fire doors constructed in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories,
Inc. requirements and shall bear a 1-1/2 hr. rating label.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired,
drawings and specifications are based on rolling fire doors as manufactured by The Cookson
Company, Inc., Pheonix, AZ, (602) 272-4244; and trade name of the manufacturer are used
herein.
2.2 COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Products:
1. Fire-Rated Counter Doors (Pass-Through): Provide face of wall mounted rolling counter
fire door, Series No.FD-10-1M as manufactured by The Cookson Company, Inc.
2. Fire-Rated Counter Doors (Stair Tower): Provide between the jamb mounted rolling
service fire door with sill, Series No. FDO-A10- as manufactured by The Cookson
Company, Inc.
B. Curtain shall consist of Cookson No. 10, interlocking roll formed flat-faced, 22-gauge stainless
steel slats, and stainless steel tubular bottom bar with lift handles and vinyl astragal providing a
seal between the bottom bar and sill.
1. Locking: Bottom bar of furnished with concealed sliding bolt deadlock operated by a
cylinder lock, operable from coil side.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08331-2 05/13/05
SECTION 08331 -ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of electric-motor-operated overhead coiling doors:
1. Fire-rated counter doors.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications: for miscellaneous support framing, except as
specified herein.
2. Division 16,Electrical: Electrical connections for power operation and fire alarm.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Include description of fire-release system including testing and resetting instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control systems indicating manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
D. Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance data for inclusion in Maintenance
Manual specified in Division One.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08331-1 05/13/05
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust rolling insulated service doors to operate easily;
free of warp, twist, or distortion and with tight fit around entire perimeter.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain rolling insulated service doors. Refer to Section 01730, Operation
and Maintenance Data.
END OF SECTION 08330
Cooley Dickinson Hospital OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Surgery/Bed Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 08330-6 05/13/05
2.4 FINISH
A. The finish on the door curtain, bottom bar and hood shall be Cookson ColorCote consisting of
the following:
1. Hot dipped galvanized G-90 coating consistent with ASTM A-525.
2. Bonderized coating for prime coat adhesion.
3. Corrosion inhibiting primer-.2mils per side.
4. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of polyester based
powder coating.
B. All other steel items, including but not limited to the items listed below, shall receive one (1)
coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint:
1. Brackets.
2. Barrel.
3. Guides.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install rolling insulated service door and operating equipment, complete with
necessary hardware, according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as
specified.
B. Rolling insulated service doors shall be installed by a manufacturer's authorized installer.
C. All bolts for fastening the door equipment to the building structure shall be furnished by the
Door Contractor. If any such bolts are required to be built into the masonry or concrete
structure, such bolts are to be delivered to the Contractor who will install same according to the
location diagram furnished by the door manufacturer.
D. Upon completion of the installation make required adjustments and assure that components are
in optimum operating condition.
loow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08330-5 05113105
producing sufficient torque to assure easy operation of the door curtain from any position.
Spring tension shall be adjustable by means of adjusting wheel on the outside of the end
bracket.
F. Hoods: Fabricated of not less than No. 24 gauge galvanized steel formed Io fit contour of end
brackets in a neat manner and reinforced with stiffening rolls at top and bottom edges. Provide
manufacturer's weatherproof baffle inside of hood to prevent airflow around the coil and
control air infiltration.
2.3 OPERATORS
A. boors shall be electrically operated. Electric motor and worm reduction gears shall be separate
units coupled together and so designed and constructed that in case of failure in the electrical
system the door can be operated by means of an auxiliary chain gear operating mechanism. A
control lever shall be located within easy reach from the floor which will instantly engage the
auxiliary chain gear operating mechanism. Power unit shall be self-locking and capable of
holding the door curtain in any position in case of failure of the counterbalancing spring. Motor
unit shall be so designed that the motor can be completely removed without interfering with the
operation of the door by the auxiliary chain gear operator. Electric motor shall be fitted with
ball bearings and of sufficient capacity to move the door curtain in either direction from any
position at a speed of not less than 1 foot per second.
B. Electric controls shall include the following:
1. Reversing across the line type automatic starter with overload relays, solenoid brake, 'WNk
interlock switch, limit switch and three button "Open," "Close" and "Stop" push-button
control switch with key lockout.
C. Motor and electrical characteristics:
1. The following information is based on Cookson Company. Motors and accessories by
other specified manufacturers shall be of similar nature:
a. Motor: Model FMWI, 1/2 horsepower.
b. Voltage: 115v, 1 phase, 60h
D. Obstruction Detection Device: The door shall include the Featheredge rolling door safety edge
system as manufactured by the The Cookson Company and shall include the following features.
1. The Featheredge shall be installed on the bottom bar of the door and shall automatically
reverse the door if the device detects an obstruction in the downward travel of the door.
2. The Featheredge shall consist of a rubber boot attached below the bottom bar with an
electrical switch secured to the back of the bottom bar and connected to the motor
operator with a coil cord. The Featheredge shall operate with air wave technology and
shall not rely on pneumatic pressure or electrical strip contacts to operate properly. The
Featheredge shall create an air wave that shall be detected and reverse the direction of
the rolling door.
3. The operation of the Featheredge shall not be subject to interference by temperature,
barometric pressure, water infiltration, or cut it the rubber boot.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 08330-4 05/13/05
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired.
drawings and specifications are based on Type FMWI — Motor Operated Insulated Service
Doors by The Cookson Company, Phoenix, AZ; and trade names of that manufacturer are used
herein.
2.2 SERVICE DOOR MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtain: Constructed of interlocking roll formed galvanized steel insulated slats, 3-inch
high by 7/8-inch deep, to provide a curtain stiffness to withstand design wind pressure. Slats
shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel flat faced exterior sections with interlocking 22 gauge
interior metal backing with expanded polyurethane insulation. The ends of alternate
interlocking slats shall be fitted with galvanized malleable iron endlocks, which shall act as a
wearing surface in the guides and prevent lateral movement of individual curtain slat.
1. Galvanizing shall be G90 in accordance with ASTM A-525.
B. Bottom Bar: Curtains shall be equipped with bottom bar consisting of two angles of equal
low weight, one on each side, securely fastened to the bottom of curtain for reinforcement and to
provide contact against the sill when closed.
1. A compressible rubber seal shall be attached to the bottom bar to provide additional
weathering at the sill.
C. Guides: Formed of standard steel angles not lighter than 3/16" thick and of sufficient depth to
retain curtains in place under normal wind pressure. Attach to jambs, plumb and true, by bolts
of not less than 1/2" diameter, spaced not more than Y-0" on centers. Guides shall be fitted at
top into slots cast in the mouth of the roller shaft brackets.
1. Provide continuous vinyl weatherstripping along the exterior leg of each guide for a
weather-tight installation.
D. Brackets: Fabricated of 1/2" thick steel, designed to form an end closure support for the hood.
Ends of roller shaft shall be journaled into bracket hubs of sufficient thickness to provide ample
bearing surface for load of roller shaft and curtain. Operator bracket hub and plug in spring end
of shaft shall be fitted with self-lubricating bronze bearings or permanently lubricated, sealed
ball bearings.
E. Barrel: Roller shafts shall be steel pipe of sufficient diameter to reduce deflection to not to
exceed 0.03" per foot of span. Ends of roller shaft shall be completely closed by cast iron plugs
machined to fit ID of pipe and secured by cap screws. Roller shaft shall house all
counterbalancing mechanism including an oil tempered helical steel spring capable of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Surgery/Bed Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08330-3 05113105
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control systems indicating manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
D. Manufacturers Certifications: Submit a letter from the manufacturer that the insulated service
door complies with the specified design requirements.
E. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Submit color charts of manufacturer's full color line of powdered coatings for selection
by the Architect.
F. Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance manual for rolling insulated service
doors, to include in Maintenance Manual specified in Division One.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Curtain to be assembled in one piece, rolled and wrapped in metal bound wood matting to
prevent scratching.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Surgery/Bed Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 08330-2 05113105
SECTION 08330—OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrically operated rolling insulated service doors and operators.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of.Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05500, Miscellaneous Metals: for steel channel framed opening and supports.
2. Section 09900,Painting: for field applied paint finishes.
3. Division 16,Electrical. The following work is included under this division:
a. Wire, conduit, fuses and electrical wiring to control switches as well as wiring
between the control switches and motor terminals.
b. Install the control switches furnished by the door manufacturer.
C. All wiring shall be done in accordance with the wiring diagram furnished by the
door manufacturer.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide coiling insulated service door components and
operators capable of operating for 25 cycles per day for not less than 50,000 cycles for the life
of the door.
B. Structural Performance: Provide rolling insulated service doors capable of withstanding the
effects of the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door
components:
1. Wind Load (Basic Velocity Pressure): 12.5 lbflsq. ft.
C. Thermal Conductance: Provide insulated service doors with average U-factor of not more than
1.00 when tested according to AAMA 1503 or NFRC 100.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Surgery/Bed Expansion,Phase I
Package 'E' -2323 08330-1 05/13/05
B. By careful coordination with the trades involved, determine specific locations and sizes for
low
access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work
and install the access doors where required.
1. In areas where aesthetics are of significant importance, access panels have been indicated
on the Drawings as "AP". Final location shall be coordinated in the field with the
Architect.
C. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
D. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
1.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08311
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACCESS PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08311 -3 05/13/05
B. Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with, and that are identical to access
door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test
method and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 80, "Standard for Fire Door and Fire Windows".
2. NFPA 252, "Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies".
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
L Milcor Inc., Holland, OH 43528 (800) 861-6452.
2. Karp Associates Inc., Maspeth, NY 11378 (800) 8884212.
3. Elmdor/Stoneman, City of Industry, CA 91744 (800)488-8999.
2.2 ACCESS PANELS (AP)
A. Products: Products listed below are those of Milcor, Inc. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other
manufacturers specified.
1. Plaster walls and ceilings-Milcor Style K.
2. Tile and masonry -Milcor Style M.
3. Gypsum Wallboard walls and ceilings -Milcor Style DW
B. Provide fire rated access panels in rated partitions and ceilings. Fire rated access panels shall
carry Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 1-1/2 hour in walls and Warnock-Hersey, 3 .hour label in
ceilings. Fire rated access panels shall be provided with a 20 gauge insulated door panel
operated by a knurled knob.
C. Access panels shall be supported on invisible hinges and shall be fitted with standard cams to be
operated by screwdriver. All panels shall be finished with one coat gray rust inhibitive paint.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACCESS PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08311 -2 05113105
SECTION 08311 -ACCESS PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Access panels are include herein for information relative to the specifications for the types of
access panels to be included in the project. Access panels are specified to be furnished under
Division 15 -MECHANICAL and Division 16 -ELECTRICAL.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 04220, Concrete Masonry Units: for anchoring and grouting access door frames
set in masonry construction.
2. Section 07720,Roof Accessories: for roof hatches.
3. Section 08710,Door Hardware: for mortise cylinder locks and master keying.
4. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of access panels in metal stud
partitions and ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated, provide construction details,
fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. Include manufacturer's
specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with
specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show elevations and sections of each door design type, details of all openings,
and all details of construction, installation details, and anchorage for each type of substrate.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained
and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ACCESS PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08311 - 1 05/13/05
E. Should pre-machined doors require additional fitting, immediately seal and finish trimmed
surfaces to exactly match finished door. Perform all trimming and finishing in strict accordance
with door manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08211
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 - 12 05/13/05
3. Vinyl Sealer
4. Sand(220 grit)
5. top coat
6. top coat
7. Sheen: satin.
TOUCH-UP FINISHES
A. Field touch-up of doors, scheduled for transparent finishes, will be performed by an authorized
representative of the door fabricator.
B. Field touch up includes the filling, repair, touch-up and refinishing of exposed job-made nail or
screw holes, raw surfaces resulting from job fitting,job-inflicted scratches and mars, and final
cleaning of the finished surfaces. Use materials as furnished by the door fabricator that blend in
color and sheen and are compatible for field applications.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed as required for proper hanging with level heads
and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOORS
A. Hardware: For finish hardware installation, see Section 06100,Rough Carpentry.
B. Installation Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and the referenced quality standard,and as indicated.
1. Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
2. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80 and
instructions attached to door.
C. Store doors in well ventilated building as specified above, cover to keep clean, but allow
circulation. Relative humidity must be between 25% and 55%.
D. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 - 11 05113105
2. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or as required to comply with governing .
regulations, install finish hardware as indicated in NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7,
"Hardware Locations for Flush Wood Doors".
D. Clearance: Include clearance dimensions on shop drawings Submitted to Architect for approval.
I. For non-fire rated doors provide clearances of 1/8-inch at each jamb, 1/8-inch at head,
1/8-inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors and 1/4-inch from bottom of door to top of
decorative floor finish or covering.
2. Undercuts:
a. Set bottom dimension from finished floor. Review Contract DOCUrnentS to
determine locations of the various types of finished floor or exposed concrete
floors.
b. Provide 1/4-inches from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish, covering,
or exposed concrete floor.
C. Where thresholds occur provide 1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of
threshold, unless otherwise noted.
d. Where floor conditions required additional vertical trimming, trim within the limits
of the bottom rail and to the specified clearance. Seal bottom edge of rail after
trimming.
3. For fire-rated doors, provide clearances complying with NFPA 80, and the limitations of
the authority having jurisdiction.
4. Where floor conditions required additional vertical trimming, trim within the limits of the
bottom rail and to the specified clearance. Seal bottom edge of rail after trimming.
E. Provide all cut-outs.
F. Provide 1/8-inch by 1/8-inch decorative saw cut reveals in patterns as indicated.
G. Rabbet meeting stiles of pairs of doors located in smoke barriers.
2.10 GLAZING
A. Install glass in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Install glazing bead with mitered corners.
C. Countersink nails and fill holes with color matched putty.
2.11 FINISHING
A. Factory finish doors faced with wood veneers in accordance with AWI Finish System No. TR-6
Catalyzed Polyurethane,Premium Grade, clear finish.
1. Washcoat-reduced vinyl sealer(Note: Omit for open grain wood)
2. Stain shall be custom color. Architect will furnish color sample for matching.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 - 10 05113105
2.8 GLASS
A. Transparent, Wireless,Fire Rated Glass, laminated ceramic glazing material as manufactured by
Nippon Electric Glass Co.,Ltd. and distributed by Technical Glass Products (800)426-0279.:
1. 5/16-inch thick FireLite®Plus ,Premium (polished surfaces) .
a. Install in fire rated door assemblies. Conform with latest edition of ASTM E152,
ASTM E163,NFPA-80, NFPA 252, NFPA 257.
b. Permanently identify each individual glazing unit with a listing mark visible after
installation.
C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, shall be glazed into
frames with a similar rating, using silicone glazing compound which shall be
supplied with the Firelite material.
13. Clear wire glass:
1. Doors in smoke barriers: Install 1/4-inch thick polished glass with wires running
diagonally.
2. Each individual glazing unit shall be permanently identified with a listing mark which
shall be visible after installation.
C. Clear tempered glass:
1. Install in non-rated wood doors.
2. Glass shall comply with:
Owlk a. Federal Specification DD-G-00140313 covering heat strengthened and fully
tempered flat glass.
b. ANSI Z97.1-1975 Standard for Safety Glass.
3. Each individual glazing unit shall be permanently identified with a listing mark which
shall be visible after installation.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in strict accordance with the above specified standards, the manufacturer's
specifications,including the specified options as listed herein.
B. Factory prefit and premachine doors including properly sized and spaced pilot holes for all
mortise butt hinges and mortise lock fronts. Request the following information to be received:
1. Approved metal buck schedule and shop details.
2. Approved hardware schedule and templates.
C. Finish Hardware Locations
1. Coordinate finish hardware locations with the work of Section 08113 -Steel Frames.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -9 05113105
D. Fabricate exposed top rails to produce a smooth finish that will not fray a cheese cloth that is
wiped on it.. Sand smooth top rails when fabricated from a wood product.
1. Fabricate top rails as follows:
a. Algoma: Maple, birch or basswood.
b. Marshfield: TimberStrand Laminated Strand Lumber.
C. VT: .050-inch plastic laminated top, full width and thickness of door.
2.6 DOOR FACINGS
A. Veneered doors for transparent finish:
i. Veneer Grade: A
2. Veneer Species: White Vl:aple
3. Veneer Cut: Quarter sliced
4. Matching Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip matched grain for transparent finish.
5. Assembly of Door Faces: Center Balanced matched, minimum widths in accordance with
AWI. Standards for specified veneer cut.
6. Pairs: Provide pair matching for pairs of doors.
2.7 GLAZING BEADS FOR VISION PANELS
A. Non-fire rated doors:
1. Algoma: Doors with transparent finish: No. W-4 hardwood matching face veneers for
species and color.
2. Marshfield: Doors with transparent finish: No. W-6 hardwood matching face veneers for
species and color.
3. VT: Doors with transparent finish: No. VT1 hardwood matching face veneers.
B. Fire rated doors:
1. Algoma: Doors with transparent finish: W-9 Fire Rated Wood Veneered Lite Beading,
matching face veneers for species and color.
2. Marshfield: Doors with transparent finish: Fire Rated Wood Veneered Lite Beading,
matching profile of W-6 and matching face veneers for species and color
3. VT: Doors with transparent finish: No. VT IF Fire Rated wood, veneered, matching face
veneers
4. Exceptions: 20 minute fire rated doors in smoke barriers shall have metal frames, style
115.
C. Glazing beads for doors with transparent finish: Each section of the glazing bead comprising the
glazing frame shall be compatible for color. Heartwood species shall have no sapwood;
sapwood species shall have no heartwood.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -8 05113105
b. Stile: 1 ply 1-3/8 -inch nominal TimberStrand Laminated Strand Lumber prior to
factory trimming, glued to core, veneer banded in same specie as face veneer
3. VT 5502
a. Core: Particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-2.
b. Stile: 1-3/8 -inch SCL, glued to core, with 1/16-inch solid wood exposed edge,
same species as face, full width of door.
4. Fabricate exposed top rails to produce a smooth finish that will not fray a cheese cloth
that is wiped on it. Sand smooth top rails when fabricated from a wood product.
a. Fabricate top rails as follows:
1) Algoma: Maple,birch or basswood.
2) Marshfield: TimberStrand Laminated Strand Lumber.
3) VT: .050-inch plastic laminated top,full width and thickness of door.
5. Hardware blocking:
a. Provide blocking to secure all hardware components, as required by hardware
manufacturer and automatic door operator manufacturer.
2.5 FLUSH WOOD FULL GLASS DOORS
A. Algoma FGFW Full Glass Door with Life Time Warranty.
1. Size: Doors shall be 1-3/4 -inch thick, unless noted otherwise.
2. Cores: Core: Structural composite lumber core.
3. Stiles: 7/8-inch prior to factory trimming, glued to core of same species as face.
4. Top and bottom rails: 5/8-inch high top and 1-3/8 -inch high bottom prior to factory
trimming, glued to core, mill option hardwood species. Top rail fabricated to produce a
smooth finish; Maple,birch or basswood.
5. Veneer matching: Book matched.
B. Marshfield full glass door with horizontal mullion with Life Time Warranty.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4-inches, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Core: DCL-l.
3. Stile edges: Veneer edge bands of same specie as face veneers.
4. Veneer matching: Book matched.
5. Exposed top rails fabricated to produce a smooth finish:
a. TimberStrand Laminated Strand Lumber.
C. VT 5508 with Lifetime Warranty
1. Thickness: 1-3/4-inches, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Cores: Structural composite lumber core
3. Stiles: 1-3/8 -inch prior to factory trimming, glued to core. 1/16-inch outer stile same
species as face.
4. SCL top and bottom rails: 1 3/8 -inch high top and 1 3/8 -inch high bottom prior to
factory trimming, glued to core.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -7 05113105
b. Stile: 2 ply 1-3/8 -inch nominal prior to factory trimming, glued to core, outer stile
of same species as face veneer.
2. Marshfield DFP-20 Series.
a. Core: Particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1-LD-2.
b. Stile: 1 ply 1-3/8 -inch nominal TimberStrand Laminated Strand Ltimber prior to
factory trimming, glued to core, veneer banded in same specie as face veneer
3. VT 5502
a. Core: Particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-2
b. Stile: 1 3/8 -inch SCL, glued to core, with 1/16-inch solid wood exposed edge,
same species as face, full width of door.
B. Size: Doors shall be 1-3/4-inch thick, unless noted otherwise.
C. Hardware blocking;
1. When screw applications are acceptable for certain hardware components and automatic
door operators, provide internal blocking as recommended by the hardware manufacturer
to ensure a secure installation without the use of through-bolts.
2. When through-bolts are required by the hardware manufacturer or automatic door
operator manufacturer to secure specific hardware components, provide internal blocking
to ensure maximum holding power at all through-bolt locations.
D. Fabricate exposed top rails to produce a smooth finish that will not fray a cheese cloth that is
wiped on it. Sand smooth top rails when fabricated from a wood product.
1. Fabricate top rails as follows:
a. Algoma: Maple, birch or basswood.
b. Marshfield: TimberStrand Laminated Strand Lumber.
C. VT: .050-inch plastic laminated top, full width and thickness of door.
2.4 NON-FIRE-RATED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Construct using 5 ply hot-press method. Wood used shall be thoroughly seasoned, kiln dried
with a moisture content of not less than 5% and not greater than 8%.
B. Size: Doors shall be 1-3/4-inch thick, unless noted otherwise. Provide 2-1/4-inch thick doors for
double-acting doors with concealed overhead closers.
C. Particle Core Doors
I. Algoma Novodor:
a. Core: Particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.
b. Stile: 2 ply 1-3/8 -inch nominal prior to factory trimming, glued to core, outer stile
of same species as face veneer.
2. Marshfield DPC-1 Series.
a. Core: Particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1-LD-2.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -6 05113105
olmk b) Pairs of doors with listed cylindrical, mortise or hospital latch:
Standard Edge Guard set#208 with applied veneer of same specie as
face veneers.
b. Marshfield
1) 45 and 60 minute doors: PairGuard System. Stiles shall be edgebanded with
veneer of same specie as face veneers
2) 90 minute doors:
a) Pairs of doors with listed vertical rod exit devices: PairGuard System.
Stiles shall be edgebanded with veneer of same specie as face
veneers.
b) Pairs of doors with listed cylindrical, mortise or hospital latch: Metal
Edge series 208 with applied veneer of same specie as face veneers.
C. VT:
1) 45, 60 and 90 minute doors:
a) No metal edge construction with 1/16-inch solid wood edge, full
thickness of door, same species as face veneer.
G. Wood reinforcing blocking:
1. When screw applications are acceptable for certain hardware components and automatic
door operators, provide internal blocking as recommended by the hardware manufacturer
to ensure a secure installation without the use of through-bolts.
2. When through-bolts are required by the hardware manufacturer or automatic door
operator manufacturer to secure specific hardware components, provide internal blocking
to ensure maximum holding power at all through-bolt locations.
H. Metal fire labels on each door shall indicate a heat transmission rating of a maximum of 250
degrees F. in 30 minutes.
I. Fabricate exposed top rails to produce a smooth finish that will not fray a cheese cloth that is
wiped on it. Sand smooth top rails when fabricated from a wood product.
1. Fabricate top rails as follows:
a. Algoma: Maple,birch or basswood.
b. Marshfield: TimberStrand Laminated Strand Lumber.
C. VT: .050-inch plastic laminated top,full width and thickness of door.
J. Furnish written statement on 60 and 90 minute labels that construction provides the heat
transmission rating of a maximum of 250 degrees F. in 30 minutes.
2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOOR -20 MINUTE RATED DOORS
A. Type:
1. Algoma PC-5.
a. Core: Particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -5 05113105
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following. No other manufacturers will be accepted.
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Algoma,Wisconsin (800) 678-8910.
2, Marshfield Door Systems, Inc,Marshfield,Wisconsin (800) 869-3667.
3_ VT Industries,Holstein, IA (800) 827-1615
22 FIRE-RATED FLUSH WOOD DOORS-45, 60, AND 90 MINUTE FIRE RATED DOORS
A. Type:
1. Algoma Superfire Door.
2. Marshfield DFM Series.
3. VT 5P08, 5P45, or 5P I
B. Size: Doors shall be 1-3/4 -inch thick, unless noted otherwise.
C. Provide balanced construction by furnishing stile edge screw holding reinforcement to both
vertical stiles on all 45, 60, and 90 minute rated doors.
D. Provide all mineral core doors with full length untreated solid lumber vertical stiles, matching
face veneers for species and for color.
E. Provide 45, 60, and 90-minute doors with special heavy-duty reinforcement, as required, to
allow surface mounted hardware to be attached with screws. Through bolting will not be
accepted.
F. Stiles:
1. Single doors:
a. Algoma: Superstile with outer stile of same specie as face veneer.
b. Marshfield: Triple-Ply with veneer edge band of same specie as face on 45, 60 and
90 minute doors.
C. VT: 1/16-inch solid wood edge, full thickness of door, same species as face
veneer.
2. Pairs of doors:
a. Algoma:
1) 45 and 60 minute doors: Superstile with outer stile of same specie as face
veneer
2) 90 minute doors:
a) Pairs of doors with listed vertical rod exit devices: Superstile with
outer stile of same specie as face veneer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -4 05113105
E. Certification: In conjunction with shop drawing submittal, submit certification signed by an
Officer of the door manufacturing corporation, stating that the machining, glazing and finishing
of the doors shall be performed only in the factory of the door manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Machining, glazing and finishing of doors (except where field finishing is indicated) shall be
performed only in the door manufacturer's factory.
1.7 PACKAGING, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. After finishing individually polybag doors and stretcher wrap for palletizing.
B. Store and handle doors in strict compliance with the manufacture's instructions and
recommendations and AWI standards.
1. Store doors flat on carefully leveled supports.
2. Utilize three 2 x 4's placed the full width of the doors, one across the center of the doors
and the other two 12-inches in from each end, covered with cardboard to protect the face
of the bottom door.
3. Cover the top door in a similar manner.
4. Store doors in dry, well ventilated areas, protected from all light sources, with a humidity
level range of 25 percent to 55 percent.
5. Handle doors with clean canvas gloves to eliminate finger marks and soil stains.
6. Do not hang doors until the humidity levels in the building are controlled between 25
percent and 55 percent.
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. All door shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free of manufacturing defects for the life
of the original installation. Warranty shall provide for replacement of the door as originally
furnished. Manufacturer shall pay a reasonable charge to remove a defective door, refinish and
replace with a new door providing the defect was not apparent prior to its installation.
B. Warranty shall include replacement of glass and glazing if defective door has vision lite.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -3 05113105
1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (A.W.I.)—Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards,
Seventh Edition,Version 1.0 1997
H. Labeling Agencies:
1. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH)
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards unless otherwise indicated:
1. All doors shall be, at a minimum, in accordance with Architectural Woodwork Institute
Quality Standards Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program, Seventh
Edition, Section 1300 Architectural Flush Doors, except as modified herein.
2. Non-Fire-Rated Wood Doors: All solid core flush wood doors shall be in accordance
with Architectural Woodwork Institute "Quality Standards" Section 1300 Architectural
Flush Doors and be PC-5ME Particle Core Door type construction, or SCL-5ME
Structural Composite Lumber Core, for premium grade doors, with core, stile and rail
components all glued together with no voids permitted.
3. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Where fire-resistance classifications are shown or scheduled for
door assemblies, provide doors which comply with the appropriate parts of the above
AWI standards, premium grade, with the requirements of NFPA No. 80 "Standard for '
Fire Doors and Windows". Fire-rated doors shall bear the label of an independent testing
agency having approval of the local building authorities.
1.5 SUBMITTAL
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of
each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings,
requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data.
D. Samples:
1. Three(3) 8-inch by 12-inch sample
2. Samples shall indicate examples of color and grain variations across selected veneer
range, stain(when stain is specified)color as well as top coat build and gloss level.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 -2 05113105
SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standard and fire rated wood doors
2. Flush wood full glass doors.
3. Factory machining.
4. Factory glazing.
5. Factory finishing.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 08113, Steel Frames.
3. Section 08710,Finish Hardware.
1.3 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. ASTM E152-Methods of Fire Tests and Door Assemblies.
B. NFPA 252-Standard Methods for Fire Assemblies.
C. UBC 7-2, 1997
D. UL 10(b) -Fire Tests for Door Assemblies-Neutral Pressure
E. UL 10(c) -Fire Tests for Door Assemblies-Positive Pressure
F. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) — NFPA No. 80 Standard for Fire Doors and
Windows.
G. Quality Standards:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08211 - 1 05113105
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's data, and as specified herein.
Comply with provisions of the applicable Steel Door Institute standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in
position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. Prior to
installation of gypsum panels, secure anchors to webs of metal studs with minimum of 2 self
tapping screws at each anchor.
C. Metal frames in steel stud partitions shall have 1.6-gage (minimum)jamb anchor clips welded to
the frame. Locate anchor clips at head; 12" down from head; and 24" (maximum) on centers to
floor. Provide floor anchor clip at each jamb, welded to frame. Clips shall have at least two
holes for power driven or expansion type attachment to concrete.
D. Metal frames in masonry partitions shall have not less than four (4) 16 gage adjustable anchors
per jamb, extending into the masonry. On doors over 7 feet in height, add one anchor for each
additional foot. Provide anchors for labeled frames as required by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc.
E. Remove shipping bars at the time of frame installation in preparation for wood spreader bar
which will be installed under the work of Section 06100-Rough Carpentry.
F. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of factory coat and apply
touch up of compatible air-drying primer or galvanized repair type paint.
END OF SECTION 08113
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08113 -5 05113105
H. Fabricate frames with the proper depth between flanges to receive the full thickness of the
finished partition.
1. Provide door frames with a shipping bar welded to the base (bottom) of each frame for in-transit
support.
2.3 FINISH HARDWARE PREPARATION
A. Prepare units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing,
drilling and tapping, in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided
by hardware suppliers. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI At 15.
B. Reinforce units to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied
finish hardware may be done at site.
C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or as required to comply with governing
regulations, install finish hardware as indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
2.4 SHOP FINISHING
A. Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of interior fabricated hollow metal units. Clean surfaces
of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before the application of the shop
coat of paint.
B. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface
ready to receive field-applied paint.
C. In lieu of prime coated paint indicated above, products manufactured by S. W. Fleming with
hot-dipped galvanized finish will be acceptable.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08113 -4 05113105
6. De La Fontaine, Sherbrooke,PQ; 819-821-9230.
B. Basis of Design: Provide metal frames of the types and styles indicated on the Drawings and in
Schedules. Comply with applicable S.D.I. standard for minimum materials and construction
requirements except as otherwise specified herein.
2.2 CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES
A. Materials:
1. Interior Openings: Frames shall be either commercial grade cold-rolled steel conforming
to ASTM A366 or commercial grade hot-rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM
A569, except frames manufactured by S. W. Fleming shall have a zinc coating supplied
by the hot-dip process .
2. Exterior Openings: Frames shall be either commercial grade cold-rolled steel conforming
to ASTM A366 or commercial grade hot-rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM
A569, and shall have a zinc coating supplied by the hot-dip process conforming to ASTM
A526 with designation ZF275 (G90).
B. Frames shall be saw mitered and continuously welded. Fabricate frame units to be rigid, neat in
appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Form metal accurately to required profiles.
Gages shall be as follows:
1. Interior frames: 16 gage up to but not including 3'-6"; 14 gage for 3'-6" and over in
width,and for all lead-lined door frames.
2. Exterior frames: 14 gage.
C. Frame Reinforcing
1. Where door frame openings exceed 4'-0", reinforce frames with 1/8 inch thick steel
channel extending full length of frame head and welded thereto.
D. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in the manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work
that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the
site.
E. Drill stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames; two at heads of
double-swing frames.
F. Provide 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame at back of all finish
hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation.
G. Frames for interior borrowed lights shall be 16 gage, fabricated similar to door frames and be
furnished with glazing stops. Provide loose, channel-shaped stops, prepared for screw
application to frames.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08113 -3 05113105
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, elevations of
each frame design type, details of all openings, and all details of construction, installation, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of
successful production acceptable to the Architect.
B. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the wort: of this
Section.
C. Single source: All work of this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer .
D. Test reports and compliance
1. All labeled frames shall be of a type which has been investigated and tested in
accordance with UL-10(b), ASTM E-152, NFPA 80, ANSI A2.2 and, when required,
UL-305.
2. Underwriters Laboratories labeled frames shall be manufactured under the UL factory
inspection program in strict compliance with UL procedure R-3821 and UL-63 Standard
for Safety. They shall provide the degree of fire protection, heat transmission and panic
loading capability indicated by the opening class. Appropriate steel label shall be
mechanically attached to each frame. Non steel labels will not be accepted.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following
1. Ceco Door Products. Milan,TN 38358; (888) 232-6366.
2. Curries Company, Inc.,Mason City, IA 50401; 641-423-1334.
3. Republic Builders Products Corp.McKenzie,TN 38201; (800) 733-3667.
4. Steelcraft Mfg. Co.,Cincinnati, OH; (800)243-9780
5. Fleming Door Products,Ltd.,Ajax, ON; (800) 263-7515
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08113 -2 05113105
SECTION 08113 -STEEL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes custom steel frames for the following:
1. Doors.
2. Borrowed lights.
3. Interior view windows.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Installation of wood spreader at bottoms of metal
frames.
2. Section 08710,Finish Hardware.
3. Section 09900,Painting.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The Door Hardware Institute — Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom
Steel Doors and Frames.
B. Steel Door Institute(S.D.I.)—S.D.I.publications for standard steel doors and frames.
C. HMMA,Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL FRAMES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08113 - 1 05113105
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's data, and as specified
herein.
B. Fit non-fire rated metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified
above.
C. Install fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08800, Glazing and with hollow
metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Final adjustments:
1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to final inspection.
2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3. Remove and replace defective work, including doors which are warped, bowed or
otherwise damaged.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of factory coat and apply
touchup of compatible air-drying primer or galvanized repair type paint.
END OF SECTION 08110
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08110-5 05113105
B. Reinforce doors to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied
hardware may be done at site.
C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or as required to comply with governing
regulations, install finish hardware as indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames"by the Door and Hardware Institute.
2.4 CLEARANCE
A. For non-fire rated doors provide clearances of 1/8-inch at each jamb, 1/8-inch at head, 1/8-inch
at meeting stiles for pairs of doors.
13. Door Bottoms:
1. Include clearance dimensions on shop drawings submitted to Architect for approval.
2. Set bottom dimension from finished floor. Review Contract Documents to determine
locations of the various types of finished floor or exposed concrete floors.
3. Provide 5/8-inches from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish, covering, or
exposed concrete floor.
4. Where thresholds occur provide 1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of
threshold, unless otherwise noted.
C. For fire-rated doors comply with NFPA 80 for prefits and undercuts.
2.5 SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean,treat and paint exposed surfaces, including galvanized surfaces, of all steel doors.
B. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before the
application of the shop coat of paint.
C. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface
ready to receive field-applied paint.
D. In lieu of prime coated paint indicated above, products manufactured by
S. W. Fleming with hot-dipped galvanized finish will be acceptable without prime paint.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08110-4 05113105
2. Curries Company, Inc.,Mason City, IA 50401; 641-423-1334.
3. Republic Builders Products Corp. McKenzie,TN 38201; (800) 733-3667.
4. Steelcraft Mfg. Co., Cincinnati, OH; (800) 243-9780
5. Fleming Door Products,Ltd.,Ajax, ON; (800)263-7515
6. De La Fontaine, Sherbrooke, PQ; 819-821-9230.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION -FLUSH DOORS
A. General: Provide metal doors of the types and styles indicated on the Drawings and in
Schedules.
B. Doors shall be 1-3/4" thick, of hollow metal construction.
C. Exterior doors and interior doors located in wet areas shall be fabricated of two 16-gage, roller-
leveled, prime quality, G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel sheets.
D. Interior doors, except as indicated above, shall be fabricated of two 18-gage, roller-leveled,
prime quality cold-rolled steel sheets.
E. Cores: Polystyrene core providing a"U"factor of 0.26 and an "R"value of 3.75 or better.
F. The vertical door edges shall be continuously fully welded and ground smooth. The vertical
edge joint between the face sheets shall be ground smooth to provide a door with no exposed
seams. Body fillers on vertical edges and faces will not be acceptable.
G. The top and bottom of the doors shall be closed flush with 16-gage steel channels. Provide weep
holes on bottom channels.
H. Doors swinging in pairs and double egress doors:
1. Bevel the meeting stiles of pairs of fire rated labeled doors. Such doors with astragals will
not be accepted.
2. Meeting stiles of double egress doors in smoke barriers shall be rabbeted.
I. Glazing requirements:
1. Glass panels,as called for on the drawings, shall be held in place with moldings or shapes
of 16 gauge steel in stock design.
2. The approved manufacturer's fire rated doors shall be capable of receiving fire rated
wireless glass as specified in Section 08800-Glazing.
2.3 FINISH HARDWARE PREPARATION
A. Prepare doors to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing,
drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided
by hardware suppliers. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08110- 3 05113105
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, elevations of ^"
each door design type, details of all openings, and all details of construction, installation,
anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this
Section.
13. Single source: All work of this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer unless
otherwise approved by the Architect.
C. Test reports and compliance:
1. All labeled fire doors shall be of a type which has been investigated and tested in
accordance with NFPA 80.
2. Underwriters Laboratories labeled doors shall be manufactured under the UL factory
inspection program and in strict compliance with UL procedure R-3791, and shall
provide the degree of fire protection, heat transmission and panic loading capability
indicated by the opening class. Appropriate steel label shall be mechanically attached to
each door. Non steel labels will not be accepted.
3. Labels shall be affixed to all classified doors for the class of opening indicated.
4. When listed in the door schedule or shown on the plans furnish hollow metal doors with a
temperature rise core material that would provide a 250 degree in 30 minute rating. The
fire label attached to the door shall state this temperature rise rating in addition to the
regular fire door rating.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of the following
1. Ceco Door Products. Milan,TN 38358; (888)232-6366.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 08110-2 05/13/05
00"' SECTION 08110- STEEL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Standard non-rated and fire-rated hollow metal doors.
2. Custom sized non-rated and fire-rated hollow metal doors.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 08113, Steel Frames.
2. Section 08710,Finish Hardware.
l,, 3. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
4. Section 09900, Painting: Final field finishing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The Door Hardware Institute — Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom
Steel Doors and Frames.
B. Steel Door Institute(S.D.I.)—S.D.I. publications for standard steel doors and frames.
C. HMMA, Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital STEEL DOORS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 08110 - 1 05113105
3.9 CLEANING UP
A. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. Clean adjacent surfaces free
from sealant as the installation progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by
the sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 07920
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920- 11 05/12/05
E. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by
the Architect, thoroughly filling all joints to the recommended depth. Tool all joints to the
profile shown on the details in the Drawings.
F. Apply sealant to joints between plumbing fixtures and abutting surfaces. Clean all surfaces prior
to application of sealant to insure good bonding.
3.8 FOAM SEALING STRIPS
A. Installation: Install preformed expanding foam in accordance with manufacturer's detailed
instructions and as follows:
13. Interior Horizontal and Foundation Perimeter Joint Assemblies:
1. Prepare joint surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to remove loose
particles, foreign matter and other contaminants that may be detrimental to the adhesion
of the sealant. Mix epoxy adhesive and apply to joint gap faces.
2. Remove preformed foam sealant from the packaging, taking care not to cut silicone face.
3. Join individual strips to provide a continuous length be by means of scarf joints. Using a
miter-box, cut 45-degree miters at ends of material to be joined.
4. Apply heat to both sides of the preformed foam sealant to open the out cells of the foam
to receive the epoxy. Apply a light coat of epoxy adhesive to the bottom third of the both
sides of the foam.
5. Install each length of sealant into joint immediately after application of epoxy adhesive.
Starting from one end feed material into joint,recessing material 1/4-inch from the top of
the joint. Push joints firmly together,taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing
seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. Temporarily hold in place with
wood wedges, if necessary, until expansion has taken place.
6. Wipe excess epoxy from the top of the material. Within 4 hours, inject a bead of silicone
between the cured silicone facing and the joint-face. At miters and butt joints, pry back
the silicone facing and inject liquid silicone into the joint. Tool the freshly applied.
C. Exterior Joints:
1. Remove Emseal from the packaging and insert the narrow edge into the joint gap. Set the
seal so that when it is fully expanded the face of the seal is located 1/2" back from the
face of concrete. Temporarily hold in place with wood wedges, if necessary, until
expansion has taken place.
2. At temperatures above 20 degrees Centigrade (70 degrees Fahrenheit) the material will
recover in a few hours. At temperatures below 20 degrees Centigrade (70 degrees
Fahrenheit)the recovery can be accelerated by heating the material with a hot air blower.
3. Jointing of the individual strips to provide a continuous length shall only be by means of
scarfed joints, cut at about 45 degrees relative to the sides of the joint. The scarfed ends
shall be pushed well past one another.
4. Apply Type "A" Sealant over foam sealing strips to complete sealing of expansion joints.
Prior to applying sealant, perform test to assure that sealant does not adhere to sealing
strips. If sealant adheres to sealing strips, install bond breaker over sealing strips.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920- 10 05/12/05
C. Remove packaging and expose self-adhesive side by removing release liner. Ensure correctly
sized material is selected for joint.
D. Set Backerseal maximum 1/4 inch back from the face of the joint.
E. Joining lengths: Miter a 45 degrees and apply wet sealant to the mitered faces before butting
tightly together. Use a sharp knife to cut the miter.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL-INTERIOR APPLICATION
A. Use only the backup material recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant for the particular
installation. Closed cell polyethylene foam backup material shall not be compressed in excess of
25 percent. Open cell polyurethane may be compressed 25 to 50 percent. When using backup of
tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material.
3.6 BOND-BREAKER INSTALLATION
A. Install an approved bond-breaker where recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant and
where directed by the Architect, adhering strictly to the installation recommendations.
B. Sealants shall not be applied over tar, asphalt, or similar type of impregnated backup materials
without the use of a bond-breaker as specified above or a polyethylene bond-breaker tape.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS
A. Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to the details on the
Drawings, and verify that the required proportion of width-of-joint to depth-of-joint has been
obtained.
B. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power-actuated gun or other appropriate means.
Guns shall have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill
joints as designed.
I. Depth of sealant shall be as follows:
a. The depth and the width of the sealant shall be as specified by the sealant
manufacturer.
2. Depth of Type B sealant shall be one-half the width of the joint with a minimum depth of
1/4 inch.
C. Thoroughly and completely mask all joints where the appearance of sealant on adjacent surface
would be objectionable.
D. All joints, in conjunction with precast concrete work, will be raked out and prepared for the
applications of sealant under the work of Section 04210 - Brick Masonry . Sealant shall be
applied in accordance with the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-9 05/12/05
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Beginning of sealant work means Installer's acceptance of joint surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Concrete surfaces: All surfaces in contact with sealant shall be dry, sound, and well brushed and
wiped free of dust. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags.
Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by use of sandblasting or wire
brushing. Remove laitance and mortar from the joint cavity. Where backup is required, insert
the approved backup material in the joint cavity to the depth required.
B. Steel surfaces: Steel surfaces in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted or, if sandblasting
would not be practical or would damage adjacent finish, the metal shall be scraped or wire-
brushed to remove mill scale. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with
clean rags. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by a solvent that leaves no
residue.
C. Aluminum surfaces: Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant shall be cleaned of temporary
protective coatings, dirt, oil and grease. When masking tape is used for a protective cover,
remove the tape just prior to applying the sealant. Use only such solvents to remove protective
coatings as are recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of the aluminum work, and
which are non-staining.
3.3 PRIMING
A. Prime all surfaces to which sealant is to be bonded. Use only the primer recommended by the
manufacturer of the sealant and approved by the Architect for the particular installation. Apply
the primer in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL-EXTERIOR APPLICATION
A. Store Backerseal indoors at room temperature.
B. Joint sides shall be clean, dry, sound and free from contaminants.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-8 05/12/05
3. Perimeter joints at aluminum storefront, aluminum curtain wall, aluminum entrances,
exterior louvers and other such items: Color to match aluminum.
4. Precast concrete joints as specified: Color to match precast concrete.
5. Type "B": White or manufacturer's standard color, selected by Architect.
6. Type "C": Clear.
7. In concealed installation, standard gray or black sealant may be used.
8. Architect shall approve all colors for matching.
2.7 PRIMERS
A. Use only those primers which are non-staining, have been tested for durability on the surfaces to
be sealed, and are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the
sealant used.
2.8 BACKUP MATERIALS
A. Backer seal for exterior sealant application shall be a secondary seal consisting of alternate
layers of acrylic-impregnated expanding foam sealant, "Backerseal (Greyflex)" manufactured
by Emseal Joint Systems,LTD.,Westborough, MA (508) 836-0280.
B. Backer rod for interior sealant applications, and elsewhere where "Backer Rod" is indicated on
the Drawings, shall be non-absorbing, non-staining, extruded from a blend of polyolefin. Sof-
Rod as manufactured by Applied Extrusion.Technologies or Sof-Type, manufactured by I.T.P.
Corp.
2.9 BOND-PREVENTIVE MATERIALS
A. Use one of the materials described in the following paragraphs, as best suited for the application
and as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
B. Polyethylene tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive, with the adhesive required only to hold tape to
the construction materials as indicated.
C. Aluminum foil: Conform to MIL-SPEC-MIL-A-148E.
D. Wax paper: Conform to Federal Specification UU-P-270.
2.10 MASKING TAPE
A. Masking Tape: For masking around joints, provide non-staining, nonabsorbent masking tape
conforming to Federal Specification UU-T-106C, compatible with joint sealant and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-7 05/12/05
2.3 POLYURETHANE SEALANTS
A. Polyurethane Sealant: Provide a two-part chemically-curing polyurethane meeting Federal
Specification TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self-leveling), and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
P, Class 25, Use T, M, and 0.
B. Type "D": Provide polyurethane sealant for all horizontal traffic bearing joints not indicated to
be sealed with another type of sealant.
1. Provide one of the following products:
a. Sikaflex 2CSL by Sika Corp.
b. Vulkem 245 by Mameco International.
C. THC-900 manufactured by Tremco.
2.4 ACRYLIC SEALANTS
A. Type "E": For interior applications for sealing joints at perimeter of door frames, view
windows, exterior windows, exterior louvers, wood wall trim with opaque finish , and
acoustical ceiling wall molding and walls.
1. Provide the following product.
a. "Acrylic Latex 834" manufactured by Tremco
2.5 FOAM SEALING STRIP
A. Premolded Filler for Exterior Application: Emseal Precompressed (PC), as manufactured by
Emseal Joint Systems, Inc.,Westborough,MA(800) 526-8386, or as approved equal.
B. Premolded Filler for Interior Horizontal and Foundation Perimeter Joint Application: Preformed
expanding open cell polyurethane foam impregnated with an acrylic polymer-modified water-
based asphalt emulsion; DHS System as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems, Inc.,
Westborough,MA(800) 526-8386.
1. Primer: Manufacturer's standard two component, high-modulus, high-strength, structural
epoxy paste adhesive;Emseal 820.
2.6 SEALANT COLORS
A. Colors: Provide custom colors to match the various abutting surfaces as follows:
1. Horizontal joints in exterior brick: Color to match mortar.
2. Vertical joints in exterior brick: Color to match brick.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-6 05/12/05
00''
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. General: Use only the types of sealants described herein.
B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealant, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.2 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealant: Provide a one component, neutral cure, silicone sealant conforming to the
requirements ASTM C719, FS TT-S 00230C, Type 11, Class A and FS TT-S- 001543A, Class
A. The sealant shall be compatible with the specified application's substrates and have a
minimum movement capability of±50% and a shore A hardness of±25.
B. Type "A": Provide silicone sealant for all joints in building skin not indicated to be sealed
with another type of sealant.
1. Provide one of the following products.
00,11, a. Silpruf by G.E. Silicones
b. DC-791 or 795 by Dow Corning.
C. Spectrem 2 by Tremco.
2. For high movement joints where + 100% -50% movement is required: One part Ultra —
Low Modules, Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant, Spectrem 1 or equal system
by G.E.
C. Type "B" for sealing joints between plumbing fixtures and abutting surfaces:
1. Dow Corning 786.
2. G.E. Sanitary 1700
D. Type "C" for sealing joints between all casework and abutting wall surfaces and gypsum soffit;
for sealing joints between wood bases and floors and wood bases and walls; for sealing joints
between wood wall trim with transparent finish and walls:
1. Dow Corning 799.
2. G.E. 1000
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-5 05/12/05
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and storage: Deliver all materials of this Section to the job site in the original
unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store only under conditions
recommended by the manufacturer. Do not retain on the job site any material which has
exceeded the shelf life recommended by its manufacturer.
B. Protection: Use all mean necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after-installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the
limits established by manufacturers of the materials and products used.
B. Temperature: Comply with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Understand
that joints to be sealed should not be near their fully closed nor fully open extremes, but in the
mid-range of the joint's intended movement. All surfaces of joints shall be clean and dry prior to
application of sealant system.
1.8 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Amok
A. Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or
replace work which exhibits defects in materials or workmanship. "Defects" is defined to
include, but is not limited to, leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration, and failure to
perform as required. Include requirement for removal and replacement of covering and
connected adjacent work.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. In addition, provide a manufacturer's guarantee which shall warrant that the products provided
will perform as watertight weatherseals for a period of 20 years from the date of purchase. In
addition to maintaining the integrity of the weatherseals the sealants shall not change color
when used with back-up materials and substrates that have been approved for compatibility by
the sealant manufacturer.
C. Staining Warranty: Provide a manufacturer's guarantee which shall warrant that the sealant
systems provided will not stain or discolor adjacent surfaces.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-4 05/12/05
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers:
1. Proper calking and proper installation of sealants require that installers be thorough]),
trained and experienced in the necessary skills and thoroughly familiar with the specified
requirements.
2. For calking and installation of sealants throughout the Work, use only personnel who
have been specifically trained in such procedures and who are completely familiar with
the joint details shown on the Drawings and the installation requirements called for in this
Section.
3. Provide written evidence of firm's experience with a minimum of 3 years experience on
major projects similar in size and nature to that of the project.
B. Mock-Ups: Before beginning primary work of this section, provide 10 linear feet mock-ups of
each type of sealant and filler work at locations acceptable to Architect and obtain Architect's
acceptance of visual qualities and acceptable adhesion qualities. Protect and maintain acceptable
mock-ups throughout the work of this section to serve as criteria for acceptance of this work.
Acceptable mock-ups may be incorporated into the finished work.
C. Testing:
1. Preconstruction Sealant Tests for Adhesion and Compatibility: Submit to approved
sealant manufacturer samples of every material to which sealant is to be bonded,
including, but not limited to, aluminum(separate sample for each aluminum finish), and
all other components such as stone, brick, precast and other adjoining materials and
accessories. Perform tests in accordance with ASTM C794 to verify sealant compatibility
with abutting surfaces and type of primers required to ensure adhesion to substrates.
a. Submit samples of each type and finish of framing member, stone, precast and
other adjoining materials for adhesion and staining testing as required for testing
by sealant manufacturer.
b. Schedule sufficient time for testing, analysis and reporting of results,
understanding that long lead times are required by the sealant manufacturer.
C. Obtain manufacturer's written report and recommendations regarding proper
primer choice and use. Use sealants and substrates only in combinations for which
favorable adhesion and compatibility results have been obtained.
d. Make all arrangements and pay all expenses related to these tests.
2. Construction Sealant Adhesion Tests: Periodically test sealants in place for adhesion
using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. Promptly replace all sealant which
does not adhere or which fails to cure properly.
3. Testing Agency: If manufacturers cannot or will not perform these tests, employ at
Contractor's expense an independent testing agency acceptable to the Architect to
perform tests and certifications indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-3 05/12/05
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410, Testing Laboratory Services
2. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete
3. Section 04210, Brick Masonry
4. Section 04220, Concrete Masonry Units
5. Section 07275,Foam Insulating Sealant
6. Section 07840,Firestops and Smoke Seals
7. Section 07531, EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered
S. Section 08410, Aluminum Framed Storefront
9. Section 08800, Glazing
10. Section 08911, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall
1.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Performance and Design Requirements for Sealants: Provide sealants to maintain long term [20
year minimum] air tight and water tight seals. No cohesive or adhesive failures, nor cracking or
bubbling of sealant surfaces are permitted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Include manufacturer's tables indicating width and depth of sealant for all applications.
Selections from the manufacturer's tables shall be high lighted to denote specific
requirements for each application.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each sealant and available colors of each type, each backing
material, each primer, and each bond breaker proposed to be used.
D. Test Reports: Submit 3 copies of testing reports performed by manufacturer for primers and
sealants.
owk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920-2 05/12/05
SECTION 07920—JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Throughout the Work, caulk and seal all joints where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as
required to provide a positive barrier against passage of air and moisture.
B. Caulking the following areas with sealant compound.
1. Interior and exterior perimeter of openings in exterior walls, including but not limited to:
a. Aluminum curtain wall
b. Aluminum framed storefront
C. Aluminum entrance door systems
d. Door frames
e. Louvers
2. Interior and exterior surfaces of expansion joints and control joints in masonry walls and
partitions.
3. Joints between plumbing fixtures and abutting surfaces.
4. At sheathing for exterior masonry walls:
a. In joints where sheathing abuts dissimilar surfaces or materials.
b. Perimeter of penetrations through gypsum sheathing.
C. Elsewhere that sealant is indicated in conjunction with sheathing.
5. Sealant"Soft Joints"in exterior masonry veneer walls where indicated on the Drawings.
6. Joints between stone cladding and abutting dissimilar materials.
7. Both sides of door frames and view windows located in interior partitions.
8. Perimeter of all casework.
9. Wood bases: at joint between wood base and floor;at joint between wood base and walls.
10. Wood wall trim: at joints between wood wall trim and walls.
11. Acoustical ceilings: at joint between acoustical ceiling wall molding and walls
12. Control and construction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
13. Wherever sealant is indicated on the drawings and where such sealant is not specified to
be installed under other sections of the specifications
C. Installing foam sealing strips at exterior expansion joints where new concrete foundations walls
abut existing foundation walls; at expansion joints in exterior masonry walls, at foundation
perimeter joint where floor slab abuts foundation walls, and elsewhere as indicated on the
drawings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital JOINT SEALANTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07920- 1 05/12/05
2. At construction joints (perimeter openings) between floor or roof construction and
aluminum curtain wall system in which a continuous horizontal mullion does not occur at
the floor or roof line, install perimeter curtain wall fire containment system, in strict
accordance with manufacturer's written instruction and UL listing requirements.
G. Installation of firestopping sealant at partition tops:
1. Apply Bio Fireshield, Biostop 700 or Biostop 770 Firestop Mastic and Mineral wool
filler in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install mineral wool backer
insulation full depth of partitions.
2. Similar systems produced by any of the other specified manufacturers may be used
providing such systems comply with all criteria required for such application.
H. Conclusion of work day:
1. Wherever work is performed in areas which abut or are adjacent to Owner occupied
areas, at the conclusion of the work day ensure that all penetrations and perimeter
construction joints are firestopped and that there are no openings, penetrations or
construction joints left unprotected.
END OF SECTION 07270
40W
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840-9 05/13/05
B. Dam Construction
1. Install dams when required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings
and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Combustible damming material
must be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming material may be left
as a permanent component of the firestop system.
2. Placement of dams shall not interfere with function or adversely affect the appearance of
adjacent construction.
C. Installation of Single Component 1'1a.sic,►ncnc Firestop
1. Apply with manual or powered caulking gun.
2. Use incombustible insulation as required to achieve fire resistance rating.
3. Surface of gun grade silicone firestop may be tooled using clean,potable water.
4. Clean excess material off of adjacent surfaces and tools within 10 minutes using either
water or Xylol where the use of such would not be hazardous.
D. Installation of Cementitious Firestop Mortar.
1. Add dry powder to water and mix with mechanical mixer or hand mixing tools. Add one
44 lb. bag mortar mix to 2.5 gallons (± .5 gallons) or clean, potable water. Average
mixing time is 3 minutes. Average wet density is 70 PCF±5 PCF.
2. Do not apply if ambient or substrate temperature is less than 35T during 24 hours after
application.
3. Wet all surfaces prior to application of firestop mortar.
4. Mortar may be hand applied or pumped into the opening.
5. Exposed surfaces shall be finished using conventional plastering tools prior to curing.
6. When installation around layered cables, it is recommended to increase the fluidity of the
firestop mortar to provide a better fill around the cables. Vibrate or move the cables
slightly to prevent voids from forming between the cables.
7. Allow 48 hours for initial cure prior to form removal.For full cure allow 27 days.
8. Wet material may be cleaned with water. Dry material may require scraping or chipping.
E. Installation of Firestop Collars(Plastic Pipe Only)
1. Firestop collars may be surface mounted to a slab or wall or imbedded in Bio Fireshield
Novasit K-10 Firestop Mortar to a maximum depth of 2 inches.
2. For wall penetrations with ABS pipe firestop collars must be installed on both sides of
the penetration to provide a 3 hour F and T Rating. All other applications required
installation on one side only to provide a 3 hour F and T Rating.
F. Firesafing Insulation:
1. Install firestopping safing insulation on safing clips spaced as needed between each stud
and floor slab, leaving no voids. Secure safing clips to slab using fasteners recommended
by insulation manufacturer. Install sealant over mineral wool in accordance with test
requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840- 8 05113105
1). At construction joints (perimeter openings) between floor construction and aluminum curtain
wall system in which a continuous horizontal mullion does not occur at the floor line, install
Thermafiber LLC, Firespan Curtain Nall Insulation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of work
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface to receive firestops shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, form release agents, or other
matter that would impair the bond of the firestop material to the substrate or penetrating item(s).
B. Voids and cracks in substrate shall be filled and unnecessary projection removed prior to
installation of firestops.
C. All penetrating items shall be permanently installed prior to firestop installation.
D. Substrate shall be frost,free and, when applicable,dry.
E. Adhere strictly to system manufacturer's installation requirements regarding weather and
temperature.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Installation of firestops shall be performed by applicators/installers qualified and trained
by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with
manufacturer's detailed installation procedures.
2. Apply firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements,
acceptable mock-up installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. Meet building
code requirements.
3. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and other trades to assure that all pipe,
conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire rated construction have been
permanently installed prior to installation of firestops, schedule and sequence the work to
assure that partitions and other construction which would conceal penetrations are not
erected prior to the installation of firestops.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840-7 05113105
2.3 CEMENTITIOUS FIRESTOP MORTAR
A. Provide cementitious firestop mortar B 10.
B. Firestop mortar shall have U.L. Classification as a "fill, void, or cavity material" for through
penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM/UL1479.
C. Cementitious mortar shall be asbestos free.
2.4 FIRESTOP COLLAR (FOR USE WITH PLASTIC PIPE)
A. Provide pre-manufactured fire protective pipe sleeve,Bio Fireshield Firestop Collar.
B. Provide separated (two piece) firestop collar for application when plastic pipe system is already
in place. Provide non-separated firestop collar for application prior to installation of plastic pipe
system.
C. Firestop collars shall have UL Classification as "fill, void, or cavity material" for through
penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-8141UL1479.
2.5 FIRESTOP PILLOWS
A. Provide Bio Fireshield Firestop Pillows.
look
B. Firestop pillows shall have UL Classification as "fill, void, or cavity material" for through
penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479.
2.6 GASKETS FOR ELECTRICAL OUTLET BOXES
A. Provide Bio Fireshield Firestop Gaskets for protecting electrical outlet boxes which are not
separated 24 inches horizontally on center.
B. Firestop gaskets shall be UL classified as a"Wall opening Protective Material (CLIV)".
2.7 MINERAL FIBER INSTALLATION(FIRE SAFING)
A. Provide minimum 4 PCF Thermafiber as manufactured by Thermafiber LLC, minimum 4 PCF
FBX Safing Insulation as manufactured by Fibrex, or approved equal to suit conditions and to
comply with fire resistance and firestop manufacturer's requirements; galvanized steel safing
clips as required for installation of Safing insulation.
B. Material shall be classified non-combustible per ASTM E-136.
C. Use in conjunction with Biotherm 100 or Biotherm 200 Sealant for application for curtain wall
construction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840-6 05113105
3. Where application occurs at joints at partition tops, apply one label at 30 foot centers, on
one side of partition.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to jobsite in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing proper U.L.
labeling.
B. Material shall be stored off the ground in an area protected from weather, moisture, and
freezing.
C. All materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For convenience to describe the quality level required, Bio Fireshield, Inc. [7 t8] 535-=4550,
specifications are included.
B. Products manufactured by the following manufactures meeting all the requirements of this
Section will be considered as equal to the specified products:
1. Hevi-Duty/Nelson, [800] 331-7325.
2. 3M Ceramic Materials Department, [800] 328-1687.
3. Hilti Construction Chemicals,Inc.
4. Specified Technologies,Inc. (STI), [800] 992-1180.
5. Metacaulk,manufactured by Rectorseal Corporation [800] 231-3345.
C. Products manufactured by either Rectorseal (800) 231-3345 or Thermafiber LLC (888) 834-
2371, for firestopping perimeter openings between floor or roof construction and aluminum
glazed curtain wall systems as described herein.
2.2 FIRESTOP SEALANTS,PUTTY AND SPRAYABLE MASTIC
A. Provide single component, non-combustible elastomeric firestop sealant, Biotherm 100 (Gun
Grade), Biotherm 200 (Self Leveling), BioSTOP 500, Biostop 700, Biostop 750 and Biostop
150.
B. Sealant system shall have U.L. Classification as a "fill, void, or cavity material" for through
penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479.
C. Sealant for sealing joints between underside of decks and tops of fire rated partitions, and
smoke barriers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840-5 05113105
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of
successful production acceptable to the Designer.
B. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this
Section.
1. The manufacturer of the firestop material shall submit written certification that the
contractor to be used for firestopping has been trained in the application of the products
by the manufacturer proposed to be used on the project.
C. Single source:
1. All work of this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer except in the event
there are penetrations or other requirements for fire/smoke stopping for which the
proposed manufacturer has no listed Design System tests by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc., or other laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, provide products
by any of the specified manufacturer's for which Design Systems are listed.
2. Where penetrations occur for which no listed Design System tests exists, obtain from the
firestop system manufacturer an engineered system acceptable to the authorities having
jurisdiction for firestopping such penetrations. Engineered system from manufacturer
shall include a detail drawing showing the engineered system and shall contain no
disclaimers .
D. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Labeling firestop systems:
1. Provide labels at all penetrations and joints where firestop systems have been applied.
2. Labels shall be self-adhering, minimum 3 inches by 5 inches, containing the following
information:
a. Printed message stating:
WARNING
FIRESTOP SYSTEM
DO NOT DISTURB
SYSTEM#
CONTRACTOR
DATE
Manufacturer's name, address and
telephone number
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840-4 05113105
D. Non-combustible dams shall be constructed:
1. As necessary to achieve fire rating as tested and rated.
2. In conformance with installation requirements for type of floor, wall, and partition
construction.
3. As recommended by firestop/smokeseal manufacturer.
E. Combustible damming materials, if used, must be removed after proper curing.
F. Provide firestop materials that are free of solvents, lead, ethylene glycol, PCB's and asbestos.
G. In construction joints use only firestop systems that remain flexible after curing.
H. Do not use firestop materials which re-emulsify.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of firestop and smokeseal material
to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical uses, performance
and limitation criteria, and test data.
2. Submit copies of Systems Designs as indicated in latest edition of Fire Resistance - Vol.
II, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Directory for each type of firestop configuration in the
Work.
3. Submit manufacturer's installation procedures for each type of product and
construction/resistance required for the project.
C. Samples:
1. Submit samples of products to be used.
2. Submit sample of firestopping label to be used on project.
D. On-Site Mock-Up Installation to be Included in Work: Minimum thirty days prior to application
in any area, provide samples of firestop and smokeseal materials and installation in accordance
with the following requirements.
I. Apply one mock-up of appropriate firestop and smokeseal material for each different
penetration and fire rating required for the work.
2. Mock-up areas will comply with thickness, fire resistance ratings, and finished
appearance of the project and applicable fire code.
3. Accepted mock-ups will constitute standard of acceptance for method of application,
thickness, and finished appearance for firestop and smokeseal application. The sample(s)
shall remain visible during completion of the work and shall remain as part of the
completed work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840-3 05113105
5. Mineral fiber, non-combustible insulation (safing) for use as damming material for tested Awftk
and rated firestop system per manufacturer's requirements; .
6. Clips and closures as required for support and containment of dams and insulation
materials.
7. Firestopping sealant/mastic for construction joints between floor and exterior walls; and
tops of partitions as specified above.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05800, Expansion Control: Fire-rated barriers at expansion joints in floors or
roof.
2. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
3. Section 09111, Interior Metal Stud System: Fire-rated deflection tack assemblies at tops
of partitions.
4. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: sealant for penetrations and construction
joints at tops of non-rated corridor and passageway partitions; fire-rated construction
joints at tops of partitions at deflection tracks.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Work-Division 15 and Division 16.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. The term firestop includes firestops and smokeseals, except where not applicable.
1.4 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide firestop systems and work to conform to Building Code Requirements in fire resistant
wall and floor assemblies.
B. Testing Requirements:
1. All firestop/smokeseal systems shall be tested by a recognized, independent testing
agency and shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T)requirements of ASTM
E-814.
2. Conform to UL Fire Hazard Classification Requirements.
3. All firestop systems used for joints shall be tested in accordance with UL2079
C. Frrestops in place shall be of sufficient thickness, width, and density to provide a fire resistance
rating at least equal to the floor, wall, or partition construction into which it is installed.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital 'FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 07840 -FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Install firestops and smoke seals at:
a. All penetrations through fire-resistive and smoke assemblies including, floors, fire
rated partitions, smoke barriers, smoke partitions; and temporary partitions and
barriers separating work areas from Owner's facilities.
b. At expansion joints in chase walls where expansion joints are not exposed to view.
C. Elsewhere that such firestopping and smoke seals are indicated, required by codes,
regulations or governmental authorities having jurisdiction.
d. At construction joints (perimeter openings) between floor construction and exterior
walls or exterior aluminum curtain wall construction.
e. At construction joints (perimeter openings) between floor or roof construction and
aluminum curtain wall system in which a continuous horizontal mullion does not
occur at the floor or roof line
B. Firestop and smokeseal systems in the work of this Section includes all labor, materials,
equipment, and services necessary to complete the installation of Firestops and Smokeseals as
required by code, as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and including, but not
limited to,the following:
1. Single component, Non-Combustible, Silicone Firestop Sealant, Intumescent firestop
calk (which remains flexible after curing), spray applied intumescent firestop mastic, or
Putty for use in the following fire-rated and/or smoke barrier construction:
a. With penetrations subject to movement including conduit, cable, bundles, buss
duct,and non-combustible pipe.
b. In control joints,in head of wall/floor assemblies, in floor edge wall voids, etc.
C. As a sealant or caulking for smoke barrier construction, fire and smoke dampers,
fire door frames in walls.
d. In conjunction with mineral wool for open areas between floor/roof assembly and
metal stud or aluminum framed curtain wall systems.
2. Cementitious Firestop Mortars for use:
a. In static (non-moving) penetrations such as cable trays, electrical and
communication cable bundles,conduit, and non-combustible sleeves and pipes.
b. In filling cavities (openings) in fire rated assemblies.
3. Firestop collars for use with through penetrations involving combustible plastic pipe or
conduit.
4. Firestop pillows for use for temporary sealing of openings and penetrations of any kind
which need to be re-opened and re-sealed in a fast and safe manner.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07840- 1 05113105
3.5 PATCHING
A. Patch and repair all surfaces of sprayed fireproofing material damaged by the work of other
trades, so that every substrate over which sprayed fireproofing has been applied is totally
covered in accordance with the specified Underwriters Laboratories designs. Such patching and
repairing shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Patch fireproofing in existing building(s) disturbed as a result of demolition and construction
work.
1. Materials and systems shall match existing assemblies in so far as practical.
2. Material thickness shall match existing, or as required to maintain the hourly rating of the
existing assembly.
3.6 CLEANING UP
A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use all means necessary to prevent dusting and
tracking of fireproofing materials onto floor surfaces. At completion of each segment of
installation in a room or space, promptly remove from the working area all equipment, dust and
surplus material of this Section.
END OF SECTION 07810
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810-8 05/13/05
B. Provide all necessary measures for protection of workmen and public and for prevention of air
pollution, as required under federal regulations, applicable state and local ordinances, and/or
code regulations. Provide protection for workmen applying fireproofing and for other workmen
who are in the vicinity of application or mixing operations.
C. Provide masking, drop cloths or other satisfactory covering for all materials which are not to
receive fireproofing, to prevent damage from contamination from overspray or fallout of
materials. Clean or replace any material so damaged or contaminated.
D. For adverse weather conditions check with manufacturer for application techniques.
E. Confirm that temperature and ventilation are maintained to the requirements as specified.
F. Surfaces shall be reasonably clean and free from dirt, grease, oil, loose plaster, rust scale, loose
paint or other conditions which would prevent good adhesion.
G. All unsuitable substrates shall be identified and made known to the Architect and corrected
prior to the application of the sprayed fireproofing.
H. Sprayed fireproofing shall not be applied to steel floor decks prior to the placement of concrete
on that deck.
I. The application of sprayed fireproofing to the underside of roof deck shall not commence until
the roof is completely installed and weathertight, all penthouses are complete, all mechanical
units have been placed, and vibratory roof traffic has ceased.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Adhesive, such as Bond-Seal, shall be applied to the underside of all steel deck, and any primed
steel. Install as per the appropriate UL fire resistance design and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
B. Equipment, mixing and application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written
application instructions.
C. The surface shall be wetted with water as recommended by the manufacturer. The fireproofing
material shall then be sprayed to the wet surface to the thickness required to obtain the required
U.L. hourly rating.
D. At the end of each day, and before the fibers have dried, lightly spray the fiber mat with water.
Steel columns which are not furred and are exposed to view shall be hand tamped to the
thickness required by the U.L. Design.
E. Sealer: All sprayed fireproofing material which is not indicated to be furred or covered by other
construction and which will be exposed to view, shall be sealed after installation. Allow
surfaces to thoroughly dry and apply one coat of sealer, such as Bond-Seal.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810-7 05/13/05
2.4 DESIGNS -FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS -
A. All sprayed fireproofing shall be applied at the required thickness and density to achieve the
ratings listed and shall conform to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. design numbers, listed on
the Drawings.
1. The building design is based on"Unrestrained"conditions.
B. Where size of a structural steel framing member is smaller than the size indicated in the
specified Fire resistance Rating Design, adjust the thickness of the sprayed-on material in
accordance with the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
C. Sprayed fireproofing ratings are based on the products of Isolatek International. If products of
the other listed manufacturers are used, revise the accessories and application procedures to
meet requirements of the corresponding laboratory test numbers.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. All surfaces to receive fireproofing shall be free of oil, grease, loose mill scale, dirt,
paints/primers (other than those listed and tested)or other foreign materials which would impair
satisfactory bonding to the surface.
B. Coordinate the Work so that the installation of sprayed fireproofing is complete in an area prior
to the installation of ducts, piping, conduit or other suspended equipment, and after the
installation of offset anchor plates or clips for metal stud framing systems.
C. The sprayed fireproofing shall only be applied to steel deck after it has been confirmed that the
steel decking has been constructed in accordance with the criteria set forth by the Steel Deck
Institute.
3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of
those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810-6 05/13/05
building code and all authorities having jurisdiction. All materials and installation shall be in
conformance with the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., design numbers listed on the Drawings
and all manufacturers shall be as listed by Underwriters Laboratories for the design numbers
indicated.
B. Materials shall be applied to conform to the drawings, specifications and following test criteria:
1. Deflection: When tested in accordance with ASTM E759, the material shall not crack or
delaminate when the non-concrete topped galvanized deck to which it is applied is
subjected to a one time vertical center load resulting in a downward deflection of 1/120th
of the span.
2. Bond hnpact: When tested in accordance with ASTM E760, the material shall not crack
or delaminate from the concrete topped galvanized deck to which it is applied.
3. Cohesion/Adhesion (bond strength): When tested in accordance with ASTM E736, the
material applied over uncoated or galvanized steel shall have an average bond strength as
follows:
a. Type A: 150 psf(7.2 kPa).
b. Type B: 434 psf(20.8 kPa).
C. Type C: 10,000 psf(478 kPa).
4. Air Erosion: When tested in accordance with ASTM E859, the material shall not be
subject to losses from the finished application greater than 0.025 grams per sq. ft. (0.27
grams per square meter).
5. Compressive Strength: When tested in accordance with ASTM E761, the material shall
not deform more than 10 percent when subjected to the following crushing force:
a. Type A: 750 psf(23.9 kPa).
took b. Type.B: 7,344 psf(351 kPa).
C. Type C: 78,912 psf(3,778 kPa).
6. Corrosion Resistance: When tested in accordance with ASTM E937, the material shall
not promote corrosion of steel.
7. Surface Burning Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E84, the
material shall exhibit the following surface burning characteristics:
a. Flame Spread: 0
b. Smoke Developed: 0
8. Density: When tested in accordance with ASTM E605, the material shall meet the
minimum individual and average density values as listed in the appropriate UL design or
as required by the authority having jurisdiction, but in no case shall be no less than the
following average minimum.
a. Type A: 15 pcf,minimum
b. Type B: 22 pcf, minimum
C. Type C: 40 pcf minimum
C. The material shall have been tested and reported by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) in
accordance with the procedures of UL 263 (ASTM El 19).
D. Sprayed fireproofing materials shall be free of all forms of asbestos, including actinolite,
amosite, anthophyllite,chrysotile,crocidolite and tremolite. Material manufacturer shall provide
certification of such upon request.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810-5 05113105
D. Prior to application of spray fireproofing, confirm that above conditions are met and are in
accordance with the requirements of Section 01500-Temporary Facilities And Controls.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following. No other manufacturers will be
approved.
1. Isolatek International, Cafco [800] 631-9600.
2. W. R. Grace Construction Products [800] 242-4476.
2.2 SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Type A (Low Density): For built-up trusses, steel deck and beams, and all other concealed
applications except as indicated on the drawings:
I. Isolatek Blaze-Shield® II,Isolatek International
2. Monokote MK-6,W. R. Grace
B. Type B (Medium Density): Steel columns which are exposed to view and steel framing and
steel decking located within elevator shafts:
1. Isolatek Blaze Shield HP,Isolatek International
2. Monokote Z-106,W. R. Grace
C. Type C (High Density): For truss cross braces, and steel columns, beams and crossbraces
adjacent to louvers:
1. Isolatek Cafco®Fendolite®M-II,Isolatek International.
2. Monokote MK-146,W. R. Grace.
D. Potable water shall be used for the application of sprayed fireproofing materials.
E. Adhesive and Sealer: Isolatek Bond-Seal.
F. Mold Inhibitor: Mold inhibitor shall be added to fireproofing materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. The sprayed fireproofing material shall have been tested by accredited laboratories to meet
required ratings and performance, and shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810-4 05/13/05
B. Field Tests:
1. Field testing and inspection may be required to be performed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. At the option of the
Architect, tests may be required for any of the following categories:
2. ASTM E605 - Standard Test Method for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-
Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members.
a. ASTM E736 -Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members.
b. ASTM E761 -Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied
to Structural Members
C. Patching (has been done to maintain the monolithic nature of the sprayed fiber.
3. The "Inspection Procedure for Field Applied Sprayed Fire Protection Materials" as
published by the AWCI shall be used as a field test guideline.
C. Mock-Up: Before commencing with the work of this section, the fireproofing applicator shall
apply specified fireproofing in accordance with the fire ratings specified herein to representative
surface area of 50 square feet minimum. Finish density, thickness, bond and appearance will be
evaluated and approved by the Architect and the spray fireproofing material manufacturer's
representative before proceeding with the work of this section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the project in manufacturer's unopened packages, fully identified as to trade
name, type and other identifying data. Packaging shall bear the UL labels for fire hazard and
fire-resistance classifications.
1. Label to identify the application for which the product is intended.
B. Store materials above ground, in a dry location,protected from the weather. Damaged packages
found unsuitable for use should be rejected and removed from the project.
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. When the prevailing outdoor temperature at the building is less than 40° F (4° C), a minimum
substrate and ambient temperature of 40°.F (4° C) must be maintained for 24 hours before,
during and 24 hours after application of sprayed fireproofing.
B. Ventilation must be in place to allow proper drying of the sprayed fireproofing during and
subsequent to its application.
C. In enclosed areas, ventilation shall not be less than three(3)complete air changes per hour.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810-3 05113105
4. ASTM E736 -Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members.
5. ASTM E759 -Effect of Deflection of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members.
6. ASTM E760 -Effect of Impact on the Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials
Applied to Structural Members.
7. ASTM E761 -Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members.
8. ASTM E859 - Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural
Members.
9. ASTM E937 -Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)Fire Resistance Directory.
C. Uniform Building Code Standard No. 43-8 (current edition): Thickness and Density
Determination for Spray-Applied Fireproofing.
D. AWCI Publication: Inspection Procedure for Field Applied Sprayed Fire Protection Materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data:
1. Furnish certificates, including complete report and test record if required, attesting that
fire protection material and installation method meet specified test procedures,fire hazard
classification and fire resistance rating. Certificates shall also list thickness and density of
material proposed for use for each member of each design.
2. After certificates, reports and test records have been submitted and approved, these
submissions shall not be changed unless all aspects of the change are approved by the
Architect.
3. Letters from testing laboratories summarizing a test or engineering studies shall be
accepted as meeting the requirements for submission.
a. Sprayed fireproofing ratings are based on the products of Isolatek International. If
products of the other listed manufacturers are used, submit the corresponding
laboratory test numbers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: The applicator shall be licensed by the manufacturer of the material,
and be qualified and skilled in this type of application. He shall use materials and equipment
recommended by the manufacturer, and shall execute all work in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810-2 05/13/05
SECTION 07810-SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for, and incidental to, the
complete and proper installation of all sprayed fireproofing and related work as shown on the
drawings or where specified herein, and in accordance with all applicable requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. At existing buildings, patch fireproofing disturbed as a result of construction and demolition
work.
C. The material and installation shall conform to the applicable building code requirements and the
requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
2. Section 05310,Metal Decking.
3. Section 05400, Cold-Formed Metal Framing: for installation of Z-clips to substrates prior
to application of spray-on fireproofing material.
4. Section 07270,Firestops and Smoke Seals.
5. Section 09111, Interior Metal Stud Framing: for installation of Z-clips to substrates prior
to application of spray-on fireproofing material.
6. Section 09250,Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM Test Standards:
1. ASTM E84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. ASTM El 19 -Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. ASTM E605 -Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07810- 1 05/13/05
END OF SECTION 07720
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROOF ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07720-5 05/13/05
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work of this Section in strict accordance with approved Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and
elevation, and without warping.
B. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, roof
insulation, roofing and flashing, as required, to ensure that each element of the Work performs
properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
C. Anchor securely in place and capable of resisting lateral and thermal stresses, as well as inward
and outward loading pressures. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous
items as required for completing installation.
D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing
cement to form a seal.
E. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide
adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal with thick
bead of mastic sealant,except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and
lubricate joints and hardware.
B. Upon completion of the installation, touchup scratches and abrasions on finished surfaces to be
completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROOF ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07720-4 05113105
C. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated.
D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other non-
corrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with
finish of material being fastened.
E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride,
or block design of sponge neoprene.
F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur
and containing no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.
G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, nondrying, non-migrating
sealant.
H. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with
joint surfaces; ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, and, A.
I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non-asbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel
application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
2.3 ROOF HATCH FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. external loading and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal loading
pressure. Frame with 12-inch high, integral-curb with 3-1/2 inch flange, with welded corner
joints, 1-inch thick insulation, and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing). Provide gasketing and
equip corrosion-resistant hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock
hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles.
B. Cover and Curb Material: Aluminum, sheets and extrusions.
1. 1 I gage aluminum cover and curb with 18 gage aluminum cover liner.
C. Hardware: Zinc plated and chromate sealed.
D. Type: Single-leaf personnel access.
1. For Ladder.Access: Custom sized, 36-x 60-inches,based on the following products:
a. Bilco model`E-50"Roof scuttle.
2. Babcock-Davis model `B-RHA".
3. Milcor model "RD-1".
2.4 FINISH
A. Class I, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-C22A41 (Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: Class I Architectural,clear film thicker than 0.7 mil)complying with AAMA 607.1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROOF ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07720-3 05113105
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent
damage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for roof hatch by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof hatch with roofing membrane and flashing, and
interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard from warranty stating that
materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from
the date of Substantial Completion. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this
period,manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide custom products as specified
herein, from one of the following manufacturers:
1. Bilco Co.,New Haven, CT(203) 934-6363.
2. Babcock-Davis, a Cierra Products Co.,Minneapolis,MN(888)412-3726.
3. Milcor, a Gibraltar Co.,Lima, OH(800)528-1411.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 for Alclad alloy 3005H25 or alloy and temper required to suit
forming operations.
B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper required to suit
structural and finish requirements. Mill finish,unless indicated otherwise.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROOF ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07720-2 05113105
SECTION 07720 -ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof hatches.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05500,Metal Fabrications: for metal ladders for access to roof hatches.
2. Section 07531,EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered: for roofing and flashing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated, provide construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes and manufacturer's
specifications and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights,
loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, anchorage and interface of the work of this Section with the work
of adjacent trades.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROOF ACCESSORIES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07720 - 1 05113105
END OF SECTION 07715
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ELEVATOR VENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07715-5 05/13/05
1. Curb: 12 gage formed galvannealed metal with Permatector corrosion-resistant coating
and 1 inch fiberglass insulation.
2. Hood and Corner Trim: Formed aluminum, 0.10-inch thick with 1-inch fiberglass
insulation.
C. Dampers: Horizontally-mounted damper inside penthouse assembly at roof opening with 120v,
continuously energized damper controls to hold damper in closed position, and opening when
de-energized. Provide "open or closed" indicator switch for use on low-voltage control circuit
connected to fire alarm panel.
1. Damper Tray: 18 gage formed galvannealed metal with Permatector corrosionOresistant
coating.
D. Louvers: Fabricated of 0.081-inch thick extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy and temper.
1. Louver Frame: 4-inches deep shop welded at mitered corners.
2. Louver Blades: J profile positioned at 37/45 degrees on 4-1/2 inch centers.
E. Bird Screens: Flattened expanded aluminum,0.05-inch thick with 3/4-inch openings.
F. Glazed Panels: 1/8-inch thick annealed glass.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions,and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install elevator hoistway vent according to manufacturer's written instructions and
approved submittals.
B. Install elevator hoistway vent in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform
appearance. Coordinate with work of other Sections.
C. Anchor securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing installation. Install elevator
hoistway vent to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener
disengagement.
D. Test operable dampers for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ELEVATOR VENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07715-4 05113105
D. Samples: For exposed factory-applied finish required, prepared on Samples of size to
adequately show color.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details
for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof hatch with roofing membrane and flashing, and
interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure. and
noncorrosive installation.
1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
look installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Elevator hoistway vent shall be as manufactured by Greenheck, as
distributed by Pace Representatives,Boston,MA; (617) 342-7072.
1. Product: Greenheck Model ESJ-401P Stationary Blade Louver Penthouse with SMD-202
Operable Damper and Siemens GGD-221 Activator.
2. Size: 36-inch curb height, plus F-6" penthouse height, with 2'-6" inside throat
dimension of penthouse.
3. Finish: Aluminum, mill finish.
2.2 ELEVATOR VENTS
A. Manufacturer's standard unit fabricated from the following materials, with manufacturer's
standard welded or sealed mechanical joints
B. Enclosure:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ELEVATOR VENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07715-3 05/13/05
1. Structural Performance — Implied Loads: Design and construct aluminum architectural ...
louver system to withstand minimum loading requirements as specified herein.
a. Design and engineer elevator hoistway vent system in accordance with procedures
for determining design wind loads for components and cladding for building height
>60 feet, pursuant to §1609.8.2 of BOCA '99, incorporating the following project-
specific values:
1) Basic Wind Speed: 70 mph
2) Exposure Category: C.
3) Basic Velocity Pressure: (Pv): 12.5
4) Wind Load Importance Factor(1): 1.16
5) Product of Internal Pressure Coefficient and Gust Response Factor (GC,,;):
Condition(+0.25 and—0.25).
B. Seismic Requirements:
1. General Seismic Requirements: Architectural components and their attachments shall
comply with seismic design requirements of the referenced building code for a project in
Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II1, with a Seismic Performance Category of D:
2. Architectural Components Design: The glazed aluminum curtain wall system and
attachments shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Section 1612.7.3 of
780 CMR, in its entirety, and for seismic forces (F.) in accordance with the formula Fp =
A,,C,PW,where the following values are used:
a. The coefficient representing effective peak velocity-related acceleration (A,,) =
0.12g.
b. The seismic coefficient for architectural components(Cc):
1) Components (Cc) =0.9.
2) Attachments (CJ = 3.0
C. Performance criteria factor from Table 1612.7.3 of 780 CMR(P) = 1.5.
d. Wc=weight of architectural component.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and
components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ELEVATOR VENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07715-2 05113105
SECTION 07715 -ELEVATOR VENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide roof-mounted elevator vents.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07531, EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered.
2. Section 10200,Louvers.
3. Section 13851,Fire Alarm System: for interconnects to automatically operated damper.
4. Section 14240,Hydraulic Elevators.
5. Division 16 Sections: for power supply and final connections for automatically operated
damper.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the seismic
requirements for elevator hoistway vents as it pertains to exterior cladding of the
building.
B. The BOCA@ National Building Code 11999, Fourteenth Edition, referred to herein as `BOCA
99":
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the performance
requirements for design wind loads, and other designated or applicable loads for
architectural as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design louver system with maximum allowable deflection of any support member not
exceeding 1/180 of the unsupported span when exposed to:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ELEVATOR VENTS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07715-1 05113105
C. Isolation: Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install prefabricated corner sections,and running lengths of formed aluminum coping and fascia
over cleats and concealed joint covers, allowing 1/8-inch space between sections for controlled
expansion.
E. Install waterproof sealant to underside of roof edging retainer base plate as recommended and
supplied by the roofing membrane manufacturer.
F. Splash Blocks: Furnish and install precast concrete splash blocks where indicated on the
drawings. Size and profile shall be as required for proper water dispersal.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure roof edge flashing and trim Work
during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time
of Substantial Completion.
1. Touch-up minor scratches and marks with coating that matches color and sheen, and is
compatible with factory applied finish so no evidence remains of corrective work.
END OF SECTION 07710
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07710-7 05113105
or Method 7. Processing shall conform with ASTM B-339-67 (1972) Section 5.
Conversion coating weight shall be between 30-100 mgms. per square foot.
2. Application:
a. The finish for all exposed to view aluminum shall be a two coat, two bake system.
The primer coat shall be an inhibitive primer with dry film thickness averagin- 0.2
mils to 03 mils. The color coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0
mils. The total minimum dry film thickness of the fluoropolymer system shall be
1.2 mils.
3. Unexposed areas such as inside corners and channels shall be visually covered to the
extent possible.
4. The finish shall meet the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association "2605 -
Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels".
5. Approved Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc. No other manufacturer will be accepted.
6. Color and Gloss: Provide custom colors as follows:
a. Adjacent to Brick: Match metal faced composite wall panel `MP-l' 1111-nished
under Section 07412-Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
b. Adjacent to Metal Panels:
1) MP-1: Match metal faced composite wall panel 'MP-1' furnished under
Section 07412- M:anufactured.Metal Wall Panels.
2) MP-2: Match metal faced composite wall panel 'MP-2' furnished under
Section 07412-Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof edge system
installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install work true to line
and levels indicated. Coordinate with installation of single ply membrane roofing system, as
required to ensure that the entire Work performs properly and is waterproof and weathertight.
B. Install blocking, cleats, clips, coping chairs, and other anchoring and attachment devices
required. Anchor products securely to withstand wind loading, structural movement and thermal
stresses. Use non-corrosive mechanical fasteners of size and type as supplied, or as
recommended by manufacturer for substrate and application.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07710-6 05/13/05
2.5 ROOF FASCIA
oow
A. Roof Edge System (EPDM Roofing without Gravel Ballast): Provide manufacturer's standard
low-profile system consisting of formed aluminum decorative snap-on fascia cover in size and
profile indicated. System shall be watertight and not require exposed fasteners.
1. Basis of Design: "Econosnap-3 Roof Edging" as manufactured by W.P. Hickman
Company, or equal product acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Include continuous galvanized steel spring clips, concealed joint covers, formed decorative
fascia cover with factory fabricated inside and outside mitered and welded corners, and other
accessories, indicated, or required for a complete installation. Provide components fabricated
from the following metal:
1. Retainer: 24 gauge galvanized steel.
2. Fascia Cover: 0.050-inch thick aluminum.
2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE COMPONENTS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories, designed and manufactured for use with gravel
stops and fascia system, and of the same material as primary system.
B. Spillout Scuppers: Provide manufacturer's standard factory formed aluminum spill-out scupper,
fully welded.
tow
1. Basis of Design: Custom formed through-wall scuppers as manufactured by W.P.
Hickman Company,or equal product acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
2. Provide components fabricated from the following metal:
a. Spillout Scupper: 0.050-inch thick aluminum.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum
Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations.
B. High Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C40RIx, AAMA 2605.
1. Apply fluoropolymer finish to all exposed to view aluminum. The finish coating for
extruded aluminum shall be a factory applied, oven baked finish based on Kynar 500 or
Hylar 5000 (70% min. polyvinylidene fluoride — PVFZ). Application of the finish based
on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shall be performed under specifications issued by the
coating manufacturer and by an applicator specifically approved by manufacturer. Said
applicator shall provide written notification of approval by the manufacturer prior to
application of the finish. The coating system shall be applied to properly cleaned and
pretreated aluminum. The pretreatment shall meet ASTM D-1730-67, Type B, Method 5
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07710-5 05/13/05
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, splice plates, anchoring devices, and
similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with
material being installed; non-corrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
G. Coping Chair: Provide manufacturer's standard molded styrene support chair, 3 inch wide,
designed to drain water back to exterior of system.
2.3 WALL COPING
A. Coping System: Provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of formed aluminum coping
in shapes and sizes indicated. System shall be watertight and not require exposed fasteners or
sealants.
1. Basis of Design: "Permasnap Coping" as manufactured W.P. Hickman Company, or
equal product acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Include galvanized steel hold down cleats, gutter support chairs, concealed joint covers, formed
coping cap with factory fabricated inside and outside mitered and welded corners,end caps, and
other accessories indicated or required for a complete installation. Provide components
fabricated from the following metal:
1. Coping Cleat: 16 gauge galvanized steel.
2. Coping Cap: 0.050 inch thick aluminum.
2.4 GRAVEL STOP
A. Gravel Stop System (EPDM Roofing with Gravel Ballast): Provide manufacturer's standard
system consisting of formed aluminum gravel stop in shapes and sizes indicated. System shall
be watertight and not require exposed fasteners or sealants.
1. Basis of Design: "Econosnap-2 Roof Edging" as manufactured W.P. Hickman Company,
or equal product acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Include continuous galvanized steel spring clips, concealed joint covers, formed gravel stop
fascia with factory fabricated inside and outside mitered and welded corners, and other
accessories indicated or required for a complete installation. Design shall be such that assembly
may be field installed without fastener penetration of roofing membrane. Provide components
fabricated from the following metal:
1. Spring Clip: 24 gauge galvanized steel.
2. Fascia: 0.050-inch thick aluminum.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07710-4 05113105
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of
each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of
materials and finishes.
1.7 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE:
A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Pref�ibncated coping and gravelstop shall be included under
the membrane roofing manufacturer's "Full System Warranty" specified in Section 07531 -
EPDM Membrane Rooting -Adhered.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for use intended and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
of alloy and temper designated below
1. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 3003-1114, with a minimum thickness of 0.050
inchunless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, G90 coating designation; commercial quality; provide
24 gauge material,unless otherwise indicated
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories designed and manufactured to match and
fit roof edge treatment system indicated
B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of same metal as sheet metal flashing or other non-corrosive metal,
of type and size as recommended by roof edge system manufacturer for product and substrate
application. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, nondrying, non-migrating
sealant.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07710- 3 05/13/05
4. Project Exposure Category: C.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 41300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product data or each type of roof edge product specified.
Include installation instructions, specifications and other data demonstrating that materials and
performance comply with the specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings in sufficient detail showing layout, profiles, methods of
joining, accessory items, anchorage details, and interface with adjoining roof and wall
construction.
D. Certification: Provide a letter of certification from the manufacturer that the prefabricated gravel
stop. coping systems, meet the specified performance requirements. Certification to shall bear
the signature and stamp of the registered Professional Engineer.
E. Samples for Verification: Samples of prefabricated gravel stop, coping systems, and accessory
items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations,
include sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected
1. 8-inch length section of each different product to be exposed as finished surfaces.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of manufactured roof edge system from one source and by
a single manufacturer. Roof edge system shall be as manufactured by or acceptable to the
membrane roofing system manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed roof edge system
flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Mockups: Prior to installing coping and gravel stop, construct mockups indicated to verify
selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location designated by Owner.
2. Provide 12-inch straight length, and 12-inch by 12-inch corner sample of coping and
gravelstop.
3. Notify Owner one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Owner's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 07710-2 05113105
SECTION 07710 -PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory fabricated and finished roof edge flashing and trim in the
following categories:
1. Gravel stops.
2. Fascia.
3. Copings.
4. Scuppers.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05800,Expansion Control: for roof expansion joint covers.
2. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry: for wood blocking for gravel stops and copings.
3. Section 07531,EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered.
4. Section 07620, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: for shop and field fabricated metal
flashing and trim.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install manufactured roof edge flashing and trim systems to withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
B. Provide manufactured roof edge products that are listed with FM (Factory Mutual) Approval
Guide approved for Class as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Provide manufactured roof edge systems that are certified by the manufacturer to comply with
ANSUSPRI Standard ES-1, "Wind Design Guide for Edge Systems Use with Low Slope
Roofing Systems"based on the following performance criteria:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 70 mph
2. Velocity Pressure: 12.5
3. Wind Importance Factor: 1.16
Cooley Dickinson Hospital PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07710- 1 05/13/05
2. Apply surface conditioner or primer by spray,brush, or roller at the rate recommended by ,
manufacturer, prior to flashing installation. Allow surface conditioner to dry completely
before flashing application.
3. At locations where through wall flashing and self adhered flashing strips are installed
over dampproofing:
a. Apply primer by brush or heavy nap, natural-material roller at rate recommended
by manufacturer prior to flashing installation.
b. Allow primer to dry completely before flashing application.
C. Through Wall Flashing:
1. Install through wall flashing at the bottom of cavities, heads and sills of all openings in
exterior walls and at all areas where through wall flashing is indicated on drawings.
2. Precut pieces of flashing to easily handled lengths for each location.
3. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position flashing carefully before placing it
against the surface.
4. Unless otherwise detailed, start flashing 1/2-inch in from face of exterior wall. Flashing
shall not be permanently exposed to sunlight.
5. Extend flashing to back up wall and turn up a minimum of 8-inches before terminating
flashing.
6. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand
roller. Fully adhere flashing to substrate to prevent water from migrating under flashing.
7. Overlap adjacent pieces 4-inches and roll all seams with a steel hand roller.
8. Carry flashing 6-inches beyond both ends of sills and lintels. Both head and sill flashing
shall be turned up at the ends to form a pan. All corners shall be formed -NOT CUT.
9. Apply a bead or trowel coat of termination mastic along flexible flashing top edge,
seams,cuts, and penetrations.
10. Metal flashing edging:
a. Apply metal flashing edging to through wall flashing where through wall flashing
terminates at face of exterior wall.
b. Attach through wall flashing over metal flashing, overlapping so that edge of wall
flashing is 1/2-inch back of face of masonry.
C. Form metal flashing edging to a profile that extends beyond the face of the exterior
wall, turning down and extending over the relieving angle or horizontal surface to
which flashing is adhered.
d. Butt lengths as indicated, allowing space between adjoining pieces.
11. Do not allow the rubberized asphalt surface of the flashing membrane to come in contact
with polysulfide sealants,creosote,uncured coal tar products or EPDM.
12. Do not expose flashing membrane to sunlight for more than thirty days prior to enclosure.
D. Self Adhered Flashing Strip:
1. Install in locations indicated and in similar manner as installation of through wall
flashing.
END OF SECTION 07650
Cooley Dickinson Hospital THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 07650-4 05113105
a. At locations where flashing is adhered to dampproofing, provide rubber-based
primer in solvent.
1) Product: Bituthene B2 Primer.
b. At locations where flashing is adhered to fiberglass faced exterior sheathing,
provide water-based primer, which imparts an aggressive, high tack finish on
treated substrates.
1) Product: Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer.
C. At locations where flashing is adhered to damp concrete or concrete masonry
substrates provide rubber-based primer in solvent.
1) Product: Bituthene B2 Primer.
d. At locations where flashing is adhered to dry concrete or concrete masonry
substrates provide latex-based, water-dispersible, surface conditioner.
1) Product: Perm-A-Barrier Surface Conditioner.
3. Metal flashing edging in conjunction with through wall flashing:
a. Product: "S.S. Edge Flashing" manufactured by Dur-O-Wall.
b. Factory formed, ASTM A276 Type 304 stainless steel edge flashing, 26 gage in 8
foot lengths.
C. Fabricate to width and profile indicated with bent drip edge and both edges
hemmed.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Where through-wall flashing is to be installed over dampproofing, ensure that substrate surface
is acceptable for the placement of the through-wall flashing.
C. Provide priming substrates when temperature is below 40°F and on fiberglass faced exterior
sheathing.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through wall flashing and self adhered flashing strips to dry surfaces at air and
surface temperatures of 25 degrees F. and above in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations at locations indicated on Construction Documents.
B. Preparation:
1. Ensure that substrate is free of dirt, dust or other foreign matter that would impede proper
adhesion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07650-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods'needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Section 07196—Air Barrier Systems.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling of each product.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Design is based on products by the following manufacturers; and
trade names of those manufacturer are used herein.
1. Membrane Flashing:
a. Grace Construction Products, Cambridge,MA 02140, (866) 333-3726.
2. Metal Flashing:
a. Dur-O-Wal,Folcroft,PA 19032, (877) 851-8400.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Flashing Description: .32 mils of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 8 mils of
cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene film to provide a minimum 40 mils thick membrane.
Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone-coated release paper until installed.
1. Product: "Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing"manufactured by Grace Construction Products.
B. Self-adhered flashing strips shall be same product as flashing. Strip widths shall be as indicated
on drawings, but in no case less than width required to provide a minimum 2-inch overlap at
joint to be covered.
C. Wall Flashing Accessories:
1. Termination Mastic: Rubberized asphalt-based mastic for sealing top edge, seams, cuts
and penetrations of flexible flashings.
a. Product: Bituthene Mastic
2. Primer:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07650-2 05/13/05
SECTION 07650 -THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide flexible rubberized asphalt, self-sealing through-wall flashing, self-adhered flashing
strips and wall flashing accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete
2. Section 04210,Brick Masonry
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry
4. Section 07196,Air Barrier Systems
5. Section 07210,Building Insulation
6. Section 07531,EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered
7. Section 07620, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
S. Section 07920,Joint Sealants
9. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples:
1. Submit (2) samples of flexible membrane through wall flashing and metal flashing
edging.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07650- 1 05113105
3.3 EMBEDMENT
A. Embed metal in conjunction with roofs in a solid bed of sealant, using materials and methods
described in Section 07920 of these Specifications or other materials and methods approved in
advance by the Architect.
3.4 SOLDERING
A. Thoroughly clean and tin the joint materials prior to soldering.
B. Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated copper, in order to heat the seams thoroughly and
to completely fill them with solder.
C. Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for use.
D. Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat,full-flowing, and smooth.
E. After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solution.
3.5 CAP FLASHING
A. Install two-piece cap flashing in conjunction with base flashing as indicated on the drawings.
The built-in or receiver portion of the flashing and the cap portion or insert shall be made of
separate pieces. The cap shall be installed after the base flashing are in place. The built-in
portion shall be set with a bed of mortar above and below the copper. All flashing shall be
installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and the Sheet Metal
Contractor shall be responsible for its proper installation.
B. The built-in portion of the flashing or receiver shall extend 4-inch into masonry wall
terminating with a 1/4-inch hooked edge. The edge to which the separate cap or insert member
shall connect, shall have a special factory formed vertical locking slot which requires no
malleting or bending to hold the cap member in place. A slip tongue shall insure alignment of
vertical locking slot. End joints of receiver shall be lapped and interlocked, and shall not be
soldered except at corners and for special conditions.
C. The cap member shall be factory formed to provide spring action against base flashing. The
upper edge of cap member shall be made to snap lock into vertical slot of wall flashing. The
cap member shall not be less than 4-inch wide and shall lap base flashing not less than 3-inch.
The end of each length of cap shall lap not less than 3-inch.
END OF SECTION 07620
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07620-6 05113105
D. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-
'' resistant performance once installed where so required.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams and inaccessible joints with flat-lock seams true to line,
sweating full of solder. Make lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2-111ch wide.
Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 3-inches.
Make flat and lap seams in the direction of flow.
F. Joints: Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for additional strength and
stiffness.
G. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
H. Expansion Provisions: Form, fabricate, and install sheet metal so as to adequately provide for
expansion and contraction in the finished work. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for
flashing runs of more than 40'-0" except where closer spacing is indicated or required for proper
installation. Space movement joints at maximum of 10-feet with no joints allowed within 24-
inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints
of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inchdeep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed
within joints).
I. Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces
at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
J. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed
on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
1. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than eight inches apart and, where
exposed to the weather, use lead washers.
2. For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing nails 1-1/4 -inch long by 11-gage.
3. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plug holes and plugs.
K. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, without nailing through the
exterior metal. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal
component being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal recommended by sheet
metal manufacturer.
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for
application but never less than thickness of metal being secured.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07620-5 05113105
H. Adhesives: Type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather- ,,
resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
I. Paper Slip Sheet: 15-1b/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790,
Type 1, Style lb.
J. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D4397, minimum 6-mil thick black polyethylene film,
resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154.
K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type I, asbestos free,asphalt based.
2.3 METAL CAP FLASHING
A. Two-piece Cap Flashing: 16 ounce copper, soft or cold rolled.
B. Flat Copper Receiver Four Inches into Wall.
1. Built-in portion, 16 ounce cold rolled copper.
2. Cap member, 11 ounce cold rolled copper,factory formed.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify that substrate is sound,
dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage,and securely anchored.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.
B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim. Form sheet metal
accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing molded and broken surfaces
with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to
an accurate fit and soldering securely. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered
before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back 1/2-inch to form
hems.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07620-4 05113105
C. Sheet Copper: 16 ounce, cold-rolled copper sheet conforming to ASTM B370, Temper H00 or
HO1,except as otherwise indicated.
D. Lead-Coated Copper: 16 ounce cold-rolled copper sheet with 15 pounds lead coating per 100
square feet, conforming to ASTM 13101,Temper H00 and 1401, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M,Type 304,No. 2D(dull,cold rolled) finish.
F. All sheet metal flashing, unless otherwise indicated shall be 16 ounce sheet copper, flashing
exposed to view shall be lead-coated copper.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed,
noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Fasteners for copper shall be copper or hardware bronze of Stronghold type, or equal,
with large flat head. Not smaller than No. 12 stubs gauge (0.109 inch) and of sufficient
length to penetrate wood roof nailers not less than 7/8-inch.
2. Fasteners for aluminum sheet metal work shall be made of aluminum alloys 6061 or 5056
conforming to Federal specification FF-N-105,Type 2, Style 20.
3. Fasteners for fastening galvanized sheet metal work shall be made of stainless steel, non-
magnetic of type.
C. Solder:
1. Composed of 50% pig lead and 50% block tin for plain copper; 40% pig lead and 60%
block tin for lead-coated copper. Shall comply with ASTM B32.
2. Flux: Muriatic acid killed with zinc or an approved brand of soldering flux, shall be used.
Acid shall be thoroughly washed off after soldering is completed.
D. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, nondrying, non-migrating
sealant.
F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, non-corrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for nonmoving joints,including riveted joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07620-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: In addition to complying with pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," and the current
edition of"Copper and Common Sense" published by Revere Copper and Brass, Inc..
C. Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim reglets, and similar purposes
provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing
and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials
that might cause staining,denting, or other surface damage.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use intended and as
required for proper application of finish indicated but with not less than the strength and
durability properties specified in ASTM B209 for 5005-H15.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with
ASTM A526, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, with G90 coating
designation, mill phosphatized.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07620-2 05/13/05
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide flashing and sheet metal not specifically described in other Sections of these
Specifications but required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of the
building.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03450,Precast Architectural Concrete
2. Section 04210,Brick Masonry.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Masonry Units.
4. Section 07531,EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered.
5. Section 07650,Through-Wall Flashing
6. Section 07710, Prefabricated Coping and Gravelstop: for factory fabricated and finished
roof edge flashing and trim.
7. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
8. Division 15,Mechanical;penetrations through building.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Include sections, and specific details for fabrication and installation of flashing.
Show end-dams, corner conditions,transitions and other special applications. Include anchorage
details and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07620- 1 05/13/05
K. Daily Seal: Ensue that water does not flow beneath any completed sections of the membrane
system. Temporarily seal any loose membrane edge with roofing manufacturer's recommended
temporary sealant when weather is threatening.
1. Mix the two components thoroughly according to the instructions on the label.
2. Apply the temporary sealant at a rate of 100 lineal feet per gallon (on smooth surface), 12
inches back from the edge of the sheet onto the exposed substrate surface. If necessary,
use a trowel to spread materials in order to achieve a complete seal.
3. After embedding the membrane in temporary sealant, check for continuous contact.
Weight the edge,providing continuous pressure over the length of the cut.
4. When work is resumed, pull sheet free before continuing installation.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF BALLAST
A. Install protection mat over roofing membrane, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and
ends a minimum of 12 inches. Prior to placement of ballast, extend protection mat a minimum
of 2" above the anticipated ballast level at the perimeter. Provide additional matting around
penetrations to prevent direct contact between ballast and flashing
B. Apply decorative stone ballast uniformly over roofing membrane at the rate required for System
2 Ballasted Membrane Roofing System as defined by ANSI/SPRI RP-4-1997. Spread with care
to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofing system.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAY PAVERS
A. Provide additional layer of 045 inch thick EPDM membrane, loose laid, as protection under
concrete pavers.
B. Install pavers straight and aligned with edges butted.
END OF SECTION 07531
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 - 13 05/13/05
3. Flashing of the gravel stop deck flange shall extend 3 inches minimum past the point of
securement in all directions.
4. Flashing of the gravel stop deck flange shall provide complete coverage of the flange and
provide a minimum 3 inches wide splice to the adjoining deck membrane. Use the same
splice cement for sealing EPDM membrane flashing to the membrane and to the gravel
stop.
5. Gravel stop shall extend above gravel surface sufficiently to retain gravel and prevent
gravel migration.
F. Flashing-Coping Covers:
1. Extend membrane over plywood or wood blocking which forms the top of cornice and
secure to edge of wood molding. Nail membrane to continuous wood blocking at
perimeter of flat roof. After metal drip strip has been installed at edge of coping cover,
install membrane flashing over edge of flashing and a minimum of 3 inches beyond point
of securement. Install membrane flashing 3 inches both sides of point of securement of
membrane where it abuts coping.
G. Where base flashing occurs at masonry walls, install 1/8 inch x 1 inch aluminum flat bar- at top
of membrane and secure through flashing to structure. Apply lap sealant over edge of flat bar
and flashing.
H. Expansion Joints: Install in accordance with manufacturer's standard details.
1. Roof Drains:
1. Provide a smooth finish on the clean mating surfaces between the clamping ring and the
drain base.
2. Taper insulation around drain to prevent membrane from bridging and to provide a
smooth transition form roof surface to drain clamping ring.
3. The seal between the membrane and the drain base shall be provided by water cut off
mastic under constant,even compression as shown in manufacturer's standard details.
4. Follow drain manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
J. Surface Splices: Correction of splices,tears,etc., shall be accomplished by splicing a membrane
section over the affected area.
1. Select repair membrane which is the same material as that to be repaired.
2. Extend the repair membrane section at least 3 inches in every direction from the splice,
tear, etc., to be corrected.
3. To remove field dirt,clean the splice area with soap and water,rinse with clean water and
dry.
4. Follow manufacturer's splicing procedures.
5. NOTE: Surface splice at drain shall extend 6 inches onto horizontal surface of roof
membrane.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 07531 - 12 05113105
a. Loose lay the 6 inch wide reinforced strip along parapet walls and fasten with seam
fastening plates fastener to the roof deck or vertically into the parapet wall. All
fasteners must be installed so the tops of the fasteners are flush with the top of the
seam fastening plate. Spacing of the seam fastening plates shall be a maximum of
12 inches on center. If adjustment of fasteners becomes necessary to avoid
obstructions below the roof deck, roofing system manufacturer must be contacted
for specific requirements.
1) For horizontal attachment, the reinforced strip must be positioned a
minimum of 1/8 inch to a maximum of 6 inches away from the angle
change.
2) For vertical attachment, the reinforced strip must be attached to the vertical
wall and must extend a minimum of 3 inches onto the horizontal
substrate/insulation.
b. Adjoining sections of the reinforced strip need not be overlapped; however, gaps
between adjoining sections must not exceed 1 inch.
C. To clean the RUSS and deck membrane and to splice the deck membrane to the
reinforced strip, follow roofing manufacturer's instructions on membrane splicing,
excluding the use of in-seam sealant and lap sealant. The vertical field splices at
the base of a wall or curb must be overlaid with 6 inch wide uncured membrane
flashing centered over the field splice.
D. Membrane Flashings: Perimeter membrane flashing shall be done with uncured EPDM flashing
using the longest pieces practicable. Where roof parapets occur which are over 3 feet in height,
install flashing approved by roofing manufacturer. All flashings and terminations shall be done
e6k in accordance with roofing manufacturer's standard details or as detailed on the Drawings.
1. Complete splice between flashing and main roof sheet before bonding flashing to vertical
surface. Splice shall extend at least 3 inches beyond the fasteners which attach the
membrane to the horizontal surface. Apply bonding adhesive to both flashing and
surface to which it is being bonded, at a rate covering approximately 60 square feet of
finished surface per gallon. After the bonding adhesive has dried to the point where is
does not string or stick to a dry finger, roll the flashing into the adhesive. Care must be
taken to assure that the flashing does not bridge where there is a no change of direction.
Secure top edge of flashing to vertical substrate at 12 inches on center under metal
counterflashing or as otherwise detailed.
2. Flash all penetrates (pipes, conduits, posts, etc.) passing through the membrane. Flash
pipe with molded pipe flashings where installation is possible. Seal clusters of pipes and
unusual shaped penetrations with 2 inches minimum pourable sealers unless otherwise
detailed.
E. Flashing-Gravel Stops:
1. Deck membrane shall be installed over a perimeter wood nailer to the outside fascia of
the building. Membrane shall extend below and be secured to the wood nailer.
2. Gravel stop shall be installed and secured through the membrane as recommended by the
gravel stop manufacturer and according to an installation detail accepted by the
membrane manufacturer. Securement provided by the Contractor shall prevent buckling
and prevent metal gravel stop from pulling free.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING -ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 - 11 05/13/05
H. The membrane underlayment shall be butted together with no gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Gaps
greater than 1/4 inch shall be filled with the same material.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT
A. Install in strict accordance with roofing membrane manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mechanically attach to the roof deck with coated side up.
C. Recovery board shall be butted together with no gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Gaps greater than
1/4 inch shall be filled with the same material.
3.7 MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Execute work such that the membrane can be temporarily sealed on a down slope surface at the
end of each day with Nite Seal and Lay Flat Tubing according to daily seal procedures.
1. Position .060 inch thick, maximum 10 foot wide membrane over acceptable substrate
without stretching.
2. Allow membrane to relax approximately 1/2 hour prior to bonding.
3. Fold sheet back 5 feet so that half of the underside of the sheet is exposed. Sheet fold
shall be smooth without wrinkles or buckles.
4. Apply bonding adhesive evenly, without globs or puddles, with a 9 inch wide plastic core
short nap paint roller to both the sheet and the substrate at the rate specified on the
container label.
5. Do not apply bonding adhesive to the splice area.
6. Allow adhesive to dry until it is tacky, but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch,
followed by continuous bead of in-seam sealant applied to outer edge of sheet.
7. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles.
8. Brush down the bonded half of the sheet, immediately after rolling the sheet into the
adhesive, with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.
9. Fold back the unbonded half of the sheet and repeat the bonding procedure.
10. Install adjoining sheets in the same manner, overlap edges a minimum of 3 inches.
B. Perimeter Blocking:
1. Wood Blocking: Where wood blocking are indicated, attach membrane to wood
blocking using roofing nails spaced a maximum of 8" on center.
C. Additional perimeter securement: Securement must be provided at the perimeter of each roof
level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, etc., at any inside angle
change where slope or combined slopes exceed 2 inches in one horizontal foot, and at other
penetrations in accordance with roofing manufacturer's details and securement options as listed
below.
1. RUSS (Reinforced Universal Securement Strip)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 07531 - 10 05113105
E. Where penetrations are made through roofing system and existing insulation is disturbed by
new construction, install insulation to match existing roof assembly.
F. Flash all new penetrations through existing roofing systems.
3.3 APPLICATION OF VAPOR RETARDER -(U.L. LISTED ASSEMBLIES)
A. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications and in conjunction with
applicable UL design.
B. Coordinate with application of vapor retarder installed on perimeter walls of roof hatch to
ensure proper overlapping of systems.
C. Install vapor retarder over clean, dry decking prior to installation of gypsum thermal barrier.
Where metal deck occurs, apply parallel to the flutes and secure with asphalt. Overlap edges 2
inches and continuously seal.
3.4 APPLICATION OF THERMAL BARRIER(STEEL DECK ONLY)
A. Install perpendicular to the steel roof deck with joints staggered and occurring over the crests of
the roof deck. Secure to deck with adhesive applied at a rate of.04 gallons per 100 square feet.
3.5 APPLICATION OF ROOF INSULATION
A. Verify all dimensions, drain heights and drain locations in the field prior to installation of the
tapered roof insulation system.
B. Starting at low points (roof drains) lay tapered roof insulation. No more insulation shall be laid
in a day than can be covered with membrane roofing in the same day.
C. Fill insulation shall be utilized in V increments as necessary to achieve the specified thickness
and thermal values.
D. Locate valleys by snapping chalk lines from drains to rood edge. Adjacent valleys should form
90 degree right angles. Lacing of tapered panels at valleys,in lieu of mitering, is acceptable.
E. Install crickets where required.
F. Membrane underlayment shall be mechanically attached to the roof deck. Attachment shall be
1 insulation fastener and plate per every 2 square feet of insulation. No less than 2 fasteners
shall be used for securing cut insulation.
G. Insulation by manufacturers other than roofing membrane manufacturer shall be mechanically
attached to the roof deck according to the insulating manufacturer's written recommendations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 -9 05/13/05
5. Finish: Smooth ,
V. Protective Mat Fabric: Black, UV resistant polypropylene protective mat weighing 7 ounces per
square yard, as recommended by roofing manufacturer, for use with crushed stone and at
concrete pavers.
W. Decorative Ballasting: As defined in ANSUSPRI RP-4-1997.
1. Ballast#4:
a. Rounded water-worn gravel shall be 1-1/2 -inch inch nominal diameter. Gradation;
50% retained by a 3/4-inch screen, 95% retained by a 1/2-inch screen, and 98%
retained by a 1/4-inch screen. Use ASTM C136 method for sizing gravel.
b. Spread Rate: Minimum of 1000 pounds per 100 square feet.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system.
1. Roof surfaces before laying insulation and membrane roofing shall be smooth, firm, dry
and free from high spots, depressions, oil, grease, all loose and foreign material, ponded
water, ice or snow, shall be broom cleaned and comply with all requirements of the roof
manufacturer.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EXISTING ROOFS
A. All work shall be in strict conformance to original roofing system manufacturer's "Revision and
Alteration Procedures" and be performed by the roofing system manufacturer's authorized
roofing applicator.
B. Written authorization from original roofing system manufacturer shall be obtained prior to the
start of work.
C. Where work is to be performed in areas of existing roofing system, such roofs shall be
maintained and kept watertight until the completion of the new work.
D. Cut and patch existing roof assembly as required by new construction. Patched area shall be in
accordance with details and specifications of original roofing system manufacturer, and for the
tying in of existing roof assembly with single ply membrane flashing requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 - 8 05/13/05
3. Accessories: Provide sealants or tape as specified by manufacturer for installation of
vapor retarder.
P. Gypsum Wallboard Thermal Barrier: "Dens-Deck"Firestop Type X manufactured by Georgia-
Pacific, 5/8-inch thick, 4 foot by 8 foot. See UL directory for adhesive manufacturers whose
product may be used in the specified design for adhering gypsum thermal barrier.
Q. Insulation:
1. Tapered insulation systems:
a. "Styrofoam SM", Dow chemical Company.
b. "Foamular 250",U.C. Industries.
2. Taper system with minimum 3-inch at low point typically, tapering 1/8-inch per foot to
high points.
R. Membrane Underlayment: 1/2 inch "Sure-Seal HP" Recovery Board.
S. Fasteners:
1. Steel deck, 22 gauge or heavier.
a. Sure-Seal HP Fasteners are recommended. All fasteners must penetrate the deck a
minimum of 3/4 inch.
b. An alternate fastener must be recommended by the respective manufacturer and
accepted by Carlisle for use on each specific project prior to bid and installation of
the fastener.
fo"` C. Due to the fluted design of most steel decks, a specific effort is required to ensure
3/4-inch deck penetration by every fastener. Pre-bid investigation of deck
alignment,physical conditions and rib depth are strongly recommended along with
the practice of making a test installation. Pullout resistance of 400 pounds
minimum must be provided.
d. Decks heavier than 22 gauge may require pre-drilling.
2. Concrete deck: Sure-Seal Fasteners as recommended by roofing manufacturer that shall
provide a minimum pull out resistance of 800 pounds, and shall penetrate concrete deck a
minimum of 1-1/4 inches
T. Fastening Plates:
1. Carlisle Sure-Seal Fastening Plates as recommended by roofing manufacturer to secure
insulation or membrane underlayment. Fastening plates, by others, must be accepted by
Carlisle prior to project bid and installation.
U. Precast Concrete Paver System: Where indicated,provide precast concrete roof pavers.
1. Manufacturer and Type: "Pedestal® Pavers" paver system by Hanover Architectural
Products,Hanover,PA(717)637-0500.
2. Size: 23 1/2 inches by 23 1/2 inches by 2'/z inches thick.
3. Weight: 231bs per square foot.
4. Color: Natural
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 -7 05/13/05
a. Where White Roof Membrane is indicated, all exposed to view associated roofing •
products, such as but not limited to, membrane flashings and sealant shall be
white.
B. Membrane Flashings: Where membrane flashings are indicated on the drawings, they shall be
.060" thick Elastoform.
C. Roof Drains: Included under Division 15. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install
the roof drains, and make the caulking joint connection with the piping system. Flashing for
roof drains shall be furnished and installed under the work of this Section.
D. Rubber Fastening Strips: Extruded rubber fastening strips furnished by membrane
manufacturer, shall be indicated on the Drawings for the various locations shown and
recommended by membrane manufacturer.
E. Reinforced Universal Securement Strip (RUSS): 6-inch wide reinforced EPDM membrane
installed in conjunction with seam fastening plates.
F. Bonding Adhesive: Compatible with materials to which the membrane is to be bonded,
furnished by membrane manufacturer.
G. In-Seam Sealant: Shall be siliconized type recommended by manufacturer.
H. Splicing Cement: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
I. Splice Cleaner: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
J. Lap Sealant: Butyl base, compatible with materials with which it is used, shall be trowel or gun
consistency, furnished by membrane manufacturer.
K. Water Cut Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane
manufacturer.
L. Molded Pipe Flashing: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane
manufacturer.
M. Nite Seal: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane
manufacturer.
N. Pourable Sealer: Compatible with material with which it is used, furnished by membrane
manufacturer.
O. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarders in conjunction with UL-Listed roofing assemblies.
1. Manufacturer: Fortifiber Building Systems Group,Reno,NV 89509, (800)773-4777.
2. Product: Vaporstop 398 Roof Deck vapor Retarder, 32 inches wide by 405 lineal feet
long.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 -6 05113105
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Upon Substantial Completion of the Project and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the
Owner a copy of the manufacturer's written 10 year Total System Warranty, guaranteeing to
maintain the specified roof in a watertight condition
1. Warranty shall cover product quality, performance, and workmanship for a period of 10
years.
2. Warranty shall include Manufacturer's standard twenty year material only warranty
3. Warranty shall cover total roofing system, including roofing membrane, adhesives,
sealant, fasteners, membrane flashings, perimeter flashing, prefabricated coping and
gravelstops specified in other sections, and other related materials.
4. Warranty shall provide coverage for uplift created by peak wind speed of W miles per
hour.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
tow 1. Carlisle SynTec Systems (800)479-6832
2. Johns Manville, Inc. SPM Systems (800)654-3103
3. Versigard by Versico Inc. (800)992-7663
B. Basis of Design: The specifications included herein are those of Carlisle SynTec Roofing
System "Design "A" for an adhered roof membrane assembly. Provide specified product or
"SPM Systems"by Johns Manville,or"Versigard"by Versico. No other manufacturers will be
considered.
1. Existing Roofing Systems: Provide all materials required by the alteration work as
manufactured by or acceptable the original roofing system manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Roof Membrane: .060 inches thick, 20 feet x 100 feet or the longest sheet possible as
determined by the job condition, EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) compounded
elastomer,meeting the requirements of ASTM D3235.
1. Provide non-reinforced "Sure-Seal" black membrane typically, except provide "Sure-
White"membrane at entrance canopy roof.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 -5 05113105
F. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Section 07196—Air Barrier Systems.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name,product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for
storing and mixing with other components.
B. Storage of materials.
1. Store on a clean floor to keep ends of rolls free from foreign matter.
2. Store roofing materials in a dry place, on raised platforms, and cover with waterproof
tarpaulins, inside or in closed vans,protected from the sun and the weather.
3. Store solvents, adhesives and cements in a cool, dry area.
4. Keep lids tightly sealed on all containers.
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Oil base or plastic roof cement shall not be used. Do not allow waste products (petroleum,
grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in
contact with roofing system.
B. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180 degrees
Fahrenheit.
C. Cements and bonding adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are extremely flammable. Do
not breathe vapors or use near fire. Refer to container labels and material safety data sheets for
specific information. Splice cement used in the splicing procedure is extremely flammable, do
not use near fire, flame, in a confined or unventilated area. Dispense only from a UL listed or
approved safety can.
D. Ensure splicing and bonding surfaces are dry and clean.
E. Cold temperatures will not restrict installation of the roofing system. Follow specified
precautions for storage of materials and expose only enough cement and adhesive to be used
within a four hour period.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 -4 05113105
r
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Apply roofing system in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions using a
Roofing Contractor approved by the manufacturer of the roofing system.
B. Accomplish the following procedures prior to start of any work on existing roofs:
1. The existing roofing system is under warranty. Review proposed roofing work with
Owner's representative and obtain the warranty number assigned by original roofing
system manufacturer.
1 The Contractor shall notify the original roofing system manufacturer of the proposed
alterations in writing, identifying the project name, location, and warranty number.
3. Shop drawings outlining locations where the alterations will take place, and proposed
details shall be submitted by the Contractor to original roofing system manufacturer's
Technical Services Department.
4. Obtain written authorization from original roofing system manufacturer. prior to
commencement of roofing work.
C. Installer Qualifications: Authorized by roofing system manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years
of experience in installation of specified roofing system.
D. Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by the
manufacturer's inspector of the roofing system to ascertain that the roofing system has been
installed according to manufacturer's published specifications and details, prior to issuance of
warranty.
E. Pre-Roofing Conference:
1. Prior to installation of roofing and associated work, meet at project site with the roofing
subcontractor (Installer), roofing membrane sheet manufacturer, installers of related
work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, Owner and Architect.
2. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant.
3. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening pre-roofing
conference.
4. The pre-roofing conference shall include the following:
a. Review drawings, specifications and approved materials.
b. Correct conflicts, if any, between approvals and requirements of Contract
Drawings and Specifications.
C. Examine job site conditions, including inspection of deck, material labels and
methods of storing materials.
d. Confirm that nailers, curbs and edges are installed and meet specified
requirements.
e. Review installation procedures.
f. Review scheduling and temperature requirements.
g. Establish methods for protecting finished roof from other trades.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 -3 05/13/05
1. Design roofing system for peak wind speed of 70-miles per hour.
B. Underwriter's Laboratory Inc., Requirements
1. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in Building
Materials Directory, January 2004 or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory
for Class A rated materials/system.
2. Except as specified otherwise, materials and installation for roof assembly shall be in
strict accordance with UL design(s) detailed on the Drawings and all pertinent data as
indicated in Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. Fire Resistance Directory,January 2004.
C. Factory Mutual Requirements
1. FM listing: Provide EPDM sheet roofing system and component materials that have been
evaluated by Factory Mutual System for fire, wind up lift and hail damage and that are
listed in Factory Mutual System Approval Guide for Class I construction.
a. Wind Uplift Rating: Membrane roofing system shall be secured to decking in
accordance with requirements of FM 1-28 for Roof System Approval Ratings of
FM I-60, based on a Basic Wind Speed of 70 miles per hour.
2. Above-deck roof components shall be designed and installed in accordance with
requirements of FM 1-29 for performance requirements specified above.
3. Provide roof-covering materials that bear FM approval markings on the packaging.
4. Indicate that materials have been subjected to FM's examination and follow-up
inspection services.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, standard details, and other data needed
to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings, including plans, sections, project specific details and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades. Include the following
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Insulation fastening patterns.
D. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
E. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
roofing installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' - 2323 07531 -2 05113105
SECTION 07531 -EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide adhered membrane roofing system where indicated on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05800,Expansion Control.
2. Section 07195, Polyethylene Vapor Barriers: Coordination of polyethylene vapor retarder
with non-UL-Listed roofing system components.
3. Section 07620, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
4. Section 07710,Prefabricated Coping and Gravelstop
5. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum sheathing at parapet walls.
6. Division 15, Mechanical: for roof drains.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Factory Mutual:
1. Factory Mutual System Approval Guide,2004 edition.
2. Factory Mutual Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-28 (FM 1-28), Wind Loads to
Roof Systems, dated April 1998.
3. Factory Mutual Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-29 (FM 1-29),Above Deck Roof
Components,dated April 1998 and revised September 1998.
B. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.:
1. Fire Resistance Directory, 2004 edition
2. Roofing Materials &Systems Directory,2004 edition.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 07531 - 1 05/13/05
END OF SECTION 07412
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package' —2323 07412- 10 05113105
D. Install joint fillers, gaskets and sealants, of types recommended by metal wall panel
manufacturer, where shown and where required for a complete weatherproof installation and
compliance with specified performance requirements.
E. Separate dissimilar materials with coat of bituminous paint or sealant, and use gasketed
fasteners as recommended by the metal wall panel manufacturer.
F. Remove all strippable film for all work as it is erected and prior to moving to the next portion or
area.
3.4 INSTALLATION—SUBFRAMING
A. Subfi-aming Channel Attachment: Attach metal furring as dictated by installation requirements.
Install over sheathing, securing through sheathing and into metal stud framing with 2 fasteners
of size and type as recommended by furring manufacturer. Nest channels 8-inches at splices and
anchor with two fasteners in each wing.
3.5 INSTALLATION—METAL FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL
A. General: Install the composite wall panel system, attachment clips, fasteners, splines, trim and
related items in accordance with dimensions and procedures shown on the approved shop and
erection drawings and as required for a complete installation.
, * 1. Install the composite wall panel system using manufacturer's "Rear-Ventilated Rain
Screen"method.
B. Attach panel clips to sub-framing support system at locations, spacings, and with self-tapping
fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips
with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective covering and strippable film, if any, as work is installed and prior
to moving to the next portion or area, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt and
sealants.
C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after completion of installation in accordance with
recommendations of panel and coating manufacturer.
D. Repair or replace all damaged material. Maintain protection of completed or installed walls
from damage by other trades during construction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412-9 05/13/05
d. No checking,crazing, adhesion loss.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrates where panels are to be installed to verify that substrates, sheathing,
supplemental framing system, and other conditions, are in compliance with specified tolerances.
B. Inspect delivered materials upon receipt to insure that no damage has occurred during shipment.
C. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verity that substrate layout complies with shop drawing layout.
B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with Section 07600 — Flashing and Sheet
Metal, and Section 07710—Prefabricated Coping and Gravelstop.
C. Install sub-framing, furring channels, clip angles, base flashing, sills, and other miscellaneous
support members and anchorage according to metal wall panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to furring and framing members, unless otherwise indicated.
Anchor metal wall panels and other components securely in place, with provisions for thermal
and structural movement.
B. Install panels and trim members in accordance with panel manufacturer's approved shop
drawings. Erect panels plumb, level and true, and in alignment with adjacent wall panels.
Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. Anchor panels and trim securely in
place using concealed fasteners as recommended by the panel manufacturer to within the
following tolerances:
1. Substructure: Design panel system to accommodate sub-structure tolerance of+0/-1/8".
2. Finish Surface: Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected
panels: 1/4-inch in 20 feet,non-cumulative.
C. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in a manner which would
damage the finish,decrease strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance.
Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412-8 05113105
3. Provide factory applied continuous strippable polyethylene film to protect panel finish
from damage.
4. Maximum deviation from panel flatness shall be 1/8-inch in 5'-0" on panel in any
direction for assembled units;non-accumulative,no oil-canning.
F. Formed Trim: Fabricated trim and flashing materials from 0.030-inch thick aluminum sheet
with finish to match adjacent wall panel system.
G. Sub-Framing: Metal furring channels, Z-shaped, fabricated of 20 gage hot-dipped galvanized
steel.
23 FINISHES
A. Finish:
1. Coil coated KYNAR O 500 or HYLAR x 5000 based polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)
resin in conformance with the following general requirements of AAMA 2605.
a. Colors:
1) Panel Type MP-1: Silver Metallic, A-3001-DXLE
2) Panel Type MP-2: Alabaster, 1-30-D
2. Coating Thickness: 1.0 mil (+0.2mil).
3. Hardness: ASTM D3363; F minimum using Eagle Turquoise T2375.
4. Impact:
a. Test Method: ASTM D-2794 Gardner Variable Impact Tester with 5/8" mandrel.
tow b. Coating shall withstand direct and reverse impact of 1 5 inch pounds per mil
substrate thickness.
C. Coating shall adhere tightly to metal when subjected to#600 Scotch Tape pick-off
test. Slight microcracking permissible. No star cracking or removal of film to
substrate shall occur.
5. Adhesion:
a. Test Method: ASTM D3359 at room temperature.
b. Coating shall not pick off of a 1/16 inch crosshatched grid with reverse impact of
1.5 inch pounds per mil substrate thickness and taped with#600 Scotch Tape.
6. Humidity Resistance:
a. Test Method: ASTM D2247.
b. No formation of blisters when subjected to condensing water fog at 100% relative
humidity and 100°F for 4000 hours.
7. Salt Spray Resistance:
a. Test Method: ASTM B117; Expose coating system to 4000 hours, using 5% NaCl
solution.
b. Corrosion creepage from scribe line: 1/16-inch maximum.
C. Minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field.
8. Outdoor Weather Exposure:
a. Ten-year exposure at 45° angle facing south Florida exposure.
b. Maximum color change of 5 Delta units as calculated in accordance with ASTM
D2244.
C. Maximum chalk rating of 8 in accordance with ASTM D4214.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412 -7 05113105
2.2 METAL FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL
A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal-faced composite wall panels composed
of a solid core of thermoplastic compound sandwiched between two metal sheet facings.
Include attachment system components and accessories required for weathertight system.
B. Products:
1. Manufacturer and Type:
a. Alcan Composites USA, Inc., "Alucobond".
b. Reynolds Metal Company, "Reynobond PE".
2. Panel Thickness: 4mm.
C. Materials:
1. Aluminum Sheet: Smooth coil-coated sheet, of alloy and temper as standard with panel
manufacturer to suit forming and performance requirements, not than 0.020-inch thick.
2. Core: Manufacturer's standard solid extruded thermoplastic core.
D. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Fasteners: Non-corrosive fasteners of size and type as recommended by the panel
manufacturer for the application and substrate conditions. Provide concealed fasteners,
except where unavoidable.
a. Color: Fasteners, where exposed shall be provided with heads matching color of
metal panel.
2. Accessories:
a. Extrusions, formed members, sheet, and plate shall conform with ASTM B209 and
the recommendations of the manufacturer.
b. Sealants: Sealants and gaskets as per panel manufacturer's standards and as
required to comply with performance requirements.
C. Reticulated Foam Inserts: Flexible polyurethane foam with three-dimensional
skeletal structure and few or no membranes between strands.
E. Fabrication: Panels shall be formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between
dissimilar materials. Core material shall be free of voids and/or air spaces. Fabricate composite
wall panels to the greatest extent possible in the factory, formed into profile for installation
method indicated. Panel lines, breaks and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from
warp and buckle.
1. Panel stiffeners, where required as internal reinforcing to composite panels, shall be
structurally fastened or restrained at the ends and shall be secured to the rear face of the
composite panel with compatible silicone of sufficient size and strength to maintain panel
flatness.
2. Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but shall be kept to an absolute
minimum
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412-6 05113105
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be authorized by manufacturer, with a minimum of 5
years of experience in installation of architectural metal systems similar in size and nature of
this project.
C. Panel manufacturer/installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all cornporients of the
exterior panel system including, but not limited to attachment to sub-construction, panel to
Panel joinery, panel to dissimilar material joinery, and joint seal associated with the panel
system.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel through one source from a single
manufacturer
1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed.
Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and damage to surface and edges. Store material in accordance with panel manufacturer's
recommendation.
C. Protect finish with strippable polyethylene in accordance with panel manufacturer's
recommendations.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before metal wall panel
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for each metal wall panel specified is based on the
product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or
a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide products by the manufacturer
specified, alternate manufacturers will not be accepted.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412-5 05113105
780 CMR, in its entirety, and for seismic forces (Fp) in accordance with the formula Fp=
A,.C,PW,;where the following values are used:
a. The coefficient representing effective peak velocity-related acceleration (A,,) =
0.12g.
b. The seismic coefficient for architectural components (C„):
1) Components (C,) =0.9.
2) Attachments (CJ= 3.0
C. Performance criteria factor from Table 1612.7.3 of 780 CMR (P) = 1.5.
d. W,= weight of architectural component.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
13. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, material descriptions and finishes, installation instructions, and
other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout and
elevations of metal wall panels. Indicate thickness and dimension of individual components,
fastening and anchorage methods, details of edge conditions and interface with the work of
adjacent trades, location of joints including joints to accommodate thermal movement, sealants
and gaskets; trim, flashing,closures,and accessories.
D. Samples:
1. Panel Assembly: Two samples of each type of assembly, 12” x 12" minimum. Include
joint for composite panels and fasteners, closures, gaskets, and other metal wall panel
accessories.
2. Samples for Verification: Six samples each color or finish selected, 3 inches x 5 inches
minimum.
E. Materials Certificates: Manufacturer's affidavit certifying material meets requirements
specified.
F. Coating Applicator's Certification: Prior to application of finish materials, submit coating
manufacturer's written approval of applicator.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience
in manufacturing of architectural metal systems. Manufacturer shall have complete in-house
engineering facilities.
Awk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412-4 05113105
4. 22.5 in. lb./in. after 21 days soaking in water at 70 degrees F.
E. Fire Performance: Provide metal wall panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide wall panel system with foamed core and
interior surface with the following surface-burning characteristics per ASTM E 84.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
2. ASTM E162; No surface flaming.
3. UBC 17-5; No flame spread along interior face or penetration through the wall assembly.
F. Structural Performance:
1. Structural Performance—Implied Loads: Design and construct metal wall panel system to
withstand minimum loading requirements as specified herein.
a. Design and engineer metal wall panel system in accordance with procedures for
determining design wind loads for components and cladding for building height
>60 feet, pursuant to §1609.8.2 of BOCA '99, incorporating the following project-
specific values:
1) Salient Corners: Within 14-feet of exterior corners.
2) Basic Wind Speed: 70 mph
3) Exposure Category: C.
4) Basic Velocity Pressure: (P,,): 1.2.5
5) Wind Load Importance Factor(1): 1.16
6) Product of Internal Pressure Coefficient and Gust Response Factor (GCp):
Condition (+0.25 and—0.25).
b. Window load testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E330 to obtain
the following results:
1) Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the secured
perimeter-framing members shall not exceed 1/175 or 3/4-inch, whichever is
less.
2) Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not
exceed L/60 of the full span.
3) Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/.16-inch.
4) At 1-1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing members
shall not exceed L/100 of span length and components shall not experience
failure or gross permanent distortion. At connection points of framing
members to anchors,permanent set shall not exceed 1/16-inch.
G. Seismic Requirements
1. General Seismic Requirements: Architectural components and their attachments shall
comply with seismic design requirements of the referenced building code for a project in
Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III, with a Seismic Performance Category of D:
2. Architectural Components Design: The glazed aluminum curtain wall system and
attachments shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Section 1612.7.3 of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412-3 05113105
B. The BOCA a National Building Code 11999, Fourteenth Edition, referred to herein as "BOCA
99":
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the performance
requirements for design wind loads, and other designated or applicable loads for metal
wall panel system as it pertains to exterior cladding of the building.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Metal Wall Panel System: consists of metal wall panels of size, type and profile indicated, and
includes all attachment system components, miscellaneous framing, related trim, flashings,
sealants and accessories necessary for a complete system meeting the specified requirements for
wind loading, air infiltration and water penetration.
1. Rai nscreen-Principle Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard pressure-equalized,
rainscreen-principle system, with concealed drainage of baffles and weeps for water
which may accumulate in the members of the system. Provide horizontal and vertical
joints with reveal as detailed.
a. Do not apply sealants to joints, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. The anchorage system shall be designed so that the panels are secure and accommodate
expansion and contraction.
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General: Provide metal wall panel systems that comply with performance requirements as
specified. If system tests are not available, mock-ups shall be constructed and tests performed
under the direction of an independent third party laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction which show compliance to the following minimum standards.
B. Water Penetration: No water infiltration of panel assembly shall occur under a differential static
pressure of 6.24 psf after 15 minutes of exposure when tested in accordance with AST VI Test
Procedure E331.
C. Thermal Performance: Design metal wall panel system to provide free and noiseless vertical
and horizontal movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, including oil canning, when subject to material
temperature range of-20°F to+180°F.
D. Bond Integrity: When tested for bond integrity, in accordance with ASTM D1781 (simulating
resistance to panel delamination), there shall be no adhesive failure of the bond (a) between the
core and the skin nor(b)cohesive failure of the core itself below the following values:
1. Bond Strength: 214 psi(vertical pull).
2. Peel Strength: 22.5 in. lb./in. as manufactured.
3. 22.5 in. lb./in. after 8 hours in water at 200 degrees F.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412-2 05113105
' SECTION 07412 -MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all material, labor and equipment to complete the installation of exterior metal wall
panel system(s) of the following types as shown on the Drawings and herein specified.
Installation shall include all related trim, fasteners and other devices for secure anchorage of
panels to substructure provided for this purpose.
1. Metal faced composite wall panels.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
.,, 1. Section 05800, Expansion Control: for exterior joint assemblies to receive metal faced
composite wall panel finish.
2. Section 07196,Air Barrier System: for weather barrier behind metal wall panel system.
3. Section 07600,Flashing and Sheet Metal: for field fabricated flashing and trim not part of
the metal wall panel system.
4. Section 07710, Prefabricated Coping and Gravelstop: for manufactured fascia, copings
and trim not part of the metal wall panel system.
5. Section 07920, Joint Sealants: for sealants and gaskets not part of the metal wall panel
system.
6. Section 08911, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall: for coordination of metal panel system
with curtain wall framing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the seismic
requirements for metal wall panel system as it pertains to exterior cladding of the
building.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07412- 1 05113105
B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive foam insulating sealants in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within specified ranges.
3. In low humidity, mist area with water to aid cure of one component sealant.
4. Paint or cover foam exposed to ultra-violet radiation.
5. Avoid overfilling restricted spaces.
6. Install foam sealant in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and all other
applicable regulations pertaining to sealing materials.
B. Installation Areas: Provide continuity with the air/vapor barrier, seal the following areas:
1. Aluminum curtainwall heads,jambs and sills.
2. Aluminum storefront framing heads,jambs and sills.
3. Architectural louver heads,jambs and sills.
4. Sliding entrance system door head,jambs and threshold.
5. Aluminum framing and thresholds at aluminum manual swinging doors.
6. Pressed metal frames and thresholds at hollow metal doors in exterior walls.
7. Miscellaneous penetrations through primary air barrier system installed in non fire-rated
exterior walls.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean and make good surfaces soiled or damaged by work of this Section.
B. Remove excess sealant with recommended solvent.
C. Remove debris and surplus materials upon completion of work.
END OF SECTION 07275
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FOAM INSULATING SEALANT
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07275 -4 05113105
AVW
C. Foam Sealant shall comply with the following physical characteristics:
ASTM Test
Property Method Result
Flexural Strength:
Parallel, psi C-203 18.7
Perpendicular,psi 35.1
Compressive Strength:
Parallel, psi D-1621 15.6
Perpendicular,psi 7.3
Water Absorption D-2842 2.3
Open Cell Content D-2856 <2%
Tensile Strength:
Parallel,psi D-1623 36.1
Perpendicular,psi 22.7
Shear Strength:
Parallel, psi C-273 12.8
Perpendicular,psi 10.6
Water Vapor Transmission
(perm-in) E-96 9.8
Fire Safety Testing
Flame Spread E-84 25
Smoke Developed 350
Flame Spread Index E-162 25 or less
D. Primer: As recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.
E. Substrate Cleaner: Non-corrosive type recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FOAM INSULATING SEALANT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07275 -3 05113105
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Certifications: Manufacturer shall provide written certification that products furnished under
this section are free of urea compounds in accordance with the provisions of §2603.1.1 of 780
CMR.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Applicator must be company specializing in performing the work of
this section with a minimum of 2 years documented experience and approved by materials'
manufacturer.
B. Code Compliance All products furnished under the work of this section shall be free of urea
compounds prohibited under §2603.1.1 of 780 CMR.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as specified in Section 07196 —Air Barrier
Systems.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials
manufacturer before,during and after installation.
B. Do not install two component foam sealant materials in enclosed spaces without ventilation.
Alternatively, appropriate breathing apparatus should be worn.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Design is based on products by Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
MI 48674, (800) 366-4740, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by another manufacturer. The Architect will be the sole judge in
determining the equivalency of the proposed system.
B. Foam Insulating Sealant: Provide two-component, polyurethane sealant, density 1.75 - 25FS,
cream colored sealant;Froth-Pak Polyurethane Spray Foam System by Dow, or approved equal.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FOAM INSULATING SEALANT
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07275 -2 05/13/05
SECTION 07275 -FOAM INSULATING SEALANT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide foam insulating sealant to supplement air barrier system and other assemblies to
prevent air leakage in the building envelope.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07115,Dampproofing: Below grade dampproofing.
2. Section 07195, Polyethylene Vapor Barriers
3. Section 07196,Air Barriers
4. Section 07210,Building Insulation
5. Section 07840,Firestops and Smokeseals
6. Section 07920,Joint Sealants
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Foam insulating sealant is a two-component polyurethane foamed-in-place system for air
leakage control and insulation of gaps,cracks,cavities and joints in the building envelope.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
B. ASTM E-84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
C. ASTM E-162 Test method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy
Source.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FOAM INSULATING SEALANT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07275 - 1 05/13/05
KdSTE ,m
Quality Worldwide
Koester American Corp.
LIMITEDI K®ESTER YAP I® 2060 SYSTEM
WARRANTY
PROJECT: DATE STARTED:
ADDRESS: DATE FINISHED:
APPLICATOR:
SIZE: _
KOES'FER FINAL FLOOR
SYSTEM: COVER SYSTEM
APPLIED: APPLIED:
Koester American Corporation will warrant for a period of ten (10) years the Koester VAP Ic�) 2000 against material defects.
In addition, Koester American Corporation will warrant the water vapor transmission reduction as shown in Koester American
Corporation printed literature, if Koester American Corporation's suggested application instructions and any other technical
information stipulated in Koester American corporation's literature are strictly followed.
This limited warranty covers against failure due to concrete water vapor transmission only and includes the following:
1. Koester American Corporation approved adhesives
2. Koester American Corporation approved cementitious underlayments
3. Floor covering systems(including epoxy and polyurethane systems)
4. All labor charges involved
This limited warranty is further subject to the following conditions:
1) Koester American Corporation products must be applied as per Koester American Corporation application
specifications on"structurally sound"and clean areas in which the concrete meets acceptable industry standards
as defined in ACI Committee 201 Report, "Guide to Durable Concrete". If the areas to which the products are
applied now or in the future fail to meet these standards,the aforementioned warranty shall be void.
2) The foregoing warranty shall be void if a cohesive substrate failure in the concrete surface occurs and/or concrete
surfaces have been treated with any kind of penetrating surface sealer like silicates.
3) The aforementioned warranty shall be void if the products are applied to improper substrates such as cracks,
expansion joints and surface honeycombs in areas not properly prepared per Koester American Corporation
surface preparation requirements, or bond inhibiting contaminants are present preventing proper
performance/adhesion of Koester products.
4) The foregoing warranty shall be void if Koester American Corporation's required guidelines for material
coverage/surface preparation are not strictly followed(see product specifications).
5) The foregoing warranty shall be void if any cracks develop after the application of Koester American
Corporation products or leakage/water vapor transmission occurs due to pin holes in the coating.
6) The foregoing warranty shall be void if the Koester American Corporation products have been applied by an
applicator not approved/certified by Koester American Corporation.
Subject to the foregoing, the sole and exclusive remedy due to a breach of this warranty shall be expressly limited to the
repair of defective areas due to failure of Koester American Corporation products, and shall expressly exclude consequential
damages including, but not limited to, damages to structure or to contents of structures. All accounts must be paid in full prior
to any warranty being issued or enforced.
The beneficiary of the warranty must provide Koester American Corporation, 1206 Laskin Road, Suite 201, Virginia
Beach, Virginia 23451, a written notice within thirty (30) days of the discovery of a breach of this warranty in order to assert
its right to any repairs covered by this warranty.
Harald Muench-President
1206 Laskin Road, Suite 201 0 Virginia Beach, Va 23451 0 Tel. (757) 425-1206 p Fax (757) 425-
Consult the adhesive manufacturer for their minimum recommended thickness of cementitious
underlayment to absorb excess moisture in the adhesive. Leveling of the substrate shall not be
considered part of the water vapor reduction system. No exceptions.
D. For installation of resilient flooring directly over the water vapor reduction system, the
contractor responsible for installing the floor covering system shall use 100% solids adhesives
and or contact type adhesives with long working times that can be applied to substrates with a
pH up to 10. The method of use is to apply the contact type adhesives to the substrate and allow
the materials water to flash off prior to the flooring installation. Always test proper adhesion of
adhesive to water vapor reduction system prior to installation of entire flooring systems. No
exceptions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean all tools and equipment with xylene immediately after use for the VAP 1 2000 System
and water when using VAP 1 Primer for water vapor reduction.
B. Remove all debris resulting from water vapor reduction system installation from project site.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect each coat during specified cure period from any kind of traffic, topical water, and
contaminants.
END OF SECTION 07265
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 -8 05/13/05
G. Proper removal of contaminants may render surfaces too rough for certain flooring systems.
Therefore shotblast a small test area and verify with the flooring applicator that the surfaces are
fit to receive the specified flooring system without the application of an underlayment on top of
the VAP 12000 System.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. VAP 10 2000 System Application:
1. The coverage rates for this Single Coat system depend on the surface texture and porosity
of the substrate as well as the measured level of moisture from Section 3.1 Examination.
On average, coverage of 90 to 130 sq.ft./gal. can be expected.
2. Approximate Coverages Relative to Existing Levels of Moisture Vapor.
Up to 8 lbs./1000 sq.ft./24hr. 130 sq.ft./gal.
Up to 15 lbs./1000 sq.ft./24hr. 90 sq.ft./gal.
Up to 25 lbs./1000 sq.ft./24hr. 70 sq.ft./gal.
3. Apply one coat of VAP 1® 2000 at an average coverage rate of 90 to 130 sq.ft./gal. using
a squeegee and or a 3/8-inch nap roller leaving NO areas untreated. Allow to cure a
minimum of 12 hours before installing flooring system. (See additional application
instructions in Koester technical data sheets.)
B. Optional: VAP 1 Primer System Application; (For very porous surfaces to avoid out gasing/ air
displacement, see technical brochures.)
1. Dampen uncontaminated concrete surface, (SSD) Surface Saturated Dry, leaving NO
standing water. Surfaces must be damp, not wet to the touch. Always use clean potable
water to pre-dampen concrete surfaces. Only pre-dampen concrete prior to the first VAP
Primer coat. DO NOT pre-dampen between subsequent coats of the VAP Systems.
2. Spray VAP 1 Primer leaving no areas untreated. Back brush thoroughly.
3. Avoid puddling and pinholes when back brushing.
4. Provide continuous ventilation and air movement during curing process.No exceptions.
5. Apply first VAP I Primer coat at a rate of 250 sf per gallon and allow to cure a minimum
of 6 hours. (See additional application instructions in Koester technical data sheets.)
6. Apply one coat of VAP 10 2000 at an average coverage rate of 90 to 130 sf per gallon
using a squeegee and or 3/8-inch nap roller leaving NO areas untreated. Allow to cure a
minimum of 12 hours before installing flooring system. (See additional application
instructions in Koester technical data sheets.)
C. A cementitious underlayment system with an approved epoxy primer if required by the Owner,
Floor Covering Installer, or the Floor Covering Manufacturer may be used to level and smooth
surfaces after shotblasting the floor on top of the water vapor reduction system. The
underlayment system utilized must be tested and approved (no exceptions) by the manufacturer
of the underlayment system prior to installation. No underlayment system containing gypsum
will be allowed. When water based adhesives are utilized in the floor covering installation, use
an approved underlayment system with primer prior to the installation of the flooring system.
low
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 -7 05113105
C. Floor treatment calcium chloride tests:
1. After proper cure of the final coat of the water vapor reduction system the Owner's
Special Inspector shall provide calcium chloride tests to determine if the level of water
vapor transmission and alkalinity are reduced to the Owner's specified levels in
conjunction with the flooring manufacturers installation requirements. Contact Owner
and water vapor reduction system Manufacturer's Representative concerning areas with a
water vapor transmission level greater than the Owner's specified levels.
D. Adhesion tests:
1. The Owner's Special Inspector will verify proper adhesion of flooring adhesives,
coatings, and leveling compounds to the final vapor reduction coating system for
acceptability. Contact Manufacturer's Representatives for recommendations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspect all surfaces with regard to their suitability to receive moisture vapor reduction system
with vapor reduction coating system by Manufacturer's Representative.
B. Clean all surfaces to receive moisture vapor reduction system. Shotblast all floors and clean
surfaces with Shop Vac to remove all residue off the substrate. Remove defective materials,
and foreign matter such as dust, adhesives, leveling compounds, paint, dirt, floor hardeners,
bond breakers, oil, grease, curing agents, form release agents, efflorescence, laitance, Shotblast
bee bees, etc. Repair all cracks, expansion joint, control joints, and open surface honeycombs
and fill in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations. Inform vapor reduction system
manufacturer if concrete additives like chlorides or any other soluble compounds that can
contaminate surfaces have been used in the concrete mix. Reinforcing fibers must be burned
off, scraped and vacuumed. Remove, after shotblasting, leaving no fibers left on the concrete
surfaces.
C. Provide uncontaminated,absorbtive, sound surface. DO NOT ACID ETCH!
D. Repair concrete prior to moisture vapor reduction system installation by utilizing Koester SB
Bonding Emulsion with approved concrete repair materials. Comply with all requirements as
listed in Manufacturer's technical data information. No exceptions. Consult with vapor
reduction manufacturer.
E. Make sure that surfaces to be treated with moisture vapor reduction system have NOT
previously been treated with other materials like underlayments, screeds, penetrating sealants,
etc. If this is the case,consult with the Manufacturers Representative prior to any application of
moisture vapor reduction system.
F. Only a surface substrate that remains uncontaminated,absorbtive, and sound shall be considered
fit to receive a water vapor reduction system. Comply with all requirements as listed in
Manufacturer's technical data information. No exceptions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 -6 05113105
2.5 MIX DESIGNS
A. Use clean containers and mix thoroughly as per manufacturer's requirements to obtain a
homogeneous mixture. Use a low speed motor less than 400 rpm and a two bladed Jiffy mixing
blade only. DO NOT AERATE. Mix ratios are measured by volume.
B. VAP 10 2000 Mix Ratio: Mix Component A and B at a ratio of 2.4:1.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Calcium chloride test requirements:
1. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing shall be performed by the Owners Special Inspector
as outlined in Section 01410—Testing Laboratory Services.
2. Provide anhydrous calcium chloride tests according ASTM F 1869 - 98 in accordance to
all surface preparation methods outlined. Tests shall be installed onto freshly abraded
contaminant free concrete. No exceptions.
3. Only conduct calcium chloride tests at the same temperature and humidity expected
during normal use. If this is not possible,then the test conditions should be 75° F +- 10°
F and 50+- 10% relative humidity. Maintain these conditions 48 hours prior to and
during tests. Water vapor transmission levels are directly affected by ambient room
temperature and readings conducted without a sustained ambient temperature are NOT
acceptable.
4. Owner's Special Inspector shall provide test results with a marked up floor finish plan
showing test results. Owner's Special Inspector will provide a written clarification on
status of the ambient air temperature and humidity before and during the testing
procedures.
5. Owner's Special Inspector will provide a marked up floor plan showing areas with vapor
reduction system recommendations.
B. Initial calcium chloride tests:
1. Before installation of tile, terrazzo, VCT, resilient sheet flooring, carpet, and or epoxy
flooring systems over interior concrete slabs, the Owner's Special Inspector will make
known the level of water vapor transmission in the slab in accordance to ASTM F 1869-
98 to all parties involved. The Owner's Special Inspector will document the test results
and provide recommendations on the type of moisture vapor reduction system to be
utilized.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 -5 05/13/05
B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Koester VAP 10 2000 System by Koester American Corporation;
Corporate Headquarters: (757)425-1206.
C. Terminology hereafter is based upon the products of Koester American Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Use materials of one manufacturer throughout the project as hereinafter specified.
B. Water-based primer/curing agent, 100% solids VAP 10 2000 coating, containing specifically
formulated chemicals and resins to provide the following characteristics and properties.
I. ASTM E 96, Water Vapor Transmission (dry and wet methods) Performance shall be
documented by an independent testing laboratory at a minimum 90% for Koester VAP
10 2000 System water vapor transmission reduction compared to untreated ACI
Committee 201 durable concrete.
2. Certify acceptance and exposure to continuous topical water exposure after final cure.
2.3 KOESTER VAP 1® 2000 SYSTEM
A. This one (1) coat system consists of one (1) coat of VAP 10 2000 applied to a properly
prepared concrete surface. The water vapor reduction system shall be required to reduce vapor
emissions by a minimum of 90% after final cure.
B. Verify water vapor emission by anhydrous calcium chloride testing according to ASTM F 1869-
98 prior to proceeding with any floor covering installation. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing
performed by the Owner's Special Inspector resulting in water vapor transmission levels greater
than 3 lbs/24hrs. per 1000/sf. and less than 25 lbs/24 hrs per 1,000/sf. (depending on individual
conditions) shall determine where this system is utilized and the coverage rates required.
2.4 AREAS NOT REQUIRING VAPOR REDUCTION SYSTEM
A. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing performed by the Owner's Special Inspector for interior
concrete slab areas receiving resilient sheet flooring material will determine where these
systems might be required. Water vapor reduction system might be required on concrete floors
with water vapor transmission level less than 3 lbs/24 hrs per 1,000 sf or 5 lbs for some specific
flooring systems, verify with flooring system manufacturer.
B. Water vapor reduction system is not required on interior concrete slabs without floor finishes.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 -4 05113105
C. Handle product in a manner that will prevent breakage of containers and damage products.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
1. Do not apply moisture vapor reduction system to unprotected surfaces or when water is
accumulated on the surface of the concrete.
2. Do not apply water vapor reduction system when temperature is lower than 50° F or
expected to fall below this temperature within 24 hours from time of application.
3. Allow continuous ventilation and indirect air movement at all times during application
and curing process of the water vapor reduction system.
B. Protection: Protect water vapor reduction system to prevent damage from active rain or topical
water for a minimum period of 24 hours from time of application.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Before installation of the receiving finish flooring materials over the interior concrete slabs,
anhydrous calcium chloride testing shall be performed per ASTM F 1869-98 by the Owner's
Special Inspector to determine the level of water vapor transmission in the slab and the type of
moisture vapor reduction system required.
B. The Owner's Special Inspector will coordinate with the Owner scheduling water vapor
reduction system testing and allowing enough time to test, submit and install the water vapor
reduction system before installation of floor finish.
C. The Owner's Special Inspector will allow for as much time as is reasonable for the concrete slab
to dry before installing anhydrous calcium chloride tests. All mastics, glues, and contaminants
shall be removed to provide a clean, sound, concrete substrate prior to installing anhydrous
calcium chloride tests as per ASTM F 1869-98. No Exceptions!
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written warranty signed by water vapor emission control
system manufacturer and installer covering work of this Section, including removing and
reinstalling flooring system and all related labor charges, for a period of 10 years.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Water vapor reduction system shall be the product of a single manufacturer, no substitutions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 -3 05/13/05
C. Submit anhydrous calcium chloride testing according to ASTM F 1869-98, that shall be
performed by the Owner's Special Inspector to the Architect, Owner, General Contractor, and
Water Vapor Reduction System Manufacture's Representative.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Applicator
1. Employ an Applicator currently approved by the manufacturer, experienced in surface
preparation and application of the material and subject to inspection and control of the
manufacturer.
2. Installer shall have no less than five (5) years experience installing the Koester water
vapor reduction coating systems.
B. Manufacturer's Qualification
1. Manufacturer shall have no less than five (5) years experience in manufacturing the same
water vapor reduction system. The water vapor reduction system must be specifically
formulated and marketed Internationally for water vapor reduction and alkalinity control
without change of formulation or system design for a minimum period of five (5)years.
2. Manufacturer shall provide the Owner with their standard ten (10) year warranty at no
additional cost. Applicator of water vapor reduction system shall provide standard
installation warranty for workmanship.
3. Manufacturer shall provide independent lab test reports documenting performance per the
following:
a. ASTM E 96, Water Vapor Transmission (dry and wet methods) Performance shall
be documented by an independent testing laboratory at a minimum of 90% for
Koester Vap 1 2000 System, water vapor transmission reduction compared to
untreated ACI Committee 201 durable concrete.
b. Certify acceptance and exposure to continuous topical water exposure after final
cure.
4. Submit list of product use and performance history, for the same formulation and system
design, listing reference sources. Similar projects shall have documented minimum
initial water vapor transmission rates of 15 lbs per 1,000 sf per 24 hrs, and have resulted
in maintained water vapor reduction rate of less than 3 lbs per 1,000 sf per 24 hrs when
tested to ASTM F 1869-98.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the job site in their original unopened containers, clearly labeled with the
manufacturer's name and brand designation.
B. Store products in an approved ventilated dry area; protect from dampness, freezing, and direct
sun light. Product should not be stored in areas with temperatures in excess of 90 ° F or below
50°F.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 -2 05113105
,#O*' SECTION 07265 -WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the application of systems for the reduction of moisture vapor
transmission and alkalinity control for interior concrete slabs requiring the installation of
resilient sheet vinyl and rubber flooring.
B. Section 01210, Allowances: For procedural requirements of work under this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01210, Alternates: Description of work affecting this Section 07265.
2. Section 01410,Testing Laboratory Services: Moisture testing concrete floors.
3. Section 02070, Selective Demolition: Removal of old flooring materials.
4. Section 03300, Cast-In Place Concrete: Installation and curing requirements according to
ACI 302.
5. Section 03515, Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayment.
6. Section 09310,Tiling.
7. Section 09400,Terrazzo.
8. Section 09651,Resilient Tile Flooring and Base.
9. Section 09652,Resilient Sheet Flooring.
10. Section 09671, Composition Flooring.
11. Section 09680, Carpeting
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, independent test data, certification
requirements, warranty information and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with
specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07265 - 1 05113105
2. Exterior wall constructed with 6-inch deep metal studs:
a. Friction fit batts of the proper width and thickness to completely fill the cavities.
3. Exterior wall constructed with metal studs greater than 6-inches deep:
a. Impale insulation batts of proper width and thickness on impaling pins adhered to
the back of exterior sheathing.
b. Locate an impaling pin at each corner, approximately 3-5 inches from the edges,
and one pin in the center of each piece of bats insulation.
D. Exterior ceilings and soffits:
1. Install insulation over entire area of exterior ceilings and soffits.
2. Sequence installation to progress with installation of ceiling and soffits.
3. Overlap edges and ends to form continuous application.
4. Do not cover recessed lighting fixtures unless indicated otherwise.
END OF SECTION 07210
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BUILDING INSULATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07210-7 05/13/05
B. Cut insulation to fit between metal wall panel clips and masonry wall ties. Ensure that all
insulation boards are butted and that the entire surface of the sheathing is completely covered by
insulation.
C. Apply full coat of adhesive to back of insulation boards using a saw-tooth notched trowel with
1/8-inch notches. Press firmly into place.
3.5 INSTALLATION, TYPE "E" INSULATION
A. Install semi-rigid board insulation at curtain-wall spandrel panels where indicated on Drawings
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Retain insulation in place by impaling pints within curtain wall framing, spaced at
intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely
in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated
between insulation and glass.
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent
insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.
3.6 INSTALLATION, BATT INSULATION
A. General:
1. Install Batt insulation without gaps or voids.
2. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage.
3. Overlap ends and edges to form continuous installation.
4. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical
services within the plane of insulation,leaving no gaps or voids.
5. At all partitions extend insulation full height from floor to underside of overhead
structure.
B. Partitions and walls furred with metal studs; shaft walls:
1. Install insulation after one layer of gypsum board has been installed on one side of the
partition, attaching insulation to backside of wallboard with 9/16-inch long stapes applied
through a minimum of 2-inch square heavy paper washer. Install insulation to full height
of partition,and full width of framing.
C. Exterior wall constructed with metal studs:
1. General:
a. Fill all framing spaces, including behind electrical outlets and piping, to form a
complete insulating blanket around the heated or cooled areas of the structure.
b. Cut insulation pieces to size with a utility knife to fit non-standard size cavities and
to fit around conduit, outlets, and bridging, as required to avoid compressing the
batts.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BUILDING INSULATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07210-6 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation.
2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install insulation products and accessories in strict accordance with insulation manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION TYPE "B" INSULATION
A. Install insulation on the underside of steel deck and as indicated.
B. Install with insulation hanger and washers.
1. Apply hangers with adhesive, at a rate of one clip for each square foot of insulation.
2. Install in strict accordance with insulation hanger manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Allow adhesive to cure thoroughly before installing insulation, a minimum of 24 to 48
hours.
C. Install a"test area" to insure that the insulation hangers are compatible with the surface to which
they are to be adhered. Allow "test area" to remain for a 48 hour period, then pull down to test
adhesion.
D. Install insulation with end joints staggered and all joints butted tightly. Cut around electrical
boxes, pipes and other protrusions,fitting insulation snuggly to object.
E. After completing insulation installation,tape all joints with pressure sensitive foil-faced tape.
3.4 INSTALLATION,TYPE "C" INSULATION
A. Install rigid insulation in core of cavity walls, applying horizontally to exterior face of gypsum
sheathing,over which the air barrier system has been applied.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BUILDING INSULATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07210-5 05113105
D. Type "D" Rigid Insulation:
1. Exterior wall areas furred with Z-furring channels: Type 703, unfaced fiberglass,
thickness as indicated; manufacturer: Owens-Corning; Type I/S 300 manufactured by
Johns Manville.
E. Type `B"Rigid Insulation:
1. Insulation shall be semi-rigid unfaced fiberglass; Owens Corning Curtainwall
Insulation/CW 225. Provide material in thickness as indicated.
2. Refer to Section 07841, Firestops and Smokeseals for rigid insulation for through-
penetration and perimeter fire-resistive systems.
2.3 BATT INSULATION
A. Insulation for steel stud partitions and furred walls shall be any of the following:
1. U. S. Gypsum SAFB blanket insulation, minimum of 3-inch thick, unfaced.
2. Glass fiber Batts, unfaced, minimum of 3-1/2 inch thick, conforming to ASTM C665-84,
Type 1, manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. or Johns Manville.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide batt and blanket insulation materials with
maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively, as determined
by ASTM E84. '
1. Where fire rated partitions occur,provide type insulation required by indicated fire tests.
C. Insulation for exterior walls constructed of face brick with metal stud backup shall be unfaced
glass fiber Batts or blankets, 6-1/4 inches or 6-1/2 inches thick, (R=19), conforming with ASTM
C665-84, Type 1,manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. or Johns Manville.
D. Insulation for wall areas furred with studs: unfaced glass fiber batts or blankets, conforming
with ASTM C665-84,Type 1, thicknesses as indicated on the drawings. Manufacturers: Owens-
Corning Fiberglass Corp. or Johns Manville.
E. Exterior Gypsum Wallboard Soffit Insulation: Unfaced glass fiber Batts or blankets, 6-1/4 inch
or 6-1/2 inch thick(R=19), ASTM C665-84, Type 1, Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. or Johns
Manville.
F. Batt Insulation Accessories: Where batt insulation is installed between exterior metal studs
greater than 6-inches deep,provide the following installation accessories:
1. Insulation Hanger,complete with adhesive and washers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BUILDING INSULATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07210-4 05113105
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary at no change in Contract Sum.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH 43659; (800)438-7465
2. Johns Manville Corp., Denver,CO 80217-5108; (800) 654-3103.
3. Dow Chemical Co.,Midland,MI 48674; (800)441-4369.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Type "A" Rigid Insulation: Included under Package `F.l'.
B. Type "B" Rigid Insulation:
1. Insulation shall be 4-inches thick, rigid foil-faced, fiberglass, Owens Corning 705 or
equal.
2. Insulation Hanger:
a. Manufacturer: GEMCO,Danville, IL 61834, (800) 331-1164.
b. Type: 2-inch x 2-inch Perforated hanger for adhesive application.
1) Nail: Low carbon steel,galvanized.
2) Base Plate: Low carbon steel, galvanized.
3) Length: minimum 1/2 inch longer than insulation to be installed
4) Washer: S-125, mild steel galvanized
C. Adhesive: Tuff-Bond Hanger Adhesive, or as required by manufacturer for
adhering to substrate.
3. Miscellaneous Products:
a. Foil faced pressure sensitive tape: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Type "C" Rigid Insulation:
1. Insulation shall be 1-1/2 inch thick Styrofoam "CavityMate SC" brand insulation with
ship-lapped edges, as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company.
2. Adhesive: Synthetic rubber based insulation adhesive compatible with air barrier system;
Rigid Insulation Adhesive No. 230-21 by Henry, Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BUILDING INSULATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07210-3 05113105
2. Section 07200, Foundation Insulation (Package `F.1'): for rigid insulation at interior of .40%k
foundation walls and underside of floor slabs
T Section 07275, Foam Insulating Sealant: insulating sealant in conjunction with air barrier
systems.
4. Section 07565,EPDM Membrane Roofing: for tapered roof insulation.
5. Section 07840, Firestops and Smokeseals: Safing insulation at through-penetrations; and
curtain wall and safing insulation at perimeter fire-resistive joint systems.
6. Division 15, Mechanical: for duct,equipment and pipe insulation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal hlsulation.
B. ASTM C612, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
C. ASTM C665, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Samples: Provide 12-inch by 12-inch sample of each type of insulation specified, labeled with
manufacturer's name,material name,thickness and locations of use.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Section 07196—Air Barrier Systems.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery and storage procedures to insure proper protection of the materials at the
site as well as timely delivery to meet the requirements of other Sections of the work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BUILDING INSULATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07210-2 05113105
AOW
SECTION 07210 -BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide rigid insulation.
1. Type "B" rigid insulation on underside of steel deck, where indicated on the Drawings.
2. Type "C" rigid insulation in cavity of exterior metal panel clad wall systems and
hi•ic;(< Li?Il.x?r v��sl! sysierit,.
3. Type 'D" semi-rigid insulation on the interior side of exterior walls in areas 'furred with
Z-furring channels.
4. Type "E" semi-rigid insulation at curtain-wall spandrel panels where indicated on
Drawings, and not part of fire-rated perimeter joint assembly.
5. Elsewhere that rigid insulation is indicated and not specified in other specification
sections.
B. Provide batt insulation:
1. Exterior wall constructed with metal studs.
2. Interior partitions and shaft walls.
3. Exterior ceilings and soffits.
4. Walls furred with metal studs.
5. Elsewhere that batt insulation is indicated and not specified in other specification
sections.
C. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section
1. Furnish the following items for installation under the work of Section 09250 - Gypsum
Board Assemblies:
a. Type "D" rigid insulation for walls furred with "Zee" furring.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07196, Air Barrier System: coordination of air barrier system with installation of
rigid insulation Type"C".
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BUILDING INSULATION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07210- 1 05/13/05
1. When transition membrane is installed, apply air barrier by spray or brush over entire
surface as indicated,to a wet film thickness of 88 mils requiring an average application of
1042 ft2/drum. Overlap air barrier transition membrane a minimum of 1 inch. Trowel
around all projections ensuring a complete and continuous seal.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Primary air barrier and air barrier transition membrane is not designed for permanent exposure.
Product designed to withstand job site exposure for up to six weeks (less in summer
applications). Cover primary air barrier and air barrier transition membrane as soon as possible.
END OF SECTION 07196
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07196-7 05113105
A. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other .
contaminants. Fill spalled areas in substrate to provide an even plane.
B. New concrete should be cured for a minimum of 14 days and must be dry before air barrier
membranes are applied.
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with the work of adjacent trades which require tie-in with, or overlap of the primary
air barrier or air barrier transition membrane.
B. Ensure all transitions with adjacent building systems are installed in manner sufficient to
maintain a continuous barrier against the leakage of air.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Joints: Fill joints between panels of gypsum sheathing and other panel type substrates prior to
the application of the liquid membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
the following:
1. Joints up to 1/4-inch: Seal joint with trowel application of primary air barrier material
reinforced with a 2-inch wide strip of woven glass mesh fabric tape.
2. Joints exceeding 1/4-inch: Seal joint using air barrier transition membrane, lapped a
minimum of 3-inches on both sides of the joint.
3. Expansion(deflection)Joints: Provide 18-inch wide strip of air barrier transition
membrane to span over open deflection joint forming bellows to accommodate
movement.Extend membrane 8-inch on both sides of the joint.
B. Primer: Apply primer for self-adhered membrane at rate recommended by manufacturer.
Primed surfaces not covered by air barrier transition membrane during the same working day
must be re-primed.
C. Transition Sheet
1. Position air barrier transition membrane and remove protective film. Press firmly into
place.Ensure minimum 2" overlap at all end and side laps.
2. Promptly roll all laps with a counter top roller to effect seal.
3. Ensure all preparatory work is complete prior to installing air barrier system.
4. Where transition sheet is overlapped by EPDM membrane roofing, provide protective
sealant or tape compatible with EPDM membrane roofing, at the edge of transition
membrane to prevent bitumen from coming into contact with the EPDM membrane.
D. Primary Air Barrier
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07196-6 05113105
1. When site conditions permit application and drying time with air and surface
temperatures above 45 degrees F,provide the following primer.
a. Polymer emulsion type, quick setting, non-flammable during application, low-
VOC, having the following physical properties:
1) Color: Aqua;
2) Weight: 8.3 lbs./gal.;
3) Solids by weight: 53%;
4) Drying time(initial set): 30 minutes;
b. Acceptable material: "Aquatac"as manufactured by Henry Company.
2. When site conditions require application and drying time with air and surface
temperatures 45 degrees F and below, provide the following primer.
a. Synthetic rubber based adhesive type, quick setting, having the following physical
properties:
1) Color: Blue;
2) Weight: 6.7 lbs./gal.;
3) Solids by weight: 35%;
4) Drying time(initial set): 30 minutes;
b. Acceptable material: "Blueskin Primer"as manufactured by Henry Company.
E. Transition Membrane Edge Sealer: Provide sealant or tape compatible with EPDM membrane
roofing at edge of air barrier transition membrane in locations where overlapped by roofing
membrane.
F. Reinforcing Fabric:
1. Open weave glass fabric consisting of glass fiber yarn saturated with synthetic resins,
having the following physical properties:
a. Color: Yellow.
b. Weight: 0.28 oz/SF.
2. Acceptable Material: "990-06 Yellow Jacket"as manufactured by Henry Company.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Commencement of the work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared
substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07196-5 05113105
E. Protect rolls from direct sunlight until ready for use.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Pei-form Work only when conditions are acceptable to the manufacturer of the materials being
installed.
B. Ensure all preparation work is complete prior to installing air/vapor barrier membrane.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Henry Company, 2911 Slauson Avenue, Huntington Park, CA, (800)
523-0268, or approved equal air barrier system.
1. Distributed By: Abington Associates, 155 Summit Road, Abington, MA 02351 (781)
878-0025.
B. Primary Air Barrier:
1. One component elastomeric (rubberized) membrane, spray or brush applied, having the
following characteristics:
a. Air permeability: 0.0108 CFM/ft2 at 1.6 lbs./ft2 to ASTM E283;
b. Air permeability: No change at 62.8 lbs./ft2 to ASTM E331;
C. Water vapor permeabce: 4 perms to ASTM E96 Method B;
d. Long term flexibility to: Pass to CGSB 71-GP-24M;
e. Low temperature flexibility and crack bridging: Pass -4 degrees F to ASTM C836;
2. Acceptable material: "Air Bloc 07"as manufactured by Henry Company.
C. Transition Membrane:
1. SBS modified bitumen, self-adhering vapor permeable membrane, consisting of
microporous film laminate, backed with adhesive, and having the following physical
properties:
a. Thickness: 17 mils min.
b. Air leakage: less than 0.002 CFM/ft2 at 1.61bs./ft2 to ASTM E283;
C. Vapor permeance: 37 perms to ASTM E96;
d. Low temperature flexibility: Pass at 40 degrees F to CGSB 37-GP-56M;
C. Elongation: 65% min. to ASTM D412;
2. Acceptable material: `Blueskin Breather"as manufactured by Henry Company.
D. Transition Membrane Primer:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07196-4 05113105
1. Required attendees: Owner, Architect, Contractor, air barrier system applicator's Project
Superintendent, air barrier manufacturer's representative, air barrier foam applicator, and
representatives of other related trades as directed by the Architect or Contractor, and
representatives for installers of related work specified under the following Sections:
a. Section 04210—Brick Masonry
b. Section 04220—Concrete Masonry Units
C. Section 07195—Polyethylene Vapor Barriers
d. Section 07210—Building Insulation
C. Section 07275 -Foam Insulating Sealant
f. Section 07531 —EPDM Membrane Roofing -Adhered
g. Section 07600—Flashing and Sheet Metal
h. Section 07650—Through-Wall Flashing
i. Section 08410, Aluminum Framed Storefront
j. Section 08911 —Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall
k. Section 09250—Gypsum Board Assemblies: Exterior sheathing installer.
2. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening pre-installation
conference.
3. Agenda:
a. Review drawings, specifications and approved materials.
b. Correct conflicts, if any, between approvals and requirements of Contract
Drawings and Specifications.
C. Examine job site conditions, including inspection of substrate, material labels and
methods of storing materials.
1) Review staging and material storage locations.
d. Review scheduling of air barrier installation and related work.
1) Review coordination of work by other trades.
e. Establish weather and working temperature conditions to which Architect and
Contractor must approve.
1) Review emergency rain protection procedures.
2) Establish conditions for which a temporary covering will be provided.
f. Review installation procedures.
1) Confirm that substrate conditions meet specified requirements.
2) Discuss process for building official's inspection and final approval of air
barrier installation.
g. Establish methods for protecting installed air barrier from other trades.
4. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in undamaged and original packaging indicating the name of the
manufacturer and product.
B. Store role materials on end in original packaging.
C. Store adhesives and primers at temperatures of 40 degrees F and above to facilitate handling.
D. Keep solvent away from open flame or excessive heat.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07196-3 05/13/05
2. ASTM E330-90: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
3. ASTM E96: Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
4. CGSB 37-GP-56M: Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, manufacturer's standard details, installation instructions, and
other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Certifications: Prior to commencing the Work, submit independent documentation certifying
that the air barrier membranes have been tested by a third party laboratory to the applicable
standards for air leakage.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Submit in writing a document stating that the applicator of the primary
air barrier membranes specified in this section is recognized by the manufacturer as suitable for
the execution of the Work.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain air barrier system materials through one source from a single
manufacturer, including sheet membrane, air barrier sealants,primers, mastics, and adhesives.
C. Perform Work in accordance with the printed requirements of the air barrier manufacturer and
this specification.
D. Maintain one copy of manufacturer instructions on site.
E. At the beginning of the Work and at all times during the execution,of the Work, allow access to
Project site by the air barrier membrane manufacturer's representative.
F. Mock-Up:
1. Where directed, construct typical exterior wall panel incorporating substrate, fenestration
framing, attachment of insulation, and showing air barrier membrane application details.
2. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up before proceeding with air barrier installation.
Mock-up may be incorporated as part of the Work, if so approved by the Architect.
G. Preinstallation Conference: At least two weeks prior to commencing the work of this Section,
conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section
01200, Project Meetings. Coordinate time of meeting to occur prior to installation of work
under the related sections named below.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07196-2 05113105
SECTION 07196 -AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide air barrier system at exterior envelope of building.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07115, Dampproofing
2. Section 07195,Polyethylene Vapor Barrier
3. Section 07275,Foam Insulating Sealant
4. Section 07650, Through-Wall Flashing
5. Section 08410, Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Coordination of air barrier transitional
OOW sheet with tie-in behind storefront framing.
6. Section 08911, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall: Coordination of air barrier transitional
sheet with tie-in to glazing pocket.
7. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum composite sheathing substrate.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Primary Air Barrier: Vapor permeable emulsion air barrier membrane applied to exterior
gypsum wallboard composite sheathing.
B. Transition Air Barrier Membrane: Modified bitumen, self-adhering type, integrally laminated to
a cross laminated polyethylene film, applied at intersection of primary air barrier and adjacent
assemblies to maintain continuous air barrier.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The following standards are applicable to this section:
1. ASTM E283-91: Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07196-1 05113105
Awk
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of vapor retarder with the work of trades in adjacent areas to ensure
proper installation.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
2. Use care when installing vapor retarder around structural members with spray
fireproofing to avoid disturbing, compressing, or otherwise damaging spray fireproofing.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer and as required for compliance with
applicable UL design.
4. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage systems per manufacturer's
instructions. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates.
5. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs.
Secure vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall
openings; and at lap joints.
6. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape
according to vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener
penetrations with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other
solid substrates.
7. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarder.
8. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by
other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
B. Where exterior wall vapor retarder is extended under roof vapor retarder:
1. Ensure that exterior wall retarder is loosely-draped to accommodate differential
movement between wall and ceiling assemblies.
2. Lap joint with roofing vapor retarder not less than 6 inches, with the edge of the
overlapping retarder in the direction of the roof pitch to prevent moisture migration
under the vapor retarders.
END OF SECTION 07195
Cooley Dickinson Hospital POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 071954 05113105
3. Size to meet project requirements for minimum of joints.
PROPERTIES TEST METHOD DURA-SKRIMIOFR
Appearance Translucent, Cream Color
Thickness, Nominal 10 mil
Weight Per MSF 43 pounds
1 Inch Tensile Strength ASTM D751 50 Lbf.
Hydrostatic Resistance ASTM D751 74 psi
PERMEABILITY
WVTR ASTM E96,Method A 0.013 /m2/day
Perm Rating ASTM E96,Method A 0.030 U.S. Perms
BURNING CHARACTERISTICS
Flame Spread Index ASTM E84 Method A 5
Smoke Developed Value ASTM E84 Method A 75
C. Vapor-Retarder Tape, Sealant, Adhesive: Provide pressure-sensitive tape, sealant(s), and
adhesive(s) of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and
penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections
capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with vapor retarder attachment.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07195-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years of experience in installation of specified vapor
retarder system.
B. Pre-Roofing Conference: Refer to Section 07531, EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered:
1. Prior to installation of polyethylene vapor retarder and associated work, attend Pre-
Roofing Conference Meeting at project site with the roofing subcontractor (Installer),
roofing membrane sheet manufacturer, installers of related work, and other entities
concerned with roofing performance, Owner and Architect.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage of materials.
1. Store on a clean floor to keep materials free from foreign matter.
2. Store sealants, tape, and adhesives in a cool, dry area.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, curing, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Raven Industries, Sioux Falls, SD 57117, 800-635-3456.
2. Other manufacturers meeting all requirements specified herein, as approved by the
Architect.
B. Product:
1. Dura-Skrim IOFR consisting of 2 sheets of high-strength fire-retardant film laminated
together with a third layer of molten polyethylene, with heavy-duty scrim reinforcement
placed between plies.
2. Vapor retarder shall meet or exceed NFPA's 701 large and small scale requirements in
addition to CPAI Section 6 and 7.
Aoftk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07195-2 05113105
low SECTION 07195 -POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide fire-retardant, reinforced-polyethylene vapor barrier and accessories at the following
locations and elsewhere where indicated on the Drawings.
1. All non-UL-Listed roofing assemblies.
2. Vertically at interior side of light gage metal framing and extended under edge of roofing
as detailed on the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07115,Dampproofing: Below grade dampproofing.
2. Section 07210, Building Insulation: Coordination of insulation installation with vapor
retarder.
3. Section 07531, EPDM Membrane Roofing - Adhered: Coordination of polyethylene
vapor retarder with non-UL-Listed roofing system components; vapor retarders furnished
as part of UL-Listed roofing assemblies.
4. Section 09250, Gypsum Board Assemblies:
a. Foil-backed gypsum wall board-type vapor retarder furnished and installed under
the work of Section 09250.
b. Coordination of installation of polyethylene vapor retarder with installation of
gypsum wall board and ceiling systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIERS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07195-1 05/13/05
3.5 SEALING OF ACTIVE LEAKS -AWN
A. Open crack or holes by cutting to a minimum depth of one inch; for severe leaks, one and one-
half to two inches.
B. Mix and apply waterproof plug in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Force material into crack or hole with maximum pressure. If necessary, use external force to
hold waterproof plug in place until a firm set takes place.
D. Finish off surface and render flush with a minimum 1/8" coat of waterproofing per Article 3.3.
E. For compatibility, the waterproof plug and cementitious membrane waterproofing shall be
produced by the same manufacturer.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection may be performed in accordance with Section 01410, Testing Laboratory
Services as follows:
1. Twenty-four hours after application, Cementitious Membrane will be inspected to ensure
that coating has cured to a hard finish, showing no softness or dusting. This will be done
by rubbing the cured membrane to ensure that it is hard.
2. The cured membrane will be chipped to determine if the required minimum thickness has
been applied in those areas where inadequate coverage is suspected. Patch these areas. A%*
3. Inspection for complete coverage will be made to ensure all holes, cracks, and voids have
been filled, leaving no pinholes or uncovered areas, and all joints and cracks have been
properly treated.
4. The bond will be inspected by tapping the cured, rigid membrane to ensure no hollow
sounds occur and a tight, strong bond has been achieved.
B. Remove, properly prepare and patch any improperly applied Cementitious Membrane material
and surfaces with Cementitious Membrane.
C. Re-inspection shall comply with Section 01410 and this Specification.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove and properly discard all used material, packages, containers, and debris from the
project site caused by the application of the cementitious membrane waterproofing.
END OF SECTION 07160
AAWPA
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CEMENTITIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07160-6 05113105
1. All surfaces should be thoroughly wet down, saturated, moist, and all freestanding and
excess water shall be removed before applying waterproofing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Dry Shake/Power Trowel Method -Horizontal Surfaces
1. Cementitious Membrane Waterproofing shall be uniformly dry shaked, sprinkled, or
broadcast on concrete prior to initial set immediately before power troweling commences.
For normal waterproofing applications, the application rate is 314 pound per square foot.
For severe hydrostatic pressure and maximum protection, apply approximately one pound
per square foot.
2. The treated unset concrete surface shall be uniformly power troweled to desired finish.
3. Polyethylene or a wet cure may be used for proper curing in accordance with the
American Concrete Institute's standards and procedures.
B. Installation on Set Concrete
1. Mix and apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
2. Thoroughly mix waterproofing, using mortar mixer or electric drill mixer, leaving no
lumps or unmixed materials. Do not use a concrete mixer. Add only enough water to
reach the desired consistency. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Apply waterproofing in one coat, no less than 1/8" thick, completely filling voids, holes,
cracks, leaving no pinholes or uncovered areas. The cementitious membrane
waterproofing shall be dressed to a rough or smooth finish as indicated on details or
drawings.
a. For small areas, waterproofing may be applied by trowel.
b. For large areas, waterproofing may be applied by an approved plaster sprayer, or
shotcrete equipment.
4. Apply waterproofing in one application, at minimum dimensions of 1" x 1" strips for
cants,coves, fillets,construction joints, and penetrations.
5. Proper curing and protection of waterproofing:
a. For hot weather or windy conditions or for maximum wear resistance, as soon as
waterproofing will not be damaged by water, moist cure surface or apply
polyethylene for a minimum of four hours, or immediately apply approved resin
base curing compound meeting ASTM C-309, Specification for Liquid Membrane
Curing Compounds.
b. Protect waterproofing from non-pedestrian traffic for 24 hours. Protect
waterproofing from freezing, rain and hydrostatic pressures until it reaches its
normal 24 hour strength.
3.4 PROTECTION COURSES
A. Under normal nontraffic or nonabrasive conditions, the cementitious membrane waterproofing
should not require a protection course.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CEMENTITIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07160-5 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Verify the following:
1. That all surfaces are free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, form release
agents, paints, impregnations, all loose material, and foreign matter likely to affect the
bond or performance of the waterproofing.
2. That provisions for cants, coves, fillets, penetrations and construction joint strips are
coordinated with Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. That provisions for expansion and control joints are consistent with specifications and
drawings.
B. Additional inspection for application on set concrete surfaces:
1. Surfaces are sufficiently rough to ensure a good cement bond. A finish similar to medium
sandpaper or rougher is recommended.
2. That surfaces/substrates to receive a positive side application have completed a minimum
28 day curing period in order that drying shrinkage cracks have reached nearly their
maximum width. 'Oak,3. That concrete is structurally sound, and all cracks have been repaired.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning and Roughening. Mechanically or chemically clean and roughen surfaces by chipping,
brushing, acid etching, or using an approved chemical detergent to obtain a clean, sound surface
similar in roughness to a medium sandpaper or rougher.
B. Repairing cracks, spalled areas, and patching holes.
1. All cracks not subject to movement exceeding 1/10 inch in width shall be routed out to a
minimum width of one inch and patched with nonshrink cementitious membrane
waterproofing with fine sand(Five Star Waterproofing).
2. All cracks subject to movement shall be treated as recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer.
3. All cracks with active leaks shall be sealed with waterproof plug per Article 3.5.
4. All honeycombed or spalled concrete areas and holes shall be patched with
waterproofing.
C. Surface Wetdown.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CEMENTITIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07160-4 05/13/05
product. The Architect will be the sole judge in determining the equivalency of the
proposed system.
B. Product: Cementitious Membrane Waterproofing System shall consist of a self curing,
nonshrink, single coat cementitious membrane.
1. Color: As selected by the Architect.
C. All waterproofing materials must be formulated with a true waterproof cement and must not be
based on Portland Cement with chemical additives.
D. Materials shipped to the job site must show the following properties when applied in a single,
self curing coat:
PROPERTY TEST METHOD TEST VALUE
1. PERMEABILITY CRD-C-48
Positive Side-692 foot head 7.96 x 10-14cm/sec
Negative Side -230 foot head 7.16 x 10-13cm/sec
2. SALT WATER PERMEABILITY
AND
CHLORIDE INTRUSION
15% Salt Water Solution •Positive
Side- 115 foot head CRD-C-48 6.39 x 10-12cm/sec
Permeability Coefficient
NCHRP 244 0.000-0.005% CI
% Chloride Ion Intrusion (For Concrete&
Into Concrete Chloride
Determination)
3. BOND STRENGTH
6,000 psi concrete surface ASTM C-321 85 psi minimum
4. SHRINKAGE
Plastic State ASTM C-827 0.0%
Hardened State-Moist ASTM C-157 0.0%
Hardened State-Dry ASTM C-596 300 millionths max.
5. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
4 Hours ASTM C-109 2,000 psi minimum
1 Day ASTM C-109 4,000 psi minimum
28 Days 8,000 psi minimum
6. Acceptable for drinking water
contact by U.S.Environmental
Protection A enc
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CEMENTITIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07160-3 05113105
C. ASTM C-596,Drying Shrinkage of Cement Mortars. ,
d. ASTM C-109, Compressive Strength of Mortars.
C. Applicator Qualifications:
1. Minimum of five years of application of cementitious waterproofing materials.
2. Experience with application by trowel and/or spraying (as applicable) of cementitious
materials.
3. Meet WCM System Applicator qualifications as outlined in the WCM System Applicator
Program.
D. Mock-Up: Sample application and concrete work and finishing (for dry shake/power trowel
method):
1. A sample application consisting of not less than 50 square feet shall be installed by the
applicator in accordance with this section. The same application shall be examined in
accordance with Article 3.06 of this specification entitled Field Quality Control. Further
work shall not proceed until acceptance of sample application has been obtained.
2. The sample application shall remain as a standard for all cementitious membrane
waterproofing on this project.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver waterproofing to the job site in original, unopened package, clearly labeled with the
manufacturer's identification and printed instructions. '
B. All material shall be stored and handled in accordance with recommendations of the
manufacturer and the American Concrete Institute for Cement and Cement Products.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing at temperatures of 40°F and above. Do not
apply waterproofing on frozen surfaces. Contact manufacturer for hot and cold weather
application procedures.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Five Star Products,Inc.,Fairfield , CT 06430. Tel: 203-336-7900.
1. Similar systems by other manufacturers may be considered for approval by the Architect
providing that such systems meet or exceed all of the requirements of the specified
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CEMENTITIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07160-2 05/13/05
SECTION 07160 -CEMENTITIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Apply cementitious membrane waterproofing to negative side of walls and floors of elevator
pits.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A.' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07115, Dampproofing
3. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, test data, installation instructions, warranties, and other data
needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Conform to applicable American Standard for Testing and Materials and Corps of Engineers
standards as follows:
1. Corps of Engineers:
a. CRD-C-48, Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete.
2. American Standard for Testing and Materials:
a. ASTM C-321,Bond Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars.
b. ASTM C-827,Early Volume Change, Cementitious Mixtures.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CEMENTTTIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 07160- 1 05/13/05
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb and level, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved
shop drawings and product installation data.
B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in
finished work. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.
C. Provide backsplashes and sidesplashes. Adhere to countertops using manufacturer's standard
color-matched silicone sealants.
D. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Replace stained components.
E. Protect surfaces from damage. Repair work or replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to
Architect's satisfaction.
END OF SECTION 06450
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06450-4 05113105
I. Product: "Zodiaq®"by DuPont Polymers.
2. Pattern, Style and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
C. Joint adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, non-
porous joints.
D. Core: EWA C-C Plugged EXT, fir plywood, sanded.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Lavatories: Cast, Corian acrylic material, undermount configuration,of the following types;
1. Sinks in Patient Toilets: Model 810.
2. Staff Sinks: Model 820.
B. Lavatory Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard bowl clips, panel inserts and fasteners
for attachment of undermount lavatories.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fabricate components to greatest extent practicable to sizes and shapes indicated, and in
accordance with approved shop drawings.
001W B. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without
conscious joints.
C. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp return. Route radii and contours to template.
Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.
D. Countertops and Transaction Tops: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes
and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's
written recommendations for adhesives, sealers,fabrication,and finishing.
E. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings. Drill holes in courtertops for plumbing fittings in
shop.
F. Adhere undermount sink bowls to countertops in shop using manufacturer's recommended
sealant,joint adhesive and mounting hardware. Sand joint area smooth.
G. Window Stools: Fabricate as detailed in longest lengths possible.
Almk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06450-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver solid surfacing material fabrications until painting and similar operations that
could damage solid surfacing material have been completed in installation areas. If solid
surfacing material must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where
environmental conditions comply with requirements specified by the manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where work of this Section is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide Manufacturer's Standard 10 Year Warranty. Awlk
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Design is based on products by DuPont Polymers, Wilmington, DE
19898; (800)426-7426, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
2.2 MATERIAL
A. Solid-Surfacing Material (SSM-1, 2 & 3): Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin
complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 6, without a
precoated finish.
1. Product: "Corian®"by DuPont Polymers.
2. Pattern, Style and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
B. Solid-Surfacing Material (SSM-4): Homogeneous solid sheets composed of quartz crystals and
filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for
Type 6, without a precoated finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06450-2 05/13/05
SECTION 06450-SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work described in this section:
1. Countertops and transaction tops.
2. Vanity tops with seamed undennount sinks.
3. Window stools.
4. Other items indicated as "Solid Surfacing Material" or "SSM".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 06402,Architectural Woodwork:
3. Division 15,Mechanical: plumbing for undermount sinks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: 3-inch x 3-inch samples of each type and color required,
showing the full range of color variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to
be used for the Work.
E. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and methods for
solid surfacing material to include in maintenance manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06450- 1 05/13/05
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. -took
3? INSTALLATION
A. General: Install casework to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2
for fabrication of type of casework involved.
B. Trim scribes of the base and wall cabinets, and countertops to the walls and soffits. All cabinets
and casework shall be set in place, leveled, plumbed, accurately scribed and secured to walls
and floors.
C. The installation shall be complete,including all trim and hardware. Casework shall be left clean
and free from defects. Workmanship shall be first-class.
D. Secure all casework and all other wall mounted items to wall construction using toggle bolts or
molly bolts attached to horizontal steel reinforcing sheet, or wood screws attached to wood
blocking, located within stud partitions.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective casework, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace casework. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402- 10 05113105
#OW I. High pressure laminated plastic countertops and splash backs shall be of 3/4-inch thick
plywood core minimum surfaced with plastic laminate, with backing sheet on the
underside of countertop, self-edged unless otherwise indicated.
2. Height of back splash shall be 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. Provide end splashes
wherever countertops abut end walls.
3. Wherever sinks occur in countertops, apply sealant at joint between backsplash and
countertop. Sealant shall be G.E. SCS 1000. Color shall be Translucent.
I. Metal Accents: For use with casework shall be of material, size and shape as detailed on the
drawings, welded construction with all welds ground and polished to matching finish.
J. Provide access panels in casework where indicated, or where required to access equipment or
utilities. Use Selby propeller nuts with oval head screws and cup washers.
K. Install overhead door stops wherever cabinet doors or door pulls will engage or]lit abutting wall
surfaces.
L. Provide a grommet wherever the Owner's equipment wiring is required to penetrate countertops.
M. Scribes to Walls: Provide scribes to allow .l-inch between the edge of the cabinets and adjacent
walls, and to trim the countertop baeksplashes to walls.
N. Scribes to Soffits: Provide scribes to allow 2-inches between the top edge of the wall cabinets
and the underside of the adjacent soffit.
O. Laminated Plastic Window Stools: Fabricate of 3/4 inch core with laminated plastic on exposed
surfaces and on all edges except where hardwood nosing are indicated. Install backing sheet on
unexposed surfaces. Install stools over plywood subsill using adhesive recommended by
laminate manufacturer.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHING OF WOOD AND HARDWOOD VENEER CASEWORK
A. Finish:
1. Factory finish in accordance with AW1 Finish System No. TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane,
Premium Grade, with 2 top coats.
2. Sheen: satin.
3. Stain shall be custom color to match Architect's control sample.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402-9 05113105
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Drawers:
1. Connections between backs, sides and front of drawer body shall be regular multiple
drawer dovetails with joints glued.
2. Connection between drawer front and drawer body shall be with not less than 4
countersunk wood screws.
3. Drawer body shall be of 1/2 inch thick hardwood. Drawer bottoms shall be of 1/4 inch
plywood.
4. Drawer fronts:
a. Plastic laminate casework: shall have plastic laminate applied to both inside and
outside of drawer fronts and to all edges. Install hardwood veneer where hardwood
veneer casework is indicated.
5. Drawers shall slide on metal drawer slides.
B. Doors:
1. All cabinet doors shall have a core of particleboard of 3/4-inch thickness minimum.
2. Doors over 60 inch high shall be 1-3/8 -inch thick, solid particleboard core, constructed
in accordance with type PC-HPDL, Section 1300, Architectural Flush Doors, of AWI
Quality Standards.
3. All surfaces of doors shall be laminated plastic. Install hardwood veneer where hardwood
veneer casework is indicated.
C. Cabinet Tops, Bottoms,Ends and Backs: Shall be of 3/4-inch thick core minimum, except open
face cabinets shall have tops and bottoms minimum 1-inch thick core.
D. Shelves:
1. In cabinets shall be of 3/4-inch thick core minimum to 27-inches wide. One inch shelving
at 30-inch wide cabinet and over.
2. Thickness at all widths of open cabinets and wall mounted shelves shall be one inch.
3. All removable or adjustable shelves shall have all surfaces veneered with laminated
plastic.
E. Wall Cabinet Dimensions: As indicated on Contract Drawings. Construct to permit alignment of
adjacent cabinets,of full variety of types in one grouping.
F. Base and Full Height Cabinets: Construct to dimensions indicated to permit alignment of
adjacent units of full variety of types in one grouping.
G. Recessed Toe Space: Toe space and all exposed to view surfaces shall be faced with resilient
base furnished and installed under other sections, as noted.
H. Countertops and Splash Backs:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402- 8 05/13/05
b. Wire Pulls (Finish Groups D, E, F G & I): Brass with US26D finish, round bar
type 4" long wire pull with 1-5/16 -inch projection, secured with machine screws
from inside.
4. Drawer Slides: Full extension, ball-bearing slides with positive stop and rubber hold-in
bumpers, zinc-finish, manufactured by Accuride International, Inc., Santa Fe Springs CA
(310) 903-0200. :
a. Drawers up to 24" wide: No. 7432
b. File drawers and drawers greater than 24" No. 4032
C. Pencil drawers No. 2006
5, Shelf Supports for Adjustable Shelving in Casework: Right-angle shelf rests, .060 inch
steel; 1/2 inch wide by 1/2 inch high by 13/16 inch long, with hole to fasten to underside
of shelf with wood screw; #X-73 as manufactured by Selby, or approved equal.
a. Finish: Nickel
b. Provide screw fasteners to fasten supports to underside of shelf.
6. Counter Stand-Offs: 1-1/4 -inch diameter by lengths indicated with low profile cap.
Provide threaded studs, neoprene washers and plastic spacer tubing as required for a
complete assembly; Model #SO-3 and #SO-6 Barrels with #SO-CAP 12, clear anodized
aluminum finish as manufactured by Gyford Productions LLC, Reno, NV,
(775) 829-7272.
7. Cabinet Legs: 1-3/8 -inch diameter by 4-1/8 -inch high die-cast aluminum furniture feet,
matte finish; Hafele Model No. 634.55.413.
8. Wardrobe Rail: 9-5/8 inch length; Hafele Cat. No. 805.12.250.
9. Grommets: 2-1/2 -inch diameter TG Series, plastic, color selected by Architect.
Manufactured by Doug Mockett&Co., Inc.,Manhattan Beach, CA(1-800-523-1269).
10. Overhead Door Stop: Selby No. S-214N, nickel finish, 7-3/4 inches or 10 inches as
required to suit condition.
M. Corkboard (TKBD-1): Tack surface shall consist of a 1/4 inch thick linoleum resilient
homogeneous tackable surface material with natural jute backing laminated to 1/4 inch
hardboard.
1. Tackable Surface Material: Uni-Colored Linoleum Bulletin Board by Forbo Linoleum
Inc.,Hazleton, PA. (800) 842-7839.
a. Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
N. Metal Counter Supports: Extruded aluminum, 2-inch by 2-inch `T' with custom powder coat
finish as manufactured by Rakks Rangine Corporation,Millis,MA(800) 826-6006.
1. Type 1: Surface Mount, Model EH-1818 for 24-inch counters, Model EH-1824 for 30-
inch counters with not less than 450-1bs./bracket capacity.
2. Type 2: Flush Mount,Model EH-1818-FM with not less than 300 lbs./bracket capacity.
O. Shelf Standards: For wall mounting, shall be heavy-duty type, 12 gauge, satin anochrome finish
steel providing 2" adjustment, 7/8" wide by 11/16" high, complete with end caps and heavy-
duty 12 gauge steel brackets with matching finish in sizes to suit shelving. KV #85ANO
standards with#185 brackets.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 06402-7 05113105
6. Select veneers so that all panels are similar in color and grain.
7. Panels shall be end matched flipped veneer at horizontal joints when panels are stacked.
F. Solid Stock Wood: All solid stock wood exposed to view shall be White Maple, AWI Premium
Grade.
G. Metal Shapes,Plates and Angles: Julius Blum&Co.,Inc., Carlstadt,NJ, (800) 526-6293.
1. Aluminum Plate: Alloy 6063-T5; Class II,clear anodized finish.
2. Steel Angles: Cold rolled, C1010 carbon steel.
3. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: Type 304 (18/8); directional satin No. 4
finish.
I i. PVC Edge Banding: Manufactured by Woodtape, Kirkland, WA 800-426-6362 or (206) 1721-
2150. 5rnm thick, radiused to profiles indicated, widths as indicated. Custom color to match
sample provided by Architect.
I. Glazing: For shelving, shall be 1/4-inch tempered glass; refer to Section 08800, Glazing for
requirements.
J. Acrylic Sheet: For dividers; Plexiglas G, manufactured by Atohaas, or equivalent manufactured
by G.E.,Translucent White,0.236-inches thick.
1. Ease exposed to view edges on divider panels.
K. Decorative Translucent Panels: Lumicor"Colorway" acrylic decorative panels as manufactured '
by Schober, Inc., Renton, WA (425) 255-4000; Class C2 or CC2 based on ASTM D635 for
light transmitting plastics.
1. Pattern and Color: As indicated on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet.
2. Thickness: As indicated.
L. Hardware: Shall be as manufactured by Knape and Vogt, Garcy, Stanley Hardware or approved
equal.
1. Hinges:
a. For 1-3/8" thick doors,pivot set Stanley No. 327.
b. For 3/4" thick core doors concealed type hinges, self-closing by Blum. Hinges
shall be all metal, with screw-on type boss for 165 degree opening. Install one pair
of hinges for door up to 36": one and half pairs for doors over 36". Finish shall be
US26D.
2. Locks: Solid brass, US261) cylinder type pin tumbler. All doors and drawers where
indicated on the drawings shall be provided with locks and shall be keyed as directed.
3. Drawer and Door Pulls:
a. Decorative Pulls (Finish Groups A, B, C, H & J): Anodized aluminum, round bar
type with 1-3/8 —inch projection by length as indicated and end posts mounted
flush, secured with machine screws from inside, Hafele Model No. 106.74.XXX.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402-6 05113105
B. Backing Sheets:
1. Plastic Laminate Clad Casework and Countertops: Provide unfinished plastic laminate
balancing (backer) sheet, conforming to NEMA LD3 undecorated laminate. Grade BKL,
0.020-inch nominal thickness.
C. Furnish only laminates by the manufacturers listed on the Materials and Finishes Index Sheet,
and as follows:
1. The Architect reserves the right to select from any of the products listed and designate the
locations for their installation.
a. Wilsonart International,Temple,TX (800)433-3222.
b. Formica Corporation, Cincinnati, OH(800) 367-6422.
C. Pionite (Panolam Industries), Auburn,ME(800) 746-6483.
d. Stoller Metals (Stephen O. Stoller,Inc.), Kent, WA(206) 903-6112.
D. Cores: All cores shall be of particleboard, except cores for countertops in which sinks are
located shall be plywood constructed with veneer core and hardwood veneers, fabricated with
Type I waterproof adhesive, suitable for receiving plastic laminate.
1. High Performance Particleboard Core:
a. Particleboard to be of 47 lb. density, and balanced construction with moisture
content not to exceed 8%. All particleboards shall meet or exceed the requirements
for general use grade per ANSI A208.1,
b. Particleboard shall meet the following Performance Requirements. Submit
compliance data from the manufacturer prior to fabrication:
1) Screw Holding,Face: 371 lbs.
2) Modulus of Rupture: 2,400 psi.
3) Modulus of Elasticity: 450,000 psi.
4) Internal Bond: 90 psi.
5) Surface Hardness: 9001bs.
6) In addition, particleboard shall be manufactured with Phenol Formaldehyde
resins only(Urea Formaldehyde will not be accepted).
a) Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Conform with HUD 24 CFR Part
3280 with emission less than 0.3 PPM
2. Plywood Core: EWA C-C Plugged EXT, fir plywood, sanded.
E. Veneered Hardwood Panels: AWI Premium Grade. Cores shall be particleboard or fiberboard
with 1/8-inch thick hardwood edge banding on exposed edges. Edge banding shall match veneer
face for species,color and finish.
I. Veneer Face Grade: AA.
2. Species: White Maple.
3. Cut: Quarter Cut
4. Matching Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip matched with wood grain applied
vertically to panel cores.
5. Assembly of Panel Faces: Center balanced match, with wood grain applied vertically to
panel cores.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402-5 05113105
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Casework design shall conform to the flush overlay design as indicated in the AWI Quality
Standards. Horizontal and vertical reveals between all doors and drawers shall be 1/8" unless
otherwise detail.
B. High pressure laminates shall be adhered to cores with adhesives in such manner that when
tested in accordance with the Shear Strength Test set forth in the above mentioned quality
standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, the shear strength shall be not less than 200
pounds per square inch at room temperature and not less than 15 pounds per square inch at 240
degrees.
C. Identification of Parts:
1. Plastic laminate casework:
a. All surfaces, exterior or interior, of cabinets and cases exposed to view, and doors
and drawer fronts of same shall be veneered with high pressure decorative
laminate.
b. Exposed to view applies equally to tops and bottoms of cabinets and cases, cabinet
shelving and interior of cabinets and cases exposed when doors are open.
2. Wood veneer casework:
a. Conform to requirements of AWI standards, Premium Grade.
D. Backing sheets shall be used on all unexposed cabinet surfaces and on the underside of all
countertops.
E. Shop made joints in counter are allowed only when required length exceeds laminate length
obtainable. Such a joint shall touch throughout its length and be flush within a tolerance of
.005". Joints between adjoining tops which must be field assembled shall be shop prepared with
bolt up type fasteners.
F. Apply plastic laminate to core edges prior to application of laminate to faces. Individually cut
edges and face laminate material and apply in their final or near final sizes. All edges shall be
eased.
G. Provide all cutouts for sinks, fixtures and fittings located in plastic laminate casework. See
casework,plumbing, mechanical and electrical drawings.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) for casework and countertops,
conforming to NEMA LD3.1 —,General Purpose: Grade HGS,nominal 0.048-inch thickness.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402-4 05/13/05
„, C. Field Mockup:
I. Prior to start of casework fabrication,provide a cabinet sample(s) as follows:
a. Complete base cabinet fabricated with high pressure decorative laminate in colors
and pattern as directed by the Architect.
b. Complete base cabinet fabricated with wood veneer as directed by the Architect.
2. Sample shall show full construction of all joints in both casework, laminate and veneer.
3. Sample shall contain: countertop with back splash, door with specified hardware, drawer
with slide and specified hardware, back and side panels.
4. Samples not fully conforming to the referenced AWI Quality Standards and this
specification will be rejected by the Architect.
5. Once approved, the sample(s) shall become the standard for the remaining work. The
sample(s) may be incorporated into the final work with prior approval of the Architect.
D. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Convene prior to commencing work of this section. Refer to other requirements included
in Division 1, General Requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified
in "Project Conditions” Article.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed,and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402-3 05113105
C. NEMA LD3—High Pressure decorative laminate. .,
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Prepare shop drawings on minimum 36-inch wide by 24-inch high sheets. 8-1/2 -inch by
I 1-inch sheets will not be accepted.
2. Level of detail for shop drawings:
a. Key Plan: 1/4" = P-0"
b. Elevations: 1/2" = 1'-0"
C. Plan Section: 3" = 1'-0"
d. Vertical Section: 3" = P-0"
e. Details: 3" or Full Size
D. Samples:
1. Lumber: Two 8 inch long pieces of each type of profile to be installed illustrating wood
species,cut,expected range of color and finish.
2. Wood Veneer Panel: Two 8 by 10 -inches for each wood species, veneer layout, cut,
expected range of color and finish.
a. Minimum of three(3) samples per log of flitches to be used. (Note: all log samples
to be submitted simultaneously).
b. Finish samples on approved flitches.
C. Wood filler color samples.
3. High pressure laminate: Two 8 inch by 10 inch samples of selected colors and patterns.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:
1. Perform all work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Section 400 Architectural
Cabinets,for Premium Grade and this specification.
2. Casework construction not manufactured in accordance with the above referenced quality
standards and these specifications is not acceptable.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Casework shall be constructed by member firms of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute
look
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06402-2 05113105
SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Plastic laminated casework
2. Wood veneered casework.
3. Plastic laminated countertops.
4. _ Shop finishing.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: for wood furring, blocking, and shims required for
installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not
specified in this Section.
3. Section 06450, Solid Polymer Fabrications: Solid surface material.
4. Section 09651, Resilient Tile Flooring and Base: Furnishing and installing resilient base
on casework base units.
5. Section 09652, Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnishing and integral sheet vinyl base on
casework base units.
6. Section 09111,Interior Metal Stud System: Studs for wall cabinet mounting.
7. Section 09845,Acoustical Wood Panels: Wood veneer acoustical wall and ceiling panels.
8. Section 11535,Laboratory Equipment: Custom stainless steel countertops.
9. Division 15, Mechanical: for coordination with building in of cabinet heaters
10. Division 16,Electrical: for coordination with electrical devices mounted in casework.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI),
Seventh Edition,referred to herein as "AWI Quality Standards".
B. ANSI/BHMA A156.9—Cabinet hardware.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 06402- 1 05/13/05
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HARDWOOD PANELING
A. Install panels with articulated joints between panels, and at outside and inside corners. Install
panels using Panel "Z" Clips manufactured by Monarch Metal Fabrication, Inc., Bohemia, New
York (Telephone Number: (631) 563-8967.
B. Panel attachment clips shall be Series MF 625 furnished in continuous lengths.
C. Full height panels shall have 3 rows of continuous panel clips. Length of panel clip shall be 12-
inch less than width of panel, unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings.
D. Installation tolerance: Install panels within the following tolerances:
1. Typical joint width: As detailed on the Drawings.
2. Joint taper: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for width of each hardwood panel non-cumulative,
except that taper tolerance shall not act to increase or decrease joint width tolerance.
3. Maximum offset in alignment at corners: 1/16 inch.
4. Step between faces of adjacent panels 1/16 inch.
5. Plumbness overall of installed panel system: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION 06200
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FINISH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06200-7 05113105
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Tale necessary field measurements in the field to assure proper dimensions for the work of this
Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform installation in accordance Section 1700 Installation of Woodwork, AW1
Quality Standards, Premium Grade.
B. Field Joints:
1. Select wood members so that the color of adjacent members is similar and nearly uniforrn
in appearance.
2. The grain figure or other natural character markings shall be similar in character and
appearance and shall match as closely as possible from one member to the other at the
butting joint.
3. Members with only flat grain shall not be permitted adjacent to members with only
vertical grain.
4. Members with mixed grain shall be permitted only adjacent to members with similar
grain at the adjacent edge.
5. All joints shall be tight and formed to conceal shrinkage. Shop miters 4 inches or more
from heel to point shall be glued and locked. Make dowels and tenons a driving fit. Make
shop joints of interior work with waterproof glue or hot glue, under pressure.
6. Running finish shall be in long lengths and jointed only where solid fastenings can be
made. End joints shall be scarfed. Miter exterior corners and cope interior angles unless
otherwise detailed.
C. Do not install any trim until all surfaces of trim have been primed and back primed. Carefully
scribe woodwork to walls or other adjacent work.
D. All workmanship shall be of the best Cabinetmaker's work and all dressed smooth, nails set,
cleaned and fine sandpapered ready for Painter's finish.
E. Do all cutting, patching,jobbing, etc., for all trades doing work in the building, in accordance
with best building practice.
F. Do not bring inside finish into the buildings until the buildings are thoroughly dry, and set no
finish in place until it has been painted on the back.
G. The back of all interior wood finish and fittings where not exposed shall be painted one coat of
paint before erection.
H. Attach wood trim to wood blocking with countersunk finish nails, and to steel framing with
countersunk Type S trim head U.S. Gypsum screws.Fill holes with material to match wood.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FINISH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06200-6 05/13/05
0"k, I. Comply with AWI Section 900B,Premium Grade.
2. Species: White Maple.
2.4 VENEERED WINDOW STOOL
A. Fabricate of hardwood veneer on 3/4-inch thick core with hardwood edging and secure to
plywood substool with construction adhesive.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative
humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
finished work:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1. inch or more in nominal thickness to :U$-inch radius.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING OF HARDWOOD VENEER PANELING
A. Finish:
1. Factory finish in accordance with AWI Finish System No. TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane,
Premium Grade, with 2 top coats.
2. Sheen: satin.
3. Stain shall be custom color to match Architect's control sample.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
l
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FINISH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06200-5 05/13/05
C. Wood species and grade for opaque finish: Yellow Poplar, Southern Yellow Pine, Plain Sawn, -talk,
Grade II.
D. Moisture Content: 6-8 percent.
2.2 PANELWORK
A. Panelwork shall conform to the Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide
Specification, premium grade, according to the SCVenth Edition of Architectural Woodwork
Institute Quality Standards; for transparent finish, and to the design and details shown. Work
shall be finished smooth and free from machine or tool marks that will show through the finish.
All nail heads shall be set to receive putty.
B. Veneered Hardwood Panels: A.W.I. Premium Grade, Quai-ter Sliced., White Maple, %-;s-ad , 'AA
for transparent finish. Veneers shall be 1/24 inch thick or less. Cores shall be fire retardant
(Class A - with flame spread rating of 0 - 25) particle board with matching hardwood edge
banding on exposed edges
1. Moisture Content: 6-8 percent.
2. Matching Between Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip matching.
3. Matching Within individual Panels: Balance match.
a. Wood grain applied vertically to panel core.
4. Matching of Panels Within an Area: Sequence matched uniform size set and numbered.
5. Panel veneers shall be book matched with wood grain applied vertically to panel cores.
6. Panel Joints: As detailed on the Drawings. '
C. Fabrication Tolerances for Hardwood Panel Joints: Furnish materials and workmanship within
the following allowable tolerances.
1. Fabrication tolerances: Provide hardwood panels cut to required size within the following
tolerances.
a. Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Size(dimension each side): Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
C. Squareness (difference in length of two diagonal measurements): Plus or minus
1/16 inch.
D. Install panels with articulated joints between panels, and at outside and inside corners. Install
panels using SeriesMF 625 Panel "Z" Clips manufactured by Monarch Metal Fabrication, Inc.,
Bohemia, New York; (631) 563-8967.
2.3 INTERIOR DOOR AND SIDELIGHT FRAMES
A. Frames, complete with casings,fabricated from solid wood. Connect jambs,heads and sills with
dadoes or rabbeted joints. Route frames as required for glazing requirements. Attach glazing
beads loosely to framing members for installation of glass under the work of Section 08800 -
Glazing
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FINISH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06200-4 05113105
3. The mock-up installation, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points
for comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purpose of
acceptance or rejection.
4. If the mock-up installation is not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely
demolish and remove it from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work of
this Section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Keep materials under
cover and dry. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle
to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under-
temporary coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be
stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas.
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet,moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM,RAILINGS, AND RELATED ITEMS
A. Interior trim, baseboard, chair rail, handrails, and related items shall be of solid stock matching
wood, Premium grade, according to the Seventh Edition of Architectural Woodwork Institute
Quality Standards, unless otherwise specified. All stock shall be free of wormholes, brash grain,
checks or shakes.
B. Wood species and grade for transparent finish:
1. Hardwood-Select White Maple, Plain Sawn,Grade 1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FINISH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06200-3 05/13/05
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
1. Prepare shop drawings on minimum 36 inch wide by 24 inch high sheets.
8-1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets will not be accepted.
2. Level of detail for shop drawings for Standing and Running Trim:
a. Key Plan: 1/4"=1'-0"
b. Elevations: 1/2"=1'-0"
C. Details: Full Size
3. Level of detail for shop drawings for paneling:
a. Key Plan: 1/4"=1'-0"
b. Elevations: 1/2"=1'-0"
C. Plan Section: 3"=1'-0"
d. Vertical Section 3"=1'-0"
e. Details: Full Size
D. Submit the following product samples:
1. Lumber Products: 50 square inches lumber for each species and cut with one-half of
exposed surface finished.
2. Panel Products: Two 8 x 10 inches panel for each species and cut with one-half of
exposed surface finished.
a. Minimum of three(3) samples per log of flitches to be used. (Note: all log samples
to be submitted simultaneously).
b. Finish samples on approved flitches.
C. Wood filler color samples.
E. Test Reports: Submit test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Installation Standard: Installation of work of this section shall conform with Section 1700 of the
above referenced AWI Standard.
C. Mock-ups:
1. At location determined by the Architect provide a full height (floor to ceiling) mock-up
of one vertical section of hardwood panel system.
2. The mock-ups may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated into the finished Work,
when so approved by the Architect.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FINISH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06200-2 05113105
to "' SECTION 06200 -FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Wood handrails.
3. Interior hardwood paneling.
4. Interior wood veneer sills.
5. Interior wood fi-ames and jambs.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
OOW
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view
2. Section 06402, Architectural Woodwork: for shop-fabricated interior woodwork and
wood veneer casework.
3. Section 08800, Glazing
4. Section 09845, Acoustical Wood Panels: Wood veneer acoustical wall and ceiling panels.
5. Section 09900, Painting: for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry, and
field applied finish coats.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th Edition, published by the Architectural
Woodwork Institute,Reston Virginia.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FINISH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06200- 1 05/13/05
D. Install all hardware with screws and fasteners furnished by hardware manufacturer. Hardware
to be installed on metal surfaces shall be drilled and tapped. Self tapping screws and fasteners
will not be accepted. Do not through bolt hardware to be installed on wood doors, except where
the work cannot be reinforced for normal screw mounting, and then only with the Architect's
approval. In such cases, provide sleeves for each through-bolt or use sex screws.
E. Adjustment and cleaning:
1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation and function of every unit.
2. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Remove all markings.
3. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
Substantial Completion or Owner occupancy, return one week prior to such time and
make final check and adjustment of all hardware items. Clean operating items to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
F. Protection:
1. Protect finish hardware trim immediately after installation with a piece of suitably sized
masking tape or cloth bags, which shall remain on the knobs until the completion of all
work.
G. Owner's instructions:
1. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and
hardware finishes.
END OF SECTION 06100
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-10 05113105
B. Ensure finished height of nailers is same as top surface of roof insulation within 1/4-inch, plus
or minus.
3.9 ROOF SLEEPER ASSEMBLY
A. Fabricate and install as detailed.
B. Coordinate with the work of Division 7 — Thermal and Moisture Protection for installation of
roofing and flashing.
3.10 PLYWOOD SUBSTOOLS FOR EXTERIOR WINDOWS
A. install plywood substools required for the installation of laminated plastic window stools.
Install substools to framing, using countersunk flathead screws for metal framing and common
nails for wood framing. Shim as required to assure a leveled top surface.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF WOOD SPREADERS AT DOOR FRAMES
A. During the installation of pressed metal door frames, after the steel spreader bar has been
removed, install 2 x 4 wood spreaders at door opening, carefully dimensioned to permit square,
true installation of door frames and doors.
., B. Spreaders shall remain in place until doors are installed.
3.12 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE ON DOORS
A. Install hardware in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or as required to comply with governing
regulations, install surface mounted finish hardware as indicated in the following standards:
1. Steel Doors: "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors
and Frames"by the Door and Hardware Institute.
2. Flush Wood Doors: NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Flush
Wood Doors".
C. As lock cylinders are installed and checked for operation, place all keys to each lock cylinder in
a heavy, consecutively numbered, envelope approximately 2" x 3" and seal the envelope. The
outside of the envelope shall be marked to identify the key by room number, type of room and
master key set. The envelope shall then be cataloged by number, room number, type of room
and master key set. All master keys and grand master keys properly labeled shall be delivered
to the Owner,taking his receipt for acknowledgement.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-9 05/13/05
4. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for
excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold; as well as for improper
cutting and fitting.
D. Prevent direct contact between ACQ preservative treated material and aluminum. Maintain
minimum of 1/4-inch space between treated wood and aluminum building components using
polyethylene or nylon spacers, or maintain separation using minimum 10-mil thick
polyethylene film.
E. Treat cut ends of preservative treated material with field-applied end coat prior to installation.
3.5 GENERAL FRAMING
A. In addition to framing operations normal to the fabrication and erection indicated on the
Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for the work of other trades.
3.6 ALIGNMENT
A. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary not more
than 1/8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing members.
3.7 FASTENING
A. Nailing:
1. Use only common wire nails or spikes of the dimensions required. Provide penetration
into the piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the nail or spike;
provided, however, that 16d nails may be used to connect two pieces of 2" (nominal)
thickness.
2. Nail without splitting wood. Prebore as required.
3. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified
requirements.
B. Bolting: Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. Drill straight and true
from one side only. Do not bear bolt threads on wood, but use washers under head and nut
where both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
C. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of threads,
enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank.
3.8 INSTALLATION-ROOF NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A. General: Provide anchorage for nailers as required for roof and edging in accordance with the
requirements of Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Bulletin #1-49 and as indicated on
Contract Drawings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-8 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION
ew 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 DELIVERIES
A. Stockpile materials sufficiently in advance of need to assure their availability in a timely
manner for this Work.
3.3 COMPLIANCE
A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought onto or
stored at the job site.
B. Promptly remove non-complying materials from the job site and replace with materials meeting
the requirements of this Section.
C. Comply with preservative treated material manufacturer's product data, including product
technical bulletins, product catalog installation instruction and product carton instructions for
installation.
1. ACQ treated wood scraps and cut-offs should be disposed of in a non-hazardous material
lined landfill in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.
3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B. Produce joints which are tight, true, and well nailed, with members assembled in accordance
with the Drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations.
C. Selection of lumber pieces:
1. Carefully select the members.
2. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing
bolts or proper nailing, and will allow making of proper connections.
3. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-7 05113105
2. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials,Exterior:
a. "FRXO" as manufactured by Arch Wood Protection, Inc., Smyrna, GA 30080,
(866) 873-3789.
b. `Exterior Fire-X" as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc..
Thomson, GA 30824, (800) 832-9663.
C. Interior: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and
plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation:
1. Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced below values
published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and
humidity conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by a qualified
independent testing agency.
2. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to
treatment.
3. Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
D. Exterior: Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
E. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective
pieces.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified.
1. At exterior locations, or in area of high relative humidity, provide hot-dip galvanized
fasteners complying with ASTM A153.
2. Where carpentry is pressure-preservative treated, provide fasteners of Type 304 and 316
stainless steel.
B. Rough Hardware: Furnish and install all rough hardware such as threaded rods for support of
curtain cubicle tracks.
1. Steel Items: Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A36.
2. Machine Bolts: Comply with ASTM A307, Grade A with ASTM A563 hex nuts and,
where indicated flat washers.
3. Lag Bolts: Comply with ASME B 18.2.1.
4. Nails: Use common except as otherwise noted. Comply with ASTM F1667.
5. Screws: Comply with ASME B 18.6.1
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by Contractor, subject to Architect's approval.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-6 05/13/05
d. "DuraGuard"as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products, inc., Thomson,
GA 30824, (800) 832-9663.
C. Retention Rates:
1. Pressure treat above ground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention
of 0.25 lb./cu. ft.
D. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15
percent, respectively. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements
for untreated material.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on the Drawings and the following:
1. Wood cants, roof sleeper assemblies, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking,
stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
F. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment,
apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces.
1. Use material type acceptable to manufacturer of ACQ preservative.
G. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Provide fire-retardant-treated wood for all interior wood blocking, furring, framing
and elsewhere that fire retardant treatment is indicated on Contract Drawings. Comply with
applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-
retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber
Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Acceptable Products:
1. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials,Interior:
a. "D-Blaze" as manufactured by Chemical Specialties, Inc., Charlotte, NC 28217,
(800)241-0240.
b. "Dricon FRT" as manufactured by Arch Wood Protection, Inc., Smyrna, GA
30080, (866) 873-3789.
C. "Tyro-Guard"as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc., Thomson,
GA 30824, (800) 832-9663.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-5 05113105
B. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with DOC PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for
Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels. Furnish construction
panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade
requirements.
C. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber and panels indicated for support or attachment of other
construction, as follows:
1. Grades/Species for Lumber and Plywood:
Grounds for patching plaster work Redwood B and better
Wood blocking Eastern Spruce No. 2 common; Southern
Wood roof sleepers Pine No. 2 common; Douglas Fir No. 2
common
Plywood substools APA Rated Underlayment; Group 1,
Exposure l; 3/4 inch thickness, unless
otherwise noted
Plywood panels for electrical and APA Graded BD INT, (touch sanded),
telecommunications panels 3/4 inch thick(fire-retardant-treated)
Exterior plywood sheathing for parapets; roof APA Rated Sheathing, 32/16,Exposure 1
curbs for ductwork; roof sleeper platform
assembly
Plywood for TV wall bracket APA Rated B-D, Group 2,
Exposure 1,thickness as required
D. For items of dimension lumber size, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture
content.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIAL
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9
(plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection
agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.
B. Preservative Treatment: Waterborne, alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ) preservative system,
containing no arsenic and no chromium.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. "NatureWood Preservative" as manufactured by Osmose, Inc., Griffin GA 30224,
(800) 241-0240.
b. "Preserve®" as manufactured by Chemical Specialties,Inc., Charlotte, NC 28217,
(800)421-8661.
C. "ACQ Preserve®" as manufactured by J. H. Baxter Co., San Mateo, CA 94402.
(800)780-7073.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-4 05113105
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduce to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
4. Provide Research/Evaluation Reports showing compliance with building code in effect
for Project.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Preservative-Treated Wood: Obtain each type ol'preservative-
treated wood product from one source and by a single producer.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-
retardant-treated wood product from one source and by a single producer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the materials to the job site and store in a safe area, out of the way of traffic, and stored
up off the ground surface. Identify framing lumber as to grades, and store each grade separately
from other grades.
B. Use extreme care in off loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting, and breaking of
materials.
C. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings. Protect metals with adequate waterproof outer
wrapping.
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and
applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide
lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the
ALSO Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of
Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 06100-3 05113105
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Section 06200,Finish Carpentry
2. Section 08110 ,Steel Doors
3. Section 08211, Flush Wood Doors
4. Section 08710,Finish Hardware
5. Section 10800,Toilet Accessories: Locations where wood blocking is required.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them,include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority
3. RIS: Redwood inspection Service
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber-Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
B. Window and Door Manufacturers Association — WDMA Industry Standard I.S.IA.9A7,
Hardware Locations for Flush Wood Doors.
C. Steel Door Institute(S.D.I.)—S.D.I.publications for standard steel doors and frames.
D. The Door Hardware Institute — Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom
Steel Doors and Frames.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions:
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, material descriptions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements for each type of process, treatment and factory-
fabricated product.
C. Material Certificates:
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-2 05/13/05
SECTION 06100 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide wood, nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other rough hardware, and other items
needed, and perform rough carpentry for the construction shown on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Furnish and install wood fw-ring.
C. Furnish and install blocking for:
I. Cubicle curtain, IV and shower curtain track.
2. Toilet accessories furnished under other Sections.
3. Wood blocking in conjunction with drywall partitions.
4. At perimeters of exterior aluminum curtain wall and aluminum storefront.
5. At heads of exterior windows and aluminum storefront for the installation of window
treatment which includes, but is not limited to roller shades and drapery hardware.
6. Other locations where wood blocking is indicated on the Drawings.
D. Furnish and set all grounds for patching existing plaster work.
E. Furnish and install all wood nailers in connection with roofing work.
F. Furnish and install wood blocking and plywood for TV wall brackets.
G. Installing finish hardware on wood and hollow-metal doors.
H. Furnish and install wood spreaders at bottoms of door openings of steel door frames.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Finish hardware for wood and hollow metal doors furnished in Section 08710 - Finish
Hardware.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ROUGH CARPENTRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 06100-1 05/13/05
1. Install secondary seals in continuous lengths; vulcanize all field splice joints in
secondary seal material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer's recommended
procedures.
2. Install primary flexible seals in standard lengths.
3. Seal transitions and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
L. Installation of Metal Faced Composite Wall Panel: Refer to Section 07412, Manufactured
Metal Wall Panels.
M. Installation of Fire Barrier:
1. Install fire barrier in accordance with federal, state and local building codes using
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
2. Install transition and end joints to provide continuous fire resistance and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 05800
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-8 05113105
B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing expansion joint cover
assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in fasteners for
masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide
fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and provide for secure
attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies.
C. Perform all cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of expansion joint covers.
Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and
adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
D. Allow adequate free movement for thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid
buckling.
E. Set floor covers at elevations to be flush with adjacent finished floor materials. If necessary,
shim to level, but ensure base frames have continual support to prevent rocking and vertical
deflection.
F. Locate wall, ceiling, roof, and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
Securely attach in place with all required accessories.
G. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than three 3 inches from
each end and not more than 24 inches on centers.
H. Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with end joints held to a minimum and
metal members aligned mechanically using splice joints. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that
will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames.
I. Adhere flexible filler materials (if any) to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Installation of Extruded Preformed Seals - Install seals to comply with manufacturer's
instruction and with minimum number of end joints.
2. For straight sections provide preformed seals in continuous lengths.
3. Vulcanize or heat-seal all field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide
watertight joints using manufacturer's recommended procedure.
4. Apply manufacturer's approved adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant-adhesive to both frame
interfaces prior to installing preformed seal.
5. Seal transitions in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
J. Installation of Elastomeric Sealant Joint Assemblies:
1. Seal all end joints within continuous runs and joints at transitions in accordance with
manufacturer's directions to provide a watertight installation.
2. Install exterior flexible seal in standard lengths.
3. Seal transitions and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
K. Installation of Seismic Seals:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-7 05113105
provide a heat shield and to accommodate the dynamic movement of expansion/seismic joint 100%1,
assembly.
E. For all joints within closed spaces such as chase walls, fire barrier system to include .032 inch
thick galvanized steel cover where conventional expansion joint cover is not used.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and
application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after
products are fabricated. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces with protective covering before
shipment.
B. Aluminum Finish:
1. Clear Anodized Finish - AA-C22A41; medium matte etched finish with 0.7 mil
minimum thick anodic coating.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, conditions, surfaces and blockouts where joint systems will be installed for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and comply
with the requirements of the manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and
scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, with particular attention
given to the installation of items embedded in concrete and masonry so as not to delay job
progress.
B. Provide all templates as required to related trade for location of all support and anchorage
items.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions
recommendations for all phases of work, including preparation of substrate, applying materials,
and protection of installed units.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-6 05/13/05
I. Movement Characteristics-Horizontal Movement Capacity:
a. First Floor: 1-inch
b. Third Floor: 3-inches
C. Fourth Floor: 6-inches
E. Seismic Ceiling Cover: FCF Series
1. Movement Characteristics-Horizontal Movement Capacity:
a. First Floor: 1-inch
b. Third Floor: 3-inches
C. Fourth Floor: 6-inches
2.5 EXTERIOR SEISMIC EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES
A. Seismic Cover Assembly for Wall-To-Corner Joints: Series XLC, designed to allow attachment
of field applied composite wall panels.
1. Movement Characteristics-Horizontal Movement Capacity:
a. Plus/minus 9-inches at all floors
2.6 ROOF EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES (SEISMIC)
A. Seismic Cover Assembly for Exterior Roof Joints: Series SRJ
1. Movement Characteristics-Horizontal Movement Capacity:
a. Plus/minus 9 inches
2.7 FIRE BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Construction Specialties Model 1713-97.
B. Testing Requirements: Prefabricated fire barrier assemblies tested in accordance with ANSVUL
2079 for two-hour certification, unless otherwise detailed and in compliance with ASTM
E1399 and NFPA#251 procedures. Materials to carry UL label and be subject to Underwriters
Laboratories follow-up system for quality assurance.
C. Provide prefabricated fire barrier assembly at the following locations:
1. Roof expansion joints
2. Floor joints (behind cover assemblies and at expansion joints in chase walls where cover
assemblies are not required, but continuous fire barrier is required to ensure fire-rated
joint).
D. For joint widths up to and including 24 inches, the barrier shall be supplied in maximum
lengths to eliminate field splicing. Fire barrier to consist of intumescent blankets layered to
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-5 05113105
E. Exterior Seals: Typically two single layered flexible extrusions, one interior PVC and one
exterior thermoplastic rubber, as classified under ASTM D 2000, retained in a set of
compatible frames, in color indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected by architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible vapor
seals and filler materials, drain tubes, adhesive and other accessories compatible with material
in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation
indicated. Select units comparable to those indicated or required to accommodate joint size,
variations in adjacent surfaces, and structural movement. Furnish units in longest practicable
lengths to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline mitered corners where joint changes
directions or abuts other materials. Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee joints,
corner, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint
cover assemblies.
2.4 INTERIOR SEISMIC JOINT ASSEMBLIES
A. Seismic Floor-To-Floor Cover: SGR-HD Serieswith heavy-duty aluminum center plate, 1/4-
inch thick. .
1. Movement Characteristics-Horizontal Movement Capacity:
a. First Floor: 1-inch
b. Third Floor: 3-inches
C. Fourth Floor: 6-inches
B. Seismic Floor-To-Wall Cover: SGRW-HD Series with heavy-duty aluminum center plate, 'A
inch thick
1. Movement Characteristics-Horizontal Movement Capacity:
a. First Floor: 1-inch
b. Third Floor: 3-inches
C. Fourth Floor: 6-inches
C. Seismic Wall-To-Wall Cover: SGW Series with aluminum faced honeycomb panel center.
1. Movement Characteristics-Horizontal Movement Capacity:
a. First Floor: 1-inch
b. Third Floor: 3-inches
C. Fourth Floor: 6-inches
D. Seismic Corner Wall Cover: SGWC Series with aluminum faced honeycomb panel center.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-4 05/13/05
01"k 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Where applicable, check actual locations of walls and other construction to which work must
fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings and coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of
work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Expansion joint cover assemblies specified herein and indicated on the drawings shall be
manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc, Muncy,PA, (800) 233-8493.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6, sheet
and plate.
1. Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious materials with zinc chromate
primer or chromate conversion coating.
"" B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304 with 2B finish, unless indicated otherwise, for plates,
sheet and strips.
C. Extruded Preformed Seals:
1. Thermoplastic rubber primary seals extruded in Santoprene retained in extruded
aluminum side frames complete with independent continuous PVC back seal. Side
frames mounted on butyl caulk tape with appropriate anchors 18" on center.
2. The installation to include factory, heat welded transitions where applicable to ensure a
watertight system.
a. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Provide primary seal with multi movement grooves designed to remain in place
throughout movement of the joint to± 100 % of the joint width.
4. Provide pantographic wind load supports, maximum 5'-0" on center to support seal
systems of 12 inches and wider.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C
920,Use T. factory-formed and bonded to metal frames or anchor members; Color: Black.
1. Joints up to two inches wide -withstand plus or minus 35 percent movement of the joint
width without failure.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-3 05113105
NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43-1, or ASTM E 119 and E 814 including hose stream test at full-rated
period by Underwriter Laboratories, Inc.
1. Fire Rating -Not less than the rating of adjacent construction.
C. Loading Characteristics
1. Standard floor covers should be designed to withstand a minimum point load of 500 lbs.
without damage or permanent deformation.
2. Heavy-duty covers should withstand a point load of 2,000 lbs.
D. Single-Source Responsibility -Obtain expansion joint cover assemblies from one source from a
single manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
D. Certificates: Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating test
results relative to compliance of fire-rated expansion joint assemblies.
E. Samples:
1. Samples for each type of metal finish indicated.
2. Samples of each type of flexible seal to be used in work with color samples as above.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site ready for use, and fabricated in as large sections and assemblies
as practical. Assemblies shall be identical to submitted and reviewed shop drawings, samples
and certificates.
B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. Remove materials which
are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with
acceptable materials at no additional cost.
C. Exercise proper care in the handling of all work so as not to injure the finished surface, and
take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-2 05113105
SECTION 05800 -EXPANSION CONTROL
PAI:T I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform all operations required for
complete installation of Expansion Control and related work as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.
b'. Work Included The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Floor expansion joint cover assemblies.
2. Wall/ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies.
3. Exterior expansion joint seals.
4. Roof expansion joint assemblies.
5. Fire barrier systems:
a. Behind expansion joint cover assemblies as required to provide fire-rated
expansion joint system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete
2. Section 04210, Brick Masonry
3. Section 05120, Structural Steel
4. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications
5. Section 07412,Manufactured Metal Wall Panels.
6. Section 07920,Joint Sealants
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified
herein and to all applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics -Where indicated, provides expansion joint cover assemblies
identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ANSI/UL 263,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EXPANSION CONTROL
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05800-1 05113105
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
ornamental formed metal.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, COLUMN COVERS
A. Locate and place custom metal column covers level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent
construction. Use concealed anchorages where possible.
B. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveal / glazing
pocket as detailed.
C. Install decorative glass insert in compliance with Section 08800, Glazing, as the Work
progresses.
D. Corrosion Protection: Apply nonmelting/nonmigrating-type bituminous coating or other
permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in
direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or
deterioration of either material or finish.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of ornamental formed-metal items from damage during construction period.
Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05730
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ORNAMENTAL FORMED METALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 05730-4 05113105
C. Fasteners: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting ornamental formed-metal items and for
attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated or unavoidable.
2.3 COLUMN COVERS
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble column covers in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
13. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers with those of adjoining
construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and
surfaces aligned, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated
below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that will engage continuous mounting
clips.
1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.063 inch.
a. Finish: Powder coat.
2. Fabricate with return flanges at the vertical joints for structural strength. Reinforce at the
top and bottom with gussets.
3. Cover shall be removable,demountable, and re-usable with exposed fasteners.
4. Apply manufacturer's recommended sound-deadening mastic to backs of column covers.
2.4 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum
Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations.
B. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard
thermosetting polyester powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils.
Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions.
I. All exposed to view surfaces shall be coated. Finish shall be cured and oven baked to
insure paint adhesion and uniform surface hardness.
2. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of color options.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ORNAMENTAL FORMED METALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 05730-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE "wo
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing ornamental formed metal similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Fabricator
shall have at successfully completed at least ten projects within the last five years. utilizing
systems. materials and techniques as herein specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained
and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver ornamental formed-metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped
together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they
stain or bond to finished surfaces.
B. Store products inside, on elevated platforms in a well-ventilated, dry location.
C. Protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion,extreme temperatures and humidity.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of columns and other construction contiguous with
ornamental formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the custom metal column covers is based on products
as manufactured by Gordon, Inc., Interior Specialties Division, Shreveport, LA (800) 747-
8954, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks,roller marks, stains, discolorations, or
other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B. Aluminum Sheet: Flat sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than
strength and durability properties of alloy 5055-H34.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ORNAMENTAL FORMED METALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 05730-2 05113105
SECTION 05730 -ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL
PART ] - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Custom interior column covers.
B. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
L Decorative glass inserts furnished under-Section 08800, Glazing.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications: for non-ornamental metal fabrications.
2. Section 06402, Interior Architectural Woodwork: for ornamental metal laminates.
3. Section 07412, Manufactured Metal Wall Panels: for exterior column enclosures
fabricated from composite metal panel system.
4. Section 08800, Glazing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, plans,
elevations, section, details of components, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of
this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- square
samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ORNAMENTAL FORMED METALS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 05730- 1 05/13/05
END OF SECTION 05511
Am,*,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 - 10 05/13/05
b. At top of stairs, continue railings to walls.
3. Where indicated set posts into sleeves bedded into concrete, wedge plumb and set with
non shrink, non metallic grout. Furnish and install steel pipe sleeves, sized to accept steel
posts, and fabricated with 3/16" steel plate continuously welded to bottom of sleeves. Set
sleeves prior to placement of concrete.
a. For removable railing posts, fabricated slip-fit sockets from steel tube whose ID is
sized for a close fit with posts.
E. Upon completion of installation, touch-up field welds and abraded surfaces, using primer
specified for shop use.
3.3 WORKMANSHIP
A. Metal work shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines, angles, and arisways.
Shearing and punching shall leave clean, true lines, and surfaces. Thickness of metal, details of
metal, details of assembly and support shall give ample strength and stiffness for the intended
purpose.
B. Conceal fastenings where practicable. For permanent connections, use welds where possible.
Welds exposed to view shall be ground and dressed smooth.
C. Provide lugs, clips, anchors, and miscellaneous fastenings necessary for complete assembly and
installation. Miter corners and angels of exposed moldings and frames.
D. Make trim in longest lengths possible, locate joints symmetrically. Fit adjacent pieces with
hairline joints and aligned surfaces. Space exposed screws evenly and symmetrically.
E. Bolted and Screwed Connections:
1. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades.
2. Use bolts for field connections only. Provide washers under heads and nuts bearing on
wood. Draw all nuts tight and nick threads of permanent connections. Use beveled
washers where bearing is on sloped surfaces.
3. Where screws must be used for permanent connections in ferrous metal, use flat head
type, countersunk, with screw slots filled and finished smooth and flush.
3.4 CLEANING,TOUCH UP,AND PROTECTION
A. Touch up damaged coatings and finishes, and repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of
repair. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be
successfully cleaned or repaired.
B. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of
final acceptance. Remove protections and re-clean as necessary immediately before final
acceptance.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 -9 05113105
after galvanizing at the galvanizer's plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable
environmental regulations and as recommended by the primer coating manufacturer.
Brush blasting,blast cleaning/profiling of the surface is unacceptable surface preparation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
32 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of
those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the
manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly into
position. Bolt stair construction to walls and floors in accordance with load requirements.
C. Metal Stairs: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs look
to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-
bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
2. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03300,
Cast-in-Place Concrete.
D. Handrails:
1. At walls:
a. Secure rails to walls with wall brackets and anchor plates in a manner required to
meet code requirements.
b. Return handrail ends to within 1/8-inch of wall.
C. At metal stud walls install wall bracket anchor plate through wall to wood blocking
with 3/8-inch diameter round head wood screws.
d. At masonry or concrete walls secure anchor plates with 3/8 inch expansion bolts.
e. Secure wall brackets to anchor plates with(3)round head bolts into threaded holes
in anchor plate.
2. At steel stairs:
a. Weld or bolt railings and newels to stringers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase I
Package `E' -2323 05511 - 8 05113105
4. Make bends to preserve contour of the pipe.
5. Cap exposed ends of posts and rails.
6. Rails and adjacent surfaces shall be free of abrasive or sharp elements. Edges shall have a
minimum of 1/8-inch radius.
7. Wall brackets:
a. Manufacturer: R & B Wagner, Inc., Butler, WI 53007 (414) 461-2111 (800-786-
2111), or as approved equal.
b. Type: Type P-3 malleable bracket with Style F-3, with anchor plate, (1) 7/16 inch
diameter hole and (3) 1/4 inch diameter tapped holes with 1/4 inch round head
bolts. Dimension from wall to pipe centerline, 2-1/2 inches, unless indicated
otherwise.
C. Stair Gates: Fabricate gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to
match guards. Provide cam-type self-closing hinges, latch (operable from both sides),
overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction opposite egress,
and all appurtenances required for a complete installation.
D. Finish:
1. Interior: Shop applied primer.
2. Exterior: Hot-dip galvanized with factory applied primer.
2.7 FINISH
A. Surface Preparation of Steel: Thoroughly clean all steel of all loose mill scale by sand blasting
SSPC SP-6. Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter and other foreign matter by wire
brushing or scraping (power wire brushing if necessary). Grind smooth any sharp projections.
Oil and grease deposits shall be removed by solvent.
B. Painting: All steel members, except galvanized items, after they are prepared, shall be painted
before shipping. All surfaces shall be painted, except machined surfaces, surfaces which are to
be welded, and surfaces to be encased in concrete. Surfaces encased in concrete shall receive a
coating of bituminous paint. Paint shall be applied thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and
worked into the joints and other open surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be
given two coats. Dry film thickness per coat of prime paint shall be not less than 2.4 mils.
C. Galvanizing: For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality and performance, provide
factory-applied metal coatings as specified by Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, MA 02149, (617)
389-8440.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-
dip process, Duragalv by Duncan Galvanizing. Comply with ASTM A123 for fabricated
products and ASTM A153 for hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in
referenced standards. The galvanizing bath shall contain high grade zinc.
2. Factory Applied Primer: Provide factory-applied polyamide epoxy primer, 2.0 to 4.0 mils
dry film thickness, Primergalv by Duncan Galvanizing, certified VOC compliant,
conforming to applicable regulations and EPA standards. Apply primer within 12 hours
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 -7 05/13/05
Fabricate stringers and platform frames of structural steel channels, tubing, plates, or a
combination thereof. Construct treads and platforms from welded steel grating supported at
each end with carriage angles welded or riveted to channel frame and stringers. Provide
continuous cast abrasive nosing along front edge of treads and platforms.
1. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized with factory applied primer.
2.5 SHIPS LADDER
A. Open riser ships ladder shall be manufacturer's standard or stock design metal open riser stairs,
complete, with channel stringers and grating treads supported at each end with angles to
stringers.
1. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized.
B. Stringers shall be channels rigidly and securely anchored to concrete and masonry with 1/2"
expansion bolts operating in lead sleeves or toggle bolts as the case may be and shall have steel
angle clips bolted to steel as required. Stringers parallel to and in contact with building
construction shall be anchored thereto with similar bolts spaced not over 3' apart. Carriage
angles for support of treads shall be welded or riveted to strings.
C. Treads and platforms shall be steel grating with cast abrasive continuous nosing along front
edge and bars shall be welded to carriage angles. Carriage angles shall be welded or bolted to
strings.
D. Railings shall be 1-1/4 inches, nominal dimension Fabricate from steel pipe of sizes and in
accordance with Details shown on the Drawings. Use ASTM A53, Grade A, steel pipe, with
black finish for interior use and hot-dip galvanized at exterior locations. Wall thickness shall be
as required to meet specified loads. Pipe shall be continuously welded to stair construction.
Flanges for securing horizontal rails to concrete and masonry shall be secured with expansion
bolts operating in lead sleeves or toggle bolts as the case may be.
E. Provide toe guards at platforms.
2.6 STEEL TUBE HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
A. Fabricate railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details,
finish,and member sizes, including post spacings, and anchorage,but not less than that required
to support structural loads.
B. Handrails: Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect:
1. Fabricate from steel pipe, to shapes and dimensions indicated or otherwise required for
the use.
2. Make joints flush, with concealed and seamless fittings.
3. Accurately cut, miter,weld, and grind to achieve flush surfaces.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 -6 05/13/05
B. Shop fabricate in as large sections as practicable, and in strict accordance with the approved
Shop Drawings and pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
' where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.4 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Join pieces together
by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Provide complete assemblies, including metal framing,
hangers, handrails, railing systems, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, or other
components necessary for support, and as required to anchor on the supporting structure.
B. Metal Framed Stairs, Concrete Filled: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements
indicated. Fabricate stringers and platforms of structural steel channels, tubing, plates, or a
combination thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Shape metal
pans for risers, treads and platforms of structural steel sheet.
1. Finish: Shop applied primer.
C. Metal Framed Stairs, Open Grating: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from
metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 -5 05113105
a. Comply with ASTM A185, welded mesh size 2" x 2", using 12-gage wire in both oar*,,
directions.
b. Tack weld to inside of steel pan treads.
7. Machine bolts, nuts, and washers: Comply with ASTM A307, grade A. Types and sizes
of bolts required for anchoring stair construction to masonry, concrete or steel shall be
determined by load requirements and surface construction to which stairs are to be
anchored.
8. Arc-welding electrodes: Comply with AWS A5.1, using E60XX or E70XX series as
required for the intended use.
9. Shop primer: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer" or "Rustoleum number 5769 Primer"; or equal
as approved by the Architect.
10. Handrails: Fabricate from steel pipe of sizes and in accordance with details shown on thy:
Drawings. Use ASTM A53, Grade A, steel pipe, with black finish for interior use and
hot-dip galvanized at exterior locations. Wall thickness shall be as required to meet
specified loads.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-shrink, non-
metallic complying with CE CRD-0588,Type C.
B. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended for color match, strength and compatibility in the fabricated items.
C. Fasteners: Furnish of base metal and alloy, matching finished color and texture as metal being
fastened, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners for the interconnection of handrail and
railing components, and for all other connections, except where exposed fasteners are
unavoidable.
D. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint(Cold-applied asphaltic mastic).
E. Provide all steel shapes indicated on the drawings which are not indicated or required by the
structural drawings.
F. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 -4 05113105
D. Galvanizer: Engage the services of a qualified galvanizer who has demonstrated a minimum of
five years experience in the successful application of galvanized coatings specified in this
specification in the facility where the work is to be performed and who will apply the coatings
within the same facility.
E. Coordination between Fabricator and Galvanizer: Prior to fabrication and final submittal of
shop drawings to Architect, direct fabricators to submit shop drawings to the galvanizer for all
metal fabrications to receive factory-applied metal coatings. Direct galvanizer to review
fabricator's shop drawings for suitability of materials for galvanizing and coatings and
coordinate any required modifications to fabrications required to be performed by the fabricator.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks, roller marks,rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, directed by the Architect, or required by
governmental agencies having jurisdiction, provide materials complying with the following
minimum standards:
I. Structural Steel: ASTM A36.
2. Sheet Steel: Form risers, sub-treads and landings from 12-gage hot-rolled steel complying
with ASTM A569 or ASTM A570 as determined by code requirements or load
requirements.
3. Steel Plate:
a. Except for plates to be bent or cold-formed, comply with ASTM A36.
b. For plates to be bent or cold-formed, comply with ASTM A283,grade C.
4. Steel bars and bar-size shapes:
a. For hot-rolled carbon steel bars and bar-size shapes, comply with ASTM A575 in
grade as selected by the fabricator.
b. For other steel bars and bar-size shapes,comply with ASTM A663 or ASTM A36.
5. Welded Steel Grating: Light Duty Welded Steel 19-W-4 Series, size and type as
determined by load requirements.
6. Wire fabric:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' 2323 05511 -3 05113105
working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load _4ON**_,
to produce the maximum stress in each component of steel stairs.
1. Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of not less than 100 lbf per sq. ft. or a
concentrated load of 300 lbf. with deflection of stringer not to exceed 1/360 of span.
2. Railings: Capable of withstanding uniform load of not less than 50 lbf per linear foot
applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf per linear foot applied
vertically downward or a concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any
direction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
13. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation procedures, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,
anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1. Shop drawings and calculations for metal stair and rails indicated to comply with certain
design loading, shall be prepared by and bear the stamp of a licensed structural engineer
registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
D. Certificate of Compliance for Items Coated by Galvanizer: Submit notarized Certificate of
Compliance with application for payment for galvanizing, signed by the galvanizer, indicating
compliance with requirements of specifications. Include scope of services provided, and
quantity and itemized description of items processed.
1. Include galvanizer's certification that shop applied primer is completely compatible with
field-applied topcoats provided under Section 09900 -Painting.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in engineering and producing steel fabrications
similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance and
with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble all items specified as work of this section to the greatest extent
possible to minimize field splicing. Disassemble units as required for shipping and handling.
Clearly mark units for reassembling in the field.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and who is experienced in providing
engineering services for metal stair and rail systems of the kind indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 -2 05113105
SECTION 05511 -METAL STAIRS
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel framed stairs with concrete-filled treads and platforms.
2. Industrial-type steel framed stairs with steel grating treads.
3. Steel framed ships ladder with steel grating treads.
4. Handrails railings and guardrail systems.
5. Handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
ate"
1. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete: for concrete fill for treads.
2. Section 05500,Metal Fabrications: for metal nosings not installed in metal stairs.
3. Section 09651, Resilient Tile Flooring and Base: for resilient stair treads and landing
tiles.
4. Section 09900,Painting: for field finishing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. "Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of American Welding Society, AWS
D1.0, latest edition, with current supplements and addenda.
B. Steel Structures Painting Council; "Cleaning Steel.for Finishes."
C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) minimum standards for
construction,proportions and dimensions of fixed metal stairs.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance Requirements: Engineer, fabricate, and install steel stairs, and railing
systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL STAIRS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05511 - 1 05/13/05
2. For factory-applied finish coatings, the applicator shall be responsible for field-touch-up
for up to 1 percent of the surface area at no additional expense to the Owner. Provide
touch-up such that repair is not visible from a distance of 6 feet.
3. A touch-up repair kit or touchup instructions shall be provided to the Owner for each
type of factory-applied finish.
END OF SECTION 05500
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-12 05/13/05
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after-
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
D. Where field welding is required, comply with AWS recommended procedures of manual-
shielded metal-arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and for methods to be used in
correcting welding work and the following.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
E. Grind exposed welds smooth; touchup shop prime coats.
3.3 INSTALLATION, CUBICLE CURTAIN AND IV TRACK
A. Secure threaded rods to framing members of overhead structure.
1. At concrete structural framing and at composite structure with steel decking and concrete
use expansion shields capable of receiving threaded rods: Hilti "Drop-In Anchor" (HDI),
or as approved equal.
2. At roof areas with steel decking and steel framing install Unistrut system between
framing members, securing directly to steel framing. Install accessories for anchoring
threaded rods.
3. Provide steel angle diagonal brace
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B. Touch-Up and Repair: For damaged and field-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds,
bolted connections and abraded areas.
1. For galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of
ASTM A 780, modified to 95 percent zinc in dry film. Galvanizing repair paint shall
have 95 percent zinc by weight, ZiRP by Duncan Galvanizing. Thickness of applied
galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness required by ASTM A
123 or A 153 as applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with silver paint, brite
paint,or aluminum paints is not acceptable.
A
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-11 05/13/05
D. Galvanizing: Galvanize materials in accordance with specified standards and this specification. -OW..
Galvanizing shall provide an acceptable substrate for applied coatings. The dry kettle process
shall be used to eliminate any flux inclusions on the surface of the galvanized material.
1. Prior to galvanizing, the steel shall be immersed in a pre flux solution (zinc ammonium
chloride.
2. The wet kettle process shall be prohibited.
3. To provide the galvanized surface required, the following procedures shall be
implemented:
a. A monitoring recorder shall be utilized and inspected regularly to observe any
variances in the galvanizing bath temperature.
b. The pickling tanks shall contain hydrochloric acid with a constant range between
10 - 14 percent, iron content less than 8 percent and zinc content less than 3
percent. Titrations shall be taken weekly at a minimum.
C. All chemicals and zinc will be tested at least once a week to determine compliance
with ASTM standards. All testing will be done using atomic absorption
spectrometry equipment at a lab in the galvanizing plant.
4. Finish coatings shall be applied under the following conditions.
a. Minimum air temperature shall be 65 degrees F. Surface temperature of steel shall
be 60 degrees to 95 degrees F and, in any event, be 5 degrees F higher than the
dew point. Humidity shall be 85 percent maximum.
b. The use of iron or steel shot and sand and aluminum oxide grit as a blast medium,
and power wire brushes are not permitted.
C. Surface of substrate shall be dry and free from dust, dirt, oil, grease or other
contaminants. Coating and cure facility shall be maintained free of airborne dust
and dirt until coatings are completely cured.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications.
B. Set work accurately into position, plumb, level, true, and free from rack. Anchor firmly into
position. Comply with requirements, manufacturers' written instructions and requirements
indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline,joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-10 05/13/05
B. Provide countersunk drilled holes for securing threshold.
C. Threshold shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
2.13 METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products as manufactured by
Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH 44706 (800) 321-9800, or as approved equal.
B. Welded Steel Grating: Grating Mark 19-W-4 Series, Steel. Provide grating of size and type as
required to comply with structural performance requirements but not less than the following
1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 -inches o.c.
2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-3/4 -inches.
3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16-inches.
4. Crossbar-Spacing: 2-inches o.c.
C. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware and similar items.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings.
D. Anchorage: Saddle clips, galvanized
E. Steel Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Shop Paint: All steel members, except galvanized items, after they are prepared, shall be prime
painted before shipping. All surfaces shall be prime painted, except machined surfaces,
surfaces which are to be welded and surfaces to be encased in concrete. Primer Paint shall be
applied thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and worked into the joints and other open
surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be given two coats. Dry film thickness per
coat of prime paint shall be not less than 2.4 mils.
1. On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two coats of the specified
primer. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-9 05113105
C. Lintel Schedule: Lintels shall be in accordance with the following schedule; one angle for each
4-inch (nominal) thickness of masonry:
1. 4 x 3-1/2 x 5/16 inch angle -4 inch leg vertical -for openings up to 4 feet 6 inches.
2. 5 x 3-1/2 x 5/16 inch angle - 5 inch leg vertical - for openings 4 feet 6 inches to 6 feet 0
inches.
3. 6 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 inch angle - 6 inch leg vertical - for openings 6 feet 0 inches to 8 feet 0
inches.
D. Lintel Tie and Anchor Assembly:
1. Provide steel flat bar straps with shims welded to backside of vertical leg of lintel angles
for attaching masonry anchors and ties to backup construction.
2. Fabricate as detailed.
E. Hot-dip galvanize loose steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls.
2.9 ANGLE GUARD NOSING
A. Nosing at exterior roll-up doors shall be, unless sized otherwise, 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 3/8" angles
for building into the concrete platform; angle nosing shall have strap anchors at not greater than
2'-0" to center.
B. Nosings shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Coat surfaces in contact with concrete with mastic.
2.10 ANGLE IRON FRAMES AT ROLL-UP DOOR
A. Angle iron frames of size indicated on the drawings
B. Provide 1/4 inch bent strap anchors for anchoring into masonry
C. Angles shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.
D. Frames shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
2.11 STEEL TUBES AND PLATES FOR LOW PARTITION
A. Fabricate as detailed. Coordinate with the work of other trades to ensure proper installation.
2.12 EXTERIOR CHECKERED PLATE THRESHOLD
A. Fabricate from 1/4 inch thick plate, similar to Inland 4-way plates with small lug pattern. Weld
continuous flat bar door stop. Cope ends to fit door frame profile. Joint shall be no greater than
'A inches to accommodate sealant joint.
Aak
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-8 05/13/05
b. At metal stud walls install wall bracket anchor plate through wall to steel
reinforcing plate attached to studs with 3/8 inch toggle or molly bolts, except if
wood blocking is indicated secure anchor plate with 3/8 inch diameter round head
wood screw.
C. At masonry or concrete walls secure anchor plates with 3/8 inch expansion bolts.
d. Secure wall brackets to anchor plates with (3) round head bolts into threaded holes
in anchor plate.
G. Exterior Railing System Finish: After hot-dip galvanizing, pipe railing and sleeves shall be
coated with Colorgalv by Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, Massachusetts, in strict accordance
with the galvanizer's recommendations and specifications. Color shall be as selected by the
Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2.o LADDERS
A. Ladders, unless otherwise noted, shall be 3" x 3/8" solid section continuous slide rails, 16"
apart with 3/4" diameter solid steel bar rungs spaced 12" on centers with ends shouldered into
side rails.
B. Provide extended side rails at least 42" above top rung and return to wall or structure. Securely
anchor each ladder siderail with clip angles at top, bottom and intermediate points spaced not
more than 5'-0" on center.Provide 7" clearance from walls to centerline of rungs.
C. Fit rungs in holes drilled in side rails. Weld and grind smooth to touch. Provide rungs with non-
slip top surface.
D. Ladders for elevators shall comply with the ANSI. A17.1-1971 Code or local code whichever is
more stringent.
E. Exterior ladders shall be hot dip galvanized with factory applied primer.
2.7 ELEVATOR SILL SUPPORT
A. Furnish and install steel angle sub sills for support of aluminum elevator sills at floor landings.
B. Fabricate angles to suit conditions. Provide straps for anchoring angles into concrete
2.8 LOOSE LINTELS
A. Furnish loose steel lintel angles for openings in exterior and interior masonry walls for
installation under the work of Sections 04210 and 04220.
B. Fabricate lintels for openings and recesses in walls and partitions where shown and elsewhere
as needed. Provide at least 8 inches bearing at each end, unless otherwise shown. Weld together
individual members of composite lintels made up of more than one member.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-7 05113105
2.4 SUPPORTS
A. Supports for overhead toilet partitions, cubicle curtain track and I.V. tracks shall be as detailed
on the plans.
2.5 EXTERIOR GUARD RAILS
A. Guard rails shall consist of steel pipe hand rails secured to steel bar stock rail support system.
B. Construct steel pipe hand rail of ASTM A53, Grade A, Schedule 40, steel pipe, 1-1/4 inch
nominal, except as indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
C. Construction:
1. Fabricate rail support system from steel bar stock.
2. Miter and weld all corners of support system.
3. Grind smooth all welds and file all edges and corners.
4. Pipe Rails:
a. Fabricate pipe railing from mechanical steel tubing internally vented with holes
3/4 the size of the pipe's internal diameter.
5. Where size of assembly is too large for galvanizing kettle, galvanize components prior to
fabrication and assemble after galvanizing.
D. Railings, wall rails and attachments shall resist a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in
any direction at any point of the top rail, and they shall also be designed for a uniform
distributed load of 50 pounds per lineal foot applied in any direction at the top of the railing.
E. Where indicated set posts into sleeves bedded into concrete, wedge plumb and set with non
shrink, non metallic grout. Furnish and install steel pipe sleeves, sized to accept steel posts, and
fabricated with 3/16" steel plate continuously welded to bottom of sleeves. Set sleeves prior to
placement of concrete.
F. Wall rails:
1. Wall brackets:
a. Manufacturer: R & B Wagner, Inc., Butler, WI 53007 (414) 461-2111 (800-786-
2111), or as approved equal.
b. Type: Type P-3 malleable bracket with Style F-3, with anchor plate, (1) 7/16 inch
dia. hole and (3) 1/4 inch dia. tapped holes with 1/4 inch round head bolts.
Dimension from wall to pipe centerline, 2-1/2 inches, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Form elbow bends and wall returns to uniform radius, free from buckles and twists, with
smooth finished surfaces. Close exposed ends of steel pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick
steel plate in place. Return handrail ends to within 1/8" of wall.
3. Installation:
a. Secure rails to walls with wall brackets and anchor plates in a manner required to
meet code requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-6 05113105
environmental regulations and as recommended by the finish coating
manufacturer.
C. Coatings shall be certified VOC compliant and conform to applicable regrdations
and EPA standards.
d. Apply the galvanizing, primer and coating within the same, facility and provide
single-source responsibility for galvanizing, priming and finish coating.
e. Brush blasting, blast cleaning/profiling of the surface is unacceptable for surface
preparation.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
B. Grout: Pre-mixed, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-shrink, non-metallic cement based grout
complying with ASTM C1107 "Standard Specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic Grout -
Non Shrink"; Five Star Grout or Architect approved substitute.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or the approved Shop Drawings, use materials of
size, thickness, and type required to produce reasonable strength and durability in the work of
this Section.
B. Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines and levels.
Fabricate work with uniform, hairline tight joints. Form welded joints and seams continuously
and grind flush and smooth to be invisible after painting. Use concealed fasteners wherever
possible,for exposed fasteners, use hex head bolts or Phillips head machine screws.
C. Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent possible. Clearly label pieces in shop to facilitate
field assembly.
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove all burrs. Ease exposed edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise indicated. At exposed connections, finish
exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and
contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
E. Prior to shop painting or priming, properly clean metal surfaces as required for the applied
finish and for the proposed use of the item.
F. On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two coats of the specified primer.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-5 05113105
10. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48,class 10.
11. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47.
12. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise noted.
13. Threaded Rod: ASTM A-307, Grade C.
C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class required for the particular use. Comply
with the following standards as pertinent.
1. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head regular type complying with ASTM A307, grade
A.
2. Lag bolts: Provide square-head type complying with Federal Spec FF-B-561.
3. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with Federal Spec FF-S-
92B.
4. Wood screws: Flat head,zinc-plated steel complying with Federal Spec FF-S-111D.
5. Washers: Plain washers --comply with Federal Spec FF-W-92, round, carbon steel; lock
washers --comply with Federal Spec FF-W-84, helical spring type carbon steel.
6. Toggle bolts: Provide type, class, and style needed but complying with Federal Spec FF-
B-588.
7. Anchorage devices: Provide expansion shields complying with Federal Spec FF-S-325.
D. Shop Paint: shall be Modified Alkyd primer equal to Tnemec No. 10-99G Green Metal Primer,
Dupont 681 FD Primer, or Architect approved substitute.
E. Galvanizing: For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality and performance, provide
factory-applied metal coatings as specified by Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, MA 02149, (617)
389-8440.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-
dip process,Duragalv by Duncan Galvanizing. Comply with ASTM A123 for fabricated
products and ASTM A153 for hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in
referenced standards. The galvanizing bath shall contain high grade zinc.
2. Factory Applied Primer: Provide factory-applied polyamide epoxy primer, 2.0 to 4.0 mils
dry film thickness, Primergalv by Duncan Galvanizing, certified VOC compliant,
conforming to applicable regulations and EPA standards. Apply primer within 12 hours
after galvanizing at the galvanizer's plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable
environmental regulations and as recommended by the primer coating manufacturer.
Brush blasting, blast cleaning/profiling of the surface is unacceptable surface
preparation.
3. Architectural Finish: Provide factory-applied architectural coating over hot-dip
galvanized steel,Colorgaly by Duncan Galvanizing matching approved samples.
a. Primer coat shall be factory-applied polyamide epoxy primer, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry
film thickness. Apply primer within 12 hours after galvanizing at the galvanizer's
plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable environmental regulations
and as recommended by the primer coating manufacturer.
b. Finish coat shall be factory-applied color-pigmented, two-component high-build
aliphatic polyurethane finish, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry film thickness. Apply finish
coating at the galvanizer's plant, in a controlled environment meeting applicable
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-4 05113105
3. ASTM A - 123: Specification for Zinc (hot - galvanized) Coatings on Products
Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed, and Forged steel shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by taking accurate field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Allow for field cutting and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication is
not possible.
2. Do not field cut or fit items which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, limit materials to
those which are free from surface blemishes,pitting,rolled trade names, and roughness.
B. Comply with the following standards, as pertinent:
1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36.
2. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283, grade C.
3. Steel tubing(hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A501.
4. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306,grade 65, or ASTM A36.
5. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108.
6. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336.
7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with
ASTM A525.
8. Stainless steel sheets: AISI Type 302 or 304, 24-gage, with number 4 finish.
9. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer or finisher
for the type of use and finish indicated
a. Extruded bar and shapes: ASTM B 221, 6063-T6.
b. Extruded pipe and tube: ASTM B 429, 6063-T6.
C. Drawn Seamless tube: ASTM B 483, 6063-T832.
d. Plate and sheet: ASTM B209, 6063-T6.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-3 05113105
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include A=%...
manufacturer's specifications, material descriptions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements for each factory-fabricated product including brackets,
and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage
and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
D. Samples for Verification: Submit two 3 inch by 6 inch samples of factory-applied coatings and
colors proposed for use for approval prior to coating application.
T. Certificate of Compliance for Items Coated by Galvanizer: Submit notarized Certificate of
Compliance with application for payment for galvanizing, signed by the galvanizer, indicating
compliance with requirements of specifications. Include scope of services provided, and
quantity and itemized description of items processed.
1. Include galvanizer's certification that shop applied primer is completely compatible with
field-applied topcoats provided under Section 09900 -Painting.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the ""o*
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding
Society Code [AWS] "Standard Qualification Procedures."
C. Galvanizer: Engage the services of a qualified galvanizer who has demonstrated a minimum of
five years experience in the successful application of galvanized coatings specified in this
specification in the facility where the work is to be performed and who will apply the coatings
within the same facility.
D. Coordination between Fabricator and Galvanizer: Prior to fabrication and final submittal of
shop drawings to Architect, direct fabricators to submit shop drawings to the galvanizer for all
metal fabrications to receive factory-applied metal coatings. Direct galvanizer to review
fabricator's shop drawings for suitability of materials for galvanizing and coatings and
coordinate any required modifications to fabrications required to be performed by the
fabricator.
E. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM A-36: Specification for Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A - 569: Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 maximum percent), Hot-rolled
Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-2 05/13/05
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide miscellaneous metal work shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed
for a complete and proper installation.
1. Steel access ladders
2. Loose steel lintels
3. Support angles for elevator door sills
4. Steel tubes and plates for low partitions
5. Exterior steel guard rails
6. Bent plate thresholds
7. Metal gratings at sump pits
8. Steel framing and support for ceiling hung toilet partitions
9. Miscellaneous framing and supports
B. Furnish anchor bolts, inserts and pipe sleeves required to attach items to concrete. For
installation, refer to Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete: reinforced concrete stair treads.
2. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
3. Section 05450, Metal Support System: for metal support systems fabricated from
manufactured components.
4. Section 05511,Metal Stairs: for interior steel framed stairs, and associated pipe rails.
5. Section 05730, Ornamental Formed Metal: for custom interior column covers.
6. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry: wood blocking attached to miscellaneous metals.
7. Section 09900,Finish Painting: field finishing of miscellaneous metal materials.
8. Section 10190, Cubicles: cubicle curtain and IV track support requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL FABRICATIONS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05500-1 05113105
equipment at their extremities of travel, and/or in combination with each other to produce the
maximum load configuration possible.
1. Base loads on the most severe conditions as may be encountered by any of the
manufacturers producing equipment of the type of services of the rooms indicated.
2. Safety Factor: The system shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 2.5 based
on ultimate strength under static loading conditions.
3. Seismic Bracing: Medical system support framing system shall be adequately braced to
meet all code requirements.
4. Deflection: No more than 1/720`' of the span maximum deflection in either plane, when
maximum loading conditions are applied due to equipment operations.
3.5 FINISHING
A. Field Painting of Exposed Members: Refer to Section 09900, Painting.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of this section of work, remove all protective wraps and debris. Repair any
damage due to installation of this section of work.
B. Provide protection and maintain conditions that ensure metal support framing systems during
construction is without damage at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05450
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05450-6 05/13/05
3.2 INSTALLATION- GENERAL
A. Installation shall be accomplished by a fully trained manufacturer's authorized installer and
shall conform to the approved shop drawings in every respect.
B. Set structural and secondary metal framing support systems into final position true to line, level
and plumb, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions.
1. Tolerance: The support structure to which medical equipment is to be attached, shall
have horizontal attachment surfaces parallel, square and level to within plus or minus
1/16-inch.
C. Provide all appurtenances, fittings, braces, etc. to insure a rigid, stable installation. The
complete installation shall be coordinated with mechanical,plumbing and electrical drawings.
D. Anchor material firmly in place. Tighten all connections to their recommended torque.
3.3 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Anchorage: Secure system to structural steel framing above by means of direct attachment to
the structural framing system as follows.
1. Structural Steel: Provide Unistrut P5501 upper rail secured to bottom flange of existing
structural steel members by means of P2786 beam clamps and U-Bolts.
2. Concrete: Provide Unistrut P1000T upper rail secured to bottom of existing concrete slab
with expansion bolts and P1047 "U"fittings spaced not more than 12-inches on center.
B. Vertical Support: Bottom rails and overhead anchorage shall be connected by a series of P1000
vertical and diagonal support channels. Join components with wing shaped Unistrut fittings.
Install members as indicated and as required to support bottom rail.
C. Support Structure: Bottom rails shall consist of Unistrut P1001 channel. Attach medical
equipment to support system by means of threaded rods and steel plate. Coordinate size, spacing
and location of threaded rods and plates with manufacturer of medical equipment to be
supported.
1. Layout: As required by manufacturer of Owner's equipment.
3.4 SUPPORT SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Design: The support structure shall be designed to support a concentrated load at any point
along the exposed rails, as exerted by the equipment to be purchased by the Owner along with
the weights of the structure itself and any ceiling finishes attached to it. The concentrated load
shall be the maximum that will be encountered by positioning the individual pieces of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05450-5 05/13/05
2. Width of Channels: 1-5/8-inches
3. Depth of Channels: 1-5/8-inches, unless otherwise noted or detailed.
4. Material: Uncoated steel complying with ASTM A570
5. Thickness: 12-gage
B. Fittings: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel plate, strip or coil, conforming to ASTM A575, A576,
A36 or A635. Fittings shall have sufficient capacity to resist and/or transfer full design loadings
imposed on them by the connected members.
1. Finish: Match finish of channel framing members.
C. Nuts, Bolts and Washers: Nuts fabricated from hot-rolled steel bar, ASTM A576; Screws,
ASTM A307; Threaded Rod fabricated from hot-rolled carbon steel, ASTM A36, A575 or
A576.
1. Finish: Electro-galvanized per ASTM B633,Type III SCI.
D. Wedge Type Expansion Anchors: Threaded stud bolt body with Type 18-8 stainless steel split
expansion ring. Anchor body fabricated of carbon steel, zinc-plated to comply with ASTM
B633, Class Fe/Zn5. Redhead "WS-G Series Trubolt" anchors as manufactured by ITW
Ramset/Redhead.
E. Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard,paintable PVCsnap-in closure strips in 10 ft. lengths.
2.4 FINISHES "
A. Metal support system components shall be finished in accordance with the following standards:
1. Painted: Rust inhibiting acrylic enamel paint applied by electro-deposition, after cleaning
and phosphating, and thoroughly baked. Finish to withstand minimum 400 hours salt
spray when tested in accordance with ASTM B 117.
a. Color: Perma-Green as standard with support system manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05450-4 05113105
B. Upon delivery to the project site, all components shall be protected from the elements by a
shelter or other covering.
C. Materials that appear damaged, distressed, unidentifiable or rusted shall not be used and will not
be accepted.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal support framing systems. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing concrete inserts that are to be embedded in
concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provisions in the work of
those trades for interface with work of this Section.
C. Field Measurements: The contractor shall verify dimensions_ by field measurements to assure
that the metal support framing system can be installed according to plans, and without
interference with structural framing, mechanical systems, plumbing or other obstructions and
indicated measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Metal framing support systems shall be as manufactured by Unistrut
Corporation,Wayne, Michigan. No other manufacturers will be accepted.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot-rolled Uncoated Steel Sheets: ASTM A570.
B. Cold-rolled Uncoated Steel Sheets: ASTM A283.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653 GR33, G90 coating designation.
D. Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A575,A576 or ASTM A36
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Channel: Manufacturer's standard channels with flange edges returned toward web and as
follows:
1. Style:
a. Perforated with 9/16-inch diameter holes @ 1-7/8-inch o.c.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05450-3 05113105
D. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,
anchorage, piece-to piece connection hardware and requirements, accessory items, and interface
of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1. Drawings shall include, but not be limited to plans, sections, and details of the complete
system. Plans shall show all manufactured parts, by catalog numbers, all fabricated parts,
and all fasteners, anchors, hardware, and clear assembly instructions for the installers.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Design Data:
1. Submit structural calculations shall be prepared by and bear the stamp of a licensed
structural engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, for metal support
framing systems.
2. Structural design shall be based upon the Owner's equipment to be installed.
�. The arrangement of ceiling support members shown on the equipment supplier's
drawings, or equipment list, shall be incorporated into the support system.
4. Calculations shall show the adequacy of all portions of the support system to satisfy the
requirements of the specified building code. Data shall include, but not be limited to,
description of design criteria, stress and deflection analysis and typical connection
analysis and design.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AM*
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: The manufacturer shall not have had less than 10 year's
experience in manufacturing strut systems.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Installer must be a manufacturer's authorized representative/installer
with not less than 5 years experience in the installation of strut systems, and shall demonstrate
experience of projects of similar scope and size.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and who is experienced in providing
engineering services for metal support systems of the kind indicated.
D. Source Limitations: All strut system components shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.
All materials shall be stamped and identifiable by manufacturer and part number (where
appropriate).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All material is to be delivered to the project site in original factory packaging to avoid damage
to the finish.
Aftk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05450-2 05/13/05
ell- SECTION 05450 -METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all material, labor and equipment to complete the installation of manufactured metal
support framing system(s). Installation shall include all related materials, fittings, fasteners,
accessories and other devices for secure anchorage of framing system to building structure and
support of the following equipment.
1. Surgical Lights.
2. Gas Columns.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
ek 1. Section 01150, Special Provisions
2. Section 05120, Structural Steel
3. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications: for metal support systems fabricated from standard
steel shapes and plates.
4. Section 09510, Acoustical Ceilings:
5. Section 09900, Painting: for field finishing exposed to view support systems.
6. Division 15,Mechanical: for piping, duct and equipment supports.
7. Division 16,Electrical: for conduit,fixture and equipment supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, strengths, finishes, sizes and engineering information, installation
instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 05450-1 05113105
B. Horizontal alignment (levelness) of walls shall be within 1/960th (1/8" in 10'-0") of their AWW,
respective lengths.
C. Spacing of studs shall not be more than ± 1/8" from the designed spacing providing that the
cumulative error does not exceed the requirements of the finishing materials.
END OF SECTION 05400
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400- 14 05113105
3.5 ERECTION(AXIAL LOAD-BEARING)
A. Handling and lifting of prefabricated frame panels shall be done in a manner as to not cause
distortion in any members.
B. Tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure as shown on the plans, and as
designed and detailed on approved shop drawings.
C. Complete uniform and level bearing support shall be provided for the bottom track.
D. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural
element or they shall be butt welded or spliced together,
E. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flanges or webs of both upper and
lower tracks.
F. Framed wall openings shall include headers and supporting studs as shown on the plans, and as
designed and detailed on approved shop drawings.
G. Jack studs shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads, at free standing
stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support and shall be securely attached to supporting
members.
1. Approved Alternate: StiffClip°HE by The Steel Network.
H. Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is completed.
I. Wall stud bridging shall be installed in a manner to provide resistance to both minor axis
bending and rotation. Bridging rows shall be equally spaced not to exceed 4 feet on-center.
J. Recommended Bridging Connection: BridgeClips by The Steel Network. Provide attachment
through stud punch-out clamping onto stud web and wrapping around bridging channel.
Provide holes for screw attachment to stud web and channel.
K. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on plans as "sheer walls"for frame stability and lateral
load resistance. Such stud walls shall be braced as indicated on plans and specifications.
L. Splices in axially loaded studs are not be permitted. Provide insulation equal to that specified
elsewhere in all doubled jamb studs and double header member which will not be accessible to
the insulation contractor.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Vertical alignment(plumbness)of studs shall be within 1/960th(1/8" in 10'-0")of the span.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400- 13 05/13/05
F. Erect load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design ••
requirements.
G. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
H. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support. Install specified clip system for vertical deflection of
primary building structure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Attach cross studs, furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.
J. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent
stud rotation.
K. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized and primed surfaces with primer.
3A ERECTION (WIND LOAD ONLY)
A. Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner as to not cause distortion
in any member.
B. Tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure as shown on the plans.
C. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural
element or they shall be butt-welded spliced together.
D. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flanges or webs of both upper and
lower tracks.
E. Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads, at
first standing stair rails, and elsewhere to furnish support and shall be securely attached to
supporting members.
1. Approved Alternate: StiffClip°HE by The Steel Network.
F. Wall stud bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging rows shall be
spaced according to the following schedule. Wall up to 10 foot height; one row at mid-height.
Wall exceeding 10 feet in height; bridging rows spaced not to exceed 5 feet on-center. Install
an additional row of horizontal bridging 12 inches beneath track.
G. Recommended Bridging Connection: BridgeClips by The Steel Network. Provide attachment
through stud punch-out clamping onto stud web and wrapping around bridging channel.
Provide holes for screw attachment to stud web and channel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package B' - 2323 05400- 12 05/13/05
G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
H. Accurately align and attach runners in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations
and approved shop drawings. . Allow for main structure deflection at top runner to avoid
transferring load stud system. Allow for x Mirrinnrrn of 1/2-inch niovcnicn( 1-)ctwCCn Wflcction
hack, or deflection clip system and framing, unless ot.herwist, required or indicated
1. Frame wall openings with additional framing members at perimeter of openings in
accordance with engineering requirements.
2. Align holes in framing members to facilitate electrical conduit and piping work.
3. Provide all connections and accessories to accomplish a complete structural system.
4. Provide all needed members for proper fastening interior gypsum wallboard.
I. Bracing:
1. Provide continuous 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channel horizontal bracing within 10 to 12
inches of tops of stud.
2. Connect bracing to each stud as indicated on approved shop drawings.
3. Provide additional bridging and bracing as recommended by manufacturer, as necessary,
and as indicated on approved shop drawings.
4. Provide kick-back bracing perpendicular to plane of framing system and securely
anchored to building structure needed to create a complete structural system meeting
specified performance requirements.
J. Touch-up damaged metal coatings, with galvanize repair paint.
3.3 ERECTION OF STUDDING
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall and partition layout. Secure in place as indicated
on approved engineered shop drawings, at maximum 16 inches on center.
C. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top
and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated on approved shop drawings; not more than 2 inches
from abutting walls and at each side of openings.
D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door and window
jambs.
1. Approved Alternate: JamStudTM by The Steel Network consisting of a 50ksi minimum
single member section. Properties must be lxx effective >= 5.725 in^4 and Ma>= 57.14
kips-in or stronger.
E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400- 11 05/13/05
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect previous work, related work, and conditions under which this work is to be performed
and notify Contractor in writing of all deficiencies and conditions detrimental to the proper
completion of this work.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrates, previous work and
conditions.
3.2 ERECTION -GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and
requirements in this Section. '
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing;do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as indicated
on approved Shop Drawings, or where not indicated, as standard with fabricator. Wire
tying or clip fasteners of framing members is not permitted.
a. Where welding is indicated or required on approved Shop Drawings: Comply with
AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to approved Shop Drawings,
with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw
threads.
D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400- 10 05/13/05
1. "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound"BY ZRC Worldwide Inc., Marshfield MA.
AVW 2. "ZIRP"by Duncan Galvanizing,Everett MA.
3. "CG Zinc-Rich Cold Galvanizing"by American Polywater Corp., Stillwater, MN.
2.3 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-
steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Power-Actuated Fastening Systems : Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners:
I. Screws shall be manufactured by HILTI with "Kwik Seal" coating, or as approved equal.
2. Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.
3. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing,manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.4 PRE-ERECTION FABRICATION
A. Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting. Fabricate panels
square with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements; attach
components in a manner to prevent racking.
B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site,ready for installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-9 05113105
required), capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and
lateral drift of primary structure using mechanical fasteners.
1. DriftClipTM including step bushings. Mechanical attachment to structure and screw
attachment to stud web using step-bushings to permit frictionless vertical and lateral
movement. Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS Grade 50 (340), Class 1 50 ksi (340 MPa)_
minimum yield strength, 65 ksi (450 MPa) minimum tensile strength, G-90 (2275) hot-
dipped galvanized coating 68 mil, 14 gauge minimum thickness. Provide clips with
attached bushing and screw of the series, size and configuration as required by the
structural design calculations. Approved Manufacturer: The Steel Network, Inc. (TSN) or
approved equal.
a. TSN product "DriftClip DSL": Exterior head of wall.
b. TSN product "DriftClip DSLB": By-pass structural pour stop at floor slab.
C. TSN product "DriftClip DSLS": By-pass structure.
F. Sheet Materials:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M; unless indicated
otherwise.
G. All galvanized studs and accessories, 16 gage or heavier, shall be formed from steel that
conforms to the requirements of ASTM A-446 with a yield of 50 ksi and as set forth in Section
A3.1 of the AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members", latest
edition.
H. All galvanized studs and accessories, 18ga., shall be formed from steel that conforms to the
requirements of ASTM A-446, with a yield of 33 ksi and as set forth in Section A3.1 of the
AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition.
1. All galvanized studs and accessories shall have a minimum G-60 coating.
J. Physical properties and allowable load capabilities of members shall be developed in
accordance with AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members",
latest edition.
K. In accordance with AISI Section D4, rigid collateral facing materials may be considered as
adequate support of members against rotation.
L. Provide color coding or other marking designation to distinguish the installation of various
gages of studs. Markings shall be applied along the full length of the member.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Liquid zinc coating containing 95 percent metallic zinc, by weight in
the dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as
an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to FS DOD-P-21035A for repair of hot-dip
galvanizing and meeting the requirements. Acceptable products include:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-8 05/13/05
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Marino/Ware, South Plainfield,NJ 07080 (800) 627-4661.
2. Dietrich Industries,Hammond, IN 46320 (800) 873-2443.
3. Superior Steel Studs,Inc.,Astoria, NY 11102 (718) 545-7500.
4. The Steel Network, Inc.,Raleigh,NC 27615 (888)474-4876.
B. Products: Studs shall be based on:
1. Marino Type SW
2. Dietrich Type CSJ
3. Superior Type SSJ
4. Steel Network Type SG and JS
C. Studs, runners (track), bracing and bridging shall be manufactured per ASTM Specification C-
955.
1. Stud Gage: As required by design criteria,but minimum 18 gage.
2. Track Gage: As required by design criteria,but minimum 1.8 gage.
3. Bridging Gage: As required by design criteria, but minimum 16 gage. (Dietrich "U"
channel, or equal.)
D. Vertical Deflection Clips (non-load-bearing framing): Manufacturer's standard bypass and head
clips as required, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical
displacement of primary structure using mechanical fasteners.
1. VertiClip including step bushings. Mechanical attachment to structure and screw
attachment to stud web using step-bushings to permit frictionless vertical movement.
Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS Grade 50 (340), Class 1 50 ksi (340 MPa)_ minimum
yield strength, 65 ksi (450 MPa) minimum tensile strength, G-90 (Z275) hot-dipped
galvanized coating 68 mil-14 gauge minimum thickness. Provide clips with attached
bushing and screw of the series, size and configuration as required by the structural
design calculations., Approved Manufacturer: The Steel Network, Inc. (TSN) or
approved equal.
a. TSN product"VertiClip SL":Exterior head of wall.
b. TSN product"VertiTrack VTX":Exterior head of wall pre-assembled with track.
C. TSN product"VertiClip SLB": By-pass structural pour stop at floor slab.
d. TSN product"VertiClip SLT": By-pass floor slab or structure.
C. TSN product"VertiClip SLS": By-pass structure.
E. Drift Clips (non-load-bearing framing): If so required by project requirements and as indicated
on approved shop drawings: Manufacturer's standard bypass and head of wall clips (as
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-7 05113105
F. Submit the following prior to request for Certificate of Occupancy, to both Architect and local
Building Official having jurisdiction:
1. All certifications, reports and programs required by Chapter 1.7 of the Massachusetts
State Building code for work engineered by Contractor's Profession Engineer under the
requirements of this Section
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
Nvith minimum 3 years documented experience.
C. Installer: Company with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating
previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer.
D. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AWCI, MF/SLA and
AWS D 1.3 requirements.
E. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
F. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill,
shop, or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by the Owner.
G. However, such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements,
nor shall inspector's acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by
the Owner or Architect if defects are discovered.
H. The Contractor shall give proper notice to inspection agencies designated by the Architect and
shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other physical damage
during delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing on a flat plane, protect with a waterproof covering, and
ventilate to avoid condensation.
C. Any damaged materials shall be removed from the job site immediately.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-6 05113105
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, material descriptions, installation specifications and other data
needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing materials, shop coatings, steel thickness,
details of fabrication, details of attachment to adjoining work, size, location and spacing of
fasteners for attaching framing to itself, location, size and spacing of attachment to the structure,
accessories and their installation, and critical installation procedures. Include plans, elevations,
sections and details. All shop drawings shall bear the signature and stamp of the registered
Professional Engineer who designed the framing system and oversaw the production of the
Shop Drawings.
D. Certifications
1. Certifications shall be statements from the manufacturer certifying that the materials
conform to the appropriate requirements as outlined in the Contract Documents.
2. Submit certification confirming that all welders to be employed on the work have passed
American Welding Society Standard B3.0. Welders shall have passed the qualification
tests within the preceding 12 month period from date of submission of certificates.
E. Calculations
1. Submit engineering calculations or data for typical and special conditions for exterior
wall components and connections.
2. Engineering calculations or data shall be submitted verifying the framing assembly's
ability to meet or exceed the specified design requirements and the requirements of
governing codes and authorities. In the event of a conflict between these requirements,
the more stringent requirements shall govern, as determined by the Architect. These
calculations shall include,but not be limited to the following items:
a. Steel Framing, including built-up framing supporting windows against lateral and
gravity loads.
b. All connections (member to member, and member to structure) shall be thoroughly
examined and designed.
C. Wall bridging shall be designed to provide resistance to minor axis bending and
rotation of wall studs. Bridging spacing shall not exceed 6 feet. Provide bridging
wherever masonry, including stone, is located in conjunction with cold formed
metal framing, and elsewhere as required by design requirements.
d. Wall framing that does not have continuous sheathing applied to one side shall be
checked for compression in the unsheathed flanges and compression flange bracing
shall be added as required.
e. Calculations shall be performed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the state
in which the project is located. The submitted calculations shall be affixed with the
Engineer's registration stamp and signature.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-5 05/13/05
simultaneous occurrence of inward design pressure on one surface, and outward design
pressure on the adjoining surface,is not required.
3. Cold-formed metal framing must also carry dead, wind and earthquake loads and live
loads from work specified in other sections supported by cold-formed metal framing.
C. Structural Performance -Implied Loads: Design and construct cold-formed metal framing
system to withstand minimum loading requirements as specified herein.
1. Design and engineer cold-formed metal framing system in accordance with procedures
for determining design wind loads for components and cladding for building height >60
feet, pursuant to §1609.8.2 of BOC:A '99, incorporating the following project-specific
values:
a. Salient Corner Area: Within 14-feet of exterior corners.
b. Basic Wind Speed: 70 rnph
C. Exposure Category: C
d. Basic Velocity Pressure(II): 12.5
e. Wind Load Importance Factor(1): 1.16
f. Product of Internal Pressure Coefficient and Gust Response Factor (GCS,;):
Condition 1(+0.25 and—0.25).
2. Design and engineer interior metal framing system for a design load pressure of not. less
than 10 psf to compensate for internal pressure fluctuations.
D. Seismic Requirements
1. General Seismic Requirements: Cold-formed metal framing system shall comply with
seismic design requirements of the referenced building code for a project in Seismic
Hazard Exposure Group 1II, with a Seismic Performance Category of D:
2. Design: The cold-formed metal framing system shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 1.612.7.3 of 780CMR and applicable sections of refeerenced state
supplement and amendment, in its entirety, and for seismic forces (F4,) in accordance with
the formula Fr=A,,C,PWc where the following values are used:
a. The coefficient representing effective peak velocity-related acceleration (AJ _
0.12g.
b. The seismic coefficient for architectural components (Q:
1) Components (CJ=0.9.
2) Attachments (CJ= 3.0
C. Performance criteria factor from Table 1610.6.3 of BOCA 99 (P) = 1.5.
d. Wc= weight of architectural component.
E. Allowable Connection Points: Connect cold-formed metal framing to building structure only at
locations approved by building structural engineer and as indicated on the approved shop
drawings.
F. Provide movable joints to accommodate the full range of manufacturing tolerances, field
tolerances, thermal movement, wind and seismic movement, floor and beam deflections and
column settlement. Joints shall accommodate the worst possible combination of effects so as to
prevent internal stress, failure,deterioration or failure of weather seals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-4 05113105
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Structural performance: Design, engineer and provide a complete metal framing and support
system having deflection limits as specified herein under the full inward and outward lateral
load as indicated herein and in all cases not less than as prescribed by applicable codes for this
project location. Deflection and structural calculations shall not include any structural benefit
from the fagade systems; metal framing alone shall carry the loads. Where a member supports
more than one finish,the most restrictive deflection shall govern.
1. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of
joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to
seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
2. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
members, and clearances of intended openings.
3. Exterior Wall Framing Deflection Limits: Note: Stud spacing shall be 16 inches
maximum on center unless indicated otherwise.
a. Deflection limit for masonry veneer: L/600 where L is the length of the steel
member or a maximum of 0.3-inches. Design wall framing to accommodate
horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
b. Deflection limit for exterior metal panel systems: L/175 where L is the length of
the steel member or 3/4-inch, which ever is less.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Engineering and Design: Provide the services of a Professional Engineer, registered in the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts to design, engineer, and certify that the work of this section
meets or exceeds the requirements specified in this section. The Engineer shall assume
professional responsibility for the design of all cold-formed framing components and their
connections. Design decisions which effect visual characteristics shall be subject to the approval
and modifications of the Architect.
B. Loads: Design cold-formed metal framing and connections to support total loads including dead
loads, live loads, earthquake loads, thermal loads, wind loads and other loads as prescribed by
the governing building code by reference standards,and as described herein.
1. Pressures and loads used for design shall satisfy the building code, but shall not be less
than the minimum values specified below. Where permitted by code, the sum of the dead
load, live load, and wind (or earthquake) load may be multiplied by an allowable
reduction factor. Other load combinations, and single loads, shall not to be reduced. An
allowable stress increase of one third,or any other value, shall not be used in conjunction
with a reduced load combination.
2. Wind pressures shall be assumed to act perpendicular to flat surfaces supported by cold-
formed metal framing, regardless of the surface orientation. Wind pressures shall be
assumed to act perpendicular to tangents of curved surfaces. At corners and other changes
in plane, both surfaces shall be assumed to experience their inward design pressures
simultaneously, and their outward design pressures simultaneously. Design for
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-3 05/13/05
C. The BOCA a National Building Code/1999, Fourteenth Edition, referred to herein as "BOCA
99":
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the performance
requirements for design wind loads, seismic requirements and other designated or
applicable loads for cold-formed metal framing system.
D. ASTM Standards:
1. A123 -Zinc Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
2. A645 - Steel Sheet, Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially
Heat Treated.
3. A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
4. A780-Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
5. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and
Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members; 2001.
6. A1008/A1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability
7. A1011/AI0I IM - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
8. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 1998.
9. C-955 Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Track) and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and
Metal Plaster Base.
10. C-1007 Standard Specification for the Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and
Axial)Steel Studs and Related Accessories.
11. C1513 Standard Specification For Steel Tapping Screws For Cold-Formed Steel Framing
Connections
E. ANSI-Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.
F. AWCI: Specifications Guide for Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
G. AWS A 2.0-Standard Welding Symbols.
H. AWS D 1.3 -Light Steel Welding Code.
1. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual.
J. ML/SFA: Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing.
K. AISC-LRFD Manual of Steel Construction;third edition.
L. AISI-Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 1996.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400-2 05/13/05
SECTION 05400-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Design, engineer, furnish and install metal framing and support system for the following
applications:
1. Load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall framing.
2. Cold-formed metal framing for exterior canopies. '
3. Elsewhere that cold-formed metal framing is indicated.
4. Include all connections,bracing,bridging and accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package 'A.' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410, Testing Laboratory Services: Controlled on-site inspection and testing of
steel stud system for exterior curtain wall.
2. Section 04210, Brick Masonry: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing.
3. Section 05120, Structural Steel: Structural building framing.
4. Section 05310,Metal Decking
5. Section 06100,Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and curbing.
6. Section 07210,Building Insulation: Batt and blanket insulation within framing members.
7. Section 09111,Interior Metal Stud System: Partition Framing.
8. Section 09250, Gypsum Board,Assemblies: Exterior wall sheathing
1.3 REFERENCE
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards.Where these standards conflict
with other specified requirements,the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
B. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
1. The above building code is the reference standard for determining the seismic
requirements for cold-formed metal framing system.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 05400- 1 05113105
2. Always pre-wet surfaces,keeping lower areas wet to avoid streaks.
3. Apply diluted Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner directly to surfaces with masonry
brush or low-pressure spray.
4. Allow the cleaner to remain on the surface for 3-5 minutes or until stains have
disappeared.
5. Re-apply cleaner and rinse thoroughly with a garden hose pressure fresh water rinse
followed by a pressure rinse, not to exceed 800-1.000 psi, 4-6 gallons per minute with
minimum 15 degree fan tip, to ensure that all residues are removed from the surface.
NOTE: If pressure rinsing equipment is not available, brush the surface while performing
the second fresh water rinse.
C. Final Clean-Down of Concrete Masonry Chits:
1. Mortar Removal Cleaning:
a. Perform final mortar removal cleaning after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
b. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
C. Pre-soak walls before cleaning.
d. Scrub walls with detergent solution using stiff brush.
e. Thoroughly rinse and wash off cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using
clean water.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove and dispose of necessary masking materials following completion of cleaning
operation. Windows and non-masonry areas shall be left clean.
B. All residual washed from building surface shall be swept or flushed away from surrounding
sidewalk and service areas nightly. All premises shall be clean and neat at all times.
END OF SECTION 04500
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MASONRY CLEANING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04500-6 05/13/05
2. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to
unprotected surfaces.
3. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents
soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water
penetration into building interiors.
4. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a
liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply
liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean substrates of substances that interfere with penetration or
performance of surface treatments. Test for moisture content and pH level, according to
manufacturer's instructions, to ensure surface is prepared and dry to receive surface treatments.
C. Test Application: As specified in Part 1 above for Prein stall ation Testing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins,
product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.
B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all
surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without
streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
D. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upwards from bottom to top of each treated area
at each stage or scaffold setting.
3.4 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION CLEANING
A. Final Clean-Down of Brick Masonry:
1. All surfaces shall be spray or brush coated with diluted cleaner and left on the surface 2
or 3 minutes. A second application shall follow if deemed necessary by preliminary test.
2. Coated area shall then be rinsed from bottom of the staging up with clean water using
high pressure rinsing equipment. Equipment should be adjusted so that rinse water, either
cold or warm, is applied at a pressure not to exceed 800-1000 psi, 4-6 gallons per minute
with minimum 15 degree fan tip.
3. Gun used to apply water shall be equipped with not less than a 15 degree spray tip. All
tips shall be fan type.
B. Final Clean-Down Process-Precast Concrete:
1. Dilution: Follow manufacturer's written recommendations.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MASONRY CLEANING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04500-5 05/13/05
2.3 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Aam*+,
A. Water: Clean, potable,free of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, and organic matter.
B. Brushes: Fiber bristle only.
C. Liquid-Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard product for protecting glass, metal
and polished stone surfaces from effects of masonry cleaners. Provide "SureKlean Acid Stop,"
as manufactured by ProSoCo,Inc.
D. Spray Equipment for Chemical Cleaners: Low-pressure tank or chemical pump with cone-
shaped spray tip.
E. Spray Equipment for Water: Equipment capable of controlled spray application of water at
pressures, volume and temperature (if any) indicated, with not less than 15-degree fan-shaped
spray tip.
F. Steam Generator: Capable of delivering live steam at nozzle head.
2.4 MIXES
A. Mixing: Mix proprietary materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including
product data and product technical bulletins.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY
A. Source Quality: Obtain masonry restoration, cleaning materials, and protective treatments from
a single manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously
installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor
vehicles, landscaping,buildings,and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MASONRY CLEANING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04500-4 05/13/05
#01b, 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply at surface and air temperatures below 40°F (4°C) or above 95°F (35°C) unless
otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Do not apply when surface and air temperatures are not expected to remain above 40°F (4°C)
for a minimum of 8 hours after application, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Do not apply under windy conditions which would cause cleaning products or protective
treatments to be blown onto adjacent unprotected surfaces.
D. Do not apply to frozen substrate. Allow adequate time for substrate to thaw, if freezing
conditions exist before application.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: PROSOCO, Inc., 3741 Greenway Circle,Lawrence, KS 66046; Telephone: (800)
255-4255, (785) 865-4200.
B. Product(s)/System(s): Sure Klean ®Masonry Restoration and Cleaning Products:
1. New Construction Cleaning-Final Clean-Down of Brick.
2. New Construction Cleaning-Final Clean-Down of Precast Concrete Surfaces.
2.2 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION CLEANERS
A. Final Clean-Down of New Brick:
1. Vana Trol®
a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; slight amber color; 1.117 Specific Gravity; 0.3 (1:6
dilution)pH; -30°F(-34.4°C)Freeze Point; 9.3 lbs. wt./gal. (1.114 kg wt./L.).
B. Final Clean-Down of New Precast Concrete Surfaces:
1. Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner.
a. Characteristics: Clear liquid, light brown color; 1.130 Specific Gravity; No Flash
Point; 0.7 (at 1:1 dilution) pH; 18°F (-7.79°C) Freeze Point; 9.40 lbs. wt./gal.
(1.126 kg wt./L.).
C. Concrete Masonry Unit Cleaner:
1. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium
polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MASONRY CLEANING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04500-3 05113105
products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and Aow*,,,
performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
13. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has
specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. Work of this Section
shall be performed by a firm with not less than five years successful experience in comparable
masonry cleaning projects.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation
during construction and approving application method.
D. VOC Compliance: Products used in the work of this section shall be in compliance with the
VOC. requirements of the regulatory agency having jurisdiction.
E. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to verify project requirements,
substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty
requirements.
F. Preinstallation Testing: Conduct preinstallation testing as follows: A
1. Preinstallation testing area(s) shall be used to exhibit cleaning performance on type of
brickwork,concrete masonry units and precast concrete.
2. Provide separate preinstallation test area for each type of masonry indicated to be
cleaned.
3. Test areas shall be approved by the Architect and shall be approximately 20 square feet.
4. Samples of adjacent nonmasonry materials shall be tested for possible reaction with
cleaning materials, such samples shall be available for inspection by the Architect.
Multiple tests of varying concentrations shall determine composition of cleaning solution
required.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to
avoid construction delays.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions
and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MASONRY CLEANING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04500-2 05113105
SECTION 04500 -MASONRY CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Masonry construction cleaning of new masonry construction listed below:
1. New exterior face brick.
2. New precast concrete.
3. New concrete masonry units.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Section 03450,Architectural Precast Concrete
2. Section 04210,Brick Masonry
3. Section 04220, Concrete Masonry Units
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, application procedures, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Program Description:
1. Cleaning Program: Submit written program description for cleaning process describing
materials, methods,equipment, and sequence of operations.
D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Manufacturer's Field Reports:Manufacturer's field reports specified herein.
E. Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with
Section 01730 — Operation and Maintenance Data. Include methods for maintaining installed
Cooley Dickinson Hospital MASONRY CLEANING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04500-1 05/13/05
B. Final Cleaning: Final cleaning of concrete masonry units is under the work of Section 04500 - .,
Masonry Cleaning.
END OF SECTION 04220
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 04220-16 05/13/05
I. Fully grout the jambs and heads of all pressed metal door frames located in walls with
concrete masonry.
2. Bed anchors of metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar.
3.5 .LINTELS
A. Install steel lintel angles as the work progresses.
3.6 SITE TOLERANCES
A. The following allowable installed tolerances are allowable variations from locations and
dimensions indicated by the Contract Document and shall not be added to allowable tolerances
indicated for other work.
I. Allowable Variation from True Plumb: In lines and surfaces of walls and arises: 1/4-inch
in 10-feet, 3/8-inch in any story or 20-feet maximum, 1/2-inch in 40-feet, non-
cumulative.
2. Allowable Variation from True Level: ± 1/8-inch in 10'-0"
3. Allowable Variation from True Wall Thickness: ± 1/4-inch.
4. Allowable Variation from True Plane of Adjacent Surfaces: ± 1/16-inch in 10'-0"
3.7 INSPECTION
A. The Structural Engineer of Record or his alternate, retained by the Owner, will be present at all
times when reinforced masonry is being constructed.
B. Masonry Prism Testing:
1. Preparation of Prism Testing Samples: For each type of wall construction indicated
below, provide prism test samples per ASTM E 447, Method B. Perform prism test for
each type of concrete masonry unit.
a. Hollow exterior concrete masonry units 12-inches wide by 8-inches high by 16-
inches in length.
b. Grouted (solid) exterior concrete masonry units 12-inches wide by 8-inches high
by 16-inches in length.
2. Frequency of Prism Testing: Provide prism testing samples during construction for each
5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
3. The Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
testing of prism samples in accordance with Section 01410 - Testing and Laboratory
Services.
3.8 CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean concrete masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-15 05113105
modified by the supplemental requirements contained. See Structural Drawings for additional
requirements.
B. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will
reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown
on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting
or other causes.
C. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars
against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses.
Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not
less than the nominal bar diameter of 1-inch(whichever is greater).
U. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the
Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching
to dowels, lap ends,place in contact and wire tie.
1. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, use Class "B" tension splice
for reinforcement.
E. Anchoring;Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated on drawings.
F. Place two #4 bars per cell at 4'-0" on center, plus at corners and each side of openings as
minimum reinforcement unless shown otherwise.
G. Horizontal joint reinforcing:
1. Provide for all CMU walls spaced not more than 16-inches o.c. vertically, except space
reinforcing at 8-inches o.c. immediately above and below openings and extend this
reinforcing at least 2-feet beyond each jamb.
2. Overlap joints in reinforcing at least 6-inches. Do not bridge expansion and control
joints, if any. Provide preformed corners and tees.
3. Where lintel angles and joint reinforcement occur in the same joint, stop reinforcement
at angle.
3.4 GROUTING
A. Grout Types:
1. Use "Fine Grout" for filling 4 inches spaces or smaller in both horizontal directions.
B. Grouting Technique: "Low Lift"method, in accordance with NCMA TEK#3-2.
C. Grouting Technique: "High Lift"method, in accordance with NCMA TEK#3-2.
D. Grouting Pressed Metal Door Frames
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-14 05113105
I. Install vertical control joints in walls where indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
2. Do not provide control joints at masonry veneer construction — refer to provisions for
expansion joints at veneer systems specified herein.
3. Installation:
a. Install preformed control-joint gaskets in preformed slots.
b. Leave perimeter edges of units at control joints free and clear of any obstructions
as required for installation of backer seal and sealant under the work of Section
07920—Joint Sealants.
4. Locations of Control Joints: Provide control joints in accordance with the following
requirements.
a. Where indicated on the Drawings.
b. When not indicated on the Drawings, provide vertical control joints at cavity wall
backup, in accordance with the following:
1) Every 2.5-feet maximum.
2) 4-feet from corners.
J. Mortar Screen
1. Install at cavity where weep holes occur above through-wall flashing.
2. Install after the first course above through-wall flashing are laid.
3. Place one continuous row of mortar screen in the cavity on the flashing against the inside
of the outer wythe at the base of the wall,zig-zag side up.
K. Weep Holes
1. Weeps in exterior cavity walls shall be spaced 16-inches o.c.. Install weeps in mortar
joints directly above through-wall flashing. Install weep vents in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
L. Cavity Walls:
1. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.Perform
work in accordance with the methods described in Section 04210—Brick Masonry.
2. Wood/metal strip catcher:
a. Fabricate a wood or metal strip slightly smaller in width than the cavity
dimensions and attach wire or rope pulls.
b. Starting at lowest point in the cavity, place strip into cavity.
C. As wall in constructed to next level of wall ties, lift catcher by pulls, removing
mortar remnants from catcher. Place catcher on next level wall ties ties.
d. Continue process until completion of wall.
3.3 REINFORCED MASONRY
A. All work in conjunction with reinforced concrete masonry construction shall be as indicated on
the Drawings, and shall conform to all requirements of "Specification for Masonry
Construction (ACI - ASCE 530.1)" published by the American Concrete Institute, except as
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package' —2323 04220-13 05113105
E. Infilling existing openings: -^
1. Existing openings shall be cut and fit so that new masonry is toothed into existing
coursing.
P. Masonry Wall Anchors And Ties:
1. Exterior walls constructed of masonry veneer with CMU backup shall have horizontal
joint reinforcement anchor system starting with the first course of the backup block and
continuing at alternating courses.
a. Anchor ties attached to the joint reinforcing shall be spaced horizontally 16-inches
on centers for anchoring brickwork. Install additional anchor ties at approximately
8-inches o.c., at jambs of wall openings and near corners of structure. In no case
shall the spacing of the anchors exceed one anchor for each 1.75 sq. ft. of wall
area.
2. Lap horizontal joint reinforcement to minimum of 6 inches. Reinforcement shall be wide
enough to bridge cores in block and extend to within 1/2 inch of face and wall. Corners
shall be prefabricated"L"or"T"units.
G. Tooling:
1. Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface, providing joints of"concave" pattern throughout.
Do not tool joints of masonry scheduled to receive plaster or stucco finish.
H. Expansion Joints at Veneer Systems:
1. Provide vertical expansion joints in CMU masonry veneer, where indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Install expansion joint stabilizers, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, 16-
inches o.c. vertically at each bed joint where veneer anchor ties are installed.
3. Install foam compressible filler in expansion joint, leaving sufficient room for
installation of backer seal and sealant under the work of Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
Where expansion joint stabilizers bridge expansion joints, discontinue foam
compressible filler at bottom of stabilizer and resume use of filler immediately above
stabilizer.
4. Wherever new exterior masonry walls abut existing work:
a. Provide expansion joint, size as detailed on the Drawings, to accommodate
compressible filler.
b. Install Type "V" expansion joint stabilizer in accordance with manufacturers
instructions. Where holes for fasteners are provided, secure to masonry with
fasteners specified above.
5. Install foam compressible filler in joints between masonry and abutting dissimilar
material.
6. At exterior walls where CMU masonry veneer abuts the underside of steel relieving
angles, install compressible filler at top of CMU and underside of steel and prepare joint
to receive sealant and backer seal.
I. Control Joints.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase I
Package `E' —2323 04220-12 05113105
5. Set units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced.
6. Clean the top surface of foundation free from dirt, debris, and laitance, and expose the
aggregate prior to start in installing first course.
7. Accurately fit the units to plumbing, ducts, openings, and other interfaces, neatly
patching all holes.
8. Keep the walls continually clean, preventing grout and mortar stains. If grout does run
over, clean immediately.
9. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide 3/8 inch wide joints in running bond
with vertical joints located at center of masonry units in the alternate course below.
10. Sealant at Mortar Joints: Prepare mortar joints for installation of sealant where indicated
on the Drawings and as specified herein:
a. Mortar Joint Preparation: Rake out face of mortar joint to depth indicated as
preparation for installation of bond-breaker tape and sealant under the work of
Section 07920—Joint Sealants.
b. Prepare mortar joints for the installation of sealant at the following locations:
1) Where"Soft Joint"is indicated on the Drawings.
2) Where exposed-to-view masonry wythe abuts precast concrete or limestone.
3) Where masonry wythe abuts dissimilar materials.
4) Where bond-breaker material is installed in the masonry bed joint.
B. Flashing:
1. Install in accordance manufacturer's instructions
2. Through-Wall Flashing:. Refer to Section 07650-Through-Wall Flashing.
3. Metal Cap Flashing: Refer to Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
C. Laying up:
1. Place units in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints.
2. Align vertical cells of hollow units to maintain a clear and unobstructed system of flues.
3. Hold racking to an absolute minimum.
D. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:
1. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement in every second horizontal joint in concrete
masonry unit construction.
a. Where horizontal joint reinforcing occurs within anchored veneer construction,
provide horizontal joint reinforcing in alternating courses with masonry anchor
ties. Where anchor ties are located within the same bed joint as horizontal joint
reinforcing, discontinue joint reinforcing on either side of anchor.
2. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement at first joint above and below openings.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
3. Lap joints in reinforcement 6 inches minimum.
4. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8-inch
on exterior side of walls, 1/2-inch elsewhere.
5. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints.
6. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T"
sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
returns, offsets,column fireproofing,pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-11 05113105
17 GROUT MIXES
A. General: Grout for non-reinforced and reinforced masonry shall be in accordance with ASTM
C 476.
B. Mixing:
1. Provide "fine grout" or "coarse grout" as required in accordance with
ASTM C 476.
2. Proportions:
a. For "fine grout," provide one part Portland cement to 2-1/4 parts minimum to three
parts maximum of damp loose sand, with sufficient water to achieve fluid
consistency.
3. "Fluid consistency" is interpreted as meaning as stiff as feasible while pouring intimately
in place without segregation, filling all voids as required. Unless otherwise specified
desired consistency of grout shall be considered achieved when slump falls between 8
and 11 inches
C. Use "fine grout" where called for on the Drawings, where the grout space is less than 3 inches
in its least dimension, or required by agencies having jurisdiction.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. If conditions
detrimental to performance of unit masonry are detected, notify the Architect, in writing of
such conditions.
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections
prior to installation.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Do not commence installation of the work of this Section until horizontal and vertical
alignment of foundation is within 1 inch of plumb and the lines shown on the Drawings.
2. Do not use chipped or broken units.
3. Lay only dry masonry units.
4. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-10 05/13/05
AV%k 1. Compressible joint filler material shall be "Ceramar" flexible foam expansion joint filler
manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Elgin, 1L (800) 342-5976 or approved equal,
conforming to ASTM D 1752.
a. Size: As detailed on the Drawings.
b. Note: Backer seal and sealant for veneer masonry expansion joint provided under
Section 07920-Joint Sealants.
G. Expansion Joint Stabilizer:
1. "Slip-SetTM Stabilizer" as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.
2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.
3. Provide style "H" stabilizer for level horizontal mortar joints at masonry veneer
expansion joints.
4. Provide style "V" stabilizer for to connect intersecting walls or new walls to existing
abutting walls.
5. Fasteners For Securing Style "V" Stabilizer To Existing Masonry: 1-1/4 inch long by
3/16 inch diameter tapered flat head screw fastener, designed for fastening into masonry
with corrosion-resistant coating;HILTI Kwik-Con II+316-114 TFH or approved equal.
H. Control Joints:
1. Rubber shear keys conforming to ASTM D 2000, with a minimum durometer hardness of
80 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240.
2. Hohmann and Barnard#RS Series or approved equal.
2.6 MORTAR MIXES
A. Mixing:
1. Mixing Proportions: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for job-mixed
mortar, of types indicated below.
2. Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not less than three minutes, using only sufficient
water to produce a mortar which is spreadable and of a workable consistency. When
mixing use known volume measures; do not batch by shovel.
3. Retemper mortar with water as required to maintain high plasticity. On mortar boards,
retemper only by adding water within a basin formed with mortar, and by working the
mortar into the water. Discard and do not use mortar which is unused after 1-1/2 hours
following initial mixing.
4. Provide type N mortar for exterior masonry above grade.
5. Provide type S mortar for reinforced and load-bearing masonry, and elsewhere as
indicated.
6. Provide type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth and elsewhere
as indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-9 05113105
1. Hohmann &Barnard No. CWT 22 gage corrugated galvanized steel.
2. Weston Company No. WM3.
E. Formed Wire: Provide 3/16-inch diameter rectangular dovetail anchors. Dovetail to be
compatible with anchor slot specified under Section 03300.
F. Wire Mesh: 19-gage galvanized steel wire, 1/2-inch square mesh, sized for width of masonry
unit.
G. Mesh Ties: Provide 1/2-inch square, 16-gage hot dipped galvanized mesh, 16-inclies long x 1/2-
unit width.
14. Miscellaneous Ties: Provide straps, bars, rods and similar items which are fabricated from not
less than 16 gage sheet steel or 3/16-inch diameter steel wire.
1. Galvanizing: Provide hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153, class B2, 1.5 oz/ft2 zinc coating on all
ties, reinforcing, anchors and similar items which extend into an exterior wall assembly. Semi-
exposed areas shall be considered exterior.
15 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Mortar Screen: Mortar Net Green TM as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.,
Hauppauge, NY (516) 234-0600 or approved equal.
1. Thickness: 2-inches.
2. Material: 200 Denier 100 percent recycled polyester.
B. Typical Weep Inserts: #QV -Quadro-VentTM as manufactured by Hohmann &Barnard, Inc., or
approved equal.
1. Honeycombed polypropylene, 2-1/2-inches in height, color as selected by Architect.
C. Lintel Weep Inserts:
1. Where "Lintel Weeps" are indicated on the Drawings, provide 3/8-inch O.D. medium-
density polyethylene weep hole #341, as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or
approved equal.
D. Backer Rod: Where backer rod is detailed on the Drawings in conjunction with veneer
expansion joint at masonry opening, provide 3/8-inch diameter non-absorbing, non-staining,
extruded from a blend of polyolefin. Sof-Rod as manufactured by Applied Extrusion
Technologies or Sof-Type, manufactured by I.T.P. Corp.
E. Bond Breaker: Self-adhered through-wall flashing strips (refer to Section 07650 — Through-
Wall Flashing).
F. Compressible Filler:
AM%*
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-8 05/13/05
6. Water: Provide water free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic
materials.
2.3 GROUT MATERIALS
A. General: Grout for non-reinforced and reinforced masonry shall be in accordance with ASTM
C-476-33.
B. Ingredients:
I. Portland Cement: Comply with ASTM C150, type I or type II, free from water soluble
salts and alkalies.
2. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of
dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter.
3. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the
Architect.
4. Water: Provide water free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic
materials.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615,
except as otherwise indicated.
1. Provide Grade 60.
2. Shop-fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked.
B. Anchor and Tie Manufacturer: Hohmann&Barnard, Inc. (516) 234-0600.
C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage System for Brick Veneer or Concrete Masonry
Veneer with Concrete Masonry Unit Back-up:
1. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: #280 S.I.S. Dub'1 Loop-LokTM Ladder Type
Reinforcement. System shall include Box Byna-tie/Continuous Wire.
2. Insulation Retainer: Slip on "Loop-Lok" Washer to mechanically lock insulation in
place.
3. Include preformed welded corners.
4. Continuous 3/16-inch, hot-dipped galvanized, horizontal joint reinforcement wire.
Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire snapped into Seismiclip at all tie
locations.
5. Size ties with seismic clip to penetrate a minimum of 1-1/2 -inches into the depth of the
veneer wythe when measured from the back face of veneer wythe while maintaining a
minimum of 5/8-inch mortar cover from the outside edge of the tie to the outside face of
joint.
D. Wall ties for securing concrete masonry units to existing surfaces:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-7 05113105
I. Units shall be of standard sizes, shapes, including necessary closures, fitters and split
units where piping and conduit are built into exposed finish walls. Provide "U" block
units where indicated on the drawings. Surfaces to be exposed or painted shall be smooth
and of uniform texture.
a. Provide special shapes for corners, jambs, control joints, headers, bonding, and
other special conditions.
b. Provide square-edged units for outside corners.
2. Masonry units for reinforced masonry shall be two core units.
3. Solid Units: Provide solid units where voids would be exposed to view after installation.
4. Concrete masonry units shall conform with ASTM Designation C-90, Grade N, Type I
for hollow load-bearing units.
l3. Concrete Masonry Units
1. Aggregate shall comply with ASTM Designation C 33 Normal Weight Aggregate for
CMU; do not use cinder aggregate.
2. Size:
a. Concrete masonry back up units: 8-inches wide by 8-inches high by 16-inches in
length, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Concrete masonry veneer units: 4-inches wide by 8-inches high by 16-inches in
length, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. General: Mortar for non-reinforced and reinforced unit masonry shall be in accordance with
ASTM C270, and shall be Portland cement and lime mortar. Masonry cement will not be
approved.
B. Ingredients:
1. Portland Cement: Comply with ASTM C150,type I.
2. Lime: Provide hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207,Type S.
3. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of
dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter, and complying with
ASTM C144.
4. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the
Architect.
5. Admixtures for CMU exposed to weather:
a. Integral Water Repellent Admixture: DRY-BLOCK Mortar Admixture, by W.R.
Grace &Co.-Conn.
b. Mortar color: Chemically inert synthetic iron oxide pigments, lightfast, weather
resistant, complying with A.S.T.M. C-979. "H" color series, as selected by
Architect, manufactured by Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc., Springfield, IL
(217) 522-3112. Centurion Pigments manufactured by Centurion Colorbond
(subsidiary of Lafarge Corp.) Hamburg, PA (215) 562-3000 will be considered as
equal to the specified product.
C. Use no other admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the Architect.
,.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-6 05/13/05
place. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in
ambient temperature of 90 degrees F or greater,with relative humidity less than 50 percent.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Cold Weather Construction: Comply with the requirements of 780 CMR 2112.3, and the
following additional requirements:
I. Installation: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the
following procedures:
a. 32 to 25 degrees F: Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40
and 120 degrees F. Maintain grout above freezing until used in masonry.
b. 25 to 20 degrees F: Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40
and 120 degrees F. Maintain grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat
masonry units to 40 degrees F when grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls
under construction.
C. 20 degrees F and Below: Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures
between 40 and 120 degrees F. Maintain grout above freezing until used in
masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 degrees F. Provide enclosures and use heat on
both sides of walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 degrees
F within the enclosures.
2. Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 degrees F and
above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after
completion of cleaning.
D. Hot Weather Protection: Comply with the requirements of 780 CMR 2112.4.
E. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes,from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-5 05/13/05
a. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated below, test masonry
prisms per ASTM E 447, Method B. Perform prism test for each type of concrete
masonry unit.
1) Hollow concrete masonry units 12 inches wide by 8 inches high by 16
inches in length.
2) Grouted (solid) concrete masonry units 12 inches wide by 8 inches high by
16 inches in length.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from
one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
E. Reinforced Masonry: Reinforced concrete masonry construction shall conform to all
requirements of "Specification for Concrete Masonry Construction (ACI 531.1)" published by
the American Concrete Institute, except as modified by the supplemental requirements
contained herein.
F. Fabricator of exterior exposed to weather concrete masonry units shall be qualified DRY-
BLOCK producer satisfying requirements of W.R. Grace &Co. -Conn.
G. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Section 07196, Air Barrier Conference.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under waterproof cover, and in a dry location to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants,
corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried
condition.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection: Cover work with waterproof sheeting at the end of each day and whenever work is
not in progress. Extend cover down both sides of walls at least 24 inches and hold securely in
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-4 05113105
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and
placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of
Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and
arrangement of masonry reinforcement.
D. Certifications: Provide material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and
Contractor, certifying that each material complies with specified requirements.
1. Mortar
2. Grout
3. Reinforcing
4. Concrete Masonry Units
a. In addition to material compliance certification, provide the following certificates
for CMU:
1) Certification attesting that the units have cured at the manufacturer's
facility a minimum of 28 days prior to being shipped to the site.
2) DRY-BLOCK producer qualifications
3) Certification attesting that architectural concrete masonry units were
produced using DRY-BLOCK in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications.
5. Certification by masonry subcontractor attesting that DRY-BLOCK was added to mortar
mix in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Owner's Inspections and Testing: Coordinate and cooperate with Owner's testing requirements
(refer to Section 01410 - Testing And Laboratory Services) and code-required inspections by
the Structural Engineer of Record or his alternate.
B. Testing Under the Work of This Section:
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency
must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted
criteria conforming to ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to
satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
2. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to
perform the following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed
materials and construction with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-3 05/13/05
7. Section 07531,EPDM Membrane Roofing-Adhered Aawk
8. Section 07620, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal cap flashing.
9. Section 07650, Through-Wall Flashing: Flexible through-wall flashing.
10. Section 07920, Joint Sealants; control joint sealants.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
B. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 315 —Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ACI 530-95/ASCE 5-95/TMS 402-95 — Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures, referred to herein as "ACI 530-95".
3. ACI 530.1-95/ASCE 6-95/TMS 602-95 — Specification for Masonry Structures, referred
to herein as "ACI 530.1-95".
C. National Concrete Masonry Association:
1. TEK Manual for Concrete Masonry Design And Construction, referred to herein as
"NCMA TEK".
D. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A 615/A 615M — Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM C 90-—Specification for LoadBearing Concrete Masonry Units.
3. ASTM C 140—Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.
4. ASTM C 270—Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
5. ASTM C 476—Specification for Grout Masonry.
6. ASTM E 447, Method B—Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths
(f`m) at 28 days.
I. For Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. As indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. Engineered Masonry Design: In accordance with 780 CMR 2101.1.1, all masonry shall
conform to the engineered masonry design requirements of Chapters 1 through 8 of ACI 530-
95.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase I
Package `E' —2323 04220-2 05113105
SECTION 04220 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Concrete masonry units for:
1. Exterior veneer with concrete masonry back up for cavity walls.
2. Concrete masonry back up for brick veneer and concrete masonry veneer.
B. Concrete masonry types for this project include the following:
1. Standard concrete masonry units
C. Reinforcement, anchorages and accessories.
1.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Furnish masonry veneer ties for installation under the work of Section 04210 -Brick Masonry.
1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03450-Architectural Precast Concrete: Cast-in-place items.
B. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Steel lintels.
C. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal cap flashing.
1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410,Testing and Laboratory Services
2. Section 03450,Architectural Precast Concrete
3. Section 04210,Brick Masonry.
4. Section 05120, Structural Steel
5. Section 07196,Air Barrier Systems.
6. Section 07210,Building Insulation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04220-1 05113105
3.6 CLEANING
A. During the progress of the work, keep the exposed surfaces of masonry clean at all times, and
protected against damage. As each segment of the masonry is erected, dry-brush the surfaces
free from mortar spots and droppings.
B. Prior to the final cleaning of masonry, examine all face joints in exposed masonry to locate
cracks, holes or other defects in the mortar; point up all such defects and fill with mortar as
specified herein Cut out defective joints in masonry and replace with new materials, exercising
extreme care to match original work.
END OF SECTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-15 05113105
1 Wood/metal strip catcher: 0
a. Fabricate a wood or metal strip slightly smaller in width than the cavity
dimensions and attach wire or rope pulls.
b. Starting at lowest point in the cavity ,place strip into cavity.
C. As wall in constructed to next level of wall ties, lift catcher by pulls, removing
mortar remnants from catcher. Place catcher on next level wall ties ties.
d. Continue process until completion of wall.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from true surface level for exposed to view walls and partitions:
1. Unit-to-unit tolerance: 1/16-inch.
2. Surface, overall tolerance: 1/4-inch in 10-feet in any direction and 1/2-inch in 20-feet or
more.
a. Where both faces of single wythe wall or partition will be exposed to view,
request and obtain decision from the Architect as to which face will be required to
conform to the specified surface level tolerance.
B. Maximum variation from plumb: For lines and surfaces of walls do not exceed 1/4-inch in 10-
feet, 3/8-inch in any story up to 20-feet maximum. At expansion joints and other conspicuous
lines, do not exceed 1/4-inch in 20-feet.
C. Maximum variation from level: For lines of sills, tops of walls and other conspicuous lines, do
not exceed 1/8-inch in 3-feet, or 1/4-inch in 10-feet and 1/2-inch in 30-feet.
D. Maximum variation of linear building line: For position shown in plan relating to columns,
walls and partitions,do not exceed 1/2-inch in 20-feet or 3/4-inch in 40-feet.
E. Maximum variation in specified height: 1/2-inch per story.
F. Maximum variation of joint thickness: 1/8-inch in 3-feet.
3.4 GROUTING PRESSED METAL DOOR FRAMES
A. Fully grout the jambs and heads of all pressed metal door frames located in masonry walls.
B. Bed anchors of metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cooperate with the Owner's independent testing under the scope of Section 01410 - Testing
Laboratory Services, and prepare testing samples in accordance with reference the reference
standards below.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-14 05113105
a. Install foam compressible filler in expansion joint, leaving sufficient room for
installation of backer seal and sealant under the work of Section 07920 — Joint
Sealants. Where expansion joint stabilizers bridge expansion joints, discontinue
foam expansion joint filler at bottom of stabilizer and resume use of filler
immediately above stabilizer.
4. Wherever new exterior masonry walls abut existing work:
a. Provide expansion joint, size as detailed on the Drawings, to accommodate
compressible filler.
b. Install Type "V" expansion joint stabilizer in accordance with manufacturers
instructions. Where holes for fasteners are provided, secure to masonry with
fasteners specified above.
5. Install foam compressible filler in joints between masonry and abutting dissimilar
material, and elsewhere as indicated.
6. At exterior walls where face brick abuts the underside of steel relieving angles, install
compressible filler at top of brick and underside of steel and prepare joint to receive
sealant and backer rod.
J. Mortar Screen
1. Install in strict conformance with manufacturers written instructions.
2. Install at masonry veneer cavity where weep holes occur above through-wall flashing.
3. Install in one continuous row on through wall flashing with dovetail side up. No
adhesives or fasteners are required. Mortar need not have set in order to install mortar
screen.
K. Weeps
1. Weeps in exterior cavity walls shall be spaced 16-inches o.c.. Install weeps in mortar
joints directly above through-wall flashing. Install weeps in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
L. Lintels And Relieving Angles
1. Install steel lintel angles and relieving angles as the work progresses.
2. Secure lintel to framing with adjustable anchors as detailed on the Drawings.
M. Precast Concrete Trim
1. Install as indicated on setting shop drawings. Set all units in full mortar bed, and when
initial set has occurred,rake out joint 3/4-inch for application of sealant.
2. Install specified buttons in horizontal joints.
3. Secure precast units to various back-up systems with anchors, with ties and anchors set
firmly with grout.
N. Cavities/Air Spaces:
1. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Perform
work in accordance with the methods described in Brick Institute of America Technical
Notes On Brick Construction,No. 21C Revised.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-13 05113105
b. Horizontal joint reinforcement wire and wire tie shall be snapped into Seismiclip a
anchor clip and fully surrounded by mortar.
C. Cut or interrupt horizontal joint reinforcement at expansion joints.
G. Joinery
1. General:
a. Cut out and repoint defective joints in accordance with BIA No. 7F.
b. On all joints exposed to the weather, tool and make smooth, solid, and watertight.
C. Where sealant (masonry soft joint) is required, rake joints to depth indicated to
form clean reglets 3/8-inch wide.
1) Type 1 —Precast concrete: 3/4-inch depth.
2) Type 2—Brick, Concrete Masonry Units: 1/4-inch depth.
d. Except as otherwise required, brick joints shall 3/8-inches, but not be less than
5/16 inch nor more than 7/16 inch thick and of uniform thickness.
e. Do not lay masonry in freezing weather unless means to prevent freezing, in
accordance with cold weather masonry installation procedures, specified above,
are employed.
f. All cutting shall be with a power saw especially adapted to the cutting of masonry.
g. Joints between face brick and precast concrete shall be raked out to receive
sealant.
2. Joint pattern:
a. Interior joints not exposed to view shall be "struck"joints.
b. All other joints: Provide "concave tooled"joints.
3. Sealant at Mortar Joints: Prepare mortar joints for installation of sealant where indicated
on the Drawings and as specified herein:
a. Mortar Joint Preparation: Rake out face of mortar joint to a depth of 3/a inches as
preparation for installation of bond-breaker tape and sealant under the work of
Section 07920—Joint Sealants.
b. Prepare mortar joints for the installation of sealant at the following locations:
1) Where"Soft Joint"is indicated on the Drawings.
2) Where exposed-to-view masonry wythe abuts precast concrete or limestone.
3) Where bond-breaker material is installed in the masonry bed joint.
H. Flashing:
1. Install in accordance manufacturer's instructions
2. Through-Wall Flashing% Refer to Section 07650-Through-Wall Flashing.
3. Metal Cap Flashing: Refer to Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1. Veneer Expansion Joints:
1. Note: Pre-fabricated expansion joint cover assemblies for building expansion joints are
furnished and installed under Section 05800 -Expansion Control.
2. Provide vertical expansion joints in brick masonry veneer for both building expansion
joints and brick veneer expansion joints, where shown on the Drawings.
3. Install expansion joint stabilizers, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, 16
inches o.c. vertically at each bed joint where veneer anchor ties are installed.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-12 05113105
AW,,, Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other
locations.
2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make the brickwork plumb, level, and true
to line, with square angles and corners.
3. Use only brick that are clean and free from dust and other foreign matter.
4. Lay in running bond unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
5. Lay brick in soldier coursing where indicated.
6. Install special sized brick in locations indicated.
7. Do not use bonding headers on grouted masonry unless specifically so directed by the
Architect.
8. Bed joints:
a. Bevel all bed joints, sloping toward the center of the wall in such a manner that
the bed joints will be filled when the brick is finally brought to line.
b. Do not furrow the bed joints.
C. Avoid fins of bed joints protruding into cavity space. If they occur, leave in place
and flatten with trowel to backside of masonry unit. Do not, in any case, cut off
and drop into the cavity space.
9. Head joints: Regardless of thickness, completely fill with mortar or grout.
10. Where concrete masonry backup occurs, lay both wythes of the wall to a line.
11. Where bricks are moved or shifted,remove and lay again in fresh mortar.
12. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half
running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed
surfaces of set masonry, wet masonry units lightly and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
"* F. Anchoring
1. Masonry Wall Anchors And Ties:
a. Secure anchor over rigid insulation and exterior sheathing and into steel stud
framing member. Secure anchor to steel stud with 2 screws in strict accordance
with anchor manufacturer's instructions.
b. Space anchors 16 inches horizontally and vertically so that ties may be attached at
every sixth course of brick. Install additional ties at approximately 8-inches o.c., at
jambs of wall openings and near corners of structure. In no case shall the spacing
of anchors exceed one anchor for each 1.75 sq. ft. of wall area.
C. Insert steel ties into slotted portion of anchors installed under the work of Section
04220-Concrete Masonry Units. Adjust vertically to fit masonry coursing.
2. Anchors at concrete surfaces:
a. Space anchors 16-inches horizontally and vertically so that ties may be attached at
every sixth course of brick. Install additional ties at approximately 8-inches o.c., at
jambs of wall openings and near corners of structure. In no case shall the spacing
of anchors exceed one anchor for each 1.75 sq. ft. of wall area.
b. Insert steel ties into slotted portion of anchors. Adjust vertically to fit masonry
coursing.
3. Rigid PVC Interlock System:
a. Masonry veneer walls shall be reinforced using a horizontal joint reinforcement
and Seismiclip® rigid PVC interlock anchor clip. PVC anchor clip shall accept
3/16-inch diameter wire ties and 3/16-inch diameter continuous wire.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-11 05113105
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting
1. The mason shall perform all masonry cutting and patching for whatever trade required.
2. Cut masonry units with masonry saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped surfaces.
3. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction.
4. Use full-size units without cutting, where possible.
5. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
a. At expansion joints, ensure that uncut surface of brick faces the inside of joint.
6. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to
produce uniform blend of colors and textures.
B. Existing Masonry:
1. Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
2. Where infilling existing openings, the existing work shall be toothed to provide a
continuation of the masonry bond.
3. Where new openings are cut, openings shall be cut larger than the required opening and
the new brick toothed into the existing brickwork. All exposed to view brick surfaces
shall be solid with no voids exposed.
4. Where New Cap Flashing Is Installed Into Existing Masonry Walls:
a. Remove face brick in sections as required for the installation of the through-wall low*
flashing.
b. Thoroughly clean removed face brick of all mortar and stack for reuse.
C. Installation of through-wall flashing under the work of Section 07650 - Through-
Wall Flashing.
d. After installation of flashing,reinstall removed face brick.
C. Equipment Openings: Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of
masonry. After installing equipment complete masonry to match construction immediately
adjacent to the opening.
D. Wetting of bricks:
1. When being laid, provide brick suction sufficient to hold the mortar and to absorb water
from the mortar and grout.
2. Provide brick sufficiently damp so that mortar will remain plastic enough to permit the
brick to be leveled and plumbed immediately after being laid without destroying the
bond.
E. Laying:
1. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 04210-10 05113105
1. Compressible filler shall be "Cerarnar" flexible foam expansion joint filler manufactured
by W.R. Meadows,Elgin, IL(800) 342-5976 or approved equal, conforming to ASTM D
1752.
a. Size: As detailed on the Drawings.
2.6 MORTAR MIXES
A. Mixing:
1. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for job-mixed mortar, of types
indicated below.
1 Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not less than three minutes, using only sufficient
water to produce a mortar which is spreadable and of a workable consistency. When
mixing use known volume measures; do not batch by shovel.
3. Add color admixture in strict accordance with color manufacturer's specifications for the
type of mortar required.
4. Retemper mortar with water as required to maintain high plasticity. On mortar boards,
retemper only by adding water within a basin formed with mortar, and by working the
mortar into the water. Discard and do not use mortar which is unused after 1-1/2 hours
following initial mixing.
5. Provide Type N mortar for interior masonry and exterior masonry above grade, except as
indicated otherwise.
6. Provide Type S mortar for reinforced and load-bearing masonry, and elsewhere as
indicated.
7. Provide Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth and elsewhere
as indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. If conditions
detrimental to performance of unit masonry are detected, notify the Architect, in writing of
such conditions.
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections
prior to installation.
C. Foundations:
1. Do not commence installation until foundations are clean,rough, and level.
2. Sandblast the foundation tops,if necessary, and remove all laitance and foreign material.
3. Verify that the foundation elevation is such that the bed joint thickness shall not vary
from specified thickness, and that the foundation edge is true to line with masonry not
projecting over more than 1/4-inch.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-9 05/13/05
C. Weep Inserts (Precast): #CV5010 Cavity Weep as manufactured by Masonry Technology, Inc.,
Cresco, IA (800) 879-3348.
1. 0.024 inch thick high-impact polystyrene, formed and die cut 2-1/4-inch wide weep legs
at 9-1/2 -inch on center; continuous belt ]-inch wide; and total width of 6-inch.
D. Lintel Weep Inserts:
1. Where "Lintel Weeps" are indicated on the Drawings, provide 3/8 inch O.D. medium-
density polyethylene weep hole #341, as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or
approved equal.
E. Grout for installation of elevator sills and elsewhere that grout is indicated and not specified
under other sections, shall be non-shrink, non-metallic:
1. Five Star General Purpose Grout manufactured by U.S. Grout Corp.
2. Crystex manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
3. Or as approved equal.
F. Veneer Expansion Joints:
1. Expansion joint filler (compressible filler) shall be "Ceramar" flexible foam expansion
joint filler manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Elgin,IL(800) 342-5976 or approved equal,
conforming to ASTM D 1752.
a. Size: As detailed on the Drawings.
b. Note: Backer seal and sealant for brick masonry expansion joint provided under Awk
Section 07920-Joint Sealants.
2. Expansion Joint Stabilizer:
a. "Slip-SetTM Stabilizer"as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard,Inc.
b. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.
C. Provide style"H" stabilizer for level horizontal mortar joints.
d. Provide style "V" stabilizer for to connect intersecting walls or new walls to
existing abutting walls.
e. Fasteners For Securing Style "V" Stabilizer To Existing Masonry: 1-1/4 inch long
by 3/16 inch diameter tapered flat head screw fastener, designed for fastening into
masonry with corrosion-resistant coating; HILTI Kwik-Con II+316-114 TFH or
approved equal.
G. Bond Breaker: Self-adhered through-wall flashing strips (refer to Section 07650 — Through-
Wall Flashing).
H. Backer Rod: Where backer rod is detailed on the Drawings in conjunction with veneer
expansion joint at masonry opening, provide 3/8-inch diameter non-absorbing, non-staining,
extruded from a blend of polyolefin. Sof-Rod as manufactured by Applied Extrusion
Technologies or Sof-Type,manufactured by I.T.P. Corp.
I. Compressible Filler:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-8 05113105
1. DW-10HS Series.
2. Anchor shall be 12 gage,hot dipped galvanized.
3. Provide screw holes to accommodate specified screws for installing anchor.
4. No other anchor system shall be used.
5. Masonry Tie: As specified herein.
6. Fasteners for attaching masonry anchors to steel stud backup:
a. Self drilling screw with hex washer head and bonded neoprene washer; screw type
12-14x3-HWH-#2, Kwik Seal finish, manufactured by HILTI.
D. Precast Concrete for attachment to metal stud wall system:
1. DW-l0HS Series.
2. Anchor shall be 12 gage, hot dipped galvanized.
3. Provide screw holes to accommodate specified screws for installing anchor.
4. Masonry Tie: As specified herein.
5. Fasteners for attaching masonry anchors to steel stud backup:
a. Self drilling screw with hex washer head and bonded neoprene washer screw type
12-14x3-HWH-#2, Kwik Seal finish, manufactured by HIL,TI.
E. Masonry and Precast Concrete Ties:
1. Tie Construction: 3/16-inch diameter, hot dipped galvanized.
a. Seismic interlocking tie assembly conforming to UBC 3006 (d) 1 (i) as follows:
1) Byna-Lok tie®.
2) Continuous 3/16-inch, hot-dipped galvanized,horizontal joint reinforcement
wire. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire snapped into
Byna-Lok tie®. at all tie locations.
3) Size ties with seismic clip to penetrate a minimum of 1-1/2 -inches into the
depth of the veneer wythe when measured from the back face of veneer
wythe while maintaining a minimum of 5/8-inch mortar cover from the
outside edge of tie to the outside face of joint.
F. Precast Concrete Ties (other than for metal stud construction):
1. Hot dipped galvanized, fabricated to suit conditions for anchoring precast unit.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Mortar Screen: Mortar Net Green TM as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.,
Hauppauge, NY(516) 234-0600 or approved equal.
1. Thickness: 2-inches.
2. Material: 200 Denier 100 percent recycled polyester.
B. Weep Inserts (Masonry): #QV-Quadro-VentTM as manufactured by Hohmann &Barnard, Inc.,
or approved equal.
1. Honeycombed polypropylene,2-1/2 inches in height, color as selected by Architect.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-7 05113105
C. General: Provide face brick conforming to the following requirements: AWN
I. Sizes for Types 1 and 2:
a. Modular: 3-5/8 -inches thick by 2-1/4 -inches high by 7-5/8 -inches long.
2. Size ol'brick for Chiller Building shall match existing.
2.3 MORTAR
A. General: Mortar for non-reinforced and reinforced unit masonry shall be in accordance with
ASTM C 270, and shall be Portland cement and lime mortar.
1. Masonry cement will not be approved.
13. Mortar:
1. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I.
2. Hydrated lime: Type S, complying with ASTM. C 207.
3. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of
dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter, and complying with
ASTM C 144.
4. Admixtures:
a. Mortar color: Chemically inert synthetic iron oxide pigments, lightfast, weather
resistant, complying with ASTM C 979.
b. "H" color series, as selected by Architect, manufactured by Solomon Grind-Chem
Services, Inc., Springfield, IL (217) 522-3112. Centurion Pigments manufactured
by Centurion Colorbond (subsidiary of Lafarge Corp.) Hamburg, PA (215) 562-
3000 will be considered as equal to the specified product.
C. Use no other admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the Architect.
C. Water: Provide water free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials.
Water shall be potable.
2.4 ANCHORAGE SYSTEMS
A. Anchor and Tie Manufacturer: Hohmann &Barnard, Inc. (516) 234-0600.
B. Brick Veneer Anchorage For Cast-In-Place Concrete Backup:
1. DW-10HS Series.
2. Anchor shall be 12 gage, hot dipped galvanized.
3. Provide screw holes to accommodate specified screws for installing anchor.
4. Masonry Tie: As specified herein.
5. Fasteners: 1-1/4 -inch long x 1/4-inch diameter screw fasteners into predrilled holes,
drilled 1/2-inch deeper than fastener length. Kwik-Con 11+14-114 THWH stainless steel,
manufactured by HILTI.
C. Brick veneer anchorage for attachment to metal stud wall system:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-6 05113105
1.10 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate work with that of other trades which require placement and building-in of items as
the work progresses.
B. Examine all Drawings as to requirements for the accommodation of work of other trades.
Provide all required recesses, chases, slots, and cutouts. Place anchors, bolts, sleeves and other
items occurring in the masonry work. Take every precaution to minimize future cutting and
patching. Closely coordinate the location and placement of such items.
PAl:T 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 EXISTING MATERIALS
A. Salvage removed face brick for reuse under the work of this section. Face brick to be reused
shall be fully intact, completely free of mortar and shall be neatly stacked and protected.
B. It is anticipated that the existing brick removed under the work of this section will be sufficient
for the patching required. Use whatever means needed to clean existing brick without damage
to their color or finish.
C. Any new brick shall match the existing for size,texture and color, as approved by the Architect.
2.2 FACE BRICK
A. Face brick:
1. Type l: "Royal River, Medium Range" as manufactured by Morin Brick Company,
Auburn,ME (207)784-9375.
2. Type 2 (Accent): Modular "Ebony" as manufactured by The Belden Brick Company,
Canton, OH(330)456-0031.
a. Special Sized Brick for Type 2: In locations indicated provide a special sized
brick manufactured identically to Type 2 brick but sized:
1) 2-1/4-inches high by 4-inches deep by 7-5/8 -inches long.
b. Special Brick Size shall be 100 percent solid brick with no voids
3. Brick for Chiller Building: Refer to Section 01210-Cash Allowances.
B. General: Provide face brick conforming to the following requirements:
1. Conform to ASTM C 216, Grade SW,Type FBS.
2. Provide solid face brick units, 100% solid with no voids, at the following locations:
a. Wherever cores of face brick would be exposed to view or to weather.
b. Corbeled masonry.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-5 05113105
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under waterproof cover. and in a dry location to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants,
corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried
condition.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
1). Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt.
and oil.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection: Cover work with waterproof sheeting at the end of each day and. whenever work is
not in progress. Extend cover down both sides of walls at least 24 inches and hold securely in
place. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in
ambient temperature of 90 degrees F or greater, with relative humidity less than 50 percent.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Cold Weather Construction: Comply with the requirements of 780 CMR 2112.3, and the
following additional requirements:
1. Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 degrees F and
above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after
completion of cleaning.
D. Hot Weather Protection: Comply with the requirements of 780 CMR 2112.4
E. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-4 05113105
1. Size-variation data for Type FBS brick, certifying that actual range of sizes for brick falls
within ASTM C 216 dimension tolerances.
2. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together
with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch
numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to specifically identify
exact materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of
aggregates.
a. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor acceptance of mockup
constitutes approval of deviations from Contract Documents unless such
deviations are specifically brought to the attention of the Architect and approved
in writing.
C. Samples: Submit the following:
1. (2) Straps of each specified face brick.
2. (4) Samples of selected mortar color.
3. (1) Sample of brick veneer anchor system. Include anchor, tie, screws, seismic clips and
all other accessories.
4. (1) Sample of each type of mortar screen and weep.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Owner's Inspections and Testing:
1. Coordinate and cooperate with Owner's testing requirements (refer to Section 01410 -
Testing And Laboratory Services) and code-required inspections.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from
one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Section 07196,Air Barrier Systems.
E. Mockups:
1. Refer to Section 01430-Mockups, for complete description of mockups to be installed.
2. Provide the specified types of face brick, bond pattern, mortar color, and joint type used
in the Work.
a. Include exterior brick-veneer wall with window opening and precast trim, and
incorporating metal stud backing, exterior sheathing, cavity wall rigid insulation,
masonry ties,through-wall flashing and weeps.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-3 05113105
9. Section 07620, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. '''fto
10. Section 07650,Through-Wall Flashing
11. Section 07920, Joint Sealants: Sealant for control joints, expansion joints and joints
between brick masonry and abutting materials.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. The Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, referred to herein as "780
CMR".
B. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 530-95/ASCE 5-95/TMS 402-95 — Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures,referred to herein as "ACI 530-95".
2. ACI 530.1-95/ASCE 6-95/TMS 602-95 — Specification for Masonry Structures, referred
to herein as "ACI 530.1-95".
C. Brick Institute of America:
I. Technical Notes on Brick Construction, referred to herein as `BIA Tech Notes", number
of applicable technical notes as specified herein.
D. National Concrete Masonry Association:
1. TEK Manual for Concrete Masonry Design and Construction, referred to herein as '""'""'
"NCMA TEK".
E. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C 144—Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
2. ASTM C 150—Specification for Portland Cement
3. ASTM C 207—Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
4. ASTM C 216—Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or
Shale)
5. ASTM C 270—Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
6. ASTM C 476—Specification for Grout for Masonry
7. ASTM C 979—Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 04210-2 05/13/05
SECTION 04210-BRICK MASONRY
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work of this Section includes:
1. Provide masonry installation and masonry accessories.
a. Construct exterior masonry walls of mace brick backed with metal stud
construction.
2. Provide rework of existing masonry at areas of selective demolition including
installation,patching, and repair.
3. Perform all necessary cutting and patching for whatever trade requires penetrations in
brick masonry.
1.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Dovetail anchor slots for installation under the work of Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry: Brick veneer ties for walls constructed of face brick with
concrete masonry back-up.
B. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.
1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01410,Testing Laboratory Services
2. Section 03450,Architectural Precast Concrete
3. Section 04220, Concrete Masonry
4. Section 04500,Masonry Cleaning
5. Section 05400,—Cold Formed Metal Framing: Metal studs for exterior walls.
6. Section 05800,Expansion Control: Building expansion joints through masonry.
7. Section 07150,Dampproofing
8. Section 07196,Air Barrier System
Cooley Dickinson Hospital BRICK MASONRY
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 04210-1 05113105
APO* D. Install all framing , formwork and dowels required for the placing of concrete and of bonding
new concrete to existing..
E. A commercial nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, approved by the Architect, may be used in lieu of
the specified concrete mix.
F. Color and texture of concrete shall match that of existing abutting concrete.
3.2 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. General: Repair all concrete surfaces disturbed by the Work.
B. Patching: Repair disturbed areas by patching with cement mortar.
1. Cut out concrete as required to complete the Work. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to
the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be
patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound
has dried. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
2. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement
so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching.
END OF SECTION 03730
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE PATCHING
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03730-3 05113105
B. Reinforcement:
1. Bars: Deformed steel,ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2. Mesh: Welded steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185.
C. Concrete Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type 1 unless other types specified in writing by
Architect/Engineer.
a. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect/Engineer.
2. Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide
aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete.
a. Local aggregates not complying with ANSI/ASTM C 33, but which have shown
by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and
durability, may be used when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
3. Water: Potable and free of substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
D. Bonding Agent: Silpro C-21 Acrylic Latex manufactured by Silpro Masonry Systems, Inc.,
Ayer, MA(800) 343-1501.
E. Concrete Patching Materials:
1. Manufacturer: Silpro Corporation, Ayer,MA 01432 (800) 343-1501
2. Horizontal Surfaces:
a. Mascrete Latex
b. Primer: C-21 Acrylic Latex
3. Vertical Surfaces:
a. VO Patch
b. Primer: Weld-O-Bond Plus
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FILLING OF OPENINGS
A. Shortly before placing concrete, saturate the perimeter edges of the openings with water. After
the free or glistening water disappears, the edges shall be given a thorough coating of neat
cement slurry mixed to the consistency of thick paste and scrubbed in with a stiff bristle brush.
B. The concrete mixture shall consist of one part cement, approximately one part fine aggregate
and approximately two parts coarse aggregate by damp loose volume. The coarse aggregate
shall have a maximum size of 3/8-inch. The exact proportions of fine and coarse aggregate
shall be adjusted to produce a well-graded total aggregate. Mixing water shall not exceed 4-1/2
gallons per sack of cement (0.399 absolute ratio by weight). The mixture shall be of zero
slump.
C. Place mix and strike level with adjacent surfaces.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE PATCHING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03730-2 05113105
SECTION 03730 -CONCRETE PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Fill with concrete all existing openings in slabs and decks of floors and roofs where such
openings are not required for the completion of the Work.
B. Patching existing disturbed concrete surfaces.
L Cut and remove designated portions of interior slab-on-grade as required for trei�ich
wort:..
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 02070, Selective Demolition
2. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete
3. Section 03515, Self-Leveling Cementitious Underlayment
4. Division 15,Mechanical
5. Division 16,Electrical
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Formwork: Plywood forms sufficient for structural and esthetic requirements.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital CONCRETE PATCHING
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03730-1 05/13/05
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without dirt, dust, damage or deterioration
at time of finish floor application.
END OF SECTION 03515
low
look
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELF-LEVELING CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03515-5 05/13/05
3.2 PREPARATION AN**
A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, except where more
restrictive requirements are specified in this section.
B. Clean subfloors free of grease, wax, curing compounds and all other foreign materials.
Subfloors shall be solid and sound; remove all soft or crumbly materials.
C. Make adhesion tests as recommended by manufacturer to ensure good bond to substrate.
ll. Prime subfloors as recommended by underlayment manufacturer, using the correct primer for
porous and non-porous subfloors.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, except where more
restrictive requirements are specified in this section.
13. Mix product directly from sealed package with water in proportions recommended by
manufacturer. Add coarse aggregate and mix again. Avoid overwatering.
C. Pour or pump plastic underlayment onto subfloors and spread with a wide squeegee. Place
sufficient material to cover highpoints with at least 1/8-inch of underlayment; featheredge
where necessary to meet adjacent construction.
D. If two or more layers of underlayment are applied, place second layer after first layer has set to
walkable hardness.
E. Where depressions occur,fill depressed area level with abutting surfaces.
F. At recesses indicated to receive recessed floor mats:
1. Coordinate leveling material installation with the installation of recessed floor mat.
Provide leveling material in sufficient quantity to ensure floor mat surface is at the
proper elevation with maximum variation of 1/8-inch in 10'-0" when measured with a
10'-0" long straight edge.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Install underlayment so that all floor areas are level within the following tolerances:
1. Surfaces shall be true to plane within 1/8-inch maximum deviation under a 10-foot
straight edge in any direction in accordance with ACI 302 (72) 75, Class A Flatness
Tolerance.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELF-LEVELING CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03515-4 05113105
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayment: Ardex K - 15 as manufactured by Ardex, Inc., whose
specifications are included herein.
B. The following products are listed as equals to the specified product:
1. Silflo 200 manufactured by Silpro Masonry Systems.
2. Ultra/Plan manufactured by Mapei.
3. Elastiment 945 manufactured by Boiardi.
C. Performance Specifications:
I. Thickness Range: From featheredge to 2".
2. Working Time: At least 30 minutes at 70°F.
3. Flowing Time: At least 10 minutes at 70°F.
4. Initial Set: As defined by ASTM C191, 30 minutes at 70°F.
5. Final Set: As defined by ASTM C191, 2 hours at 70°F.
6. Compressive Strength: ASTM C109, 2630 psi after 1 day,4100 psi after 28 days.
7. Flexural Strength: ASTM C348, 770 psi after 1 day, 1000 psi after 28 days.
8. Compatibility: Compatible with flooring adhesives which are compatible with normal
concrete.
9. Meets other specification requirements.
D. Aggregate: Provide coarse sand for underlayment up to 1/8" thick and pea gravel for thicker
installations.
E. Water: Clean and drinkable.
F. Primers: As recommended by underlayment manufacturer for subfloor condition and porosity.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. The Installer shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this work is to be
performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion
of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning
work means Installer accepts substrates and conditions.
B. Prior to commencement of work install a 3 foot by 3 foot test area of the underlayment applied
over resilient flooring. Allow to set,then test for adhesion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELF-LEVELING CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03515-3 05113105
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE "01'4
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm which has at least three years experience in work of the type
required by this section and which is acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials.
B. Source: Provide self-leveling concrete underlayment materials which are the products of one
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of the
primary materials.
1.5 TESTS
A. Burning Characteristics: Provide materials whose surface burning characteristics, when tested
in compliance with ASTM E84 are Class A for flame spread, fuel contributed, and smoke
developed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict
compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from all possible
damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the
limits established by manufacturers of the materials and products used.
B. Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetrating work is
complete.
C. Ventilation: Comply with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish procedures to maintain optimum
working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.Complete work
of this section before work which could be damaged by water, humidity, and splashing of
underlayment is begun.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELF-LEVELING CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03515-2 05/13/05
SECTION 03515 - SELF-LEVELING CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, self-leveling, concrete underlayment as
required to achieve a level subfloor within the tolerances specified in the following areas:
1. In each individual room, space or area.
B. Fill and level depressions in existing concrete slabs remaining after completion of demolition
work.
C. Leveling recess at recessed floor mat.
12 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 02070, Selective Demolition
2. Section 09310,Tiling
3. Section 09651,Resilient Tile Flooring and Base
4. Section 09652,Resilient Sheet Flooring
5. Section 09680, Carpeting
6. Section 12484,Foot Mats and Frames
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions,use limitations, and other data needed to
demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
1. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements.
C. Test Reports: Submit certified reports for tests and performance required.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELF-LEVELING CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03515-1 05113105
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 03450
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03450-5 05113105
ASTM C-33 tolerance for organic content will be allowed. Provide each carefully
selected and well graded; free of material, such as iron oxides, or chloride salts, causing
staining or reacting with cement.
C. Design mixes:
1. Prepare design mix type of concrete required, and obtain the Architect's approval of the
proposed design mix.
2. Pay costs for obtaining the design mix.
3. Have mixes prepared either by the testing agency selected in accordance with Section
01456 of these Specifications, or by qualified precast concrete manufacturing personnel.
4. Proportion mixes either by laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using
materials to be employed on the Work for type of concrete required, and complying with
ACI 211.1.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate the work of this Section to the sizes and shapes indicated, and of texture
matching the approved Samples.
2. Provide finished units which are straight, true to size and shape, and within the specified
casting tolerances.
3. Make exposed edges sharp, straight, and square. Make flat surfaces into a true plane.
4. Warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective units will not be
acceptable.
5. Place and secure in the forms all polyserts and other anchors, clips, stud bolts, inserts,
ferules, shear ties, and other devices required for handling and installing the precast units
and for attachment as indicated or specified.
B. Form cure or moist cure the work of this Section as required.
C. Casting tolerances: Maintain casting, bowing, warping, and dimension tolerance to match the
allowable tolerances of the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Architectural Precast
Concrete, Second Edition, Section 6.4, unless listed in the following maximums:
1. Overall dimension for width of units: Plus or minus 1/8-inch. For height: Plus 1/8-inch to
minus 1/4-inch.
2. Thickness of units: plus 1/4-inch or minus 1/8-inch.
3. Bowing or warping: Do not exceed 1/360 of the span.
4. Insert locations: Place within plus-or-minus 3/8-inch in each direction.
5. Opening dimensions to figured dimensions: Accurate with a tolerance of plus 1/4-inch to
minus zero.
6. Variation form square, or difference in length of the two diagonal measurements: 1/8-
inch per 8 ft. of diagonal,up to 3/8-inch maximum.
7. Angular variation of plane of side mold: plus or minus 1/16-inch.
8. Differential bowing in adjacent panel units of the same design: 3/8-inch.
9. Warping: 1/16-inch per three feet from nearest adjacent corner.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03450-4 05113105
B. Color and finish shall match sample to be provided by the Architect.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. Provide reinforcement, accessories, and connection materials required in accordance with final
design as approved by the Architect.
B. Anchors, Dowels, Ties, Cramps: Steel, ASTM A-36, galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A-
123, 1.25 oz/sq. ft. of sizes and configurations required for support of stone and applicable
superimposed loads. As manufactured by Hohmann &Barnard, Inc., or approved equal.
C. Supports: Steel,ASTM A-36, galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A-123, 1.25 oz/sq. ft.
D. Bolts, Washers and Nuts: Galvanized steel.
E. Lifting Hooks: Removable type for panels in excess of 75 lbs.
F. Setting Buttons: Plastic.
G. Galvanized touch-up: Zinc-Rich Coating: MIL-P-21035, self-curing, one-component, sacrificial
organic coating.
2.3 CONCRETE
A. Concrete: Provide normal weight, 28 day 5,000 psi minimum compressive strength concrete
with 4% to 6% total air content. Concrete slump shall be 3" to 4". No calcium chloride will be
permitted in mix.
1. Portland Cement: Provide ASTM C150 Type 111. Use only one brand throughout project.
a. Color: Provide standard gray cement.
2. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260 as approved by Architect.
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494,Type A.
4. Water: Provide clean potable water free from substances harmful to concrete and
embedded steel.
5. Sand Blast: (if selected for finish)Visually exposed precast, and edges to receive sealant,
shall receive a light sandblast to obtain desired texture and appearance.
6. Exposed Aggregate Retarder: (if selected for finish) Provide non-staining product which
produces results matching approved samples and mock-ups.
7. Avoid the use of Coloring agents, using judicious selection of aggregate as required to
provide sample.
B. Aggregates:
1. Fine Aggregates: Washed, inert, manufactured sand material with color characteristics
which when combined with other constituents will produce concrete of specified colors;
select material of colors, type and size gradation to match panel in Architect's Office.
Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33, with the further restriction that only half the
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03450-3 05/13/05
4. Welded connections, indicated by AWS standard symbols.
5. Details of inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories and construction at
openings in precast units.
6. Locations and details of anchorage devices that are to be attached to, or embedded in,
other construction.
D. Samples:
1. Accompanying the above submittal, submit precast samples approximately 12-inch x 12-
inch x 2-inch, showing quality, texture, and color of proposed finish.
2. Prior to start of installation, and after the Architect's review of finish samples, submit
one full size sample of each required precast unit, delivered to the job site. Acceptable
full size samples may be incorporated into the construction.
3. Architect's review of samples will be for color, texture, and general condition only.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers' qualifications: Minimum of five years production experience in architectural
precast concrete work of quality and scope required for this Work.
1. Manufacturer must show that he has experienced personnel, physical facilities,
established quality control procedures, and management capability sufficient to produce
the required units without causing delay to the project.
2. When requested by the Architect, the manufacturer shall submit written evidence of the
above requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the work of this Section to the job site in such quantities and at such times as to assure
the continuity of construction.
B. Store units at the job site in a manner to prevent cracking, distortion, warping, staining, and
other physical damage, and in a manner to keep markings visible.
C. Lift and support the units only at designated lifting points or supporting points as shown on the
approved Shop Drawings.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FINISH
A. Finish surface shall consist of a combination of cement and aggregate, lightly treated with
retarder or lightly sand blasted on surfaces that will be within view in the final installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03450-2 05/13/05
SECTION 03450 -ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide architectural precast concrete where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein; and
as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. This Section includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Architectural precast units for building exterior including bands, sills, in configuration as
indicated.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Section 04210,Brick Masonry: installation of precast concrete units.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Masonry Units.
4. E Section 06100,Rough Carpentry.
5. Section 07920,Joint Sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, manufacturer's certifications and laboratory test reports and
other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings showing complete information for fabrication and
erection of the work of this Section,including,but not necessarily limited to:
1. Member dimensions and cross sections; locations, size, and type of reinforcement,
including special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection.
2. Handling and erection procedures, sequence of erection.
3. Layout, dimensions, tolerances, and identification of each precast unit corresponding to
the sequence and procedure of installation.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 03450-1 05/13/05
G. Remove foundation walls,footings and concrete slabs.
H. Remove window assemblies, door assemblies and stairs.
1. Broom clean floor slabs at completion of demolition work. Flooring materials indicated to
remain shall be covered and protected from soiling and construction debris.
J. Remove all debris from site and dispose of legally. Burning on site is not permitted.
END OF SECTION 02070
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 02070-5 05/13/05
I. Interior walls: ,
a. Remove interior walls and partitions as indicated and as needed to accommodate
new work.
b. Where existing walls-to-remain are indicated to receive new finishes, cornplctely
- remove trim and fasteners.
2. Ceilings: Where ceilings are indicated to be removed, also remove ceiling mounted
systems and equipment leaving only bare structure free from hangers.
a. Ceilings which must be temporarily removed for mechanical, plumbing or fire
protection work shall be carefully removed and stored for reinstallation when work
has been completed.
3. Doors and Frames: Where doors and frames are indicated to be removed from walls or
partitions which are to remain, remove doors and frames carefully so as to minimize
damage to wall. Repair and patch wall as necessary to accommodate new door frame or
other new work.
4. Roofing and Floor Penetrations: Remove existing roofing decking only after roofing
contractor has removed existing roofing system leaving deck surface bare and clean. All
penetrations in floors and roof shall be framed with miscellaneous iron prior to cutting
and demolition of deck and concrete. Coordinate the demolition work with Division 15 -
Mechanical. Make all existing and new conditions satisfactory for application of new
elastomeric roofing membrane. Perform this work in a timely manner to minimize
weather damage to the building.
5. Remove all existing structure indicated to be removed and create new openings in walls,
floors, and roofs as needed to properly complete the work of the Contract. Protect
openings to prevent injury to persons in compliance with authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site. Remove
and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered.
E. Removal of Existing Flooring:
1. Completely remove existing flooring located in areas scheduled to receive new flooring
surfaces and elsewhere as noted. Remove all layers of flooring down to the existing
substrate. Other than for terrazzo floors, where existing flooring is installed in a setting
bed, the existing setting bed shall be completely removed.
2. Remove resilient flooring and adhesive in strict accordance with the technical bulletin
entitled " Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Covering",
dated July 1990 and applicable updates, as issued by Resilient Floor Covering Institute,
966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12B,Rockville,MD 20850.Te1: (301)340-8580.
F. Preparation of Existing Floors:
1. Remove all foreign materials from existing floor surfaces by use of mechanical abraders,
grinders or other methods required to clean the existing surfaces to a smooth clean finish
acceptable for the application of new flooring surfaces or cementitious underlayment.
2. Chemicals required for cleaning of floors shall be free of fumes and odors which will
affect building occupants. Obtain Owner's approval for use of all such chemicals prior to
start of work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 02070-4 05/13/05
�p
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Visit the site and verify the extent and location of selective demolition required. Carefully
identify limits of selective demolition. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workmen
also to identify items to be removed and items to be left in place intact.
B. Post safety regulations. Provide safety lighting as necessary.
C. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered.
D. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate capping locations on Project
Record Documents.
E. Maintain existing services to functioning area of the I lospita(.
3.2 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT STRUCTURES.
A. Ensure the safety of adjacent property, including the property which is occupied, and persons
occupying such property against any damages or injuries which might occur from falling debris
or other causes. Do not interfere with the use of adjacent buildings, tunnels and structures.
B. If at any time the safety of any adjacent building, tunnel or structure shall appear to be
endangered, then cease operations and take all proper means to support such buildings or
structures.
C. Take adequate precautions to protect all existing roads, streets, curbs, pavements, trees and
plantings. Replace or otherwise repair any damage.
3.3 EXECUTION
A. Remove all equipment and building items not required for new construction in an orderly and
careful manner.Protect existing foundations, footings, slabs, and supporting structural members
not required to be removed.
B. Mechanical and electrical equipment, including fixtures, receptacles, ductwork, piping, wiring,
conduit, fans and all other such items required to be removed to complete the work, shall be
disconnected, capped and lowered to the floor under the work of Division 15, Mechanical, and
Division 16, Electrical. After such items have been lowered to the floor, removal from the site
shall be included under the work of this Section 02070.
C. Proceed with demolition systematically. Demolish in small sections and avoid overloading.
Remove all associated adhesives, clips, hangers and other attachment devices with removal of
finishes.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 02070-3 05113105
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, type and numbers to accomplish work in a timely
manner.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Occupancy: Areas to be demolished will be occupied prior to start of work. Demolition work
will be phased to comply with the Owner's use requirements.
B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility nor makes any claim as to the actual
condition or structural adequacy of any existing construction to be demolished. The Contractor
shall investigate and assure himself of the condition of the work to be demolished and shall take
all precautions to ensure safety of persons and property.
C. Salvage: Items of value which are not indicated to be returned to the Owner or reused on this
project shall become the property of the Contractor. Storage or sale of items on the project site
is prohibited.
1. Items indicated to be salvaged shall be removed with extreme care to prevent damage.
All components and parts of salvaged items shall be saved and packaged. Store salvaged
items as directed by Owner.
2. Salvage removed face brick for reuse under the work of Section 04210 -Brick Masonry.
Face brick to be reused shall be fully intact, completely free of mortar and shall be neatly
stacked and protected.
D. Traffic: Conduct operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with the
normal use of public passages and other adjacent facilities. Do not close or obstruct traffic
ways, corridors, streets,, walks or other used facilities without the written permission of the
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Protection: Ensure the safe passage of persons in and around the space and the building during
demolition. Prevent injury to persons and damage to property. Protect items to remain. Maintain
fire protection systems in operation throughout the work of this project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 02070-2 05113105
SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Demolition and removal of designated building construction, equipment and fixtures.
B. Demolition and removal of designated partitions,casework, components and accessories.
C. Remove designated flooring, base and ceiling finishes.
D. Demolish designated portions of structures.
E. Demolition and removal of designated retaining walls and foundations.
F. Demolition and removal of designated floor slabs. Grind down portions of existing concrete
slabs to meet designated grades and elevations.
G. Demolition and removal of designated window sash and associated items. Remove designated
window and door assemblies to rough openings.
OOW H. Demolition and removal of designated HVAC equipment, ductwork, supports, electrical and
plumbing fixtures and equipment.
I. Remove designated areas of face brick and salvage as required for re-use in filling openings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01120,Alteration Project Procedures: Reinstallation of removed materials.
2. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities and Controls: Protection and noise control barriers;
interruption of services.
3. Section 01560,Dust and Airborne Contaminants Control
4. Section 04210,Brick Masonry;removal and replacement of existing masonry.
5. Division 15 -Mechanical: Disconnecting and capping existing HVAC,plumbing and fire
protection utilities.
6. Division 16 -Electrical: Disconnecting and capping existing electrical utilities.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 02070- 1 05/13/05
3.3 REMOVAL
A. At a time as may be designated by the Architect and the Owner, completely demolish and
remove mockup from the job site.
END OF SECTION 01430
Aak
Cooley Dickenson Hospital MOCKUPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 014304 05113105
i. Section 08911– Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall:
1) Install a full sized, section of aluminum framed curtain wall, complete with
flashing and panning.
J. Section 09250–Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1) Install gypsum sheathing on both sides of metal stud framing for mockup
components requiring sheathing.
C. Interior Finish Mockups: Shall consist of typical interior room layouts complete with all
finishes.
1. Construct all room partitions, as detailed on Contract Drawings, complete with all room
finishes as specified and indicated and as selected by the Architect and approved by the
Owner.
}. Include all rrledical gases, NVAC wall registers. electrical receptacles. wall sconces', and
all wall mounted equipment. Finished ceilings shrill include fighting fi,,aures, 1-{VAC
ceiling registers and diffusers. sprinkler heads.
3. Paint all walls within the mockup in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900
- Painting. Except for walls requiring epoxy paint, this mockup shall be used for the
sample room required under the above-mentioned section.
D. Workstation Mockups: Shall consist of typical nurse station.
1. Construct workstation of wood framing and drywall to establish profiles and sizes as
indicated on Contract Drawings.
E. Finishes, colors and textures of components shall be as specified for each component and shall
be selected by the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Construct mockups on site in locations as directed by the Architect.
B. Construct mockups in time to make product and/or assembly modifications without delaying
production work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Construct mockup to duplicate actual job conditions.
B. Provide foundations,bases, supports and braces adequate to make mockup stable and safe.
C. Provide weather protection for materials in mockup that are exposed to weather in intended
service.
Cooley Dickenson Hospital MOCKUPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 01430-3 05/13/05
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS.
4. Construct mockups in an area selected by the Architect and approved by the Owii vr.
13. Exterior Mockup Units: Shall consist of full size representative exterior wall sections complete
with aluminum curtain wall with glazing, precast concrete, face brick, metal panel and
perimeter sealant.
1. General: Construct mockup unit as veneer cavity wall, including metal stud framed
backup, gypsum sheathing, metal panels, and exterior masonry in bond pattern, mortar
color, and joint type. Mockup shall include all components specified and indicated which
are typical to the exterior wall construction including air barrier system, masonry ties,
cavity insulation, through wall flashing, mortar netting, weeps and additional
components specified herein.
2. Components to be included in the mockup include but are not limited to:
a. Section 03300–Cast-In-Place Concrete
1) Provide foundation support for mockup panel.
b. Section 04210-Brick Masonry
1) Fabricate unit of face brick with selected mortar and backup consisting of 6-
inch metal studs, exterior gypsum board sheathing on both sides of studs,
specified brick anchors.
C. Section 03450–Architectural Precast Concrete
1) Fabricate unit of architectural precast concrete and backup consisting of 6-
inch metal studs, exterior gypsum board sheathing on both sides of studs,
specified stone anchors.
d. Section 05400–Light Gage Metal Framing
1) Install metal stud framing with bracing required for construction and
support of various components of the mockup panel.
e. Section 07196–Air Barrier System:
1) Provide air barrier system within cavity.
f. Section 07412–Manufactured Metal Wall Panel:
1) Install metal faced composite wall panels complete with all related trim,
fasteners, sub-framing and other devices.
g. Section 07920–Joint Sealants.
1) Install sealant at perimeter of all components. Colors shall be as selected by
the Architect.
h. Section 08800–Glazing.
1) Install insulated glazed units into aluminum framed curtain wall system.
Glazing shall include insulated vision glazing and insulated spandrel glass
areas. Vision glass and spandrel glass types shall be as specified.
Cooley Dickenson Hospital MOCKUPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package 'E' —2323 01430-2 05/13/05
SECTION 01430 -MOCKUPS
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Construct mockups in locations indicated and as specified herein. Mockups shall include the
following:
1. Exterior wall section.
2. Typical patient bedroom and toilet layout.
3. Typical operating room.
4. Headwall for PACU and Stage I1 Recovery.
5. Typical workstation (Nurse Station).
B. Correct mockup as directed until it is approved by the Owner. Accepted mockup shall be the
quality standard by which production work is judged, subject only to conditions given by the
Owner, through the Architect in his written acceptance.
1. Intent: Mockup shall demonstrate proposed range of aesthetic effects, workmanship, and
other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.
Mockup is to demonstrate colors, textures, relationships and blending of the various
materials.
2. Revise mockup as necessary to obtain the Architects approval.
3. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviation from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviation is specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
C. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undamaged and undisturbed condition
as a standard for judging the completed Work. Remove mockup, including foundation when
directed by Architect.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings for mockup in sufficient detail to show sizes, layout,
finishes,method of construction, and installation of each component.
Cooley Dickenson Hospital MOCKUPS
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 01430-1 05/13/05
1.6 ADJUSTMENTS OF COSTS
A. General: If the cost of the item specified exceeds the allowance, an additive change order will
be issued to the contract for the amount of the difference between the cost of the item specified
and the allowance. If the cost of the item specified is less than the allowance, a deduction will
be taken for the difference.
1. The amount of the Change Order will recognize any changes in handling costs at the site,
labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses caused by the selection
under the Allowance.
2. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs at the site or other expenses caused by
the selection under the Allowance,prior to execution of the work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No. 1: Water Vapor Emission Control System
1. Provide within the Contract Sum a Lump Sum Allowance of Thirty Thousand Dollars
($30,000.00) for the installation of water vapor emission control system as specified in
Section 07265, Water Vapor Emission Control System. Extent of material required shall
be determined by moisture tests performed under Section 01410, Testing Laboratory
Services, and as directed by the Owner. Application shall be performed at the unit
price(s)of Three Dollars($3.00)per square foot.
2. The final cost of water vapor emission control system shall be derived by the quantity of
square feet of material multiplied by the applicable unit price
B. Allowance No. 2: Face Brick- Chiller Building
1. Contractor shall allow Six Hundred Dollars ($600.00) per thousand, pallet delivered at
the job site for the purchase of the exterior face brick, to be selected by the Architect and
approved by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 01210
Cooley Dickenson Hospital ALLOWANCES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 01210-3 05/13/05
I. Handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating and storage.
2. Protection from the elements and from damage.
3. Labor for installation and finishing except where labor is specified to be part of the
Allowance.
4. Other expenses required to complete the installation.
5. Contractor's and Subcontractor's overhead and profit.
1.4 SELECTION OF PRODUCTS UNDER ALLOWANCES
A. Architect's Duties:
1. Review with the Contractor products and suppliers and installers.
2. Make selection in consultation with the Owner. Obtain Owner's written decision
designating:
a. Product, model and finish.
b. Accessories and attachments.
C. Supplier and installer as applicable.
d. Cost to Contractor,delivered to site or installed as applicable.
e. Manufacturer's Warranties.
3. Transmit Owner's decision to the Contractor
4. Prepare Change Orders.
B. Contractor's Duties:
1. Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified suppliers and installers.
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect.
3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of the Architect.
4. Notify Architect promptly of:
a. Any reasonable objections Contractor may have against any supplier or party
under consideration for installation.
b. Any effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by selections under
consideration.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY AND
INSTALLATION
A. Arrange for and process shop drawings,product data and samples as required.
B. Make all arrangements for delivery.
C. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects.
D. Submit claims for transportation damage.
E. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of Specification Sections.
Cooley Dickenson Hospital ALLOWANCES
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 01210-2 05113105
SECTION 01210 -ALLOWANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.
Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer
selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is
available for evaluation.
2. Unless otherwise specified, installation shall be excluded from the allowance.
3. If necessary, the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order, either additive or
deductive, for the amount of the difference between the cost of the item specified and the
allowance.
B. Types of allowances include the following:
1. Lump-sum allowances.
2. Unit-cost allowances.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.
1.3 ALLOWANCES FOR PRODUCTS
A. The amount of each Allowance includes:
1. The cost of the product to the Contractor or Subcontractor less any applicable trade
discounts.
2. Delivery to the site.
3. Applicable taxes.
B. In addition to the amount of each Allowance, include in the Guaranteed Maximum Price the
Contractor's costs for:
Cooley Dickenson Hospital ALLOWANCES
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' —2323 01210- 1 05/13/05
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Included in Volume Two
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
No Work included in this Division
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Included irr Volanne Two
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Included in Volume Two
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION 00005
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS -Volume One
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 00005-4 05/13/05
DIVISION 9 -FINISHES
Adolk 09111 INTERIOR METAL STUD FRAMING
09210 GYPSUM PLASTER
09250 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09310 TILING
09400 TERRAZZO
09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE
09652 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09671 COMPOSITION FLOORING
09680 CARPETING
09720 WALL COVERING
09725 PLASTIC WALL COVERING
09841 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
09845 ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANELS
09900 PAINTING
09965 REINFORCED EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
(Refer-to Package `F.1'for additional Sections in this Division)
10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10190 CUBICLES
10200 LOUVERS
10262 CORNER GUARDS
10263 WALL GUARDS
10350 FLAGPOLES
10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11132 PROJECTION SCREENS
11242 WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
11530 LABORATORY REFRIGERATION
11535 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
12494 ROLLER SHADES
12497 DRAPERY TRACK
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS -Volume One
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 00005-3 05/13/05
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06450 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
(Refer to Pacicawe `F.1'for additional Sections in this Division.)
07160 CEMENTITIOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07195 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIERS
07196 AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
07265 WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
07275 FOAM INSULATING SEALANT
07412 MANUFACTURED METAL WALL PANELS
07531 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING-ADHERED
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07650 THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
07710 PREFABRICATED COPING AND GRAVELSTOP
07715 ELEVATOR VENTS
07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07810 SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
07840 FIRESTOPS AND SMOKE SEALS
07920 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL DOORS
08113 STEEL FRAMES
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08311 ACCESS PANELS
08330 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08331 ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS
08410 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08450 ALL GLASS ENTRANCES
08461 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08524 VIEW WINDOW WITH INTEGRAL BLIND
08710 FINISH HARDWARE
08716 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
08717 AUTOMATIC DOOR SENSING SYSTEMS
08800 GLAZING
08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS -Volume One
Surgery/Beds Expansion, Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 00005-2 05113105
SECTION 00005 -TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROJECT MANUAL
00001 COVER PAGE
00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
(Refer to Packages `A'and `F.l'for additional Sections in this Division)
BIDDING. AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
(Refer to Package `A'for additional Sections in this Division)
01210 ALLOWANCES
01430 MOCK-UPS
DIVISION 2- SITEWORK
(Refer to Package `F.1'for additional Sections in this Division)
02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
(Refer to Package `F.1'for additional Sections in this Division)
03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
03515 SELF-LEVELING CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT
03730 CONCRETE PATCHING
DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04210 BRICK MASONRY
04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
04500 MASONRY CLEANING
DIVISION 5 -METALS
(Refer to Package `F.1',for additional Sections in this Division)
05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
05450 METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
05511 METAL STAIRS
05730 ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL
05800 EXPANSION CONTROL
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS -Volume One
Surgery/Beds Expansion,Phase 1
Package `E' -2323 00005-1 05/13/05
kil
R 0
P R O 1 E C T IVI A N U A L
V O L U M 'E" O N E
Date of Issue:May 13, 2005
PROJECT Phase 1-Surgery/Beds Expansion - Package `E'
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Northampton, Massachusetts
Architect's Commission Number—2323
OWNER Cooley Dickinson Hospital
30 Locust Street
Northampton, Massachusetts 01061
ARCHITECT The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street
Newton, Massachusetts 02458
CONSULTANTS Structural Engineer
Struble Engineering, LLC
604 Main Street
Reading, Massachusetts 01867
HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection,
and Electrical Engineering
The Ritchie Organization, Inc.
80 Bridge Street
Newton, Massachusetts 02458
Civil Engineer
Vanasse Hangen Brustlin, Inc.
505 East Columbus Avenue
Springfield, Massachusetts 01105
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER Barr & Barr, Inc.
260 Cochituate Road, 2`d Floor
Framingham, Massachusetts 01701
A R C H I T E C T U R E P L A N N I N G E N G I N E E R I N G I N T E R I O R D E S I G N
TRO/The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street,Newton,MA 02458-1134 T 617.969.9400 F 617.527.6753
C. Grounding: Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and
grounding connections. Measure ground resistance at each ground rod and report re-
sults. Use an instrument specifically designed for ground-resistance measurements.
D. Duct Integrity: Rod ducts with a mandrel 1/4 inch (6 mm) smaller in diameter than ID
of ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts, remove obstructions and retest.
E. Watertightness: Make internal inspection of manholes 3 months after completing con-
struction for indications of water ingress. Where leakage is noted, remove water and seal
leak sources. Reinspect after 2 months and reseal remaining leak sources. Repeat proc-
ess at 2-month intervals until leaks are corrected.
F. Correct installations where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove x1d
replace defective products and retest.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Pull brush through full length of ducts. Use round-bristle brush with a diameter 1/2 inch
(12 mm) larger than the ID of duct.
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
END OF SECTION 16119
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures ..,
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 16119-8 02/28/0
2. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and be-
tween conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power-driven agi-
tating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. Pour c,lCh
run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous oprra-
tion. When more than 1 pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane
and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm)
into the concrete on both sides of joint near the corners of the envelope.
3. Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturb earth and where
indicated
4. Ductbank Identification: Upon pouring of concrete, red pigment shall be shaken
onto the top surface of the ductbank.
5. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where
the soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclu-
sions; otherwise, use forms.
6. Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior enve-
lope wall, 1-1/2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) be-
tween power and signal ducts. Ducts shall not be directly above or below any
other utilities or ducts except when crossing at approximate right angles. When
crossing water or sewer conduits there shall have a minimum 12 inches vertical
clearance from the electrical conduit. For gas there shall be a minimum of 3 feet in
any direction.
7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 30 inches below finished grade in all ar-
eas.
Aw
H. Stub-ups: Use galvanized rigid steel conduit for stub-ups to equipment and riser poles.
For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit a minimum of 5
feet (1.5 m) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations.
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for the purpose and then encase
coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
I. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal
spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-
psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.
J. Pulling Cord: Install 2500-lb test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Provide 24 hour notice to owner, architect, and electric utility company prior
to concrete encasement of ductbanks.
B. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of in-
stallation of underground ducts and utility structures.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 16119-7 02/28/05
A. Install nonmetallic conduit and duct as indicated, according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum of 4 inches/100 feet (1:300) to drain toward manholes
and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point
in runs between 2 manholes to drain in both directions.
C. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows with a minimum radius of 36 inches for
stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances. At other locations, construct long
sweep bends with 5°couplings with a minimum 42 inch duct segment in between cou-
plings. Use longer segments when practical. Maintain a minimum radius of 40 feet,
both horizontally and vertically.
D. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane.
E. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Handholes: Space end bells approximately 10 inches
(250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.
Change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without
reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. Grout end bells into
manhole walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
F. Building Entrances: Make a transition from underground duct to conduit at least 10 feet
(3 m) outside the building wall. Use fittings manufactured for that purpose. Follow ap-
propriate installation instructions below:
1. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Install reinforcement in duct banks passing through dis-
turbed earth near buildings and other excavations. Coordinate duct bank with
structural design to support duct bank at wall without reducing structural or \wa-
tertight integrity of building wall.
2. Direct-Buried, Nonencased Duct at Nonwaterproofed Wall Penetrations: Install a
Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe sleeve for each duct. Calk space between con-
duit and sleeve with duct-sealing compound on both sides for moisture-tight seal.
3. Waterproofed Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install a watertight entrance-sealing
device with the sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry
construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing
to the device to make permanently watertight.
G. Concrete-Encased Nonmetallic Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with
duct size and required duct spacing, and install according to the following:
1. Separator Installation: Space separators at a maximum of 8 feet and at each cou-
pling to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, and secure separators to the earth
and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do not use tie wires or rein-
forcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct
groups.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and UtilitY �u u,Iu1I ..,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 16119-6 02/28/05
A. Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft.
(60 L),where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M may be used.
B. Concrete: Comply with Division 3 for concrete and reinforcement.
1. Strength: 3000-psig- (20.7-MPa-) minimum, 28-day compressive strength.
2. Aggregate for Duct Encasement: 3/8-inch (10-mm) maximum size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Underground Ducts For Electrical Utility Service: Plastic or rigid galvanized steel conduit
encased in concrete as shown on plans.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to receive ducts and utility structures for com-
pliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting per-
formance of underground ducts and utility structures. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 2 but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-
operated, compaction equipment
B. During backfill operations, install ductbank warning tape approximately 8" below sur-
face for entire length of ductbank installation.
C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades,
unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is com-
pleted.
D. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.
Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodclin .
sprigging, and mulching. Perform according to Division 2.
E. Restore disturbed pavement. Refer to Division 1.
3.4 CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package 'F.1'—2323 16119-5
3. Conduit Spacers and Accessories:
a. American Pipe and Plastic
b. Cantex
C. Carlon
d. Certainteed
e. GS Industries
f. Chance
g. Cooper
h. Electrical Materials
i. IPEX
j. Thomas & Betts
2.2 CONDUIT AND DUCT
A. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, rated for use with 90 deg C con-
ductors under all installation conditions.
B. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3.
C. Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: High-density polyethylene, Schedule 40.
D. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1, galvanized.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum 1-1/2 inches duct spac-
ings and concrete cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.
Spacers shall not exceed 8 foot intervals and shall be placed at each coupling.
B. Ground Rods: Solid-copper-clad steel, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter by 10-foot (3-111)
length as indicated in Division 16 Section "Grounding".
C. Ground Wire: Stranded bare copper, No. 4/0 AWG minimum as indicated in Divi-
sion 16 Section "Grounding".
D. Duct Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to
cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (1 deg C). Capable of
withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (149 deg C) without slump and of adhering to
clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry,
lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 16119-4 02/78/01
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts and manholes with final arrangement of
other utilities as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes with final profiles
of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and underground obstruc-
tions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field con-
ditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by
Architect.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Conduit-Straight:
a. Carlon
1) 48715
b. Ipex
1) 08841UL
C. American Pipe and Plastics
1) TC74207
2. Conduit-Bends:
a. Carlon
1) UA9FNB
b. Cantex
1) 5233842
C. Certainteed
1) 59734
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' —2323 16119-3
C. Shop Drawings: Show details and design calculations for precast manholes, including re-
inforcing steel. Include Shop Drawings prepared by registered professional structural en-
gineer, as indicated by seal on Shop Drawings.
D. Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and
underground structures. Include plans and sections drawn to scale.
E. Certificate for concrete and steel used in underground, precast concrete utility structures,
according to ASTM C 858.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
G. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of utility structures with ASTM C 857 and
ASTM C 858, based on factory inspection.
H. Record Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts and manholes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section
that is listed and labeled. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
B. Comply with ANSI C2 and NPFA 70.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to
prevent bending, warping, and deforming.
B. Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.
C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Architect not less than 10 working days in advance of proposed utility in-
terruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 16119-2 02/28/05
SECTION 16119 -UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, and duct.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 for excavation, backfill, and related items for ducts and manholes.
2. Division 3 for concrete requirements.
3. Division 16 Section "Grounding" for ground rods at manholes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct: Electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used under-
ground, embedded in earth or concrete.
B. Duct Bank: 2 or more conduits or other raceway installed underground in the same
trench or concrete envelope.
C. Handhole: An underground junction box in a duct or duct bank.
D. Manhole: An underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, connect-
ing with ducts to afford facilities for installing and maintaining cables.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: For metal accessories for manholes, conduits and ducts, duct-bank mate-
rials, and miscellaneous components.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Underground Ducts and Utility Structures
Foundation/ Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1'—2323 16119-1
low ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground
rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or
heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below
concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
B. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts,
cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to
ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum,
stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductors level or plumb arOUnd cor-
ners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recom-
mended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
3.5 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace
it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trench-
ing, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include
application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Divi-
sion 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as
indicated.
END OF SECTION 16060
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' - 2323 16060-5
1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final
grade, unless otherwise indicated. "•*�
2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic
welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without
exposing steel or damaging copper coating.
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless oth-
erwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be sub-
jected to strain, impact, or damage.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals
in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to
make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers
and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent
future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
C. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct cir-
cumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make
a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding con-
ductor.
D. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration
of insulation and cable.
3.4 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so
4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod be-
fore manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16060-4 02/28/05
E. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) in diameter.
2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1116 inch (1.5 mm) thick.
4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, termi-
nated with copper ferrules; 1-518 inches (42 mm) wide and 1116 inch (1.5 mm)
thick.
2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combina-
tions of conductors and connected items.
B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufac-
turer's written instructions.
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
1. Size: 3/4 by 120 inches (19 by 3000 mm in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct
contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for under-
ground connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other
and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' - 2323 16060-3 02/28/05
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
1. Comply with UL 467.
C. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a. Boggs, Inc.
b. Chance/Hubbell.
C. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. ,
d. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical.
C. Ideal Industries, Inc.
f. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.
g. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
h. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
i. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
B. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
C. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16060-2 02/28/05
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general. provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Groundin" re-
quirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements ul
tems described in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Ground rods.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7
or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Grounding and Bonding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' - 2323 16060-1 02/28/OS
3. Colors: In accordance with Cooley Dickinson Hospital Standards.
E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above
power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished
grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does
not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single line marker.
F. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR,
Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and mainte-
nance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-
laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for sys-
tem or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
G. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red back-
ground with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency instructions on
power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Raceways.
2. Supporting devices for electrical components.
3. Electrical identification.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, fin-
ishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Comple-
tion.
END OF SECTION 16050
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' - 2323 16050-7
I. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-
drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and
fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install
sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
J. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless other-
wise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening
methods are indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid ma-
sonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
S. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided
with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits,
pipe straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of
its proof-test load.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical iden-
tification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or re-
quired by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:
1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive
marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm) wide, completely encir-
cling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by
side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-
foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (8-m) maximum in-
tervals in congested areas.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16050-6 02/28/05
Polk H. Penetrate structural slabs and foundation walls only where approved by Architect. Sub-
mit proposed penetration points, sized openings, and penetration methods to Architect
for approval.
3.4 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel
system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of
at least four; minimum of 200-1b (90-kg) design load.
3.5 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical compo-
nents.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assem-
blies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hang-
ers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 per-
cent minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
H. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, con-
trol enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless compo-
nents are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V - 2323 16050-5 02/28/05
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations:
1. Exposed: Rigid Galvanized Steel or IMC.
2. Concealed: Rigid Galvanized Steel or IMC.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings,
and floors.
B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues
and steam or hot-water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping.
C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering.
D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same
plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use
and location.
F. Install raceways embedded in slabs in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and
leave at least 1-inch (25-mm) concrete cover.
1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3. Install conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN27) parallel to or at right angles to
main reinforcement. Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement, place con-
duit close to slab support.
4. Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make
bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel;
otherwise, provide field bends for exposed parallel raceways.
G. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofila-
ment plastic line with not less than 200-1b (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12
inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ,.
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16050-4 02/28/05
G. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs are not permitted.
2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application cate-
gory. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1,NFPA 70, and these Specifications.
B. Raceway Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1,Table 3, for minimum size of letters for leg-
end and minimum length of color field for each raceway size.
1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a
clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
2. Color: Black letters on orange background.
3. Legend: Indicates voltage.
C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1
inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick).
D. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum
thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thick-
ness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.
E. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII,
Part 1910.145. Weather-resistant, nonfading,preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs
with 0.0396-inch (1-mm), galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appro-
priate to the application. 1/4-inch (6-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
F. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible head-
room.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of com-
ponents. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other in-
stallations.
eW Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' - 2323 16050-3
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work
and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electri-
cal installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other struc-
tural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for effi-
cient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning be-
fore closing in the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. EMT: ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with set-screw or compression fittings.
B. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings.
D. LFMC: Zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
E. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used.
2.2 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authrn-iticti
having jurisdiction.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-
mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
E. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
F. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16050-2 02/28/05
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Raceways and boxes.
2. Supporting devices for electrical components.
3. Electrical identification.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.S QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 and any local or state addenda to NFPA 70.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16050-1 02/28/05
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal
data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of
the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination require-
ments conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpen-
dicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in fin-
ished spaces.
10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or re-
placement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting,with minimum of interference with other installations.
11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
END OF SECTION 16010
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Foundation/ Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' - 2323 16010-5
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT
CLOSEOUT." ,
B. The minimum information that shall be furnished in the maintenance manual shall in-
clude the following:
1. Catalog cut sheets for every item for which a shop drawing is required.
2. Approved special construction details that differ from the details shown on
Drawings.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems,
materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building components.
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during pro-
gress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.
4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are con-
structed.
5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials anal
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materi-
als, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and over-
head utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connec-
tion for each service.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16010-4 02/28/05
of each submittal required, which will be retained by the Electrical Consulting Engi-
neer.
1. Shop Drawings - Initial Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints.
2. Shop Drawings - Final Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints.
3. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item.
4. Samples: 1 additional set.
E. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare Coordination Drawings according to the requirements outlined in Di-
vision 1 to a 1/4-inch-equals-l-foot (1:50) scale or larger. Detail major ele-
ments, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in re-
lation to each other and to other systems, installations, and building compo-
nents. Indicate locations and space requirements for installation, access,
and working clearance. Show where sequence and coordination of installa-
tions are important to the efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate drawing
preparation with effort specified in other Specification Sections. Include the
following:
1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addi-
tion to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for:
1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent
building lines.
3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and mate-
rials installed.
B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state
in which the project is located as specified in Division 1 to record the locations and in-
vert elevations of underground installations.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' - 2323 16010-3
8. Massachusetts State Building Code
B. Electrical work shall comply with the current standards of the following organizations:
1. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services - Guidelines for Construction
and Equipment of Hospital and Medical Facilities
2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
3. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
4. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society
5. EIA/TIA - Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Asso-
ciation
a. EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building Wiring Standard.
b. EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Path-
ways and Spaces.
6. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
7. FM - Factory Mutual Association
8. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories
9. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
10. NEMA- National Electric Manufacturers Association
11. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
C. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regula-
tions of governmental agencies and authorities having jurisdiction including local and
state building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire, and health department codes and
standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted in groups by systems. For example, all lighting fix-
tures, lamps, ballasts and accessories shall be submitted simultaneously in one package.
C. Refer to the applicable Division 16 section for specific submittal requirements. Where
there are no specific submittal requirements in the specification section, provide manu-
facturer's standard literature showing the submittal items. Required shop drawings
shall include but not be limited to:
1. Ductbanks and associated raceways
2. Grounding materials
D. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of electrical related shop drawings,
product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus two copies
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements ,,W%,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' - 2323 16010-2 02/28/05
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes basic general requirements for electrical installations. The follow-
ing administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand
the requirements specified in Division 1:
1. Codes and Standards.
2. Submittals.
3. Coordination drawings.
4. Record documents.
5. Electrical installations.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
w. Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of
Division 16.
B. Related Sections: The following sections of Division 16 contain requirements that re-
late to this section:
1. Section 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
2. Section 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
3. Section 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
4. Section 16119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Electrical work shall comply with the current editions of the following codes:
1. BOCA - National Building Code
2. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code
3. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
4. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
6. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code
7. Massachusetts Electric Code
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Electrical Requirements
Foundation/ Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' - 2323 16010-1
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
END OF SECTION 15445
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewage Pumps *"*+
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15445-6 02/28/05
E. Sewage Pump Basins: Install basin to concrete pad with anchor bolts before lowering
into prepared hole. Adjust inlet zone according to sanitary invert elevation and connect
to inlet/outlet drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of basins according to manufac-
turer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement.
Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with
finished floor.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary drainage and vent piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15
Section "Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping
and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and
connect to sanitary drainage piping.
2. Install swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sewage pump discharge.
Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN65)
and larger.
3. Install swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each automatic, packaged pump
discharge.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in Divi-
sion 16 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as re-
quired for system application.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is
bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewage Pumps
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15445-5 02/28/05
1. Material: Fiberglass or cast iron.
2. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with basin sump, cast in or at-
tached to sump, in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.
C. Basin Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access,
pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating or cast iron.
2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot traffic
for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.
2.5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and
check valves. Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. In-
clude features and devices indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for sewage pumps. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of mo-
tors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Vertical Sewage Pumps: Set pumps on basin floor. Make direct connections to sanitary
drainage piping.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewage Pumps AM%,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15445-4 02/28/05
E. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 VERTICAL SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Description: pump complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for vertical sewage pumps. Include
quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Impeller: Non-corrosive.
3. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, elevated thrust bear-
ings. Capable of passing 3-inch solids.
4. Seals: Tandem mechanical, oil filled Reservoir.
5. Motor: (2)-3HP, 3 Phase, 460V, 1150RPM, capable of delivering 250 GPM at 20
TDH with a shut-off head of 46 TDH, Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type;
with built-in overload protection; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of
15-feet type SO, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at
pump.
6. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof
cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
7. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, gal-
vanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
8. Basin Cover: Steel and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to "Sewage Pump
Basins" Article for other requirements.
9. Controls: NEMA I, Type 1 duplex control enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with three mercury-float switches in NEMA 250,
Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator
to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units
if one pump cannot handle load. Control panel shall include additional contact for
for remote alarm installation.
10. Remote Alarm: Locate alarm panel in Engineering department of OPD building ad-
jacent to master medical alarm panel.
11. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercury-
float-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer
and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
2.4 SEWAGE PUMP BASINS
A. Description: Factory fabricated with sump, pipe connections, and separate cover. Pro-
vide 60-inches diameter by 84-inches deep fiberglass basin with 66-inch diameter vented
gas tight steel cover. Center line of inlet shall be 48-inches below top of basin.
B. Basin Sump: Fabricate watertight, with sidewall openings for pipe connections.
ew Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewage Pumps
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 15445-3 02/28/05
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional re-
quirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated.
Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-
ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Sewage Pump and Basins:
a. Weil Pump Co.
b. Tramco Pumps.
C. Armstrong Pumps.
2.2 SEWAGE PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sewage
pump units complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construc-
tion for permanent installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps avail-
able only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion
flanges.
C. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through
full range of pump performance curves.
D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units be-
fore shipping.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewage Pumps
Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15445-2 02/28/05
SECTION 15445 - SEWAGE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewage pumps for the building sanitary drainage systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for sewage pump motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance curves, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type and size of pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differ-
entiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewage Pumps
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1'— 2323 15445-1 02/28/05
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where pene-
trated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless
trap is indicated.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 1S Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping with vertical stubs 18-inches above finished grade. Cap piping for future
connection the plubing fixtures and equipment under Package `E' Surgery/Bed Tower
Project.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled [trap seal primer systems] and their installation, including piping
and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15430
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties A041k,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15430-8 02/28/05
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 12-inch.
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-Hub outlet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping join-
ing materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust
valve for proper flow.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the fol-
lowing, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for lar-
ger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and
smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for pip-
ing below floors.
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drain-
age. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
C. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but
not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Foundation/ Site /Utilities 02/28/05
Package 'F.1'—2323 15430-7
15. Trap Material: Cast iron.
16. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap. '°"*4
17. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
C. Floor Drains, FD-C: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: CPD, Lab & Sterilizer Locations.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 3001Y-04.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
S. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: SS Type 304.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 12-inches.
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
15. Trap Material: Cast iron.
16. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
17. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
2.7 AREA DRAINS
A. Area Drains, 4"-AD-A: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Areaway.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 3001-NB-FBS-U-Y.
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
S. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15430-6 02/28/05
2.6 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drains, FD-A: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Public Toilet Rooms.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 2005Y-03-B-U.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Sediment Bucket: Not Required.
8. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
10. Top Shape: Round.
11. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 8-inches.
12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
13. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap.seal
primer valve connection.
14. Trap Material: Cast iron.
15. Trap Pattern: P-trap.
16. Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.
B. Floor Drains, 4"-FD-B: Comply with ASME A112.21AM and ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Mechanical Room.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 2280-04-B-U.
b. Mifab
3. Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required, Secondary flashing flange.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant.
8. Sediment Bucket: Required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 8.5-inches.
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
14. Inlet Fitting: Duco-cast iron, with threaded inlet and No-hub outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Foundation/ Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package 'F.1'- 2323 15430-5
A. Manufacturers:
1. ProSet Systems, Inc.
2. Linkseal.
B. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and
stack fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Cast-iron, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-
branch stack fitting with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-
release harness in branch.
a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for
plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.
2.5 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M.
1. Application: Floor cleanout, Wall cleanout, and installation in exposed piping.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.
3. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
4. Clamping Device: Required.
5. Outlet Connection: Threaded, Inside calk, Spigot.
6. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
8. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze.
9. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
10. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
B. Cleanouts: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M.
1. Application: Wall cleanout.
2. Products:
a. Smith,Jay R. Mfg. Co.; 4472-U-02-TP
3. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast bronze.
4. Outlet Connection: Taper Thread plug.
5. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel.
7. Cover Shape: Round.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15430-4 02/28/05
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following re-
quirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the fol-
lowing characteristics:
1. Manufacturers:
a. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
2. 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure.
3. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) solder joint.
5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
7. Distribution Unit: TP-2 requires 2-gravity lines; TP-3 requires 3-gravity lines; TP-4
requires 4-gravity lines.
8. '/z-inch supply line shall be installed to drain to floor drain by gravity. Avoid bends
and traps in piping to ensure water supplies floor drain trap. Install trap primer in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where re-
quired, increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
B. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
piping and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.
C. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet,
and trap seal primer valve connection.
2.4 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Foundation / Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15430-3
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights.
Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of -�
-'
components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:
1. Cleanouts, floor drains, and area drains.
2. Sleeve penetration systems.
B. Field test reports.
C. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping
materials and installation.
E. NSF Compliance:
I. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic
potable-water piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sec-
tions 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital p Plumbing Specialties
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15430-2 02/28/05
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
1. Trap seal primer valves.
2. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
3. Sleeve penetration systems.
4. Cleanouts.
5. Floor drains.
6. Area drains.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig (860 kPa).
2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Plumbing Specialties
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15430-1 02/28/05
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water.
3.12 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that neutralization system is installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and in-
stallation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions and do the following:
1. Install neutralizing solutions and limestone.
2. Energize circuits.
3. Start and run systems through complete sequence of operations.
4. Adjust operating controls.
3.13 DEMONSTRATION
Ae"+a
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-
nel to adjust, operate, and maintain neutralization systems. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15221
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping -'"
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15221-8 02/28/05
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pressure-Piping Testing:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced piping until
it has been tested and approved. Expose piping that was covered or concealed be-
fore it was tested.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operat-
ing pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
B. Chemical-Waste Piping Inspection:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put drainage and vent piping into operation until it is in-
spected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before con-
cealing after system roughing-in and before setting fixtures and equipment.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdic-
tion to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with require-
ments.
3. Reinspections: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust neutralization system set points.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use
procedures described below:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Foundation/ Site /Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' —2323 15221-7
I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 36 inches (910 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch
(13-mm) rod.
4. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-
mm) rod.
5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
6. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-
mm) rod.
J. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1220 min).
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are spe-
cific connection requirements:
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect chemical-waste piping to sinks, specialties, accessories, and equipment. Use
chemical-resistant coupling, adapter, or fitting as required for materials being joined.
D. Connect chemical-waste, force-main piping to pumps, specialties, accessories, and
equipment. Use chemical-resistant coupling, adapter, or fitting as required for materials
being joined.
E. Ground equipment.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
G. Arrange for electric-power connections to specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping AORN
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15221-6 02/28/05
C. Plastic-Piping Electrofusion joints: Make polyolefin drainage-piping joints according to
ASTM F 1290.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for seismic-
restraint devices.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support de-
vices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42, riser clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer:
MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and
coupling.
E. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
F. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
G. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP piping with the following maximum horizontal spac-
ing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 33 inches (840 min) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch
(13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-
mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 (DN 200): 48 inches (1220 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical PP piping every 72 inches (1830 mm).
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Chemical Waste Piping
Foundation / Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package 'F.1'—2323 15221-5
C. Above Floor Chemical-Waste Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size
range:
1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion
joints.
D. Under Slabs-on-Grade, Chemical-Waste Piping: Use the following piping materials for
each size range:
1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion
joints.
3.3 SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. Anchor neutralization tank to concrete pad with ballast support flange. Tank shall be in-
stalled level within 1/z bubble. Contractor shall provide all precautions to prevent damage
to the tank walls. Allow a minimum clearance of 4 to 6-inches between tank wall and
surrounding earth.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 1S Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Install piping next to equipment, accessories, and specialties to allow service and mainte-
nance.
C. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ing may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install underground fiberglass piping according to ASTM D 3839.
F. Install drain valves at low points in chemical-waste force mains.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction. If specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufac-
turer's written instructions.
B. Plastic-Piping, Heat-Fusion Joints: Make polyolefin pressure-piping joints according to
ASTM D 2657.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15221-4 02/28/05
Ow 1. Exception: Pipe and fittings made from PP resin without fire-retardant additive
may be used for underground installation.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly
used joining materials. Connections shall be made by electro-fusion fittings.
2.5 SPECIALTIES
A. Corrosion-Resistant Traps: P-trap; NPS 2 (DN 50), as required to match connected pip-
ing.
1. PP: ASTM D 4101, PP resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections to equipment
and plumbing fixtures.
2.6 NEUTRALIZATION SYSTEM BASIN
A. Furnish and install where shown on plans One (1) Duplex set of Weil Vertical Sump
Pumps, model No. 1200-SS, ALL WETTED PARTS 316 STAINLESS STEEL, Each
Pump rated to deliver 60 GPM at 20 ft. TDH with 3/4 HP, 460 volt, three phase, 60 cy-
cle, AC, 1750 RPM TEFC motors. CONTROLS: Four (4) teflon coated stainless steel
float balls mounted on pipe suspended into basin. One (1) NEMA I Duplex control
panel with 2-magnetic starters, 2-disconnect switches, 1-control circuit transformer, 1-
alternator, 2-TOA switches, 2-running lights, 1-alarm horn with silencer, 1-set of iso-
lated contacts for remote alarm. COVER: 46" OD Round 1/2" steel with all necessary
openings including 4": vent connection, BASIN: 42" Dia. x T-0" deep acid resistant fi-
berglass basin with inlet and anchor flange as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ing may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1'—2323 15221-3 02/28/05
D. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers: All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other
than that specified must submit a complete verification specification for the substituted
equipment along with literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, and a list of similar
sized installations where proposed equipment is installed. The complete submittal must
be presented to the Architect at least (7) full working days prior to the bid opening for
approval. Substitutions will not be permitted after the contract has been awarded. Refer
to Specification Section 01300, SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain pipe, fittings, and joining materials for each piping system
through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing laboratory.
C. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping."
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store piping and specialties with sealing plugs in ends or with end protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following re-
quirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. PP Drainage Pipe and Fittings: Orion Blueline, ASTM F 1412, pipe extruded and drain-
age-pattern fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PP resin with fire-
retardant additive complying with ASTM D 4101. Include fusion joint ends.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15221-2 02/28/05
SECTION 15221 - CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and specialties for the following systems:
1. Chemical-waste and vent, gravity-flow, nonpressure piping system designated
"chemical waste."
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Process Material Sewerage" for exterior chemical-waste pip-
ing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot (3-m) head of water.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For chemical-waste piping materials, components, and specialties and for
neutralization systems.
B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties, including relation to other services
that serve same work areas.
C. Maintenance Data: For neutralization systems and tanks to include in maintenance
manuals.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Chemical Waste Piping
Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15221-1 02/28/05
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drain-
age piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close
openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less
than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to
completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15160
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 15160-6 02/28/05 I
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts accord-
ing to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspec-
tion must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having juris-
diction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or in-
spection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,
in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
j Foundation/ Site /Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' —2323 15160-5
D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main
piping.
E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop Link-Seal assembly at each service pipe penetra-
tion through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials I
and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
F. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Hand-
book," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
H. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-
sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of
standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size I
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
1. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab
in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indi-
cated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
K. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade
if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15160-4 02/28/05
f
B. Aboveground Storm Drainage Piping. Use [any of] the following piping materials for
each size range:
1. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the
following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
2. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one
of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
3. NPS 8 (DN 200): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
4. NPS 10 (DN 250): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
5. NPS 12 (DN 300): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou-
plings.
6. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou-
plings.
C. Underground Storm Drainage Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping;
gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping;
gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pip-
ing; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
4. NPS 12 (DN 300): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
5. NPS 15 (DN 375): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage" for Project site storm sewer and drainage
piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building
storm sewers.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 15160-3 02/28/05
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include
corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type
coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to
and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING
A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class[es] (Underground).
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301 (Above Grade).
1. Couplings: Clamp-All ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-
resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral center pipe stop.
a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide
shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide
shield with 6 bands.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15160-2 02/28/05
ew
SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes storm-drainage piping inside the building and to locations indi-
cated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for storm drainage piping system spe-
cialties.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the fol-
lowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa)].
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage Piping
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15160-1 02/28/05
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having ju-
risdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage
and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was cov-
ered or concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except out-
side leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and
fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30
kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water
level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and
traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.
Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.
Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-
tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air
pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout pe-
riod of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
lowk
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15150
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping AORN,
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15150-6 02/28/05
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Gasketed joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Soldered joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Grooved joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts accord-
ing to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Stub sanitary
waste, soil and vent pipe 18-inches above finished floor. Cap pipe openings for future
connection under Package `E' Surgery/Bed Tower Project.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspec-
tion must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having juris-
diction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or in-
spection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15150-5 02/28/05
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to build-
ing sanitary sewers.
D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop Link-seal assembly at each service pipe penetra-
tion through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
F. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Hand-
book," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105.
H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true
to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab
in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade
if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ,
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15150-4 02/28/05
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rat-
ings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 and DN 40): Copper Type `L' (waste) and Type
`M' (vent) tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
2. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the
following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
3. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one
of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
4. NPS 8 (DN 200): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
"* 5. NPS 10 (DN 250): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
6. NPS 12 (DN 300): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou-
plings.
7. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and compact, stainless-steel cou-
plings.
D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gas-
kets; and gasketed joints.
2. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping;
gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pip-
ing; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
4. NPS 12 (DN 300): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
5. NPS 15 (DN 375): Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15150-3 02/28/05
1
i
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
i
2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING
A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class[es]. (Underground)
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. (Above grade)
1. Couplings: Clamp-Alls, ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-
resistant fasteners, and ASTM C S64 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide
shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide
shield with 6 bands.
2.3 COPPER TUBING
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L (for waste) and Type M (for vent)
(ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indi-
cated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-
and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15150-2 02/28/05
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the build-
ing and to locations indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems
specialties.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the fol-
lowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15150-1 02/28/05
i
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been al-
tered, extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdic-
tion or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651
or AWWA C652 or as described below:
I
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not ap-
pear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50
ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for
24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three
hours.
C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming I
from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work pro-
gresses.
END OF SECTION 15140
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15140-6 02/28/05
0_ 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and ap-
proved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdic-
tion to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with require-
ments.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic
water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operat-
ing pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate
test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure con-
stitute defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
1. Manually adjust circuit setter balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return pip-
ing to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
2. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable and nonpotable domestic water piping as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15140-5 02/28/05
1
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- I
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
I
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install Type K copper piping from floor drain trap primer connection to 18-inches above
finished floor level. Tubing shall not include fittings below grade level. Cap pipe opening
for future connection under Package "E" Surgery/Bed Tower Phase I Project.
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use cast-iron gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 250°F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 175 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve 31/2"-6" GV Throttling and Isolation
Ball Valve 1/2"-3" BV Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 31/21)-6" BF Throttling and Isolation
Butterfly Valve 8"-12" -- Not Used
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15140-4 02/28/05
t
M
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Underground Domestic Water Service Piping: Provide piping listed for service and com-
plying with NSF 61. Use the following piping materials for each size range:
i
1. Ductile-Iron Piping: Use mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; mechanical-joint, duc-
tile-iron fittings; and restrained, gasketed joints. Stub water main a minimum of
i 18-inches interior of foundation wall with flanged end for connection to OS&Y
valve for future connection.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop Link-Seal assembly at each service pipe penetra-
tion through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
C. Install underground ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried piping
inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to water service pip-
ing outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-
"" block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
D. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that
piping is full of water.
F. Perform the following steps before operation:
1. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing
of piping during installation.
2. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
3. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified
for application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.
G. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do
not operate water heaters before filling with water.
H. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 prig (550 kPa) maximum,
unless otherwise indicated.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1'—2323 15140-3 02/28/05
i
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials. I
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPING
i
1. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM.A 47 (ASTM A 47M), malleable-iron
castings or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.
I
a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe
dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and
bolts and nuts.
2. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with com-
bination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or
AWWA C153. Include two gasketed, ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed,
sleeve section. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include
AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
3. Ductile-Iron, Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with
sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-
joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C_111
ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
Ductile-Iron, Expansion joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping
sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying
with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indi-
cated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
I
2.3 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Hammond Valve.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
C. NIBCO INC.
d. Red-White Valve Corp.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze
solid wedge. Provide flanged ends for connection with ductile iron water main piping as
described above. Provide dielectric fitting as necessary.
1
PART 3 -EXECUTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping *
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15140-2 02/28/05
I
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
I
{ PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and
equipment inside the building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping special-
ties.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems
with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 80 psig (550 kPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Domestic Water Piping
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15140-1 02/28/05
i
i
i
3.2 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION
I
A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion joints and bends and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.3 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
Ii
I
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. ,
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and
to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and in-
clude embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion-joint manufacturer's written instructions if
expansion joints or compensators are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors in-
stalled on or in concrete.
END OF SECTION 15121 Amok
I
J
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15121-4 02/28/05
i
I
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for ap-
plication.
I
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened Port-
land cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be in-
stalled.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install prefabricated expansion loops at all locations where piping crosses a seismic joint.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15121-3 02/28/05
1
I
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe expansion joint and alignment guide indicated.
I
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping sys-
tems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions
and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building struc-
ture.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating,
end connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe expansion joint, signed by product manufac-
turer.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pipe expansion joints to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
2. Metraflex, Inc.
3. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
B. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base
for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
2.2 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
A0
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.V — 232') 15121-2 02/28/05
i
E
I
SECTION 15121 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following pipe expansion joints and expansion compensation
devices for mechanical piping systems:
1. Pipe bends and loops.
2. Alignment guides and anchors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BR: Butyl rubber.
B. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
C. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
D. CSM: Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber.
E. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
F. NR: Natural rubber.
G. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working
pressures, and temperatures.
B. Capability: Products shall absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between an-
chors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.V — 2323 15121-1 02/28/05
I
Specification I
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Swing Check Valve 1/2"-2" SWG-C Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping
H. Pumped Condensate Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
PUMPED CONDENSATE SERVICE i
Maximum Temperature- 250`
Operating Pressure—0-15 prig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Butterfly Valve 2-1/2"-6" BTFY-C Isolation
Globe Valve 2-1/2"-10" 1 GLB-C ATC Modulation and Bypass
Plug Valve 2-1/2"-10" PLG-A Balancing @ Cond Pump Disch. I
END OF SECTION 15110
1
I
i
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15110-12 02/28/05
I1
I
f
I Maximum Temperature - 250°F
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 175 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve 31/2"-12" GTV-A Isolation
Ball Valve NA NA Throttling and Isolation
f
Butterfly Valve I NA NA Isolation
Butterfly Valve I NA NA Isolation
D. Heating Hot Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
E. Chilled Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
CHILLED WATER SERVICE
Maximum Temperature- 150T
Maximum Pressure (1/2"-12") — 150 psig
Maximum Pressure (14"-24") — 125 psig
Specification
T e of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Butterfly Valve 8"-12" BTFY-B Isolation
NOTE 1: Balancing valves 1/2"-2" and balancing valves required at terminal
equipment shall be calibrated balancing valves as specified in Divi-
sion 15 Section-"Hydronic Piping".
F. Low Pressure Saturated Steam Systems: Use valve types according to the following
schedule:
G. Medium Pressure (Steam) Condensate Return Systems: Use valve types according to the
following schedule:
MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE SERVICE
Maximum Temperature - 366T
Operating Pressure— 0-150 psig
Specification
Type of Valve Size Valve Type Application Notes
Gate Valve -- -- Not Used
Ball Valve 1h"-2" BLV-A Throttling and Isolation
Globe Valve 1/2"-2" 1 GLB-B B ass
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15"110-11 02/28/05
i
I
I
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. I
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
i
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install chainwheel operators on valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger and more than 96
inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished
floor elevation.
G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping ,
joint construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- I
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of 1
valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Domestic Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package 'F.]' — 2323 15110-10 02/28/05
1
i B. Plug Valves Type (PLG-A): MSS SP-78, 175-psi (1200-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Teflon packing, flanged end connections:
1. Operator: Gear operator with handwheel and position indicator.
i
2.9 CHAINWHEEL ACTUATORS
I
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.
2. Roto Hammer Industries, Inc.
C. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.
t1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for valve.
2. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.
3. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Re-
move special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 1 5110-9 02/28/05
1
1
b. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves—Figure 351
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IR116
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 1123
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. —Figure F2981
f. NIBCO Inc. —Figure F-718-B
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure G-512
h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 613
i. Powell —Figure 241
j. Fairbanks —Figure 0131
2. Globe Valves Type (GLB-D): i
a. Grinnell Corp. —Figure 6250A
b. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves—Figure 21E
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IR313
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 884
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. —Figure F2983
f. NIBCO Inc. —Figure F-768-B i
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure G-532 i
h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 923
i. Powell—Figure 256
j. Fairbanks—Figure 0110
B. Globe Valves Type (GLB-C): MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable
bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated pack-
ing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with ASTM A 126 Class B
cast-iron handwheel.
C. Globe Valves Type (GLB-D): MSS SP-45, Class 250, 500-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 Class
B cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc,
brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with
cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron
handwheel.
2.8 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron plug valves
by one of the following:
1. Plug Valves Type (PLG-A): 1
a. Grinnell Corp.
b. DeZurik.
C. NIBCO Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15110-8 02/28/05
r
f
I 2.6 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bronze globe valves by
one of the following:
I
1. Globe Valves Type (GLB-A):
a. Grinnell Corp. — Figure 3240
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division. —Figure 7-TF
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IB413T
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 123
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. —Figure 590
f. NIBCO Inc. —Figure T-235Y
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure B-22-T
h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 106-A-2
i. Powell —Figure 150
j. Fairbanks—Figure 4195-3
2. Globe Valves Type (GLB-B):
a. Grinnell Corp. — Figure 3255
b. Crane Co, Crane Valve Group, Crane Valves—Figure 362E
C. Hammond Valve Corporation. —Figure IB412
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. —Figure 409
e. NIBCO Inc. —Figure T-275-B
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure B-66
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves —Figure 1103
h. Powell —Figure 120
i. Fairbanks —Figure 033
B. Globe Valves Type (GLB-A): MSS SP-80; Class 1S0, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP;
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon
bronze-alloy stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded end connec-
tions; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
C. Globe Valves Type (GLB-B): MSS SP-80; Class 300, 600-psi CWP; ASTM B 61 bronze
body and screwed bonnet, bronze disc and seat, silicon bronze-alloy stem, renewable seat
rings, threaded end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
2.7 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron globe valves
by one of the following:
1. Globe Valves Type (GLB-C):
a. Grinnell Corp. — Figure 6200A
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.V —232') 15110-7 02/28/05
copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut,
threaded end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
C. Gate Valves Type (GTV-B): MSS SP-80; Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP;
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and union bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon al-
loy rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded end con-
nections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
I
2.5 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron gate valves
by one of the following:
1. Gate Valves Type (GTV-C):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure#6020A
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 4651/2
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IR1140
d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. - Figure F2885
e. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 1430
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure G-623
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 651A
h. Powell—Figure 1793
i. Fairbanks —Figure 0405
2. Gate Valves Type (GTV-D):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure #6100A ,
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 71/2E
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IR330
d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. - Figure F2894
e. Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 1436
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure F-667
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 204
h. Powell —Figure 1797
i. Fairbanks—Figure 0312
B. Gate Valves Type (GTV-C): MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126, Class B cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy
stem, outside screw and yoke, bolted bonnet, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece
packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
C. Gate Valves Type (GTV-D): MSS SP-70, Class 250, 500-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron ASTM A 126 wedge, cast bronze ASTM B 584
seats, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece
packing gland assembly, bolted bonnet, flanged end connections; and with ASTM A 126
Class B cast-iron handwheel.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.V — 2323 15110-6 02/28/05
i
I
C. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-B): MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035-
kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, extended neck, 416 or
410 stainless-steel stem with upper and lower TFE bushings, resilient EPDM seat, lug
style with bi-directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-psig:
I
1. Disc Type: Aluminum-Bronze.
2. Operator: Gear operator with handwheel and position indicator. Provide chain
wheel operators for valves installed over 96 inches above the floor.
D. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-C): MSS SP-68, ANSI Class 150, BS 1400 AB2 aluminum-
bronze body and disc, Inconel 625 metal seat, K-Monel shaft and disc pin, PTFE com-
posite shaft bearing on top and bottom, graphite body gasket and gland packing, lug
style with bi-directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-psig WSP:
1. Operator: Gear operator with handwheel and position indicator. Provide chain
wheel operators for valves installed over 96 inches above the floor.
2.4 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bronze gate valves by
one of the following:
1. Gate Valves Type (GTV-A):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure#3000
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 438
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IB645
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 2129
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. - Figure 105
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. —Figure B-110
g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 370
h. Powell —Figure 507
i. Fairbanks—Figure 0250
2. Gate Valves Type (GTV-B):
a. Grinnell Corp. - Figure#3090
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves - Figure 435UB
C. Hammond Valve Corporation - Figure IB631
d. Cincinnati Valve Co. - Figure 3150
e. Milwaukee Valve— Figure 1151
f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves—Figure 64U
g. Powell — Figure 2714
h. Fairbanks— Figure U-0228
B. Gate Valves Type (GTV-A): MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) cold working
pressure (CWP); ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and union bonnet, solid-bronze wedge,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.V.—2323 15110-5 02/28/05
2.2 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide copper-alloy ball
valves by one of the following:
1. Ball Valves Type (BLV-A):
a. Jomar. —T-100-SS
I
B. Ball Valves Type (BLV-A): MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP,
ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass or red
bronze ball, full port for 1-inch valves and smaller and standard port for 1-1/a inch valves
and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals; threaded end
connections:
1. Operator: Lever operators with vinyl grip, lockable.
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
2.3 HIGH PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-A): ,
a. Grinnell Corp. Figure LC-8281-3
b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. Figure 632LD-RS66-1
C. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Figure LG-752-BS-3E
2. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-B):
a. Grinnell Corp. Figure LC-8282-3
b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. Figure 632LD-RS66-1
C. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Figure LG-722-BS-3E
3. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-C):
a. Grinnell Corp. Figure M15L-32M5-4
B. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-A): MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035-
kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, extended neck, 416 or I
410 stainless-steel stem with upper and lower bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seat, lug
style with bi-directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-psig:
I
1. Disc Type: Aluminum-Bronze.
2. Operator: Standard lever handle with 10 position (minimum) memory stop.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15110-4 02/28/05
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature.
If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclo-
sures.
i
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
I
2.1 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in
the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller, except plug
valves.
5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
J. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15110-3 02/28/05
J
I
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Submittals and Sub-
stitutions" and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
B. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include a valve schedule indicating the I
following: i
1. Piping system and valve size range applicable to valve each valve type.
2. Valve design and arrangement.
3. Body, seating, and trim materials.
4. End connections.
5. Pressure and temperature classification.
6. Dimensions and required clearances.
7. Shipping, installed, and operating weights.
8. Specialties and accessories.
C. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of valve and maintenance guide to include
in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 and Division 15 — "Basic Mechanical
Methods and Materials". Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, ser-
vicing, disassembling, and repairing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: All valves of similar type shall be of a single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance (up to 125 psig SWP): ASME B31.9 for building services piping
valves.
C. ASME Compliance (125 psig SWP to 300 psig SWP): ASME B31.1 for power piping
valves.
D. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension
and design criteria.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 1
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15110-2 02/28/05
i
E
I
I
SECTION 15110—VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves for use in HVAC piping system
applications:
1. Copper-alloy ball valves.
2. High-pressure butterfly valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Gray-iron swing check valves.
5. Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves.
6. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
7. Bronze gate valves.
8. Cast-iron gate valves.
9. Bronze globe valves.
10. Cast-iron globe valves.
11. Cast-iron plug valves.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and
actuators.
3. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
I. CWP: Cold working pressure.
2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
5. SWP: Steam working pressure.
6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital HVAC Valves
Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15110-1 02/28/05
1
V
I
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNES BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) S REQ'D JACKET
(in inches)
i
i
5" to 36" Glass fiber 1 2" Yes A-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
D. Exterior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (306T to 4500:
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all exterior exposed and concealed high pressure
steam piping according to the Exterior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Applica-
tion Schedule:
I Exterior High Pressure Steam Piping Insulation Application Schedule (306°F to 450°F)
I
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D J ACKET
5" to 10" Cellular glass 5" No A-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
I
II
END OF SECTION 15083
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 15083-15 02/28/05
i
I
E. Interior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Application Schedule (180'F to 250T):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed steam
condensate piping according to the Interior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Applica-
tion Schedule:
1. Pumped discharge piping.
2. Low pressure condensate return piping.
3. Low pressure process condensate return piping.
4. Medium pressure condensate return piping.
5. High pressure condensate return piping. j
3.12 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.
B. Exterior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Application Schedule (180T to 250°F):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following exterior exposed and concealed steam
condensate piping according to the Exterior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Appli-
cation Schedule:
1. Pumped discharge piping.
2. High pressure condensate return piping.
Exterior Steam Condensate Piping Insulation Application Schedule (306`F to 450°F)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
1/2" to 11/a" Cellular glass 3" No A-Note 1
11/2" to 4" Cellular glass 31/z" No A-Note 1
5" to 10" Cellular glass 4" No A-Note 1
12" to 36" Cellular glass 41/2" No A-Note 1
NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4
inch corrugations.
NOTE 2: Apply insulation over freeze protection heat tracing.
C. Exterior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35`F to 90°F): Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed chilled water piping ac-
cording to the Interior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
Exterior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 90°F)
AwN
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15083-14 02/28/05
i
3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Domestic Cold Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35F to 90T):
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed domestic cold wa-
ter piping according to the Interior Domestic Cold Water Piping Insulation Application
Schedule:
Interior Domestic Cold Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35°F to 90C')
VAPOR FIELD
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNES BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) S REQ'D JACKET
(in inches)
1/z" to 11/a" Glass fiber 1" I Yes None
11/2" to 8" Glass fiber 11h" I Yes None
B. Interior Heating Hot Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (90T to 2000:
Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed heating
hot water piping according to the Interior Heating Hot Water Piping Insulation Applica-
tion Schedule:
1. Constant temperature heating hot water systems.
2. Variable temperature heating hot water systems.
3. Radiant floor heating hot water systems.
4. Snowmelt hot water/glycol systems.
C. Interior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35CF to 100`F): Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed condenser water piping
according to the Interior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
D. Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule (40T to 90cfl: Unless
otherwise indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed miscellaneous
piping according to the Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule:
1. Cold water make-up piping.
2. Piping to and from expansion tanks.
3. Condensate drains from cooling coils.
Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule (40cF to 90T)
VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) (in inches) RE 'D JACKET
All piping Glass fiber 1" Yes None
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15083-13 02/28/05
{
j
I
B. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints. f
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insu-
lation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect.
2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncom-
pliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials ac-
cording to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according
to these Specifications.
3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
1
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retard-
ers, and field-applied jackets. i
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities {
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15083-12 02/28/05
i
steel wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-
steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed
I insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer
E of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of
lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth
finish.
1
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same
material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.
` 3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.
f D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
I 1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insu-
lation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket with-
out disturbing insulation.
2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
I 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
k 4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-
mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
I 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insula-
tion with vapor-retarder mastic.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15083-11 02/28/05
I
i
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched sta-
ples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple lon-
gitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the in-
sulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insula-
tion of the same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, over-
lapping seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with aluminum jacket.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket insula-
tion to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation
for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-
mm) intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15083-10 02/28/05
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple lon-
gitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the in-
sulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, over-
lapping seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
` 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered
sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to
adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insula-
tion jackets at least 1 inch (25 mm) at each end. Secure fitting covers with manu-
facturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder
mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket in-
sulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to al-
low valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insu-
lation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fit-
ting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape
and vapor-retarder mastic.
S. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with
canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer.
3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION
I
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15083-9 02/28/05
i
j
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor re-
tarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
with vapor-retarder mastic.
I
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of
roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50
mm) below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate in-
sulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls
and floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through
penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic
where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of
15 to 20 feet (4.5 to 6 m) to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation seg-
ments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched sta-
ples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 15083-8 02/28/05
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and special-
ties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a va-
por retarder.
h
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
f with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and va-
por-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for apply-
ing insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation
at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation
on anchor legs at least 12 inches (300 mm) from point of attachment to pipe and
taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the in-
sulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insula-
tion to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the
I insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the
hanger, support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insula-
tion material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material
as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). Apply
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to re-
ceive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4
inches (100 mm) o.c.
0
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1'— 2323 15083-7 02/28/05
a
1
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
S. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
B. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed,
stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compati-
ble with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's
written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout
the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use ac-
cessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either
wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
A
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15083-6 02/28/05
i
I
I
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
( C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock
ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
` 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained within
the piping system.
D. Heavy PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 30-mil-
(0.75-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, re-
ducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
E. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-
mil- (0.5-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
ow 1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, re-
ducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
F. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209
(ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
G. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Corrugated finish, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same mate-
rial, finish, and thickness as jacket.
I
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
I 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
! Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15083-5 02/28/05
I
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
3. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
b. Pabco.
C. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with
the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-
applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber in-
sulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging
cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for in-
door applications. Comply with MIL-C-19S6SC, Type IL
B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermeti-
cally sealed cells, incombustible.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 1.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hy-
drous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type II.
i
D. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimen-
sions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 150834 02/28/05
I
I
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Archi-
tect.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appro-
priate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Di-
vision 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after in-
stalling and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of pip-
ing that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15083-3 02/28/05
I
I
i
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3. Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type
of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insula-
tion materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an appren-
ticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable test-
ing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke- '
developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and
finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build
mockups according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the com-
pleted Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN50) straight pipe.
b. One 90-degree elbow.
C. One tee fitting.
d. One NPS 2 (DN50) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation. +
g. One reducer. I
1
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15083-2 02/28/05
i
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
I
( PART 1 - GENERAL
I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
l field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and applica-
tion for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and pro-
tection saddles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and
field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
1
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type
of insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
t type of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing prod-
uct and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
' Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pipe Insulation
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 232') 15083-1 02/28/05
1
PLUMBING SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR ID
Domestic Cold Water 2" Round Green White CW
Domestic Hot Water 2" Square Yellow White HW
Domestic Hot Water Circulation 2" Square Yellow Black HWC '
Gas 1-1/2" Square Black White LPG
Steam 2" Square Red White LPS
Fire Protection System Valve Tag Application Table
FIRE PROTECTION TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM ID
SYSTEMS SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR
Fire Line Piping 2" Round Red White FL
Sprinkler 2" Round Red White SP
3.5 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION ,
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually
blocked by other work.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 15075
J
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification ,
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package T.1' —2323 15075-8 02/28/05
I
I
I
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed and above removable acoustical ceiling locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
` 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
` units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
f 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
k 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
` 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10
feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings where walls extend to the underside
of structure, install pipe markers in each room.
3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
M within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; faucets; and
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme
and with captions similar to those indicated in the following tables:
kHVAC Hydronic Systems Valve Tag Application Table
f
HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR ID
Chilled Water 2" Round Green White CHW
Non-Potable Cold Wtr Make-up 2" Round Green Black NPCW
1
HVAC Steam and Condensate Systems Valve Tag Application Table
HVAC STEAM SYSTEMS TAG TAG TAG LETTER SYSTEM
SIZE SHAPE COLOR COLOR ID
High Pressure Steam 2" Square Red White HPS
High Pressure Condensate 2" Square Red White HPR
I Pumped Condensate Discharge 2" Square Red White PD
Plumbing System Valve Tag Application Table
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
i Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15075-7 02/28/05
t
I
A
C. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color
codes: I
a. Green: For cooling equipment and components.
b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components.
C. Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 i
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing dis-
tances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indi-
cate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations,
and identify units.
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.
b. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
C. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.
d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
e. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
f. Tanks and pressure vessels.
g. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equip-
ment.
D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with
flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and cover-
ing full circumference of pipe.
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) wide, lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and cov-
ering full circumference of pipe.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 15075-6 02/28/05
. i
i
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more
than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is
Installer's option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located
where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include name-
plates for the following general categories of equipment:
1. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
2. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.
3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
4. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of me-
chanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers
may be omitted if both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
I less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing dis-
tances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indi-
cate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations,
M and identify units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following
general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.
b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
C. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
d. Pumps, compressors,condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
I e. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.
f. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
g. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
h. Tanks and pressure vessels.
i. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equip-
ment.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15075-5 02/28/05
i
i
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches
(150 mm): 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) or
Larger: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum.
2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity
of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
2.4 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system ab-
breviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Archi-
tect. Provide 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener. i
1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick brass or 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick lami-
nated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer.
2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
2.5 VALVE SCHEDULES
A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations
for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on ma-
sonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
2. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-
thickness glass.
2.6 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized
card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm).
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. I
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO
NOT OPERATE.
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 15075-4 02/28/05
i
C. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving condi-
tions, and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves;
4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide
holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
3. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
j 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, engraved laminated plastic,
with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch
(3.2-mm) center hole for attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
4 service, and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for
each application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band
pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-
band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length re-
quired for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both direc-
tions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-
adhesive back.
C. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with pres-
sure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
I
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2')23 15075-3 02/28/05
5. In addition to mounted copies, furnish copies for maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1 and Division 15 Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Meth-
ods".
6.
I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
I
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attach- I
ment on equipment.
1. Data:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
C. Labels of tested compliances.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
l
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 15075-2 02/28/05
i
i
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
j 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installa-
tion:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Equipment signs.
4. Access panel and door markers.
5. Pipe markers.
6. Duct markers.
7. Valve tags.
8. Valve schedules.
9. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
` B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identifica-
tion material and device.
C. Valve numbering scheme coordinated with the Owners valve numbering scheme.
D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system.
1. Valve schedule shall indicate the valve number, piping system, system abbreviation
as shown on tag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification.
2. Tabulate valve schedules to indicate the location of all valves by room name and
number as identified on the architectural floor plans.
3. Indicate areas, floors, or specific rooms controlled by each.
4. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
i
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Mechanical Identification
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15075-1 02/28/05
I
'I
J
1
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.14 GROUTING
J
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other '
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
I
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 15050
I
1
i
i
I
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation/ Site /Utilities
Package `F.V — 2323 15050-20 02/28/05
I
v
I
C. Mechanical devices that require access include, but are not necessarily limited to; valves,
cleanouts, air release valves; water hammer arrestors, terminal boxes; fire and smoke
dampers, smoke detectors, steam traps, filters, coils, volume and control dampers.
D. Access panels shall be large enough to provide access for maintenance and removal of
mechanical devices.
3.11 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufac-
turer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise in-
dicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter
of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's set-
ting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement
as specified in Division 3.
3.12 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.13 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
F
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and an-
chor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fas-
teners without splitting wood members.
i
i Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation / Site/Utilities
I Package 'FA' —2323 15050-19 02/28/05
i
1
(
3.7 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment. J
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materi-
als of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect pip-
ing materials of dissimilar metals.
3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replace-
ment of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum inter-
ference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
1
3.9 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9
Section "Painting".
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with mate-
rials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.10 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access Panels: Comply with Section 08305.
B. Furnish access panels for installation under other sections to allow access to mechanical
equipment and devices installed under Division 15. Furnish access panels for mechanical
devices installed behind permanent construction such as gypsum wall board partitions
and ceilings or concrete masonry walls and partitions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 15050-18 02/28/05
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements re-
quired for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble me-
chanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make wa-
tertight seal.
P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Divi-
sion 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to
tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Hand-
' book," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
i
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
I and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged J oints: Select appropriate gasket material size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15050-17 02/28/05
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board par-
titions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. I
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas
or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-
iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear I
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materi-
als:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gyp-
sum-board partitions.
C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane water-
proofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-
iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and loca-
tion of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and instal-
lation.
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and me-
chanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements re-
quired for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble me-
chanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make wa-
tertight seal.
I
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch
(25-min) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
I
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15050-16 02/28/05
i
I
E
t
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I1. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the follow-
ing:
1. New Piping:
1 a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-
plated finish.
C. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-
casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
low f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-
plate type.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
E a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated fin-
ish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and
spring clips.
C. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting,
cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-
' brass type with chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.
g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-
plate type.
Owl
f
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation /Site/Utilities
I Package TX — 2323 15050-15 02/28/05
I
3.4 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for gen-
eral demolition requirements and procedures.
I
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components in-
dicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and re-
move, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and rem_ ove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal ca-
pacity and quality.
3.5 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specify-
ing piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calcu-
late friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
i
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Awk
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15050-14 02/28/05
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
i
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect site conditions before starting preparatory work and verify that actual conditions
are known and acceptable before starting work.
B. Inspect areas where piping and equipment will be installed and verify adequate space is
available for access, service and removal of equipment. Coordinate with the Work of
i other Sections.
C. Notify the Architect immediately when the removal of existing ceilings, walls, or obstruc-
tions reveal conditions substantially different from the Contract Documents.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform coordination with the work of other Sections and prepare composite coordina-
tion drawings as specified in Section 01150 before starting installation work of this sec-
tion.
B. Verify points of connection to existing systems before proceeding with any related instal-
lation work.
3.3 SYSTEM SHUTDOWNS
I
A. Coordination shutdowns of existing systems with the Owner and submit a written re-
' quest at least ten working days in advance. Minimize system shut downs as much as
possible. Submit a list of all effected areas, the proposed work to be performed, and the
expected length of the shut-down including time for re-testing.
B. Provide temporary services to maintain active system during extended shut-downs as re-
f quired for demolition and construction phasing.
tow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation I Site/Utilities
j Package `F.1' — 2323 15050-13 02/28/05
I
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each
sealing element.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. In-
clude clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
I
E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that com-
pletely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-
plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15050-12 02/28/05
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges,
full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system
pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermo-
plastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working
pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg Q.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package T.1' —2323 15050-11 02/28/05
i
i
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to
and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
I
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
C. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or
coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type
coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) mini-
mum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg Q.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Eclipse, Inc.
d. Epco Sales, Inc.
e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15050-10 02/28/05
i
B. Record drawings include ductwork fabrication drawings or coordination drawings pre-
pared under the work of this Contract. Provide polyester mylar reproducible drawings
of both the Contract Drawings and additional fabrication/coordination drawings that
I indicate mechanical systems.
f C. Submission of the specified polyester mylars of the full mechanical coordination draw-
ings eliminates the requirement to modify the Contract Drawings to incorporate the
changes to piping and equipment locations made during construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE,TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed be-
low.
i
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thick-
ness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux accord-
ing to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refriger-
ant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS
fow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation / Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15050-9 02/28/05
I
I
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacement
necessary to the approval of the Architect at no change in Contract Sum.
1.12 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS I
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section— "Contract Closeout".
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Bind Manuals in hard-cover, three-ring binders,
and provide identified dividers with tabs. Indicate appropriate model numbers in manu-
facturers' brochures and cross out non-applicable information. Review the Manuals
with the Owner's maintenance personnel and add additional maintenance data sheets
and information as directed by the Owner's Representatives. Copies of faxed pages are
unacceptable.
C. Division of Manuals: Divide manuals with tabs to match the mechanical specification
sections.
I
D. Each Manual shall include:
1. Table of contents.
2. Subcontractor's warranties.
3. Name and telephone number of local representative or supplier. 1
4. Manufacturers' maintenance procedures.
5. Exploded drawings and parts lists.
6. Troubleshooting checklists with potential problems and possible causes.
7. Schematic wiring diagrams.
8. Record drawings.
9. Valve tag charts.
10. Equipment warranties and guaranties.
11. Additional requirements specified in the mechanical sections.
E. Instruction Seminar: Perform systems instruction seminar and walk-through with the
Owner's representatives after preparation and review of the Operation and Maintenance
manuals.
1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents for the work of Division 15 as specified in Division 1 Section
"Project Record Documents". The record drawings shall accurately indicate all valve lo-
cations and shall clearly show the assigned valve tag number. Record drawings shall in-
clude.
1. Piping and equipment location changes from the Contract Documents.
2. Valve locations and valve tag numbers.
3. Equipment identification numbers coordinated with the Owner's Facility Man-
agement Program.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 15050-8 02/28/05
E. Scheduled Equipment: Standard manufacturers model numbers scheduled on the draw-
ings shall be modified as specified in the descriptive specification for the scheduled
equipment. The drawings generally define quantities, and the specifications further de-
fine equipment quality and system components, which may not be included in the stan-
dard model number.
F. Pipe sizing notations: Pipe sizing notations run along the pipe from the larger sizes to the
smaller size. Sections of pipe that are not specifically identified with a pipe size are the
continuation of the previous larger pipe size indication. Pipe sizes change only where in-
dicated by a notation change.
f G. Existing Conditions: The existing conditions indicated on the contract drawings are
taken largely from existing record drawings. Preparation work of the mechanical sec-
tions includes the verification of existing conditions before the start of related installation
work.
I
1.9 DUST AND AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS CONTROL
A. Comply with the requirements of dust and airborne contaminant control as specified in
I Division 1 Section— "Dust and Airborne Contaminants Control".
t
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Prepare coordination drawings as specified in Division 1 Section— "Special Provisions".
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress
of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring ac-
cess that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of the Mechanical Sections be-
fore, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all
trades and Sections.
1. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent en-
trance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15050-7 02/28/05
I
I
1. Failures in operating component or components.
2. Leakage from piping system.
3. Code violations.
C. The use of systems or equipment provided under Division 15.Sections for temporary ser-
vices and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of work nor beneficial use by the
Owner, and shall not institute the Warranty period.
D. Obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturers published
data without exclusion or limitation, in Owner's name.
E. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
F. Guarantee shall include 24-hour service of complete system during guarantee period at
no cost to Owner. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Owner's approval.
G. Submit guarantee to Architect before final payment and include in the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
H. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer's equipment and material warranties
still in force to Owner.
I. This Article shall not be interpreted to limit Owner's rights under applicable codes and
laws and under this Contract. I
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with Article 2 of the Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701, including the
Appendix. Visit the site prior to submission of bids and examine existing conditions to
be familiar with the related implications to the Work of the Mechanical Sections.
B. Questions regarding the Bidding Documents: Submit questions and requests for clarifica-
tions in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders.
C. Contract Documents: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show every
fitting and component and shall be used in conjunction with the specified requirements
to provide complete and functional systems. The drawings and specifications are com-
plimentary, and the requirements indicated on both establish the requirements of the
Contract. j
I
D. Document Review: Review the complete set of Contract Documents and be familiar
with the space requirements of other trades. Thoroughly review building sections, archi-
tectural details, and mechanical and electrical drawings for a complete understanding of
the scope and coordination requirements of the Mechanical Sections.
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
i
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 15050-6 02/28/05
i
b. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
1) If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing will be Contractor's
responsibility.
f
1.6 CODES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS
A. Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable Rules, Laws, Regulations,
Codes, and Ordinances of Local, State, and Federal Governments.
1. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent
regulations of authorities that have )urisdiction.
2. In case of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regula-
tions, the more stringent requirement shall govern when so directed by the Archi-
tect.
B. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the applicable regulations and retain at the Pro-
ject site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need.
C. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent re-
quirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as
if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
D. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract
Documents, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Copies of Standards: Obtain copies of the most recent editions of the following stan-
dards and retain at the Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a
reasonable need:
1. UL Through Penetration Fire Stop Systems.
2. SMACNA Fire Damper Installation Guide.
1.7 WARRANTY
I
A. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Archi-
tect two copies of a written Warranty agreeing to replace the work of each mechanical
section which fails due to defective materials or workmanship within one year after Date
of Substantial Completion. Date of Substantial Completion shall be as determined in
accordance with the General Conditions.
I B. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be
limited to:
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation /Site /Utilities
Package `F.1' —23 23 15050-5 02/28/05
1
1. The inclusion of a manufacturer's name within the list of acceptable manufacturers
does not necessarily mean that the manufacturers standard product is equal to the
specified or scheduled product without some required modification. The submit-
ted product shall be equal in all respects to the specified product. ,
C. Substitutions: Substitutions include manufacturers not listed as acceptable within the
specifications, or products, systems and methods that differ from the specified systems.
1. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 Section "Submittals and Substitutions".
Submit list of proposed substitutes for review and approval in compliance with Ar-
ticle 3 of the Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701.
2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify that the products of acceptable manu-
facturers and proposed substitutes meet or exceed the performance of the specified
or scheduled product including the following:
a. Horsepower: Equal or less.
b. Efficiency: Equal or greater.
C. Capacities: Equal or greater.
d. Space/Clearances: Equal or greater.
e. Storage and Recovery: Equal or greater.
f. Warranty: Equal or better.
g. Weight (Lbs): Equal or less.
h. Noise: Equal or quieter.
3. By the submission of a proposed substitution, the Contractor represents that he has ^#*.
reviewed the proposed substitution and certifies that:
a. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
b. Changes to the building design, including A/E design and review time at a
rate of 2.7 x DPE, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested
substitution will be included in the bid price with no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the
construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements.
d. Maintenance and service parts are available locally.
e. All costs associated with the use of the proposed substitute will be covered
by the Contractor.
D. Qualifications for Welding and Brazing Work:
1. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." I
a. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15050-4 02/28/05
i
i
D. Schedule of Shut-downs: After the project construction schedule is developed, submit the
following information to the Owner for all required shut-downs of existing systems.
1. Date of proposed shut-down.
2. List of systems to be affected.
3. List of areas affected by the shut-down.
4. Description of work to be performed.
5. Estimated length of the shut-down.
E. Piping Systems Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule of mechanical piping systems to
indicate the piping material, joints, and fittings to be used with each system.
F. Insulation Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule to indicate insulation types and
thicknesses to be used on each mechanical piping system.
G. UL Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule to in-
dicate the UL-System number for through-penetration assemblies to be used with all me-
chanical systems. Coordinate with the work of Division 7 Section "Firestops and
Smokeseals".
' H. Product Data: For the following:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Record Drawings: Prepare record drawings in accordance with the provisions of Divi-
sion 1 Section "Project Record Documents" and the additional requirements of this Sec-
tion.
K. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare and submit copies of the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Close-Out", Division
1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data", and in Article 1.10 of this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled, licensed workers who are thoroughly
trained and experienced and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1
B. Standard of Quality: The manufacturers names specified first or scheduled on the draw-
ings are used for the design and to establish the standard of quality upon which the Con-
tract is based. Acceptable manufacturers names are listed to provide competitive bids
` with the specified or scheduled manufacturer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation /Site/Utilities
i Package 'F.1' — 2323 15050-3 02/28/05
t
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambi-
ent temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical con-
tact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather JJ
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient I
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
I
I
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
A. General Requirements: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section "Submit- ,.
tals and Substitutions", the Sections of Division 15-Mechanical, and the additional re-
quirements of this Section.
1. Copies of faxed pages within submittal packages will be rejected.
B. Materials List: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to proceed, submit a list of the proposed materials to be provided under the work
of the Mechanical Sections of Division 15.
C. Organization of Submittals: Bind submittals into comprehensible packages with related
product data sheets organized and identified by Specification Section and Article num-
bers. Bind submittals into packages as specified in the Sections of Division 15. Identify
submittal pages to indicate the specific equipment or fixture type the data sheet applies
to. Submittals that are not properly bound and identified may be returned without re-
view.
I
1. Indicate appropriate model numbers in manufacturers' brochures and cross out
non-applicable information.
2. Copies of faxed pages are unacceptable.
3. Submit shop drawings for particular systems complete, simultaneously, and organ-
ized by system.
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation /Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' — 2323 15050-2 02/28/05
ew SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Organization of Submittals.
2. Proposed substitutions.
3. Coordination drawings.
4. Infection control requirements.
5. Phasing requirements.
6. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
7. Transition fittings.
8. Dielectric fittings.
9. Core drilling.
10. Penetrations.
11. Mechanical sleeve seals.
12. Sleeves.
13. Escutcheons.
14. Grout.
it 15. Mechanical demolition.
16. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
I 17. Painting and finishing.
18. Concrete bases.
19. Supports and anchorages.
20. Record documents.
21. Systems start-ups and Commissioning.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceil-
ings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished oc-
cupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Foundation / Site/Utilities
Package j.V -2323 15050-1 02/28/05
I
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean dirt and debris from pipe and valve.
END OF SECTION 13915
i
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' —2323 13915 - 7 02/28/05
1
D. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of
water supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification
signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16. I
D. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
I
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. I
3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: i
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-
trols and equipment.
i
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 13915 - 6 02/28/05
I
A. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.
B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish
and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in
aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded or grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and
grooved joints.
3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Gate Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications
where required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
i
i 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic i in
Pp g
joint construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
I
1. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings
and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
I
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
i
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviat-
ing from approved working plans.
C. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2
and larger connections.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1'—2323 13915 - 5 02/28/05
I
i
I
1. Manufacturers:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company.
b. System Sensor.
2.5 PRESSURE GAGES I
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. AGF Manufacturing Co.
2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.
S. Marsh Bellofram.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch-diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to
300 psig.
1. Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.
2. Air System Piping: Include retard feature and caption "AIR" or "AIRIWATER"
on dial face.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and NFPA 291. Use re-
sults for system design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
I
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water main connections and valves to verify actual locations of
piping connections before installation.
B. Examine foundation walls for suitable thicknesses for sleeve and water tight link seal as-
sembly.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Foundation /Site/Utilities i
Package `F.1' —2323 13915 - 4 02/28/05
I
I
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with factory- or field-formed, radius-
cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Victaulic Co. of America.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching
ductile-iron-pipe OD and cement lining.
C. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting with key for duc-
tile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include flange-type, ductile-iron housing with
rubber gasket listed for use with housing and steel bolts and nuts.
2.3 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed and FMG approved,with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
B. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
I
C. Indicator Post Valve: UL 262 and FM 1120/1130, Resilient Wedge type: Iron body with
fusion epoxy coated interior and exterior (ANSI/AWWA C550) and NSF-61, Non-rising
bronze stem, rubber encapsulated iron wedge, triple o-ring seal and flanged ends.
D. Indicator Post: UL/FM approved adjustable post assembly, carbon steel upper barrel
tapped for supervisory switch and ductile iron lower barrel.
a. Available Manufacturers:
1) Hammond Valve.
2) Milwaukee Valve Company.
3) Mueller Company.
4) NIBCO.
5) Red-White Valve Corp.
I
2.4 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
1 B. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch
with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve
is in other than fully open position.
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Foundation/Site /Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 13915 - 3 02/28/05
i
I
C. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-
suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to as-
sume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow
test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and
field test reports by a qualified professional engineer. i
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installa-
tion, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements ap-
ply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING ,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1' — 2323 13915 - 2 02/28/05
SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class I standpipe systems.
2. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Combined Standpipe and Sprinkler System: System shall connect to Locust Street fire
main provided by Division 2.. Service shall enter fire pump room with isolation
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
B. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE 7, "Minimum De-
sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Piping materials.
2. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 13915 - 1 02/28/05
B. All work shall be rigidly anchored to the supporting
construction in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
3.03 CLEAN-UP
A. Surfaces of signs shall be cleaned as recommended by the sign
manufacturer after installation.
B. All defective work shall be removed and replaced with work
conforming to the specified requirements.
3.04 ERECTION OF POSTS
A. P-5 Breakaway posts shall be installed in conformance with
details shown on the "Commonwealth of Massachusetts,
Department of Highways, Standard Drawings for Signs and
Supports" , when located within public roadways.
I
B. Posts shall be supported in a concrete base or driven into
soil, as detailed in the drawings.
C. Posts specifically indicated on the drawings to be driven,
` shall be driven a minimum of three feet into firm ground.
D. The height of signs above ground surfaces shall meet Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
END OF SECTION 10450
Base Date: 6/03
I
1
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Signage
i Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 10450-5 02128/05
I
1
i
FHWA publication "Standard Alphabet for Highway Signs"
(Current Edition) , or as shown of the Drawings.
2.04 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. The sign fabricator shall design a complete system of
fastenings and anchorage devices for the various signs, as
required for attachment to the various supporting structures.
These may include, concealed clip systems, face screws and
epoxy adhesives. Wherever reasonably possible, fastenings and
anchorage devices shall be fully concealed, and shall be
vandal proof. The Contractor shall provide safe and secure
installations in strict conformance to the governing laws and
building code.
2.05 SIGN SUPPORTS
A. Sign supports shall be breakaway type. P-5 breakaway sign
posts shall conform to Massachusetts Highway Department
details entitled "Standard Ground Mounted Supports Breakaway
Design" and material specifications.
B. Within municipal right-of-way, new Pedestrian Crossing signs
shall be equipped with high-visibality post markers to
increase driver awareness of cross walk location.
I
PART 3—EXECUTION "
3.01 PROTECTION AND TEMPORARY COVERS
A. Completed sign panels shall be protected and maintained in
good condition, free from dirt, scratches, hand marks or other
blemishes. The panels shall be transported in a manner that
prevents damage.
B. Subsequent to erection, if required by the Engineer, exterior
signs shall be covered until the actual use is desired.
Material used to temporarily cover any sign panel shall
effectively conceal the message, be non-injurious to the
panel, and its finish, its structural integrity, and of
sufficient durability for the time period required.
3.02 INSTALLATION
I
A. Erection of all signs shall be performed by experienced sign
erectors. Signs shall be installed true, plumb, and level,
located where shown on the Drawings or as required by the
Engineer. No field cutting of any sign work will be allowed.
Exercise extreme care in all handling and stacking of signs to
avoid chipping.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Signage
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 10450-4 02/28/05
coated, pressure-activated adhesive applied as recommended by
the manufacturer of the reflective sheeting or be opaque black
permanent inks applied on approved high intensity sheeting.
F. Treatment of Aluminum Sign Panels Prior to Application of
Reflective Sheeting.
1. vapor degreasing: By total immersion of the panel in a
saturated vapor or trichloroethylene. Trademark printing
shall be removed with lacquer thinner or controlled
alkaline cleaning system.
Alkaline degreasing: By total immersion of the panel in
a tank containing alkaline solutions, controlled and
titrated to the solution manufacturer's specification.
2. Rinsing: After satisfactory degreasing, the panels shall
be thoroughly washed with running water.
3. Drying: The panel shall be thoroughly dried by use of a
forced hot air dryer.
4. Metal shall not be handled between cleaning and etching
operation and the application of reflective sheeting,
except with devices or clean canvas gloves.
i
` 5. Metal shall not come in contact with greases, oils or
other contaminants prior to the application of reflective
sheeting.
2.03 LEGENDS
A. Permanently Applied Legends:
1. Permanently applied legends shall be reflective or opaque
sheeting applied directly to clean, dust-free background
in a manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer.
2. Heat activated adhesive-coated material shall be applied
only by mechanical means.
3. Finishes shall be as recommended by and applied in the
manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer.
4. Legends shall be neatly cut.
B. Silk Screen Processed:
1. The legends shall be of the series and size specified in
the AASHTO Manual for "Signing and Pavement Markings"
I
(Current Edition) , and the dimension and details of the
letters in to each series shall be as specified in the
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Signage
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l'—2323 10450-3 02/28/05
I
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ALUMINUM SIGN PANELS
A. Aluminum Sign Panel shall be fabricated from flat aluminum
sheeting, ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 5052-H38, of the
following thickness and mounting, unless otherwise specified:
i
Area of Sign Thickness
(scxuare feet) Mounting (Inches)
< 10 Single Post 0.080
Between 10 and 20 Two Posts 0.080
Between 6 and 25 Single Post (Top Mounted) 0.250
B. Sign supporting hardware shall be aluminum or stainless steel.
2.02 REFLECTIVE SHEETING
A. Reflective sheeting shall meet the requirements of AASHTO
M268.
1. Panel Sheeting shall be Type II (Engineering Grade) .
2. Legend Sheeting shall be Type III (High Intensity) . High-
intensity sheets shall be utilized on new Pedestrian
Crossing signs to be installed within municipal right-of-
way.
B. Reflective sheeting shall be applied to properly treated base
panels with mechanical equipment in a manner specified for the
manufacture of traffic control signs by the sheeting
manufacturer. Heat activated adhesive coating sheeting shall
be pre-perforated.
1. No splices shall be allowed on sign panels.
C. when pressure sensitive adhesive coating reflective sheeting
is used all sheeting splices and sign edges shall be sealed
with materials recommended by and in a manner specified by the
sheeting manufacturer.
I. Dry heat activated adhesive coated reflective sheeting
when applied to aluminum shall be edge sealed as
specified by the sheeting manufacturer.
D. The reflective sheeting shall be applied to properly treated
base panels with mechanical equipment in a manner specified by
the sheeting manufacturer.
E. The numerals shall be black, die-cut, pre-spaced, conforming
to the detail on the Drawings. Numerals shall have a pre-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Si a
� e g
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 10450-2 02/28/05
SECTION 10450
SIGMGE
PART 1---GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for site signs and
supports.
B. The work includes:
1. The furnishing and installation of new signs and sign
supports.
2. The removal of existing signs.
3. New signs and sign supports in public roadways under the
jurisdiction of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Department of Highways or City of Northampton. The signs
and supports shall conform to the requirements of
Sections 828 and 840 of the latest edition of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Standard Specifications for
Highways and Bridges.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
i
1. Shop Drawings of all signs and supports. Do not order
material or begin fabrication until Engineer's approval
has been obtained.
2. Show sizes and thicknesses of all members, types of
materials, methods of construction and assembly, type of
4 surface treatment, complete dimensions, hangers,
brackets, anchorage, fasteners, relationship to
surrounding work by other trades, shop finishes, sign
designs, layouts, and lettering, and other pertinent
details of fabrication and installation.
1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall have experience in the type of work
required and a reputation for producing satisfactory work on
time.
l
j B. Deliver and store in a manner that prevents cracking,
chipping, stress of the components, and damage.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Signage
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 10450-1 02/28105
•
i
B. Scoring shall cut into slab surface at least 1 inch, but in no
case not less than 25 percent of slab depth.
3.13 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Materials for concrete shall be heated when concrete is mixed,
placed, or cured when the mean daily temperature is below 40°F
or is expected to fall to below 40°F within 72 hours. The
concrete, after placing, shall be protected by covering, heat,
or both.
B. Details of handling and protecting of concrete during freezing
weather shall be subject to the approval and direction of the
Engineer. Procedures shall be in accordance with provisions
of ACI 306R.
3.14 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays
of the sun and the forms and reinforcement just prior to
placing shall be sprinkled with cold water. Every effort
shall be made to minimize delays which will result in +
excessive mixing of the concrete after arrival on the site.
B. During periods of excessively hot weather (95 0F. , or above) ,
ingredients in the concrete shall be cooled with cold mixing
water to maintain the temperature of the concrete at
permissible levels in accordance with the provisions of ACI
305. Any concrete with a temperature above 95 0F. , when ready
for placement, will be rejected.
C. Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period
of hot weather giving air temperature, general weather
conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, etc. ) and relative
humidity. Records shall include checks on temperature of
concrete as delivered and after placing in forms. Data should
be correlated with the progress of the work so that conditions
surrounding the construction of any part of the structure can
be ascertained.
3.15 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Concrete surfaces shall be protected from traffic or damage
until surfaces have hardened sufficiently.
I
END OF SECTION 03301
Base Date: 6/03
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/ Site/ Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 03301-12 02/28/Q5
I
2. Concrete cured with a curing compound shall have the
compound applied at a rate of 200 square feet per gallon,
in two applications perpendicular to each other.
3. Curing period shall be seven days minimum.
C. Only if additional protection is absolutely required, the
surface should remain uncovered after the seven day period for
at least 4 days, after which time new and unwrinkled non-
staining reinforced waterproof Kraft curing paper may be used.
3.10 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joints shall be 1/2 inch wide and located where
shown on the Drawings. Expansion joints shall be troweled in
the concrete to required width with preformed joint filler in
place. Joint filler shall extend the full depth of the slab
and full length of the expansion joint.
1. For concrete walks, pavements, and pads, depth of joint
filler shall be placed to form a 1-1/4 inch deep recess
for sealant and backer rod below finished concrete
surface.
2. Use of multiple pieces to make up required depth and
""° width of joint will not be permitted.
3.11 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Construction joints shall be placed whenever placing of
concrete is suspended for more than 30 minutes.
1. Butt joint with dowels or thickened edge joint shall be
used if construction joints occur at control joint
locations.
2. Keyed joints with tiebars shall be used if the joint
occurs at any other location.
3.12 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Control joints shall be tooled into the concrete slab, with 3-
inch wide border and troweled edges, in pattern as shown on
the Drawings. If no pattern is shown, [then pattern shall
result in square shape with a maximum area of 36 square feet.]
Joint shall be made after concrete is finished and when the
surface is stiff enough to support the weight of workmen
without damage to the slab, but before slab has achieved its
final set.
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package X —2323 03301-11 02/28/05
`
j
i
i
I
continuously moist from time of placing until end of curing
period, or until curing membrane is applied.
E. Sidewalks, walkways, accessible routes, and ramps shall be
constructed and finished in accordance with the Americans with
Disabilities Act, and State and Local requirements.
F. Exposed -Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in
pavement surfaces as follows:
1. Immediately after float finishing, spray-apply chemical
surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing
laps with tape, and remove when ready to continue
finishing operations.
3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by
lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle
broom.
4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water
flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed
from aggregate surfaces to depth required.
3.09 CURING
A. Concrete shall be kept continuously damp from time of
placement until end of specified curing period or cured by
other methods. Water shall not be added to surface during
floating and troweling operations, and not earlier than 24
hours after concrete placement. Between finishing operations,
surface shall be protected from rapid drying by a covering of
waterproofing paper. Surface shall be damp when the covering
is placed over it, and shall be kept damp by means of a fog
spray of water, applied as often as necessary to prevent
drying, but not sooner than 24 hours after placing concrete.
None of the water so applied shall be troweled or floated into
surface.
B. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering with
curing paper or application of a curing compound.
1. Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely
covered with paper with seams lapped and sealed with
tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed to become
moistened between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete.
During curing period surface shall be checked frequently,
and sprayed with water as often as necessary to prevent
drying, but not earlier than 24 hours after placing
concrete.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.l' —2323 03301-10 02/28/05 i
• I
I
F. Concrete which has set or partially set, before placing shall
not be used. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.
G. Concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated, or otherwise
consolidated to secure a solid and homogeneous mass,
thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners of
forms.
H. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained
full set, latter shall be cleaned of foreign matter, and
mortar laitance shall be removed by chipping and washing.
Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water,
but shall have no free water on surface. A coat of 1:1
cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8 inch thick, shall be well
scrubbed into the thoroughly dampened concrete base. New
concrete shall be placed immediately, before grout has dried
or set.
3.08 FINISHIN4
A. Concrete surfaces shall be screeded and finished true to line
and grade, and free of hollows and bumps. Surface shall be
dense and smooth.
1. Finished concrete surface for concrete subbase shall be
wood floated to a slightly rough surface. Surface shall
not deviate more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
i
2. Finished concrete surfaces shall be wood-floated and
steel troweled, or broom finished, to a uniform surface.
Surface shall not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Horizontal surfaces of concrete surfaces which will be exposed
shall be given a light broomed finish, with direction of
grooves in concrete surface perpendicular to length of
f concrete band, slab, or pad. After concrete has set
sufficiently to prevent coarse aggregate from being torn from
surface, but before it has completely set, brooms shall be
drawn across the surface to produce a pattern of small
parallel grooves. Broomed surface shall be uniform, with no
smooth, unduly rough or porous spots, or other irregularities.
Coarse aggregate shall not be dislodged by brooming operation.
C. Immediately following finishing operations, arises at edges
and both sides of expansion joints shall be rounded to a 1/4
inch radius. Control joints to be tooled shall be scored into
slab surface with scoring tool. Adjacent edges of control
Ijoint shall at same time be finished to a 1/4 inch radius.
D. Where finishing is performed before end of curing period,
concrete shall not be permitted to dry out, and shall be kept
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
i Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package`F.1'—2323 03301-9
I
I
D. Chamfer exposed corners and edges, using wood, metal, PVC, or
rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth
lines and tight edge joints.
E. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris
just before placing concrete. Re-tighten forms and bracing
before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks
and maintain proper alignment.
3.05 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into formwork the anchorage devices
and other embedded items required for work that is attached
to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting
drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by
suppliers of items to be attached.
B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate
screen strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to
support screed strips using strike-off templates or
compacting-type screeds.
3.06 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A. Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual,
low-VOC form-coating compound before placing reinforcement.
3.07 CONCRETE PLACING
A. Equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to
be observed as to weather, and condition of base shall meet
the requirements of ACI 316R.
B. The Engineer shall be notified of scheduled concrete placement
sufficiently in advance of start of operation to allow
preliminary inspection of the work, including subgrade, forms,
and reinforcing steel.
C. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4 0C) .
D. Adjacent work shall be protected from stain and damage.
Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to
equal their original conditions.
E. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material I
against which new concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly
damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free water on
surface.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package`F.I' —2323 03301-8 02/28/05
I
i
3.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Before being placed in position, reinforcing steel shall be
thoroughly cleaned of loose mill and rust scale, dirt, ice,
and other foreign material which may reduce the bond between
the concrete and reinforcing. Where there is delay in placing
concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be
reinspected and cleaned when required.
B. Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded.
C. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, reinforcing shall
extend within 2 inches of form work and expansion joints.
Reinforcing shall continue through control joints. Adjacent
sheets of fabric reinforcing shall lap 6 inches.
I D. After forms have been coated with form release agent, but
before concrete is placed, reinforcing steel shall be securely
wired in the required position and shall be maintained in that
position until concrete is placed and compacted. Chair bars
` and supports shall be installed in a number and arrangement
approved by the Engineer.
3.04 FORMS
I
A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork
to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that
might be applied until concrete structure can support such
loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures
are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and
surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347
limits.
1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed
to view.
2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B. Construct forms to provide for openings, offsets, sinkages,
keyways, recesses, moldings, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
bulkheads, anchorages, and inserts, and other features
required for the work. Use selected materials to obtain
required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at
joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying
against concrete surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and other features for easy
removal.
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'FT—2323 03301-7 02/28/05
i
B. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed
before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are
performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed
subgrade, subbase, base, or pavement, subsequent backfill and
compaction shall be performed as required by the Engineer and
as specified in Section 02300, Earthwork.
C. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
D. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Engineer. Subgrade
shall be approved for installation of the gravel base course.
Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall
be repaired.
3.02 BASE COURSE
A. Base course for concrete paving shall be pavement subbase
course or gravel base materials specified in Section 02320,
Pavement Subbase and Base, as shown on the Drawings.
B. Width of base course shall extend beyond edge of the proposed
pavement as shown on the Drawings.
C. Material shall be placed in lifts no more than 6 inches thick,
compacted measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to
specified density.
1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch
basin, and other structures only after they have been set
to required grade.
2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of
crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress
toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue
until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller
wheels.
3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 inch as measured
by means of a 10 foot long straightedge shall be regraded
and recompacted.
D. Base course shall be compacted at optimum moisture content to
not less than 95 percent of maximum density as determined by
ASTM D1557.
E. The base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less
select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with
the base course material.
I
f
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.l' —2323 03301-6 02/28/05
I
I
1. Premolded filler shall be one piece for the full depth
and width of the joint.
B. Smooth dowel shall be hot rolled plain steel dowel bonded at
one end and operating in smooth close fitting sleeve (of same
material) at the other.
2.06 CONTROL JOINTS
A. ,joint filler to be polyethylene foam with manufacturer's
recommended sealant.
2.07 FORMS
A. Cylindrical Forms: Sonotube Fibre Forms, wax-impregnated
` strippable forms manufactured by Sonoco Products Company,
General Products Division, ABS or PVC plastic reusable forms,
or approved equivalent.
B. Forms for Exposed Finish: Plywood, metal, metal-framed
plywood faced, or other acceptable panel materials. Plywood
shall be APA Ref. 1 B-B (Concrete Form) , Class I Exterior
Grade plywood or B-B or A-C Class I high density overlay
concrete form plywood. Form work materials shall produce
smooth, continuous, straight and level surfaces.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish: Plywood, lumber or metal, with
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side.
D. Form Ties: Prefabricated, adjustable length galvanized steel
snap-off ties, with brackets, cones, cornerlocks and other
accessories as necessary.
E. Form Release Agent: Commercial formulation compounds that
will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete.
F. Imprinting Tools: Mats and tools used to stamp projecting
texture and patterns onto plastic concrete surfaces shall be
specifically designed with rigid back supports to enable a
clean, sharp, stamping image. Stamps for curb ramps shall be
designed to meet ADA detectable warning requirements.
I
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBaRADE
(((� A. The subgrade of areas to be paved shall be graded and
compacted as specified in Section 02320, Pavement Subbase and
Base.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 03301-5 02/28/05
I
7. Contain no calcium chloride or admixtures containing
calcium chloride shall be added to the concrete. No
admixtures other than those specified shall be used in
the concrete without the specific written permission of
the Engineer in each case.
2.03 CONCRETE AGGREGATES
A. Provide in conformance with ASTM C33.
B. Fine aggregates in conformance with ASTM C33, part 6.
C. Coarse aggregates in conformance with ASTM C33, parts 9 thru
11 and tables 2 and 3, with the following Class designations:
1. 1S - For footings and foundations not exposed to the
weather.
1
2. 4S - For pavements, driveways, curbs, walkways,
sidewalks, and retaining walls that are exposed to the
weather.
I
3. IN - For pavements, driveways, curbs, walkways,
sidewalks, and retaining walls that are not exposed to
the weather.
D. Exposed Aggregate for ADA curb ramps shall be selected, hard,
durable, washed rounded stones free of deleterious reactivity
to cement with graded sizes between 1h to 'A inch diameter i
nominal sieves.
2.04 CURING MATERIALS FOR UNCOLORED CONCRETE
A. Curing shall be accomplished by the following methods:
I. Moist curing with burlap covering.
2. Curing paper, nonstaining, fiber reinforced laminated
Kraft bituminous product conforming to ASTM C171. Four
mil polyethylene sheeting may be substituted for curing
paper.
3. Curing compound, a resin-base, white pigmented compound
conforming to ASTM C309, Type 2.
2.05 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joint filler shall be preformed, nonbituminous type
conforming to ASTM D1752, Type II, similar to Sealtight Cork
Expansion Joint Filler, manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. ,
Elgin, IL 60120, or approved equivalent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 03301-4 02/28/05
J
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60,
deformed.
1. Bars employed as dowels shall be hot-rolled plain rounds.
B. Steel wire: ASTM A82, plain cold drawn steel.
C. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the
applicable requirements of ASTM A185. Fabric reinforcement
shall be furnished in flat sheets. Fabric reinforcement in
rolls will not be permitted.
D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, and other
devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing
bars, and welded wire fabric in place shall be wire bar-type
supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or
horizontal runners where base material will not support
chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of
supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with
legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) .
2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
A. Portland cement concrete shall:
1. Have a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45 conforming to
ACI 316R.
2. Be Air-entrained type conforming to ASTM C94. Air
content by volume shall be 6 percent + 1 percent, and
shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C260.
3. Be placed with a slump not less than 3 inches nor greater
than 4 inches, determined in accordance with ASTM 0143.
4. Use cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type I or II. Only
one color of cement, all of the same manufacturer, shall
be used for the work.
5. Use fine and coarse aggregates conforming to ASTM C33.
6. Contain a water reducing agent to minimize cement and
water content of the concrete mix at the specified slump.
Water reducing agent shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 03301-3 02/28/05
I
i
ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
Manual of Standard Practice.
Americans with Disabilities Act and State Recrulations
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work and materials for construction of the cement concrete
walks shall conform to ACI 316R. Other cast-in-place concrete
shall conform to ACI 301.
I
B. Work, materials, and color of the wheelchair ramp paving shall
conform to applicable sections of Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA) and Architectural Access Board standards (AAB) ,
whichever is more stringent.
C. Dimensions, locations, and details of equipment pads, anchors,
supports, and similar features shown on the drawings are
approximate. Manufacturer's approved shop Drawings of
equipment to be supported, anchored, or contained thereby
shall be consulted for exact location, size and details.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Description of methods and sequence of placement for each type
of specially-finished concrete, including description of
methods and sequence of placement.
B. Manufacturer's product data for the following:
1. Form release agent.
2. Preformed joint filler.
3. Concrete reinforcement specification data from
manufacturer.
1.06 TESTING
A. The Owner may employ an independent testing laboratory to
inspect and test concrete paving and other cast-in-place
concrete work.
B. Testing of materials and installed work may occur at any time
during progress of the work. Rejected materials and installed
work shall be removed and replaced.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete ,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 03301-2 02/28/05
SECTION 03301
SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for concrete cast-in-place
on the site.
B. The work of includes cast-in-place concrete pavement,
monolithically cast concrete curb/sidewalks, bases,
foundations, structures and thrust blocks.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02300 - Earthwork
2. Section 02725 - Curbing
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. References herein are made in accordance with the following
abbreviations and all work under this Section shall conform to
the latest editions as applicable.
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Building
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 316R - Recommendations for Construction of Concrete
Pavements and Concrete Bases
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM 185 - Welded Wire Steel Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM 615 - Deformed and Plain Billot Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C143 - Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C231 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Cast in Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 03301-1 02/28/05
Foundation walls not so designated shall be braced either temporarily at the upper level by means
designed and implemented by the General Contractor or permanently by the casting and full curing
(reached 100%of its 28-day strength)of the upper level floor slab. Backfilling against these walls shall
not commence until the wall concrete has achieved 100%of its 28-day strength. Temporary bracing(if
used) shall not be removed until the upper level slab is cast and its concrete has achieved 100%of its 28-
day strength.
3.13 VAPOR BARRIER
A. Apply vapor barrier under all interior slabs-on-grade after insuring that gravel sub base is level and well
compacted.
B. Lap and tape all joints to a minimum width of 12 inches. Trim vapor barrier to fit neatly around column
bases and tape all edges.
C. Do not damage the vapor barrier at any time;repair any accidental punctures with a patch of the same
material extending a minimum of 12 inches in all directions with all edges of the patch taped.
3.14 CUTTING OF HOLES
A. Cut holes required by other trades in any cast-in-place concrete which did not receive sleeves. Use a core
drilling process or sawing process which produces clean sharp edges and the minimum hole size which
accommodates the piping,conduit,or equipment requiring the opening.
B. Obtain approval of Architect before cutting any holes for any trades. ,w,
3.15 FLOOR HARDENING
A. All interior concrete floors remaining exposed in the finished work shall be treated with a chemical
hardener in a three-coat application,not sooner than 28 days after pouring of slab,in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications.
3.16 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Grout solid all column leveling plates and beam bearing plates in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.17 WATERSTOP
A. Install continuous Bentonite strip waterstop at vertical and horizontal wall construction joints as indicated
on the Drawings. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Strip
waterstops shall not be located within shear keys.
END OF SECTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Foundation/Site/Utilities Cast-in-Place Concrete
Package T.F —2323 03300-12 02/28/05
ew E. Roof slabs and fills shall be screeded and floated to provide even surface,free of depressions or raised
areas,for insulation and roofing. Slope roof slabs or fills to roof drains or slab edges as indicated.
F. Exterior platforms,walks,etc. shall be given rough broom finish.
G. No dry cement or mixture of sand and cement shall be applied to surface of any concrete slab to absorb
moisture.
H. Protect floors from damage until completion of job.
3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect newly placed concrete against low and high temperature effects and against rapid loss of moisture.
Cure all concrete for at least seven days at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F by curing methods
approved by the Architect. Submit curing methods to the Architect for review and approval prior to
commencement of the work involved(see Section 3.11-C below,also).
B. Vertical or near vertical surfaces may be cured by maintaining wood forms continuously wet during
curing period,by wrapping with continuous .006"polyethylene with taped joints or as approved by the
Architect.
C. Floor surfaces,after hardening sufficiently to prevent damage,and normally within several hours after
final troweling,shall be water-cured only(curing compounds shall not be used)by methods approved by
the Architect.
3.12 FORM REMOVAL/LOAD APPLICATION
A. Forms shall be removed without damage to concrete. The contractor shall be responsible for the safety of
the construction during and after form removal.No act of the Architect shall relieve him of this
responsibility.
B. Protect corners from damage after form removal by boxing,corner boards or other means approved by the
Architect.
C. Formwork for columns,walls,beam sides and other parts not supporting the weight of concrete may be
removed as soon as the concrete has reached 30%of its specified 28-day strength,but not before 48 hours,
provided it is properly cured and protected.
D. Formwork for beam soffits,slabs and other parts supporting the weight of concrete shall remain in place
until the concrete has reached 100%of its specified 28-day strength except that after the concrete has
reached 75%of its specified 28-day strength,but not before 7 days,the form work may be removed and
the elements securely reshored.
E. Reshoring shall remain in place until concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength and until members
can safely support their weight and the load thereon.Until the 28-day strength has been achieved,all
concrete shall be protected from shock,vibration and heavy loads.
F. Foundation walls retaining earth specifically designated as allowing backfilling before being braced by the
upper level slab shall not be backfilled until the wall concrete has achieved 100%of its 28-day strength.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 03300-11 02/2 /05
C. Exposed Vertical Surfaces: Immediately after removal of forms,chip off all fins,and other projections, '
and patch all voids,honeycombs,and air pockets exceeding 3/4"in any dimension. In areas where
concentrations of small voids occur,patch a sufficient number of the voids to produce a uniform
appearance across the entire panel. Smooth out projections and fins with wet carborundum stones or
power grinders to extent directed by Architect. Pull tie rods and pack voids formed by wood tie-rod cones
to a point 3/4"from finish surface. Patch irregular lines at edges of ceiling ribs to produce neat,uniform
appearance. Adhere to standards established on approved sample concrete panels.
D. Plywood-Formed Ceilings and Soffits: Immediately after removal of forms,remove all fins and other
projections even with adjacent surfaces. Patch all voids,honeycombs,and air pockets greater than 3/4"in
any dimension. In areas where concentration of voids 1/2"and less occur,patch a sufficient number of
them to produce a uniform appearance across the entire surface. j
E. All exposed concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove stains,laitance,dust,form oil,and all other
surface residue by use of water,stiff brushes,sandpaper or other means approved by the Architect.
F. Finishing of Concealed Concrete Surfaces: At surfaces to receive waterproofing membranes or
dampproofing coatings,chip off fins and other projections and trowel patch all voids,honeycombs and air
pockets exceeding 1/2"in any dimension. Pull tie-rods and patch voids formed by tie-rod cones flush
with adjacent surfaces. At outside faces of foundation walls,except for surfaces to receive waterproofing
membranes,trowel-patch all voids,honeycombs and air pockets exceeding 3/4" in depth. At other
concealed surfaces,patching,if any, shall be as directed by the Architect and shall,in general,be only
such as is required to assure or protect the structural integrity of concrete or reinforcing.
G. At ceiling and soffit surfaces where certain voids may be too small to warrant cutting out,dampen void,
fill with patching mortar,and rub smooth with burlap.
3.9 FLOOR AND OTHER FLATWORK FINISHES
A. Concrete for finish floor slabs shall be poured as dry as practicable within allowable slump range. Except
when otherwise indicated or specified,concrete finish floor slabs shall be monolithically finished at
required elevation by screeding,floating,and troweling to provide smooth,even,non-porous finish,free
of trowel marks. Do not begin finish troweling until concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess
fines from working to the surface. After troweling is complete and slabs have set sufficiently to ring the
trowel,the surfaces of all slabs exposed in the finished work shall be given a second steel troweling to a
burnished finish.
B. Concrete for floor slabs shall be poured to the proper elevations adding concrete to compensate for form
and shoring deflections. Slab thickness indicated on drawings is a minimum.
C. Finish surface shall not vary more than 1/4" when measured by a 10-0" straight edge,except at sub-slabs
to receive resilient or wood flooring which shall not vary more than 1/8" when measured by a 10-0"
straight edge. Leveling of the slab by the Contractor to this tolerance for resilient flooring will be allowed
by the use of latex type underlayment as approved by the Architect. At wood floors,the slab shall be
brought to specified level by machine grinding or by special leveling compound by flooring manufacturer,
or both,as approved by the Architect.
I
D. Concrete slabs to receive Portland cement setting beds or concrete pads or fills shall be given a rough
wood float or broom finish.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.1' —2323 03300-10 02/28/05
1. When the average daily temperature falls below 40 degrees F,all surfaces of concrete shall be
maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F and not over 90 degrees F for seven(7)days.
2. Concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of at least 60 degrees F and not over 90
degrees F.
3. The temperature of the forms including gravel base,shall be at least 40 degrees F.
4. The Contractor shall maintain a record of temperature of the concrete at the most exposed surfaces of
each placement at the beginning and at the end of each day of the curing period,which shall be
available to the Architect.
F. Conveying-Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as
practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will
assure that the required quality of the concrete is retained.
G. Depositing-Delivery and placement of concrete shall be programmed so that the time lapse between
batching and placement shall not exceed 1-1/2 hours. Concrete shall not be allowed a free fall of over 4
feet. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position,to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing.
H. Concrete shall be deposited continuously,in horizontal layers of such thickness(not deeper than 18
inches)that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. Placing shall be carried out at such a rate
that the concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete which has partially
hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited.
I. Concrete shall be consolidated with the aid of mechanical vibrators in conformance with ACI
"Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete" to produce a dense,homogeneous mass without
voids or pockets. Vibrators should be placed in concrete rapidly so as to penetrate approximately 3 to 4
inches into the previous lift,to blend the two layers.Vibrating techniques must assure that when the
course aggregate reaches the form,it stops and the matrix fills the voids.
i
3.8 FINISHING OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A. The intent of this Specification is to secure for the job,materials and workmanship of such quality that
only nominal finishing will be required to produce concrete surfaces equal to the best obtainable with the
concrete and forming materials specified. Surfaces which reveal,upon removal of forms,imperfections of
such magnitude as to seriously impair the appearance of the structure,in the opinion of the Architect,shall
be deemed cause for rejection,and concrete members containing such imperfections shall be entirely
removed and replaced without damage to adjacent materials or extra expense to the Owner. Lesser
imperfections of concrete surfaces shall be patched and finished in accordance with the following
procedures:
B. Patching-Areas to be patched shall not exceed 1.5 square feet for each 1000 square feet of surface area.
M Patches shall match in every respect,the color and texture of the surrounding surfaces. Mix formulation
shall be determined by trial to obtain a color match when both the patch and the surrounding concrete are
cured and dry. After initial set,surfaces of patches shall be textured manually to obtain a match with the
surrounding surfaces. All patches are subject to Architect's final acceptance as to appearance and quality.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 03300-9 02/28/05
i
A. Provide construction joints as shown on the Drawings,but in any case limit the maximum dimensions for
placement of concrete in any one placement as follows:
1. Walls: 72 feet
2. Reinforced slabs,beams: 30 feet
3. Slabs-on-grade: 72 feet
4. Slabs on metal deck: 72 feet
B. Construction joint shall be formed with keyed bulkheads. Reinforcement shall continue through the joint,
and additional reinforcement shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Provide control joints as shown on the Drawings,but in any case limit the maximum dimensions between
joints as follows:
1. Slabs-on-grade: 30 feet
D. Control joints shall be saw-cut as approved by the Architect. Reinforcement shall continue through the
joint.
E. Column isolation joints shall be provided around all columns penetrating slabs on grade and shall consist
of circular box-outs in the slab that shall be filled with concrete after the surrounding slab has been fully
cured. Diameter of these circular joints shall be sufficient to allow column installation/grouting if the
construction sequencing casts the slab before column erection,but in no case shall be less than 24-inches.
Alternate isolation joint configurations(i.e.,diamond-shape)may be submitted to the Architect for review
and approval.
3.7 PLACING
A. Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to each placement.
B. Do not place concrete until soil bearing material,reinforcing steel,inserts,sleeves and other work to be
built into the concrete have been inspected and approved by the Architect and all trades concerned.
C. In hot weather,all concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot
Weather Concreting".
1. When temperature rises above 70 degrees F,all surfaces of concrete shall be protected against rapid
drying.
2. Concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of not over 90 degrees F.
3. The temperature of the forms shall not be over 90 degrees F.
E. In cold weather, all concreting shalt be done in accordance with ACI 306, 'Recommended Practice for
Cold Weather Concreting".
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 03300-8 02/28/05
A. All materials shall be stored to prevent damage from the elements and other causes.
B. Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign
matter. Any materials which have deteriorated,or which have been damaged,shall not be used for
concrete.
C. Store reinforcement steel on wood skids to protect it from earth and damage from trucking or other
construction operations. Reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale,rust,release agent,concrete
splatter and other extraneous coatings at the time it is embedded in the concrete.
D. All forms shall be stored in neat manner and orderly fashion,protected from the weather and abuse.
E. Materials which are judged not acceptable for this project shall not be stored on the site,but shall be
immediately removed from the site.
3.2 FORMING
A. Acceptable tolerances shall be as specified in ACI 347 'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
B. Forms shall be constructed to conform to shapes,lines,and dimensions shown,plumb and straight,and
shall be maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load. Forms shall be sufficiently tight
to prevent the leakage of grout. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent displacement and to safely
support the construction loads.
C. Treat forms with a form release agent applied according to the manufacturer's instructions,by roller,brush
or spray to produce a uniform thin film without bubbles or streaks. Apply the release agent in two coats
AW
for the first use of the form and in one coat for each additional use.
3.3 MIXING PROCESS
A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and transported in accordance with "Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete" ASTM C 94,Alt.#3 and ACI 304, 'Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete".
3.4 REINFORCING
A. Reinforcing shall be securely tied and supported to maintain proper spacing and cover during placing
operations. Take particular care to bend tie wire ends away from exposed faces of beams,slabs,and
columns. In no case shall ends of tie wires project towards or touch formwork.
3.5 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Coordinate the installation of all embedded items required by other trades,including(but not limited to)
such items as beam support plates,wedge anchors,deck edge support angles,pipe sleeves,dovetail anchor
slots,etc.. Such items normally are to be in place prior to the placing of reinforcing steel.
3.6 JOINTS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 03300-7 02/28/05
i
the Architect.
7. Non-Shrink Grout: Shall be"Masterfloor 713"by Master Builders, "Sono Grout"by Sonneborn
Contech,Inc. "Five Star Grout" by U.S. Grout Corporation or equal approved by the Architect.
I
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Strength,cement and water requirements: I
Design Min.Cement Max.Water
Compr. Strength Factor Cement Ratio
fc Sacks/vd3 lbs/vd3 Gal/sack Gal by wt.
3000 5.5 517 6.5 0.60(*)
4000 6.5 611 5.5 0.50(*)
*See additional water-cement ratio limitations in Section 2.2-D below. I
B. All concrete shall be proportioned in accordance with ACI Standard 211.1,"Recommended Practice for
Selecting Proportion for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete"and comply with the requirements of ACI
301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete"Chapter 3,Method i (trial batches)or 2(field experience). I
C. Air-entraining and water-reducing agents shall be used in all concrete,in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions. Total air entrained in freshly mixed concrete shall be 5.0%plus or
minus 1.0%of volume of concrete with required strengths maintained. I
D. Water-Cement Ratio-All concrete for interior slabs on grade shall have a maximum water-cement ratio
of 0.45. All concrete required to be watertight and/or subjected to de-icers shall have a maximum
water-cement ratio of 0.45. All concrete subjected to freezing and thawing shall have a maximum
water-cement ratio of 0.50. This ratio includes the total water in the mix at time of placement,including
free water of aggregates and liquid admixtures.
I
E. Slump of concrete(at point of delivery to the forms):
1. Footings: 4 inches
1
2. Slab-on-grade: 4 inches
3. Slab on metal deck: 4 inches
4. Reinforced walls,beams,slabs,pilasters,piers: 4 inches
G. Premix admixtures in solution form and dispense as recommended by the manufacturer. Include the water
in the solution in the design water content of the mixtures.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 STORAGE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 03300-6 02/28/05
eolk 2. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 in flat sheets.
3. Bar supports,metal accessories and other devices necessary for proper assembly of concrete
reinforcing shall be of standardized factory-made wire bar supports. Wire for tying shall be ASTM A
82 18 gauge black annealed wire. At exposed Architectural concrete all accessories shall have
approved high-density polyethylene tips so that the metal portion shall be at least one-quarter of an
inch from the form or surface.
F. Formwork
1. Forms for Architectural Concrete Surfaces exposed to view in finished work shall be new Class 1
B-B High Density Overlay plyform,exterior grade not less than 5 ply nor Iess than 5/8 inch thick,
conforming to U.S.Product Standard P-1-66.
2. Forms for concrete surfaces not exposed to view in finished work shall be made of wood,metal,or
other material subject to approval of Architect.
3. Form release agent shall be of a non-staining type,specifically manufactured for concrete forms.
4. Form Ties shall be factory-fabricated,removable or snap back of approved design. Wire shall be at
least 1-1/2"back from exterior surfaces and 1"from interior surfaces. Furnish with removable
wooden or plastic cones of approved sizes where called for,with waterproof stop at exposed
Architectural concrete surfaces.
G. Surface Conditioners
1. Floor Sealer shall conform to ASTM C 309 Type I and shall be compatible with adhesives used for
floor coverings.
2. Floor Hardener shall conform to"Surfhard"by Euclid Chemical Company,Inc., "Hornolith"by W.R.
Grace Company, "Saniseal 50"by Master Builders Company or equal approved by the Architect.
H. Other Materials:
1. Joint filler where used with caulking or sealants,shall be cork type,non-extruding,self-expanding
filler strips conforming to ASTM D 1752,I11. Where no sealant or caulking is required,strips may
be non-extruding bituminous type in accordance with ASTM D 1751.
2. Flexible epoxy joint sealant shall be Sikadur 51 NS/SL by Sika Corporation,or approved equal.
3. Dovetail Anchor Slots shall be formed of not less than 20 gauge hot dipped galvanized steel, 1"by 1"
and furnished with felt or fiber fillers.
4. Vapor Barrier shall be a reinforced 10-mil(minimum)reinforced polyethylene film equal to Stego
Wrap(10-mil) manufactured by Stego Industries,LLC or Griffolyn T85 manufactured by Reef
Industries,Inc. Tape for sealing vapor barrier joints shall be pressure-sensitive type specifically
recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Waterproof Kraft Paper shall be in accordance with ASTM C 171.
6. Waterstops shall be continuous adhered strips of expandable Bentonite compound,as approved by
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l' —2323 03300-5 02/28/05
on the Contract Documents.
a""'
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement
1. Portland Cement-ASTM C 150,Type I or 11.
2. Fly Ash-Use of fly ash as a partial substitute for cement in foundation concrete(footings and walls)
may be considered by the concrete supplier as an option. Material specifications and mix design
must be submitted for review and approval by the Architect prior to proceeding with the affected
portions of the work.
B. Natural Aggregate
1. Coarse Aggregate: Shall be hard,durable,uncoated crushed stone or gravel conforming to ASTM C
33.Coarse aggregate for exposed Architectural concrete shall be specially selected for light color as
approved by the Architect and shall come from a single source. Stockpile sufficient quantities during
summer months to assure continuous supply when source pit is frozen.Coarse aggregate shall pass
through 3/4" sieve except 3/8" at toppings less than 3"thick.
2. Fine Aggregate: Shall be sand,clean,hard,durable,uncoated grains,free from silt,loam and clay,to
meet ASTM C 33. Fine aggregate for exposed,Architectural concrete shall be specially selected for
light color as approved by the Architect,and shall come from a single source. Stockpile adequate
amounts of fine aggregate during warm months to assure continuous supply when source pit is
frozen.
3. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete shall be expanded shale,conforming to ASTM C 330.
Aggregate shall pass through 3/8" sieve.
C. Water
1. Water shall be potable.
i
D. Admixtures
1. Water-reducing Agent shall conform to ASTM C 494,
Type A. Water-reducing agent shall be compatible with air-entraining agent.
2. Air-entraining agent shall conform to ASTM C 260.
3. Calcium Chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1%Chloride ions are not permitted.
E. Concrete Reinforcement
1. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615 deformed bars,Grade 60.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 03300-4 02/28/05
i
look 2. Compression test specimens:ASTM C 31
3. Slump: ASTM C 143
4. Air content: ASTM C 231
5. Compressive strength: ASTM C 39
6. Unit weight: ASTM C 138
F. All reinforcing shall be inspected by the testing agency for grade,size,spacing,position,cleanliness,
cover and support.
G. Cooperate with the testing agency's work and provide help as required for taking and storing samples.
Provide storage facilities for concrete cylinders at the site. Facilities must protect cylinders from affects
of low or high temperatures in cold or hot weather,respectively.
H. Compression tests shall consist of four(4)cylinders for each test made,cured and tested by the laboratory
during the progress of the job. At least one(1)test shall be made for each placement of concrete up to 50
cubic yards pour, and at least one(1)test for each 50 cubic yards thereafter,unless otherwise directed by
the Architect. Concrete for each set of cylinders shall be from one(1)sample representative of the entire
batch. All cylinders shall be standard 6"x 12".
I. When tests of control specimens fall below required strength,the Architect may require core specimens
taken from concrete in question and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42. If these specimens do not
meet strength requirements,the Architect will have right to require additional curing,load tests,
strengthening or removal and replacement of those parts of structure which are unacceptable,and in
addition,removal of such sound portions of structure as necessary to ensure safety, appearance,and
durability of the structure. Additional testing,load tests,strengthening or removal and replacement of
parts of structure shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
J. Accept as final,results of tests made by the qualified professional testing organization engaged by the
Owner.
K. Testing required because of changes requested by the Contractor in materials,sources of materials or mix
proportions,and extra testing of concrete or materials because of failure to meet the Specification
requirements is to be paid by the Contractor.
L. A final report shall be issued by the testing agency following the completion of work in this Section.
1.7 NOTIFICATION OF RELATED TRADES
A. Notify all other trades responsible for installing chases,inserts,sleeves,anchors,louvers,etc. when ready
for such installation,and for final checking immediately before concrete is placed. Cooperate with such
trades to obtain proper installation.
B. Leave openings in walls for pipes,ducts,etc.for mechanical and electrical work,as shown on Drawings
or required by layout of mechanical systems. Provide additional reinforcing at these openings as required
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Pacicabe T.F —2323 03300-3 02/28/05
fabricator certifying that the materials or product delivered to the job meets the requirements specified.
However,such certification shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of complying with any
added requirements specified herein.
1.4 SUBMITTALS I
A. Submit Complete Shop Drawings and Data,in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300-
SUBMITTALS.
I
B. Provide Submittals for fabricating and placing reinforcing steel. Show all required information for
cutting, bending and placing reinforcing bars and show all accessories and support bars on placing
drawings. Indicate suitable marks for placing bars.
C. Provide submittals of forms for Architecturally Exposed Concrete,showing layout of joint patterns and
exposed cone recesses at wall ties.
D. Provide concrete Mix Data as specified in Paragraph 2.02B.
E. Provide manufacturer's Data for other products.
I
F. Fabrication of any material or performing of any work prior to the final approval of the Submittals will be
entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
G. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing materials called for in Contract Documents,
even though these materials may have been omitted from approved Submittals.
I
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials, measuring,mixing,transportation,placing and curing shall be subject to inspection by the
Architect or by the testing agency. However,such inspection, wherever conducted,shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract
requirements,nor shall inspector's acceptance of material or workmanship prevent later rejection of same
by the Owner or Architect if defects are discovered.
B. A qualified testing agency for testing and inspection will be selected by the Owner and shall be paid
directly by the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified testing agency,approved by the Architect,to test
aggregate and to prepare or review mix designs for each strength and density of concrete specified,and
shall submit mix designs and test results to the Architect for approval. The costs of all such preliminary
services shall be borne by the Contractor.
D. Advise the testing agency of intent to place concrete by notification at least 24 hours prior to the time of
placement.
E. Concrete will be sampled and tested for quality control as follows:
1. Sampling fresh concrete: ASTM C 172
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 03300-2 02/28/05
DIVISION 3-CONCRETE
SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The work of this Section consists of all plain and reinforced concrete work as shown on the Drawings and
as specified herein,and includes,but is not limited to the following:
1. Furnishing,placing,curing and finishing of all plain and reinforced concrete work for the building
and site.
2. Furnishing,erection and removal of formwork and shoring.
3. Furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel and related accessories.
4. Furnishing and installation of vapor barrier.
5. Furnishing and installation of joint fillers.
6. Furnishing and installation of anchor slots.
7. Setting of anchor bolts and grouting of leveling plates and bearing plates.
8. Coordination with all other trades for location of all pipe sleeves,duct openings,keys,chases,
electrical boxes and conduits,anchors,inserts,fastenings and other devices required by other trades.
9. Hardening and sealing of exposed concrete floors.
B. Items to be installed only: Install the following items furnished by the designated Sections:
1. Section 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL: Anchor bolts,embedded plates and angles with bolts,
studs or anchors,as indicated by the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. The related work shall be performed under the following Sections:
I
I. Section 02300 EARTHWORK.
2. Section 04210 UNIT MASONRY.
3. Section 05130 SHEAR CONNECTORS.
4. Section 05300 METAL DECKING.
5. Section 07210 BUILDING INSULATION
6. Section 09900 PAINTING.
1.3 REFERENCES (LATEST EDITIONS)
A. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials.
i B. ACI listed standards by the American Concrete Institute.
C. In case of conflict between the References and the Project Specification,the Project Specification shall
govern. In the case of conflict between References,the more stringent shall govern.
I
D. When compliance with any such References is specified herein for materials or a manufactured or
fabricated product,the Contractor,if requested,shall furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer or
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Cast-in-Place Concrete
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 03300-1 02/28/05
required to ensure normal, vigorous, and healthy growth.
Maintenance shall continue until final acceptance of the work.
B. Maintenance shall also include all temporary protection
fences, barriers, signs, and all other work incidental to
proper maintenance.
C. Scattered bare spots will be allowed up to a maximum of 2
percent of any lawn area, provided none are larger than 72
square inches. After the grass has sprouted, all bare areas
shall be re-seeded or re-sodded repeatedly until all areas are
covered with a satisfactory growth of grass. At the time of
the first cutting, lawn should be mowed not less than 2-1/2
inches high. Sod shall be maintained between 1-3/4 and 2-1/2
inches high. Do not remove more than one-third of the grass
blade. All lawns shall receive at least three mowings before
acceptance.
D. The seeded and sodded areas shall be maintained in a
continuous moist condition, satisfactory for good germination
and growth of grass until acceptance.
E. Six weeks after the seeded areas have become established,
fertilizer shall be applied over the entire area. Sod shall
be fertilized at the time of the second mowing.
I
END OF SECTION 02920
Base Date: 6/03
Cooley Dickinson IIospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package TX —2323 02920-9 02/28/05
i
and to form the seed bed in one operation. In areas
inaccessible to the Culti-packer, the seeded ground shall be
lightly raked with flexible rakes and rolled with a water
ballast roller. Seeding shall be done in two directions at
right angles to each other.
B. In areas having slopes 3:1 or steeper, and in drainage swales,
the Contractor shall carry out a separate overseeding opera-
tion immediately after sowing the specified seed mix. The
overseeding shall be sown at the rate of 3 pounds per 1,000
square feet, seeded areas requiring additional erosion
control, shall be covered with an approved, biodegradable
erosion control fabric and the fabric firmly anchored.
C. The wild flower seed mix shall be applied uniformly over the
designated area at a rate of 30 pounds per acre. The seed
shall be lightly raked to ensure proper soil-seed contact and
kept damp until the plants have become established.
I
3.05 HYDROSEEDINQ
A. Designated areas shall be hydroseeded only after written
approval of the finished grading by the Engineer.
B. Fertilizer shall be added to the hydroseeding slurry at the
rate of five pounds per 1,000 square feet.
C. Seed shall be added to the hydroseeding slurry at the rate of
seventy-five pounds per acre.
D. Wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be added to the hydroseeding
slurry at the rate of two tons per acre.
E. A mobile tank with a capacity of at least 500 gallons shall be
filled with water, and the required amounts of seed, wood
cellulose mulch and fertilizer. The slurry shall be
thoroughly mixed by means of positive agitation in the tank.
The slurry shall be applied by means of a centrifugal pump
using the turret or hose application technique from the mobile
tank. The hose or turret shall be equipped with a seeding
nozzle of a proper design to ensure even distribution of the
solution over the area to be seeded and shall be operated by a
person thoroughly familiar with this type of seeding
operation.
3.06 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION
A. Maintenance of seeded and sodded areas shall begin immediately
after installation. Maintenance includes watering, weeding,
mowing and edging, reseeding, replacement of dead sod, disease
and insect pest control, repair of all erosion damage, and any
other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package TT —2323 02920-8 02/28/05
and other undesirable substances, and maintain grading and
drainage patterns.
C. When topsoil is required, place topsoil on previously
scarified subsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Subsoil
shall be cleaned of debris and stones larger than 2 inches
prior to topsoil spreading.
D. Apply fertilizer, superphosphate, and lime, at rates
recommended by the testing agency and approved by the
Engineer. Thoroughly and evenly incorporate fertilizer and
lime into the soil to a depth of 3 inches, by discing or other
approved methods. In areas inaccessible to power equipment,
fertilizer and lime shall be incorporated into the soil by
manual methods. At existing trees, the depth shall be
adjusted to avoid disturbance of the roots.
E. Seeding and sodding shall be done immediately after final
grading, provided the bed has remained in a good, friable
condition, and has not become muddy or compacted. Any
undulations or irregularities in the surface resulting from
fertilizing, liming, tilling, or other causes, shall be
regraded prior to seeding and sodding. The surface shall be
free of stones, cleared of all trash, debris, roots, brush,
wire, grade stakes and other objects that would interfere with
establishment of grass and grass maintenance operations.
3.02 HYDROSEED BED PREPARATION
A. Prepare seed bed for hydroseeding the same as for seeding and
sodding, but do not incorporate fertilizer into the top
3 inches of topsoil.
B. Hydroseeding shall be applied with a spray machine designed
for this purpose and approved by the Engineer.
3.03 SEEDING
A. Seeding shall be done between April 1 to June 1, or August 15
to October 15, except as otherwise authorized in writing by
the Engineer.
B. All disturbed areas not covered by buildings, paving, or
otherwise developed, shall be seeded.
C. Seeding shall not be done during windy or inclement weather.
3.04 MANUAL SEEDING
A. Sow lawn seed uniformly with an approved mechanical seeder at
the rate of five pounds per 1,000 square feet. Culti-packer
or approved similar equipment may be used to cover the seed
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T —2323 02920-7 02/28/05
`
2. Wild flower seed mix: four pounds of wild flower seed
shall be thoroughly mixed with 26 pounds of Sheep Fescue
(Festuca ovina) seed.
3. Submit a certificate from the supplier outlining the type
and percentage of wild flower plants in the mix.
2.05 EROSION CONTROL MATTING FOR SLOPED AREAS
A. Matting for erosion control shall be provided on all slopes of
1 foot rise to 2 feet and steeper and shall consist of undyed
and unbleached smolder resistant jute yarn woven into a
uniform, open, plain weave mesh. Jute matting shall be
furnished in rolled strips and shall conform to the following:
Width: 48 inches, plus or minus one inch
78 warp ends per width of cloth
41 weft ends per yard
Weight: To average between 1.22 pound and 1.80 pounds
per linear yard.
Tolerance: plus or minus 5%
B. Stakes for pegging erosion control matting shall be sound
hardwood approximately 1 inch by 3 inches. Stakes shall be
free from insects and fungi and capable of remaining intact in
the ground for at least two years.
2.06 HYDROSEED MIX
The Contractor shall submit a certified statement as to number of
pounds of fertilizer, amounts and types of grass seed, and processed
fiber, per 100 gallons of water.
PART 3--- %ECUTION
3.01 SEED AND SOD BED PREPARATION
A. Grade all lawn areas to finish grades as indicated on the
Drawings. When no grades are shown, areas shall have a smooth
and continual grade between existing or fixed controls and
elevations shown on Drawings. Roll, scarify, and rake, as
required, to obtain uniform, even lawn surfaces. All lawn
areas shall slope to drain. Finish grades shall be approved
by the Engineer.
B. If no new topsoil is required, thoroughly loosen soil in areas
to be seeded or sodded to a minimum depth of 6 inches with
approved power or hand equipment. Remove rocks, debris, clods
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02920-6 02/28/05
i
i
ew
C. Superphosphate—Superphosphate shall be composed of finely
ground phosphate rock, as commonly used for agricultural
purposes, and containing not less than 20 percent available
phosphoric acid. The superphosphate shall be delivered to the
site in the original, unopened containers, each bearing the
manufacturer's guaranteed analysis and submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Any superphosphate that becomes caked
or otherwise damaged (making it unsuitable for use) will be
rejected.
2.03 WATER
Water shall be furnished by the Contractor, suitable for irrigation,
and free from ingredients harmful to plant life. Hoses and other
watering equipment required for the work shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
2.04 SEED
A. Lawn Seed—Seed shall be fresh, clean and selected from the
previous year's crop; weed seed content not to exceed
1 percent; complying with applicable Federal and State seed
laws; furnished and delivered premixed in unopened containers
in the following proportions:
Percent Percent
Percent Germination Purity
Proportion Minimum Minimum
1. For Lawns:
Creeping Red Fescue 50% 85% 95%
Kentucky Bluegrass 40 85 90
(improved varieties)
Manhattan Perennial Rye 10 90 95
2. For Field Grass:
Creeping Red Fescue 60% 85% 95%
Perennial Rye 25 90 95
Birdsfoot Trefoil 15 90 95
3. For Temporary Lawns:
Annual Rye 60% 90% 95%
I Perennial Rye 40 90 95
B. Wild Flower Seed
1. The wild flower seed shall contain: Bachelor's Button,
Chicory, Lance Leaved Coreopsis, Baby's Breath, Baby
Snapdragon, Scarlot Flax, Lewis Flax, Evening Primrose,
Corn Poppy and Catchfly, or other varieties as approved
by the Engineer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02920-5 02/28/05
I
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 SOILS
A. Topsoil shall conform to the requirements of Section 02300,
Earthwork.
B. Testing shall confirm that the topsoil, obtained from the site
or loam from off-site, contains not less than 4 percent nor
more than 20 percent organic matter as determined by the loss
on ignition of oven-dried samples. Test samples shall be
oven-dried to a constant weight at a temperature of 230
degrees F (±5) and certified test results shall be sent to the
Engineer by the laboratory for approval.
2.02 SOIL CONDITIONING MATERIALS
A. Lime—Lime shall be an approved agricultural limestone
containing no less than 50 percent total carbonates, and 25
percent total magnesium with a neutralizing value of at least
100 percent. The material shall be ground to such a fineness
that 40 percent will pass through a No. 100 U.S. Standard I
Sieve, and 98 percent will pass through a No. 20 U.S. Standard
Sieve. The lime shall be uniform in composition, dry and free
flowing, and shall be delivered to the site in the original,
unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's
guaranteed analysis. Any lime that becomes caked or otherwise
damaged (making it unsuitable for use) will be rejected. ' i
B. Fertilizer—Fertilizer shall be a complete, standard product
complying with State and Federal Fertilizer Laws. The
fertilizer shall be uniform in composition, dry and free
flowing, and shall be delivered to the site in the original,
unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's
guaranteed analysis, and submitted to the Engineer for
approval. Fertilizer shall contain the following minimum
percentage of available plant food by weight: 10 percent
nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, 10 percent potash, in which
75 percent of the nitrogenous elements shall be derived from
organic sources or Urea-form. Exact percentages of fertilizer
may vary in accordance with the soil test report. Any
fertilizer that becomes caked or otherwise damaged (making it
unsuitable for use) will be rejected.
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' -2323 02920-4 02/28/05
I
2. Lawns shall exhibit a uniform, thick, well-developed
stand of grass. Lawn areas shall have not bare spots in
excess of four inches in diameter and bare spots shall
comprise no more than two percent of the total area of
the lawn.
3. Lawn areas shall not exhibit signs of damage from
erosion, washouts, gullies, or other causes.
4. Pavement surfaces and site improvements adjacent to lawn
areas shall be clean and free of spills or overspray from
placing or handling of topsoil and seeding operations.
B. Inspection and Acceptance
1. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Engineer will
inspect all lawn areas to determine completion of work.
This request must be submitted at least five days prior
to the anticipated inspection date.
2. If the lawn areas are not acceptable, the Engineer will
indicate corrective measures to be taken, and shall
' extend the maintenance period as necessary for the
` completion of the work. The Contractor shall request a
second inspection of the lawns after corrective measures
h have been accomplished. This process shall be repeated
until the total area of the lawn being inspected is
acceptable.
3. When the lawn areas are acceptable, a meeting of the
Contractor and Owner's representative will be arranged to
accept the lawn work. A final inspection will be a part
of this meeting. At this meeting, the Contractor shall
be furnished with a written acceptance of the lawn
section being approved. The Contractor shall turn over
maintenance of the lawn to the Owner at this meeting.
4. Following the acceptance of lawns, the Contractor shall
provide the Owner with access to all lawn areas as
required for the owner's maintenance work.
C. Site Cleanup
1. The Contractor shall leave the site in a clean and neat
condition. Final acceptance will not be granted until
this condition is met.
AVK
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
i Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02920-3 02/28/05
J
purity, weed content and germination of the seed, and Vie,
also the net weight and date of shipment. No seed shall
be sown until the Contractor has submitted the
certificates.
D. Maintenance Manual
1. The Contractor shall submit a written manual, prepared
for the Owner that outlines a schedule for proper
maintenance of the lawns. This schedule should include
timing and methods for mowing, watering, aeration,
fertilization, liming, and other lawn maintenance
operations.
E. Submittal Schedule
1. Before installation:
I
a. Manufacturer's Product data
b. Soil Test Reports
c. Seed Certification
d. Hydroseed mix
2. After Installation and before acceptance
a. Maintenance Manual
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work shall be performed by personnel experienced in lawn
installation under the full time supervision of a qualified
foreman.
B. Work shall be coordinated with all other trades on site.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
i
A. Deliver material to the site in original unopened packages,
showing weight, manufacturer's name and guaranteed analysis.
B. Store materials in a manner that their effectiveness and
usability will not be diminished or destroyed. Materials shall
be uniform in composition, dry, unfrozen and free flowing. Any
material which has become caked or otherwise damaged or does
not meet specified requirements will be rejected.
1.06 INSPECTION FOR ACCEPTANCE
A. Conditions of Acceptance i
I
1. Acceptance shall be given for the entire portion of the I
lawn areas. No partial acceptance will be given.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02920-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02920
SEEDING AND SODDING
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for topsoil, seed and sod
for site landscape areas.
B. The work includes:
1. Furnishing, Spreading, and fine grading of topsoil and
loam borrow
2. Application of lime and fertilizer
3. Seeding, sodding and mulching
4. Maintenance of seeded and sodded areas.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02300 - Earthwork
I
2. Section 02270 - Erosion Control
i
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers Product Data
1. Submit material specifications and installation
instructions where applicable attesting that the
following materials meet the requirements specified:
a. Fertilizer
b. Seed
c. Lime
B. Soil Test Retorts
1. Prior to ordering the topsoil, submit soil test report to
the Engineer for review and approval. Do not order
materials until approval has been obtained. Delivered
materials shall closely match the approved samples.
C. Certificates
1. A manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance to the
specifications shall be submitted by the manufacturers
with each shipment of each type of seed. These
certificates shall include the guaranteed percentages of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Seeding and Sodding
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package` Y —2323 02920-1 02/28!05
I
I
J. The Contractor shall protect the buildings, walks, pavement,
curbing, trees, shrubs, mulch and other site fixtures from
over-spray of paint and damage from marking operations.
END OF SECTION 02760
Base Date: 6/03
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pavement Markings
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.V —2323 02760-4 02/28/05
sand or other material which might interfere with drainage or
could constitute a hazard to traffic will not be permitted.
E. Where sand blasting is used for the removal of pavement
markings and the removal operation is being performed within
10 feet of a lane occupied by traffic, the residue, including
dust, shall be removed immediately as the marking removal
progresses by a vacuum attachment operating concurrently with
the blast cleaning operation, or by other methods approved by
the Engineer.
3.03 pAVEt4ENT MARKING APPLICATION
A. The material shall be applied to the pavement by equipment
designed and manufactured specifically for the application of
pavement markings.
B. The Contractor shall employ the services of a Registered Land
surveyor to provide control for layout of pavement markings.
C. Paint markings shall be applied at a minimum thickness of 15±
1 mil. Thermoplastic markings shall be applied at 125 to 188
mils thickness.
D. Pavement markings shall be applied in accordance with the
layout shown on the drawings. No paint shall be applied to
tow new bituminous pavement until the top course has cured at
least one week, and allow two weeks curing for newly installed
bituminous concrete curbing.
E. All parking stalls shall be single stripe and shall be spaced
equally. The line indicated on the Drawings is on the center
line of the stall marking.
F. Where entire areas are to be cross-hatched, the striping shall
conform to the cross-hatching shown on the Drawings.
G. All parking stall markings shall be straight with sharp
corners and clean edges. Directional arrows, cross hatching,
lane divider stripes, stop lines, and lettering shall be
painted white to the size, length, and spacing shown on the
Drawings.
H. All markings shall be applied in one coat with brush, spray,
or marking machine over dry clean pavement surfaces, when the
atmospheric temperature is at or above 40°F and when the
weather is otherwise favorable in the opinion of the Engineer.
I. Use only skilled workmen who are experienced and normally
employed in the wort: of installing pavement markings. Supply
all the necessary equipment and materials required for the
work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pavement Markings
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l' —2323 02760-3 02/28/05
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pavement markings shall conform to Section 860 of the current
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Highways Standard
Specifications for Highways and Bridges and Manual of Uniform
Traffic Control Devices, current edition.
B. Traffic markings shall be yellow non-reflectorized traffic
paint.
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall clean the pavement of dust, dirt, old
pavement markings, concrete curing compounds and other foreign
material which may be detrimental to the adhesion of the
marking material.
3.02 PAVEMENT MARKING REMOVAL
A. Existing pavement markings that conflict with the proposed
markings, and those shown on the Drawings, shall be removed.
Pavement markings shall be removed before any change is made !
in the traffic pattern. Any excessive damage to the pavement
caused by pavement marking removal shall be repaired by the
Contractor by methods acceptable to the Engineer at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Approved methods include:
1. Sand blasting using air or water.
2. High pressure water.
3. Steam or superheated water.
4. Mechanical devices such as grinders, sanders, scrapers,
scarifiers and wire brushers.
C. Painting over a pavement marking line with asphaltic liquids
or paints will not be permitted, unless approved by the
Engineer and/or the municipality within right-of-way only.
I
D. Material deposited on the pavement from removal operations
shall be removed as the work progresses. Accumulations of
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital I
Pavement Markings
Foundation/Site/ Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 02760-2 02/28/05
' I
SECTION 02760
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1—GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for removal of existing
pavement markings and construction of new markings.
B. The work includes:
1. Removal of existing markings by approved methods
2. Pavement surface preparation
3. Furnishing and installing new pavement markings with
project area
4. Furnishing and installing new pavement markings within
municipal right of way to enhance existing pedestrian
crosswalk on Locust Street in accordance with project
drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02300 - Earthwork
2. Section 02320 - Pavement Subbase and Base
3. Section 02700 - Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
i 4. Section 02725 - Curbing
1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall cordon off areas where markings are being
applied, but maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian
traffic as required for other construction activities.
Flagmen, barricades, drums, warning signs, warning lights and
similar devices shall be used as required.
I
B. Coordinate with municipality and arrange for/pay for police
services to accomplish painting work within right-of-way.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit material certificate to the Engineer, signed by the
material producer and Contractor, certifying that materials
comply with these specifications and have been approved for
use by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of
Highways.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pavement Markings
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package ` Y —2323 02760-1 02/28/05
I
2. The curb paver shall be properly supported and weighted
during operation along the edge of the pavement and shall
be guided along string or chalk lines to maintain the
proper alignment and level of the completed curb.
3. Any portions of the completed curb, which are not
satisfactorily compacted, show signs of sagging,
cracking, and distortion, do not conform to the required
lines, grades or cross section, and which cannot be
satisfactorily repaired, shall be removed and replaced at
no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Joints: Bituminous curb construction shall be a continuous
operation in one direction only without joints. When placing
of the curb is discontinued for a length of time that permits
the mixture to cool, the curb shall be cut in a true vertical
plane and the exposed end painted with tack coat material just
prior to placing the fresh curb mixture against the previously
constructed curb to achieve a continuous bond.
E. Curing: The newly completed curb shall be protected from
traffic or other disturbance by barricades or other suitable
methods until adequate stability has been obtained, but in no
case less than twelve hours.
END OF SECTION 02725
Base Date: 6/03
i
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T —2323 02725-9 02/28/05
`
I
2. All individual pieces of curved curbing shall be marked
to correspond to the radius and location where curbing is
to be set.
B. Excavation shall extend 6 inches below and behind finished
curb, as shown on the Drawings.
1. The gravel base shall be placed in the excavated area,
compacted and graded to the proposed curb subgrade.
C. Precast concrete curb units shall be doweled together
continuously to the line and grade shown on the Drawings. Any
units damaged during setting operations shall be removed and
replaced.
D. After the curb is set, the trench shall be backfilled
immediately with approved material. The first layer shall be
4 inches in depth and compacted. The other layers shall be not I
more than 6 inches in depth and compacted until the trench is
filled. Care shall be taken to prevent disturbing the line or
grade of the curb during this procedure.
3.04 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB AND BERM I
A. General Requirements
I
1. Bituminous curb shall be constructed by the use of an
approved self-propelled extruding curb machine equipped '`'
with a material hopper, distributing screw and curb
forming device capable of placing the bituminous mixture
to the required lines, grades and proper curb cross-
section. Prior to the placement of any curb, the
Contractor shall submit a detail of the cross-section of
the curb mold to the Engineer for approval.
B. Surface Preparation
I
1. Before curbing is to be placed on pavement, the pavement
surface shall be thoroughly swept and cleaned by
mechanical sweepers and allowed to dry. If the curb is
to be placed on cement concrete pavement, the concrete
shall receive a coating of tack coat material prior to
placement of the curb.
I
C. Placing and Compaction
1. The hot bituminous mixture shall be placed in the hopper
of the curb paver without segregation and extruded
through the mold form to provide the proper compaction
and surface texture.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital I
Curbing ,,M*
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package TX - 2323 02725-8 02/28/05
i
pointing, the curbstones or edging shall be satisfactorily
cleaned of all excess mortar that may have been forced out of
the joints.
G. Transitions from normal curb settings to wheelchair ramps
shall be accomplished with transition curb as shown on the
drawings. Transitions shall be of the same type curb and
similar to that abutting and, if on a curve, of the same
radius.
H. The ends of the stone curb at driveways and intersections
shall be cut at a bevel or rounded, as shown on the Drawings.
I. If curb, curb corners or edging of different quarries is used
on the same project, curbing of each particular quarry shall
be segregated and set to give uniform appearance.
J. Procedures for removal and resetting of existing granite curb,
and new granite curb, in existing pavements shall include the
following:
1. Prior to excavation for existing granite curb removal,
the pavement surface shall be saw cut a minimum of one
foot from the face of curb.
2. Existing curb shall be carefully excavated, and removed
in a manner that protects the curb and existing pavement
to remain from damage.
3. Existing granite curb shall be cleaned by sandblasting as
required to remove bituminous material, paint and
concrete from exposed surfaces prior to resetting in the
proposed work.
4. New granite curb shall be set to match the top of
existing granite curb remaining in place at abutting
sections and, if required, transitioned to the typical
section shown on Drawings within the first section of
curb. Cement concrete shall be placed along the front
face of the curb as shown on the Drawings.
3.03 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB
A. Precast units delivered to the site shall be inspected for
damage, unloaded and placed along the prepared curb trench, or
other designated location, with the minimum amount of
handling.
1. Materials shall be handled in a manner that prevents
damage to the curb units.
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 02725-7 02/28/05
i
PART 3—EXECUTION w
3.01 GENERAL
A. Trenching, excavation, backfilling, and compaction shall be
completed in accordance with Section 02300 Earthwork, except
as modified within this Section.
B. Cement mortar bedding, if required, shall be placed as shown
on the drawings and in accordance with Section 03301, Cast-in-
Place Concrete.
3.02 GRANITE CURB AND EDGING INSTALLATION
A. Excavation shall extend 6 inches below and behind curb, as
shown on the Drawings.
1. The gravel base shall be placed in the excavated area,
graded and compacted to above the proposed curb subgrade.
B. Curbing and curb corners shall be set on additional gravel
spread upon the foundation. All spaces under the curb and
curb corners shall be filled with gravel thoroughly compacted
so that the curb and curb corners will be completely supported
throughout their length. The curb shall be set at the line
and grade required as shown on the plans unless otherwise
directed.
C. Edging shall be set on a thoroughly compacted base so that the
edging will be completely supported throughout their length.
Concrete shall be placed to support the edging base as shown
on the plans.
D. Curb, curb corners or edging shall be fitted together as
closely as possible.
E. Immediately after the curb, curb corners, curb inlets, and
edging is set, the space between it and the wall of the trench
shall be filled with gravel thoroughly tamped to a depth of
6 inches, care being taken not to affect the line or grade of
the curb, curb corners, curb inlets and edging. The trench
shall continue to be filled with gravel and compacted in
6-inch lifts until grade is achieved. If the curb materials
and trench are part of reconstruction work and existing
bituminous concrete surface is to remain, then the use of
concrete backfill is acceptable, to an elevation suitable to
support the pavement patch or section.
F. The joints between curbstones (both front and back) or edging
shall be carefully filled with cement mortar and neatly '
pointed on the top and front exposed portions . After
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package TT —2323 02725-6 02/28/05
i
2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB
A. The concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of
5,000 psi at 28 days, and shall contain 5 to 7 percent
entrained air. The material shall conform to Site Cast-in-
Place Concrete, Section 03301.
B. All precast curb with radius of 100 foot or less shall be
formed to the radius shown on the Drawings.
C. Precast concrete curb units shall be rub finished:
1. After the concrete has properly hardened, the exposed
surfaces shall be rubbed with a #16 carborundum stone or
an approved abrasive to fully remove laitance and sand
grain finish. No cement shall be used in the rubbing
process.
2. The finish of the units shall be uniform and shall
conform to those of adjacent work in their final
position.
D. Precast concrete curb sections shall be furnished with sockets
in each end to receive dowels to maintain the horizontal and
vertical alignment of the curb. The dowel socket shall be
11/16 inch by 2-1/2 inches. 5/8 inch by 4 inch dowels shall
be provided.
! 2.04 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURBING AND BERM
Bituminous concrete curb and berm shall conform to the requirements
for Dense Mix as specified in Section 02700, Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
Pavement.
2.05 CEMENT MORTAR
A. Cement mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement
and two parts of sand by volume with sufficient water to form
a workable mix. Cement shall be Portland Cement Type II.
2.06 TRANSITION SECTIONS
I
Horizontal transition sections shall be provided at all locations
where curb sections change (i.e. , vertical to sloped) . Vertical
transition sections shall also be provided for precast curb sections
at wheelchair ramps. Vertical transition sections for granite curb
shall be made as shown on the Drawings.
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
i Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.V —2323 02725-5 02/28/05
i
The ends of all stones shall be square with the planes of
the top and face so that when the stones are placed end
to end as closely as possible, no space shall show in the
joint at the top and face of more than 1/2 inch for the
full width of the top and for 8 inches down on the face;
after which the end may break back not over 8 inches from
the plane of the joint. The arris formed by the inter-
section of the plane of the joint with the planes of the
top and exposed faces shall have no variation from the
plane of the top and exposed faces greater than 1/8 inch.
2.02 GRANITE EDGING
A. Granite shall conform to ASTM C615. Stone shall be hard and
durable granite of a uniformly light grayish white color free
from seams that would impair the structural integrity.
B. The stones for the granite edging shall be cut to the
following dimensions:
Top Width Nominal Depth Minimum Length
4 inches 12 inches 3 feet
C. The exposed face shall be smooth quarry split to an
approximate true plane and still have no projections of more
than 1-1/2 inches and no depression greater than 1 inch. The AOW*A
top shall be sawed and shall have no projection or depression
greater than 1/4 inch. Any projection not meeting the above
shall be dressed off.
D. The top and bottom lines of the face shall be pitched off to a
straight line and shall not show over 1 inch between stone and
straight edge when straightedge is placed along the top and
bottom lines.
E. The ends shall be square to the plane of the face so when
placed end to end no space more than 1-1/2 inches shall show
except on a radius of 10 feet or less where the finish joint
shall be no more than 3/4 inch.
F. Drill holes not more than 3-1/2 inches or 1/2 inch in depth
shall be permitted.
G. The sides shall not be under the square more than 4 inches or
over the square at the back more than 1 inch.
H. The arris formed by the intersection of the plane of the face
with the plane of the end joint shall not vary from the plane
of the face more than 1/4 inch.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l' —2323 02725-4 02/28/05
i
B. Whenever curbing is sawed, all surfaces that are to be exposed
shall be thoroughly cleaned and any iron rust or iron
particles removed by sand blasting or other methods approved
by the Engineer and any saw mark in excess of 1/8 inch shall
be removed.
C. Dimensions
1. The stones for the several types of granite curb shall be
cut to the dimensions and curvature hereinafter needed:
Min. Width Minimum Width
Ty-pe Lenctth at Top Depth at Bottom
Highway 6 Feet 6 Inches 17 to 19 4 Inches
Inches (for 2/3 length)
Site 3 Feet 5 Inches 15-17 3-1/2 Inches
Inches (for 2/3 length)
Stones to be set on a radius of 100 feet or less shall be
cut to the required curvature, unless otherwise approved
and, except for making closures, shall be of the
following minimum lengths:
Radius Minimum Length
50 Feet to 100 Feet 6 Feet
25 Feet to less than 50 Feet 4 Feet 6 Inches
10 Feet to less than 25 Feet 3 Feet
D. Finish
1. Granite curb shall have a top surface free from wind,
shall be peen hammered or sawed to an approximately true
plane, and shall have no projections or depressions
greater than 1/8 inch. The front and back arris lines
shall be pitched straight and true and there shall be no
projection on the back surface for 3 inches down from the
top which would exceed a batter of 4 inches to 1 foot.
The front face shall be at right angles to the planes of
the top and ends and shall be smooth quarry split, free
from drill holes and with no projection of more than 1
inch and no depression of more than 1/2 inch measured
from the vertical plane of the face through the arris or
pitch line for a distance down from the top of 8 inches.
For the remaining distance, there shall be no projection
or depression greater than 1 inch measured in the same
manner.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T —2323 02725-3 02/28/05
`
E. ASTM C33--Concrete Aggregates. A*ftlo,
F. ASTM C94--Ready-Mixed Concrete.
G. ASTM C150—Portland Cement.
H. ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
I. ASTM C309—Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curbing
Concrete.
J. ASTM C494--Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's literature for granite
and precast curb, edging, corners and inlets, indicating size,
shape and dimensions, finish and setting method for Engineer's
approval.
B. Copies of tests on representative samples of the concrete used
in the manufacture of precast units showing a compressive
strength of 5,000 pounds must be received by the Engineer
prior to shipping any units.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Granite and precast curb units shall be adequately protected
from damage during transit to the site.
B. Curbing shall be protected against staining, chipping, and
other damage. Cracked, badly chipped, or stained units will
be rejected and shall not be employed in the work.
1.06 SAMPLES
A. The Contractor shall supply to the site three samples of all
curb types for approval prior to ordering materials. Approved
sample material may be used in the work upon approval by the
Engineer.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GRANITE CURB
A. Granite curb shall be basically light gray in color, free from
seams and other structural imperfections or flaws which would
impair its structural integrity, and of a smooth splitting
appearance. Natural color variation characteristic of the
deposit from which the curb is obtained will be permitted.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02725-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02725
CURBING;
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for furnishing and
installing all types of granite, concrete and bituminous
concrete curbs, edging and berms.
B. The work includes:
1. Furnishing and installing granite curb, granite edging,
curb corners, precast concrete curb, and bituminous
concrete curb and berms.
2. All associated items and operations required to complete
the installations, including surface preparation,
concrete support, jointing and finishing.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02210 - Site Preparation and Demolition
2. Section 02300 - Earthwork
3. Section 02320 - Pavement Subbase and Base
4. Section 02700 - Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
5. Section 03301 - Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. References herein are made in accordance with the following
abbreviations and, all work under this Section shall conform
to the latest editions as applicable.
B. ACI 304 Recommended Practice for measuring, mixing,
transporting and placing concrete.
C. ANSI/ASTM D1751—Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types) .
D. ANSI/ASTM D1752—Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion
Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Curbing
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02725-1 02128/05
D. Immediately prior to the placement of the HMA overlay, the A
sawcut edges of the existing pavement shall be tack coated to
bond the new pavement to the old pavement. The new pavement
surface shall be finished flush with the abutting pavement.
The surface seam of the pavement joint shall be sealed with
tack coat and back sanded.
END OF SECTION 02700
Base Date: 6/03
I
I
I
I
i
I
i
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving AWRk
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02700-30 02/28/05
. I
i
area shall conform to all material and compaction
specification requirements.
(3) When the corrective work consists of an overlay,
the overlay shall cover those paver passes
sufficient to correct the defects. The area
overlaid shall be placed with a transverse butt
joint using a transverse saw cut and asphalt
removal.
(4) All materials shall meet contract requirements.
The overlay shall be placed so the finished surface
will conform to grade and smoothness requirements.
The overlay area shall be compacted to the
specified density.
(5) The Owner shall retest any sections where
corrections were made to verify that the
corrections produced a surface that conforms to the
grade and smoothness requirements.
3.09 MEETING EXISTING PAVEMENTS
A. Where new pavements will abut existing pavements, the
Contractor shall sawcut the existing pavements to produce a
uniform, smooth joint surface. Sawcutting of existing
pavements shall be neat, straight and even lines, and done in
a manner that prevents damage to the pavement to remain.
B. Full-Depth- Pavement: sawcut by approved method to the full
depth of the pavement prior to placement of any new pavement.
The sawcut surface shall be a neat true line with straight
vertical edges free from irregularities. The sawcut surface
shall be tack coated immediately prior to the installation of
the new abutting HMA material to provide a bond between the
old and new pavement. The new compacted pavement surface
shall be finished flush with the abutting pavement.
C. HMA overlays: The existing hot mix asphalt pavement shall be
sawcut to a neat true line with straight vertical edges free
of irregularities for a minimum depth of one and one half
inches. Prior to completing overlays, existing pavements
shall be tapered by grinding. The taper, along the entire
length of the joint, shall be one and one-half inches deep at
the sawcut face and shall taper to zero inches deep toward the
overlay at a distance of two feet from the sawcut face in
driveways and at a distance of six feet in roadways and
parking areas. The taper shall be cleaned and shall receive
I an asphalt emulsion tack coat immediately prior to placement
of the overlay. The new compacted surface at the joint shall
be flush with the abutting existing pavement.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02700-29 02/28105
I '
3. When profile corrections are required, the
Contractor shall use one or more of the following
corrective methods:
(a) Removing and replacing the entire pavement
thickness;
(b) Diamond grinding or micro milling;
(c) Overlaying (not patching) with the specified
surface course;
(d) Removing the surface by milling and applying a
lift(s) of the specified course(s) ;
(e) Use of other methods that will provide the
desired results;
e. Grade: The finished surface of the pavement shall not
vary from the gradeline elevations and cross sections
shown on the plans by more than 1/2 inch (12.70 mm) .
The Contractor shall remove deficient areas and
replace with new material. Sufficient material shall
be removed to allow at least 1.5 inches (37.5mm) of
hot mix asphalt to be placed. Skin patching for
correcting low areas shall not be permitted. High
points may be ground off. The Contractor shall make
tests for conformity with the specified crown and
grade immediately after initial compaction. Any
variation shall be corrected by the removal or
addition of materials and by continuous rolling.
f. Shaping Edges: While the surface is being compacted ;
and finished, the Contractor shall carefully trim the
unsupported outside edges of the pavement not
receiving curbing. Edges so formed shall be beveled
while still hot with the back of a lute or smoothing
iron and thoroughly compacted by tampers or by other
satisfactory methods.
g. The corrective method(s) chosen by the Contractor
shall be performed at the Contractor's expense,
including all necessary equipment and traffic control.
(1) Areas of removal and replacement shall be removed
the full width of the paver pass. The removal
areas shall be reconstructed with a transverse butt
joint, using a transverse saw cut perpendicular to
the paver pass.
(2) Replacement materials shall be placed in sufficient
quantity so the finished surface will conform to
grade and smoothness requirements. The corrective
I
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package ` X —2323 02700-28 02/28/05
• I
i
TABLE 7
THICKNESS ACCEPTANCE TOLERANCES
Specified Thickness Allowable Tolerances (T)
1 inch to 2 inches ±1/4 inch
2 inches+ to 5 inches ±3/8 inch
over 5 inches ±1/2 inch
Material shall conform to the specification
requirements for thickness listed above. Material not
conforming to specification requirements shall be
subject to corrective action, production suspension,
rejection, removal, or reduced payment as determined
by the owner.
c. Inferior Material: The owner may at any time, not
withstanding previous acceptance, notify the
Contractor of inferior material and recommend the
rejection of any batch of HMA which is rendered unfit
for use due to contamination, segregation, incomplete
coating of aggregate, or improper mix temperature.
Such recommendation may be based on only visual
inspection or temperature measurements. In the event
of such notification, the Contractor should evaluate
and dispose of any inferior material. If inferior
material is not rejected by the Contractor, the Owner
will take a representative sample of the rejected
material in the presence of the Contractor, and if it
can be demonstrated in the laboratory, that such
material was erroneously incorporated into the work,
I payment will not be made for that material and the
Contractor will remove and replace the defective
material identified by the Owner.
d. Smoothness: The finished surfaces of the pavement
shall be uniform in appearance, free from
irregularities in contour and texture and shall
present a smooth-riding surface. Smoothness
evaluation applies to all hot mix asphalt concrete
roadways receiving 1.5" (38mm) or more in plan
(compacted) thickness
1. The finished surface of the pavement shall not vary
more than 1/4 inch (6.2mm) for the surface course
and 3/8 inch (9 .5mm) for the intermediate course.
Each area shall be evaluated with a 10-foot (3.0m)
straightedge.
I
2. Measurements will be made perpendicular and
I parallel to the paver passes at distances not to
exceed 50 feet (15.2m) .
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package X —2323 02700-27 02/28/05
`
i
Where G.,,= bulk specific gravity of compacted
specimen
G_= theoretical maximum specific gravity
H A material shall conform to the specification
requirements for density listed below. Material not
conforming to specification requirements shall be
subject to corrective action, production suspension,
rejection, removal, or reduced payment as determined
by the owner.
I. Mat Density. The in-place density of each course
shall be compacted to a density of at least ninety-
two (92.0) percent and no more than ninety-seven
(97.0) percent of the theoretical density as
determined from field or plant samples.
J
2. Joint Density. The in-place density of each course
shall be compacted to a density of at least ninety
(90.0) percent and no more than ninety-seven (97.0)
percent of the theoretical density as determined I
from field or plant samples.
i
3. Acceptance of field placed material for mat density '
and joint density will be based on the test results I
obtained by the owner.
i
b. Thickness Determinations: The compacted thickness
shall be evaluated based on the test results obtained
by the owner. Sampling and testing shall be performed
in accordance with Section 3.07 Field Quality
Assurance. The thickness requirements shall apply
only when each pavement layer is specified to be a
uniform compacted thickness of 1 inch (25mm) or
greater. The compacted thickness of each layer of the
hot mix asphalt or mixes will be measured to determine I
compliance with the acceptance tolerances in Table 7.
Thickness shall be evaluated for compliance by the
Owner to the requirements shown on the plans. The
thickness shall be determined for each compacted core
specimen in accordance with ASTM D3549.
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02700-26 02/28/05 i
I
I
or when the asphalt binder content is below the
minimum values stated in Table 3. The Contractor
shall be required to suspend production if two points
in a row fall outside the Action Limits for individual
measurements. If production is suspended, the
Contractor shall be required to produce material on a
trial basis for testing purposes without shipment to
the project. The Owner or his representative shall pay
for acceptance sampling and testing for the first set
of trials, necessary to determine conformance with the
specification requirements. If the first set of
trials does not conform to specification requirements,
the Contractor shall pay for any additional trial
sampling and testing for acceptance. When trials have
been approved, the plant will return to its normal
operation.
c. Mixture Temperature: The temperature of the mixture
shall be in accordance with the Performance Graded
Asphalt Binder (PGAB) allowable mixing and compaction
temperature range.
d. Failure to stop production and make adjustments when
required due to an individual test not meeting the
specified requirements shall subject all mix from the
stop point to the point when the next individual test
is back on or within the action limits, or to the
point when production is actually stopped, whichever
occurs first, to be considered unacceptable. This
material shall be removed and replaced with materials
that comply with the specifications at the
Contractor's expense.
2. Hot Mix Asphalt Placement
a. Mat Density and Joint Density: Mat and Joint Density
will be evaluated based on the test results obtained
by the owner. Sampling and testing shall be performed
in accordance with Section 3.07 Field Quality
Assurance.
The bulk specific gravity shall be determined for each
compacted core specimen. The theoretical maximum
specific gravity shall then be used to determine the
density of the compacted specimen in accordance with
AASHTO T269, using the bulk specific gravity of each
sample and the average theoretical maximum specific
gravity for the material course and construction lot.
f
Density = (G,,,, /G,,,,,) x 100
low
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.l' —2323 02700-25 02/28/05
i
i
high side or the low side. If two consecutive
calculations fall outside the specification range by
up to 1.5%, either on the high side or the low side,
the Contractor shall be required to suspend
production. If production is suspended, the
Contractor shall be required to produce material on a
trial basis for testing purposes without shipment to
the project. The Owner or his representative shall pay
for acceptance sampling and testing for the first set
of trials, necessary to determine conformance with the
specification requirements. If the first set of
trials does not conform to specification requirements,
the Contractor shall pay for any additional trial
sampling and testing for acceptance. When trials have
been approved, the plant will return to its normal
operation.
b. Gradation and Asphalt Binder Content: The Contractor
shall take corrective action and/or suspension of
production when the individual results for asphalt
content and/or gradation fall outside the following
control limits:
TABLE 6
CONTROL LIMITS FOR INDIVIDUAL MEASUREMENTS
Limits
Sieve Size Action Suspension
25.4 mm 0% 0%
19.0 mm ±6% ±9%
12.5 mm ±6% ±9%
9.5 mm t6% ±9%
4.75 mm t6% ±9%
2.36 mm t5% t7.5%
1.18 mm t5% t7.5%
0.600 mm t4% t5.5
0 .300 mm ±3% t4.5
0.150 mm t3% ±4.5
0.075 mm t2% ±3%
Asphalt Binder Content ±0.4% ±0.70%
These limits shall be applied to the target values
established in the JMF. Corrective action shall be
taken by the Contractor when the calculated individual '
result for gradation or asphalt content falls outside
the target JMF value beyond the action limit listed in
Table 6. The Contractor shall take the appropriate
action when results indicate the material is out of
tolerance. The Contractor shall be required to
suspend production when the calculated individual
result for gradation falls outside the target JMF
value beyond the suspension limit listed in Table 6,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02700-24 02/28/05
I
the core samples shall be the average of the maximum
specific gravity measurements for the material course
and construction lot. The percent density of each
sample will be determined in accordance with AASHTO
T269, using the bulk specific gravity of each sample
and the average theoretical maximum specific gravity
for the material course and construction lot.
3.08 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. General: Acceptance will be based on the following
characteristics of the hot mix asphalt and completed pavement
on a material course and construction phase basis:
Hot Mix Asphalt Production
Plant air voids
Gradation
Asphalt binder content
Mixture Temperature
r
Hot Mix Asphalt Placement
Mat density
Joint density
Thickness
' Inferior Material
Smoothness
Grade
1. Hot Mix Asphalt Production
a. Plant Air Voids - The average plant bulk specific
gravity shall be determined per set of laboratory
compacted specimens. The theoretical maximum specific
gravity, for the sample, shall then be used to
determine the air voids in accordance with AASTHO
T269. Material shall conform to the specification
requirements for air voids listed in Table 3.
Material not conforming to specification requirements
M shall be subject to corrective action, production
suspension, rejection, removal, or reduced payment.
f Corrective action shall be taken by the Contractor
when the calculated plant produced air voids per set
of laboratory compacted specimens, fall outside the
specification range by up to and including 1.5%,
either on the high side or the low side. The
Contractor shall be required to suspend production
when the calculated air voids fall outside the
` specification range by more than 1.5%, either on the
Ar Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02700-23 02/28/05
I
i
2. Field Placed Material: Material placed in the field may
be tested for mat and oint density,y, and compacted �
thickness on a random basis, in accordance with ASTM
D3665. No surface course material shall be placed until
an evaluation of the intermediate course for
specification conformance is completed. The Owner, prior
to placement of the surface course, may determine the
quality and acceptance for the intermediate course.
a. Mat Compaction. The lot size shall be the total
quantity of each course placed per construction phase i
or per 200,000 square feet maximum of construction.
Three, six-inch diameter cores of finished, compacted
material shall be taken by the Owner or the Owner's
representative from each course and each lot, or
partial lot. Core locations will be determined by the
Owner on a random basis. Cores shall not be taken
closer than 1 foot (0.3 meters) from a longitudinal
joint and 10 feet (3.0 meters) from a transverse
joint.
I
b. Joint Compaction. The lot size shall be the total
length of longitudinal joints constructed by a
material course placed per lot of construction. Three
(3) cores of finished, compacted materials shall be
taken by the owner or the Owner's representative from
each course and each lot, or partial lot. Core
locations will be determined by the Owner on a random
basis and be located directly over the joint, not
adjacent to the joint.
c. Sampling. Samples shall be neatly cut with a core
drill. The cutting edge of the core drill bit shall
be of hardened steel or other suitable material with
diamond chips embedded in the metal cutting edge. The
minimum diameter of the sample shall be 6 inches
(152.4mm) . Samples that are clearly defective, as a
result of sampling, shall be discarded and another
sample taken. The Owner or the Owner's representative
shall furnish all tools, labor, and materials for
cutting samples and filling the cored pavement. Cored
holes shall be filled in a manner acceptable to the
Owner and within one day after sampling.
d. Testing. The bulk specific gravity of each cored
sample will be measured by the laboratory technician
in accordance with AASHTO T166 or T275, whichever is
applicable. The theoretical maximum specific gravity
shall be measured once for each plant sample in
accordance with the plant-produced material section.
The theoretical value used for the percent density of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving AWN
/Site/Utilities
Package `F.l' —2323 02700-22 02/28/05
temperature. The compaction temperature of the
specimens will be as specified in the job mix formula.
c. Testing. Sample specimens shall be tested for bulk
specific gravity in accordance with AASHTO T166 or
T275; whichever is applicable, for use in computing
air voids.
d. The theoretical maximum specific gravity for the
mixture shall be measured for each sample in
accordance with AASHTO T209, Type C, D, or E
container. Samples shall be taken on a random basis,
in accordance with ASTM D3665. The value used in the
field placed void computations shall be the average of
all maximum specific gravity measurements for each
course and construction phase
e. Asphalt Binder Content: Extraction tests may be
performed once per sample in accordance with AASHTO
T164 or AASHTO T308 for determination of asphalt
content. The weight of ash portion of the extraction
test, as described in AASHTO T164, shall be determined
as part of the first extraction test performed at the
beginning of plant production; and as part of every
tenth extraction test performed thereafter, for the
duration of plant production. The last weight of ash
value obtained shall be used in the calculation of the
asphalt content for the mixture. If utilizing AASHTO
T308 for asphalt content determination, the
calibration process and calibration factor, as
described in AASHTO T308, shall be determined as
stated, prior to acceptance testing. A verification
shall be performed as part of every twentieth test
performed thereafter or when changes in the mix are
apparent.
I
The use of the nuclear method for determining asphalt
content in accordance with AASHTO T287 is permitted,
provided that it is calibrated for the specific mix
being used.
f. Gradation: Aggregate gradations shall be determined
once for each sample from mechanical analysis of
extracted aggregate in accordance with AASHTO T 30 and
AASHTO T27 (Dry Sieve) . When asphalt content is
determined by the nuclear method, aggregate gradation
shall be determined from hot bin samples on batch
plants, or from the cold feed on drum mix or
continuous mix plants, and tested in accordance with
AASHTO T27 (dry sieve) using actual batch weights to
determine the combined aggregate gradation of the
mixture.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package'F.1'—2323 02700-21 02/28/05
conformance to compaction requirements. The material
will also be evaluated for conformance to the
requirements of plant produced material.
2. If the tests by the Owner indicate that pavement does not
conform to specification requirements, necessary
adjustment to JMF, plant operation, placing procedures,
and/or rolling procedures shall be made. A second
control strip shall than be placed. If the second
control strip also does not meet specification
requirements, both sections shall be removed at the
Contractor's expense. Additional control strips, as
required shall be constructed and evaluated for
conformance to the specifications. Any additional
sections that are not acceptable shall be removed at the
Contractor's expense. No payment will be made for
material and labor employed, either in placement or
removal of the nonconforming strip.
3. In no case shall the test result of any one mat core
density fall below 90% of theoretical and 88% of
theoretical for joint compaction.
3.07 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Acceptance Sampling and Testing: All acceptance sampling and
testing necessary to determine conformance with the
requirements specified in this section may be performed by the
Owner or his representative.
1. Plant Produced Material. Plant produced material may be
tested for gradation, asphalt content, and air voids on a
random basis, in accordance with ASTM D3665. Sampling
shall be from material deposited into trucks at the plant
or from trucks at the job site. Where more than one
plant is simultaneously producing material for the job,
the random sample will be obtained from one facility and
considered representative of the day's production.
a. Sampling. Each sample, obtained by the Owner or his
representative and selected on a random basis, will
consist of sufficient material for preparation of test
specimens. One set of laboratory compacted specimens
will be prepared for each sample in accordance with i
AASHTO T245, at the number of blows required by Table
3. Each set of laboratory compacted specimens will
consist of two test portions prepared from the same
field sample.
b. The sample of HMA may be reheated in a covered metal
tin and placed in an oven to obtain the compaction.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02700-20 02/28/05
Intermediate (binder) course: 3/8 inch
Top course: 1/4 inch
E. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate
ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable paving as
directed by Owner.
F. Compaction: The in-place compaction of each course shall be
compacted to a density of at least ninety-two (92.0) percent
and no more than ninety-seven (97.0) percent of the
theoretical density. Density shall be calculated in
accordance with one of the following standards:
1. Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixture Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens: ASTM D-1188.
2. Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
Using Saturated Surface Dry Specimens: ASTM D-2726.
3. The theoretical maximum specific gravity for the mixture
shall be measured for each sample in accordance with
AASHTO T209, Type C, D, or E container.
Areas of insufficient compaction shall be delineated, removed,
and replaced in compliance with the specifications at no
additional cost to the Owner.
G. Control Strip: If it is determined, during the performance of
the contract, that the material does not conform to the
material acceptance requirements, the Owner may order the
contractor to cease all operations and construct a CONTROL
STRIP consisting of a sufficient quantity of HMA according to
the JMF. The contractor shall construct a test section 300
feet (90m) long by, 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9m) wide placed in two
lanes, with a longitudinal cold joint, and shall be of the
same depth specified for the construction of the course which
it represents. The underlying grade or pavement structure
upon which the control strip is to be constructed shall be the
same as the remainder of the course represented by the control
strip. The equipment used in construction of the control
strip shall be the same type and weight to be used on the
remainder of the course represented by the control strip. A
control strip may be required if a change is made in the Job
j Mix Formula, sources of supply, or paving and rolling
equipment.
1. The mixture shall be prepared, placed, and compacted in
accordance with this specification. When the control
strip pavement has cooled sufficiently, a total of six,
Six-inch (61) diameter core samples of the finished
pavement including three (3) core samples that span the
longitudinal joint shall be and tested for
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T —2323 02700-19 02/28/OS
`
F. Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials
and defective areas and fill with fresh, hot top or
intermediate course material. Compact by rolling to specified
surface density and smoothness.
G. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on
pavement until it has cooled and hardened. Erect barricades
to protect paving from traffic.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Independent Testing Laboratory, selected and paid for by the
Owner, may be retained to perform construction testing of in-
place HMA courses for compliance with requirements for
density, thickness and surface smoothness. Top and base
courses will be randomly cored by the testing laboratory
technicians at a minimum rate of three cores for every course
and construction phase or 40,000 square feet of paving,
however, no less than three cores in light duty areas and
three cores in heavy duty areas will be obtained.
Samples of all material including compacted specimens and
certified copies of all reports and printouts shall be made
available to the Owner or his representative as often as
requested including:
I
1. Performance Graded Binders
2. Recycling agents
3. Virgin aggregates
4. Reclaimed pavement materials
5. Loose and compacted mixture specimens
6. Combined aggregate samples
I
B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and
elevations.
C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness shall not be less
than the thickness specified on the drawings. Areas of
deficient paving thickness shall receive a tack coat and a
minimum 1-inch compacted thickness overlay; or shall be
removed and replaced to the proper thickness, at the
discretion of the Owner, until specified thickness of the
course is met or exceeded, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Surface Smoothness: Testing shall be performed on the
finished surface of each course for smoothness, using a 10-
foot straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles
to centerline of paved area. The results of these tests shall
be made available to the Owner upon request. Surfaces will
not be acceptable if they exceed the following tolerances for
smoothness:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving Amok
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.V—2323 02700-18 02/28/05
I
i
material be broadcast across the mat. Excess material
should be removed by hand and returned to the screed.
3. Trafficking over freshly placed surface course material
shall not be permitted until the material has been
compacted, and allowed to cool to a temperature of 140°F
minimum.
K. Joints — Make joints between old and new pavements, and
between successive days' work, to ensure continuous bond
between adjoining work. Construction joints shall have the
same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of
paving. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
3.05 ROLLING AND COMPACTION
A. The mixture, after being spread, shall be thoroughly compacted
by rollers having a minimum weight of 240 pounds per inch of
drum width as soon as it will bear the weight of the rollers
without undue displacement. The number, weight, and types of
rollers and sequences of rolling operations shall be such that
the required compaction and surface texture are consistently
attained while the mixture is in a workable condition.
Rolling shall continue until the surface is of uniform
texture, true to grade and cross section, and the required
field compaction is obtained. The number of rollers and
AWK
passes required shall be governed by the compaction results;
however, at least two rollers shall be provided for each paver
employed on the paving operation. Each roller shall be
operated by a competent, experienced roller operator and shall
be kept in as nearly continuous operation as practicable while
work is underway. A plate shall be attached to each roller
showing the ballasted and unballasted weight per length-width
of tread.
B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers, hand rollers, or
vibratory plate compactors in areas inaccessible by self-
propelled rollers.
C. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following
rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after
breakdown rolling, and repair displaced areas by loosening and
filling, if required, with hot material.
! D. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is
hot. Continue rolling until mixture has been thoroughly
compacted.
E. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for
removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks
are eliminated and course has attained specified density.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package`F.1' —2323 02700-17
I
i
I
to the RTFO at 140°F (60°C) and the viscosity of the A
residue shall establish the maximum viscosity allowed for
the binder after silo storage. The viscosity of the
residue shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO
T202 or AASHTO TP48.
2. If the Owner determines that there is an excessive amount
of heat loss, segregation and/or oxidation of the mixture
due to temporary storage, use of surge bins or storage
bins will be discontinued.
I. Hand Work: Whenever possible, all pavement shall be spread by
a self-propelled finishing machine. At inaccessible or
irregular areas, pavement may be placed by hand methods. If
hand methods are used, the hot mixture shall be spread
uniformly to the required depth with hot shovels and lutes.
After spreading, the hot mixture shall be carefully smoothed
to remove all segregated coarse aggregate and lute marks.
Lutes used for hand spreading shall be of the type designed
for this use. Material loads shall not be dumped faster than
they can be properly spread. Workers shall not stand on the
loose mixture while spreading.
J. Paving Machine Placement: Upon arrival, the mixture shall be
placed to the full width by a hot mix asphalt paver. It shall
be struck off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the
work is completed, it shall have the required thickness and
conform to the grade and contour indicated. The speed of the
paver shall be regulated to eliminate pulling or tearing of
the hot mix asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted,
placement of the mixture shall begin along the centerline of a
crowned section or on the low side of areas with a one-way
slope. The top course in larger parking fields shall be
placed in the direction of surface-water flow. The mixture
shall be placed in consecutive adjacent strips having a
minimum width of 10 feet except where edge lanes require less
width to complete the area.
1 . The longitudinal joint in one course shall offset the
longitudinal joint in the course immediately below by at
least 1 foot. Transverse joints in one course shall be
offset by at least 10 feet from transverse joints in the
previous course.
2. The placement of the material along the longitudinal
joint may be performed by setting the screed to overlay
the first mat. The elevation of the screed above the
surface of the first mat should be equal to the amount of
roll-down expected during compaction of the new mat. The
overlapped material shall be bumped by the lutes, if
necessary, to optimize the density along the longitudinal
joint. Under no circumstances should the overlapped
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02700-16 02/28/05
have priority in the use of the equipment necessary for
acceptance testing. The equipment shall conform to the
applicable ASTM and AASHTO specification requirements for the
specific testing being performed.
Laboratory shall be in compliance with ASTM D3666 latest
edition.
The laboratory shall contain all of the equipment necessary to
perform testing in accordance with ASTM and AASHTO standards
referenced herein and with MHD Standard Specifications for
Roads and Bridges, latest edition, in addition to, those
requirements listed below:
• Electronic Balance: 20,0009m capacity minimum, sensitivity
0.1gm.
• Marshall equipment: Automatic HMA compactor mounted in
accordance with ASTM D1559 and conforming to specifications
for ASTM D1559 which consists of totally enclosed, rigidly
mounted operated frame, a standard circular-foot compaction
hammer assembly designed to ensure an eighteen (18) inch
(457mm) drop regardless of specimen height; a one-third
(1/3) horsepower motor with belt guard and controls, and
automatic counter that shuts off the power after the set
number of hammer drops, and a standard compaction pedestal
with guide pins for centering one standard (4-inch
diameter) HMA mold at a time.
• The Contractor shall also provide two (2) stability
compaction molds conforming to ASTM D1559 and suitable for
use with the automatic HMA compactor. Note: The Soiltest
Model AP-800 automatic HMA compactor and AP-166 stability
compaction molds have been found suitable.
• Bulk Specific Gravity determination equipment (AASHTO T-
166) . In addition, all ancillary and miscellaneous
equipment needed to perform the testing in accordance with
these specifications shall be provided.
H. Temporary Storage of Hot Mix Asphalt: Use of surge bins or
storage bins for temporary storage of hot mix asphalt mixtures
will be permitted:
1. For hot mix asphalt containing more than 10% RAP, the
storage period shall be established from the Rolling Thin
Film Oven (RTFO) residue at 140°F (60 0C) , tested in
accordance with AASHTO T240. Prior to production the
Contractor shall recover, by AASHTO T170, a sufficient
quantity of the RAP binder. The RAP binder shall be
blended with the virgin binder at the JMF percentages.
The laboratory RAP-virgin binder blend shall be subjected
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28105
Package T.I' —2323 02700-15
shall be used in the production mixtures without prior
approval.
The approved JMF for each mixture shall be in effect until
modified in writing by the Contractor. Should a change in
sources of materials be made, a new JMF must be developed and
approved before the new material is used. All mixture
furnished for the work shall conform to the job mix formula
within the tolerance ranges as specified.
D. JMF Tolerances: The job mix formula with the allowable
tolerances shall govern the production limits for the
aggregate gradation for each mixture. Liquid asphalt contents
shall be within the limits stated in TABLE 3.
TABLE 5
JOB MIX FORMULA TOLERANCES
(BASED ON A SINGLE TEST)
Tolerance
Material Plus or Minus
Aggregate passing No. 4 sieve or larger 6 percent
Aggregate passing No. 8 and No. 16 sieves 5 percent
Aggregate passing No. 30 sieve 4 percent +
Aggregate passing No. 50 and No. 100 sieves 3 percent
Aggregate passing No. 200 sieve 2 percent �a
Asphalt Binder 0.4 percent
Temperature of Mix 20 degrees F
(-7 C)
E. Hot Mix Asphalt Mixing Plants Haul Vehicles Pavers and
Compactors: Shall conform to MHD 1995 Standard Specifications
for Highways and Bridges, Section 460, unless modified herein.
F. Sampling Platform: A safe and adequate platform or catwalk
with stairway and railing shall be provided to accommodate the
inspector while checking temperatures and obtaining samples of
the mixture from haul vehicles. The height of the platforms
and raised platforms shall be adequate to accommodate safe
acquisition of mix samples from the type of hauling unit(s)
being utilized on the project. I
G. Testing Laboratory: The Contractor or producer shall provide
a fully equipped asphalt testing laboratory for control and
acceptance testing functions during periods of mix production,
sampling, and testing, and whenever materials subject to the
provisions of these specifications are being supplied or
tested. The laboratory shall provide adequate equipment,
space, and utilities as required for the performance of the
specified tests. The laboratory and all testing equipment
shall be located at the production facility. The owner shall
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 02700-14 02/28/05
I
i
Contractor assumes responsibility for constructing the
pavement to meet compaction and specification requirements.
The Owner will not permit work to continue when overtaken by
sudden storms until the pavement surface shows no signs of
free moisture. The material in transit at the time of
shutdown will not be placed until the pavement surface shows
no signs of free moisture, provided the mixture is within
temperature limits as specified
3.04 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT PRODUCTION AND PLACEMENT
A. Asphalt Binder Material: The Contractor shall set aside one
(1) 1-qt samples of the asphalt binder material obtained from
each truckload, shipment, or equivalent of asphalt binder
material shipped to the production facility. Each sample
shall be labeled with the PG grade, source and batch number,
quantity, project name, plant, date, and the sampling
inspector. The Contractor shall maintain documentation in the
form of a Materials Certificate of each shipment, with a copy
attached to each quart sample.
After receiving the quart samples, obtained by the Contractor,
the Owner may test the samples for verification of the
performance grade. Material shall conform to the
specification requirements for the applicable performance
grade as specified herein_ Material not conforming to
specification requirements shall be subject to corrective
action, production suspension, rejection, removal, or reduced
payment as determined by the Owner.
B. Job Mix Formula (JMF) : No HMA shall be produced until a JMF
has been submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Owner. The HMA shall be designed using procedures contained
in Chapter 5, MARSHALL METHOD OF MIX DESIGN, of the Asphalt
Institute's (AI) Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2) , Mix Design
Methods for Asphalt Concrete, and shall meet the requirements
of Table 3 and Table 4 in this specification.
All tests for initial aggregate submittals necessary to
determine compliance with requirements specified herein shall
be made by the Contractor.
A separate job mix formula shall be submitted for each mixture
and each approved RAP stockpile (the stockpile shall be of a
uniform quality throughout) .
C. Sampling: The Contractor shall submit representative samples
from actual sources of supply for all aggregates to be used
for the production of HMA. ASTM D75 shall be used in sampling
coarse aggregate and fine aggregate, and ASTM C 183 shall be
used in sampling mineral filler. Sampling may be observed and
supervised by the Owner or his representative. No aggregate
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' —2323 02700-13
I
1
i
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Tack Coat '
1. Apply to contact surfaces of all cement concrete and
other surfaces abutting or projecting into pavement.
2. Apply tack coat to existing pavement surfaces to receive
HMA overly at a rate of 0.03 to 0.06
Y gallons per square
yard of residual asphalt on the surface.
3. When the intermediate (binder) course pavement is exposed I
to construction and or local traffic for more than 30
days or when the surface becomes contaminated with silt,
a tack coat shall be applied prior to the surface course
pavement at a rate of 0.03 to 0.06 gallons per square
yard of residual asphalt on the surface.
4. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving.
B. Weather Limitations: The hot mix asphalt shall not be placed
when weather conditions of fog or rain prevail or when the
pavement surface or base shows signs of free moisture (film of
water) . When the surface temperature of the underlying course
is less than 50°F (10°C) the Contractor shall determine the
time available for compaction. The time available for
compaction shall be calculated based on the time, date, air
temperature, average wind speed, sky conditions, latitude, mix f
type, PG grade, lift thickness, mix delivery temperature,
existing surface type, existing moisture content of surface, I
existing state of moisture in surface, and surface
temperature. The estimated time available for compaction can
be calculated with the computer program called Pave Cool Tool
2_0.
This program is available at the following web location:
http://mnroad.dot.state.mn.us/research/mnroad_project/restools
/cool tool-asp
The information regarding the air temperature, average wind
speed, sky conditions, mix delivery temperature, and existing
moisture conditions shall be evaluated by the Owner and a
Contractor's representative located at the paving operation.
The estimated time available for compaction shall be provided
by the Contractor to the Owner. The Owner and the Contractor I
shall determine if there is an adequate amount of time
available to compact the mixture. Options can be explored to
extend the time available for compaction. If there is an
adequate amount of time available to compact the mixture, the
temperature requirements may be waived by the Owner; however
all other requirements including compaction shall be met. The
' I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/ Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 02700-12 02/28105
of wear, as determined by the L.A. Abrasion Test (AASHTO-T96) ,
shall be 35 percent.
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall install all pavements in the location and
to the grades shown on the Drawings, or approved by the Owner.
The type and thickness of pavement courses shall be as shown
on the Drawings.
B. Eauinment: Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating
condition and correct breakdowns in a manner that will not
delay or be detrimental to progress of paving operations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Proof roll prepared base material surface to identify areas
requiring removal and recompaction, and to provide a uniform
degree of compaction over the entire pavement area.
B. Do not begin paving work until deficient base material areas
have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. Paving
shall not be applied until the Owner inspects and approves the
finished base.
C. Check all frames, covers, grates, water valve boxes and other
miscellaneous castings that are located in the proposed
pavement areas to ensure that all have been correctly
positioned and set to the proper slope and elevation. All
covers and grates shall be set flush with the required
finished surface. No depressions or mounds will be permitted
in the pavement to accommodate inaccuracies in the setting of
castings.
I
D. All vertical surfaces of structures and existing concrete
surfaces in contact with new hot mix asphalt pavement shall be
painted with a uniform coating of an approved tack coat
material. Extreme care shall be exercised in the application
of this material to prevent splattering or staining of
surfaces that will be exposed after the paving is completed.
I Surfaces that are stained as a result of the Contractor's
operation shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost
to the Owner.
E. All existing paved surfaces to be overlaid shall be thoroughly
cleaned by a self-propelled sweeper. Areas inaccessible by
power sweeper shall be broom swept until the pavement surface
is clean.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 02700-11 02/28/05
4. The asphalt binder content (PGAB percentage) shall meet
the minimum requirements stated in Table 3 for each
mixture type. The asphalt binder content of the mixture
shall be calculated on the percentage basis by weight of
the total mix.
5. The maximum size aggregate used shall not be more than
one-half of the thickness of the compacted course being
constructed on a prepared surface or that which can be
placed to achieve specification requirements. The
maximum size is defined as one sieve size larger than the
nominal maximum size. The nominal maximum size is
defined as one sieve size larger than the first sieve to
cumulatively retain more than 10 percent.
H. Additional Criteria
1. In addition to the above Marshall requirements, the
mixtures shall also conform to the following:
TABLE 4
MINIMUM PERCENT VOIDS IN MINERAL AGGREGATE
U.S.A. Standard Nominal Maximum Minimum Voids in
Sieve Designation Particle Size Mineral AaareQ_ate
Inches Inches M. Percent
I
1/2 0.500 12.5 16 ,
3/4 0.750 19.0 15
1 1.000 25.0 14
2. Voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) , for each plant sample,
shall be computed in accordance with the procedures
contained in Chapter 5, MARSHALL METHOD OF MIX DESIGN, of
the Asphalt Institute's Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2) , Mix
Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete.
3. Each mixture shall be evaluated for stripping by
performing indirect tensile tests on compacted mixtures.
If the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) of the composite
mixture, as determined by AASHTO T283 with freeze/thaw
cycle, is less than 75, the aggregates shall be rejected
or the asphalt treated with an approved anti-stripping
agent. The amount of anti-stripping agent added to the I
asphalt shall be sufficient to produce a TSR of not less
than 75. If an antistrip agent is required, it will be
provided by the Contractor at no additional cost.
2.02 HMA FOR SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
A. HMA for sidewalks and driveways shall conform to the
requirements for dense mix--the maximum allowable percentage
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02700-10 02/28/05
l TABLE 3
SIEVE ANALYSIS OF MIX
PERCENT BY WEIGHT PASSING
Binder Modified Top Dense
sieve Course Ton Course Mix
2 inch
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 100 95-100
5/8 inch
1/2 inch 65-80 60-100 100 100
3/8 inch 68-88 80-100 80-100
No. 4 48-65 48-68 50-76 55-80
No. 8 37-51 33-53 37-54 48-63
No. 16 20-40 26-40 36-49
No. 30 17-30 14-30 17-29 24-38
No. 50 10-22 9-21 10-21 14-27
No. 100 6-16 5-16 6-18
No. 200 0-6 2-6 2-7 4-8
PGAB 5.0-6.0 5.0-6.0 5.5-7.0 7-8
Temp. Mix (°F) 265-325 265-325 265-325 265-325
Marshall Blows 50 75 50 50
stability, lbs. (min.) 1200 1500 1200 1000
Flow, hundredths of an inch 8-16 8-16 8-16 8-16
Percent Air Voids 3.0-6.0 3.0-5.0 3.0-5.0 3.0-6.0
1. The mineral aggregate shall be of such size that the
percentage composition by weight, as determined by
laboratory sieves, will conform to the gradation or
gradations specified in Table 3 when tested in accordance
with AASHTO Standards T27 and T11.
2. The gradations in Table 3 represent the limits, which
shall determine the suitability of aggregate for use from
the sources of supply. The aggregate, as selected (and
used in the JMF) and blended, shall have a gradation
within the limits designated in Table 3 and shall not
vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on
the adjacent sieve, or vice versa, but shall be well
` graded from coarse to fine.
3. Deviations from the final approved mix design for
gradation of aggregates shall be within the tolerances
for individual measurements as specified in these
requirements. The job mix formula tolerances will apply
if they fall outside the grading band in Table 3. All
I mixture furnished for the work shall conform to the job
mix formula within the tolerance ranges as specified.
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 02700-9 02/28/05
I
E
I
E. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, Portland cement, or other
inert material complying with AASHTO M 17/ASTM D 242.
F. Anti-strippincr additive: Shall be incorporated and thoroughly
dispersed in the asphalt binder material in an amount equal to
the percent by weight established by the job mix formula. This
percent is based on the efficiency of the additive as
determined by laboratory tests. The treated composite mixture
shall have a minimum tensile strength ratio (TSR) of not less
than 75, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T283 with the
freeze/thaw cycle. The specimens for the AASHTO procedure
shall be 4" (100mm) in diameter, compacted with the Marshall
hammer or the Superpave gyratory compactor to the desired air
void level of 7.0 + 1.0%. If the TSR ratio is less than 75,
the aggregates shall be treated with an approved antistrip in
sufficient quantity to produce acceptable results. The hot
mix asphalt materials and asphalt binder material that require
antistrip additives (either liquid or mineral) shall continue
to meet all requirements specified herein for binder and HMA.
The anti-strip agent shall be included in the bid price.
G. Hot Mix Asphalt: Plant mix may be composed of a homogeneous
mixture of aggregate, filler if required, asphalt binder,
and/or additives, combined to meet the composition limits by
weight and other characteristics as specified. The several
aggregate fractions shall be sized, uniformly graded and
combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets
the grading requirements of the following specifications:
i
I
I
I
i
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02700-8 02/28/05
I
4. For design purposes, the specific gravity of the combined
aggregate blend with RAP used in a HMA mixture shall be
determined in accordance with the attached test method
for BULK SPECIFIC GRAVIY OF AGGREGATE BLENDS WITH RAP.
C. Asphalt Binder Material: The types, grades, controlling
specifications, and maximum mixing temperatures for the
asphalt binder materials shall conform to the following:
THE PGAB GRADE SELECTED FOR THIS CONTRACT IS PG 64-28 and PG
58-34 as applicable. If traffic speed and/or level warrant,
the PGAB may be adjusted by the Owner for the Design Traffic
conditions in accordance with Table below:
SUPERPAVE PGAB Adjustment for Design Traffic Conditions
Traffic Loadinc Adiustment to PGAB Grade
Standing Increase high temperature grade by 2
(<20 km/h) grades (12° C) . Use low temperature grade
as determined by LTTP BIND software.
Slow Transient Increase high temperature grade by 1
(20 to 70 km/h) grade (6° C) . Use low temperature grade
as determined by LTTP BIND software.
Traffic Level (ESALs) Adjustment to PGAB Grade
1 x 10' to 3 x 10' Consideration should be given to
increasing high temperature grade by 1
grade (6° C) . Use low temperature grad
as determined by LTPP BIND software
>3 x 10' Increase high temperature grade by 1
grade (6° C) . Use low temperature grade
as determined by LTTP BIND software.
The blending at the HMA plants of PG binder from different
suppliers is strictly prohibited. Contractors may switch to
another approved source of PG binder, upon written
notification to the Owner, and by certifying that the tank to
be utilized has been drained to an un-pumpable condition. The
tank shall not retain more than 0.5% in volume capacity of
previous residue source. Contractors who blend PG binders
will be reclassified as a supplier and required to certify the
binder in accordance with AASHTO MP1 and AASHTO PP-26. Also
if any modifications, blending, or addition of additives
occurs, the Contractor shall re-certify the material in
accordance with AASHTO MP1 and AASHTO PP-26.
D. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; AASHTO M140/ASTM D 997 or
AASHTO M 208/ASTM D 2397, RS-1 or CRS-1.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.V—2323 02700-7
I
T176. The sand equivalent value shall be determined 4"*,
for the combined mix aggregates, including coarse and
fine aggregates and mineral filler portions.
c. In the fine aggregate sieve analysis passing #4
(4.75mm) , the amount between two successive sieves
#16, #30, #50, and #100 shall not exceed 33% of the
fine aggregate total.
d. The fine aggregate, as delivered to the mixer, shall
meet the following gradation requirement:
TABLE 2
Percent Passina
sieve Minimum Maximum
3/8 inch 95 100
No. 8 70 95
No. 50 20 40
No. 200 2 16
3. Mineral Filler: If filler, in addition to that naturally
present in the aggregate, is necessary, it shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M17.
B. Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP) : The use of a maximum of 10 %
recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) will be allowed in the HMA
surface courses. All other HMA mixtures may contain a maximum
of 25% RAP by mass of the entire mixture.
1. The RAP, incorporated into the HMA mixtures, shall be
maintained as a separate captive stockpile and shall not
be added to without prior approval. RAP shall consist of
asphalt pavement recovered by cold milling or other
removal techniques. The RAP shall be crushed so that 100
percent passes the 3/4-inch sieve, or a smaller size
depending on the mixture being produced. The Contractor
shall assure that the RAP is free from contaminating
substances such as joint seal compound.
2. The coarse aggregate in the RAP shall be crushed stone
and the top-size shall not exceed the maximum aggregate
size established by the JMF. The final HMA mixture
containing RAP shall conform to all the specification
requirements contained herein.
3. For mixtures containing 15% or less RAP, the asphalt
binder shall be a PG 64-28. For mixtures containing
greater than 15% and up to 25% RAP, the asphalt binder
grade shall be a PG 58-34.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving ,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02700-6 02/28/05
i
A
i
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate: Aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, with or
without sand or other inert finely divided mineral aggregate.
The portion of the materials retained on the #4 sieve (4.75
mm) shall be known as coarse aggregate, the portion passing
the #4 sieve (4.75 mm) and being retained by the #200 sieve
(0.075 µm) as fine aggregate, and the portion passing the #200
sieve (0.075 µm) as mineral filler.
1. Coarse Aggregate
a. Coarse aggregate shall consist of sound, tough,
durable particles, free from adherent coatings of
clay, organic matter, and other deleterious
substances. It shall show no more wear than thirty
(30) percent loss when tested in accordance with
AASHTO - T96, nor shall the sodium sulfate soundness
loss exceed nine (9) percent, or the magnesium
soundness loss exceed twelve (12) percent, after five
cycles, when tested in accordance with ASTM C88.
b. The coarse aggregate shall not contain more than ten
(10) percent, by weight, of flat or elongated pieces,
when tested in accordance with ASTM D4791 at a ratio
stated within the standard specifications, or in lieu
of, 3:1. A flat particle is one having a ratio of
width to thickness greater than the stated ratio; an
elongated particle one having a ratio of length to
width greater than the stated ratio. An aggregate
particle whose maximum length is the stated ratio
times its maximum thickness is considered flat and
elongated.
2. Fine Aggregate
a. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, durable,
angular particles produced by crushing natural stone,
or gravel that meets the requirements for wear and
soundness specified for the coarse aggregate. The
aggregate particles shall be free from coatings of
clay, silt, or other objectionable matter and shall
contain no clay balls. The fine aggregate, including
any blended material for the fine aggregate, shall
have a plasticity index of not more than 6 and a
liquid limit of not more than 25 when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T89 and AASHTO T90.
b. Fine aggregates shall have sand equivalent values of
40 or greater when tested in accordance with AASHTO
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package T.I'—2323 02700-5
i
I
5. RTFO percent mass loss (rolling thin film oven) -oft*,,
6. RTFO - G*/sinS and phase angle at test temperature
7. PAV Residue - G*(sinS) and phase angle at test
temperature
8. Creep stiffness and m-value at test temperature
9. Direct tension results (when equipment available)
10 . Strain sweep in accordance with AASHTO TP-5 (optional)
11. Physical hardening after 24 hours in accordance with
AASHTO TP-1 (optional)
12 . Mixing and Compaction viscosity-temperature chart
D. Asphalt Anti-Stripping Additive: This specification provides
for an additive to asphalt to assist in the coating of wet
aggregate and to increase the resistance of the asphalt binder
coating to stripping in the presence of water. The additive
shall be chemically inert to asphalt (heat stable) and when
blended with asphalt shall withstand storage at a temperature
of 400°F for extended periods without loss of effectiveness.
E. Testina Laboratory: The laboratory used to develop the JMF
shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666. A certification
signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets
these requirements shall be submitted with the JMF.
F. Certified Test Reports: Submit Certified Test Report(s)signed
by the material producer and Contractor certifying that
materials comply with, or exceed, the requirements herein.
Owner reserves the right to employ an independent testing
laboratory for testing materials included in the JMF, and
Contractor shall, upon request of Owner, supply suitable
quantities of these materials for such testing.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate paving with all other work,
especially underground utility construction, to prevent
covering up unfinished or uninspected work and loss of time or
labor by improper scheduling. Any repaving required shall be
done at no cost to Owner.
1.07 PAVEMENT WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY
A. The construction of all pavements within public rights-of-way
shall be in accordance with the rules, regulations and
requirements of the Public Agency having control and ownership
of such rights-of-way.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.I' —2323 02700-4 02/28/05
(
B. JMF Submittal: The job mix formula shall be submitted in
writing by the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the start
of paving operations and shall include as a minimum:
1. Percent passing each sieve size.
2. Gradation and percent of each individual aggregate or
mineral filler, including source, location, and bulk
specific gravity.
3. Percent of asphalt binder.
4. Performance graded asphalt binder certified test results
and Material Certificate certifying the PG grade,
including source and location.
5. Number of blows of hammer compaction per side of Marshall
molded specimen.
6. Mixing temperature.
7. Compaction temperature.
8. Temperature of mix when discharged from the mixer.
9. Plot of the combined gradation on the Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA) 0.45 power gradation curve.
10. Graphical plots of stability, flow, air voids, voids in
the mineral aggregate, and unit weight verses asphalt
content.
11. Percent natural sand.
12. Percent fractured faces.
13. Percent elongated particles.
14. Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR)
15. Antistrip agent - type, quantity, supplier and location.
C. Performance Graded As-phalt Binder Material: The
certification(s) shall show the appropriate AASHTO and/or ASTM
test(s) for each material, the test results, and a statement
that the material meets the specification requirement.
Reference AASHTO MP-1 and PP6
1. Flash point
2. Rotational viscosity at 135 0C and 165°C
3. Specific gravity at 25°C
4. Original G*/sinb and phase angle at test temperature
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02700-3 02/28/05
I
AASHTO — American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials
AI — Asphalt Institute
FHWA — Federal Highway Administration
MHD/MDPW — Massachusetts Department of Public Works, Standards
Specifications for Highways and Bridges
NETTCP -- New England Transportation Technician Certification
Program
1.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
A. Construct pavement when atmospheric temperature is above 40 0F,
the base is not frozen, and there is not any film (free
standing) of water on the base to be paved.
B. The required temperature of the HMA mixture, within a
tolerance of plus or minus 15 0F, when delivered at the site,
will be governed by the temperature of the base upon which the
mix is placed, as follows:
TABLE 1
Base Required Material Temperature in Degrees F
Temperature For Course Thickness in Inches
in Decrees F 1 1-1/2 2 3 and Greater
35-40 - 305 295 280
41-50 310 300 285 275
51-60 300 295 280 270
61-70 290 285 275 265
71-80 285 280 270 265
81-90 275 270 265 260
91 & over 270 265 260 255
C. Tack coat shall be applied only when the ambient temperature
is above 40°F, and when the temperature has been above 35°F
for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply
when base is wet, contains excess moisture, or during rain.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Job Mix Formula (JMF) : No HMA shall be produced until a JMF
has been submitted by the Contractor and reviewed by the
Owner's representative. The HMA shall be designed using
procedures contained in Chapter 5, MARSHALL METHOD OF MIX
DESIGN, of the Asphalt Institute's (AI) Manual Series No. 2
(MS-2) , Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete, and shall
meet the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 02700-2 02/28/05
{
SECTION 02700
HOT MIX ASPHALT UM) PAVEMENT MASSACHUSETTS
PART 1—GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work under this section consists of furnishing hot mix asphalt
(HMA) pavement (referred to as bituminous in the contract
drawings) composed of mineral aggregate, reclaimed asphalt
pavement (RAP) , asphalt binder material and an anti-strip
additive (if required) , that are mixed in a central mixing
plant and then placing the mix on a prepared course in
accordance with these specifications and conformance to the
lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross sections as shown
on the plans or as directed by the owner.
B. The work includes:
1. Preparation for HMA paving and furnishing and installing
HMA.
2. HMA overlays over existing pavement, including surface
preparation, and leveling courses, tack coating and all
other associated operations required.
3. Sawcutting existing pavements.
C. Acceptance of plant produced material for gradation, asphalt
content, and air voids shall be determined by the owner in
accordance with the requirements of Article 3.09 ACCEPTANCE
CRITERIA. Installation of Hot Mix Asphalt shall not commence
until Job-Mix Formulas complying with the requirements of this
section have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the Work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02300 - Earthwork
2. Section 02320 - Pavement Subbase and Base
3. Section 02725 - Curbing
4. Section 02760 - Pavement Markings
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. References herein are made in accordance with the listed
specific standards of the following organization and Work
j under this Section shall conform to the latest edition, unless
` modified by these specifications.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital riot Mix Asphalt Paving
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V—2323 02700-1 02/28/05
f
Electric Red
Gas and oil Yellow
Communications Orange
Water Blue
Sewer and Drain Green
Chemical Red (not APWA)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Tracer tape shall be installed above the pipe or conduit it is
to identify at depths as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for installation.
END OF SECTION 02649
Base Date: 6/03
- I
I
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Warning and Tracer Tape
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02649-2 02/28/05
I
SECTION 02649
WARNING AND TRACER TAPE
PART 1—GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section covers the furnishing, handling and installation
of tracer tape for all buried utility systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Six sets of manufacturer's literature on the materials, colors
and printing specified herein, shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review.
B. Tape samples shall also be submitted to the Engineer for
review.
PART 2—PRODUCT
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Tape shall be manufactured by: Terra-Tape and Terra-Tape D by
Reef Industries, Houston, TX; Markline and Detectatape by
Allen Systems, Houston, TX; an equivalent tape by Industrial
Tape and Supply Company, Atlanta, GA; or approved equal.
2.02 TAPE
A. Warning and tracer tape shall be at least 6 inches wide.
B. Tracer tape for non-ferrous pipe or conduit shall be
constructed of a metallic core bonded to plastic layers. The
metallic tracer tape shall be a minimum 5-mil thick and must
be locatable at a depth of 18 inches with ordinary pipe
locaters.
C. Warning tape for ferrous pipe or conduit shall consist of
multiple bonded plastic layers. The non-metallic tracer tape
shall elongate at least 500% before breaking.
D. The tape shall bear the wording: "BURIED DRAIN LINE BELOW"
(with "DRAIN" replaced by "WATER", "SEWER", "ELECTRICAL",
"GAS", "TELEPHONE", or "CHEMICAL" as appropriate) ,
continuously repeated every 30 inches to identify the pipe.
I
E. Tape colors shall be as follows as recommended by the American
Public Works Association (APWA) :
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Warning and Tracer Tape
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02649-1 02128!05
i
I
construction debris and dirt. The system shall be thoroughly
flushed clean and the Contractor shall furnish all necessary
hose, pumps, pipe and other equipment that may be required for
this purpose. No debris shall be flushed into existing
drains, storm recharge chambers, storm drains and/or streams.
B. Testing and Correction of Defective Work: If a mandrel 3 feet
long and 90 percent of the pipe diameter cannot be pulled
through the completed pipe runs after 7 days of completed
trench backfill, the pipe line shall be deemed unacceptable
and the pipe lines shall be removed and replaced. The
Contractor shall make the necessary repairs or replacements
required to permanently provide an open and structurally sound
drainage system capable of supporting the anticipated loading
from all sources throughout the year.
3.13 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the work, and before final acceptance by
the Engineer, the entire drainage system shall be subjected to
a final inspection in the presence of the Engineer. The work
shall not be considered as complete until all requirements for
line, grade, cleanliness, mandrel tests and other requirements
have been met.
END OF SECTION 02600
Base Date: 6/03
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V—2323 02600-15 02/28/05
2. The LOCK JOINT Flexible Manhole Sleeve cast in the wall
of the manhole base. The stainless steel strap and
exposed sleeve shall be protected from corrosion with a
bitumastic coating.
3. PRESS WEDGE II gasket cast into the wall on the manhole
base. The rubber wedge shall only be driven into the V
slot from the outside of the manhole.
4. The RES-SEAL, a cast iron compression ring which
compresses a rubber "O" ring gasket into a tapered hole in
the wall of the manhole base. Exposed metal shall be
protected from corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
5. KOR-N-SEAL neoprene boot cast into the manhole wall. The
stainless steel clamp shall be protected from corrosion
with a bitumastic coating.
3.10 ROOF DRAIN OR SIMILAR CONNECTIONS
A. General Requirements: The Contractor shall make all required
connections of the building drainage system pipes into the
site drainage system at locations and at distances from the
buildings as shown on the drawings. If stubs are constructed
for later connection to the building pipes, the ends shall be
sealed with watertight plugs and marked with 2 x 4 risers for
later location
�s
B. Coordination with Building Contractor: The Contractor shall
coordinate the work with the work of the Building Contractor
to determine the exact location and elevation of the point of
entry into the building.
C. Connections: Roof drain connections to the site drainage
system shall be made with fittings supplied by the pipe
manufacturer.
3.11 TRENCH DRAINS AND SLOTTED DRAINS
A. Trench drain and slotted drain installation methods shall be
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the
details shown on the Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's written
instructions for installation prior to installation, as
required in Article 1.03.
3.12 CLEANINC3, TESTING AND REPAIR
A. The Contractor shall clean the entire drainage system of all
debris and obstructions. This shall include removal of all
formwork from structures, concrete and mortar droppings,
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02600-14 02/28/05
I
3.06 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Steps shall be cast into the precast walls during manufacture.
B. Steps in brick masonry and concrete units shall be installed
as the masonry courses are laid.
3.07 CASTINGS
A. Cast-iron frames for grates and covers shall be well bedded in
cement mortar and accurately set to the proposed grades.
B. All voids between the bottom flange and the structure shall be
completely filled to make a watertight fit. A ring of mortar,
at least one-inch thick and pitched to shed water away from
the frame shall be placed over and around the outside of the
bottom flange. The mortar shall extend to the outer edge of
the masonry all around its circumference and shall be finished
smooth. No visible leakage will be permitted.
C. Structures within the limits of bituminous concrete pavement
shall be temporarily set at the elevation of the bottom of the
binder course. After the binder course has been compacted,
the structures shall be set at their final grade. Backfill
necessary around such structures after the binder course has
been completed shall be made with 3,500 psi concrete.
3.08 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES
A. General Requirements: The contractor shall make all required
connections of the proposed drainage system into existing
drainage system, where and as shown on the Drawings.
B. Compliance with Requirements of Owner of Facility: Connections
into existing drainage system facilities shall be performed in
accordance with the requirements of the Owner of the facility.
The Contractor shall comply with all such requirements,
including securing of all required permits, and paying the
costs thereof.
3.09 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS
A. Manhole pipe connections for precast manhole bases may be
accomplished by any method described below. The Contractor
shall make sure that the outside diameter of the pipe is
compatible with the particular pipe connection used.
1. A tapered hole filled with non-shrink waterproof grout
j after the pipe is inserted. This connection method will
not be allowed when connecting PVC pipe to manholes.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02600-13 02/28/05
i
I
3.04 BRICK MASONRY
A. Brick masonry structures shall be watertight. All leaks in
brick masonry structures shall be sealed. All brick masonry
shall be laid by skilled workmen.
B. All beds on which masonry is to be laid shall be cleaned and
wetted properly. Brick shall be wetted as required to be
damp, but free of any surface water when placed in the work.
Bed joints shall be formed of a thick layer of mortar which
shall be smoothed or furrowed slightly. Head joints shall be
formed by applying a full coat of mortar on the entire brick
end, or on the entire side, and then shoving the mortar
covered end or side of the brick tightly against the bricks
laid previously. The practice of buttering at the corners of
the brick and then throwing the mortar or crappings in the
empty joints will not be permitted. Dry or butt joints will
not be permitted. Joints shall be uniform in thickness and
approximately 1/4 inch thick.
C. Brickwork shall be constructed accurately to the required
structure dimensions and tapered at the top to the dimensions
of the flanges of the cast-iron frames, as shown on the
Drawings.
D. Joints on the inside face of walls shall be tooled slightly
concave with an approved jointer when the mortar is thumbprint
hard. The mortar shall be compressed with complete contact
along the edges to seal the surface of the joints.
E. All castings to be embedded in the brickwork shall be
accurately set and built-in as the work progresses.
F. Water shall not be allowed to flow against brickwork or to
rise on the masonry for 60 hours after it has been laid, and
any brick masonry damaged in this manner shall be replaced as
directed at no additional cost to the Owner. Adequate
precautions shall be taken in freezing weather to protect the
masonry from damage by frost.
3.05 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete masonry units shall be soaked in water before laying.
As circular concrete block walls are laid-up, the horizontal
joints and keyways shall be flushed full with mortar. As
rectangular blocks are laid-up, all horizontal and vertical
joints shall be flushed full with mortar. Plastering of the
outside of block structures will not be required. No
structure shall be backfilled until all mortar has completely
set.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 02600-12 02/28/05
3. Invert shelves shall be graded with a 1-inch drop per 1-
foot length sloped from the manhole walls.
E. Manhole steps shall be accurately positioned and embedded in
the concrete when the section is cast. Precast-reinforced
concrete manhole sections shall be set vertical and with
sections and steps in true alignment.
F. All holes in sections used for their handling shall be
thoroughly plugged with rubber plugs made specifically for
this purpose or with mortar. The mortar shall be one part
cement to 1-1/2 parts sand, mixed slightly damp to the touch,
hammered into the holes until it is dense and an excess of
paste appears on the surface, and finished smooth and flush
with the adjoining surfaces.
G. Precast sections shall be level and plumb with approved joint
seals. Water shall not be permitted to rise over newly made
joints until after inspection and acceptance. All joints shall
be watertight.
H. Openings which have to be cut in the sections in the field
shall be carefully made to prevent damage to the riser.
Damaged risers will be rejected and shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
I. Change-In-Type Structures. Where indicated on the drawings,
existing subsurface drain structures shall be converted to the
new structure types in the following manner;
a. Catch Basins to Manholes
i. Fill basin sump with 3000 psi concrete and create new
inverts at the elevations and sizes indicated and in
accordance with specifications and details for new
drain manholes.
ii. Provide and adjust to grade new drain manhole frame
and cover.
iii. Stockpile existing frame and grade per Owner
directions.
b. Manholes to Catch Basins (inlets) .
i. Where sump is indicated on the drawings, replace
existing manhole structure with new precast catch
basin structure.
ii. Where sump is not indicated on the drawings, replace
existing frame and cover with new frame and grate and
adjust to grade per these specifications and details
for new catch basins.
iii. Stockpile existing manhole frame and cover per Owner's
directions.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02600-11 02/28/05
for the pipe from construction operations during placement of a
the final backfill and protect the pipe from stones or cobbles
in the final backfill. Compact initial backfill per Section
02300.
Flooding or jetting as a procedure for compaction is not
allowed.
E. Final Backfill: The final backfill should be the same
material as the proposed embankment or surface finishes.
Generally, the excavated material may be used as final
backfill. Placement should be as specified for the
embankment. In lieu of a specification, the final backfill
should be placed in 12 inch maximum lifts and compacted to a
minimum 95 percent modified proctor density to prevent
excessive settlement at the surface. Compaction should be
performed at optimum moisture content.
F. Vehicular and Construction Loads: During construction, avoid
heavy equipment loads (> 40,000 lbs. per axle over the pipe.
Additional temporary cover should be placed over the pipe for
heavy construction load crossings. Hydrohammers or hoe-pak
compactors may not be used over the pipe until at least 48
inches of cover have been provided.
3.03 MANHOLES, CATCH BASIN'S AND LEACHING CHAMBER
A. Manholes Catch Basins and Leaching Chamber shall be
constructed at the locations and to the lines, grades,
dimensions and design shown on Drawings or as required by the
Engineer.
B. Precast concrete Units shall be installed in a manner that
ensures watertight construction and all leaks in precast
concrete structures shall be sealed. If required, precast
concrete structures shall be repaired or replaced to obtain
watertight construction.
I
C. Stubs shall be short pieces of pipe cut from the bell ends of
the pipe. Stubs shall be plugged with brick masonry unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
D. Manhole Inverts shall conform accurately to the size of the
adjoining pipes.
1. Manhole inverts shall be constructed of 3,500 psi
concrete as shown the Drawings.
2 . Inverts shall be laid out in smooth diameter curves of
the longest possible radius to provide uniform flow
channels.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02600-10 02/28/05
I
reconstructed with mechanical-joint pipe for a
distance of 10 feet on each side of the drain. One
full length of water main should be centered over
the drain so that both joints will be as far from
the sewer as possible.
When it is impossible to obtain horizontal and/or
vertical separation as stipulated above, both the water
main and drain shall be constructed of mechanical-joint
cement lined ductile iron pipe or other equivalent based
on water tightness and structural soundness. Both pipes
shall be pressure tested by an approved method to assure
water tightness.
3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPES
The type of materials to be used in bedding and backfilling and the
method of placement shall conform to the requirements of Section
02300, Earthwork, the details shown on the Drawings and the
following.
A. Embedment materials are those used for bedding, haunching and
initial backfill around pipes as illustrated on the drawings:
All embedment materials should be free from lumps of frozen soil or
ice when placed. Embedment materials should be placed and compacted
at optimum moisture content
B. Trench Bedding: Material must be provided to insure proper
line and grade is maintained. Unsuitable or unstable
materials shall be undercut and replaced with a suitable
bedding material, placed in 6" lifts. Other methods of
stabilization, such as geotextiles may be appropriate and
their use must be approved by Owner's Representative.
Provide stable and uniform bedding for the pipe and any
protruding features of its joints and/or fittings. The middle
of the bedding equal to 1/3 of the pipe outside diameter
should be loosely placed, with the remainder compacted to a
minimum of 95 percent standard proctor density.
C. Haunching: Proper haunching provides a major portion of the
` pipe's strength and stability. Exercise care to insure
placement and compaction of the embedment material in the
haunches. For larger diameter pipes (>30") , embedment
materials should be worked under the haunches by hand.
Haunching materials shall be placed and compacted in 6 inch
maximum lifts, compacted to 95 percent modified proctor
density.
D. Initial Backfill: The initial backfill shall be from the
springline to 24 inches above the pipe to provide protection
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/ Site/ Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 02600-9 02/28/05
J. Pipe Entrances to Structures: All pipe entering structures
shall be cut flush with the inside face of the structure, and
the cut ends of the pipe surface within the structure shall be
properly rounded and finished so that there will be no
protrusion, ragged edges or imperfections that will impede or
affect the hydraulic characteristics of the stormwater flow.
The method of cutting and finishing shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
K. Protection during Construction: The Contractor shall protect
the installation at all times during construction, and
movement of construction equipment, vehicles and loads over
and adjacent to any pipe shall be performed at the
Contractor's risk.
At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, all open
ends of pipes shall be closed by approved temporary watertight I
plugs. If water is in the trench when work is resumed, the
plug shall not be removed until the trench has been dewatered
and all danger of water entering the pipe eliminated.
_ I
L. Water Pipe — Drain Pipe Separation: When a drain pipe crosses
above or below a water pipe, the following procedures shall be
utilized:
I
1. Relation to Water Mains
a. Horizontal Separation: Whenever possible drains
shall be laid at a minimum at least 5 feet,
horizontally, from any existing or proposed water
main. Should local conditions prevent a lateral
separation of 5 feet, a drain may be laid closer
than 5 feet to a water main if:
i. It is laid in a separate trench, or if
I
ii. It is laid in the same trench with the water
mains located at one side on a bench of
undistributed earth, and if
iii. In either case the elevation of the top
(crown) of the drain is at least 12 inches
below the bottom (invert) of the water main.
I
b. Vertical Separation: Whenever drains must cross
under water mains, the drain shall be laid at such
an elevation that the top of the pipe is at least
12 inches below the bottom of the water main. When
the elevation of the drain cannot be varied to meet I
the above requirements, the water main shall be
relocated to provide this separation or
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02600-8 02/28/05
I
1
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor to verify the location, size invert and type of
existing pipes at all points of connection prior to ordering
new utility materials.
B. All pipes shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades
shown on the drawings and in conformance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. As soon as the trench is excavated to the normal grade of the
bottom of the trench, the Contractor shall immediately place
the bedding material in the trench. The pipe shall be firmly
bedded in the compacted bedding material accurately to the
lines and grades shown on the Drawings.
D. Laving Pine: Each length of pipe shall be laid with firm,
full and even bearing throughout its entire length, in a
prepared trench. Pipe shall be laid with bells upgrade unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Every length of pipe shall be inspected and cleaned of all
dirt and debris before being laid. The interior of the pipe
and the jointing seal shall be free from sand, dirt and trash.
Extreme care shall be taken to keep the bells of the pipe free
from dirt and rocks so that joints may be properly lubricated
and assembled. No pipe shall be trimmed or chipped to fit.
No length of pipe shall be laid until the proceeding lengths
of pipe have been thoroughly embedded in place, to prevent
movement or disturbance of the pipe alignment.
E. Notch under pipe bells and joints where required to provide
for uniform bearing under entire length of pipe.
F. Excavation, backfilling and compaction shall be as specified
in Section 02300.
G. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to
attain required compaction density.
i
H. Pipe Extension: Where an existing pipe is to be extended, the
same type of pipe shall be used, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
I. Full Lengths of Pipe: only full lengths of pipe shall be used
in the installation except that partial lengths of pipe may be
used at the entrance to structures, and to accommodate the
required locations of service connection fittings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/ Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02600-7 02/28/05
G. Double catch basin grate shall be LeBaron LV-248-2 or approved ,•
equivalent, with four flanges or with three flanges for use
with gutter inlet or abutting vertical curb.
H. Catch basin outlet hoods shall be LeBaron Oil and Grease Trap
Model No. L-219-12 for 12-inch outlet pipes or L-219-15 for
15-inch outlet pipes, or approved equivalent.
I. Openings at top of concrete structures where curb inlets are
required shall be 24 inches by 27 inches.
J. Landscape (Area) drains shall be ADS manufacturer, "NYOPLAST"
In-Line drain with cast ductile iron dome grate.
2.05 SILT SACKS/SEDIMENT CONTROL DEVICES
A. Install at locations shown on the drawings, or at all
catchbasins that are determined to be receiving surface water
during construction.
B. Manufacturer: ACF Environmental, Inc. or approved equal.
C. Material to be a polypropolene geotextile fabric with strength
per ASTM D4884.
2.06 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains shall be ACO Quicklock Trench Drain System as
manufactured by ACO Polymer Products, Inc. , 12080 Revenna
Road, Chardon, Ohio 44024 (800-543-4764) , or approved equal.
The channels shall be made with chemically resistant polyester
or vinylester resin polymer concrete with a minimum 28 days
compressive strength of 11,000 psi, and shall meet or exceed
the testing requirements of ASTM C39-86.
B. Pre-cast Polymer Concrete Trench Drainage channel sections
shall be set in cast-in-place concrete with a minimum 28 day
compressive strength of 4,000 psi, type II cement.
C. Cast Iron galvanized grates shall conform with ASTM A48, Class
30, with grate openings meeting the requirements of federal,
state, and local requirements adopted under the American with
Disabilities Act.
D. Each Trench Drain system shall include the following, all made
by one manufacturer.
I
1 . Channel
2. Catch Basin
3. Inlet and Outlet Caps
4. Quicklock Gratings
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l' —2323 02600-6 02/28/05
Where masonry is exposed to salt water, Type II shall be
used.
5. Hydrated lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM D207.
6. Sand for masonry mortar shall conform to the gradation
requirements of ASTM C144.
C. Steps for manholes shall be Steel Reinforced Copolymer
Polypropylene plastic step with at least a 14-inch wide
stepping surface conforming to ASTM C478 and A615.
D. Manhole Frame and Cover: Grey iron casting conforming to ASTM
A48, heavy duty, with word "DRAIN" embossed on cover. Letter
size shall be three inches. Frame and cover shall have a
minimum clear opening of 24 inches and have a minimum weight
of 475 pounds. Frame and cover shall be LeBaron LK 110A or
approved equal.
2.04 CATCH BASINS AND LEACHING CHAMBER
A. Precast catch basins and leaching chamber shall be
manufactured in accordance with ASTM Designation C478
(4,000 psi minimum compressive strength) to the diameters and
depths shown on the Drawings. All structures shall be
designed for HS-20 loading. Precast unit joints shall be
sealed with butyl rubber in accordance with ASTM 0990.
B. Where required for hood, a slot and opening shall be cast in
the catch basin wall for mounting the cast iron hood over the
outlet pipe.
h C. When approved by the Engineer, catch basins and leaching
chamber may be constructed with brick or concrete block walls
and poured reinforced concrete bases as an alternative to
precast concrete units.
D. Brick and concrete block and other materials shall conform to
Article 2.03B.
E. Cast iron frames and grate shall conform to ASTM A48,
Class 30. When located in accessible ways, grate openings
shall meet the requirements of federal, state, and local
regulations adopted under the Americans with Disabilities Act.
F. Single catch basin frame and grate shall be LeBaron LF-246 or
approved equivalent with four flanges or with three flanges
for use with gutter inlet or abutting vertical curb. Frame
I and grate for catch basin with shallow cover shall be LeBaron
LF 244 or approved equivalent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02600-5 02/28/05
2.03 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES
A. Precast Units
1. Structure: 48-inch minimum inside diameter, precast
concrete units (4,000 psi minimum compressive strength)
with eccentric cone section tapering to 24-inch diameter
and monolithic base section meeting the requirements of
ASTM C478. All structures shall be designed for HS-20
loading, and shall be sized to accept pipe penetrations
as shown on the drawings. Vendor/manufacturer shall be
responsible for review of pipe configuration and sizing
to determine minimum size/diameter of structure.
2. Precast Unit Joint Seals: Butyl rubber O-ring type seals
meeting the requirements of ASTM C990.
3. Openings for pipe and materials to be embedded in the
walls of the manholes sections for joint seals shall be
cast in the sections at the required locations during
manufacture. Sections with incorrectly cast and patched
pipe openings will be rejected.
4. Openings shall be cast into the manhole sections to
receive entering pipes during manufacture. The openings I
shall be sized to provide a uniform 2 inch maximum
annular space between the outside of the pipe wall and
the opening in the riser. After the pipe is in position,
the annular space shall be solidly filled with nonshrink
mortar. Care shall be taken to assure that the openings
are located to permit setting of the entering pipe at its
correct elevation.
B. Masonry Units
1. Brick shall conform to Sewer Brick (Made from Clay or
Shale) , ASTM designation C32, Grade MS or Building Brick
(Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) , ASTM C62,
Grade SW.
2 . Concrete block shall be solid block and shall conform to
the Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units for
Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes, ASTM
designation C139 .
I
3 . Mortar shall be in conformance with ASTM C270, Type M.
The mortar shall be composed of Portland cement hydrated j
lime, and sand, in the proportions of 1 part cement to
1/4 part hydrated limit to 3-1/2 parts sand by volume.
4. Cement shall be Type I or II Portland cement conforming
to ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.l' —2323 02600-4 02/28/05
I
addition, any pipe may be inspected at the plant for
compliance with these specifications by an independent testing
laboratory selected and paid by the Owner. The Contractor
shall require the manufacturer's cooperation in these
inspections.
B. Inspection of the pipe may also be made after delivery. The
pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of
failure to meet any of the specification requirements, even
though pipe samples may have been accepted as satisfactory at
the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall
be marked for identification and shall be removed from the
site at once.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials for storm drainage system shall be new and
unused.
2.02 PIPE
A. Filter Fabric for Flared End Sections and Headwalls with Stone
Protection shall be Mirafi 140N, or approved equivalent.
B. High Density Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings with
smooth interior shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3350.
Four-inch through 10-inch diameter pipe corrugated
polyethylene drainage tubing shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M252. Twelve-inch through 60-inch diameter corrugated
polyethylene pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M294-
01, Types S. Standard 45 Degree "Y" connections shall be
fabricated to sizes shown on the Drawings.
Pipe joints and fittings shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M252 or AASHTO M294-01: Coupling bands shall conform
to the manufacturer's specifications. Couplers shall cover
not less than one corrugation on each section of pipe.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Pipe and fittings shall comply
with the requirements of ASTM D3034, rated SDR 35. Pipe shall
be continually marked with manufacturer's name, pipe size,
cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D3034
classification.
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/ Utilities 02/28/05
Package T.V —2323 02600-3
I
proposed for the work. Shop drawings shall be submitted MA,,
to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering material.
B. As-Built Drawings
I. Submit 6 copies of As-Built Drawings upon completion and
acceptance of work.
2. As-Built Drawings shall be complete and shall indicate
the true measurement and location, horizontal and
vertical, of all new drainage system construction. As-
Built drawings shall include a minimum of three ties
showing the distance to each catch basin and manhole from
fixed permanent objects. As-Built drawings shall also
contain any additional information required by the
municipality. Hard Copies of as-built shall be stamped
with the seal of a Licensed Land Surveyor and Licensed
Professional Engineer, and electronic copy of as-built
shall be compatible with AutoCAD 2000.
1.04 COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION
A. Coordinate the work with the termination of storm drain
connections at buildings, connections to municipal systems,
and trenching operations.
B. The contractor shall field verify and survey the size,
location and elevations of all existing pipe and utility lines
prior to ordering of materials for this utility system. A
report of the findings of the verification survey shall be
submitted to the engineer for information and comment.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
I
A. All materials shall be adequately protected from damage during
transit. Pipes shall not be dropped.
I
B. All pipe and other appurtenances shall be inspected before
placement in the work and any found to be defective from any
cause, including damage caused by handling, and determined by
the Engineer to be unrepairable, shall be replaced at no cost
to the Owner.
C. Storage and handling of pipes, manholes, catchbasins, oil-grit
separators, treatment units and other system appurtenances
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
1.06 INSPECTION
A. The manufacturer/supplier is responsible for the provision of
all test requirements specified for each type of pipe. In i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02600-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02600
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for furnishing and
installing the site storm drainage system.
B. The work includes:
1. Connection of proposed Site storm drainage system to
existing system, including coring of existing structure,
forming new invert and sealing of cored hole.
2. Construction of new site stormwater collection system,
complete with furnishing of all labor and materials,
excavation, backfill, testing and cleaning.
2. Connection of building drains from a point [ten] feet
outside of the foundations.
3. Construction related to installation of area drains,
field construction of manhole near boiler room,
connection of new system to existing headwall, and
plugging of un-used pipe entrances to existing manholes.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02240—Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
2. Section 02300—Earthwork
3. Section 02500—Water Supply System
4. Section 02570—Sewerage Collection System
5. Section 03301—Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03 SUBMITTALS
` A. Shop Drawings
1. Materials list of items proposed for the work.
2. Shop drawings or descriptive literature, or both, showing
dimensions, joint and other details of all materials
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Storm Drainage System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V—2323 02600-1 02/28/05
coliform, and the pipe section shall not be placed in service
until all of the repeat samples show no presence of coliform-
F. Furnish two copies of a Certificate of Disinfection Report to
the Engineer.
G. The Contractor shall pay all costs for all testing, flushing,
chlorinating; laboratory analyses, sampling, water supply and
municipal charges.
END OF SECTION 02500
Base Date: 6/03
I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28105
Package`F.V—2323 02500-15
I
allowable amount. Approval does not absolve the Contractor ►
from responsibility if leaks develop later within the period
of warranty.
3.13 DISINFECTION
A. Before being placed in service, all new water pipe shall be
chlorinated in accordance with ANSI/AWWA 0651 Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains.
B. The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be
determined by the Engineer in the field. Taps for
chlorination and sampling shall be installed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall uncover and backfill the
taps as required.
C. The pipe section being disinfected shall be flushed to remove
discolored water and sediment from the pipe. A 25 mg/l
chlorine solution in approved dosages shall be inserted
through a tap at one end while water is being withdrawn at the
other end of the pipe section. The chlorine concentration in
the water in the pipe shall be maintained at a minimum 25 mg/1
available chlorine during filling. To assure that this
concentration is maintained, the chlorine residual shall be
measured at regular intervals in accordance with procedures
described in Standard Methods and AWWA M12, Simplified
Procedure for Water Examination Section K.
D. During the application of the chlorine, valves shall be
manipulated to prevent the treatment dosage from flowing back
into the pipe supplying the water. Chlorine application shall
not cease until the entire pipe section is filled with
chlorine solution. The chlorinated water shall be retained in
the pipe for at least a twenty-four hour period. The treated
water shall contain a chlorine residual throughout the length
of the pipe section as indicated in AWWA C651.
I
E. Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be
flushed from the pipe section and replaced with water from the
distribution system. Prior to disposal of treated water the
Contractor shall check with local authorities to determine if
the discharge will cause damage to the receiving body or sewer
and, if required, the Contractor shall neutralize the
chlorinated water in accordance with Appendix B, AWWA C650.
Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the replacement water
may then be made by the Contractor in full accordance with
AWWA Specification C651. A minimum of three samples shall be
taken by the Contractor at locations directed by the Engineer
along the length of water pipe being chlorinated and sent to a
State approved private laboratory for analyses. The
Contractor shall rechlorine if the samples show presence of
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l'—2323 02500-14 02/28/05
I
i
structures, such as manholes, catch basins, retaining walls,
bridge abutments, parking garages, etc.
B. when spacing under A. above is not possible, Contractor shall
provide insulated water pipe for a minimum of three (3) feet
beyond the limits of the adjacent structure.
3.12 PRESSURE TESTING
A. Hydrostatic and leakage test shall be conducted in accordance
with AWWA Standard C600, and NFPA 24, Standards, except it
shall meet the leakage rates stated in Item D below as
directed by the Engineer. Testing shall be conducted by a
certified independent water testing company.
B. Conduct pipe tests after concrete thrust blocks have cured to
the required 3000 psi strength. Fill pipe 24 hours prior to
testing, and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use
only potable water.
C. Prior to pressure testing, the entire pipe section shall be
flushed to remove any rocks or debris which may have
inadvertently entered the pipe during construction.
D. once the pipe section has been filled at normal pressure and
all entrapped air removed, the Contractor shall raise the
pressure to 200 psi or two times the operating pressure
(whichever is greater) by a special pressure pump, taking
water from a small tank of proper dimensions for
satisfactorily measuring the rate of water pumped into the
pipe. This pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of 2
hours, during which time the line shall be checked for leaks.
Measured rate of water leakage shall not exceed the allowable
leakage as follows:
1. Domestic water service pipes only, without attached fire
service supply: meet latest edition of AWWA C600 series
leakage requirements for the type of pipe being
installed.
2. Fire protection piping and domestic water service pipe
with attached fire service piping: meet latest edition
of NFPA 24 leakage requirements or latest edition of AWWA
C600 series leakage requirements for the type of pipe
being installed, whichever criteria are more stringent.
Interior piping in vaults, buildings, etc. shall have zero
leakage.
Should leakage exceed the above rates, the Contractor shall
immediately locate the leak or leaks and repair them. Pipe
will be accepted only when leakage is zero, or less than the
j Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package` T —2323 02500-13
i
that the top of the sewer is at least 18 inches below the
bottom of the water main. When the elevation of the
sewer cannot be varied to meet the above requirements,
the water main shall be relocated to provide this
separation or reconstructed with mechanical-joint pipe
for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the sewer. On
full length of water main should be centered over the
sewer so that both joints will be as far from the sewer
as possible.
When it is impossible to obtain horizontal and/or vertical
separation as stipulated above, both the water main and sewer
shall be constructed of mechanical-joint cement lined ductile
iron pipe or other equivalent based on watertightness and
structural soundness. Both pipes shall be pressure tested by
an approved method to assure watertightness or both pipes
shall be encased in concrete.
3.09 GATE VALVES AND BOXES
A. Valves shall be set in firmly compacted and shaped soil. Where
the soil in the trench subgrade is found to be soft, loose,
freshly filled earth, unstable or unsuitable as a base, the
unsuitable material shall be excavated to such additional
depth and width as required. The excavated area shall be
backfilled with gravel or crushed stone, compacted and shaped.
B. Valve boxes shall be set centered and plumb over the operating
nuts of all valves. The top of each valve box shall be set to
finished grade with at least 10 inches of overlap remaining
between the upper sections for vertical adjustment. Minimum
overlap for lower, extension pieces shall be 4 inches.
C. Boxes shall he adequately supported during backfilling to
maintain vertical alignment.
3.10 HYDRANTS
I
A. Hydrants shall be installed at the locations and in
conformance with the details shown on the drawings.
B. Each hydrant shall be set vertically and be properly braced.
Hydrants shall be installed with thrust blocks or restrained
joints as specified in Articles 3.05 and 3.06. Care shall be
taken to ensure that thrust block concrete does not plug the
drain ports.
3.11 SEPARATION FROM STRUCTURES
A. Whenever possible, water pipes shall maintain a minimum
distance of three (3) feet from underground adjacent unheated I
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 02500-12 02/28/05
Number of Joints to Restraint
on Either Side of Fitting
Diameter 90 bend 45 bend 22 'A bend 11 1/ bend plug/cap
8" 30 13 6 3 38
10" 37 15 7 4 46
12" 43 18 9 4 54
16" 55 23 11 5 70
Tee Runs shall be restrained 20-feet either side of Tee
Tee Branch shall be restrained a minimum of three pipe lengths
Hydrant Branch: restrain entire branch
In-line valves: 20-feet either side of valve
B. No restraining is required in the direction of the existing
pipe if only a short length of it is exposed in the trench for
making a connection.
C. Restrained joint assemblies for push-on pipe and fittings
shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended installation procedures.
D. Restrained joint assemblies for mechanical joint pipe shall be
EBAA Iron Sales MEGALUG or approved equivalent.
3.08 WATER/SEWER SEPARATION
When a sewer pipe crosses above or below a water pipe, the following
procedures shall be utilized. The Contractor shall comply with these
following procedures:
A. Relation to Water Mains
1. Horizontal Separation: Whenever possible sewers shall be
laid at a minimum at least 10 feet, horizontally, from
any existing or proposed water main. Should local
conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10 feet, a
sewer may be laid closer than 10 feet to a water main if:
a. It is laid in a separate trench, or if;
I b. It is laid in the same trench with the water mains
located at one side on a bench of undisturbed earth,
and if;
c. In either case, the elevations of the top (crown) of
the sewer is at least 18 inches below the bottom
(invert) of the water main.
2. Vertical Separation: Whenever sewers must cross under
water mains, the sewer shall be laid at such an elevation
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package`F.1' —2323 02500-11
I
;I
spigot end of pipe for compression-type joint/mechanical-joint
connections and do not re-bevel. Assemble joints made with
sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance with the
recommendations of the coupling manufacturer using internal
stiffeners as previously specified for compression-type
joints.
C. Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks for pipe
anchorage, except where metal harness in indicated. Use
concrete, ASTM C94, having a minimum compressive strength of
3,000 psi at 28 days.
3.06 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS
A. Where pipes change horizontal and vertical direction, at
hydrants, tees and other fittings, and wherever abnormal
thrust forces may be developed, the Contractor shall construct
thrust and anchor blocks as detailed on the Drawings. They
shall be concrete, of minimum dimensions as detailed on the
Drawings or of adequate additional size to suit actual
conditions to withstand pressures anticipated, and shall be
founded in undisturbed soil.
B. Concrete for thrust blocks shall have a minimum 28 day's
compressive strength of 3,000 psi.
C. Fittings which do not use thrust blocks resting against
natural occurring material with passive resistance pressure of
1,500 psf shall be installed with a restrained joint system as I
specified in Article 3.06.
3.07 RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. Pipe with restrained joints shall be installed at locations
shown on the Drawings. Restrained joints shall be installed at
bends, reducers, tees, valves, dead ends, and hydrants. The
minimum length of pipe to be restrained on either side of the j
joint shall be as shown on the table below. The fittings of
the new piping shall be for restrained joints, as marked on
the Drawings.
I
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/ Utilities
Package `F.I'—2323 02500-10 02/28/05
prior to assembling the joint. After the nuts have been made
up finger tight, the bottom nut, then top and then
diametrically opposite nuts shall be progressively tightened.
Bolts shall be tightened to the torques listed:
Bolt Size Range of Torque
[Inchesl f Feet-Poundsl
5/8 45 - 60
3/4 75 - 90
1 inch 85 - 100
Under no conditions shall extension wrenches or a pipe over
the handle of an ordinary ratchet wrench be used to secure
greater leverage. After installation, a heavy bitumastic
coating shall be applied to all bolts and nuts.
Restraining device shall be ductile iron and shall have
dimensions such that it can be used with the standardized
mechanical joint bell and tee-head bolts conforming to
ANSI/AWWA A21.11 and ANSI/AWWA C153 latest revision.
3.05 LAYING OF PVC WATER PIPE
A. Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe and Associated
Fittings: Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and
fittings in accordance with section 3.01 entitled "General";
and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and
appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7,
"Installation" .
B. Jointing: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets
specified for this type joint, using either elastomeric-gasket
bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to
pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on
joint ends having factory-made bevel; for push-on joint
connections to metal fittings, valves, and other accessories,
cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a
bevel approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used
for the same type of joint. Use an approved lubricant
recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on joints.
Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in
accordance with the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7,
1 "Installation, " for pipe joint assembly. Assemble push-on
joints for connection to fittings, valves, and other
accessories in accordance with the applicable requirements of
AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make compression-type
joints/mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts,
nuts, and internal stiffeners previously specified for this
` type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable
requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and with the
recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off
kCooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.P —2323 02500-9 02/28105
type of materials to be used in bedding and backfilling and
method of placement shall conform to the requirements of
Section 02300.
C. All pipes shall be clean before laying. When laying is
stopped for any reason, the open ends of the pipe shall be
closed by watertight plugs or other approved means. If water
is in the trench when work is resumed, the plug shall not be
removed until the trench has been dewatered and all danger of
water entering the pipe has been eliminated.
Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be
provided if required to avoid utility conflicts.
D. When cutting of pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by
machine, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of
the pipe. Cut ends of pipe to be used with a push-on bell
shall be beveled to conform to the manufactured spigot end.
Cement lining shall be undamaged.
E. Maximum allowable deflection for pipe laid without fittings
shall not exceed the allowable amount established by the pipe
manufacturer and shall not exceed those shown in AWWA 0600.
F. The pipe shall be laid with a minimum cover of 5.5-feet below
finished grade, with a maximum of 6-feet.
G. All piping shall be laid in the dry with the spigot ends
pointing in the direction of flow. Installation shall proceed
from the downstream to upstream in all cases.
3.03 JOINTING DUCTILE IRON PIPE PUSH-ON TYPE]
A. Push-on joints shall be made in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. A rubber gasket shall be
inserted in the groove of the bell end of the pipe and the
joint surface cleaned and lubricated using the pipe
manufacturer's suggested methods and materials. The plain end
of the pipe to be laid shall be inserted in alignment with the
bell of the pipe to which it is to be jointed and pushed home
with a jack or by other means. After joining the pipe, a
metal feeler gauge shall be used to make certain that the
rubber gasket is correctly located and has not been twisted or
otherwise displaced.
3.04 JOINTING MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical joints shall be made in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Mechanical joints shall be made
by first cleaning the surfaces against which the gaskets will
come in contact with a wire brush. The gasket, bell, and
spigot shall be lubricated by washing with soapy water just
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 02500-8 02/28/05
` specified in AWWA C504. Hydrants shall be given two coats of
primer paint before shipment. Contractor shall field paint
hydrants red, the color required by the municipality, after
installation. Hydrant bonnets shall be silver for water mains
with diameters less than 20-inches.
2.09 THRUST RESTRAINTS
A. Thrust restraints (cement concrete thrust blocks, clamps and
tie rods, and restrained joints) shall be installed in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and per
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. The Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer the method[s]
to be used to restrain thrust prior to installing fittings and
hydrant. Test pits may be required in areas of existing
utilities to determine the exact location and dimensions of
thrust restraints required.
C. Concrete for thrust blocks shall have a minimum 28 day
compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Concrete shall be no leaner
than one part cement, 2 'A parts sand and 5 'h pates stone.
D. In addition to concrete thrust blocks, Megalug joint
restraints shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All water pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants and other
appurtenances shall be installed at the locations as shown on
the Drawings.
The proposed location and vertical alignment may be altered to
avoid conflicts with existing and proposed utilities, as
approved by the Engineer.
B. Contractor to verify the location, size, invert and type of
existing pipes at all points of connection prior to ordering
new utility materials.
I
3.02 LAYING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be installed in
accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C600.
B. Each length of pipe shall be laid with firm, full and even
bearing throughout its entire length, in a trench prepared and
maintained in accordance with Section 02300, Earthwork. The
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package`F.l' —2323 02500-7
D. Covers shall be close fitting and substantially dirt-tight.
The top of the cover shall be flush with the top of the box
rim. The word WATER shall be cast in the top surface of the
cover.
E. Valve Boxes shall be American made.
2.08 HYDRANTS
A. Hydrants shall include:
Make and Model: Kennedy: The Guardian
American Darling: B-62 or M-94
U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co. : Metropolitan
Type of Thread: National Standard
Number of Outlets: 2 - 2-1/2 inch hose connection
1 - 4-1/2 inch steamer connection
Diameter of Opening: 5-1/4 inch
Size and Type of Inlet Connection: 6 inch mechanical joint
Direction of opening: Open Left (counter-clockwise) . Hydrant
shall be marked with an arrow and the word "OPEN" to indicate
direction to turn stem to open the hydrant.
Depth of Cover: 5'-6"
Size and Shape of Operating Nut: Pentagonal
B. Hydrant shall conform the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C502,
latest issue, and be American made. Hydrant seats shall be
bronze. All internal parts shall be removable through the
bonnet. Seals shall be of the dual o-ring type and bonnet
shall be provided with leak-free lubrication. Hydrants shall
employ a nylon antifriction thrust bearing to reduce operating
torque and it shall not require lubrication. Stem stoop nut
shall protect components below from excess torque.
Hydrants shall be traffic models, equipped with a break
flange.
C. Bolts and nuts shall be made from a corrosion-resistant
material. Hydrant shall be able to rotate 360-degrees. Nozzles
shall be threaded in and pinned. Hydrants shall have a
positive closing, self-cleaning drain valve and drainage area
shall be completely bronze or brass-lined.
i
D. After being thoroughly cleaned, all iron work set below grade
shall be painted with two coats of asphalt varnish as
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Water Supply System �
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package'F.1'—2323 02500-6 02/28/05
I
2.06 GATE VALVES
A. Gate valves shall be resilient seated conforming to the
requirements of AWWA C509 or AWWA C515, solid wedge type
valves conforming to the requirements of AWWA Standard C500,
of the type used by the municipal Water Department. Valves
shall be rated for 200-psi minimum working pressure and a
minimum 300-psi test pressure. Gate Valves shall be American
made.
B. Gate valves shall be cast iron body, double-disc, parallel
seat or resilient seat, non-rising stem with O-ring type
stuffing box for valves 3 inches to 16 inches size. Valves
shall have mechanical joints equal to AWWA 0111.
C. Gate valves shall open to the right [clockwise] .
D. Bolts, studs and nuts shall be made from a corrosion-resistant
material such as low-zinc bronze, nickel copper alloy, or
stainless steel. All ferrous parts, except finish or bearing
surfaces, shall be given 2-coats of asphaltum varnish. After
the valves are assembled and tested, a third coat shall e
applied on the exterior. The body ring shall be free from any
coating. All external fasteners shall be Stainless Steel Type
304 or 306.
E. Operating nut shall be 2 inches square at the base, tapering
to 1-15/16 inches square at the top.
F. Post indicator valves, when indicated on the drawings, are
used to actuate and indicate the opened or closed status of
the installed value and indicator posts shall be listed by
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and approved by Factory
Mutual Research (FM) and shall be of a manufacturer approved
by the local utility company.
2.07 VALVE BOXES
A. Each gate valve shall be provided with a valve box and cover.
B. Valve boxes shall be of the adjustable, telescoping, heavy-
pattern type designed and constructed to prevent the direct
transmission of traffic loads to the pipe or valve.
C. Valve boxes shall be cast iron, asphalt coated with cast iron
` covers. The smallest inside diameter of the shaft shall not
be less than 5-1/4 inches. The lower section of the box shall
be designed to enclose the operating nut and stuffing box of
the valve. Provisions shall be made for adjustment through at
least 6-inches vertically while retaining a lap of at least 4
{ inches between sections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.V —2323 02500-5
I
i
i
i
2.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE FITTINGS
A. All ductile iron pipe fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA
C110/A21.10 gray and ductile iron standard fittings or
ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53-84 ductile iron compact fittings 3 inch
through 16 inch, Class 350. The ductile iron compact fittings
shall be marked in accordance with Sec. 53-11, which states
that the fittings shall have distinctly cast on them the
identity of this standard, C153; the pressure rating, 350 psi;
nominal diameter of openings; manufacturer's identification;
the country where cast; the letters "DI" or word "Ductile";
and the number of degrees or fraction of the circle on all
bends.
B. The type of fittings for pipe and valve connections shall be
determined by the Contractor in accordance with the
requirements shown on the Drawings prior to ordering the
fittings.
C. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined and coated as
specified for pipe.
D. The branch tees for hydrant or stubs shall be mechanical joint
anchoring tees.
2.05 DUCTILE IRON PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Couplings and accessories shall be pressure rated at least
equal to that of the pipe. Couplings shall be Dresser Style
153, Smith Blair 441 style or approved equivalent. The
couplings shall be provided with corrosion resistant nuts and
bolts
B. Transition couplings for joining pipe of different diameters
shall be Dresser Style 162 or approved equivalent. Coupling
shall be provided with corrosion resistant nuts and bolts.
C. After assembly, all exterior surfaces including the bolts and
nuts shall be completely coated with two coats of a heavy-duty
protective asphaltic coating. The interior of the coupling
shall be epoxy-coated. Epoxy coating shall conform to AWWA
C550.
2.05 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JOINTS
A. Joints shall be either push-on or mechanical joints conforming
to ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. Push-on and mechanical joints shall
be provided with required gaskets, lubricants and accessories
conforming to ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.I' —2323 02500-4 02/28/05
shall be repaired, realigned or replaced as required by the
Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The Drawings are diagrammatic only and are intended to
indicate the extent, but not all details, of the system which
shall be constructed. All materials are not shown; but the
Contractor shall furnish and install all materials required
for the complete system.
2.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Ductile iron pipe shall be designed in accordance with ANSI
A21.50/AWWA C150 and manufactured in accordance with ANSI
A21.51/AWWA C151. Ductile Iron pipe shall be American made.
B. Ductile iron pipe shall be Class 52 furnished in 18-foot or
20-foot nominal lengths.
C. Pipes shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4, except that the cement lining shall be
double thickness. The interior of all pipes shall have a
double seal coat of asphaltic material applied over the cement
lining in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.Inside seal
coat shall not impart taste or odor to the water contained
within.
D. The exterior of all pipe shall be factory coated with a coat
of asphaltic material conforming to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.
E. Restrained joint assemblies for mechanical fittings shall be
EBAA Iron Sales MEGALUG or approved equivalent.
Restrained joint pipe shall be American Ductile Iron Pipe
FLEX-RING Restrained Joint Pipe [4 inches - 12 inches) ,
manufactured of ductile iron, all in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C151/A21.51, Pressure Rating 350 psi, or approved equivalent.
U.S. Pipe TR FLEX restrained push-on joint pipe [4 inches - 54
inches] , manufactured in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C141 A21.51, pressure class 350 for sizes 4 inches
through 24 inches and pressure class 250 for sizes 30 inches
through 54 inches.
U.S. Pipe FIELD LOK Gasket Instant Joint Restraint [4 inches -
24 inches] , manufactured in accordance with the requirements
of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 for working pressure of 250 psi, or
approved equivalent.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.V—2323 02500-3
The Water Department may require the work to be done at night AWN
during the low use time period.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shots Drawings
1. Submit Shop Drawings or descriptive literature, or both,
showing dimensions, joints and other details of all
materials to be furnished. Shop Drawings shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering
materials.
B. As-Built Drawings
1. Submit 6 copies of As-Built Drawings upon completion and
acceptance of work.
2. As-Built Drawings shall be complete and shall indicate
the true measurements and locations, horizontal and
vertical, of all new construction. As-Built Drawings
shall include a minimum of three ties to each gate valve
box from fixed permanent objects. As-Built Drawings
shall also contain any additional information required by
the municipality. Hard Copies shall be stamped with the
seal of a Licensed Land Surveyor and Licensed
Professional Engineer, and an electronic copy of the
survey shall be compatible with AutoCAD 2000. A
i
1.06 _DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
i
A. Storage of pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and other water
line appurtenances on the site shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
B. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to
prevent injury to the pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and
other water line appurtenances. Pipe or fittings shall not be
dropped. All pipe or fittings shall be examined before laying
and no piece shall be installed which is found to be
defective. Any damage to pipe and fitting coatings shall be
repaired as directed by the Engineer.
C. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and other water system
appurtenances which are defective from any cause, including
damage caused by handling, and determined by the Engineer as i
unrepairable, shall be unacceptable for installation and shall
be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
I
D. Pipe, and all water system appurtenances that are damaged or
disturbed through any cause prior to acceptance of the work
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities "" I
Package`F.V—2323 02500-2 02/28105
i
I
SECTION 02500
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
PART 1--{GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for the proposed water
system pipe, fittings appurtenances and services.
B, The work includes:
1. Furnishing and installation of water distribution pipe,
valves and valve boxes, hydrants, pipe fittings, anchors,
thrust restraints, required accessories and connections
to existing water systems.
2. Furnishing and installing new hydrants and valve boxes to
grade.
3. Disinfecting and testing of the system.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02300 - Earthwork
2. Section 03301 - Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03 STANDARDS
A. AWWA - American Water Works Association.
B. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 COORDINATION WITH THE MUNICIPALITY
A. The municipal Water Department shall be notified prior to
starting construction of any portion of the municipal water
system.
B. The closing of valves necessary for making connections with
existing municipal system will be done by the Water Department
employees, assisted by the Contractor. Sufficient notice
shall be given the Water Department of planned connection. No
allowance will be made for any delay in closing of valves. A
48-hour notice shall be given to residents or businesses
affected by the shut-down, and shall be done by the Contractor
` under the direction of the Engineer.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Water Supply System
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package`F.1' —2323 02500-1
I
B. The pavement and curb subgrade shall be fine graded to the
location, elevations and cross slope shown on the Drawings.
C. Subgrades in in-situ soils in excavation areas and in
embankment areas shall be compacted during fine grading to 90
percent of maximum dry density in conformance with Section
02300, Earthwork.
3.02 SUBBASE MATERIAL PLACEMENT
A. Subbase material shall not be placed until the Engineer has
approved the fine grading, compaction and condition of the
subgrade.
B. Subbase material shall be placed and spread on the approved
subgrade in layers not exceeding eight inches in thickness by
approved self spreading equipment. Any displacement of the
compacted subgrade material by the equipment shall be restored
to the required grade and recompacted before placement of the
subbase material.
C. Subbase material shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum
dry density in conformance with Section 02300, Earthwork.
D. The surface of the subbase material shall be fine graded to
the location, elevations and cross slope shown on the Drawings
during final layer compaction operations.
AM*,
3.03 BASE MATERIAL PLACEMENT
A. Base material shall not be placed until the Engineer has
approved the fine grading, compaction and condition of the
subbase material.
B. Base material shall be spread on the approved subbase in
layers not exceeding four inches in thickness by approved self
spreading equipment. Any displacement of the subbase material
by equipment shall be restored to the required grade and
recompacted before placement of the base material.
C. Base material shall be compacted to 95 percent of dry density
in conformance with Section 02300, Earthwork.
D. The surface of the base material shall be fine graded to the
proposed location, elevations and cross slope shown on the I
Drawings during final layer compaction operations.
END OF SECTION 02320
Base Date: 6/03
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Pavement Subbase and Base
Foundation/Site/ Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02320-2 02/28/05
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02320
PAVEMENT SUBBASE AND BASE
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for the preparation of the
subgrade for and placement of granular pavement subbase and
base materials.
B. The work includes:
1. Fine grading and compaction of pavement subgrade.
2. Furnishing, placing and compacting of subbase and base
materials.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Other specification Sections which directly relate to the work
of this Section include:
1. Section 02300-Earthwork
2. Section 02700—Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
3. Section 02725—Curbing
4. Section 03301—Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 GRAVEL SUBBASE AND BASE
A. Gravel shall conform to the requirements of Earthwork Section
02300
2.02 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE SUBBASE AND BASE
A. Dense graded crushed stone shall conform to the requirements
of Earthwork Section 02300.
I
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
I
4 A. All subsurface utility construction shall be completed before
fine grading is begun.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Pavement Subbase and Base
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02320-1 02/28/05
j
G. Placed fill materials which become disturbed shall be regraded and recompacted. Fill
materials which become contaminated shall be removed and replaced, as directed by
the Architect.
3.10 DUST CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall employ all possible methods and/or materials to prevent the
spread of dust. Chemical materials may not be used on subgrades of areas to be
seeded or planted. Contractor shall provide dust control on a daily basis as required
and when directed by the Architect.
3.11 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS AND CLEANUP
A. Surplus excavated materials not required to complete site construction and unsuitable
excavated materials shall, unless directed otherwise by the Architect, become the
property of the Contractor who shall remove and legally dispose of such materials
from the site at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. At the end of all excavation, filling and grading operations and before acceptance of
the work, the Contractor shall remove all debris, rubbish, etc., from the site. He shall
dispose of them in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. The premises shall be left
clean, presentable, and satisfactory.
3.12 DEFICIENCY OF FILL MATERIAL
A. Provide required additional acceptable fill material from off site borrow sources to
complete the work if a sufficient quantity of suitable material is not available from the
required excavation on the project site.
END OF SECTION-
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 02300-20 02/28/05 40"0
D. Frost Protection: Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures
may be expected, unless work can be completed to subgrade or piping can be installed
and backfilled the same day. Protect the excavation from frost if placing of concrete
or piping is delayed, as approved by Landscape Architect. Protect foundation soils
from frost penetration after the footings have been cast.
E. The Contractor shall keep the area under this Contract clear and free of accumulation
of snow, ice and frozen ground within the Limit of Contract lines as required to carry
out the work at no additional cost to the Contract. The Contractor will be solely
responsible for preventing frost penetration into the foundation soil below footings and
slab for the duration of this Contract.
F. No work shall be installed on frozen ground.
3.9 ROUGH GRADING
A. Rough grading shall include the shaping,trimming, rolling, and refinishing of all
surfaces of the subbase, shoulders, and earth slopes, and the preparation of grades as
shown on the Drawings. The grading of shoulders and sloped areas may be done by
machine methods. All ruts shall be eliminated. Traffic of men and equipment across
soil subgrade areas shall be prohibited following excavation to the required lines and
grades.
B. If, during the progress of the Work any pipe, drain or other construction is damaged
due to operations under this Contract, the Contractor shall repair all damage at no
additional cost to the Owner and restore damaged areas to their original conditions.
C. Do all other cutting, filling and grading to the lines and grades indicated on the
Drawings. Grade evenly to within the dimensions required for grades shown on
Drawings and as specified herein. No stones larger than four inches (4") in largest
dimension shall be placed in upper six inches of fill. Fill shall be left in a compacted
state at the end of the work day and sloped to drain.
D. The Contractor shall bring all areas to grades as shown on the Drawings and in the
details. The Architect, however, may make such adjustments in grades and alignments
as are found necessary to avoid special conditions encountered.
E. No rubbish of any description shall be allowed to enter fill material. Such material
shall be removed from the site.
F. Wherever streets, lawns, or sidewalks or other items contained within or outside the
Limit of Contract lines have been excavated in fulfilling the work required under this
Contract, this Contractor shall furnish and install all materials necessary to bring finish
surfaces level with the existing adjacent surfaces. All work shall be installed to match
the existing conditions in accordance with the governing authority. Notify the proper
authorities prior to restoring surfaces outside the Contract Limit Lines.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.F —2323 02300-19
A. All requirements for description, placement, compaction and spreading of fill materials
as specified herein shall be applicable to backfilling operations.
B. Backfill materials as specified herein shall be used as bedding and backfill around
drainage pipes, around structures and for other uses as illustrated on the Drawings.
C. Do not commence backfilling operations for trenches and structures until all piping,
etc., has been installed, tested and approved, and the locations of all pipe and
appurtenances have been recorded. Backfill carefully by hand around pipe to depth on
one foot above top of pipe using material specified herein, and tamping firmly in
layers not exceeding six inches, compacting with hand rammers or mechanical
tampers.
D. Backfill materials as specified shall be placed to the full width of the trench as
indicated on Drawings. After a pipe is bedded, the trench shall be filled to the
centerline of the pipe with fill as specified except at the joint. After the joint is
inspected, that portion shall be filled in. Material under and around the pipe shall be
carefully and thoroughly compacted to the densities specified herein.
E. From the centerline of the pipe to a point twelve inches above the top of the pipe the
backfill shall be placed by hand and compacted with mechanical tampers to not less
than 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content of the material. above
this point, backfill may be placed by machine in layers six inches (6") deep and
compacted to the densities specified herein. This backfill shall be extended as shown
on the Detail Drawings. Backfill simultaneously all sides of pipe or structure.
3.8 DRAINAGE, DEWATERING AND FROST PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall control the grading in areas under construction on the site so that
the surface of the ground will properly slope to prevent accumulation of water in
excavated areas and adjacent properties.
B. Should surface, rain or groundwater be encountered during the operations, the
Contractor shall furnish and operate pumps and related equipment, including standby
equipment, and all necessary piping to keep all excavations clear of water at all times
and shall be responsible for any damage to the subgrade, completed work or adjacent
properties from such water. All piping exposed above surface for this use shall be
properly covered to allow traffic to pass without obstruction. Dispose of water
through temporary pipelines or ditches with outfall to natural drainage courses.
Prevent erosion and siltation of surrounding areas.
i
C. The presence of groundwater in soil will not constitute a condition for which an
increase in the Contract price may be made. Under no circumstances place concrete
fill, lay piping or install appurtenances in excavations containing free water.
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 02300-18 02/28/05 ^""
2) Top twelve inches of
subgrades in cut 95%
b. Within lawn and planting areas:
1) All fill within eighteen
inches of finished subgrade 92%
2) All fill below 18 inches from
finished grade 90%
E. Filling shall be done only after the area to be filled has been observed by the Architect.
The Contractor shall notify the Architect when excavation is ready for formal
inspection. All areas to receive fill shall be proofrolled by at least two passes of the
compaction equipment to be utilized for controlled placement of compacted fill, or
other approved equipment.
F. The Architect reserves the right to disapprove of compaction equipment being used for
compacting if he deems the equipment in use to be unsuited or inadequate to compact
materials to the specified densities within a reasonable length of time.
G. All fill is to be placed "in the dry" to which end, dewatering may be required. The
Contractor shall dewater excavated areas as required to perform the work and in such a
manner as to preserve the undisturbed condition of the excavated subgrade.
H. In freezing weather, a layer of fill shall not be left in an uncompacted state at the close
of a days operations. Prior to terminating the operations for the day, the final layer of
fill, after compaction, shall be rolled with a steel-wheeled roller to eliminate ridges of
soil left by compaction equipment.
I. Before filling against walls, the permanent structure must be completed and
sufficiently aged to attain strength required to resist fill pressures without damage.
Temporary bracing of the permanent structure walls will not be permitted. Correct any
damage to structure caused by filling operations at no cost to the Owner. Place no
stones over 4 inches in diameter closer than 18 inches to wall surfaces.
J. In the case of lawn and planting areas, compaction requirements for subgrades and
fills shall be considered minimums and maximums within the density percentages
called for, and any overcompaction of subgrades or fills which would be detrimental to
lawn or planting objectives shall be corrected by loosening subgrades or fills through
tilling or other means and recompacting to specified compaction limits.
K. If fill is placed adjacent to a slope, then the slope shall be adequately benched to
receive fill. All fill shall be placed in horizontal layers against the slope.
3.7 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES AND STRUCTURES
I
I Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
I + Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.F —2323 02300-17
i
i
D. Proof-rolling shall be visually observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or Testing
Agency. No proof-rolling shall be accomplished without observation of the
Geotechnical Engineer or Testing Agency.
E. Soil that exhibits soft, weaving or other instability as determined by the Engineer shall
be removed and replaced with compacted Gravel Borrow at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.6 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
A. Provide material conforming to these specifications and referenced Standards for all
additional required fill at no additional cost to the Owner if sufficient quality or
quantity of suitable material is not available on site.
B. Finished grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform levels or slopes between
points where levels are given or between such points and existing finished grades.
C. All areas to be filled or backfilled shall be free of construction debris, refuse,
compressible or decayable materials and standing water. Do not place fill when
materials or material below it are frozen. No fill material containing ice or frozen
lumps shall be used.
D. Material shall be placed in evenly distributed horizontal layers over entire area, spread
and compacted as specified.
i
1. Remove all debris, organic materials or otherwise unsuitable materials from
areas to be backfilled or filled.
2. Deposit fill and backfill in successive layers having a loose lift thickness not
more than 6-inches for hand operated equipment and 12-inches for heavy (10-
ton) vibratory rollers. Each layer shall moistened and thoroughly compacted by
roller, pneumatic tamper, or other approved method.
i
3. Moisture-density determinations shall be performed on representative soil
samples in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D.
4. Field density tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM D1556. The
following percentages of maximum dry densities shall be achieved for fill
materials or prepared subgrades.
a. Under structures, footings, paved surfaces, drainage piping, utilities and
other improvements:
1) All fills 95%
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02300-16 02/28/05 1
D. Utilities or piping shall not be laid directly on boulders,cobbles or other hard material.
This material shall be removed to a minimum of six inches below the bottom of pipe at
all points and backfilled or compacted as specified.
E. In general, the width of trenches shall be kept to a minimum and in the case of piping
shall not exceed the sum of the pipe's outside diameter plus 2'0" to at least twelve (12")
inches above the pipe.
F. Provide shoring, sheeting, and/or bracing at excavations, as required,to assure
complete safety against collapse of earth at the side of excavations. Provide shoring of
public utility lines where exposed in nea excavations in accordance with rules and
regulations of the local authorities, at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 SHORING AND SHEETING
A. Shoring and bracing of trenches and other excavations shall be in accordance with the
latest requirements of the Department of Labor and Industries Industrial Bulletin No.
12, Section 10 and subsequent amendments.
B. Provide shoring of existing utility lines where exposed in new excavations in
accordance with rules and regulations of the local authorities or utility owner, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. Provide shoring of existing utility lines where exposed in new excavations in
accordance with rules and regulations of the local authorities or utility owner at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D. All sheeting, shoring, and bracing involved shall be removed by the Contractor after
the completion of the permanent structures,in a manner so as not to disturb or mar the
structures. Sheeting may be left in place only by written permission from the
Architect, subject to such conditions as the Architect may require. No payment will be
made by the Owner for such sheeting and shoring and bracing left in place.
3.5 PROOF-ROLLING
A. All areas to receive fill or support footings shall be proof-rolled prior to placing fill or
constructing the footings as indicated below unless otherwise directed by the
Architect.
B. Proof-rolling foundation subgrade in trenches shall be accomplished by making at
least 5 passes over the area using a vibratory plate compactor. In open areas, proof-
rolling shall be accomplished by a heavy vibratory drum compactor making at least 4
complete passes over the area.
C. Proof-rolling pavement subgrade or areas to receive fill shall be proof-rolled using a
heavy vibratory drum compactor making at least 4 passes of the area.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 02300-15 02/28/05
F. No excavation will be permitted below a line drawn downwards at 2 horizontal to 1
vertical from the underside of the closest edge of any in-place footing or utility at a
higher elevation without providing adequate sheeting and bracing as defined above to
prevent all movement of the in-place footing or utility.
H. Removal of existing paving, sidewalk, and curb shall be for the full depth thereof and
shall include any base courses. The Contractor shall use power saws or other suitable
tools, equipment, and methods for cutting and trimming, that will remove the materials
to the neat lines as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Architect, with a
minimum damage to pavement, sidewalk, and curbs that are to remain. Damage done
at these locations shall be repaired and restored by the Contractor at his expense.
I. The ground adjacent to all excavation shall be graded or shall have a bituminous
concrete berm to prevent surface water from running into the excavation. Keep
excavations free from water. No claims for additional cost will be allowed for pumping
and draining required for excavations.
J. It is assumed that the Contractor has fully familiarized himself with subsurface
conditions and that the Contract Sum has included all necessary drainage costs for the
Work under this Section.
3.3 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Excavate as necessary for all drainage pipes, utilities and related structures and
appurtenances, and for any other trenching necessary to complete the work.
B. Definitions:
1. Trench shall be defined as an excavation of any length where the width is less
than twice the depth and where the shortest distance between payment lines
does not exceed ten (10) feet. All other excavations shall be defined as open
excavations.
2. The words "invert" or "invert elevation" as used herein shall be defined as the
elevation at the inside bottom surface of the pipe or channel.
3. The words "bottom of the pipe" as used herein shall be defined as the base of
the pipe at its outer surface.
C. In general, machine excavation of trenches will be permitted with the exception of
preparation of pipe beds which will be hand work. Excavate by hand or machine
methods to at least six (6") inches below the bottom of pipe or as shown on the
Drawings. Excavation to final grade shall be made in such a manner as to maintain the
undisturbed bearing character of the soils exposed at the excavation level.
i
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 02300-14 02/28/05
i
H. When the plans require excavation in areas in close proximity to existing buildings,
roads, structures and utilities it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at his
expense to use satisfactory means and methods to protect and maintain the stability of
such roads, and structures located immediately adjacent to but outside the limits of
excavation.
I. Do not excavate to full depth for footings in freezing weather unless concrete or
backfill can be placed immediately. Following the placement of concrete footings,
soil beneath footings shall be adequately protected from frost.
J. All foundations shall bear directly upon the natural undisturbed soil or accepted
compacted fill.
K. All soil bearing surfaces shall be carefully hand-cleaned of all loose soil. The final cut
to expose foundation bearing surfaces consisting of soil shall be made utilizing a
smooth edged excavating bucket or a bucket with teeth placed horizontally to prevent
disturbance of the bearing surface. Upon completion of excavation to the final foot-
ing subgrade, a 3-inch thickness of crushed stone or a lean concrete mud mat shall be
placed to protect the bearing surface from disturbance. All disturbed bearing surfaces
shall be repaired and recompacted to the specified density.
L. No excavation shall be made below the groundwater level without lowering the
�ow groundwater level. The bottom of the excavation must be free of standing water and
visible.
3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION
A. All materials required to be excavated to permit construction of the proposed building
and associated site improvements shall be included in the Contract Price as stated in
the Measurement and Payment Section.
B. General excavation shall consist of all excavation not included as trench excavation.
C. Work of cutting and filling shall be scheduled to efficiently use all acceptable
excavated materials as directed by the Architect. If necessary, such materials shall be
temporarily stockpiled between excavation and filling operations. The Architect shall
approve locations for stockpiles.
D. Temporary ditches shall be made as needed to drain off surface water to avoid damage
to areas of cut or fill. Such ditches shall be maintained as required for efficient
operation, at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. When excavations have reached ctor will peceive Architect shall be
to proceed iftified and
will assess the conditions. Th e Contra
conditions meet design requirements.
�
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
o0 o` Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.F —2323 02300-13
i
A. Compaction equipment shall consist of power-driven vibratory equipment and/or
hand-guided mechanical tampers as approved by the Architect and capable of
achieving the required degree of compaction in a reasonable length of time.
B. Provide sufficient numbers of equipment units of suitable types to spread, level, and
compact fill promptly upon delivery of materials.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Drawings indicate, in general, alignments, grade elevations and invert elevations.
Establish the lines and grades in conformity with the Drawings. The Architect,
however, may make such adjustments in the field in grades and alignments as are
found necessary in order to avoid interference with any special conditions
encountered.
B. Spot elevations shall govern over proposed contours. Where not otherwise indicated,
project site areas shall be given uniform slopes between points and existing established
grades.
C. Establish and maintain suitable stakes over all areas to be graded as directed, specified
or required. Maintain sufficient reference points at all times during construction to ,
properly perform the contract installation.
D. Mucky, soft, loose or spongy soils or other material designated by the Architect shall
be considered unsuitable for construction purposes and shall be removed from the site.
Material rendered unsuitable by the Contractor's methods of construction shall not be
defined as unsuitable soil for payment purposes. !
E. The Contractor shall take all required measures to avoid disturbance of the subgrade
particularly in consideration of the susceptibility of on-site soils to disturbance in the I
presence of surface water and groundwater.
F. Any excess excavation that has been carried, through error, beyond specified depths or
dimensions shall be backfilled by the Contractor at his own expense with compacted
gravel, with concrete, or with other material as directed by the Architect.
G. No excavation shall be deposited or stockpiled at any time so as to endanger portions
of new or existing structures, either by direct pressure or indirectly by overloading I
banks contiguous to the operation. Material, if stockpiled, shall be stored so as not to
interfere with the established sequence of the construction. If there is not sufficient
area available for stockpiling within the limits of the project, the Contractor will be
required to furnish his own area for stockpiling.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities I
Package `F.1' —2323 02300-12 02/28/05
i
I
a. Base for bituminous concrete pavement.
3. Granular Fill:
a. All fill within the building area not specifically designated as Gravel
Borrow or Crushed Stone shall be Granular Fill. Granular fill shall be
used as structural fill where indicated on the Drawings.
b. Trench backfill for drainage and utility structures.
C. Trench backfill for drain, sewer and water pipe.
d. For a minimum 3-foot width against all foundation walls having
perimeter foundation drains, as shown on the drawings.
e. Subbase for bituminous concrete road and parking lot pavements.
4. Crushed Stone:
a. As directed by the Architect.
b. Filter aggregate for drainage structure and retaining wall weepholes.
C. Below footings to protect subgrade
5. Sand for Pipe Bedding:
a. Bedding and blanket for utility lines or as shown on the drawings.
6. Ordinary Borrow:
a. For general site fill where other material is not specified.
7. Perimeter Drains:
a. Perimeter and underslab drains shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings and as approved by the Architect.
8. Geotextile Fabric:
I
` a. Shall be used under the crushed stone below the slab-on-grade, su-
rrounding the crushed stone around the perimeter drains and below
crushed stone below footings when directed by the Architect.
2.5 EQUIPMENT
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 02300-11 02/28/05
I
I
2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be placed in embankments
and compacted to the specified density in a reasonable length of time.
3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay,
decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other materials that will
corrode piping or other metal.
4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 110 lbs. per cubic foot.
5. Material from excavation on the site may be used as ordinary borrow if it meets
the above requirements and is approved by the Architect.
J. Sand for Pipe Bedding:
1. Material for pipe bedding shall meet the requirements specified in ASTM C144
K. Unsuitable Material:
1. Material containing organic matter, frozen materials, debris, clay, materials subject
to decomposition and silts too wet to be stabilized which, in the opinion of the
Soils Engineer, do not satisfy the design requirement, shall be unsuitable material.
2.2 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
A. Geotextile Fabric shall consist of Mirafi 140N or approved equal.
2.3 PERIMETER DRAINS
I
A. Perimeter drain pipe shall consist of four-inch or six-inch diameter perforated PVC
drain pipe as shown on the drawings and normally used for underdrains. The pipe
shall meet the requirements of Section M5.03.7 of the MHD Specifications.
Perforated pipe shall have 2 rows of 1/z-inch diameter holes spaced on not more than 6-
inch centers
2.4 USES OF MATERIALS
A. Fill materials listed above shall be utilized as follows and as otherwise indicated on the
Drawings, specified or directed.
1. Gravel Borrow:
a. Base for concrete pavements and slab.
b. Subbase for bituminous concrete road and parking lot pavements.
2. Dense Graded Crushed Stone: i
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 02300-10 02/28/05
No. Weight
2" 100
1-1/2" 70-100
3/4" 50-85
No. 4 30-55
No. 50 8-24
No. 200 3-10
G. Granular fill shall consist of inert natural non-recycled material that is hard, durable
stone, gravel and coarse sand, free from loam and clay, surface coatings, and
deleterious materials. The material shall be well graded between the following limits:
U.S. Sieve No. Percent Finer by
Weight
2/3 loose lift 100
thickness
10 30-95
40 10-70
200 0-15
The percent passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 10 percent where the material
is used as backfill adjacent to the exterior side of below ground walls.
H. Crushed stone shall consist of inert angular material derived from a stone quarry that is
hard, durable, washed stone, free of deleterious materials. Gradation shall conform to
MHD Specification Designation, M2.01.4, and the following:
U.S. Sieve Percent Finer by
No. Weight
1" 100
3/4" 90-100
1/2" 10-50
3/8" 0-20
No. 4 0-5
I. Ordinary borrow shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil, meeting the following
requirements:
f
1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen
materials, and stones larger than six inches maximum dimension and not more
than 35 percent passing the number 200 sieve.
i
i
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
} Foundation/Site/Utilities
I
Package `F.V —2323 02300-9 02/28/05
E. Compensation for all work required under this Section and not specifically covered
elsewhere, shall be included in the Contract Price for earthwork.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS
A. Fill materials shall conform to the following material descriptions. Gradation
requirements shall be determined by ASTM D422 unless specified otherwise.
B. All material shall be well graded between the gradation limits shown.
C. Material termed "recycled", "reprocessed", or the like containing ground building
debris, bituminous pavement or other similar non-soil materials or material coming
from sources other than natural sand or gravel borrow pits free of hazardous residue
shall not be used on this project.
D. On-site material for use in compacted fill shall meet the requirements specified herein
for the intended material. Processing material to meet the specifications shall be done
at no additional cost.
E. Gravel borrow shall consist of inert natural non-recycled material that is hard, durable
stone, gravel and coarse sand, free from loam and clay, surface coatings, and
deleterious materials. The material shall be well graded between the following limits:
U.S. Sieve Percent Finer by
No. Weight
3" 100
1/2" 50-85
No. 4 40-75
No. 10 30-60
No. 40 10-35
No. 100 5-20
No. 200 2-10
The amount passing the No. 100 sieve shall
be between 40%and 70%of that amount
passing the No.40 sieve
F. Dense graded crushed stone shall consist of angular material derived from a stone
quarry that is hard, durable and free of deleterious materials. Material shall be free
from clay, loam or other plastic material. Gradation shall conform to MHD
Specification Designation, M2.01.7, and the following:
U.S. Sieve Percent Finer by
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02300-8 02/28/05
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. See SECTION 01720-RECORD DOCUMENTS of Division 1 contained within these
specifications for provisions relative to record drawings.
1.13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. All excavated material is unclassified general excavation and shall be removed and
disposed of as required under this section.
B. If any part of the excavation is carried through error beyond the depth directed by the
Architect and the dimensions indicated on the Drawings, or called for in the specifica-
tions, the Contractor, at his own expense shall furnish and install compacted gravel fill
or concrete as directed by the Architect up to the required level and/or dimensions.
C. Excavation, removal, and/or disposal of unsuitable materials below the grades called
for on the Drawings and specified herein, and rock as herein defined, shall be paid for
in accordance with the "Unit Price Schedule" after removal of such materials has been
authorized by the Architect. The quantities of excavation,removal, disposal and back-
filling involving an adjustment of the Contract Price shall be calculated by the
Contractor's registered Civil Engineer and shall be subject to measurement verification
and approval by the Architect prior to the removal of such materials. The Contractor
shall not be compensated for removal of material lower than the authorized depths
determined by the Architect. The Contractor shall backfill unauthorized excavations
with material and in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
D. Payment Lines: The following payment lines shall be used for purposes of Contract
Price adjustment to determine volume of materials to be excavated,removed or back-
filled. No additional payment shall be made for material lying within the specified pay
limits.
1. Footings and slabs: A vertical line twelve inches from the toe of the footings.
The depth shall be measured to the 6-inches below the bottom of footings and
12-inches below the bottom of slabs as shown on the drawings.
2. Surface areas outside the building: To the depth of the required subgrade.
3. Utility structures: Twelve inches outside of the walls and to the bottom of the
structures.
4. Utility trenches: Width shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus two feet.
Maximum depth shall not exceed the bottom of the pipes, etc. Banks of
trenches shall be vertical
Earthwork
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.1' —2323 02300-7
I. Submittal of the Contractor's plans, design calculations and methods of construction ^"
shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the adequacy of the excavation
lateral support system, preventing damage to structures, utilities and streets adjacent to
excavations, and the safety of persons working within excavated areas and the public
at large.
1.11 TESTING
A. The Owner will retain a Geotechnical Engineer and/or Testing Agency to perform on-
site observation and testing during the construction operations. The Contractor shall
coordinate the individual's required presence on the site with the Architect and the
construction activities. The services of the Agency shall include, but shall not be
limited to the following:
1. Field testing to assess degree of compaction.
2. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill materials specified, as required.
3. Geotechnical engineering assessment of excavated footing and slab subgrades.
B. The Geotechnical Engineer's or Agency's presence does not include supervision or
direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees, or agents. The presence of
the Geotechnical Engineer or Agency or any observations and testing performed by their
representatives, or any notice or failure to give notice, shall not excuse the Contractor from
defects discovered in the Work.
C. The Contractor shall provide a 50-pound sample of each fill material from each proposed
source of supply. The Contractor shall include the name of the source and identify the
specification item for which the material is proposed. Allow sufficient time for testing and
evaluation of results before materials are needed. Once a source of supply for a specific
material has been accepted for use on the project, the Contractor will bear the cost of
testing for any additional materials submitted for the same use. This also includes the
event where the gradation of the material within the source changes.
D. Architect will be sole and final judge of suitability of all material
E. The Testing Agency will determine the maximum modified dry density and optimum water
content of fill materials in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D, and the in-place
density in accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167.
F. Tests of materials as delivered may be made from time to time. Materials in question shall
not be used pending test results. The Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of off-
site all rejected materials and replace with new, whether in stockpiles or in-place.
i
G. The Contractor shall bear the cost of testing materials that fail to conform to the
Specifications.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.l' —2323 02300-6 02/28/05
without cost to, the Owner. Existing streets, sidewalks and curbs damaged during the
project work shall be repaired or replaced to their condition prior to commencement of
earthwork operations.
1. 9 SUBMITTALS
A. Issue submittals in accordance with Division 1. Submittals under this Section shall
include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions
1.10 EARTH SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. The Contractor shall provide temporary excavation support to protect adjacent struc-
tures, roadways, utilities, property, personnel and the public during the construction
period in accordance with all Local, State and Federal requirements.
B. The use of tiebacks for excavation support is permitted provided that they do not
interfere with adjacent utilities and structures.
C. All earth support systems shall be designed and stamped by a Professional Engineer
Registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts employed by the Contractor. Said
design shall be submitted to the Architect not less than 10 days prior to
commencement of field installation activities. The earth support design shall be
complete and include drawings indicating the extent of earth support in plan and
section, design calculations, material specifications and a complete construction
sequence. The Contractor's design shall take into account all soil pressures,
hydrostatic pressures, adjacent structure surcharge loads, applicable traffic, con-
struction equipment, stockpiles and any other surcharge loads. All intermediate stages
of loading as well as final conditions shall be considered.
D. Coordinate the location of the bracing such that it will minimize interference with the
excavation and minimize obstruction of the subsequent structural concrete work.
E. Design the excavation lateral support system for staged removal of bracing in
accordance with the proposed construction and backfilling sequence.
F. Design each component member of excavation lateral support system structures to
safely support the maximum load that can occur during construction including
surcharge due to cranes,backhoes, concrete trucks, etc.
G. Design and install an excavation lateral support system to permit safe and expeditious
construction of permanent structures and utilities and subsequent backfilling.
H. Install and limit the movement of the excavation lateral support systems to minimize
settlement of the ground adjacent to excavations.
i
I Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.1' —2323 02300-5 02/28/05
NNW
E. Any apparent conflict between the Drawings and Specifications and the applicable ""N
Codes and Regulations shall be referred to the Architect in writing,for resolution
before the work is started.
1.7 LAYOUT AND GRADES
A. The Contractor shall maintain and/or establish benchmarks and survey monuments
shown on the Drawings or found to exist on the site to provide a base reference for the
construction. Replace any that may become destroyed or disturbed. The Contractor
shall employ and pay all costs for a registered Civil Engineer or Surveyor who is
licensed within the jurisdiction of the project site to lay out all lines and grades in
accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and as necessary or required for the
construction. The Contractor shall submit building layout drawings for approval,
stamped by a Registered Surveyor. The selection of the registered Civil Engineer or
Surveyor shall be subject to the Architect's approval.
B. The words "finished grades" as used herein shall mean final grade elevations indicated
on the Drawings. Spot elevations shall govern over proposed contours. Where not
otherwise indicated, project site areas shall be given uniform slope between points for
which finished grades are indicated or between such points and existing established
grades.
1.8 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall observe all rules and regulations governing the respective utilities
in executing work under this Section. All work shall be executed in such a manner as
to prevent any damage to existing buildings, streets, curbs, paving, service utility lines,
structures and adjoining property.
B. Locate and mark underground utilities to remain in service before beginning the work.
Protect all existing utilities to remain in service during operations. Do not interrupt
existing utilities except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. When an active utility line is exposed during construction its location and elevation
shall be plotted on the Record Drawings by the Contractor and both the Architect and
the Utility Owner notified in writing.
D. Inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during construction operations shall be
removed, plugged, capped or filled. The location of such utilities shall be noted on
Record Drawings and reported in writing to the Owner.
E. Provide barricades, fences, lights, signs, and all other safety devices required for the
protection of the public.
F. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of work the Contractor
shall, at his own expense make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.F —2323 02300-4 02/28/05 """*®
D. The soil borings logs and Geotechnical Engineering Reports were prepared for
purposes of foundation design but are offered to the Contractor for general
information. The Contractor is advised to review this data for information that may be
helpful to his understanding of subsurface conditions. No claim for extra
compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of subsurface
conditions consistent with the data given, except as otherwise provided elsewhere
herein. Interpretation of this data for purposes of construction is the responsibility of
the Contractor. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to make his own inter-
pretations and draw conclusions with respect to the character of the materials to be
encountered and their impact upon his work based on his expert knowledge. Neither
the Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility for the accuracy of the data.
E. The Contractor shall note that the existing soil may not meet the specified
requirements for borrow material shown in the Project Manual. The Contractor shall
note that none of the excavated on-site soil can be reused in other than specific areas
designated by the Architect. In addition, the excavated soil shall only be reused if it is
sufficiently dry so that it can be worked and compacted to the specified degree as it is
being placed. The Contractor shall consider in his bid that all fill shall be supplied
from an off-site borrow source. If the Architect judges that the on-site excavated soil
is acceptable for reuse, then the Contractor may reuse this material within designated
areas in lieu of off-site borrow. The Owner shall receive a credit for the in-place
volume of material reused. The credit shall include the cost to purchase and transport
� the borrow material to the site.
1.6 PERMITS, CODES, AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the City of Northampton,
the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and all other authorities having jurisdiction over
the project site. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and
services necessary to make the work comply with these requirements without
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Comply with the provisions of the Manual for Accident Prevention in Construction of
the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., and the requirements of the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration,United States Department of Labor.
C. The Contractor shall procure and pay for all permits and licenses required for the
complete work specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
D. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct any street, sidewalk, or passageway without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall so
conduct his operations as to interfere as little as possible with the use of roads,
driveways, or other facilities near enough to the work to be affected by the work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package T.V —2323 02300-3
1.4 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
A. The following standards and definitions are applicable to the work of this Section to
the extent referenced herein:
1. MHD Specifications: The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Highway
Department, Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, including
latest revisions.
2. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
3. Rock Excavation: For payment purposes, rock shall be defined as bedrock or
original ledge which cannot be removed by conventional excavating equipment
(Komatsu PC650 or equivalent) and which requires the use of drills, explosives
and/or a rock splitter, as well as individual boulders over two cubic yards in
open excavation and over one cubic yard in trenches that are removed by power
excavating equipment without the use of drills or explosives.
4. Unsuitable material is material that is not satisfactory for its intended purpose.
Material such as but not limited to loam, subsoil, organic material, debris,
frozen material or weak, soft, and uncompacted soil, including fill, or material
containing roots or other organic matter as determined by the Architect shall be
considered unsuitable for supporting structures and pavements. Material that is
rendered unsuitable through the Contractor's means and methods of
construction will not be considered unsuitable for payment purposes even look
though the Contractor is required to remove and replace the unsuitable material.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall fully inform himself of existing conditions at the site before
submitting his bid, and shall be responsible for carrying out all site work required to
fully and properly execute the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions
encountered in the actual work. No claim for extra compensation or extension of time
will be allowed on account of actual conditions inconsistent with those assumed,
except those conditions described in the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
B. Plans, surveys, measurements and dimensions under which the work is to be
performed are believed to be correct to the best of the Architect's knowledge, but the
Contractor shall have examined them for himself during the bidding period and formed
his own conclusions as to the full requirements of the work involved. All earth
materials shall be included in the base bid.
C. Geotechnical Engineering Reports, which include the logs of soil borings, have been
prepared for specific projects at this site. This information is available for review by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall review this information to enhance his
understanding of the site conditions and how these conditions might affect his work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.P —2323 02300-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02300 -EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of the
Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The work of the Section consists of all earthwork and related items as indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified herein including,but is not necessarily limited to, the
following:
1. General excavation.
2. Trench excavation.
3. Shoring and sheeting.
4. Providing, placing and compacting fill materials.
5. Drainage, dewatering and frost protection.
6. Stripping of Loam,Topsoil and Subsoil
7. Off-site disposal of excess or unsuitable material.
8. Rough grading.
9. Dust control.
1.3 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Comply with all related section of the Project Manual.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Earthwork
Foundation/Site/Utilities 02/28/05
Package `F.V —2323 02300-1
E. The Contractor shall remove and properly dispose of sediment
from control facilities as required by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall modify and improve erosion and sedimentation
control facilities and replace deteriorated hay bales and
other devices as required by the Engineer.
F. Minimum temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation
control measures are shown on the Drawings. The Contractor
shall strictly adhere to the minimum provisions shown.
Additionally, temporary measures shall be selected and
constructed by the Contractor in consultation with the
Engineer to accommodate changing field conditions that develop
during construction.
G. The temporary sedimentation basins shall be maintained from
the start of construction until construction of the permanent
detention basins and/or stormwater system is completed and
perimeter areas are stabilized. A temporary outlet shall be
constructed above the expected sediment levels. Construction
of the basins shall be sequenced so that the temporary outlet
is installed and basin embankment is constructed with the
material available from the initial site excavations.
3.05 MAINTENANCE OF EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
A. The Contractor shall check the condition of erosion and
sedimentation control devices daily and maintain them in good
operating condition. Hay bales shall be replaced when
deteriorated.
B. The Contractor shall inspect the condition of diversion dikes
and ditches, filter berms, interceptor dikes, sediment basins
and other erosion and sedimentation control devices after each
rainstorm and during major storm events. Repairs shall be
made as necessary.
C. During construction, temporary outlets of the drainage systems
shall direct the flow to temporary p ry or permanent sedimentation
basins.
D. Temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control devices shall
be removed and adjacent areas outside the limits of grading
restored upon completion of the work or when required by the
Engineer.
I
END OF SECTION 02270
Base Date: 6/03
i
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Erosion Control
Foundation/Site/Utilities Ask
Package ` T —2323 02270-6 02/28/05
I
I
3.03 SILT FENCE
A. Silt fence shall be installed at locations as shown on the
Drawings, identified as Erosion Control Barrier.
B. Supporting posts shall be spaced 4 feet on center, and driven
at least one foot into the ground. Posts shall be 1-1/2 inch
square or heavier wood posts, or standard steel posts.
C. Fabric shall be anchored in a 4-inch deep trench dug on the
upslope side of the posts. The trench shall be at least
4 inches wide. The fabric shall be laid in the trench,
backfilled and compacted.
D. Fabric rolls shall be spliced at posts. The fabric shall be
overlapped 6 inches, folded over and securely fastened to
posts.
E. Silt fences shall be inspected immediately after each storm
event and at least daily during prolonged rainfall.
3.04 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS—TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall construct all permanent erosion and
sediment control features at the earliest practical time as
outlined in the accepted schedule. Temporary erosion and
sediment control measures shall be used to correct conditions
that develop during construction which were unforeseen, but
are needed prior to installation of permanent control
features, or that are needed temporarily to control erosion or
sedimentation which develops during construction operations.
B. Where erosion is likely to be a problem, clearing and grubbing
operations shall be scheduled and performed so that grading
operations and permanent erosion and sediment control features
can follow immediately thereafter, if conditions permit;
otherwise, temporary control measures will be required between
successive construction stages.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling erosion within
the project area and retaining sediment on-site away from
sensitive environmental resources. Any fines, construction
delays, remedial actions, or incarceration resulting from the
Contractor's failure to comply with these provisions shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor and not the Owner.
D. Failure by the Contractor to control erosion, pollution, and
siltation shall be cause for the Owner to employ outside
assistance to provide the necessary corrective measures. The
cost of such assistance, including engineering costs, will be
i charged to the Contractor and appropriate deductions made to
the Contractor's monthly progress payment request.
I
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Erosion Control
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l' —2323 02270-5 02/28/05
I
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 EROSION CONTROL--HAY BALES
A. Hay bales shall be installed at the locations, shown on the
Drawings and in general as follows:
1. Toe of slope of embankment construction to filter all
runoff flowing to off-site discharges.
2. Toe of temporary earthwork stockpile slopes.
3. Other locations as may be shown on the Contract Drawings
and required by laws, regulations, and permits.
B. Tightly abut hay bales to form a continuous barrier. secure
bales in place with two stakes per bale. The bales shall be
trenched 4 inches into the ground. Soil shall be constructed
on the upside slope of the bales. Deteriorated, destroyed or
rotted bales shall be replaced immediately. Sediment shall be
removed and disposed of periodically from behind the hay
bales. The accumulated sediment shall not be allowed to rise
above the mid height of the bale. All sediment, hay bales and
appurtenances shall be removed and disposed of at the
completion of the Contract. Haybales shall be completely
removed from the site, and shall not be broken apart and
spread throughout the project area.
3.02 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MATS
A. Erosion control mats shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations.
B. Areas to receive mats shall be smooth graded and compacted.
Remove all rocks, dirt clods, vegetation and other
obstructions that may cause damage to the mats.
C. Unroll mats parallel to the direction of water flow and lay
flat against the ground. Overlap roll ends 1 to 2 feet with
upslope mat on the top to prevent uplift of mat end by water
flow. Overlay adjacent edges of mat by six inches. Extend
mat 2 to 3 feet above the crest of steep slopes and anchor by
excavating a 6 inch deep trench, and secure end of mat in
trench, backfill and compact. Secure mat to the ground using
staples or pins furnished by manufacturer of mat.
D. Erosion control mats shall be placed at locations as directed
by the municipality.
I
i
1
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Erosion Control
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 02270-4 02/28/05
i
• I
I
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Temporary erosion control seed for quick growing grasses such
as wheat, rye or oats shall be planted only when permanent
grasses (See Section 02920) cannot be planted due to the
growing season. All permanent grass areas planted with
temporary erosion control seed shall be replaced with
permanent seed. Apply seed mixture at a rate of 100 pounds per
acre.
% Germination
Seed % Weight Minimum
Winter Rye 80 Minimum 85
Red Fescue 4 Minimum 80
(Creeping)
Perennial Rye Grass 3 Minimum 90
Red Clover 3 Minimum 90
Other Crop Grass 0.5 Maximum
Noxious Weed Seed 0.5 Maximum
Inert Matter 1.0 Maximum
B. Erosion Control Blanket/Fabric Netting—See Section 02920
Curlex blankets, as manufactured by American Excelsior Company
Polyjute Style 465 GT, as manufactured by Synthetic Industries
or approved equivalent.
Tensar Erosion Mat, (TM2000, TB1000 or TM3000] , as
manufactured by the Tensar Corporation
C. Hay bale sediment traps consisting of hay bales banded with
wire or nylon tape (minimum two bands for bale) approximately
two-feet, six-inches in length. Haybales are an included
component of the Erosion Control Barrier
Stakes for hay bales shall be 1 inch by 1 inch by 3 feet long,
or approved equal.
D. Silt fence fabric shall be 100X, as manufactured by Mirafi.
Silt Fence is an included component of Erosion Control
barrier.
E. Filter fabric at construction entrance shall be 600X, as
manufactured by Mirafi.
I
I
E
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Erosion Control
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02270-3 02/28/05
I
I
to be installed by the Contractor to meet Federal, State and
Local regulations for the construction program, including, but
not necessarily limited to, such items as; berms, erosion
control barrier of haybales and silt fence and other such
items, all of which shall be removed by the Contractor after
installation of permanent erosion control measures,
stabilization of the site, and prior to final completion of
the project.
C. The temporary control provisions shall be coordinated with the
permanent erosion control features to the extent practical to
ensure economical, effective and continuous erosion control
throughout the construction and post-construction period.
1.04 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. City of Northampton Department of Public Works Stormwater
Drainage Permit.
B. Compliance with the EPA NPDES Stormwater Regulations as
described in Section 02260 is the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
1.05 PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
A. Prior to the start of the construction, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer: schedules for the construction of
required stormwater detention basins, temporary and permanent
erosion and sediment control work, clearing and grubbing,
grading, structures at watercourses, construction, and paving.
No work shall be started until control schedules and methods
of operations have been submitted to the Engineer.
B. Proof of submittal of the Notice of Intent for an NPDES
General Permit for Construction Activities under EPA
Regulations 40 CFR Parts 9, 122, 123 and 124.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
A. When in the opinion of the Engineer it becomes necessary, the
Engineer will inform the Contractor of construction procedures
and operations that jeopardize erosion and sedimentation
control provisions. If these construction procedures and
operations are not corrected promptly, the Owner may suspend
the performance of any or all construction until corrections
have been made, and such suspension shall not be the basis of
any claim by the Contractor for additional compensation from
the Owner nor for an extension of time to complete the Work.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Erosion Control
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02270-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL
PART 1---GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary erosion
control provisions.
B. The work includes:
1. Providing and maintaining all temporary erosion control
measures shown on the Drawings and required by the
Engineer during the life of the Contract to control soil
erosion and water pollution.
2. The installation and maintenance of additional silt
fence, berms, construction exits, catchbasin filters,
erosion control barrier of haybales and silt fence,
grasses, and other approved erosion control devices or
methods, needed to protect any areas on or off site in
accordance with the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan
to be developed by the Contractor, which is required by
the EPA.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02210—Site Preparation and Demolition
2. Section 02240—Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
3. Section 02300—Earthwork
4. Section 02260—EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction
Activities Requirements
5. Section 02920—Seeding and Sodding
1.03 DEFINITION AND COORDINATION OF EROSION CONTROL PROVISIONS
A. Permanent erosion control measures are defined as those
elements that are to be incorporated into the final project
product, including but not necessarily limited to, such items
as; finish paving and disturbed area stabilization of loam and
seed and other such items.
B. Temporary erosion control measures are defined as those
elements that are required by permit approvals and necessary
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Erosion Control
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02270-1 02/28/05
now
This.Form Replaces Form 3517-7(8-96) " Form Approved OMD Nos,204[3 0086 and 2040 0211.
Refer to Ithe Folicwtng Page for instradions
NPpt S '
United States,Envnonrnentat Pmts fiartAgene
Form Washkgtlon 00 20460 IdWEPA Notice:of 7ermtnadon(NO7)of Coverage Ubdair"an NP60 0ijaeral P4nnn..for Storm
Water;Dischatgen Awoolated with Ea��Acttvtty
Submission of this Notice.of 7eiminafion const<tutea:notice lhatthe pally r 3enhfted th Sacfmst:ti:of thts.tonn,s no longer
authorized to discharge storm water associated,with constntction activity:ui+der the NPt7ES ptxrgram Own she sits:botified in
Section tit 61 619 form.All necessary intohTWIon triust be included on this forme Refer to•the instructions of the.erW of th.06 16M.
v'ntir
•:,'%J:Y•:i:�:.-$::ti{.?::;.::!{;.y,, .:Yi:>ii"i:i:L:{::Jw•�•:.4:::L:ii:}•:�'Y%'L. ::.Yei.'•\vv?,::n.W.vA !duv.:.i::.
.}5...::::r.v.:v:.:,.�.:.:8:.- ...:. ::::.�'�l?•:w:xlvnv::::.,.t}.My:.4:,f::{:iw:::S%4?)i::r.}�f.::}:. :.•.f.[- '�: ::�:u.f:v: v�:.f;'i4v{C}:�!�)�: :•.O:h.?
NPDES S.torm Water General Permit Trackiog'Number, L LL.L_L L-1
Reason for Termination{Check:only one)=
L._) F1691 sW.W112:41164 tjas been 90110ed on ati portions of#ie site for which you pre respona3bie;
Q
Another operai'gr has"assumed cantrol;wxordlnd.to Appendix G.Section 11.6 of tho OOR. over alt areas.of the site:tl at
have::not bean Anailystabilized.
D Coverage under on aitemative NPOES permit has been obpined.
Ofor residential.corstrvctior only ter iporery'stabiliz.a.wri:has been.comoteted:anOthe reotdenco:has:been transferred to the
homeowner.
?!.!{.}'::i.ii-:vu-a:N::{-'fi.•:r:: i•.;?..,;•i:t:.�ii..i::::.??ii•...:
•: .. ......... ...v ../..?:pi•::,:.i}:{;:4:ii:+i:.vi':•:{:•:.}'f,•;./G •.:ni::-r:^C:v�.... }�...
Name: ' r :� J:_1 1._L�_ L7. r i i.1 f <t,j j t,•3
e
IRS Employer ItlentiHcahoa:Nitrtlher(EW) LL"
Mailing;Address:
sir,et L= � I i _ I..: I. 1 . 1 1 1 1 { I .]-._..
; . 1
1 City I L ' li �� �I 1_ I 1 I ..t._�..�1.�� -�—� !•-i� 'Stater U11-1:
1 7:ip.Cods:L .L i_j- f
Phone:1 = E : t r L I .L i F"(optionai)r L L..j LL..1_I -L E i
E-mail(oponn9l):. L; f I I l i 1 €.-: o- ---LL `._I_-1-1 ! 1 , i
r
' -?? .... ..... .v�r� ..:..,:�:.:v. .::•i}?}:v}:y:•?'ii:}':i.}:i..v.5..,..:\....:.: v- :.-#:,n-.... ':vti.v`.4{;i.}:?„'}}?ii:'.::v.{:iik?i:?•i}}:.
................................... ..,:.:.....:.,.... ...........!•....v..:......r....:.:v.�:.{.:::.v:.::::-0...:+•.:..,.,..•.v:.4.......r!:,.:v.••:r�...�....�.......S:
Project/Site Name[e� ' I 1 1 1 I i 1 i E 1. t 1 l t 1 f }
Project StreoMocati n
City: { f ( r 1 1 1 1..¢:. tt I 1`.Statec ?. z Code•. 1-1 } yy t'
y L__'.... .�,.-1._.1-..:_j_ L.1 � _� 1 L' L:J •p' '�... . : ::. 1 'f:---i....1 JL._i..
County orsirnitar gwernmenf subdMaion: i
�s . :-•::TJnR.::'{i:4ivs.:.:{:•i::hi':vC:•:::vi:� 'uC'�:i:i::�vSiiYv:�':?ivit.vb-•,•
,���r•`iY ....ss14 y��yi
i 1CXt szf.
I ccrti(y q-dw peo*of low that this amumar Land all c dGtU3lBritS.YtL°te prepared undermy dkedbn p supervision h aCOOrddfp a w>ih a System
designed io assure s,at:aJ5ed.penwnnet Pope,* the irikxnYaatbn subrnbed.IaiiW an my nciuw.y of d*rte,0
peisor s wtxrrnara ge ftte:system•a SOS a
Wsonsike*WmWitia forflath9rYtg ttrrt k,tonnatiorr,Jhe ititarrrta6on s xnit C Is,to tkte besE d my
lutbxtedga.ind&w.W.bw.accurate,and ccmpiets.l orp&A a that there are sg*iicant perwAss for stbmtt v famenk nafon;t ck E the
I possikx'Sty'oftirte.a!x!impn8mverd fark"Aiv vioJatfons.
Print Name:
Print Titie:
Signature.
Date:
_.............. ......
EPA Farm 3510.13(Rev.6/03)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'-2323 02260-11 02/28/05
Instructions for Completing EPA Form 3510.13
Notice of Termination(NOT)of Coverage Under an NPDES General Permit for
Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity
NPDES Form This Form Replaces Form 3517-7(8-98) Form Approved OMB Nos.2040-0086 and 2040-0211
Who May File an NOT Form operator of the project is the legal entity that controls the site operation,
Permittees who are presently covered under the EPA-issued National Pollutant rather than the site manager. Provide the employer identification number
Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for Storm Water (EIN from the Internal Revenue Service; IRS). If the applicant does not
Discharges Associated with Construction Activity may have an EIN enter "NA" in the space provided. Enter the complete
submit an NOT form when final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of mailing address and telephone number of the operator. Optional: enter
the site for which you are responsible;another operator has assumed control in the fax number and e-mail address of the operator.
accordance with Appendix G,Section 11,C of the General Permit over all areas
Of the site that have not been finally Section III.Project/Site Information
stabilized; coverage under an alternative NPDES permit has been Enter the official or legal name and complete street address, including
obtained; or for residential construction only, temporary stabilization has been city, state, zip code, and county or similar government subdivision of the
completed and the residence has been transferred to the homeowner. project or site. If the project or site lacks a street address, indicate the
general location of the site (e.g., Intersection of State Highways 61 and
"Final stabilization" means that all soil disturbing activities at the site 34).Complete site information must be provided for termination of permit coverage to
have been completed and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a be valid.
density of at least 70"/0 of the native background vegetative cover for the area
has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent Section IV.Certification Information
structures, or equivalent permanent stabilization measures (such as the use of All applications,including NOIs,must be signed as follows:
riprap, gabions, or geotextiles) have been employed. See "final stabilization" For a corporation: By a responsible corporate officer. For the purpose of
definition in Appendix A of the Construction General Permit for further guidance this Part, a responsible corporate officer means: (1) a president,
where background native vegetation covers less than 100 percent of the ground, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a
in acid or semi-arid areas,for individual lots in residential construction, and for principal business function, or any other person who performs similar
construction projects on land used for agricultural purposes, policy- or decision-making functions for the corporation, or (ii) the
manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating
Completing the Form facilities, provided, the manager is authorized to make management
Type or print, using uppercase letters, in the appropriate areas only. decisions which govern the operation of the regulated facility including
Please place each character between the marks. Abbreviate if having the explicit or implicit duty of making major capital Investment
necessary to stay within the number of characters allowed for each recommendations, and initiating and directing other comprehensive
item. Use only one space for breaks between words, but not for measures to assure long-term environmental compliance with
punctuation marks unless they are needed to clarify your response. If environmental laws and regulations; the manager can ensure that the
you have any questions about this form, refer to necessary systems are established or actions taken to gather complete
www.epa.gov/npdes/stormwaterlcgp or telephone the Storm Water Notice and accurate information for permit application requirements;and where authority to
Processing Center at (866) 352-7755. Please submit original sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the
document with signature in ink-do not send a photocopied signature. manager in accordance with corporate procedures.
Section I.Permit Number For a partnership or sole proprietorship: By a general partner or the
Enter the exsting NPDES Storm Water General Permit Tracking proprietor,respectively,or
Number assigned to the project by EPA's Storm Water Notice
Processing Center. If you do not know the permit tracking number, refer to For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency. By either a
www.epa.govinpdeslstormwaterlcgp or contact the Storm Water Notice principal executive officer or ranking elected official. For purposes of this
Processing Center at(866)352-7755. Part,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes(1)the chief executive
officer of the agency, or(ii)a senior executive officer having responsibility for the
Indicate your reason for submitting this Notice of Termination by overall operations of a principal geographic unit of
checking the appropriate box.Check only one: the agency(e.g.,Regional Administrator of EPA).
Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site for which Include the name and title of the person signing the form and the date of
you are responsible. signing.An unsigned or undated NOT form will not be considered valid termination of
permitcoverage.
Another operator has assumed control according to Appendix G, Section
11.0 over alt areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized. Paperwork Reduction Act Notice
Public reporting burden for this application is estimated to average 0.5
Coverage under an alternative NPDES permit has been obtained. hours per notice, including time for reviewing instructions, searching
existing data sources,gathering and maintaining the data needed,and completing
For residential construction only, if temporary stabilization has been and reviewing the collection of information. An agency may
completed and the residence has been transferred to the homeowner. not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a
collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control
Section 11.Operator lnformatlon number. Send comments regarding the burden estimate, any other
Provide the legal name of the person, firm, public organization, or any aspect of the collection of information, or suggestions for improving this
other entity that operates the project described in this application and form including any suggestions which may increase or reduce this
is covered by the permit tracking number identified in Section I.The burden to: Chief, Information Policy Branch, 2136, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Washington, DC
20460. Include the OMB number on any correspondence. Do not send
the completed form to this address.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities ,
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.P —2323 02260-10 02/28/05
.:sn: xs... -`.. ••:sF,: ".. r .............
p,�•.•y�.. aC"v"'r'•;•..,',.,. {,`..,.:EC:�:i '.;;::: .:= .:'2.:..r. 2,:t. S :..a:`P .'Sa •::%i'• '�ai._rev' „$,t::{:<- �;:s�r;:}:y;:i,v-„•--w•,” -:•'+
F4t ie�.�. aiF•�t gay; R`' ,;:,:v `Yry. T: Sys Y` xfi: U C '�.3 c.. .{xk•C;Sw.• .A.
�� °�-� .•.'>.'•`'�`Xl�-SS,.'v.�+.v�'. ,K��s�' '�':.;;,:.`LX. ,•,�s.,,.�,�,•,:
a '..^h: �`x.{•.
Ha%-the SWPPP been prepared in advance of filing this NOP D Y.6. No
Location of SWPPP for viaWitsg: Address Section dl Address irrSBCtfon 111 olher
If Other. l j ff
i
swAPP street: I. 1 1. i �' t _ _ _. .�. —. i.. ... ` i 1.1
.State: ZIP Code: 1 _.(:_L1... (.... l
SWPPP Contact Infor na ion(if different than that E i 1__ IM Section 11):
1�
!. 1. EE I I i i[
Name: _ . f
`U -L i_i _1_?. Fax;(opiional) L__1_j LLJ . Li�:.
E-mail(optional): :l_ �_,f...- i E A.. �- - rr
�iy
v
:v
t
Ideal fy%ename(s)of waterbodies to which you discharge. _ 1
=s this discharge consrstert write the essumptlons and requirements of appticsblo EPA approved:or'estabAshed 7Mf3L(s)7
! y yes LED No
..�`;.kS � �� J.R4':.. _ .'Y;2: i :yV• 3c:+e+2h auxfz¢<;v... • •�f::i:, ':Qw't:eY, r� h. �...'
Under which criterion of the,permit have you.Wis Tied your ESA eligibility obligatigns?
�~ A El 1 #c 0:0 1:1E D
If you select criterion F,provide permit tr'aclidng number of operator under yr jicti you are cer4f ing eiigiaftiy:
Li I: I I '
a�X,.'-,.-..,i> Mli � �{y ?x�}NnO .W kx<; i�Fxi�v ih•vG'+�M�Q:;�.y.,�}�>n•:�xT.�••.�-y..;' .-�`".?tt`u:`ASS`a:,v:�„;t.:;f.vi.:�rv�.R>.v.R.`:.;v:v�..}-+*�r y
.f..
}:'•:Y.
Y:;•.m+_ a: '. .... v,•l,W}9514}S?�.+U'b>%,n$.+RCSE;iC9'4i�. .�Y�.
II certify under penalty of low that this document end all attachments were prepared under rn direction or supervision in accordance
vdth a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered:and evaluated 1 w I ormotion submitted. Based on my
inquiry o€the:person or persms wha Mmiage the syslem,or th se'.persons directly:tasponsrtite for gathering the information♦the
iafon»aSon submitted ls,.tb the best of rrty knowledge and belief,.ttue,'accurate,and complete_ l:am aware:fhai there are sfgniticant.
penalties for Submitting'false informatiop•includirq. the>po"Ibltity of fine and imprlsonirieof for knaxfng violHtions.
t.
Print Name'....,.... .
Print Title: _
Signature:
i
l
EPA Forrn 3510-9(Rev.6103)
;oolcy Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.]'—2323 02260-9 02/28/05
i
This Form fTeplaces Form 3510-9(s-04) FomrApproved OMB Nos.2040.0188 and 2.040.02111
Refer to the Foliowl. Peres fo_instrutitions
United Slow Environmental Protection Agency
NPDES
I Y+/ashington DC 20460
Notice.of intent No[ for.Storttt W orDischa AAssoctato4with
Form I EM Gonstittctfstn Activity Hradec an WPpS a!Parmit
..........................
Submission.of this Notice of Intent(NC!)constitutes notice that the party identit`ted aT sedictn II of Ws form rw4uest%authorteaiion:to
dischorge.I'arrsuant to the NPDES Construction Geneia?Permit(CGP):permit number iderfi8ed In Section t IN$(or[t)•:8001dasiott
of this 1.401 atso constitttfes natice thn(:tfie part y'idoatztied in.SeCtian;il.Of this fozni trtt3als ft e 1 requirements of 1►ie:00P forth@
project ktemified fn.Section Ill of this form.PerrA.coverage is required pnor to'romnrencerttenf vt txxtstrueGou activity Uh11E you 8rb'.
ellt7late to tarminate coverage as detailed in the CGR 7'a obtain authorizs4on,you must su0ma a complete and.aecurota'140t fort,
Refer.to the Instruct fons.at the end tit tills form,
'sX. a "'•5 3 'Q VS ja ycnyFS••1 2 .�BM
' Vic'!.-S.'i•''Pi�.K' �`i..7',G '"o' '�J:si 'K'-' •Q�.."^"K•• '� �"
i,t.-• 1N.[iJ� '>:vrir .?' r.✓'' a , .. .. �'H-181M;3!P._ 'P� •B
E #
Name:LI { I i I I ! I :� { 3 1 1 1 1 1 I f I I I I
IRS Employer Idsntificatior.Number(EIN):
Mailing Address: J
city:I---I•--`..l 1---A- 1 I {..:I ....I....[.. ..�.J...,{: 1---I... ..l---(.. LLJ_ State:L_j rp cone:Ll_ ...1—L.
Phone: ..al ? Fax o tlonal�:L J . - L I . [ I 1...I
'1-1-ii
:. 'r.. ,.: wt"d K i 3 Ar,:"�,.'� S'aa tc a+,G�•;r' N• "` �� np,�r?•eY Y K •r•� P�•.L ;��F w " <v f}.,�„
l Y �.j�ti-f FMdt�td„�s4�?����}i!alr...L.�wor,.�a.`r.,�,''i,.r.'rr�ai,:iafc lo... N, .! :. �� .. "•„k. 'a... .. .. i
Pro ect/Site Name:
l
Project StreWLocatlor.:
City:'{ State:LL Tip Coda: .. . (`. L
CountyOf-slmilaf
to llude/Longitude(Use cre of Three pessible:fcrrmats-and specifyrnethod)
Latitude t. -2--'-_' N(degcetag,minutes,seconds). LnRgitude 1.__ n__ __'W(degrees,minutes„seconds} '
2• __' _ _ N(degrees,minutes,decimal) __ _-__W(degrees,minutesdedmal)
3.__. __o N(decimal) 3 _ ---(`W(decimal)
U5.G.5,topograp r...} EPA web:sit C1 GPS L7;Other
r
tdethod: ttic trap e
•if you used a t/.S.G.S.topographic map;:what was the stele: i
:
(Project Located In Indian country? t3 Yes Lw�No
r
If so.name of Reservation or if not part of a Reservation,pnt'Not Applicable':
.......
Estimated Project Start Date:i I i ' .l., ;� ESrimairtf Prcs)eci CO��ptet on Date, ;
K"x Dat. Y. Monih D2le lhw
Estimated Area to be Distxbed(to the nearest quarter acre)>
- 1
EPA,Form 3610-9(Rev.6103)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02260-8 02/28/05
Instructions for Completing EPA Form 3510-9
Notice of Intent(NOI)for Storm Water Discharges Associated with
Construction Activity Under an NPDES General Permit
NPDES Form This Form Replaces Form 3510-9(8/98) Form Approved OMB Nos.2040.0188 and 2040-0211
fax number(optional), and e-mail address(optional)of the contact (i) a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the
person if different than that listed in Section II of the NOI form. corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any
other person who performs similar policy- or decision-making
Section V. Discharge Information functions for the corporation, or (ii) the manager of one or
Enter the name(s) of receiving waterbodies to which the project's more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities,
storm water will discharge. These should be the first bodies of provided,the manager is authorized to make management decisions
water that the discharge will reach.(Note:If you discharge to more which govern the operation of the regulated facility including having
than one waterbody, please indicate all such waters in the space the explicit or implicit duty of making major capital investment
provided and attach a separate sheet if necessary.) For example, recommendations, and initiating and
if the discharge leaves your site and travels through a roadside directing other comprehensive measures to assure long-term
swale or a storm sewer and then enters a stream that flows to a environmental compliance with environmental laws and regulations;
river, the stream would be the receiving waterbody.Waters of the the manager can ensure that the necessary
U.S. include lakes, streams, creeks, rivers, wetlands, systems are established or actions taken to gather complete
impoundments, estuaries, bays, oceans,and other surface bodies and accurate information for permit application requirements;
of water within the confines of the U.S. and U.S. coastal waters. and where authority to sign documents has been assigned or
Waters of the U.S. do not include man-made structures created delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures.
solely for the purpose of wastewater treatment. U.S. Geological
Survey topographical maps may be used to make this For a partnership or sole proprietorship: By a general partner
determination. If the map does not provide a name, use a format or the proprietor,respectively;or
such as"unnamed tributary to Cross Creek". If you discharge into
a municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4),you must identify For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency: By
e waterbody into which that portion of the storm sewer either a principal executive officer or ranking elected official.
scharges. That information should be readily available from the For purposes of this Part, a principal executive officer of a federal
operator of the MS4. agency includes (i) the chief executive officer of the
agency, or (ii) a senior executive officer having responsibility
Indicate whether your storm water discharges from construction for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency
activities will be consistent with the assumptions and requirements (e.g.,Regional Administrator of EPA).
of applicable EPA approved or established TMDL(s). To answer
this question, refer to www.epa.gov/npdeslsformwaferlcgp for Include the name and title of the person signing the form and
state- and regional specific TMDL information related to the the date of signing. An unsigned or undated NOI form will not
construction general permit. You may also have to contact your be considered eligible for permit coverage.
EPA regional office or state agency. If there are no applicable
TMDLs or no related requirements, please check the"yes"box in Paperwork Reduction Act Notice
the NOI form. Public reporting burden for this application is estimated to
average 3.7 hours. This estimate includes time for reviewing
Section VI.Endangered Species Information instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and
Indicate for which criterion (i.e., A, B, C, D, E, or F) of the permit maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing
the applicant is eligible with regard to protection of federally listed the collection of information.An agency may not conduct or sponsor,
endangered and threatened species, and designated critical and a person is not required to respond to, a
habitat. See Part 1.3.C.6 and Appendix C collection of information unless it displays a currently valid
of the permit. If you select criterion F, provide the permit tracking OMB control number.Send comments regarding the burden estimate,
number of the operator under which you are certifying eligibility. any other aspect of the collection of information, or suggestions for
The permit tracking number is the number assigned to the improving this form, including any suggestions which may increase or
operator by the Storm Water Notice Processing Center after EPA reduce this burden to: Chief,
acceptance of a complete NOI. Information Policy Branch 2136, U. S. Environmental
Section VII.Certification Information Protection, Agency, 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Washington,
All applications, including NOls,must be signed as follows: D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number on
For a corporation:By a responsible corporate officer.For the any correspondence.Do not send the completed form to this address.
purpose of this Section,a responsible corporate officer means:
ooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
v oundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02260-7 02/28/05
Instructions for Completing EPA Form 3510-9
Notice of Intent(NOI)for Storm Water Discharges Associated with
Construction Activity Under an NPDES General Pen-nit
NPDES Form This Form Replaces Form 3510-9(8/98) Form Approved OMB Nos.2040-0188 and 2040-0211
Who Must File an NOI Form Application. An operator of a project is a legal entity that
Under the provisions of the Clean Water Act, as amended (33 controls at least a portion of site operations and is not
U.S.C. 1251 et. seq.; the Act), federal law prohibits storm water necessarily the site manager. Provide the employer
discharges from certain construction activities to waters of the U.S. identification number (EIN from the Internal Revenue Service; IRS),
unless that discharge is covered under a National Pollutant also commonly referred to as your taxpayer ID. If the applicant does
Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit. Operator(s) of not have an EIN enter "NA" in the space
construction sites where one or more acres are disturbed,smaller provided. Also provide the operator's mailing address,
sites that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale telephone number, fax number (optional) and e-mail address
where there is a cumulative disturbance of at least one acre, or (if you would like to be notified via e-mail of NOI approval
any other site specifically designated by the Director, must submit when available). Correspondence for the NOI will be sent to
an NOI to obtain coverage under an NPDES general permit. Each this address.
person, firm, public organization, or any other entity that meets
either of the following criteria must file this form: (1) they have Section Ill.Project/Site Information
operational control over construction plans and specifications, Enter the official or legal name and complete street address,including
including the ability to make modifications to those plans and city, state, zip code, and county or similar government subdivision of
specifications; or (2) they have day-to-day operational control of the project or site. If the project or site lacks a street address,indicate
those activities at the project necessary to ensure compliance with the general location of the site(e.g., Intersection of State Highways 61
SW PPP requirements or other permit conditions. If you have and 34). Complete site information must be provided for permit
questions about whether you need an NPDES storm water permit, coverage to be granted.
or if you need information to determine whether EPA or your state The applicant must also provide the latitude and longitude of
agency is the permitting authority, refer to the facility either in degrees, minutes, seconds; degrees,
www.epa.gov/npdes/stormwaterlcgp or telephone the Storm Water minutes, decimal; or decimal format. The latitude and
Notice Processing Center at(866)352-7755. longitude of your facility can be determined in several different ways,
including through the use of global positioning system (GPS)
Where to File NOI Form receivers, U.S. Geological Survey (U.S.G.S.)
See the applicable CGP for information on where to send your topographic or quadrangle maps, and EPA's web-based siting tools,
completed NOI form. among others. Refer to
www.epa.govinpdeslstormwaterlcgp for further guidance on
Completing the Form the use of these methodologies. For consistency, EPA
Obtain and read a copy of the appropriate EPA Storm Water requests that measurements be taken from the approximate center of
Construction General Permit for your area.To complete this form, the construction site.Applicants must specify which method they used
type or print, using uppercase letters, in the appropriate areas to determine latitude and longitude. If a U.S.G.S.topographic map is
only. Please place each character between the marks(abbreviate used,applicants are required to specify the scale of the map used. I
if necessary to stay within the number of characters allowed for indicate whether the project is in Indian country, and if so,
each item). Use one space for breaks between words, but not for provide the name of the Reservation. If the project is in Indian Country
punctuation marks unless they are needed to clarify your Lands that are not part of a Reservation, indicate "not applicable" in
response. If you have any questions on this form, refer to the space provided.
www.epa.gov/npdes/stormwatericgp or telephone the Storm Water
Notice Processing Center at (866) 352-7755. Please submit Enter the estimated construction start and completion dates
original document with signature in ink - do not send a using four digits for the year (i.e., 05/27/1998). Enter the estimated
photocopied signature. area to be disturbed including but not limited to:grubbing,excavation,
grading, and utilities and infrastructure installation. Indicate to the
Section 1.Permit Number nearest quarter acre.Note: 1 acre=43,560 sq.ft.
Provide the number of the permit under which you are applying for Section IV.SWPPP Information
coverage (see Appendix B of the general permit for the list of Indicate whether or not the SWPPP was prepared in advance
eligible permit numbers). of filing the NOI form. Check the appropriate box for the
Section 11.Operator Information location where the SW PPP may be viewed.Provide the name,
Provide the legal name of the person,firm, public organization,or
any other entity that operates the project described in this
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package`F.l' —2323 02260-6 02/28/05
i
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
PROJECT:
ADDRESS
DATE:
CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR:
NAME:
ADDRESS:
I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms of conditions of
the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit
that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity
from the construction site identified as part of this certification.
Signature Date
Title
Company
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l' —2323 02260-5 02/28/05
required to minimize pollution. The Contractor's SWPPP shall
include provisions for but not be limited to the following:
1. Project Construction and Sequencing
2. Construction Trailers
3. Laydown Areas
4. Equipment Storage Areas
5. Stockpile Areas
6. Spill Response Procedure
B. Reproducible copies of one or more of the Contract Drawings
will be provided to the Contractor to serve as a base for the
Contractor to develop a SWPPP and modify as necessary as
construction proceeds.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02260-4 02/28/05
ew conjunction with the provisions for the maintenance of Erosion
Control Measures in Section 02270 and the Order of Conditions.
B. A maintenance inspection report shall be prepared after each
inspection. The Contractor shall identify one individual who
will be responsible for conducting inspections and preparing
the reports. The Contractor shall also designate a person who
will fill in for the inspector during absences. These
individuals shall be trained in all maintenance and inspection
practices necessary for keeping the sediment and erosion
control measures in proper working order.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 EROSION CONTROL DEVICES
A. Erosion Control Devices shall be constructed as shown on the
SWPPP and as specified in Section 02270.
3.02 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PRINCIPLES
The following general principles shall be followed by the Contractor
in preparing the SWPPP and during the construction phase:
A. Protect and maintain existing vegetation wherever possible.
B. Minimize the area of disturbance.
C. To the extent possible, route unpolluted flows around
disturbed areas.
D. Install mitigation devices as early as possible.
E. Minimize the time disturbed areas are left unstabilized.
F. Maintain siltation control devices in proper condition.
3.03 CONTRACTOR'S STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
A. The Contract drawings and specifications identify a portion of
the required facilities and temporary erosion and
sedimentation control devices. The Contractor shall prepare a
SWPPP in accordance with NPDES requirements which identifies
the location of construction facilities and proposes
additional erosion and sedimentation control measures as
` Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02260-3 02/28/05
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02210-Site Preparation and Demolition
2. Section 02240-Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
3. Section 02300-Earthwork
4. Section 02320-Pavement Subbase and Base
5. Section 02270-Erosion Control
6. Section 02600-Storm Drainage System
7. Section 02920-Seeding and Sodding
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Guidance Manual—"Storm Water Management for Construction
Activities, Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best
Management Practices" (EPA 832-R-005) .
B. Summary of Guidance Manual—"Storm Water Management for
Construction Activities, Developing Pollution Prevention Plans
and Best Management Practices" (EPA) .
C. Massachusetts Stormwater Management Policy Handbook (Volume I)
and Technical Handbook (Volume II) issued by the Massachusetts
Department of Environmental Protection, March 1997.
D. Massachusetts Sediment and Erosion Control Guideline for Urban
and Suburban Areas, March, 1997.
I
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Copy of the Notice of Intent/ (NOI) form filed with the EPA.
B. Copy of Receipt of NOI and Permit number from EPA
C. Copy of the Notice of Termination (NOT) form filed with EPA at
completion of project.
1.05 INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall inspect disturbed areas of the site at
least once per week and within 24 hours of a storm of 0.25
inches or greater. Such inspections may be performed in
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities .
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.V—2323 02260-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02260
EPA NPDES GENERAL PERMIT FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES REQUIREMENTS
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for the individuals that
are in control of the site to implement a Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) . This SWPPP will be
provided to the contractor for review, execution and assuming
of responsibility by the contractor. The SWPPP is to be signed
by the Contractor as part of the filings for a National
Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit
for Construction Activities. Any revisions required to the
SWPPP shall be performed by the contractor.
B. The storm water pollution prevention measures contained on the
site drawings are the minimum required by the City of
Northampton. The Contractor is required to provide additional
measures to prevent pollution from storm water discharges in
compliance with the Federal EPA NPDES permit and all other
local, state and federal requirements.
C. For construction areas greater than one acre in size, the
Contractor shall not begin construction without submitting
evidence that a "Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater
Discharge Associated with Construction Activity under NPDES
Permit" has been filed and been acknowledged by EPA (or
designated state) at least seven (7) days prior to
construction. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
complete the SWPPP and file the NOI. A copy of the required
NOI form is attached.
D. The Contractor shall conduct the storm water management
practices in accordance with local regulations and governing
authorities, the Federal NPDES Construction General Permit
requirements, and any enforcement action taken or imposed by
Federal or State or local agencies. The cost of any fines,
construction delays and remedial actions resulting from the
Contractor's failure to comply with all provisions of local
regulations and Federal NPDES permit requirements shall be
paid for by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. As a requirement of the EPA's NPDES permitting program, each
Contractor and Subcontractor shall execute a Contractor's
Certification form indicating that they have read and
understand the regulations.
F. When the site is stabilized and no additional exposed soil
will occur, the respective Contractor(s) who filed an NOI
shall prepare and file a Notice of Termination (NOT) form.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction Activities
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02260-1 02/28/05
D. The Contractor shall remove frames, covers, and grates from
manholes, catch basins and gate valves and satisfactorily
store and protect them until they are required for reuse in
the work. Existing frames, covers and grates determined by
the Engineer to be unsuitable for reuse shall be removed from
the site.
3.08 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove from site all materials resulting from demolition
operations, and legally dispose of.
B. No burning or burying of any demolition material will be
allowed.
C. Contractor shall have available for inspection and review by
the Owner and Construction Manager copies of all invoices/bill
of lading for all material disposed of.
END OF SECTION 02210
Base Date: 6/03
OOW
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Preparation and Demolition
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02210-5 02/28/05
3.04 SELECTIVE CLEARING AND THINNING
A. Selective clearing and thinning shall be completed as directed
by the Engineer. Limits of selective clearing and thinning
are shown on the Drawings.
B. The work shall include the removal of dead and diseased tree
limbs and plants, removal of trees and shrubs that interfere
with proposed construction and pruning and removal of live
vegetation that interferes with the growth of other trees and
plants.
3.05 DEMOLITION
A. Locate demolition equipment and remove materials in a manner
that prevents excessive loading to existing underground
utilities.
3.06 FILLING VOIDS
A. Completely fill all voids including, but not limited to,
excavation areas and voids resulting from demolition or
removal of structures, including underground fuel storage
tanks (to be removed by others) , abandoned utilities and
existing trees with suitable material as specified in Section
02300.
B. Areas to be filled shall be free of standing water, frost,
frozen, and unsuitable material prior to fill placement.
C. Place and compact fill materials in conformance with the
requirements of Section 02300.
D. Grade filled area surface to match adjacent grades and slope
to provide surface drainage.
3.07 REMOVAL AND ABANDONMENT OF UTILITIES
A. All existing structures, utilities, and appurtenances of any
kind shall be completely removed within the limits of
excavation for the new buildings and to the limits specified
on the drawings.
B. outside the limits of excavation for the new buildings, all
abandoned utilities and utility structures shall be removed to
limits shown on contract drawings.
C. Manholes and catch basins designated to be abandoned shall
have all lines plugged with brick and mortar prior to filling
with sand or gravel. The top 4 feet of these structures shall
be removed and the bottom slab broken up prior to filling.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Preparation and DeinoIition
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02210-4 02/28/05
C. Place tree protection fencing as required to protect other
plants, adjacent property areas to remain uncleared, monuments
and existing improvements from damage.
D. The Contractor shall repair or replace immediately any damage
to existing trees or root systems that are to remain and to
trees that are to be transplanted. The Contractor shall
employ an arborist to determine the repair and replacement
needs and methods for approval by the Engineer.
E. Replace damaged shrubs and other vegetation designated to
remain with the same size and species.
F. The tree protection fencing shall be maintained for the
duration of construction operations. The work shall include
immediate replacement of any damaged fence. Fencing shall be
removed from the site at the completion of construction
operations. The fencing disposal shall be in accordance with
local, state and federal laws and regulations for the disposal
of the material.
3.02 UTILITIES
A. Notify all corporations, companies, individuals or local
authorities owning, or having jurisdiction over, utilities
AVK running to, through or across areas to be affected by
demolition operations.
B. Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and
protect them from damage.
C. Have all discontinued utility services disconnected in
accordance with the requirements of the utility owner.
3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clearing shall include cutting, removal, and off-site disposal
of trees, bushes, shrubs, stumps, fallen timber, refuse,
trash, fencing and other incidental materials not required for
reuse on the site.
B. The Contractor shall grub the area within the clearing limits
to completely remove stumps and root systems, except for those
to remain or to be transplanted.
C. Depressions, excavations and voids resulting from the removal
of stumps or roots shall be filled with suitable material and
compacted as specified under Section 02300.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Preparation and Demolition
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02210-3 02/28/05
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the following information to the
Engineer for review before commencing any site or demolition
work:
1. All permits and notices authorizing demolition
2. Certificates of utility service severances, including
written correspondence/permits from all affected
utilities
3. Permits for transport and disposal of debris
4. Demolition procedures and operational sequence
5. Calculations as required
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.01 TREE PROTECTION FENCING
A. Tree protection fencing shall be orange plastic web fence,
4 feet high minimum. Wood stakes shall be six-foot long by 1
inch by 1 inch square driven a minimum of two feet into the
ground. Posts shall be spaced eight feet (maximum) on center. �A
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall flag the approximate limits of clearing
with marked stakes or other means acceptable to the Engineer.
Trees to remain and trees to be saved and/or transplanted
shall be clearly identified during this staking process. The
Engineer shall be notified a minimum of five working days
prior to scheduled commencement of clearing operations to
review the flagged limits. Adjust the clearing limits as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Before clearing begins, protect designated trees to remain
with tree protection fencing to the approximate diameter of
foliage to prevent damage to the trunk, foliage and root
system by construction equipment and procedures. Trees to be
transplanted may be removed to another location as detailed in
Section 02935, or may be left in place and be protected in
similar fashion as the trees to remain as described above.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Preparation and Demolition
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02210-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02210
SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for site clearance and
utility structure demolition.
B. The work includes:
1. Protection of existing vegetation to remain
2. Clearing and grubbing
3. Selective clearing and thinning
4. Demolition of structures, signage, light standards,
foundations and appurtenances
5. Removal and abandonment of utilities
6. Filling or removal of existing piping
7. Disposal of material from clearing, grubbing, thinning
and demolition in approved off-site disposal areas
8. Filling of voids and excavations resulting from the work
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Other specification Sections which directly relate to the work
of this Section include:
1. Section 02300—Earthwork
2. Section 02260 EPA NPDES General Permit for Construction
Activities requirements.
3. Section 02270—Erosion Control
1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site conditions existing during the bidding period will be
maintained by the Owner insofar as practical.
B. Actual site condition variations that differ from those during
the bidding period that affect site preparation operations
shall be brought to the attention of the Owner prior to the
commencement of any site work.
AIPW
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Site Preparation and Demolition
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02210-1 02/28/05
i
NEWWA New England Water Works Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
UL Underwriters Laboratory
1.08 TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain access to the site and through the
work zones for personnel and vehicles of emergency services,
utility agencies, inspection services and others authorized to
enter, move about and work on the site. Blockages to traffic
flow within any part of the Hospital Campus shall be presented
to the Owner a minimum of 48-hours in advance of actual
closure date, for review, approval and coordination. Due to
emergency care nature of existing facility, Contractor shall
not be authorized to proceed with any traffic closure within
the hospital campus without express, written approval from the
Owner.
B. When work is required on public roadways, Contractor shall
furnish, install, maintain and remove all signs, drums,
barricades, steel plates and other devices required by the
State or municipality to maintain and protect pedestrians and
vehicular traffic. All work within municipal right-of-way
shall be reviewed and approved by the City of Northampton
Department of Public Works. Contractor shall be responsible
for obtaining all related utility and road opening permits
from the city. ,
C. Protective measures shall be installed at site access points
to prevent mud and other debris from being deposited on the
public roadways by construction traffic. The public roadways
shall be swept as required to remove any deposits.
END OF SECTION 02000
Base Date: 6/03
Cooley Dickinson Hospital General Requirements
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.1' —2323 02000-4 02/28/05
i
required in the proposed work or existing utilities to resolve
the conflict as soon thereafter as is reasonable.
G. Contractor to verify the location, size, invert elevation and
type of existing facilities at all points of connection prior
to ordering new utility materials.
1.05 SOILS INFORMATION
A. Subsurface explorations and a geotechnical engineering report
have been prepared for the Owner and is available for
inspection upon written request from the Owner.
C. The soils data and geotechnical report are furnished for
informational purposes only and are specifically not a part of
these Contract Documents. The Owner does not guarantee that
the information is representative of all soils, rock and other
materials that may be encountered on the site.
D. Contractor may make additional subsurface explorations upon
written request to, and upon approval by, the Owner at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 SOIL SUPPORT
A. Contractor shall furnish and install excavation soil support
OOW devices or use soil strengthening techniques required to
perform excavations in accordance with the current
requirements of the Department of Labor, Occupational Health
and Safety Administration and all State and Municipal laws and
regulations.
1.07 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. References are made to technical societies, organizations and
groups using the following abbreviations. All work so
referred shall conform to the current edition of the
referenced standard.
GENERAL REFERENCE STANDARDS
AASHTO American Association of State Highway
Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
ACOE United States Army Corps of Engineers
AOAC Association of Official Agricultural Chemists
AGC Associated General Contractors of America
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWWA American Water Works Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Cooley Dickinson Hospital General Requirements
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 02000-3 02/28/05
locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the
owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and
(iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground
Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the
Work.
Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Facility is
uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was
not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor
shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before
further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing
any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency) ,
identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give
written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer.
Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and
determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in
the Contract Documents to reflect and document the
consequences of the existence of the Underground Facility. If
Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is
required, revised plans and specifications will be issued, to
reflect and document such consequences. During such time,
Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection
of such Underground Facility.
B. Contractor shall notify all municipal agencies and utility
companies owning or operating utilities, of proposed work AMNON
affecting the utilities, or agencies.
C. Contractor shall give written notification within the time
period required by the agency or company for advance
notification. A copy of the notification shall be furnished to
the Engineer.
D. Contractor shall notify "DIG SAFE" before commencing any work
in the vicinity of existing subsurface utilities.
E. Contractor shall secure in place existing utilities whose
support is affected by the work and cooperate and assist the
agency or company operating the utility in maintaining the
utility services. Contractor shall correct any damage to the
utilities caused by construction operations by repair, or
replacement, as required by the utility Owner. When the
repair or replacement is made by the utility Owner, Contractor
shall pay all costs assessed by the utility Owner for the
work.
F. If the existing utilities are found to conflict with the
proposed work, the Contractor shall protect and maintain the
utilities and take measurements to determine the location,
type and dimensions of the utility. The information shall be
furnished to the Engineer who will determine the changes
Cooley Dickinson Hospital General Requirements
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 02000-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies the general requirements for the site
work included in the Contract.
B. These requirements supplement those contained in the Standard
General Conditions of the Construction Contract and their
Supplemental Conditions.
C. References are included in this Section to Articles of the
General Conditions to call the Contractor's attention to
frequently needed requirements.
1.02 PERMITS
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions,
Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits
and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary,
in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay
all charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution
of the Work, and shall pay all charges of utility owners for
connections to the Work.
1.03 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and
Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the
Work.
B. If Contractor performs any work that is contrary to Laws or
Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses
and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting therefrom.
1.04 UTILITIES
A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or
indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based
on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the
owners of such Underground Facilities or by others.
Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy
or completeness of any such information or data; and
The cost of all of the following will be included in the
Contract and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:
(i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital General Requirements
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 02000-1 02/28/05
3
08
yy
OZ
Office
Building
Utility 3
Line "
�W
L-z €
gg_
i
s'1
�aa
Notes:
1. Seaboard Drilling Inc.conducted the explorations on May 13,2004 at the approximate locations shown.
2. Base plan provided by others. Locations staked out by others.
3. Office borings depicted by"O"and utility borings depicted by"L".
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC Scale:NTS Exploration Location Plan
Geotechnical Engineers May 2 004 CDH Office Bldg and Utilities
Holliston,Massachusetts Northampton, Massachusetts
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Infrastructure BORING NO. L-3
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts DATE: 5/15/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Casin g Stabilization Time
Depth
Date Started:5/12/04 (ft)
Date Finished:5/12/04 Dry
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
00 No. Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0 Fill
1 1 24/12 0-2 6-10-10-6 Ss Brown fine to medium SAND some Silt trace Gravel
2 _2'_
3
4
5
6 2 24/18 5-7 5-8-12-16 Ss Sand Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
7
8
9
10
11 3 24/18 10-12 5-10-13-16 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
12 _12'_
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA ss
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC BORING NO. L-2
Geotechnical Engineers CDH Infrastructure
Holliston,Massachusetts Northampton MA DATE: 5/15/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Casin g Stabilization Time
Depth
Date Started:5/12/04 (ft)
Date Finished:5/12/04 Dry
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
Type Strata Visual Description Note
00 No. Pen/Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0 Fill
1 1 24/12 0-2 15-16-14- Ss Black fine SAND some Silt
2 12 2'
3
4
5
6 2 24/22 5-7 5-9-13-16 Ss Sand Rust fine to medium SAND trace Silt
7
8
9
10
11 3 24/18 10-12 10-17-17- Ss Rust fine to medium SAND trace Silt
12 14 12'
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA s s
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG I Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Infrastructure BORING NO. L-1
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts DATE: 5/15/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Casin g Stabilization Time
Depth
Date Started:5/12104 B
Date Finished:5/12/04 5/12 8 During drilling
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
Type Strata Visual Description Note
(ft) No. Pen/ Depth Blows/6"
Rec.
0
1 1 24/6 0-2 3-5-9-12 Ss Fill 6"topsoil to brown black fine to medium SAND some
2 Silt trace Coal
3
4 —4'-
5
6 2 24/12 5-7 6-8-11-13 Ss Rust fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
7 Sand
8
9
10 Wet red fine to medium SAND trace Silt occasional
11 3 24/18 10-12 3-6-7-7 Ss Clayey Silt Layer
12 _12'-
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0–10%
A=Auger Little 10–20% Type HSA ss
U=Undisturbed Some 20–35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Office Building BORING NO. 0-8
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts DATE: 5/13/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Casin g Stabilization Time
Depth
Date Started:5/13/04 (B)
Date Finished:5/13/04 Dry
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
M) No. Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0
1 1 0-2 15-15-18- Ss Tan fine to medium SAND little Silt trace Gravel
2 29
3
4
5
6 2 5-7 6-7-6-8 Ss Tan fine to medium SAND trace Silt
7
8
9 Stratified
10 Sand
11 3 10-12 12-16-19- Ss Tan fine to medium SAND trace Silt
12 21
13
14
15
16 4 15-17 10-13-19- Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
17 19
18
19
20
21 5 20-22 5-6-9-12 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
22
23
24
25
26 6 25-27 5-5-8-8 Ss Red fine SAND some Silt with Clayey Silt Layer
27
28
29
30
31 7 30-32 7-10-16-17 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
32 _32'_
33
34
35
36
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA s s
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 2
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC
CDH Office Building BORING NO. 0-7
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts DATE:
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Depth
Date Started: Date (ft) Casin g Stabilization Time
Date Finished:
Driller:
Depth Sample
Type Strata Visual Description Note
(ft) No. Pen/ Depth Blows/6"
Rec.
37
38
39
40
41 9 4042 8-14-16-21 Ss Red fine SAND some Silt
42
43
44
45
46 10 45-47 10-14-17- Ss Stratified Red fine SAND some Silt
47 20 Sand
48
49
50
51 11 50-52 8-10-15-17 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt ""�►a
52
53
54
55
56 12 55-57 11-14-18- Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
57 16
58
59
60
61 13 60-62 10-11-15- Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
62 19 62'
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA s s ,AAWN
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Office Building BORING NO. O-7
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts p DATE: 5/13/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Casin g Stabilization Time
Depth
Date Started:5/13/04 (B)
Date Finished:5/13/04 Dry
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
�B) Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
No. Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0
1 1 0-2 6-8-8-9 Ss Tan fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
2
3
4
5
6 2 5-7 11-17-18- Ss Tan fine to medium SAND trace Silt
7 21
8
9 Stratified
10 Sand
11 3 10-12 7-12-16-14 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
12
13
14
15
16 4 15-17 13-14-17- Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
17 17
18
19
20
21 5 20-22 6-7-12-12 Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
22
23
24
25
26 6 25-27 9-10-10-10 Ss Tan fine to medium SAND trace Silt
27
28
29
30
31 7 30-32 8-9-9-11 Ss Red fine SAND some Silt
32
33
34
35
36 8 35-37 5-8-35-37 ss Red fine SAND some Silt
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA ss
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Office Building BORING NO. 0-6
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts DATE: 5/13/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Casin g Stabilization Time
Depth
Date Started:5/13/04 B
Date Finished:5/13/04 Dry
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
Depth Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
No. Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0
1 1 0-2 6-9-8-10 Ss Tan fine to medium SAND some Silt
2
3
4
5
6 2 5-7 6-8-10-12 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND and Silt
7
8
9 Stratified
10 Sand
11 3 10-12 11-18-31- Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
12 29
13
14
15
16 4 15-17 13-15-15- Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
17 14
18
19
20
21 5 20-22 6-7-10-13 Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
22
23
24
25
26 6 25-27 7-8-10-14 Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
27
28
29
30
31 7 30-32 6-8-8-11 Ss Red fine SAND little Silt
32 _32'_
33
34
35
36
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA s s
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Office Building BORING NO. 04
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts p DATE: 5/13/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Depth Casing Stabilization Time
Date Started:5/13/04 (ft)
Date Finished:5/13/04 D
Driller:Seaboard Drilling iY
Depth Sample
(ft) Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
No. Rec. Depth Blows!6"
0
1 1 0-2 5-5-34 Ss Tan fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
2
3
4
5
6 2 5-7 5-7-10-12 Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
7
8
9 Stratified
10 Sand
11 3 10-12 7-7-8-10 Ss Red fine SAND some Silt
12
13
14
15
16 4 15-17 5-6-8-10 Ss Red fine SAND some Silt
17
18
19
20
21 5 20-22 9-10-10-11 Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
22
23
24
25
26 6 25-27 9-12-22-19 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
27
28
29
30
31 7 30-32 10-15-15- Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
32 16 _32'_
33
34
35
36
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA s s
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 1401bs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
We!Geotechnieal r Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Office Building BORING NO. 0-3
Engineers Northam ton MA Holliston, assachusetts p DATE: 5/13/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Depth Casing Stabilization Time
Date Started:5/13/04 (ft)
Date Finished:5/13/04
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
(B) Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
No. Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0
1 1 0-2 8-8-10-10 Ss Tan fine to medium SAND little Silt
2
3
4
5
6 2 5-7 8-14-14-19 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
7
8
9 Stratified
10 Sand
11 3 10-12 10-20-21- Ss No Recovery
12 23
13
14
15
16 4 15-17 6-12-15-17 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
17
18
19
20
21 5 20-22 3-5-7-9 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
22
23
24
25
26 6 25-27 5-10-19-20 Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt
27
28
29
30
31 7 30-32 15-17-22- Ss Tan fine to medium SAND trace Silt
32 29 _32'_
33
34
35
36
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA ss
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 1401bs.
TEST BORING LOG sheet 2
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH O BORING NO. 0-2 "Amok
Office Building
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts DATE:
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Depth
Date Started: Date B Casing Stabilization Time
Date Finished:
Driller:
Depth Sample
Depth Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
No. Rec. Depth Blows/6"
37
38
39
40
41 9 40-42 6-12-15-20 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
42
43
44
45
46 10 4547 7-14-22-32 Ss Stratified Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
47 Sand
48
49
50
51 11 50-52 13-16-28- Ss Red fine to coarse SAND trace Silt •+'"14,
52 32
53
54
55
56 12 55-57 6-14-19-25 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
57
58
59
60
61 13 60-62 16-22-25- Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
62 33 62' _
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA s s n
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG Sheet 1
ON Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Office Building BORING NO. O-2
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts p DATE: 5/13/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date Depth Casing Stabilization Time
Date Started:5/13/04 tt
Date Finished:5-13/04 Dry
Driller:.Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
Type Strata Visual Description Note
(ft) No. Pen/
Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0
1 1 24/18 0-2 11-13-9-14 Ss Tan fine to medium SAND little Silt
2
3
4
5
6 2 24/20 5-7 6-11-13-14 Ss Red fine SAND little Silt
7
8
9 Stratified
10 Sand Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
11 3 24/18 10-12 8-11-17-19 Ss
12
13
14
15
16 4 24/20 15-17 7-11-14-19 Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
17
18
19
20
21 5 24/16 20-22 8-15-19-19 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
22
23
24
25
26 6 24/13 25-27 5-9-15-20 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
27
28
29
30
31 7 24/22 30-32 6-10-12-11 Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
32
33
34
35
36 8 24/17 35-37 6-10-17-20 1 ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
Notes:
Sample Type/FieldTest Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA ss
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4 1-3/8"
ITv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
TEST BORING LOG I Sheet 1
Weber Engineering Associates,LLC CDH Office Building BORING NO. 0-1
Geotechnical Engineers Northampton MA
Holliston,Massachusetts p DATE: 5/13/04
Groundwater Observations
Ground Elevation: Date .Depth Casing Stabilization Time
Date Started:5/13/04 ft
Date Finished:5/13/04 Dry
Driller:Seaboard Drilling
Depth Sample
th Pen/ Type Strata Visual Description Note
No. Rec. Depth Blows/6"
0
1 1 0-2 6-5-4-6 Ss Tan fine to medium SAND little Silt
2
3
4
5
6 2 5-7 15-17-28- Ss Red fine to medium SAND and Silt
7 25
8
9 Stratified
10 Sand
11 3 10-12 5-7-11-14 Ss Tan fine SAND some Silt
12
13
14
15
16 4 15-17 4-9-11-14 Ss Red fine SAND trace Silt
17
18
19
20
21 5 20-22 13-20-34- Ss Red fine to medium SAND trace Silt
22 34
23
24
25
26 6 25-27 10-100/5" Ss Red fine SAND little Silt trace Gravel
27
28
29
30
31 7 30-32 23-100/5" Ss GRAVEL
32 _32'_
33
34
35
36
Notes:
Sample Type/Field Test Proportioned Used Casing Sampler Core
ss=split spoon Trace 0—10%
A=Auger Little 10—20% Type HSA ss
U=Undisturbed Some 20—35% ID 4
Tv=Pocket Torvane And 35-50%
Pp=Pocket Penetrometer Hammer 140 lbs.
CONDITIONS
This report is delivered subject to the following conditions:
1. The recommendations presented herein reflect our opinions and are based upon engineering
studies conducted using the available subsurface information as stated herein along with our
understanding of the building configuration and grades. If other information becomes
available, or if conditions change we must be notified. The recommendations will be
reviewed in context with the new infornmmation and we reserve the right to modify our
recommendations as necessary.
2. The studies and recommendations summarized herein are based upon generally accepted
geotechnical engineering practices. No other warranty,expressed or implied is made. These
recommendations apply specifically to this project since they are based on site specific
conditions. Hence,they are not transferable.
3. This report has been prepared solely for design purposes and shall not be incorporated by
reference of other means into the Contract Documents. If this report is included in the
Project Manual,it shall be for information only. Earthwork specification clauses shall take
precedence.
We are pleased to have this opportunity to assist. If you have any questions regarding this report,
please do not hesitate to call.
Very truly yours,
WEBER ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES,LLC
Richard P. Weber, P.E., Manager
Attachments:
Exploration Location Plan
Soil Test Boring Logs
CC: Jeff Struble, Struble Engineering(by email)
Stacey Yeragotelis,TRO(by email)
I' io (tiW' 29.4573 Fax (988) 808-7381 92 R iarcti £f' Lanc, It I i,,ton MA 01 % .!6
Sieve Size Percent Finer
3-inches 100
No. 10 30-95
No.40 10-70
No. 200 0-15111
Where this material is used for backfill against basement walls for drainage,the amount passing the
No.200 sieve shall be no more than 10 percent. As an alternative,a synthetic drainage product
consisting of geotextile fabric and a drainage medium can be used adjacent to the basement walls for
drainage.
Gravel Borrow.
Base course material for slabs,pavement,walkways and where required to protect the granular fill
from disturbance.
Sieve Size Percent Finer
3-inch 100
1/2-inch 50-85
No. 4 40-75
No. 10 30-60
No. 40 10-35
No. 100 5-20
No. 200 2-8
Crushed Stone
The crushed stone should meet the requirements for material M2.01.4(3/4-inch gradation)stated in
the Massachusetts Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges.
Underpinning
We are unaware of any requirement for underpinning.
REVIEW OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
We recommend that we be allowed the opportunity to review the plans and specifications for
geotechnical issues prior to completing the Contract Documents. The purpose of this is to verify that
the intent of our recommendations have been correctly interpreted and included.
11 2110n f`i 4} 2,9-?^ . 3 I .x €4 S 4ftii_7 <S4 9.' f;riarcliff' Lan;,, 'H olliston MA
F a s2 i;
Earthwork
In the preceding sections we have outlined several recommendations for earthwork Below,we
provide additional recommendations,which should be incorporated into the structural design and
Contract Documents.
1. We expect that the excavated soil on site can be uses as common borrow and granular fill.
However,if the material has insufficient fines,the soil might require amendment or moisture so
that it can be compacted to the required degree. Once compact,the material must be protected
from becoming disturbed especially when dry.
2. All fill placed within and below the structure should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the
maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.
3. All excavations shall be stabilized by cutting back the side slopes or using shoring and bracing as
required by 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P,Excavations. Plans and specifications should make
reference to this requirement so that Contractors are aware of their responsibility. Because of the
clean nature of the native soil,the sides of excavations are expected to slough if not protected.
The contractor shall be required to engage a registered profession engineer to advise on
excavtion stability and provide a design for a lateral support system when conditions warrant.
Protecting excavations and providing safe working conditions is entirely the contractor's
responsibility.
Materials
We recommend that the following material gradations and names be used be used for consistency on
the drawings and in the earthwork specifications. All material must be well graded between the
limits shown herein and be capable of being compacted to the required degree of density. The
material shall have sufficient fines so that it does not shove and remains stable. We also
recommend that the specifications not allow the use of recycled material such as reprocessed
building demolition material.
Common Borrow
Friable natural soil containing no gravel greater than 2/3 loose lift thickness and free of trash, snow,
ice, organics,roots,tree stumps and no more than 35 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Common
borrow can be used as general backfill provided it can be compacted and stabilized for the intended
purpose.
Granular Fill
Pavement subbase material and structural fill below the building slab base course layer and below
footings:
Ph •n.; t54Sj ?29--4573 fax (983) S08-7384 92 BI-iarCIiH' L,.nc; Holliston MA 017,16
1'ar?,a 6
*, are other conventional retaining walls on site for landscaping,then they should be designed based on
the"active"lateral earth pressure. The recommended design values are shown below.
Total Soil Unit Weight(y)pcf 125 pcf
Lateral Earth Pressure Coefficient 0.5 At Rest Condition
(K@—Horizontal backfill surface
Equivalent Fluid Pressure(ye)pcf / Koy—62.5 pcf/ft
ft depth(at rest condition)
Lateral Earth Pressure Coefficient 0.33 Active Condition
(Ka)—Horizontal backfill surface
Equivalent Fluid Pressure(ye)pcf / Kay=42 pcFft
ft depth(active conditions)
Earthquake Force 0.045'yH2
Groundwater Pressure No - drained
Basement walls backfilled after the floors have been constructed will be restrained from lateral
movement and should be designed using the"at rest"pressure. Walls that are free to move laterally
at the top, such as a conventional cantilever retaining wall,should be designed using the"active"
pressure.
Surcharge Pressure
Where a restrained below ground wall retains fill and a floor above such,as the grade separation
between two floors,we recommend including a surcharge load in addition to the static and seismic
force. The recommended lateral surcharge pressure is a uniform load of 0.5q psf applied to the rear
of the below ground wall. For retaining walls resisting active pressure and a surcharge such as a
retaining wall supporting a parking area at a higher grade behind it,we recommend including a
lateral uniform surcharge pressure of 0.33q psf applied to the rear of the wall.
We recommend using the following values of surcharge pressure(q):
Condition Surcharge q(psf)
Floor load behind below ground wall 100
Light vehicular traffic/parking 100
Seismic Considerations
Subsurface conditions beginning at the ground surface of the site consist of medium dense to dense
stratified sand. However it is likely that the medium dense soil exceed 40-ft thick. Groundwater
was not encountered within a depth of at least 60-ft BGS. Based on requirements stated in Section
1612.4.2 of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Sixth Edition it is our opinion that the site has an
S3 site profile. Accordingly the recommended seismic coefficient(S)for design is 1.5. The site is
not susceptible to liquefaction since groundwater lies above 60-ft and the material itself is medium
to dense.
Pitt °t c: {�0 ;29-.45 3 F X (S 8 S g 184 X32' 1:3vi Iitf 1, 0, IIo111s�ton MA (11 ",I6
a
not subject to groundwater,we recommend that the below ground walls be dampproofed. We
recommend that a suitable continuous vapor retarder be used below all slabs on grade to reduce the "ok.
possibility of migration of moisture into the building,which could contribute to development of
mold. You should also be aware that subdrains around and below the structure will not prevent
moisture. This issue must also be coordinated with other design team professionals who can provide
measures to handle moisture that might invade building space.
In order to reduce potential percolation of surface water around the below ground area, all drainage
must be directed away from the structure as required in the MBC. Additionally,the ground surface
around the below ground walls must be paved with bituminous pavement or install 24-inches of
relatively impervious soil within the upper 2-ft of backfill placed adjacent to the wall to reduce the
potential of water percolating down adjacent to the below ground basement or foundation walls.
Slab
The subsurface conditions at this site are suitable for supporting a slab on grade. We recommend
that the slab be cast directly over at least a 6-inch thick base course layer consisting of gravel borrow
or a 4-inch thick layer of 3/flinch graded crushed stone. Prior to constructing the base course layer,
we recommend that the entire slab footprint area be proofrolled to tighten soil that might have
become loosened. Since the soil is relatively clean and dries quickly,moisture might be required to
assist compacting the material especially if the work is done during the dry summer months.
Subsurface Drainage
The groundwater level is located at least 60-ft BGS and therefore,the below ground slab on grade
and basement walls will not be subject to groundwater. However,the area at and below foundation
grade must be maintained pervious so that water percolating downward(if any)will not become
trapped at the foundation grade by construction procedures or layers of sillier and less pervious soil.
This can be done by providing a pervious drainage medium around the exterior perimeter of the
building at the foundation grade extending to 6-inches above the top of slab. The pervious medium
can be%inch crushed stone encased in geotextile fabric)extending at least 12-inches beyond the
edge of footing and basement wall.
The ground surface immediately adjacent to the building perimeter must slope away from the
structure at a grade not less than 1 (vertical)to 12(horizontal)for a distance of at least 8 ft unless
other alternative methods are used for diverting water.
Lateral Earth Pressure
Exterior foundation walls and retaining walls should be designed to resist both the superimposed
effect of the total static lateral earth pressure and the earthquake force shown below. The earthquake
force should be applied as an inverse triangle and as required by the Massachusetts State Building
Code. The pressure cause by temporary surcharges can be ignored. In addition,we believe that
there will be no significant permanent surcharges applied to the walls. The height of the wall"for
earthquake force calculations is the height measured from the top of the horizontal backfill surface to
the finish grade or floor in front of the wall. The height of wall for static earth pressure calculations
is the height of wall measured from the top of the backfill to the bottom of the foundation. If there
T,1)on i OSj 7;-_155 7'3 F {S8,8) S()S-73x1 92 BriarcIiH' La1) Elc>lls t;>u MA 01 "d6
1'
4
Groundwater
Groundwater was not encountered to the depths explored within the building footprint. Therefore,
the depth to groundwater is at least 62-ft BGS at proposed medial office building site. Unlike the
building site,groundwater was encountered at a depth of approximately 8-ft BGS in boring U 1
along the utility line. No groundwater was encountered in borings Lr2 and L,-3. The groundwater
conditions stated on the logs as reported herein are applicable to the time when the readings were
made. The level of groundwater below the ground surface fluctuates based on conditions such as
season,temperature and amount of precipitation that may be different from the time when the
observations were made. Although groundwater levels may be higher or lower during construction
and during the life of the structure,we do not anticipate that groundwater will affect construction
except possibly within the lower reach of the utility line at L 1.
RECOMMENDATIONS
Recommendations are presented in the following sections.
Building Foundations
Based on the results of the subsurface exploration program conducted at this site,the foundation soil
is medium dense sand Our studies were conducted beginning at a depth of 12-ft BGS considering
that this depth corresponds to the approximate proposed basement grade. Based on the medium
*� dense stratified sand encountered below this site,we recommend that the building be supported by
spread footings. We recommend that individual spread footings be design to bear at a soil pressure
of 2-tsf while narrow,continuous strip footings be designed to bear at a soil pressure of 1.5-tsf.
Individual footings should be at least 3-ft wide while continuous footings should be at least 2-ft
wide. Since the footings will bear at the basement grade,we expect that the bottom of the footings
will bear at a depth of 2-ft below the top of slab grade.
Footings designed in accordance with these recommendations are expected to have a total settlement
less than 3/4-inches while differential settlement between adjacent footings will be less provided that
the foundation soil remains firm and undisturbed Since the foundation soil is granular,we expect
that the settlement will occur during construction and shortly thereafter as load is applied to the
foundation.
Foundation Preparation
The foundation soil consists of relatively clean sand,which can easily become disturbed when dry
and worked over during forming and placing steel. Therefore,in order to protect the integrity of the
foundation material,we recommend that the exposed soil be protected using a 3-inch thick concrete
mud mat or a 4-inch thick layer of 3/cinch graded,angular crushed stone. We recommend that this
detail be included on the Contract drawings.
Moisture
The Massachusetts State Building Code(MBC)requires that below ground walls be dampproofed
unless subject to groundwater in which case the walls must be waterproofed. Since the structure is
1'liti .. i 0 > 2,9_. ;7 i Fax (F 85 ) i 08-'?k4 92 13 1-i a r c I i f F L I i o 1 MA 01746
1$:t g 3
the hospital building and underground utilities. The 6 borings undertaken within the building
footprint is considered sufficient because of the relatively uniform soil conditions encountered.
Borings B-2 and B-7 were taken to a depth of 62-ft BGS to assess deep subsurface conditions while
the remaining boreholes B-1,B-3, B-4 and B-6 to B-8 terminated at a depth of 32-ft BGS. Samples
of soil were retrieved at the ground surface and at 5-ft intervals to provide material for the visual
classification as shown on the logs.The samples were retrieved using a standard split spoon sampler
driven with a 140-pound weight falling 30-inches at each sampling depth. The sampler was driven a
distance of 24-inches or as otherwise shown on the logs. The number of hammer blows required to
drive the sampler into the soil in 6-inch increments is recorded on the logs. The sum of the hammer
blows for the 6-inch to 12-inch and 12-inch to 18-inch interval provides the Standard Penetration
Resistance(N)and is a measure of soil density in granular soils. The N-value in granular soil has
been correlated with the soil friction value to provide soil strength information.
Borings Lr 1 to Lr3 were taken along the proposed utility line alignment shown on the exploration
plan. These borings were taken to a depth of 12-ft BGS.
It should be noted that the classification of soil strata shown on the logs is based upon our
interpretation of the subsurface conditions. It is possible that there might be thin layers of material
lying between the sampling intervals that are not described on the logs and which might not become
known until construction. Likewise,the depth to each soil stratum is considered to be approximate
and may be more gradual or different in the field. Logs of the borings were prepared by Weber
Engineering Associates, LLC and are attached to this report for reference.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
The subsurface conditions described herein are based upon our interpretation of the materials
observed in the exploration program. You should be aware however that soil conditions can vary
between borehole locations and the actual conditions encountered during construction could be
different from those indicated by the logs.
Soil
The subsurface soil conditions encountered in each of the borings within the building footprint are
similar to the depths explored. The soil consists of medium dense to dense stratified sand,which is
relatively clean(i.e. visually less than 10%silt)although some samples exhibited more silt content.
The soil is predominately fine to medium sand with trace silt throughout the strata although there are
samples of material that visually consist of fine sand some silt,fine sand little silt,trace gravel.
Occasionally the sand changes to fine to coarse. This soil is suitable bearing material for supporting
spread footings.
Soil conditions encountered along the proposed utility alignment consist of 2-ft to 4-ft of black to
brown granular fill. Trace amounts of coal were observed within the fill retrieved from boring L-1.
Material below the fill consists of medium dense fine to medium to fine to coarse sand with trace
silt.
P wn� (50 ) =i'29-4573 F ax €; ) 8()$_73&4 " Bri arc Iiff 1.,t:i3e, 11<>?1ilton X A 01716
Page ?
W, _ wa I ,w.� .. ,1 o ti WC
May 21,2004
(By ernail)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
C/O Ms Juanita Forsythe
303 Prospect St
Northampton MA 01060
Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Medical Office Building
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Project 04579-1
Dear Ms Forsythe:
We are pleased to submit this letter summarizing the results of the geotechmcal engineering studies
undertaken regarding the referenced project at Cooley Dickinson Hospital (CDH). This work was
conducted in accordance with our proposal dated April 7, 2004. The objective of the work
summarized herein was to provide geotechnical recommendations to the design team for use on this
project.
BACKGROUND
CDH plans to construct a multi story medical office building at the hospital campus located along
Locust Street in Northampton,Massachusetts. The site of the proposed structure is at the northwest
corner of the campus in an area now occupied by paved parking. We understand that the structure
will have a one level below ground basement. At the time that this report was prepared,proposed
structural column loads were not available. Our assessment therefore was conducted using typical
soil pressures and a basement grade located 12-ft below ground surface(BGS). If conditions
change,we must be notified and such changes might result in a modification of statements made in
this report.
This report also includes logs of three borings taken along the proposed infrastructure alignment.
The utility alignment runs from the power plant to the proposed building.
SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS
Seaboard Drilling Inc. of Springfield,Massachusetts conducted a program of 7 subsurface
explorations on May 13,2004 at the locations shown on the attached Exploration Location Plan.
The original scope of explorations included 9 borehole locations. However,two borings,0-5 and O-
9,were deleted from the program because they were located close to an underground extension of
11 i 50 29-4573 F'ax (983) 808-7384 ;:? Briarcliff Lauc , 11,oHiston MA 01 ,746
Ila,,e I
SECTION 00860-GEOTECHNICAL DATA
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SOILS INVESTIGATION
A. All information furnished in the soils investigation is solely for the information of the
Contractor and is not a part of this Contract. The Owner and Architect accept no responsibility
for their contents. If the Contractor desires to make his own investigation of sub-soil conditions
at the site, he may do so after permission of the Owner is granted. Any work performed by the
Contractor prior to signing of the Contract shall be at his own expense and risk, it being
understood that any services, excavations, or existing conditions disrupted by the Contractor
during the time of investigation shall be immediately restored to conditions existing prior to the
investigation at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be assumed to have
familiarized himself with the nature of the subsurface and ground water conditions to his own
satisfaction.
B. The Soils Investigation follows:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Geotechnical Data
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.l' —2323 00860-1 02/28/05
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13915 FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
1.5150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15221 CHEMICAL-WASTE.PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15445 SEWAGE PUMPS
DIVISJC*�16- ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
END OF SECTION 00005
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 00005-2 02/28/05
SECTION 00005 -TABLE OF CONTENTS
OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
00001 COVER PAGE
00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
(Refer to Package `A'for additional Sections in this Division)
00860 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
(Refer to Package `A'for Sections in this Division)
DIVISION 2-SITEWORK
02000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
02210 SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION
02260 EPA NPDES GENERAL PERMIT FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
REQUIREMENTS
02270 EROSION CONTROL
02300 EARTHWORK
02320 PAVEMENT SUBBASE AND BASE
02500 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
02600 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02649 WARNING AND TRACER TAPE
02700 HOT MIX ASPHALT(HMA)PAVEMENT
02725 CURBING
02760 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
02920 SEEDING AND SODDING
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03301 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
10450 SIGNAGE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 00005-1 02/28/05
'd
34qmI IN 11 v:
4 r
A.t:, y'
,
PR UAL
_ . _...:.....,.
Date of Issue:February 28, 2005
PROJECT Foundation/Site/Utilities - Package`F.1'
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Northampton, Massachusetts
Architect's Commission Number—2323
OWNER Cooley Dickinson Hospital
30 Locust Street
Northampton, Massachusetts 01061
ARCHITECT The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street
Newton, Massachusetts 02458
CONSULTANTS Structural Engineer
Struble Engineering, LLC
604 Main Street
Reading, Massachusetts 01867
HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection,
and Electrical Engineering
The Ritchie Organization, Inc.
80 Bridge Street
Newton, Massachusetts 02458
Civil Engineer
Vanasse Hangen Brustlin, Inc.
505 East Columbus Avenue
Springfield, Massachusetts 01105
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER Barr&Barr, Inc.
260 Cochituate Road,2'd Floor
Framingham, Massachusetts 01701
A R C H I T E C T U R E P L A N N I N G E N G I N E E R I N G I N T E R I O R D E S I G N
TRO/The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street,Newton,MA 02458-1134 T 617.969.9400 F 617.527.6753
B. Adhesive:
1. Karnak 220AF Fibered Emulsion Dampproofing
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation.
2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install insulation products and accessories in strict accordance with insulation manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install rigid insulation on the inside of exterior foundation walls. Extend insulation vertically
from top of slab to top of footing. Provide underslab insulation below the entire area of slab-on-
grade construction.
B. Install insulation with mastic as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 07200
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FOUNDATION INSULATION
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F1' —2323 07200- 3 Addendum No.1 -03/03/05
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Coordinate delivery and storage procedures to insure proper protection of the materials at the
site. as well as timely delivery to meet the requirements of other Sections of the work.
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary at no change in Contract Sum.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Owens-Corning,Toledo, OH 43659; (800)438-7465
2. Dow Chemical Co.,Midland,MI 48674; (800)441-4369.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Type "A" Rigid Insulation:
1. Insulation shall be Styrofoam SE brand insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co.
or Foamular 250. Provide material with the following characteristics:
a. Comply with ASTM C578-92, Type VI, density 1.6 lb/cu. ft., min., compressive
strength 25 psi(ASTM D1621-73.
b. Thermal resistance: 5 year aged R-values of 5.4 and 5.0 min., degree F/sq. ft.-
h/BTU/inch at 40 degrees F and 75 degrees F respectively(ASTM C518-91).
C. Water absorption: Max. 0.3%by volume(ASTM C272-91).
2. Provide material in thickness as indicated,but not less than the following:
a. Inside face of foundation walls: 1-inch.
b. Underside of floor slabs: 1-inch.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FOUNDATION INSULATION
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F1' —2323 07200-2 Addendum No. 1-03/03/05
SECTION 07200-FOUNDATION INSULATION
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rigid insulation at interior of foundation walls.
2. Rigid insulation on underside of floor slabs.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete
2. Section 07115 -Dampproofing
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Samples: Furnish 12-inch x 12-inch sample of type of insulation specified, labeled with
manufacturer's name, material name, thickness and locations of use.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital FOUNDATION INSULATION
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F1' —2323 07200- 1 Addendum No.1 -03/03/05
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering
and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Surface shall be free of oil, grease,dirt, laitance and loose material.
1. Dry concrete and masonry surfaces may be dampened with water before application.
2. Repair all cracks and holes with Karnak #220AF Fibered Emulsion Dampproofing and
Karnak#31 Fiberglass Membrane or Karnak#34 Asphalt Saturated Cotton Fabric,before
applying the surface coating.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
B. Apply primer, when so required by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Apply coating by trowel in such a manner as to completely cover wall surfaces leaving no
pinholes,defects or undercoated areas. Apply at a rate of 6 gallons for 100 square feet.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 07115
' Cooley Dickinson Hospital DAMPPROOFING
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 07115 -3 Addendum No. 1 -03/03/05
1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Deliver all materials to the site in sealed containers bearing the manufacturer's name and
material identification.Materials shall be stored off the ground and kept dry until use.
B. All surfaces shall be clean, free of dampness, frost, dust, laitance or loose concrete, films of oil,
grease, curing compounds, lacquers or other substances which would affect the application of
dampproofing.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Karnak Corp., Clark,NJ 07066; (800) 526-4236
2. W.R. Meadows,Hampshire,IL 60140; (800) 342-5976
B. Dampproofing:
1. Shall be asbestos free, emulsion type fibrated asphalt compound, conforming to 4ASTM
'" D1227,Type IV,Karnak 920,W. R. Meadows,Type 3, as approved equal.
2. When application is to be performed when temperatures are below those recommended
by manufacturer, use solvent type Karnak 86, W. R. Meadows Spray-Mastic, or as
approved equal. Apply manufacturer's recommended primer to surfaces as required by
manufacturer's instructions.
3. All material shall be certified by manufacturer to be asbestos free.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital DAMPPROOFING
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 07115 -2 Addendum No. l -03/03/05
SECTION 07115-DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work to be performed shall include:
1. Applying dampproofing to the following areas:
a. Exterior face of steel columns, bearing plates and fastening hardware attached to
concrete footings in locations where columns extend under concrete slab-on-grade.
b. Exterior face of foundation walls of spaces to be occupied, except where
waterproofing membrane is scheduled or indicated.
C. In areas noted on the drawings to receive dampproofing other than those described
above.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of Package `A' of these
Specifications.
low B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 05120-Structural Steel.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, Submittals and Substitutions.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturer's specifications, recommendations for method of application, primer, coverage or
thickness, and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital DAMPPROOFING
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 07115 - 1 Addendum No. l -03/03/05
this purpose. No debris shall be flushed into existing
sewers, storm drains and or streams.
All work of cleaning and repair shall be performed at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3,11 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the work, and before final acceptance by
the Engineer, the entire sewer system shall be subjected to a
final inspection in the presence of the Engineer. The work
shall not be considered as complete until all requirements for
line, grade, cleanliness, leakage tests and other requirements
have been met.
END OF SECTION 02570
Base Date: 6/03
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V—2323 02570-14 02/28/05
Pipe Size (in. ) Time (sec. )
4 0.190L
6 0.427L
8 0.760L
10 1.187L
12 1.709L
15 2.671L
Where L = length of pipe being tested
D. Vacuum Testing of Manholes: New sewer manholes shall be
vacuum tested in accordance with procedure and standards in
ASTM C1244.
E. Correction of Defective Work: If leakage exceeds the
specified amount, the Contractor shall make the necessary
repairs or replacements required to permanently reduce the
leakage to within the specified limit, and the tests shall be
repeated until the leakage requirement is met.
F. Compliance with Acrency Requirements: In the event of conflict
between the leakage test requirements specified herein with
the leakage test requirements of agencies having jurisdiction
over all or any portion of the sewer system installed under
this Contract, the more restrictive requirements shall govern.
3.09 PIPE DEFLECTION MEASUREMENT
A. In accordance with ASTM D3034, no less than 30 days after
completion of the PVC sewer pipe installation, the Contractor
shall test the pipeline for deflection using a "go/no-go"
deflection mandrel having a minimum of nine evenly spaced arms
or prongs. The "go/no-go" gauge shall be hand pulled through
all sections of the pipeline by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall submit drawings of the "go/no-go" gauge to
the Engineer for approval prior to testing. Complete
dimensions of the gauge for each diameter of pipe to be tested
shall be in accordance with ASTM D3034.
B. Any section of pipe found to exceed 7.5 percent cross-section
deflection shall be deemed a failed pipe and shall be
excavated and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
3.10 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. The Contractor shall clean the entire sewer system of all -
debris and obstructions. This shall include removal of all
formwork from structures, concrete and mortar droppings,
construction debris and dirt. The system shall be thoroughly
flushed clean and the Contractor shall furnish all necessary
hose, pumps, pipe and other equipment that may be required for
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'—2323 02570-13 02/28/05
2. a. Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to
or greater than the diameter of the pipe to be tested.
b. Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal test pressures
without requiring external bracing or blocking.
c. All air used shall pass through a single control
panel.
d. Three individual hoses shall be used for the following
connections:
• From control panel to pneumatic plugs for
inflation;
• From control panel to sealed line for introducing
the low pressure air;
• From sealed line to control panel for continually
monitoring the air pressure rise in the sealed
line.
3. The following testing procedures shall be explicitly
followed:
a. All pneumatic plugs shall be seal tested before being
used in the actual test installation. One length of
pipe shall be laid on the ground and sealed at both
ends with the pneumatic plugs to be checked. Air
shall be introduced into the plugs to 25 psig. The
sealed pipe shall be pressurized to 5 psig. The plugs
shall hold against this pressure without bracing and
without movement of the plugs out of the pipe.
4. After the pipe has been backfilled and cleaned, pneumatic
plugs shall be placed in the line at each manhole and
inflated to 25 psi. Low-pressure air shall be introduced
into this sealed line until the internal air pressure
reaches 4 psi greater than the average back pressure of
any ground water that may be over the pipe. At least two
minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to
stabilize.
After the stabilization period (3.5 psi minimum pressure
in the pipe) , the portion of pipe tested shall be
acceptable if the time required in minutes for the -
pressure to decrease from 3.5 to 3.0 psi (greater than
the average back pressure of any ground water that may be
over the pipe) is not less than the time indicated in the
following table:
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package 'F.1'-2323 02570-12 02/28/05
Depending on field conditions, the following tests for leakage
shall be employed:
1. Infiltration Test: The test may be used only when ground
water levels are at least five feet above the top of the
pipe for the entire length of the section to be tested
during the entire period of the test. Ground water
levels may be measured in an open trench or in standpipes
previously placed in backfilled trenches during the
backfilling operations. When standpipes are installed in
the backfill for ground water measurement, the lower ends
shall be satisfactorily embedded in a mass of crushed
stone or gravel to maintain free percolation and
drainage. Infiltration through joints shall be measured
by using a watertight weir or any other approved device
for volumetric measurement installed at the lower end of
the section under test.
2. Exfiltration Test: This test consists of filling the
pipe with water to provide a head of at least five feet
above the top of the pipe or five feet above ground
water, whichever is higher, at the highest point of the
pipe section under test, and then measuring the loss of
water from the line by the amount which must be added to
maintain the original level. In this test, the pipe must
remain filled with water for at least twenty-four hours
prior to the taking of measurements. Exfiltration shall
be measured by the drop of water level in a closed-end
standpipe or in one of the sewer manholes available for
convenient measuring.
When a standpipe and plug arrangement is used in the
upper manhole of a section under test, a positive method
of releasing entrapped air in the sewer shall be
installed prior to taking measurements.
3 . Leakage Requirements: The total leakage of any section
tested shall not exceed the rate of 50 gallons per day
per mile per inch of nominal pipe diameter. For purposes
of determining the maximum allowable leakage, manholes
shall be considered as sections of 48-inch diameter pipe,
five feet long, and the equivalent leakage allowance
shall be 2.25 gallons per manhole per 24 hours.
C. Low-Pressure Air Exfiltration Testing
1. The sewer pipes and service pipes shall be tested for
leakage by the use of low-pressure air as approved by the
Engineer. The test length shall not exceed one length of
pipe between two manholes. Air test procedures may be
dangerous and the Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions to prevent blowouts.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l'—2323 02570-11 02/28/05
the manhole invert. Drop connections for differences of less
than 2 feet shall also be provided if required by the
governing authority.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. General Requirements: The Contractor shall make all required .
connections of the building sewer service pipes into the sewer
system. Work shall include making the service pipe
connections into the sewer system pipes or into the manholes
located ten (10) feet outside of the proposed building lines.
If stubs are constructed for later connection to the building
pipes, the ends shall be sealed with watertight plugs.
B. Coordination with Building Contractor: The Contractor shall
coordinate the work with the work of the Building Contractor
to determine the exact location and elevation of the point of
entry into the building.
3.08 LEAKAGE TESTS
A. General Requirements: The Contractor shall test the completed
sewer system, including manholes and service connections, for
leakage by infiltration, exfiltration or low-pressure air
exfiltration tests. Manhole structures may be tested by a low
pressure air vacuum test. The tests shall be conducted as
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all
necessary equipment, materials and labor for performing the
tests.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 hours
prior to the start of testing. Testing shall only be
performed in the presence of the Engineer.
Sections of pipe tested for infiltration and exfiltration
prior to completion of the Contract shall be subject to
additional leakage tests, if warranted, in the opinion of the
Engineer, prior to acceptance of the Work.
B. Infiltration and Exfiltration Testing: The test length
intervals for either type of leakage test shall be approved by
the Engineer, but in no event shall they exceed one thousand
feet. Where sewer pipe is laid on steep grades, the length to
be tested by exfiltration at any one time shall be limited by
the maximum allowable internal pressure on the pipe and joints
at the lower end of the line. The maximum internal pressure
at the lowest end shall not exceed 25 feet of water or 10.8 -
psi.
The test period, wherein the measurements are taken, shall not
be less than four hours in either type of test.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 02570-10 02/28/05
3.05 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES
A. General Requirements: The Contractor shall make all required
connections of the proposed sewer into existing sewer system,
where and as shown on the Drawings and as required by the
Engineer.
B. Contractor to verify the location, size, invert and type of
existing pipes at all points of connection prior to ordering
new utility materials.
C. Compliance with Requirements of Owner of Facility:
Connections into existing sewer facilities shall be performed
in accordance with the requirements of the Owner of the
facility. The Contractor shall comply with all such
requirements, including securing of all required permits, and
paying the costs thereof. The costs of making the connections
in accordance with the requirements of the owner of the
existing facility shall be included in the Contract Sum.
3.06 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS
A. Manhole pipe connections for precast manhole bases may be
accomplished by any method described below. The Contractor
shall make sure that the outside diameter of the pipe is
compatible with the particular pipe connection used.
1. A tapered hole filled with non-shrink waterproof grout
after the pipe is inserted. This connection method will
not be allowed when connecting PVC pipe to manholes.
2. The LOCK JOINT Flexible Manhole Sleeve cast in the wall
of the manhole base. The stainless steel strap and
exposed sleeve shall be protected from corrosion with a
bitumastic coating.
3. PRESS WEDGE II gasket cast into the wall on the manhole
base. The rubber wedge shall only be driven into the V
slot from the outside of the manhole.
4. The RES-SEAL, a cast iron compression ring which
compresses a rubber "0" ring gasket into a tapered hole
in the wall of the manhole base. Exposed metal shall be
protected from corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
5. KOR-N-SEAL neoprene boot cast into the manhole wall. The
stainless steel clamp shall be protected from corrosion
with a bitumastic coating.
B. Sewer manholes shall be constructed with drop connections when
the proposed invert of the connection is at least 2 feet above
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.I'—2323 02570-9 02/28/05
C. Masonry: All brick or concrete block shall be thoroughly
wetted before laying.
The first course of masonry shall be embedded in the concrete
foundation immediately after the foundation has been poured.
All masonry shall be laid in the flat position in a full bed
of mortar, and all vertical and horizontal joints shall be
filled solid with mortar. Vertical joints on each succeeding
course shall be staggered. Joints shall be not less than 3/8
inch or more than 1/2-inch wide. Joints on the inside of the
structure shall be neatly struck and pointed.
The exterior and interior surface of the walls shall be
plastered with a one-half (1/2) inch coat of 1:2 cement
mortar.
D. Inverts: Brick invert channels shall be constructed in all
manholes to provide a smooth channel for sewage flow through
the structure, and shall correspond in shape to the lower half
of the pipe. At changes in directions, the inverts shall be
laid out in curves of the longest possible radii tangent to
the centerline of the sewer pipes at the manhole side..
Shelves shall be constructed to the elevation of the highest
pipe crown and sloped to drain toward the flow channel.
Special care shall be taken in laying brick inverts. Joints
shall not exceed three-sixteenth inch in thickness and each
brick shall be carefully laid in full cement mortar joints on
bottom, side and end in one operation. No grouting or working
in of mortar after laying of the brick will be permitted.
Bricks forming the shaped inverts in manholes shall be laid on
edge.
Invert channels shall be built for future extensions where
shown on the Drawings and where directed by the Engineer.
E. Steps: Steps shall be installed in all manholes, spaced
twelve inches on center vertically and set securely in place
during the construction of the masonry wall.
F. Precast Manholes: Precast manholes shall be installed only
after Shop Drawings have been approved.
The top grade of the precast concrete cone section shall be
set sufficiently below finished grade to permit a maximum of
five and a minimum of two courses (laid in the flat position) -
of eight inch brick to be used as risers to adjust the grade
of the manhole frame. Manhole frames shall be set on a grout
pad to make a water-tight fit.
Grout fill lifting holes on all manhole sections.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02570-8 02/28/05
C. 1. Lubricant for jointing of PVC pipe shall be applied as
specified by the pipe manufacturer. Use only lubricant
supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
2. PVC Pipe shall be pushed home by hand or with the use of
bar and block. The use of power equipment, such as a
backhoe bucket, shall only be used at the direction of
the manufacturer.
3. Field-cut pipe ends shall be cut square and the pipe
surface beveled to the size and shape of a factory-
finished beveled end. All sharp edges shall be rounded
off.
D. Jointing of Ductile Iron and Cast Iron Pipe shall be in
accordance with Section 02500, Water Supply System.
E. Jointing of Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Pipe shall be in
accordance with Section 02600, Storm Drainage System.
3.04 MANHOLES
A. General Requirements: All manholes shall be built in
accordance with the Details and in the locations shown on the
Drawings.
Structures shall be constructed of brick masonry, precast
solid concrete block, cast-in-place concrete or precast
concrete.
All masonry shall be installed by personnel experienced and
skilled in this work, and any person net deemed to be such by
the Engineer shall be removed and replaced by a person so
qualified.
Manholes shall be constructed as soon as the pipe laying
reaches the location of the manhole. Should the Contractor
continue pipe laying without making provision for completion
of the manhole, the Engineer shall have the authority to stop
the pipe laying operations until the manhole is completed.
The Contractor shall accurately locate each manhole and set
accurate templates to conform to the required line and grade.
Any manhole which is mislocated or oriented improperly shall
be removed and rebuilt in its proper location, alignment and
orientation at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Foundations: All manholes shall be constructed on a 12-inch
layer of compacted bedding material. The excavation shall be
dewatered to provide a dry condition while placing bedding
material and setting the base.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package ` Y —2323 02570-7 02/28/05
utilized. The Contractor shall comply with these following
procedures:
1. Relation to Water Mains
a. Horizontal Separation: Whenever possible sewers shall
be laid at a minimum at least 10 feet, horizontally,
from any existing or proposed water main. Should local
conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10 feet, a
sewer may be laid closer than 10 feet to a water main
if:
i. It is laid in a separate trench, or if
ii. It is laid in the same trench with the water
mains located at one side on a bench of
undistributed earth, and if
iii. In either case the elevation of the top (crown)
of the sewer is at least 18 inches below the
bottom (invert) of the water main.
b. Vertical Separation: Whenever sewers must cross under
water mains, the sewer shall be laid at such an
elevation that the top of the sewer is at least 18
inches below the bottom of the water main. When the
elevation of the sewer cannot be varied to meet the
above requirements, the water main shall be relocated
to provide this separation or reconstructed with
mechanical-joint pipe for a distance of 10 feet on
each side of the sewer. one full length of water main
should be centered over the sewer so that both joints
will be as far from the sewer as possible.
When it is impossible to obtain horizontal and/or
vertical separation as stipulated above, both the water
main and sewer shall be constructed of mechanical-joint
cement lined ductile iron pipe or other equivalent based
on watertightness and structural soundness. Both pipes
shall be pressure tested by an approved method to assure
watertightness or both pipes shall be encased in
concrete.
3.03 PIPE JOINTS
A. All joints shall be made water-tight.
B. Pipe shall be jointed in strict accordance with the Pipe
manufacturer's instruction. Jointing of all pipes shall be
done entirely in the trench.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
"* Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.I' —2323 02570-6 02/28/05
prepared trench. Pipe shall be laid with bells upgrade unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Do not permanently support
pipes on bells.
Every length of pipe shall be inspected and cleaned of all
dirt and debris before being laid. The interior of the pipe
and the jointing seal shall be free from sand, dirt and trash.
Extreme care shall be taken to keep the bells of the pipe free
from dirt and rocks so that joints may be properly lubricated
and assembled. No pipe shall be trimmed or chipped to fit.
No length of pipe shall be laid until the proceeding lengths
of pipe have been thoroughly embedded in place, to prevent
movement or disturbance of the pipe alignment.
All piping shall be laid in the dry with the spigot ends
pointing in the direction of flow. Installation shall proceed
from the downstream to upstream in all cases.
D. Pipe Extension: Where an existing pipe is to be extended, the
same type of pipe shall be used, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
E. Full Lengths of Pine: Only full lengths of pipe shall be used
in the installation except that partial lengths of pipe may be
used at the entrance to structures, and to accommodate the
required locations of service connection fittings.
F. Pine Entrances to Structures: All pipe entering structures
shall be cut flush with the inside face of the structure, and
the cut ends of the pipe surface within the structure shall be
properly rounded and finished so that there will be no
protrusion, ragged edges or imperfections that will impede or
affect the hydraulic characteristics of the sewage flow. The
method of cutting and finishing shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
G. Protection during Construction: The Contractor shall protect
the installation at all times during construction, and
movement of construction equipment, vehicles and loads over
and adjacent to any pipe shall be performed at the
Contractor's risk.
At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, all open
ends of pipes shall be closed by approved temporary water-
tight plugs. If water is in the trench when work is resumed,
the plug shall not be removed until the trench has been -
dewatered and all danger of water entering the pipe
eliminated.
H. Water Pipe - Sewer Pine Separation: When a sewer pipe crosses
above or below a water pipe, the following procedures shall be
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package`F.l'—2323 02570-5 02/28/05
Where masonry is exposed to salt water, Type II shall be
used.
5. Hydrated lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM D207.
6. Sand for masonry mortar shall conform to the gradation
requirements of ASTM C144.
C. Manhole Frame and Cover: Grey iron casting conforming to ASTM
A48, heavy duty, with the word SEWER embossed on cover.
Letter size shall be three inches. Frame and cover shall be
LeBaron LA 328-1 or approved equivalent.
D. Pipe Connections: Flexible sleeve or rubber gaskets shall be
Lock Joint, Kor-n-Seal, A-Lok or approved equivalent.
E. Steps: Steel reinforced copolymer polypropylene steps
conforming to ASTM C478.
2.03 BITUMASTIC COATINGS
The entire exterior surface of all masonry and concrete (whether
precast or cast-in-place) structures associated with sewerage
systems, such; manholes, grease traps, holding tanks, tight tanks,
septic tanks, aeration tanks, pump stations, valve pits, etc., shall
receive two coasts of waterproofing such as Carboline Bitumastic 300M
as manufactured by SOMAY Products, Inc. , Miami, FL. , Sonnoshield HLM
5000 as manufactured by Sonneborn, Shakopee, MN, at a minimum
thickness of 7 mils per coat'and a total thickness of 14 mils,
however in no case shall the thickness per coat be less than that
recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLIND
The type of materials to be used in bedding and backfilling and the
method of placement shall conform to the requirements of Section
02300, Earthwork, and the details shown on the Drawings.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All sewer pipe shall be laid accurately to the lines and
grades shown in the Drawings and in conformance with pipe
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
B. Notch under pipe bells and joints, where applicable, to
provide for uniform bearing under entire length of pipe.
C. Layincr Pipe: Each length of pipe shall be laid with firm,
full and even bearing throughout its entire length, in a
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
AVON Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.t' —2323 02570-4 02/28/05
B. Joints: PVC pipe shall have an integral wall bell and spigot
push-on joint with elastomeric gaskets secured in place in the
bell of the pipe. The bell shall consist of an integral wall
section with a solid cross section elastomeric gasket, factory
assembled, securely locked in place to prevent displacement
during assembly. Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to ASTM
D3212.
C. Spigot pipe ends shall be supplied with bevels from the
manufacturer to ensure proper insertion. Each spigot end
shall have an "assembly stripe" imprinted thereon to which the
bell end of the mated pipe will extend upon proper joining of
the two pipes.
2.02 MANHOLES
A. Precast Units:
1. Structure: 4 foot minimum inside diameter precast units
(4,000 psi minimum compressive strength) with eccentric
cone section tapering to 30-inch diameter, or flat top,
and one pour monolithic base section conforming to ASTM
C478. All units to be designed for HS-20 loading.
2. Precast Unit Joint: Butyl rubber section joint
conforming to ASTM C990.
3. The date of manufacture and the name or trademark of the
manufacturer shall be clearly marked on the inside of
each precast section.
B. Masonry Units:
1. Brick shall conform to Sewer Brick (Made from Clay or
Shale) , ASTM designation C32, Grade MS or Building Brick
(Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) , ASTM C62,
Grade SW. Brick for construction of inverts and
adjusting manholes to grade shall be Grade SM conforming
to ASTM C32.
2. Concrete block shall be solid block and conforming to the
Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units for
Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes, ASTM
designation C139.
3. Mortar shall be in conformance with ASTM C270, Type M.
The mortar shall be composed of Portland cement hydrated
lime, and sand, in the proportions of 1 part cement to
1/4 part hydrated limit to 3-1/2 parts sand, by volume.
4. Cement shall be Type I or II Portland cement conforming
to ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.I' —2323 02570-3 02/28/05
also contain any additional information required by the
municipality. Hard Copies shall be stamped with the seal
of a Licensed Land Surveyor and Licensed Professional
Engineer, and electronic copies shall be compatible with
AutoCAD 2000.
1.04 INSPECTION
A. The manufacturer/supplier is responsible for the provisions
and all test requirements specified in ASTM D3034 for SDR 35
gravity pipe and ASTM D2241 for PVC pressure rated sewer pipe.
In addition, all PVC pipe may be inspected at the plant for
compliance with these specifications by an independent testing
laboratory selected and paid by the Owner. The Contractor
shall require the manufacturer's cooperation in these
inspections.
B. Inspection of the pipe may also be made after delivery. The
pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of
failure to meet any of the specification requirements, even
though pipe samples may have been accepted as satisfactory at
the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall
be marked for identification and shall be removed from the
site at once.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. All materials shall be adequately protected from damage during
transit. Pipes shall not be dropped.
B. All pipe and other appurtenances shall be inspected before
placement in the work and any found to be defective from any
cause, including damage caused by handling, and determined by
the Engineer to be unrepairable, shall be replaced at no cost
to the Owner.
C. Storage and handling of pipes, manholes and other sewer system
appurtenances shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC)
A. Pipe and Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings
(4 inches to 15 inches) shall be Type PSM polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) SDR 35 with full diameter dimensions conforming to the
specifications for Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings, ASTM Designation D-3034.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 02570-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02570
SEWERAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
PART 1—GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies requirements for the sewerage system.
B. The work includes furnishing and installing all pipe, fittings
manholes, structures and appurtenances required for the
proposed system to convey sewage.
C. Included is the connection of the proposed sewage collection
system to the existing municipal collection system in Locust
Street, including manhole coring, complete removal of existing
brick invert, installation of flexible pipe seal ring,
construction of new brick pipe invert and waterproofing of
existing manhole.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02240 - Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
2. Section 02300 - Earthwork
3. Section 02600 - Storm Drainage System
4. Section 03301 - Site Cast-In Place Concrete
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List and Shop Drawings
1. Materials list of materials proposed.
2. Shop drawings for all material and structures prior to
ordering materials.
B. As-Built Drawings
1. Submit 6 copies of As-Built Drawings upon completion and
acceptance of work.
2 . As-Built Drawings shall be complete and shall indicate
the true measurement and location, horizontal and
vertical, of all new construction. As-Built Drawings
shall include a minimum of three (3) ties to each manhole
from fixed permanent objects. As-Built drawings shall
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Sewerage Collection System
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.V —2323 02570-1 02/28/05
or other means shall be placed promptly to prevent this
occurrence.
3.03 RECORDS FOR WELL SYSTEMS
A. When well point, or other type of well systems, are used for
dewatering, the following information shall be obtained and
recorded:
1. The average flow rate and time of operation of each pump
used in the dewatering system. Provide appropriate
devices, such as flow meters, for observing the flow
rates. Submit the data, in tabular form, during the
period that the dewatering system is in operation.
2. The groundwater elevations during the period that the
dewatering system is in operation. Submit observation
records daily within 24 hours of reading.
3. During the initial period of the dewatering, make
required observations on a daily basis. If, after a
period, dewatering operations have stabilized,
observations may be changed to longer intervals, as
accepted by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 02240
Base Date: 6/03
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package T.l' —2323 02240-4 02/28/05
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE WATER CONTROL
A. Intercept and divert surface water runoff away from
excavations through the use of dikes, curb walls, ditches,
pipes, sumps or other approved means.
B. Provide and maintain ditches of adequate size to collect and
prevent surface and subsurface water seepage from entering the
excavations. Divert the water to settling basins or other
approved equipment required to reduce the amount of fine
particles before discharge into drainage pipes and natural
water courses. If a drainage system or water course is silted
or becomes blocked due to dewatering operation, it shall be
cleaned by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Any enforcement actions or fines resulting from improper
dewatering and/or discharge of turbid water and sediment to
protected areas shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
3.02 DEWATERINO EXCAVATIONS
A. Accomplish dewatering in accordance with the means and methods
submitted as required in Article 1.04. Keep the Engineer
advised of any changes required to accommodate field
conditions and, on completion of the dewatering system
installation, revise and resubmit the information required to
show the installed system.
B. Perform dewatering operations to lower the groundwater level
in excavations as required to provide a stable, dry subgrade
for the prosecution of the proposed work.
C. Maintain dewatering operations in a manner that prevents
buildup of excessive hydrostatic pressure and damage to
structures, and the subgrade.
D. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Contractor
shall provide and maintain ample means and devices to remove
promptly, and to dispose of properly, all water entering
excavations and to keep them dry until the proposed work is
completed.
E. Do not discharge water to protected environmental resources
without treatment to remove suspended solids and sediments.
F. No pipe shall be laid in water. No masonry shall be laid in
water, and no water shall be allowed to inundate new concrete
and new brick masonry within 48 hours after installation.
Contractor shall constantly guard against the possibility of
flotation of pipe or structures after installation. Backfill
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package T.l'—2323 02240-3 02/28/05
2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for the
proposed work;
3. Prevent damage to adjacent properties, buildings,
structures, utilities and other facilities;
4. Ensure that, after 12 hours of initial pumping, no soil
particles will be present in the discharge.
5. Retain all sediments on-site within the work area.
B. Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere
with utilities and construction work to be done by others.
C. Modify dewatering equipment and procedures when operations
threaten to cause damage to new or existing facilities or
adjacent areas not within the limit of work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to installation of the dewatering system, submit working
drawings and design data prepared by a registered professional
engineer with the following information:
1. The proposed types of dewatering systems;
2. Arrangement, location and depths of system components;
3. Complete description of equipment and instrumentation to
be used including installation, operation and maintenance
procedures;
4. Types and sizes of filters;
5. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of the
proposed system and equipment; and
6. Provisions and methods of sediment removal and disposal
of water.
7. All permits required for the work.
B. Submit records required in Article 3.03.
PART 2---PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V —2323 02240-2 02/28/05
SECTION 02240
DEWATERING AND CONSTRUCTION SURFACE WATER
PART 1—{GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies the requirements for control of surface
and subsurface water within the site.
B. The work includes:
1. Control of surface water runoff to prevent flooding of
excavations, trenches and adjacent properties, and the
saturation and loosening of soils.
2. Removal of subsurface water from excavations and
trenches.
3. Provision of equipment and facilities to remove sediment
and control the rates and volumes of disposal of surface
and subsurface waters removed from the work areas.
4. Provisions for the protection of adjacent and
downgradient, properties and environmental resources.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include:
1. Section 02210-Site Preparation and Demolition
2. Section 02300-Earthwork
3. Section 02260-EPA-NPDES General Permit for Construction
Activities Requirements
4. Section 02270-Erosion Control
5. Section 02600-Storm Drainage System
6. Section 02570-Sewerage Collection System
1.03 DEWATERINCG SYSTEM REOUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall design the dewatering systems to: -
1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure and lower the
groundwater levels to a minimum of 2 feet below the
bottom of excavations;
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.V—2323 02240-1 02/28/05
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07115 DAMPPROOFING
07200 FOUNDATION INSULATION
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10450 SIGNAGE
DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13915 FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15221 CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15445 SEWAGE PUMPS
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
END OF SECTION 00005
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 00005-2 Addendum No. l -03/03/05
SECTION 00005 -TABLE OF CONTENTS
OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
00001 COVER PAGE
00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
(Refer to Package `A'for additional Sections in this Division)
00860 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
BIDDING AND CONTRACT-REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Refer to Package `A'for Sections in this Division)
DIVISION 2 -SITEWORK
02000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
02210 SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION
02240 DEWATERING AND CONSTRUCTION SURFACE WATER "
02260 EPA NPDES GENERAL PERMIT FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
REQUIREMENTS
02270 EROSION CONTROL
02300 EARTHWORK
02320 PAVEMENT SUBBASE AND BASE
02500 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
02570 SEWERAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
02600 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02649 WARNING AND TRACER TAPE
02700 HOT MIX ASPHALT(HMA)PAVEMENT
02725 CURBING
02760 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
02920 SEEDING AND SODDING
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03301 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 00005-1 Addendum No. 1 -03/03/05
ITEM-4 SECTION 07115-DAMPPROOFING
I. Add new Section 07115 -Dampproofing dated March 3,2005, attached to and made part of this
Addendum.
ITEM-5 SECTION 07200-FOUNDATION INSULATION
I. Add new Section 07200-Foundation Insulation dated March 3, 2005, attached to and made part of
this Addendum.
DRAWING ITEMS
ITEM-6 REVISED DRAWINGS
1. Delete in their entirety the drawings listed below and substitute the revised drawings,dated March
3, 2005, which are attached and are made a part of this Addendum.
Dwg No. Dwg Title
S200.A GROUND FLOOR/FOUNDATION PLAN- SECTION A
S200.13 GROUND FLOOR/FOUNDATION PLAN -SECTION B
S201.A FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS -SECTION A
(FOR INFORMATION ONLY)
S401 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND COLUMN SCHEDULE
ITEM-7 NEW DRAWINGS
I. The following new issue drawings dated March 3, 2005 are attached and made a part of this
Addendum.
Dwg. No. Dwg. Title
S202.A THIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS -SEC.'TION A
(FOR.INFORMATION ONLY)
S202.13 THIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS - SECTION B
(FOR I:N:FORMAT.ION ONLY)
S203.A FOURTH FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS -SECTION A
(FOR INFORMATION ONLY)
S20113 FOURTFI FLOOR FRAMING PLAIN AND_DETAILS -SEC'TION B
(FOR IN.FORMATI.ON ONLY)
S204.A ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND DE'T'AILS -SECTION A
(FOR INFORMATION ONLY)
S204.13 ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND DETAILS -SECTION B
(FOR INFOIMATION ONLY)
END OF ADDENDUM
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number One
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 ADl-2 03/03/05
The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street
Newton,Massachusetts 02458
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'
Northampton,Massachusetts
TRO Commission No. 2323
Date: March 3,2005
ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE
The Drawings and Specifications for the above project,dated February 28, 2005,are modified and
supplemented with this Addendum.
SPECIFICATION ITEMS
ITEM-1 SECTION 00005- TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. Delete Section 00005 -Table of Contents dated February 28, 2005, and substitute Section 00005 -
Table of Contents dated March 3, 2005 attached to and made part of this Addendum.
Note: Revisions are annotated in the following manner:
—Modified portions of text are annotated with a vertical line in the margin.
—Deleted text is indicated by strikethough(i.e. Delete44:e*t).
—New text is underlined(i.e.New text).
ITEM-2 SECTION 02240-DEWATERING AND CONSTRUCTION SURFACE WATER
1. Include Section 02240 -Dewatering and Construction Surface Water dated February 28, 2005,
which was inadvertently omitted from the original specification.
ITEM-3 SECTION 02570- SEWERAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
I. Include Section 02570- Sewerage Collection System dated February 28, 2005, which was
inadvertently omitted from the original specification.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number One
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 AD 1-1 03/03/05
F. Metal floor deck units shall be fastened to the supporting structure(minimum requirements)as
follows:
1. Panel ends and end laps:Welded at each rib.
2. Intermediate supports:Welded at each rib.
3. Longitudinal edges at marginal supports:Welded,maximum spacing of twelve(12)inches.
4. Side laps of adjacent units: Screw fastened between supports at intervals not exceeding thirty
(30)inches.
G. Fasten accessories to deck by welding.
H. Holes and openings which are indicated on the Structural Drawings shall be cut by the deck
erector. Coordinate locations with respective trades. Holes not so indicated,but which are
required for work by other trades,shall be located and cut by the respective trades.
I. All welding shall be in accordance with the References and shall be done only by experienced
welders who have previously been qualified to perform the type of work required.
J. After erection,all scarred areas on top side of galvanized roof decking,including cuts,drill holes,
rust spots,welds and weld scars,shall be touched up with a zinc-rich paint.
END OF SECTION
opwk
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Decking
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.l'—2323 05300-4 03/21/05
E. Closures shall be flexible rubber to seal flutes.
F. All exposed surfaces shall be ready for job site finish painting.
2.02 METAL FLOOR DECK
A. Typical metal floor deck shall be formed of steel sheets conforming to ASTM Standard A446
Grade A and shall be the composite type,with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.
Galvanized coating shall conform to ASTM A525 G 60. See Drawings for deck type,gauge and
depth.
B. Typical metal floor deck units shall be cut so that end joints will butt over supporting members.
Typical lengths shall extend over three(3)or more spans where possible.
C. Accessory metal sections shall be of the same material,gauge and finish as the metal floor deck
units,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Pour stops shall be not lighter than 18 gauge and be of the same material and finish as the metal
deck units. Use heavier gauge where indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE
A. Care and protection shall be given to all metal decking material during handling and storage.
During unloading and hoisting,extra care shall be given to prevent damage to the ends,sides and
distortion of the individual items. If items are to be stored prior to installation,they shall not be
placed in contact with the ground.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Deck shall be erected and fastened in accordance with manufacturer's specifications,approved
Shop Drawings,and as hereinafter specified.
B. Place metal deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with proper bearings,
end and side laps before permanently securing work.
C. Welds to steel supports shall be fusion type. Puddle welds shall be at least 5/8 inch diameter or an
elongated weld having an equal perimeter.
D. When deck units or accessories are 22 gauge or lighter,use welding washers to connect all such
material to supporting steel.
E. Typical roof deck units shall be fastened to the supporting structure(minimum requirements)as
follows:
1. Panel ends and end laps: Welded at each rib.
2. Intermediate supports: Welded at each rib.
3. Longitudinal edges at marginal supports:Welded maximum spacing of twelve(12)inches.
4. Side laps of adjacent units: Screw fastened between supports at intervals not exceeding
twenty-four(24)inches.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Decking
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05300-3 03/21/05
A. Submit complete Shop Drawings in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300-
SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings shall indicate size and location of framing supports and the location,lengths,types,
gauges,and markings of deck units. Shop Drawings shall indicate fastening methods for deck
units,and the type of connections,welds or screws,and other items as hereinafter called for.
C. Shop Drawings shall also show all accessories and methods of attachment to the building frame.
D. Approval of Shop Drawings will be for size and arrangement of units and for strength of
connections. Errors in dimensions shown on the shop drawings shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
E. Fabrication of any material or performing any work prior to the final approval of the Shop
Drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
F. Reproductions of structural plans,sections and details shall not be used for erection drawings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill,shop or
field by the Architect,or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by the
Owner. All deck fastening shall be visually inspected.
B. However, such inspection,wherever conducted,shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements,nor
shall inspector's acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the
Owner or Architect if defects are discovered.
C. The Contractor shall give proper notice to inspection agencies designated by the Architect and
shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL ROOF DECK
A. Typical metal roof deck shall be formed of steel sheets conforming to ASTM A446 Grade A,with
minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi with nestable side lap. Galvanized coating shall conform to
ASTM A525 G 60. See Drawings for deck type,gauge and depth.
B. Typical metal roof deck units shall be cut to required lengths so that end joints will occur Over
supporting members and be lapped a minimum of two(2)inches. Typical lengths shall extend
over three(3)or more spans,where possible.
C. Accessory metal sections shall be of the same material,gauge and finish as the metal roof deck
units,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Sump pans shall be recessed and not lighter than 14 gauge galvanized sheets. Size of the hole to
be field cut to match the roof drain.
tow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Decking
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `El'—2323 05300-2 03/21/05
DIVISION 5-METALS
SECTION 05300-METAL DECKING WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing all metal deck work as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein and includes,but is not limited to,the following:
1. Metal roof deck.
2. Metal floor deck.
3. Roof deck accessories: finish strips,butt strips,ridge plates,valley plates,sump pans and
rubber closures.
4. Floor deck accessories: finish strips,butt strips,closures and pour stops.
5. Shop coating and field touch-up paint after erection.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. The related work shall be performed under the following Sections:
1. Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2. Section 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3. Section 05130 SHEAR CONNECTORS.
4. Section 05210 STEEL JOISTS
5. Section 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING.
6. Section 09900 PAINTING.
1.03 REFERENCES(LATEST EDITIONS)
A. 'Basic Design Specifications for Steel Deck Construction"by the Steel Deck Institute.
B. "Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Cold Formed Structural Members"by the American
Iron and Steel Institute.
C. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials.
D. "Structural Welding Code-Steel"by the American Welding Society.
E. In case of conflict between the References and the Project Specification,the Project Specification
shall govern. In the case of conflict between References,the more stringent shall govern.
F. When compliance with such References is specified for materials or a manufactured or fabricated
product,the Contractor,if requested,shall furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer or fabricator,
certifying that the materials or product delivered to the job meets the requirements specified.
However,such certification shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of complying
with any added requirements specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
tow
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Metal Decking
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.F—2323 05300-1 03/21/05
If these items are to be stored prior to installation,they shall not be placed in contact with the
ground and shall be protected from the elements and kept dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All steel joists and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Reference Specifications,
approved Shop Drawings and herein specified.
B. Open web joists shall be welded to steel supports with two(2)3/16"fillet welds,each at least 2V2
inches long. Note that this requirement exceeds similar requirements contained in the Reference
Specifications.
C. Bridging shall be installed in accordance with the Reference Specifications or as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
D. Joists shall be permanently fastened to supports and all bridgings and anchors completely installed
before any construction loads(other than the workers installing these items) are placed on the
joists.
E. All welding shall be in accordance with the AWS"Structural Welding Code". All field welding
shall be done in accordance with the Reference Specifications and shall be done only by
experienced welders who have previously been qualified by tests prescribed in the AWS
"Standard Qualification Procedure"to perform the type of welding required.
END OF SECTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steel Joists
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.F—2323 05210-3 03/21/05
responsibility of the Contractor.
D. Fabrication of any material or performing any work prior to the final approval of the Shop
Drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
E. Reproductions of structural plans,sections and details shall not be used for erection drawings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill,shop
or field by the Architect,or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by
the Owner.
B. However,such inspection,wherever conducted,shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements,
nor shall inspector's acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the
Owner or Architect,if defects are discovered.
C. The Contractor shall give proper notice to inspection agencies designated by the Architect and
shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All steel joists and accessories shall be formed of material in accordance with the Reference
Specification. See Contract Drawings for type,depth and size.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. All steel joists and accessories shall be fabricated in accordance with the Reference Specifications,
approved Shop Drawings and as herein specified.
B. All steel joists and accessories shall be fabricated by a member of the Steel Joist Institute.
2.03 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. All items shall be cleaned of scale,rust,weld slag and weld splatter and other foreign matter and
be given one(1)coat of rust-inhibitive paint, 1 mil dry film thickness,as approved by the
Architect.
B. Shop and field touch-up paint shall be compatible with paint to be used for finish painting in the
field.
C. After erection,all scarred areas shall be touched up with the same paint as the shop coat.
PAR T 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE
A. Care and protection shall be given to all steel joists and accessories during handling and storage.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steel Joists
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05210-2 03/21/05
DIVISION 5-METALS
SECTION 05130-STEEL JOIST WORK
PART 1-GENERAL
LOIWORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing all steel joist work as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein and includes,but is not limited to the following:
1. Open web steel joists.
2. Bridging,anchors,extended ends,ceiling extensions and special seats.
3. Shop paint and field touch-up paint after erection.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. The related work shall be performed under the following Sections:
1. Section 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
2. Section 05300 METAL DECKING.
3. Section 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
3. Section 09910 PAINTS
1.03 REFERENCES (LATEST EDITIONS)
A. "Standard Specifications,Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel joists and Joist Girders,"by
the Steel Joist Institute.
B. "Structural Welding Code-Steel" by the American Welding Society.
C. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials.
D. In case of conflict between the References and the Project Specification,the Project Specification
shall govern. In the case of conflict between References,the more stringent shall govern.
E. When compliance with such References is specified for materials or a manufactured or fabricated
product,the Contractor,if requested,shall furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer or fabricator,
certifying that the materials or product delivered to the job meets the requirements specified.
However,such certification shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of complying
with any added requirements specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete Shop Drawings in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300-
SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings shall indicate type, number, sizes,details and spacing of members. Shop drawings
shall indicate fastening methods for joists,bridging,anchors and all other details required for
installation.
C. Approval of Shop Drawings will be for size and arrangement of steel joists and related items and
for strength of field connections. Errors in dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings shall be the
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Steel Joists
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05210-1 03/21/05
IN
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Shear connector studs shall be installed by an automatic welding system,in the number and
spacing shown on approved Shop Drawings and as herein specified.
B. Steel in the area to which the stud is to be directly welded should be free of loose mill scale,heavy
rust,dirt and paint.In addition,where studs are to be welded through metal deck,verify that no
water has become entrapped between the beam and the deck,prior to welding studs.
C. Studs should not be welded when the temperature falls below 10 degrees Fahrenheit,or when the
surface is wet with rain or snow.
D. All welding shall be in accordance with The Structural Welding Code.
E. After welding,break off ceramic arc shields and dispose of them properly.
END OF SECTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Shear Connectors
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.V—2323 05130-3 03/21/05
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill,shop
or field by the Architect,or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by
the Owner.
B. However,such inspection,wherever conducted,shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements,
nor shall inspector's acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the
Owner or Architect,if defects are discovered.
C. A minimum of two(2)shear connector studs shall be welded at the start of each production period
to determine proper settings for the generator,control unit,and stud welder.These studs shall be
capable of being bent 45 degrees from vertical without weld failure. If,after welding,visual
inspection reveals that a sound,full 360 degree weld has not been achieved for any particular stud,
that stud shall be struck with a hammer and bent approximately 15 degrees from vertical towards
the nearest end of the beam,or bent away from the opening in the fillet weld. Studs meeting this
test shall be considered acceptable and shall be left in this position. Studs failing under this test
shall be replaced.
D. The Contractor shall give proper notice to inspection agencies designated by the Architect and
shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All shear connector studs shall be made from cold drawn bar stock conforming to the requirements
of ASTM A 108,Grades 1015 through 1020,either semi-or fully-killed. See drawings for
lengths and diameter.
B. Tensile requirements of shear connector studs,as determined by tests(ASTM A 370)of bar stock
after drawing,or of full diameter finished studs,at the manufacturer's option,shall conform to the
following:
1. Tensile strength,(psi) minimum: 60,000
2. Elongation in 2 inches,(%)minimum: 20
3. Reduction in area,(%) minimum: 50
C. Studs shall be of uniform diameter;heads shall be concentric and normal to shaft;and the weld
shall be chamfered and solid fluxed. Studs shall not be painted or galvanized.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE
A. Care and protection shall be given to all shear connectors during handling and storage. If
connectors are to be stored prior to installation,they shall not be placed in contact with the ground
and shall be protected from the elements and kept dry.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Shear Connectors
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05130-2 03/21/05
DIVISION 5-METALS
SECTION 05130-SHEAR CONNECTOR WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing all shear connectors as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein and includes,but is not limited to the following:
1. Headed shear connectors.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. The related work shall be performed under the following Sections:
1. Section 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
2. Section 05300 METAL DECKING.
1.03 REFERENCES (LATEST EDITIONS)
A. "Specification for the Design,Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" by the
American Institute of Steel Construction.
B. "Structural Welding Code-Steel"by the American Welding Society.
C. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials.
D. In case of conflict between the References and the Project Specification,the Project Specification
shall govern. In the case of conflict between References,the more stringent shall govern.
E. When compliance with such References is specified for materials or a manufactured or fabricated
product,the Contractor,if requested,shall furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer or fabricator,
certifying that the materials or product delivered to the job meets the requirements specified.
However,such certification shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of complying
with any added requirements specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete Shop Drawings in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300-
SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings shall indicate size and position of all shear connectors. Shop Drawings shall
indicate fastening methods for connectors.
C. Approval of Shop Drawings will be for size and arrangement of shear connectors. Errors in
dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
D. Purchasing of any materials or performing any work prior to the final approval of Shop Drawings
will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
E. Reproductions of structural plans,sections and details shall not be used for erection drawings.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Shear Connectors
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05130-1 03/21/05
END OF SECTION
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Structural Steel
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
•
Package `F.l'—2323 05120-6 03/21/05
"+ 2.04 GALVANIZING
A. All steel items noted on the Drawings to be galvanized shall be galvanized by the hot dip process
conforming to ASTM A123 with the addition of nickel to zinc bath. All galvanizing shall be done
after fabrication. All galvanized material to be painted shall be primed by the galvanizer within
twelve hours after galvanizing and shall be force cured in a facility capable of maintaining 150
degrees F. All hot dip galvanized steel shall be safeguarded against embrittlement according to
ASTM A143.
B. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings,all exterior,brick relieving angles shall be
galvanized.
C. The galvanizer shall inspect all members for compliance with this Specification,and shall mark
each member with a stamp indicating the ASTM number and the weight of the zinc coating in
ounces per square foot.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Care and protection shall be given to all structural steel during handling and storage. If items are
to be stored prior to installation,they shall not be placed in contact with the ground.
3.02 ERECTION
A. All structural steel shall be anchored and erected in accordance with References,approved Shop
Drawings,and as hereinafter specified.
B. All work shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and rigidly fastened in place
with suitable attachments to the construction of the building.
C. Temporary bracing,guying,and support shall be provided to keep the structure safe and aligned at
all times during construction,and to prevent danger to persons and property. Check all temporary
loads and stay within safe capacity of all building components.
D. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings,all field connections shall be bolted in accordance
with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". All bolts shall
be fully tensioned. Use not less than one(1) washer placed under the turning part of the assembly.
E. Do not cut or alter any member in the field without Architect's written approval for each specific
condition.
F. Welding,as indicated on the Drawings,shall be in accordance with References and shall be done
only by experienced welders who have been qualified by tests as prescribed in AWS "Standard
Qualifications Procedure" for the type of work required.
G. Prior to field welding of any galvanized steel element,galvanizing in the general area to be welded
must be removed by grinding.
H. All galvanized steel elements shall be touched up with zinc-rich paint at areas scarred by welding
or bolting.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Structural Steel
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05120-5 03/21/05
particular beam and span.Connections for girders which support other beams should be designed
for at least 1.5 times the AISC uniform load reaction. All connection design shall be subject to
approval by the Architect and Structural Engineer.
C. Welding,as indicated on the Drawings,shall be in accordance with References and shall be done
only by experienced welders who have been qualified by tests as prescribed in AWS "Standard
Qualifications Procedure"for the type of work required.
D. All shop connections shall be welded or bolted.
E. Weld and joint details shall comply with requirements of the"Structural Welding Code-Steel"by
the American Welding Society.
F. Bolting shall comply with the requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
G. All field connections shall be bolted,except where welding is indicated on the Drawings. All field
bolts shall be alternate design type with twist off elements.
H. Diameter of holes in bolted parts shall be 1/16" greater than the nominal diameter of the bolt. No
unfair holes will be accepted,and enlargement of holes shall not be accomplished by burning.
Burrs resulting from drilling or punching shall be ground to the surface of the material. Shearing
and punching shall be done cleanly so as not to deform or mar adjacent surfaces.
1. Provide holes and connections as required for site assembly of steel work. Holes shall be drilled
or punched and reamed in the shop. Show sizes and locations of all such holes on the Shop
Drawings.
J. Provide angles,bars,etc. as necessary for deck support at columns where members do not frame
in from all four sides and where connections interfere with the support of metal decking.
K. In general,beam to beam,and beam to column connections shall be double angle type
connections,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. All structural steel shall be cleaned of all scale,rust, grease and other foreign matter and be given
one(1) shop coat of rust inhibitive paint except surfaces to receive spray-on fireproofing,surfaces
to receive field-welded shear connectors,at contact surfaces in slip critical connections and at
contact surfaces to be field-welded.
B. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with "Steel Structures Painting Council Surface
Preparation No. 3,Power Tool Cleaning" (all steel).
C. Primer shall be weldable red or gray alkyd rust inhibitive primer,as approved by the Architect.
D. Shop and field touch-up paint shall be compatible with paint to be used for finish painting in the
field as required under PAINTS Section.
E. Primer paint shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's directions to ensure no running or
sagging,and to provide a dry film of two(2)mils per coat.
F. After erection,all scarred areas shall be touched up with the same paint as the shop coat.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Structural Steel
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05120-4 03/21/05
the Owner.
B. However,such inspection, wherever conducted,shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to
furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements,nor shall inspector's
acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the Owner or Architect
if defects are discovered.
C. Inspection of welding work other than full or partial penetration welds shall consist of
non-destructive spot testing done by visual,magnetic particle,radiographic or ultrasonic methods,
whichever is most effective for joint to be tested.
D. Full and partial penetration welding shall be inspected and tested one hundred(100)percent either
by ultrasonic or by radiography in accordance with the latest edition of the AWS Structural
Welding Code. However, if,for an individual welder,the reject rate is demonstrated to be five(5)
percent or less,the non-destructive testing rate may be reduced to twenty-five(25)percent for the
individual welder. The evaluation of the welding shall be based on a sampling of at least forty
(40)completed welds.
E. Inspection of bolting work shall be in accordance with"Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts"by the American Institute of Steel Construction,latest edition. All
bolting shall be visually inspected as directed by the Architect and Structural Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall give proper notice to inspection agencies designated by the Architect and
shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural steel shapes(including channels)and exterior fagade relieving angles shall comply with
the requirements of ASTM A992(Fy=50 ksi)for Structural Steel. Structural steel plate material
and angles not specifically designated otherwise shall comply with ASTM A36(Fy= 36 ksi)for
Structural Steel. Steel tubing shall comply with ASTM A500 Grade B. Steel pipe shall comply
with ASTM A53 Grade B.
B. Bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A325. Bolts shall be A
325N with washer,except A325,type SC at slip critical connections as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Anchor bolts shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A307,except A 325 as indicated on
the Drawings. All anchor bolts shall be headed type,with plate washer.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. All structural steel shall be fabricated in accordance with References,approved Shop Drawings,
and as hereinafter specified.
B. The design of members and connections for any portions of the structure not indicated on the
Drawings shall be completed by the fabricator. Connections shall be capable of supporting the
maximum uniform load of the member for the span shown and the material specified.
Consideration must be given to the additional load carrying capacity of composite steel members.
In general,and unless otherwise indicated,connections for composite beams shall be designed for
at least 1.75 times the end reaction derived from the AISC uniform load beam tables for the
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Structural Steel
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.F—2')23 05120-3 03/21/05
OOW
C. "Structural Welding Code-Steel"by the American Welding Society.
D. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials.
E. SSPC listed standards by the Steel Structures Painting Council.
F. In case of conflict between the References and the Project Specification,the Project Specification
shall govern. In the case of conflict between References,the more stringent shall govern.
G. When compliance with any such References is specified herein for materials or a manufactured or
fabricated product,the Contractor,if requested,shall furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer or
fabricator certifying that the materials or product delivered to the job meets the requirements
specified. However,such certification shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of
complying with any added requirements specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete Shop Drawings in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300-
SUBMITTALS.
B. Design of all connections is to be provided by the fabricator under the supervision of a registered
professional engineer. Before starting the work of the Shop and Erection Drawings,the steel
fabricator shall have their representatives contact the Architect and arrange to contact the
Structural Engineer to discuss connection details,schedules,shop procedures,materials,and other
concerns related to structural steel work.
C. Prior to submission of Shop Drawings,Contractor shall verify all dimensions, site conditions,etc.,
relating to existing conditions. Any discrepancies which affect the structural design or details
shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Structural Engineer.
D. No variance from design sizes and details will be permitted on submitted Shop Drawings,but
requests for modification of connection type or details to better suit their shop practice,or for any
other reasons, will be considered by the Architect and Structural Engineer.
E. Shop Drawings shall include all information required for fabrication of the component parts of the
structure. They shall indicate size and weight of members,type and location of shop and field
connections,the type,size and extent of all welds. The welding symbols used on the Shop
Drawings shall be as adopted by the American Welding Society.
F. Approval of Shop Drawings shall be for size and arrangement of principal and auxiliary members
and for strength of connections. Any errors in dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor.
G. Fabrication of any material or performing of any work prior to the final approval of the Shop
Drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
H. Reproductions of structural plans,sections and details shall not be used for erection drawings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill,shop
or field by the Architect,or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Structural Steel
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.F—2323 05120-2 03/21/05
DIVISION 5—METALS
SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and erecting all structural steel work as shown on
the Drawings and as specified herein and includes,but is not limited to,the following:
1. Leveling plates and anchor bolts.
2. Columns with base plates and connections.
3. Beams with connections.
4. Channels,angles,plates,frames,anchors,etc.
5. Lateral bracing.
6. Moment connections.
7. Masonry channel anchors(installation only).
8. Shop paint and field touch-up paint after erection.
9. Galvanizing.
B. Items To Be Furnished Only: Furnish the following items for installation by the designated
Sections:
1. Section 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Anchor bolts,embedded plates with bolts
or anchors,as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Items To Be Installed Only: Install the following items furnished by the designated Sections:
1. Section 04220-CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: Masonry channel anchors.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. The related work shall be performed under the following Sections:
1. Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2. Section 04210 BRICK MASONRY.
3. Section 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS.
4. Section 05130 SHEAR CONNECTORS.
5. Section 05210 STEEL JOISTS
6. Section 05300 METAL DECKING.
7. Section 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING.
8. Section 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS.
9. Section 09900 PAINTING.
1.03 REFERENCES (LATEST EDITIONS)
A. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and"Specifications for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Buildings" and"Seismic Provisions for Structural
Steel Buildings"by the American Institute of Steel Construction.
B. The second sentence in paragraph 4.2.1 of the"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" is deleted under the provisions of this Specification.
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Structural Steel
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2—Structural Steel
Package `F.1'—2323 05120-1 03/21/05
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
END OF SECTION 00005
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foundation/ Site/Utilities Addendum No. 2-Structural Steel
Package `F.F —2323 00005-3 03/21/05
02700 HOT MIX ASPHALT(HMA)PAVEMENT
02725 CURBING
02760 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
02920 SEEDING AND SODDING
DIVISION 3- CONCRETE
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03301 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 5 -METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05130 SHEAR CONNECTOR
05210 STEEL JOISTS
05310 METAL DECKING
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07115 DAMPPROOFING
07200 FOUNDATION INSULATION
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
10450 SIGNAGE
DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13915 FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
1.5160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15221 CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15445 SEWAGE PUMPS
OW Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2-Structural.Steel
Package `F.1' —2323 00005-2 03/21105
SECTION 00005 -TABLE OF CONTENTS
OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
00001 COVER PAGE
00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
00500 FORM OF AGREEMENT (AIA A121/CM 199 1) (Included in Package 'A')
00600 CONSTRUCTION BOND FORMS—(AIA A312-1984) (Included in Package 'A')
00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS—(AIA A201, 1987) (Included in Package 'A')
00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (Included in Package `A')
00860 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING (Included in Package 'A')
01060 APPLICABLE STANDARDS (Included in Package 'A')
01120 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES (Included in Package 'A')
01150 SPECIAL PROVISIONS (Included in Package 'A')
01200 PROJECT MEETINGS (Included in Package 'A')
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS (Included in Package 'A')
01560 DUST AND AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS CONTROL (Included in Package 'A')
01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (Included in Package 'A')
01710 CLEANING (Included in Package 'A')
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS (Included in Package 'A')
01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA (Included in Package 'A')
DIVISION 2-SITEWORK
02000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
02210 SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION
02240 DEWATERING AND CONSTRUCTION SURFACE WATER
02260 EPA NPDES GENERAL PERMIT FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
REQUIREMENTS
02270 EROSION CONTROL
02300 EARTHWORK
02320 PAVEMENT SUBBASE AND BASE
02500 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
02570 SEWERAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
02600 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02649 WARNING AND TRACER TAPE
Cooley Dickinson Hospital TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foundation/Site/Utilities Addendum No.2 -Structural Steel
Package `F.F –2323 00005-1 03/21/05
END OF ADDENDUM
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number Two
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' -2323 AD2-3 03/21/05
III. Addendum No. 1,Item 7: New Drawings: Delete in their entirety the drawings listed below and
substitute the revised drawings,dated March 21,2005,which are attached and are made a part of
this Addendum
Dwg. No. Dwg. Title
S20?-.A THIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS - SECTION A
S202.13 THIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS -SECTION B
S203.A FOURTH FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS - SECTION A
S203.13 FOURTH FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS -SECTION B
S204.A ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND DETAILS -SECTION A
S204.13 ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND DETAILS - SECTION B
SPECIFICATION ITEMS
ITEM-2 SECTION 00005- TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. Add the following Section(s),attached to and made part of this Addendum,to the Table Of
Contents:
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05130 SHEAR CONNECTORS
05210 STEEL JOISTS
05300 METAL.DECKING
DRAWING ITEMS
ITEM-3 REVISED DRAWINGS
1. Delete in their entirety the drawings listed below and substitute the revised drawings,dated March
21. 2005, which are attached and are made a part of this Addendum.
Dwg. No. Dwg Title
S100 GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS
S201.13 FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS - SECTION B
ITEM-4 NEW DRAWINGS
I. The following new issue drawings dated March 21,2005 are attached and made a part of this
Addendum.
Dwg. No. Dwg Title
6000 COVER SHEET-PACKAGE F.1 -ADDENDUM 2
5210 CHILLER PLANT ADDITION,PART PLANS AND DETAILS
S402 FRAMING ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number Two
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' -2323 AD2-2 03/21/05
r
The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street
Newton,Massachusetts 02458
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'
Northampton,Massachusetts
TRO Commission No. 2323
Date: March 21, 2005
ADDENDUM NUMBER TWO
The Drawings and Specifications for the above project,dated February 28, 2005, are modified and
supplemented with this Addendum.
PREVIOUS ADDENDUM ITEMS
ITEM-1 ADDENDUM NO. 1
I. Addendum No. 1,Item 1: Section 00005,Table of Contents: Delete Section 00005 -Table of
Contents dated March 03, 2005, and substitute Section 00005 -Table of Contents dated March 21,
2005 attached to and made part of this Addendum.
Note: Revisions are annotated in the following manner:
—Modified portions of text are annotated with a vertical line in the margin.
—Deleted text is indicated by strikethough(i.e. meted—T=-(-�-).
—New text is underlined(i.e.New text).
II. Addendum No. 1,Item 6: Revised Drawings: Delete in their entirety the drawings listed below
and substitute the revised drawings, dated March 21,2005, which are attached and are made a part
of this Addendum
Dwg. No. Dwg Title
S200.A GROUND FLOOR/FOUNDATION PLAN - SECTION A
S200.I3 GROUND FLOOR/FOUNTDATION PLAN -SECTION B
S20LA FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS - SECTION A
S401 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND C:OI..UMN SCHEDULE
ew Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number Two
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 AD2-1 03/21/05
TRO ADDENDUM N0. 3
PACKAGE F.1
A RCHI7ECTURF.
Project: COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL Re: PIT FOR CHILLED WATER CONNECTIONS
eo*—LANNING SURGERY/BEDS EXPANSION — PHASE 1 AT NEW CHILLER BUILDING ADDITION
E NGINEERING
Comm No. 2323 W.O. No. — Doc. Ref. S210 Date 03/28/05
I NTERIoR D ESIGN
F
* = BIDDERS NOTE.- ADD'L UTILITY SLEEVE
REQ D THROUGH FNDN. WALL OPPOSITE
LARGE SLEEVE qX Fl THIS LOCATION (NOT SHOWN)
PENETRATIONS FOR UTILITY 5210 PERIMETER DRAIN
LINES —)(SEE SECT. Fl)
[201,-0"]
- - - of i - - -L - - - - - - - �
04 ` J
(( 4,-0„
4"0 PERF PIAC PIPE
UNDERSLAB DRAIN IN I F7
12" MIN. CRUSHED I I I S210
. — — STONE BED — — — — — — — — - I
PART PLAN - CHILLED WATER CONNECTION
PIT AT CHILLER BUILDING ADDITION
T.0.C. ELEV
205'-4"
_ co
N
SEE SECT. a 14 ® 12" HORZ., TYP.
FlIS210 FOR
WALL/FTNG. �I 14 ® 16" VERT. DWLS., TYP.
REQ'TS
4-15 ® 16" LONG
4-15 ® 16" SHORT
r
iV
11° 14" 4'_3" PIT a„ 6"
WALL WALL
SECTION F2
L L J
DRAWN BY: JWS
REVIEWED BY: JWS
SCALE: As Noted
SHEET NUMBER: ADD03-01S
The Ritchie Organization
low 80 Bridge Street
Newton,Massachusetts 02458
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `FX
Northampton,Massachusetts
TRO Commission No. 2323
Date: March 28, 2005
ADDENDUM NUMBER THREE
The Drawings and Specifications for the above project,dated February 28, 2005,are modified and
supplemented with this Addendum.
DRAWING ITEMS
ITEM-1 NEW DRAWINGS
L The following new issue drawings dated March 28, 2005 are attached and made a part of this
Addendum.
Dwg. No. DwjZ. Title
ADD03-01S PIT FOR CHILLED WATER CONNECTIONS AT NEW CHILLER
BUILDING ADDITION
END OF ADDENDUM
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number Three
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.F —2323 AD3-1 03/28/05
TRO ADDENDUM N0. 4
PACKAGE F.1
A RCHITECTUAE
Project: COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL Re: REVISED BASE PLATES FOR STAIR BRACING
*' LANNING SURGERY/BEDS EXPANSION — PHASE 1 COLUMNS RECEIVING DIAGONAL BRACES
!r NGINEfiRING
Comm No. 2323 W.O. No. — Doc. Ref. S401 Date 04/07/05
II NTEAIoRDESIGN
I
1 .
sn 6n 3.4 4 O.H.
4" 4" 8" 1 Ul" 3/B" GUSSET le
3/B" GUSSET At FOR DIAG.
FOR DIAG. 6 6 BRACE CONN.
BRACE CONN.
is Y4 in
p3 • •
>12"x12"x1'-5y2" Y4
B.P. W/ 4-1-0 Al2 X16"x1'-7/2"
A325 A.B.'s B.P. W/ 5-1"o
A325 A.B.'s
TYPE M TYPE N
r- �I
L J
DRAWN BY: JWS
REVIEWED BY: JWS
SCALE: As Noted
SHEET NUMBER: ADD04-03S
THo ADDENDUM N0. 4
PACKAGE F.1
A RCHITECTURE
Project: COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL Re: SECTION MARK AT SEISMIC EXPANSION
LANNING SURGERY/BEDS EXPANSION — PHASE 1 JOINT AT CONNECTOR TO EXISTING BUILDING
NGINEERING
Comm No. 2323 W.O. No. — Doc. Ref. S201 Date 04/07/05
I NTERIoRDESIGN
F
W12�16 L20] W8x10 [10] C10x15.3 —
I( B.S ELEV.'
d
DO
o r, I) 239'-13/8"I
co
00 3 u
I U) N I�
W8x10 [10] x _
W12 16 [20]
W12114 [20] waxlo [10] m Ii
x SIM. 5 (n I I
3 S202 '
r W8x18 [10 I I
ELEi/ B.S. ELEV.— f-
-la 18° I F4A I F4B I 239'-13/e"
S-40 F S-40
B.S. ELEV B.S ELEV.
238'-8" 238'-8"
-----------�-- I-------- ------------
1 II
. .I
PART PLAN - EXPANSION JOINT AT FIRST
FLOOR CONNECTOR TO EXISTING BUILDING
X.
r
L L J
DRAWN BY: JWS
REVIEWED BY: JWS
SCALE: As Noted
SHEET NUMBER: ADD04-02S
III. Addendum No. 2,Item 3: Revised Drawings: Delete in their entirety the drawings listed below
and substitute the revised drawings,dated April 07,2005, which are attached and are made a part
of this Addendum.
Dwg. No. Dwg Title
S100 GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS
IV. Addendum No.2,Item 4: New Drawings: Delete in their entirety the drawings listed below and
substitute the revised drawings,dated April 07, 2005, which are attached and are made a part of
this Addendum.
Dwg. No. Dwg. Title
S210 CHILLER PLANT ADDITION PART PLANS AND DETAILS
5402 FRAMING ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS
DRAWING ITEMS
ITEM-2 NEW DRAWINGS
1. The following new issue drawings dated April 07, 2005 are attached and made a part of this
Addendum.
Dwg: No. Dwg
ADD04-02S SECTION MARK AT SEISMIC EXPANSION JOINT AT CONNECTOR TO
EXISTING BUILDING
ADD04-03S REVISED BASE PLATES FOR STAIR BRACING COLUMNS RECEIVING
DIAGONAL BRACES
END OF ADDENDUM
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number Four
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.l' —2323 AD4-2 04/07/05
The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street
Newton,Massachusetts 02458
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `FX
Northampton,Massachusetts
TRO Commission No. 2323
Date:April 7,2005
ADDENDUM NUMBER FOUR
The Drawings and Specifications for the above project,dated February 28,2005, are modified and
supplemented with this Addendum.
PREVIOUS ADDENDUM ITEMS
ITEM-1 ADDENDUM NO.2
I. Addendum No.2,Item 1-1: Addendum No. 1,Item 1, Section 00005,Table of Contents: Include
the following section references which were inadvertently omitted:
"01300—SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS (Included in Package `A')
01320 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION (Included in Package `A')
01410 -TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES (Included in Package W)"
II. Addendum No.2,Item 1-III: Addendum No. 1, Item 7,New Drawings: Delete in their entirety
the drawings listed below and substitute the revised drawings,dated April 07, 2005, which are
attached and are made a part of this Addendum.
Dwg,No. Dwg Title
S202.A THIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS -SECTION A
S202.I3 THIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS -SECTION B
S203.A FOURTH FLOOR FR.A.MING PLAN AND DETAILS - SECTION A
S203.13 FOURTH FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS - SEC.'TION B
S204.A ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND DETAILS - SECTION A
S204.13 ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND DETAILS SECTION B
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number Four
Foundation/ Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 AD4-1 04/07/05
THO ADDENDUM N0. 5
PACKAGE F.1
A RCHITECTUAE
Project: COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL Re: REVISED SECTION Fl/S210 SHOWING
0``` LANNING SURGERY/BEDS EXPANSION — PHASE 1 THICKENED/SHIFTED 15" FOUNDATION WALL
- NGINEERING
Comm No. 2323 W.O. No. — Doc. Ref. S210 Date 04/12/05
I NTERIoRDESIGN
F BOND BEAM COURSE B.0. BOND BM
W/ 2-15 CONT. ® ELEV. 217'-4'
8' REINFORCED CMU W/ 15
32 0.c. VERT. IN
BRICK VENEER FULLY—GROUTED CELLS, 2-19
WIRES HORZ. ® 16 o.c. PLUS
BOND BUS. AS SHOWN
15 DWLS. ® 32'o.c. (5'-4' LG.)
00
I
N
x
el
T.O.C. ELEV.
205'-4'
EXT. PAVING
-----------
PERIMETER
Z DRAIN SYSTEM RIGID INSULATION
5- GEOTEXTILE WRAP
x J/4' CRUSHED STONE 6'—MIN. 'i/4" CRUSHED STONE
4'0 PERF. PVC PIPE
GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
r �
COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL
x
N
9' 15'
12"
WALL
L- SECTION F1
�„ _ ,,-o'
+, DRAWN BY: JWS
REVIEWED BY: JWS
SCALE: As Noted
SHEET NUMBER: ADD05-06S
RO ADDENDUM N0. 5
PACKAGE F.1
A RCHITECTURE
Project: COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL Re: CONCRETE CURBS AT EXTERIOR WALL
LANNING SURGERY/BEDS EXPANSION — PHASE 1 SUPPORTS ON LOW ROOFS (THIRD LEVEL)
NGINEBRING
Comm No. 2323 W.O. No. — Doc. Ref. S202 Date 04/12/05
I NTERIoRDE51GN
F
BRICK VENEER 2'-0 T�/
„ I p
A5
6" , /30 DWLS.
14 CONT. A5 (HOOKED)
FORMED CURB CONT. DECK EDGE
ROUGHEN SURFACE CLOSURE
0
FORMED EDGE OF
CONC SLAB
W8
1'-10"
CHANNEL w/ CLIP W18
ANGLE CONN.
lowk SECTION 1
a
BRICK VENEER 2l-0" Ty P
A5
14 CONT. A5
FORMED CURB #3 ® 24" DWLS.
(HOOKED)
ROUGHEN SURFACE
0o 1
W12 W21 r-
14024' (CAST IN
DECK RIBS)
Az SECTION 2
a
L L
DRAWN BY: JWS
REVIEWED BY: JWS
SCALE: As Noted
SHEET NUMBER: ADD05-05S
RO ADDENDUM N0. 5
PACKAGE F.1
A RCHITECTUAE
Project: COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL Re: RAISED CONCRETE CURBS AT HIGHER
LANNING SURGERY/BEDS EXPANSION — PHASE 1 LEVEL BRICK SHELVES AT EAST END
s
G NGINF.ERING
Comm No. 2323 W.O. No. — Doc. Ref. S201 Date 04/12/05
�1 NTERIoRDESIGN
1
TP
* = BACKING CURB AT
2'-0" SAME HEIGHT WHEN B.S.
ELEV IS AT 238'-55/B"
(I.E., 105/8" ABOVE B.S.)
6"
B.S ELEV , T.O.C. ELEV.
238'-8" 238'-8" (TYP.)
(SEE PLAN)
•<4 .
SEE SECT. Cc
F1/S401 FOR
BALANCE OF INFO. aQ
SECTION AT BRICK SHELF @
EL. 238'-8" SHOWING BACKING CURB
ell-
4
TYP
6"
B.S. ELEV.
239'-13/8" I
(SEE PLAN) T.O.C. ELEV.
238'-8" (TYP.)
a
SEE SECT.
F1/S401 FOR ° r
BALANCE OF INFO. .
SECTION AT BRICK SHELF 0
EL. 2J9 '— tYa " SHOWING BACKING CURB
3
L L J
DRAWN BY: JwS
REVIEWED BY: JWS
SCALE: As Noted
SHEET NUMBER: ADD05-04S
r Q
V
The Ritchie Organization
80 Bridge Street '
Newton,Massachusetts 02458
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1'
Northampton,Massachusetts
TRO Commission No.2323
!3Q �'6' W5 Date:April 12,2005
t
ADDENDUM NUMBER FIVE
The Drawings and Specifications for the above project, dated February 28,2005,are modified and
supplemented with this Addendum.
DRAWING ITEMS
ITEM-1 DRAWING S201.A,FIRST FLOOR FRAMING/FOUNDATION FLAN- SECTION A
I. Add the following Note:
"7. At the 6"slab on grade shown on plan between grid lines 11.3, 11.8, C and C.6, provide a
17'-0"x 6'-9"x 1-5/8"-deep slab depression for a flush-mounted metal entry mat,effectively
creating a 7-5/8"-deep slab on grade around the perimeter of this mat. Correspondingly,
depress all slab seats on the surrounding grade beams by a similar amount(1-5/8")."
ITEM-2 NEW DRAWINGS
1. The following new issue drawings dated April 12, 2005 are attached and made a part of this
Addendum.
DwR.No. Dwg. Title
ADD05-04S RAISED CONCRETE CURBS AT HIGHER LEVEL BRICK SHELVES AT
EAST END
ADD05-05S CONCRETE CURBS AT EXTERIOR WALL SUPPORTS ON LOW ROOFS
(THIRD LEVEL)
ADD05-06S REVISED SECTION F1/S210 SHOWING THICKENED/SHIFTED 15"
FOUNDATION WALL
END OF ADDENDUM
Cooley Dickinson Hospital Addendum Number Five
Foundation/Site/Utilities
Package `F.1' —2323 AD5-I 04/12/05